Toyota Avensis 2003-2007 Diagnostics

05–835 DIAGNOSTICS

–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

0543F–04

ABS WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECU detects trouble, it will prohibit ABS control, turn on the ABS warning light, and store the DTC. Connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 to make the ABS warning light blink and output the DTC.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator

Combination Meter B–W

22 C11

9 C10 17 C10

W–B (*4) J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A

Driver Side J/B J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4) A

B–R I13 Ignition SW

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 1 1A

36 S1 WA

R–Y J17 J/C

ABS

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

17 IE1

R–Y

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM1

IG1

6

Engine Room J/B No.4 B–G (*1)

1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)

Engine Room R/B No.3 W–B (*3 *1) B (*2)

3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD F45135



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester.

1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the ABS warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–57)

NG

2 (a)

INSPECT ABS WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTORL ECU – CMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


AlwaysON MALFUNCTION IN ABS ECU

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No.

Always ON

DTC Detecting Condition Either of the following 1 or 2 is detected: 1. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the ECU. 2. There is a malfunction in the ECU internal circuit. 3. Malfunction in the circuit of meter or ABS warning light circuit.

Trouble Area Battery IC regulator ABS warning light circuit Power source circuit Skid control ECU

HINT: There is a case that hand–held tester cannot be used when ECU is abnormal.


0543D–04


–



Driver Side J/B ECU–IG

18

R–W

D8 IG1 Relay 3

5

1 DN

G

C

J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C

G

C

22 R–W

J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

R–W

IE1

14 S1 IG1

B–L (*2) B–G (*1) B–G (*1)

Engine Room J/B No.4 1

B–G (*1)

4B

Engine Room R/B No.3 B (*2)

ALT

1 4A

1

2

3

B (*2)

ALT 3

1

1

W (*2)

3

2

1 4D

ED1

Combination Meter 9 R–Y C10 22 C11

17 IE1

R–Y

36 S1

WA

J17 J/C

17 C10

W–B (*4)

W–B (*4) A

A W–B (*3)

ABS

Driver Side J/B B–W

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

J/C

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

B–W

18 DA

IG1

AM2 1 1

B–R

2

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4) J16 J/C

W–B (*3, *1) IL Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV


B–R 4 AM2

IG2 6

W–B (*3)

W–B (*3, *2) FL MAIN

B–R

I13 Ignition SW


2 DH

A

IO

*3: LHD *4: RHD

A J15 J/C

A

W–B (*4) W–B

IK

W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

EA

F45140


–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK DTC FOR ABS Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–756). YES

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE

NO

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR SECURELY CONNECTED NO

CONNECT CONNECTOR TO ECU

YES

3

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(IG1 TERMINAL)

WITH USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. WITHOUT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: GND (a) Disconnect the skid control connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V IG1

OK


NG

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM

C94397

NG

4

INSPECT BATTERY OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK



5 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for a short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the DLC3 and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6 (a)



OK

7 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


AlwaysON MALFUNCTION IN ECU(VSC WARNING LIGHT)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ECU stores DTC, the VSC warning light illuminates on the combination meter. DTC No.

Always ON

DTC Detecting Condition

Malfunction in skid control ECU


Trouble Area Battery IC regulator Power source circuit Skid control ECU

0543E–04


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

R–W Combination Meter B–W

22 C11

J/C

16 C11

Skid Control ECU with Actuator 22 14 R–W IE1 S1 IG1

G C R–W J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

6 34 W–R IE1 S1 VSCW

W–R

VSC Driver Side J/B J/C

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

18 DA 18 DB IG1 Relay

1 DN

B–G (*1)

5 DH

I13 Ignition SW

2 DH

ECU–IG

5

3

1

2

9 DA AM1

1 DH

G–Y

3 AM1

IG1

1 G–R B–R Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1

IG2 6

4 AM2

B–R B–L (*2) 1 ED1

W (*2)

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

AM2 B–R

1

1 1

2

1A

B–G (*1) B (*2)

Engine Room R/B No.3


1 ALT

4A B–G (*1)

1 4D

3

1 4B

ALT

3

2

B (*2)

1

1

2

FL MAIN

W–B

B–G (*1) W–B

Battery


IJ

W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

EA

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45147



–



CHECK DTC FOR VSC Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–756). YES


NO

2



YES

3



OK


NG


C94397

NG

4


OK



5 (a)

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6 (a)

CHECK VSC WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

7 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0543H–04

BRAKE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Brake warning light comes on when the brake fluid is insufficient, the parking brake is applied or the EBD is defective.



–




22 C11

4 C11 17 C10

18 IE1

P

J17 J/C W–B (*4)

Brake

J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A

Driver Side J/B C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4) A



20 S1 EBDW

P

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM2

IG2

6


1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)


3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK




–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(BRAKE WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the Brake warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK

Go to step 4

YES


NG

2 (a)

CHECK DTC FOR ABS Check the DTC on page 05–756.

NO

3 (a)

INSPECT BRAKE WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

4

INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSY(See page 71–3) NG

REPLACE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSY

OK

5

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH(See page 71–3) NG

OK


REPLACE BRAKE MASTER RESERVOIR SUB–ASSY

CYLINDER


6 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – PARKING BRAKE SWITCH) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal PKB of the skid control ECU and parking brake switch (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

7 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal EBDW of the skid control ECU and brake fluid level warning switch (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

8 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION MERTER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


DTC

C0200/31 RIGHT FRONT SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C0205/32 LEFT FRONT SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C1330/35 RIGHT FRONT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC

C1331/36 LEFT FRONT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

0542U–04

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Rotor

The speed sensor detects wheel speed and transmits the appropriate signals to the ECU. These signals are used for control of the ABS and VSC control systems. Each of the front and rear rotors has 48 serrations. When the rotors rotate, the magnetic field generated by the permanent magnet in the speed sensor induces an AC voltage. Since the frequency of this AC voltage changes in direct proportion to the speed of the rotor, the frequency is used by the ECU to detect the speed of each wheel.

Speed Sensor N S Magnet Coil

To ECU

Low Speed High Speed +V

BR3583 BR3582

–V

F00010

DTC No.


C0200/31 C0205/32

When any of the following 1 to 3 is detected : 1. Vehicle speed is more than 40 km/h (25 mph), pulses are not input for 0.01 second. 2. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph), the wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. 3. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 18 km/h (11 mph), the front wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected.

Trouble Area

Right front and left front speed sensor Speed sensor rotor

C1330/35 C1331/36

Detecting abnormality in the resistance value of each speed sensor.

Right front and left front speed sensor Speed sensor circuit

HINT: DTC No. C0200/31 and C1330/35 are for the right front speed sensor. DTC No. C0205/32 and C1331/36 are for the left front speed sensor.



–



A4 ABS Speed Sensor Front LH

41 S1 FL+

R–L

24 S1 FL–

W

21 S1 FR+

B

22 S1 FR–

2

1

A5 ABS Speed Sensor Front RH

L–Y

2

1

F40884


1 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FRONT SPEED SENSOR) Select the item ”WHEEL SPEED FL (FR)” in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the hand– held tester. Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed on the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed speed value.

HINT: There is tolerance of 10 % in the speedometer indication. OK NG


Go to step 5


2

–


INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR

2

(a) (b) (c)

1

(d) C93876

Remove the fender liner. Disconnect the speed sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector. OK: Resistance: 1.2 to 1.6 k at 20_C (68_F) Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1 M or higher

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT RH

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH

NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756). OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FRONT SPEED SENSOR–SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between each front speed sensor and the skid control ECU connector (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR SERRATIONS Normal Signal Waveform

GND

2 m/s / Division 1 V / Division

W04200

(REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals FR+ – FR– and FL+ – FL– of the skid control ECU. (b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check the signal waveform. HINT: S As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases, a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater. S When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope, error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches, looseness or foreign matter deposited on it. OK

NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)



5

–


INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION (a)

Check the speed sensor installation. OK: The installation bolt is tightened properly and there is no clearance between the sensor and front steering knuckle. Torque: 8.0 Nm (82 kgfcm, 71 in.lbf)

NG

OK

BR3795

NG


NG



6 (a) (b)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TIP Remove the front speed sensor (See page 32–59). Check the sensor tip. OK: No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip. NG

CLEAN OR REPAIR SPEED SENSOR


7

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR (a) (b)

Remove the front speed sensor rotor (See page 30–6). Check the sensor rotor serrations. OK: No scratches, missing teeth or foreign objects.

HINT: If a foreign object is attached, remove it and after reassembling, check the output waveform. BR3719

NG

CLEAN OR REPAIR SPEED SENSOR ROTOR

NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756). OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)



–


DTC

C0210/33 RIGHT REAR SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C0215/34 LEFT REAR SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C1332/38 RIGHT REAR SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC

C1333/39 LEFT REAR SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

0577Z–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC C0200/31, C0205/32, C1330/35, C1331/36 on page 05–774. DTC No.

C0210/33 C0215/34

C1332/38 C1333/39


Trouble Area


Right rear and left rear speed sensor Speed sensor rotor


Right rear and left rear speed sensor Speed sensor circuit

HINT: DTC No. C0210/33, C1332/38 are for the right rear speed sensor. DTC No. C0215/34, C1333/39 are for the left rear speed sensor.


A32 ABS Speed Sensor Rear LH

2 IB1

R

23 S1 RL+

G

1 IB1

G

40 S1 RL–

1

2

A33 ABS Speed Sensor Rear RH

R

P

1 IM1

P

10 IE2

P

38 S1 RR+

V

10 IM1

V

11 IE2

V

39 S1 RR–

1

2

F45131



–



1 (a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(REAR SPEED SENSOR) Select the item ”WHEEL SPEED RL (RR)” in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the hand– held tester. Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed on the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed speed value.

(b)

HINT: There is tolerance of 10 % in the speedometer indication. OK

Go to step 5

NG

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR (a) (b)

(c)

F41836

Connector 2

2

1

1 Connector 1 2 F10180

Disconnect the skid control sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector. OK: Resistance: 2.2 k or less Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1 M or higher

Skid control Sensor Sub–Wire Harness: (a) Disconnect the sub–wire harness connector from the floor wire harness (b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector lock part and connecting part of the connector. (c) Measure resistance between terminal 1 of the connector 1 and terminal 2 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (d) Measure resistance between terminal 2 of the connector 1 and terminal 1 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (e) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector 1 and body ground. OK: 10 M or higher NG

REPLACE SKID CONTROL SENSOR

NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756). OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(REAR SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each skid control sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4


GND


W04200

(REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals RR+ – RR– and RL+ – RL– of the skid control ECU. (b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check the signal waveform. HINT: As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases, a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater. When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope, error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches, looseness or foreign matter deposited on it. OK


NG

5

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR INSTALLATION (a)

OK

Check the sensor installation. OK: There is no clearance between the sensor and rear axle carrier.

NG F10178

NG





6 (a) (b)

–


INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR TIP Remove the skid control sensor (See page 32–61). Check the sensor tip. OK: No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip. NG

CLEAN OR REPAIR SKID CONTORL SENSOR


7

INSPECT SENSOR ROTOR (a)

Check the sensor rotor serrations. OK: No scratches, missing teeth or foreign objects.

NG

REPLACE REAR AXLE HUB & BEARING ASSY RH

NG

REPLACE REAR AXLE HUB & BEARING ASSY LH

W04846

NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756). OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) NOTICE: Do not reuse the skid control sensor.



–


DTC

C0226/21 SFR SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C0236/22 SFL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C0246/23 SRR SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C0256/24 SRL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

05780–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure action on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force. DTC No. C0226/21 C0236/22 C0246/23 C0256/24


Solenoid valve signal does not match to the check result.


Trouble Area

Each solenoid valve


–



Engine Room R/B No.4 & Engine Room J/B No.4 1 4B

B–G (*1)

ALT 1

VSC

4 2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1

21

Engine Room R/B No.3 ALT 3

3 1

R (*1)

W (*2)

VSC

1 1B

5 S1 +BS

R (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 W–B

W–B

FL MAIN

10 S1 GND2 6 S1 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132


RECONFIRM DTC Check if other DTCs are detected (See page 05–756). YES


NO REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)



DTC

–


05781–02

C0273/13 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT IN ABS MOTOR RELAY CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ABS motor relay supplies power to the ABS pump motor. While the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC are activated, the ECU switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0273/13

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. After actuation of the motor relay, pump motor voltage is not supplied within 0.08 second. 2. Pump motor voltage is at high level for 2.5 seconds or more although motor relay does not actuate . 3. Pump motor voltage keeps low level for longer than 0.04 second and the pump repeats activating for 0.7 seconds 3 times maximum. At the last time of activation, the pump motor goes dead because of short circuit.

ABS motor relay ABS motor relay circuit



B–G (*1)

ALT

VSC

1

21


3 1

L (*1)

4

W (*2)

9 S1 +BM

2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 VSC

1 1B

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132



–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS MOTOR RELAY) Check the operation sound of the ABS motor individually when operating it with the hand–held tester. OK: The operation sound of the ABS motor is heard. OK

IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER THE DTC IS DELETED, CHECK THE CONTACT CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION

NG

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(+BM TERMINAL VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

GND

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. Measure the voltage between terminals +BM and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V

+BM C94397

OK

NG




3

–


INSPECT FUSE(VSC FUSE) (a)

Gasoline Engine: VSC (50 A) Engine Room R/B No.4

(b)

Diesel Engine: Engine Room R/B No.1

Remove the VSC (50 A) fuse from the engine room R/B No.4 (Gasoline engine) or engine room R/B No.1 (Diesel engine). Check continuity of the VSC fuse. OK: Continuity

VSC (50 A)

F45087

NG

CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE

OK

4

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY) (a)

GND

Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1 or less

NG C94397

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND)(See page 01–32)

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BM TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–


05782–02

C0278/11 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUT IN ABS SOLENOID RELAY

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This relay supplies power to each ABS solenoid. After the ignition switch is turned ON, if the initial check is OK, the relay goes on. DTC No.

C0278/11


Trouble Area

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. 3 or more solenoid valves are shown faulty in response and simultaneously valve supply voltage is detected faulty. 2. Solenoid valve relay is not turned OFF.

ABS solenoid relay ABS solenoid relay circuit


Engine Room R/B and J/B B

1

ALT

ABS No.2

1A 1

21

2

W–B

W–B FL MAIN

1

L

5 S1

+BS

6 S1

GND1

10 S1

GND2

W–B Battery

EA

C95006



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(+BS TERMINAL VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

GND

+BS

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. Measure the voltage between terminals +BS and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK C94397


NG

2


Gasoline Engine: Engine Room R/B No.4

(b)


VSC (25 A) Diesel Engine: Engine Room R/B No.1

VSC (25 A)

NG F45087

OK




3

–



GND


NG C94397


OK CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BS TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–


05C5L–01

C0365/43 MALFUNCTION IN DECELERATION SENSOR

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The lateral acceleration sensor is combined with the yaw rate sensor. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0365/43

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 2: 1. Lateral acceleration difference between sensor signal and reference value is large. 2. Offset value of sensor signal is higher than the standard value. 3. Sensor signal is out of range

Yaw rate sensor Yaw rate sensor circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM LHD: W–B

B J7

J/C

Skid Control ECU with Actuator

D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B

Y1 J18 YAW Rate Sensor J/C W–G GND 1 CANL 2 C UBAT W–L 3 CANH 4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA

S12 Steering Sensor CAN GND W–G 7 HIGH 5 C CAN 1 LOW

12V

W–L 6 B

(Shielded) W–B A J15 J/C IK

F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2

W B (Shielded) B C W B (Shielded) B C W B

(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor

C J/C A W–G GND W–G J22 J23 1 CANL 2 C UBAT J22 3 CANH 4

11 16 W–G IO1 S1 YGND

W–L S12 Steering Sensor

W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22

B W–L CAN 12V J23 7 HIGH 6 W–B

F

B W–L J22

12 30 W–L IO1 S1 YIGA

A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



1

READ VALUE OF YAWRATE SENSOR(INCLUDE LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) C95216

Remove the 2 bolts and lateral acceleration sensor with connector still connected. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 Turn the ignition switch and hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check the lateral acceleration value 0 0.23 G. Check that the acceleration value displayed on the hand– held tester is changing: Place the yaw rate sensor vertically to the ground and turn the sensor pivoted on its center. OK: Lateral acceleration value is changing.

OK


NG

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(YAW RATE SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal SS1, SS2, YIGA and YGND of the yaw rate sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C5N–01

C0371/55 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT IN YAW RATE SENSOR CIRCUIT



Trouble Area

C0371/55

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4: 1. The voltage of sensor signal is out of range. 2. The offset value of sensor signal is outside the plausible range. 3. Sensor signal changes rapidly under normal driving. 4. Yaw rate sensor value is considerably different from the reference value of yaw rate during cornering.



B J7

J/C


D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B

Y1 J18 YAW Rate Sensor J/C W–G GND 1 CANL 2 C UBAT W–L CANH 3 4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA


12V

W–L 6 B


F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2


(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor




W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22


F

B W–L J22


A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



1

READ VALUE OF YAWRATE SENSOR (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) C95217

Remove the 2 bolts and yaw rate sensor with connector still connected. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch and hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check the yaw rate value 0 5 deg/s. Check that the yaw rate value of the yaw rate sensor displayed on the hand–held tester is changing: Place the yaw rate sensor vertically to the ground and turn the sensor pivoted on its center. OK: Yaw rate value is changing.

OK


NG

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C5O–01

C1201/45 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. C1201/45


Trouble Area

A trouble signal in the engine control system is input.

Engine control system

HINT: If trouble occurs in the engine control system, the ECU prohibits TRC and VSC control.


CHECK DTC FOR ENGINE A

Normal Code

B

Malfunction Code

B

A REPLACE ECM


REPAIR ENGINE CONTROL ACCORDING TO CODE OUTPUT

SYSTEM


DTC

–


0542Z–04

C1203/59 ECM COMMUNICATOIN CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit is used to transmit TRC & VSC control information from the skid control ECU to the ECM (TRC+, TRC–), and engine control information from the ECM to the skid control ECU (ENG+, ENG–). DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1203/59

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected : 1. IG1 voltage is 8.5 V or more, and the condition that data can not be sent to ECM continues for 1.2 seconds or more. 2. IG1 voltage is 8.5 V or more, engine speed is 500 r.p.m or more, vehicle speed is 60 km/h (38 mph) or more, and the condition that data can not be received from ECM continues for 1.2 seconds or more. 3. The condition that data can not be transmitted between the skid control ECU and ECM occurs at least once within 5 seconds continues 10 consecutive times within 60 sec.

TRC+ or TRC– circuit ENG+ or ENG– circuit ECM


ECM 25 TRC+ E9

G

31 TRC– E9

L W (*3) Y (*4)

24 ENG+ E9 30 ENG– E9

B

*1: LHD *2: RHD

6 13 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2) 13 3 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2) 7 15 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2) 14 14 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2)

G

18 S1 TRC+

L

19 S1 TRC–

Y

8 S1 ENG+

B

7 S1 ENG–

*3: RHD 1AZ–FSE *4: Except RHD 1AZ–FSE F45139



–



CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each of terminals ENG+, ENG–, TRC+, TRC– of the skid control ECU and the same one of the ECM (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

2 (a)

CHECK OPERATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR Check the MIL. (1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. NG

CHECK AND REPLACE ECM

OK CHECK AND REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)


OR


DTC

–


C1208/54 MALFUNCTION IN STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT



C1231/31

Detection of any of conditions 1 through 7: 1. When the condition that ECU terminal IG1 voltage is 9.8 V or more, and does not receive data from steering angle sensor continues. 2. Sensor internal failure. 3. The offset value is out of range. 4. Sensor signal changes too rapidly. 5. Steering angle value difference between measured and reference is out of range. 6. Steering sensor is not centered. 7. Steering sensor signal is out of range. 8. Steering sensor is not calibrated.


Trouble Area

Steering angle sensor Steering angle sensor circuit

05C5R–01


–



B J7

J/C


D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B

Y1 J18 YAW Rate Sensor J/C GND W–G 1 CANL 2 C UBAT W–L 3 CANH 4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA


12V

W–L 6 B


F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2


(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor




W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22


F

B W–L J22


A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



1 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF STEERING SENSOR Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check that the steering wheel turning angle value of the steering angle position sensor displayed on the hand–held tester is changing when turning the steering wheel. OK: Steering wheel turning angle value is changing. OK

Go to step 4

NG

2

CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NG

REPLACE STEERING SENSOR(See page 32–65)

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING SENSOR CIRCUIT – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal SS1, SS2, YIGA and YGND of the skid control ECU and steering angle sensor (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4

CALIBRATE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR(See page 05–756) NG

REPLACE STEERING SENSOR



OR


DTC

–


05432–04

C1204/44 NE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The skid control ECU receives engine revolution speed signals (NE signals) from the ECM. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1202/44

At vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, when data received from the ECM is in normal condition, engine revolution signal > 0 rpm continues for 5 seconds or more.

NEO circuit ECM Skid control ECU


ECM

17 NEO E9

5 13 IE8 IE1 (*1) (*2)

Y–B

Y–B

32 S1

NEO

*1: LHD *2: RHD F45138


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – ECM) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal NEO of the skid control ECU and ECM (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


2

–


INSPECT ECM TERMINAL VOLTAGE(NEO TERMINAL) (a) (b) (c)

Gasoline engine:

Remove the ECM with connector still connected. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminal NEO of the ECM and body ground under the engine conditions below. OK: Engine condition

Voltage

OFF (IG ON)

3 to 6 V or below 1 V

ON (Idling)

3 to 6 V below 1 V (Pulse)

NEO (Reference) Diesel engine:

3–6V

Below 1 V

F03007

NEO F45092

NG

REPLACE ECM

OK IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER THE DTC IS DELETED, CHECK THE CONTACT CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION



–


DTC

C1225/25 SMC SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC


DTC

C1227/27 SRC SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC


05785–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure action on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1225/25

Open or short in SMC1 circuit.

Brake actuator SMC1 circuit

C1226/26



C1227/27

Open or short in SRC1 circuit.

Brake actuator SRC1 circuit

C1228/28





–




B–G (*1)

VSC

ALT 1


21


3 1

L (*1)

W (*2)

VSC

1 1B

9 S1 +BM

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132







DTC

–


05786–02

C1237/37 TIRES OF DIFFERENT SIZE


C1237/37


Trouble Area

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4: 1. When the ignition switch is ON, the speed difference between max. and min. wheel speed is 5 % or more for 20 sec. at vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph)or more. 2. When the ignition switch is ON, the slip difference be wheels at either side of vehicle 6 % or more (vehicle speed: 100 km/h (62 mph) or more). 3. Continuous ABS control for 60 seconds or more. 4. Interference on 1 or more wheels for 20 seconds with the brake pedal depressed, or for 5 seconds when the brake pedal is not depressed.

Speed sensor Sensor rotor


INSPECT TIRE SIZE NG

REPLACE TIRES SO THAT ALL 4 TIRES ARE SAME IN SIZE

OK

2 (a)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR Check the speed sensor rotors (See page 05–774 or 05–778). NG

REPLACE SENSOR ROTOR

OK

3 (a)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR Check the speed sensors (See page 05–774 or 05–778). NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR

OK

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal of the speed sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


C1241/41 LOW BATTERY POSITIVE VOLTAGE OR ABNORMALLY HIGH BATTERY POSITIVE VOLTAGE


C1241/41

DTC Detecting Condition Low battery voltage is less than 9.8 V at the time of non– operation of ABS control or less than 9.4 V at the time of operation of ABS control, or battery voltage is more than 17.4 V.


Trouble Area Battery IC regulator Power source circuit

05436–04


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

22 IE1

R–W

R–W

Skid Control ECU with Actuator 14 S1 IG1

Driver Side J/B

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

IG Relay

1 DN

5

5 DH

G–Y

ECU–IG 3

1

2

18 DB

R–W

9 DA

W–B I13 Ignition SW

AM1

1 G–R DH 3

G–Y AM1

1

IG1

G–Y Engine Room R/B No.3 B–L (*2)

1 ED1

W (*2)

W–B

ALT 3

3 2

B (*2)

1

W–B

Engine Room J/B No.4 1 4D

B–G (*1)

ALT

FL MAIN

W–B

1 4B


W–B B–G (*1) B (*2)

Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

IJ

EA

F45133



–



INSPECT FUSE(ECU–IG FUSE) (a) (b)


Remove the ECU–IG fuse from the driver side J/B. Check continuity of the ECU–IG fuse. OK: Continuity

NG

INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO ECU–IG FUSE

NG


F45090

OK

2


OK

3


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: GND (a) Disconnect the skid control connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK

IG1 C94397

NG




4

–


INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY) (a) (b)

GND

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1 or less

NG C94397

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND)(See page 01–32)

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – IG1 TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–


05787–02

C1246/53 MALFUNCTION IN MASTER CYLINDER PRESSURE SENSOR


C1246/53


Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected: 1. The voltage of sensor signal is out of range (less than 0.3 V, more than 4.7 V). 2. The sensor supply voltage is out of range (above 5.6 V, below 4.4 V). 3. The sensor signal offset value is out of range. 4. Gradient of sensor signal is not within allowed range.

Master cylinder pressure sensor Master cylinder pressure sensor circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator 12 S1 E2 11

O1 Oil Pressure Sensor Y–R 1 GR

S1 PMC 27 S1 VCM

2 Y–G 3 Driver Side J/B

S13 Stop Light SW

1 G–W (*4) IR1

G–W (*4) 2

1

R–W (*3) 11 IE3 R–W (*4)

G–W (*3)

6 IE3

2 DA

2 DL

G–W

1 DM

G–W (*3)

To Stop Light

R–W (*3)

2 IR1

STOP

22 DA

R–W (*4)

37 S1 STP

1 DN

B–G (*1)

Engine Room R/B No.3 FL MAIN B (*2)

ALT 3

3 1

1 ED1

W (*2)

B–L (*2)

2 Engine Room J/B No.4

Battery B–G (*1) *1: 1AZ–FSE *3: LHD *2: 1CD–FTV *4: RHD


1 4B

ALT 1

1 4D

B–G (*1)

2 F45141


–



1 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF MASTER CYLINDER PRESSURE SENSOR Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check that the brake fluid pressure value of the No.1 master cylinder pressure sensor and No.2 master cylinder pressure sensor displayed on the hand–held tester changes when depressing the brake pedal. OK: Brake fluid pressure value is changing. OK

Go to step 4

NG

2 (a)

INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY Check that the stop light comes on when the brake pedal is depressed and goes off when the brake pedal is released. NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASTER CYLINDER PRESSUR SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal of the master cylinder pressure sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(STP TERMINAL) (a) (b)

STP C94397

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. Measure the voltage between terminal STP of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground when the brake pedal is depressed. OK: Voltage: 8 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


C1249/58 STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT



C1249/58

After the ignition switch is turned ON, the condition that the STP terminal voltage of ECU is 40 % to 67 % of supplied voltage, continues for 1 second or more.


Trouble Area

Stop light switch circuit

05439–04


–


WIRING DIAGRAM S13 Stop Light SW 1 IR1

G–W (*4) 2

1 G–W (*3)

2 IR1

R–W (*4)

G–W (*4)

11 IE3

R–W (*3) FL MAIN

2 DA

6 G–W (*3) IE3 22 DA

R–W (*4)

C J/C B J31 J30

W–B

G–W

1 DM

G–W

37 S1 STP

1 DN

Engine Room J/B No.4 1 4B

ALT 1


W–B (*5)

STOP

2 DL

R–W (*3)

B–G (*1)

B (*2)


Driver Side J/B

1 4D 2

B–G (*1)

ALT

3

1 W (*2) B–L (*2) 3 ED1 H20 J32 1 2 High Mounted Stop Light J/C W–B (*5) W–B (*5) G–W (*5) 1 2 C C J/C C Rear Combination Light LH J30 STOP 2 5 4 1 4 6 B C G–W G–W R13 R13 R13 R13 R13 R13 J31 J30 (*5) (*6) (*7) (*5) (*6) (*7)

Rear Combination Light RH 6 3 3 STOP 7 4 1 B C W–B G–W G–W (*6, *7) R14 R14 R14 R14 R14 R14 J31 J30 (*5) (*6) (*7) (*5) (*6) (*7) H20 High Mounted Stop Light 4 1 1 3 L(*6) L(*7) G–W W–B (*7) G–W (*6) BG1 BE1 BD1 BF1 2 1 (*6) (*7) (*6, *7) W–B (*6) G–W (*7) W–B (*6) W–B (*7)

W–B (*6, *7) Battery

W–B BS


BT

A J/C A J33 J34

W–B (*6, *7)

W–B (*7) 2 4 BD1 BF1 (*6) (*7) *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

W–B (*6)

*5: S/D *6: L/B *7: W/G

3 BG1

W–B (*7)

G–W (*8, *9)

2 W–B (*6) BE1 BX

1 N8 Noise Filter (Stop Light) F45775


–




Go to step 4

OK

2


STP C94397


OK


NG

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LIGHT SWITCH – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the stop light switch and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LIGHT CIRCUIT) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector of the stop light circuit (See page 01–32). OK

REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY

NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR



DTC

–


05788–02

C1288/88 ECU VERSION MISS MATCHI



Trouble Area

When either of the following 1 or 2 is detected: 1. ECM does not match. 2. Steering angle sensor is not calibrated.

ECM Steering angle sensor calibration.


PERFORM STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ZERO POINT CALIBRATION Perform the steering angle sensor zero point calibration (See page 05–756).

2 (a)

RECONFIRM DTC Check if the same DTC is stored in the memory. NO

END

YES

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING ANGLE SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the steering angle sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05789–02

C1300/62 SKID CONTROL ECU MALFUNCTION


C1300/62


Trouble Area

1. Skid control ECU continuously detects the continuous operation of ABS at all 4 wheels for max. 1.28 sec. 2. Continuos VSC operation for 10 sec. or more. 3. Internal malfunction in ECU.

ECU


RECONFIRM DTC A

DTC C1300/62

B

Except DTC C1300/62

B


A

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(IG1 TERMINAL VOLTAGE)

WITH USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. WITHOUT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: GND (a) Disconnect the skid control connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK

IG1 C94397

NG




3

–



GND

C94397


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C5U–01

C1301/42 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit is used to send TRC & VSC control information from the yaw rate sensor and steering angle sensor information to the skid control ECU DTC No.

C1301/42

DTC Detecting Condition IG1 voltage is 9.5 V or more, and the condition that data from steering angle sensor or yaw rate sensor can not be received continues for 0.1 seconds or more.


Trouble Area Yaw rate sensor Steering angle sensor Yaw rate sensor circuit Steering angle sensor circuit


–



B J7

J/C


D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B


(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA


12V

W–L 6 B


F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2


(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor




W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22


F

B W–L J22


A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(YAW RATE SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the yaw rate sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


0578A–02

C1350/51 PUMP MOTOR IS LOCKED/OPEN CIRCUIT IN PUMP MOTOR GROUND



Trouble Area

C1350/51

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected. 1. No motor voltage supply within 0.08 sec. after actuation starts the motor relay. 2. A high level of motor voltage when actuation does not starts the motor relay for more than 2.5 sec. 3. The pump motor voltage is high level for a certain time after the motor relay has elapsed.

Brake actuator pump motor ABS motor relay circuit



B–G (*1)

VSC

ALT 1

21


3 1

W (*2)

L (*1)

4 2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 VSC

1 1B

9 S1 +BM

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132



–








–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542O–04

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ABS & EBD & BA Check Sheet

Inspector’s : Name VIN Production Date

Customer’s Name

/

/

Licence No. Date Vehicle Brought In

/

Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs

km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (

times a day)

ABS does not operate. ABS does not operate efficiently. BA does not operate. EBD does not operate.

Symptoms

ABS Warning Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

Brake Warning Light (PKB released)

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

1st Time

Normal Code

Malfunction Code (Code

)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

STOP LIGHT SW

ON

OFF

NO SYS ABS SYSTEM Freeze Frame Data

BA FAIL SF

#IG ON VEHICLE SPD


km/h MPH


–


TRC & VSC Check Sheet

Inspector’s : Name VIN /

Production Date

Customer’s Name

/


/

/

km miles

Odometer Reading

/


Continuous

/ Intermittent (

times a day)

TRAC does not operate. (Wheels spin when starting rapidly.) VSC does not operate. (Wheels sideslip at the time of sharp turning.) TRC OFF Indicator Light Symptoms

Check Item

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

VSC Warning Indicator

Displays

Does not Display

SLIP Indicator Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

Skid Control Buzzer

Sounds

Does not Sound

ABS Warning Light

Normal


)

Malfunction Indicator Light

Normal


)

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

VSC/TRC OFF SW SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION

Freeze Frame Data

OFF

ON VSC/TRC P,N

2

R

3

D

4

L

FAIL

STEERING ANG

deg

YAW RAT

deg/s

MAS CYL PRESS THROTTLE MAS PRESS GRADE

V deg MPa/s

G (RIGHT&LEFT)

G

G (BACK&FORTH)

G



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542Q–04

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT:

Using SST 09843–18040, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. If malfunction is not found when inspecting parts, inspect the ECU and ground points for poor contact. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code. For details of each code, refer to the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No.” in the DTC chart. When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified. DTC chart of ABS system: DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

C0200 / 31 (05–774)

Right front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction

Right front speed sensor Right front speed sensor circuit Right front speed sensor rotor

C0205 / 32 (05–774)

Left front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction

Left front speed sensor Left front speed sensor circuit Left front speed sensor rotor

C0210 / 33 (05–778)

Right rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction

Right rear speed sensor Right rear speed sensor circuit Right rear speed sensor rotor

C0215 / 34 (05–778)

Left rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction

Left rear speed sensor Left rear speed sensor circuit Left rear speed sensor rotor

C0226 / 21 (05–782)

Open or short circuit in brake actuator

Brake actuator SFRR or SFRH circuit

C0236 / 22 (05–782)


Brake actuator SFLR or SFLH circuit

C0246 / 23 (05–782)


Brake actuator SRRR or SRRH circuit

C0256 / 24 (05–782)


Brake actuator SRLR or SRLH circuit

C0273 / 13 (05–784)

Open or short circuit in ABS motor relay circuit


C0278 / 11 (05–787)

Open or short circuit in ABS solenoid relay circuit


C1237 / 37 (05–807)

Wrong tire size

Tire size Speed sensor rotor

C1241 / 41 (05–808)

Low battery positive voltage or abnormally high battery positive voltage

Battery Charging system Power source circuit

C1249 / 58 (05–815)

Open circuit in stop light switch circuit

Stop lamp switch Stop lamp switch circuit

C1300 / 62 (05–819)


Battery Skid control ECU

C1330 / 35 (05–774)

Open circuit in right front speed sensor circuit

Right front speed sensor Right front speed sensor circuit

C1331 / 36 (05–774)

Open circuit in left front speed sensor circuit

Left front speed sensor Left front speed sensor circuit

C1332 / 38 (05–778)

Open circuit in right rear speed sensor circuit

Right rear speed sensor Right rear speed sensor circuit



–


C1333 / 39 (05–778)

Open circuit in left rear speed sensor circuit

Left rear speed sensor Left rear speed sensor circuit

Always ON (05–827)

Malfunction in skid control ECU Open circuit in ABS warning light circuit

Battery Charging system Power source circuit Skid control ECU

DTC chart of VSC system: DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

C0365 / 43 (05–790)

Malfunction in lateral acceleration sensor (combined in yaw rate sensor)


C0371 / 55 (05–793)

Malfunction in yaw rate sensor circuit


C1224 / 44 (05–797)

Open or short circuit in NE signal circuit


C1201/45 (05–796)

VSC shut down due to ECM failure

ECM

C1203 / 59 (05–799)

ECM communication circuit malfunction


C1208 / 54 (05–801)

Malfunction in steering angle sensor


C1225 / 25 (05–805)

Open or short circuit in brake actuator solenoid circuit (SMC1 circuit)


C1226 / 26 (05–805)



C1227 / 27 (05–805)

Open or short circuit in brake actuator solenoid circuit (SRC1 circuit)


C1228 / 28 (05–805)



C1246 / 53 (05–812)

Malfunction in master cylinder pressure sensor


C1288 / 88 (05–818)

Malfunction in ECM version

Steering angle sensor zero point calibration

C1301 / 42 (05–821)

Malfunction in CAN communication circuit (steering angle sensor circuit, yaw rate sensor circuit)

Steering angle sensor circuit Yaw rate sensor circuit

C1350 / 51 (05–825)

Pump motor is locked Open circuit in pump motor ground

Brake actuator pump motor


Malfunction in skid control ECU Open circuit in VSC warning light circuit



Trouble Area


–


DTC of sensor check function : Code No.

Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1271/71

Low output voltage of right front speed sensor

Right front speed sensor Sensor installation Sensor rotor

C1272/72

Low output voltage of left front speed sensor

Left front speed sensor Sensor installation Sensor rotor

C1273/73

Low output voltage of right rear speed sensor

Right rear speed sensor Sensor installation Sensor rotor

C1274/74

Low output voltage of left rear speed sensor

Left rear speed sensor Sensor installation Sensor rotor

C1275/75

Change in output voltage of right front speed sensor

Right front sensor rotor

C1276/76

Change in output voltage of left front speed sensor

Left front speed sensor rotor

C1277/77

Change in output voltage of right rear speed sensor

Right rear sensor rotor

C1278/78

Change in output voltage of left rear speed sensor

Left rear speed sensor rotor



–


ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542N–04

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1

Vehicle Brought to Workshop

2

Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–754)

3

Check and Clear DTCs and Freeze Frame Data (See page 05–756)

4

Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 5 Symptom occurs: Go to step 6

5

Symptom Simulation (See page 01–32)

6

DTC Check (See page 05–756) There is no output: Go to step 7 There is output: Go to step 8

7

Problem Symptoms Table (See page 05–772) Check for fluid leakage and Go to step 10

8

DTC Chart (See page 05–766)

9

Circuit Inspection (See page 05–774 – 05–854)

HINT: When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified.



10

Identification of Problem

11

Repair

12

Confirmation Test

–


End HINT: Step 3, 6, 9, 12: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand–held tester. Fail safe function: When a failure occurs in the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC systems, the ABS warning light, the VSC warning light and the TRC OFF indicator light come on and the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC operations are prohibited. In addition to this, when the failure that disables the EBD operation occurs, the brake warning light comes on as well and the EBD operation is prohibited.



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 056T1–03

LOCATION

Brake Actuator (Include Skid Control ECU)

Skid Control Sensor Combination Meter (ABS Warning Light) (Brake Warning Light) (VSC Warning Light) (TRC OFF Indicator Light) (SLIP Indicator Light)

Left Front Speed Sensor Speed Sensor Rotor Steering Angle Sensor

ECM

Skid Control Buzzer

Parking Brake Switch

TRC OFF Switch

DLC3

Stop Lamp Switch

Yaw Rate Sensor (Include Lateral Acceleration Sensor) F45086



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0577Y–02

ABS Warning Light

BRAKE Warning Light

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

VSC Warning Light SLIP Indicator Light

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Check the warning lights. (1) Release the parking brake lever. (2) When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the ABS warning light, Brake warning light, VSC warning light, TRC OFF indicator light and SLIP indicator light come on for approx. 3 seconds.

HINT: TRC OFF Indicator Light

When the parking brake is applied or brake fluid level is low, the Brake warning light comes on. If the ECU stores DTC, the ABS warning light , VSC warning light and TRC OFF indicator light come on. If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to troubleshooting for the light circuit. Trouble Area

F45094

DLC3

ABS warning light circuit

05–827

Brake warning light circuit

05–840

VSC warning light circuit

05–831

TRC OFF indicator light circuit

05–844

SLIP indicator light circuit

05–848

(b)

Tc

CG C52361

Without using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Using SST, connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read the DTC from the ABS warning light or VSC warning light on the combination meter.

HINT:

If no code appears, inspect the diagnostic circuit, ABS warning light circuit or VSC warning light circuit. Trouble Area


See page

See page

Tc terminal circuit

05–852


05–827


05–831


As an example, the blinking patterns for the normal code and codes 11 and 21 are shown on the left. (4) Codes are explained in the code table on page 05–766. (5) After completing the check, disconnect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3, and turn off the display. If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time, the lowest numbered DTC is displayed first. (c) With using the hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Hook up the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.

0.25 sec. 0.25 sec.

ON

OFF Code 11 and 21 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec. 1.5 sec. 4 sec.


Normal Code 2 sec.

–

2.5 sec.

ON OFF Code 11

Code 21

R01346

(d)

BR3890

Without using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Using SST, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Clear the DTCs stored in the ECU by depressing the brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 seconds. (4) Check that the ABS warning light and VSC warning light indicates the normal code blinking pattern. (5) Remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040

HINT: Disconnecting the battery cable during repairs will not erase the DTCs in the ECU. (e) With using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.



–


2. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed on the Hand–held tester, you can read the value and status of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on the tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item ABS MOT RELAY SOL RELAY VSC / TRC OFF SW

Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS motor relay / ON or OFF Solenoid relay / ON or OFF VSC / TRC OFF switch / ON or OFF

STOP LIGHT SW

Stop light switch / ON or OFF

PKB SW

Parking brake switch / ON or OFF

WHEEL SPD FR

WHEEL SPD FL

WHEEL SPD RR

WHEEL SPD RL

DECELERAT SENS1 IG VOLTAGE SFRR SFRH SFLR SFLH SRRR (SRR) SRRH (SRH)

Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Lateral acceleration sensor 1 reading / min.: –1.869 G, max.: 1.869 G ECU power supply voltage / NORMAL or TOO LOW ABS solenoid SFRR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFRH / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFLR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFLH / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRRR (SRR) / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRRH (SRH) / ON or OFF


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ON : Motor relay ON

–

ON : Solenoid relay ON

–

ON : Switch ON OFF : Switch OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released ON : Parking brake applied OFF : Parking brake released

–

–

–

Actual wheel speed

Speed indicated on speedometer

Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed


Approximately 0 0.1G at Reading changes when vestill condition hicle is bounced NORMAL : 9.8 V or over TOO LOW : Below 9.8 V

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–


Item SRLR SRLH SRCF(SA1) SRCR(SA2) SRMF(SMCF,SA3)

SRMR(SMCR,STR)

ENGINE SPD

VEHICLE SPD

Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS solenoid SRLR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRLH / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRCF(SA1) / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRCR(SA2) / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRMF(SMCF,SA3)1 / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRMR(SMCR,STR) / ON or OFF Engine Speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 6000 rpm Maximum wheel speed sensor reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH), max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH)

–


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

Actual engine speed

–

Actual vehicle speed


YAW RATE

Yaw rate sensor/ Min.: –128 deg/s, Max.: 128 deg/s

–

YAW ZERO VALUE

Memorized zero value/ Min.: –128 deg/s, Max.: 128 deg/s

–

STEERING ANG

MAS CYL PRS1 TEST MODE #CODES

Steering sensor/ Min.: –1152 deg, Max.: 1150.875 deg Master cylinder pressure sensor 1 reading / min.: 0 V, max.: 5 V Test mode / NORMAL or TEST Number of DTC recorded / min.: 0, max.: 255


–

When brake pedal is released : 0.3 – 0.9 V NORMAL : Normal mode TEST : During test mode Min.: 0, max.: 26

Reading increases when brake pedal is depressed


–


3. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the Hand–held tester allows the relay, solenoid, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on tester, select the ”ACTIVE TEST”. HINT: IG must be turned ON to proceed Active Test using a hand–held tester. *1: For VSC equipped vehicles only Item

Vehicle Condition / Test Details

SFRR

Turns ABS solenoid SFRR ON / OFF

SFRH

Turns ABS solenoid SFRH ON / OFF

SFLR

Turns ABS solenoid SFLR ON / OFF

SFLH

Turns ABS solenoid SFLH ON / OFF

SRRR(SRR)

Turns ABS solenoid SRRR(SRR) ON / OFF

SRRH(SRH)

Turns ABS solenoid SRRH(SRH) ON / OFF

SRLR

Turns ABS solenoid SRLR ON / OFF

SRLH

Turns ABS solenoid SRLH ON / OFF

SRCF(SA1)

Turns TRAC solenoid SRCF (SA1) ON / OFF

SRCR(SA2)

Turns TRAC solenoid SRCR (SA2) ON / OFF

SRMF(SMCF,SA3)

Turns TRC solenoid SRMF (SMCF,SA3) ON / OFF

SRMR(SMCR,STR)

Turns TRC solenoid SRMR(SMCR,STR) ON / OFF

SFRR & SFRH

Turns ABS solenoid SFRR & SFRH ON / OFF

SFLR & SFLH

Turns ABS solenoid SFLR & SFLH ON / OFF


Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard


Item

–



SRH & SRR

Turns ABS solenoid SRH & SRR ON / OFF

SRLR & SRLH

Turns ABS solenoid SRLR & SRLH ON / OFF

SFRH & SFLH

Turns ABS solenoid SFRH & SFLH ON / OFF

SRCF & SRCR

Turns ABS solenoid SRCF & SRCR ON / OFF

SRMF & SRMR

Turns ABS solenoid SRMF & SRMR ON / OFF

SOL RELAY

Turns ABS solenoid relay ON / OFF

ABS MOT RELAY

Turns ABS motor relay ON / OFF

ABS WARN LIGHT

Turns ABS warning light ON / OFF

VSC WARN LIGHT

Turns VSC warning light ON / OFF

VSC / TRC OFF IND

Turns VSC / TRC OFF indicator ON / OFF

SLIP INDI LIGHT

Turns SLIP indicator light ON / OFF

BRAKE WRN LIGHT

Turns BRAKE warning light ON / OFF

VSC WARN BUZ

Turns VSC warning buzzer ON / OFF


Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of motor can be heard Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Buzzer can be heard


4. (a) (b)

–


FREEZE FRAME DATA The vehicle (sensor) status memorized during ABS and/or VSC operation or at the time of error code detection can be displayed using the hand–held tester. Only one record of the freeze frame data is stored and the freeze frame data generated during ABS and/or VSC operation are constantly updated. Also, the number of the operations of the ignition switch ”ON” after the freeze frame data is stored can be memorized up to 31 and it can be displayed.

HINT: If the ignition switch ”ON” operation exceeds 31 times, ”31” appears on the display. (c) If the diagnosis code malfunction occurs, the freeze frame data at the occurrence of the malfunction is stored but the ABS actuation data is deleted. Hand–held tester display VEHICLE SPD

Measurement Item

Reference Value*

Vehicle speed

Speed indication of a meter

Stop light switch signal

Stop light switch ON: ON, OFF: OFF

Numbers of operations of ignition switch ON after memorizing freeze frame data

0 to 31

MAS CYL PRESS

Master cylinder pressure sensor output voltage

Release brake pedal: 0.3 to 0.9 V Depress brake pedal: 1.5 to 4.5 V

MASS PRESS GRADE

Master cylinder pressure sensor changing gradient

–30 to 200 MPa/s

Operate system

ABS operate: ABS BA operate: BA VSC (TRC) operate: VSC (TRC)

Yaw rate angle sensor output value

–70 to 70

Steering sensor output value

Left turn: Increase Right turn: Drop

Throttle position sensor output value

Release accelerator pedal: edal: Approx. A rox. 0 deg Depress accelerator pedal: Approx. 90 deg

Right and left G

–1.869 to 1.869 G

TRC OFF switch signal

TRC OFF SW ON: ON OFF: OFF

Shift lever position

P: P R: R N: N D: D 2: 2 L: L

STOP LIGHT SW # IG ON

SYSTEM YAW RATE STEERING ANG THROTTLE G (RIGHT & LEFT) VSC (TRC) OFF SW

SHIFT POSITION

*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”Idling”, it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF.


05−763 DIAGNOSTICS

−


5.

Without using hand−held tester: ABS SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) NOTICE: After replacing the steering angle sensor and/or ECU, perform zero point calibration of the steering angle sensor or system decision (When replacing the ECU) (See step 7.). HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during test mode, the DTCs will be erased.

DLC3

(a)

Ts

CG C52361

Procedures for test mode: (1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (2) Using SST, connect terminal Ts and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843−18040 (3) Check that the steering wheel is in the straight− ahead position and shift the shift lever to P range. (4) Turn the ignition switch ON. (5) Check that the ABS warning light blinks.

HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink, inspect the ABS warning light circuit or Ts terminal circuit. Trouble area

See Page

Ts terminal circuit

05−854


05−827

(b)

Check the speed sensor signal. (1) Drive the vehicle straight forward at the speed of 45 km/h (28 mph) or over for several seconds and check that the ABS warning light goes off.

HINT: The sensor check may not be completed if the wheels spin or the steering wheels are steered during this check. (c) Stop the vehicle.

DLC3

(d)

Tc

(e) HINT: S S CG C52361

Using SST, connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843−18040 Read the number of blinks of the ABS warning light. See the list of DTCs on page 05−766. If every sensor is normal, the normal code is output (A cycle of 0.25 second ON and 0.25 second OFF is repeated).


–


If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time, the lowest numbered code is displayed first.

Malfunction Code (Example Code 72 76) 7

2

7

6

ON OFF

1.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec.

0.5 sec.

2.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

4 sec. Repeat BR3893

(f)

6.

After the check, disconnect the SST from terminal Ts and CG, Tc and CG of DLC3 and turn the ignition switch to OFF. SST 09843–19040

With using hand–held tester: ABS SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) NOTICE: After replacing the steering angle sensor and/or ECU, perform zero point calibration of the steering angle sensor or system decision (When replacing the ECU) (See step 7.). HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during test mode, the DTCs will be erased. (a) Hook up the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Perform step 5. (c) to (d) on the previous page. (c) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. 7. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ZERO POINT CALIBRATION NOTICE: When replacing the steering angle sensor with column assembly or ECU, Engine and ECT ECU (A/T), Engine ECU (M/T) or when adjusting the front wheel alignment or steering wheel center point in accordance with the removing or installing or replacing the suspension, axle or steering parts, make sure to perform steering angle sensor zero point calibration. (a) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and keep the shift lever at P range. (c) Make sure the steering off center angle is less than ±3° when assembling the steering wheels (Smaller value is desirable). (d) Press the TRC OFF switch and hold it. (e) Check that the following conditions are satisfied. HINT: Engine warning light comes on. ABS warning light is blinking. (f) Depress the brake pedal 3 times or more within 2 seconds. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


(g) Check that the skid control buzzer sounds for 3 seconds. HINT: Press and hold the TRC OFF switch until the skid control buzzer sounds. When it starts sounding, turn off the switch. When the skid control buzzer starts sounding, turn off the TRC OFF switch. If the skid control buzzer sounds, the sensor calibration is in normal completion. If the skid control buzzer does not sound, perform the sensor calibration again. If the skid control buzzer still will not sound, there is malfunction in the steering angle sensor, so check the DTC.



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542T–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. NOTICE: When replacing the ABS & TRACTION actuator, sensor or etc., turn the ignition switch to OFF. Symptom

ABS does not operate BA does not operate EBD does not operate

Suspect Area If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Speed sensor circuit 4. Check the brake master cylinder with a ABS actuator checker or hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage.

ABS does not operate properly BA does not operate properly EBD does not operate properly

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. Speed sensor circuit 3. Stop light switch circuit 4. Check the brake master cylinder with a ABS actuator checker or hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage.

ABS warning light malfunction

1. ABS warning light circuit 2. ABS & TRACTION actuator

DTC of ABS check cannot be performed

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. Tc terminal circuit

Sensor signal check cannot be performed

TRC does not operate


1. Ts terminal circuit 2. ABS & TRACTION actuator If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 4. Speed sensor circuit

See page

05–756 05–808 05–774 05–778 32–56

05–756 05–774 05–778 05–815 32–56

05–827 –

05–756 05–852 05–854 –

05–756 05–808 – 05–774 05–778

05–773 DIAGNOSTICS Symptom

–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM Suspect Area

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 4. Speed sensor circuit

See page

05–756

6. Steering angle sensor circuit

05–808 – 05–774 05–778 05–790 05–793 05–801

SLIP indicator light malfunction

1. SLIP indicator light circuit 2. ABS & TRACTION actuator

05–848 –

TRC OFF indicator malfunction

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. TRC OFF switch circuit

VSC does not operate

5. Yaw rate sensor and deceleration sensor circuit

DTC of VSC check cannot be performed

VSC warning light malfunction


If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. Tc terminal circuit If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. VSC warning circuit

05–756 05–844

05–756 05–852

05–756 05–831


–


0543K–04

SKID CONTROL BUZZER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The skid control buzzer sounds during VSC operation.

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C G C J11 J21 (*3) (*4)

Skid Control ECU With Actuator

V7 VSC Warning Buzzer B–Y R–W Buzzer 1 2

3 IE1

B–Y

15 S1 BZ

Driver Side J/B 18 DB

ECU–IG

IG1 Relay

1 DN

1 ED1

B–L (*2)

W (*2)

B–G (*1) Engine Room J/B No.4 FL MAIN

B–G (*1)

1 4B

ALT 1

2

1 4D

B–G (*1)

Engine Room R/B No.3 Battery


B (*2)

ALT 3

1

2

3

W (*2)

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45145



–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(SKID CONTROL BUZZER) Check that skid control buzzer sounds ”ON” and ”OFF” with the hand–held tester. OK


NG

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL BUZZER ASSY 2 1 (+)

(–)

(a) (b)

Disconnect the skid control buzzer connector. Apply battery positive voltage to the terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control buzzer connector, check that the buzzer sounds.

F02192

NG

REPLACE SKID CONTROL BUZZER ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL BUZZER – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal BZ of the skid control ECU and skid control buzzer (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0543J–04

SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The SLIP indicator blinks during TRC & VSC operation.

WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU With Actuator

Combination Meter

B–W

15 C11

22 C11

8 IE1

LG

4 S1 IND

LG

Slip I13 Ignition SW


J/C

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

B–W

IGN

18 DA

2 DH

B–R 6

IG2

AM2

4


AM2 1

2

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R

1

B–R

Engine Room J/B No.4 1 4A

B–G (*1)

1 4B

B–G (*1)

Engine Room R/B No.3 B (*2) *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV

3

3

FL MAIN

Battery B (*2)

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45144



–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the SLIP indicator light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal IND of the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


056T7–03

TC TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Connecting terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 causes the ECU to display the DTC by flashing the ABS warning light.

WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3


Driver Side J/B W–L (*2)

TC

D J/C B 17 W–L (*2) J21 J20 DB

15 DL

W–L

6 CA

W–B (*2)

17 S1 TC

13 J8 J/C W–L (*1) B

W–L (*1) B CG

W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1)

4

A

Center J/B 3 CB

A IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD

IO: Gasoline IL: 1CD–FTV C87490

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 DLC3

INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Tc TERMINAL) (a) (b)

Tc

CG

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V

C52361

OK NG


Go to step 3


2 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the skid control ECU and DLC3 (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542S–04

TERMINALS OF ECU

C94401

Symbols (Terminals No.) WT (2) – GND (6 (6, 10)

IND (4) – GND (6, (6 10)

Wiring Color

Condition IG Switch ON, TRAC OFF Light ON

Below 2.0

IG Switch ON, TRAC OFF Light OFF

10 to 14

IG Switch ON, SLIP indicator light ON

Below 2.0

IG Switch ON, SLIP indicator light OFF

10 to 14

Always

10 to 14

LG B – W LG–B W–B B

LG – W W–B B

+BS (5) – GND (6, 10)

R – W–B

ENG+ (8) – ENG– (7)

Y–B

+BM (9) – GND (6, 10)

L – W–B

PMC (11) – E2 (12)

GR – Y–R

SS1 (13) – SS2 (29)

W–B

IG1 (14) – GND (6, 10)

R–W – W–B

BZ (15) – GND (6, (6 10)

B Y–W B–Y W–B B

IG switch ON

TRC+ (18) – TRC– (19) EBDW (20) – GND (6, (6 10)

Pulse generation

Always

10 to 14

IG switch ON, stop light switch OFF

0.3 to 0.9

Engine idling, slowly tun steering wheel IG switch ON IG switch ON, VSC buzzer is sounded

Tc (17) – GND (6, 10)

STD Voltage (V)

Pulse generation 10 to 14 Below 1.0 10 to 14

IG switch ON, VSC buzzer is not sounded

10 to 14

W–L – W–B

IG Switch ON

10 to 14

G–L

IG switch ON

Pulse generation

IG Switch ON, Brake warning light ON

5 to 9

IG Switch ON, Brake warning light OFF

Below 2.0

P – W–B W B

FR+ (21) – FR– (22)

W–B

IG switch ON, slowly turn right front wheel

AC generation

RL+ (23) – RL– (40)

R–G

IG switch ON, slowly turn left rear wheel

AC generation

D/G (26) – GND (6, 10)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 12

VCM (27) – GND (6, 10)

Y–G – W–B

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

W – W–B

IG switch ON

10 to 14

YIGA (30) – YGND (16)

W–L – W–G

IG Switch ON

10 to 14

PKB (31) – GND (6 (6, 10)

B W–W B–W W–B B

Ts (28) – GND (6, 10)

NEO (32) – GND (6, 10)

Y–B – W–B

VSCW (34) – GND (6, (6 10)

W R–W W–R W–B B

SP1 (35) – GND (6, 10)

L–W – W–B

WA (36) – GND (6, (6 10)

R Y–W R–Y W–B B

IG switch ON, parking brake switch ON

Below 1.5

IG switch ON, parking brake switch OFF

10 to 14

Engine idling IG Switch ON, VSC warning light ON IG Switch ON, VSC warning light OFF

STP (37) – GND (6, (6 10) RR+ (38) – RR– (39) FL+ (41) – FL– (24)

Vehicle drives at about 20 km/h (12 mph)

Pulse generation 5 to 9 Below 2.0 Pulse generation

IG Switch ON, ABS warning light ON

Below 2.0

IG Switch ON, ABS warning light OFF

10 to 14

Stop light switch OFF

Below 1.5

Stop light switch ON

8 to 14

G W–W G–W W–B B P–V

IG switch ON, slowly turn right rear wheel

AC generation

L–Y – R–L

IG switch ON, slowly turn left front wheel

AC generation



CSW (42) – GND (6 (6, 10)

–


IG switch ON, TRC OFF switch pressed

Below 1.5

IG switch ON, TRC OFF switch released

8 to 14

G Y–W G–Y W–B B



–


0543I–04

TRC OFF INDICATOR, TRC CUT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the TRC control main switch. When the TRC OFF switch is pressed, TRC control goes off and the TRC OFF indicator illuminates. Also, turn the TRC OFF indicator light to ”ON” when the VSC system is at the fail safe control. If the ignition switch is turned off, TRC control surely comes on the next time the ignition switch is turned ON.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

7 CA


Combination Meter

Center J/B 6 CD

21 C11

R–W

2 7 LG–B IE1 S1 WT

17 LG–B C11 TRC OFF

Driver Side J/B R–W

7 DB IG1 Relay

1 DN

3

5

5 DH

GAUGE1

1

9 DA

2 AM1


1 DH

G–R 3

AM1

1

IG1

G–Y Engine Room J/B No.4 1 B–G 4D (*1)

ALT 2

1 4B

1


1 ED1

B–L (*2)

B–G (*1)

W (*2)

ALT 3

2

3

1

B (*2)

FL MAIN

J16 J/C W–B (*4) A

T9 TRC Off SW W–B (*4) A 6

14 IE1

G–Y 9

G–Y

42 S1 CSW

Center J/B

Battery

W–B (*3) IJ

10 C1

6 W–B (*3) CA

IL

IP


*3: LHD *4: RHD F45146



–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(TRC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the TRC OFF indicator light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–held tester. OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT TRC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

3

INSPECT TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH (a) (b) (c) 4 3 2 10 9 8 7 6 5

+

E

Remove the TRC OFF switch. Disconnect the TRC OFF switch connector. Measure resistance between terminals + and E of the TRC OFF switch when the TRC OFF switch is ON and OFF. OK:

C94394

NG

TRC OFF switch

Resistance

Pushed in

Continuity

Released

1M or higher

REPLACE TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH

OK

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – TRC OFF SWITCH) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CSW of the skid control ECU and TRC OFF switch (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5 (a)

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05−854 −

DIAGNOSTICS


056T8−03

TS TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The sensor check circuit detects troubles in the sensor signal which cannot be detected by the DTC check. Connecting terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3 starts the check.

WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3 TS

W (*1) 12

D

W (*2) CG


J8 J/C

J/C

B W (*2) J21

W−B (*2)

W−B (*1) A

J16 J/C

*1: LHD *2: RHD

W−B (*1) A

28 S1 TS

W

IE2

D

C J20

4

12

W (*1)

Center J/B 3

6

CB

CA

IO

W−B (*2)

IP

IO: 1AZ−FSE IL: 1CD−FTV

C87489


INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL) (a) (b)

Ts

CG

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V

C52361

OK NG

Go to step 3


2 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of the DLC3 and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0543G–04

VSC WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ECU stores DTC, the VSC warning light illuminates on the combination meter.

WIRING DIAGRAM

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)


22 C11

J/C

16 C11


G C R–W J10 J20 (*3) (*4)


W–R


C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN


1 DN

B–G (*1)

5 DH

I13 Ignition SW

2 DH

ECU–IG

5

3

1

2

9 DA AM1

1 DH

G–Y

3 AM1

IG1


IG2 6

4 AM2

B–R B–L (*2) 1 ED1

W (*2)

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

AM2 B–R

1

2

1 1

1A

B–G (*1) B (*2)



1 ALT

4A B–G (*1)

1 4D

3

1 4B

ALT

3

2

B (*2)

1

1

2

FL MAIN

W–B

B–G (*1) W–B

Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

IJ

W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

EA

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45147


–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSC WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the VSC warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT VSC WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINATION METER – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056SW–09

ABS WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECU detects trouble, it will prohibit ABS control, turn on ABS warning light, and store the DTC. Connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 to make the ABS warning light blink and output the DTC.



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



22 C11

9 C10 17 C10

W–B (*4) J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A

Driver Side J/B J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4) A



22 S2 WA

R–Y J17 J/C

ABS

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

17 IE1

R–Y

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM2

IG2

6


1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)


3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD F45135



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the ABS warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–held tester. OK

REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–54)

NG

2 (a) (b) (c)

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY(ABS WARNING LIGHT) (See page 71–1) Disconnect the connector from the skid control ECU. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the ABS warning light. OK: ABS warning light comes on NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(WA CIRCUIT) Check for a short circuit in harness and connector between terminal WA of the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056SV–09



Always ON

DTC Detecting Condition Either of the following 1 or 2 is detected: 1. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the ECU. 2. There is a malfunction in the ECU internal circuit.

Trouble Area Battery Charging system Power source circuit ABS warning light circuit Skid control ECU

HINT: There is a case that hand–held tester cannot be used when there is a malfunction in the ECU.



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

J/C

22 C A B–W J8 J26 C11 (*3) (*4)

9 R–Y C10 17 C10

17 IE1

W–B (*3) W–B (*4)

ABS

R–W


IGN

18 DA IG1 Relay

1 DN 5 DH

5

3

1

2

18 S2 IG1

22 IE1

2 DH

B–R

18 G C J/C G C R–W DB J10 J20 J10 J20 (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) 9 W–B DA

ECU–IG

Skid Control ECU with Actuator 22 R–Y S2 WA

R–W

I13 Ignition SW AM1

1 DH

G–R 3 AM1

IG1 1

4 AM2

IG2 6

B–R G–Y

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 B–R 1 ED1

B–L (*2)

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

1 B–G (*1) 1A

AM2

B–R

1

W (*2)

2

B (*2)

1


Engine Room J/B No.4

3 ALT

1 4A B–G (*1)

1 4D

ALT 2

3

1 1

2

4B

B (*2)

J15 J/C

FL MAIN B–G (*1) B (*2)

J17 J/C

W–B (*4)

A A

A W–B (*3 *1) W–B (*3 *2)

Battery

IJ *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD


3

1

IK

IO

IL

J16 J/C A

A

W–B

W–B

10 S2 GND2

W–B

6 S2 GND1

EA

F45148


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–699). YES


NO

2



YES

3


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. Voltage: 10 to 14 V

GND

GND

IG1

NG


F45088

OK

Go to step 5


4

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground. Resistance: 1 or less

NG GND

–

GND

F45088



5

INSPECT COMBINATION METER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) (a) (b) (c)

GND

GND

WA

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. Using service wire, connect terminals WA and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: ABS warning light goes off.

F45088

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577X–04




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


Combination Meter

B–W

22 C11

4 C11 17 C10

18 IE1

P

J17 J/C W–B (*4)

Brake

J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A


J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1 1

B–R

2

W–B (*4) A



12 S2 EBDW

P

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM2

IG2

6


1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)


3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTC (See page 05–699). OK: Normal code NG


OK

2 (a)

INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT Check for an open or short circuit in the parking brake switch circuit (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE SWITCH CIRCUIT

PARKING

BRAKE

OK

3 (a) (b)

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the brake fluid level in reservoir. Check for an open or shot circuit in brake fluid level warning switch circuit (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT

OK

4 (a)

INSPECT VACUUM WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the vacuum warning switch and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5 (a)

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY(BRAKE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT) Check for an open or short circuit in the combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

OK




6 (a)

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BRAKE ACTUATOR – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the brake actuator and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

050XJ–11

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Rotor

The speed sensor detects wheel speed and transmits the appropriate signals to the ECU. These signals are used for control of the ABS control system. Each of the front and rear rotors has 48 serrations. When the rotors rotate, the magnetic field generated by the permanent magnet in the speed sensor induces an AC voltage. Since the frequency of this AC voltage changes in direct proportion to the speed of the rotor, the frequency is used by the ECU to detect the speed of each wheel.


To ECU


BR3583 BR3582

–V

F00010

DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0200/31 C0205/32

When any of the following 1. to 3. is detected : 1. Non–plausible high frequent signal, high wheel acceleration or high gradient for 20 sec. with the brake pedal applied or for 5 sec. when the brake pedal is not applied. 2. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph), the wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. 3. Deviation of 2 wheel speed.


C1330/35 C1331/36






–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator L–Y A4 ABS Speed Sensor Front LH

2

1


6

R–L

S2 FL–

W

10 S2 FR+

B

9 S2 FR–

2

1

5 S2 FL+

F40884


1 (a) (b)




Go to step 5


2

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR (a) (b) (c) 2

1

(d) C93876


NG


NG



3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FRONT SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each front speed sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4


GND


W04200

(REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminal FR+ – FR– and FL+ – FL– of the skid control ECU. (b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check the signal waveform. HINT: S As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases, a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater. S When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope, error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches, looseness or foreign matter deposited on it. OK




5

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



NG

OK

BR3795

NG


NG



6 (a) (b)




7



HINT: If a foreign object is attached, remove it and after reassembling, check the output waveform. R00948

NG


NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54)



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577U–04

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC



C0210/33 C0215/34

C1332/38 C1333/39


Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 to 3 is detected : 1. Non–plausible high frequent signal, high wheel acceleration or high gradient for 20 sec. with the brake pedal applied or for 5 sec. when the brake pedal is not applied. 2. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph), the wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. 3. Deviation of 2 wheel speed.








R

2 IB1

R

7 S2 RL+

G

1 IB1

G

17 S2 RL–

1

2

P

1 IM1

P

10 IE2

P

19 S2 RR+

1

2

V

10 IM1

V

11 IE2

V

8 S2 RR–

F45131



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


1 (a)


(b)


Go to step 5

NG

2

INSPECT REAR SPEED SENSOR (a) (b)

(c)

Disconnect the skid control sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector. OK: Resistance: 2.2 k or less Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1 M or higher

F41836

Connector 2

2

1


Skid control Sensor Sub–Wire Harness: (a) Disconnect the sub–wire harness connector from floor wire harness. (b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector lock part and connecting part of the connector. (c) Measure resistance between terminal 1 of the connector 1 and terminal 2 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (d) Measure resistance between terminal 2 of the connector 1 and terminal 1 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (e) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector 1 and body ground. OK: 10 M or higher NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). NG

OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE SKID CONTROL SUB–WIRE HARNESS

SENSOR

OR


3 (a)

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for on open or short circuit in harness and connector between each skid control sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR SERRATIONS Normal Signal Waveform

GND


W04200



NG

5

INSPECT SENSOR INSTALLATION (a)

Check the sensor installation. OK: There is no clearance between the sensor and rear axle carrier. NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). OK

NG F10178

NG

OK



SENSOR

OR


6 (a) (b)

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TIP Remove the skid control sensor (See page 32–61). Check the sensor tip. OK: No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip. NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). NG


OK

7


Check the sensor rotor serrations. OK: No scratches, missing teeth or foreign objects. NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699).

W04846

NG


NG





–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


050XQ–12

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure acting on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force. DTC No. C0226/21 C0236/22 C0246/23 C0256/24


Trouble Area

Each solenoid circuit




B–G (*1)

ALT 1

ABS 21


3 1

W (*2)

R (*1)

4 2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 ABS

1 1B

3 S2 +BS

R (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

1 S2 GND2

W–B

4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV F45132



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM




NO REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54)



DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056ST–06


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ABS motor relay supplies power to the ABS pump motor. While the ABS is activated, the ECU switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0273/13

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. Pump motor voltage is 2.0 V or more for 1 sec. or more at motor relay OFF. 2. Pump motor voltage is (IG – 4.0 V) or less for 0.1 sec. or more at motor relay ON. 3. After the end of the actuation of the motor relay slow down condition of motor does not meet the specification.




B–G (*1)

ALT

ABS

1

21


3 1

L (*1)

4

W (*2)

2 S2 +BM

2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 ABS

1 1B

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 1 W–B

FL MAIN

W–B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


1 (a)



NG

2


+BM

GND

GND


F45088

OK

NG




3

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

INSPECT FUSE(ABS FUSE) (a)

Gasoline Engine: ABS (40 A) Engine Room R/B No.4

(b)


Remove the ABS (40 A) fuse from the engine room R/B No.4 (Gasoline engine) or engine room R/B No.1 (Diesel engine). Check continuity of the ABS fuse. OK: Continuity

ABS (40 A)

F45087

NG


OK

4


GND

GND


F45088

NG


OK CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BM TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056SS–06



C0278/11


Trouble Area

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. Internal circuit malfunction in ECU. 2. Valve relay voltage is 0.8 x IG or less for 0.5 sec. 3. Valve relay voltage is high level at valve relay OFF.




B–G (*1)

ALT 1

ABS 21


3 1

W (*2)

R (*1)


1 1B

3 S2 +BS

R (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 1 W–B

FL MAIN

W–B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



+BS

GND


OK

GND

F45088


NG

2



(b)


ABS (25 A) Diesel Engine: Engine Room R/B No.1

ABS (25 A)

NG F45087

OK




3

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


GND

–

GND


F45088

NG

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND) (See page 01–32)

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BS TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577V–04

C1237/37 SPEED SENSOR ROTOR FAULTY


C1237/37


Trouble Area

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4: 1. Wheel speed deviation of unspecified wheel. 2. Wheel sensor signal failure suspicion. 3. Continuous ABS control for 60 sec. or more.





OK

2

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR NG


NG


OK

3

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR

OK

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal of speed sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

050XX–09


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the power source of the ECU, hence the actuators. DTC No.


C1241/41

With vehicle speed to about 6 km/h (4 mph), battery voltage is less than 9.4 V at the time of non–operation of ABS control or less than 9.2 V at the time of operation of ABS control, or battery voltage is more than 16.9 V.


Trouble Area Battery Charging system Power source circuit


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

22 IE1

R–W

R–W


Driver Side J/B

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

IG Relay

1 DN

5

5 DH

G–Y

ECU–IG 3

1

2

18 DB

R–W

9 DA


AM1

1 G–R DH 3

G–Y 1


1 ED1

W (*2)

W–B

ALT 3

3 2

B (*2) 1

1

W–B


B–G (*1)

ALT

FL MAIN

W–B

1 4B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B B–G (*1) B (*2)

Battery

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

IJ

EA

F45133



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM





NG


NG


F45090

OK

2


OK

3


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V GND

GND

IG1

NG


OK F45088



4

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground.

(b) OK: Resistance: 1 or less

GND

GND

F45088

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND) (See page 01–32)




DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

050XZ–13



C1249/58

DTC Detecting Condition Stop light switch circuit is open, and stop light switch voltage is in the level between 40 % and 70 % of the battery voltage.


Trouble Area Stop light switch Stop light switch circuit


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


G–W (*4) 2

1 G–W (*3)

2 IR1

R–W (*4)

G–W (*4)

11 IE3

R–W (*3) FL MAIN

2 DA

6 G–W (*3) IE3 22 DA

R–W (*4)

C J/C B J31 J30

W–B

G–W

1 DM

G–W

20 S2 STP

1 DN


ALT 1


W–B (*5)

STOP

2 DL

R–W (*3)

B–G (*1)

B (*2)


Driver Side J/B

1 4D 2

B–G (*1)

ALT

3




W–B BS


BT

A J/C A J33 J34

W–B (*6, *7)

W–B (*7) 2 4 BD1 BF1 (*6) (*7) *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

W–B (*6)

*5: S/D *6: L/B *7: W/G

3 BG1

W–B (*7)

G–W (*6, *7)

2 W–B (*6) BE1 BX



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



Go to step 4

OK

2


Disconnect skid control ECU connector. Measure the voltage between terminal STP and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector when the brake pedal is depressed. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK GND

GND

STP


F45088

NG

3 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–708)

4 (a)






DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577W–04




Trouble Area

Internal control unit of skid control ECU failure.

ECU


RECONFIRM DTC A

DTC C1300/62

B

Except DTC C1300/62

B


A

2


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V GND

GND

IG1

NG


OK F45088



3

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



NG GND

–

GND

F45088





DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

05C5B–01




Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected. 1. No motor voltage supply after skid control ECU starts the motor relay. 2. A high level of motor voltage when skid control ECU does not start the motor relay. 3. The pump motor voltage is high level for a certain time after the motor relay has elapsed.

C1350/51




B–G (*1)

ALT 1

ABS 21


3 1

W (*2)

L (*1)


1 1B

2 S2 +BM

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 1 W–B

FL MAIN

W–B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM







–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050X4–14

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ABS Check Sheet


Customer’s Name

/

/


/

Date Problem First Occurred Frequency the Problem Occurs

km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/ Continuously

/ Intermittently (

times a day)

ABS does not operate. ABS does not operate efficiently. Symptoms ABS Warning Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

Brake Warning Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

STOP LIGHT SW

ON

OFF

NO SYS SYSTEM Freeze Frame Data

ABS FAIL SF

#IG ON VEHICLE SPD


km/h MPH


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XB–14


Using SST 09843–18040, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. If malfunction is not found when inspecting parts, inspect the ECU and ground points for poor contact. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code. For details of each code, refer to the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No.” in the DTC chart. When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified.

C0200/31 (05–709)


Right front speed sensor Right front speed sensor rotor

C0205/32 (05–709)


Left front speed sensor Left front speed sensor rotor

C0210/33 (05–713)


Right rear speed sensor Right rear speed sensor rotor

C0215/34 (05–713)


Left rear speed sensor Left rear speed sensor rotor

C0226/21 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SFR) circuit

SFRR or SFRH circuit

C0236/22 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SFL) circuit

SFLR or SFLH circuit

C0246/23 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SRR) circuit

SRRR or SRRH circuit

C0256/24 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SRL) circuit

SRLR or SRLH circuit

C0273/13 (05–719)



C0278/11 (05–722)



C1237/37 (05–725)

Speed sensor rotor is wrong number of teeth on one of the 4 wheels

Speed sensor Sensor rotor Speed sensor circuit

C1241/41 (05–726)

Low battery voltage or abnormally high battery voltage


C1249/58 (05–730)


Stop light switch Stop light switch circuit

C1300/62 (05–733)



C1330/35 (05–709)

Open circuit in right front speed sensor


C1331/36 (05–709)

Open circuit in left front speed sensor


C1332/38 (05–713)

Open circuit in right rear speed sensor


C1333/39 (05–713)

Open circuit in left rear speed sensor


C1350 / 51 (05–735)



Malfunction in ECU

Battery Charging system ABS warning light circuit Power source circuit Skid control ECU




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

DTC of speed sensor check function: Code No.

Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1271/71



C1272/72



C1273/73



C1274/74



C1275/75

Abnormal change in output voltage of right front speed sensor

Right front speed sensor rotor

C1276/76

Abnormal change in output voltage of left front speed sensor


C1277/77

Abnormal change in output voltage of right rear speed sensor

Right rear speed sensor rotor

C1278/78

Abnormal change in output voltage of left rear speed sensor




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050YD–14



2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9





10


11

Repair

12

Confirmation Test

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

End HINT: Step 3, 6, 9, 12: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand–held tester. Fail safe function: When a failure occurs in the ABS system, the ABS warning light comes on and the ABS operation is prohibited. In addition to this, when the failure which disables the EBD operation occurs, the brake warning light comes on as well and the EBD operation is prohibited.



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XD–10

LOCATION


Skid Control Sensor Left Front Speed Sensor

Combination Meter (ABS Warning Light) (Brake Warning Light)

Speed Sensor Rotor


DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch

F45085



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 0577T–04

PRE–CHECK ABS Warning Light

BRAKE Warning Light

1. (a) (b)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Release the parking brake lever. Check the warning lights. When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the ABS warning light and brake warning light come on for 3 sec.

HINT: F45095

(c)

Tc

CG

C52361

Normal Code 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec. ON OFF Code 11 and 21 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec. 1.5 sec. 4 sec.

2.5 sec.

ON OFF Code 11

Code 21 R01346


Without using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Using SST, connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read the DTC from the ABS warning light on the combination meter.

HINT:

2 sec.

When the parking brake is applied or the level of the brake fluid is low, the brake warning light comes on. If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to troubleshooting for the ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737 or 05–741) or brake warning light circuit (See page 05–744).

If no code appears, inspect the diagnostic circuit or ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737 or 05–744). As an example, the blinking patterns for normal code and codes 11 and 21 are shown on the left. (4) Codes are explained in the code table on page 05–704. If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time, the lowest numbered DTC is displayed 1st. (5) After completing the check, remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (d) With using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (e) Without using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Using SST, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON.


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

(3)

Clear the DTCs stored in ECU by depressing the brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 sec. (4) Check that the ABS warning light indicates the normal code blinking pattern. (5) Remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040

BR3890

HINT: Disconnecting the battery cable during repairs will not erase the DTCs in the ECU. (f) With using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.

2. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed on the Hand–held tester, you can read the value and status of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on the tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item ABS MOT RELAY SOL RELAY

Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS motor relay / ON or OFF Solenoid relay / ON or OFF

STOP LIGHT SW


PKB SW


ABS OPERT FR

ABS operation (FR) / BEFORE or OPERATE

ABS OPERT FL

ABS operation (FL) / BEFORE or OPERATE

ABS OPERT RR

ABS operation (RR) / BEFORE or OPERATE

ABS OPERT RL

ABS operation (RL) / BEFORE or OPERATE


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ON : Motor relay ON

–


–

ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released ON : Parking brake applied OFF : Parking brake released BEFORE : No ABS operation (FR) OPERATE : During ABS operation (FR) BEFORE : No ABS operation (FL) OPERATE : During ABS operation (FL) BEFORE : No ABS operation (RR) OPERATE : During ABS operation (RR) BEFORE : No ABS operation (RL) OPERATE : During ABS operation (RL)

–

–

–

–




Item

WHEEL SPD FR

WHEEL SPD FL

WHEEL SPD RR

WHEEL SPD RL

IG VOLTAGE SFRR SFRH SFLR SFLH SRRR (SRR) SRRH (SRH) SRLR SRLH AIR BLD SUPPORT TEST MODE #CODES

Measurement Item / Range (Display) Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) ECU power supply voltage / NORMAL or TOO LOW ABS solenoid (SFRR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFRH) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFLR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFLH) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRRR (SRR)) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRRH (SRH)) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRLR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRLH) ON / OFF Air bleed support / SUPPORT or NOT SUP Test mode / NORMAL or TEST Number of DTC recorded / min.: 0, max.: 255

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed

–

Actual wheel speed

–

NORMAL : 9.8 V or over TOO LOW : Below 9.8 V

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Not supported

–

NORMAL : Normal mode TEST : During test mode

–

Min.: 0, max.: 19

–

3. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the Hand–held tester allows the relay, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on the tester, select the ”ACTIVE TEST”.



Item

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


SFRR

Turns ABS solenoid (SFRR) ON / OFF

SFRH

Turns ABS solenoid (SFRH) ON / OFF

SFLR

Turns ABS solenoid (SFLR) ON / OFF

SFLH

Turns ABS solenoid (SFLH) ON / OFF

SRRR

Turns ABS solenoid (SRRR) ON / OFF

SRRH

Turns ABS solenoid (SRRH) ON / OFF

SRLR

Turns ABS solenoid (SRLR) ON / OFF

SRLH

Turns ABS solenoid (SRLH) ON / OFF

SFRR & SFRH


SFLR & SFLH


SRRR & SRRH

Turns ABS solenoid SRRR & SRRH ON / OFF

SRLR & SRLH


SFRH & SFLH


ABS MOT RELAY


ABS WARN LIGHT


BRAKE WRN LIGHT


4. (a) (b)

Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of motor can be heard Observe combination meter Observe combination meter

FREEZE FRAME DATA The vehicle (sensor) status memorized during ABS operation or at the time of error code detection can be displayed using the hand–held tester. Only one record of the freeze frame data is stored and the freeze frame data generated during ABS operation are constantly updated. Also, the number of the operations of the ignition switch ”ON” after the freeze frame data is stored can be memorized up to 31 and it can be displayed.

HINT: If the ignition switch ”ON” operation exceeds 31 times, ”31” appears on the display. (c) If the diagnosis code malfunction occurs, the freeze frame data at the occurrence of the malfunction is stored but the ABS actuation data is not stored. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–703 DIAGNOSTICS Hand–held tester display VEHICLE SPD

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

Measurement Item

Reference Value*

Vehicle speed




# IG ON


0 to 31

SYSTEM

Operate system

ABS operate: ABS

STOP LIGHT SW

*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”Idling”, it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 5. SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during the test mode, the DTCs of the sensor check function will be erased. (a) Check the sensor signal. (1) Start the engine. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (3) Select the TEST MODE.

0.13 sec.

0.13 sec.

ON

OFF BR3904


(4) Check that the ABS warning light blinks. HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink, inspect the ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737). (5) Drive the vehicle straight forward. HINT: Drive the vehicle faster than 45 km/h (28 mph) for several sec. There is a case that the sensor check is not completed if the vehicle has its wheels spun or its steering wheel steered during this check. (6) Stop the vehicle. (7) Using SST, connect the terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. (b) Read the DTC from the hand–held tester screen. HINT: See the list of DTCs shown on the 05–704. Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XH–14

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. NOTICE: When replacing Skid Control ECU, sensor or etc., turn the ignition switch to OFF. Symptom

Suspect Area 1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Speed sensor circuit

ABS does not operate

4. Check the brake actuator with a hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 5. When the above areas (1. to 4.) are all normal but the problem still occurs, replace the skid control ECU. 1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. Speed sensor circuit

ABS does not operate properly

3. Stop light switch circuit 4. Check the brake actuator with a hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 5. When the above areas (1. to 4.) are all normal but the problem still occurs, replace the skid control ECU.

See page 05–699

05–709 05–713 32–53

05–699 05–709 05–713 32–53


1. ABS warning light circuit 2. Skid control ECU

05–737 –

DTC check cannot be performed

1. ABS warning light circuit 2. Tc terminal circuit 3. When the above areas (1. and 2.) are all normal but the problem still occurs, replace the skid control ECU.

05–737 05–748

Speed sensor signal check cannot be performed

1. D/G terminal circuit 2. Skid control ECU


– –


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

05C5C–01


WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3

Driver Side J/B

13

W–L (*2) J8 J/C W–L (*1) W–L (*1)

4

B B W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1)

TC

CG


A

17 DB

15 DL

W–L

6 CA

W–B (*2)

25 S2 TC

Center J/B 3 CB

A IO

IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD F45136

Except 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TC


Driver Side J/B W–L (*2) 13

D J/C B 17 W–L (*2) J21 J20 DB

15 DL

W–L

6 CA

W–B (*2)

25 S2 TC

J8 J/C W–L (*1) B CG

4

W–L (*1) B

W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1) A

Center J/B 3 CB

A IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Tc TERMINAL)

DLC3

(a) (b)

Tc

CG


C52361

OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the skid control ECU and the DLC3 (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XF–14

TERMINALS OF ECU

F45089

Symbols (Terminals No.)

Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

+BM (2) – GND (1, 4)

L – W–B

Always

10 to 14

+BS (3) – GND (1, 4)

R – W–B

Always

10 to 14

L–Y – R–L

IG switch ON Slowly turn left front wheel

AC generation

RL+ (7) – RL– (17)

R–G

IG switch ON Slowly turn left rear wheel

AC generation

FR+ (10) – FR– (9)

W–B

IG switch ON Slowly turn right front wheel

AC generation

FL+ (5) – FL– (6)

D/G (11) – GND (1, 4) EBDW (12) – GND (1 (1, 4)

PKB (14) – GND (1, (1 4) IG1 (18) – GND (1, 4) RR+ (19) – RR– (8)

STP (20) – GND (1 (1, 4)

WA (22) – GND (1, (1 4)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON, ABS warning light OFF

8 to 12

IG switch ON, BRAKE warning light ON

5 to 9

IG switch ON, BRAKE warning light OFF

Below 2.0


Below 2.0


10 to 14

IG switch ON

10 to 14

P – W–B W B

B W–W B–W W–B B R–W – W–B P–V

IG switch ON Slowly turn right rear wheel

AC generation


8 to 14


Below 4.0

G W–W G–W W–B B IG switch ON, ABS warning light ON

5 to 9


Below 2.0


SP1 (23) – GND (1, 4)

L–W – W–B

Vehicle drive at about 20 km/h (12mph)

Tc (25) – GND (1, 4)

W–L – W–B

IG switch ON


Pulse generation 10 to 14


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

05C5D–01


WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TS


J8 J/C W (*1)

12 IE2

W (*1)

12

D

D

13 S2

W

TS

W (*2) Center J/B CG

W–B (*2) 4

3

6

CB

CA

W–B (*2)

J16 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B (*1)

A

A IO

*1: LHD *2: RHD

IP

F45137

Except 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TS

W (*1) 12

12 IE2

W (*1) D

W (*2) CG


J8 J/C

D J20

D J/C

B W (*2) J21

W–B (*2) 4

13 S2 TS

W

Center J/B 3 CB

6 W–B (*2) CA

J16 J/C W–B (*1) A

W–B (*1) A IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD




−

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL)

DLC3

(a) (b)

Ts

CG

C52361


OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 − BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of the DLC3 and the skid control ECU (See page 01−32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU − DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01−32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32−54)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

11

–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

05A7M–02

ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature inside the cabin and sends the appreciate signals to the A/C amplifier. DTC No.

11

Detection item

Trouble Area

Open or short in room temperature sensor circuit

Cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assembly GR A17 A/C Room Temp. Sensor G 1

2

22 A16 TR

6 A16 SG–5

I35373



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TR – SG–5) (a) A16

SG–5

A15

(b) (c)

TR I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal TR and SG–5 of A/C amplifier connector at each temperature. Standard: 1.8 to 2.2 V at 25_C (77_F) 1.2 to 1.6 V at 40_C (104_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, the voltage decreases. OK

NG


PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE


2

–


INSPECT COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR (a) (b)

Remove cooler the thermistor (room temp. sensor). Measure the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) connector at each temperature. Standard: 1,615 to 1,785 at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases. I30111

Resistance (k)

Temperature (_C) I30156

NG

OK


REPLACE COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal TR and SG–5 of A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4 (a) (b)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 8.5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. Standard: Normal codes are output. MG

OK SYSTEM OK


REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER

OR


DTC

12

–


05C7L–01

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature outside the cabin and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. DTC No.

12

Detection item

Trouble Area

Open or short in ambient temperature sensor circuit

Thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) Harness or connector between thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) and combination meter Combination meter Harness or connector between combination meter and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM

Combination Meter 14 C10

13 C10 12 C10 11 C10

I14 Integration Relay P–B

1 IC1

P–B P MPX2MPX1 11 22

A/C Control Assembly 10 IC1

P

20 A15 MPX–

Engine and ECT ECU (A/T)Engine ECU (M/T) 10 23 20 18 21 29 29 P P–B A15 MPX+ E9 E9 E10 MPX1MPX2 E9 E10 E9 (*3) (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) (*3) A1 A/C Ambient Temp. Sensor 4 W W IE1 2 1 15 W–R W–R IE1 *1: 1CD–FTV *2: 1AZ–FSE *3: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE I35374



–



INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY C10–12

C10–11

(a) (b)

I37583

Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Measure resistance between the terminal C10–11 and C10–12 of the ambient temp. sensor connector at each temperature. Standard: 9.0 to 9.8 k at 0_C (0_F) 2.7 to 2.9 k at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, resistance decreases.

Resistance (k)


OK NG


REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY


2 (a) (b)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINATION METER – OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR) Disconnect the connector from ambient temp. sensor. Check continuity between the terminal C10–11 (12) of combination meter assy and the terminal A1–1 (2) of ambient temp. sensor connector. Standard: Continuity NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3 (a) (b)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 8.5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. Standard: Normal codes are output. NG

REPLACE OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR




DTC

13

–


050TN–10

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature inside the cooling unit and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. DTC No.

13

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open or short in evaporator temperature sensor circuit.

Cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator ( temp. sensor)) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assembly W–G A19 A/C Thermistor B 1

2

16 A15 SG–4

10 A16 TE

I35373



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TE – SG–4) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

TE

SG–4 I36144

NG


Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal TE and SG–4 of A/C amplifier connector at each temperature. Standard: 2.0 to 2.4 V at 0_C (32_F) 1.4 to 1.8 V at 15_C (59_F)

OK



2

–


INSPECT COOLER THERMISTOR NO.1 (a) (b)

Remove the cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor). Check the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor) at each temperature, as shown in the chart. Standard: 1,500 at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases. E50650

Resistance (k)


NG

REPLACE COOLER THERMISTOR NO.1

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER THERMISTOR NO.1 – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal TE and SG–4 of A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a) (b)

–



OK SYSTEM OK




DTC

21

–


05C7M–01

SOLAR SENSOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A photo diode in the solar sensor detects solar radiation and sends signals to the A/C amplifier.

Resistance of photodiode High

Low Weak Strong Strength of solar radiation DTC No.

21

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open or short in solar sensor circuit circuit. ( the checking g is being g performed in a dark place,, DTC 21 (If could be displayed.)

Automatic light g control sensor ((solar sensor)) Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A18 A/C Solar Sensor

A/C Control Assembly L

1 IF1

L

21 A16 TSP

LG

2 IF1

LG

9 A16 TSD

O

3 IF1

O

15 A16 S5–4

2 3

1

I35375



–



INSPECT COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR

2

(a) (b)

1

I33908

Remove cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. Cover the sensor with a cloth, and check the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor resistance. (1) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. Resistance: (No continuity)

HINT: Connect the ohmmter positive (+) lead to terminal 2 and the ohmmeter negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. (c) Remove the cloth from the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor, and subject the sensor to the electric light and check the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor resistance. (1) Measure resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. Resistance: Approx. 10 k (Continuity) HINT: Connect the positive (+) lead to ohmmeter to terminal 2 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. NG

REPLACE COOLER THERMISTOR

(SOLAR

SENSOR)

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) (a)

TSD

A16

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between solar sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 131415161718192021222324

TSP

S5–4

I37731

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3 (a) (b)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 8.5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. Standard: Normal codes are output NG


OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE



DTC

23

–


0564B–07

PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The pressure sensor sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier assy when the A/C refrigerant pressure drops too low or rises too high. When the A/C amplifier receives these signals, it outputs signals though the A/C amplifier to switch OFF the compressor relay and turns the magnetic clutch OFF. DTC No.

23

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open in pressure sensor circuit. Abnormal refrigerant pressure. below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) over 3,140 kPa (32.0 kgf/cm2, 455 psi)

A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) Harness or connector between A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A3 A/C Pressure Sensor

VC GND VOUT

A/C Control Assembly B–W

3 G–W 1 L–W 2

7 IE2 8 IE2 17 IE2

B–W G–W L–W

16 A16 S5 18 A16 SG 7 A16 PRE

I35376



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(PRE) A16

(a) (b)

A15

(c) (d) SG

PRE

(e) I36144

Install the manifold gauge set. Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Check the voltage between terminal PRE and SG of A/C amplifier connector when refrigerant pressure is changed. The voltage changes following refrigerant pressure change, as shown in the diagram below. Standard: Low Pressure Cut Side ON (0V)

225 kPa

196 kPa OFF (4.5 – 5.5 V)

OK

Reference : High Pressure Cut Side ON (0V) 2,550 kPa 3,140 kPa OFF (4.5 – 5.5 V)


NG

2

INSPECT AIR CONDITIOER PRESSURE SENSOR (a) (b) (c) 2

(d) 1

3

(+) (V) 4.9 4.8

Disconnect the pressure sensor connector. Install the manifold gauge set (See page 55–38). Connect the positive (+) lead from the three 1.5 V dry cell batteries to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1. Check the voltage between terminals 2 and 1 of pressure sensor. Standard: The voltage varies with on the refrigerant pressure as shown in the chart.

(–)

Dry Cell Battery

1.0 0.5 0.1 0 0.39

3.19 MPa

NG I35425

OK


REPLACE SENSOR

AIR

CONDITIOER

PRESSURE


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE SENSOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between pressure sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4 (a) (b)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. After turning the ignition switch ON, read DTC. Standard: Normal codes are output. NG

OK SYSTEM OK



OR


DTC

24

–


05C7N–01

SOLAR SENSOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE)




24

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open or short in solar sensor circuit circuit. (If ( the checking g is being g performed in a dark place,, DTC 24 could be displayed.)




1 IF1

L

21 A16 TSP

LG

2 IF1

LG

9 A16 TSD

O

3 IF1

O

15 A16 S5–4

2 3

1

I35375



–



INSPECT COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR (a) (b)

1

3

I33908




(SOLAR

SENSOR)

OK

2


TSD

A16

Check for open or short circuit in harness and connector between solor sansor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 131415161718192021222324

TSP

S5–4

I37731

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3 (a) (b)

–







DTC

31

–


05A7T–02

AIR MIX DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the position of the air mix damper and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. The position sensor is built in the air mix damper servo sub–assy.

TPP terminal voltage (V) 4

1 0 Damper opening angle 100% DTC No.

31

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Short to ground or power source circuit in air mix damper position sensor circuit.

Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper position sensor) Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A24 Air Mix Control Servo Motor (Front Passenger Side) M

MAX 4 (*1) HOT 5 (*2)

MAX 5 (*1) COOL 4 (*2)

W (*2)

Y (*2)

PT 3 V (*2) VZ 2 (*1) 1 (*2)

GND 1 (*1) 2 (*2)

R (*2)

P (*2)

A/C Control Assembly

5 IQ1

4 IQ1

3 IQ1

1 IQ1

2 IQ1

2 A15 AMPH

W (*1) W (*2) Y (*1) Y (*2) V (*1) V (*2) R (*1) R (*2) P (*1)

1 A15 AMPC

20 A16 TPP

1 A16 S5–1

13 A15 SG–1

P (*2) *1: LHD *2: RHD I35377



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPP – SG–1) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

TPP

SG–1 I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Change the set temperature to activate the air mix damper and measure the voltage between terminal TPP and SG–1 of A/C amplifier assy. Standard: MAX. COOL: 3.5 to 4.5 V MAX. HOT: 0.5 to 1.8 V

HINT: As the set temperature increases, the voltage decreases gradually without interruption. OK

NG




2

–


INSPECT AIRMIX NO.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY

LHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL

5 4 3 2 1

PT VZ

GND I35383

Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy connector. Resistance: 4.2 to 7.8 k While operating air mix damper servo sub–assy as shown in the procedure on page 05–1133, measure the resistance between terminal PT and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy. Standard: MAX. HOT: 3.4 to 6.2 V MAX. COOL: 0.8 to 1.6 V

HINT: As the air mix damper servo sub–assy moves from COOL side to HOT side, the resistance decreases gradually without interruption.

RHD Models: MAX. HOT

MAX. COOL

PT VZ

GND

NG I36141

REPLACE AIRMIX NO.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX NO.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a) (b)

–







DTC

33

–


05A7X–02

AIR OUTLET DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the position of the mode damper and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. The position sensor is built in the mode damper servo sub–assy.

TPM terminal voltage (V) 4

1 0 100% Damper opening angle DTC No.

33

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Short to ground or power source circuit in mode damper position sensor circuit.

Mode damper servo sub–assy (mode damper position sensor) Harness or connector between mode damper servo sub– assy (mode damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A25 Air Vent Mode Control Servo Motor

M

A/C Control Assembly L–B

FACE 5 LG–B DEF 4 GR–R PT 3 BR–W VZ 2 G–W GND 1

4 A15 3 A15 19 A16 14 A16 15 A15

AOF AOD TPM S5–3 SG–3

I35378



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPM – SG–3) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

SG–3

TPM

I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with being connectors connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Change the set to activate the mode damper sub–assy and measure voltage between terminal TPM and SG–3 of A/C amplifier assy. Standard: FACE: 3.5 to 4.5 V DEF: 0.5 to 1.5 V

HINT: As the is moved from FACE side to DEF side, the voltage decreases gradually with out interruption. OK


NG

2

INSPECT MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY (a) (b)

FACE

(c)

DEF

5 4 3 2 1

VZ

PT

GND

I35385

Remove the mode damper servo sub–assy. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of mode damper servo sub–assy connector. Standard: 4.2 – 7.8 k While operating mode damper servo sub–assy as in the procedure on page 05–1136, measure the resistance between terminal PT and GND of mode damper servo sub– assy. Standard: DEF: 3.4 to 6.2 k FACE: 0.8 to 1.6 k

HINT: As the mode damper servo sub–assy moved from DEF side to FACE side, the resistance decreases gradually with out interruption. NG

OK


REPLACE MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between mode damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4 (a) (b)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 1.0 minutes after turnig the ignition switch ON. Standard: Normal codes are output. NG




OR


DTC

36

–


05A80–02

AIR MIX DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE)


TPI terminal voltage (V) 4


36

Detection Item

Trouble Area


Air mix damper servo sub–assy (Air mix damper position sensor) Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A23 Air Mix Control Servo Motor (Driver Side)

M

A/C Control Assembly P–L

MAX 4 HOT MAX 5 COOL

B GR

PT 3 Y–B VZ 2 Y–R GND 1

12 A15 11 A15 8 A16 2 A16 14 A15

AMDH AMDC TPD S5–2 SG–2

I35378



1

–


INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPD – SG–2) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

TPD

SG–2 I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Change the set temperature to activate the air mix damper and measure the voltage between terminal TPD and SG–2 of A/C amplifier. Standard: MAX. COOL: 3.5 to 4.5 V MAX HOT: 0.5 to 1.8 V


NG




2

–


INSPECT AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY

RHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL

5 4 3 2 1

PT

VZ GND I35383

Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy connector. Resistance: 4.2 to 7.8 k While operating air mix damper servo sub–assy as shown in the procedure on page 05–1139, measure resistance between terminal PT and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy. Resistance: MAX. HOT: 3.4 to 6.2 k MAX. COOL: 0.8 to 1.6 k


LHD Models: MAX. HOT

MAX. COOL

PT

VZ GND

I36141

NG

REPLACE AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a) (b)

–







DTC

41

–


05A83–02

AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This air mix damper servo sub–assy is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air mix damper to the desired position. DTC No.

41

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Air mix damper position sensor value does not change even if A/C amplifier operated air mix damper control servomotor.

Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper control) Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper control) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy


MAX 4 (*1) HOT 5 (*2)

MAX 5 (*1) COOL 4 (*2)

W (*2)

Y (*2)

PT 3 V (*2) VZ 2 (*1) 1 (*2)

GND 1 (*1) 2 (*2)

R (*2)

P (*2)


5 IQ1

4 IQ1

3 IQ1

1 IQ1

2 IQ1

2 A15 AMPH

W (*1) W (*2) Y (*1) Y (*2) V (*1) V (*2) R (*1) R (*2) P (*1)

1 A15 AMPC

20 A16 TPP

1 A16 S5–1

13 A15 SG–1

P (*2) *1: LHD *2: RHD I35377



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c)

PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch (passenger side) and change to step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand. Display Code

Air Mix Damper Operation

0

COOL side (0% open)

1

COOL side (0% open)

2

COOL side (0% open)

3

COOL side (0% open)

4

COOL/HOT (50% open)

5

COOL/HOT (50% open)

6

HOT side (100% open)

7


8


9


OK

NG




2

–



LHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL

Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal MAX HOT and negative (–) lead to terminal MAX COOL, then check that the lever turns to ”HOT” side smoothly. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal MAX COOL and negative (–) lead to terminal MAX HOT, then check that the lever turns to ”COOL” side smoothly.

5 4 3 2 1

MAX COOL

MAX HOT I35383


MAX. COOL

MAX HOT

MAX COOL

I36141

NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER NO.2 SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper control servomotor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

43

–


05A87–02

AIR OUTLET DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit turns the servomotor and changes each mode damper position by the signals from the A/C amplifier assy. When the AUTO switch is on, the A/C amplifier changes the mode automatically between ”FACE”, ”BI–LEVEL”, ”FOOT” and ”FOOT/DEF” according to the temperature setting. DTC No.

Detection Item

Trouble Area

43

Air mode damper position sensor value does not change even if A/C amplifier operated mode damper control servomotor.

Mode damper servo sub–assy (mode damper control) Harness or connector between mode damper servo sub– assy (mode damper control) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy


M



4 A15 3 A15 19 A16 14 A16 15 A15


I35378



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Warm up engine. Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change it to the step operation. Check the air flow by hand. Display code

Air flow condition

0

FACE

1

FACE

2

FACE

3

FACE

4

FACE1

5

B/L

6

FOOT1

7

FOOT

8

FOOT/DEF

9

DEF

OK

NG




2

–



FACE

(c)

Remove the mode damper servo sub–assy. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal DEF and negative (–) lead to terminal FACE then check that the lever turns to ”DEF” position. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal FACE and negative (–) lead to terminal DEF then check that the lever turn to ”FACE” position.

DEF

5 4 3 2 1

FACE

DEF

I35385

NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between mode damper servo sub–assy and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

46

–


05A8A–02

AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The air mix damper servo sub–assy is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air mix damper to the desired position. DTC No.

46

Detection Item

Trouble Area


Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper control ) Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper control servomotor) and A/C amplifier A/C amplifier assy


M



B GR


12 A15 11 A15 8 A16 2 A16 14 A15


I35378



1 (a) (b) (c)

–


PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch (driver side) and change to the step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand. Display Code


0

COOL side (0 % open)

1


2


3


4

COOL/HOT (50% open)

5

COOL/HOT (50% open)

6


7


8


9


NG

OK




2

–



RHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL


5 4 3 2 1

MAX COOL

MAX HOT I35383


MAX. COOL

MAX HOT

MAX COOL I36141

NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix control servomotor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C7P–01

AIR CONDITIONER MAGNETIC VALVE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The air conditioner magnetic valve is controlled by A/C amplifier.

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W (*2)

H J26

J/C

F J27 R–W (*2)

2 IK2

R–W

A/C Control Assembly R

2

1

3 IK2

R

8 A15 SOL+

R–W (*1)

Center J/B 1 R–W CB (*1)

C3 Compressor Assembly

9 CJ

Driver Side J/B From 6 HTR DC Fuse *1: LHD *2: RHD I35381



–



PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change to the step operation. Check the air flow level by hand. Display Code

Blower level

0

ON

1

ON

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF

5

OFF

6

OFF

7

OFF

8

OFF

9

OFF

OK


NG

2

INSPECT AIR CONDITIONER MAGNETIC VALVE (a)

Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard: 10 to 11 at 25 C (77 F) If the resistance is not as specified, replace the compressor assy.

NG

REPLACE W/PULLEY COMPRESSOR ASSY

I36135

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal SOL+ of A/C amplifier and battery + terminal (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


050TW–10

BACK–UP POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the back–up power source for the A/C amplifier. Power is supplied even when the ignition switch is off and is used for diagnostic trouble code memory etc.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fuse Block ECU–B2 6

B–W

1

6

2


Center J/B W–R

10 CC

7 CF

W–R

24 A16 +B

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 B–G (*1) DCC 1 4 5 B–W B (*2) IE4 IP1 1 1A 2 1 (*3) (*4) Engine Room R/B No.3 B (*2)

3

3

B (*2)


B–G (*1)

1 4A

B–G (*1)

Center J/B W–B (*3)

6 CA

3 CG

W–B (*3)

13 A16 GND

J17 J/C FL MAIN

W–B (*4) A

A

W–B (*4) A

J15 J/C Battery IP

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV

IK

*3: LHD *4: RHD

I35395



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b)

CHECK FUSE(ECU–B2, DCC FUSE) Remove the ECU–B2 fuse and DCC fuse from the fuse block and engine room J/B. Check for the continuity of ECU–B2 fuse and DCC fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) A16

(a) (b)

A15

Remove the A/C amplifier with being connected. Measure the voltage between terminal +B and GND of A/C amplifier. Standard: 10 to 14 V

+B

GND

NG I36144

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–


05C7O–01

BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The blower motor is operated by signals from the A/C amplifier. Blower motor speed signals are transmitted by changes in the Duty Ratio. Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and then B is the period of non–continuity. Blower Level (Reference) HI M8 M7

Si duty (%)

M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 LO

Duty Ratio =

A A+B

x 100 (%)

A OFF 5 V B

ON 0 V

1 cycle 26.3 37.8 51.6 65.3 83.7 30.9 44.7 58.4 74.5

100.0

I36148

WIRING DIAGRAM B5 Blower Motor Controller

SI

+B

VM

GND

A/C Control Assembly L–B 2 B 3

2 IJ2

B–W

1 IJ2

W–B

4 IJ2

4

1

3 IJ2

5

R

L–B B4 Blower Motor B L M 2 1

L–B

A16 BLW Driver Side J/B From 2 HTR DF RELAY

L–B

W–B

A

J15 J/C IK


I36133


–



PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set to actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change to step operation. Check the air flow level by hand. Display Code

Blower level

0

0

1

1

2

16

3

16

4

16

5

16

6

16

7

16

8

16

9

31

OK


NG

2

INSPECT BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY (a) 1

Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and negative (–) to terminal 2. Standard: Blower motor operates smoothly. If operation is not as specified, replace the blower motor.

2

NG

LHD RHD

REPLACE BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY

I30151

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY – BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between blower w/fan motor sub–assy and blower motor control (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL – BODY GROUND) (a) B5

1

2

3

Check for an open circuit in harness and connector between terminal GND of blower motor control and body ground (See page 01–32).

4

GND

NG

I37588

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5

INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(BLW) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c) (d)

BLW

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch ON. Blower switch is ON. Measure the waveform between terminal BLW of A/C amplifier and body ground. OK: Pulse generation

HINT: I36144

The correct waveform is as shown. Waveform varies with blower level.

2V/ Division

GND 500 s sec. / Division

I31456

NG


OK

6 (a)

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between A/C amplifier and blower motor control (See page 01–32). NG

OK REPLACE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TH–09

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s name:

VIN Customer’s Name

Production Date Licence No.

Date vehicle Brought In

/

/

Date of Problem Occurrence

/

How Often does Problem Occur?

Continuous

Weather

Fine

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Symptoms

km Miles

Odometer Reading

Intermittent

Cloudy Warm

/ (

Snowy

Cool

times a day) Various / Other

Cold (Approx.

F C

)

Air Flow Control Faulty

Blower motor does not operate Blower motor speed does not change (Always Hi, Always Mid, Always Lo)

Temperature Control Faulty

Cabin temperature does not go down Cabin temperature does not rise Response is slow

Air Inlet Control Faulty

Cannot change between FRS and REC (Always Fresh or always Recirculating)

Vent Control Faulty

Mode will not change Will not enter the desired mode

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

I30150



–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TJ–13

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check (sensor check), check the circuit listed for the code in the table below (Proceed to the page given for that circuit). DTC No. (See Page) 00 11 *1 (05–1102)

Detection Item Normal

21 *3 (05–1113)

– (8.5 min. or more)

Ambient temperature sensor circuit (open/short)

Thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) Harness or connector between thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) and combination meter Combination Combinationmeter meter Harness or connector between combination meter and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

(8.5 min. or more)

Evaporator temperature sensor circuit (open/short)

Cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

(8.5 min. or more)

Solar sensor circuit (open) (Passenger side)

Automatic light control sensor (solar sensor) Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar ( l sensor)) and d A/C amplifier lifi assy A/C amplifier assy

Solar sensor circuit (short) (Passenger side) Pressure sensor circuit

Solar sensor circuit (open) (Driver side) Solar sensor circuit (short) (Driver side) Air mix damper position sensor circuit (Passenger side)

31 (05–1122)

Air outlet damper position sensor circuit 33 (05–1126)

Air mix damper position sensor circuit (Driver side) 36 (05–1129)

41 (05–1133)

– Cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

23 (05–1116)

24 *3 (05–1119)

Memory

Room temperature sensor circuit (open/short)

12 *2 (05–1106)

13 (05–1109)

Trouble Area

Air mix damper control servomotor (Passenger side)


A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) Harness or connector between A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy Automatic light control sensor (solar sensor) Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar ( l sensor)) and d A/C amplifier lifi assy A/C amplifier assy

(8.5 min. or more) –

–



(1 min. or more)


(1 min. or more)


(1 min. or more)


(15 sec.)

05–1095 DIAGNOSTICS Air outlet damper control servomotor 43 (05–1136)

46 (05–1139)

Air mix damper control servomotor (Driver side)

–



(15 sec.)


(15 sec.)

HINT:

*1: If the room temp. is approx. –18.6C (–3.7F) or lower, DTC 11

may be output even though the sys-

tem is normal. If the ambient temp. is approx. –52.9C (–61.4F) or lower, DTC may be output even though the system is normal. *3: If the check is being performed in a dark place, DTC 21 and 24 (solar sensor circuit abnormal) could be displayed. *2:



–


050U2–12

HEATER RELAY CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The heater relay is switched on by signals from the A/C amplifier. It supplies power to the blower motor.

WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B HTR HTR Relay 1

2 DP

L

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

1 DN

G–Y

5 DH

5

2

4

3

34 DA 2 DF

A/C Control Assembly 17

GR–R L–B

A16 HR

To Blower Motor W–B

4 DF

IG1 Relay 5

3 9 DA

1


2

AM1

1 DH

G–R

G–Y

3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y

Engine Room R/B No.3 B–L (*2)

1 ED1

W (*2)

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 HTR 1 L W (*2) 1 1B 2 1

3 140A ALT 3

2

1

3

B (*2)

Engine Room R/B No.4 B–G (*1)

1 4C 1 4D

120A ALT (*3) 100A ALT (*4) 1 4B

B–G (*1) B (*2) W–B

FL MAIN

W–B IJ

Battery

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

*3: 1AZ–FSE, 1AZ–FE *4: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE I35394


–



CHECK FUSE(HTR FUSE) Remove the HTR fuse from the driver side J/B and engine room J/B. Check for the continuity of HTR fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

INSPECT HEATER RELAY (a)

Check for the continuity between each pair of terminals of cooler relay assy, as shown in the chart. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

3–5

Less than 1 (When battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2)

No continuity

Less than 1 3–4

No continuity (When battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2)

1–2

Approx. 1.3 k

E32993

NG

REPLACE HEATER RELAY

OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) (a) A16

A15

(b)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Measure the voltage between terminal HR of A/C amplifier and body ground when ignition switch is ON and OFF. Standard:

Ignition switch position

Blower switch position

Voltage (V)

OFF

OFF

0

ON

ON

Below 1.0

ON

OFF

10 to 14

HR I36144

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–


05C7R–01

HOT GAS HEATER MAGNETIC VALVE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION For the hot gas heater, it is necessary to fulfill the following 6 conditions. Hot gas heater switch is ON. Recirculation damper position is FRS. Blower motor switch is in the position other than OFF. Ambient temperature varies according to the following condition; A/C switch ON

Below –1.5C (32F)

A/C switch OFF

Below 8C (46F)

Air mix damper position is MAX HOT. Water temperature is 70C (158F) or less.

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W (*2)

H J/C H R–W J26 J26 (*2)

11 IE1

C4 Condenser Assembly R–W

A/C Control Assembly R–B

1

2

18 IE2

R–Y

7 A15 MGV

Driver Side J/B 6 DC

5 DB

R–W (*1)

From HTR Fuse *1: LHD *2: RHD I35380



1

–


INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER (a) A16

A15

(b)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Measure the voltage between terminals MGV of the A/C amplifier and body ground. Standard:

MGV I36144

OK

Recirculation switch

Voltage (V)

Operate

Below 1.0

Not Operate

No Continuity

PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

NG

2

INSPECT W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY (a)

I36136

Apply voltage between terminals and check that the refrigerant passages switch.

NG

REPLACE W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY – AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between w/ receiver condenser assy and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS


–


05C7S–01

HOT GAS HEATER SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Hot gas heater performs only when its switch turns to ON and fulfill the following 6 conditions. Hot gas heater switch is ON. Recirculation damper position is FRS. Blower motor switch is in the position other than OFF. Ambient temperature varies according to the following condition; A/C switch ON

Below –1.5C (32F)

A/C switch OFF

Below 8C (46F)


WIRING DIAGRAM P5 Power Heater SW

Center J/B 1 R–W (*2) CB

12 CK

R–W (*2, *1) 3 IG

A/C Control Assembly 11 A16 HOTGASIN

G–Y (*1) IN 6 W–B (*1)

H J26

J/C

E 2

F R–W (*3, *1) J27

A R–W (*3)

J16 J/C

Driver Side J/B

A R–W (*2)

6 DC

From HTR Fuse

W–B (*1)

IL *1: 1CD–FTV *2: LHD *3: RHD I35396



1

–


INSPECT HETER SWITCH ASSY (a)

Check that the continuity when connecting the positive tester lead (+) and the negative tester lead (–) to the following terminals. Standard:

Heater switch condition

Connecting terminals

ILL+ E IN

ILL– IG I32396

NG

Standard value

ON

IG – IN

Continuity

OFF

IG – IN

No continuity

ON

IG – E

Continuity

OFF

IG – E

No continuity

ON

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

OFF

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

REPAIR OR REPLACE HETER SWITCH ASSY

OK

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(A/C CONTROL ASSEMBLY – BATTERY) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal HOTGASIN and GND of the A/C amplifier. Standard:

HOTGASIN I36144

NG


Standard value

ON

10 to 14 V

OFF

0V


OK

3

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH – BODY GROUND) (a) E

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between heater switch and body ground (See page 01–32).

I32395

NG


OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TG–11


VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORK SHOP

2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (See page 05–1090)

3

CHECK AND CLEAR DTC (See page 05–1091)

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM OCCUR (GO TO STEP 6)

SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR (GO TO STEP 5)

5

SYMPTOM SIMULATION (See page 01–22)

6

DTC CHECK (See page 05–1091) MALFUNCTION CODE (GO TO STEP 7) NORMAL CODE (GO TO STEP 8)

7

DTC CHART (See page 05–1094) GO TO STEP 10

8

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1100)

9

ACTUATOR CHECK (See page 05–1091)



–


10

CIRCUIT INSPECTION (See page 05–1102 to 05–1159)

11

IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM

12

PARTS INSPECTION

13

REPAIR

14

CONFIRMATION TEST

15

END



–


050TV–11

IG POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the power source for the A/C amplifier and servomotor, etc.

WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B AM1

1 DH

IG1 Relay HTR

1 DN 5 DH

5

3

1

2

H J/C H J26 J26

R–W (*4)

A/C Control Assembly R–W (*4)

Center J/B

6 DC 9 DA

R–W (*3)

1 CB

2 R–W CE (*3)

12 A16 IG

W–B

I13 Ignition SW G–Y

G–R 1 IG1

AM1 3

Engine Room R/B No.4 120A ALT (*5) 1 100A ALT (*6) 1 4D 4B 2 1

B–G (*1)

Center J/B 6 CA


1 ED1

W (*2)

W–B (*3)

140A ALT 3 2

1 B (*2)

FL MAIN

3 13 W–B CG A16 GND (*3)

A

3

W–B (*4) J17 J/C

A

B–G (*1)

W–B (*4) A

Battery

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD *5: 1AZ–FSE, 1AZ–FE *6: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE

J15 J/C IJ

IP

IK

I36744



–



CHECK FUSE(HTR FUSE) Remove the HTR fuse from the driver side J/B. Check for the continuity of HTR fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2


A15

(b) (c)

IG

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal IG and GND of the A/C amplifier. Standard: 10 to 14 V

GND

NG I36144

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7J–01

LOCATION w/ Hot Gas Heater Models: Magnetic Valve Assy

w/ Pulley Compressor Assy Air Conditioner Magnetic Valve

Pressure Sensor

Pressure Sensor

Cooler (Solar Sensor) Thermistor

Outer Ambient Temperature Sensor

Combination Meter Assy

w/ Receiver Condenser Assy

Engine and ECT ECU (A/T) Engine ECU (M/T) Air Conditioner Control Assy (Air Conditioning Amplifier)

Driver Side J/B

DLC3 Heater Switch Cooler (Room Temp. Sensor) Thermistor I35352



–


Recirculation Damper Servo Sub–assy

Mode Damper Servo Sub–assy

Evaporator

Evaporator Temp. Sensor

Blower w/ Fan Motor Sub–assy Blower Motor Control

Airmix No.2 Damper Servo Sub–assy Airmix Damper Servo Sub–assy

I35353



–



Inspector’s name:




/

/


/


Continuous

Weather

Fine

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Symptoms

km Miles

Odometer Reading

Intermittent

Cloudy Warm

/ (

Snowy

Cool


Cold (Approx.

F C

)







Vent Control Faulty


1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

I30150



–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TM–13

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If the normal code is displayed during DTC check although the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below, and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting. Symptom

Whole functions of the A/C system does not operate.

Suspect Area 1. IG power source circuit 2. A/C amplifier assy 3. Engine ECU

See page

1AZ–FSE: 1AZ–FE: 1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE: 1CD–FTV:

Air Flow Control : No blower operation

1. 2. 3. 4.

Air Flow Control : No blower control

1. Blower motor circuit

05–1148

Air Flow Control : Insufficient air out

1. Blower w/fan motor sub–assy 2. Blower motor circuit 3. A/C amplifier assy

05–1148 05–1148 05–1098

Temperature Control : Cool air does not come out

1. Volume of refrigerant 2. Drive belt tension 3. Refrigerant pressure 4. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 5. Pressure sensor circuit 6. Air mix control servomotor circuit 7. Air mix damper position sensor circuit 8. Room temp. sensor circuit 9. Ambient temp. sensor circuit 10.A/C amplifier assy

55–24 55–46 55–24 05–1151 05–1116 05–1133 05–1122 05–1102 05–1106 05–1098

Temperature Control : Warm air does not come out

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Air mix control servomotor circuit Air mix damper position sensor circuit Ambient temp. sensor circuit Room temp. sensor circuit A/C amplifier assy Heater radiator

05–1133 05–1122 05–1106 05–1102 05–1098 –

Temperature Control : Output air is warmer or cooler than the set temperature or response is slow.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Room temp. sensor circuit Ambient temp. sensor circuit Solar sensor circuit Air mix damper position sensor circuit Air mix control servomotor circuit Evaporator temp. sensor circuit A/C amplifier assy

05–1102 05–1106 05–1113 05–1122 05–1133 05–1109 05–1098

Temperature Control : No temperature control (only Max. cool or Max. warm)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.


05–1102 05–1106 05–1113 05–1122 05–1133 05–1109 05–1098

No air inlet control

1. Recirculation damper servomotor circuit 2. A/C amplifier assy

05–1153 05–1098

No air outlet control

1. Air outlet damper position sensor circuit 2. Air outlet control servomotor circuit 3. A/C amplifier assy

05–1126 05–1136 05–1098


Blower motor circuit Heater relay circuit Blower w/fan motor sub–assy A/C amplifier assy

05–1144 05–1098 05–294 05–149 05–5 05–528 05–1148 05–1146 05–1148 05–1098


Engine idle up does not occur, or is continuous

–


1. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 2. A/C amplifier assy 3. Engine ECU


05–1151 05–1098 05–294 05–149 05–5 05–528

Set temperature value displayed does not much up with operation of temperature control switch.

1. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 2. A/C amplifier assy

05–1151 05–1098

Brightness does not change when light control switch it turned.

1. Illumination light system 2. A/C amplifier assy

– 05–1098

Unable to access the diagnosis mode.

1. A/C amplifier assy

05–1098

DTC is not recorded. Set mode is cleared when IG switch is turned off.

1. Back–up power source circuit 2. A/C amplifier assy

05–1142 05–1098

Hot gas heater: Symptom Warm wind does not blow out even if the gas heater switch is turned on before the water temperature rises under the condition where the ordinal A/C correctly operates.


Suspect Area 1. Hot gas heater magnetic valve circuit 2. Hot gas heater switch circuit 3. A/C amplifier assy

See page 05–1157 05–1159 05–1098


–


05C7Q–01

RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The recirculation damper servomotor is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air inlet damper to the desired position.

WIRING DIAGRAM A21 Air Inlet Control Servo Motor

Center J/B R–W (*1)

R–W (*2)

1 CB

6 CE

H J26

R–W (*2)

H J26

3

+

R–Y

5 A15 REC

P–B

6 A15 FRS

1

R–W (*2) 2

Driver Side J/B 6

R–W (*2)

J/C

R–W (*1)


DC

From HTR Fuse

*1: LHD *2: RHD I35397



1 (a) (b) (c)

–


PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set to actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change to step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand. Display code

Recirculation damper position

0

FRESH

1

FRESH

2

FRESH

3

FRESH

4

RECIRCULATION

5

RECIRCULATION

6

RECIRCULATION

7

RECIRCULATION

8

RECIRCULATION

9

RECIRCULATION

NG

OK




2

–


INSPECT RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY

LHD Models:

(a) (b)

REC

FRS I36092

Remove the recirculation damper servo sub–assy. Connect the positive (+) lead to from the battery to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 2, then check that the arm turns to ”FRS” side smoothly. (c) Connect the positive (+) lead to from the battery to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1, then check that the arm turns to ”REC” side smoothly. If operattions are not as specified, replace the mode damper servomotor.

I36094

RHD Models:

REC

FRS

I36093

I36094

NG

OK


REPLACE RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(RECIRCULATON DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – BATTERY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between recirculation damper and battery + terminal (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(REC, FRS) A16

(a) (b)

A15

FRS

Remove A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Measure the voltage between terminal FRS of A/C amplifier and body ground when recirculation switch is operated, as shown in the table. Standard:

REC I36144

(c)


Voltage (V)

FRESH

Below 1.0

RECIRCULATION

10 to 14

Measure voltage between terminal REC of A/C amplifier and body ground when recirculation switch is operated, as shown in the table. Standard:

NG


Voltage (V)

FRESH

10 to 14

RECIRCULATION

Below 1.0


OK REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR



–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7K–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

AIR CONDITIONER AMPLIFIER ASSY A16

A15

121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 242322212019181716151413

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20191817161514131211

I36145

Terminal No. (Symbols)

Wiring Color

Condition IG SW: ON Front blower: Operate

Specification

A16–5 (BLW) – A16–13 (GND)

R – W–B

A16–7 (PRE) – A16–18 (SG)

L–W – G–W

A15–20 (MPX–) – A16–13 (GND)

P – W–B

Multiplex communication circuit

–

A15–10 (MPX+) – A16–13 (GND)

P–B – W–B


–

A15–6 (FRS) – A16–13 (GND)

P–B – W–B

IG SW: ON R/F SW: RECIRCULATION FRESH

10 to 14 Below 1.0 V

A15–5 (REC) – A16–13 (GND)

R–Y – W–B

IG SW: ON R/F SW: FRESH RECIRCULATION


A16–17 (HR) – A16–13 (GND)

GR–R – W–B

IG SW: ON Front blower: OFF Operate


A15–4 (AOF) – A16–13(GND)

L–B – W–B

IG SW: ON Mode switch: DEF. FACE

Below 1.0 10 to 14 V

A15–3 (AOD) – A16–13 (GND)

LG–B – W–B

IG SW: ON Mode switch: FACE DEF.


A16–12 (IG) – A16–13 (GND)

R–W – W–B

IG SW: LOCK ON

A15–2 (AMPH) – A16–13 (GND)

W – W–B

IG SW: ON Set passenger side temp.: MAX. COOL MAX. HOT


A15–1 (AMPC) – A16–13 (GND)

Y – W–B

IG SW: Set passenger side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL


A15–12 (AMDH) – A16–13 (GND)

P–L – W–B

IG SW: Set driver side temp.: MAX. COOL MAX. HOT


A15–11 (AMDC) – A16–13 (GND)

B – W–B

IG SW: Set driver side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL


A16–13 (GND) – Body ground

W–B – Body ground

Always

Continuity

A16–24 (+B) – A16–13 (GND)

W–R – W–B

Always

10 to 14 V

A16–8 (TPD) – A15–14 (SG–2)

GR – Y–R

A16–20 TPP – A15–13 (SG–1)

V–P

A16–9 (TSD) – A16–13 (GND) A16–21 (TSP) – A16–13 (GND)

Start engine Refrigerant pressure: 0 kPa (0 kgf/cm2, 0 psi) 3,138 MPa (32.0 kgf/cm2, 455 psi)

Pulse generation

0.5 4.8 V

Below 10 to 14 V

IG SW: ON Set driver side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL

1.0 4.0 V

IG SW: ON Set passenger side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL

1.0 4.0 V

LG – W–B

IG SW: ON Solar sensor subject to electric light

0.8 to 3.3 V

L – W–B


0.8 to 3.3 V


05–1099 DIAGNOSTICS Terminal No. (Symbols)

Wiring Color

A16–22 (TR) – A16–6 (SG–5)

GR – G

A16–10 (TE) – A15–16 (SG–4)

–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Condition

Specification

IG SW: ON Cabin temp.: 25C (77F) 40C (104F)

1.8 to 2.2 1.2 to 1.6 V

B – W–G

Evaporator temp.: 0C (32F) 15C (59F)

2.0 to 2.4 1.4 to 1.8 V

A16–23 (ILL+) – A16–13 (GND)

G – W–B

Light control switch TAIL or HEAD

10 to 14 V

A16–19 (TPM) – A15–15 (SG–3)

GR–R – G–W

IG SW: ON Set air flow setting: DEF. FACE

1.0 4.0 V

A15–8 (SOL+) – A16–13 (GND)

R – W–B

A15–7 (MGV) – A16–13 (GND) (*1)

R–Y – W–B

Start engine Hot gas heater: Operate

A16–11 (HOTGASIN) – A16–13 (GND) (*1)

G–Y – W–B

IG SW: ON Hot Gas SW: ON

10 to 14 V

A16–16 (S5) – A16–18 (SG)

B–W – G–W

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–1 (S5–1) – A15–13 (SG–1)

R–P

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–2 (S5–2) – A15–14 (SG–2)

Y–B – Y–R

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–14 (S5–3) – A15–15 (SG–3)

BR–W – G–W

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–15 (S5–4) – A16–9 (TSD)

O – LG

IG SW: LOCK ON

1.7 4.2 V

A16–15 (S5–4) – A16–21 (TSP)

O–L

IG SW: LOCK ON

1.7 4.2 V

A15–17 (CFAN) – A16–13 (GND)

W–R – W–B

Start engine Condenser fan: operate


A16–19 (PBKIG) – A17–13 (GND)

B–W – W–B

IG SW: ON PARKING BRAKE SW: OFF ON


A17–3 (PBLT) – A17–13 (GND) (*3)

L–R – W–B

IG SW: ON SEAT BELT SIGNAL: OFF ON


A17–4 (RDEFIN) – A17–13 (GND) (*2)

G–W – W–B

IG SW: ON RDEF RELAY : OFF ON


(*1) (*2) (*3) 2.

Start engine Compressor: Operate

Pulse generation 10 to 14 Below 1.0 V

Diesel (standard) only Petrol only Except 1AZ–FE COMBINATION METER A9

A10

I35419


Wiring Color

C10–17 (Z1H) – Body ground


C10–11 (HAY) – C10–12 (HAZ)

W–R – W


Condition Always IG SW: ON Ambient temp.: 25C (77F) 40C (104F)

Specification Continuity 1.35 to 1.75 0.85 to 1.25 V


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C55–01

A AUDIO SYSTEM CANNOT BE OPERATED WITH STEERING PAD SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM Radio Receiver Assy

Steering Pad SW LH 12 AU1 S15

LG

7 R11 SW1

11 AU2 S15

P

8 R11 SW2

10 EAU S15

W–R

6 R11 GND

I35619



–

AUDIO SYSTEM


INSPECT STEERING WHEEL ASSY(AU1, AU2, EAU) (a) (b)

AU1 EAU

AU2

OK


Remove the steering pad switch LH. Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

AU1 – EAU

Do not switch position

Approx. 100 k

AU1 – EAU

SEEK+ switch: push

0

AU1 – EAU

SEEK– switch: push

Approx. 0.3 k

AU1 – EAU

VOL+ switch: push

Approx. 1 k

AU1 – EAU

VOL– switch: push

Approx. 3.2 k

AU1 – EAU


Approx. 100 k

AU1 – EAU

MODE switch: push

0

NG I35662

REPLACE STEERING WHEEL ASSY


2

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING WHEEL ASSY – RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) (a)

Radio Receiver Assy: SW1

Disconnect the connectors from the steering wheel assy and radio receiver assy. (1) Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Specified condition

SW1– – AU1

Continuity

SW2 – AU2

Continuity

GND – EAU

Continuity

(2) SW2

GND

Steering Wheel Assy:

Check for a short between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

AU1

EAU

AU2

Specified condition No continuity

SW2 – Body ground

No continuity

GND – Body ground

No continuity

I37571

NG

OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY


Tester connection SW1 – Body ground

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR (See page 01–32)

OR


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C54–01

CASSETTE TAPE CANNOT BE EJECTED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

PRESS ”EJECT” AND CHECK OPERATION Press ”EJECT” and check the operation. (1) Press the cassette tape EJECT switch of the radio receiver assembly for 2 seconds or more and check that the cassette tape is ejected. Standard: The cassette tape is ejected. NG

REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY

OK

2 (a)

CHECK CASSETTE TAPE Check the cassette tape. (1) Check that the ejected cassette tape does not have the label peeled, cassette body deformation or others. Standard: No fault on the cassette tape. NG

CASSETTE TAPE FAULTY

OK

3 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK

NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY




–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C53–01

CASSETTE TAPE CANNOT BE INSERTED OR PLAYED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECT Check for any foreign objects. (1) Check that no foreign objects or defects are detected in the cassette tape player of radio receiver assy. Standard: No foreign objects or defects detected. NG

REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT

OK

2 (a)

CHECK CASSETTE TAPE Check the cassette tape. (1) Check that the cassette tape is a normal tape to which music or voice is recorded. Standard: Proper cassette tape to which music or voice is recorded. NG


OK

3 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another one and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: The function is recovered to be normal. OK





–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C52–01

CD CANNOT BE EJECTED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1

PRESS ”EJECT” AND CHECK OPERATION

(a)

Press ”EJECT”and check the operation. (1) Press the CD EJECT switch of the radio receiver assembly for 2 seconds or more to see if the CD is ejected. Standard: CD is ejected. Reference: If the CD is not ejected, send the vehicle for repair. Do not try to remove it by force. NG


OK

2 (a)

CHECK IF A PROPER CD IS INSERTED Check that a proper CD is inserted. (1) Check that in what conditions the sound skipping occurs. Standard: Driving on the bad road. NG


OK

3 (a)

REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. Standard: Installed properly. OK



CD FAULTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C51–01

CD CANNOT BE INSERTED OR IS EJECTED RIGHT AFTER INSERTION INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1

CHECK IF A PROPER CD IS INSERTED

(a)

Check if a proper CD is inserted. (1) Make sure that the CD is normal audio CD, and that there is no deformation, flaw, stain, burr and other defects on the CD. Standard: Normal audio CD. Reference: Translucent or different–shaped CD cannot be played. CD–ROM for the computers (with music recorded in) and recorded CD –R may not be played. NG

CD FAULTY

OK

2 (a)

CHECK IF A CD IS INSERTED PROPERLY Check that a CD is inserted properly. (1) Check whether or not the CD is inserted upside down. Standard: Not upside down. NG

SET DISC CORRECTLY

OK

3

DISC CLEANING (a)

Disk cleaning (1) If the disk gets dirty, clean the disk by wiping the surface from the center to outside in the radial directions with a soft cloth. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static preservative. Standard: Malfunction disappears. E50013

OK NG


DISC DIRTY


4 (a)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. (1) Replace the CD with onother normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK



CD FAULTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

054A0–09

CD SOUND SKIPS INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1

DISC CLEANING (a)


OK

DISC DIRTY

NG

2 (a)


CD FAULTY

NG

3 (a)

CHECK WHEN THIS HAPPENS Check when this happens. (1) Check that in what condition (place) noise occurs. Standard: Driving on the bumpy road. OK

Go to step 5

NG

4 (a)

COMPARE IT WITH ANOTHER CAR OF SAME MODEL Compare it with another vehicle of the same model. (1) Compare with the vehicle of the same type which does not have a trouble to see if there is any difference in the condition of trouble occurrence. Standard: No difference found. OK

NG


SETTING


5 (a)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

CHECK OF RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Check of radio receiver assembly installation. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. Standard: Installed properly. NG

INSTALL THE RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY PROPERLY

OK

6

DID THE TEMPERATURE IN THE CABIN CHANGE RAPIDLY?

(a)

Did the temperature in the cabin change rapidly? (1) Check whether or not the rapid temperature change occurred in the cabin. Standard: The rapid temperature change occurred. Reference: The rapid temperature change creates condensation inside the CD player, which may prevent the CD from being played. OK



CONDENSATION DUE TO TEMPERATURE CHANGE (LEAVE IT AS IT IS FOR A WHILE BEFORE USING)


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4W–01

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AUDIO SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s name: VIN Production Date

Customer’s Name

Licence No. Brought–in Date

/

/

/

Date of First Occurrence Frequency of Problem Occurrence

km Mile

Odometer Reading

Constant

/

Intermittent (

Times a day)

Problem Symptom

Radio

DTC Check

Switch

Parts name

CD Noise

DTC (1st time).

DTC (2nd time).

Radio receiver assy

I30195



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549F–10

DESCRIPTION 1. RADIO WAVE BAND The radio wave bands used in radio broadcasting are as follows: Frequency

30 kHz

Designation

300 kHz

3 MHz

LF

MF AM

Radio wave Modulation

Amplitude modulation

30 MHz HF

300 MHz VHF FM

Frequency modulation

LF: Low Frequency MF: Medium Frequency HF: High Frequency VHF: Very High Frequency

2. SERVICE AREA There are great differences in the size of the service area for AM and FM broadcasting. Sometimes FM stereo broadcast cannot be received even through AM can be received very clearly. FM stereo has the smaller service area, but it also picks up static and other types of interference (”noise”) easily.

FM (Stereo) FM (Monaural) AM BE2818

3. RECEPTION PROBLEMS HINT: Besides the problem of static, there are some move problems called ”fading”, ”multipath” and ”fade out”. These problems are caused not by electrical noise but by the nature of the radio waves themselves. Fading

(a)

Ionosphere

BE2819


Fading Besides electrical interference, AM broadcasts are also susceptible to other types of interference, especially at night. This is because AM radio waves bounce off the ionosphere at night. These radio waves then interfere with the signals that reach the vehicle’s antenna directly from the same transmitter. This type of interference is called ”fading”.


Multipath

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

(b)

Multipath Interference caused by reflection of radio waves against obstructions is called ”Multipath”. Multipath occurs when radio signals emitted from the broadcast transmitter antenna are reflected against tall buildings or mountains and interferes with other signals which are to be received directly.

(c)

Fade Out Because FM frequency is higher than that of AM, FM radio wave tends to be reflected against obstructions such as tall buildings or mountains. For this reason, FM signals often seems to gradually disappear or fade away as the vehicle goes behind those obstructions. This phenomenon is called ”fade out”.

BE2820

Fade Out

BE2821

4. (a)

NOISE PROBLEMS It is very important for noise troubleshooting to understand a customer’s claim clearly. Use the following table to diagnose the phenomenon. Radio wave

Condition in which noise occurs

Strong possibility of foreign noise.

Noise occurs when listening to faint broadcasting.

The same program may be broadcasted from some local stations. If the program is the same, one of those may be tuned in.

Noise occurs only at night.

Strong possibility of beat from a distant broadcasting.

Noise occurs at a specific place while driving.

Strong possibility of multipath noise and fading noise caused by changes of FM frequency.

AM

FM

Probable cause

Noise occurs at a specific place.

HINT: If the condition where the noise occurs does not meet any of the above, find out the cause based on ”Reception Problems”. Refer to the description about Multipath and Fading mentioned previously. 5. COMPACT DISC PLAYER (a) Compact Disc (hereafter called ”CD”) Players use a laser beam pick–up to read the digital signals recorded on the CD and reproduce analog signals of the music, etc. 4.7 in. (12 cm) and 3.2 in. (8 cm) discs are available for the CD player. HINT: Never attempt to disassemble or apply oil to any part of the player unit. Do not insert any object into the magazine except for a disc. NOTICE: CD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure. Be sure to operate the player correctly as instructed.



6.

Example : Head

Capstan

(a) (b)

Pinch Roller

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE Tape Player / Head Cleaning: Raise the slot cover with your finger. Using a pencil or similar object, push in the guide. Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner, clean the head surface, pinch rollers and capstans.

N17398

7.

MAINTENANCE CD Player / Disc Cleaning: If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping the surface from the center to outside in the radial directions with a soft cloth. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static preservative. BE4331

8. (a) (b) (c) 9. (a) (b) (c)

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Components in the audio system communicate each other though AVC–LAN. (Radio receiver function) The master component of AVC–LAN is the radio receiver assy with a resistance (60 – 80 ), which is necessary for communication. When short circuit or open circuit occurs in the AVC–LAN circuit, the audio system does not operate normally due to the communication cutoff. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION The audio system has diagnosis function (The diagnosis result is displayed on the LCD of the radio receiver assy). (Radio receiver function) The component code (physical address), or three–digit number (in hexadecimal) is set for each component comprising AVC–LAN. The logical address, or two–digit number (in hexadecimal) is set for each function and component unit in each component.



–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549J–12

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART Terms

Meaning Three–digit code (shown in hexadecimal) which is given to each component comprising the AVC–LAN. Corresponding to the function, individual symbols are specified.

Physical address

Logical address

Two–digit code (shown in hexadecimal) which is given to each function comprising the inner system of the AVC–LAN.

1. RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (Physical address: 190) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, trouble code may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting the engine. *2: It is stored when 180 seconds have passed after the power supply connector is pulled out after the engine starts. *3: It may be stored when the engine key is turned 1 minuite after the engine starts. *4: It may be stored when the engine key is turned again after the engine starts. *5: When 210 seconds have passed after pulling out the power supply connector of the master component with the ignition switch in ACC or ON, this code is stored. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Description

Action to be taken

22

RAM Error

D6 *1

Absence of Master

D7 *5

Connection check Error

D8 *2

No Response to Connection Check

Component shown by sub code is or was disconnected from system after engine start.

Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code.

D9 *1

Last Mode Error

Audio or visual component operated before engine stop is or was disconnected with ignition switch in ACC or ON.


DA

No Response to ON/OFF Instruction

No response is identified when changing mode (audio and visual mode change). Sound and picture does not change by button operation.

Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code. If error occurs again, replace component shown by sub code.

DB *1

Mode Status Error

Dual alarm is detected.

Check harness for power supply of component shown by sub code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code.

Transmission Error

Transmission to component shown by auxiliary code failed. (Detecting this DTC does not necessarily mean actual failure.)

If same sub code is recorded in other component, check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code. (If not, delete DTC and recheck.)

DC *3


Abnormal condition of RAM is detected.

Replace radio receiver assy.

Component in which this code is recorded was disconnected from system or master component with ignition in ACC or ON.

Check harness for power supply system of radio receiver assy. Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy.

Component in which this code is recorded was disconnected from system or master component ignition with in ACC or ON.

Check harness for power supply of radio receiver assy. Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy.


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

DD *4

Master Reset (Momentary Interruption)

After the engine was started, master component was disconnected from system.

Check harness for power supply system of multi–display. Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy. If this error occurs frequently, replace radio receiver assy.

DE *4

Slave Reset (Momentary Interruption)

After the engine was started, component shown by sub code had been disconnected from system.


E0 *1

Registration Completion Instruction Error

”Registration Completion Instruction” command from master cannot be received.

Since this DTC is provided for engineering purpose, it may be detected when no actual failure exists.

E2

ON/OFF Instruction Parameter Error

Error occures in ON/OFF controlling command from master component.

Replace radio receiver assy

Registration Request Transmission

Registration Request command is output from component shown by sub code. Receiving Connection Check Instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.


E3 *1

(b)

Logical address: 61 (Cassette switch)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Description

Action to be taken

40

Mechanical Error of Media

Malfunction due to mechanical failure is identified. Or cassette tape is cut or entangled.

Inspect cassette tape. Replace radio receiver assy.

41

EJECT Error

Malfunction due to mechanical failure.


42

Tape caught in the radio receiver assy

Hub lock etc.

Inspect cassette tape.

(c)

Logical address: 62 (CD player)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Description

Action to be taken

No Disc Readout

Disc cannot be read.

Inspect CD. Replace radio receiver assy.

44

CD player Error

Error is detected in CD player.


45

EJECT Error

Magazine cannot be ejected.


Scratched/Reversed Disc

Scratches or dirt is found on CD surface or CD is set upside down.

Inspect CD.

47

CD High Temp.

High temperature is detected in CD player.


48

CD Excess Current

Excess current is applied CD player.


42

46



–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549G–09


VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP

2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (SEE PAGE 05–1398)

3

CHECK AND CLEAR THE DTCS (SEE PAGE 05–1399)

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM OCCURS (GO TO STEP 6)


5

SYMPTOM SIMULATION (SEE PAGE 05–1398)

6

DTC CHECK (SEE PAGE 05–1399) MALFUNCTION CODE (GO TO STEP 7) NORMAL CODE (GO TO STEP 8)

7

DTC CHART (SEE PAGE 05–1405) GO TO STEP 9

8

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (SEE PAGE 05–1412)

9

CIRCUIT INSPECTION (SEE PAGE 05–1413 – 05–1432)

10

CONFIRMATION TEST



END


–

AUDIO SYSTEM


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4X–01

LOCATION Sedan:

Engine Room R/B No.4 (*1) Engine Room J/B No.4 (*1) Engine Room R/B No.3 (*2) ALT Fuse

Radio Receiver Assy

Steering Pad Switch LH

Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Room J/B No.1 DCC Fuse

Front No.2 Speaker Assy Front No.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.2 Speaker Assy

Rear No.1 Speaker Assy

Driver Side J/B RAD No.1 Fuse AM1 Fuse Fuse Block RAD No.2 Fuse


I35612



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Lift Back:


Radio Receiver Assy

Steering Pad Switch LH Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Room J/B No.1 DCC Fuse

Front No.2 Speaker Assy Front No.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.2 Speaker Assy Rear No.1 Speaker Assy



I35613



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Wagon:


Radio Receiver Assy





I35614



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

054A1–09

NOISE OCCURS INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK OF SPEAKER INSTALLATION Check the speaker installation condition. (1) Check that each speaker is securely installed. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

HINT: The radio is equipped with the noise prevention system that works against only the excessively large noise, thereby excessively large noise do not occur in the radio. If large noise occurs, check whether or not the earth on the antenna installation part and the proper noise–prevention equipment are all installed, and whether or not the improper wiring is held. Condition in which noise occurs

Noise type

Depressing the acceleration pedal increases noise, and stopping the engine erases the noise immediately.

Alternator noise

Noise occurs during the A/C or the heater operation.

Blower motor noise

Rapid acceleration during the drive on the unpaved road or after the IG switch is turned ON makes noise.

Fuel pump noise

Pressing and then releasing the horn switch, and keeping pressing the horn switch makes noise.

Horn noise

Stopping the engine erases the small noise that has been heard.

Ignition noise

Noise occurs in turn with the blink of the turn signal flash.

Flasher noise

Noise occurs during the window washer operation.

Washer noise

Noise occurs during the engine running, and it continues to occur after the engine is stopped.

Water temperature sensor noise

Noise occurs during the wiper operation.

Wiper noise

Noise occurs when the brake pedal is depressed.

Stop light switch noise

Others.

Static electricity on the vehicle

HINT:

Identify the condition under which the noise occurs, and check the noise filter on the related part. Make sure first that there is no noise from outside. Failing to do so makes the noise occurrence source detection impossible and leads to misunderstanding. The noise should be removed in descending order of loudness. NG OK IDENTIFICATION OF NOISE SOURCE


INSTALL IT PROPERLY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C4Z–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) WIRING DIAGRAM

J24 J/C L–Y (*5)

Radio Receiver Assy

L–Y (*5)

E

E

4 R9 +B

L–Y (*4) Center J/B 4 CE

8 CB

L–Y (*3) Driver Side J/B

GR

3 DH

RAD No.1

4 DB

1 DH

AM1

1 DN

G I12 Ignition Switch 2 ACC

F F F J/C F GR J8 J20 J8 J20 (*3) (*6)

G–R AM1 3

(*3) (*6)

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

Fuse Block L–Y (*3)

7

RAD No.2

L–Y (*4) L–Y (*5)

6

2

3 R9 ACC

6

1

R9

B–W

GND

BR (*3) W–B (*6)


3 1

ALT 3 B (*2)

1

W (*2)

3

2

ED1

Engine Room R/B No.1, Engine Room J/B No.1 1 1A

FL MAIN

DCC

5 4 IP1 IE4 1 2 (*6) (*3) Engine Room R/B No.4, Engine Room J/B No.4

B–G (*1) Battery B–G (*1)

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD

1

ALT

1 4A 1

B–W

1

2

1 4D

B–G (*1) IN

4B

*4: RHD, 1CD–FTV, w/o Multi–display *5: RHD, Except *4 *6: RHD I35615



–

AUDIO SYSTEM


INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER ASSY(BU, ACC, GND) ACC

+B

(a) (b)

GND

Remove the radio receiver assy. Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND – Body ground

Always

Continuity

(c)

Check the voltage between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

I35616

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

+B – GND

Always

10 to 14 V

ACC – GND

Ignition SW ACC

10 to 14 V

NG


OR

OK

2 (a)

CHECK FOR PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Check problem symptoms table (See page 05–1412). Suspected areas are cleared

A

Suspected areas still exist

B

B

A REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY


PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1412)


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549I–12

1

PRE–CHECK

6

1. (a)

SEEK DOWN SEEK UP

DISC

I35610

(b)

DIAGNOSIS CHECK Starting Diagnosis Mode (All elements are lighting in the SW check mode). (1) Turn off the audio system and turn the IG switch to ACC. While pressing the preset switches ”1” and ”6” at the same time, press ”DISC” 3 times. (2) Reference: When the system enters the Diagnosis Mode, a ”beep” tone is emitted 3 times and all the elements are lighting in the SW check mode. It takes about 40 seconds to complete the check. Turn all the elements in the LCD on. When pressing the switch, comfirm a beep tone is emitted. Press ”SEEK TRACK UP” button switches to enter the ”Service Check Screen”. Service Check Screen. (1) Reference In the service check mode, the system check and the diagnosis memory check are performed, and the check results are displayed in ascending order of the device codes (physical address.) Terms

Meaning

Component code (Physical address)

Three–digit code (In hexadecimal) given to each device comprising AVC–LAN. Corresponding to its function, individual symbol is provided.

Logical address

Two–digit code (In hexadecimal) given to each function and device unit in each device comprising AVC–LAN.

Code No. (physical address) List Code No. (physical address) 190

(c)


Equipment name Radio receiver assy (Audio head unit)

Finishing Diagnosis Mode. (1) Press ”DISC” for 2 seconds or more, or turn the IG switch OFF.


(d)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Service Check Mode Result Display (for checking the current and the past system conditions). (1) Press the ”SEEK TRACK” switch to see the check result of each device.

P–––indicates physical address 190–––physical address

good–––”The component is normal”.


CHEC–––”Check needed”.

: SEEK TRACK UP : SEEK TRACK DOWN

The illustration shows the case that the system has 2 devices with codes 190 and 360, and the device (code 360) requires a check. The check result is displayed in ascending order of device code. The device code is displayed first, and then the check result.

I34696

(2) Display good

NCON

ECHN

CHEC

Check Result Display.

Original Language

Meaning

Action to be taken

Good (normal)

No DTCs are detected in both ”System Check Mode” and ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.

–

No connection

The system recognized the component when it was registered, but the component gives no response to the ”Diagnosis Mode ON Request”.

Check the power source circuit and the communication circuit of the device indicated by the device code (physical address).

Exchange

One or more DTC for ”Exchange” is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.

Go to the detail information mode to check the trouble area referring to the DTC list.

Check

When no DTCs are detected for ”Exchange”, one or more DTC for ”Check is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.




–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Display

Original Language

Meaning

Action to be taken

OLD

Old version

Old DTC application is identified and DTC is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.

–

No response

The device gives no response to any one of ”System Check Mode ON Request”, ”System Check Result Request” and ”Diagnosis Memory Request”.

Check the power source circuit and the communication circuit of the device indicated by the device code (physical code).

NRES

(3) (e)


To perform the Service Check again, press the preset switch ”1”. Detailed information Mode (when displaying the troubled device’s DTC) (1) With ”CHEC” or ”ECHN” being displayed, press the preset switch ”2” to go to the detailed information mode. (2) Press the ”SEEK TRACK” switch to display ”System Check Result (SYS)” and ”Diagnosis Memory Response (CODE)”.


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Service Check Mode

PRESET SWITCH ”3” Detail Information Mode

PRESET SWITCH ”2” P–––indicates physical address 190–––physical address

*1

SYS–––system check result

1–––the first code 62–––logical address

Detail information of the first code is displayed

47–––DTC

Continue to display detailed information when more than one DTC is detected. CODE–––diagnosis memory response result 2–––the second code 01–––logical address

DC–––DTC

P–––indicates physical address 360–––sub code

Detail information of the second code is displayed

(*2) 6F–––connection check number 05–––the number of times of occurrence (in decimal) Continue to display detailed information when more than one DTC is detected.


From *1

To *1

The illustration shows the case that the component with code 190 has DTC ”47” and ”dC” as a result of the system check and the diagnosis memory response. The detailed information mode shows the system check result first, then the diagnosis memory response result. (*2): As for the DTCs that do not have any sub code, sub code is not displayed. I34695



–

(3)

AUDIO SYSTEM

Displayed Items in Detailed Information Mode

Division Code for DTC display

Meaning

The order of detailed information displayed when the ”SEEK TRACK UP” switch is pressed. (The order is reversed when the ”SEEK TRACK DOWN” switch is pressed.)

SYS

System check result is displayed.

Logical address DTC

Diagnosis memory check result is displayed.

Logical address DTC Sub code Connection confirmation number The number of times of occurrence

CODE

(4) (5) (f)

Check the trouble area referring to the DTC list. To return to the service check mode, press the preset switch ”3”. Clearing Individual DTC Memory (when clearing the memory of the DTC detected in the past individually) (1) Press the preset switch ”5” for 2 seconds or more while the ”ECHN” is displayed in the service check mode or during the detail information mode.

HINT:

(g)

Beep sound is emitted once when the DTC memory is completely cleared. When the DTC memory is cleared, only the component code (physical address) is displayed for the target component. To check the DTC, press the preset switch ”1” and perform the service check again. Clearance of all the DTC memory (when clearing all the memory of the DTC detected in the past) (1) Start the diagnosis mode after repairing the trouble area. (2) Press the preset switch ”5” for 2 seconds or more. (”CLR” is displayed at this time.)

HINT:


Beep sound is given once when the DTC memory is completely cleared. When the DTCs memory for all the device is cleared, only the component codes (physical address) are displayed. (3) Press the preset switch ”1” to perform the service check again, and check that no DTCs are displayed for all the component codes (physical address).


2. (a)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

IDENTIFICATION OF NOISE SOURCE Identify the condition under which the noise occurs, and check the noise filter on the related part.


Noise Source


Generator


Blower motor

Rapid acceleration while driving on the unpaved road or after the IG switch is turned ON makes noise.

Fuel pump

Pressing and then releasing the horn switch, and keeping pressing the horn switch makes unusual noise.

Horn

Stopping the engine erases small noise that has been heard.

Ignition

Noise occurs synchronously with the turn signal flash.

Flasher


Washer

Noise occurs during the engine running, and it continues after the engine stops.

Engine coolant temperature sensor


Wiper


Stop light switch

Others.

Static electricity stored on the vehicle

(b)


Reference: Make sure first that there is no noise from outside. Failing to do so makes the noise source detection difficult and leads to misunderstanding. The noise should be removed in descending order of loudness. Setting the radio untuned makes noise noticeable, making the recognition of the phenomenon easier.


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549M–11

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Pressing power switch does not start system.

5. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy)

05–1413

Sound quality is bad in all modes. (volume is too low)

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Sound quality is bad in all modes (volume is too low)

05–1413 05–1415

Noise occurs.

–

05–1419

Radio broadcast cannot be received. (bad reception)

–

05–1420

CD cannot be inserted or is ejected right after insertion.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. CD cannot be inserted or is ejected right after insertion

05–1413 05–1422

CD cannot be ejected.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. CD cannot be ejected

05–1413 05–1424

Sound quality is bad only when CD is played.(volume is too low)

–

05–1425

CD sound skips.

–

05–1426

Cassette tape cannot be inserted or played.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Cassette tape cannot be inserted or played

05–1413 05–1428

Cassette tape cannot be ejected.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Cassette tape cannot be ejected

05–1413 05–1429

Sound quality is bad only when playing tape.

–

05–1430

Tape is tangled due to incorrect tape speed or auto–reverse malfunction.

–

05–1431

STEERING PAD SWITCH Symptom A audio system cannot be operated with steering pad switch


Suspect Area –

See page 05–1432


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549R–06

RADIO BROADCAST CANNOT BE RECEIVED (BAD RECEPTION) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK IF RADIO AUTO–SEARCH FUNCTIONS PROPERLY Check if the radio auto–search functions properly. (1) Perform the auto–search of the radio and check that it functions normally. Standard: The radio auto–search functions properly. OK


NG

2 (a)

CHECK OPTIONAL COMPONENT Check optional component (Sun shade film, telephone antenna etc.). (1) Check whether or not any optional component is installed, such as the sunshade film and the telephone antenna. Standard: Optional component is installed. OK

EFFECT FROM OPTIONAL COMPONENT

NG

3 (a)

CHECK ANTENNA FOR NOISE PRODUCTION Noise Check with Antenna. (1) With the ignition switch in ACC, turn on the radio and choose the AM mode. (2) Place a tip of a screwdriver or the antenna of the antenna assembly w/ holder and check that the noise heard from the speaker. Standard: Noise occurs. OK

NG




4

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER ASSY(ANTENNA) (a)

(b)

E50367

Preparation for Check (1) Remove the antenna plug of the radio receiver assy. Noise Check (1) With the radio receiver assy connector connected, turn the ignition switch to ACC. (2) Turn on the radio and choose the AM mode. (3) Place a flat–head screwdriver or a metal such as a thin wire on the antenna jack of the radio receiver assy and check that the noise heard from the speaker. Standard: Noise occurs.

OK

NG REPLACE ANTENNA CORD SUB–ASSY




–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C50–01

SOUND QUALITY IS BAD IN ALL MODES (VOLUME IS TOO LOW) WIRING DIAGRAM

Radio Receiver Assy

T15 Front No.2 Speaker Assy RH (+) OUT

P F20 Front No.1 Speaker Assy RH

1

3

2 V

1

4

LG

1 IL1

LG (*1)

1 R9 FR+

L

6 IL1

L (*1)

5 R9 FR–

1 IA1

P (*2)

2 R9 FL+

6 IA1

V (*2)

6 R9 FL–

(+) IN (–) IN 2 (–) OUT

T14 Front No.2 Speaker Assy LH (+) OUT

LG F19 Front No.1 Speaker Assy LH

1

3

2

1

L

P

4

(+) IN V

(–) IN 2 (–) OUT

T17 Rear No.2 Speaker Assy RH (+) OUT

B R25 Rear No.1 Speaker Assy RH

4

R

1

3

(+) IN

2

1

(–) IN 2 W (–) OUT

Y

17 BC1

R

9 IM2

R

W

18 IM2

W

7 BA1

B

1 IC2

B

17 BA1

Y

10 IC2

Y

7 BC1

1 R10 RR+ 3 R10 RR–

T16 Rear No.2 Speaker Assy LH (+) OUT

R R24 Rear No.1 Speaker Assy LH

4 B

1

3

(+) IN

2

1

(–) IN 2 Y (–) OUT

W

2 R10 RL+ 6 R10 RL–

*1: LHD, RHD w/o Multi–display *2: RHD, LHD w/o Multi–display I35617



–

AUDIO SYSTEM


ADJUST SOUND QUALITY Adjust the sound quality. (1) Operate the radio receiver assy to adjust the sound quality. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK

BAD SOUND QUALITY

NG

2 (a)

COMPARE IT WITH ANOTHER CAR OF SAME MODEL Compare it with another vehicle of the same models. (1) Compare with the vehicle of the same type which does not have a trouble to see if there is any difference in the condition of trouble occurrence. Standard: No difference found. OK

NG


SETTING


3

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(RADIO RECEIVER ASSY – SPEAKER ASSY) (a)

FL+ FR+ RL+

Disconnect the connectors from the radio receiver assy and speakers. (1) Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart.

RR+

FL– FR–

RR– RL+

Front No.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.1 Speaker Assy

(2)


I35618

NG

OK


Tester connection

Specified condition

FL+ – 1 (Front No.1 speaker assy LH)

Continuity

FL– – 2 (Front No.1 speaker assy LH)

Continuity

FR+ – 1 (Front No.1 speaker assy RH)

Continuity

FR– – 2 (Front No.1 speaker assy RH)

Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity

RL+ – 1 (Rear No.1 speaker assy LH)

Continuity

RL– – 2 (Rear No.1 speaker assy LH)

Continuity

RR+ – 1 (Rear No.1 speaker assy RH)

Continuity

RR– – 2 (Rear No.1 speaker assy RH)

Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity

Check for a short between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Tester connection

Specified condition

FL+ – Body ground

No Continuity

FL– – Body ground

No Continuity

FR+ – Body ground

No Continuity

FR– – Body ground

No Continuity

RL+ – Body ground

No Continuity

RL– – Body ground

No Continuity

RR+ – Body ground

No Continuity

RR– – Body ground

No Continuity

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR(See page 01–32)

OR


4

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

INSPECT FRONT NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY

(a)

Resistance check. (1) Check the resistance between the terminals of the speaker. NOTICE: The speaker should not be removed for checking. Standard value: 4 NG

REPLACE FRONT NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY

OK

5 (a)

INSPECT FRONT NO.2 SPEAKER ASSY Check that malfunction disappears when a known good speaker is installed. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

HINT: Connect the all connectors of speakers. NG


OK

6

INSPECT REAR NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY

(a)


REPLACE REAR NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY

OK

7 (a)

INSPECT REAR NO.2 SPEAKER ASSY Check that malfunction disappears when a known good speaker is installed. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

HINT: Connect the all connectors of speakers. NG OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY




–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549Z–09

SOUND QUALITY IS BAD ONLY WHEN CD IS PLAYED (VOLUME IS TOO LOW) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK



CD FAULTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549U–10

SOUND QUALITY IS BAD ONLY WHEN PLAYING TAPE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappear. OK


NG

2 (a)

CHECK FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECT Check for foreign objects. (1) Check that no foreign material and troubles are detected in the radio receiver assembly cassette tape player. Standard: No foreign objects or defects detected. NG


OK

3

CLEAN HEAD AND CHECK OPERATION (a) Head

Pinch Roller

Capstan

Head cleaning (1) Raise the cassette door with your finger. Next, using a pencil or similar object, push in the guide. (2) Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner, clean the head surface, pinch rollers and capstans. (3) Check that the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

N17398

OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY


HEAD DIRTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549V–10

TAPE IS TANGLED DUE TO INCORRECT TAPE SPEED OR AUTO–REVERSE MALFUNCTION INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)



OK

2 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK(BELOW 90 MIN.) Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one (90min or less) to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK


NG

3


Pinch Roller

Capstan

OK N17398



Head cleaning (1) Raise the cassette door with your finger. Next, using a pencil or similar object, push in the guide. (2) Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner, clean the head surface, pinch rollers and capstans. (3) Check that the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. HEAD DIRTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4Y–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

RADIO RECEIVER ASSY R9

R10

R12

R11

I35611


Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

R9–1(FR+) – R9–7(GND)

LG – BR*1 LG – W–B*2

Audio system is playing

A waveform synchronized with sounds is output

R9–2(FL+) – R9–7(GND)

P – BR*1 P – W–B*2



R9–3(ACC) – R9–7(GND)

GR – BR*1 GR – W–B*2

Ignition switch to ACC

10 to 14

R9–4(+B) – R9–7(GND)

L–Y – BR*1 L–Y – W–B*2

Always

10 to 14

R9–5(FR–) – R9–7(GND)

L – BR*1 L – W–B*2



R9–6(FL–) – R9–7(GND)

V – BR*1 V – W–B*2



R9–7(GND) – Body ground

BR*1 – Body ground W–B*2 – Body ground

R9–8(ANT) – R9–7(GND)

B – BR*1 B – W–B*2

Radio switch ON and AM or FM

10 to 14

R9–10(ILL+) – R9–7(GND)

G – BR*1 G – W–B*2

Light control switch TAIL

10 to 14

R10–1(RR+) – R9–7(GND)

B – BR*1 R – W–B*2



R10–2(RL+) – R9–7(GND)

B – BR*1 B – W–B*2



R10–3(RR–) – R9–7(GND)

W – BR*1 W – W–B*1



R10–6(RL–) – R9–7(GND)

Y – BR*1 Y – W–B*2



R11–6(GND) – R9–7(GND)

W–R – BR*1 W–R – W–B*2

R11–7(SW1) – R9–7(GND)



Always

Always Steering pad switch not operating. SEEK+ switch push SEEK– switch push VOL+ switch push VOL– switch push

Continuity

Below 1.0 4 or more Approx. 0.5 Approx. 0.9 Approx. 2.0 Approx. 3.4


R11–8(SW2) – R9–7(GND)

P – BR*1 P – W–B*2

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Steering pad switch is not operating MODE switch push

4 or more Below 2.5

R12–9 (TX+)

P

See ”Service Check Mode”

–

R12–10 (TX–)

LG


–

*1: LHD *2: RHD



–

COMBINATION METER 05C4F–01

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK COMBINATION METER SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s name: VIN

Customer’s Name


Date of Vehicle Brought In

/

/

Odometer Reading

/

Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs Weather Conditions When Problem Occurred

Weather Outside temperature

Hot Warm Cold (Approx.

Cool F ( C))

Gauge

Malfunction in tachometer Malfunction in water temperature receiver gauge Malfunction in fuel receiver gauge Entire combination meter does not operate Buzzer does not sound

Others

Problem Symptom

/

Constantly Sometimes ( Times per day, month) Once only Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Various/Others

Malfunction in speedometer

Seat belt warning lamp for driver’s seat does not come on Seat belt warning lamp for front passenger’s seat does not come on The ambient temperature is not displayed


km Mile


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4L–01

ENTIRE COMBINATION METER DOES NOT OPERATE WIRING DIAGRAM Diesel Engine Type (1CD–FTV): J/C Fuse Block 5 4 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1)

DOME 1

6

B–W

2

F 6

F

J10 J26 (*1) (*2)

W–R

Combination Meter Assy H W–R J11 (*1) F 20 J26 C11 W–R (*2)


IGN

2 DH IG1 Relay

B–L 1 ED1

5

3

2

1

GAUGE1

AM1

1 DN

J/C A C A C J8 J26 J8 J26 B–W B–W (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) Center J/B 6 7 7 CA CD DB R–W R–W 5 6 6 CA CK DH W–B 9 DA W–B 18 DA

1 DH 3 G–R 4

Engine Room J/B No.1 and R/B No.1 DCC 1 1 1A B

2

1 1

AM2 2

1


Ignition Switch 1 AM1

IG1

AM2

IG2

B–R 1 1 IP1 IE4 B–R (*2) (*1) FL MAIN

6

W–B (*1) A J15 J/C

B 3

W

2

W–B (*2)

Battery

ALT 3

21 C11 5 C11

W–B G–Y

B–R

22 C11

1

IK

*1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models


IJ

IP

IL

3

I35761


–

COMBINATION METER

Gasoline Engine Type: J/C


Fuse Block 5 4 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1)

DOME 1

6

B–W

F 2

6

W–R

F

J10 J26 (*1) (*2)


2 DH

IG1 Relay GAUGE1 5 3 2

1

AM1

1 DN

J/C A C J8 J26 B–W (*1) (*2) Center J/B 7 7 DB CA R–W 5 6 DH CA 9 DA

18 DA

IGN

1 DH

A C J8 J26 (*1) (*2) 6 CD 6 CK

B–W

R–W W–B

22 C11 21 C11 5 C11

W–B

W–B G–Y

Ignition Switch

3

1

G–R

AM1 IG1 4

B–R

6 AM2 IG2

Engine Room J/B No.1 and R/B No.1 DCC 1 1 1A B–G

B–G

1 4A 1 4D

2

1

B–R 1

AM2 2

1

B–R


1 1 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1) FL MAIN

W–B (*1) A J15 J/C

B–G ALT 2

1

1 4B

W–B (*2)

Battery IK

IJ

IP

IL

*1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models I35762



–

COMBINATION METER


INSPECT FUSE(GAUGE2, ECU–B) Check continuity in the GAUGE, DOME fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY(POWER SOURCE AND GROUND CIRCUIT) (a) (b)

C11–20

(c) C11–22 C11–5

C11–21 I34628

Remove the combination meter assy. Check continuity. (1) Check continuity between the terminal C11–5 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. Standard: Continuity. Check the voltage. (1) Measure the voltage between the terminal C11–20 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. Standard voltage: 10 – 14 V (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Measure the voltage between the terminal C11–21, 22 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. Standard voltage: 10 – 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

COMBINATION METER

COMBINATION METER 056Q7–04



2


3

Check multiplex communication system (See page 05–1654)

(a)

Check the DTC output. DTC outputs (Proceed to ”BODY MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM) DTC does not output (Go to step 4)

4

Problem Symptom Confirmation (See page 05–1509)

5


6

Repair or Replace

7

Confirmation Test

8

End



–

COMBINATION METER 056QA–03

LOCATION

Rear Door Courtesy Switch Back Door Courtesy Switch Front Door Courtesy Switch Front Door Courtesy Switch Engine Room No.4 J/B, R/B

Fuel Sender Gauge Assy

Engine Room No.1 J/B, R/B

Park/Neutral Start Switch

I34623



–

COMBINATION METER

Combination Meter Assy Accessary Meter Passenger’s Seat belt Warning Lamp

Driver Side R/B

Center J/B

Fuse Block Occupant Detection Sensor

Driver Side J/B

Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH Front Seat Inner Belt Assy LH

I34624



C11

–

COMBINATION METER

C10

I34625



–

COMBINATION METER

TAIL IND

C11–14 (ILL+)

BEAM–

C10–6 (BEAM–)

C11–12 (BEAM+) TURN–L

C10–17 (POWER EARTH)

C10–3 (AVC LAN+) C10–4 (AVC LAN–)

AVC–LAN I/F

TURN–R

C11–1 (TURN L) C11–13 (TURN R)

DOOR

LIGHTS C10–15 (BEAN (SECURITY))

C10–13 (BEAN (EFI))

BEAN I/F

C10–14 (BEAN (BODY)) C10–12 (OUTSIDE TEMP–) C10–11 (OUTSIDE TEMP+)

OUTSIDE TEMP ODO/TRIP

C10–10 (FUEL) C10–5 (FE)

S

C10–16 (E/G OIL LEVEL)*1 C10–1 (WATER LEVEL)*1

T

C11–5 (SIGNAL EARTH)

C11–19 (SI) C11–3 (TACHO)

CPU F

W

C11–18 (4P OUT) C10–2 (ACC) A/T SHIFT CLOCK

CPU POWER SUPPLY

C11–20 (+B)

I34626



–

COMBINATION METER

CPU C11–21 (IG1+) BUZZER WATER LVL C11–9 (CHECK ENGINE)

CHECK E/G

*1, 2: C11–16 (VSC)

VSC

*1, 2: C11–15 (SLIP)

*3: C11–10 (AUTO LEVELING)

SLIP AUTO LVL

C10–9 (ABS) ABS ACTIVE CIRCUIT

ABS

*3: C11–6 (EMPS)

C11–22 (IG2+) EMPS ACTIVE CIRCUIT

EMPS

C11–4 (EBD) BRAKE ACTIVE CIRCUIT

C11–2 (BRAKE LVL SW)

AIR BAG

BRAKE A/B ACTIVE CIRCUIT

C11–8 (AIR BAG)

E/G OIL LVL FUEL A/T OIL TEMP CHG ECT SNOW D–SEAT BELT Rr FOG *1, 2: C11–17 (TRC OFF)

C10–8 (Rr FOG) C10–7 (Fr FOG)

Fr FOG TRC OFF

C11–11 (OIL PRESS SW)

OIL/P

*1: GLOW CRUISE *1: 1CD–FTV, *2: 1AZ–FSE, 2AZ–FSE, *3: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

I34627


–

COMBINATION METER

Terminal No.

Wire harness side Fuse Filter Warning Switch (*1) 1 2 RAD No.1 Fuse 3 Multi Display 4 Multi Display 5 Fuel Sender Gauge 6 GND 7 Front Fog Light Relay 8 Rear Fog Light Relay

C10

9 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 10 Fuel Sensor Gauge 11 Ambient Temp. Sensor 12 Ambient Temp. Sensor 13 Engine ECU 14 Integration Relay 15 Security ECU 16 Engine Oil Level Sensor 17 18 1 2 3

GND – Turn Signal Flasher Relay Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch Engine ECU

4 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 5 GND 6 EMPS ECU 7 – 8 Airbag Sensor Assembly 9 Engine ECU 10 Headlight Beam Level Control ECU C11

11 Oil Pressure Switch 12 H–HI RH Fuse/H–LP RH Fuse 13 Turn Signal Flasher Relay 14 TAIL Fuse 15 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 16 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 17 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 18 4P OUT (Other Parts) 19 20 21 22

Skid Control ECU with Actuator DOME Fuse GAUGE1 Fuse IGN Fuse

*1: 1CD–FTV



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4K–01

MALFUNCTION IN FUEL RECEIVER GAUGE WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy F25 Fuel Sender Gauge 2

15

3

IC1

BR–W

BR–W

6 IC1

G–W

G–W

5 C10

10 C10

I34419


INSPECT FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY (a) (b)

Remove the fuel sender gauge assy. Check that the float position is between E and F and measure resistance between the terminal 2 and 3 of the connector. (c) Check that the resistance value changes continuously. Standard:

1

e–3–1–B

E51362

NG F 1/2

11.9 mm

E I33111


Float level

Float position mm (in.)

Resistance ()

F

88.6 (3.49) 3 (0.12)

4.0 1.5

1/2

6.4 (0.25) 3 (0.12)

50.5 2.6

E

102.9 (4.05) 3 (0.12)

110.0 3.0

REPLACE FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY


2

–

COMBINATION METER

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY AND COMBINATION METER) (a) (b)

C10–5

(c) C10–10 I34628

Remove the combination assy and fuel sender gauge. Check the continuity between the terminal 3 of the fuel sender gauge and the terminal C10–5 of the combination meter assy. Standard: Continuity. Check continuity between the terminal 2 of the fuel sender gauge and the terminal C10–10 of the combination meter assy. Standard: Continuity.

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4H–01

MALFUNCTION IN SPEEDOMETER WIRING DIAGRAM w/ VSC: Combination Meter Assy

Skid Control ECU

SP1

35 S1

16 IE1

L–W

19 C11

L–W

Center J/B

J15 J/C

A

6 CA

W–B (*1) W–B

6 CK

W–B

5 C11

W–B (*2) IK

IP

IL


w/o VSC: Combination Meter Assy

Skid Control ECU

SP1

23 S2

16 IE1

L–W

19 C11

L–W

Center J/B A

6 CA

W–B (*1) W–B

J15 J/C

6 CK

W–B

5 C11

W–B (*2) IK

IP

IL *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models


I35752


–

COMBINATION METER


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(SKID CONTROL ECU)

(a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. ALL(ECM): Item

Measurement Item/ Range (Display)

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPEED

Vehicle speed / Min.: 0 km/h, Max.: 255 km/h

Almost same at the meter speed (When driving)

–

NG

GO TO BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

2

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Check the input signal waveform. (1) Remove the combination meter assy. (2) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminal C11–19 and C11–5 of the combination meter assy. (3) Start the engine. (4) Check the signal waveform.

C11–5

C11–19

Item I34628

Contents

Tool setting

5 V/ DIV, 20 ms/ DIV

Vehicle condition

Driving at approx. 20Km/h

HINT: As the vehicle speed becomes higher, the cycle of the signal waveform becomes shorter. OK

CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY

A05135

NG

3 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN SKID CONTROL ECU AND COMBINATION METER ASSY) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Disconnect the connector from the skid control ECU. Check continuity between the terminal S1–35 (SP1)/S2–23 (SP1) of the skid control ECU and the terminal C11–19 of the combination meter connector (See Page 05–770). Standard: Continuity. OK


CHECK AND REPLACE SKID CONTROL ECU


–

COMBINATION METER

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4I–01

MALFUNCTION IN TACHOMETER WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy

ECM

J/C 5 TACH E9

GR–R

B A J27 J9 (*2) (*1)

D E J26 J8 (*2) (*1)

GR–R

3 C11

Center J/B

J15 J/C

A

6 CA

W–B (*1) W–B

6 CK

W–B

5 C11

W–B (*2) IK

IP

IL



READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(ECM)

(a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATE LIST”. ALL(ECM): Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ENGINE SPEED

Engine speed / Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16,383 rpm

Almost same at the meter rpm (When engine is running)

–

NG OK


GO TO ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM


2

–

COMBINATION METER

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Check the input signal waveform. (1) Remove the combination meter assy. (2) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals C11–3 and C11–5 of the combination meter connector. (3) Start the engine.

C11–5

(4)

C11–3

Check the signal waveform. Item

Contents

Tool setting


Vehicle condition

Engine idle speed

I34628

A05138

OK


NG

3 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN ECM AND COMBINATION METER ASSY) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Disconnect the connector from the ECM. Check continuity between the terminal E9–5 (TACH) of ECM and the terminal C11–3 of the combination meter connector (See Page 05–1506). Standard: Continuity. OK





–

COMBINATION METER

05C4J–01

MALFUNCTION IN WATER TEMPERATURE RECEIVER GAUGE WIRING DIAGRAM ECM


18 23 20 MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*1) (*2) (*3)

13 C10

P

*1: 1AZ–FE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV

I35754

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: The ECM sends information on the water temperature sensor to the meter through the Bean. If there is on open or short circuit in the water temperature sensor circuit, the ECM outputs DTCs. Perform troubleshooting with the ”Engine system”.

1

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER



Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

COOLANT TEMP

Coolant Temperature / Min.: –40C, Max.: 140C

After warming up: 80 – 95C (176 – 203

If the value is ”–40 C” or ”140 C”, sensor circuit is open or shorted.

NG


OK

2

CHECK THAT MALFUNCTION DISAPPEARS A KNOWN GOOD COMBINATION METER IS INSTALLED NG




–

COMBINATION METER




–


PRE–CHECK 1. DATA LIST According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (e) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. ALL(ECM):

2. (a)

Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPEED



–

ENGINE SPEED



–

COOLANT TEMP




SET BUZZER OFF MODE (SEAT BELT) Within 6 seconds after turning ignition switch to the ON position, depress the ODO/TRIP switch for 10 seconds or more, and fasten the driver’s seat belt to enter the buzzer ON/OFF mode.

HINT: This procedure can be performed when the display shows the ”ODO” mode. (b) When entering the buzzer ON/OFF mode, current buzzer condition is shown on the display. According to the display, select the buzzer OFF mode by operating the ODO/TRIP switch. HINT: After entering the buzzer ON/OFF mode, when the ODO/TRIP switch is not operated for 10 seconds or more, the display returns to the normal mode. When the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery, the buzzer setting returns to buzzer ON mode. 6s Ignition SW

ON OFF ON

ODO/TRIP SW

OFF

Driver’s Seat Belt Unfastened Fastened


10s

10s


–

COMBINATION METER 056QC–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Chart No.

Symptom

See page

1


05–1510

2

Malfunction in tachometer

05–1513

3

Malfunction in water temperature receiver gauge

05–1515

4

Malfunction in fuel receiver gauge

05–1517

5

Entire combination meter does not operate

05–1519

6

Seat belt warning lamp for driver’s seat does not operate

05–1522

7

Seat belt warning lamp for front passenger’s seat does not flash

05–1524

8

The ambient temperature does not display

05–1527

9

Warning buzzer does not sound

05–1530



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4M–01

SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP FOR DRIVER’S SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy I14 Body ECU MPX2

BKL

1 IC1

22 P–B

12 IC1

9 L–R

B9 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy 3 G–Y 1 W–B

L–R

P–B Driver Side J/B 14 2 DB DD

Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 GSW (*1) A27 14 19 DBEW (*2) A28 A26 LBE+ (*1) (*2) (*1) RBE+ (*2) 3 2 A28 A26 LBE– (*1) (*2) (*1) RBE– (*2)

14 C10

L–R




(a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. BGW(Body): Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

D SEAT BUCKL SW

Driver seat belt buckle switch ON / OFF

ON: Fasten the driver seat belt OFF: Unfasten the driver seat belt

–

OK

NG




2

–

COMBINATION METER

CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY (a)

Check resistance. (1) Disconnect the connector from front seat inner belt assy. (2) Check resistance between the terminal 3 and 1 of the front seat inner belt assy. Standard:

2 1 4 3

I35973

NG

Condition

Specified Condition

Seat belt is fastened

No continuity

Seat belt is unfastened

Continuity

REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(BODY ECU–FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY) Check continuity between the terminal I14–9 of body ECU and the terminal A27–4 of airbag sensor assembly. Check continuity between the terminal A28–14 (A26–19) / A28–3 (A26–2)of airbag sensor assembly and the terminal B9–3 / B9–1 of front seat inner belt assy. ( ): LHD Models Standard: Continuity

(b)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4


CHECK AND REPLACE BODY ECU



OR


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4N–01

SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP FOR FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT DOES NOT FLASH WIRING DIAGRAM RHD Models: I14 Body ECU


A/C Control Assembly 20 MPX– A15 (*2) 9 MPX+ A13 (*1)

29 A13 (*1) 10 A15 (*2)

10 IC1

P

MPX2 11 P

P–B

1 IC1

P–B

14 C10

MPX1

P–B

ECM 29 29 E10 E9

24 3 A16 A13 PBLT (*1) (*2)

21 E9

MPX2

(*3) (*4) (*5)

F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light B–PBEW

22

18 23 20 MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*3) (*4) (*5)

P

13 C10

3 L–R (*6)

B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) J22 IG to GAUGE Fuse R–W(*6) J/C 8 C 3 2 1 C PBEW IC3 G–Y (*6) G–Y (*6) W–B(*6) 1 E J/C W–B (*6) B C A J31 J30 J16 W–B (*6) W–B (*6) J/C A 5

W–B (*6) IL

BS *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6:

Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV Except 1AZ–FE I35764



–

COMBINATION METER

LHD Models: I14 Body ECU A/C Control Assembly 20 MPX– A15 (*2) 9 MPX+ A13 (*1) 24 PBLT A13 (*1)

29 A13 (*1) 10 A15 (*2) 3 A16 (*2)

10 IC1

P

P–B

F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light B–PBEW 6 L–R (*6) IG

4

E

P

G–Y (*6)

14 IM1

22 P–B

1 IC1

P–B

14 C10

MPX1

ECM 29 29 21 E10 E9 E9 MPX2 18 23 20 (*3) (*4) (*5) MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*3) (*4) (*5)

to GAUGE Fuse

R–W(*6) PBEW 7

MPX2 11


P

13 C10

B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor)

3 G–Y (*6)

1 W–B(*6)

8 Center J/B

W–B(*6)

9 CH

6 CA W–B

*1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6:

Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV Except 1AZ–FE

IP

W–B BU

BV

I35765



–

COMBINATION METER




E66856

NG

Condition

Specified Condition


No continuity


Continuity


OK

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(A/C CONTROL ASSEMBLY–FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY) Check continuity between the terminal A13–24 / A16–3 of A/C control assembly and the terminal F19–3 (6) of front passenger’s seat belt warning light. ( ): LHD models Check continuity between the terminal F19–2 (F19–7)of front passenger’s seat belt warning light and the terminal B10–3 of front seat inner belt assy. ( ): LHD models Standard: Continuity

(b)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3


CHECK AND REPLACE AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ASSEMBLY




–

COMBINATION METER 05C4G–01

TERMINALS OF ECU COMBINATION METER ASSY

C11

C10

I35933

Terminal No.

Wiring color

Condition

C11–1 – Body ground (TURN L – Body ground)

G–W – Body ground

Turn signal LH indicator light OFF ON

C11–2 – Body ground (BRAKE LVL SW – Body ground)

R–W – Body ground

Brake fluid level warning switch ON

C11–3 – Body ground (TACHO – Body ground)

GR–R – Body ground

Ignition switch OFF ON, Engine idle speed

Specified condition Below 1 V 10 to 14 V Below 1 V

Puls generation (*2)

C11–5 – Body ground (SIGNAL EARTH – Body ground)


Constant

C11–6 – Body ground (EMPS – Body ground)

B–W – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and EMPS Indicator OFF ON

10 to 14 V Below 1 V

C11–8 – Body ground (AIRBAG – Body ground)

B–Y – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and AIRBAG Indicator OFF ON


C11–9 – Body ground (CHECK ENGINE – Body ground)

W – Body ground

C11–10 – Body ground (AUTO LEVELING – Body ground)

LG – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and AUTO LEVERING Indicator OFF ON

C11–11 – Body ground (OIL PRESS SW – Body ground)

Y–B – Body ground

Engine running Stopped

C11–12 – Body ground (BEAM+ – Body ground)

R–W (w/HID), R (w/o HID) – Body ground

C11–13 – Body ground (TURN R – Body ground)

G–Y – Body ground

Engine running and CHECK ENGINE indicator OFF

Continuity

9 to 14 V

10 to 14 V Below 1 V No continuity Continuity

Headlight OFF ON

Below 1 V 10 to 14 V

Turn signal RH indicator light OFF ON


Combination switch OFF ON


C11–14 – Body ground (ILL+ – Body ground)

G – Body ground

C11–15 – Body ground (SLIP – Body ground)

LG – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and SLIP Indicator OFF ON


C11–16 – Body ground (VSC – Body ground)

W–R – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and VSC Indicator OFF ON




–

COMBINATION METER 10 to 14 V Below 1 V

C11–17 – Body ground (TRC OFF – Body ground)

LG–B – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and TRC OFF Indicator OFF ON

C1–19 – Body ground (SI – Body ground)

L–W – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and turn the wheel slowly

C11–20 – Body ground (+B – Body ground)


Any Contents

C11–21 – Body ground (IG1+ – Body ground)


Ignition switch OFF ON






C10–1 – Body ground (WATER LEVEL – Body ground)

Y–R – Body ground

Fuel filter warning switch ON

Below 1 V

C10–2 – Body ground (ACC – Body ground)

GR – Body ground

Ignition switch OFF ACC


C10–3 – Body ground (AVC LAN+ – Body ground)


Communication circuit

–

C10–4 – Body ground (AVC LAN– – Body ground)

G – Body ground


–

Puls generation (*1) 10 to 14 V

C10–5 – Body ground (FE – Body ground)

BR–W – Body ground

Constant

C10–6 – Body ground (BEAM– – Body ground)

W–B (DRL) R–W (w/ HID) R– (w/o HID) – Body ground

Headlight ON, Hi–beam indicator OFF ON

C10–7 – Body ground (Fr FOG – Body ground)

G – Body ground

Ignition switch ON, Fr fog light indicator ON OFF


C10–8 – Body ground (Rr FOG – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON, Rr fog light indicator ON OFF


C10–9 – Body ground (ABS – Body ground)

R–Y – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and ABS Indicator OFF ON


C10–10 – Body ground (FUEL – Body ground)


Fuel sender gauge is F position E position

C10–11 – Body ground (OUTSIDE TEMP+ – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON

C10–12 – Body ground (OUTSIDE TEMP– – Body ground)

W – Body ground

Constant

C10–13 – Body ground (BEAN (EFI) – Body ground)

P – Body ground


–

C10–14 – Body ground (BEAN (BODY) – Body ground)

P–B – Body ground


–

C10–15 – Body ground (BEAN (SECURITY) – Body ground)

P–L – Body ground


–

C10–16 – Body ground (E/G OIL LEVEL – Body ground)

Y–G – Body ground

OIL LEVEL switch ON

No continuity

C10–17 – Body ground (POWER EARTH – Body ground)


Constant


Continuity

No continuity Continuity

4.0 110.0 3.31 V (–9C) 0.8 V (43C)

Continuity

Continuity


–

COMBINATION METER

*1: Reference: Using oscilloscope: Item

Contents

Tool setting


Vehicle condition


A05135


Contents

Tool setting


Vehicle condition

Engine idle speed

A05138

ENGINE ECU 1AZ–FSE: E13

E12

E11

E10

TACH

E9

I34746

Except 1AZ–FSE: E13

E12

E10

TACH

E9

C95801



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4O–01

THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DOES NOT DISPLAY WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy A1 Ambient Temp. Sensor 2 1 W–R

W


15 IE1

4 IE1

W–R

W

11 C10

12 C10

I35755


–

COMBINATION METER


CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY C10–12

C10–11

(a) (b)

I37583

Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Measure resistance between the terminal C10–11 and C10–12 of the ambient temp. sensor connector at each temperature. Resistance: 9.0 to 9.8 k: at 0C (0F) 2.7 to 2.9 k: at 25C (77F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, resistance decreases. Resistance:

Resistance (k)

Temperature (C) I30156

OK NG




2 (a) (b)

–

COMBINATION METER

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR Disconnect the connector from ambient temp. sensor. Check continuity between the terminal C10–11 (12) of combination meter assy and the terminal A1–1 (2) of ambient temp. sensor connector. Standard: Continuity. NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4P–01

WARNING BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND WIRING DIAGRAM LHD Models:

A/C Control Assembly 20 29 MPX– A15 A13 (*2) (*1)


I14 Driver Side J/B (Body ECU) 22 MPX2 P–B 10 IC1

P

11 MPX1 P 9

KSW

8 DA

DCTY

13 DB

1 IC1

P–B

U1 Unlock Warning SW 2 1 Y

BKL

24 3 PBLT A13 A16 (*1) (*2)

R

B J10

J/C

B J10

Driver Side J/B 2 14 DB DD

12 IC1

14 C10

R

L–R L–R Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 L–R A27 GSW D9 Door Courtesy SW 19 14 1 A26 LBE+ IC2 G–Y R 2 W–B W–B A26 LBE– W–B (*5) (*7)

B9 Buckle Switch 3

1

IL

IO

F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light 6 B–PBEW L–R (*6) B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) PBEW

7 G–Y (*6)

14 IM1

3 G–Y (*6)

1 W–B (*6)

W–B BU

BV

*1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: Except 1AZ–FE *7: Except (*5) I36641



–

COMBINATION METER

RHD Models:




P

11 MPX1 P 9

KSW

8 DA

DCTY

13 DB

1 IC1

B J10

R

J/C

B J10


12 IC1

R

L–R L–R Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 L–R DBEW A27 D9 Door Courtesy SW 14 14 1 A28 RBE+ IC2 G–Y R 3 W–B W–B A28 RBE– W–B (*5) (*7)

B9 Buckle Switch 3

1

IL F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light 3 B–PBEW L–R (*6)

PBEW

P–B


BKL

24 3 PBLT A13 A16 (*1) (*2)

14 C10

2 G–Y (*6)

B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) 8 IC3

3 G–Y (*6) C J31 W–B (*6)

BS


IO

1 J/C

B J30

W–B (*6) J22 J/C C C

W–B (*6) *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: Except 1AZ–FE *7: Except (*5)

I36642


–

COMBINATION METER


CHECK BUZZER Buzzer does not sound.

A

Only seat belt buzzer does not sound.

B

HINT: Perform the buzzer OFF mode check, when only the seat belt buzzer does not sound. If the seat belt buzzer still does not sound even after the check, proceed to step 2. B

SYSTEM CHECK MODE(SEE PAGE 05–1499)

A

2


(a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the display and select the ”DATA LIST”. Key reminder buzzer: Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY UNLOCK WRN SW

Key unlock warning switch OFF / ON

Key unlock warning switch ON

–

D DOOR CTY SW

D door courtesy switch OFF / ON

D door courtesy switch ON

–

IG SW

Ignition switch OFF / ON

Ignition switch OFF

–

Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY UNLOCK WRN SW



–

D DOOR CTY SW



–

IG SW


Ignition switch OFF

–

Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

D SEAT BUCKL SW

Driver seat buckle switch is OFF / ON

Driver seat buckle switch is OFF position

–

P SEAT BUCKL SW

Passenger seat buckle switch is OFF / ON

Passenger seat buckle switch is OFF position

–

IG SW


Ignition switch OFF

–

VEHICLE SPD


Vehicle speed 15 km/h


Light reminder buzzer:

Seat belt buzzer:

HINT: When the vehicle speed is not displayed on the hand–held tester, refer to ”Malfunction in speedometer” (See Page 05–1510). Result: NG (Seat belt buzzer does not operate)

A

NG (Key reminder / Light reminder buzzer does not operate)

B

OK

C



–

COMBINATION METER

B

Go to step 5

C


A

3

INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY(D–SEAT)(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG

CHECK AND REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY

OK

4

INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY(P–SEAT)(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG



5

INSPECT IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG

CHECK AND REPLACE IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH

OK

6

INSPECT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG

CHECK AND REPLACE DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY




–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7U–01


Inspector’s name:




/

/

km Miles

Odometer Reading


/


Continuous

Weather

Fine

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Intermittent

Cloudy Warm

/

Snowy

Cool

(


Cold (Approx.

F C

)

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

I35990



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7W–01

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the table below and proceed to the appropriate page. DTC No.

Description of fault

Comment / Remedy

000

No malfunction

010

Overvoltage shutoff

011

Undervoltage shutoff

012

Overheating

Check temperature at temperature or overheating sensor > 125 C Check water circuit.

014

Possible overheating detected (Hardware threshold value)

Difference of measured values at temperature sensor > 15 C (min. 70 C water temperature and metering pump in operation); Check temperature sensor and overheating sensor, replace if necessary.

017

Overheating detected (Hardware threshold value)

Temperature at temperature or overheating sensor > 130 C, emergency OFF if DTC No. 012 or 014 not is applicable; Check water circuit, temperature sensor and overheating sensor, replace if necessary.

020

Glow plug break

Check glow plug, replace if necessary.

021

Glow plug output overload


030

Combustion air blower motor EMF outside perm. range.

Blower impeller or burner motor fammed (frozen solid, dirty, etc.) Remedy jam, replace burner motor if necessary.

031

Combustion air blower motor break

Check the lead to combustion air motor (burner motor) for continuity, replace if necessary.

032

Combustion air blower motor short–circuit

Check combustion air blower motor (burner motor), replace if necessary. Check supply lead (chafed, etc.).

047

Metering pump short–circuit

Check the supply lead to metering pump for short–circuit, check metering pump, replace if necessary.

048

Metering pump break

Check the supply lead to metering pump for continuity, remedy break, replace metering pump if necessary.

051

Cold blow time exceeded

At start, if flame sensor above 70 C, > 240 sec.; Check exhaust gas combustion air supply, check flame sensor, replace if necessary.

052

Safety time exceeded

When all perm. start attempts used up; Check the fuel delivery and fuel supply. Check exhaust gas and combustion air ducts.

054

Flame cutout, High setting

056

Flame cutout, LOW setting

060

Temperature conrol sensor break

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 2 and 10 connector B > 2 M (if break)

061

Temperature control sensor short–circuit

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 2 and 10 at connector B < 2 M (If short– circuit)

064

Flame sensor break

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 7 and 14 at connector B > 3,040 (If break)

065

Flame sensor short–circuit

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 7 and 14 at connector B > 780 (If short–circuit)


– Voltage between 1 and 5 at connector A > 16 V Voltage between 1 and 5 at connector A < 10.2 V (Voltage values must be present > 20 seconds) Check battery, regulator and electrical leads.

Check the fuel delivery and fuel supply. Check exhaust gas combustion air ducts. If combustion OK Check the flame sensor, replace if necessary.

05–1167 DIAGNOSTICS DTC No.


–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM Comment / Remedy

071

Surface sensor break

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 4 and 11 at connector B > 2 MW (If break)

072

Surface sensor short–circuit

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 4 and 11 at connector B > 50 W (If short–circuit)

090 092 093

Control unit detective (Internal fault / Reset) Control unit detective (ROM error) Control unit detective (RAM error)

Control unit malfunction due to interference voltage from vehicle electrical system; possible causes low batteries, chargers, other sources of interference; eliminate interference voltages. Internal faults detected in microprocessor / memory detected. Replace control unit.

097

Internal control unit faults

Other faults which cannot lead to DTC No. 90, 92 and 93, replace control unit.



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM

05C80–01

ECU POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is power source for the power heater ECU and power heater fuel pump.

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No.1, Engine Room J/B No.1

Engine Room R/B No.3 B

3

3

B

1

Power Heater ECU

PWR HTR

1A

1 1

W

5 P1 +

W–B

1 P1 –

2 J2 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

W–B A

A

EC

I35410



1 (a) (b)

–


CHECK FUSE(PWR HTR) Remove the PWR HTR from the engine room J/B or R/B No.1. Check that the continuity exists of PWR HTR fuse. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

INSPECT POWER HEATER ECU(+) (a) P1

(b) (c)

Remove the power heater ECU with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal ”+” of the power heater ECU and body ground. Standard: 10 to 14 V

+ I36137

NG


OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER HEATER ECU – BODY GROUND) (a) P1 –

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the power heater ECU and body ground (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I37732

NG





–


COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7T–01



2


3


4



5


6

DTC CHECK (See page 05–1164)

7

DTC CHART (See page 05–1166)

8


9


10




11

PARTS INSPECTION

12

REPAIR

13

CONFIRMATION TEST

14

END


–



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7X–01

LOCATION

Alternator Assy Heater Pump Assy

Heater Assy

Center J/B

Heater Switch Assy Driver Side J/B HTR Fuse


I36096


–


05C83–01

POWER HEATER ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Turning on the alternator allows current to flow from the alternator to the power heater. As a result, the power heater ECU control the expanded power of the combustion type power heater.

WIRING DIAGRAM A11 Alternator

4 L A11


Power Heater ECU

Y

3 EE1

Y

8 P1

ALT+L

I35971


1

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – ALTERNATOR) (a) P1

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal ALT+L of power heater ECU and terminal L of alternator (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ALT+L A11

1 2 3 4

L I37735

NG


OK

2

CHECK AND REPLACE GENERATOR W/CLUTCH PULLEY NG

OK REPAIR OR REPLACE POWER HEATER ECU


REPAIR OR REPLACE GENERATOR W/CLUTCH PULLEY


–


05C82–01

POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the power heater switch is turned on, the fuel pump receives the drive voltage from the power heater ECU, causing the combustion type power heater to operate.

WIRING DIAGRAM Power Heater ECU

F17 Fuel Pump 2

M

2 P1 F/P

L 1 W–B EC

I35412



1

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – BODY GROUND) (a) P1 F/P

Check for short circuit in harness and connector between terminal F/P of power heater ECU and body ground (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I37732

NG


OK

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP) (a) F17

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector betwen terminal 1 of power heater ECU and power heater fuel pump (See page 01–32).

1 2

I37734

NG


OK

3

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP – BODY GROUND) (a) F17

Check for an open circuit in harness and connector between terminal 2 of power heater fuel pump and body ground (See page 01–32).

1 2

I37734

NG OK




4

–


INSPECT POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP (a) F17

I36139

Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and negative (–) to terminal 2 with the power heater turned on and check the pressure of the hose by hand. Standard: The pressure is applied to the hose.

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP




–


05C81–01

POWER HEATER SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the power heter switch is turned on, the power heater ECU sends the drive signal to the fuel pump, causing the combustion type power heater to operate.


Center J/B 1 CB

12 CK

R–W 3 IG

Power Heater ECU G–Y

IN 6

12 IE6

G–Y

3 P1 SW

W–B

R–W E 2

Driver Side J/B 1 DN 5 DH

B–L

IG1 Relay 5

3

1

2

HTR

6 DC 9 DA 1 DH

AM1

W–B


G–R 1 IG1

B–L

1 ED1

W

AM1 3


2

1

3

B A

FL MAIN

Battery

J15 J/C IJ

IK

I36132



1

–


INSPECT HETER SWITCH ASSY (a) P5

ILL+

E

Check that the continuity when connecting the positive tester lead (+) and the negative tester lead (–) to the following terminals.


Connectiong terminals

ON

IG – IN

Continuity

OFF

IG – IN

No Continuity

IN ILL–

IG I32396

NG

Standard Value

ON

IG – E

Continuity

OFF

IG – E

No Continuity

ON

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

OFF

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

REPLACE HETER SWITCH ASSY

OK

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – POWER HEATER ECU) (a) P5

(b) (c)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal IN of the heater switch and SW of the power heater ECU. Heater switch condition

Standard value

ON

10 to 14 V

OFF

0V

IN P1 SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I37733

OK


NG



3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – BATTERY) (a) P5

Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between heater switch and battery (See page 01–32).

IG I32395

NG


OK

4

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) P5 E

Check for an open circuit in henees and connector between heater swith and body ground (See page 01–32).

I32395

NG





–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7V–01

PRE–CHECK NOTICE: If the glow plug breaks, the ECU detects the breakage and stops the automatic operation, so the burner heater does not activate. (For other failures, similarly activated.) The cause of failures (such as voltage malfunction, overheating malfunction, short–circuit or breakage of functional components, etc.) and repair methods are shown by connecting the DTC tester and reading the DTC. 1. DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTION (a) Connect the DTC tester between the connector A (Vehicle harness) of DTC check harness and connector B (Power heater harness). (b) Start the engine. (c) Pressing the DTC calling button displays a 3–digit number DTC.

Connector A

Connector B

DTC Display

In Normal

DTC Check Harness In Malfunction

Past Record Control Panel Current Display ”Heating” Symbol

Memory Clear Button DTC Calling Button


DTC Calling Button I12508


2. (a)

3. (a) 4.

–


DESCRIPTION OF DISPLAY AND BUTTONS AF: Current Value Malfunction (Blinking at current failure) Diag: DTC (Example: 064 Flame sensor break) Memory Clear button: Deletion of faulty memory (Press both buttons together for longer than 2 sec.) > Button: Scroll up of faulty memory (The past 5 codes can be stored.) < Button: Scroll down of faulty memory (The past 5 codes can be stored.) FAULTY MEMORY The ECU is able to store upto 5 pieces of faulty memory. If it is full, the new data is written over F5. WIRING DIAGRAM

Connector A

Battery Buner Motor 13

R

14 Glow Plug

BR 9

B–R

12 Surface Sensor 5 6 Temp.Control Sensor

Power Heater ECU

G L–Y L Y

3 4

L–W

5 1 6 2 7 3

W–R (*1) Y–R (*2)

Terminal L of Alternator

W–B

Metering Pump

R–G Fuse (20 A)

R–B R–L (*1) R–Y (*2)

IG SW Vehicle Side

8 4

Flame Sensor 1 2

*1: TMC Made *2: TMUK Made

Connector B

I35431



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7Z–01


The combustion type power heater does not operate


Suspect Area 1. 2. 3. 4.

ECU power source circuit Power heater switch circuit Power heater fuel pump circuit Power heater alternator circuit

See page 05–1171 05–1173 05–1176 05–1179


–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7Y–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

POWER HEATER ECU P1

I36138


Wiring Color

P1–1 (–) – Body ground


Always

Continuity

P1–2 (F/P) – Body ground

L – Body ground

Always

Continuity

P1–3 (SW) – Body ground


P1–5 (+) – Body ground

W – Body ground

Always

P1–8 (ALT +L ) – Body ground

Y – Body ground

Alternator: Operate


Condition

IG SW: ON Power heater SW: ON

Specification

10 to 14 Continuity Pulse generation


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

05C4T–01

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit carries the SET/COAST, RES/ACC and CANCEL signals (each voltage) to the ECM.

WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE C14 Combination SW

ECU

Cruise Control Main Switch Assy W CCS 2 CANCEL

SET/COAST

RES/ACC

24 E11 CCS

CRUISE

3 ECC J/C E

BR

J13 BR

E

J13 D

J13

E J12

BR

EE

I35711



–


1CD–FTV C14 Combination SW

ECU


SET/COAST

RES/ACC

24 E11 CCS

CRUISE

3 ECC J/C E

BR

J13 BR

E

J13 D

J13

E J12

BR

E1

I35711



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: In case of using the hand–held tester, start the inspection from step 1, and in case of not using the hand–held tester, start from step 2.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and turn the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”CCS READY” in the DATA LIST and read its prompts displayed on the hand–held tester. Item

Measurement Item / Display (Range)

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

CCS READY M

Cruise control system standby condition (Main CPU) / ON or OFF

ON – OFF : Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in.

”1”

CCS READY S

Cruise control system standby condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF


”1”

NG

Go to step 2




2

–


INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) (c)

(d)

I35702

Remove the horn button assy. Disconnect the cruise control main switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Resistance()

Neutral

2–3

(No continuity) 210 to 270

RES/ACC

2–3

SET/COAST

2–3

560 to 700

CANCEL

2–3

1,380 to 1,700

Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Specification

OFF

2–3

10 k or higher

ON

2–3

1 or less

HINT: When malfunction is found with the cruise control main switch assy, replace the steering wheel assy.

NG


OK

3 (a) (b)

(c)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH, BODY GROUND – ECM) Disconnect the cruise control switch connector and ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

CCS (S14 – 2) – CCS (E11 – 24)

Always

1 or less

Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

CCS (E11 – 24) – Body ground

Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1709) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


05C4U–01

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the cruise control main switch is turned off, the cruise control does not operate.

WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE (M/T) R–W (*1) R–W (*2)

9 IE2 5 IR1

R–W (*1)

C9 Clutch Start SW Assy LG–B (*1) 1 2 LG–B (*2)

R–W (*2)

15 IE2 6 IR1


LG–B (*1) C LG–B (*2)

J19 J/C

D

10 E11 D

LG–B (*1) C LG–B (*2) D

Center J/B 21 C11

CPU

ECM

J14 J/C

CRUISE

6 CD 6 W–B CK

R–W

8 CE 6 W–B CA

5 C11 *1: LHD *2: RHD

IP

I35709



1AZ–FSE (A/T) N1 Park/neutral Position SW 10 1 R–W LG–B IK1 IK2 3 RB DL 7

–

ECM D D J/C C C LG–B J14 J19 J14 J19 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) Driver Side J/B GAUGE2 GAUGE1 7 R–W D DB

LG–B

Center J/B R–W

8 CA

1 CD

R–W


27 DA


10 E11 D

Center J/B

CRUISE

21 C11

6 CD 6 CK

R–W W–B

7 CA 6 W–B CA

CPU 5 C11

IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD

I35708

C9 Clutch Start SW Assy

1CD–FTV R–W (*1) R–W (*2)

9 IE2 5 IR1

R–W (*1)

ECM

LG–B 2 (*1)

1

R–W (*2)

LG–B (*2)


6 IR1

10 E11 D

LG–B (*1) LG–B (*2)

Center J/B 21 C11

CPU

15 IE2

CRUISE

6 CD 6 W–B CK

R–W

8 CE 6 W–B CA

5 C11 *1: LHD *2: RHD

IP

I35710



–



1 (a) (b) (c)



Normal Condition

CCS READY M


ON OFF: Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in.

CCS READY S



NG


OK

2

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (a)

Disconnect the C11connector from combination meter assy. Measure voltage according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard:

(b)

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

Terminal 21 (C11) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

Result:

I36055

A


OK

A

NG (M/T)

B

NG (A/T)

C

B

Go to step 4

C

Go to step 7


3

–


INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (a) (b)

I36055

Disconnect the C11 connector from the combination meter. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition


10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY

4

INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY (a) (b)

2

Free 1

Push in


Switch condition

Tester connection

Specification

Switch pin free

1–2

10 k or higher

Switch pin pushed in

1–2

1 or less

NG E67361

OK

Disconnect the clutch start switch assy connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard:

INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY


5 (a) (b)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINAITION METER ASSY – CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter connector and clutch start switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Combination meter (C11–21) – Clutch start switch (C9–1)

Always

1 or less

(c)


Condition

Specification

Clutch start switch (C9–1) – Body ground

Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6 (a) (b)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY – ECM) Disconnect the clutch start switch connector and ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Clutch start switch (C9–2) – D (E11–10)

Always

1 or less

(c)


Condition

Specification

D (E11–10) – Body ground

Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




7

–


INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Shift the shift lever to the D range. Check continuity between terminal 3 and terminal 7. Standard: There is continuity.

NG C53270

REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY

OK

8 (a) (b)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINAITION METER ASSY – PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter connector and park/neutral position switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Park/neutral start switch (N1–3) – Combination meter (C11–21)

Always

1 or less

(c)


Condition

Specification

Combination meter (C11–21) – Body ground

Always

10 k or higher

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


9 (a) (b)

(c)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY – ECM) Disconnect the ECM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Park/neutral start switch (N1–7) – D (E11–10)

Always

1 or less


Condition

Specification


Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADJ–04

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet


Customer’s Name

Licence No. Date of Vehicle Brought in

/

/

Date of Problem Occurrence Condition of Frequency Problem Occurrence Problem Occurs?

/ Continuous

Vehicle Speed when Problem Occurred

Symptoms

km Mile

Odometer Reading

/

Intermittent (

Times a day)

km Mile

Auto cancel occurs

Driving condition City driving Freeway Up hill Down hill After cancel occurred, did the driver activate cruise control again? Yes No

Cancel does not occur

With brake ON Clutch pedal depressed (M/T) Except D range shift (A/T) When control SW turns to CANCEL position

Cruise control malfunction

Slip to acceleration side Slip to deceleration side Hunting occurs O/D cut off does not occur (A/T) O/D does not return (A/T)

Switch malfunction

SET ’ACCEL’ ’COAST’ RESUME CANCEL

CRUISE MAIN indicator light

Remains ON

Does not light up

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check


Blinks


–


05C4V–01

DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Making short circuit between terminal TC and CG of DLC3 will output DTC from the DLC3.

WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE D5 DLC3 W–L (*2)

TC 13

D J21

J/B

(*2)

W–L (*1)

B B J8 J20 (*1) (*2) B J8 (*1)

W–L

17 DB

3 DC

W–L

20 E12 TC

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (*2)

CG

ECM

Driver Side J/B

6 CA

W–B (*2)

4 W–B (*1) A J16 J/C *1: LHD *2: RHD

A W–B IO

IP

I35707



–


1CD–FTV D5 DLC3 W–L (*2)

TC

D J21

J/B

(*2)

13

W–L (*1)

B B J8 J20 (*1) (*2) B J8 (*1)

W–L

17 DB

3 DC

W–L

11 E12 TC

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (*2)

CG

ECM

Driver Side J/B

6 CA

W–B (*2)

4 W–B (*1) A J16 J/C *1: LHD *2: RHD

A W–B IL

IP

I35707

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 D5 DLC3

INSPECT DLC3(TC TERMINAL VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

TC

CG C52361

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – CG (D5 – 4)

10 to 14 V

NG

Go to step 3


2 D5 DLC3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – ECM) (a) (b)

Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: 1AZ–FSE

TC

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 20)

1 or less

1CD–FTV C52361

(c)

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 11)

1 or less

Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (E12 – 20) – Body ground

10 k or higher


10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

D5 DLC3

CG

Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

CG (D5 – 4) – Body ground

10 k or higher

C52361

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 D5 DLC3

–




TC

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 20)

1 or less

1CD–FTV C52361

(c)

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 11)

1 or less


Specified Condition


10 k or higher


10 k or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 056HG–05

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description ECM controls of the cruise control the function on a vehicle. Data stored in the cruise control memory and on the DTC can be read from the DLC3 on the vehicle. If CRUISE MAIN indicator light does not come on after the DTC check, there is a malfunction of the cruise control. Use the hand–held tester or SST to check and solve the problem.

(b)

Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses ISO 9141–2(Euro–OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) for communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2 / ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 C52361

Terminal No.

Connection/SpecifiedCondition

Condition

4

Chassis Ground Body Ground / 1 or less

Always

7

Bus Line / Pulse Generation

During Communication

16

Battery Positive – Body Ground / 9 to 14 V

Always

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” after connecting the hand–held tester to the DLC3 and turning the ignition ON, there is a problem either with the vehicle or with the tool. If communication is normal when connecting the tool to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still not possible when connecting the tool to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself. Consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual.



(c)

–


Check the indicator. (1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (2) Check that the CRUISE MAIN indicator light comes on when the main switch is ON, and that the indicator light goes off when the main switch is OFF.

HINT: If there is a problem with the indicator, inspect the cruise main indicator light circuit (See page 05–1722). I34749

(d) Check the DTC. HINT: If a malfunction occurs in the vehicle speed sensors or stop lamp switch assy, etc. during cruise control driving, the ECU actuates AUTO CANCEL of the cruise control and then the CRUISE MAIN indicator light will start to blink, informing the driver of a malfunction. At the same time, data of the malfunction is stored as a diagnostic trouble code, or DTC.

Indicator Light 0.5 sec.

1.5 sec. ON OFF

BE4034

(e)

TC

DLC3

CG

Output of the DTC using diagnosis check wire. (1) Using SST, connect terminals TC and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (3) Read the DTC on the CRUISE MAIN indicator light.

C52361

HINT: If the DTC is not output, inspect the cruise main indicator light circuit (See page 05–1722) and diagnosis circuit (See page 05–1729). For example, the normal blinking pattern and the blinking pattern for code 52 are shown in the illustration.

Normal Code 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec. ON

OFF Code 52 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.

2.5 sec.

ON

OFF Code 52 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

I03610


–


2. USING HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Hand–held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which records the monitored data. Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. 3. DATA LIST HINT: From the DATA LIST displayed by the the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, the sensor and so on without removing parts. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step to troubleshooting is one way to shorten labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (c) According to the display on the tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPD

Vehicle speed / min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)


–

MEMORY SPD

Stored vehicle speed / min.: 36 km/h (22 mph), max.: 200 km/h (124 mph)

Actual stored vehicle speed

–

THROTTLE

Required throttle opening angle / min.: 0_, max.: 125_

Actual required throttle opening

–

CRUISE CONTROL

Cruise control system active condition / ON or OFF

ON : Cruise control activated OFF : Cruise control inactivated

–

MAIN SW (MAIN)

Main SW signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF

ON : Main SW ON (Pushed in) OFF: Main SW OFF (Pushed out)

”3”

MAIN SW (SUB)

Main SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF


”3”

CCS READY M



”1”

CCS READY S



”1”

CCS INDICATOR M

Cruise indicator signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF

ON : ”CCS READY” ON OFF : ”CCS READY” OFF

”2”

CCS INDICATOR S

Cruise indicator signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF


”2”

CANCEL SW

CANCEL SW signal / ON or OFF

ON : CANCEL SW ON OFF : CANCEL SW OFF

–

SET/COAST SW

COAST/SET SW signal / ON or OFF

ON : COAST/SET SW ON OFF : COAST/SET SW OFF

–

RES/ACC SW

ACCEL/RES SW signal / ON or OFF

ON : ACCEL/RES SW ON OFF : ACCEL/RES SW OFF

–

STP LIGHT SW2 M

Stop lamp SW signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF

ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released

–

STP LIGHT SW2 S

Stop lamp SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF


–



–


STP LIGHT SW1 S

Stop light SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF


–

SHIFT D POS

PNP SW signal (D position) / ON or OFF

ON : Shift D position OFF : Except shift D position

–

HINT: ”3” is OK but ”1” is NG ECM failure ”1” is OK but ”2” is NG DTC output or ECM failure ”3” is OK but cruise indicator does not turn on CRUISE MAIN indicator or wire harness or ECM failure 4. DTC CLEAR (a) The following methods will erase the DTCs and freeze frame data. (1) The hand–held tester can be used to erase the codes. (2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI No.1 fuse can also erase the codes (1AZ–FSE). Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI the fuse (1CD–FTV). (b) After completing repairs, the DTC retained in the memory can be cleared by removing the EFI No.1 fuse for 1 minute or more with the ignition switch to the OFF position. (c) Check that the normal code is displayed after connecting the fuse.

5. (a)

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION (ROAD TEST) Inspect the SET switch. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (3) Push down the control switch to the SET/COAST position. (4) After releasing the switch, check that the vehicle cruises at the desired speed.

(b)

Inspect the ’ACC’ switch. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (3) Check that the vehicle speed increases when the control switch is pushed up to RES/ACC, and that the vehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is released. (4) Push the control switch to RES/ACC, and then immediately release it. Check that the vehicle speed increases by about 1.6 km/h (Tap–up function).

(1)

(3) I35838

(3) (1)

I35839



Inspect the ’COAST’ switch. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (3) Check that the vehicle speed decreases while the control switch is pushed down to SET/COAST, and the vehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is released. (4) Push the control switch to SET/COAST, and then immediately release it. Check that the vehicle speed decreases by about 1.6 km/h (Tap–down function).

(d)

Inspect the CANCEL switch. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (3) After doing one of the following, check that the cruise control system is cancelled and that the normal driving mode is resumed. Depressing the brake pedal. Depressing the clutch pedal (M/T). Shifting to any gear besides D (A/T). Pushing the main switch button to OFF. Pulling the control switch to CANCEL.

(e)

Inspect the RESUME switch. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (3) After doing one of the following, check that the cruise control system is cancelled and that the normal driving mode is resumed. Depressing the brake pedal. Depressing the clutch pedal (M/T). Shift to any gear besides D (A/T). Pulling the control switch to CANCEL. (4) After the control switch is press towards RES/ACC at the driving speed of more than 40 km/h (25 mph), check that the vehicle resumes the same speed maintained before the cancellation.

(3) I35838

(1)

(3) I35840

(1)

I35839



(c)

(1)

(3)

–


–


CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADI–04



2


3

CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS (See page 05–1700)

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR (GO TO STEP 5) SYMPTOM OCCURS (GO TO STEP 6)

5


6


7


GO TO STEP 9

8


9

CIRCUIT INSPECTION (See page 05–453)



–


10

TERMINAL OF ECM (See page 05–1707)

11

INDEMNIFICATION OF PROBLEM

12

REPAIR OR REPLACE

13

CONFIRMATION TEST

END HINT: Step 3, 6, 9, 13: Diagnostic steps permit the use of the hand–held tester.



–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADK–04

LOCATION Engine Room J/B No.4

Engine Room R/B

Park/neutral Position Switch (A/T) LHD:


Driver Side J/B

ECM DLC3 RHD:


Cruise Control Main Switch Assy

ECM DLC3 Driver Side J/B

Clutch Start Switch Assy (M/T) Stop Lamp Switch Assy AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

I35700


–


05C4Q–01

DTC

P0500/21 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ”A”

DTC

P0503/23 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ”A” INTERMITTENT/ERRATIC/HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION See page 05–453. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. (1CD–FTV) DTC No.

DTC Detection Condition

P0500/21

The malfunction code is output when the vehicle speed signal from the vehicle speed sensor is cut for 0.14 sec. or more while cruise control is in operation.

P0503/23

Momentary interruption and noise malfunction codes are output when a rapid change of vehicle speed occurs while cruise control is in operation.

Trouble Area Combination meter Vehicle sspeed eed sensor Vehicle speed sensor ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–453. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. (1CD–FTV)

INSPECTION PROCEDURE See page 05–453. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. (1CD–FTV)



DTC

–


05C4R–01

P0571/52 BRAKE SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lamp switch assy sends a signal to the ECM. When the ECM receives this signal, it cancels the cruise control. A fail–safe function is provided so that it functions normally, even if there is a malfunction in the stop lamp signal circuit. The cancel condition occurs when battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal STP. When the brake is on, battery positive voltage is normally applied through the STOP fuse and the stop lamp switch assy to terminal STP of the ECM, and the ECM turns the cruise control OFF. If the harness connected to terminal STP has an open circuit, terminal STP will have battery positive voltage and the cruise control will be turned OFF. DTC No.


P0571/52

The malfunction code is output when the voltage of the STP terminal and that of the ST1 terminal on the ECM are less than 1 V for 0.5 sec. or more. When the following conditions are realized, a malfunction is detected. The STP terminal voltage is less than 1 V. The ST1 terminal voltage is less than 1 V. For more than 0.5 sec. or more.


Trouble Area

Stop lamp switch assy Stop lamp switch assy circuit ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE

10 DC

A J26 (*2) B–W

B–G

G–W S13 6 11 R–W G–W G–W Stop Lamp R–W Driver Side J/B IE3 IE3 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) Switch Assy 2 1 2 R–W G–W G–W R–W IR1 DA IR1 (*2) (*2) 1 (*2) 2 (*2) 20 14 G–W G–W B–W B–W IE1 IE2 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) J/C C E C 3 4 G–W B–W B–W G–W J8 J27 J9 IR1 IR1 (*2) (*2) 3 (*2) 4 (*2) (*2) (*1) (*1) I13 Driver Side J/B Ignition SW IGN 1 1 18 2 B–R B–R DA DH IE4 IP1 6 IG2 AM2 4 (*1) (*2) Engine Room R/B Engine Room J/B No.4

1 4B

1 4A 1 4D

ALT 1

B–G

AM2

1 1A

1 1

2 B–G

1 DN

ECM 19 E11 STP

12 E11 ST1–

B–R

2 Driver Side J/B STOP

22 DA

FL MAIN Battery

*1: LHD *2: RHD

I35714



–


1CD–FTV G–W S13 6 11 R–W G–W G–W Stop Lamp R–W Driver Side J/B IE3 IE3 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) Switch Assy 10 2 1 2 G–W G–W R–W IR1 R–W DC DA IR1 (*2) (*2) 1 (*2) 2 (*2) 20 14 B–W B–W G–W G–W IE1 IE2 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) A C J/C E C 3 4 G–W B–W B–W G–W J26 J8 J27 J9 IR1 IR1 (*2) (*2) 3 (*2) 4 (*2) (*2) (*1) (*2) (*1) I13 Driver Side J/B Ignition SW IGN 1 1 18 2 B–R B–R B–W DA DH IE4 IP1 6 IG2 AM2 4 (*1) (*2) Engine Room J/B No.4 Engine Room R/B 1 AM2 B B–R 1 3 1A 1 2 ALT W B 3 Driver Side J/B 3 1 2 1 STOP 22 1 ED1 B–L DN DA

ECM 19 E11 STP

12 E11 ST1–

FL MAIN Battery

*1: LHD *2: RHD

I35713



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: In case of using the hand–held tester, start the inspection from step1, and in case of not using the hand–held tester, start from step 2.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and turn the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”STOP LIGHT SW” in the DATA LIST and read the displayed value. Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

STP LIGHT SW2 M



–

STP LIGHT SW2 S



–

Standard: Brake pedal depressed: OK Brake pedal released: OFF NG

Go to step 2


2 (a)

INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH OPERATION Check that the stop lamp lights up when brake pedal is depressed, and goes off when the brake pedal is released. NG

OK


INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT


3


INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) 2

4 Free

–

1

3

Pushed in E67360

Disconnect the stop lamp switch assy connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Switch pin free

1–2

1 or less

Switch pin free

3–4

10 k or higher


1–2

10 k or higher


3–4

1 or less

NG

Specification


OK

4

INSPECT ECM (a) (b) (c)

1AZ–FSE:

STP

1CD–FTV: STP

I35703


Remove the ECM with connectors. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between terminal STP of ECM connector and body ground when the brake pedal is depressed and released. Standard: Pedal condition

Tester connection

Specification

Depressed

STP (E11–19) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

Released


1 V or less


(d)

1AZ–FSE:

ST–

–


Measure the voltage between terminal ST1– of ECM connector and body ground when the brake pedal is depressed and released. Standard: Pedal condition

Tester connection

Specification

Depressed

ST– (E11–12) – Body ground

1 V or less

Released


10 to 14 V

1CD–FTV: ST–

I35932

NG

REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)




DTC

–


05C4S–01

P0607/54 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC indicates the internal abnormalities of ECM. DTC No.

Detection Item

P0607/54

The ECM has a supervisory CPU and control ECU inside. When each input STP signal is different for 0.15 sec. or more, the malfunction code is output. The malfunction code is output after 0.4 sec. have passed from the time the cruise cancel input signal (STP input) is input into the ECM. HINT: When a malfunction code is detected, the fail safe must be kept on until the ignition switch is turned off.




Trouble Area

ECM


–


PRE–CHECK 1. (a)


(b)


DLC3 C52361

Terminal No.


Condition

4


Always

7



16


Always




(c)

–






1.5 sec. ON OFF

BE4034

(e)

TC

DLC3

CG


C52361




0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.

2.5 sec.

ON


I03610


–




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPD



–

MEMORY SPD



–

THROTTLE



–

CRUISE CONTROL



–

MAIN SW (MAIN)



”3”

MAIN SW (SUB)



”3”

CCS READY M



”1”

CCS READY S



”1”

CCS INDICATOR M



”2”

CCS INDICATOR S



”2”

CANCEL SW



–

SET/COAST SW



–

RES/ACC SW



–

STP LIGHT SW2 M



–

STP LIGHT SW2 S



–



–


STP LIGHT SW1 S



–

SHIFT D POS



–


5. (a)


(b)


(1)

(3) I35838

(3) (1)

I35839




(d)


(e)


(3) I35838

(1)

(3) I35840

(1)

I35839



(c)

(1)

(3)

–


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 056HK–05

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the related troubleshooting page. Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Main switch cannot be turned ON. (Cruise indicator light in combination meter is not lit.)

1. Cruise control switch circuit 2. CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit 3. ECM

05–1718 05–1722 01–32

Setting of vehicle speed cannot be done. (Although indicator light in combination meter is lit when the main switch is turned ON, they go off when vehicle speed is set.)

1. Cruise control switch circuit 2. ECM

05–1718 01–32

Setting cannot be done. (Indicator light in combination meter is lit when the main switch is turned ON and they remain ON while setting.)

1. 2. 3. 4.

Cruise control switch circuit Stop lamp switch circuit Combination meter system ECM

05–1718 05–1711 71–1 01–32

While the vehicle is driving with cruise control, the set control is canceled. (Indicator light and CRUISE remain ON.)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Cruise control switch circuit Vehicle speed sensor circuit Stop lamp switch circuit CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit ECM

05–1718 05–1710 05–1711 05–1722 01–32

Hunting (Speed is not constant.)

1. Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2. ECM

05–1710 01–32

Setting cannot be cancelled. (When Coast, Acceleration, Resume, Set speed change and Control switch are operated.)


05–1718 05–1722 01–32

DTC is not output, or is output when should not be.

1. Diagnosis circuit 2. CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit 3. ECM

05–1729 05–1722 01–32

CRUISE MAIN indicator light does not light up.

1. 2. 3. 4.

05–1718 05–1722 01–32 71–1


Cruise control switch circuit CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit ECM Combination meter


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADL–02

TERMINALS OF ECM 1AZ–FSE: E8

E9

E10

E11

E12

I34746

Symbols (Terminals No.) TC – E1 (E12–20 – E10–1)

STP – E1 (E11–19 – E10–1)

IGSW – E1 ((E12–9 – E10–1))

ST1 – E1 ST1– (E11–12 – E10–1)

CCS – E1 (E11 24 – E10–1) (E11–24 E10 1)

Wiring Color

W–L – BR

Condition

STD Voltage

Ignition switch ON

10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON Connect terminals TC and CG of DLC3

Below 2 V

Ignition switch ON Depress brake pedal

10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON Release brake pedal

Below 1 V

G W – BR G–W

Ignition switch ON Cruise control main switch ON

0 to 3 V

Ignition switch ON Cruise control main switch OFF

9 to 14 V


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON

9 to 14 V

B W – BR B–W

G W – BR G–W

W – BR


Ignition switch ON CANCEL switch hold ON

6 to 10.1 V

Ignition switch ON SET/COAST switch hold ON

4 to 7.1 V

Ignition switch ON RES/ACC switch hold ON

2.1 to 4 V

Ignition switch ON MAIN switch hold ON

Below 1 V


–


1CD–FTV: E9

E8

E11

E12

I34747


STP – E1 (E11–19 – E9–7)

ST1 – E1 ST1– (E11–12 – E9–7)

CCS – E1 (E11 24 – E9 (E11–24 E9–7) 7)

Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage


10 to 14 V


Below 1 V


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON

9 to 14 V

G W – BR G–W

G W – BR G–W

W – BR

M/T: D – E1 (E11–10 – E9–7)

LG B – BR LG–B

TC – E1 (E12–11 – E9–7)

W–L – BR



6 to 10.1 V


4 to 7.1 V


2.1 to 4 V


Below 1 V

Ignition switch ON Depress clutch pedal

Below 1 V

Ignition switch ON Release clutch pedal

10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON

10 to 14 V


Below 2 V


–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV)

05B62–03

CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECM detects a trouble, the CHK ENG is illuminated. At this time, the ECM records the DTC in its memory.

WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R

1 1 B–R IE4 IP1 (LHD) (RHD)

ECM

4

Engine AM2 Room R/B No. 1

2 1

IG2 AM2

1

W I13 Ignition Switch

DH 2

1A 1 B Engine Room R/B No. 3

3

3

9

6 B–R

IGN

12 E9

W

C11 Combination Meter Assy Check Engine Warning Light

Driver Side J/B

DA 18 22

B FL MAIN

B–W

B–W C J8

Battery

A J26

J/C

(LHD) (RHD)

C J8

A J26

(LHD) (RHD)

A81015

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Troubleshoot each trouble symptom in accordance with the chart below . CHK ENG remains on

Start inspection from step 1

CHK ENG is not illuminated




1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–


CLEAR DTC Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Read the DTC (See page 05–528). Clear the DTC (See page 05–528). Check that the CHK ENG is not illuminated. Standard: CHK ENG is not illuminated OK

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE (See page 05–544)

NG

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) (b) (c)

E9

ECM Connector

A65748

Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check that the CHK ENG is not illuminated. Standard: CHK ENG is not illuminated

OK


NG CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

3 (a)

CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CONDITION Check that the CHK ENG is illuminated when the ignition switch is turned ON. Standard: CHK ENG is illuminated OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

4 (a)

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY(CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT) See the combination meter troubleshooting on page 05–1509. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE BULB OR COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER – ECM)



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JC–04

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s Name VIN

Driver’s Name

Production Date

Date Vehicle Brought in

Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name

Engine does not Start

Engine does not crank

Difficult to Start

Engine cranks slowly Other

Poor Idling

Incorrect first idle Idling rpm is abnormal Rough idling Other

Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall

Soon after starting After accelerator pedal depressed After accelerator pedal released During A/C operation Shifting from N to D Other

km miles

No initial combustion

Back fire Other

No complete combustion

High (

rpm)

Low (

Muffler explosion (after–fire)

Surging

Others

Data Problem Occurred

Condition When Problem Occurs

Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation

Just after starting ( Starting Driving Constant speed A/C switch ON/OFF Other

Condition of check engine warning light (CHK ENG) Normal mode (Pre–check)

Suburbs Other Warming up

day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/

Cold (approx. Inner City

After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.

min.) Idling Acceleration

F) Downhill

Other Racing Deceleration

Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal

Malfunction code(s) (code Freeze frame data (

)


)

)

DTC Inspection Check Mode


Normal

)

rpm)


–


ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CP9–01

DESCRIPTION 1. COMMON RAIL SYSTEM The common rail system stores high–pressure fuel supplied from the supply pump in the common rail and injects it using the injector. Fuel injection timing and fuel injection volume are regulated by the ECM; it provides an electric current to the solenoid valve of the injector with the EDU to regulate them. By storing high–pressure fuel produced in the supply pump in the common rail, this system can always offer stable fuel injection pressure regardless of the engine speed and engine load, even if a driving speed is low. In addition, this system uses the injector that opens and closes its fuel passage with the Two–Way–Valve (TWV) therefore both the fuel injection time and volume are precisely regulated by the ECM. The ECM monitors internal fuel pressure of the common rail with the fuel pressure sensor and commands the supply pump to supply fuel to obtain a target internal pressure (approximately 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1,835 kgf/cm2, 4,351 to 26,106 psi)). The ECM opens and closed the pressure discharge valve to improve controllability for the common rail internal fuel pressure. This system has two divisional fuel injections. It performs ”pilot–injection” as subsidiary fuel injection prior to the main fuel injection to make combustion soft, and this helps to reduce engine vibration and noise. Common Rail System Diagram (1CD–FTV Fuel System) : High–pressure Area

Sensors

ECM

EDU Common Rail

Pressure Discharge Valve

Fuel Pressure Sensor

Injector Fuel Filter Supply Pump Assy Fuel Tank Suction Control Valve A81021



–


COMMON RAIL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: Component

Description

Common rail

Store high–pressure fuel produced by the supply pump

Supply pump

Operated by the crankshaft, and supply high–pressure fuel to the common rail

Injector

Inject fuel to the combustion room based on signals from the ECM

Fuel pressure sensor

Monitor internal fuel pressure of the common rail and send signals to the ECM

Pressure discharge valve

Based on signals from the ECM, open the valve when sudden deceleration is occurred, or when the ignition switch is OFF to prevent the fuel pressure from being too high

Suction control valve

Based on signals from the ECM, adjust fuel volume supplied to the common rail and regulate the internal fuel pressure

2.

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Engine Control System Diagram

Fuel Tank

Suction Control Valve

Supply Pump

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Generator Ignition Switch Signal Starter Signal Vehicle Speed Signal DLC3 Battery Voltage

Pressure Discharge Valve Common Rail ECM Fuel Pressure Sensor

Other Signal

EDU Relay (INJF) (INJT PRD)

EDU Inter Cooler

Mass Air Flow Meter Atmospheric Temp. Sensor Turbo Charger

VRV for Turbo Charger

Intake Shatter EGR Valve

EGR Cooler Camshaft Position Sensor

Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor

Intake Air Temp. Sensor

Injector

Manifold Absolute Sensor Glow Plug

Vacuum Pump

Crankshaft Position Sensor

Glow Relay

A81477



–


3. INJECTION CONTROL SYSTEM The ECM controls the fuel injection system using the injector and the supply pump. The ECM determines the fuel injection volume and injection timing by controlling duration and timing of the energizing to the solenoid valve of the injector, and determines injection pressure by controlling the Suction Control Valve located on the supply pump. The feed pump is used to pump fuel from the fuel tank into the supply pump. Injection Control Diagram Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor EDU TWV Camshaft Position Sensor Common Rail Crankshaft Position Sensor (NE Signal)


ECM


Orifice

Orifice

Control Chamber

Check Valve

Piston

Plunger Other Sensor

Feed Pump

Eccentric Cam Nozzle Needle

Fuel Tank

Injector

A81479



–


4. SUPPLY PUMP OPERATION SYSTEM The rotation of the eccentric cam causes the ring cam pushes plunger A upward as illustrated below. The spring force pulls plunger B (which is located on opposite of plunger A) upward. As a result, plunger B draws fuel in, and plunger A pumps fuel at the same time. Supply Pump Operation Diagram Check Valve Plunger A


Eccentric Cam To Common Rail Ring Cam

Plunger B From Feed Pump

Plunger A: Pumping End Plunger B: Suction End

Plunger A: Pumping Start Plunger B: Suction Start

Plunger A: Suction Start Plunger B: Pumping Start

Plunger A: Suction End Plunger B: Pumping End A81480



–


5. SUCTION CONTROL VALVE OPERATION SYSTEM HINT: The ECM controls the suction control valve operation to regulate the fuel volume that is pumped by the supply pump to the common rail. Consequently, the fuel pressure in the common rail is controlled to the target injection pressure. (a) Suction control valve opening small: (1) When the opening of the suction control valve is small, the fuel suction area is kept small, therefore the transferble fuel volume is decreased. (2) The suction volume becomes small due to the small suction area, despite the plunger stroke is full. Therefore, the difference of the volume between the geometry volume and the suction volume is in vacuum condition. (3) Pumping will start at the time when the fuel pressure has become higher than the common rail pressure. Suction Control Valve Opening Small Operation Diagram

Plunger

Plunger

Pumping

Top–Dead Center

Bottom–Dead Center

Starting Point

: Fuel Pumping Volume

Cam Stroke Suction Control Valve

(1) Check Valve

Small Suction Area

(1)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(2)

A81483

(b)

Suction control valve opening large: (1) When the opening of the suction control valve is large, the fuel suction area is kept large, therefore the transferble fuel volume is increased. (2) If the plunger strokes fully, the suction volume will increase because the suction area is large. (3) Pumping will start at the time when the fuel pressure has become higher than the common rail pressure.

Suction Control Valve Opening Large Operation Diagram

Pumping


Starting Point

Cam Stroke (1)

Suction Control Valve Large Suction Area

(2) (3)

(1)

(2)

(3) A81484



–


6. DIAGNOSTICS TROUBLE CODE MATRIX FOR FUEL SYSTEM HINT: This matrix indicates typical DTC codes combinations for each malfunction occurrence. ( DTC No.

A

B

C

E

D

() ()

P0088 (See page 05–563)

()

P0190 (See page 05–557)

P0191 (See page 05–603)

P0192 (See page 05–557)

()

P1272 (See page 05–663) Trouble area

Malfunction


A

Stuck open

B

Stuck close

C

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit or pressure sensor output fixed

D

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit

E

Stuck open

F

Stuck close

G

Open or short in suction control valve circuit

H

Stuck open

I

Stuck close

J

EDU

Faulty EDU

K

Common rail system (Fuel system)

Fuel leaks in high–pressure area

L

7.

DIAGNOSTICS TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DTC No.

Description

P0087

Fuel pressure sensor output status at fixed value

P0088

Internal fuel pressure too high (200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi) or more)

P0093


P0190

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (Low or high output)

P0191

Fuel pressure sensor out of range (Low output)

P0192

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (High output)

P0193

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (Sensor 1 and/or 2 relation)

P0200

Open or short in EDU or injector circuit

P0627


P1229

Fuel over fed

P1238

Injection malfunction, exclude open or short in injector circuit

P1271


P1272

Closed malfunction of the pressure discharge valve


()

() () () Refer to

Open or short in injector circuit

Pressure discharge g valve

L

P1271 (See page 05–663)


K

()

P1229 (See page 05–563)

Injector j

J

I

() () ()

P0627 (See page 05–655)

P1238 (See page 05–658)

H

): Potential DTC codes

P0193 (See page 05–557) P0200 (See page 05–604)

G

P0087 (See page 05–557)

P0093 (See page 05–570)

F


–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JD–04

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT: Parameters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your readings due to the type of instrument or other factors. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check in the check mode, check the circuit for the codes listed in the table below. For details of each code, refer to the ’’See page ’’ under the respective ’’DTC No.’’ in the DTC chart.

P0045 (05–554)

Turbo/Super Charger Boost Control Solenoid Circuit / Open

P0087 (05–557)

*1 CHK ENG

VRV Open or short in VRV circuit ECM

Fuel Rail/System Pressure – Too Low

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit Fuel pressure sensor ECM

Fuel Rail/System Pressure – Too High

Supply pump Pressure discharge valve Short in Supply pump (suction control valve)circuit Open pressure discharge valve circuit ECM

P0093 (05–570)

Fuel System Leak Detected – Large Leak

Fuel line between supply pump and common rail Fuel line between common rail and injector Supply pump Common rail Injector (P1238 is set simultaneously) Pressure discharge valve Open or short in EDU circuit (P0200 is set simultaneously) Open or short in injector circuit (P0200 and P1238 are set simultaneously) EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously) ECM

P0095 (05–573)

Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit

P0097 (05–573)

Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Low

P0098 (05–573)

Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit High

P0100 (05–577)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit Mass air flow meter ECM

P0101 (05–583)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/PerformanceProblem

Mass air flow meter

P0102 (05–577)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Meter Circuit Low Input

P0103 (05–577)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Meter Circuit High Input


P0088 (05–563)

Open O or short h t iin di diesell tturbo b iinlet l t air i ttemp. sensor circuit i it Diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor ECM

P0105 (05–584)

Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit

Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit Manifold absolute pressure sensor Turbocharger assy EGR valve assy ECM

P0106 (05–588)

Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/PerformanceProblem

Manifold absolute pressure sensor



P0107 (05–584)

Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input

P0108 (05–584)

Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input

P0110 (05–589)

Intake Air Temperature Circuit

P0112 (05–589)

Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input

P0113 (05–589)

Intake Air Temperature Circuit High Input

P0115 (05–593)

Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit

P0116 (05–597)

Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range/Performance Problem

P0117 (05–593)

Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Low Input

P0118 (05–593)

Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit High Input

P0168 (05–598)

Fuel Temperature Too High

P0180 (05–599)

Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit

P0182 (05–599)

Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit Low Input

P0183 (05–599)

Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit High Input

P0190 (05–557)

Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit

P0191 (05–603)

Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

P0192 (05–557)

Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input

P0193 (05–557)

Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input

P0200 (05–604)

Injector Circuit / Open

P0234 (05–612)

Turbo/Super Charger Overboost Condition

P0299 (05–612)

Turbo/Super Charger Underboost

P0335 (05–616)

Crankshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit

P0339 (05–616)

Crankshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit Intermittent

P0340 (05–620)

Camshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)


–



Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit Engine coolant temp. sensor ECM

Cooling system Engine coolant temperature sensor Thermostat

Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit Engine coolant temp. temp sensor ECM

Fuel temperature sensor



Open or short in fuel pressure sensor Fuel pressure sensor ECM

Open O or short h t in i intake i t k air i ttemperature t sensor circuit i it Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

Open or short in fuel temp. temp sensor circuit Fuel temperature sensor ECM

Open or short in EDU circuit Injector EDU ECM VRV Open or short in VRV circuit Turbocharger g EGR valve Vacuum hose ECM Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position osition sensor Signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) ECM Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft position sensor Camshaft timing pulley ECM


P0380 (05–622)

Glow Plug/Heater Circuit ”A”

P0400 (05–629)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow

P0403 (05–629)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation Control Circuit

P0488 (05–633)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation Throttle Position Control Range/ Performance

P0500 (05–640)

–


Open or short in glow plug circuit Glow fuse Glow relay Glow plug ECM

Open or short in intake shutter circuit Open or short in fully opened switch circuit Intake shutter ECM

Vehicle Speed Sensor ”A”

Open or short in speed sensor circuit Speed sensor Combination meter ECM Skid control ECU

P0504 (05–643)

Brake Switch ”A”/”B” Correlation

Short in stop lamp switch signal circuit Stop lamp switch ECM

P0560 (05–647)

System Voltage

Open in back–up power source circuit ECM

P0606 (05–650)

ECM/PCM Processor

P0607 (05–650)

Control Module Performance

P0622 (05–651)

Generator Field ”F” Terminal Circuit

Open in generator circuit Generator Drive belt ECM

P0627 (05–655)

Fuel Pump Control Circuit / Open

Open or shot in suction control valve circuit Suction control valve ECM

P1229 (05–563)

Fuel Pump System

Short in supply pump (suction control valve) circuit Suction control valve ECM

Injector Malfunction

Injector EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously) Open or short in engine wire (P0200 is set simultaneously) Connector connection (P0200 is set simultaneously) Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing ECM

P1251 (05–612)

Turbo/Super Charger Overboost Condition (Too High)

VRV Open or short in VRV circuit Turbocharger EGR valve Vacuum hose ECM

P1271 (05–663)

Fuel Regulator Circuit Malfunction (EDU Drive)

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit Open or short in pressure discharge valve it self EDU ECM

Fuel Pressure Regulator Malfunction

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit (P1271 is set simultaneously) Pressure discharge valve Supply pump ECM

P1238 (05–658)

P1272 (05–663)

EGR valve assy EGR passage assage Open or short in EGR circuit ECM

ECM



–


P1601 (05–673)

Injector Correction Circuit Malfunction (EEPROM)

Injector compensation code ECM

P1611 (05–650)

IC Circuit Malfunction

ECM

P2120 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit

Open or short in accelerator pedal position sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor ECM

P2121 (05–681)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit Range/Performance

Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor ECM

P2122 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit Low Input

P2123 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit High Input

P2125 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”E” Circuit

P2127 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”E” Circuit Low Input

P2128 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”E” Circuit High Input

P2138 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D”/”E” Voltage Correlation

P2226 (05–684)

Barometric Pressure Circuit

P2227 (05–685)

Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/Performance

P2228 (05–685)

Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input

P2229 (05–685)

Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input

B2799 (05–1625)

Engine Immobiliser System Malfunction

O Open en or short in accelerator pedal edal position osition sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor ECM

ECM

Immobiliser system

*1: Check engine warning light (CHK ENG) is illuminated



–


05B5V–03

ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ignition switch is turned ON, battery positive voltage is applied to terminal IGSW of the ECM and the EFI MAIN relay (Marked: EFI MAIN) control circuit in the ECM sends a signal to terminal MREL of the ECM switching on the EFI MAIN relay. This signal causes current to flow to the coil, closing the contacts of the EFI MAIN relay and supplying power to terminal +B of the ECM. If the ignition switch is turned off, the ECM continues to switch on the EFI MAIN relay for a maximum of 2 seconds for the initial setting of the throttle valve.

WIRING DIAGRAM

I13 Ignition Switch B–R 1 1

4

AM2

IG2

IE4 (LHD) IP1 (RHD)

A B–W J26 (RHD)

Driver Side J/B

2 B–R DH 6

18 DA

IGN

B–Y

B–W (LHD)

C

GR

1

2

1

2 AM2

EFI 1

1

1A

C

B–W (RHD) B–W (LHD)

GR

ECM 9 E9

IGSW

8 E9

MREL

1 E9

+B

1

5

1

3

2

B–W

EFI MAIN Relay

1

B

E J27

J8 J/C 2 IE1

B–R 1

J/C

1

BR

7 E12 E1

1 8

Engine Room R/B No. 1

IK1

3 Engine Room R/B No. 3

B–W

B–W

W–B

3 B FL MAIN 10 EE1

BR

Battery EC

EI

A81013



–



INSPECT ECM(+B VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E9

E12

E1 (–)

+B (+)

ECM Connecter

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard:

OK

A18294

Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V


NG

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) E12

E1

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

NG ECM Connector


Specified condition

E1 (E12–7) – Body ground

Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A65745

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(IGSW VOLTAGE)

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)

E9

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

IGSW (+)

ECM Connecter

NG


A18294

OK

Go to step 6


4

–


CHECK FUSE(IGN FUSE) (a) (b)

Driver Side J/B

Remove the IGN fuse from the driver side J/B. Check for continuity in the IGN fuse. Standard: Continuity

IGN Fuse

NG A79096

CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESSES AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE

OK

5

INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY (a)

I13

Measure the for continuity between the connector terminals shown in the chart below.

NG

Ignition Switch

B50489

Switch

Terminal No.

Resisitance

LOCK

All Terminals

No continuity

ACC

1–3

Continuity

ON

1–2, 1–3, 2–3, 5–6

Continuity

START

4–5, 4–6, 5–6, 1–2

Continuity

REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY – IGNITION SWITCH, IGNITION SWITCH – ECM)

6

INSPECT ECM(MREL VOLTAGE)

E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)

MREL (+)

ECM Connecter

OK


A18294


Specified condition

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

NG



7

–


CHECK FUSE(EFI FUSE) (a) (b)


Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. Check for continuity in the EFI fuse. Standard: Continuity

NG

EFI Fuse A66054


OK

8

INSPECT EFI MAIN RELAY (a) (b)

Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No.1. Inspect the EFI MAIN relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Condition

1–2

Constant

Continuity

Usually

No Continuity

Apply B+ between Terminals 1 and 2

Continuity

3–5 B16200

Specified condition

Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2

Continuity No Continuity

3–5

NG OK


Continuity (Apply battery voltage terminals 1 and 2)

REPLACE EFI MAIN RELAY


9

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI MAIN RELAY – ECM, EFI MAIN RELAY – BODY GROUND) (a)

Engine Room R/B No.1 EFI MAIN Relay

Check the harness and connector between the EFI MAIN relay and ECM connector. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A66056


Specified condition

EFI MAIN relay (1) – MREL (E9–8)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): E9

(b)

MREL ECM Connector

A65748


Specified condition

EFI MAIN relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground

No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI MAIN relay and body ground. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open):

OK


Specified condition

EFI MAIN relay (2) – Body ground

Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

NG CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TERMINAL +B OF ECM – BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL)



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JB–04



2


3

CONNECT THE HAND–HELD TESTER TO DLC3

HINT: If the display indicates a communication fault in the tool, inspect DLC3.

4

CHECK DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA (See page 05–528)

HINT: Record or print DTC and freeze frame data, if needed.

5

CLEAR DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA (See page 05–528)

6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7

SETTING THE CHECK (TEST) MODE DIAGNOSIS (See page 05–528)

8

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION

HINT: If the engine does not start, perform steps 10 and 12 first.

B A


A

Malfunction does not occur

B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10


9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12

BASIC INSPECTION (See page 05–528)

B

A

Wrong parts not confirmed

B

Wrong parts confirmed

GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A

Wrong circuit confirmed

B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14

CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–686)

15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A

Malfunction not confirmed

B

Malfunction confirmed

GO TO STEP 18


16

–


CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528)

GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JE–04

LOCATION ECM Injector Common Rail Assy (Pressure Discharge Valve Assy)

Camshaft Position Sensor

Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temperature Sensor

Glow Plug Assy

EGR Valve Assy

Common Rail Assy (Fuel Pressure Sensor Assy)

Mass Air Flow Meter Engine Room R/B No.3

EDU Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

DLC3 Supply Pump Intake Shutter Assy

Accelerator Pedal Assy (Accel Position Sensor) Engine Room J/B

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor VRV Crankshaft Position Sensor


Fuel Temperature Sensor

A80993



DTC

P0045

–


05CPC–01

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT / OPEN



Trouble Area VRV Open or short in VRV circuit ECM

Open or short in VRV circuit for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic)

P0045

WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0234 on page 05–612.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1

INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY (See page 12–16) NG

REPLACE VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(VN VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E12

VN(+)

Inspect using the oscilloscope. During idling, check the waveform between terminals E12 and E13 of the ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)

Correct waveform is as shown

E1(–)

ECM Connector

A66060

VRV Signal Waveforms 5V/ Division

GND

1 msec./ Division

OK


A82974

NG



3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(VRV – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side V4

Disconnect the V4 VRV connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VN (E13–10) – (V4–2)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short):

VRV Connector A56869


Specified condition

VN (E13–10) or (V4–2) – Body ground

No continuity

E13

VN

ECM Connector

OK


A80456

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(VRV – EFI MAIN RELAY) (a)

Engine Room R/B No. 1 EFI MAIN Relay

Check the harness and connector between the EFI main relay and ECM connector. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A66056


Specified condition

EFI main relay (1) – MREL (E9–8)

Continuity



Specified condition

EFI main relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground

No continuity

MREL

ECM Connector

A81091



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


DTC

P0087

FUEL RAIL/SYSTEM PRESSURE – TOO LOW

DTC

P0190

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC

P0192

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0193

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05CPD–01

HINT:

For more information on the fuel pressure sensor and the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P0087, P0190, P0192 and/or P0193 are present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.



–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM monitors internal fuel pressure of common rail using the fuel pressure sensor and controls the suction control valve to regulate the internal pressure to the target pressure(approx. 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1,835 kgf/cm2, 4.351 to 26,106 psi)). The pressure sensor is a semiconductor pressure sensor that varies electric resistance when applying pressure to its silicon. This sensor outputs voltage in proportion to the internal fuel pressure. The sensor has been designed as a duplicate circuit, and its main (PR) circuit is used under normal condition. Even if either sensor is failed, another normal sensor will be used to monitor the internal fuel pressure.

Detect P0193 Internal Structure of the Pressure Sensor (Duplicate System)

Property of Output Voltage

Output Voltage (V)

VC 4.90 4.44 3.89

Main

PR E2

PR (Main) Detect P0192 Sub

PR2 (Sub)

1.40 0.85 0.55

VCS PR2

E2S

0

190 Fuel Pressure (MPa)

A81476

DTC No.


P0087

Fuel pressure sensor output stays at fixed value.

P0190

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec.: (c) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is ”0.55 V or less” or ”4.9 V or more”.

P0192

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec.: (a) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is 0.55 V or less.

P0193

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec.: (a) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is 4.9 V or more.

Trouble Area

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit Fuel F l pressure sensor ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192 and P0193”, use the hand–held tester to confirm internal the fuel pressure of the common rail from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40

Running the engine at 2,500 rpm (No engine load)

Approx. 50 to 100



–


MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0087 (Fuel pressure sensor output stays at fixed value): Under normal condition, internal fuel pressure of the common rail usually fluctuates 1 to 2 MPa (10 to 20 kgf/cm2, 145 to 290 psi) even if the driving condition is constant. The internal fuel pressure is approximately 30 to 40 MPa (306 to 408 kgf/cm2, 4,351 to 5,801 psi) at idling, and it increases to approx. 50 to 100 MPa (510 to 1,020 kgf/cm2, 7,251 to 14,503 psi) when running the engine at 2,500 rpm. This DTC code is set if there is no fluctuation at the internal fuel pressure. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P0190, P0192 and P0193 (Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit): These DTCs are set if the fuel pressure sensor output voltage is out of the standard range. The DTCs stand for open or short malfunction of the sensor circuit. If these DTCs are present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P0087 Malfunction Detection

Normal

Fuel Pressure

Abnormal

Engine Speed A82882

MONITOR STRATEGY P0087: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation

Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 sec. 1 driving cycle

P0190: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation

Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 0.5 sec. 1 driving cycle





–


P0193: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration

Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 0.5 sec.

CHK ENG operation

1 driving cycle

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P0087: Specification

Item

Minimum

Maximum

Engine speed

500 rpm

–

Battery voltage

8V

–

5 mm3/st

–

Fuel quantify

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor circuit (P0190, P0192 and P0193) is malfunction

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P0087: Detection Criteria Changing value of fuel pressure

Threshold Virtually no fluctuation

P0190: Detection Criteria Fuel pressure sensor output voltage

Threshold Less than 0.55 V or more than 4.9 V


Threshold Less than 0.55 V



Threshold More than 4.9 V


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

F16 Fuel Pressure Sensor

PR

PR2

VCS

VC

E2S

E2

ECM

5

P

5 EB1

P

26 E13 PCR1

2

P–B

2 EB1

P–B

33 E13 PCR2

1

R–W

1 EB1

R–W

2 E12 VCS

6

R–W

6 EB1

R–W

18 E13 VC

3

BR

3 EB1

BR

1 E12 E2S

4

BR

4 EB1

BR

28 E13 E2

A80998

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:

After completing repair, confirm P0087 is not set again. If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Check that internal fuel pressure of the common rail is within specification below. Reference: Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100

NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Go to step 3


2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. Clear the DTCs. Let the engine idle for 60 seconds and perform quick acceleration to 2,500 rpm for 30 seconds. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192 and/or P0193” are output.

A

DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192 and/or P0193” are not output.

B

B


A REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65)

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR – ECM)

E13 PCR1

(a) (b) (c)

E12

VC

VCS

Disconnect the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

E2S

Specified condition

PCR1 (E13–26) – PR (F16–5)

PCR2

E2

PCR2 (E13–33) – PR2 (F16–2)

ECM Connector

VCS (E12–2) – VCS (F16–1)

A80452

Continuity

VC (E13–18) – VC (F16–6) E2 (E13–28) – E2 (F16–4)

Wire Harness Side PR2 F16 VCS

E2S (E12–1) – E2S (F16–3)

Standard (Check for short): E2S


Specified condition

PCR1 (E13–26) or PR (F16–5) – Body ground PCR2 (E13–33) or PR2 (F16–2) – Body ground VCS (E12–2) or VCS (F16–1) – Body ground

E2

VC PR Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector

No continuity

VC (E13–18) or VC (F16–6) – Body ground E2 (E13–28) or E2 (F16–4) – Body ground

A80453

E2S (E12–1) or E2S (F16–3) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR) (See page 11–78)


OR


–


05CPE–01

DTC

P0088

FUEL RAIL/SYSTEM PRESSURE – TOO HIGH

DTC

P1229

FUEL PUMP SYSTEM

HINT:

For more information on the supply pump (suction control valve) and the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P0088 and/or P1229 are present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to description on page 05–517. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0088

Internal fuel pressure of the common rail is too high. The fuel pressure exceeds 200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi).

Supply pump (Suction control valve) Pressure discharge valve Short in supply pump (Suction control valve) circuit Open in pressure discharge valve circuit ECM

P1229

Fuel over fed. Internal fuel pressure is beyond the target fuel pressure despite the ECM closing the suction control valve.

Short in supply pump (Suction control valve) circuit Supply pump (Suction control valve) ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0088 and P1229”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel rail pressure from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0088 (Internal fuel pressure too high): The ECM will set this DTC if the fuel pressure inside the common rail is beyond 200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi). This DTC indicates that the suction control valve may be stuck open, or there may be short in its circuit, and the pressure discharge valve may be stuck close, or there may be open in its circuit. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P1229 (Fuel over fed): The ECM will set this DTC if the actual fuel pressure inside the common rail stays higher than the target fuel pressure, despite the ECM closing the suction control valve. This DTC code represents that the suction control valve may be stuck open, or there may be short in its circuit. Under this condition, the pressure discharge valve will operate quite often. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF.



–


MONITOR STRATEGY P0088: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration

Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 sec.

CHK ENG operation

1 driving cycle


Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 min.

CHK ENG operation

1 driving cycle

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P0088: Specification The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or suction control valve circuit, or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning

P1229: Item

Specification

Target fuel pressure variation is small

–

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or suction control valve circuit, or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P0088: Detection Criteria

Threshold 200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi) or more


P1229: Threshold Internal fuel pressure of the common rail stays higher than the target fuel pressure, despite the ECM closing the suction control valve, and also the pressure discharge valve is frequently operating



–


WIRING DIAGRAM S6 Suction Control Valve

EDU PRD

4 E5

1

LG–R

2

LG

ECM 2 E13 PCV+ 1 E13 PCV–

R–L

32 E13 PRD

R–L

P3 Pressure Discharge Valve

(Shielded) PRV

8 E5

W

1 EA1

W

COM3

7 E4

B

2 EA1

B

(Shielded)

BR

D J12

BR

E J12

2

1

J/C

E J13

BR

D J13

EI

A82347

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0088 AND/OR P1229)

(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (c) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. (d) Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”Only DTC P0088” or ”DTC P0088 and P1229” are output

A

Only DTC P1229 is output

B

DTC ”P0190, P0191, P0192, P0193 and/or P1271” are output

C


D

B

Go to step 4

C

GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544)

D

Go to step 3

A

2

READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P1272 OUTPUT)

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. Clear the DTCs. Start the engine and turn the ignition switch OFF. Wait for 10 seconds and then restart the engine and turn the ignition switch OFF again. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. (g) Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

DTC P1272 is output

A

DTC P1272 is not output

B

B A


Go to step 4


3 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check that the internal fuel pressure of the common rail drops below approximately 5 MPa within approximately 1 second as the ignition switch is turned OFF at the engine in an idle. Result:

(e)

Pressure Displayed (MPa)

Proceed to

Approx. 5 or less

A

Approx. 5 or more

B

B

REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 14–286) PROCEED TO STEP 4 AFTER REPLACEMENT

A

4

CHECK INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY(SUCTION CONTROL VALVE) Suction Control Valve

(a)

Check the suction control valve for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 1.9 to 2.3 at 20_C (68_F)

NG A75346

OK


REPLACE INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY (SUCTION CONTROL VALVE) (See page 11–69)


5

–



(a) Disconnect the suction control valve connector and then start the engine. Wait for 1 minute. HINT: If the engine does not start, the suction control valve is normal. Therefore proceed to step 6. (b) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. (e) Clear the DTCs. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. (g) Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A

DTC P1229 is output

B

B


A

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SUCTION CONTROL VALVE – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side S6 PCV+

Disconnect the S6 suction control valve connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) PCV+ (S6–1) – PCV+ (E13–2)

PCV– Suction Control Valve Connector A81460

PCV– (S6–2) – PCV– (E13–1)

Specified condition Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) PCV+ (S6–1) or PCV+ (E13–2) – Body ground PCV– (S6–2) or PCV– (E13–1) – Body ground


E13 PCV+ PCV–

NG

ECM Connector A81089

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


7


INSPECT ECM(PCV VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

PCV+

–

Inspect using the oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard : Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1)


PCV– ECM Connector

A66060

10V/ Division 500mV/ Division

PCV+ PCV– 5 msec./Division

A82559

NG


OK CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0088 AND/OR P1229 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) for 5 minutes, and then confirm P0088 and/or P1229 is not set again.



DTC

P0093

–


05CPF–01

FUEL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED – LARGE LEAK

HINT:

For more information on the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P0093 is present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.



P0093

Trouble Area Fuel line between supply pump and common rail Fuel line between common rail and injector Supply pump Common rail Injector (P1238 is set simultaneously) Pressure discharge valve Open or short in EDU circuit (P0200 is set simultaneously Open or short in injector circuit (P0200 and P1238 are set simultaneously) EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously ECM

Fuel leaks in high–pressure area.

HINT: After confirming DTC P0093, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel rail pressure from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0093 (Fuel leaks in high–pressure area): This DTC stands for fuel leaks is existing in high–pressure area in the common rail system. The ECM constantly monitors the internal fuel pressure of the common rail after the engine is started, and the ECM then will set this DTC if the decreasing rate of the internal fuel pressure is large when injecting the fuel. In the common rail system, high–pressure fuel (approx. 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1,835 kgf/cm2, 4.351 to 26,106 psi)) is always applied to the high–pressure area including the supply pump, common rail, injector and piping. The ECM adjusts the suction control valve opening angle to obtain the target internal fuel pressure. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and permits driving the vehicle for extra 1 minute before stopping both the fuel injection and supply pump operation, then stops the engine. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF.

MONITOR STRATEGY Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation


TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Item Engine speed

Specification Minimum

Maximum

600 rpm

–

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or suction control valve circuit, or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold Drop rate in the internal fuel pressure is large when injecting fuel


1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0093) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output besides DTC P0093)

Proceed to


A

DTC P1238 is output

B

DTC ”P0200 and/or P1271” are output

C

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0093” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B

Go to step 3

C


A

2 (a)

CHECK FUEL LEAKAGE(INSPECT HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL PARTS AND AREA FOR FUEL LEAKS) Visually check the supply pump, injector and fuel line located between the supply pump and the common rail for fuel leaks or fuel pressure leaks. Also, perform the same on the fuel line between the common rail and the injector (See page 11–69, 11–60).

HINT: Fuel leaks inside the components (Supply pump, etc) may result. NG OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE


3 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4.9 to 4.9 mm3/st NG

REPLACE INJECTOR ASSY (See page 11–60)

OK

4 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL LEAK TEST) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL LEAK TEST”. Check for fuel leaks in high–pressure area.

GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0093 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT:

After clearing the DTC, let the engine idle for 1 minute and then run it at 2,500 rpm for 30 seconds. At the same time, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside the common rail from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Internal fuel pressure of the common rail must be stable under each driving condition. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100



–


DTC

P0095

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT

DTC

P0097

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW

DTC

P0098

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

05CPG–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Fig. 1) 30 20

Resistance k

10 5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 – 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

The inlet air temperature sensor is built into the intake air connector and senses the inlet air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the inlet air temperature. The lower the inlet air temperature, the greater the thermistor resistance value, and the higher the inlet air temperature, the lower the thermistor resistance value (See Fig. 1). The inlet air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM. The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the inlet air temperature sensor from terminal THIA via a resistor R. That is the resistor R and the inlet air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the inlet air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the inlet air temperature, the potential at the terminal THIA also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability with a cold engine.

Temp. C (F) A56991

DTC No.

Proceed to


Step 1

Open or short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0097

Step 4

Short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0098

Step 2

Open in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0095

Trouble Area

Open or short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit Diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0095, P0097 or P0098”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM I9 Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temperature Sensor

ECM 5V 2

GR

1

BR

20 E13

R THIA

28 E13

E2 E1

A76568


If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INLET AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual diesel turbo inlet air temperature. Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B

OK (Same as present temperature)

C

HINT:

If there is an open circuit, the hand–held tester indicates –40°C (–40°F). If there is a short circuit, the hand–held tester indicates 140°C (284°F) or more.

A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS) (a)

Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp. Sensor

ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THIA and E2 of the diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 1405C (2845F) or more

Wire Harness Side I9

E2 THIA Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp. Sensor Connector A56868

OK

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE DIESEL TURBO INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG

3

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM) (a)


ECM

(b)

A75742

Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THIA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 1405C (2845F) or more

E13

THIA

E2

OK ECM Connector

A80455

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

OR


4

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) (a)


ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –405C (–405F)

OK A76591

REPLACE DIESEL TURBO TENPERATURE SENSOR

INLET

AIR

NG

5

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM)


(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –405C (–405F)

A75744

E13 THIA E2

OK


NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CPH–01

DTC

P0100

MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT

DTC

P0102

MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0103

MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow meter uses a platinum hot wire. The hot wire mass air flow meter consists of a platinum hot wire, a temperature sensor and a control circuit installed in a plastic housing. The hot wire mass air flow meter works on the principle that the hot wire and temperature sensor located in the intake air bypass of the housing detect any changes in the intake air temperature. The hot wire is maintained at the set temperature by controlling the current flow through the hot wire. This current flow is then measured as the output voltage of the mass air flow meter. The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and temperature sensor provide a bridge circuit, with the power transistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temperature. B+ Temperature sensor Power Transistor Platinum Hot Wire (Heater) B

A

Output Voltage

Temperature sensor Platinum Hot Wire (Heater)

A53295

DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0100

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic)

P0102

Open in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic)

P0103

Short in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic)


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100, P0102 or P0103”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the mass air flow ratio from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF”. Air Flow Value (gm/s) Approx. 0.0 174.0 or more AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Malfunction Mass air flow meter power source circuit open VG circuit open or short EVG circuit open


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

A6 Mass Air Flow Meter VG 5 B–W

3

ECM G

24 VG E12

L–Y

32 EVG E12

+B

From EFI MAIN Relay

E2G

4

A76970

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Air flow rate (gm/s)

Proceed to

0.0

A

174.0 or more

B

1 Mass Air Flow Rate 173.0 or more (*1)

C

*1: The value must be changed when the throttle valve is opened or closed.

A


B

Go to step 6

C



2

–


INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER(POWER SOURCE) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side +B (+) A6

Turn the ignition switch ON. Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (A6–3) – Body ground

9 to 14 V

Mass Air Flow Meter Connector

NG

Go to step 5

A54396

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(VG VOLTAGE)

E12

(a) (b)

VG (+)

Start the engine. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E12 ECM connector.

HINT: The A/C switch should be turned OFF. Standard: EVG (–)


Condition

Specified condition

ECM Connector

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.4 V

A66060

OK NG




4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASS AIR FLOW METER – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side Mass Air Flow Meter Connector A6

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

VG

VG (A6–5) – VG (E12–24)

E2G

E2G (A6–4) – EVG (E12–32) A54396


Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VG (A6–5) or VG (E12–24) – Body ground

No continuity

E12

VG EVG ECM Connector

A80454

OK REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASS AIR FLOW METER – EFI MAIN RELAY) (a) (b)


(c)

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Remove the EFI main relay from the engine room R/B No. 1. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):



Specified condition

+B (A6–3) – EFI main relay (3)

Continuity


A54396

Engine Room R/B No. 1 EFI Main Relay

NG A66056


Specified condition

+B (A6–3) or EFI main relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–686)

6

INSPECT ECM(SENSOR GROUND) (a) E12

Check for continuity between the terminal of the E12 ECM connector and body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

EVG (E12–32) – Body ground

Continuity

EVG ECM Connector A66060

NG

OK




7

–





VG

VG (A6–5) – VG (E12–24)

E2G

E2G (A6–4) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12


A80454



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0101

–


05CPI–01

MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0100 on page 05–577. DTC No.


Trouble Area

After engine is warmed up, condition (a) continues for more than 10 sec. at idling: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Mass air flow meter output greater than 2.2 V P0101

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for more than 6 sec. with engine speed 2000 rpm or more: (2 trip detection logic) (a) VTA greater than 0.1 V (b) Mass air flow meter output less than 0.25 V

Mass air flow meter


1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0101) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

P0101 and other DTCs are output

A

Only P0101 is output

B

HINT: If any other codes besides P0101 are output, perform the troubleshoot for those DTCs first. B

REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER

A GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544)



–


05CPJ–01

DTC

P0105

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT

DTC

P0107

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0108

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION V 4.5

1 kPa

13.3

253.3

mmHg 1,900 100 (3.9) (74.8) (in.Hg) Air Pressure

By a built–in sensor unit, the manifold absolute pressure sensor detects the intake manifold pressure as a voltage. The ECM then determines the basic injection duration and basic ignition advance angle based on this voltage. Since the manifold absolute pressure sensor does not use the atmospheric pressure as a criterion, but senses the absolute pressure inside the intake manifold (the pressure in proportion to the preset absolute vacuum 0), it is not influenced by fluctuations in the atmospheric pressure due to high altitude and other factors. This permits it to control the air fuel ratio at the proper level under all conditions.

A06532

DTC No. P0105 P0107 P0108


Trouble Area

Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic)


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / PIM”. Intake Manifold Pressure (kPa) Approx. 0 250 or more


Malfunction PIM circuit short VC circuit open or short PIM circuit open E2 circuit open


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

T5 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 VC

PIM

E2

ECM 5V R–W

18 VC E13

2

W–R

28 PIM E12

1

BR

28 E2 E13

A81002


If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / PIM” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: Same value as the actual atmospheric pressure. NG

OK




2

–


INSPECT ECM(VC VOLTAGE) E13

(a) (b)

VC (+)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V

E2 (–) ECM Connector

NG

A66060


OK

3

INSPECT ECM(PIM VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E12

E2 (–)

PIM (+)


Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Voltage:


Condition

Specified condition

PIM (E12–28) – E2 (E13–28)

Applied negative pressure of 40kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 in.Hg)

0.2 to 0.8 V

PIM (E12 – 28) – E2 (E13–28)

Same as atmosphere

1.3 to 1.9 V

PIM (E12 – 28) – E2 (E13–28)

Applied positive pressure of 69kPa (0.7 kg/cm3,, 10.0 psi

3.2 to 3.8 V

NG OK




4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR – ECM) (a)

Wire Harness Side PIM

T5

(b) (c)

VC

E2

Disconnect the T5 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Connector

Specified condition

PIM (T5–2) – PIM (E12–28) VC (T5–3) – VC (E13–18)

A56992

Continuity y

E2 (T5–1) – E2 (E13–28)


E12

E13

Specified condition

PIM (T5–2) or PIM (E12–28) – Body ground VC (T5–3) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground

VC

No continuityy

E2 (T5–1) or E2 (E13–28) – Body ground

PIM E2

ECM Connector

NG

A81088

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

5

CHECK TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–7) NG

REPLACE TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–11)

OK

6

CHECK EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 12–18) NG

REPLACE EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 14–286)

OK REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR


OR


DTC

P0106

–


05CPK–01

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/ BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/ PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0105 on page 05–584. DTC No. P0106


Trouble Area

Voltage output of the manifold absolute pressure sensor is out of the standard range. (2 trip detection logic)



If DTCs ”P0105, P0107, and P0108” are output simultaneously, manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108” first. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a)


Proceed to

Only P0106 are output

A


B



A REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR



–


05CPL–01

DTC

P0110

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT

DTC

P0112

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0113

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Fig.1) 30 20

Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F)

The intake air temperature sensor is built in the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature is, the greater the thermistor resistance value becomes, and the higher the intake air temperature is, the lower the thermistor resistance value becomes (See Fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from terminal THA (THAR) via resistor R. The resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA (THAR) also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability with a cold engine.

A67628

DTC No.

Proceed to


P0110

Step 1

Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0112

Step 4

Short in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0113

Step 2

Open in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area

Open or short in intake air temperature sensor circuit Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0110, P0112 or P0113, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

A6 Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Built in Mass Air Flow Meter)

5V G–R

THA 2

E13 28

E2

BR

E13

1

R

31 THA

E2

A72925



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual intake air temperature. Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS)


(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the mass air flow meter wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

A75743


E2

OK

THA A54396

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER

NG

3

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM)


(a) (b)

ECM

A75742

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

E13

THA

E2 ECM Connector

OK A80455

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


OR


4

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)

Mass Air Flow Meter

(a) (b) (c)

ECM

A75766

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

OK


NG

5

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM) (a) (b) (c)

ECM

Mass Air Flow Meter

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

THA

OK




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CPM–01

DTC

P0115

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT

DTC

P0117

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0118

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A thermistor is built in the engine coolant temperature sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature. The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as those of the intake air temperature sensor. HINT: If the ECM detects DTC ”P0115, P0117 or P0118” it enters the fail–safe mode in which the engine coolant temperature is assumed to be 80 C (176 F). DTC No.

Proceed to


Step 1

Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0117

Step 4

Short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0118

Step 2

Open in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0115

Trouble Area


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0115, P0117 or P0118”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the engine coolant temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E2 Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor

5V

2

W

2 EC1

B–W

19 THW E13

1

L

1 EC1

BR

28 E2 E13

R

A81000



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual intake air temperature. Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–




ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

Wire Harness Side

E2

OK Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Connector

A76786

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR

NG

3



ECM

(b)

A75742

THW

Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THW and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

E2 E13

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


OR


4

–




ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

OK A75766

REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG

5



(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

THW

OK




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0116

–


05CPN–01

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM


P0116


Trouble Area

When THW greater than –40 C (–40 F) and less than 60 C (140 F), and THA greater than –6.7 C (20 F), and when starting engine, conditions (a) and (b) continue (2 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THW change is lower than 3 C (5.4 F) after engine was started.


In case that reading value of engine coolant temp. sensor will not change more than 1 C (1.8 F) even after repeating 6 trips (detection logic) of adjusting speed pattern with THW more than 90 C (194 F) after engine was started.


If DTCs ”P0115, P0116, P0117 and P0118” are output simultaneously, engine coolant temperature sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0115, P0117 or P0118” first. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B



A

2

INSPECT THERMOSTAT (See page 16–39) NG

REPLACE THERMOSTAT (See page 16–50)

OK REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR



DTC

P0168

–


05CPO–01

FUEL TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH


P0168


Trouble Area

When THF greater than 35 C (95 F) and less than 60 C (140 F), and THF –6.7 C (20 F), and when starting engine, conditions (a) and (b) continue (1 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THF change is lower than 3 C (5.4 F) after the engine was started.


In case that reading value of fuel temp. sensor will not change more than 1 C (1.8 F) even after repeating 6 trips (detection logic) of adjusting speed pattern with THF more than 60 C (140 F) after the engine was started.


If DTCs ”P0180, P0182 and P0183” are output simultaneously, fuel temperature sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0180, P0182 or P0183” first. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B


A REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR




–


DTC

P0180

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0182

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0183

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05CPP–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel temperature sensor senses the fuel temperature. A thermistor built into the sensor changes the resistance value according to the fuel temperature. The lower the fuel temperature is, the greater the thermistor resistance becames, and the higher the fuel temperature is, the lower the thermistor resistance becomes (See Fig. 1). The fuel temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the fuel temperature sensor from terminal THF via a resistor R. The resistor R and the fuel temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the fuel temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the fuel temperature, the potential at terminal THF also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM performs the pressure control compensation of the supply pump and error detection compensation of the highly pressurized fuel system.

(Fig.1) 30 20

Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) A67628

DTC No.

Proceed to


P0180

Step 1

Open or short in fuel temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0182

Step 4

Short in fuel temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0183

Step 2

Open in fuel temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area

Open or short in fuel temp. sensor circuit Fuel temperature sensor ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0180, P0182 or P0183”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM F18 Fuel Temp. Sensor

5V 2

L

1

BR

29 THF E13 28 E13

R

E2 E1

A10940



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL TEMPARATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual fuel temperature. Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–



Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the fuel temperature sensor wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

A75743

Wire Harness Side F18

Fuel Temp. Sensor Connector

OK A66104

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG

3


Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b)

ECM

A75742

Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THF and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

E13

THF

E2

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

HARNESS

OR


4

–



Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A76591

OK

REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG

5


Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

THF ECM Connector

OK A80456



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0191

–


05CPQ–01

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTCs P0087 on page 05–557.


If DTCs ”P0087, P0190, P0192, and P0193” are output simultaneously, manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192, and P0193” first. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

DTC No. P0191

1 (a)


Trouble Area

Voltage output of the fuel pressure sensor for the common rail is out of the standard range. (1 trip detection logic)


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0191) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B



A REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR) (See page 11–78)



DTC

P0200

–


05CPR–01

INJECTOR CIRCUIT / OPEN

HINT:

For more information on the EDU, see page 05–517. If P0200 are present, Use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The EDU has been adopted to drive the injector at high speeds. The EDU has realized high–speed driving under high fuel pressure conditions using the DC/DC converter that provides a high–voltage, quick–charging system. Soon after the EDU receives an injection command signal (IJT) from the ECM, the EDU responds to the command with injector injection confirmation signal (IJF) when the current is applied to the injector. EDU Wiring Diagram

Maximum 150 V COM3 COM2

BATTERY

DC/DC Converter

Maximum 150 V

Command Pulse

COM1 Injector

ECM

IJT#1

INJ#1

IJT#4

INJ#4

IJT#2

INJ#2

Control Circuit

IJT#3

INJ#3

PRD


PRV

IJF

Confirmation Pulse

GND

EDU Connector

E5

E4

Warning: Terminal J, I, H, K, L, M, N and S are high voltage A81481



–


DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0200

Open or short in EDU or injector circuit. After engine is started, there is no injection confirmation signal (IJF) from EDU to ECM, despite the ECM sending injection command signal (IJT) to the EDU.

Open or short in EDU circuit Injector EDU ECM

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0200 (Open or short in EDU or injector circuit): The ECM always monitors both the injection command signal (IJT) and injection confirmation signal (IJF). This DTC will be set if the ECM judged that the number of IJT signals and IJF signals are inconsistent. The EDU monitors a drive current supplied to the injector and interprets the IJF signal as low if the current exceeds the specified level, and then it indicates that there is the current in the injector. P0200 refers to malfunction of injector drive circuit or injector circuit. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. Malfunction Detection

Command Signal (IJT) ECM

Confirmation Signal (IJF)

EDU

ON Injection Command Signal

OFF

IJT

Abnormal Injection Confirmation Signal

IJF

Normal A81495


IJF signal from EDU Continuous 10 sec. 1 driving cycle

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Item


Maximum

Engine speed

500 rpm

–

Battery voltage

11 V

Ignition switch


– ON


–


TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold If injection missing counter* is accumulated a specified number of times successively, or if injection missing counter for either one of the cylinders is accumulated a specified number of times successively (Approximately 1 second or more). *: Injection missing counter increments when no IJF signal from the EDU despite the ECM sending the IJT signal.

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

(LHD) (RHD) 7 7 B–Y IE3 IO1 10 EE1

B–W GR B–W 1

B–W

1

3


1

1

3 EFI MAIN Relay

5

EDU Relay

2 1

5 1

2

(Shielded)

R–B

W–B

7 EE1

B–Y

1 E9 +B

GR

2 IE1

GR

8 E9

Y

4 IE2

Y

10 E9 IREL

5 IJT#4 E5 BATTERY

R–L R–B G–W W–R R–W W–L

(Shielded)

1 2 EFI 1

8 E4

G

B–W

6 IJT#1 E5 3 IJT#2 E5 2 IJT#3 E5

1

B–Y

8 IK1

4 PRD E5 7 IJF E5

1


W

1 EA1 1

Discharge

INJ#4

Valve

B

2

2 EA1

B

3

7 E4

B

Engine Room R/B No. 3 3

BR

BR

B

W–B Battery

E J13

EC AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

22 E13 #3 21 E13 #4

W

B–R 1

J/C BR

3 E4

2

5 COM1 E4 COM3 2 INJ#2 E4

I8 Injector No. 4 B

1 INJ#3 E4 6 COM2 E4

D J13

1 GND E5

B–R

1 B–R

2

I6 Injector No. 2 Y

L 1

BR

D J12 D J12 E J12

FL MAIN

32 E13 PRD 25 E13 INJF 24 E13 #1 23 E13 #2

P3 Pressure

1 1A

MREL

I5 Injector No. 1 4 8 INJ#1 E4 E5 PRV

W

2 E10 BATT

B–W

EDU

1

1

B–Y

2

I7 Injector No. 3 V

L 1

2

L W–B

EI A81001


–


PULSE GENERATION INSPECTION HINT: Problem area can be identified by inspecting waveform at the following inspection points. Warning: Terminal COM1, COM2, and INJ#1 to 4 are high–voltage ECM

High–voltage Area

EDU

INJF D

COM2

C IJF

Injector

COM1

IJT#1

INJ#1

IJT#4

INJ#4

#2

IJT#2

INJ#2

#3

IJT#3

INJ#3

#1 #4

B

A

A81508

HINT: Inspect the following inspection points ”A and D” or ” B and C” at the same time. Malfunction point

Trouble area

A

ECM

B (if A is normal)

Open or short in ”#1 to #4 (ECM)” – ”IJT#1 to #4 (EDU)” harness or connector.

C (if A and B are normal)

Open or short in ”INJ#1 to #4 (EDU)” – ”COM1 and/or COM2” (EDU) circuit. Injector EDU

D (if A, B and C are normal)

Open or short in ”IJF (EDU)” – ”INJF (ECM)” circuit. (P1271 is set simultaneously)

(a)

Signal Waveform #1 5 V/ Division

#3 #4 #2 20 msec./Division


A09438

Reference: Inspect using the oscilloscope. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. Inspection Points

Specified Condition

A and B



(b)

Signal Waveform


Reference: Inspect using the oscilloscope. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left.

5 V/ Division

INJF

–

Inspection Points

Specified Condition

C and D


20 msec./Division A81511


If P0200 and P1271 are present simultaneously, there is open in the INJF wire harness between the EDU and ECM, or there is open in the wire harness for both of the injector the pressure discharge valve. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0200) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

DTC P0200 and P1238 are output

A


B

B

Go to step 3

A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

(e)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4.9 to 4.9 mm3/st The cylinder that has a misspecification compensation value is a faulty cylinder, use the following flowchart to inspect and repair the cylinder.

GO



3

–


INSPECT INJECTOR ASSY (a)

Check the injector for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 0.85 to 1.05 at 20_C (68_F)

2 1

Injector Assy

NG A81503


OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – INJECTOR ASSY) (a)

Wire Harness Side Injector Connector 1 2

I5

I6

I7

Check the harness and connector between the injector and EDU (INJ# terminal). (1) Disconnect the I5, I6, I7, or I8 injector connector. (2) Disconnect the E4 EDU connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

I8


Specified condition

Injector (I5–1) – INJ#1 (E4–4)

A80992


Wire Harness Side INJ#2 INJ#4 INJ#1

Injector (I7–1) – INJ#3 (E4–1) Injector (I8–1) – INJ#4 (E4–3)

COM1

Injector (I5–2) – COM1 (E4–5)

E4

Continuity

Injector (I6–2) – COM2 (E4–6) Injector (I7–2) – COM2 (E4–6) Injector (I8–2) – COM1 (E4–5)


COM2

INJ#3 EDU Connector

Specified condition

Injector (I5–1) or INJ#1 (E4–4) – Body ground

A56874

Injector (I6–1) or INJ#2 (E4–2) – Body ground Injector (I7–1) or INJ#3 (E4–1) – Body ground Injector (I8–1) or INJ#4 (E4–3) – Body ground Injector (I5–2) or COM1 (E4–5) – Body ground

No continuity

Injector (I6–2) or COM2 (E4–6) – Body ground Injector (I7–2) or COM2 (E4–6) – Body ground Injector (I8–2) or COM1 (E4–5) – Body ground

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – ECM)

Wire Harness Side IJF E5

(a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the E5 EDU connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the terminals of the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

IJT#3

IJT#2

IJT#4

EDU Connector

Specified condition

IJT#1 (E5–6) – #1 (E13–24) IJT#2 (E5–3) – #2 (E13–23)

IJT#1

IJT#3 (E5–2) – #3 (E13–22)

A80994

Continuity y

IJT#4 (E5–5) – #4 (E13–21) IJF (E5–7) – INJF (E13–25)



Specified condition

#1 (E13–24) or IJT#1 (E5–6) – Body ground

#2


INJF


#4 #3

#1

No continuityy

#4 (E13–21) or IJT#4 (E5–5) – Body ground INJF (E13–25) or IJF (E5–7) – Body ground


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6

INSPECT INJECTOR DRIVER(BATTERY VOLTAGE)

Wire Harness Side BATTERY (+)

E4

EDU Connector

(a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the E4 and E5 EDU connectors. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the EDU connector. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

BATTERY (E4–8) – GND (E5–1)

9 to 14 V

A56874

Wire Harness Side E5

GND (–) EDU Connector


A80994

NG

CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (BATTERY – EDU)


7

–


INSPECT ECM(INJECTOR VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E12

Inspect using the oscilloscope. During idling, check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

#1 (E13–24) – E1 (E12–7) #2 (E13–23) – E1 (E12–7)

#1

#2

#3

#4

E1

ECM Connector

#3 (E13–22) – E1 (E12–7)


#4 (E13–21) – E1 (E12–7)

A66060



A09438

NG

REPLACE ECM(See page 10–65)

OK

8

REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER

GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0200 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC, start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds, and then confirm P0200 is not set again.



–


05CPS–01

DTC

P0234

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER OVERBOOST CONDITION

DTC

P0299

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER UNDERBOOST

DTC

P1251

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER OVERBOOST CONDITION (TOO HIGH)


P0234 P0299 P1251


Trouble Area

When the condition that the turbocharger pressure exceeds the standard value for 0.5 sec. or more. (1 trip detection logic) Actual turbocharger pressure is deviated 20 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2, 2.9 psi) or more from the simulated target pressure based on the engine speed and fue injection volume for 60 seconds.

VRV Open or short in VRV circuit Turbocharger Vacuum hose EGR valve ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM V4 VRV B–W

1

ECM 2

2 IE1

GR

W

10 E13 VN

GR

8 E9 MREL


EE1 10

1 B–W

B

1 B

1 1A

EFI MAIN Relay 1 2

3

5

1

1 B–Y

EFI 1

2

1

W–B

FL MAIN 3 Battery 3

Engine Room R/B No. 3 EC A81003



–



1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0234, P0299 AND/OR P1251) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0234, P0299 and/or P1251” are output

A

”P0234, P0299 and/or P1251 and other DTCs are output

B

B


A

2

CHECK CONNECTION OF VACUUM HOSE NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE VACUUM HOSE

OK

3

CHECK VACUUM HOSE(CHECK VACUUM BETWEEN TURBOCHARGER – VRV FOR INTAKE PRESURE CHANGE AT 900 RPM)

(a) Using a 3–way connector, connect a vacuum gauge to the hose between the E–VRV and turbocharger. (b) Warm up the engine to above 80 C (176 F). (c) Check the vacuum at 900 rpm. Result: Proceed to

Vacuum

A

0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 in.Hg) to 50 kPa (375 mmHg, 14.8 in.Hg)

B

Above 50 kPa (375 mmHg, 14.8 in.Hg)

B A


Go to step 8


4

–


INSPECT ECM(VN VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E12

E13

VN


Specified condition

VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)


E1

ECM Connector

A66060

E–VRV Signal Waveforms 5V/ Division GND

1 msec./ Division

A05967

NG


OK

5

INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY(OPERATION) VRV: ON

(a) (b) (c)

VRV: OFF Air Filter

F

E

E

Air

Air A15518

Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the VRV. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check for operation of the E–VRV when it is operated by the hand–held tester. VRV ON: Air from port E flows out through port F. VRV OFF: Air from port E flows out through air filter.

NG


OK

6

INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY(RESISTANCE) (See page 12–16) NG

OK




7

–




Disconnect the V4 VRV connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check the continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) VN (E13–10) – (V4–2) E2 (E13–28) – (V4–1)



Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) VN (E13–10) or (V4–2) – Body ground E2 (E13–28) or (V4–1) – Body ground


E13

VN E2

NG ECM Connector

A80456

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

8

INSPECT TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–7) NG


OK

9

INSPECT EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 12–18) NG




AND


–


05B5I–03

DTC

P0335

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0339

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is installed the crankshaft timing pulley. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals of every engine revolution. The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G signal, and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signal. DTC No.

P0335

P0339


Trouble Area

No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking (2 trip detection logic) No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 650 rpm or more (2 trip detection logic) In conditions (a), (b) and (c), when no crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal is input for 0.05 sec. or more. (1 trip detection logic) (a) Engine revolution 1,000 rpm or more (b) STA signal is OFF (c) 3 sec. or more has lapsed after STA signal is switched from ON to OFF.

G and NE Signal Waveforms 5 V/ Division NE

G 20 msec./Division (Idling)


A81512

Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor Signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) ECM

Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

NE+ (E13–27) – NE– (E13–34)



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM C1 Camshaft Position Sensor (Shielded) 1

P

23 G1 E12

2

L

31 G– E12

1

G

27 NE+ E13

2

R

34 NE– E13

C6 Crankshaft Position Sensor (Shielded)

E1 E J12 J/C

BR

E E

EI A81004


Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the engine mechanical systems. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1

–


INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(RESISTANCE) (a)

Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Resistance: 1,630 to 2,740 at cold 2,065 to 3,225 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50 _C (122 _F) and ”Hot” is from 50 _C (122 _F) to 100 _C (212 _F).


A78431

NG

REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (See page 10–64)

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side C6

Disconnect the C6 crankshaft position sensor connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Crankshaft position sensor (C6–1) – NE+ (E13–27)

Crankshaft Position Sensor Connector A76790

Continuity

Crankshaft position sensor (C6–2) – NE– (E13–34)


Specified condition

Crankshaft position sensor (C6–1) or NE+ (E13–27) – Body ground Crankshaft position sensor (C6–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground

E13

No continuity

NE+

NE–


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

3

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

OR


4 (a)

–


CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE(TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE(CRANKSHAFT TIMING PULLEY)) Check the teeth of the sensor plate. NG



REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE (CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY)


DTC

P0340

–


05B5J–03

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Camshaft position sensor (G signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G signal plate has one tooth on its outer circumference and is installed on the camshaft timing pulley. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil change, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is mounted on the crankshaft timing pulley. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G signal and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signal. DTC No.

P0340


Trouble Area

No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking ((2 trip detection logic) g ) No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 650 rpm or more (1 trip detection logic)


Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft position sensor Camshaft timing pulley ECM


Specified condition

G1 (E12–23) – G– (E12–31)



A81512



1

INSPECT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (a)

Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Resistance: 1,630 to 2,740 at cold 2,065 to 3,225 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10C (14F) to 50 C (122 F) and ”Hot” is from 50 C (122 F) to 100 C (212 F).


A64984


NG

REPLACE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (See page 10–63)


2

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the C1 camshaft position sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) – G1 (E12–23)

Camshaft Position Sensor Connector A54385

Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) – G– (E12–31)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) or G1 (E12–23) – Body ground Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) or G– (E12–31) – Body ground

E12

Specified condition

Specified condition

No continuity

G1 G–


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

3

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a)

CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY(TEETH OF PLATE) Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG



REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY

OR


DTC

P0380

–


05CPT–01

GLOW PLUG/HEATER CIRCUIT ”A”

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The glow plug is mounted inside the engine combustion room. To ensure efficient engine starting with a cold engine, the ECM calculates time the current needs to flow into the glow plug depending on the engine coolant temperature after the ignition switch is turned ON. The ECM then turns on the glow relay and permits the current to flow into the glow plug. The glow plug is then heated and enhances fuel combustion with the cold engine. This DTC will be set if there is open in glow plug itself or its circuit.

Battery

ECM

GLOW Relay

Glow Plug Generator A81017

The ECM performs the after glow for a certain period of time depending on the engine coolant temperature after the engine has been started. After glow reduces a diesel engine knocking, a white smoke, and etc with a cold engine. After Glow System After Glow Time

(sec.) 120

1 0

40 20 (C) 104 68 (F) Engine Coolant Temperature ON

Ignition Switch

OFF ON

Glow Plug

OFF

OFF

Engine Speed

After Glow Time Starting Engine A81018



–



Trouble Area

When the glow plug is turned from ON to OFF, or vice–versa, conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied: (a) Battery voltage dos not change (b) Duty signal from terminal M of the generator does not change

P0380

S Open or short in glow plug circuit S Glow fuse S Glow relay S Glow plug S ECM

MONITOR DESCRIPTION When starting a cold engine, the ECM supplies the current to the glow plug for a certain period of time. As the supplying current to the glow plug is terminated, the large current is suddenly cut off, therefore the battery voltage then varies and also terminal M output (duty ratio) of the generator varies. If these variations are not occurred when the glow plug is turned from ON to OFF, or vice–versa, the ECM realizes that the current has not been supplied to the glow plug, and interprets this as open malfunction of the glow plug or glow plug circuit.


Glow plug circuit Twice per driving cycle 3 min. 2 driving cycles



Maximum

Battery voltage

11 V

–

Engine speed

700 rpm

2,000 rpm

–

40_C (104_F)

Engine coolant temperature Engine speed is stable Time after engine start

– 8 sec.

Any switches that vary electrical load have not been being operated

– –

The monitor will not run if the generator circuit is malfunctioning

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold When the battery voltage, or terminal M output (duty ratio) of the generator does not change, despite turning the glow plug from ON to OFF, or vice–versa



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM AM1

IG1

3

8 E13 ALT

1 I13 Ignition Switch

G–R

9 E12 RL

G–Y

B–L B DH 1

Driver Side J/B

A12 1 B 5

A11 3 M

A11 4 L

1 Generator

IG1 Relay 3

B

W

B

Y

1 DN 5 DH

AM1 ED1 1

B–L

2

IG S A11 2 A11 1

ECU–IG

R–W

14 E9

B

GREL

R

IK2 1 EE1 5 3

3

IK1 10

18 DB 9 DA

3

R

R

2

2 ALT

2

4

GLOW

1

1

G2 GLOW Relay

R–W

B

W–B 3 3

3 Engine Room R/B No. 3 B 1

B

1 B

7 7

G J10 (LHD) C J20 (RHD)

BR

G J10 (LHD) C J20 (RHD) R–W

IE3 (LHD) IO1 (RHD)

1

1

2 ALT–S EFI 1 1

1

IJ

BR

2

G1 Glow Plug

Battery

7 E12 E1

B–Y

J/C

FL MAIN

2 E10 BATT

B–Y

B

1A

Engine Room R/B No. 1 BR EI

A81005



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: S S

After completing repair, confirm P0380 is not set again. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Glow System Wiring Diagram From Battery

GREL

GLOW Relay

ECM

Glow Plug

A81506

1

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0380)


Proceed to


A

P0380 and P0622 are output

B

B

A




2

–


CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY ASSY (a)

Check the glow plug relay for continuity. (1) Check that there is continuity between and terminal. Specified condition: Between terminal


A33913

NG

1–2


3–4

Continuity

REPLACE GLOW PLUG RELAY ASSY

OK

3

CHECK FUSE(GLOW FUSE) (a)


(b)

GLOW Fuse

Remove the GLOW fuse from the engine room R/B No. 3. Check for continuity in the GLOW fuse. Result: Continuity

NG A80987


OK

4

INSPECT GLOW PLUG ASSY (a)

Ohmmeter

Continuity

B08263

Check the glow plug for resistance. (1) Check that there is resistance between the glow plug terminal and ground. Standard resistance: Approx. 1.1 at 20_C (68_F) NOTICE: S Be careful not to damage the glow plug pipes as it could cause an open circuit or shorten life of the glow plugs. S Avoid getting oil and fuel on the glow plug when cleaning. S During inspection, be sure to wipe off any oil of the terminal and bakelite washer with a dry cloth. S Do not apply more than 11 V to the glow plug as it could cause an open circuit. NG

OK


REPLACE GLOW PLUG ASSY (See page 19–33)


5

–


INSPECT GLOW PLUG ASSY(INSTALLATION) NG

TIGHTEN GLOW PLUG

OK

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GLOW PLUG RELAY – ECM, AND GLOW PLUG RELAY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) (c)

E9

Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Remove the glow plug relay. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

GREL

Specified condition

+S (Glow plug relay terminal 3) – GREL (E9–14)

Continuity

–S (Glow plug relay terminal 4) – Body ground

ECM Connector


A81091

NG –S


Specified condition

GREL (E9–14) – Body ground

No Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

+S

A80991

OK

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GLOW PLUG RELAY – GLOW PLUG, AND GLOW PLUG RELAY – BATTERY) (a) (b) (c)

L

Remove the glow plug relay. Disconnect the glow plug wire. Check for continuity between the wire harness. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

L (Glow plug relay terminal 2) – Glow plug wire

B

B (Glow plug relay terminal 1) – Positive terminal of the battery A80991

OK


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Continuity

HARNESS

OR


8

–


INSPECT ECM(GREL VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E9

Turn the ignition switch START. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E13 ECM connectors. Voltage:


Condition

Specified Condition

GREL (E9–14) – E2 (E13–28)

Engine coolant temp. is 40C (104F) or less

9 to 14 V

GREL

E2 ECM Connector

NG

A66060


OK

9

INSPECT ECM(BATT VOLTAGE) E1 (–)

E12

(a)

BATT (+)

Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified Condition

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

E10

ECM Connector

A80463

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR (BATTERY – ECM)

OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528)


OR


–


05CPU–01

DTC

P0400

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

DTC

P0403

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CONTROL CIRCUIT



Trouble Area

P0400

Mass air flow rate is not changed when turning on EGR valve

P0403

EGR valve assy motor malfunction

EGR valve assy O Open en or short in EGR circuit EGR passage ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM

B–W

From EFI MAIN Relay E3 EGR Valve Assy 6 5 B–W

2 B–W

ECM G

6 E12 EG+A

4

Y–G

5 E12 EG–A

3

R–L

4 E12 EG+B

1

G–B

3 E12 EG–B

A81006

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES P0400 AND/OR P0403)

(a) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed

P0400 and/or P0403 are output

A

P0400 and/or P0403 and other DTCs are output

B

HINT: If any other codes besides P0400 and/or P0403 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B


A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Warm up the engine, the engine coolant temperature should be above 75_C (167_F) and bellow 90_C (194_F). Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF”. Check that the MAF reading during idling. Result: MAF greater than 4 g/s but less than 16 g/s Force the EGR valve to operate with a hand–held tester, make the valve opening 0, and check that the AFM reading during idling. Result: MAF greater than 10 g/s but less than 16 g/s

(e) (f) (g)

NG


OK

3

INSPECT EGR VALVE ASSY EGR3

+B2

(a)

EGR4 EGR2

EGR1

Check the EGR valve for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the specified terminals. Resistance:

+B1

A82939

NG

OK


Terminal No.

Specified condition

+B1 – EGR1

19.6 1.4

+B1 – EGR2

19.6 1.4

+B2 – EGR3

19.6 1.4

+B2 – EGR4

19.6 1.4



4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EGR VALVE ASSY – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side E3 S4

S2

Disconnect the E2 EGR valve connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

S1

S3 EGR Valve Connector

Specified condition

EG+A (E12–6) – S3 (E3–6) EG–A (E12–5) – S1 (E3–4)

Continuity

EG+B (E12–4) – S4 (E3–3)

A56871

EG–B (E12–3) – S2 (E3–1)


E12

Specified condition

EG+A (E12–6) or S3 (E3–6) – Body ground EG–A (E12–5) or S1 (E3–4) – Body ground

No continuity

EG+B (E12–4) or S4 (E3–3) – Body ground EG–B (E12–3) or S2 (E3–1) – Body ground

EG–B

EG+A

NG

EG+B

EG–A

ECM Connector

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A81087

OK

5

INSPECT ECM(EGR VALVE ASSY VOLTAGE)

E1

E12

(a) (b)

EG–B

Inspect using the oscilloscope. During idling, check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

EG+A (E12–6) – E1 (E12–7) EG–A (E12–5) – E1 (E12–7)

EG+A

EG–A

EG+B

ECM Connector

EG+B (E12–4) – E1 (E12–7) A66060


EG–B (E12–3) – E1 (E12–7)

Signal Waveform 10 V/ Division

GND

0.5 msec./Division

OK


A09818

NG



6

–


CHECK DEPOSIT(EGR VALVE ASSY) NG

REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT AND CLEAN EGR VALVE

OK

7

CHECK DEPOSIT(EGR PASSAGE) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

8

CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAKS NG



REPAIR EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE POINT


DTC

P0488

–


05CPV–01

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION THROTTLE POSITION CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM opens and closes the intake shutter valve using the step motor. Upon opening and closing the valve, the exhaust gas recirculation volume is properly controlled. Also, the engine vibration and noise will be reduced by closing the valve when the engine is stopped. The ECM detects fully opened of the intake shutter valve with the intake shutter valve fully opened switch Intake Shutter Internal Structure Intake Shutter Control Motor Intake Shutter Valve Reduction Gear CLOSE

OPEN

Intake Shutter Valve Fully Opened Switch

OFF

ON

A81482

DTC No.

P0488

DTC Detection Condition Intake shutter valve fully opened switch is not turned on, despite forcing the intake shutter valve to fully open.


Trouble Area Open or short in intake shutter circuit Open or short in fully opened switch circuit Intake shutter ECM


–


MONITOR DESCRIPTION This DTC will be set if the actual opening angle of the intake shutter valve varies from the target opening angle. The ECM forces the valve to fully open within 2 to 3 seconds as the ignition switch is turned ON, and then checks if the intake shutter valve fully opened switch is turned on. In addition, the ECM also forces the valve to fully open when accelerating the engine (high engine load) and checks if the switch is turned ON. When starting and/or accelerating the engine, the ECM sets this DTC if the switch is not turned on. If the DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. Malfunction Detection

ECM Commanding Fully Open Abnormal CLOSE Actual Intake Shutter Valve Opening Angle

Normal

OPEN Normal ON Fully Opened Switch Status

OFF

Abnormal Intake Shutter Valve Control Motor Step Counter

CLOSE

OPEN Time

A81510


Intake shutter valve fully opened switch Continuous 3 sec. 1 driving cycle

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Specification Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle



–


TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold Intake shutter valve fully opened switch is not turned ON, despite the ECM commanding the intake shutter valve to open fully

WIRING DIAGRAM B–W

From EFI MAIN Relay ECM

D1 Intake Shutter

B–W

B–W

5

2

6

B

15 E13 LU+A

4

G

14 E13 LU–A

3

Y

13 E13 LU+B

1

L

12 E13 LU–B

W–B

2

1

11 E13 THOP

P–L

T3 Intake Shutter Fully Opened Switch

EI

A81906


1 (a)

CHECK INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY Visually check that the intake shutter valve moves within approximately 2 to 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. Intake shutter

Proceed to

Does not move

A

Smoothly move to full–open position

B

B A


Go to step 6


2 (a)

–


CHECK INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY Check if the intake shutter valve moves as the lever is rotated by hand. Intake shutter

Proceed to

Smoothly moved

A

Difficult to move smoothly

B

B

REPLACE INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY (See page 10–61)

A

3

INSPECT INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY (a)

Check the intake shutter for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. RHD Resistance: Terminals

Temperature

Resistance

at 20_C (68_F)

18 to 22

Temperature

Resistance

at 20_C (68_F)

18 to 22

1–2 1–3 4–5 4–6

Intake Shutter Assy A31135

LHD Resistance: Terminals 1–3 2–3 4–6 5–6

NG

OK




4

–


INSPECT ECM(LU VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

LU–B E13

E12


Specified condition

LU+A (E13–15) – E1 (E12–7) LU–A (E13–14) – E1 (E12–7)

LU–A LU+B E1 LU+A ECM Connector


LU+B (E13–13) – E1 (E12–7) LU–B (E13–12) – E1 (E12–7)

A66060


LU+A LU+B LU–A LU–B

10 msec./Division

A56892

NG


OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side D1

Disconnect the D1 intake shutter connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

LU+A (E13–15) – Intake shutter (D1–6) LU–A (E13–14) – Intake shutter (D1–4)

Intake shutter Connector

LU+B (E13–13) – Intake shutter (D1–3)

A56871

Continuity

LU–B (E13–12) – Intake shutter (D1–1)


E13

Specified condition

LU+A (E13–15) or Intake shutter (D1–6) – Body ground LU–A (E13–14) or Intake shutter (D1–4) – Body ground

LU+B

LU+B (E13–13) or Intake shutter (D1–3) – Body ground

LU+A

No continuity

LU–B (E13–12) or Intake shutter (D1–1) – Body ground

LU–A

LU–B


NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Fully open the intake shutter valve by hand. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / ACCEL OPEN SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Switch Condition Displayed

Proceed to

OFF

A

ON

B

B

CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0488 OUTPUT AGAIN)

HINT: After clearing the DTC, start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle, then confirm P0488 is not set again. A

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FULLY OPENED SWITCH – ECM) (a)

Wire Harness Side

(b) (c)

T3

Disconnect T3 the intake shutter fully opened switch connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

Intake Shutter Fully Opened Switch Connector A81491

THOP

ECM Connector

OK


A80456

Specified condition

THOP (E13–11) – Intake shutter (T3–1)

Continuity


Specified condition

THOP (E13–11) or Intake shutter (T3–1) – Body ground

No continuity

NG

E13


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0488 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC, start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle, then confirm P0488 is not set again.



DTC

P0500

–


05B5L–03

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ”A”

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The speed sensor for skid control ECU detects the wheel speed and sends the appropriate signals to the skid control ECU. The skid control ECU converts these signals into a 4–pulse signal and outputs it to the combination meter. After this signal is converted into a more precise rectangular waveform by the waveform shaping circuit inside the combination meter, it is then transmitted to the ECM. The ECM determines the vehicle speed based on the frequency of these pulse signals.

4–Pulse

From Speed Sensor

Skid Control ECU

4–Pulse

Combination Meter

ECM

A79413

DTC No.


P0500

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 7 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic): (a) THW less than 70C (158F) (b) Engine speed is greater than 2,000 rpm but less than 3,500 rpm


Trouble Area Open or short in speed sensor circuit Speed sensor Combination meter ECM Skid control ECU


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

C11 Combination Meter Assy

ECM

18

V–W

H H J10 J20 (LHD) (RHD)

J/C

H H J10 J20

V–W

17 SP1 E10

(LHD) (RHD)

A81008


1

CHECK OPERATION OF SPEEDOMETER

(a) Drive the vehicle and check if the operation of the speedometer in the combination meter is normal. HINT: The vehicle speed sensor is operating normally if the speedometer display is normal. NG

OK


CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT (See page 05–1510)


2


INSPECT ECM(SP1 VOLTAGE)

E13

E2

(a) (b) (c) (d)

E10

SP1 ECM Connector

A80462

Shift the transmission to the neutral position. Jack up the vehicle. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E13 ECM connectors as the wheel is turned slowly. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

SP1 (E10–17) – E2 (E13–28)

Generatedintermittently

HINT: The output voltage should fluctuate ups and downs similarly to the diagram on the left when the wheel is turned slowly.

4.5 to 5.5V

0V

–

Turn Wheel A62954



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0504

–


05CPW–01

BRAKE SWITCH ”A”/”B” CORRELATION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In this system, the signal of the stop lamp switch is used to judge whether the acceleration system is abnormal or not. The stop lamp switch has a duplex system (signals STP and ST1–) to memorize the abnormality when the signals of depressing and releasing the brake pedal are detected simultaneously. HINT: Normal condition is as shown in the table.

DTC No.

P0504

Signal

Brake pedal released

In transition

Brake pedal depressed

STP

OFF

ON

ON

ST1–

ON

ON

OFF

DTC Detection Condition Conditions (a), (b) and (c) continue for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic): (a) Ignition switch ON (b) Brake pedal released (c) STP signal is OFF when the ST1– signal is OFF


Trouble Area Short in stop lamp switch signal circuit Stop lamp switch ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B

I13 Ignition Switch 6 B–R

4 AM2

B–R

IG2 12 E10 ST1–

DH 2

1 IE4 (LHD) 1 IP1 (RHD)

G–W (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

Driver Side J/B

B–R

DA 18

1 AM2 1


G–W (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

IGN 6 IE3

2

ECM 10 19 G–W DC E10 STP

2 DA

1 IR1

G–W (LHD)

G–W (RHD)

G–W (RHD)

1

4

B–W

G–W (LHD)

S13 Stop Lamp Switch

1 1A B

14 IE2

4 IR1


R–W (LHD)

3

11

1

2

3

R–W (RHD)

B–W (RHD)

IE3

2 IR1

B–W (LHD) 20

3 IR1

IE1

ALT

2

R–W (RHD)

R–W (LHD)

B–W (RHD)

B–W (LHD)

3

3 B

DA 22

W FL MAIN

STOP

C J9 (LHD) E J27 (RHD) Driver Side J/B

J/C C J8 (LHD) A J26 (RHD)

DN 1 Battery

1 ED1

B–L B–W

A81009




1 (a)

–


CHECK OPERATION OF STOP LIGHT Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake pedal is depressed and released. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

OK

2

INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY (a)

Free

Pushed in 2

1

Check for continuity between each pair of the terminals. Standard: Switch position Switch pin free Switch pin pushed in

Terminals No.

Specified condition

1–2

Continuity

3–4

No continuity

1–2

No continuity

3–4

Continuity

Stop Lamp Switch 4

3 A72924

NG


OK

3

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STP SIGNAL AND ST1– VOLTAGE)

Brake Pedal Depressed

(a) (b)

Brake Pedal Released

(c) E12

E1 (–)

E10

Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Brake Pedal

Specified condition

Depressed

STP Signal ON

Released

STP Signal OFF

Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard:


Brake pedal

Specified condition

ST1– (E10 ST1 (E10–12) 12) – E1 (E12–7)

Depressed

Below 1.5 V

Released

7.5 to 14 V

ST1– (+)


OK




4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LAMP SWITCH – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side S13

Disconnect the S13 stop lamp switch connector. Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Stop lamp switch (S13–1) – STP (E10–19)

Stop Lamp Switch Connector

Continuity

Stop lamp switch (S13–4) – ST1– (E10–12) A56986


Specified condition

Stop lamp switch (S13–1) or STP (E10–19) – Body ground Stop lamp switch (S13–4) or ST1– (E10–12) – Body ground

No continuity

E10

ST1– STP ECM Connector

A81090

OK REPLACE ECM(See page 10–65)


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0560

–


05CPX–01

SYSTEM VOLTAGE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the ignition switch is OFF, the battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal BATT of the ECM for the DTCs memory and air–fuel ratio adaptive control value memory, etc. DTC No.


P0560

Trouble Area

Open in back–up power source circuit (1 trip detection logic).


HINT: If DTC P0560 appears, the ECM does not store other DTC.

WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM Engine Room R/B No. 1


B

1 1A

EFI 1

2

1

B–Y

7 7 IE3 IO1 (LHD) (RHD)

B–Y

2 BATT E10

3 B FL MAIN

Battery

A81010




1

–




Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. Check for continuity in the EFI fuse. Standard: Continuity

EFI fuse

NG A66058


OK

2


E12

(a)

BATT (+)


Specified condition

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

E10

ECM Connector

A80463

OK NG




3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI FUSE – ECM, EFI FUSE – BATTERY) (a)


EFI Fuse

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and ECM. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A80988


Specified condition

EFI fuse (2) – BATT (E10–2)

Continuity


(b)

BATT ECM Connector A80464


Specified condition

EFI fuse (2) or BATT (E10–2) – Body ground

No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and battery. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Battery positive terminal – EFI fuse (1)

Continuity


Specified condition

Battery positive terminal or EFI fuse (1) – Body ground

No continuity

NG

OK REPLACE JUNCTION BLOCK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CPY–01

DTC

P0606

ECM/PCM PROCESSOR

DTC

P0607

CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE

DTC

P1611

IC CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0606 P0607 P1611

DTC Detection Condition ECM inside error (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using ,. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65)



DTC

P0622

–


05CQ7–01

GENERATOR FIELD ”F” TERMINAL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the generator is generating the current, the duty signal is sent from terminal M of the generator to the ECM terminal ALT. The duty signal is used for detecting the open malfunction of the generator circuit and DTC P0380.

Battery

ECM

GLOW Relay


DTC No.


Trouble Area

Generator terminal M duty signal is not output while engine is running.

P0622

Open in generator circuit Generator Driver belt ECM

MONITOR DESCRIPTION The ECM will detect a generator failure or an open malfunction of the circuit, if the duty signal is not output from terminal M of the generator despite the engine running.


Generator circuit Continuous 10 sec. 1 driving cycle



Maximum

Battery voltage

11 V

–

Engine speed

700 rpm

2,000 rpm

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold There is no signal output from terminal M of the generator



–



IG1

3

8 E13 ALT


G–R

9 E12 RL

G–Y

B–L B

DH 1 ED1 1 Driver Side J/B W

B

A12 1 B

1 DN 5 DH

AM1

5

A11 3 M

Y A11 4 L

Generator

1

IG A11 2

IG1 Relay 3

S A11 1

R–W

2

ECU–IG 3

B–L

IK2 1

B EE1 5

3 18 DB 9 DA

2


ALT 1

3

R–W

W–B BR


3 B

7 E12 E1

B

J/C

B

1


2 ALT–S

FL MAIN

R–W

1

1 W–B Battery

IJ

B

1A


BR EI

A81011 A81005



–



If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1

CHECK IF CHARGE LAMP IS ILLUMINATED

HINT: Run the engine at 2,000 rpm, and check if the charge lamp located in the combination meter is OFF. YES

Go to step 3

NO

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GENERATOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E13 ALT

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the A11 generator connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

ALT (E13–8) – M (A11–3)

Continuity




Specified condition

ALT (E13–8) or M (A11–3) – Body ground

No continuity

Wire Harness Side A11

Generator Connector A81490

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

3

INSPECT DRIVE BELT (See page 14–266) NG

OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE DRIVE BELT (See page 14–269)

OR


4

–


INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM (See page 19–26)




DTC

P0627

–


05CPZ–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0627


Trouble Area

Open or short in suction control valve circuit for more than 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic).

Open or short in suction control valve circuit Suction control valve ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

S6 Suction Control Valve 1

LG–R

2 E13 PCV+

2

LG

1 E13 PCV–

A80997




1

–


CHECK INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY Suction Control Valve

(a)


NG A75346


OK

2




PCV– SCV Connector

PCV– (S6–2) – PCV– (E13–1) A81460




E13 PCV+ PCV– ECM Connector A81089

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


3



E13

PCV+

–


Specified condition

PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1)



A66060



A82559

NG





DTC

P1238

–


05CQ0–01

INJECTOR MALFUNCTION

HINT:

For more information on the injector and the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P1238 is present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM detects combustion deterioration for specific cylinder. HINT: The cylinder that has compensation learned value for INJ VOL varies from other cylinders may be malfunctioning. If DTC P0093 (Fuel leaks in high–pressure area) is present simultaneously, leakage malfunction of the cylinder probably be occurred. If DTC P0200 (Open or short in EDU or injector circuit) is present simultaneously, there probably be faulty circuit located between the ECM and the injector including the EDU. If only DTC P1238 (Injector malfunction) is present, probably the injector is mechanical malfunction or insufficient compression (valve clearance, etc) has occurred, not an open or short malfunction of the ECM, EDU and injector circuit. Solenoid valve of the injector is the same type of the pressure discharge valve. Injector Cross Section Diagram

Solenoid Valve

Piston

Nozzle Needle

A81504



P1238

–



Main Trouble Area S Injector S EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Open or short in engine wire (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Connector connection (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Compression pressure S Valve clearance

Engine speed variation is large when idling.

Related Trouble Area

S Valve timing S ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC P1238, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside the common rail in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P1238 (Injection malfunction, exclude open or short in injector circuit): This DTC will be set if the engine speed variations between each cylinder is large. The ECM monitors changes in the crankshaft rotation speed using the crankshaft position sensor for detecting poor combustion. Also, it identifies faulty cylinder using the camshaft position sensor. The fluctuation counter increments when irregular crankshaft rotation speed variation exceeds the threshold at idling. Therefore, either one of the cylinders has very poor combustion (Rough idle), the ECM sets this DTC.


Crankshaft position sensor Continuous 10 min. 2 driving cycles

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Specification

Item

Minimum

Engine Engine speed Engine coolant temperature

Maximum At idling

500 rpm

–

20_C (68_F)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold The number of irregular changes in the crankshaft rotation speed

HINT: The number of irregular changes in the crankshaft rotation speed indicates the insufficient combustion cylinder.




–



If DTCs other than P1238 are present simultaneously, first perform the troubleshooting for them. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to


A


B

HINT: If any other codes besides P1238 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B


A

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR IN ENGINE ROOM

HINT: Check the wire harness and connector connections. NG OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE


3 (a) (b) (c)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS FOR MALFUNCTION CYLINDER) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4.9 to 4.9 mm3/st Cylinders that have a compensation value which is outside of the specification range are considered to be faulty cylinders. Use the following flowchart to inspect and repair the cylinder. Result:

(d)

Result

Proceed to

Faulty cylinder can not identified

A

Faulty cylinder can be identified

B

B

Go to step 5

A

4 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(INJECTION CUT FOR MALFUNCTION CYLINDER) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / INJECTOR CUT #1, #2, #3 and #4”. Check for the 4 cylinders in the sequence and then performs the power balance inspection to identify faulty cylinder (If there is no changes in the engine speed even though the fuel injection is cut off during idling, the cylinder is malfunctioning).

GO

5

CHECK CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE OF MALFUNCTION CYLINDER (See page 14–266) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

6

CHECK VALVE CLEARANCE OF MALFUNCTION CYLINDER (See page 14–266) NG

OK


ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE (See page 14–270)


7

–


READ OUTPUT DTC (DTC P1238 OUTPUT AGAIN)

HINT: After clearing the DTC, let the engine idle for 10 minutes after it was warmed up, and confirm P1238 is not set again. OK


NG

8


GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1238 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC, let the engine idle for 10 minutes after it was warmed up, and confirm P1238 is not set again.



–


05CQ1–01

DTC

P1271

FUEL REGULATOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (EDU DRIVE)

DTC

P1272

FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR MALFUNCTION

HINT:

For more information on the pressure discharge valve and the common rail system, see page 05–517. For more information on the EDU, see page 05–604. If P1271 and/or P1272 are present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM controls the internal fuel pressure of the common rail by opening and closing the pressure discharge valve. When sudden deceleration is occurred, the internal fuel pressure will temporarily become higher than usual and combustion noise may result, therefore the ECM will open the valve temporarily to discharge the pressure inside the common rail. Also, the pressure discharge valve opens when the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the internal pressure is then promptly discharged. Pressure Discharge Valve Operation Under Sudden Deceleration Accelerator Pedal Opening Angle

Open Close

Open Pressure Discharge Valve

Close

w/o Pressure Discharge Valve Fuel Pressure

w/ Pressure Discharge Valve Target Fuel Pressure

Long Time Time A81485



–


HINT: The solenoid valve of the pressure discharge valve is the same type of the injector solenoid valve. Pressure Discharge Valve Cross Section Diagram

To Fuel Tank (Low Pressure)

Valve Solenoid

From Common Rail (High Pressure)

A81505

DTC No.

DTC Detection condition

Trouble Area

P1271

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit. There is no valve opening confirmation signal (IJF) from EDU to ECM, despite the ECM sending valve opening command signal (PRD) after the engine has been started (1 trip detection).

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit Open or short in pressure discharge valve itself EDU ECM

P1272

Pressure discharge valve closed malfunction. Actual pressure decreasing rate deviates from the simulated pressure drop rate by the ECM after the ignition switch is turned OFF (2 trip detection).


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P1271 and/or P1272”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside common rail in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100



–


MONITOR DESCRIPTION P1271 (Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit): This DTC will be set if there is no valve opening confirmation signal (IJF) from the EDU to the ECM, despite the ECM commanding the pressure discharge valve to open with the EDU. This DTC refers to open or short malfunction of the pressure discharge valve circuit, therefore the malfunction that the valve is stuck open or closed can be excluded. The EDU monitors the current supplied to the pressure discharge valve, and the EDU interprets the IJF signal is low if the current exceeds the specified level, and the EDU indicates that there is the current in the pressure discharge valve. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P1271 Malfunction Detection

Command Signal (PRD) ECM


EDU

ON Pressure Discharge Valve PRD Command Signal

OFF Abnormal

Pressure Discharge Valve Confirmation Signal

IJF

Normal A81500

P1272 (Closed malfunction of the pressure discharge valve): The pressure discharge valve will open and discharge the internal fuel pressure of the common rail to the fuel tank when the ignition switch is turned OFF. In this event, the ECM compares the actual dropping rate of the internal fuel pressure and the simulated dropping rate. If the ECM judges the actual dropping rate is smaller than the simulation, the ECM then interprets this as the valve has stuck closed and set this DTC. This DTC detection will be activated if the internal fuel pressure does not drop below the specified level after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF.



EDU Continuous 3 sec. 1 driving cycles


–


P1272: Required sensors


Frequency of operation

Once per driving cycle

Duration CHK ENG operation

1 sec. 2 driving cycles

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P1271: Specification Drive the vehicle at 50 km/h with the 3 rd transmission gear and then decelerate it by completly releasing the accelerator pedal

P1272: Item


Maximum

30 MPa (306 kgf/cm2, 4,351 psi)

–

Fuel temperature

0_C

–

Battery voltage

11 V

–

Fuel pressure

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or pressure discharge valve circuit, or fuel temp. sensor is malfunctioning

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P1271: Threshold If the confirmation signals from the EDU is not present, despite the ECM sending the command signals regularly during decelerating

P1272: Threshold If the internal pressure stays beyond the specified level after the ignition switch was turned OFF



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

EDU 4 E5

PRD

R–L

ECM 32 E13 PRD

R–L


(Shielded) PRV

8 E5

W

1 EA1

W

COM3

7 E4

B

2 EA1

B

(Shielded)

BR

D J12

BR

E J12

2

1

J/C

E J13

BR

D J13

EI

A80999

PULSE GENERATION INSPECTION HINT: Problem area can be identified by inspecting waveform at the following inspection points. Warning: Terminals COM3 and PRD are high–voltage

EDU High–voltage Area

PRD A

B PRD

PRV Pressure Discharge Valve

ECM C IJF

INJF D

COM3 A81507

HINT: Inspect the following inspection points ”A and D” or ”B and C” at the same time. Malfunction point A

Trouble area ECM

B (If A is normal)

Open or short in ”PRD (ECM)” – ”PRD (EDU)” circuit.

C (If A and B are normal)

Open or short in ”PRV (EDU)” – ”COM3 (EDU)” circuit. Pressure discharge valve EDU

D (If A, B and C are normal)




(a)

Signal Waveform



5 V/ Division

PRD

–

Inspection point

Specified condition

A and B



(b)

Signal Waveform


5 V/ Division

INJF

Inspection point

Specified condition

C and D




After completing repair, confirm P1271 and/or P1272 is not set again. If P0200 and P1271 are present simultaneously, there is open in the INJF wire harness between the EDU and ECM, or there is open in the wire harness for both of the injector the pressure discharge valve. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P1271 AND/OR P1272) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”Only DTC P1271” or ”P1271 and P1272” are output

A


B

B A


Go to step 8


2

–


INSPECT COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (a)


Check the pressure discharge valve for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 0.85 to 1.05 at 20_C (68_F)

NG A82883

REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 14–286)

OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE – EDU) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the E4 and E5 EDU connectors. Disconnect the P3 pressure discharge valve connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) COM3 (E4–7) – COMG (P3–2)

COM3 EDU Connector

PRV (E5–8) – #G (P3–1) A81461

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) COM3 (E4–7) or COMG (P3–2) – Body ground

Wire Harness Side

PRV (E5–8) or #G (P3–1) – Body ground

E5

PRV EDU Connector

Specified condition


A81462

Wire Harness Side P3 #G

COMG

Pressure Discharge valve Connector

OK


NG A81694

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – ECM) (a) (b) (c)


PRD EDU Connector

Disconnect the E5 EDU connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

PRD (E5–4) – PRD–(E13–32)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): A81462


Specified condition

PRD (E5–4) or PRD (E13–32) – Body ground

No continuity

E13

PRD ECM Connector

A81089

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5



E4

EDU Connector

(a) (b) (c)


Specified condition


9 to 14 V

A56874




A80994

NG

CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (EDU – BATTERY)


6

–


INSPECT ECM(PRD VOLTAGE)

E13

PRD

(a) (b)

E12

E1 ECM Connector

A66060

Signal Waveform

Inspect using the oscilloscope. Drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal, and check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

PRD (E13–4) – E1 (E12–7)


HINT: It may be that the following method is the alternative inspection: Run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 10 seconds and then decrease to idle speed with accelerator pedal completely released.

5 V/ Division

PRD


NG


OK

7


GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1271 AND/OR P1272) HINT: P1271: After clearing the DTC, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal, then confirm P1271 is not set again. P1272: After clearing the DTC, turn the ignition switch OFF after the engine was started, and restart the engine and then turn the ignition switch OFF, and then confirm P1272 is not set again.



8 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check if the internal fuel pressure of the common rail drops below approximately 5 MPa within approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned OFF at idling. Result:

(e)

Pressure Displayed

Proceed to

5 MPa or more

A

5 MPa or less

B

B

CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1271 AND/ OR P1272)

HINT: P1271: After clearing the DTC, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal, then confirm P1271 is not set again. P1272: After clearing the DTC, turn the ignition switch OFF after the engine was started, and restart the engine and then turn the ignition switch OFF, and then confirm P1272 is not set again. A

9

REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY(PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 11–78)




DTC

P1601

–


05CQ2–01

INJECTOR CORRECTION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (EEPROM)


P1601


Trouble Area

Injector compensation value is not registered (1 trip detection logic) Wrong injector compensation value is registered (1 trip detection logic)



1

CHECK INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE (See page 05–528) NG



SET INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE (See page 05–528)


–


05CQ3–01

DTC

P2120

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT

DTC

P2122

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P2123

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC

P2125

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”E” CIRCUIT

DTC

P2127

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P2128

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC

P2138

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D”/”E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION

HINT: This is procedure of accelerator pedal position sensor.



–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: This electrical throttle system does not use a throttle cable. The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket and it has the 2 sensors to detect the accelerator position and a malfunction of the accelerator position sensor. In the accelerator pedal position sensor, the voltage applied to pedal terminals VPA1 and VPA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the accelerator pedal. The VPA1 is a signal to indicate the actual accelerator pedal opening angle which is used for the engine control, and the VPA2 is a signal to indicate the information about the opening angle which is used for detecting a malfunction. The ECM judges the current accelerator pedal opening angle with the signals from terminals VPA1 and VPA2, and the ECM controls the throttle motor based on these signals. Movable Range

Movable Range Usable Range

*1: Accelerator pedal released (15)

Usable Range

*1

*2: Accelerator pedal depressed (about 100) Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Output Voltage (V)

*2

*1

5

VPA2

*2 0.8

VPA1

0

EP2

VPA1

VPA2 VCP2

VCP1

*1

105 125 Usable Range

*2

EP1 Accelerator Pedal Opening Angle (deg) A71015



–



DTC No.

Trouble Area

P2120

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) VPA less than 0.2 V and VPA2 greater than 0.97 deg, or VPA greater than 4.8 V

P2122

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) VPA less than 0.2 V (b) VPA2 greater than 0.97 deg

P2123

Condition (a) continues for 2.0 sec. or more: (a) VPA greater than 4.8 V

P2125

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) VPA2 less than 0.5 V and VPA greater than 0.97 deg, or VPA2 greater than 4.8 V and VPA greater than 0.2 V but les than 3.45 V

P2127

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) VPA2 less than 0.5 V (b) VPA greater than 0.97 deg

P2128

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 2.0 sec. or more: (a) VPA2 greater than 4.8 V (b) VPA greater than 0.2 V but less than 3.45 V

P2138


Condition (a) or (b) continues for 2.0 sec. or more: (a) Difference between VPA and VPA2 less than 0.02 V (b) VPA less than 0.2 V and VPA2 less than 0.5 V

HINT: After confirming ”DTC P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128 and P2138”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the accelerator pedal position sensor output voltage. Accelerator pedal position expressed as voltage output Trouble area

Accelerator pedal released ACCEL POS #1

Accelerator pedal depressed

ACCEL POS #2

ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

VC circuit open

0V

0V

0V

0V

VPA circuit open or ground short

0V

1.5 to 2.9 V

0V

3.5 to 5.5 V

VPA2 circuit open or ground short

0.5 to 1.1 V

0V

2.5 to 4.6 V

0V

EP circuit open

5V

5V

5V

5V



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

A20 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor

6 (LHD) VCP1 4 (RHD)

5 (LHD) VPA1 5 (RHD)

3 (LHD) EP1 1 (RHD)



1 (LHD) EP2 3 (RHD)

ECM

B (LHD) B (RHD) G (LHD) G (RHD) Y (LHD) Y (RHD) B (LHD) B (RHD) W (LHD) W (RHD) Y (LHD)

5 IG2

6 IG2

1 IG2

7 IG2

2 IG2

3 IG2

B (LHD)

G (LHD)

Y (LHD)

B (LHD)

W (LHD)

Y (LHD)

26 VCPA E9

22 VPA E9

28 E9

EPA

27 VCP2 E9

23 VPA2 E9

29 E9

EPA2

Y (RHD) A76878




1

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(ACCEL POS #1 AND ACCEL POS #2) (a) (b) (c)

Depressed

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ETCS / ACCEL POS #1 and ACCEL POS #2” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Accelerator pedal

ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

Released FI7052

OK


NG

2

INSPECT ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY(ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR)

LHD EP2 VCP2

Accelerator Pedal Assy

(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)

Disconnect the accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between each terminal. Standard (LHD): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Resistance

EP1 (3) – VCP1 (6) 2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20_C (68_F) EP2 (1) – VCP2 (4)

Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20_C (68_F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 6 2 1 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

NG

OK


REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY (See page 10–66)


3

–


INSPECT ECM(VCPA AND VCP2 VOLTAGE) VCPA (+) EPA2 (–)

E9

(a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28) 4 5 to 5.5 4.5 55V

EPA (–)

VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)

VCP2 (+) ECM Connector

A66060

NG


OK

4

INSPECT ECM(VPA AND VPA2 VOLTAGE) VPA2 (+)

VPA (+) E9

EPA2 (–)

(a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 ECM connector. Symbols (Terminal No.)


Accelerator pedal position

VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

EPA (–)

ECM Connector

NG


A66060

OK



5


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR – ECM)

Wire Harness Side EP2 VPA2 LHD

A20

–

(a) EP1

(b) (c)

VCP2 VPA1 VCP1 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Connector

Disconnect the A20 accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Disconnect E9 the ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (LHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)

A54384

EP1 (A20–3) – EPA (E9–28)

Wire Harness Side EP1 VPA2 RHD

VCP1 (A20–6) – VCPA (E9–26) VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23)

EP2

Continuity

EP2 (A20–1) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (A20–4) – VCP2 (E9–27)

(Check for Short) Symbols (Terminal No.)

A20


Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) or VPA (E9–22) – Body ground EP1 (A20–3) or EPA (E9–28) – Body ground A54384

VCP1 (A20–6) or VCPA (E9–26) – Body ground VPA2 (A20–2) or VPA2 (E9–23) – Body ground

No continuity

EP2 (A20–1) or EPA2 (E9–29) – Body ground VCP2 (A20–4) or VCP2 (E9–27) – Body ground

E9 VPA

Standard (RHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No.)

VCPA VPA2

EP1 (A20–1) – EPA (E9–28) VCP1 (A20–4) – VCPA (E9–26)

ECM Connector

Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)

EPA2 EPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23)

VCP2 A81091

Continuity



Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) or VPA (E9–22) – Body ground EP1 (A20–1) or EPA (E9–28) – Body ground VCP1 (A20–4) or VCPA (E9–26) – Body ground VPA2 (A20–2) or VPA2 (E9–23) – Body ground

No continuity


NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2121

–


05CQ4–01

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE



Trouble Area

Conditions (a) and (B) continue for 0.5 sec.: (a) Difference between VPA and VPA2 exceeds the threshold (b) IDL is OFF

P2121



INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)

Disconnect the A20 accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between each terminal. Standard (LHD): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Resistance

EP1 (3) – VCP1 (6) 2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (1) – VCP2 (4)

Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 2 1 6 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

NG




2

–


INSPECT ECM(VPA AND VPA2 VOLTAGE) VPA (+)

VPA2 (+) E9

EPA2 (–) EPA (–) ECM Connector A66060

(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

OK


NG

3



A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)


Disconnect the A20 accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (LHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No.)

A54384

Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22) EP1 (A20–3) – EPA (E9–28)



EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity

EP2 (A20–1) or EPA2 (E9–29) – Body ground

E9

VCP2 (A20–4) or VCP2 (E9–27) – Body ground

VPA2 VPA


EPA2

VCPA

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22) EP1 (A20–1) – EPA (E9–28) VCP1 (A20–4) – VCPA (E9–26)

ECM Connector

EPA

VCP2 A81091

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) EP2 (A20–3) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (A20–6) – VCP2 (E9–27)


Specified condition

Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY (See page 10–66)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CQ5–01

DTC

P2226

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT

DTC

P2228

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P2229

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Detect the atmospheric pressure using the atmospheric pressure sensor. Followed by the atmospheric pressure, correct the injection timing, the injection volume and the amount of common rail internal fuel pressure and then they create optimum combustion. DTC No. P2226 P2228 P2229

DTC Detection Condition ECM malfunction (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65)



DTC

P2227

–


05CQ6–01

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Detect the atmospheric pressure using the atmospheric pressure sensor. Followed by the atmospheric pressure, correct the injection timing, the injection volume and the amount of common rail internal fuel pressure and then they create optimum combustion. DTC No. P2227


Trouble Area

Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction (2 trip detection logic)

ECM


1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B






–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPB–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI2547

Hand–held Tester

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect an OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or a hand–held tester to the vehicle, and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system / components or in the power train control components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO 15031–4 are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–544). If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips, the CHK ENG goes off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

DLC3 A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–544). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check mode using hand– held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand– held tester only) (See step 3).


–


(b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

* 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: The freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, engine coolant temperature, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2(Euro–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 9141–2 format.

DLC3 A04550

Terminal No.

Connection / Voltage or Residence

Condition

7

Bus + Line / Pulse generation+

During transmission

4

Chassis Ground – Body Ground / 1 or less

Always

16


Always

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Deparment listed in the tool’s instruction manual.



–


(c)

Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (d) Check the CHK ENG. (1) The CHK ENG lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. HINT: If the CHK ENG is not illuminate, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. 2. DTC CHECK (Normal Mode): NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.

Hand–held Tester

(a)

DLC3 A76859

(b)

(c)


Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down. If you need help with the hand–held tester, refer to the hand–held tester’s instruction book). (4) See page 05–544 to confirm the details of the DTCs. Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and ETCS fuses from the engine room R/B for more than 60 seconds.


–


3. DTC CHECK (Check Mode): HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check mode. (a) Procedure for Check Mode using the hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery positive voltage 11V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”N” position. A/C switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (4) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (5) 0.13 Sec ON

OFF 0.13 Sec A76900


Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check mode. The CHK ENG blinks in 0.13 sec intervals as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG goes off after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the normal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.)


(c)

–


Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and ETCS fuses from the engine room R/B for more than 60 seconds.

4. FAIL–SAFE CHART If any of the following codes are recorded, the ECM enters the fail–safe mode. DTC No.

Fail–Safe Operation

Fail–Safe Deactivation Conditions

P0087

VTA is fixed at 10 %

Ignition switch OFF

P0088


Ignition switch OFF

P0093

After fail safe driving control is performed for 1 minute, engine stalls

Ignition switch OFF

P0095 P0097 P0098

Intake air temp. is fixed at 145_C (293_F)

Return to normal condition

P0105 P0107 P0108

Turbo pressure is set at fixed value


P0115 P0117 P0118

When fuel temp. sensor operates normal and intake air temp. is less than 15_C (59_F), value of fuel temp. sensor is substituted When fuel temp. sensor operates normal and intake air temp. is more than 20_C (68_F), value is fixed at 120_C (248_F) When the fuel temp. sensor is abnormal, value is fixed at 40_C (104_F)


P0168

Output limit


P0180 P0182 P0183

Fuel temp. is fixed at 40_C (104_F)


P0190 P0191 P0192 P0193


Ignition switch OFF

P0200


Ignition switch OFF

P0335

Output limit


P0488


Ignition switch OFF

P0500

Vehicle speed is fixed at 0 km/h (0 mph)

Vehicle speed less than 10 km/h (6 mph)

P1229


Ignition switch OFF

P1271


Ignition switch OFF

P1272


Ignition switch OFF

P2120 P2122 P2123 P2125 P2127 P2128 P2138

Output limit

Ignition switch OFF

5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s ECM in the check mode, the 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of the 2 trip detection logic, and the sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTCs (See step 2). (b) Set the check mode (See step 3). AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


(c) Perform a simulation test (See page 01–22). (d) Check the connector and terminal (See page 01–32). (e) Wiggle the harness and connector (See page 01–32). 6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if its value differs from those listed here. Do not solely depend on the ”Normal Condition” here when deciding whether a part is faulty or not. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOLUME INJ TIMING ENGINE SPD

MeasurementItem/Range (Display)

Normal Condition *

Diagnostic Note

Injection volume/ Min.: 0 mm3, Max.: 1279.98 mm3

Idling: 3 to 10 mm3

Injection timing/ Min.: 0_CA, Max.: 51_CA

Idling: –1 to 5CA

Engine speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383.75 rpm

Idling: 750 to rpm

If the value is Approximately 0.0 gm/s: S Mass air flow meter power source circuit open S VG circuit open or short If the valve is 160 gm/s or more: S E2G circuit open

MAF

Air flow rate from MAF sensor status/ Min.: 0 gm/s, Max.: 655.35 gm/s

S Idling: 3.2 to 4.7 gm/s S Running without load (2,500 rpm): 13.1 to 18.9 gm/s

PIM

Absolute pressure inside intake manifold/ Min.: 0 kPa, Max.: 255 kPa

Idling: 85 to 110 kPa

COOLANT TEMP

Coolant temperature/ Min.: –40 _C, Max.: 215 _C

After warming up: 80 to 95C (176 to 203

INTAKE AIR

Intake air temperature/ Min.: –40 _C, Max.: 215 _C

Equivalent to Ambient Temp.

FUEL TEMP

Fuel temperature status/ Min.: –40 _C, Max.: 215 _C

Actual fuel temp.

Accel position status/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %

S Accelerator pedal released: 10 to 22 % S Accelerator pedal depressed: 52 to 90 %

Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine).

VEHICLE SPD

Vehicle speed/ Min.: 0 km/h, Max.: 255 km/h



THROTTLE POS

Throttle step position status/ Min.: 1 step, Max.: 255 step

S Throttle fully closed: 1 step S Throttle fully open: 255 step


COMN RAIL PRESS

Common rail pressure status/ Min.: 0 MPa, Max.: 255 MPa

Idling: 30 to 40 MPa

ACCEL POSITION


If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”, sensor circuit is open or shorted shorted.


Hand–held Tester Display


–


Normal Condition *

Diagnostic Note If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”, sensor circuit is open or shorted.

Ambient temperature sensor status/ Min.: –40 _C, Max.: 215 _C

Actual atmosphere

INJ VOL FB #1

Revised injection volume of the cylinder 1/ Min.: –10 mm3, Max.: 40 mm3

Idling: –3.0 to 3.0 mm3

INJ VOL FB #2



INJ VOL FB #3



INJ VOL FB #4



PUMP VCM ANGLE

Pump vacuum angle status/ Min.: 0 _CA, Max.: 255 _CA

Idling: 70 to 90CA

M–INJ/PILOT ON

M–INJ/PILOT ON/ Min.: 0 us, Max.: 65,535 us

Idling: 600 to 1,200 us

M–INJ/PILOT OFF

M–INJ/PILOT OFF/ Min.: 0 us, Max.: 65,535 us

Idling: 0 us

PILOT–INJ

Pilot–Injection/ Min.: 0 us, Max.: 65,535 us

Idling: 400 to 700 us

Injection volume feedback learning value/ Min.: –10 mm3, Max.: 9,092 mm3


Stop light switch/ ON or OFF

S Brake pedal depressed: ON S Brake pedal released: OFF

STARTER SIG

Starter signal/ ON or OFF

Cranking: ON

AMBI TEMP SENS

INJ FB VALUE

STOP LIGHT SW

A/C CUT SIG

A/C cut signal/ ON or OFF

A/C ON: OFF

EGR SYSTEM

EGR system status/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

ACCEL OPEN SW

Accel open switch/ ON or OFF

Accelerator pedal fully opened: ON

CHECK MODE

Check mode/ ON or OFF

Check mode ON: ON

EGR STEP POS

EGR step position status/ Min: 0 step, Max: 125 step

Idling: 0 to 125 step

*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten diagnostic time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST” AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


(g)

–


According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

[Test Details] Change step of EGR motor Min: 0 step, Max: 125 step

[Test Details] Connect the TC and TE1 ON or OFF

FUEL LEAK TEST

[Test Details] Fuel leak test ON or OFF

INJECTOR CUT #1

[Test Details] Injector cut #1 ON or OFF

INJECTOR CUT #2


INJECTOR CUT #3


INJECTOR CUT #4


EGR STEP POS

TC/TE1



–


8. READ INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE HINT: This operation is useful when confirming the compensation code of each injector or when DTC P1601 is present.

Reading flowchart:

Are you read the injector

A81230

(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC 3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Turn the main switch of the hand–held tester ON. NOTICE: Do not start the engine in this operation.



(d)

–


(e)

Enter ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” and select the item ”INJECTOR COMP.” Press the ”ENTER” button on the hand–held tester.

(f)

Press the ”ENTER” button again.

(g)

Select ”READ COMP VALUE” and press the ”ENTER” button.

(h) (i)

Select a cylinder number which you want to read the compensation code. Press the ”ENTER” button.

(j)

Wait until the next screen comes up.

A80985

A66061

A66063

A66064

A66065



(k)

–


Confirm the 30–digit–alphanumeric code which is displayed on the hand–held tester. This is the injection compensation code for the cylinder.

HINT: The code shown in the illustration is an example. (l) Press the ”ENTER” button to exit this screen.

A66066

(m) Press the ”NO” button to complete the confirmation. HINT: If you want to read other compensation codes for other cylinders, press the ”YES” button instead of ”NO.” By pressing the ”NO” button, the hand–held tester returns to the ”DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” screen.

A66067



–


9. SET INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE HINT: This operation must be done when replacing the ECM or the injectors.

Setting flowchart:

Register the injector compensation code

other cylinders?

(Set the injector compensation code)

A81231




(d)

–


(e)


(f)

Press the ”Enter” button again.

(g)

Select ”SET COMP VALUE” and press the ”ENTER” button.

(h)

Press the ”ENTER” button.

(i)

Select a cylinder number which you want to register the compensation code. Press the ”ENTER” button.

A80985

A66061

A66062

A66068

(j)

A66069



–


(k)

A66070

Input the 30–digit–alphanumeric code with the hand– held tester to register the compensation code to the ECM. NOTICE: Be careful not to register a wrong compensation code to the ECM. The compensation code which stored in the ECM must be consistent with the compensation code of the injector assembly. If a wrong code was set to the ECM, rough idling or engine rattling may result. In addition, it may be a cause of the engine failure or short–life. (l) After inputting, press the ”ENTER” button. (m) Press the ”ENTER” button again.

A66071

(n)

A66072

HINT: The code shown in the illustration is an example. NOTICE: Make sure the correct compensation code is entered on the hand–held tester before pressing YES button. If a wrong compensation code was entered on the hand–held tester, select the ”NO” button to correct the error (Back to step (g)). (o) Press the ”YES” button to set the code to the ECM.

(p)

A66073


Confirm the injection compensation code which is displayed on the hand–held tester.



–


(q) Press the ”NO” button to complete the registration. HINT: If you want to register other compensation code for other cylinders, press the ”YES” button instead of ”NO.” By pressing the ”NO” button, the hand–held tester returns to the ”DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” screen.

A66074

BASIC INSPECTION When the malfunction is not confirmed in the DTC check, troubleshooting should be carried out in all the possible circuits considered as causes of the problem. In many cases, by carrying out the basic engine check shown in the following flow chart, the location causing the problem can be found quickly and efficiently. Therefore, using this check is essential in the engine troubleshooting.

1

CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE

NOTICE: Carry out this check with the engine stopped and ignition switch OFF. Voltage

NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V

CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY

OK

2

CHECK IF ENGINE WILL CRANK NG

PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE 05–551

OK

3

CHECK AIR FILTER (a)

Visually check that the air filter is not excessively dirty or oily. NOTICE: If necessary, clean the filter with compressed air. First blow from the inside thoroughly, then blow from the outside of the filter. NG

Inside A66289

OK


CLEAN OR REPLACE


4 (a) (b)

–


CHECK FUEL QUALITY Check that only diesel fuel is used Check that the fuel does not contain any impurity. NG

REPLACE FUEL

OK

5

CHECK ENGINE OIL (See page 17–20) NG

ADD OR REPLACE

OK

6

CHECK ENGINE COOLANT (See page 16–37) NG

REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT (See page 16–44)

OK

7

CHECK IDLE SPEED AND MAXIMUM SPEED (See page 14–266) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE INJECTION PUMP (See page 11–69)

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE VACUUM PUMP

OK

8

CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT

OK

9

CHECK VACUUM PUMP

OK PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE (See page 05–551)



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPA–01

PRECAUTION 1.

2. 3.

Since each injector has a characteristic fuel injecting behavior, the ECM compensates such behavior by adjusting an injection time for each injector to optimize the fuel injection volume. Compensating data for the optimum injection volume, which has converted into a 30–digit–alphanumeric value, has been imprinted on a head potion of the injector as the injection compensation code. The injection compensation code will be required to register to the ECM when replacing the injectors or the ECM. If an incorrect injection compensation value was registered to the ECM, the engine assembly may rattle or the engine idling may be rough. In addition, it may be a cause of the engine failure or short–life.



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JF–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When the malfunction code is not confirmed the DTC check and the problem still can not be confirmed in the basic inspection, then proceed to this step and perform troubleshooting according to the numbered order given in the table below. Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Does not crank (Difficult to start)

2. Starter 3. Starter relay 4. Engine coolant temperature sensor

19–22 19–22 10–56

Difficult to start with a cold engine

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

STA signal circuit Injector Fuel filter Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle Glow plug system

05–691 11–56 11–82 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Difficult to start with a warm engine

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

STA signal circuit Injector Fuel filter Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

05–691 11–56 11–82 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Engine stalls soon after starting

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Fuel filter Injector EC power source circuit EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–82 11–56 05–686 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Engine stalls (Other than conditions listed abobe)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

EC power source circuit Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

05–686 11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Incorrect first idle (Poor idling)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Fuel filter Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

11–82 11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

High engine idle speed (Poor idling)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

A/C signal circuit Injector STA signal circuit EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

55–3 11–56 05–691 10–56 10–56 10–56



–


Lower engine idle speed (Poor idling)

1. A/C signal circuit 2. Injector 3. EGR system 4. Compression 5. Valve clearance 6. Fuel line (Air bleed) 7. EC 8. Supply pump 9. Fuel pressure sensor 10.Diesel throttle

55–3 11–56 12–16 14–266 14–270 – 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Rough idling (Poor idling)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Injector Fuel line (Air bleed) EGR system Compression Valve clearance EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–56 – 12–16 14–266 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Hunting at hot engine (Poor idling)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Injector EC power source circuit Compression Fuel line (Air bleed) Valve clearance EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–56 05–686 14–266 – 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Hunting at cold engine (Poor idling)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.


11–56 05–686 14–266 – 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Hesitation/ Poor acceleration (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Injector Fuel filter EGR system Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–56 11–82 12–16 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Knocking (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Injector EGR system EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

11–56 12–16 10–56 10–56 10–56

Black smoke (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Injector EGR system EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–56 12–16 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56



–


White smoke (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

EGR system Injector Fuel filter EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

12–16 11–56 11–82 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Surging/ Hunting (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4.

Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56



–


05B5Y–02

STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: While the engine is being cranked, current flows from terminal ST2 of the ignition switch to the ST relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal).

WIRING DIAGRAM

I13 Ignition Switch B–R

1 1 IE4 IP1 (LHD) (RHD)

B–R

B–R

B–R

1 1


ST2

B–Y

5

5

STA

5

B–Y

5

AM2

7 E9

B–Y 4 AM2

1 2

ECM

6

1

Fuse Block

ST Relay

1 ST 2

1A

6 2

3

Driver Side R/B

B 5

5

B–Y

B–W

B–Y

3 B


B J13 7

3

W–B C

J13

IK1 B

B J12

FL MAIN B–R

1 S5

1 S4

9 DA

J13 J/C

2 DJ

B

C

Driver Side J/B

A J12 B–Y

Starter W–B

Battery IJ

A81016



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: This chart is on the premise that the engine is cranked normally. If the engine is not cranked, proceed to the problem symptoms table on page 05–551.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STA SIGNAL) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STARTER SIG” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Ignition Switch Position

ON

START

STARTER SIG

OFF

ON

OK

NG




2

–


INSPECT HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – ST RELAY) (a) (b) (c)

E9

STA ECM Connector

Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Remove the ST relay from the driver side R/B. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

ST relay (1) – STA (E9–7)

Continuity



Specified condition

ST relay (1) or STA (E9–7) – Body ground

No continuity

Driver Side R/B LHD Starter Relay

A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD

Starter Relay A79098



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054KK–04

TERMINALS OF ECM

E13

E12

E10

E9

A66714


Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

Always

9 to 14

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON

9 to 14

MREL (E9–8) (E9 8) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

GR – BR

VC (E13–18) – E1 (E12–7)

R–W – BR

VPA (E9–22) (E9 22) – EPA (E9–28) (E9 28)

G–Y

IG switch OFF

0 to 1.5

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

IG switch ON, accelerator pedal fully released

0.5 to 1.1

IG switch ON, accelerator pedal fully depressed

3.0 to 4.6


0.9 to 2.3


3.4 to 5.0

VPA2 (E9–23) (E9 23) – EPA2 (E9 (E9–29) 29)

W–Y

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

G – L–Y

Idling

0.5 to 3.4

THA (E13–31) – E2 (E13–28)

G–R – BR

Idling, intake air temp. at 20 C (68 F)

0.5 to 3.4

THW (E13–19) – E2 (E13–28)

B–W – BR

Idling, engine coolant temp. at 80C (176F)

0.2 to 1.0

STA (E9–7) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

Cranking

#1 (E13–24) – E1 (E12–7) #2 (E13 (E13–23) 23) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) #3 (E13–22) – E1 (E12–7) #4 (E13–21) – E1 (E12–7)

G–W – BR W–R W R – BR R–W – BR W–L – BR

Idling

Pulse generation (See page 05–604)

G1 (E12–23) – G– (E12–31)

P–L

Idling


NE+ (E13–27) – NE– (E13–34)

G–R

Idling


STP (E10–19) (E10 19) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

G W – BR G–W

ST1 (E10–12) ST1– (E10 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

G W – BR G–W

TC (E9–11) (E9 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

W L – BR W–L

W (E9–12) (E9 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

W – BR

6.0 or more

IG switch on, brake pedal is depressed

7.5 to 14

IG switch on, brake pedal is released

0 to 1.5

Brake pedal is depressed

0 to 1.5

Brake pedal is released

7.5 to 14

IG switch ON

9 to 14

Idling

9 to 14

IG switch ON

0 to 3

SP1 (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)

V–W – BR

IG switch ON, rotate driving wheel slowly


SIL (E9–18) – E1 (E12–7)

W–G – BR

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3

Pulse generation



PIM (E12–28) ( ) – E2 (E13–28) ( )

W–R – BR

IREL (E9 (E9–10) 10) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

Y – BR

TACH (E9–5) – E1 (E12–7)

GR–R – BR

VCS (E12–2) – E1 (E12–7)

R–W – BR

GREL (E9–14) (E9 14) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R – BR

FAN (E9–3) (E9 3) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

W – BR

THIA (E13–20) – E2 (E13–28)

GR – BR

–


Applied negative pressure of 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 in. hg)

0.2 to 0.8

Same as atmosphere

1.3 to 1.9

Applied positive pressure of 69kPa (0.7 kg/cm3, 10.0 psi)

3.2 to 3.8

IG switch OFF

9 to 14

Idling

0 to 1.5

Idling

Pulse generation

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

Cranking

9 to 14

Idling

0 to 1.5

Fan OFF

9 to 14

Fan ON

0 to 1.5


0.5 to 3.4

THF (E13–29) – E2 (E13–28)

L – BR

IG switch ON

0.5 to 3.4

PCR1 (E13–26) – E2 (E13–28)

P – BR

Idling

1.8 to 2.1

PCR2 (E13–33) – E2 (E13–28)

P–B – BR

Idling

1.2 to 1.5

ALT (E13–8) – E1 (E12–7)

B–L – BR

Idling

Pulse generation

RL (E12–9) (E12 9) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

Y – BR

Idling

9 to 14

PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1)

LG–R – LG

IG switch ON Idling

0 to 3 Pulse generation (See page 05–563)

PRD (E13–32) – E1 (E12–7)

R–L – BR

IG switch OFF

INJF (E13–25) – E1 (E12–7)

R–B – BR

Idling


EG+A (E12–6) – E1 (E12–7) EG–A EG A (E12 (E12–5) 5) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) EG+B (E12–4) ( ) – E1 (E12–7) ( ) EG–B (E12–3) – E1 (E12–7)

G – BR Y G – BR Y–G R–L – BR G–B – BR

Idling

Pulse generation ((See page g 05–629))

LU+A (E13–15) – E1 (E12–7) LU–A LU A (E13 (E13–14) 14) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) LU+B ((E13–13)) – E1 ((E12–7)) LU–B (E13–12) – E1 (E12–7)

B – BR G – BR Y – BR L – BR

Racing


THOP (E13–11) (E13 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

P L – BR P–L

VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)

W – BR


4 to 6.5

Idling

9 to 14

IG switch ON

0 to 3

IG switch ON


05–862

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567O–10

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK

Transmission Control System Check Sheet

Inspector’s Name

:

Registration No. Customer’s Name

Registration Year

/

/

Frame No. Date Vehicle Brought In

/

Date Problem Occurred How Often Does Problem Occur?

/

km mile

Odometer Reading

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (

Vehicle does not move ( Any range No up–shift

( 1st 2nd

No down–shift

( O/D 3rd

times a day)

Particular range)

2nd 3rd

3rd O/D )

3rd 2nd

2nd 1st )

No up–shift (S range) No down–shift (S range) Symptoms

Lock–up malfunction Shift point too high or too low Harsh engagement ( N D

Lock–up

Any drive range)

Slip or shudder No kick–down Others

Check Item

MIL

Normal

Remains ON

1st Time

Normal code

Malfunction code (DTC

)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check


05–876

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567Q–08

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the page given. *1 : – ... MIL does not light / ... MIL light up DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area Combination meter Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit Vehicle speed sensor ECM

MIL *

Memory

P0500/42 (05–240)


P0710/38 (05–882)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit

P0712/38 (05–882)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit Low Input

P0713/38 (05–882)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit High Input

P0717/37 (05–884)

Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal

Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit Speed sensor (NT) ECM Automatic transaxle assembly

P0748/62 (05–886)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”A” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit Shift solenoid valve SL1 ECM

P0778/63 (05–886)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”B” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)


P0793/67 (05–892)

Intermediate Shaft Speed Sensor ”A”

Open or short in speed sensor (NC) circuit Speed sensor (NC) ECM

P0982/65 (05–886)

Shift Solenoid ”D” Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)

P0983/65 (05–886)

Shift Solenoid ”D” Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)

P2716/77 (05–894)

Pressure Contorl Solenoid ”D” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)

–

P2769/64 (05–897)

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

–

P2770/64 (05–897)

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

–


Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit ATF temperature sensor ECM

Open or short in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit Shift solenoid l id valve l S4 ECM Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit Shift solenoid valve SLT ECM

Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit Shift solenoid l id valve l DSL ECM

05–856

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE))

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567N–11

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: The ECM of this system is connected to the multiplex communication system. Therefore, before starting troubleshooting, make sure to check that there is no trouble in the multiplex communication system.

When using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. 1


2


3

Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3

4

Check and Clear DTC and Freeze Frame Data (See page 05–863)

5

Visual Inspection

6

Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis (See page 05–863)

7

Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 8 Symptom occur: Go to step 9

8



DIAGNOSTICS

9

–


DTC Check (See page 05–863) DTC is not output: Go to step 10 DTC is output: Go to step 17

10

Basic Inspection (See page 40–2, 40–8 and 40–69) NG

Go to step 19

OK

11

Mechanical System Test (See page 05–863) NG

Go to step 16

OK

12

Manual Shifting Test (See page 05–863) NG

Go to step 14

OK

13

Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 1 (See page 05–879) NG

Go to step 18

OK

14


Go to step 16

OK

15

Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 3 (See page 05–879)

NG

16

Part Inspection Go to step 19

17



05–857

05–858

DIAGNOSTICS

–

18

Circuit Inspection (See page 05–882)

19


20

Repair

21

Confirmation Test


End

When not using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. 1


2


3

Check and Clear DTCs (See page 05–863)

4


5



DIAGNOSTICS

6

–



7


Go to step 16

OK

8


Go to step 13

OK

9


Go to step 11

OK

10


Go to step 15

OK

11


Go to step 13

OK

12


NG

13


14



05–859

05–860

DIAGNOSTICS

–

15


16


17

Repair

18

Confirmation Test

End



05–908

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C92–01

KICK DOWN SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The kick–down switch is turned ON when the accelerator pedal is depressed to the full throttle and sends signals to ECM. When the kick–down switch is turned ON, the ECM controls gear shifting according to the programmed shift diagrams. If a short circuit develops in the kick–down switch, the ECM disregards the kick–down signals and controls shifting at the normal shift points.

WIRING DIAGRAM Center J/B 6 CA

6 CJ

W–B

1 IG1

K2 Kick Down SW W–B

1

W

2

ECM 2 IG1

W

27 E9

KD *1

W–B

IP *1: Europe spec

G25416


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–909



INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal KD of ECM and body ground when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or not. OK: Accelerator pedal

Voltage

Fully depressed (Kick–down switch is ON)

Below 1 V

Released (Kick–down switch is OFF)

10 to 14 V

KD H42584

OK


NG

2

INSPECT KICK DOWN SWITCH (a) (b)

D02350

Disconnect the kick–down switch connector. Measure the continuity between terminals of the kick– down switch connector when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. OK: Kick–down switch

Continuity

ON

Continuity

OFF

No continuity

NG

REPLACE KICK DOWN SWITCH

OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR NG

OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–877 0567R–11

LOCATION Combination Meter (MIL)

ECM

DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch Assy Europe spec: Kick–down Switch

Shift Lock Control Unit (Transmission Control Switch)

Shift Solenoid Valve SLT

Speed Sensor (NT) Speed Sensor (NC)

Shift Solenoid Valve SL1

Park/neutral Position Switch Assy

Shift Solenoid Valve S4 Shift Solenoid Valve SL2

Shift Solenoid Valve DSL

Transmission Wire (ATF Temperature Sensor) D30682


05–882

DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0710/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0712/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0713/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05C8T–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM. DTC No.


P0710/38

(a) and (b) is detected momentary within 0.5 sec. when neither P0712 or P0713 is not detected (1–trip detection logic) (a) ATF temperature sensor resistance is less than 79 (b) ATF temperature sensor resistance is more than 156 k HINT: Wthin 0.5 sec. the malfunction switches from (a) to (b) or from (b) to (a)

P0712/38

ATF temperature sensor resistance is less than 79 for 0.5 sec. or more (1–trip detection logic)

P0713/38

DTC is detected for 0.5 sec. or more (1–trip detection logic) ATF temperature sensor resistance is more than 156 k after started engine for 15 minutes or more

Trouble Area


WIRING DIAGRAM

E1 ECT Solenoid

ECM BR

O E2

6

O

V THO

28 E13 E2

1

30 E13 THO

D26545


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–883



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR) THO

(a) (b)

(c) E2 C54864

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Resistance: 79 to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols

Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

(d)

THO

E2 C95813

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Resistance: 79 to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols

Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–884

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8U–01

P0717/37 TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine. By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT) with the counter gear speed sensor signal (NC), the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0717/37

ECM detects conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. or more: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NT < 300 rpm

Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit Speed sensor (NT) ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM T4 Turbine Speed Sensor 1

B–O

27 E12 NT+

B

35 E12 NT–

2

D26540


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–885



INSPECT SPEED SENSOR(NT) (a) (b)

C58536

Disconnect the speed sensor connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR(NT)

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

NT+

(d)

NT– C95812

Connect the speed sensor connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NT+ and NT–. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that NT+ as well as NT– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–886

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8V–01

DTC

P0748/62 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1)

DTC

P0778/63 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2)

DTC

P0982/65 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)

DTC

P0983/65 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shifting from 1st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF operation of the shift solenoid valves SL1 and SL2 which are controlled by the ECM. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the shift solenoid valves, the ECM controls the remaining normal shift solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe function). DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0748/62

ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valves SL1 (1–trip detection logic) (a) When solenoid is energized, duty ratio exceeds 75% (b) When solenoid is not energized, duty ratio is less than 3%


P0778/63



P0982/65

ECM detects short in solenoid valve S4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve S4 is operated (1–trip detection logic)

Short in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit Shift solenoid valve S4 ECM

P0983/65

ECM detects open in solenoid valve S4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve S4 is not operated (1–trip detection logic)

Open in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit Shift solenoid valve S4 ECM

HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0748/62 is output, check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTC P0778/63 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S4 when DTC P0982/65 and P0983/65 is output.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–887


Fail safe function: If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short, the ECM turns the other shift solenoid ON and OFF in order to shift into the gear positions shown in the table below. The ECM also turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF at the same time. If both solenoids malfunction, hydraulic control cannot be performed electronically, and so it must be done manually. Manual shifting as shown in the following table must be done (In case of a short circuit, the ECM stops sending the current to the short circuit solenoid). SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 MALFUNCTIONING

NORMAL Solenoid Valve

Gear

Solenoid Valve

SL1

SL2

S4

ON

ON

OFF

1st

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

ON

OFF

2nd

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

X

OFF

OFF

OFF OFF

3rd

X

3rd

OFF

X

3rd

OFF

X

SL1 SL2

S4

Gear

SHIFT SOLENOID SL2 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 ON OFF 3rd X OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

O/D

X

ON ON

ON

SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 AND SL2 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4

SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4

X

1st

3rd

OFF

ON

X

2nd

OFF

3rd

OFF OFF

X

3rd

ON

O/D

OFF OFF

X

3rd

SHIFT SOLENOID SL2 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 ON X 3rd X OFF

X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

ON OFF X

X

ON

O/D

X ON


Gear

ON

X

OFF

Solenoid Valve SL1 SL2 S4 ON

OFF OFF ON OFF

SHIFT SOLENOID S4 MALFUNCTIONING

SHIFT SOLENOID SL1, SL2 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 X

X

X

3rd

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

05–888

DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM E1 ECT Solenoid

ECM Y

R

17 E12 SL2+

R–B

16 E12 SL2–

Y

19 E12 SL1+

Y–B

18 E12 SL1–

SL2+ 4

BR SL2– 9 W SL1+ 5

B SL1– 10

L

R S4 8

13 E12 S4

D26538


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–889


INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SL1/SL2/S4) (a) SL1+

SL2+

(b)

(c) SL1–

SL2–

S4 D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT1+ and SL1– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SL1+ as well as SL1– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (d)

(e)

Measure the resistance between terminals SL2+ and SL2–. OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SL2+ as well as SL2– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (f)


Go to step 4

Measure the resistance between terminal S4 of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) NG

OK

Go to step 3

Go to step 5

05–890

2

DIAGNOSTICS

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1

SL1+ SL1–

S4 SL2+

SL2–

C95812

(d)

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the connector from the ECM. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: SL1+ – SL1–: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) SL2+ – SL2–: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) S4 – E1: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals SL1+, SL1–, SL2+ and SL2– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1)

1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)

Remove the shift solenoid valve SL1. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SL1. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector, then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

(+)

D25466

NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE


REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1)

DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–891


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG


OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE

5

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4) (+)

(a) (b)

(–)

(c)

D25467

Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.



REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4)

05–892

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8W–01

P0793/67 INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR ”A”

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the counter gear. By comparing the counter gear speed signal (NC) with the direct clutch speed sensor signal (NT), the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0793/67

ECM detects conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. or more: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NC < 300 rpm


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM

C3 Counter Gear Speed Sensor 1

LG

26 E12 NC+

LG–B

34 E12 NC–

2

D26541


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–893



INSPECT SPEED SENSOR(NC) (a) (b)

Disconnect the speed sensor (NC) connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F)

C58536

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR(NC)

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – ECM)

3

(a) (b) (c)

NC+ NC– C95812

(d)

Connect the speed sensor (NC) connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that NC+ as well as NC– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–894

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

–


05C8X–01

P2716/77 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”D” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID SLT) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Line Pressure Control Pressure

Current Flow to Solenoid D02290

ON

OFF

1 cycle

The throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulator valve (which modulates the line pressure) causes the solenoid valve SLT, under electronic control, to precisely and minutely modulate and generate the line pressure according to the extent of the accelerator pedal depressed or the output of engine power. This controls the line pressure and provides smooth shifting. Upon receiving a signal of the throttle valve opening angle, the ECM controls the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) duty ratio to the solenoid valve, modulating the line pressure and generating throttle pressure. (*): Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and B is the period of non–continuity, then Duty Ratio=A/(A+B) x 100 (%)

BE4056

DTC No.

P2716/77

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. or more: (1 trip detection logic) (a) SLT– terminal: 0V (b) SLT– terminal: 12V


Trouble Area Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit Shift solenoid valve SLT ECM

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–895

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid O

P–L

17 E13 SLT+

P

16 E13 SLT–

SLT+ 2

G SLT– 7

D26542


INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SLT) (a) SLT+

(b)

(c) SLT– D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SLT+ as well as SLT– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG OK


Go to step 3

05–896

2

DIAGNOSTICS

–



(d) SLT+

SLT–

C95813

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SLT+ as well as SLT– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT)

1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)

Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SLT. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector, then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

(+)

D25466

NG



REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT)

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–897 05C8Y–01

DTC

P2769/64 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL)

DTC

P2770/64 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The shift solenoid valve DSL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM in order to control the hydraulic pressure operation the lock–up relay valve, which then the controls operation of the lock–up clutch. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P2769/64

ECM detects short in solenoid valve DSL circuit 4 times when solenoid valve DSL is operated (2 trip detection logic)

Short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit Shift solenoid valve DSL ECM

P2770/64

ECM detects open in solenoid valve DSL circuit 4 times when solenoid valve DSL is not operated (2 trip detection logic)

Open in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit Shift solenoid valve DSL ECM

Fail safe function: If the ECM detects a malfunction, it turns the shift solenoid valve DSL OFF.

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid

L–B

G DSL 3

11 E12 DSL

D26539


05–898

1

DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(DSL) (a) DSL

(b)

C54864

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1 DSL C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals DSL and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–899

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) (a) (b)

(c) (–)

(+)

D03728

Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL of shift solenoid valve DSL and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG



REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL)

05–902

DIAGNOSTICS

–


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM. The ECM receives signals (REVERSE and DRIVE) from the park/neutral position switch.


05C90–01

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–903


WIRING DIAGRAM N1 Park/neutral Position SW

ECM

W–L

20 IK2

R–Y

5 IK1

PL 1

RL 2

J/C

D D D D W–L J18 J29 J18 J29 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) J/C A C R–Y (*2) R–Y (*2) J22 J23

W–L

21 E10 P 11 E10 R

J5 J/C

R–W 3

R–Y (*1)

R–Y(*1)

RB

C R NL 5

LG–B DL 7

9 IK2

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

R

C J/C

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

22 E10 N

R

J14 J/C

10 IK2

LG–B (*1)

10 E10 D

LG–B (*1) C C LG–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 IK1

8 CA

1 CD

R–W

R–W

Driver Side J/B IG1 Relay

1 DN

B–G G–Y

5

5 DH

GAUGE2

3

R–W

9 DA

2

1

27 DA

AM1

1 DH

W–B I13 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1

IG1 1

G–Y Engine Room J/B No.4 B–G

ALT

1 4D 2

1

1 4B

FL MAIN B–G Battery

IJ

*1: LHD *2: RHD D30747


05–904

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (a) (b)

Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Check the continuity between each terminal shown below when the shift lever is moved to each position. Shift Position

C91579

Terminal No. to continuity

P

1–3

6–9

R

2–3

–

N

3–5

6–9

D

3–7

–

OK: There is continuity. NG


OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d)

E1

R N

D

Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that P, R, N as well as D of the ECM connector when the shift lever is shifted to the following position. OK:

P C96192

NG



Shift range

Terminal

Voltage (V)

P

P – E1

7.5 to 14

R

R – E1

7.5 to 14

N

N – E1

7.5 to 14

D

D – E1

7.5 to 14

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–863 05C8R–02

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD (1) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle to the OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or hand– held tester, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. (2) Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the Check Engine Warning Light (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)/CHK ENG (MIL) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system/components or in the driving system components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to CHK ENG (MIL) illuminating when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO15031–6 are recorded in the ECM memory. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip, the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. (3) To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand– held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.). (4) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–876). (5) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection, and ensure thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to check mode when troubleshooting, technicians can cause the CHK ENG (MIL) to light up for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 2).


05–864

DIAGNOSTICS

(6)

–


*2 trip detection logic: When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction code is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG (MIL) to illumenate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip.). (b) Description M–OBD (1) When troubleshooting Multiplex (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand–held tester to the vehicle, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. (2) The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the MIL on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in driving system components. In addition to the MIL illuminating when a malfunction is detected, the applicable DTCs are recorded in the ECM memory. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip, the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. (3) To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 on the vehicle or read the number of blinks of the MIL when TC and CG terminals on the DLC3 are connected. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and activate the several actuators and check freeze frame data and various forms of engine data (For instruction book). (4) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use, and also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and perform troubleshooting. Most DTCs use 2–trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection and ensure thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to check (test) mode using the hand–held tester when troubleshooting, the technician can cause the MIL to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily. *2–trip detection logic: When a logic malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected again during the 2nd test drive, this 2nd detection causes the MIL to illuminate.


DIAGNOSTICS

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

–

05–865


Inspect the DLC3. (1) The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro– OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 D25148

Terminal No.

Connection

Voltage or Resistance

Condition

7

Bus Line

Pulse generation

During communication

4

Chassis Ground

Body Ground / 1 or less

Always

16

Battery Positive

Body Ground / 9 – 14 V

Always

HINT: If your display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of hand–held tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand– held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still not possible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual.

2. (a)

FI2547


INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (NORMAL MODE) Check the MIL. (1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running.

HINT: If the MIL does not come on, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. (b) Check the DTC, using the hand–held tester. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down.

05–866

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(1)

(c)

CG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 DLC3

Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book. (2) See page 05–876 to confirm the details of the DTCs. Check the DTC (Not using the hand–held tester). (1) Turn the ignition switch ON, but do not start the engine. (2) Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of DLC3. SST 09843–18040

TC D25148

(3)

Normal Code 0.26 Seconds

Read the DTC indicated by the number of times of the MIL blinks.

HINT: If the system is operating normally, the light will blink 2 times per second.

ON OFF 0.26 Seconds AT0716

Malfunction Code ”42” For Next Code 0.52 Seconds 2.5 Seconds

The malfunction code is indicated, as shown in the chart on the left (DTC ”42” is shown as an example).

HINT: When 2 or more malfunction codes are stored in memory, the lower–numbered code is displayed first.

ON OFF

4.0 Seconds

(4)

1.5 Seconds 4.5 Seconds Repeat

AT0713


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–867

3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. (a) Check the DTC. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery voltage 11 V or more Throttle valve fully closed Shift lever in P range Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON.

(6) 0.13 sec.

(7)

0.13 sec.

ON

(8)

OFF BR3904


Switch the hand–held tester from Normal mode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes). Start the engine (MIL goes out after the engine starts). Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.

NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, which all DTCs etc. are erased. (10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clear the DTC. (1) When using hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate a hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 10 seconds or more.

05–868

DIAGNOSTICS

–


4. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item

Measurement Item/ Display (Range)

STOP LIGHT SW

Stop light SW Status/ ON or OFF

SHIFT

Actual Gear Position/ 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th (O/D)

SPD (NC)

Counter Gear Speed display: 50 r/min

LOCK UP SOL

Lock Up Solenoid Status/ ON or OFF

KICKDOWN SW

Kick down SW Status/ ON or OFF

PNP SW [NSW]

PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF

Shift lever range is; P or N: ON Except P or N: OFF

REVERSE


Shift lever range is; R: ON Except R: OFF

DRIVE


Shift lever range is; D and 3: ON Except D and 3: OFF

SOLENOID (SLT)

Shift Solenoid SLT Status/ ON or OFF

IG SW ON: ON

u

AT FLUID TEMP

ATF Temp. Sensor Value/ min.: –40_C (–40_F) max.: 215_C (419_F)

80_C (176_F) (After Stall Test)

If the value is ”–40_C (–40_F)” or ”215_C (419_F)”, ATF temp. sensor circuit is opened or shorted.


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

S Brake Pedal is depressed: ON S Brake Pedal is released: OFF

u

Shift lever Range is; S D: 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th (O/D)

u

D Range is warmed up,4th (O/D); Same as input shaft speed

u

S Lock Up: ON S Except Lock Up: OFF

u

S Accelerator Pedal is depressed: ON S Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF

u

The shift lever range and these values are different, there are failures of the PNP switch or shift cableadjustment cable adjustment.

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–869


5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Item

LINE PRESS UP

Test Details [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid SLT and raise the line pressure. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Stopped. IDL: ON [Others] ON: Line pressure up. OFF: No action (normal operation)

Diagnostic Note

–

LOCK UP

[Test Details] Control the shift solenoid DSL to set the ATM to the lock–up condition. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Speed: 60 km/h (37 mph) or more

Possible to check the DSL operation.

SHIFT

[Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid valve and set the each shift range by yourself. [Vehicle Condition] Less than 50 km/h (31 mph) [Others] Press " button: Shift up Press u button: Shift down

Possible to check the operation of the shift solenoid values.

6. (a)

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms of the trouble. If the problem is that the transaxle does not shift up, shift down, or the shift point is too high or too low, conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symptoms. 7. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. Check to see that 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place, and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). HINT: O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control (1. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or less. 2. If there is a 10 km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed.) O/D Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or lower)


05–870

(2) (3)

DIAGNOSTICS

–


Check for shift shock and slip. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. Check for abnormal noise and vibration. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration.

HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc. (4) Check kick–down operation. While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1, 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. Drive in D range O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph). Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock–up. (b) S range test Shift to the S range, depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when: Down–shifting causes engine overrun. Down–shifting is required continuously, down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed. (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. CAUTION: Before conducting this test, ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–871

8. (a)

MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS Measure the stall speed. The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuring the stall speeds in the D and R ranges. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds. To ensure safety, do this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction. The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. (1) Chock the 4 wheels. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SST 09843–18030 (3) Fully apply the parking brake. 9 10111213141516 (4) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal. DLC3 TAC (5) Start the engine. (6) Shift into the D range. Press all the way down on the D25148 accelerator pedal with your right foot. (7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time. Stall speed: 2,550 " 150 rpm (8) Do the same test in the R range. Stall speed: 2,550 " 150 rpm Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause

(a) Stall speed low in D and R ranges

Engine output may be insufficient Stator one–way clutch not operating properly HINT: If more than 600 rpm below the specified value, the torque converter could be faulty.

(b) Stall speed high in D range

Line pressure too low Forward clutch slipping No. 2 one–way clutch not operating properly U/D clutch slipping

(c) Stall speed high in R range

Line pressure too low Direct clutch slipping 1st & reverse brake slipping U/D clutch slipping

(d) Stall speed high in D and R ranges

Line pressure too low Improper fluid level U/D one–way clutch not operating properly


05–872

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(b)

Measure the time lag. (1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag before the shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the direct clutch, forward clutch, and 1st and reverse brake. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests. Take 3 measurements and take the average value.

(2) (3)

Chock the 4 wheels. Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SST 09843–18030 (4) Start engine and check idle speed. 9 10111213141516 Idle speed: 650 ± 50 rpm (In N range and A/C OFF) (5) Shift the lever from N to D range. Using a stop TAC watch, measure the time from when the lever is shifted until the shock is felt. D25148 Time lag: N " D less than 1.2 seconds (6) In the same way, measure the time lag for N " R. Time lag: N " R less than 1.5 seconds Evaluation (If N " D or N " R time lag is longer than the specified): Problem

Possible cause

N " D time lag is longer

Line pressure too low Forward clutch worn U/D one–way clutch not operating properly

N " R time lag is longer

Line pressure too low Direct clutch worn 1st and reverse brake worn U/D one–way clutch not operating properly


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–873

9. HYDRAULIC TEST (a) Measure the line pressure. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe. (1) Warm up the ATF. (2) Remove the test plug on the rear side of the transaxle case and connect SST. SST 09992–00095 (09992– 00231, 09992–00271) (3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Start the engine and check idling speed. SST SST (6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedC81121 D25472 al and shift into D range. (7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling. (8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when engine speed reaches stall speed. (9) In the same way, do the test in R range. Specified line pressure: Condition

D range

kPa (kgf / cm2, psi)

R range


Idling

372 to 412 (3.8 to 4.2, 54 to 60)

672 to 742 (6.9 to 7.6, 98 to 108)

Stall

931 to 1,031 (9.5 to 10.5, 135 to 150)

1,768 to 1,968 (18.0 to 20.1, 256 to 285)

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause

If the measured values at all ranges are higher

Line pressure control solenoid (SLT) defective Regulator valve detective

If the measured values at all ranges are lower

Line pressure control solenoid (SLT) defective Regulator valve detective Oil pump defective

If pressure is low in the D range only

D range circuit fluid leak Forward clutch defective

If pressure is low in the R range only

R range circuit fluid leak Direct clutch defective 1st & reverse brake defective


05–874

DIAGNOSTICS

D09299

–


10. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (a) Disconnect the solenoid wire. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. While driving, shift through the D range. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Shift range

Gear position

D

3rd

R

Reverse

P

Pawl Lock

HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish, do the above road test. If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in the transaxle itself. (c) Connect the solenoid wire. (d) Cancel out the DTC.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–875

11. RESET MEMORY CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy, engine assy or ECM. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only (a) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (b) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (c) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (d) Perform the reset memory procedure from the ENGINE menu. CAUTION: After performing the RESET MEMORY, be sure to perform the ROAD TEST described earlier. Tester menu flow:

G23367


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–861 05CBX–01

PRECAUTION CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy, engine assy or ECM. HINT: Initialization can not be completed by only removing the battery.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–879 0567W–11

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE HINT: If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the trouble still occurs, check the circuits for each symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the page given for troubleshooting. The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters. If the instruction ”Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart” is given in the flow chart for each circuit, proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check. If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits, then check and replace the ECM. CHAPTER 1: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MATRIX CHART Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

No up–shift (A particular gear, from 1st to O/D gear, is not up– shifted)

ECM

01–32

No down–shift (A particular gear, from O/D to 1st gear, is not down–shifted)

ECM

01–32

No lock–up or No lock–up off

4. 5. 6. 7.

05–905 05–161 05–161 01–32

Shift point too high or too low

ECM

01–32

No gear change by shifting into ”+” or ”–” while the shift lever is in the Sposition

1. Transmission control switch circuit 2. ECM

05–910 01–32

Up–shift to O/D from 3rd while engine is cold

1. Engine coolant temp. sensor circuit 2. ATF temp. sensor circuit 3. ECM

05–161 05–882 01–32

Harsh engagement (N D)

ECM

01–32

Harsh engagement (Lock–up)

ECM

01–32

Harsh engagement (Any driving range)

ECM

01–32

Poor acceleration

ECM

01–32

Engine stalls when starting off or stopping

ECM

01–32

No kick–down

1. Kick–down switch circuit 2. ECM

05–908 01–32


Stop light switch circuit Engine coolant temp. sensor circuit Throttle position sensor circuit ECM

05–880

DIAGNOSTICS

–


Chapter 2: On–vehicle Repair (L: U241E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM840U) Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Vehicle does not move in any forward range or reverse range

1. Manual valve 2. Primary regulator valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L –

Vehicle does not move in R range

Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

–

No up–shift (1st 2nd)

1. Valve body assy 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L –

No up–shift (2nd 3rd)


L –

No up–shift (3rd O/D)


L –

No down–shift (O/D 3rd)

Valve body assy

L

No down–shift (3rd 2nd)

Valve body assy

L

No down–shift (2nd 1st)

Valve body assy

L



L –


1. C1 accumulator 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart 3. Valve body assy

L – L

Harsh engagement (N R)


L –



L –

Harsh engagement (2nd 3rd)

Valve body assy

L

Harsh engagement (3rd O/D)

Valve body assy

L

Harsh engagement (O/D 3rd)

Valve body assy

L

Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse)

1. Oil strainer 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

No kick–down

Valve body assy


40–47 – L

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–881

Chapter 3: Off–vehicle Repair (L: U241E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM840U) Symptom

Suspect Area

See page


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Front and rear planetary gear U/D planetary gear U/D one–way clutch (F2) Forward clutch (C1) U/D brake (B3)

L L L L L


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Front and rear planetary gear unit U/D planetary gear Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) 1st & reverse brake (B2)

L L L L L


1. No.1 one–way clutch (F1) 2. 2nd brake (B1)

L L


Direct clutch (C2)

L


U/D clutch (C3)


Torque converter clutch


1. Forward clutch (C1) 2. U/D one–way clutch (F2) 3. No.1 one–way clutch (F1)

L L L


1. Direct clutch (C2) 2. 1st & reverse brake (B2)

L L



40–37

Slip or shudder (Forward position: After warm–up)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

40–37 L L L L L

Slip or shudder (R range)


L L

Slip or shudder (1st)

No.1 one–way clutch (F1)

L

Slip or shudder (2nd)

1. U/D one–way clutch (F2) 2. 2nd brake (B1)

L L

Slip or shudder (3rd)

Direct clutch (C2)

L

Slip or shudder (O/D)

U/D clutch (C3)

L

No engine braking (1st – 3rd: D range)

U/D brake (B3)

L

Poor acceleration (All range)

1. Torque converter clutch 2. U/D planetary gear

Poor acceleration (O/D)

1. U/D clutch (C3) 2. U/D planetary gear

Large shift shock or engine stalls when starting off or stopping



Torque converter clutch Forward clutch (C1) Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) No.1 one–way clutch (F1) U/D one–way clutch (F2)

L 40–37

40–37 L L L 40–37

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–905 05C91–01

STOP LIGHT SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition, when brakes are suddenly applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends a signals to the ECM. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress.


05–906

DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B 6 IE3 G–W (*1)

G–W (*1)

1 IR1

G–W (*2)

G–W (*2)

1

2 DA

ECM

10 DC

19 E10 STP

G–W

1 DM

G–W

S13 Stop Light Switch

G–W (*4, *5) C J30

G–W (*4, *5)

C J30

C J30

2

G–W (*4, *5)

1 R–W (*1)

11 IE3

R–W (*2) G–W (*3)

2 IR1 2

R–W (*1)

R–W (*2)

DA 22

STOP Driver Side J/B DN 1

H20 High Mounted Stop Light 1 1 4 6 W–B (*3) C C

J32 Junction Connector

N8 Noise Filter

B J31 Junction B J31 Connector G–W

1 BD1 (*4) 3 BF1 (*5)

G–W

(*3) 7 (*4) 4 R13 (*5) 1 Rear Combination 6 2 (*3)Light LH 3 5 (*4) 3 4 (*5)

L (*4)

(*3) (*4) (*5) R14 1 BE1 Rear G–W Combination (*4) (*3) Light RH (*4) H20 1 (*5) High Mounted 2 Stop Light

B–G W–B (*3)

1 4D 2

1 1 4B

Engine ALT Room B J30 Junction J/B No.4 Connector C J31

W–B (*4, *5)

W–B

3 BG1

B–G FL MAIN

W–B (*5)

W–B (*3)

W–B (*5)

L (*5)

4 BG1 W–B (*4) W–B (*5)

2 BD1 (*4) 4 BF1 (*5)

W–B

G–W (*5)

W–B (*4) A J33 2 BE1 W–B (*4)

Junction Connector A J34 W–B (*4, *5)

W–B Battery

*1: LHD *2: RHD *3: SEDAN *4: LIFT BACK *5: WAGON


BS

BT

BX

A79094

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–907



INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY NG


OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY – ECM) NG

OK REPAIR OR REPLACE ECM


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–878

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8S–01

TERMINALS OF ECM E13

E12

E10

E9

C95801


Wiring Color

SLT+ (E13–17) – SLT– (E13–16)

P–L – P

IG switch ON

10 to 14

THO (E13–30) – E2 (E13–28)

V – BR

IG switch ON and ATF temperature 110C (230F)

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1

Vehicle driving under lock–up range

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

O/D gear

10 to 14

Except O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1

1st or 2nd gear

10 to 14

3rd or O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

10 to 14

1st gear

10 to 14

Except 1st gear

Below 1

DSL (E12–11) (E12 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

L B – BR L–B

S4 ((E12–13)) – E1 ((E12–7))

L – BR

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

SL2+ (E12–17) (E12 17) – SL2 (E12 SL2– (E12–16) 16)

R – R–B

SL1+ (E12–19) (E12 19) – SL1 (E12 SL1– (E12–18) 18)

Y – Y–B

NC+ (E12–26) – NC– (E12–34)

LG – LG–B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 to 5

NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35)

B–O – B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 to 5

D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

LG B – BR LG–B

R (E10 (E10–11) 11) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

R Y – BR R–Y

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)

V–W – BR

SPT1 (E10–20) (E10 20) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

L – BR

SFTD (E9–21) (E9 21) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

B – BR

SFTU (E9–22) (E9 22) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

R – BR

KD*1 (E9 (E9–27) 27) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

W – BR

*1: Europe


IG switch ON

Shift lever D range

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Shift lever other than D range

Below 1

IG switch ON

Shift lever R range

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Shift lever other than R range

Below 1

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

IG switch ON and shift lever S position

7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and shift lever except for S position

Below 1


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and shift lever ”–” position (Down shift)

Below 1.5


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and shift lever ”+” position (Up shift)

Below 1.5

IG switch ON and kick–down switch ON

Below 1

IG switch ON and kick–down switch OFF

10 to 14

05–910

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C93–01

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When shifting the shift lever into S range using the transmission control switch, it is possible to shift in 1 to 4 positions. Shifting ”+” once changes up 1 shift range position, ”–” once changes down 1 shift range position respectively.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–911


WIRING DIAGRAM T7 Transmission Control SW

ECM 20 E10 SPT1 21 E9 SFTD 22 E9 SFTU

L

R–W 3

SCT

S

7 B

SFTD 1 R SFTU 2

J17 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B E

A

5

A

W–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 CG

7 CA

R–W

7 DB

R–W

Driver Side J/B

B–G G–Y

IG1 Relay GAUGE1

1 DN

5

5 DH

3

1

9 DA

2 AM1

1 DH


IG1

1


1 4D

ALT 2

FL MAIN

W–B 1 4B

1 B–G

A

J15 J/C

Battery IJ

IK

IP

*1: LHD *2 RHD

D30750


05–912

DIAGNOSTICS

–



CHECK ECM (a) (b)

E1

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT1 and E1 of the ECM. OK:

NG

SPT1

Shift position

Specified condition

Except S position

Below 1 V

S position

7.5 to 14 V

Go to step 6

H42584

OK

2

CHECK ECM (a) SFTU

E1

SFTD

Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the ECM. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition

Shift to ”+” (Up shift)

SFTU – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTU – E1

7.5 to 14 V

Shift to ”–” (Down shift)

SFTD – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTD – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42584

OK

NORMAL

NG

3

INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) SFTU (+)

(a) (b) (c)

SFTD (+)

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminals E and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E

Continuity

S position

SFTU – E

No continuity


SFTD – E

Continuity

S position

SFTD – E

No continuity

E (–) H42585


REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY

DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–913

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b)

E6

Tester connection

Specified condition

SFTU (E6–22) – SFTU (A–2)

Continuity

SFTD (E6–28) – SFTD (A–1)

Continuity

SFTD

SFTU

SFTU

Disconnect the ECM connector. Check the continuity between ECM and transmission control switch. OK:

SFTD

A

NG H42586

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION COTROL SWITCH – BODY GROUND) Check the continuity between body ground and E of the transmission control switch connector (wire harness side). OK: Continuity NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

05–914

6

DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b) (c)

IG

S

H42585

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminal IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition

Except S position

IG – S

No continuity

S position

IG – S

Continuity

NG


OK

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (a) (b) (c) (d)

E5

E1 (–)

SPT1

Connect the transmission control switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal SPT1 and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Except S position

SPT1 – E1

Below 1 V

S position

SPT1 – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42587

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Specified condition

HARNESS

AND

05–900

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8Z–01

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM.

WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–882.



(a) (b)

E2 C54864

(c)

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Temperature: C (F)

Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2

Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols THO – Body ground E2 – Body ground

NG OK




DIAGNOSTICS

2

–

05–901



E2 THO

(d) C95813

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Temperature: C (F)

Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2

Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols

Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–919

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE))

0567O–11



Inspector’s Name

:


Registration Year

/

/


/


/

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (

Vehicle does not move ( Any range

Symptoms

km mile

Odometer Reading

No up–shift

( 1st 2nd

No down–shift

( O/D 3rd

No up–shift

(S range)

No down–shift

(S range)

times a day)

Particular range)

2nd 3rd

3rd O/D )

3rd 2nd

2nd 1st )


Lock–up

Any drive range)


Check Item

MIL

Normal

Remains ON

1st Time

Normal code


)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–931


0567Q–09


Detection Item

Trouble Area

MIL *

Memory

P0500 (05–453 )


Combination meter Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit Vehicle speed sensor ECM

P0705 (05–938)

Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Malfunction (PRNDL Input)

Short in park/neutral position switch circuit Park/neutral position switch ECM

P0710 (05–941)


P0711 (05–943)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Performance

P0712 (05–941)


P0713 (05–941)


P0717 (05–945)



P0724 (05–947)

Brake Switch ”B” Circuit High

Short in stop light switch circuit Stop light switch ECM

P0741 (05–948)

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Perfomance (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Shift solenoid valve DSL ECM

P0743 (05–951)

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit Shift solenoid valve DSL ECM

P0746 (05–954)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”A” Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)

Shift solenoid valve SL1 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Shift solenoid valve SL1 ECM

P0748 (05–956)



P0766 (05–962)

Shift Solenoid ”D” Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)

Shift solenoid valve S4 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Shift solenoid valve S4 ECM

P0776 (05–963)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”B” Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)



Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit ATF temperature t t sensor ECM

05–932

DIAGNOSTICS

–


P0778 (05–956)



P0793 (05–965)



P0982 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)

P0983 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)

P2716 (05–967)




DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–915

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 0567N–12


1


2


3


4


5

Visual Inspection

6


7


8


9



05–916

10

DIAGNOSTICS

–



Go to step 19

OK

11


Go to step 16

OK

12


Go to step 14

OK

13


Go to step 18

OK

14


Go to step 16

OK

15


NG

16


17


18



DIAGNOSTICS

19


20

Repair

21

Confirmation Test

End


–


05–917

05–970

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C9J–01



6 CJ

W–B

4 IG2


1

W

2

ECM 8 IG2

W

30 E10 KD

W–B

IP

G25416


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–971





Voltage


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

KD D30684

OK


NG

2


Disconnect the kick–down switch connector. Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2 of the kick–down switch when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. OK: Kick–down switch

NG

Continuity

ON

Continuity

OFF

No continuity


D02350

OK

3




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–933 0567R–12


ECM











05–938

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

P0705

–


TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM. DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition DTC is detected for 500 msec. or more (2–trip detection logic). 2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for P, R, N and D position.

P0705

When any of following conditions for 500 msec. or more in the S position (2–trip detection logic). (a) P position input signal is ON. (b) N position input signal is ON. (c) R position input signal is ON.


05C96–01

Trouble Area

Short Sh t in i park/neutral k/ t l position iti switch it h circuit i it Park/neutral position switch assy ECM

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–939



ECM

W–L

20 IK2

R–Y

5 IK1

PL 1

RL 2

C

NL 5 LG–B DL 7

C

A J/C C J22 J23 R–Y (*2)

R–Y(*2) 9 IK2 10 IK2

7 E9

R LG–B

P

11 E10 R

R–Y(*1)

R–Y(*1)

R–W 3 RB R

6 E9

W–L J15 J/C

C D J14 J19 (*1) (*2)

J/C

N

C D 10 LG–B J14 J19 E10 D (*1) (*2)

Center J/B 1 IK1

R–W

8 CA

1 CD

R–W

R–W


1 B–G

DN

5

5 DH

G–Y

GAUGE2

3 2

1

AM1

27 DA

R–W

9 DA

W–B

1 DH

I12 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1

IG1 1


1 4D

ALT 2

1

FL MAIN

1 4B

B–G IJ

Battery *1: LHD *2: RHD D30749


05–940

DIAGNOSTICS

–





C91579


P

1–3

6–9

R

2–3

–

N

3–5

6–9

D

3–7

–



OK

2


E1

R

D

Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that P, R, N as well as D of the ECM connector when the shift lever is shifted to the following range. OK:

N P D30683

NG



Shift range

Terminal

Voltage (V)

P

P – E1

7.5 to 14

R

R – E1

7.5 to 14

N

N – E1

7.5 to 14

D

D – E1

7.5 to 14

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0710

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0712

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0713

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05–941 05C97–01



P0710


P0712


P0713


Trouble Area


WIRING DIAGRAM

E1 ECT Solenoid

ECM 28 O

O

E2 6

BR

THO 1

V

E13 E2

32 E12 THO

D26545


05–942

DIAGNOSTICS

–




(a) (b)

(c) E2 C54864


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG


OK

2


E2

(d)

THO

C91565

Connect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Resistance: 79 to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols

Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0711

–

05–943


05C98–01

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” PERFORMANCE


P0711


Trouble Area

Both (a) and (b) are detected: (2–trip detection logic) (a) After 12 sec. of engine start, temp. of atmosphere and that of engine coolant is more than –10C (b) After normal driving for over 20 min. and 10 km, ATF temp. is less than 10C





(a) (b)

E2 C54864

(c)

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK:


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2

Measure the resistance between body ground and that THO as well as E2 of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG OK

Temperature: C (F)


05–944

2

DIAGNOSTICS



E2

C82158

–

(d)

THO C91565

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK:



Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2

Measure the resistance between body ground and that THO as well as E2 of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

OK

Temperature: C (F)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0717

–


05–945 05C99–01

TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL



Trouble Area

P0717




B–O

27 E12 NT+

B

35 E12 NT–

2

D26540


05–946

DIAGNOSTICS

–




C58536


NG


OK

2


NT+ NT–

(d) C91565


NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0724

–

05–947


05C9A–01

BRAKE SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition, when brakes are suddenly applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends signals to the ECM. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0724

The stop light switch does not turn off even once the vehicle is driven (2–trip detection logic).

Short in stop light switch signal circuit Stop light switch ECM





OK

2




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–948

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0741

–


05C9B–01

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor, Air–flow meter and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch. Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch with the lock–up schedule in the ECM memory to detect a mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve DSL, valve body and torque converter clutch. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0741

Lock–up does not occur when driving in lock–up range (normal driving at 80 km/h 50 mph), or lock–up remains ON in lock– up OFF range (2 trip detection logic)

Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed Valve body blocked or stuck Shift solenoid valve DSL Lock–up clutch



(b)

Disconnect the transmission wire connector connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between the terminal 3 and the body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20C (68F)

C54864

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSIONWIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E1

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals DSL and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20C (68F)

DSL

C91565

OK

Go to step 3

NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–949

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) (–)

(a) (b)

(+)

(c)

(–)

(d)

(+)

(e)

D03447 D03448

Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air, check that the solenoid valve does not leak the air. OK: Solenoid valve does not leak air. When battery voltage is supplied to the shift solenoid valve, check that the valve opens. OK: Solenoid valve opens. Measure the resistance between the terminal DSL of shift solenoid valve DSL and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes operation noise.

D30707

(–)

(+)

D03420 D03419

D03728

NG


NG


OK

4

CHECK TRANSMISSION WIRE

OK


05–950

5

DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY

OK

6

INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY NG

OK REPAIR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY


REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0743

–


05–951 05C9C–01

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CIRCUIT ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL)


P0743

DTC Detection Condition Either (a) or (b) is detected at 1 time: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Solenoid resistance is 8 or less short circuit when solenoid is energized (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or more open circuit when solenoid is not energized

Trouble Area




L–B

G DSL 3

11 E12 DSL

D26539


05–952

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(DSL) (a) (b)

DSL

C54864

Disconnect the solenoid connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between the terminal 3 and the body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1

NG

DSL



Connect the transmission wire connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

C91565

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–953


(–)

(c)

(+)

D03420 D03419

D03728

Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. Measure the resistance between the terminals DSL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes operation noise.

NG




05–954

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0746

–


05C9D–01

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor to detect the actual gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear). Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanical troubles of the shift solenoid valves and valve body. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0746

The gear required by the ECM does not match the actual gear when driving (2–trip detection logic)

Shift solenoid valve SL1 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.)



1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG


OK

2


OK



DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–955



OK REPAIR OR REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY


05–956

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C9E–01

DTC

P0748

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1)

DTC

P0778

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2)

DTC

P0982

SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)

DTC

P0983

SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)



Trouble Area

P0748



P0778



P0982

ECM detects short in solenoid valve No. 4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve No. 4 is operated (1–trip detection logic)


P0983

ECM detects open in solenoid valve No. 4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve No. 4 is not operated (1–trip detection logic)


HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0748 is output, check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTC P0778 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S4 when DTC P0982 and P0983 is output.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–957




Gear

Solenoid Valve

SL1

SL2

S4

ON

ON

OFF

1st

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

ON

OFF

2nd

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

X

OFF

OFF

OFF OFF

3rd

X

3rd

OFF

X

3rd

OFF

X

SL1 SL2

S4

Gear


OFF

OFF

ON

O/D

X

ON ON

ON



X

1st

3rd

OFF

ON

X

2nd

OFF

3rd

OFF OFF

X

3rd

ON

O/D

OFF OFF

X

3rd


X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

ON OFF X

X

ON

O/D

X ON


Gear

ON

X

OFF


OFF OFF ON OFF



X

X

3rd

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

05–958

DIAGNOSTICS

–



ECM Y

R

17 E12 SL2+

R–B

16 E12 SL2–

Y

19 E12 SL1+

Y–B

18 E12 SL1–

SL2+ 4

BR SL2– 9 W SL1+ 5

B SL1– 10

L

R S4 8

10 E12 S4

D26538


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–959



SL2+

(b)

(c) SL1–

SL2–

S4 D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals 5 and 10. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals 5 and 10 of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (d)

(e)

Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 9. OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 9 of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (f)


Go to step 4

Measure the resistance between terminal 8 and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) NG

OK

Go to step 3

Go to step 5

05–960

2

DIAGNOSTICS



E1

SL1+ S4

SL1–

–

SL2+

SL2– C91565

(d)

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the connector from the ECM. Measure the resistance between terminals of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: SL1+ – SL1–: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) SL2+ – SL2–: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) S4 – E1: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals SL1+, SL1–, SL2+ and SL2– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG




DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–961


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG



5


(a) (b)

(–)

(c)

D25467

Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.




05–962

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0766

–


05C9F–01

SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)



Trouble Area

P0766


Shift solenoid valve S4 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.)



(a) (b)

(–)

(c)

D25467

Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid makes an operating noise.

NG


OK

2



OK

3





DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0776

–


05–963 05C9G–01

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2)



Trouble Area

P0776





1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

Remove the shift solenoid valve SL2. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector, then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

2

(–)

(+)

D25466

NG


OK

2


OK



05–964

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–






DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0793

–


05–965 05C9H–01

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR ”A”



Trouble Area

P0793



WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


LG

26 E12 NC+

LG–B

34 E12 NC–

2

D26541


05–966

DIAGNOSTICS

–




C58536

Disconnect the speed sensor (NC) connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of the speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F)

NG


OK

2


NC+ NC–

C91565

(d)

Connect the speed sensor (NC) connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC–. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P2716

–


05–967 05C9I–01

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”D” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID SLT) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION



ON

OFF

1 cycle


BE4056

DTC No.

P2716

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. or more: (1–trip detection logic) (a) SLT– terminal: 0V (b) SLT– terminal: 12V


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid O

P–L

13 E12 SLT+

P

12 E12 SLT–

SLT+ 2

G SLT– 7

D26542


05–968

DIAGNOSTICS

–




(b)

(c) SLT– D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT–. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


(d) SLT+

SLT–

C91565

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–969


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466




DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–977


05C9L–01

PATTERN SELECT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ECT SNOW is the system that operates the throttle motor to control engine output to reduce skidding of the driving wheels, guarantee takeoff acceleration, driving straightness and turning stability.

WIRING DIAGRAM

I14 Integration Relay

E8 *3 ECT Pattern Select SW W–B

B 1

8 CH

*1

11 CF

*2

4

14 DA

11 8 SNOW MPX1 B8

ECM 29 E10 MPX2

Driver Side J/B 22 MPX2 B8

18 E10 MPX1

6 CA

W–B IP

*1: RHD *2: LHD

(*3) Pattern Select Switch (ECT SNOW Switch) When the ECT SNOW switch is pushed, the switch contact is made and the ECT SNOW mode is selected. To cancel the ECT SNOW mode, push the ECT SNOW switch once again. The ECT SNOW mode is automatically cancelledout when the ignition switch is turned ”OFF”. D30688


05–978

DIAGNOSTICS

–



DRIVING TEST Start the engine. Turn the ECT SNOW switch ”OFF”. Confirm vehicle response by driving from a parked position to fully depressing the accelerator pedal. Turn the ECT SNOW switch on and perform the same check as (c). Confirm that there is a difference between ECT SNOW switch ”ON” and ”OFF”.

HINT:

Driving test should be done on a paved road (a nonskid road). Make sure not to use the TRAC system when testing a vehicle equipped with one. Standard: There is a difference in acceleration between ”ON” and ”OFF”. NG

Go to step 2

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page xx–xxx)

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a)

Wire Harness Side:

(b)

Disconnect the connector of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Measure the resistance between 4 of the wire harness connector and body ground. Standard:

NG B59192

Tester connection

Specified condition

4 – Body ground

Below 1

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY (a)

Switch Side:

D30685


Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 4 of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Specified condition

Press continuously Pattern select switch

1–4

Continuity

Release Pattern select switch

1–4

No continuity

NG

REPLACE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY

DIAGNOSTICS

4

–

05–979


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY – INTEGRATION RELAY) (a)

Instrument Panel J/B Assy Vehicle Front Side:

(b) (c)

DA

Connect the connector of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Disconnect the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) connector. Measure the resistance between terminal SNOW of instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) and body ground. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Specified condition


DA–14 (SNOW) – Body ground

Below 1



10 k or higher

DA

SNOW

D30751

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



AND

05–920

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C94–02

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description (1) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle to the OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or hand– held tester, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. (2) Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the Check Engine Warning Light (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)/CHK ENG (MIL) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system/components or in the driving system components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to CHK ENG (MIL) illuminating when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO15031–6 are recorded in the ECM memory. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip, the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. (3) To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand– held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.). (4) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–931). (5) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection, and ensure thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to check mode when troubleshooting, technicians can cause the CHK ENG (MIL) to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 2).


DIAGNOSTICS

–

(6)

(b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

05–921


*2 trip detection logic: When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction code is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG (MIL) to illumenate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip.).

Inspect the DLC3. (1) The vehicle’s ECM uses ISO 9141–2 (Euro–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2 format.

DLC3 D25148

Terminal No.

Connection


Condition

7

Bus Line

Pulse generation


4

Chassis Ground


Always

16

Battery Positive

Body Ground / 9 to 14 V

Always


2. (a)

FI2547



HINT: If the MIL does not come on, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.

05–922

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(b) Check the DTC, using the hand–held tester. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down. (1) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book. (2) See page 05–931 to confirm the details of the DTCs. (c) Clear the DTC. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. 3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. (a) Check the DTC. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery voltage 11 V or more Throttle valve fully closed Shift lever in P range Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON. (6) 0.13 sec.

0.13 sec.

ON

OFF BR3904


Switch the hand–held tester from Normal mode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes).

NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (7) Start the engine (MIL goes out after the engine starts).

DIAGNOSTICS

–

(8)

05–923


Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.

NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, which all DTCs etc. are erased. (10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clear the DTC. When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (c) Clear the DTC. When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 10 seconds or more. 4. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item


STOP LIGHT SW


SHIFT


SPD (NC)


LOCK UP SOL


KICKDOWN SW



Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

Brake Pedal is depressed: ON Brake Pedal is released: OFF

u

Shift lever Range is; D: 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th (O/D)

u


u

Lock Up: ON Except Lock Up: OFF

u

Accelerator Pedal is depressed: ON Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF

u

05–924

DIAGNOSTICS

–


Item


PNP SW [NSW]



REVERSE



DRIVE



SOLENOID (SLT)


IG SW ON: ON

u

AT FLUID TEMP




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note


5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Item

LINE PRESS UP

6. (a)

Test Details [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid SLT and raise the line pressure. [Vehicle Condition] S Vehicle Stopped. S IDL: ON [Others] ON: Line pressure up. OFF: No action (normal operation)

Diagnostic Note

–

LOCK UP



SHIFT

[Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid valve and set the each shift range by yourself. [Vehicle Condition] Less than 50 km/h (31 mph) [Others] S Press " button: Shift up S Press u button: Shift down


PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms of the trouble. If the problem is that the transaxle does not shift up, shift down, or the shift point is too high or too low, conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symptoms.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–925

7. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. Check to see that 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place, and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). HINT: O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control (1. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or less. 2. If there is a 10 km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed.) O/D Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or lower) (2) Check for shift shock and slip. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. (3) Check for abnormal noise and vibration. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration. HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc. (4) Check kick–down operation. While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1, 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. Drive in D range O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph). Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock–up. (b) S range test Shift to the S range, depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when: The ATF temperature is low. Down–shifting causes engine overrun. Down–shifting is required continuously. (Down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed.) (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. CAUTION: Before conducting this test, ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.


05–926

DIAGNOSTICS

–


8. (a)


Possible cause






Line pressure too low Direct clutch slipping 1st and reverse brake slipping U/D clutch slipping




DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–927

(b)


(2) (3)


Possible cause






05–928

DIAGNOSTICS

–



D range


R range


Idling

372 to 412 (3.8 to 4.2, 54 to 60)

672 to 742 (6.9 to 7.6, 98 to 108)

Stall

931 to 1,031 (9.5 to 10.5, 135 to 150)

1,768 to 1,968 (18.0 to 20.1, 256 to 285)

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause


Shift solenoid valve SLT defective Regulator valve detective


Shift solenoid valve SLT defective Regulator valve detective Oil pump defective




R range circuit fluid leak Direct clutch defective 1st and reverse brake defective


DIAGNOSTICS

D09299

–

05–929


10. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (a) Disconnect the transmission wire. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. While driving, shift through the D range. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Shift range

Gear position

D

3rd

R

Reverse

P

Pawl Lock

HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish, do the above road test. If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in the transaxle itself. (c) Connect the transmission wire. (d) Cancel out the DTC.


05–930

DIAGNOSTICS

–



G23367


05–918

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05CBY–01



DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–935 0567W–12


Suspect Area

See page


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


1. 2. 3. 4.

05–947 05–309 05–309 01–32


ECM

01–32



05–972 01–32


05–309 05–941 05–943 01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

Poor acceleration

ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

No kick–down


05–970 01–32




05–936

DIAGNOSTICS

–



Suspect Area

See page



L L –



–



L –



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


1. Lock–up relay valve 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L –



L – L



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L



No kick–down

Valve body assy


40–47 – L

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–937


Suspect Area

See page


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


L L L L L


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Front and rear planetary gear unit U/D planetary gear Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) 1st and reverse brake (B2)

L L L L L



L L


Direct clutch (C2)

L


U/D clutch (C3)





L L L


1. Direct clutch (C2) 2. 1st and reverse brake (B2)

L L



40–37


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

40–37 L L L L L



L L



L



L L


Direct clutch (C2)

L


U/D clutch (C3)

L


U/D brake (B3)

L

No engine braking (1st: L range)

1st and reverse brake (B2)

L

No engine braking (2nd: 2 range)

2nd brake (B1)









L 40–37

L 40–37 L L L 40–37

05–934

DIAGNOSTICS

–



E12

E10

E11

E9

I34746


S4 ((E12–10)) – E1 ((E11–1))

DSL (E12–11) (E12 11) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

Wiring Color

L – BR

STD Voltage (V) Below 1

O/D gear

10 – 14

Except O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1


10 – 14

IG switch ON

10 – 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

1st or 2nd gear

10 – 14

3rd or O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

10 – 14

1st gear

10 – 14

Except 1st gear

Below 1

L B – BR L–B

SLT+ (E12–13) – SLT– (E12–12)

P–L – P

SL2+ (E12–17) – SL2 (E12 SL2– (E12–16) 16)

R – R–B

SL1+ (E12–19) – SL1 (E12 SL1– (E12–18) 18)

Condition IG switch ON

Y – Y–B

NC+ (E12–26) – NC– (E12–34)

LG – LG–B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 – 5

NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35)

B–O – B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 – 5

THO (E12–32) – E2 (E13–28)

V – BR

D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

LG B – BR LG–B

R (E10–11) (E10 11) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

V–W – BR

SPT1 (E10–20) (E10 20) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

L – BR

IG switch ON and Shift lever D range

10 – 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than D range

Below 1

IG switch ON and Shift lever R range

10 – 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than R range

Below 1

IG switch ON

4.5 – 5.5

IG switch ON and Shift lever S position

7.5 – 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever except for S position

Below 1


7.5 – 14

B – BR IG switch ON and Shift lever ”–” position (Down shift) IG switch ON and Shift lever S position

SFTU (E10–22) (E10 22) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1)

Below 1.5 7.5 – 14

R – BR IG switch ON and Shift lever ”+” position (Up shift)

KD*1 (E10 (E10–30) 30) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1)

Below 1.5

R Y – BR R–Y

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E11–1)

SFTD (E10–21) (E10 21) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1)

ATF temperature: 115 C (239 F) or more

W*1 BR

*1: LHD


Below 1.5


Below 1


10 – 14

05–972

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C9K–01

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When shifting the shift lever into S position using the transmission control switch, it is possible to shift in 1 to 4 positions. Shifting ”+” once changes up 1 shift range position, ”–” once changes down 1 shift range position respectively.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–973




L

R–W 3

SCT

S

7 B

SFTD 1 R SFTU 2

J17 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B E

A

5

A

W–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 CG

7 CA

R–W

7 DB

R–W

Driver Side J/B

B–G G–Y

IG1 Relay GAUGE1

1 DN

5

5 DH

3

1

9 DA

2 AM1

1 DH


IG1

1


1 4D

ALT 2

FL MAIN

W–B 1 4B

1 B–G

A

J15 J/C

Battery IJ

IK

IP

*1: LHD *2 RHD

D30750


05–974

DIAGNOSTICS

–



CHECK ECM (a) (b)

E1

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT1 and E1 of the ECM. OK: Shift range

Specified condition

Except S position

Below 1 V

S position

7.5 to 14 V

SPT1

NG

Go to step 6

D30684

OK

2

CHECK ECM E1

(a)

SFTU

Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the ECM. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTU – E1

7.5 to 14 V


SFTD – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTD – E1

7.5 to 14 V

SFTD D30684

OK

NORMAL

NG

3


(a) (b) (c)

SFTD (+)

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Measure the resistance between terminals E and SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E

Continuity

S position

SFTU – E

No continuity


SFTD – E

Continuity

S position

SFTD – E

No continuity

E (–) H42585



DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–975


E11

Tester connection

Specified condition

SFTU (E11–22) – SFTU (A–2)

Continuity

SFTD (E11–21) – SFTD (A–1)

Continuity

SFTD

SFTU

SFTU


SFTD

A

NG H42967

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

05–976

6

DIAGNOSTICS

–



IG

S

H42585

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminal IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Specified condition

Except S position

IG – S

No continuity

S position

IG – S

Continuity

NG


OK

7


E1 (–)

SPT1 (+)

Connect the transmission control switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal SPT1 and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Except S position

SPT1 – E1

Below 1 V

S position

SPT1 – E1

7.5 to 14 V

C91567

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Specified condition

HARNESS

AND

05–984

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567O–09



Inspector’s Name

:


Registration Year

/

/


/


/

km mile

Odometer Reading

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (


( 1st 2nd

No down–shift

( O/D 3rd

times a day)

Particular range)

2nd 3rd

3rd O/D )

3rd 2nd

2nd 1st )



Lock–up

Any drive range)


Check Item

MIL

Normal

Remains ON

1st Time

Normal code


)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check


05–996

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567Q–07

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the page given. *1 : ... MIL light up DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area Combination meter Open or short in speed sensor circuit Speed sensor ECM

MIL *1

Memory

P0500 (05–98)

Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction

P0710 (05–1003)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction (ATF Temperature Sensor)

P0711 (05–1005)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (ATF Temperature Sensor)

P0750 (05–1007)

Shift Solenoid ”A” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)


P0753 (05–1010)

Shift Solenoid ”A” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve S1 circuit Shift solenoid valve S1 ECM

P0755 (05–1007)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)


P0758 (05–1010)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)


P0770 (05–1013)

Shift Solenoid ”E” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)

Shift solenoid valve SL is stuck open or closed Valve body blocked or stuck Shift solenoid valve SL Torque converter clutch Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.)

P0773 (05–1015)

Shift Solenoid ”E” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL circuit Shift solenoid valve SL ECM

P1520 (05–1018)

Stop Light Switch Circuit

Open or short in stop light switch circuit Stop lamp switch assy ECM

P1725 (05–1019)

NT Revolution Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Input Turbine Speed Sensor)


P1760 (05–1021)

Linear Solenoid for Line Pressure Control Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit Shift solenoid valve SLT ECM

P1780 (05–1024)

Park/Neutral Position Switch Malfunction

Short in park/neutral position switch circuit Park/Neutral position switch assy ECM

P1790 (05–1027)

ST Solenoid Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve ST)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve ST circuit Shift solenoid valve ST ECM

P1798 (05–1030)

SB Solenoid Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SB)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve SB circuit Shift solenoid valve SB ECM


O Open en or short in ATF tem temp.. sensor circuit Transmission wire (ATF temperature sensor) ECM

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E)

05–997

HINT: This DTC may be output when the clutch, brake and gear components, etc. inside the automatic transmission are damaged.


05–980

DIAGNOSTICS

–


ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567N–10


1


2


3


4


5

Visual Inspection

6


7


8


9



DIAGNOSTICS

10

–



Go to step 19

OK

11


Go to step 16

OK

12


Go to step 14

OK

13


Go to step 18

OK

14


Go to step 16

OK

15


NG

16


17


18



05–981

05–982

DIAGNOSTICS

19


20

Repair

21

Confirmation Test

End


–


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1033


05C8O–01



6 CJ

W–B

1 IG1

K2 Kick Down SW W W–B 1

ECM 12 2 W 1 E10 KD * IG1

2

W–B

IP *1: LHD

G25416


05–1034

DIAGNOSTICS

–




KD

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure voltage between terminal KD of ECM and body ground when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or not. OK: Accelerator pedal

Voltage


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

H42584

OK


NG

2


Disconnect the kick–down switch connector. Check continuity between terminals of the kick–down switch connector when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. OK: Kick–down switch

D02350

NG

Continuity

ON

Continuity

OFF

No continuity


OK

3




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

05–998

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567R–10


ECM

DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch Assy LHD: Kick–down Switch

Shift Lock Control Unit (Transmission Control Switch) Speed Sensor (NT)

Transmission Wire (ATF Temperature Sensor)

Shift Solenoid Valve SL


Shift Solenoid Valve S2

Shift Solenoid Valve SB Shift Solenoid Valve S1

Shift Solenoid Valve ST

Shift Solenoid Valve SLT D30681


DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0710

–


05–1003 0567Z–06

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION


P0710


Trouble Area

Either (a) or (b) is detected for 0.5 sec. or more: (1 trip detection logic) (c) Temp. sensor resistance is less than 79 (d) After engine has been operating for 15 min. or more, resistance at temp. sensor is more than 156 k

Open or short in ATF temp. sensor circuit Transmission wire (ATF temperature sensor) ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM

E1 ECT Solenoid

ECM BR

O E2

6 V

O THO 1

28 E13 E2 30 E13 THO

D26545


05–1004

DIAGNOSTICS

–




(a) (b)

(c) E2 C54864


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG


OK

2


(d) E2 THO

C95813


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0711

–

05–1005


05C8G–01

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE


P0711


Trouble Area






(a) (b)

E2 C54864

(c)


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2


NG OK




05–1006

2

DIAGNOSTICS

–



E2 THO

(d) C95813


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0750

SHIFT SOLENOID ”A” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1)

DTC

P0755

SHIFT SOLENOID ”B” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2)

05–1007 05C8H–01

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor and speed sensor NT to detect the actual gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear). Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect the mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valves, the valve body or automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.). DTC No.


P0750 The gear required by the ECM does not match the actual gear when driving (2–trip detection logic) P0755


Trouble Area Shift solenoid valve S1 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.) Shift solenoid valve S2 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.)

05–1008

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S1/S2) (a) (b)

S1

(c)

Remove the shift solenoid valve S1/S2. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

S2

S1

S2

D30679

OK


NG

REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S1/S2)

DIAGNOSTICS

2

–


05–1009

INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY(See chapter 2 in the problem symptoms table) NG




05–1010

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8I–01

DTC

P0753

SHIFT SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1)

DTC

P0758

SHIFT SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shifting from 1st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF operation of the shift solenoid valves S1 and S2 controlled by ECM. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the solenoid valves, the ECM controls the remaining normal solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe function). Fail safe function: If either of the solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short, the ECM turns the other solenoid valve ON and OFF to shift to the gear positions shown in the table below. The ECM also turns the shift solenoid valve ST OFF at the same time. If both solenoids malfunction, hydraulic control cannot be performed electronically and must be done manually. Manual shifting as shown in the above table must be done (In the case of a short circuit, the ECM stops sending current to the short circuited solenoid). NORMAL Range

D

2 (S range) 1 (S range)

Solenoid valve S1 S2 ON ON

Gear 1st

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF OFF

OFF

3rd

ON

ON

ON

ON OFF

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1 MALFUNCTIONING


Solenoid valve S1 S2 OFF X

Solenoid valve S1 S2 X ON

Gear 3rd

Gear

BOTH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES MALFUNCTIONING Gear when shift selector is manually operated

2nd

3rd

X

2nd

3rd

X

3rd

3rd

X

3rd

3rd

X

2nd

3rd

ON

X

2nd

3rd

OFF

X

3rd

3rd

ON

X

2nd

3rd

ON

X

2nd

3rd

X

OFF

3rd

ON

X

OFF

3rd

OFF

O/D

X

ON

O/D

OFF

1st

X

OFF

3rd

ON

OFF

2nd

X

OFF

3rd

OFF

3rd

X

OFF

3rd

ON

ON

1st

X

OFF

O/D

ON

OFF

2nd

X

OFF

3rd

X: Malfunctions

DTC No.

P0753 P0758

DTC Detection Condition ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valve S1 or S2 circuit when it changes ECM records DTC P0753 or P0758 if condition (a) or (b) is detected: (a) When solenoid is energized, solenoid resistance is 8 or less and it is counted (b) When solenoid is not energized, solenoid resistance is 100 k or more and it is counted

Trouble Area

Open or short in shift solenoid valve S1/S2 circuit Shift solenoid valve S1/S2 ECM

HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve S1 when DTC P0753 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S2 when DTC P0758 is output.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1011


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid W S1

15 E12 S1

P

14 E12 S2

5

B S2

P–L

10

G22782


INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(S1/S2) (a) S1

(b)

S2

D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal S1/S2 of transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1 S1

NG

S2 C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: S1 – E1: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F) S2 – E1: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–1012

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–



S1

(c)

Remove the shift solenoid valve S1/S2. Measure the resistance between the solenoid valve connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

S2

S1

S2

D30679

NG




DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0770

–


05–1013 05C8J–01

SHIFT SOLENOID ”E” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor, air–flow meter and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch. Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch with the lock–up schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve SL, valve body and torque converter clutch or automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.). DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0770

Lock–up does not occur when driving in the lock–up range (normal driving at 80 km/h 50 mph), or lock–up remains ON in the lock–up OFF range. (2–trip detection logic) When lock–up is ON, clutch or brake slips or gear is broken. (2–trip detection logic)



INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL) (a) (b)

(c)

D30680

Remove the shift solenoid valve SL. Measure the resistance between terminal SL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG

REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL)

OK

2




05–1014

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–






DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0773

–


05–1015 05687–06

SHIFT SOLENOID ”E” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The shift solenoid valve SL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM to control the hydraulic pressure acting on the lock–up relay valve, which then controls operation of the lock–up clutch. Fail safe function: If the ECM detects a malfunction, it turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0773

Either (a) or (b) is detected for 1 time. (2–trip detection logic) (a) Solenoid resistance is 8 or less when solenoid is energized. (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or more when solenoid is not energized.



R

LG SL

4

13 E12 SL

D26539


05–1016

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SL) (a) SL

(b)

C54864

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal SL and the body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE–ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E1

SL C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SL and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–1017


(c)

D30680

NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL)


Remove the shift solenoid valve SL. Measure the resistance between terminal SL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

OK


05–1018

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1520

–


05C8K–01

STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition, when brakes are suddenly applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends signals to the ECM. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress. DTC No. P1520


Trouble Area

Stop light switch remains ON while vehicle running (1–trip detection logic)






OK

2




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1725

–


05–1019 057ZG–05

NT REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine. By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT) with the vehicle speed sensor signal, the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P1725

ECM detects conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. or more: (1 – trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and Park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NT < 300 rpm


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

T4 Turbine Speed Sensor B–O 1

2

B

27 E12 NT+

35 E12 NT–

D26540


05–1020

DIAGNOSTICS

–




C58536

Disconnect the sensor connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor (NT). OK: Resistance: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F)

NG


OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR–ECM) (a) (b) (c)

(d)

NT+ NT– C95812

Connect the speed sensor (NT) connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NT+ and NT–. OK: Resistance: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F) Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols

Specified condition

NT+ – Body ground

No continuity

NT– – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1760

–


05–1021 05C8L–01

LINEAR SOLENOID FOR LINE PRESSURE CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION



ON

OFF

1 cycle

The throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulator valve (which modulates the line pressure) causes the solenoid valve SLT, under electronic control, to precisely and minutely modulate and generate the line pressure according the extent of the accelerator pedal depressed or the output of engine power. This reduces the function of the line pressure and provides smooth shifting. Upon receiving a signal of the throttle valve opening angle, the ECM controls the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) duty ratio to the solenoid valve, modulating the line pressure and generating throttle pressure. (*): Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and B is the period of non–continuity, then Duty Ratio=A/(A+B) x 100 (%)

BE4056

DTC No. P1760

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. or more: (a) SLT– terminal: 0 V (b) SLT– terminal: 12 V



05–1022

DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid 17

P–L

G SLT+

E13 SLT+

3

GR

16 E13 SLT–

P SLT–

8

D26542



(b)

(c) SLT– D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT–. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Check continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols SLT+ – Body ground SLT– – Body ground

NG OK


Go to step 3


DIAGNOSTICS

2

–

05–1023



(d) SLT+

SLT–

C95813

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols

Specified condition

SLT+ – Body ground

No continuity

SLT– – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector, then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

2

(–)

(+)

D25466

NG




05–1024

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

P1780

–


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends the signals to the ECM. DTC No.


P1780



Trouble Area


0568L–06

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1025



ECM

W–L

20 IK2

R–Y

5 IK1

PL 1

RL 2

J/C

D D D D W–L J18 J29 J18 J29 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) J/C A C R–Y (*2) R–Y(*2) J22 J23

W–L

21 E10 P 11 E10 R

J5 J/C

R–W 3

R–Y(*1)

RB

R–Y(*1) C

9 IK2

R NL 5

LG–B DL 7

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

R

10 IK2

C J/C

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

22 E10 N

R

10 E10 D

LG–B

Center J/B R–W

1 IK1

8 CA

1 CD

R–W

R–W


1 DN

B–G G–Y

3

5

5 DH

GAUGE2

R–W

9 DA

2

1

27 DA

AM1

1 DH


IG1 1


1 4D

ALT 2

1

1 4B


IJ

*1: LHD *2: RHD D30748


05–1026

DIAGNOSTICS

–




Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Check the continuity between each terminals shown below when the shift lever is moved to each range.

Shift Range

C53270


P

1–3

6–9

R

2–3

–

N

3–5

6–9

D

3–7

–



OK

2


E1

R

D

N P

Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that R as well as D, P and N of the ECM when the shift lever is shifted to the following range. OK:

C96192

NG



Shift Range

Terminal

Voltage (V)

P

P – E1

10 to 14

R

R – E1

10 to 14

N

N – E1

10 to 14

D

D – E1

10 to 14

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1790

–


05–1027 05C8M–01

ST SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shift solenoid valve ST is switched ON–OFF by a signal from ECM so that let in or out timing of O/D and 2nd brake is adjusted by operating orifice control valve. Therefore, shift solenoid valve ST operates when letting in or out reverse clutch. If it is broken, the shift shock becomes big. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P1790

ECM memorizes DTC P1790 if (a) or (b) condition below is detected once or more. (a) Solenoid resistance is 30 or lower (short circuit) when solenoid is energized. (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or higher (open circuit) when solenoid is not energized.



Y ST

R–B 2

12 E12 ST

D26539


05–1028

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ST) (a) ST

(b)

C54864

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal ST and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1

ST

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals ST and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG C95812



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–1029

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(ST) (a) (b)

(c)

D09034

Remove the shift solenoid valve ST. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG



REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(ST)

05–1030

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

P1798

–


05C8N–01

SB SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SB)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shift solenoid valve SB controls the 2nd brake (B1) and 1st and reverse brake pressures and performs the 1st and 2nd engine brake control. Fail safe function: S shift control prohibition. On activating the fail–safe function during S shift, the driving mode turns to the ordinal D range. DTC No.


P1798


Trouble Area



V SB

L 7

19 E12 SB

D26539


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1031



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SB) (a) (b)

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure resistance between terminal 7 and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

SB C54864

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1

SB

NG C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure resistance between terminals SB and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–1032

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SB) (a) (b)

(c)

D09034

Remove the shift solenoid valve SB. Measure resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG



REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SB)

05–1040

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8Q–01

PATTERN SELECT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When SNOW mode is selected with the pattern select switch, the ECM controls the solenoid valves and the transmission starts from 2nd gear. In D range, the transmission automatically shifts up through 3rd to O/D as usual.

WIRING DIAGRAM


E8 ECT Pattern Select SW W–B 1 8 CH

*1

11 CF

*2

14 DA

B 4

11 8 SNOW I14 MPX1

ECM 29 E10 MPX2

Driver Side J/B 22 I14 MPX2

23 E10 MPX1

6 CA

W–B IP *1: RHD *2: LHD

D30688


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–1041


INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY (a) (b)

Disconnect the connector of pattern select switch. Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 4 of the pattern select switch. OK: Pattern select switch

Specified condition


Continuity


No continuity

NG


D30685

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH – INTEGRATION RELAY, PATTERN SELECT SWITCH – BODY GROUND) NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



AND

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–985 05C8E–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)



05–986

DIAGNOSTICS

–

(6)

(b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516




DLC3 D25148

Terminal No.

Connection


Condition

7

Bus Line

Pulse generation


4

Chassis Ground


Always

16

Battery Positive


Always


2. (a)

FI2547




DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–987

(b) Check the DTC, Using the hand–held tester. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down. (1) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book. (2) See page 05–996 to confirm the details of the DTCs. (c) Clear the DTC. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. 3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. (a) Check the DTC. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery voltage 11 V or more Throttle valve fully closed Shift lever in P or N range Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON. (6) 0.13 sec.

0.13 sec.

ON

OFF BR3904



NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (7) Start the engine (MIL goes off after the engine starts).

05–988

DIAGNOSTICS

(8)

–



NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, which all DTCs etc. are erased. (10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clear the DTC. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. 4. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item


STOP LIGHT SW


SHIFT


LOCK UP SOL


KICKDOWN SW


SNOW SW

Pattern SW (2nd) Status/ ON or OFF


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note


u


u


u

Accelerator Pedal is depressed all the way down: ON Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF

u

IG SW ON: OFF O Pattern SW (2nd) Push: ON O Pattern SW (2nd) Push: OFF

u

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–989


Item


PNP SW [NSW]



REVERSE



DRIVE


Shift lever range is; D and S: ON Except D and S: OFF

SOLENOID (SLT)


IG SW ON: ON

u

AT FLUID TEMP




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note


5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten the work time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Item

LINE PRESS UP

6. (a)


Diagnostic Note

–

LOCK UP

[Test Details] Control the shift solenoid SL to set the ATM to the lock–up condition. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Speed: 60 km/h (37 mph) or more

Possible to check the SL operation.

SHIFT





05–990

DIAGNOSTICS

–


7. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. Check that 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place, and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). HINT: O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control Coolant temp. is 60C (140F) or less and vehicle speed is 70 km/h (43 mph) or less. ATF temp. is 10C (50) or less. O/D and 3rd Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control Brake pedal is depressed. Accelerator pedal is released. ATF temp. is 10C (50) or less. Coolant temp. is 60C (140F) or less. When the 2nd start switch is on, there is no 1 " 2 up–shift and 2 " 1 down–shift. (2) Check for shift shock and slip. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. (3) Check for abnormal noises and vibration. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration. HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc. (4) Check kick–down operation. While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1, 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. Drive in D range O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 70 km/h (43 mph). Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock–up. (b) S range test Shift to the S range, depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when: Down–shifting causes engine overrun. Down–shifting is required continuously. (Down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed.) (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. CAUTION: Before conducting this test, ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–991

8. (a)

MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS Measure the stall speed. The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuring the stall speeds in the D and R ranges. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds. To ensure safety, do this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction. The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.

(1) (2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

TAC

DLC3 D25148

Chock the 4 wheels. Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. SST 09843–18030 (3) Fully apply the parking brake. (4) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal. (5) Start the engine. (6) Shift into the D range. Press all the way down on the accelerator pedal with your right foot. (7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time. Stall speed: 2,400 " 150 rpm (8) Do the same test in the R range. Stall speed: 2,400 " 150 rpm

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause


Engine output may be insufficient Stator one–way clutch not operating properly HINT: If the value is larger or smaller than the specified value by 600 rpm or more, the torque converter could be faulty.


Line pressure too low Forward clutch slipping One–way clutch No.2 not operating properly


Line pressure too low Reverse clutch slipping 1st and reverse brake slipping


Line pressure too low Improper fluid level


05–992

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(b)

Measure the time lag. (1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag before the shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the reverse clutch, forward clutch, and 1st and reverse brake. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests. Take 3 measurements and take the average value.

(2) (3)


Possible cause


Line pressure too low Forward clutch worn One–way clutch No.2 not operating properly


Line pressure too low Reverse clutch worn 1st and reverse brake worn


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–993

9. HYDRAULIC TEST (a) Measure the line pressure. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe. (1) Warm up the ATF. (2) Remove the test plug on the left side of the transaxle case and connect SST. SST 09992–00095 (09992– 00231, 09992–00271) SST (3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Start the engine and check idling speed. SST (6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedG24063 al and shift into D range. (7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling. (8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when engine speed reaches stall speed. (9) In the same way, do the test in R range. Specified line pressure: Condition

D range


R range


Idling

370 to 410 (3.8 to 4.2, 54 to 60)

540 to 640 (5.5 to 6.5, 78 to 92)

Stall

1,110 to 1,230 (11.3 to 12.5, 161 to 178)

1,700 to 1,810 (17.3 to 18.5, 246 to 263)

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause








R range circuit fluid leak Reverse clutch defective 1st and reverse brake defective


05–994

DIAGNOSTICS

G24064

–


10. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (a) Disconnect the transmission wire connector. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. While driving, shift through the D range. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Shift range

Gear position

D

3rd

R

Reverse

P

Pawl Lock

HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish, do the above road test. If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in the transaxle itself. (c) Connect the transmission wire connector. (d) Clear the DTC.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–995


G23367


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–983 05CBZ–01



05–1000

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567W–10


Suspect Area

See page


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


3. 4. 5. 6.


1. Engine coolant temp. sensor circuit 2. Throttle position sensor circuit 3. ECM

05–16 05–16 01–32



05–1035 01–32

1. Engine coolant temp. sensor circuit 2. ATF temp. sensor circuit

05–16 05–1003 05–1005 01–32



3. ECM

05–1018 05–16 05–16 01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

Poor acceleration

1. Pattern select switch circuit (ECT SNOW switch) 2. Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) 3. ECM


ECM

No kick–down


05–1033 01–32

No 2nd start

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

05–1040 05–1035 05–1024 05–1040 01–32


Pattern select switch circuit (ECT SNOW switch) Transmission control switch circuit Park/neutral position switch circuit Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) ECM

05–1040 01–32 01–32

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–1001

Chapter 2: On–vehicle Repair (L: U340E, U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM824E) Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Vehicle does not move in any forward range and reverse range

1. 2. 3. 4.

Manual valve Primary regulator valve Secondary regulator valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L L –


1. Manual valve 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L –



L –



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


1. 2. 3. 4.

Lock–up relay valve Solenoid relay valve Solenoid modulator valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L L –


1. C1 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L –


1. 2. 3. 4.

C3 accumulator Accumulator control valve Reverse control valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L L –


1. Lock–up relay valve 2. Accumulator control valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L –

Harsh engagement (1st 2nd)

1. B2 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve

L L


1. C2 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve

L L


1. B1 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve 3. 3–4 shift timing valve

L L L


Valve body assy

L

Harsh engagement (D, 2, L)

Coat relay valve

L



No kick–down

Valve body assy

L

Poor acceleration

SLT damper

L


40–42 –

05–1002

DIAGNOSTICS

–


Chapter 3: Off–vehicle Repair (L: U340E, U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM824E) Symptom

Suspect Area

See page


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Planetary gear unit Forward clutch One–way clutch No.2 Reverse Clutch 1st and reverse brake

L L L L L


1. Planetary gear unit 2. Reverse Clutch 3. 1st and reverse brake

L L L


1. 2nd brake 2. One–way clutch No.1

L L


Direct clutch

L


O/D and 2nd brake



40–37


1. Forward clutch 2. One–way clutch No.2

L L


1. Reverse clutch 2. 1st and reverse brake

L L



40–37



L L


Direct clutch

L


O/D and 2nd brake

L

Slip or shudder (Forward range)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Slip or shudder (Reverse range)


L L


One–way clutch No.2

L



L L


Direct clutch

L


O/D and 2nd brake

L

No engine braking (1st)

1st and reverse brake

L

No engine braking (2nd)

O/D and 2nd brake

L



40–37



40–37


Torque converter clutch Forward clutch Direct clutch O/D and 2nd brake 2nd brake One–way clutch No.1 One–way clutch No.2

L

40–37 L L L L L L

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–999 05C8F–01


E12

E10

E9

C95801

Symbols (Terminals No.) SLT+ (E13–17) –

Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

P–L – P

IG switch ON

10 to 14

THO (E13–30) – E2 (E13–28)

V – BR

IG switch ON and ATF temperature 110 C (230 F)

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1

ST (E12–12) (E12 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R B – BR R–B IG switch ON and R gear

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

Vehicle driving under lock–up position

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

1st or O/D gear

10 to 14

2nd or 3rd gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

10 to 14

1st or 2nd gear

10 to 14

3rd or O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1

SLT– (E13–16)

SL (E12–13) (E12 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

S2 ((E12–14)) – E1 ((E12–7))

S1 ((E12–15)) – E1 ((E12–7))

R – BR

P – BR

P–L – BR

SB (E12–19) – E1 (E12–7)

L – BR

NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35)

B–O – B

SPT (E10–8) (E10 8) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

L – BR

D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R (E10 (E10–11) 11) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

KD*1 (E10–12) (E10 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

Pulse signal is output Below 1 4 to 5


7.5 to 14


Below 1

IG switch ON and Shift lever D position

10 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than D position

Below 1

IG switch ON and Shift lever R position

10 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than R position

Below 1

IG switch ON and Kick–down switch ON

Below 1

IG switch ON and Kick–down switch OFF

10 to 14

LG B – BR LG–B

R Y – BR R–Y

W*1 – BR

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)

V–W – BR

SFTU (E10–23) (E10 23) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R – BR

SFTD (E10–30) (E10 30) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

Engine is running

IG switch ON and rotate driving wheel slowly

Pulse signal is output


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever ”+” position (Up shift)

Below 1.5


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever ”–” position (Down shift)

Below 1.5

B – BR

*1: LHD


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–1035 05C8P–01



05–1036

DIAGNOSTICS

–




L

R–W 3

IG

S

7 B

SFTD 1 R SFTU 2

J17 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B E

A

5

A

W–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 CG

7 CA

R–W

7 DB

R–W

Driver Side J/B

B–G G–Y

IG1 Relay GAUGE1

1 DN

5

5 DH

3

1

9 DA

2 AM1

1 DH


IG1

1


1 4D

ALT 2

FL MAIN

W–B 1 4B

1 B–G

A

J15 J/C

Battery IJ

IK

IP

*1: LHD *2 RHD

D30750


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1037



CHECK ECM (a) (b)

E1

SPT

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT and E1 of the ECM. OK:

NG

Shift position

Specified condition

Except S position

Below 1 V

S position

7.5 to 14 V

Go to step 6

H42584

OK

2

CHECK ECM (a) E1

SFTU

SFTD


Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTU – E1

7.5 to 14 V


SFTD – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTD – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42584

OK

NORMAL

NG

3


(a) (b) (c)

SFTD (+)

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Measure the resistance between terminals E and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E

Continuity

S position

SFTU – E

No continuity


SFTD – E

Continuity

S position

SFTD – E

No continuity

E (–) H42585



05–1038

4

DIAGNOSTICS

–



E10

SFTU SFTU

Disconnect the ECM connector. Check the continuity between ECM and transmission control switch. OK: Tester connection

Specified condition

SFTU (E10–23) – SFTU (A–2)

Continuity

SFTD (E10–30) – SFTD (A–1)

Continuity

SFTD SFTD

A

NG G25441

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

DIAGNOSTICS

6

–

05–1039



IG

S

H42585

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminals IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition

Except S position

IG – S

No continuity

S position

IG – S

Continuity

NG


OK

7


E10

E1 (–)

SPT (+)

C94728

Connect the transmission control switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Except S position

SPT – E1

Below 1 V

S position

SPT – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42587

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Specified condition

HARNESS

AND


–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM

DTC

C1511/11 Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction

DTC


DTC


DTC

C1514/14 Torque Sensor Power Source Circuit Malfunction

DTC

C1517/17 Torque Sensor Hold Malfunction

05C5H–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The torque sensor converts the power input in the steering wheel into electric signals, and sends them to the ECU. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1511/11 C1512/12

Torque q sensor circuit malfunction Steering column assy Power steering ECU assy

C1513/13 C1514/14

Torque sensor power source circuit malfunction

C1517/17

Torque sensor hold malfunction

WIRING DIAGRAM Torque Sensor

Power Steering ECU Assy

6 5 7 8

TRQV TRQ1 TRQ2 TRQG

F44868



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU, ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. HINT: Start the inspection from the step 1 with using hand–held tester. Start from step 2 without using hand–held tester.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

(e)

(f)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor with the steering wheel being in the center value position (no load). Standard: 2.3 to 2.7 V Check the difference of the values between ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” with the steering wheel being in the center value position (no load). Standard: Voltage: 0.3 V or less Check the values of the torque sensor on the data monitor when turning steering wheel. (1) Turn the steering wheel to the right end from the center value position, and check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor. Standard: 2.5 to 4.7 V (2) Turn the steering wheel to the left end from the center value position, and check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor. Standard: 0.3 to 2.5 V (3) Check the difference of the values between ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2”. Standard: Voltage: 0.3 V or less NG

Go to step 3

OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20)



2

–


INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSY(TORQUE SENSOR) TRQG (–)

TRQ2 (+)

TRQ1 (+)

(a)

Measure the voltage between terminals TRQ1 and TRQG, TRQ2 and TRQG of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Steering position

Connector B

F44304

TRQ1

TRQ2

Center position

2.3 to 2.7 V

2.3 to 2.7 V

Right turned

2.5 to 4.7 V

2.5 to 4.7 V

Left turned

0.3 to 2.5 V

0.3 to 2.5 V

OK

REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20)

NG

3

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY TRQG (–)

(a) TRQV (+)

Connector B

F44304

Measure the voltage between terminals TRQV and TRQG of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: 7.5 to 8.5 V

OK

REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSY (See page 50–9)

NG REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20)



DTC

–


050YA–04

C1515/15 Torque Sensor Zero Point Calbration Not Performed

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC does not indicate trouble. Perform calibration of torque sensor zero point to delete DTC. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1515/15

When torque sensor zero point calibration is not performed, this DTC is detected.

Sensor zero point calibration is not performed.


RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). Is DTC excepted for C1515/15 outputed? YES


NO

(a) (b)

2

PERFORM CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT(See page 05–1045)

3

RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTC (See page 05–1045). Is DTC C1516/16 outputed? NO

END

YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY DTC C1516/16(See page 05–1063)



DTC

–


0579K–02

C1516/16 Calibration of Sensor Zero Point Not Completed

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC does not indicate trouble. This is detected when the torque sensor zero point calibration is not completed normally. DTC No. C1516/16


Trouble Area

The torque sensor zero point calibration is not completed normally.

Sensor zero point calibration failure.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

(a)

1

CLEAR DTC(See page 05–1045)

2


3

RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). (A): DTC C1516/16 output after attempted 3 time or more. (B): Normal code output.

HINT: If the DTC code is output in spite of conducting the steering zero point calibration, replace the steering column assy. (A) (B) END


REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSY


–


DTC

C1523/23 Motor Circuit Malfunction

DTC


050WR–04



C1523/23

Short circuit of motor terminal or abnormal voltage or current in motor circuit.

C1524/24

Trouble Area Steering column assy Power steering ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU Assy

1

M1

Power Steering Motor

2

M2

F40038



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU, ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed.

1

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY M1

(a) (b)

M2

Connector A

Turn the ignition switch ON. Turn the steering wheel to the left and right and measure the voltage between terminals M1 and M2 of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Voltage changes when steering wheel is turned.

F44304

NG

REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20)

OK

2

INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSY(POWER STEERING MOTOR) (a) (b) M1

Disconnect the connector from the power steering motor. Measure the resistance between terminals M1 and M2 of power steering motor connector. Standard: Resistance: 0.07 to 1

M2

F44858

NG


OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20)



–


DTC

C1531/31 EMPS ECU Circuit Malfunction

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC

C1581/81 Assist Map Un–written

050WS–04



Trouble Area

C1531/31 C1532/32 Po er steering ECU assy Power ass malfunction malf nction C1533/33

Power steering g ECU assy y

C1534/34 C1581/81

Assist map un–written


RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). Is DTC except for C1531/31, C1532/32, C1533/33, C1534/34 and/or C1581/81 output? YES


NO REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20)



–


DTC

C1541/41 Speed Sensor Malfunction

DTC


DTC

C1571/71 Speed Sensor Malfunction (Test mode)

0579L–02



Speed sensor Speed sensor circuit Skid control ECU assy Combination C bi ti meter t assy Power steering ECU assy

C1541/41 Speed sensor malfunction C1542/42 C1571/71

Trouble Area

Speed sensor malfunction (Test mode)

WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter

18 C11

Power Steering ECU

V–W

H H J/C H H J10 J20 J10 J20 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

V–W

5 E15 SPD

*1: LHD *2: RHD F44865



–



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. Select the item ”SPD” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speedometer displayed by the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed by the speedometer when driving the vehicle. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed speed values.



NG

2 (a)

CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CODE OUTPUT Check that DTC for brake system output the normal code. NG

OK




3

–


INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(METER SPEED SIGNAL) SPD

PGND

E14

E15

Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect an oscilloscope to terminals SPD and PGND of the power steering ECU assy connector.

(c)

Driving at about 20 km/h (12 mph), check the signal waveform. Standard: Signal waveform as shown in the illustration.

F44304

5 V/ Division

20 ms/Division

(a) (b)

A05135

HINT: As the vehicle speed becomes high, the waveform cycle narrows. OK


NG

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – COMBINATION METER ASSY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between power steering ECU assy and combination meter assy (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK GO TO COMBINATION METER SYSTEM(See page 05–1510)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0579M–02

DTC

C1544/44 Engine Revolution Signal Malfunction

DTC


DTC

C1573/73 Engine Revolution Signal Malfunction (Test Mode)



C1544/44 Engine revolution signal malfunction C1545/45 C1573/73

Engine revolution signal malfunction (Test mode)

Trouble Area Engine revolution signal circuit ECM Power steering ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU

ECM

5 TACH E9

GR–R

A B J/C A B J9 J27 J9 J27 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

GR–R

12 E15 TACH

*1: LHD *2: RHD F44865



–



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. Select the item ”ENGINE REV” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check that there is no difference between the engine revolution value output from the tachometer displayed by the hand–held tester and the engine revolution value displayed by the tachometer when engine is idle. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed engine revolution values.

HINT: There is tolerance of 10 % in the tachometer indication. OK


NG

2 (a)

CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CODE OUTPUT Check that the DTC for engine output the normal code. NG

OK




3

–


INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL)

PGND

E14

TACH

E15

Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect an oscilloscope to terminals TACH and PGND of the power steering ECU assy connector.

(c)

With the engine idling, check the signal waveform. Standard: Signal waveform as shown in the illustration.

F44304

5 V/ Division

10 ms / Division

(a) (b)

HINT: As the engine revolution becomes high, the waveform cycle narrows.

A05138

OK


NG

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – ECM) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between power steering ECU assy and ECM (See page 01–32). NG

OK GO TO ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


0579N–02

C1551/51 IG Power Source Circuit Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The power steering ECU assy identifies ON or OFF status of the ignition switch by this circuit. DTC No.

C1551/51


Trouble Area

Unusual IG voltage value which exceeds the specification is inputed to power steering ECU assy.

ECU–IG fuse IG power source circuit Charging system Power steering ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU Assy G C J/C G C J10 J20 J11 J21 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

R–W

6 E15 IG

R–W

Driver Side J/B

I13 Ignition SW 3 AM1

G–R

3

5 DH

G–Y IG1 1

IG1 Relay

ECU–IG

18 DB

R–W

5

1

2

AM1

1 DH

9 DA

W–B

1 DN W–B

2 E14 PGND

Engine Room R/B No. 4 B–G

ALT

1 4B 1

1 4D

B–G

2

FL MAIN W–B Battery

IJ

IM

*1: LHD *2: RHD F44867



–



1

INSPECT FUSE(ECU–IG) (a) (b)

Driver Side J/B:

Remove the ECU–IG fuse from the driver side J/B. Check the continuity of the ECU–IG fuse. Standard: Continuity

ECU–IG Fuse

F44856

NG


OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Measure the resistance between terminal PGND of E14 connector and body ground. Standard: Resistance: 1 or less

PGND (–) E14 F44851

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – DRIVER SIDE J/B) (a) (b) (c)

PGND E14

IG

Disconnect the E14 and E15 connectors from the power steering ECU assy. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals IG and PGND of the E14 and E15 connectors. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

E15 F44855

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


DTC

C1552/52 PIG Power Source Circuit

DTC

C1554/54 EMPS Relay Circuit

0579O–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When turning the ignition switch to ON, battery voltage is supplied to terminal PIG of the power steering ECU assy by EMPS relay operations. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the system prohibits the steering assist by interrupting the circuits of the EMPS relay and the motor relay (built in the power steering ECU assy). DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1552/52

Unusual motor power source voltage value which is not within the specification is input to power steering ECU assy.

C1554/54

Open or short circuit of EMPS relay circuit is detected.

EMPS fuse EMPS relay PIG power source circuit Power steering ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM


Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 R EMPS Relay 1 R

R

1

3

5

1

2 EMPS

1

2

1

1

1

W–R

5 IE1

L

1 E14

W–R

3 E15 RLY

1 1A W–B

PIG

2 E14 PGND

Engine Room R/B No.4 B–G

1 4B

1 4A

B–G

FL MAIN

Battery

IM

F44862



–



1

INSPECT FUSE(EMPS) (a)

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1:

(b)

Remove the EMPS fuse from the engine room R/B No.1 and J/B No.1. Check the continuity of the EMPS fuse. Standard: Continuity

EMPS Fuse

EMPS Relay

F44852

NG

OK


INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN HARNESS AND ALL COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO EMPS FUSE


2

–


INSPECT EMPS RELAY (a) 1

3

(b) 2

1

5

3

5

Remove the EMPS relay from the engine room R/B No. 1 and J/B No. 1. Check operation of the EMPS relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

3–5

10 k or higher

3–5

Below 1 When battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

2 F45794

NG

REPLACE EMPS RELAY

OK

3


E14

Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Measure the resistance between the terminal PGND of the E14 connector and body ground. Standard: Resistance: 1 or less

PGND F44851

OK


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – ENGINE ROOM R/B AND J/B) (a) (b) (c)

E14

PIG (+) PGND (–)

Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals PIG and PGND of the E14 connector. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

F44851

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


0579Q–02

C1555/55 EMPS Motor Relay Circuit

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If a malfunction occurs in the system, the system prohibits the steering assist by interrupting the circuits of the EMPS relay and the motor relay (built in the power steering ECU assy). DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1555/55

Open or short circuit of EMPS motor relay in the ECU circuit is detected.

Power steering ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1


R EMPS Relay 1 R

R

1

3

5

1

2

2

1

W–R

5 IE1

1 E14 PIG

W–R

3 E15 RLY

1

EMPS 1

1

L

1

1A W–B

2 E14 PGND


1 4B

1 4A

B–G

FL MAIN

Battery

IM

F44862



–



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. Select the item ”PIG SUPPLY” in the FREEZE FRAME DATA and read its value displayed on the hand– held tester. Check that the power supply voltage value of the drive motor displayed by the hand–held tester. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

(d)

OK

Go to step 3

NG GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART

2

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(PIG TERMINAL VOLTGE)

PIG (+)

(a) (b)

PGND (–)

E14

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals PIG and PGND of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

NG


YES


F44304

OK

3 (a) (b)

RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). Is DTC except for C1552/52 output?

NO REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20)



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050Y7–04

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK Inspector’s : Name

EMPS Check Sheet

VIN Customer’s Name Production Date

/

/

Licence No.

Vehicle Model Date Vehicle Brought In

/


km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/

/

Continuous

( Engine

Cooled

Intermittent (

Warmed up )

times a day)

Steering operation is heavy. Steering force to the right and left differs, or steering force is uneven.

Symptoms

While running, the steering force does not alter corresponding the vehicle speed. The steering returns unwell. Vibration or strange sound comes from the steering column assy. When a trouble happens ( During turning

During vehicle stop

Always )

Others

PS Warning Light Abnormal

Remains ON

Does not come on

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

Freeze Frame Data A malfunction code is outputed at the first time, record the freeze frame data as well (as the DTCs).



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WM–04


Using SST 09843–18040, connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for the code. For details of each code, proceed the page referred to under the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No.” in the DTC chart. DTC No. (See page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

C1511/11 (05–1059) C1512/12 (05–1059)

Torque sensor circuit malfunction

C1513/13 (05–1059)

Steering column assy Power steering ECU assy

C1514/14 (05–1059)


C1515/15 (05–1062)

Calibration of torque sensor zero point is not performed

Sensor zero point calibration is not preformed.

C1516/16 (05–1063)

Calibration of torque sensor zero point is not completed


C1517/17 (05–1059)



Motor circuit malfunction


Power steering ECU assy malfunction


Speed sensor malfunction

Speed sensor Speed sensor circuit Skid control ECU Combination meter assy Power steering ECU assy

Engine revolution signal malfunction

Engine revolution signal circuit ECM Power steering ECU assy

C1551/51 (05–1073)

IG power source circuit malfunction

ECU–IG fuse Power steering relay IG power source circuit Charging system Power steering ECU assy

C1552/52 (05–1076)

PIG power source circuit malfunction

C1554/54 (05–1076)

EMPS relay circuit malfunction

C1523/23 (05–1064) C1524/24 (05–1064) C1531/31 (05–1066) C1532/32 (05–1066) C1533/33 (05–1066) C1534/34 (05–1066) C1541/41 (05–1067) C1542/42 (05–1067) C1544/44 (05–1070) C1545/45 (05–1070)




–


C1555/55 (05–1080)

EMPS motor relay circuit malfunction


C1581/81 (05–1066)





–


05C5I–01

EMPS Warning Light Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the power steering ECU assy detects a trouble, the PS warning lights up. At this time, the power steering ECU assy records a DTC in memory.


Combination Meter

B–W

22 C11 P/S

6 C11

B–W

17 C10

W–B (*1)

9 E15 WL

W–B (*2) Driver Side J/B A J/C C A B–W C J8 J26 J8 J26 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

B–W

IGN

18 DA

2 DH

B–R

I13 Ignition SW 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*1) (*2)

B–R

B–R 4 AM2

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 AM2 B–R

1 1A

1 2

IG2

B–R 6


1

1 4A

A J17 J/C A

1 B–G 4B W–B (*2)

B–G

A

FL MAIN

J15 J/C

Battery *1: LHD

IK

A J16 J/C W–B A (*1) IO

*2: RHD

F44861



–



1 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2


Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Check the continuity between the terminal PGND of the E14 connector and body ground. Standard: Continuity

PGND

E14

F44851

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (a) (b) (c)

E15 WL

Turn the ignition switch ON. Disconnect the E15 connector from the power steering ECU assy, and check the P/S warning light comes on. Using a service wire, ground the terminal WL of the E15 connector, and check the P/S warning light goes off. Standard: P/S warning light comes on and then goes off

NG F44869

OK CHECK GO TO COMBINATION METER SYSTEM




–



HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. HINT: See the indicated pages for detailed explanation. The hand–held tester can be used at step 3, 6, 9, 12.

1


2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS(See page 05–1044)

3

CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

(a)

After the completion of the DTC and freeze frame data check, clear the DTCs (See page 05–1045).

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR(Go to step 5) SYMPTOM OCCURS(Go to step 6)

5

SYMPTOM SIMULATION(See page 01–22)

6

DTC CHECK(See page 05–1045) NORMAL CODE(Go to step 7) MALFUNCTION CODE(Go to step 8)

7

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(See page 05–1058)

8

DTC CHART(See page 05–1054)



9

–


CIRCUIT INSPECTION(See page 05–1059 to 05–1086)

10

IDENTIFYING PROBLEMS

11

REPAIR

12

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WN–04

LOCATION Steering Column Assy

EMPS Fuse

EMPS Relay Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1

Power Steering ECU assy

Combination Meter Assy (P/S Warning Light)

ECU–IG Fuse

DLC3

Driver Side J/B

F45950



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 05C5F–01

PRE–CHECK

1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Check the PS warning light. (1) When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the PS warning light goes on for 2 seconds.

HINT: If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to troubleshooting for the PS warning light circuit (See page 05–1082). F15799

DLC3:

2. (a)

Tc

DTC CHECK (USING SST CHECK WIRE) Checking DTCs using a SST check wire. SST 09843–18040 (1) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.

CG C52361

(3)

Normal Code 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec.

Read and record any DTCs from the P/S warning light on the combination meter. Refer to the chart on the left for examples of a normal code and codes 21 and 22.

HINT:

ON

OFF

If the P/S warning light does not blink any DTC codes or the normal code, inspect the circuit shown in the charts below. Trouble Area

Codes 21 and 22 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.

2.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

ON

Code 21

Code 22 F40045


05–1084

P/S Warning Light Circuit

05–1082

4 sec.

OFF

Tc Terminal Circuit

If 2 or more malfunctions are detected at the same time, DTC will be displayed in the ascending order. (4) Refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart (See page 05–1054) for DTC information.


DLC3:

(b)

Ts

CG C52361

3. (a)

–


Clearing the DTCs using the SST check wire. SST 09843–18040 (1) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Disconnect and connect the SST check wire from the CG terminal 4 times or more in 8 seconds ending with it connected. (4) Check that the P/S warning light blinks a normal code. (5) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (6) Remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 DTC CHECK (USING HAND–HELD TESTER) Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Read the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen.

HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Clear the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. DATA LIST AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

4. HINT: Ignition switch must be turned ON, and the vehicle should be placed on a leveled ground to observe data by using a hand–held tester. Data List (*: with freeze frame data): Item

TRQ1 (*)

TRQ2 (*)

Measurement Item / Range (Display)

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

Show the output states in the torque sensor / Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

Steering wheel center position: 2.3 to 2.7 V Steering wheel right turned: 2.5 to 4.7 V Steering wheel left turned: 0.3 to 2.5 V

–



–



Item


–


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

TRQ3 (*)



SPD (*)

Show the vehicle speed on the speedometer / Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)


ENGINE REV (*)

Show the engine revolution / Min.: 0 rpm Max.: 8,192 rpm

Actual engine speed

–

MOTOR ACTUAL (*)

Show the current flowing motor / Min.: –128 A, Max.: 128 A

0 to 65 A

–

COMMAND VALUE (*)

Show the specified current value / Min.: –128 A, Max.: 128 A

0 to 65 A

–

THERMISTOR TEMP (*)

Show the temperature of the thermistor / Min.: –50 _C, Max.: 205 _C

PIG SUPPLY (*)

Show the power supply voltage for driving motor / Min.: 0 V, Max.: 25 V

10 to 16 V

IG SUPPLY (*)

Show the power supply condition / Min.: 0 V, Max.: 25 V

10 to 16 V

–

TRQ1 ZERO VAL (*)

Show the torque sensor/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

Steering wheel center position: 2.3 to 2.7 V

–

TRQ2 ZERO VAL (*)



–

TRQ3 ZERO VAL (*)



–

MTR OVERHEAT

Record of continuous overheat preventive control / record or un–record

Un–record

–

MTR LOW POWER

Record of low motor power supply voltage / record or un–record

Un–record

–

MTR HIGH POWER

Record of high motor power supply voltage / record or un–record

Un–record

#CODES

Number of DTC recorded / Min.: 0, Max.: 255

Min.: 0, Max.: XX

ASSIST MAP

Show the selected condition of the assist map / 01, 02, 03, 11 or 12

–

–

ECU ID

Show the identified information of ECU / 01, 02, 03, 04 or 05

–

–

TEST MODE STAT

Test mode status / NORMAL or TEST


–

–

Vehicle speed indicated on speedometer

–

While power steering operated

NORMAL: Normal mode TEST: During test mode

–

–


DLC3:

5.

Tc Ts

(a)

CG C52361

–


INPUT SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) (USING SST CHECK WIRE) Check the input signal using a SST check wire. (1) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Check that the PS warning light shows the normal code. (4) Check that the PS warning light goes off while driving the vehicle more than 10 km/h (6 mph) and the engine speed more than 300 rpm.

HINT: If the PS warning light goes off during driving, the sensor is judged to be normal. (5) Stop the vehicle. (6) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (7) Read the number of blinks of the PS warning light. HINT: See the list of DTC shown in the table below. Even if a sensor is normal, it output codes 71 and 73 during test mode.

Malfunction Code (Example Code 73)

Normal Code

3

7 ON

ON

OFF

OFF 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec.

0.5 sec.

A Cycle

4 sec. 1.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec.

Repeat F42646

DTC of input signal check function: Code No. (See page)

Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1571/71 (05–1067)

Speed sensor signal check 1 (Test mode)

Speed sensor Speed sensor circuit Skid control ECU assy Combination meter assy Power steering ECU assy

C1573/73 (05–1070)

Engine revolution signal check (Test mode)


(8)

After checking, disconnect the SST from the terminal Ts and CG, Tc and CG of DLC3, and turn the ignition switch to OFF. SST 09843–18040 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


6. (a)

–


INPUT SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) (USING HAND–HELD TESTER) Check the input signal using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Check that the warning light goes off with driving the vehicle more than 10 km/h (6 mph) and engine speed more than 300 rpm. (3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen.

HINT:

Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. See the list of DTC shown in the table below. Even if a sensor is normal, it outputs codes C1571/71 and C1573/73 during test mode.


Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1571/71 (05–1067)



C1573/73 (05–1070)



7.

CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT (USING SST CHECK WIRE)

HINT: Perform this operation in the following cases. When removing and installing ”steering wheel assembly”, ”tilt steering column assembly” and ”steering gear assembly”. When replacing power steering ECU assy. (a) Place front wheels and steering wheel facing straight ahead.

DLC3:

Tc Ts

CG C52361


(b) Perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. HINT: If the power steering ECU assy is replaced, initialization is not necessary. (1) Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch OFF. (2) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (3) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (4) Turn the ignition switch ON.


–


(5)

(c) HINT:

DLC3:

Do not touch the steering wheel. Check that the DTC for except C1515/15 is not output. (1) Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch to OFF.

(2)

Ts

8. CG C52361


Disconnect and connect the terminal Tc of DLC3 20 times within 20 seconds. (6) Check the DTC C1515/15 output. Perform the torque sensor zero point calibration.

Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3 and turn the ignition switch to ON. SST 09843–18040 (3) Disconnect the SST. SST 09843–18040 (4) Check the DTC is not output. CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT (USING HAND–HELD TESTER)

HINT: Perform this operation in the following cases. When removing and installing ”steering wheel assembly”, ”tilt steering column assembly” and ”steering gear assembly”. When replacing power steering ECU assy. (a) Place front wheels and steering wheel facing straight ahead. (b) Perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. HINT: If the power steering ECU assy is replaced, initialization is not necessary. (1) Stop the vehicle. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (3) Select the ”TRQ SENS ADJUST” mode on the hand–held tester. (4) Select the ”ZERO POINT INITIALIZE”. (5) Following the screen instructions, perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. (c) Perform the torque sensor zero point calibration. HINT: Do not touch the steering wheel. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Select the ”TRQ SENS ADJUST” mode on the hand–held tester. (4) Select the ”ZERO POINT ADJUST”. (5) Following the screen instructions, perform the torque sensor zero point calibration.


–


9. REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY NOTICE: Thoroughly check the procedures for removing and installing the power steering ECU assy when replacing it. Do the same operation or procedure for the removing and installing the steering column assy. (a) Remove the power steering ECU assy (See page 50–20). (1) Mark the clamp position on the torque sensor wire harness in order to reinstall the wire harness as shown in the illustration. (2) Disconnect the torque sensor wire harness from the clamp. NOTICE: In case the clamp will be reused, pay attention so as not to damage it. (3) Disconnect the connectors. (4) LHD: Remove the 2 bolts, screw and power steering ECU assy. (5) RHD: Remove the 2 bolts, 2 screws and power steering ECU assy.



–


RHD:

LHD: Torque Sensor Wire Harness Clamp

Torque Sensor Wire Harness Clamp

Marks

Marks

Power Steering ECU Assy Bolt A

Power Steering ECU Assy Front

Front

Bolt B Bolt B Bolt A Screw

Screw

Motor Wire Harness Torque Sensor Wire Harness Motor Wire Harness

Torque Sensor Wire Harness F44857

(b)


Install the power steering ECU assy (See page 50–20). (1) LHD: Install the power steering ECU assy with the 2 bolts and screw. Torque: Bolt A: 8.0 Nm (82 kgfcm, 71 in.lbf) Bolt B: 15.5 Nm (158 kgfcm, 11 ftlbf) (2) RHD: Install the power steering ECU assy with the 2 bolts and 2 screws. Torque: Bolt A: 8.0 Nm (82 kgfcm, 71 in.lbf) Bolt B: 15.5 Nm (158 kgfcm, 11 ftlbf) (3) Connect the connectors.


–

(4)


Align the marks on the torque sensor wire harness with the clamp, as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE: When reusing the clamp, check that there is no damage on it. When reinstalling the wire harness, make sure there is no twist in the harness or with other wire harness. 10. FAIL SAFE FUNCTION (a) If the power steering ECU assy detects a trouble, the ECU assy halt, fix or lower the steering power assist in order to protect the system. HINT: Repeating the steering operation when stopping or driving at low speed, or leaving the steering wheel turn fully for long hours will lower the amount of power assist in order to prevent power steering ECU assy from heating up. In this case, not operating the steering for about 10 minutes with engine idle will lead the fail safe function to return the normal state.



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WP–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. Symptom

Suspected Area

See page 05–1045

At the time of idling, steering control force is great.

1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. IG Power source circuit 3. Front tire (Worn or improperly inflated) 4. Front wheel alignment (Incorrect) 5. Steering column assy 6. Power steering ECU assy

05–1045

Even if the vehicle speed is increased, appropriate steering resistance cannot be felt.

1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. Combination meter assy 3. Steering column assy 4. Power steering ECU assy

P/S warning light faulty.

1. P/S warning light circuit 2. Power steering ECU assy

05–1082 01–32

DTC check cannot be done.

1. P/S warning light circuit 2. Tc terminal circuit 3. Power steering ECU assy

05–1082 05–1084 01–32

Input signal check cannot be done.

1. Ts terminal circuit 2. Power steering ECU assy 3. Combination meter assy

05–1086 01–32 71–21

Unusual noise.

1. Steering column assy 2. Power steering ECU assy 3. Steering gear assy

50–9 01–32 51–28


05–1073 28–1 26–6 50–9 01–32

71–21 50–9 01–32


–


050X7–04

TC TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the terminals Tc and CG of DLC3 are connected, the power steering ECU assy displays the DTC.


TC


13

W–L

B D J/C D B J8 J21 J9 J20 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

W–L

4 E15 TC

Center J/B

CG

4

3 CB

W–B (*2)

6 CA

W–B (*2)

W–B (*1) A J16 J/C W–B (*1) A *1: LHD *2: RHD

IO

IP

F44864



–




DLC3:

(a) (b)

Tc

CG

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. OK: Voltage: 5 to 16 V

C52361

OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminals CG of DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – POWER STEERING ECU ASSY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminals Tc of DLC3 and power steering ECU assy (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WO–04

TERMINALS OF ECU POWER STEERING ECU ASSY

E14

Connector A

E15

Connector B F44303

NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU, ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

PIG (E14–1) – PGND (E14–2)

L – W–B

PGND (E14–2) – Body Ground

W–B – Body Ground

M1 (A–1) (A 1) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2)

M2 (A–2) (A 2) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2)


Specified condition 10 to 16 V

Always

Below 1.0 V

IG switch ON, turn the steering wheel to left

Below 1.0 V

IG switch ON, turn the steering wheel to right

10 to 16 V

––W W–B B IG switch ON, turn the steering wheel to left

10 to 16 V


Below 1.0 V

––W W–B B

SIL (E15–2) – PGND (E14–2)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

RLY (E15–3) PGND (E14–2)

W–R – W–B

IG switch ON, after 1 sec. or more

Tc (E15–4) (E15 4) – PGND (E14–2) (E14 2)

W L–W W–L W–B B

IG switch ON IG switch ON, short circuit Tc and CG terminals of DLC3

10 to 16 V Below 2.0 V 5 to 16 V Below 1.0 V

SPD (E15–5) – PGND (E14–2)

V–W – W–B

IG switch ON

Pulse generation

IG (E15–6) – PGND (E14–2)

R–W – W–B

IG switch ON

10 to 16 V

GR – W–B

IG switch ON

5 to 16 V

IG switch ON, P/S warning light goes off

10 to 16 V

IDUP (E15–8) – PGND (E14–2) WL (E15–9) (E15 9) – PGND (E14–2) (E14 2)

B W–W B–W W–B B IG switch ON, P/S warning light comes on IG switch ON

Ts (E15–11) (E15 11) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2)

5 to 16 V

W–W W–B B IG switch ON, short circuit Ts and CG terminals of DLC3

TACH (E15–12) – PGND (E14–2)

Below 1.0 V

GR–R – W–B

IG switch ON

Below 1.0 V Pulse generation

TRQ1 (B–5) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B

IG switch ON, turn the steering wheel to left and right

0.3 to 4.7 V

TRQV (B–6) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B

IG switch ON

7.5 to 8.5 V

TRQ2 (B–7) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B


0.3 to 4.7 V

TRQG (B–8) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B

IG switch ON

Below 1.0 V



–


050XA–04

TS TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION After making short circuit between terminal Ts and CG of DLC3 with turning the ignition switch OFF, the mode will change from the normal mode to test mode when the ignition switch is turned ON. After the ignition switch is turned ON, there will be DTC output from Tc terminal of DLC3.


TS

(*1) (*2) J/C B D D J8 J20 J9 (*1) D

W 12

J20 (*2)

Power Steering ECU Assy W (*1)

11 E15 TS

W (*2)

Center J/B CG

W–B (*2) 4

3 CB

6 CA

W–B (*2)

W–B (*1) A J16 J/C W–B (*1) A *1: LHD *2 RHD

IO

IP

F44863



–



INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL) (Ts – CG)

DLC3:

(a) (b)

Ts

CG

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. OK: Voltage: 5 to 16 V

C52361

OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of DLC3 and power steering ECU assy (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

B2780

–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

05B0C–03

PUSH SWITCH/KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC will be output if the transponder key ECU does not detect that the unlock warning switch is ON even when the ignition switch is ON (Under normal conditions, the unlock warning switch is ON when the ignition switch is ON). DTC No.


Trouble Area

Unlock warning switch ON is not detected when ignition switch is ON

B2780

Unlock warning switch assy Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy U1 Un–lock Warning Switch Assy W–B*2

W–B 1

Y

Y*2

2

D J22

J/C

F J23

Y*2

Y 10

KSW

Driver Side J/B*1 Passenger Side R/B Assy*2 13 CF

W–B*1

Y*1

8 DA

6 Y*1 DA

Center J/B

6

CA A J16 J/C

W–B W–B IP

A IO: Gasoline IL: 1CD–FTV *1: LHD *2: RHD B66226



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 when using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 when not using the hand–held tester.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. Select the item KEY SW on the hand–held tester. OK: OFF Key is in ignition key cylinder ON No key is in ignition key cylinder OK

REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY

NG

2

INSPECT UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY (a) (b)

Free

Remove the unlock warning switch. Inspect the unlock warning switch resistance. Standard: Tester Connection

Pushed

1–2

B51903

OK


NG

Switch Position

Specified Condition

Switch pushed (Key set)

Below 1

Switch free (Key removed)

10 k or higher

REPLACE UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY


3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY) (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side

T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy

Disconnect the T8 ECU and U1 switch connectors. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T8–10 (KSW) – U1–2

Below 1

U1–1 – Body ground

Below 1

U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy

B65751

NG

OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B2784

–


05B0D–03

ANTENNA COIL OPEN/SHORT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The transponder key coil is built into the transponder key amplifier and receives a key code signal from the transponder chip in the key. This signal is amplified by the amplifier and then output to the transponder key ECU. DTC No. B2784


Trouble Area Wire harness Transponder key amplifier Transponder key ECU assy

Antenna coil is open/short

WIRING DIAGRAM


I12 Transponder Key Amplifier Amplifier ANT1

1

Y–B

8

CODE 4

Y–G

11

TXCT 5

L–R

12

GND

GR–R

13

VC5

VC5 CODE

Coil

7

ANT2

TXCT AGND

B62676


1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. Select the item ANTENNA COIL on the hand–held tester. OK: NORMAL NG: FAIL OK


CHECK AND REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY


2

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER) (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY OR TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side

Disconnect the T8 ECU and I12 amplifier connectors. Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection


Specified Condition

T8–8 (VC5) – I12–1 (VC5) T8–11 (CODE) – I12–4 (CODE)

Below 1

T8–12 (TXCT) – I12–5 (TXCT) T8–13 (AGND) – I12–7 (GND) T8–8 (VC5) or I12–1 (VC5) – Body ground T8–11 (CODE) or I12–4 (CODE) – Body ground

I12 Transponder Key Amplifier

T8–12 (TXCT) or I12–5 (TXCT) – Body ground

10 k or higher

T8–13 (AGND) or I12–7 (GND) – Body ground

̱̲̳ ̴̵ ̶ ̷

NG

B64974

OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B2793

–


05B0E–03

TRANSPONDER CHIP MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a malfunction is found in a key during the key code registration or the key code is not registered normally. Replace the key when the key code registration is not performed normally and this DTC is detected. DTC No. B2793


Trouble Area Key

Transponder chip malfunction


CHECK DTC Delete the DTC (See page 05–1602). Insert the key into the ignition key cylinder. Check that no code is output. OK

NO PROBLEM

NG

2 (a) (b)

RE–REGISTER KEY Delete the DTC (See page 05–1602). Re–register the key and check that the engine starts with the key. OK

NG REPLACE KEY


NORMAL


DTC

B2794

–


05B0F–03

UNMATCHED ENCRYPTION CODE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a key with an incomplete key code is inserted into the ignition key cylinder. DTC No. B2794

DTC Detection Condition Key with incomplete key code is inserted


REPLACE KEY


Trouble Area Key


DTC

B2795

–


05B0G–03

UNMATCHED KEY CODE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a key with a key code that has not been registered in the ECU is inserted into the ignition key cylinder. DTC No. B2795


Trouble Area Key

Key with unregistered key code is inserted


DELETE DTC AND INSERT ALL PRESENTLY AVAILABLE KEYS TO CHECK WHETHER ENGINE STARTS OR NOT OK

NG REPLACE KEY THAT WILL NOT START ENGINE


NO PROBLEM (BECAUSE OF KEY RE–REGISTRATION)


–


05B0H–03

DTC

B2796

NO COMMUNICATION IN IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

DTC

B2798

COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION NO.2

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This code is stored in the memory when a key that does not have a transponder chip is inserted or if communication between the key and transponder key ECU is impossible. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B2796

No communication

Key Wire harness Transponder key amplifier (Transponder key coil) Transponder key ECU assy

B2798

Communication error

Key

WIRING DIAGRAM



1

Y–B

8

CODE 4

Y–G

11

TXCT 5

L–R

12

GND

GR–R

13

VC5

VC5 CODE

Coil

ANT2

7

TXCT AGND

B62676



–



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. Select IMMOBILISER on the hand–held tester. OK: SET Ignition switch ON UNSET Without key OK

NORMAL

NG

2 (a)

CHECK WHETHER ENGINE STARTS WITH OTHER KEYS Check whether the engine starts with the other keys for the vehicle. OK

RE–REGISTER OR REPLACE KEY THAT WILL NOT START ENGINE

NG HINT: Start the inspection from step 3 when using the hand–held tester and start from step 4 when not using the hand–held tester.

3 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will does not start the engine. Select the item ANTENNA COIL on the hand–held tester. OK: NORMAL NG: FAIL NG

OK




4

–



Wire Harness Side



Specified Condition


Below 1




10 k or higher


̱̲̳ ̴̵ ̶ ̷

NG

B64974

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)

CHECK OPERATION OF TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER After replacing the transponder key amplifier, check that the engine starts. NG



NORMAL (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER DEFECTIVE)


DTC

B2797

–


05B0I–03


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when an error occurs in normal communication. HINT: Some noise is found in the communication line. DTC No.

B2797


Trouble Area

Keys are positioned too close to each other or noise occurred in communication line

Key Wire harness Transponder key amplifier Transponder key ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM I12 Transponder Key Amplifier

CODE


Y–G 4

11

CODE

B52550


CHECK OPERATION OF TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER After replacing the transponder key amplifier, check that the engine starts. OK

NG REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY




DTC

B2799

–


05B0J–03

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when the ECM detects errors in communication between the transponder key ECU assy and the ECM or in the communication lines. This DTC is also output when an engine start is attempted while the ECU communication ID between the transponder key ECU and the ECM are different. Before troubleshooting for this DTC, make sure that there is no DTC detected in the transponder key ECU. If there is a key code–related DTC detected in the transponder key ECU, repair it first. DTC No.

B2799


Trouble Area

Error in communication between ECM and transponder key ECU, and in communication line Communication ID is different during communication with transponder key ECU

Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy Transponder key amplifier ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy

E10 ECM

IMI

IMO

30*1 27*2

GR

29*1 26*2

W

6

7

EFIO

EFII

*1: 1CD–FTV *2: Gasoline B66227



–



CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – ECM) (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY OR ECM – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy

Disconnect the T8 ECU and E10 ECM connectors. Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: 1CD–FTV Terminal No.

Specified Condition

T8–6 (EFIO) – E10–30 (IMI)

Below 1

T8–7 (EFII) – E10–29 (IMO) T8–6 (EFIO) or E10–30 (IMI) – Body ground T8–7 (EFII) or E10–29 (IMO) – Body ground

Gasoline

E10 ECM

Terminal No.

Specified Condition

T8–6 (EFIO) – E10–27 (IMI)

Below 1

T8–7 (EFII) – E10–26 (IMO) EFIO (T8–6) or IMI (E10–27) – Body ground EFII (T8–7) or IMO (E10–26) – Body ground

B66229

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

10 k or higher

HARNESS

AND

OK

2 (a)






–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CG–07

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s : Name

VIN Production Date

Customer’s Name

/

/


/

/

Date Problem First Occurred

Frequency Problem Occurs

Weather Conditions When Problem Occurred

Symptoms

Weather

km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/

Constant

Intermittent (

times a day)

Only once Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Snowy

Various/Others Outdoor Temperature

Hot Cold (Approx.

Warm C (

Cool F)

Immobiliser is not set (Engine starts with key codes other than registered key code) Engine does not start

1st Time

Normal code

Malfunction code (Code

)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CI–07

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART 1.

TRANSPONDER KEY ECU DTC CHART DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

*B2780 (05–1613)

Push Switch/Key Unlock Warning Switch Malfunction

Unlock warning switch Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy

B2784 (05–1616)

Antenna Coil Open/Short

Wire harness Transponder key amplifier Transponder key ECU assy

B2793 (05–1618)

Transponder Chip Malfunction

Key

B2794 (05–1619)

Unmatched Encryption Code

Key

B2795 (05–1620)

Unmatched Key Code

Key

No Communication in Immobiliser System

Key Transponder key amplifier Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy

B2797 (05–1624)

Communication Malfunction No. 1


B2798 (05–1621)


Key

B2796 (05–1621)

HINT: *: Except for 1AZ–FE engine 2. ECM DTC CHART NOTICE: The DTC for the immobiliser system is specified. If the other codes are output, check the DTC chart of the engine control system. DTC No. (See Page)

B2799 (05–1625)

Detection Item



Trouble Area Wire harness Key Transponder key ECU assy Transponder key amplifier ECM


–


ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CF–07

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT:

Use this procedure to troubleshoot the engine immobiliser system. The hand–held tester should be used in step 4, 5 and 7.

1


2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AND SYMPTOM CHECK (See page 05–1601)

3

CRANK ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 10 SECONDS

4

CHECK FOR DTC

(a) (b) (c)

Check for DTCs and note any codes that are output. Delete the DTC. Recheck for DTCs. Try to prompt the DTC (SFI system and engine immobiliser system) by simulating the original activity that the DTC suggested. (1) If the DTC does not reoccur, proceed to A. (2) If the DTC (SFI system) reoccurs, proceed to B. (3) If the DTC (engine immobiliser system) reoccurs, proceed to C. B

Go to SFI or ECD SYSTEM (See page 05–290 or 05–517)

C

Go to step 8

A

5 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item KEY SW in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Transponder key ECU: Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY SW

Un–lock warning switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Key is in ignition key cylinder OFF: No key is in ignition key cylinder

–


Go to DTC B2780 (See page 05–1613)


–


OK

6 (a) (b)

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1612) When problem is not listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to A. When problem is listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to B. B

Go to step 8

A

7 (a)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1602) (1) Inspect with the hand–held tester (ECU data monitor). (2) Inspect with the hand–held tester (ACTIVE TEST). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1607)

(b)

8

ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE

9

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CM–07

LOCATION LHD Models

Transponder Key Amplifier (Transponder Key Coil)

Transponder Key ECU Assy Security Indicator

Driver Side R/B Assy

ECM

Unlock Warning Switch Assy

Transponder Key ECU Assy Passenger Side R/B Assy

RHD Models


ECM

Center J/B Unlock Warning Switch Assy

B65753



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0A–03

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description (1) The ECM controls the function of the immobiliser system on the vehicle. Data of the immobiliser system and the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) can be read in the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. When trouble occurs in the immobiliser system, even though the security indicator lamp does not come on, DTCs can be checked. Therefore, the immobiliser system seems to be malfunctioning, use the hand–held tester to check for a malfunction and repair it. (b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Inspect the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro– OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with the ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 B50154

Standard: Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition

7 (Bus + line) – 5 (Signal ground)


Pulse generation

4 (Chassis ground) – Body ground

Always

Below 1

5 (Signal ground) – Body ground

Always

Below 1

16 (B+) – Body ground

Always

10 to 14 V

HINT: If the screen displays UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE after you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and used the hand–held tester, the problem may be on the vehicle side or the tester side. If communication is normal when the tester is connected to other vehicle, inspect the DLC3 of the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tester is connected to another vehicle, the problem may be in the tester itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the tester’s instruction manual. 2. Using hand–held tester: CHECK DTC (a) Checking DTCs. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (b) Clear the DTCs from memory. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Erase DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


3. CHECK DIAGNOSIS (a) Using the hand–held tester, check for DTCs. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from normal mode to check mode, all the DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode are erased. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and make a note of them. (1) Prepare the hand–held tester. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 under the instrument panel lower pad. (3) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester switch ON. (4) Use the hand–held tester to check for DTCs and freeze frame data, and make a note of them (For operating instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book). (5) Confirm the details of the DTCs. (b) Either of the following procedures will erase the DTCs and freeze frame data. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes (See the hand–held tester instruction book for operating instructions). (2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or ECU–B fuse. 4. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed on the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Read the DATA LIST, according to the display on the tester. Transponder key ECU: Item


Normal Condition

KEY SW

Un–lock warning switch signal/ ON or OFF

OFF: Key is in Ignition key cylinder ON: No key is in Ignition key cylinder

IG SW

Ignition switch signal/ ON or OFF

OFF: Ignition switch is ON or START position ON: Ignition switch is OFF or ON position

IMMOBILISER

Immobiliser system status/ SET or UNSET

UNSET: Without key SET: Ignition switch ON

RESPONSE

Transponder chip data/ NG or OK

NG: Data error OK: Data OK

FRAME



SERIAL NUMBER



ENCRYPT CODE



STATUS



BCC

Transponder chip signal/ NG or OK

NG: Incorrect data sending OK: Correct data sending

SUB KEY

Sub key code signal/ NOMATCH or MATCH

NOMATCH: Nomatch sub–key code is sent MATCH: Sub key code is sent

MASTER KEY

Master key code signal/ NOMATCH or MATCH

NOMATCH: Nomatch Master key code is sent MATCH: Master key code is sent

REGIST SUB CODE

Number of registered sub–key/ min. 0, max. 15

Number of registered sub–key

REGIST MAS CODE

Number of registered master key/ min. 0, max. 15

Number of registered master key



–


Item


Normal Condition

REG CODE SPACE

Memory space for key codes registration/ NOT FUL or FULL

NOT FUL: Possible to resister more key code FULL: Impossible to register key code any more

ANTENNA COIL

Antenna coil condition/ NORMAL or FAIL

Normal: Antenna coil is normal FAIL: Antenna coil is abnormal

5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows you to operate the relay, VSV, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Perform the ACTIVE TEST, according to the display on the tester. Transponder key ECU: Item

Test Details

SECURITY INDIC

Turn security indicator ON/OFF



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CK–07

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Symptom

Suspected Area 1. Key

2. Transponder key amplifier Engine does not start

3. Transponder key ECU assy


See Page 05–1618 05–1619 05–1620 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625 05–1616 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625 05–1613 05–1616 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625


–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0B–02

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER (COIL) I12

B65593

(a)

Disconnect the I12 amplifier connector and check the resistance between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

GND (I12–7) – Body ground


Specified Condition Below 1

Constant

If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. (b) Reconnect the I12 amplifier connector and check the resistance or voltage of each terminal of the connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

VC5 (I12–1) – GND (I12–7)

Y–B – GR–R

No key in ignition key cylinder With key

0 V 10 to 14 V

CODE(I12–4) – GND (I12–7)

Y–G – GR–R


Waveform 1

TXCT (I12–5) – GND (I12–7)

L–R – GR–R


Waveform 2



Below 1

Constant

If the result is not as specified, the amplifier may have a malfunction.

(c)

GND

B55023


Inspect using an oscilloscope. Waveform 1 (Reference): Terminal

CODE – GND

Tool Setting

10 V/DIV., 10 ms/DIV.

Condition

Ignition switch ON


–


Waveform 2 (Reference): Terminal

TXCT – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

GND

B55024

2.

CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY T8

B50659

(a)

Disconnect the T8 ECU connector and check the voltage and resistance between each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

AGND (T8–13) – Body ground


Constant

Below 1

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

IG (T8–2) – AGND (T8–13)

B–W – GR–R


KSW (T8–10) – AGND (T8–13)

Y – GR–R

+B (T8–1) – GND (T8–14)

Condition


Specified Condition

0 V 10 to 14 V 10 k or higher Below 1

If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. (b) Reconnect the T8 ECU connector and check the voltage between each terminal of the connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

KSW (T8–10) – AGND (T8–13)

Y – GR–R

VC5 (T8–8) – AGND (T8–13)

Condition

Specified Condition


10 to 14 V 0 V

Y–B – GR–R


0 V 4.6 to 5.4 V

TXCT (T8–12) – AGND (T8–13)

L–R – GR–R


Waveform 1

CODE (T8–11) – AGND (T8–13)

Y–G – GR–R


Waveform 2

EFIO (T8–6) – AGND (T8–13)

GR – GR–R


Waveform 3

EFII (T8–7) – AGND (T8–13)

W – GR–R


Waveform 4

If the result is not as specified, the ECU may have a malfunction.



(c)

GND

–



TXCT – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

B69239


CODE – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

GND

B69240


EFIO – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

GND

B69241

Waveform 4 (Reference):

GND

B69242


Terminal

EFII – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Constant


–


3. CHECK ECM 3ZZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE , 1AZ–FE engine: E12

E13

E9

E10

B66228

(a)

Disconnect the E10 and E12 ECM connectors and check the voltage or resistance between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

IMI (E10–27) – E1 (E12–7)

GR–R – BR


Waveform 1

IMO (E10–26) – E1 (E12–7)

W – BR


Waveform 2


BR – Body ground

Below 1

Constant

1CD–FTV, 1AZ–FSE engine: E13

E12

E10

E11

E9

B50745

(b)

Disconnect the E10 and E11 or E12 ECM connectors and check the voltage or continuity between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:


Wiring Color

*1 IMI (E10–30) – E1 (E12–7)

GR – BR


Waveform 1

*2 IMI (E10–27) – E1 (E11–1)

GR – BR


Waveform 1

*1 IMO (E10–29) – E1 (E12–7)

W – BR


Waveform 2

*2 IMO (E10–26) – E1 (E11–1)

W– BR


Waveform 2

*1 E1 (E12–7) – Body ground

BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

*2 E1 (E11–1)) – Body ground

BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1


Condition

Specified Condition


–


HINT: *1: 1CD–FTV engine *2: 1AZ–FSE engine If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.

(c)

GND


IMI – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

B69241


GND

B69242


Terminal

IMO – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Constant


–

KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM 05AEZ–02

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s : name VIN /

Production Date

Customer’s Name

/

Licence No. Date Vehicle Brought in

/

/




Problem Symptoms

Weather

km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/

Constant

Intermittent (

Only once Fine

Cloudy

Rainy


Hot Cold (Approx.

Key reminder buzzer does not sound


times a day)

Warm C (

Cool F))

Snowy


–

KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM

KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM 05AEY–02

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: Use this procedure to troubleshoot the key reminder warning system. The hand–held tester should be used in step 3 and 4.

1


2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AND PROBLEM SYMPTOM

3

DTC CHECK (MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM) (See page 05–1656)

(a) (b) (c)

Check for DTCs and note any codes that are output. Delete the DTC. Recheck for DTCs. Try to prompt the DTC by simulating the original activity that the DTC suggests. (1) If the DTC does not reoccur, proceed to A. (2) If the DTC reoccurs, proceed to B. B

GO TO MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (See page 05–1656)

A

4 (a) (b)

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1593) If the fault is not listed on the symptoms table, proceed to A. If the fault is listed on the symptoms table, proceed to B. B

Go to step 5

A

5 (a)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1655). (1) Inspection with the hand–held tester (ECU DATA MONITOR). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1659). On–vehicle inspection (See page 73–26).

(b) (c)

6




7

CONFIRMATION TEST

END


–



–


05C5J–01

KEY REMINDER BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ignition switch is OFF, the key is in the ignition key cylinder and the driver side door is open the integration relay activates the combination meter to cause the buzzer to sound.

WIRING DIAGRAM Center J/B D9*4 1 5 R*5 R*5 D10*5 CA CE Door Courtesy Lamp Switch (Driver Side) J/C 9 14 B B R J10 J10 IM1 IC2 R 4 R R 5 4 R* * * 1 Center J/B U1 13 6 Unlock Warning CA CF Switch Assy W–B*5 Y W–B 1 2 5 4 W–B* W–B* A

W–B*1, 2

Integration Relay 13 DB

17

8 DA

19

DCTY

KSW

J16 A W–B*3 IL

IO

IP

Instrument Panel J/B

Combination Meter Assy 14 C10

P–B

1 IC1

P–B

22 I14 MPX2

P

11 I14 MPX1

Buzzer

Meter ECU C10 13

IC1 10 P

P

20 23 18 E9 E9 E10 *3 *2 *1


ECM

A13 29*6 A15 20*7 A/C Control MPX– Assembly MPX+ A13 9*6 7 A15 10* 21 29 29 E9 E9 E10 P–B *3 *2 *1

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV *4: LHD *5: RHD *6: Except Automatic A/C *7: Automatic A/C

B68159


–



INSPECT FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY (DRIVER SIDE) When using hand–held tester, proceed to A. When not using hand–held tester, proceed to B. B

Go to step 3

A

2 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (COURTESY LAMP SWITCH) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item D DOR CTY SW in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: ON: Driver side door is open OFF: Driver side door is closed

3 (a)

OK

Go to step 6

NG

Go to step 4

CHECK FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY Put the dome lamp No. 2 switch in the door position and open the driver side door. Then check that the courtesy lamp comes on. OK

Go to step 7

NG

4

INSPECT FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY (DRIVER SIDE) (a) (b)

Free Pushed

Remove the courtesy lamp switch. Check the switch resistance. Standard: Twster Connection

1 – Swicth Body

Swicth

Specified Condition

Switch Free

10 k or higher

Switch Pushed

Below 1

Switch Body B58556

NG

OK


REPLACE FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY


5

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) – FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side DB Instrument Panel J/B Assy

Disconnect the DB J/B connector. Disconnect the D9 or D10 switch connector. Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard Tester Connection *1 DB–13 (DCTY) – D9–1 *2 DB–13 (DCTY) – D10–1 DB–13 (DCTY) – Body ground

D9*1 D10*2 Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy

Specified Condition Below 1 10 k or higher

HINT: *1: RHD *2: LHD

OK B68145

REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSY

NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

6 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item KEY UNLK WRN SW in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: ON: The key is in the ignition key cylinder OFF: No key is in the ignition key cylinder OK

NG


Go to step 9


7

–



Free

Remove the unlock warning switch. Check the switch resistance. Standard: Tester Connection

Pushed

Switch Position

Specified Condition

Free

10 k or higher

Pushed

Below 1

1–2

B68147

NG


OK

8

CHECK WIRE HARNESS (INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) – UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY) (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side

DA Instrument Panel J/B Assy

Disconnect the DA J/B connector. Disconnect the U1 switch connector. Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

DA–8 (KSW) – U1–2

Below 1

U1–1 – Body ground DA–8 (KSW) – Body ground

10 k or higher


NG B68146

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


9 (a)

–


CHECK BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) Check if the seat belt warning buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or more (See page 05–1509).

HINT: When the seat belt warning buzzer sounds, the instrument panel J/B is abnormal. NG


OK REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSY



–

KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM 05AF5–02

LOCATION LHD Models

Combination Meter Assy Warning Buzzer


Instrument Panel J/B Assy Integration Relay

Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy

RHD Models

Combination Meter Assy Warning Buzzer Center J/B

Instrument panel J/B Assy Integration Relay


Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy B67412



–


PRE–CHECK 1. USING HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: The hand–held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which records the monitored data. Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. 2. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator etc. without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Read the DATA LIST according to the display on tester. Standard (Integuration relay): Item

MeasurementItem/Display (Range)

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY UNLK WRN SW

Unlock warning switch signal/ ON or OFF


–

D DOOR CTY SW

Driver side door courtesy switch signal/ ON or OFF

ON: Driver side door is open OFF: Driver side door is closed

–



–





Suspected Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Unlock warning switch assy Front door courtesy lamp switch (Driver side) Instrument panel junction block assy (Integration relay) Combination meter Wire harness

See Page 05–1594 05–1594 05–1591 – –


–


TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)

Vehicle Rear Side

Vehicle Front Side

DB DA DN

Integration Relay DA

DB

DN

B68141



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the DA, DB and DN J/B connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) B (DB–16) – Body ground

Wiring Color

Body ground E (DA–9) – Body ground KSW (DA–8) – Body ground

Specified Condition

W–R – Body ground *1 B–G – Body ground

B (DN–1) (DN 1) –

Condition

10 to 14 V

Constant

*2 B–L – Body ground

10 to 14 V


Constant

Y – Body ground

No key is inserted in ignition key cylinder Key inserted

Below 1 10 k or higher Below 1

HINT: *1: Except 1CD–FTV *2: 1CD–FTV If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. (c) Reconnect the DA, DB and DN J/B connectors. (d) Check the voltage of each terminal of the connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

DCTY (DB–13) – Body ground

R – Body ground

Drive side door CLOSED OPEN


If the result is not as specified, the J/B may have a malfunction.



–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

DTC

B1214

DOOR SYSTEM COMMUNICATION BUS MALFUNCTION (+B SHORT)

DTC

B1215

DOOR SYSTEM COMMUNICATION BUS MALFUNCTION (GND SHORT)

05C5P–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTCs B1214 and B1215 are output when +B and the body ground is short–circuited on the communication bus. Detecting this condition disables all the BEAN communication and outputs some DTCs. DTC No.

B1214

B1215


Trouble Area

Communication circuit and +B battery system short

ECM A/C control assy (A/C ECU) Combination meter assy Theft warning ECU assy Wire harness Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay)

Communication circuit and body ground short

ECM A/C control assy (A/C ECU) Combination meter Theft warning ECU assy Wire harness Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay)



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay) A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) P–B

20 29 A15 A13

10

9 A15 A13 *2 *1

*2

P

10 IC1

P

11 I14

MPX1

*1

29*3 E10 29*4 E9 21*5 E9

ECM

18*3 E10 23*4 E9 20*5 E9

P

Combination Meter Assy (Combination Meter ECU) 13 C10

14 C10

1 P–B

IC1

22 P–B

I14

MPX2

C10 15 *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6:

Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV w/ Theft Deterrent System

P–L*6

T6

31

MPX

Theft Warning ECU Assy

B67596



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: Disconnect connectors in operational sequence and start the next operation after the connector is connected.

1 (a)

CHECK DTC (THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY) Check whether the outputs of the DTC stops when the theft warning ECU connector is disconnected. Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU)

Combination Meter Assy (Combination Meter ECU)

ECM


B67598

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the theft warning ECU is malfunctioning. YES NO


REPLACE THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY


2 (a)

–


CHECK DTC (COMBINATION METER ECU AND WIRE HARNESS) Check whether the outputs of the DTC stops when the combination meter ECU connector is disconnected.

Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)


Combination Meter Assy Theft Warning ECU Assy (Combination Meter ECU)

ECM

B67599

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the combination meter ECU itself or the wire harness between the combination meter ECU and the theft warning ECU is malfunctioning. NO YES


Go to step 4


3 (a) (b)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COMBINATION METER ECU – THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter ECU and theft warning ECU connectors. Check the wire harness (MPX line) between the combination ECU and theft warning ECU.


C10 connector


ECM

T6 connector


B69061

(1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Check the voltage between the wire harness (MPX line) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition

BEAN (SECURITY) (C10–15) or MPX (T6–31) – Body ground

0V

If the output voltage is not 0 V, the wire harness (MPX line) may be short–circuited with +B. (3) Check the resistance between the wire harness (MPX line) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition


10 k or higher

When the resistance is 10 k or higher, the wire harness (MPX line) and body ground may be short–circuited with the body ground. NO

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

YES REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU)


HARNESS

AND


4 (a)

–


CHECK DTC (ECM) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the ECM connector is disconnected.




ECM

B67600

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the ECM is malfunctioning. YES NO


REPLACE ECM


5 (a)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COMBINATION METER ECU – ECM) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the E10* 1 or E9*2 connector of the ECM and the C10 connector of the combination meter ECU are disconnected.


C10

E9*1 or E10* 2



ECM

B67601

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the wire harness between the E10*1 or E9*2 connector of the ECM and the C10 connector of the combination meter ECU is malfunctioning. *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: Except 1AZ–FSE YES

NO


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


6 (a)

–


CHECK DTC (A/C ECU) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the A/C ECU connector is disconnected. Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)



ECM


B67972

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the A/C ECU is malfunctioning. YES

NO


REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY (A/C ECU)


7 (a)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (A/C ECU – ECM) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the A13* 1 or A15* 2 connector of the A/C ECU and the E10* 3 or E9*4 connector of the ECM are disconnected. Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)

A13* 1 or A15* 2

Air Conditioning Control Assy (A/C ECU)

E9*3 or E10* 4


ECM

B67973

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the wire harness between the A13* 1 or A15* 2 connector of the A/C ECU and the E10* 3 or E9*4 connector of the ECM is malfunctioning. *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: Except 1AZ–FSE YES

NO


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


8

(a) (b)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (INTEGRATION RELAY – A/C ECU) (INTEGRATION RELAY – COMBINATION METER ECU) Disconnect the A/C ECU, combination meter ECU and integration relay connectors. Check the wire harness (MPX lines) between the integration relay and A/C ECU as well as in between the integration relay and combination ECU.




ECM

B67602

(1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Check the voltage between the wire harness (MPX lines) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition

Integration relay or A/C ECU – Body ground

0V

Integration relay or combination meter ECU – Body ground

If the output voltage is not 0 V, the wire harness (MPX line) may be short–circuited with +B. (3) Check the resistance between the wire harness (MPX lines) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition


10 k or higher


When the resistance is 10 k or higher, the wire harness (MPX line) and body ground may be short–circuited with the body ground. NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)


AND


DTC

B1261

–


05C5Q–01

ECM (ENGINE ECU) COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1261 is output when communication between the ECM and integration relay stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1261

DTC Detection Condition No communication from ECM for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area ECM Wire harness


–


WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy (Combination Meter ECU)

Except for 1CD–FTV

ECM

13 BEAN C10 (EFI)

23 E9

P

*1, 3

18 E10 MPX1 *2

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) 9 10 MPX+ A13 A15 *5 *4 12 B–R B–R

8 IK1

B–R

EA1 3 2 IP1 IE4 *7 *6

D

B–R

4

2

1

4

D

D

B–W

J/C

4

*7

2 EFI Relay 3

J28 *7 D J28 *7

D J14 *6 D J14 *6

E9

+B

2

B–R*2

B–Y

E9

+B2

3 E9

BATT

*6

B–Y

BR*1, 2, 3

1 7 E12 E11 *1, 3

1

*2

1

B–R*2

7 7 IO1 IE3


*1, 3

29 E10 MPX2

B–R*1, 3

J28 J14 *7 *6 Engine Room R/B No. 4 EFI NO.1

29 E9

P–B

E1

*2

5 Engine Room J/B No. 4

4

4 GR

4A 1

GR*8 B–Y 1

To A/F Relay

4B 1 B–G

2 To terminal MREL of ECM

W–B

EFI

1

Main

1A 1 Battery

EC

B–G Engine Room R/B

EF*1 EE*2 EH*3 *1: 1AZ–FE *2: 1AZ–FSE *3: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *4: Except Automatic A/C *5: Automatic A/C *6: LHD *7: RHD *8: Unleaded Gasoline B67805



–



1CD–FTV

BEAN (EFI)

13 C10

ECM P

20 E9

MPX1

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) 9 10 MPX+ A13 A15 *3

W–B Engine Room R/B EC

2

B–Y

1

1 EFI MAIN Relay

8 IK1

B–W

EE1

7 7 IE3 IO1 *1

E9

MPX2

*4

10 B–W

21 P–B

1 B–W

B–Y

E9

+B

2 E10 BATT

*2

3

BR 5

1

7 E12 E1

1

1

B–Y To terminal MREL of ECM

Engine Room R/B


1 2 1

EFI

1A

1 B

EI

3

3 B FL Main

*1: LHD *2: RHD *3: Except Automatic A/C *4: Automatic A/C

Battery

B67806



1

–


CHECK RESISTANCE OF COMMUNICATION LINE (a)

Wire Harness Side

(b) E10*2 ECM

Disconnect the E9 or E10 ECM, C10 and A13 or A15 ECU connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: 1AZ–FSE Tester Connection

Specified Condition

E10–18 (MPX1) – C10–13 (BEAN) Below 1

*5 E10–29 (MPX2) – A13–9 (MPX+) *6 E10–29 (MPX2) – A15–10 (MPX+)

1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE E9*1, 3, 4 ECM

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

E9–23 (MPX1) – C10–13 (BEAN) Below 1


1CD–FTV Tester Connection

Specified Condition

E9–20 (MPX1) – C10–13 (BEAN) Below 1

*5 E9–21 (MPX2) – A13–9 (MPX+)

C10 Combination Meter Assy (Combination Meter ECU)

*6 E9–21 (MPX2) – A15–10 (MPX+)

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FE *2: 1AZ–FSE *3: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *4: 1CD–FTV *5: Except Automatic A/C *6: Automatic A/C

A13*5 A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU)


B68027

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


2

–


CHECK ECM (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side E10 ECM

Disconnect the E10 or E9 ECM connector. Check the voltage between the wire harness side connectors and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

+B (E9–1) – Body ground *1 +B2 (E9–2) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

*1 BATT (E9–3) – Body ground *2 BATT (E10–2) – Body ground

HINT: *1: Except 1CD–FTV *2: 1CD–FTV

E9 ECM

B68150

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

CHECK ECM (GROUND) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side E12*1 ECM

Disconnect the E12 or E11 ECM connector. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

*1 E12–7 (E1) – Body ground

Below 1


HINT: *1: Except 1AZ–FSE *2:1AZ–FSE E11*2 ECM

NG B68151

OK REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B1262

–


05C5S–01

A/C ECU COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1262 will be output when the communication between the A/C ECU and the integration relay stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1262

DTC Detection Condition No communication from A/C ECU for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area A/C control assy (A/C ECU) Wire harness


–


WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU)

Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay) 11 MPX1 I14

10

P

20 29 A15 A13 MPX– *1 *2

P

IC1

ECM 21 29 29 MPX2 E9 E9 E10 *5

*3

*4

Fuse Block Assy 4 5 IP1 IE4 *7 *6

Center J/B

ECU–B 2

B–W

6

1

2

10 9 MPX+ A13 A15 2 *1 *

P–B

6

10 CC

W–R

7 CF

W–R

24 2 A16 A13 +B *1 *2

B–W 1 13 40 A16 A13 GND

W–B*7

2 DCC Engine Room R/B

*2

*1

1 W–B*6

1A 1 *3, 4 B–G

Engine Room J/B No. 4*3, 4

B*5 Engine Room R/B No. 3*5

4A

3

Center J/B CG 3

1 A J17 J/C

4B 1

3 B*5

A B–G*3, 4

CA

6

W–B*7

Main A

W–B*6

J15 J/C Battery IK

IP

*1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: LHD *7: RHD

B67808



1

–



Wire Harness Side

(b) A13*1 Air Conditioning Control Assy

Disconnect the A13 or A15, E10 or E9 and I14 connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: 1AZ–FSE Tester Connection

Specified Condition

*1 A13–29 (MPX–) – I14–11 (MPX1) *2 A15–20 (MPX–) – I14–11 (MPX1)

Below 1

*1 A13–9 (MPX+) – E10–29 (MPX2)

A15*2 Air Conditioning Control Assy

*2 A15–10 (MPX+) – E10–29 (MPX2)

1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE Tester Connection

Specified Condition

*1 MPX– (A13–29) – MPX1 (I14–11) *2 MPX– (A15–20) – MPX1 (I14–11)

Below 1

*1 MPX+ (A13–9) – MPX2 (E9–29) *2 MPX+ (A15–10) – MPX2 (E9–29)

I14 Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)


Specified Condition


Below 1


HINT: *1: Except automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV

E10*3 ECM

E9*4, 5 ECM

B68152


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


2

–


CHECK AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY (A/C ECU) (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side A13*1 A/C Control Assy

Disconnect the A13 or A16 ECU connector. Check the voltage between the wire harness side connectors and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

*1 A13–2 (+B) – Body ground

10 to 14 V


*1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C

A16*2 A/C Control Assy

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

B68404

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

CHECK AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY (A/C ECU) (GROUND) (a) (b)



Specified Condition

*1 A13–40 (GND) – Body ground

10 to 14 V




NG B68404

OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B1269

–


05AEV–02

THEFT DETERRENT ECU COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1269 is output when communication between the theft warning ECU and the combination meter stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1269

DTC Detection Condition No communication from theft deterrent ECU for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area Theft warning ECU assy Wire harness


–




15 BEAN (SECURITY) C10

31 T6

P–L

MPX

Fuse Block Assy 5 B–W

IP1

F

DOME 6

1

W–R

6

J26

J/C

H J27

W–R

2 T6 +B1

2

B–W 1 W–B


29 T6

E

1 1A

1

*2 B

*1 B–G

Center J/B

Engine Room R/B No.

Engine Room J/B No. 4*1

3*2

3

4A 1

3

4B 1

CG 9

CA

6

B*2 B–G*1 Main

W–B *1: Except 1CD–FTV *2: 1CD–FTV

Battery IP

B67807



1

–


CHECK RESISTANCE OF COMMUNICATION LINE (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side

T6 Theft Warning ECU Assy

Disconnect the T6 and C10 ECU connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T6–31 (MPX) – C10–15 (BEAN) (Security)

Below 1


B68155

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

2

CHECK THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side T6 Theft Warning ECU Assy

Disconnect the T6 ECU connector. Check the voltage between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T6–2 (+B1) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

NG B65849

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


3

–


CHECK THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY (GROUND) (a) (b)


Disconnect the T6 ECU connector. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard:

NG B65849

OK REPLACE THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY


Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T6–29 (E) – Body ground

Below 1

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B1271

–


05C5T–01

COMBINATION METER ECU COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1271 is output when communication between the combination meter and integration relay stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1271

DTC Detection Condition No communication from Combination meter ECU for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area Combination meter assy (Combination meter ECU) Wire harness


–



ECM MPX1

18 23 20 E10 E9 E9 *2 *3 *1

22 MPX2 I14


13 BEAN C10 (EFI)

P

1 IC1

P–B

P–B

14 BEAN C10 (BODY)


31 T6

MPX

15 BEAN C10 (SECURITY)

P–L*4

IE4 4*5 IP1 5*6 Fuse Block Assy

B–W B–W

1

F

DOME

W–R

6

6 1

J10

2

F J26

J/C

H W–R*5 20 C11 J11

+B

F


1

1A

J26 W–R*6

1

B*3

B–G*1, 2

W–B*5

Engine Room R/B No. 3*3

3

3


4A

1

4B

1

W–B*6

A

A

B*3

17 POWER C10 EARTH

B–G*1, 2

J16 J/C

Main

A

J17 J/C A A

J15 J/C

W–B Battery IL*3, 5 IO*1, 2, 5

W–B*6

IK

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV *4: w/ Theft Deterrent System *5: LHD *6: RHD B67809



1

–



Wire Harness Side C10 Combination Meter Assy (Combination Meter ECU)

Disconnect the C10, E10 or E9, T6 and I14 connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

*1 C10–13 (BEAN) (EFI) – E10–18 (MPX1) *2 C10–13 (BEAN) (EFI) – E9–23 (MPX1) *3 C10–13 (BEAN) (EFI) – E9–20 (MPX1)

Below 1

C10–14 (BEAN) (BODY) – I14–22 (MPX2)

E10*1 ECM

C10–15 (BEAN) (SECURITY) – T6–31 (MPX)

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV E9*2, 3 ECM



B68156


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


2

–


CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)


Disconnect the C11 ECU connector. Check the voltage between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

C11–20 (+B) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

NG B67965

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) (GROUND) (a) (b)


B68158

Disconnect the C10 ECU connector. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

C10–17 (POWER EARTH) – Body ground

Below 1

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) (See page 05–1509)


AND


–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05AEQ–02

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the chart below (Proceed to the page given for that circuit). DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Door System Communication Bus Malfunction (+B Short)

Wire harness ECM A/C control assy (A/C ECU) Theft warning ECU assy Combination meter assy (Combination meter ECU) Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay)

B1215 (05–1670)

Door System Communication Bus Malfunction (GND Short)


B1261 (05–1680)

ECM Communication Stop

Wire harness ECM

B1262 (05–1685)

A/C ECU Communication Stop

Wire harness A/C assy (A/C ECU)

B1269 (05–1689)

Theft Deterrent ECU Communication Stop

Wire harness Theft warning ECU assy

B1271 (05–1693)

Combination Meter ECU Communication Stop

Wire harness Combination meter assy (Combination meter ECU)

B1214 (05–1670)



–


MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05AEO–02


Use this procedure to troubleshoot the key reminder warning system. The hand–held tester should be used at step 3 and 4.

1


2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AND SYMPTOM

3


(a) (b) (c)


Go to step 5

A

4 (a) (b)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1655). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1659).

5


END



–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05C5K–01

LOCATION

Gasoline

Engine Room R/B No. 4 EFI Relay EFI No. 1 Fuse Engine Room J/B No. 4

Engine Room R/B DCC Fuse EFI Fuse

1CD–FTV


Engine Room R/B EFI MAIN Relay EFI Fuse DCC Fuse

B70602



–


Combination Meter Assy Combination Meter ECU LHD Models Center J/B

ECM A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU)

Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse Dome Fuse Instrument Panel J/B Assy Integration Relay RHD Models

Combination Meter Assy Combination Meter ECU

Theft Warning ECU Assy Center J/B

ECM


A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse Dome Fuse B67413



–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05AEP–02

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

2. (a) (b)

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (BEAN) The BEAN communication line is used to control the ECM, the A/C control assy (A/C ECU), the combination meter assy (combination meter ECU) and the theft warning ECU, which are connected to the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay). If there is a short–circuit (bus–down) in the line, the communication to the system that has a short–circuit (bus–down)will be disabled and the DTC concerning the system will be output from the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay). CHECK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION Check the battery voltage. Standard: 10 to 14 V Inspect the DTC output. (1) Check a DTC for the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) by connecting the hand–held tester to the DLC3 and turning the ignition switch ON.

HINT:

When DTC check is impossible, check the following items. The display shows communication error (refer to new diagnostic system and the operations when an error occurrs.) (2) When the display shows DTCs of the ECU unconnected and the communication bus defective, perform the inspection depending on the type of troubleshooting.

HINT: If another DTC is output, refer to the DTC chart and check the applicable section.



–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05C5M–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integuration Relay) Vehicle Front Side

Vehicle Rear Side

DB DA DN

I14

DB

DA

DN

I14

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) Except Automatic A/C

A13

Automatic A/C

A15

Combination Meter Assy (Combination Meter ECU) C10

B67982



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the DA, DB, DN, I14 J/B, A13 or A15 and C10 ECU connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) B (DN–1) (DN 1) – Body ground B (DB–16) – Body ground E (DA–9) – Body ground *3 MPX1 (I14–11) – MPX– (A13–29) *4 MPX1 (I14–11) – MPX– (A15–20) MPX2 (I14–22) – BEAN (BODY) (C10–14)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

*1 B–G – Body ground

Constant

10 to 14 V


Constant

10 to 14 V


Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1


P–P

P–B – P–B

HINT: *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: Except automatic A/C *4: Automatic A/C If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



2.

–


CHECK ECM FOR 1AZ–FSE ECM E11

E9

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) Automatic A/C

Except Automatic A/C

A15

A13


B67959

(a) (b)

Disconnect the A13 or A15, C10 ECU, E9, E10 and E11 ECM connectors. Check the voltage and resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

+B2 (E9–2) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E11–1)

B–Y – BR

MPX1 (E10–18) – BEAN (C10–13) *1 MPX2 (E10–29) – MPX+ (A13–9) *2 MPX2 (E10–29) – MPX+ (A15–10)

P–P P B–P P–B P–B B

HINT: *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



3.

–


CHECK ECM FOR 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE ECM E9

E12


Automatic A/C


A15

A13


B67962

(a) (b)

Disconnect the A13 or A15, C10 ECU, E9 and E12 ECM connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

B–R – BR

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

MPX1 (E9–23) – BEAN (C10–13)

P–P

*1 MPX2 (E9–29) – MPX+ (A13–9) *2 MPX2 (E9–29) – MPX+ (A15–10)

P B–P P–B P–B B




4.

–


CHECK ECM FOR 1CD–FTV ECM E12

E10

E9



A15

A13


B67960

(a) (b)

Disconnect the A13 or A15, C10 ECU, E9, E10 and E12 ECM connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

B–W – BR

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

MPX1 (E9–20) – BEAN (C10–13)

P–P



HINT: *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


5.

–


CHECK A/C CONTROL ASSY EXCEPT AUTO (A/C ECU) A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) A13

Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay) I14

ECM (1AZ–FSE)

E10

ECM (1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE) E9

ECM (1CD–FTV) E9

B67983



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the A13 ECU, E9 or E10 ECM and I14 J/B connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

GND (A13–40) – Body ground

W–B – body ground

Constant

Below 1

+B (A13–2) – GND (A13–40)

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

MPX– (A13–29) – MPX1 (I14–11)

P–P

*1 MPX+ (A13–9) – MPX2 (E10–29)

P–B – P–B

*2 MPX+ (A13–9) – MPX2 (E9–29)

Constant

Below 1

P–B – P–B

*3 MPX+ (A13–9) – MPX2 (E9–21)

P–B – P–B

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



6.

–


CHECK A/C CONTROL ASSY FOR AUTO (A/C ECU) A15


A16


ECM (1AZ–FSE) E10


ECM (1CD–FTV) E9

B67984



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the A15, A16 ECU, E9 or E10 ECM and I14 J/B connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition



Constant

Below 1

+B (A16–24) – GND (A16–13)

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

MPX– (A15–20) – MPX1 (I14–11)

P–P

*1 MPX+ (A15–10) – MPX2 (E10–29)

P–B – P–B

*2 MPX+ (A15–10) – MPX2 (E9–29)

Constant

Below 1

P–B – P–B

*3 MPX+ (A15–10) – MPX2 (E9–21)

P–B – P–B

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. 7. CHECK THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY Theft Warning ECU Assy T6


B69311

(a) (b)

Disconnect the T6 and C10 ECU connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) E (T6–29) – Body ground +B1 (T6–2) – E (T6–29) MPX (T6–31) – BEAN (Security)(C10–15)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


Constant

Below 1

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 – 14 V

P–L – P–L

Constant

Below 1

If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


8.

–


CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) Combination Meter Assy (Conbination Meter ECU) C10

C11

ECM (1AZ–FSE) E10


ECM (1CD–FTV) E9

Theft Warning ECU Assy T6


B67985



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the C10, C11, T6, ECU, E10 or E9 ECM and I14 connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

POWER EARTH (C10–17) – Body ground


Constant

Below 1

+B (C11–20) – POWER EARTH (C10–17)

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

*1 BEAN (EFI) (C10–13) – MPX1 (E10–18)

P–P

*2 BEAN (EFI) (C10–13) – MPX1 (E9–23)

P–P

*3 BEAN (EFI) (C10–13) – MPX1 (E9–20)

P–P

Constant

Below 1

BEAN (BODY) (C10–14) – MPX2 (I14–22)

P–B – P–B

*4 BEAN (SECURITY) (C10–15) – MPX (T6–31)

P–L – P–L

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV *4: w/ Theft deterrent system If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3T–01

A NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY DOES NOT OPERATE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS Check obstruction. (1) Check that there are no obstructions between the navigation controller assy and the infrared ray light emission portion of the multi–display (CRT display) display. Standard: Normally returns OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

CHECK BATTERY(NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY) Check battery. (1) Check that the dry–cell battery used for the navigation controller assy is not dead. Standard: It is not dead NG

BATTERY IS DEAD

OK

3

CLEAN THE INFRARED RAY EMITTED PORTION (a)

Clean the infrared ray emitted portion. (1) Clean the infrared ray emitted portion on the multi– display (CRT display) display and navigation controller assy. (2) Check whether the same malfunction occurs. Standard: The function returns to normal.

OK I35660

DIRT AT PORTION

THE

INFRARED

NG

4

REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY Standard: Normally returns OK

SYSTEM OK

NG REPLACE MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY (See page 67–6)


RAY

EMITTED


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3K–01

AVC–LAN CIRCUIT WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display 10 CTX– M2 5 CTX+ M2

TX3+ TX3–

Navigation ECU 10 N4 TX– 5 N4 TX+

LG V

12 M1 24 M1

Body ECU (Combination Meter Assy) 3 C10 4 C10

G–Y G

Radio Receiver Assy GTX+ GTX–

5 M1 18 M1

9 R6 TX+ 10 R6 TX–

P LG

I34725


INSPECT APPARATUS Choose the apparatus to be inspected. Apparatus

Go to step

Radio receiver assy

A

Navigation ECU

B

Body ECU (Combination Meter Assy)

C

A


B

Go to step 4

C

Go to step 6


2 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SERVICE CHECK MODE(RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) Perform the service check. (1) Start the diagnosis system and read the check result for the radio receiver assy. Standard: A

”NCON” is displayed or nothing is displayed (AUDIO H/U)

B

”GOOD” is displayed

B

REPLACE MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY (See page 67–6)

A

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY – RADIO RECEIVER ASSY)

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display: M2 GTX+

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display) display and radio receiver assy. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Specified condition

GTX+ – TX+

Continuity

GTX– – TX–

Continuity

(2)

Check for a short between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

GTX– Radio Receiver Assy:

R12

NG TX– TX+

I35665

Tester connection

Specified condition

GTX+ – Body ground

No continuity

GTX– – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (See page 67–5)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SERVICE CHECK MODE(NAVIGATION ECU) Perform the service check. (1) Start the diagnosis system and read the check result for the navigation ECU. Standard: A

”NCON” is displayed or nothing display (NAVI)

B

”GOOD” is display

B


A

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY – NAVIGATION ECU)

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display:

M3

CTX+

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display) display and navigation ECU. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Specified condition

CTX+ – TX+

Continuity

CTX– – TX–

Continuity

(2)


CTX– Navigation ECU:

N7

Tester connection

Specified condition

CTX+ – Body ground

No continuity

CTX– – Body ground

No continuity

TX+

NG

TX– I35666

OK REPLACE NAVIGATION ECU (See page 67–27)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SERVICE CHECK MODE(BODY ECU) Perform the service check. (1) Start the diagnosis system and read check result for body ECU. Standard: A

”NCON” is displayed or nothing display (BODY)

B


B


A

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY – BODY ECU) (a)


M1

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display) display and body ECU (Combination meter assy). (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

TX3+ TX3– Body ECU (Combination Meter Assy): GTX+ GTX– C10

I35875

Tester connection

Specified condition

TX3+ – GTX+

Continuity

TX3– – GTX–

Continuity

(2)

Check short between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

NG

Tester connection

Specified condition

TX3+ – Body ground

No continuity

TX3– – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY (See page 71–21)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3M–01

COLOR ON NAVIGATION SCREEN IS UNUSUAL (RGB SIGNAL ERROR) WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display VG

6 M2

Navigation ECU (Shielded)

6 N4 VG

8 SYNC M2

W

8 N4 SYNC

B

3 M2

B

3 N4 B

G

7 M2

G

7 N4 G

R

2 M2

R

2 N4 R

VR

M2

Y

1 N4 VR

1

I34723



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY)DISPLAY – NAVIGATION ECU)

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display: M2 B

R

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display)display and navigation ECU. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

VR VG G

Navigation ECU:

Tester connection

Specified condition

VG – VG

Continuity

VR – VR

Continuity

R–R

Continuity

G–G

Continuity

B–B

Continuity

(2)


N4 B

G

R VR VG I35666

NG

Tester connection

Specified condition

VG – Body ground

Continuity

VR – Body ground

Continuity

R – Body ground

No continuity

G – Body ground

No continuity

B – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

2

REPLACE MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY (See page 67–6) Standard: Normally returns. NG

OK SYSTEM OK


REPLACE NAVIGATION ECU (See page 67–27)

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3N–01

FRONT SPEAKER (DRIVER SIDE) ONLY IS NOT HEARD WIRING DIAGRAM Radio Receiver Assy 6 FL– R4 2 FL+ R4 5 FR– R4 1 FR+ R4

Navigation ECU 10 N3 AUI– 1 N3 AUI+

LG (*1) R (*1) R (*2) W (*2) T16 Tweeter Front LH L

F21 Front No.1 Speaker Assy LH

2 1

1 LG 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

V

6 IA1

P

1 IA1

P (*1)

L

6 IL1

L (*2)

LG

1 IL1

2

4

T17 Tweeter Front RH V F22 Front No.1 Speaker Assy RH

2 1

1 P 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

2

4

V (*1)

11 N3 AUO– 2 N3 AUO+

LG (*2)

*1: LHD *2: RHD I34726



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


CHECK SETTING(THE VOLUME OF THE NAVIGATION VOICE SOUND) Check the settings. (1) Set the volume MAX at the voice sound settings on the menu. Standard: ”This system will guide you in this volume” is produced. OK

Go to step 4

NG

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(NAVIGATION ECU – RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) (a)

Navigation ECU:

Disconnect the connector between the navigation ECU and radio receiver assy. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

N3 AUI+ AUI– Radio Receiver Assy: R4 FL+

NG FR–

OK


I35667


FL–*1, FR–*2

Continuity

– AUI–

*1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models (2) Check for a short between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

FR+

FL–

Tester connection FL+*1, FR+*2 – AUI+

Tester connection

Specified condition

AUI+ – Body ground

No continuity

AUI– – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER ASSY(FL+(*1), FL–(*1), FR+(*2), FR–(*2), GND)

FL+

(a) (b)

FR+ R4

FL–

FR–

Remove the radio receiver assy. Using an oscilloscope, check the signal waveform between the terminals FL+*1, FL–*1, FR+*2, FR–*2 and GND of stereo component amplifier assy. *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models

I35668

Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

– GND

While voice sound is being produced

A waveform synchronized with sound is output

FL–*1, FL–*2 – GND



FL+*1, FR+*2

NG

REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (See page 67–5)

OK

4


(a)

Resistance check (1) Check resistance between the terminals of the front No.1 speaker assy. Standard: 4 NOTICE: The speaker should not be removed for checking NG

OK


REPLACE FRONT NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY (See page 67–10)


5

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(NAVIGATION ECU – FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSY) (a)

Navigation ECU:

Disconnect the connectors from the navigation ECU and front No.1 speaker assy. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

N3

Tester connection

Specified condition

AUO+ – 1

Continuity

AUO– – 2

Continuity

(2) AUO+ AUO– Front No. 1 Speaker Assy LH: F21


Front No. 1 Speaker Assy RH: F22

Tester connection

Specified condition

AUO+ – Body ground

No continuity

AUO– – Body ground

No continuity

NG I33631



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3E–01



Physical address

Logical address


1. RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (Physical address: 190) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, this code may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting an engine. *2: This code is stored in 180 sec. after the power supply connector is pulled out after engine start. *3: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after engine start. *4: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again in 1 min. after engine start. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition

Countermeasure and inspected parts

D5 *1

Registered component disconnected

Component shown by sub–code is or was disconnected from system with ignition switch ACC or ON. Communication with component shown by sub–code is not ensured when engine is started.

Check harness for power supply of component shown by sub–code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub–code.

D6 *1

Absence of Master

Component in which this code is recorded has been disconnected from system with ignition switch ACC or ON. Or, when this code was recorded, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected.

Check harness for power supply system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display.

D8 *2

No response to connection check

Component shown by sub–code is or was disconnected from system after engine is started.


D9 *1

Last Mode Error

Component operated (sound and/or image was provided) before engine stop is or was disconnected with ignition switch ACC or ON.


DA


No response is identified when changing mode (audio and visual mode change). Detected when sound and picture does not change by button operation

Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub–code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub–code. If error occurs again, replace component shown by auxiliary code

DB *1

Mode Status Error


Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub–code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub–code.

DC *4

Transmission Error

Transmission to component shown by sub– code has been failed. (This code does not necessarily mean actual failure.)

If same sub–code is recorded in other component(s), check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code.

DD *4


After engine is started, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected from system.

Check harness for power supply system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. If this error occurs frequently, replace multi–display (CRT display) display.


05–1454 DIAGNOSTICS DTC

Diagnosis item

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Condition


DE *3


After engine start, slave component has been disconnected.


DF *5

Master Error

Due to defective condition of component with a display, master function is switched to audio equipment. Error occurs in communication between sub–master (audio) and master component.

Check harness for power supply of multi– display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display.

E0 *1




E1 *1

Audio processor ON error

While source equipment is operating, AMP output is stopped.


E2


E3 *1


Registration Request command is output from slave component. Receiving Connection Check Instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.


E4 *1

Multiple Frame Abort

Multiple frame transmission is aborted.


(b)

Error occurs in ON/OFF controlling command from multi–display (CRT display) display.

Replace multi–display (CRT display) display.

Logical address: 21 (Switch)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition


10

Panel Switch Error

Error in panel switch input part is detected. (Error in switch control part, or internal communication error with switch control part is detected.)

Inspect all switches on panel switch test screen in display check mode. If any of them does not function, replace radio receiver assy. If all switches function without problem, observe them for a while.

11

Touch Switch Error

Error in touch switch sensor is detected. (Light level of LED is detected to be less than a fixed value.)

Inspect all touch switches on touch switch test screen in display check mode. If any of lines do not react, replace radio receiver assy. If all of vertical and horizontal lines react normally, observe them for a while.

(c)

Logical address: 61 (Cassette tape player’s switch)

DTC 40

(d)

Diagnosis item Mechanical Error of Media

Condition Malfunction due to mechanical failure is identified. Or cassette tape is cut or entangled.

Countermeasure and inspected parts Inspect cassette tape. Replace radio receiver assy.


DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


No Disc Readout



44

CD player Error



45

EJECT Error





Inspect CD.

42

46



Diagnosis item

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Diagnosis content

47

CD Player Temp. Too High

Readout cannot be done because temperature around player’s pick–up (reading part) is too high.

48

CD Player Excess Current

Excess current is applied radio receiver assy.

Countermeasure and inspected parts With IG switch OFF, leave vehicle in cool shaded place for a while and recheck. After deleting the DTC memory, if same code is detected, replace radio receiver assy. Replace radio receiver assy.

2. NAVIGATION ECU (Physical address: 178) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, this code may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting the engine. *2: This code is stored in 210 seconds after the master component is turned off with the ignition switch ACC or ON. *3: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned in 1 min. again after engine start. *4: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after engine start. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) Condition


D6 *1

DTC

Absence of Master

Diagnosis item


Check harness for power supply system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for power supply system of navigation ECU. Check harness for communication system of navigation ECU.

D7 *2

Connection Check Error



DC *3

Transmission Error



DD *4


Component that is to be master has been disconnected after engine start.

Check harness for power supply system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. If error occurs frequently, replace multi– display (CRT display) display.

E0 *1



Since this DTC is provided for engineering, it may be detected when no actual failure exists.

E2


E3 *1



Error is detected in ON/OFF control command from multi–display (CRT display) display . Registration Request command is output from slave component. Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.




Diagnosis item

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Condition


DF *4

Master Error



E4 *1




(b)

Logical address: 58 (Navigation ECU)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition


10

Gyro Error

Error in gyro sensor is detected. (Abnormal value in voltage output from sensor is detected for more than specified time.)

Replace navigation ECU.

42

Map Disc Error

Data cannot be read for a certain time due to scratches or dirt on disc surface or insertion of wrong disc.

Inspect disc and replace as necessary. (Visually check disc surface and wipe it with a soft cloth.)

43

Vehicle Signal Error

Input error of vehicle signal is detected. (When no vehicle signal has been input for a certain time.)

Inspect wire harness. If wire harness is normal, replace navigation ECU.

(c)

Logical address: 58 (GPS receiver)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition


11

GPS Receiver Error

Operation error of GPS receiver is detected.

At an outdoor site with a clear view, operate the system to display GPS data. If GPS mark is not properly displayed after 15 min. or more, replace navigation ECU.

40

GPS Antenna Error

Open condition of GPS antenna is detected. (Open circuit, connection failure of connectors, etc.)

Inspect antenna and replace as necessary.

41

Power Supply Error of GPS Antenna

Abnormal voltage of GPS antenna cable or short circuit is detected.

Inspect GPS antenna and replace as necessary. (When no continuity is identified between connector’s core and sealed part, GPS antenna is normal.) If GPS antenna is normal, replace navigation ECU.

3. MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY (Physical address: 110) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, it may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting an engine. *2: It is stored in 180 sec. after the power supply connector is pulled out after engine start. *3: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after engine start. *4: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned in 1 min. again after engine start. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


21

ROM Error

Abnormal condition of ROM is detected.


22

RAM Error



D5 *1


Component shown by auxiliary code is or was disconnected from system with ignition switch ACC or ON. Communication with component shown by auxiliary code is not ensured when engine is started.

Check harness for power supply of component shown by auxiliary code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by auxiliary code.

D8 *2


Component shown by auxiliary code is or was disconnected from system after engine start.

Check harness for power supply of component shown by sub– code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by auxiliary code.



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


D9 *1

Last Mode Error



DB *1

Mode Status Error


Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub–auxiliary code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub–code.

DC *4

Transmission Error

Transmission to component shown by auxiliary code has been failed. (This code does not necessarily mean actual failure.)

If same auxiliary code is recorded in order component(s), check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code.

DE *3


After engine start, slave component has been disconnected. DB


E2


Error is detected in ON/OFF control command from radio receiver assy.


E3 *1


Registration Request command is output from slave component. By reception of connection check instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.


(b)


DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


10

Panel Switch Error


Inspect all switches on panel switch test screen in display check mode. If any of them do not function, replace multi–display (CRT display) display. If all switches function without problem, observe them for a while.

11

Touch Switch Error


Inspect all touch switches on touch switch test screen in display check mode. If any of lines does not react, replace multi–display (CRT display) display. If all of vertical and horizontal lines react normally, observe them for a while.

(c)

Logical address: 34 (Front passenger monitor)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


10

Error in Picture Circuit

Error in power supply system for picture circuit (abnormal voltage) is detected.


11

Back–light Error (No current)

Decline in power output from inverter circuit for back–light.


12

Back–light Error (Excess current)

Excess power output from inverter circuit for back–light.




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4. BODY ECU (COMBINATION METER) (Physical address: 1EC) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, it may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting an engine. *2: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned in 1 min. again after the engine starts. *3: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after the engine starts. *4: This code is stored in 210 sec. after the master components is turned off with the ignition switch ACC or ON. Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


D6 *1

Absence of Master

Component in which this code is recorded has been disconnected from system with ignition ACC or ON. Or, when this code was recorded, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected.

Check harness for power supply of multi– display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for power supply of body ECU. Check harness for communication system of body ECU.

D7

Communication Check Error

DC *2

Transmission Error

DD *3


DF *4

Component in which this code is recorded is or was disconnected from system after engine start. Or, when recording this code, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected.


Transmission to component shown by auxiliary code has been failed. (Detecting this DTC does not necessarily mean actual failure.)

If same auxiliary code is recorded in other components, check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code.

After engine was started, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected from system

Check harness for power supply of multi– display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. If this error occurs frequently, replace multi–display (CRT display) display.

Master Error


Check harness for power supply of radio receiver assy. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system between radio receiver assy and multi–display (CRT display) display.

E0 *1




E1 *1






–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


E2


Error occurs in ON/OFF controlling command from stereo component amplifier assy.


E3 *1


Registration Request command is output from slave component. Registration Connection Check Instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3U–01

DRIVING DIRECTIONS ARE OPPOSITE TO MOVING DIRECTION OF VEHICLE POSITION MARK WIRING DIAGRAM Neutral Start SW (*4) Back–up Light SW (*5) 1 2 N1 B1 (*4) (*5)

R–Y

Navigation ECU

J5 J/C

5 IK1

R–Y (*3)

R–Y (*1) C

C

14 N3 REV

J22 J/C R–Y (*2)

R–Y (*2) A

A

*4: A/T *1: LHD *5: M/T *2: RHD *3: LHD Except 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE I34724


NAVIGATION CHECK MODE(VEHICLE SENSORS) Check the vehicle input signals. (1) Start up the diagnosis system and read the REV signal in vehicle sensors mode. Standard: Input signal is normal (REV) OK


NG

2

INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(REV) (a) (b)

N3

Remove the navigation ECU. Check the voltage. (1) Measure the voltage between the terminal REV of navigation ECU and body ground. Voltage: Terminal REV – Body ground

REV

I32703

OK



Condition Turn ignition switch ON and put gear shift in R range

Voltage (V) 10 to 14


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3N–01





2 1

1 LG 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

V

6 IA1

P

1 IA1

P (*1)

L

6 IL1

L (*2)

LG

1 IL1

2

4


2 1

1 P 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

2

4

V (*1)


LG (*2)

*1: LHD *2: RHD I34726



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM



Go to step 4

NG

2


Navigation ECU:



NG FR–

OK


I35667


FL–*1, FR–*2

Continuity

– AUI–


FR+

FL–


Tester connection

Specified condition


No continuity


No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


FL+

(a) (b)

FR+ R4

FL–

FR–


I35668


Condition

Specified condition

– GND



FL–*1, FL–*2 – GND



FL+*1, FR+*2

NG


OK

4


(a)


OK




5

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


Navigation ECU:


N3

Tester connection

Specified condition

AUO+ – 1

Continuity

AUO– – 2

Continuity




Tester connection

Specified condition


No continuity


No continuity

NG I33631



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3R–01

GPS MARK DOES NOT APPEAR INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK MARK DISPLAY Check that the malfunction disappears when placing the vehicle outdoors with a good view. Standard: GPS mark is displayed.

HINT: At the place surrounded by the architecture, the vehicle cannot receive the GPS radio wave. OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

CHECK OPTIONAL COMPONENT Check for optional component. (1) Check if there are any optional components on the vehicle. Standard: There are no optional components on the vehicle. (2) Check if there is anything such as film stuck to the window or any metal objects on the instrument panel. Standard: There is nothing such as film stuck to the window or any metal objects on the instrument panel. NG


OK

3

REPLACE NAVIGATION ANTENNA ASSY (See page 67–28) Standard: Normally returns. NG

OK SYSTEM OK




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3B–01



2


3

Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur (Go to step 4) Symptom occurs (Go to step 5)

4


5

DTC Check (See page 05–1438) Normal code (Go to step 7) Malfunction code (Go to step 6)

6

DTC Chart (See page 05–1453) Go to step 8

7

Problem Symptoms Table (See page 05–1464)

8

Circuit Inspection and Part Inspection

9

Indemnification of Problem



10

Repair or Replace

11

Confirmation Test

End


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3F–01

LOCATION Engine Room R/B No.1 and Radio Receiver Assy Engine Room J/B No.1 DCC Fuse Telephone Microphone Assy Body ECU AM2 Fuse (Combination Meter Assy) Multi–display Sub R/B (LHD) (CRT display) Sub R/B (RHD) Display Front No.2 Speaker Assy

Combination Meter Assy (Body ECU)

Navigation Antenna Assy

Front No.1 Speaker Assy Steering Pad Switch LH

Driver Side J/B RAD No.1 Fuse AM1 Fuse GAUGE1 Fuse IG1 Relay

Navigation ECU Steering Pad Switch RH Navigation Controller Holder Navigation Controller Assy

I34714



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

MAP IS DISPLAYED IN WHITE OR BLUE SCREEN (SWITCHED AND VEHICLE POSITION MARK ARE DISPLAYED) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK SETTING Check the settings. (1) Check that the map display is normal when the map scale is set to the widest area. Standard: Map display is normal OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

CHECK AND OPERATE AGAIN Clean the map disc. (1) After wiping the map disc in the circumference direction with a soft cloth, insert it again. OK

SYSTEM OK

OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

3

REPLACE DISC PLAYER DISC Standard: Normally returns

NG REPLACE NAVIGATION ECU (See page 67–27)


05C3P–01


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3L–01

NAVIGATION SCREEN IS NOT STABILIZED (SYNCRONOUS ERROR) WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display VG

6 M2


6 N4 VG

8 SYNC M2

W

8 N4 SYNC

B

3 M2

B

3 N4 B

G

7 M2

G

7 N4 G

R

2 M2

R

2 N4 R

VR

M2

Y

1 N4 VR

1

I34723



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM




M2

VR VG SYNC

Navigation ECU:

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display)display and navigation ECU. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Specified condition

VG – VG

Continuity

VR – VR

Continuity

SYNC – SYNC

Continuity

(2)


N4

SYNC

Tester connection

Tester connection

Specified condition

VG – Body ground

Continuity

VR – Body ground

Continuity

SYNC – Body ground

No continuity

VR VG I35666

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

2


OK SYSTEM OK



OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3H–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY) WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display Driver Side J/B 1 DH

G–R

H H J/B F J9 J21 J8 (*3) (*4) (*3) F GR J8 GR (*3) W–B

AM1 I13 Ignition SW ACC 2 G G–R 3

3

RAD No.1

4 DB

IG1 Relay

9 DA

DH

G–Y

IG1 1 4 AM2 ST2 5 B–L (*2) B–G (*1) AM1

5 DH 1 DN

1

2

5

3

GAUGE1

7

R–W

DB

6

B–W

1 2 RAD No.2

6

B–G (*1) B–R B–G (*1)

B–W 6 6

1

2

Engine Room J/B 1 ALT 4D 1 2 1 4B

1 4A

FL MAIN

1 W ED1 (*2) B (*2)

3

3 2

1

L–Y (*4)

E J/C E L–Y J24 J25 (*4)

B–G (*1)

W–B 25 M1 GND1

Center J/B 5 CG

B (*2)

6 CA W–B

3

B–W Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 DCC 4 5 B–W B 1 IE4 IP1 2 1 (*2) (*4) B–R (*3) 1 AM2 1 1 B–R B–G 1A IE4 IP1 1 (*1) 2 1 Battery *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV

1 M1 +B1

9 L–Y CB (*3)

L–Y (*3)

W–B

ALT

3 M1 IG 15 M1 ST1

Center J/B 4 CE


F GR (*4) J20 (*4) F J20 (*4)

Center J/B 3 7 R–W CA CF

Fuse Block ST

B–Y

14 M1 ACC

GR (*3)

IJ

IP

*3: LHD *4: RHD I34729



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


INSPECT MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY(ACC, IG, ST1, +B1, GND1) IG +B1

M1

(a) (b)

Remove the multi–display (CRT display) display. Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND1 – Body ground

Always

Continuity

(c) GND1

Check the voltage between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

ACC

ST1

I34716

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

+B1 – GND1

Always

10 to 14 V

IG – GND1

Ignition SW ON

10 to 14 V

ACC – GND1

Ignition SW ACC

10 to 14 V

ST1 – GND1

Ignition SW ON

10 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)

CHECK FOR PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Check the problem symptoms table (See page 05–1464). A

Suspected areas are cleared

B


B


A REPLACE MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY (See page 67–6)



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3J–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER) WIRING DIAGRAM N4 Navigation Controller Holder 5

GR (*3)

I13 Ignition SW

Driver Side J/B RAD No.1 4 3 DB DH

G 3

AM1

ACC

F J8 (*3) F GR J8 (*3)

2

1 DH

G–R

1

AM1

F J20 (*4) F J20 (*4)

B–L (*2)

DN

J/C

ACC

H H GR J9 J21 (*4) (*3) (*4)

1 ED1

W (*2)

B–G (*1) Engine Room R/B J/B B–G (*1)

1 4B

ALT 1

B (*2)

1 4D

B–G (*1)

2

Engine Room R/B No.3 ALT 3 3 1 2

W (*2) W–B

FL MAIN

1

A A

Battery

GND

J17 J/C W–B IP (*3) IK (*4)

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD I34728



1

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INSPECT NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER(ACC, GND) (a) (b)

N4

GND

ACC

Remove the navigation controller holder. Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND – Body ground

Constant

Continuity

(c)


I35658

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

ACC – GND

Ignition SW ACC

10 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)



B


B

A REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3I–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (NAVIGATION ECU) WIRING DIAGRAM Navigation ECU 9 N6 +B

L–Y (*3) E J/C E L–Y J24 J25 (*4)

L–Y (*4) Center J/B

Fuse Block RAD No.2

4 L–Y CE (*3)

10 CB

6

B–W

6 2

1

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 B (*2) B–G (*1)

1 1A

DCC 1 1

I13 Ignition SW G 3

AM1 ACC

2

Driver Side J/B RAD No.1 4 3 DH DB

GR

2 1 DH

G–R

AM1

B–W

1 DN

4 5 IF4 IF1 (*3) (*4)

B–W

F F J/C F F GR J8 J20 J8 J20 (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) 1 B–L (*2) W (*2) ED1

18 N6 ACC

Engine Room R/B J/B

B–G (*1)

1 4A 1 4B

ALT

1 B–G (*1) 4D

W (*2)

1 2 Engine Room R/B No.3 B (*2)

Center J/B

3

B (*2)

ALT 3

3 1

W (*2)

2

W–B

FL MAIN

Battery


6 CA

13 7 W–B (*3) CF N5 SNSE 7 W–B CK (*4) 17 10 W–B CH N6 GND

IP

*3: LHD *4: RHD I34727



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(+B, ACC, SNSE, GND) (a) (b)

+B

N5

N6

Remove the navigation ECU. Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND – Body ground

Always

Continuity

SNSE – Body ground

Always

Continuity

(c) SNSE

ACC

GND


I32703

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

+B – GND

Always

10 to 14 V

ACC – GND

Ignition SW ACC, ON

10 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)



B


B

A REPLACE NAVIGATION ECU (See page 67–27)




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3G–01


Suspect Area

See page

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (multi–display (CRT display)display) 3. AVC–LAN circuit

01–5 05–1465

Navigation screen display nothing

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU) 3. AVC–LAN circuit

01–5 05–1467 05–1471

Navigation screen is not stabilized (Synchronous error)

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU) 3. Navigation screen is not stabilized (Synchronous error)

01–5 05–1467 05–1475

Color on navigation screen is unusual (RGB signal error)

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU) 3. Color on navigation screen is unusual (RGB signal error)

01–5 05–1467 05–1477

Black screen

Front speaker (driver side) only is not heard Map disc cannot be inserted

– 1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU)

05–1471

05–1479 01–5 05–1467

Current position cannot be displayed on screen (disc caution screen does not change)

–

05–1483

Map is displayed in white or blue screen (switched and vehicle position mark are displayed)

–

05–1484

Vehicle position is deviated from correct point badly

1. Vehicle position is deviated from correct point badly. 2. GPS mark does not appear.

05–1485 05–1487

GPS mark does not appear

–

05–1487

Vehicle position mark rotates without control (map rotates without control)

–

05–1488

Driving directions are opposite to moving direction of vehicle position mark

–

05–1490

A navigation controller assy does not operate

1. A navigation controller assy does not operate 2. The system cannot be operated by the voice sound

05–1491 05–1494

When mount the navigation controller to the navigation controller system, it cannot be operated

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation controller holder) 3. When mount the navigation controller holder to the navigation controller system, it cannot be operated 4. The system cannot be operated by the voice sound

01–5 05–1469 05–1492

The system cannot be operated by the voice sound

1. The system cannot be operated by the voice sound 2. AVC–LAN circuit

05–1494 05–1471


05–1494


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3X–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

NAVIGATION ECU N5

N4

N3

I35876


Wiring Color

Condition

Specification

N5–3 (MIC+) – N5–6 (SGND)

B – BR


N5–4 (MACC) – N5–6 (SGND)

R – BR

Ignition switch ACC

N5–5 (MIC–) – N5–6 (SGND)

BR – BR

Always

Continuity

N5–6 (SGND) – Body ground

BR – Body ground

Always

Continuity

N5–7 (SNSE) – Body ground


Always

Continuity

N3–1 (AUI+) – N3–17 (GND)

R*1, W*2 – W–B

Audio system is sounding

N3–2 (AUO+) – N3–17 (GND)

P*1, LG*2 – W–B

Sound quality test

–

N3–5 (SPD) – N3–17 (GND)

V–W – W–B

See ”Vehicle Signal Check Mode”

–

N3–9 (+B) – N3–17 (GND)

L–Y – W–B

Always

N3–10 (AUI–) – N3–17 (GND)

LG*1, R*2 – W–B

N3–11 (AUO–) – N3–17 (GND)

V*1, L*2 – W–B

N3–14 (REV) – N3–17 (GND)

R–Y – W–B

N3–17 (GND) – Body ground


N3–18 (ACC) – N3–17 (GND)


A waveform synchronized with sounds is output 4 to 6 V


Below 1 V A waveform synchronized with sounds is output

Sound quality test

–


–

Always

Continuity

GR – W–B

Ignition switch ACC

10 to 14 V

N4–1 (VR) – N4–6 (VG)

Y – Shielded

Ignition switch OFF

Below 1 V

N4–2 (R) – N4–6 (VG)

R – Shielded

Navigation display is displayed

Pulse generation *2

N4–3 (B) – N4–6 (VG)

B – Shielded


Pulse generation *2

N4–5 (TX+)

V

N4–6 (VG) – Body ground

Shielded – Body ground

N4–7 (G) – N4–6 (VG)

G – Shielded


See ”Service Check Mode” Always Navigation display is displayed

– Continuity Pulse generation *2

05–1462 DIAGNOSTICS Symbols (Terminals No.)

Wiring Color

N4–8 (SYNC) – N4–6 (VG)

W – Shielded

N4–10 (TX–)

LG

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM Condition

Specification


Pulse generation *1


–

*1: LHD *2: RHD 2. MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY M1

M2

M3

I34717


Wiring Color

Condition

M1–1 (+B1) – M2–1 (GND2)

L–Y – W–B

Always

10 to 14 V

M1–3 (IG) – M2–1 (GND2)

R–W – W–B

Ignition switch ON

10 to 14 V

M1–4 (SPD) – M2–1 (GND2)

V–W – W–B

See ”Vehicle Signal Check”

–

M1–5 (GTX+)

P


–

M1–10 (RE1) – M1–22 (SGD1)

R – Shielded

Ignition switch ACC See ”Service Check Mode”

Specification

Approx. 3.3 V

M1–12 (TX3+)

G–Y

M1–14 (ACC) – M2–1 (GND2)

GR – W–B

Ignition switch ACC

10 to 14 V

M1–15 (ST1) – M2–1 (GND2)

B–W – W–B

Ignition switch START

10 to 14 V

M1–16 (TC) – M2–1 (GND2)

W–L – W–B

Ignition switch OFF and connect terminals TC and GND1 of check connector

Continuity

M1–17 (PKB) – M2–1 (GND2)

B–W – W–B


–

M1–18 (GTX–)

LG


–

M1–22 (SGD1) – Body ground


M1–24 (TX3–)

G

M1–25 (GND1) – Body ground


M2–1 (GND1) – M1–6 (VG)

Always See ”Service Check Mode”

–

Continuity –

Always

Continuity

Y – Shielded

Ignition switch OFF

Below 1 V

M2–2 (R) – M1–6 (VG)

R – Shielded


Pulse generation *2

M–2 (B) – M1–6 (B – VG)

B – Shielded


Pulse generation *2

M2–5 (CTX+)

V

M2–6 (VG) – Body ground


M2–7 (G) – M1–6 (VG)

G – Shielded





Wiring Color

M2–8 (SYNC) – M1–6 (VG)

W – Shielded

M2–10 (CTX–)

LG



3.

–


Specification


Pulse generation *1


–

Always

Continuity

BODY ECU (COMBINATION METER ASSY) C10

I35656


Wiring Color

Condition

Specification

C10–3 (GTX+)

G–Y


–

C10–4 (GTX–)

G


–

(a)

*1: Oscilloscope wave Terminal to be measured: SYNC – GND Setting for measurement: 500 mV/DIV10– s/DIV Condition: Navigation display is displayed.

(b)

*2: Oscilloscope wave Terminal to be measured: R, G, B – GND Setting for measurement: 200 mV/DIV10– s/DIV Condition: Navigation map is switched.

I30915

I30916



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3W–01

THE SYSTEM CANNOT BE OPERATED BY THE VOICE SOUND WIRING DIAGRAM S15 Steering Pad Switch LH AU1 AU2 EAU

LG (*1)

CTX+

R7 8 R7 6 R7

12 P (*1) 11 W–R (*1) 10

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display 5 GTX+ M1 18 GTX– M1

CTX–

Radio Receiver Assy 7

SW2 GND

9

P

R6 10 R6

LG

10 M2 5 M2

SW1

TX+ TX–


LG V

T11 Telephone Microphone Assy MACC

MIC+

MIC–

R

17 ID1

R

4 N5 MACC

B

18 ID1

B

3 N5 MIC+

W

16 ID1

W

BR

5 N5 MIC–

(Shielded)

14 ID1

(Shielded)

BR

6 N5 SGND

5

4

2

*1: w/ Steering SW I35657



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


INSPECT STEERING WHEEL ASSY(BEEP SOUND) Check the switch (Beep sound). (1) Press steering pad switch LH to check that the beep sound is produced. OK

Go to step 3

NG

2

INSPECT STEERING WHEEL ASSY(AU2, EAU) (a) (b) ”VOICE” switch

Remove the horn button assy(See page 50–9). Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

AU2 – EAU


Approx. 100 k

AU2 – EAU

VOICE switch: push

Approx. 3.1 k

S15

EAU AU2

I35662

NG

REPLACE STEERING WHEEL ASSY (See page 50–9)

OK

3 (a)

CHECK TALK BACK Check whether the system performs talk back or not. Standard: The system performs talk back. OK

NG


SYSTEM OK


4

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(NAVIGATION ECU – TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSY) (a)

Navigation ECU:

MIC+

Disconnect the connectors from the navigation ECU and telephone microphone assy. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

N5 MACC MIC–

Tester connection

Specified condition

MACC – MACC

Continuity

MIC+ – MIC+

Continuity

MIC– – MIC–

Continuity

(2)


Telephone Microphone Assy:

T11

Tester connection

Specified condition

MACC – Body ground

No continuity

MIC+ – Body ground

No continuity

MIC– – Body ground

No continuity

MACC MIC+

NG

MIC– I35670

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

5

REPLACE TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSY Standard: Normally returns NG

OK SYSTEM OK



HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3Q–01

VEHICLE POSITION IS DEVIATED FROM CORRECT POINT BADLY INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK DISPLAY(GPS MARK DISPLAY) Preparation for the pre–check. (1) Place the vehicle outdoors with a good view of the GPS mark. Check the screen display. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Turn the power switch of the radio receiver assy ON to display the map. Standard: ’’GPS’’ mark appears

(b)

NG


OK

2 (a)

CHECK WHEN THIS HAPPENS Check the abnormal condition. (1) Check the point in which the trouble occurs. Standard: A

The trouble occurs outside the specific area

B

The trouble occurs in the specific area

HINT: At the place difficult to specify the vehicle position (a by–pass road, a overhand road, a loop road, or several– storied car park, etc.), the vehicle position may be out of the point due to the wrong matching. B

SYSTEM OK

A

3 (a)

CHECK DISPLAY(AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION) Check the screen display. (1) Check the color of ’’Automatic calibration’’ switch at the distance correction screen. Standard: Green (’’Automatic calibration’’ switch) OK

NG


SYSTEM OK


4 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

NAVIGATION CHECK MODE(VEHICLE SENSORS) Check the vehicle input signals. (1) Start up the diagnosis system and read the SPEED signal in vehicle signal check mode. Standard: Input signal is normal (SPEED) NG

Go to step 6

OK

SYSTEM OK

OK

5

CHECK AND OPERATE AGAIN Standard: Normally returns


6

INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(SPD, GND1) (a) (b) SPD

N3

GND1

I32703

Remove the navigation ECU. Check the voltage. (1) Shift the shift lever to neutral. (2) Jack up either one of the front wheels. (3) Turn ignition switch ON. (4) Measure the voltage between the terminal SPD and GND1 of navigation ECU when the front wheels are turned slowly. Standard: Voltage is pulsed. 9 to14 V

0

OK




Turn the wheel


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3S–01

VEHICLE POSITION MARK ROTATES ARBITRARILY (MAP ROTATES ARBITRARILY) WIRING DIAGRAM Navigation ECU

Combination Meter

18 C11

J10 (*1) J20 (*2) J/C V–W

V–W H

5 N3 SPD

H

*1: LHD *2: RHD I34722


CHECK AND OPERATE AGAIN Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, check that the malfunction disappears. Standard: Malfunction disappears

HINT: Even if the system works correctly, the following conditions may be seen: vehicle position mark turns, or the map turns unwillingly. (It is because by turning the IG switch to ACC or ON during turning, navigation system stores based on the angular speed). In that case, turn the IG switch from OFF to ACC or ON to return the correct function. OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

NAVIGATION CHECK MODE(VEHICLE SENSORS) Check the vehicle input signals. (1) Start up the diagnosis system and read the ”SPD” signal in vehicle sensors mode. Standard: Input signal is normal OK

NG




3

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(SPD) (a) (b) SPD N3

I32703

Remove the navigation ECU. Check the voltage. (1) Shift the shift lever to neutral. (2) Jack up either one of the front wheels. (3) Turn ignition switch ON. (4) Measure the voltage between the terminal SPD of navigation ECU and body ground when the front wheel are turned slowly. Standard: Voltage is pulsed. 9 to14 V

0

OK




Turn the wheel


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3V–01

WHEN MOUNT THE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY TO THE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER, IT CANNOT BE OPERATED WIRING DIAGRAM R11 Navigation Controller Holder

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display (Shielded)

TX

10 M1 RE1

R 3

22 SGND

2

M1 SGD1

(Shielded)

I34721



Clean the infrared ray emitted portion. (1) Clean the infrared ray emitted portion on the navigation controller holder and navigation controller assy. (2) Check whether the same malfunction occurs. Standard: The function returns to normal.

I35661

OK

NG


DIRT AT PORTION

THE

INFRARED

RAY

EMITTED


2

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER – MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY) (a)

Navigation Controller Holder:

R11 TX

Disconnect the connectors from the navigation controller assy and multi–display (CRT display) display. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

SGND

Tester connecter

Specified condition

TX – RE1

Continuity

SGND – SGD1

Continuity

(2)

Check for a short between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart Standard:


M1

Tester connecter

Specified condition

TX – Body ground

No continuity

SGND – Body ground

Continuity

RE1

SGD1

NG I35698

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3

REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER Standard: Normally returns. OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

4

REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY Standard: Normally returns. OK

SYSTEM OK



HARNESS

OR


–

POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM 05C8A–01


Suspected Area

See Page

All doors cannot be locked/unlocked at once

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

DOOR fuse ECU–B 2 fuse Power window regulator master switch assy Front door lock assy LH, RH (Driver side) Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) Wire harness

05–1546

Key lock–in prevention function does not work properly (Manual operation and operation interlocked with key are active)

1. 2. 3. 4.

Unlock warning switch assy Courtesy lamp switch assy LH, RH (Driver side) Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) Wire harness

05–1555

w/ Double lock: Double lock function does not operate properly

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Wireless system DOOR fuse ECU–B 2 fuse Front door lock assy LH, RH Rear door lock assy LH, RH Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) Wire harness

05–1560



–

POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM 05C85–01

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s name:




/

/


km miles

Odometer Reading

/ Constant Once only

Sometimes (

/ Times per day, month)

Problem Symptoms

Fine Cloudy Rainy Weather Conditions Weather Various/Others When Problem Hot Warm Cool Occurred Outdoor temperature Cold (Approx. C ( F))

Snowy

Malfunction in Door Lock/Unlock Operation Using Door Lock Control Switch

Driver side door lock control switch

Driver side door Passenger side door Rear left door Rear right door Luggage door Back door

Malfunction in Door Lock/Unlock Operation Using Key

Driver side door key lock and unlock control switch


Malfunction in Key Lock–in Prevention Function

w/ Double Lock: Malfunction in Double Locking Function System Others



–


CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS HINT: The following items can be customized. NOTICE: After confirming whether the items requested by the customer are applicable or not for customization, perform the customize operation. Be sure to record the current settings before customizing. When troubleshooting, make sure that the item in question is not set to ”OFF” as a result of customization. Standard (Integration relay): DISPLAY (ITEM)

DEFAULT

AUTO LOCK DELAY ALL UNLK/OPN–CL (All unlock w/ D door open–close)


CONTENTS

SETTING

30s

Function that selects AUTO LOCK time 30 sec. or 60 sec.

30s/60s

OFF

Function that unlocks all other doors when opening driver side door within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch to OFF from ON

ON/OFF


–

POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM

05C8D–01

DOUBLE LOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION RHD Models w/ Double Lock Only: All the doors except the back door have the double locking system. This system is set and unset by the integration relay. When the integration relay receives a request signal from the wireless transmitter (See page 73–1) to set or unset the double locking system, it drives the double lock motor built into each door lock according to the condition of all the double lock position switches, thus causing the double locking system to be set and unset.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM RHD Models w/ Double Lock Only

Instrument Panel J/B Assy Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH W–B

10

9

D14

D14

17

B

B

IL2

B 9

IL1

B

Integration Relay

J/C

G

G

J20

G

G

J20

J21

3

B

J21

IC1

D14

IP

4 D14

8

W

4

L

G

5

5

D21

D21

1 BC1

10

W–B

D21

2 D21

BU

B

W

L

4 BC1

16 BC1

6 BC1

B

W

L

17

1 IA1

9

W–B

D16

2 D16

9

14

ACTS

CK

IM2

5

L

CB

IM2

L 17

DJ

ACTR

3

W

W Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH 5 6 B W–B D16 D16

L

15

CI

IM1

2

10 CA

DJ

1

L

11

6 CF

6

W

CE

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH

6

CJ

1

W

W–B

Center J/B 12

CH

L

IL1

DLPD

J20

W

IL1

I14

B

W–B

3

B

6

2 CA

2 CD

IA2

8

W

W

IA1

4

L

L

IA1

IJ

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH 10 9 4 W–B B D19 D19 BA1

3 BA1

10

W–B BQ

D19

4 D19

W

L


16 BA1

6 BA1

B

W

L

12 IC1

10 IC3

4 IC3

W L

B66822


–



INSPECT WIRELESS DOOR LOCK OPERATION Check that the doors can be normally locked and unlocked by the wireless operation. NG

GO TO WIRELESS DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM (See page 05–1568)

OK

2 (a)

INSPECT FUSE (ECU–B 2, DOOR) Inspect the ECU–B 2 and DOOR fuses (See page 68–1). NG

OK


REPLACE FUSE


3

–


INSPECT FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH (a)

Unlock

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition

Battery positive (+) Terminal 4 Battery negative (–) Terminal 3

Double locking system is Set


Double locking system is Unset

(3)

Check that the doors cannot be unlocked by operating the control cable while the double locking system is set. (4) Inspect the resistance of the double lock position switch. Standard:

Lock

B64708

Tester Connection 9 – 10

NG

OK


Double Lock Position

Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH


4

–


INSPECT FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH (a)

Unlock

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition





(3)


Lock

B64707

Tester Connection 5–6

NG

OK



Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH


5

–


INSPECT REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH (a)

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition





(3) Unlock


Lock

B64706


NG

OK



Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH


6

–


INSPECT REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH (a)

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition





(3) Lock


Unlock

B64705


NG

OK



Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH


7

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (DOOR LOCK – INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)) (a)

Wire Harness Side D14*1, D21*2, D16*3, D19*4 Door Lock

(b)

Disconnect the D14, D21, D16 or D19 door lock and the I14 and DJ J/B connectors. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D14–9 – I14–6 (DLPD) D21–5 – I14–6 (DLPD) D16–6 – I14–6 (DLPD) D19–9 – I14–6 (DLPD)


D14–4 – DJ–8 (ACTS) D21–2 – DJ–8 (ACTS) D16–2 – DJ–8 (ACTS)

Below 1

D19–4 – DJ–8 (ACTS) D14–3 – DJ–9 (ACTR) D21–1 – DJ–9 (ACTR) D16–1 – DJ–9 (ACTR) D19–3 – DJ–9 (ACTR)

(c)

DJ Instrument Panel J/B Assy

Check the resistance between the D14, D21, D16 or D19 door lock connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open): Tester Connection

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

3

D14–10 – Body ground

9

D21–6 – Body ground D16–5 – Body ground

Specified Condition

Below 1


*1 Driver side *2 Passenger side *3 Rear right side *4 Rear left side

NG B70501

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


–



HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: Troubleshoot in accordance with the procedures on the following pages.

1


2


3


(a) (b)

When problem is not listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to A. When problem is listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to B. B

Go to step 6

A

4 (a)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1536). (1) Inspection with the hand–held tester (ECU DATA LIST). (2) Inspection with the hand–held tester (ACTIVE TEST). On–vehicle inspection (See page 73–1). Inspection (See page 73–3). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1542).

(b) (c) (d)

5


END



–


05C8C–01

KEY LOCK–IN PREVENTION FUNCTION DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY (MANUAL OPERATION AND OPERATION INTERLOCKED WITH KEY ARE ACTIVE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The unlock warning switch turns ON when the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder. The courtesy lamp switch turns ON when the driver side door is opened. These 2 switches are monitored by the integration relay. In order to prevent the key from being locked in, the integration relay controls door locking operation according to the conditions of these switches so that the doors are not locked with the key locked in.

WIRING DIAGRAM LHD models

Instrument Panel J/B Assy

D9 Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy (Driver Side) 14 1 R IC2

R

J16 J/C W–B

A

Integration Relay

J10 J/C

A

B

B

R

U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy W–B Y 1 2

13 DB

17

8 DA

19

DCTY

KSW

IO*1 IL*2

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV B66819



–


RHD models


D10 Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy (Driver Side) 9 1 R R IM1

W–B

Integration Relay

Center J/B 1 CA

5 CE

6 CA

13 W–B CF

R

13 DB

17

D Y*2

8 DA

19

DCTY

IP J22 J/C 1 U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy

2

Y*2 D

KSW

Y*1

*1: 1AZ–FE *2: Except 1AZ–FE B66820



–



READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Using the hand–held tester, check that the unlock warning switch signal is output when the switch is operated. Standard (Integration relay): Item

KEY UNLK WRN SW

Measurement Item/Display (Range)

Normal Condition

Unlock warning switch signal /ON or OFF

Diagnostic Note


OK

–

Go to step 4

NG

2

INSPECT UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY

Free

(a) (b)

Pin

Remove the unlock warning switch. Inspect the resistance of the switch. Standard: Tester Connection

Pushed 1–2

Switch Position

Specified Condition

Free (Key removed)

10 k or higher

Pushed (Key set)

Below 1

B51903

NG OK




3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY – INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy

(c)

Disconnect the U1 switch and DA J/B connectors. Check the continuity between the wire harness connectors. Standard (Check for open): Tester Connection

Specified Condition

U1–2 – DA–8 (KSW)

Below 1

Check the resistance between the U1 switch connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open):


Tester Connection

Specified Condition


Below 1

17 16 15 14 13

34 33 32 31 30 12 29 11 28 10 27 9 26 8 25 7 24 6 5 4 3 2 1

23 22 21 20 19 18

NG B70499

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


4 (a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Using the hand–held tester, check that the driver side door courtesy lamp switch signal is output when the switch is operated. Standard (Integration relay): Item

D DOR CTY SW

Measurement Item/Display (Range) Driver side door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

OK

NG


Normal Condition ON: Driver side door is open OFF: Driver side door is closed

Diagnostic Note –



5

–



Free Pushed

Remove the courtesy lamp switch. Inspect the resistance of the switch. Standard: Tester Connection

̱

Switch Position

1 – Body ground

Specified Condition

Free

Below 1

Pushed

10 k or higher

Body Ground B58556

NG

REPLACE FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY (DRIVER SIDE)

OK

6

CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COURTESY LAMP SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) – INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY), BODY GROUND) (a)

Wire Harness Side D9*1, D10*2 Courtesy Lamp Switch (Driver Side)

*1LHD models

(b)

Disconnect the D9, D10 switch and the DB J/B connectors. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

1

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D9, D10–1 – DB–13 (DCTY)

Below 1

*2RHD models

DB Instrument Panel J/B Assy

B70500

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


–


LOCATION LHD Models Instrument Panel J/B Assy Integration Relay Door Fuse

Center J/B

Unlock Warning Switch Assy Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse RHD Models Center J/B

Instrument Panel J/B Assy Integration Relay Door Fuse


Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse

B70813



–


Sedan Models Power Window Regulator Master Switch Assy Door Control Switch

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH Rear Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH Rear Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy Liftback Models

Back Door Lock Assy Back Door Opener Switch Assy (Outside Handle Switch)

Wagon Models

Back Door Opener Switch Assy (Outside Handle Switch)

Back Door Lock Assy


Back Door Lock Assy

B70496



–


PRE–CHECK

1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (a) Inspect the DLC3. HINT: The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 14230 format.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DLC3 B50154

Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition



Pulse generation


Constant

Below 1


Constant

Below 1


Constant

9 to 14 V

HINT: If the display shows UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE when you have connected the cable of the hand– held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and used the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tester side. If communication is normal when the tester is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 of the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tester is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tester itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the tester’s manual. (b) Check the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding.

Hand–held Tester

A82518


2. (a) (b)

USING HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tester screen.

HINT: The hand–held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which records the monitored data. Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.


–


3. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Read the DATA LIST according to the display on the tester. Standard (Integration relay): Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note



–

D DOR CTY SW

Driver side door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF


–

P DOR CYT SW

Passenger side door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Passenger side door is open OFF: Passenger side door is closed

–

Rr DOR CTY SW

Rear door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Either right or left rear door is open OFF: Both right and left rear doors are closed

–

P LOCK POS SW

Passenger side door lock position switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Passenger side door lock is in unlock position OFF: Passenger side door lock is in lock position

–

Rr LOCK POS SW

Rear door lock position switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Rear door lock is in unlock position OFF: Rear door lock is in lock position

–

IG switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Key is in ON or START position OFF: Key is in OFF or ACC position

–

Driver side door lock position switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Driver side door lock is in unlock position OFF: Driver side door lock is in lock position

–

Manual door lock switch LOCK signal /ON or OFF

ON: Manual door lock switch is in lock position OFF: Manual door lock switch is in original position (Common to driver side and passenger side model)

–

D/L SW–UNLOCK

Manual door lock switch UNLOCK signal /ON or OFF

ON: Manual door lock switch is in unlock position OFF: Manual door lock switch is in original position (Common to driver side and passenger side model)

–

DOR KEY SW–LOCK

Key operation door lock switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Key operation door lock switch is in lock position OFF: Key operation door lock switch is in original position (Common to driver side and passenger side model)

–

P DOR KEY SW–UL

Key operation passenger door unlock switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Passenger key operation door lock switch is in unlock position OFF: Passenger key operation door lock switch is in neutral position

–

D DOR KEY SW–UL

Key operation driver door unlock switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Driver key operation door lock switch is in unlock position OFF: Driver key operation door lock switch is in original position

–

ALL UNLK/OPN–CL


ON: All doors unlock when driver side door is opened OFF: Other doors do not unlock when driver side door is opened

–

OPEN DOOR WARN

Door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Either door is open OFF: All doors are closed

–

AUTO LOCK DELAY

Door courtesy switch signal /60s or 30s

60s: Door auto locking time is 60 sec. 30s: Door auto locking time is 30 sec.

–

KEY UNLK WRN SW

IG SW

D LOCK POS SW

D/L SW–LOCK



–



Item

Diagnostic Note

Normal Condition

DOOR HANDLE SW

Back door opener switch signal (Outside handle switch) /ON or OFF

ON: Back door opener switch is pushed OFF: Back door opener switch is not pushed

–

LOCK STATUS

Back door position switch signal /UNLOCK or LOCK

UNLOCK: Back door is unlock LOCK: Back door is lock

–

4. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows you to operate the relay, VSV, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) According to the display on the tester, perform the ACTIVE TEST. Standard (Integration relay): Item

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

DOOR LOCK

Operate door lock motor for all doors LOCK/OFF

–

DOOR LOCK

Operate door lock motor for all doors UNLOCK/OFF

–



–



Suspected Area

See Page


3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.


05–1546


1. 2. 3. 4.


05–1555


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.


05–1560



–


TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) Vehicle Rear Side

DB

Vehicle Front Side

DC

DM DA

DN

DH DJ

I14


DB

DH

DC

DM

DJ

DN

I14

B70502



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the DA, DB, DC, DM, DN and I14 J/B connectors. Check the voltage or continuity between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors and the body ground. Standard:


Wiring Color

KSW (DA–8) – Body ground

Y – Body ground

E (DA–9) – Body ground B (DB–16) – Body ground

No key in ignition key cylinder Key inserted


Constant


Constant


B (DN–1) (DN 1) –

Condition

L1 (DA–29) – Body Ground


Door control switch (Master switch) OFF LOCK

UL1 (DA–13) – Body Ground


Door control switch (Master switch) OFF UNLOCK

L2 (I14 (I14–4) 4) –

*3 L–Y – Body ground

UL2 (I14–5) – Body Ground

L – Body ground

Continuity

Constant


*4 L–R – Body ground


10 to 14 V

Body ground

Body Ground

Specified Condition

Driver door key cylinder OFF LOCK

No continuityy Continuityy

Driver door key cylinder OFF UNLOCK *3 Luggage component door opener switch FREE PUSHED *4 Back door opener switch FREE PUSHED

*3 BDSU (I14–10) – Body Ground

L–B – Body ground

DCTY (DB–13) – Body Ground

R – Body ground

Driver door CLOSED OPEN

PCTY (DC–9) – Body Ground

R – Body ground

Passenger door CLOSED OPEN

RCTY (DM–12) – Body Ground

W–G – Body ground

Rear left door CLOSED OPEN



Rear right door CLOSED OPEN

*3 LGCY (I14–1) – Body Ground


Luggage door CLOSED OPEN

*4 BDCY (I14–12) – Body Ground


Back door CLOSED OPEN

10 k or higher Below 1

HINT: *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV engine *3: Sedan *4: Liftback and Wagon If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



(c) (d)

–


Reconnect the J/B connectors. Check the voltage between each terminal of the connectors and the body ground. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

ACC (DH–3) – Body ground

G – Body ground

ACT+ (DJ–1) – Body Ground

L–R – Body ground

ACT+ (DM–7) – Body Ground


ACT+ (DB–20) – Body Ground


ACT– (DJ–4) – Body Ground


ACT– (DM–6) – Body Ground


ACT– (DB–10) – Body Ground


LACT (DM–3) – Body Ground

L – Body ground

LSWD (I14–3) – Body Ground

LG – Body ground

* LSWP (DB–8) – Body Ground


Passenger door UNLOCK " LOCK

* LSWP (DA–20) – Body Ground


Rear right door UNLOCK " LOCK

* LSWP (DM–10) – Body Ground


Rear left door UNLOCK " LOCK

DLPD (I14–6) – Body Ground

B – Body ground

Double lock UNSET " SET

* ACTS (DJ–8) – Body Ground

L – Body ground


* ACTR (DJ–9) – Body Ground

W – Body ground

Double lock SET " UNSET

Specified Condition

Ignition switch ACC

10 to 14 V

Door control switch (master switch) or door key cylinder OFF " LOCK

Below B l 1V" 10 to 14 V " Below 1 V Door control switch (master switch) or door key cylinder OFF " UNLOCK

Back door opener switch (outside handle switch) OFF " ON Driver door UNLOCK " LOCK

Below 1 V " 10 to 14 V

More than 5 V " Less than 1 V


HINT: *: Double Lock If the result is not as specified, the J/B assy (integration relay) may have a malfunction.



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE)

05C7C–01

CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECM detects a trouble, the CHK ENG is illuminated. At this time, the ECM records a DTC in the memory.

WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R


ECM

4 Engine Room 2 R/B No. 1 AM2 Engine 1 Room J/B No. 1 1A 1

IG2 AM2

1


DH 2

B–G 4A 1

4B 1

Engine Room J/B No. 4

9

6 B–R

IGN

11 E9

W


Driver Side J/B

DA 18 22

B–G FL MAIN

B–W

B–W C J8

Battery

A J26

J/C

(LHD) (RHD)

C J8

A J26

(LHD) (RHD)

A81015



CHK ENG is not illuminate




1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–


CLEAR DTC Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Read the DTC (See page 05–149). Clear the DTC (See page 05–149). Check that the CHK ENG is OFF. Standard: CHK ENG is OFF OK


NG

2


E9

Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check that the CHK ENG is OFF. Standard: CHK ENG is OFF

OK ECM Connector

A65748

CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


3 (a)

CHECK CHK ENG CONDITION Check that the CHK ENG is illuminated when turning the ignition switch ON. Standard: CHK ENG is illuminated OK

CHECK AND CONNECTOR

REPAIR

HARNESS

AND

NG

4 (a)

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY(CHK ENG CIRCUIT) See the combination meter troubleshooting on page 05–1509. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE BULB OR COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLYSYSTEM OK




–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6L–01



Driver’s Name

Production Date


Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name



Difficult to Start


Poor Idling


Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall


km miles


Back fire Other


High (

rpm)

Low (


Surging

Others



Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation




day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/


After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.


F) Downhill


Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal


)


)

)



Normal

)

rpm)


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6N–01


Open or short in oil control valve (OCV) circuit Oil control valve ECM

*1 CHK ENG

P0010/39 *4 (05–169)

Camshaft Position ”A” Actuator Circuit (Bank 1)

P0011/59 *4 (05–174)

Camshaft Position ”A” –Timing Over–Advanced or System Performance (Bank 1)

P0012/59 *4 (05–174)

Camshaft Position ”A” –Timing Over– Retarded (Bank 1)

P0016/18 *4 (05–181)

Crankshaft Position – Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor A)

P0031/21 *2, *4 (05–182)

Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P0032/21 *2, *4 (05–182)

Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P0051/28 *2, *4 (05–182)


P0052/28 *2, *4 (05–182)


P0100/31 (05–186)

Mass Air Flow Circuit

P0102/31 (05–186)

Mass or volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input

P0103/31 (05–186)

Mass or volume Air Flow Circuit High Input

P0110/24 (05–194)


P0112/24 (05–194)


P0113/24 (05–194)


P0115/22 (05–199)


P0117/22 (05–199)

Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low Input

P0118/22 (05–199)

Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High Input

P0120/41 (05–204)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit

Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) ECM

P0122/41 (05–204)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit Low Input

Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) Short in VTA1 circuit Open in VC circuit ECM


Valve timing Oil control valve (OCV) Camshaft timing gear assy ECM Mechanical system (Timing chain has jumped a tooth, chain stretched) ECM

Open or short in heater circuit of A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F relay ECM

Open O or short h t iin mass air i flow fl meter t circuit i it Mass air flow meter ECM

Open O or short h t iin iintake t k air i temp. t sensor circuit i it Intake air temp. sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

Open or short in engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM


–


P0123/41 (05–204)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit High Input

Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) Open in VTA1 circuit open in E2 circuit VC and VTA1 circuit are short–circuited ECM

P0136/27 *4 (05–211)

Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay

P0141/27 *4 (05–218)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

Open or short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay ECM

P0156/29 *4 (05–211)



P0161/29 *4 (05–218)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 2 Sensor 2)


P0325/52 (05–222)

Knock Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)

Knock sensor 1 Knock sensor 1 (under–torqued or loose) ECM

P0327/52 (05–222)

Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)

Short in knock sensor 1 circuit Knock sensor 1 ECM

P0328/52 (05–222)

Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)

Open in knock sensor 1 circuit Knock sensor 1 ECM

P0335/12, 13 (05–226)


P0339/13 (05–226)


P0340/12 (05–229)


P0341/12 (05–229)

Camshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)

P0351/14 *3 (05–232)

Ignition Coil ”A” Primary/Secondary Circuit

P0352/15 *3 (05–232)

Ignition Coil ”B” Primary/Secondary Circuit

P0353/14 *3 (05–232)

Ignition Coil ”C” Primary/Secondary Circuit

P0354/15 *3 (05–232)

Ignition Coil ”D” Primary/Secondary Circuit



P0511/33 (05–243)

Idle Air Control Circuit

Open or short in idle speed control (ISC) valve circuit Idle speed control (ISC) valve is stuck or closed A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM

P0606/89 (05–247)

ECM/PCM Processor

ECM

P0500/42 (05–240)


Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position osition sensor Signal plate (crankshaft) ECM Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit osition sensor Camshaft position Camshaft timing pulley Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM

Ignition system Open or short in IGF or IGT1 to 4 circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM No. 1 to No. 4 ignition coil with igniter IG2 relay ECM


–


P0710/38 (05–882)


P0712/38 (05–882)


P0713/38 (05–882)


P0717/37 (05–884)

Input/Turbine Speed Sensor ”A” Circuit No Signal

P0748/62 (05–886)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”A” Electrocal (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)

P0778/63 (05–886)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”B” Electrocal (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)

P0793/67 (05–892)


P0982/65 (05–886)


P0983/65 (05–886)


P2237/21 *2, *4 (05–248)

Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Circuit/ Open (for A/F sensor) (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2238/21 *2, *4 (05–248)

Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Circuit Low (for A/F sensor) (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2239/21 *2, *4 (05–248)

Oxygen Sensor Pumping Current Circuit High (for A/F sensor) (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2240/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2241/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2242/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2251/21 *2, *4 (05–248)

Oxygen Sensor Reference Ground Circuit/ Open (for A/F senor) (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2252/21 *2, *4 (05–248)

Oxygen Sensor Reference Ground Circuit Low (for A/F senor) (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2253/21 *2, *4 (05–248)

Oxygen Sensor Reference Ground Circuit High (for A/F senor) (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2254/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2255/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2256/28 *2, *4 (05–248)



Electronic controlled automatic transmission (ECT)

Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM

05–164 DIAGNOSTICS P2716/77 (05–894)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”D” Electrical

P2769/64 (05–897)

DSL Solenoid Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

P2770/64 (05–897)

DSL Solenoid Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

B2799/99 (05–1625)

Engine Immobilizer System Malfunction

–



Immobilizer system

*1: ... CHK ENG is illuminated. ... CHK ENG is not illuminated. *2: This DTC is related to A/F sensor, although the caption is heated oxygen sensor. *3: This DTC indicate a malfunction related to primary circuit. *4: For European spec. only



–


05C78–01

ECM BACK–UP POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the ignition switch is OFF, the battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal BATT of the ECM for the DTCs memory and air–fuel ratio adaptive control value memory, etc.

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Room J/B No.1 B–G

1 1A

ECM

EFI 1

2

B–Y

1

7 7 IE3 IO1 (LHD)(RHD)

B–Y

3 E9 BATT

4A 1 Engine Room J/B No.4

7 E12 E1

4B 1 B–G BR FL MAIN

Battery EF

A76869




NG

EFI Fuse A66054

OK





2

–


INSPECT ECM(BATT VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E9

E12


Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

BATT (+) A18294

OK


NG

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EFI FUSE, EFI FUSE – BATTERY) (a) E9

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and ECM. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

BATT ECM Connector

A65748


Specified condition


Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Engine Room R/B No.1

(b)

EFI Fuse 2 1

A79078


Specified condition


No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and battery. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity


Specified condition


No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK AND REPLACE ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C77–01

ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ignition switch is turned ON, battery positive voltage is applied to terminal IGSW of the ECM and the EFI relay (Marking: EFI) control circuit in the ECM sends a signal to terminal MREL of the ECM switching on the EFI relay. This signal causes current to flow to the coil, closing the contacts of the EFI relay and supplying power to terminal +B of the ECM. If the ignition switch is turned off, the ECM continues to switch on the EFI relay for a maximum of 2 seconds for the initial setting of the throttle valve.

WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition SW B–R 4

A B–W J26 (RHD)

Driver Side J/B

B–R 6

2 DH

18 DA

IGN

B–Y

B–W C (LHD)

GR

1

4

2 AM2

1

ECM

J/C

B–R

2

B–W (RHD)

C

9 E9 IGSW

B–W (LHD)

J8 J/C


1

E J27

2 IE1

8 E9 MREL

GR

4

5

1 E9 +B

B–R

1

EFI EFI Relay

1

Engine Room R/B No.4 3

7 E12 E1

2

1 1A B–G 1 4A

Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Room J/B No.1

4

4 8 IK1

B–W 4


1 4B B–G

1

EFI No.1

B–R

W–B

12 EA1

2

FL MAIN

BR

4 Engine Room R/B No.4

B–R

Battery EC

EF A79123



–




E9

E12

E1 (–)

+B (+)

ECM Connecter

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connector. Standard:

OK

A18294


Specified condition

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V


NG

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – BODY GROUND)

E13

(a) (b) (c)

E12

Disconnect the negative (–) battery terminal. Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


E2

Continuity


E1 ECM Connecter

A65746

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

IGSW (+)

ECM Connecter

NG


OK A18294

Go to step 6


4

–



Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG A79096


OK

5


I13

Measure the resistance between the connector terminals shown in the chart below.

NG

Ignition Switch

B50489

Switch

Terminal No.

Resisitance

LOCK

All Terminals

1M or more

ACC

1–3

1 or less

ON

1–2, 1–3, 2–3, 5–6

1 or less

START

4–5, 4–6, 5–6, 1–2

1 or less



6


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

MREL (+)

ECM Connecter

OK


A18294

NG



7

–





NG

EFI Fuse


A66054

OK

8

INSPECT EFI RELAY (a) (b)

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Inspect the EFI relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200

Continuity (Apply battery voltage Terminals 1 and 2)

REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

9

CHECK FUSE(EFI No,1 FUSE) (a)


EFI No.1 Fuse

Ç Ç

(b)

Remove the EFI No.4 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity in the EFI No.4 fuse. Standard: Continuity

NG

OK


A79065



10

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – ECM, EFI RELAY – BODY GROUND) (a)


EFI Relay A66053

Check the harness and connector between the EFI relay and ECM connector. (1) Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. (2) Remove the EFI No.1 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. (3) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (4) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Engine Room R/B No.4 1 2 EFI No.1 Fuse

Specified condition

EFI relay (1) – MREL (E9–8)

Ç

EFI relay (3) – EFI No.1 fuse (1)

Continuity y

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (E9–1)


Specified condition

EFI relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground EFI relay (3) or EFI No.1 fuse (1) – Body ground

EFI No.1 fuse (2) or +B (E9–1) – Body ground

A79066

(b)

E9

+B ECM Connector

Check the harness and connector between the EFI relay and body ground. (1) Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B No.4. (2) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard (Check for open):

MREL A65748

No continuityy

OK


Specified condition

EFI relay (2) – Body ground

Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




–


05C7A–01

FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel injectors are located on the intake manifold. They inject fuel into the cylinders based on the signals from the ECM. Reference: Inspection using oscilloscope With the engine idling, check the waveform between terminals #1 to #4 and E01 of the ECM connectors. HINT: The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram below. Injector Signal Waveform 20V /Division

(Magnification) 20V /Division

GND

GND 100 msec./Division (Idling)

Injection duration

1 msec./Division (Idling) A78423



–


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition SW 6

4 B–R

I5 Injector No.1 2 B–R R–B 1

B–R

Driver Side J/B

B–R

I6 Injector No.2 2 R–B 1

IGN

DL 16 1

AM2 1

1 #1 E13

DH 2


2

ECM

Engine R–B 1 Room IG2 R/B No.1 B–R Engine 2 Room 8 EA1 J/B No.1

1 1A

1

Y

I7 Injector No.3 R–B 1 2 W

I8 Injector No.4 R–B 1 2

B

2 #2 E13

3 #3 E13

4 #4 E13

R–B B

B–G

4

4

W–B 1

1

4A

3


1 4B B–G

FL MAIN

IG2 Relay 2

5

4

W–B

6 E02 E13

4 W–B

Battery

7 E01 E13

EC

Engine B Room R/B No.4 EE

A76891



–



INSPECT ECM(#1, #2, #3 OR #4 VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

#1 (E13–1) – E01 (E13–7)

E01

#4

#3 #2

#2 (E13–2) – E01 (E13–7)

#1

9 to 14 V

#3 (E13–3) – E01 (E13–7)

ECM Connector

#4 (E13–4) – E01 (E13–7)

A18294

OK

Go to step 7

NG

2

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY(CHECK RESISTANCE) (See page 11–22) NG

REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSY

OK

3

INSPECT IG2 RELAY (a) (b)

Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Inspect the IG2 relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY

OK

4


Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG A79096




–


OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(INJECTOR – ECM, INJECTOR – IG2 RELAY) (a) E13

#4

#3

#2 #1 ECM Connector

Check the harness and connector between the injector connector and ECM connector. (1) Disconnect the I5, I6, I7 or I8 injector connector. (2) Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Injector (I5–1) – #1 (E13–1)

A65743

Injector (I6–1) – #2 (E13–2) Injector (I7–1) – #3 (E13–3)


Continuity

Injector (I8–1) – #4 (E13–4)


Specified condition

Injector (I5–1) or #1 (E13–1) – Body ground Injector (I6–1) or #2 (E13–2) – Body ground Injector (I7–1) or #3 (E13–3) – Body ground Injector (I8–1) or #4 (E13–4) – Body ground

IG2 Relay

A79064


I6

I7

No continuity

I8

1 2

(b)

Check the harness and connector between the injector connector and ignition switch connector. (1) Disconnect the I5, I6, I7 or I8 injector connector. (2) Remove theIG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Injector Connector

Specified condition

Injector (I5–2) – IG2 Relay (3) Injector (I6–2) – IG2 Relay (3)

A61031

Injector (I7–2) – IG2 Relay (3)

Continuity



Specified condition

Injector (I5–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground Injector (I6–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground Injector (I7–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity

Injector (I8–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IGNITION SWITCH – IG2 RELAY) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


IG2

Disconnect the battery negative (–) terminal. Disconnect the ignition switch connector. Remove the IGN fuse from the driver side J/B. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Ignition Switch Connector

IG2 (I13–6) – IGN fuse (1)

A66267

IGN fuse (2) – IG2 relay (1)



Driver Side J/B 1


2

IG2 (I13–6) or IGN fuse (1) – Body ground IGN fuse (2) or IG2 relay (1) – Body ground


IGN Fuse

A79103


IG2 Relay

A79064

NG

OK CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7

–


INSPECT ECM (a) (b) E13

Disconnect the ECM E13 connector. Check for continuity between the ECM connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity


E01

E02

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

8

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY(CHECK INJECTOR VOLUME) (See page 11–22) NG




OR


–


05C79–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In the diagram below, when the engine is cranked, current flows from terminal ST2 of the ignition switch to the starter relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal). When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to the coil of the E.F.I. circuit opening relay, the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates. While the NE signal is generated (engine running), the ECM keeps Tr ON (circuit opening relay ON) and the fuel pump also keeps operating. Circuit Opening Relay

EFI Relay

Fuel Pump

Ignition SW AM2

ST2 ECM FC

ST

Tr

MREL (M/T) (A/T)

(A/T)

STA

Start Position SW

EFI

AM2

ST Relay FL MAIN

Battery

(NE Signal)

Starter

A76888



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM GR

B–Y

2 IE1

8 E9 MREL

GR

1

10 E9 FC

2 EFI 1

Engine Room R/B No. 1 Engine Room J/B No. 1

G–Y 6 IC3

GR

B–Y

1 1A

B–G Engine Room R/B No. 4 1 4A


4 5

1

3

2

1 EFI Relay

3

FL MAIN

5

4

1 4B

B–G

B–W

B–W

2 B–W

4

4

L–B

10 IB1 4

Battery

G–Y

F25 Fuel Pump

5 B–W

C8 Circuit Opening Relay

W–B W–B

EC

BR

A76889



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY) Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL PUMP / SPD”. Perform the active test with the engine stopped. Result: The circuit opening relay operates. OK


NG

2

CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–257) NG

REPAIR OR CIRCUIT

REPLACE

POWER

SOURCE

OK

3

INSPECT CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY (a) (b)

C8

Remove the circuit opening relay. Inspect the circuit opening relay. Standard: Terminal No. 1–2

Specified condition Continuity No Continuity

3–5

B16200

NG


REPLACE CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY

OK

4

INSPECT ECM(CHECK VOLTAGE)

E12



(a) (b)

E9

FC (+) A18294


OK


Specified condition

FC (E9–10) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

Go to step 6


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY, CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d)


Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Remove the circuit opening relay. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

EFI Relay

Specified condition

EFI relay (3) – Circuit opening relay (C8–1) Circuit opening relay (C8–2) – FC (E9–10)

A66053

Continuity y



Wire Harness Side


C8

Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or Circuit opening relay (C8–1) – Body ground

1

3

Circuit opening relay (C8–2) or FC (E9–10) – Body ground

5

EFI relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground

No continuityy

2

Circuit Opening Relay Connector

A79099

E9

FC MREL

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)

6

INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSY (See page 11–22) NG

OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSY

OR


7

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY – FUEL PUMP, FUEL PUMP – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side C8 3 5 1

Remove the circuit opening relay. Disconnect the fuel pump connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

2

Circuit opening relay (C8–3) – Fuel pump (F25–4) Fuel pump (F25–5) – Body ground


A79099

Wire Harness Side



Specified condition

Circuit opening relay (C8–3) or Fuel pump (F25–4) – Body ground

No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG A66276

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


When not using hand–held tester: 1

CHECK OPERATION OF FUEL PUMP (See page 11–19) OK


NG

2


OK


CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT


3

–



C8



3–5

B16200

NG



OK

4


E12


(a) (b)

E9




FC (+) A18294

OK NG

Symbols (Terminal No.) FC (E9–10) – E1 (E12–7)

Go to step 6


5

–





EFI Relay

Specified condition


A66053

Continuity y



Wire Harness Side


C8

Specified condition


1

3


5


No continuityy

2


A79099

E9

FC MREL

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6


OK



OR


7

–





2



A79099

Wire Harness Side



Specified condition


No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG A66276



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C7H–01

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING When using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure shown below. 1


2


3



4



5


6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7


8



B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

A


B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10


9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14


15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 18


16

–



GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–


When not using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure shown below. 1


2


3


4


B

A

Malfunction occurs

B



A

5


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 7

A

6


GO TO STEP 9

7


B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 12


8

–



B

A


B


GO TO STEP 12

A

9

10


CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B

A


B


GO TO STEP 13

A

11


GO TO STEP 13

12

PARTS INSPECTION

13


14

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

15

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6O–01

LOCATION

Combination Meter Variable Resister (*1) ECM VSV (EVAP) Mass Air Flow Meter

Fuel Pump DLC3 Circuit Opening Relay Engine Room J/B No.4 Engine Room R/B No.4 Engine Room J/B No.1 Engine Room R/B No.1 Camshaft Oil Control Valve Ignition Coli and Igniter

Injector Idle Speed Control Valve Throttle Body

Crank Position Sensor A/F Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Canshaft Position Sensor Engine Coolamt Temperature Sensor Knock Sensor Neutral Start Switch

A/F Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 1) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2) *1: Leaded Only A76850



DTC

–


05C6R–01

P0010/39 CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The VVT system controls the intake camshaft to provide the optimal valve timing for every driving condition. This control is performed based on the signals, such conditions as intake air volume, throttle position and engine coolant temperature. The ECM controls the oil control valve (OCV), based on the signals output from the sensors. The VVT controller regulates the intake camshaft angle using oil pressure through the oil control valve (OCV). As result, the relative position between the camshaft and the crankshaft becomes optimal, and the engine torque improves, fuel economy improves, exhaust emissions decrease under overall driving conditions. Also, the ECM detects the actual valve timing using the signals from the camshaft position sensor and the crankshaft position sensor, and performs feedback control. This is how target valve timing is achieved by the ECM. ECM Crankshaft Position Sensor MassAir Flow Meter

Target Valve Timing

Throttle Position Sensor

Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve (OCV)

Feedback Duty Control Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor Correction Vehicle Speed Signal Camshaft Position Sensor

Actual Valve Timing A71007

DTC No. P0010/39

DTC Detection Condition Open or short in oil control valve (OCV) circuit


Trouble Area Open or short in oil control valve circuit Oil control valve ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM

C2 Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve 1

W–G

15 E13 OC1+

2

Y–B

14 E13 OC1–

A59779


When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OCV OPERATION) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and warm it up. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD/ ACTIVE TEST / VVT CTRL B1 or VVT CTRL B2”. Check the engine speed when operating the OCV by the hand–held tester. Standard: Tester operation

Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON

Rough idle or engine stall

OK


NG

2

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY (See page 10–20) NG

OK


REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY


3

–


INSPECT ECM(OCV SIGNAL) (a) (b)

E13

OC1 +

Inspection using the oscilloscope. During idling, check the waveform between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)


HINT: The waveform frequency (A) is lengthened as the engine speed becomes higher.

OC1– OCV Signal Waveform 5 V/ Division

(A)

(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A79111


OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – OCV) (a)


(b) (c)

Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve Connector

Specified condition

Oil control valve (C2–1) – OC1+ (E13–15)

Continuity

Oil control valve (C2–2) – OC1– (E13–14)

A54386


Specified condition

Oil control valve (C2–1) or OC1+ (E13–15) – Body ground

E13

Oil control valve (C2–2) or OC1– (E13–14) – Body ground

NG

OC1+

OC1– ECM Connector

A65743

OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

No continuity

HARNESS

OR


–



CHECK OPERATION OF OCV (a)

C2

(b) (c) (–)

(+)

Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve connector. Apply battery positive voltage between the terminals of the camshaft timing oil control valve. Check the engine speed. Standard: Engine speed is rough idle or engine is stalled.

NG

Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve A76968


OK

2


E13

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)




(A)

(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A79111

OK


CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page )


3

–




(b) (c)



Specified condition


Continuity


A54386


Specified condition


E13

OC1+



A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

No continuity

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6S–01

DTC

P0011/59 CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)

DTC

P0012/59 CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– RETARDED (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0010/39 on page 05–169. DTC No.


P0011/59

Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the advanced oil control valve.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed

P0012/59

Trouble Area

Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the retarded oil control valve.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed

Valve timing Oil control valve Camshaft timing gear assy ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0010/39 on page 05–169.


Advanced timing over (Valve timing is out of specified range)

P0011/59

Retarded timing over (Valve timing is out of specified range)

P0012/59

If DTC ”P0011/59 or P0012/59” is displayed, check VVT system circuit. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

When using hand–held tester: 1

CHECK VALVE TIMING (See page 14–139) NG

OK


ADJUST VALVE TIMING (See page 14–139)


2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF OCV) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and warm it up. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / VVT CTRL B1”. Check the engine speed when operating the OCV by the hand–held tester. Standard: Tester operation

Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON


OK

Go to step 4

NG

3

READ OUTPUT DTC(CHECK IF DTC OUTPUT RECURS)

(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG


VVT SYSTEM OK*


4

–


CHECK ECM(OCV SIGNAL) (a) (b)

E13

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)




(A)

(A)

(A)

GND


NG


OK

5

CHECK OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER NG

REPLACE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER

OK

6

CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY(OCV) (See page 10–20) OK

Go to step 8

NG

7

REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY(OCV)

GO

8

CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See page 14–171) OK

NG


Go to step 10


9

–


REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY

GO

10

CHECK FOR BLOCKAGE(OCV, OIL CHECK VALVE AND OIL HOLE) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

11


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK

VVT SYSTEM OK*

NG CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)



OK




2

–


CHECK OPERATION OF OCV (a) (b)

C2

(–)

Start the engine. Check the engine speed with conditions (1) and then (2). (1) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve connector. (2) Apply battery positive voltage between the terminals of the camshaft timing oil control valve. Result:

(+)


Proceed to

Check (1)

Check (2)

A

Normal engine speed


B

B

Conditions other than A

Go to step 4

A

3


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Disconnecting the battery terminal or removing the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG


VVT SYSTEM OK*


4

–



E13

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)




(A)

(A)

(A)

GND


NG


OK

5



OK

6


Go to step 8

NG

7


GO

8


NG


Go to step 10


9

–



GO

10


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

11


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Disconnecting the battery terminal or removing the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


VVT SYSTEM OK*


DTC

–


05C7F–01

P0016/18 CRANKSHAFT POSITION –CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1 SENSOR A)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0335/12, 13 and P0339/13 on page 05–226. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0016/18

Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and VVT sensor 1 signal (2 trip detection logic)

Mechanical system (Timing chain has jumped a tooth, chain stretched) ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0335/12, 13 and P0339/13 on page 05–226.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1






–


05C6T–01

DTC

P0031/21 OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P0032/21 OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC


DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P2237/21 on page 05–248. HINT: These DTCs are related to the air fuel raito (A/F) sensor, although the caption is the heated oxygen sensor. The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The heated oxygen sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the B+ side of the circuit. Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 1 System Drawing) A/F Relay From Battery

ECM

A/F Sensor Heater

HA1A

Sensor

A1A+

A/F Fuse

A1A–

Duty Control

MREL

B62793

DTC No.


P0031/21 P0051/28

Heated current is 0.8 A or less when heater operates (1 trip detection logic)

P0032/21 P0052/28

When the heater operates, heated current exceeds 19.7 A (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heater circuit of A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F relay ECM

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No.1. Bank 2 refers to the bank that does not include cylinder No.1. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly. Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.



–



INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: S

If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

S

1 A7

INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR(RESISTANCE OF A/F SENSOR HEATER) (a) (b)

Bank 1, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A8

Disconnect the A/F sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals HT and +B of the A/F sensor. Resistance: 1.8 to 3.4 (20 _C)

A75325

Bank 2, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A79112

NG

REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR

OK

2

INSPECT A/F RELAY (a) (b)

Remove the A/F relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Inspect the A/F relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200


NG


REPLACE A/F RELAY


3

–


INSPECT ECM(VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E12

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the applicable terminals of the E12 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HA1A (E12–6) – E04 (E12–4) HA2A (E12–5) – E05 (E12–3)

HA1A (+) HA2A (+) E04 (–) E05 (–) ECM Connector

HINT: A18294

The HA1A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1. The HA2A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 1. OK

NG


9 to 14 V



4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/F SENSOR – ECM, A/F SENSOR – A/F RELAY) (a)

Wire Harness Side A7 Bank 1 Sensor 1

HT

+B

Check the harness and connector between the ECM and A/F sensor connectors. (1) Disconnect the A7 or A8 A/F sensor connector. (2) Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

A/F Sensor Connector

HT (A7–1) – HA1A (E12–6)

A76787

HT (A8–1) – HA2A (E12–5)

Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (A7–1) or HA1A (E12–6) – Body ground HT (A8–1) or HA2A (E12–5) – Body ground

+B


Continuity



HT

Specified condition

(b)

A79114


Check the harness and connector between the A/F sensor connector and A/F relay. (1) Disconnect the A7 or A8 A/F sensor connector. (2) Remove the A/F relay from the engine room R/B No.4. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

E12

Symbols (Terminal No.) +B (A7–2) – A/F relay (3) +B (A8–2) – A/F relay (3)


Standard (Check for short): HA1A


HA2A ECM Connector

+B (A7–2) or A/F relay (3) – Body ground A65745

+B (A8–2) or A/F relay (3) – Body ground



A/F Relay

NG

A79113



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6U–01

DTC

P0100/31 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT

DTC

P0102/31 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0103/31 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT


A

Output Voltage


A53295

DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0100/31

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 sec.

P0102/31

Open in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 sec.

P0103/31

Short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 sec. (+B circuit)

Open O or short h t in i mass air i flow fl meter t circuit i it Mass air flow meter ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100/31, P0102/31 or P0103/31”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the mass air flow ratio in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Air Flow Value (gm/s) Approx. 0.0 271.0 or more


Malfunction Mass air flow meter power source circuit open VG circuit open or short E2G circuit open


–


WIRING DIAGRAM B–Y

ECM


EFI Relay

2 EFI 1

Engine Room R/B No. 1 and Engine Room J/B No.1

4

3

5

8 MREL E9

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

GR

2

1

4 2

IE1

B–G EFI No. 1 4

1 4A Engine Room J/B No. 4

2

1

GR

A6 Mass Air Flow Meter

B–R

1 4B

4

B–G 12 EA1

FL MAIN

W–B

B–R 1

3

G

24 VG E12

2

L–Y

32 EVG E12

Battery EC

A76863




–


When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to

0.0

A

271.0 or more

B


C

*1: The value must be changed when the throttle valve is opened or closed. B

Go to step 6

C


A

2



Mass Air Flow Meter Connector A54396

OK


Turn the ignition switch ON. Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard:

NG


Specified condition


9 to 14 V

Go to step 5


3

–


INSPECT ECM(VG VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E12

Start the engine. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 ECM connector.

HINT: The shift position should be P or N and the A/C switch should be turned OFF. Standard: VG (+) EVG (–) ECM Connector A18294


Condition

Specified condition

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

OK


NG

4



Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) VG (A6–3) – VG (E12–24)

E2G VG Mass Air Flow Meter Connector

E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

NG VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASS AIR FLOW METER – EFI RELAY) (a) (b)


(c) (d) EFI Relay

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Remove the EFI No.1 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


A66053

Continuity

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (A6–1)




Ç

Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or EFI No.1 fuse (1) – Body ground EFI No.1 fuse (2) or +B (A6–1) – Body ground

No continuity

NOTICE: Do not insert the tester leads hard in the procedure (c), the holder may be damaged. A79066


+B Mass Air Flow Meter Connector

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A54396


6


Check for continuity between the terminal of the E12 ECM connector and the body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity

NG EVG ECM Connector

OK


A18294



7

–






E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32)



A54396


Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




E12




Condition

Specified condition

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

OK

NG




2

–






NG


Specified condition


9 to 14 V

Go to step 4

A54396

OK

3





E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–




(c) (d) EFI Relay

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Remove the EFI No.1 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) EFI relay (3) – EFI No.1 fuse (1)

A66053

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (A6–1)

2 EFI No.1 Fuse


Ç

Continuity



Specified condition






A54396

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C7G–01

DTC

P0110/24 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

DTC

P0112/24 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0113/24 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT


Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) A67628

The intake air temperature sensor is built in the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature is the greater the thermistor resistance value becomes and the higher the intake air temperature is the lower the thermistor resistance value becomes (See Fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from terminal THA (THAR) via resistor R. That is, the resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA (THAR) also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability during cold engine operation.

DTC No.

Proceed to


P0110/24

Step 1

Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0112/24

Step 4

Short in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0113/24

Step 2

Open in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

Trouble Area

O Open en or short in intake air tem temperature erature sensor circuit Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

After confirming DTC ”P0110/24, P0112/24 or P0113/24”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM


5V G–R

THA 4

E2 5

20 E13

THA

R

28 E2 E13

BR

A72925


If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c)


Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

B

Go to step 4

C



2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) (b)

ECM

Mass Air flow meter

(c) (d)

Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more

A75743


THA

E2


A54396

OK


NG

3


Mass Air flow meter

(a) (b)

ECM

A75742

Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more

E13

THA

E2 ECM Connector


A18294

OK

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)

4



(a) (b) (c)

ECM

A75766

Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

OK


NG

5


ECM

Mass Air flow meter

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–



INSPECT ECM(THA VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

THA

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals THA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector. Voltage: Intake air temp.

Voltage

20 C (68 F)

0.5 to 3.4 V

60 C (140 F)

0.2 to 1.0 V

E2 ECM Connector

OK


A18294

NG

2

INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER (See page 10–20) NG


OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – MASS AIR FLOW METER) (a) (b) (c)

E13

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) THA (E13–20) – THA (A6–4)

THA

E2 ECM Connector

E2 (E13–28) – E2 (A6–5) A65743



Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

THA (E13–20) or THA (A6–4) – Body ground

Continuity

A6

THA

E2


NG A54396



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6V–01

DTC

P0115/22 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT

DTC

P0117/22 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0118/22 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A thermistor is built in the engine coolant temperature sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature. The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as those of the intake air temperature sensor. HINT: If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0115/22, P0117/22 or P0118/22” it enters the fail–safe mode in which the engine coolant temperature is assumed to be 80 C (176 F). DTC No.

Proceed to


Step 1

Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0117/22

Step 4

Short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0118/22

Step 2

Open in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0115/22

Trouble Area


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0115/22, P0117/22 or P0118/22”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the engine coolant temperature in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 (284

Short circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E2 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

5V

2

B–W

1

BR

19 THW E13

R

28 E13

E2

A72925



–






Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–



Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more


Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Connector

OK A76786

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE WATER TEMP. SENSOR

NG

3



ECM

(b)

A75742

E13

THW

E2 ECM Connector

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THW and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more

OK A18294

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR



4

–




ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

OK A75766


NG

5



(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–



INSPECT ECM(THW VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

THW

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals THW and E2 of the ECM connector. Voltage: Intake air temp.

Voltage

20 C (68 F)

0.5 to 3.4 V

60 C (140 F)

0.2 to 1.0 V

E2 ECM Connector

OK A18294


NG

2

INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (See page 10–20) NG


OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EFI WATER TEMP. SENSOR) (a) (b) E13

(c)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

THW

E2 ECM Connector

Specified condition

THW (E13–19) – Engine coolant temperature sensor (E2–2) A65743

E2 (E13–28) – Engine coolant temperature sensor (E2–1)

Continuity


Specified condition

THW (E13–19) or Engine coolant temperature sensor (E2–2) – Body ground

Continuity



MG A76786



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6W–01

DTC

P0120/41 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0122/41 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0123/41 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Throttle Position Sensor

ECM 5V

VC VTA1 E2

A58684

DTC No.

The throttle position sensor is mounted in the throttle body and detects the throttle valve opening angle. When the throttle valve is fully closed, a voltage of approximately 0.7 V is applied to terminal VTA1 of the ECM. The voltage applied to terminal VTA1 of the ECM increases in proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve and becomes approximately 3.5 to 5.0 V when the throttle valve is fully opened. The ECM judges the vehicle driving conditions from these signals input from terminal VTA1, uses them as one of the conditions for deciding the air–fuel ratio correction, power increase correction and fuel–cut control etc.


Condition (a) of DTC P0120/41, P0122/41 or P0123/41 continues for 2 sec. (Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit)

P0120/41

P0122/41

P0123/41

Trouble Area

Detection conditions for DTCs P0122 and P0123 are not satisfied but condition (a) is satisfied (a) VTA1 less than 0.1 V, or VTA1 greater than 4.9 V


(a) VTA1 less than 0.1 V


(a) VTA1 greater than 4.9 V

Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) Open in VTA1 circuit Open in E2 circuit VC and VTA1 circuit are short–circuited ECM

NOTICE: When a malfunction is detected, the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: After confirming DTCs, use the hand–held tester to confirm the throttle valve opening percentage and closed throttle position switch condition.



–


Throttle valve opening position expressed as percentage

Trouble Area

Throttle valve fully closed

Throttle valve fully open

0%

0%

VC circuit open VTA circuit open or short

Approx. 100 %

Approx. 100 %

E2 circuit open

WIRING DIAGRAM T2 Throttle Position Sensor

ECM 5V 1

R–W

VTA 3

L–W

E2 2

BR

VC

18 VC E13

21 VTA1 E13

28 E2 E13 E1 A12544


Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open.



–



READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(THROTTLE VALVE OPENING PERCENTAGE) Depressed

(a) (b)

Released

Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / THROTTLE POS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Accelerator pedal operation


Proceed to

0%

A

Approx. 10 % Approx. 75 %

B

Approx. 100 %

C

FI7052

ReleasedDepressed

B


C

Go to step 4

A

2

INSPECT THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (a) (b)

T2

Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the throttle position sensor. Standard:


Throttle Valve

Resistance

VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2)

2.5 to 5.9 k

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)

VTA E2 VC Throttle Position Sensor

OK


A53154

NG

REPLACE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR


3

–



E13

VC VTA1

E2

ECM Connector

A65159

Reconnect the throttle position sensor connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


Throttle valve

Resistance

VC (E13–18) – EC (E13–28)

2.5 to 5.9 k

VTA1 (E13 (E13–21) 21) – E2 (E13–28)

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

(d)

Check for continuity between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – Body ground

No Continuity

VTA1 (E13–21) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4


T2


Symbols (Terminal No.) VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2) VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)


OK


A53154

NG

Throttle Valve

Resistance

2.5 to 5.9 k

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k



5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR) (a) (b) (c)

E13

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

VC VTA1

E2

Specified condition

VC (T2–1) – VC (E13–18) VTA (T2–3) – VTA1 (E13–21)

ECM Connector

Continuity y

E2 (T2–2) – E2 (E13–28)

A65159


Wire Harness Side

VC (T2–1) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground

T2

VTA (T2–3) or VTA1 (E13–21) – Body ground

1

2


3

VC

E2 VTA Throttle Position Sensor Connector

A79044

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–



CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E13


VTA1

E2

Specified condition

VC (T2–1) – VC (E13–18)

VC

VTA (T2–3) – VTA1 (E13–21)

ECM Connector

Continuity y

E2 (T2–2) – E2 (E13–28)

A65159


Wire Harness Side

Specified condition


T2

No continuity


1

2

3

NG

VC


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A79044

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(VC VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c)

E13

VC (+)


Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V

NG A18294

OK

3

REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY

GO




4 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Clear the DTC (See page 05–149). Start the engine. Run the engine at idle for more than 15 seconds. Read the DTC (See page 05–149). Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0120/41, P0122/41 or P0123/41” is output again

A

”P0120/41, P0122/41 or P0123/41” is not output again

B

B A CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


SYSTEM OK


–


05C6X–01

DTC

P0136/27 OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The heated oxygen sensor is the lamination type. Compared to the conventional type, the sensor and heater portions of the lamination type are narrower overall. Because the heat of the heater acts directly on the alumina and zirconia (of the sensor portion) it accelerates the activation of the sensor. To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three–way catalytic converter is used. But for the most efficient use of the three–way catalytic converter, the air–fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The heated oxygen sensor has the characteristic whereby its output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This is used to detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and provide the ECM with feedback control the air–fuel ratio. When the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas increases. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the LEAN condition (low voltage, i.e. less than 0.45 V). When the air–fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas is reduced. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the RICH condition (high voltage, i.e. more than 0.45 V). The ECM judges by the voltage output from the heated oxygen sensor whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. However, if the malfunction of the heated oxygen sensor causes an output of abnormal voltage, the ECM becomes unable to perform accurate air–fuel ratio control. The heated oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), current flows to the heater in order to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection.

Heater Solid Electrolyte (Zirconia Element) Platinum Electrode

Element Exhaust Gas

DTC No

P0136/27 P0156/29

A

Output Voltage

Ideal Air–Fuel Mixture

Cover Air

A

Richer – Air Fuel Ratio – Leaner

A–A Section DTC Detection Condition

The following g condition continues for 480 sec. or more: During driving with the engine warmed up, voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor remains at 0.45 V or more, or 0.60 V or less.


A66651

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) Heated oxygen o gen sensor heater (bank 1, 1 2 sensor 2) EFI relay


–


HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No.1. Bank 2 refers to the bank that does not include cylinder No.1. Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.


ECM 2 IE1

GR

8 E9 MREL

GR

Engine Room R/B No.4 EFI No.2

4

4 3

4

1

2

4

13 EA1

B–W

1 EFI Engine Room Relay R/B No.4

5

2 4

4 B–Y

1 2 EFI 1 1 1A

W–B

B–W H8 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) B–W L 1 2 4


4 IK1

L

4 E10 HT1B

B

21 E12 OX1B

W

32 E13 O1B–

3

BR

D J12 J/C

B–G

E J13

1 4A

BR

Engine Room J/B No.4 1 4B B–G

H10 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2) L–R B–W 1 2 4

(*1) 10 IK1

L–R

3 E10 HT2B

R

29 E12 OX2B

G

31 E13 O2B–

3

D J13 (*1)

J/C E J12

FL MAIN

BR

*1: Shielded

Battery EC

EF

A76884



–


CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

Vehicle speed

Once 40 sec. or more

Twice 40 sec. or more

(L3)

(L3)

40 km/h (25 mph)

12 times 40 sec. or more (L3)

Idling(L2)

(L4)

(L4)

60 sec. or more

10 sec.

10 sec.

(L5)

IG SW OFF

(L1)

10 sec.

A58686

1. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (L1) 2. Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check mode (See page 05–149). (L1) 3. Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more. (L2) 4. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more. (L3) 5. Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more. (L4) 6. Perform steps 4 to 5 12 times. (L5) HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG will be illuminated on the multi–information display during step 6. NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of the malfunction will be impossible. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from 3 to 6, then perform steps from 3 to 6 again.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately. 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: Less than 3.0 V –12.5 % lean output: More than 3.35 V Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the A/F sensor output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the heated oxygen sensor output. Output voltage of A/F sensor (sensor 1)

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2)

Injection volume

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %

Case 1 Output voltage More than 3.35 V Less than 3.0 V

OK

More than 0.55 V Less than 0.4V

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %

Case 2 Output voltage

A/F sensor (A/F sensor, heater, A/F sensor circuit)

Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


NG

Heated oxygen sensor (heated oxygen sensor, heater, heated oxygen sensor circuit)

NG

Extremely rich or lean actual air–fuel ratio (Injector, fuel pressure, gas leakage in exhaust system, etc.)

Output voltage

More than 3.35 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %

Case 4 Output voltage No reaction

OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 3.0V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction

Mainly suspect trouble area

Output voltage NG

No reaction

The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST/ A/F CONTROL/USER DATA”, then select ”AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”AFS B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1 (a)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(BESIDES DTC P0136/27) Read the DTC. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0136/27” is output

A

”P0136/27” and other DTCs are output

B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0136/27” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B


A

2

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR)

(a) After warming up the engine, run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 3 minutes. (b) Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor when the engine rpm is suddenly increased. HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times by using the accelerator pedal. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates from 0.4 V or less to 0.5 V or more. OK

Go to step 6

NG

3

INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR(HEATER RESISTANCE)

H8

(a) (b)

Bank 1 Sensor 2 H10 Bank 2 Sensor 2

HT

+B 2 4 E1

1 3 OX

Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector A79117

OK


Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor. Standard:


Condition

Specified condition

HT (H8–1) – +B (H8–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H8–1) – E1 (H8–4)

'

No Continuity

HT (H10–1) – +B (H10–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H10–1) – E1 (H10–4)

'

No Continuity

NG

REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR


4

–




Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM) (a)

Wire Harness Side H8 HT Bank 1 Sensor 2

(b) (c)

H10 Bank 2 Sensor 2

Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. Disconnect the E10 and E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

OX


Specified condition

OX (H8–3) – OX1B (E12–21)

Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector

HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E10–4)

A79118

Continuity

OX (H10–3) – OX2B (E12–29) HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E10–3)


E10


Specified condition

OX (H8–3) or OX1B (E12–21) – Body ground HT (H8–1) or HT1B (E10–4) – Body ground

No continuity


OX1B OX2B HT1B HT2B ECM Connector

A65747

Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 2 System Drawing)

EFI Relay From Battery

EFI Fuse

Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater

EFI No.2 Fuse

Sensor

ECM HT1B OX1B O1B–

Duty Control

MREL


A79115


NG

–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

6

PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

HINT: Clear all DTCs prior to perform the confirmation driving pattern. GO

7 (a)

READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P0136/27 IS OUTTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0136/27” is not output again

A

”P0136/27” is output again

B

B


A CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–149)


OR


–


05C6Y–01

DTC

P0141/27 OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC

P0161/29 OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK 2 SENSOR 2)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0136/27 on page 05–211. HINT: The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The heated oxygen sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the B+ side of the circuit. Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 2 System Drawing) EFI Relay From Battery

EFI Fuse


EFI No.2 Fuse

Sensor

ECM HT1B OX1B O1B– MREL

A79115

DTC No. P0141/27 P0161/29

DTC Detection Condition Heated current is 0.2 A or less when heater operates (1 trip detection logic) When heater operates, heated current exceeds 2 A (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor yg sensor heater Heated oxygen EFI relay ECM

HINT:







–


1


H8

(a) (b)


HT

+B 2 4 E1


Condition

HT (H8–1) – +B (H8–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H8–1) – E1 (H8–4)

No Continuity

HT (H10–1) – +B (H10–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H10–1) – E1 (H10–4)

No Continuity

1 3 OX



A79117

NG

Specified condition


OK

2


Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B. Inspect the EFI relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(HT1B OR HT2B VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E10

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the applicable terminals of the E10 and E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HT1B (E10–4) – E01 (E13–7) HT2B (E10–3) – E01 (E13–7)

E01 (–)

HT1B (+) HT2B (+) ECM Connector

A18294

HINT: S S

The HT1B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2. The HT2B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 2. OK

NG


9 to 14 V



4

–


CHECK FUSE(EFI No.2) (a)


EFI No.2 Fuse

Ç

(b)


NG

OK


A79069



5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – EFI RELAY) (a)


+B

H10 Bank 2 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector

Check the harness and connector between the ECM and heated oxygen sensor connectors. (1) Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (2) Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

A79118

HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E10–4) HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E10–3)



Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (H8–1) or HT1B (E10–4) – Body ground HT (H10–1) or HT2B (E10–3) – Body ground

(b) HT1B HT2B ECM Connector

A65744


Ç Ç


Check the harness and connector between the heated oxygen sensor connector and EFI relay. (1) Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (2) Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. (3) Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. (4) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (H8–2) – EFI No.2 fuse (2)

+B (H10–2) – EFI No.2 fuse (2)

A79070

Continuity y

EFI No.2 fuse (1) – EFI relay (3)




Specified condition

+B (H8–2) or EFI No.2 fuse (2) – Body ground +B (H10–2) or EFI No.2 fuse (2) – Body ground

No continuityy

EFI No.2 fuse (1) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground

EFI Relay

NG A66053



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6Z–01

DTC

P0325/52 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0327/52 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0328/52 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A flat type knock sensor (non–resonant type) has the structure that can detect the vibration in a wider band of frequency from about 6 kHz to 15 kHz and has the following features. Knock sensors are fitted on the cylinder block to detect the engine knocking. Sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, the ignition timing is retarded to suppress it. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0325/52

Output voltage of the knock sensor 1 decreases beyond a threshold. (Threshold varies according to an engine speed.)


P0327/52

Output voltage the knock sensor 1 is 0.5 V or less.


P0328/52

Output voltage the knock sensor 1 is 4.5 V or more.


Reference: The correct waveform is as shown.

KNK Signal Waveform

Item

A05134


Contents

Terminal

KNK1 – EKNK

Equipment Set

0.01 to 10 V/ DIV, 0.01 to 10 msec./ DIV

Condition

After warming up the engine, keep the engine speed 4,000 rpm.


–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

(Shielded)

B

K1 Knock Sensor 2 1

B

1 KNK1 E12

W

2 EKNK E12

BR BR E J12

D J12 J/C

EF D J13

E J13 BR A76872

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTC (See page 05–149). Warm up the engine. Accelerate the engine to 3,000 rpm for 10 seconds or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–149). Result : Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0325/52” is output again

A

”P0325/52, P0327/52 and/or P0328/52” are output again

B

B A


Go to step 3


2 (a)

–


CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Check the knock sensor installation. Torque: 20 Nm (204 kgfcm, 15 ftlbf) NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK REPLACE KNOCK SENSOR

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – KNOCK SENSOR) (a) (b) (c)

E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Disconnect the knock sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

KNK1


EKNK

KNK1 (E12–1) – Knock sensor (K1–2)


EKNK (E12–2) – Knock sensor (K1–1)

ECM Connector


A65745


Specified condition

KNK1 (E12–1) or Knock sensor (K1–2) – Body ground EKNK (E12–2) or Knock sensor (K1–1) – Body ground

NG

No continuity

Go to step 5

OK

4

INSPECT ECM(KNK1 VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c)

E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 ECM side terminals. Standard:

KNK1


Specified condition

EKNK

KNK1 (E12–1) – EKNK (E12–2)

4.5 to 5.5 V

ECM Connector

A79072

NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


REPLACE ECM


5

–


INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR (a) (b)

A65174

Remove knock sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard:


Condition

Specified condition

FKN+ (1) – FKN– (2)

20 _C (68 _F)

120 to 280

NG

REPLACE KNOCK SENSOR




–


05C70–01

DTC

P0335/12 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC


DTC

P0339/13 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate) has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signal, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G and NE signal. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0335/12

No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking (2 trip detection logic)

P0335/13

No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more (1 trip detection logic)

P0339/13

In condition (a), (b) and (c), when no crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal is input for 0.05 sec. or more. (a) Engine revolution 1,000 rpm or more (b) STA signal is OFF (c) 3 sec. or more has lapsed after STA signal is switched from ON to OFF.

CH1 (G2+) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND

A63955


Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor Signal plate (crankshaft) ECM

Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope. HINT: The correct waveform is as shown on the left. Item

Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition

During cranking or idling


–


WIRING DIAGRAM C1 Camshaft Position Sensor

Camshaft Timing Roter

ECM

(Shielded)

1

W

2

R

E J12 C6 J/C Crankshaft Position Sensor E

E

26 G2+ E13

BR R

1

G

2

R

27 NE+ E13 BR

Crankshaft Position Sensor Plate

R

(Shielded)

34 E13

NE–

EF

A79124


Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335/12, 13 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the engine mechanical systems. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

S

1


C6

Crankshaft Position Sensor A73303

Measure the resistance between the terminals of the crankshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 985 to 1,600 at cold 1,265 to 1,890 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50 _C (122 _F) and ”Hot” is from 50 _C (122 _F) to 100 _C (212 _F). NG


REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR


2

–




Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

NE+

NE–

Specified condition

NE+ (C6–1) – NE+ (E13–27)


Continuity

NE– (C6–2) – NE– (E13–34)


Specified condition

NE+ (C6–1) or NE+ (E13–27) – Body ground

No continuity

NE– (C6–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground

E13 NE+

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Check the crankshaft position sensor installation . NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a)

CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE(TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE(CRANKSHAFT)) Check the teeth of the sensor plate. NG



REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE (CRANKSHAFT)


–


05C71–01

DTC

P0340/12 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0341/12 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor (G signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G signal rotor has 3 teeth on its outer circumference and is installed on the intake camshaft. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil changes, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate) has 34 teeth and is installed to the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signals, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G and NE signals. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0340/12

No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking (1 tri trip detection logic) No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more (1 trip detection logic)

P0341/12

While crankshaft rotates twice, camshaft position sensor signal is input to ECM 12 times or more (1 trip detection logic)

CH1 (G2+) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND

Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft C h ft position iti sensor Camshaft timing pulley Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM


Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


A63955





1

–



C1

G+ G– Camshaft Position Sensor A73303

Measure the resistance between the terminals of camshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 835 to 1,400 (Cold) 1,060 to 1,645 (Hot) NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG

REPLACE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) G+ (C1–1) – G2 (E13–26)

G– G+ Camshaft Position Sensor Connector A66132

G– (C1–2) – NE– (E13–34)


Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) G+ (C1–1) or G2+ (E13–26) – Body ground G– (C1–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground


E13 G2

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Check the camshaft position sensor installation. NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

HARNESS

OR


4 (a)

–


INSPECT CAMSHAFT Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG



REPLACE CAMSHAFT


–


05C72–01

DTC

P0351/14 IGNITION COIL ”A” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0352/15 IGNITION COIL ”B” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0353/14 IGNITION COIL ”C” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0354/15 IGNITION COIL ”D” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT:

These DTCs indicate a malfunction related to primary circuit. If DTC P0351/14 is displayed, check No.1 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P0352/15 is displayed, check No.2 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P0353/14 is displayed, check No.3 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P0354/15 is displayed, check No.4 ignition coil with igniter circuit. A Direct Ignition System (DIS) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduces high–voltage loss, and enhances the overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor. The DIS is a 1–cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1–cylinder ignition system, the one spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary winding. High voltage generated in the secondary winding is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug passes from the center electrode to the ground electrode. The ECM determines the ignition timing and outputs the ignition (IGT) signals for each cylinder. Based on the IGT signals, the power transistors in the igniter cut off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil is supplied to the spark plug that is connected to the end of the secondary coil. At the same time, the igniter also sends an ignition confirmation (IGF) signal as a fail–safe measure to the ECM.



–


From Battery

ECM

Igniter No.1 Ignition Coil with Igniter

IGT1 Crankshaft Position Sensor

No.1 Cylinder

IGF Ignition Coil IGT2


IGT3

IGT4 Various Sensor

Spark Plug

No.2 Ignition Coil with Igniter

No.2 Cylinder


No.3 Cylinder


No.4 Cylinder

TAC

To Tachometer

A73818

DTC No. P0351/14 P0352/15 P0353/14 P0354/15


No IGF signal to ECM while engine is running

Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform between terminals IGT1 to IGT4 and E1, and IGF and E1 of the E4 and ECM connectors.

CH1 (IGT1 to 4)

GND

CH2 (IGF)

GND

A63956


Trouble Area Ignition system Open or short in IGF and IGT1 to 4 circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM No. 1 to 4 ignition coil with igniter IG2 relay ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch 1 1 IE4 IP1 (LHD) (RHD) B–R

B–R 4

AM2 IG2

Driver Side J/B

2

6 B–R


1

I1 Ignition Coil and Igniter No. 1

W–B

IGN

16 DL B

1 1A

B–R R–B

1 4

B–G

B

1 4A


1 4B

4 IG2 Relay

5

1

R–B 3

2

4


4 R–B

1

2

R–W

W–B


8 E13 IGT1

W–R

9 3 1 P E13 W–R W–B 2 4 I3 W–B Ignition Coil and W–R Igniter No. 3 10 3 LG–B 1 R–B E13 13 W–B W–R W–R E13 4 2 I4 W–B Ignition Coil and W–R Igniter No. 4 11 L–Y 3 R–B 1 E13 W–B 2 4 R–B

IG2 2

1

3

R–B

2 DH

1 AM2

4

ECM

IGT2

IGT3 IGF

IGT4

B–G 8 EA1 FL MAIN

R–B W–B

R–B B–R 1 Battery EC

N2 Noise Filter (Ignition)

EF

A76873



–



1

CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER NG

Go to step 4

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – IGNITION COIL) (a) E13

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil and igniter connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

IGF ECM Connector

Specified condition

IGF (I1–2) – IGF (E13–13) IGF (I2–2) – IGF (E13–13)

A65743

Continuity



I2

I3


I4


Specified condition

IGF (I1–2) or IGF (E13–13) – Body ground IGF (I2–2) or IGF (E13–13) – Body ground

No continuity


IGF Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector

NG A54393

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3

INSPECT ECM

E13

IGF(+)

(a) (b) (c)

E12

E1(–) ECM Connector


A18294

Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IGF (E13–13) – E1 (E12–7)

4.5 to 5.5 V


NG

–



OK REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM (IGT TERMINAL) – IGNITION COIL) (a) E13

(b) (c)


IGT4

IGT3

IGT2 IGT1 ECM Connector

Specified condition

IGT (I1–3) – IGT1 (E13–8) IGT (I2–3) – IGT2 (E13–9)

A65743

Continuity



I2

I3


I4


Specified condition

IGT (I1–3) or IGT1 (E13–8) – Body ground IGT (I2–3) or IGT2 (E13–9) – Body ground

No continuity


IGT Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector

A54393

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5

INSPECT ECM(IGT1, IGT2, IGT3 AND IGT4 VOLTAGE) (a)

E1(–) E13

E12

Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors when the engine is cranked. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IGT1 (E13–8) – E1 (E12–7) IGT2 (E13–9) – E1 (E12–7) IGT3 (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)

IGT4(+) IGT3(+) IGT2(+) IGT1(+) ECM Connector

OK


Between 0.1 0 1 V and 4.5 45V

IGT4 (E13–11) – E1 (E12–7) A18294

NG



6

–



E1(–) E13

E12

(b)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil and igniter connector. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors when the engine is cranked. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IGT1 (E13–8) – E1 (E12–7)

IGT4(+) IGT3(+) IGT2(+) IGT1(+)

IGT2 (E13–9) – E1 (E12–7)

ECM Connector

4 5 V or more 4.5

IGT3 (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)

A18294

IGT4 (E13–11) – E1 (E12–7)

NG


OK

7

INSPECT IGNITION COIL ASSY(POWER SOUSE CIRCUIT) (a)


I2

I3

I4

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil and igniter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON position. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

+B (+) GND (–) Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector

Specified condition

+B (I1–1) – GND (I1–4) +B (I2–1) – GND (I2–4)

A54393

9 to 14 V

+B (I3–1) – GND (I3–4) +B (I4–1) – GND (I4–4)

OK

REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY

NG

8



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


9

–


CHECK FUSE(IGN) (a) (b)

Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG A79096


OK

10

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – IGNITION COIL AND IGNITER) (a)


I1

I3

I4

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil and igniter connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

+B Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector

Specified condition

+B (I1–1) – IG2 relay (3) +B (I2–1) – IG2 relay (3)

A54393

+B (I3–1) – IG2 relay (3)

Continuity

+B (I4–1) – IG2 relay (3)



Specified condition

+B (I1–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground +B (I2–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground +B (I3–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity

+B (I4–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground

IG2 Relay

A79064

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


11

–




IG2



IG2 (I13–6) – IGN fuse (1)

A66267




Driver Side J/B 1


2



IGN Fuse

A79103


IG2 Relay

A79064

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK AND REPLACE POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C73–01



4–Pulse

From Speed Sensor

Skid Control ECU

4–Pulse

Combination Meter

ECM

A79413

DTC No.

P0500/42

DTC Detection Condition During the vehicle is being driven, no vehicle speed sensor signal to the ECM (2 trip detection logic)




–


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM Combination Meter

18 C11

V–W

H H J10 J20

J/C

H H J10 J20

V–W

17 E10 SPD

(LHD) (RHD) (LHD) (RHD)

A76866


1


(a) Drive the vehicle and check that the operation of the speedometer in the combination meter is normal. HINT: The vehicle speed sensor is operating normally if the speedometer display is normal. NG

OK




2

–


INSPECT ECM E1 (–) E12

(a) (b) (c) (d)

SPD (+) E10

ECM Connector


Specified condition

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)


A18294

HINT: The output voltage should fluctuate up and down similarly to the diagram on the left when the wheel is turned slowly.

4.5–5.5V

0V

Shift the lever to the neutral position. Jack up the vehicle. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E10 and E12 ECM connectors as the wheel is turned slowly. Standard:

Turn Wheel

NG

A62954



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C74–01

P0511/33 IDLE AIR CONTROL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Throttle Valve

The rotary solenoid type idle speed control (ISC) valve is located under the throttle body and intake air bypassing the throttle valve is directed to the idle speed control (ISC) valve through the passage. In this way the intake air volume bypassing the throttle valve is regulated, controls the engine speed. The ECM operates the idle speed control (ISC) valve only to perform idle–up and provide feedback for the target idling speed.

Intake Air Chamber

From Air Cleaner Signal

ECM Valve

To Cylinder ISC Valve A58697

DTC No.

P0511/33


Trouble Area Open or short in idle speed control (ISC) valve circuit Idle speed control (ISC) valve is stuck or closed A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM

Idle speed continues to vary greatly from target speed (1 trip detection logic)

WIRING DIAGRAM I10 ISC Valve

B–R From Terminal 2 of EFI No.1 Fuse (See Page 05–257)

12 B–R 2 +B EA1

DUTY

GND

ECM 1

3

10 E12 RSD

G–R

W–B

BR

7 E12 E1

EF

A79101




–


When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK ISC VALVE OPERATION) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature. Switch off all the accessories. Switch off the A/C. Shift the lever to the neutral position. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / ISC DUTY RATIO”. Check that the engine RPM varies when changing the ISC duty ratio. Engine RPM: Engine RPM fluctuates ups and downs in respose to the ISC duty ratio variation. OK


NG

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side ISC valve Connector I10

1

2

3

+B (+)

NG

GND (–)

OK


Disconnect the ISC valve connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the ISC valve wire harness side connector. Standard:

A66264


Specified condition

+B (I10–2) – GND (I10–3)

9 to 14 V

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(RSD CIRCUIT) (a) (b) (c)

E12

Disconnect the ISC valve connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

DUTY (I10–1) – RSD (E12–10)

E1

RSD ECM Connector


A65745


1

2

Continuity

GND (I10–3) – E1 (E12–7)


Specified condition

DUTY (I10–1) or RSD (E12–10) – Body groundr

No continuity

3

GND

DUTY

NG

A66264

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT THLOTTLE BODY IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE ASSY (See page 10–18) NG

REPLACE THLOTTLE BODY IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE ASSY




E12

E1 (–)

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E4 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

RSD (E12–10) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

RSD (+) ECM Connector


OK A65745

Go to step 3


2

–



REPAIR OR REPLACE THLOTTLE BODY IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE ASSY


3



OK

4

CHECK BLOCKAGE OF ISC VALVE AND PASSAGE TO BYPASS THROTTLE VALVE NG





DTC

–


05C75–01

P0606/89 ECM/PCM PROCESSOR

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0606/89

DTC Detection Condition ECM inside error

Trouble Area ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)



–


05C76–01

DTC

P2237/21 OXYGEN SENSOR PUMPING CURRENT CIRCUIT/OPEN (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P2238/21 OXYGEN SENSOR PUMPING CURRENT CIRCUIT LOW (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P2239/21 OXYGEN SENSOR PUMPING CURRENT CIRCUIT HIGH (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC

P2251/21 OXYGEN SENSOR REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT/OPEN (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P2252/21 OXYGEN SENSOR REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT LOW (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P2253/21 OXYGEN SENSOR REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC




–


DTC


DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: This DTC is recorded when A/F sensor has a malfunction, although the caption is healed oxygen sensor. The air–fuel ratio sensor are the lamination type. Compared to the conventional type, the sensor and heater portions of the lamination type are narrower overall. Because the heat of the heater acts directly on the alumina and zirconia (of the sensor portion) it accelerates the activation of the sensor. To obtain a high purification rate of the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three–way catalytic converter is used. For the most efficient use of the three–way catalytic converter, the air–fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The A/F sensor has the characteristic that it provides output voltage* being approximately proportional to the existing air–fuel ratio. The A/F sensor output voltage* is used to provide feedback for the ECM to control the air–fuel ratio. By the A/F sensor output, the ECM can determine the deviation amount from the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio and control the proper injection time immediately. If the A/F sensor is out of order, ECM is unable to perform the accurate air–fuel ratio control. The A/F sensor is equipped with a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), the current flows to the heater to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection. *: The voltage value changes at the inside of the ECM only.

Heater

Platinum Electrode

Element Exhaust Gas

A

ECM Monitored A/F Sensor Voltage

Solid Electrolyte (Zirconia Element)

Cover Air

A A–A Section


Air–Fuel Ratio A73819


DTC Detecting Condition A/F sensor circuit (bank 1 sensor 1)

P2237/21 P2240/28

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF+ less than 0.5 V (b) AF+ greater than 4.5 V Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) (AF+) – (AF–) less than 0.1 V (b) (AF+) – (AF–) greater than 0.8 V A/F sensor circuit low (bank 1 sensor 1)

P2238/21 P2241/28

Condition (a) continues for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF+ less than 0.5 V Condition (a) continues for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) (AF+) – (AF–) less than 0.1 V A/F sensor circuit high (bank 1 sensor 1)

P2239/21 P2242/28

Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF+ greater than 4.5 V Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) (AF+) – (AF–) greater than 0.8 V

P2251/21 P2254/28

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF– less than 0.5 V (b) AF– greater than 4.5 V

P2252/21 P2255/28

Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF– less than 0.5 V

P2253/21 P2256/28

Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (b) AF– greater than 4.5 V

–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) Trouble Area HINT : Main trouble area Open or short in A/F sensor circuit Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM HINT : Main trouble area Open in A/F sensor circuit Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM HINT : Main trouble area Short in A/F sensor circuit Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM

HINT:

means malfunction related to bank 1 A/F sensor circuit. means malfunction related to bank 2 A/F sensor circuit. Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No. 1. Bank 2 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No. 2.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM W ECM

W 2 IE1

GR

GR

8 E9 MREL

4

4 3

1 A/F Relay

5

1 EA1

2 EA1 W

W

A7 A/F Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) 2 1

L

6 E12 HA1A

W

23 E12 A1A+

B

31 E12 A1A–

2 4

4


B–R 1 2 A/F 1 1 1A

3


W–B

(*1)

BR

D J12


Y

5 E12 HA2A

G

22 E12 A2A+

L

30 E12 A2A–

J/C

B–G

E J13

1 4A

BR


4

3

D J13 (*1)

J/C E J12

FL MAIN

BR

*1: Shielded

Battery EC

EF

A76886



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: Less than 3.0 V –12.5 % lean output: More than 3.35 V Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the A/F sensor output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the heated oxygen sensor output.



Output voltage of A/F sensor (sensor 1)

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %

Case 1 Output voltage OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


NG


NG


Output voltage

More than 3.35 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 3.0V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 3.0 V



Injection volume

More than 3.35 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph voltage output of both the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST/ A/F CONTROL/USER DATA”, then select ”AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”AFS B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If DTC is displayed, check bank 1 sensor 1 circuit. If DTC is displayed, check bank 2 sensor 1 circuit. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1 A7



Bank 1, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A8

–

Disconnect the A/F sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals HT and +B of the A/F sensor. Resistance: 1.8 to 3.4 (20_C)

A75325

Bank 2, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A79112

NG


OK

2


Remove the A/F sensor heater relay from the engine room R/B. Inspect the A/F senor heater relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5 B16200

NG OK



REPLACE A/F RELAY


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – A/F SENSOR) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side A7 Bank 1 Sensor 1 HT

+B

Disconnect the A7 or A8 A/F sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

AF+

Specified condition

AF+ (A7–3) – A1A+ (E12–23)

AF–

AF– (A7–4) – A1A– (E12–31)

A/F Connector

A76787

HT (A7–1) – HA1A (E12–6)

Continuity

AF+ (A8–3) – A2A+ (E12–22) AF– (A8–4) – A2A– (E12–30)


HT (A8–1) – HA2A (E12–5)

Standard (Check for short): +B

HT


Specified condition

AF+ (A7–3) or A1A+ (E12–23) – Body ground AF– (A7–4) or A1A– (E12–31) – Body ground

AF+

HT (A7–1) or HA1A (E12–6) – Body ground

AF–

No continuity


A/F Connector

A79114


E12 A1A+ A2A+ A2A– HA1A

HA2A

A1A– A65745


A/F Relay From Battery

ECM

A/F Sensor Heater

HA1A

Sensor

A1A+

A/F Fuse

A1A–

Duty Control

MREL

B62793



NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6M–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI0534

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD (European spec.) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle to the OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or hand– held tester, and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system / components or in the power train control components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) prescribed by ISO 15031–4 are recorded in the engine ECU memory (See page 05–161). If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips, the CHK ENG goes off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

Hand–Held Tester

A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–161). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3).


(b)

FI0534


–


* 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine condition when a misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304) or fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171) or other malfunction (first malfunction only), is detected. Because freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. Description for M–OBD (Except European spec.) When troubleshoot Multiplex OBD (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand– held tester to the vehicle, and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in drive system components. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–161). When the malfunction does not reoccur, the CHK ENG is indicated until the ignition switch is turned off, and then the CHK ENG is not indicated when the ignition switch is turned on but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.


Hand–Held Tester

A76859

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 DLC3 A04550


–


To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle or read the DTC which is indicated on the multi information display when TC and CG terminals on the DLC3 are connected. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (for operating instructions, see the instruction book.) The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, water temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 14230(M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 14230 format.


–



Condition

7


During transmission

4


Always

16


Always

Terminal No.

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Deparment listed in the tool’s instruction manual. (d) Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (e)

FI0534

A76859


HINT: If the CHK ENG lamp is not illuminated, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. 2. DTC CHECK (Nomal Mode) : NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.

(a)

Hand–Held Tester

Check the CHK ENG. (1) The CHK ENG lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running.

Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down. The hand–held tester’s instruction book. (4) See page 05–161 to confirm the details of the DTCs.


(b) CG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

–


If you have no hand–held tester, perform the following steps (1) to (6). (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Using SST, connect between terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040

DLC3 TC A04550

(3)

Read DTC by observing the CHK ENG lamp. If any DTC is not detected, the CHK ENG lamp blinks as shown in the illustration.

(4)

Example If DTC 12 and DTC 31 are detected, the CHK ENG flashes 1 time (for 0.5 sec) and flashes 2 times after the 1.5 sec interval, then flashes 3 times after a 2.5 sec interval from the previous DTC and flashes 1 time. If the interval between the previous DTC and the next DTC is 4.5 sec, it means the previous DTC is the last one of the multiple string DTCs. The CHK ENG lamp repeats the indication of DTCs from the initial cycle. (Refer to the illustration on the left) Check the details of the malfunction using the DTC chart on page 05–16. After completing the check, disconnect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) and turn off the display.

0.25sec. ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF 0.25sec. FI0294

0.5 sec.

1.5 sec. 4.5 sec.

4.5 sec. ON OFF

2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. Repeat

Start

One Cycle BR3589

(5) (6)

HINT: In the event that 2 or more DTCs are detected, the CHK ENG lamp will indicate the smaller number DTC first. (c) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (d) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds.



–


3. DTC CHECK (Check Mode): HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check (test) mode. (a) Proceduce for check mode using hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions Battery positive voltage 11V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”P” or ”N” position. Air conditioning switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (4) Turn the ignition switch and the hand–held tester main switch ON.

Hand–Held Tester

A76859

(5)

Blinking ON OFF 0.13 Second FI3605


Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check (test) mode. The CHK ENG blinks in 0.13 sec interval as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG lamp goes out after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the nomal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTCs, inspect the applicable circuit.


(b)

(c)

–


Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnecting the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds.

4. FAIL–SAFE CHART If any of the following codes are recorded, the engine ECM enters the fail–safe mode. DTC No.



P0031/21 P0032/21 P0051/28 P0052/28

The heater circuit in which the abnormality is detected is turned off

Ignition switch OFF

P0100/31 P0102/31 P0103/31

Ignition timing is calculated from engine speed and a throttle angle

If the ECM detects ”Pass” condition, the ECM will return to ”Nomal mode”.

P0110/24 P0112/24 P0113/24

Intake air temp. is fixed at 20 C (68 F)


P0115/22 P0117/22 P0118/22

Engine coolant temp. is fixed at 80


P0120/41 P0122/41 P0123/41

Fuel cut intermittently while idling

Returned to normal condition and ignition switch OFF

P0325/52 P0327/52 P0328/52

Max. timing retardation

Ignition switch OFF

P0351/14 P0352/15 P0353/14 P0354/15

Fuel cut


5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s engine ECM in check (test) mode, 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of 2 trip detection logic, and sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTC. (See step 3.) (b) Set the check (test) mode. (See step 3.) (c) Perform a simulation test. (See page 01–22) (d) Check the connector and terminal. (See page 01–32) (e) Wiggle the harness and the connector. (See page 01–32)



–


6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if the measured values are a little different from those listed here. Do not decide whether a part is faulty or not solely according to the ”Normal Condition” here. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Hand–held Tester Display


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

INJECTOR

Injection period/ Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 32.64 ms

Idling: 1.92 to 3.37 ms

'

IGN ADVANCE

Ignition timing advance/ Min.: –64 deg., Max.: 63.5 deg.

Idling: BTDC 5 to 15 deg.

'

CALC LOAD

Calculated load by engine ECM/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %

S Idling: 3.3 to 26.7 % S Running without load (2,500 rpm): 12.0 to 14.7 %

'

MAF

Air flow rate from MAF sensor/ Min.: 0 gm/s, Max.: 655 gm/s

S Idling: M/T 0.54 to 4.33 gm/sec. A/T 0.58 to 4.67 gm/sec. S Runnning without load (2,500 rpm): 3.33 to 9.17 gm/sec.

'

ENGINE SPD

Engine Speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16,383 rpm

Idling: M/T 650 to rpm A/T 550 to rpm

'

COOLANT TEMP


INTAKE AIR


THROTTLE POS

Absolute throttle position sensor/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %

CTP SW

Closed throttle position switch/ ON or OFF

VEHICLE SPD


Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (0 mph)

'

O2S B1 S2

Oxygen sensor output voltage of the bank 1 sensor 2/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 1.275 V

Idling: 0.1 to 0.9 V

'

AFS B1 S1

A/F sensor output voltage of the bank 1 sensor 1/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 7.999 V


'


After warming up: 80 to 95C (176 to 203 Equivalent to ambient temp. S Throttle fully closed: 6 to 16 % S Throttle fully open: 64 to 98 % S Throttle fully closed: ON S Throttle open: OFF

If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C” sensor circuit _C”, i it is i open or shorted. Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine) '


–


SHORT FT #1

Short term fuel trim of bank 1/ Min.: –100 %, Max.: 100%

0 20 %

'

LONG FT #1

Long term fuel trim of bank 1/ Min.: –100 %, Max.: 100 %

0 20 %

'

TOTAL FT #1

Total fuel trim of bank 1/ Min.: 0.5, Max.: 1.496

Idling: 0.5 to 1.4

'

TOTAL FT #2


Idling: 0.5 to 1.4

'

AF FT B1 S1

Short term fuel trim associated with the bank 1, sensor 1/ Min.: 0, Max.: 1.999

Lean: 0 < 1 Stoichiometric Air–Fuel Ratio = 1 Rich: 1 < 1.999

'

Idling after warming up: CL

OL: Open Loop–has not yet satisfied conditions to go closed loop. CL: Closed Loop–using oxygen sensor(s) as feed back for fuel control. OL DRIVE: Open loop due to driving conditions. (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) OL FAULT: Open loop due to detected system fault. CL FAULT: Closed loop, but fault with at least one oxygen sensor may be using single oxygen sensor for fuel control.

FUEL SYS #1

Fuel system status (Bank1) / OL or CL or OLDRIVE or OLFAULT or CLFAULT

FC IDL

Idle fuel cut / ON or OFF

Fuel cut operation: ON

'

CHK ENG

CHK ENG status / ON or OFF

CHK ENG ON: ON

'

STARTER SIG

Starter signal / ON or OFF

Cranking: ON

'

A/C SIG

A/C signal / ON or OFF

A/C ON: ON

'

PNP SW [NSW]

Neutral position switch signal / ON or OFF

P or N position: ON

'

ELECT LOAD SIG

Electrical load signal / ON or OFF

Defogger switch ON: ON

'

STOP LIGHT SW


Brake pedal depressed: ON Brake pedal released: OFF

'

PS OIL PRESS SW

Power steering signal / ON or OFF

Steering position is; center: OFF Except center:ON

'

PS SIGNAL

Power steering signal/ ON or OFF

After engine start: OFF After steer the steering: ON

'

FUEL PUMP / SPD

Fuel pump / speed status / ON/H or OFF/M,L

Idling: ON

'

EVAP VSV

VSV status for EVAP control / ON or OFF

VSV operating: ON

'

VVT CTRL B1

VVT control status / ON or OFF

VVT system operation: ON

'

IGNITION

Ignition counter/ Min.: 0, Max.: 400

0 to 400

'

CYL #1, #2, #3, #4

Misfire ratio of the cylinder 1/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 50 %

0%

'



THROTTLE POS

Throttle position sensor output voltage/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

THROTTLE TARGT

Target position of throttle valve/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

–


Throttle fully closed: 0.3 to 0.8 V Throttle fully open: 3.2 to 4.9 V


Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine) Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten diagnostic time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST”. (g) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOL

A/F CONTROL

EVAP VSV (ALONE)

FUEL PUMP / SPD

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

[Test Details] Control the injection volume Min.: –12.5 %, Max.: 25 % [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3000 rpm or less.

All injectors are tested at once. Injection volume is gradually changed between –12.5 and 25%.

[Test Details] Control the injection volume –12.5 % @ 25 % (Change the injection volume –12.5 % or 25 %.) [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3000 rpm or less.

The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor. To display the graph indication, select O2S B1 S1 or A/F B1S1 and press button ”4” after selecting ”ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/ USER DATA”.

[Test Details] Activate the VSV for EVAP control. ON or OFF

'

[Test Details] Control the fuel pump. ON or OFF

'

VVT CTRL B1

[Test Details] Activate the VVT system. ON or OFF

TC/TE1


'

[Test Details] Control the idle fuel cut prohibit ON or OFF

'

FC IDL PROHBT


ON: Rough idle or engine stall. OFF: Normal engine speed.


–



1


NOTICE: Carry out this check with the engine stopped and ignition switch off. Reference: Voltage

NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V


OK

2



NG

GO TO STEP 6

OK

3

CHECK IF ENGINE STARTS

OK

4

CHECK AIR FILTER

(a) Visually check that the air filter is not excessively dirty or oily. HINT: If necessary, clean the filter with compressed air. First blow from the inside thoroughly, then blow from the outside of filter. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

5

CHECK IDLE SPEED (See page 14–101) NG

OK




6

–


CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See page 11–19) NG

PROCEED TO PAGE 11–15 AND CONTINUE TO TROUBLESHOOT

OK

7

CHECK FOR SPARK (See page 18–7) NG


OK PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6Q–01


Suspected Area

See page

Engine does not crank (Does not start)

1. Starter 2. Starter relay

No initial combustion (Does not start)

1. ECM power source circuit 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. ECM

05–257 05–264 01–32

No complete combustion (Does not start)

1. Fuel pump control circuit

05–264

Engine cranks normally (Difficult to start)

1. Starter signal circuit 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. Compression

05–278 05–264 14–101

Cold engine (Difficult to start)

1. Starter signal circuit 2. Fuel pump control circuit

05–278 05–264

Hot engine (Difficult to start)


05–278 05–264


1. A/C signal circuit (Compressor circuit) 2. ECM power source circuit

05–257

Low engine idle speed (Poor idling)

1. A/C signal circuit (Compressor circuit) 2. Fuel pump control circuit

05–264


1. Compression 2. Fuel pump control circuit

14–101 05–264

Hunting (Poor idling)

1. ECM power source circuit 2. Fuel pump control circuit

05–257 05–264

Hesitation/Poor acceleration (Poor driveability)

1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. A/T faulty

05–264 05–879

Surging (Poor driveability)


05–264



05–264

Engine stalls during A/C operation

1. A/C signal circuit (Compressor circuit) 2. ECM

01–32

Unable to refuel/Difficult to refuel

1. ORVR system


19–8 19–8


–


05C7B–01

STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the engine is cranked, the intake air flow becomes slow, so fuel vaporization is poor. A rich mixture is therefore necessary in order to achieve good startability. While the engine is being cranked, the battery voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. The starter signal is mainly used to increase the fuel injection volume for the starting injection control and after–start injection control.

WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch B–R


B–R

4

5

ECM B–Y

9 E12 STA

B–R B–Y 1 2 AM2 1

Engine Room R/B No. 1 Engine Room J/B No.1

5

5 5

B–Y 6

1 ST Relay

1 1A B–G

5

1 4A

1 4B

B–R

1 1 S4 S5

B J13

C J13

J/C

B J12

A J12

A J12

2 DJ

B Driver Side J/B

FL MAIN

B–Y

B–Y

B–W

W–B

7 IK1

B–G

ST

6

5 B


1 2

2

3

Driver Side R/B

Fuse Block

9 DA

B–Y (M/T)

Starter W–B

Battery

B–Y (A/T)

B–W (A/T)

IJ 9

6

N1 Neutral Start SW A76870



–




READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STA SIGNAL) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STARTER SIG” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Ignition Switch Position

ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

NG




2

–



E12

STA ECM Connector

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Remove the starter relay from the driver side R/B. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Starter relay (1) – STA (E12–9)

Continuity



Specified condition

Starter relay (1) or STA (12–9) – Body ground

No continuity


A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD

Starter Relay

NG

A79098

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR



INSPECT ECM(STA VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E12

E1 (–)

STA (+) ECM Connector


A18294


Specified condition

STA (E12–9) – E1 (E12–7)

0V


(c)

–


Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 ECM connector when the engine is cranked. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

STA (E12–9) – E1 (E12–7)

6 V or more

OK


NG

2


E12

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD

Starter Relay

NG A79098



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C7D–01

TC TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Terminals TC and CG are located in the DLC3. When connecting these terminals, DTCs in normal mode or check mode can be read through the CHK ENG flashing in the combination meter.

WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3 TC

J8 J/C 13

W–L (LHD)

Driver Side J/B B

B

17 DB

W–L (LHD)

W–L (RHD) CG

4

A

20 E9 TC

W–L

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (RHD) W–B (LHD)

3 DC

ECM

6 CA W–B (RHD)

A W–B (LHD) J16 J/C

IO

IP

A76890


Even though terminal TC is not connected to terminal CG, the CHK ENG blinks. For the above phenomenon, an open or short in the wire harness, or malfunction inside the ECM is the likely cause.

1

CHECK DLC3(TC VOLTAGE) CG (–)

(a) (b)

TC (+)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the DLC3. Standard:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


Specified condition

9 10111213141516

TC (13) – CG (4)

9 to 14 V

DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NG


Go to step 3


2

–



TC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


9 10111213141516 DLC3


Specified condition

TC (13) – TC (E9–20)

Continuity


DLC3 A04550


Specified condition

TC (13) or TC (E9–20) – Body ground

No continuity

E9

TC ECM Connector

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

CHECK CHK ENG CONDITION SST

09843–18040 CG

(a) (b)

TC

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect between terminals TC and CG of the DLC3 connector. Check that the CHK ENG blinks. Standard: CHK ENG blinks

DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NO PROBLEM


NG



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6P–01

TERMINALS OF ECM

E13

E12

E10

E9

A66714

Symbols (Terminals No.) BATT (E9 – 3) – E1 (E12 – 7) FC (E9 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

Wiring Color B–Y – BR G Y – BR G–Y

W (E9 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W – BR

+B (E9 – 1) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–R – BR

STP (E10 – 19) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G W – BR G–W

F/PS (E9 – 14) – E1 (E12 – 7)

LG–B – BR

STA (E12 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–Y – BR

HA1A (E12 – 6) – E04 (E12 – 4) *1

L – W–B W B

A1A+ (E12 – 23) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

Always

8 to 14

IG switch ON

8 to 14

Idling Idling

Below 1.5 8 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 3.5

IG switch ON

8 to 14

IG switch ON, brake pedal depressed IG switch ON, brake pedal released IG switch ON Cranking Idling

8 to 14 Below 1.5 Pulse generation 5.5 or more Below 3.0

IG switch ON

9 to 14

W – BR

IG switch ON

3.0 to 3.6

A1A– (E12 – 31) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

B – BR

IG switch ON

2.7 to 3.3

HA2A (E12 – 5) – E05 (E12 – 3) *1

Y – W–B W B

Idling

Below 3.0

A2A+ (E12 – 22) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

IG switch ON

9 to 14

G – BR

IG switch ON

3.0 to 3.6

A2A– (E12 – 30) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

L – BR

IG switch ON

2.7 to 3.3

HT1B (E10 – 4) – E01 (E13 – 7) *1

L – W–B W B

Idling

Below 3.0

OX1B (E12 – 21) – 01B (E13 – 32) *1

IG switch ON

9 to 14

B – BR

IG switch ON

0 to 1.0

O1B– (E13 – 32) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

W – BR

IG switch ON

0.4 to 1.1

HT2B (E10 – 3) – E01 (E13 – 7) *1

L R–W L–R W–B B

Idling

Below 3.0

OX2B (E12 – 29) – 01B (E13 – 32) *1 O2B– (E13 – 31) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

IG switch ON

9 to 14

R – BR

IG switch ON

0 to 1.0

G – BR

IG switch ON

0.4 to 1.1



–


V–W – BR

TACH (E9 – 5) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR–R – BR

Idling

VC (E13 – 18) – E2 (E13 – 28)

R–W – BR

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

PRG (E13 – 12) – E01 (E13 – 7)



SPD (E10 – 17) – E1 (E12 – 7)

Pulse generation

VG (E12 – 24) – EVG (E12 – 32)

G – L–Y

THW (E13 – 19) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B–W – BR

G2+ (E13 – 26) – NE– (E13 – 34)

W–R

Idling


NE+ (E13 – 27) – NE– (E13 – 34)

G–R

Idling


THA (E13 – 20) – E2 (E13 – 28) VTA1 (E13 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28)

G–R – BR L W – BR L–W

#1 (E13 – 1) – E01 (E13 – 7)

B–R B R–W W–B B

#2 ((E13 – 2)) – E01 ((E13 – 7)) #3 ((E13 – 3)) – E01 ((E13 – 7)) #4 (E13 – 4) – E01 (E13 – 7)

Y – W–B W – W–B B – W–B

IGT1 (E13 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7) IGT2 ((E13 – 9)) – E1 ((E12 – 7)) IGT3 ((E13 – 10)) – E1 ((E12 – 7)) IGT4 (E13 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

R–W R W – BR P – BR LG–B – BR L–Y – BR

Idling, A/C switch OFF

1.1 to 1.5

Idling, Engine coolant temp. at 80C (176F)

0.2 to 1.0


0.5 to 3.4

IG switch ON, throttle valve fully closed

0.3 to 1.0

IG switch ON, throttle valve fully open

3.2 to 4.9

IG switch ON

Idling

IG switch ON IGF (E13 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7) RSD (E12 – 10)

W–R – BR

Idling

8 to 14

Pulse generation ((See page g 05–232)) 4.5 to 5.5 Pulse generation (See page 05–232)

G–R – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

OC1+ (E13 – 15) – OC1– (E13 – 14) *1

W–G – Y–B

IG switch ON


KNK1 (E12 – 1) – EKNK (E12 – 2)

B–W

Idling


ELS2 (E9 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

MREL (E9 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7)

– E1 (E12 – 7)

Defoger switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 3.0

GR – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IGSW (E9 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

TC (E9 – 20) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–L – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

SIL (E9 – 18) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–G – BR

Connect hand–held tester to DLC3

ELS (E9 – 12) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

VAF (E13 – 32) – E2 (E13 – 28) *2

P – BR

*1: For European spec. only *2: Leaded only


Taillight ON


IG switch ON

Below 3.0

IG switch ON

2.0 to 3.5


–


05C7E–01

VARIABLE RESISTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The variable resister has been adopted to leaded–type vehicle only. This resistor is used change the air–fuel ratio of the air–fuel mixture. The idle mixture is adjusted using this resistor. Turning the idle mixture adjusting screw clockwise moves the contacts inside the resistor, raising the terminal VAF voltage. Conversely, turning the screw counterclockwise lowers the terminal VAF voltage. When the terminal VAF voltage rises, the ECM increases the injection volume slightly, marking the air–fuel mixture a little richer.

WIRING DIAGRAM

V3 Variable Resister

ECM 5V

VCC 2

VAF 3

9 EA1

R–W

18 VC E13

P

3 EA1

P

32 VAF E13

BR

10 EA1

BR

28 E2 E13

R–W

E1 E2 1

A76892

INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: Always use a CO meter when adjusting the idle mixture. If a CO meter is not available, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ADJUST IDLE MIXTURE.



1

–


CHECK CO/HC (See page 14–101) OK

CHECK FOR PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–168)

NG

2

ADJUST CO CONCENTRATION SST

09243–00020 (a) (b)

Same condition as step 1 this chart. Using SST, adjusting the idle mixture by turning the idle mixture adjusting screw in the variable resistor. Result:

SST

Result

Idle Mixture Adjusting Screw

Proceed

Connection: 1.5 0.5 %

B

Change in CO connection

C

No change in CO connection

A

HINT:

Always check idle speed after turning the idle mixture adjusting screw. If it is incorrect, readjust idle speed. Adjustable range of the idle mixture adjust to turn this screw is 180 degrees. Do not turn this screw more than it.

B

ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE

C

CHECK CO/HC (See page 14–101)

180 A73579

A



3

–


INSPECT VARIABLE RESISTOR SST

09243–00020 (a)

V3

Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance:

2 1 3

(b)


Specified condition

1–2

3.5 – 6.5

Measure the resistance between terminals 2 and 3 when turning the idle mixture adjusting screw fully clockwise and counterclockwise using SST Resistance: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

2–3

Change from about 5 k to 0 k accordingly

SST A74545

NG

REPLACE VARIABLE RESISTOR

OK

4

CHECK ECM SST

09243–00020 (a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector while slowly turning the idle mixture adjusting screw first fully counterclockwise and then fully clockwise, using SST. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.)

SST VAF (E13–32) – E2 (E13–28)

Specified condition Voltage changes smoothly from 0 V to about 5 V, i.e. does not suddenly jump up to 5 V down to 0 V

E13

VAF

E2 ECM Connector


A79116

OK



5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – VARIABLE RESISTOR) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the V3 variable resistor connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (V3–2) – VC (E13–18)

E2 VAF VC Variable Resistor Connector

VAF (V3–3) – VAF (E13–32)

Continuity y

E2 (V3–1) – E2 (E13–28)

A73587

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) VC (V3–2) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground

E13

VAF (V3–3) or VAF (E13–32) – Body ground

NG VAF

E2

VC ECM Connector

A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE


HARNESS

OR


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE)

05CJB–01

CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECM detects a trouble, it illuminates CHK ENG. At this time, the ECM sets a DTC in the memory.

WIRING DIAGRAM

1


2 AM2 1 1A

1

B–R

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1

ECM 4

W IG2 AM2

B–R

4A

9

1

4B 1 B–G

DH 2

IGN

C11 Combination Meter Check Engine Warning Light

B–R Engine Room J/B No.4

W

I13 Ignition Switch

6

B–G

11 E9

Driver Side J/B

FL MAIN DA

18 22

B–W Battery

C A J8 J26 (LHD) (RHD)

J/C

B–W C A J8 J26 (LHD) (RHD) A76882





1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)





2

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) (b) (c) E9


W ECM Connector

A67445

NG

CHECK AND CONNECTOR

REPAIR

HARNESS

AND


3 (a)


SYSTEM OK

NG

4 (a)






–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDT–01



Driver’s Name

Production Date


Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name



Difficult to Start


Poor Idling


Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall


km miles


Back fire Other


High (

rpm)

Low (


Surging

Others



Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation




day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/


After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.


F) Downhill


Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal


)


)

)



Normal

)

rpm)


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CID–01


Open or short in OCV circuit OCV ECM

*1 CHK ENG

P0010 (05–322)


P0011 (05–325)

Camshaft Position ”A” –Timing Over– Advanced or System Performance (Bank 1)

P0012 (05–325)


P0016 (05–329)



P0031 (05–330)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Open in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay EFI fuse EFI No. 2 fuse ECM

P0032 (05–330)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater ECM

P0037 (05–330)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

Same as DTC No. P0031

P0038 (05–330)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 2)


P0051 (05–330)



P0052 (05–330)



P0057 (05–330)



P0058 (05–330)



P0100 (05–336)

Mass or volume Air Flow Circuit

P0102 (05–336)


P0103 (05–336)


P0105 (05–342)


P0107 (05–342)


P0108 (05–342)



Valve timing OCV VVT controller assembly ECM


Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit Manifold absolute pressure sensor ECM


–


*1 CHK ENG

P0110 (05–347)



P0112 (05–347)


Short in intake air temperature sensor circuit Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

P0113 (05–347)


Open in intake air temperature sensor circuit Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

P0115 (05–351)



P0116 (05–355)



P0117 (05–351)


Short in engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM

P0118 (05–351)


Open in engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM

P0120 (05–356)



P0121 (05–362)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit Range/Performance Problem

Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body)

P0122 (05–356)


Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) VTA1 circuit short VC circuit open ECM


Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) VTA1 circuit open E2 circuit open VC and VTA1 circuit are short–circuited ECM

Oxygen Sensor Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector ECM

Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1)


P0123 (05–356)

P0130 *3 (05–363)

P0133 *3 (05–374)



–


*1 CHK ENG

P0134 (05–381)

Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector Gas leakage in exhaust system PCV valve and hose PCV hose connection ECM

P0136 *3 (05–388)



P0150 *3 (05–363)



P0153 *3 (05–374)



P0154 (05–381)



P0156 *3 (05–388)



System too Lean (Bank 1)

Air induction system Injector blockage Mass air flow meter Manifold absolute pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Fuel pressure Gas leakage in exhaust system Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1 sensor 1) EFI relay PCV valve and hose PCV hose connection ECM

System too Rich (Bank 1)

Injector leak, blockage Mass air flow meter Manifold absolute pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Ignition system Fuel pressure Gas leakage in exhaust system Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) ECM

P0171 *3 (05–394)

P0172 *3 (05–394)



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) *1 CHK ENG

System too Lean (Bank2)


P0175 *3 (05–394)

System too Rich (Bank2)


P0190 (05–406)



P0191 (05–410)


Open or short in high–pressure fuel pump (spill valve) circuit High–pressure fuel pump Low–pressure fuel pump Fuel pipe Fuel relief valve Fuel pressure regulator ECM

P0200 (05–415)

Injector Circuit/Open

P0201 (05–415)

Injector Circuit/Open – (Cylinder 1)

P0202 (05–415)


P0203 (05–415)


P0204 (05–415)


P0220 (05–356)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”B” Circuit


P0222 (05–356)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”B” Circuit Low Input


Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”B” Circuit High Input


P0174 *3 (05–394)

P0223 (05–356)


O Open en or short in EDU circuit EDU (Injector driver) Fuel injector j assyy ECM


P0300 *3 (05–420)

Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected

P0301 *3 (05–420)

Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected

P0302 *3 (05–420)


P0303 *3 (05–420)


P0304 *3 (05–420)


P0325 (05–429)


P0327 (05–429)

–


Open or short in engine wire Connector connection Vacuum hose connection Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing PCV hose h connection ti PCV hose ECM

*1 CHK ENG

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2

Knock sensor Knock sensor (under–torqued or loose) ECM


Short in knock sensor circuit Knock sensor ECM

P0328 (05–429)


Open in knock sensor circuit Knock sensor ECM

P0335 (05–433)


P0339 (05–433)


P0340 (05–436)


P0341 (05–436)


P0351 (05–439)


P0352 (05–439)


P0353 (05–439)


P0354 (05–439)


P0420 *3 (05–446)

Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)

P0430 *3 (05–446)


P0443 (05–449)

Evaporative Emission Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit

Open of short in VSV circuit for EVAP VSV for EVAP ECM

P0500 (05–453)


Combination meter Open or short in speed sensor circuit Vehicle speed sensor ECM Skid control ECU Clutch or brake slips or gear is broken

P0504 (05–455)

Brake Switch Correlation



Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit osition sensor Crankshaft position Signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) ECM Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft position osition sensor Camshaft timing gear Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM

Ignition system Open or short in IGF and IGT circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM (ignition coil circuit 1 through 4) Ignition coil with igniter (ignition coil 1 through 4) IG2 relay ECM

Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter (inside exhaust manifold)


–


*1 CHK ENG

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit

Open or short in brake booster pressure sensor circuit Brake booster pressure sensor Vacuum hose ECM

P0556 (05–462)

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

Vacuum hose (between the brake booster and intake manifold, the brake booster and brake booster pressure sensor, and the intake manifold and manifold absolute pressure sensor) Open or short in brake booster pressure sensor circuit Brake booster pressure sensor Manifold absolute pressure sensor Brake booster Open or short in stop light switch circuit Stop light switch ECM

P0557 (05–459)

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input


P0558 (05–459)

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input


P0560 (05–467)

System Voltage


P0571 (05–1711)

Brake Switch ”A” Circuit

Cruise control system

P0604 (05–470)

Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error

P0606 (05–470)

ECM/PCM Processor

P0607 (05–470)


P0555 (05–459)

ECM

P0617 (05–471)

Starter Relay Circuit High

Short in park/neutral position switch (A/T) Park/neutral position switch (A/T) Ignition switch ECM

P0657 (05–470)

Actuator Supply Voltage Circuit / Open

ECM

P0705 *4 (05–474)



P0710 *4 (05–941)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” circuit


P0711 *3,4 (05–943)



P0712 *4 (05–941)



P0713 *4 (05–941)



P0717 *4 (05–945)



P0724 *4 (05–947)



P0741 *3,4 (05–948)

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Performance or Stuck Off


P0743 *4 (05–951)

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Electrical




–


*1 CHK ENG

P0746 *3,4 (05–954)



P0748 *4 (05–956)



P0766 *3,4 (05–962)



P0776 *3,4 (05–963)



P0778 *4 (05–956)



P0793 *4 (05–965)

Intermediate Shaft Speed Sensor ”A” Circuit No Signal


P0982 *4 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”D” Control Low


P0983 *4 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”D” Control High


P1235 (05–477)

High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit

Open or short in fuel pump (high pressure) Fuel pump (high pressure) ECM

P2008 (05–480)

Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit/Open (Bank 1)

Open of short in VSV for IACV circuit VSV for IACV ECM

P2102 (05–483)

Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low

Open in throttle control motor circuit Throttle control motor ECM

P2103 (05–483)

Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High

Short in throttle control motor circuit Throttle control motor ECM

P2111 (05–485)

Throttle Actuator Control System – Stuck Open

P2112 (05–485)

Throttle Actuator Control System – Stuck Closed

Throttle control motor circuit Throttle control motor Throttle body Throttle valve

P2118 (05–487)

Actuator Control Motor Current Range/Performance

Open in ETCS power source circuit ECM

P2119 (05–490)

Throttle Actuator Control Throttle Body Range/Performance

Electric throttle control system ECM

P2120 (05–492)



P2121 (05–499)





–


*1 CHK ENG

P2122 (05–492)


P2123 (05–492)


P2125 (05–492)


P2127 (05–492)


P2128 (05–492)


P2135 (05–356)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A”/”B” Voltage Correlation

VTA1 and VTA2 circuit are short–circuited Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) ECM

P2138 (05–492)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D”/”E” Voltage Correlation


P2195 *3 (05–363)

Oxygen Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2196 *3 (05–363)

Oxygen Sensor Signal Stuck Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

P2197 *3 (05–363)


P2198 *3 (05–363)


P2716 *4 (05–967)



B2799 (05–1625)


Immobiliser system


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure ressure Injector ECM

*1: CHK ENG (Check engine warning light) is illuminated *2: CHK ENG (Check engine warning light) is illuminated or blinks *3: For Euro–OBD vehicles only. *4: For A/T only.



DTC

P2121

–


05CKU–01




Trouble Area

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 0.5 seconds: (a) Difference between VPA and VPA2 exceeds the threshold (b) IDL is OFF

P2121




1


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)


Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 2 1 6 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

OK


NG

REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY


2

–



VPA (+) E9

(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V


OK


NG

3



A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)


Disconnect the accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (LHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No.)

A54384

Specified condition




EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9


VPA2 VPA


Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)

EPA2 EPA ECM Connector VCP2


VCPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) A54404



Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CK1–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In the diagram below, when the engine is cranked, current flows from terminal ST2 of the ignition switch to the starter relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of ECM (STA signal). When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to the coil of the circuit opening relay, the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates. While the NE signal is generated (engine running), the ECM keeps Tr ON (circuit opening relay ON) and the fuel pump also keeps operating. Circuit Opening Relay

IG2 Relay

Fuel Pump

Ignition SW AM2

IG2

IGN

ST2

ECM FC

ST

Tr

IGSW (M/T) (A/T)

(A/T)

STA

Park/Neutral Position SW IG2

AM2

ST Relay FL MAIN

Battery

(NE Signal)

Starter

A76880



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R


B–R

AM2 IG2

4

ECM 6

B–R

10 E9 FC

G–Y

I13 Ignition SW

1 6 IC3

B–R 1

2 AM2

IG2 2

1

1 1A

DH 2

1

DL 16

B–G

B


Driver Side J/B

IGN


1 4A

G–Y

B–R

4


5

1

3

2

4

5

1

1 4B

IG2 Relay 3

2

4

B–W

4 B–W

Battery

L–B

10 IB1

B–G

FL MAIN

B–W

B–W

4

EC

G–Y

F25 Fuel Pump

5 W–B


W–B

BR

A76881



–



PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY) Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL PUMP/SPD”. Perform the ACTIVE TEST with the engine stopped. Result: The circuit opening relay operates. NG

Go to step 2


2




3–5

B16200

NG



OK

3

INSPECT ECM(FC VOLTAGE) E1 (–)

(a) (b)

FC (+)


Specified condition

FC (E9–10) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

E9

E11

ECM Connector

A67446

NG

Go to step 6

OK

4



REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSY


5

–



Wire Harness Side 3 5

C8 1

Remove the circuit opening relay. Disconnect the F25 fuel pump connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

2

Specified condition

Circuit opening relay (C8–3) – Fuel pump (F25–4)

Continuity

Fuel pump (F25–5) – Body ground



A79099

Wire Harness Side


Specified condition


No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

A67586

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6


Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Inspect the IG2 relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


7

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IGNITION SWITCH – IG2 RELAY, IG2 FUSE – IG2 RELAY) (a)

Driver Side J/B

IGN Fuse

A79096

Wire Harness Side

Check harness and connector between the IG2 relay and ignition switch. (1) Inspect the IGN fuse. Remove the IGN fuse from the driver side J/B. Check for continuity in the IGN fuse. Standard: Continuity Reinstall the IGN fuse. (2) Disconnect the I13 ignition switch connector. (3) Remove the IG2 relay. (4) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IG2 (I13–6) – IG2 relay (1)

Continuity


I13 IG2

(b)

Ignition Coil Connector A66267


IG2 Relay A79064


Specified condition

IG2 (I13–6) or IG2 relay (1) – Body ground

No continuity

Check harness and connector between the IG2 relay and the IG2 fuse. (1) Inspect the IG2 fuse. Remove the IG2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. Check for continuity in the IG2 fuse. Standard: Continuity (2) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):



Specified condition

IG2 fuse (2) – IG2 relay (5)

Continuity


IG2 Fuse


Specified condition

IG2 fuse (2) or IG2 relay (5) – Body ground

No continuity

2 1

OK


NG A81706

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


8

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY, CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d)


Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Remove the circuit opening relay. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IG2 relay (3) – Circuit opening relay (C8–1)

IG2 Relay

Circuit opening relay (C8–2) – FC (E9–10)

A79064

Continuity y

IG2 relay (2) – Body ground


Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

IG2 relay (3) or Circuit opening relay (C8–1) – Body ground

3


No continuity

5

C8 1

2


A79099

E9

FC ECM Connector

NG A54404



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDS–01



2


3


HINT: If the display indicates a communication fault in the tool, inspect the DLC3.

4



5


6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7


8



B A


A


B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10


9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14


15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 18


16

–



GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDV–01

LOCATION Engine Room R/B No. 4

Combination Meter

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor ECM VSV for EVAP Mass Air Flow Meter

Fuel Pump (For Low Pressure) DLC3 Circuit Opening Relay Accelerator Pedal Assy Engine Room R/B No. 1 Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve (OCV)

Ignition Coil Assy Injector

Injector Driver (EDU) VSV for Intake Air Control Valve Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor Fuel Pump (For High Pressure)

Throttle Body Assy Camshaft Position Sensor

Crankshaft Position Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 1)

Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2)


Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Knock Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Park/Neutral Position Switch (Only for A/T Models)

A76858



DTC

P0010

–


05CDY–01

CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1)

HINT: This is the procedure of oil control valve (OCV).

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The VVT system controls the intake camshaft to provide the optimal valve timing for every driving condition. This control is performed based on the signals, such conditions as intake air volume, throttle position and engine coolant temperature. The ECM controls the oil control valve (OCV), based on the signals output from the sensors. The VVT controller regulates the intake camshaft angle using oil pressure through the OCV. As result, the relative position between the camshaft and the crankshaft becomes optimal, and the engine torque improves, fuel economy improves, exhaust emissions decrease under overall driving conditions. Also, the ECM detects the actual valve timing using the signals from the camshaft position sensor and the crankshaft position sensor, and performs feedback control. This is how target valve timing is achieved by the ECM. ECM Crankshaft Position Sensor Air Flow Meter


Target Valve Timing

Throttle Position Sensor Feedback

Duty Control Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor Correction Vehicle Speed Signal Camshaft Position Sensor


DTC No. P0010

DTC Detection Condition Open or short in OCV circuit


Trouble Area Open or short in OCV circuit OCV ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


W–G

16 E11 OC1+

2

Y–B

15 E11 OC1–

A59779


1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATE OCV) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and warm it up. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / VVT CTRL B1”. Check the engine speed when operating the OCV by the hand–held tester. Standard: Tester operation

Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON


OK

CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

NG

2

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY(OCV) (See page 10–39) NG

OK




3

–



E11

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E11–16) – OC1– (E11–15)



OC1–

OCV Signal Waveform 5 V/ Division (A)

(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A67528


OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – OCV) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side

C2

Disconnect the C2 OCV connector. Disconnect the E11 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) OCV (C2–1) – OC1+ (E11–16)

OCV Connector

OCV (C2–2) – OC1– (E11–15) A54386


Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) OCV (C2–1) or OC1+ (E11–16) – Body ground OCV (C2–2) or OC1– (E11–15) – Body ground


E11

OC1+ OC1–

NG ECM Connector

A81698


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CDZ–01

DTC

P0011

CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)

DTC

P0012

CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– RETARDED (BANK 1)


P0011

P0012


Trouble Area

Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the advanced OCV.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the retarded OCV.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed

Valve timing OCV Camshaft timing gear assy ECM




P0011


P0012

If DTC ”P0011 or P0012” is displayed, check VVT system circuit. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1


OK




2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–



Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON


NG

Go to step 4

OK

3

CHECK IF DTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR

(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ETCS fuses for 60 seconds or more. (b) Start the engine and warm it up. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011 or P0012 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG


VVT SYSTEM OK *


4

–



E11

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E11–16) – OC1– (E11–15)



OC1–


(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A67528


OK

5

INSPECT OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER NG


OK

6

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY(OCV) (See page 10–39) OK

Go to step 8

NG

7


GO

8

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See page 14–240) OK

NG


Go to step 10


9

–


REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See page 14–240)

GO

10

CHECK BLOCKAGE(OCV, OIL CHECK VALVE AND OIL HOLE) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

11


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ETCS fuses for 60 seconds or more. (b) Start the engine and warm it up. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011 or P0012 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


VVT SYSTEM OK


DTC

P0016

–


05CE0–01

CRANKSHAFT POSITION –CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1 SENSOR A)



Trouble Area

Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and camshaft position sensor (bank 1) signal (2 trip detection logic)




1 (a)

CHECK VALVE TIMING (See page 14–186) Check for loose and jumping teeth of timing chain. NG



ADJUST VALVE TIMING (See page 14–186) (REPAIR OR REPLACE TIMING CHAIN)


–


05CJD–01

DTC

P0031

OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P0032

OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P0037


DTC

P0038


DTC

P0051


DTC

P0052


DTC

P0057


DTC

P0058




–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0130 on page 05–363. HINT: The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The heated oxygen sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the B+ side of the circuit. Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 1 System Drawing) Heated Oxygen Sensor


+B EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A

EFI No. 2 Fuse E1 Sensor OX

OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

DTC No. P0031 P0037 P0051 P0057 P0032 P0038 P0052 P0058

DTC Detection Condition Heated current is 0.2 A or less when heater operates with +B > 10.5 V and < 11.5 V (1 trip detection logic) Heated current is 0.25 A or less when heater operates with +B 11.5 V (1 trip detection logic)

Heated current exceeds 2 A when heater operates. (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay EFI fuse EFI No. 2 fuse ECM Short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater ECM

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly. Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.



If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1


INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR(HEATER RESISTANCE) (a)

Component Side +B

HT

(b)

H9

–

B2S1

E1 Heated Oxygen Sensor

Component Side +B H7

B1S1

H8

B1S2

H10 B2S2

A61830

(c)

Disconnect the H7, H8, H9 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the heated oxygen sensor connector. Standard (Bank 2 sensor 1): Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

Measure the resistance between the terminals of the heated oxygen sensor connector. Standard (Except Bank 2 sensor 1): Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

HT

E1 Heated Oxygen Sensor A62378

NG


OK

2


Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Inspect the EFI relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


3

–


INSPECT ECM(HT1A, HT1B, HT2A OR HT2B VOLTAGE)

HT1A (+)

E1 (–) E12

E11

(a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the applicable terminals of the E11 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HT1A (E12–5) – E1 (E11–1) HT1B (E12–25) – E1 (E11–1)

HT1B (+) HT2B (+)

HT2A (+) ECM Connector

HT2A (E12–4) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

HT2B (E12–33) – E1 (E11–1)

A76903

HINT:

The HT1A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1. The HT1B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2. The HT2A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 1. The HT2B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 2. OK

NG




4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – EFI RELAY)

Wire Harness Side

(a)

H7 B1S1 H8 B1S2 H10 B2S2

H9 B2S1 HT

+B

+B HT


Check the harness and connector between the ECM and heated oxygen sensor connectors. (1) Disconnect the H7, H8, H9 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (2) Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

A66290

Specified condition

HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5) HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E12–25) HT (H9–1) – HT2A (E12–4)

Continuity

HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E12–33)

E12


HT1A HT1B HT2B

Specified condition

HT (H7–1) or HT1A (E12–5) – Body ground

HT2A

HT (H8–1) or HT1B (E12–25) – Body ground HT (H9–1) or HT2A (E12–4) – Body ground

ECM Connector

HT (H10–1) or HT2B (E12–33) – Body ground

A81695

(b) Engine Room R/B No. 4

EFI Relay A66053

No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the heated oxygen sensor connector and EFI relay. (1) Inspect the EFI No.2 fuse. Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. Check for continuity in the EFI No.2 fuse. Standard: Continuity (2) Disconnect the H7, H8, H9 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (3) Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. (4) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (H7–2) – EFI relay (3) +B (H8–2) – EFI relay (3) +B (H9–2) – EFI relay (3)

Continuity

+B (H10–2) – EFI relay (3)


Specified condition

+B (H7–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground +B (H8–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground +B (H9–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground +B (H10–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground


No continuity


NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJE–01

DTC

P0100


DTC

P0102


DTC

P0103



A

Output Voltage


A53295


Trouble Area

P0100

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 seconds.

P0102

Open in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 seconds.

P0103

Short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 seconds.


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100, P0102 or P0103”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the air flow rate from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Air flow rate (gm/s)

Malfunction

Approximately 0.0

Mass air flow meter power source circuit open VG circuit open or short

271.0 or more


EVG circuit open


–



ECM


EFI Relay Engine Room R/B No. 1 and Engine Room J/B No. 1

2 EFI 1

4

3

5

8 MREL E9

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

GR

2

1

4 2

IE1

B–G EFI No. 2 4


2

1

GR


B–W

1 4B

4

B–G 13 EA1

FL MAIN

W–B

B–W 1

3 L–Y

30 VG E13

2

29 EVG E13

G

Battery EC

A76863


1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to

0.0

A

271.0 or more

B

1 Mass Air Flow Rate 270.0 (*1)

C




–


B

Go to step 5

C


A

2


Wire Harness Side +B (+)

A6

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


9 to 14 V


NG

Go to step 7

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(VG VOLTAGE) VG (+)

E13

(a) (b)

EVG (–)

ECM Connector

A76903

Start the engine. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


Condition

Specified condition

VG (E13–30) – EVG (E13–29)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

HINT: The shift position should be P or N and the A/C switch should be turned OFF. OK

NG




4

–



Wire Harness Side Mass Air Flow Meter Connector

A6


E2G

VG (A6–3) – VG (E13–30)

VG

E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E13–29)



A54396


Specified condition


No continuity

E13

EVG

VG

ECM Connector

NG A81699

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

INSPECT ECM(SENSOR GROUND) (a) EVG

E13

NG


OK



Specified condition


Continuity



6

–




A6


E2G

VG (A6–3) – VG (E13–30)

VG

E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E13–29) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E13

VG

EVG ECM Connector

NG A81699



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – MASS AIR FLOW METER) (a)

(b) (c) (d)

Wire Harness Side +B

A6


Inspect the EFI No. 2 fuse. (1) Remove the EFI No. 2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. (2) Check for continuity in the EFI No. 2 fuse. Standard: Continuity Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (A6–1) – EFI relay (3)

Continuity



Specified condition

+B (A6–1) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity


EFI Relay A66053

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJF–01

DTC

P0105


DTC

P0107


DTC

P0108


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (V)

Output Voltage

(3.96) 3.6 2.4 1.2 150

450

20

60

mmHg 750(840) kPa 100(112)

Manifold Absolute Pressure A01512

DTC No.

By a built–in sensor unit, the manifold absolute pressure sensor detects the intake manifold pressure as a voltage. The ECM then determines the basic injection duration and basic ignition advance angle based on this voltage. Since the manifold absolute pressure sensor does not use the atmospheric pressure as a criterion, but senses the absolute pressure inside the intake manifold (the pressure in proportion to the preset absolute vacuum 0), it is not influenced by fluctuations in the atmospheric pressure due to high altitude and other factors. This permits it to control the air fuel ratio at the proper level under all conditions. If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108”, it operates the fail–safe function, keeping the ignition timing and fuel injection volume constant and making it possible to drive the vehicle.


Trouble Area

P0105

Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more

P0107

Open in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more

P0108

Short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the manifold absolute pressure from ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Manifold Absolute Pressure (kPa) Approximately 0 142 or more




–


WIRING DIAGRAM V1 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

ECM

VCC 3

R–W

18 VC E13

VOUT 2

G–W

33 PIM E13

BR

28 E2 E13

GND

1

5V

E1

A00309



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: Same as the atmospheric pressure Result: Manifold Absolute Pressure (kPa)

Proceed to

142 or more

A

0.0

B

OK (Same as present pressure) (*1)

C

*1: The value must be changed when the engine is run or stopped.

A


B

Go to step 3

C



2

–


INSPECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR(VCC VOLTAGE) (a)

Wire Harness Side

(b) (c)

V1 GND (–)

1

2 3

VCC (+)


A72877

Disconnect the V1 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the V1 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VCC (V1–3) – GND (V1–1)

4.5 to 5.5 V

NG

Go to step 4

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(PIM VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

PIM (+)


Specified condition

PIM (E13–33) – E2 (E13–28)

3.4 to 3.8 V


A76903

NG



Go to step 5


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR) (a) (b) E13

(c)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the V1 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

VC ECM Connector

1

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VCC (V1–3)

Continuity


A81699

Wire Harness Side

V1



Specified condition

VC (E13–18) or VCC (V1–3) – Body ground

No continuity

VCC

2 3


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

A72877

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5


(c)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the V1 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

E2 ECM Connector

PIM

PIM (E13–33) – VOUT (V1–2) A81699

E2 (E13–28) – GND (V1–1)


Standard (Check for short): Wire Harness Side VOUT

V1 GND

1

2 3



A72877


Specified condition

PIM (E13–33) or VOUT (V1–2) – Body ground

No continuity


NG

–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJG–01

DTC

P0110


DTC

P0112


DTC

P0113



Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) A67628

DTC No.

Proceed to

The intake air temperature sensor is built in the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature is the greater the thermistor resistance value becomes and the higher the intake air temperature is the lower the thermistor resistance value becomes (See Fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from terminal THA via resistor R. That is, the resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability during cold engine operation. If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0110, P0112 or P0113”, it operates the fail–safe functions in which the intake air temperature is assumed to be 20C (68F).


Trouble Area Open or short in intake air temperature sensor circuit Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

P0110

Step 1


P0112

Step 4



P0113

Step 2



HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0110, P0112 or P0113”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM


5V 20

GR

THA

E13

4

28

E2

BR

E13

5

R

THA

E2

E1

A72925



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual intake air temperature Result: Display

Proceed to

–40C (–40)

A

140C (284) or more

B


C

HINT:

If there is an open circuit, the hand–held tester indicates –40C (–40F). If there is a short circuit, the hand–held tester indicates 140C (284F) or more.

A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN HARNESS)


(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d) (e) (f) A75743

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Connect the terminals THA and E2 of the mass air flow meter wire harness side connector. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more


A6

THA

OK

E2 A54396


NG

3



(a) (b)

ECM

A75742

THA

E13

E2

ECM Connector


HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more

OK A76903

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR



4

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN HARNESS)


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

ECM

A75766

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

OK


NG

5



(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A81699



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0116

–


05CK2–01

ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM



P0116

When THW is greater than –40C (–40F) but less than 60C (140F), and THA is greater than –6.7C (20F), and when starting engine, conditions (a) and (b) continue (2 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THW change is lower than 3C (5.4F) from THW since when starting engine

Trouble Area




1

READ OUTPUT DTC(IN ADDITION TO P0116)

(a) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display

Proceed to

Only ”P0116” is output.

A

”P0116” and other DTCs are output.

B



A

2






–


05CK7–01

DTC

P0120

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0122

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0123

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC

P0220

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0222

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0223

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC

P2135

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A”/”B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION

HINT: This is repair procedure of ”throttle position sensor”.



–



Throttle Position Sensor Magnet IC No.1 VC VTA1

ECM

Throttle Position Sensor Output Voltage (V)

This electrical throttle system is no used throttle cable. This throttle position sensor is non–contact type. The throttle position sensor is mounted on the throttle body to detect the opening angle of the throttle valve. Since this sensor is electronically controlled with hall elements, accurate control and reliability can be obtained. It has 2 sensors to detect the throttle opening angle and a malfunction of the throttle position sensor. The voltage is applied to the terminals VTA1 and VTA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve. The VTA1 is a signal to indicate the actual throttle valve opening angle which is used for the engine control, and the VTA2 is a signal to indicate the information about the opening angle which is used for detecting a malfunction. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals input from terminals VTA1 and VTA2, and the ECM controls the throttle motor to make the throttle valve angle properly in response to the driving condition.

Fail Safe Angle *1 5

VTA2 2.58 2.25

VTA1

0.95 0.69 6.5 0

Usable Range

84

Throttle Valve Opening Angle (deg)

VTA2 E2 IC No.2 Magnet

Throttle Valve Fully Closed (Throttle Position Opening Position Expressed as Percentage (VTA1) 10 to 24 %) Throttle Valve Fully Opened (Throttle Position Opening Position Expressed as Percentage (VTA1) 64 to 96 %) *1: Fail Safe Angle 6.5 (Throttle Position Opening Position Expressed as Percentage (VTA1) about 16 %)


A19802


–



DTC No.

Condition (a) of DTC P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0222 or P0223 continues for 2 sec. (Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit)

Trouble Area

Detection conditions for DTCs P0122 and P0123 are not satisfied but condition (a) is satisfied (a) VTA1 0.2 V or VTA1 4.8 V


(a) VTA1 0.2 V


P0123

(a) VTA1 4.8 V


P0220

Detection conditions for DTCs P0222 and P0223 are not satisfied but condition (a) is satisfied (a) VTA2 0.5 V or VTA2 4.97 V and 0.2 V VTA1 1.8 V


(a) VTA2 0.5 V


P0223

(a) VTA2 4.97 V and 0.2 V VTA1 1.8 V


P2135

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec. or more, or condition (b) continues for 0.4 sec. or more: (a) |VTA1 – VTA2| 0.02 V (b) VTA1 0.2 V and VTA2 0.5 V


P0120

P0122

P0222

NOTICE: When a malfunction is detected, the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: After confirming DTCs, use the hand–held tester to confirm the throttle valve opening percentage and closed throttle position switch condition. The THROTTLE POS means VTA1 signal as well as the THROTTLE POS #2 for the VTA2 signal. Reference (Normal condition): Tester display

Accelerator pedal fully released

Accelerator pedal fully depressed

THROTTLE POS

10 to 24 %

64 to 96 %

THROTTLE POS #2

2.1 to 3.1 V

4.5 to 5.5 V



–


WIRING DIAGRAM T1 Throttle Position Sensor (Built in Throttle Body)

VC

VTA1

VTA2

E2

ECM

5

R–W

18 VC E13

6

L–W

21 E13

4

B–R

3

BR

VTA1

31 VTA2 E13 28 E13 E2

A76871



1 (a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(THROTTLE POS AND THROTTLE POS #2) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ETCS / THROTTLE POS and THROTTLE POS #2” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Throttle position expressed as percentage and voltage Accelerator pedal released


Trouble area

THROTTLE POS (VTA1)

THROTTLE POS #2 (VTA2)

THROTTLE POS (VTA1)


0%

0 to 0.2 V

0%

0 to 0.2 V

100 %

4.5 to 5.5 V

100 %

4.5 to 5.5 V

E2 circuit open

0 % or 100 %

2.1 to 3.1 V (Fail safe)

0 % or 100 %


VTA1 circuit open or ground short

About 16 % (Fail safe)

0 to 0.2 or 4.5 to 5.5 V


0 to 0.2 or 4.5 to 5.5 V


10 to 24 %

2.1 to 3.1 V

64 to 96 % (Does not fail safe)

4.5 to 5.5 V (Does not fail safe)

Throttle position sensor circuit is normal


Proceed to

VC circuit open

A

B


B

–


Go to step 5

A

2


Wire Harness Side Throttle Body Connector

T1

Disconnect the T1 throttle body connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (T1–5) – VC (E13–18)

E2

VTA2

VC

VTA1

VTA1 (T1–6) – VTA1 (E13–21)

Continuity

VTA2 (T1–4) – VTA2 (E13–31)

B53781

E2 (T1–3) – E2 (E13–28)


E13

Specified condition

VC (T1–5) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground VTA1 (T1–6) or VTA1 (E13–21) – Body ground

No continuityy

VTA2 (T1–4) or VTA2 (E13–31) – Body ground

VC E2 ECM Connector

VTA2

VTA1

NG

A81699

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(VC VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

Throttle Body Connector

T1

E2

VTA2

VC

VTA1 B53781

VC (+)

E13



A76903

Disconnect the T1 throttle body connector. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V


–

NG



OK

4


GO

5 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC(THROTTLE POSTION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). Start the engine. Run the engine at idle for 15 sec. or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0222, P0223 and/or P2135” are output again

A

No DTC output

B



SYSTEM OK


DTC

P0121

–


05CK8–01

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

HINT: This is the procedure of the ”throttle position sensor”.


DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) continues for 2.0 seconds: (a) Difference between VTA1 and VTA2 is out of threshold

Trouble Area Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body)

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY



–


DTC

P0130

OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P0150


DTC

P2195

OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P2196

OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P2197


DTC

P2198



05CK9–01


–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three–way catalytic converter is used. For the most efficient use of the three–way catalytic converter, the air–fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The heated oxygen sensor has the characteristic whereby its output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This is used to detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and provide the ECM with feedback control the air–fuel ratio. When the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas increases. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the LEAN condition (low voltage, i.e. less than 0.45 V). When the air–fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, the oxygen will be vanished from the exhaust gas. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the RICH condition (high voltage, i.e. more than 0.45 V). The ECM judges by the voltage output from the heated oxygen sensor whether the air– fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. If the malfunction of the heated oxygen sensor causes an output of abnormal voltage, the ECM becomes unable to perform accurate air–fuel ratio control. The heated oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), current flows to the heater in order to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection. Atmosphere Ideal Air–Fuel Mixture

Platinum Electrode Solid Electrolyte (Zirconia Element)

Platinum Electrode Heater Coating (Ceramic)

Output Voltage

Housing


Cover Exhaust Gas DTC No.


P0130 P0150

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) remains at 0.4 V or more, or 0.55 V or less, during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

P2195 P2197

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) remains at 0.55 V or less, during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

P2196 P2198

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) remains at 0.4 V or more, during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

A00798

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system y Fuel pressure Injector ECM

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly. The output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor and the short–term fuel trim value can be read using the hand–held tester.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

B–W 4

2 IE1

GR

2

EFI No. 2

1


B–W

GR

4

4

3

8 E9 MREL

H8 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) 25 1 P B–W 2 E12 HT1B (*1) 21 3 4 B E12 OX1B 13 B–W EA1 26 W E11 O1B– B–W

4 B–W

GR

H10 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2) B–W 2 1 L–B

1 EFI Relay

33 E12 HT2B

(*1) 2

5 4 Engine Room B–Y R/B No. 4

4 4

(*1) W–B

Engine Room R/B No. 1 and Engine Room J/B No. 1

2 EFI 1 1 1A

R

29 E12 OX2B

G

31 E11 O2B–

B–W

(*1) 1

3

H7 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) B–W 2 1 Y

BR

5 E12 HT1A

BR 4 D J12 D J12

B–G

3

BR

E J13 Engine Room J/B No. 4

BR

BR 4

3

R

23 E12 OX2A

B–W 2

1

L

4 E12 HT2A

D J13

1 4B B–G

J/C

FL MAIN E J12 W–B

BR

28 E13 E2

(*1)

J/C

BR

22 E12 OX1A

(*1)

B–W

1 4A

B

H9 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 1)

Battery EC

EE

*1: Shielded A76864



–



Vehicle speed 40 km/h (25 mph)

20 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

(d)

(d)

(d)

Idling(c)

(e)

(e)

(f)

100 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

30 sec.

IG SW OFF (a) (b)

A76369

(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Switch the hand–held tester from the ”normal mode” to the ”check mode” (See page 05–294). (c) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 100 seconds or more. (d) Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 20 seconds or more. (e) Let the engine idle for 20 seconds or more. Perform steps from (d) to (e) 3 times. (f) Let the engine idle for 30 seconds. HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG will be illuminated on the multi information display during step (f). NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of a malfunction will not occur. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from (c) to (f), then perform steps from (c) to (f) again.



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing the ”A/F CONTROL” ACTIVE TEST (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few seconds delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output. And there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor). Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %

Case 1 Output voltage Less than 0.4V

OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %

Case 2 Output voltage NG


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


Sensor 2: rear sensor (sensor 2, heater, sensor 2 circuit)

Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Sensor 1: front sensor (sensor 1, heater, sensor 1 circuit)

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction

OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2: rear sensor)

Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG



–


The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”O2S B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle is short of fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and heated oxygen sensor DTCs will be recorded, and the CHK ENG then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.

1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and/or P2198” are output

A

”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 or P2198” and other DTCs are output

B

HINT:

If any other codes besides ”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and/or P2198” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. If a misfiring DTC(s) is present, record the DTC(s) that indicates misfiring cylinder(s), then proceed to A.

B

A




2 (a)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor during idling. Heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) output voltage: Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).

(b)

P18349

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3


HINT: Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern. GO

4 (a)

READ OUTPUT DTC(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and/or P2198” are output again

A

”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and/or P2198” are not output again

B

B A REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR




5

–



Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

̲

̱

̴

̳

(b)

Disconnect the H7 or H9 heated oxygen sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the heated oxygen sensor connector. Standard (Bank 1, 2 Sensor 1):

E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

6



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


7

–



Wire Harness Side H7

H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1

Disconnect the H7 or H9 heated oxygen sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity

OX (H8–3) – OX2A (E12–23) HT (H8–1) – HT2A (E12–4) E1 (H8–4) – E2 (E13–28)

E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) or OX1A (E12–22) – Body ground

OX1A E2


No continuity


OX2A ECM Connector A76823


HINT:

The OX1A and HT1A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1. The OX2A and HT2A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 1.

Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 1 System Drawing) EFI Relay From Battery

Heated Oxygen Sensor +B

EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


8 (a)

–


CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM Check for vacuum leaks in the air induction system. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM

OK

9

CHECK FUEL PRESSURE(LOW PRESSURE) (See page 11–33) NG

CHECK AND REPLACE FUEL PUMP, PRESSURE REGULATOR, FUEL PIPE LINE AND FILTER

OK

10

CHECK FUEL PRESSURE(HIGH PRESSURE) (See page 11–33) NG

CHECK AND REPLACE FUEL PUMP, FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR, WIRING AND FUEL LEAKAGE

OK

11 (a)

CONFIRM IF ANY MISFIRING DTCS WERE PRESENT AT STEP 1 Misfiring DTC ”P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” was present at step 1. NO


YES

12

REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See page 11–42)

HINT: If one or more the misfiring DTCs ”P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” were present at step 1, replace the injector(s) mounted on the misfiring cylinder(s) that is referred by the DTC(s) with normal injector(s). GO

13





14 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B





–


05CKA–01

DTC

P0133

OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P0153



P0133 P0153


Response time for output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) to change from rich to lean, or from lean to rich, is 1.0 sec. or more during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector ECM

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing the ”A/F CONTROL” ACTIVE TEST (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few seconds delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output. And there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor).



Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume


–12.5 %



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %


–12.5 %


Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


+25 %

–12.5 %

Less than 0.4V


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”O2S B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle is short of fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and DTCs P0133 and/or P0153 will be recorded, and the CHK ENG then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.



1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO DTC P0133 AND/OR P0153) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0133 and/or P0153” are output

A

”P0133 or P0153” and other DTCs are output

B

HINT:

If any other codes besides ”P0133 and/or P0153” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. If a misfiring DTC(s) is present, record the DTC(s) that indicates misfiring cylinder(s), then proceed to A.

B


A

2 (a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DURING IDLING) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) during idling. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V, and period of ”t” must exist less than 1.0 sec. (See the following table).

(b)

A73686

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3

PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (See page 05–363)




4 (a)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P0133 AND/OR P0153 ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0133 and/or P0153” are output again

A

”P0133 and/or P0153” are not output again

B

B


A REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

5


Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

6



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200




NG

–


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

7



H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1


(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity


E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition


OX1A E2


No continuity




HINT:




EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


8 (a)

–




OK

9



OK

10



OK

11 (a)



YES

12



13





14 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B





–


05CKB–01

DTC

P0134

OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P0154



P0134 P0154


After engine is warmed up, heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) output does not indicate RICH ( 0.45 V) even once when conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continue for at least 65 sec.: (a) Engine speed: 1,400 rpm or more (b) Vehicle speed: 130 km/h (81 mph) (c) Throttle valve is not fully closed (d) 180 sec. or more after starting engine

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure PCV hose connection PCV valve and hose Injector Gas leakage in exhaust system ECM

HINT:

&$ "!$ ! % ! '% & ! &%&$ &" "!$ & "'&#'& ("& " & & ")*! %!%"$ ! %!%"$ $" & ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL” & "'&#'& ("& " & & ")*! %!%"$ % %% &! & & ")*! %!%"$ $'& * "#! "$ %"$& Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing the ”A/F CONTROL” ACTIVE TEST (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


NOTICE: There is a few seconds delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output. And there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor). Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”O2S B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.



1 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

HINT: S


S

B


A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature above 75_C (169_F). Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) when the engine rpm is suddenly increased.

HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times using the accelerator pedal. Standard: Heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) outputs a RICH signal (0.45 V or more) at least once. NG

Go to step 6

OK

3



4 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B




5

–


CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST NO


YES DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL (DTC P0134 AND/OR P0154)

6

CHECK CONNECTION OF PCV HOSE NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE

OK

7


Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

8



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200




NG

–


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

9



H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1


(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity


E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition


OX1A E2


No continuity




HINT:




EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


10

–


CHECK WHETHER MISFIRE IS OCCURRED OR NOT BY MONITORING DTC AND DATA LIST NG

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING FOR MISFIRE (See page 05–294)

OK

11 (a)



OK

12



OK

13



OK

14

CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK NG

OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE LEAKAGE POINT

EXHAUST

GAS


15 (a)

–




YES

16



17



18 (a)


Proceed to


A


B





–


05CKC–01

DTC

P0136

OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC

P0156


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0130 on page 05–363. DTC No

P0136 P0156

DTC Detection Condition If the following two conditions are satisfied at a time (2 trip detection logic): (a) The ECM records cycles which the vehicle driving and stops 8 times or more. (b) There was no change in the rich and lean outputs from heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2) for the 360 seconds under air fuel ratio feedback control. (Throttle was not closed)

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) EFI relay

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.




–



Vehicle speed



(f) 12 times 40 sec. or more

(d)

(d)

(d)

40 km/h (25 mph) Idling (c)

(e)

(e)

(e)

IG SW OFF

(a), (b)

60 sec. or more

10 sec.

10 sec.

10 sec.

A58686

(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check (test) mode (See page 05–294). (c) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more. (d) Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more. (e) Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more. (f) Perform steps (d) and (e) 12 times. HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG will be illuminated on the multi information display during step (f). NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of a malfunction will not occur. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from (c) to (f), then perform steps from (c) to (f) again.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing the ”A/F CONTROL” ACTIVE TEST (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V



–



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”O2S B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0136 and/or P0156” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B


A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) After warming up the engine, run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 3 minutes. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2) when the engine rpm is suddenly increased.

HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times by using the accelerator pedal. The output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2): Alternates from 0.4 V or less to 0.5 V or more. OK

Go to step 6

NG

3


Component Side +B

HT

H8 B1S2

H10 B2S2

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

NG OK




4

–




Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

5


Wire Harness Side H8 B1S2

(b) (c)

H10 B2S2 HT OX

E1

Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. Disconnect the E11 and E12 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

OX (H8–3) – OX1B (E12–21)


HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E12–25)

A72895

E1 (H8–4) – O1B– (E11–26) OX (H10–3) – OX2B (E12–29)

Continuity

HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E12–33) E1 (H10–4) – O2B– (E11–31)

E12

E11


OX1B


O1B– HT1B HT2B OX2B

Specified condition

OX (H8–3) or OX1B (E12–21) – Body ground

O2B–

HT (H8–1) or HT1B (E12–25) – Body ground OX (H10–3) or OX2B (E12–29) – Body ground

No continuity



HINT:


The OX1B and HT1B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2. The OX2B and HT2B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 2.


–


Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 2 System Drawing) Heated Oxygen Sensor


+B EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1B


OX1B

Duty Control

O1B– MREL

A72920

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6



7 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B A CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS



OR


–


05CKD–01

DTC

P0171

SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)

DTC

P0172

SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

DTC

P0174


DTC

P0175


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel trim is related to the feedback compensation value, not to the basic injection time. The fuel trim includes the short–term fuel trim and the long–term fuel trim. The short–term fuel trim is the short–term fuel compensation used to maintain the air–fuel ratio at stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This variance triggers a reduction in the fuel volume if the air–fuel ratio is RICH, and an increase in the fuel volume if it is LEAN. The long–term fuel trim is the overall fuel compensation carried out in long–term to compensate for a continual deviation of the short–term fuel trim from the central value, due to individual engine differences, wear overtime and changes in the operating environment. If both the short–term fuel trim and the long–term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it is detected as a malfunction and the CHK ENG is illuminated. DTC No.

P0171 P0174

P0172 P0175


Trouble Area

When air–fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on LEAN side (2 trip detection logic)

Air induction system Injector blockage Mass air flow meter Manifold absolute pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Fuel pressure Gas leakage in exhaust system Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay PCV valve and hose PCV hose connection ECM

When air–fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on RICH side (2 trip detection logic)

Injector leakage blockage Mass air flow meter Manifold absolute pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Ignition system Fuel pressure Gas leakage in exhaust system Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) ECM

HINT:

When DTC ”P0171 or P0174” is recorded, the actual air–fuel ratio is on the LEAN side. When DTC ”P0172 or P0175” is recorded, the actual air–fuel ratio is on the RICH side. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air–fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC ”P0171 or P0174” is recorded. The CHK ENG then comes on.



S S S

–


If the total of the short–term fuel trim value and long–term fuel trim value is within 25 % (Engine coolant temperature is greater than 75_C), the system is functioning normally. Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders.







–12.5 %



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %


–12.5 %


Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


+25 %

–12.5 %

Less than 0.4V


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG





1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 AND/OR P0175) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175” are output

A

”P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175” and other DTCs are output

B

HINT:

If any other codes besides ”P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. If a misfiring DTC(s) is present, record the DTC(s) that indicates misfiring cylinder(s), then proceed to A.

B


A

2 (a)

CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM Check for vacuum leaks in air the induction system. NG


OK

3


OK




4

–


INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER (a) (b)

Air E2 THA

5

VG +B E2G

4 3 2 1

(c)

30 20

RESISTANCE k

10 5

Remove the mass air flow meter. Output voltage inspection. (1) Apply battery voltage across terminals +B and E2G. (2) Connect the positive (+) tester prove to terminal VG, and negative (–) tester prove to terminal E2G. (3) Blow air into the mass air flow meter, and check that the voltage fluctuates. Resistance inspection. (1) Measure the resistance between terminals THA and E2. Resistance: 13.6 to 18.4 k at –20_C (–4_F) 2.21 to 2.69 k at 20_C (68_F) 0.49 to 0.67 k at 60_C (140_F)

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2

Acceptable

0.1 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 (–4) (32) (80) (104) (140)(176) (212) TEMPERATURE_C(_F)

A60548

OK


NG



5

(a) (b)

Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 2.32 to 2.59 kW at 20_C (68_F) 0.310 to 0.326 kW at 80_C (176_F) NOTICE: In case of checking the engine coolant temperature sensor in the water, be careful not to allow water to go into the terminals. After checking, dry the sensor. HINT: Alternate procedure: Connect an ohmmeter to the installed engine coolant temperature sensor and read the resistance. Use an infrared thermometer to measure the engine temperature in the immediate vicinity of the sensor. Compare these values to the resistance/temperature graph. Change the engine temperature (warm up or allow to cool down) and repeat the test.

30 20 RESISTANCE KW


INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR(RESISTANCE) Ohmmeter

10 5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 –20

–

0

20 40 60 80 100

(–4) (32) (68) (104) (140) (176) (212)

TEMPERATURE _C (_F)

NG

A81700


OK

6

CHECK FOR SPARK AND IGNITION (See page 18–12) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

7



OK

8


OK




9

–


CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST LEAKAGE POINT (See page 15–6)

GAS

OK

10 (a)


Go to step 14

YES

11



12



13 (a)

READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 AND/OR P0175 ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

DTC ”P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175” are output again

A

DTC ”P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175” are not output again

B

B A




14 (a)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (BANK 1, 2 SENSOR 1)) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) during idling. The output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1): Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).

(b)

P18349

NG

Go to step 21

OK

15



16 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B A

17


GO


Go to step 20


18

–




19 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B

CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32) AND PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (See page 05–363)

A

20



YES DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL (DTCS P0171, P0172, P0174 AND/OR P0175)



21

–



Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

̲

̱

̴

̳

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

22



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


23

–




H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1


(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity


E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition


OX1A E2


No continuity




HINT:




EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG

OK

24


GO AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


25

–




26 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B


A

27






DTC

P0190

–


05CKE–01


Output Voltage

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel pressure sensor is installed on a fuel delivery pipe and detects the fuel pressure. It controls of feedback the pump discharge in order to keep the fuel at target pressure 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) by the ECM.

(V) 4.5

0.5 19.6 (200)

0 (0) Fuel Pressure DTC No. P0190

MPa

(kgf/cm2) A14687


Trouble Area Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit Fuel pressure sensor ECM

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0190”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the delivery pipe pressure from ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Malfunction PR circuit short

Approximately 0

VC circuit open or short PR circuit open E2 circuit open

19.6 or more

WIRING DIAGRAM F16 Fuel Pressure Sensor

ECM

VCC 1

R–W

18 VC E13

VOUT 2

Y–G

23 PR E13

3

BR

28 E2 E13

GND

5V

E1

A00309



–




1

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) Result: Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Proceed to

19.6 or more

A

0.0

B

OK (8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi)) (*1)

C

*1: The value must be changed when the engine is run or stopped. B

Go to step 3

C


A

2

INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR(VCC VOLTAGE) (a) (b)


VOUT

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Standard:

VCC (+) GND (–)


Specified condition

VCC (F16–1) – GND (F16–3)

4.5 to 5.5 V

Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector A59674

NG OK


Go to step 4


3

–


INSPECT ECM(PR VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

PR (+)


A76903

Start the engine. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

PR (E13–23) – E2 (E13–28)

2.1 to 3.2 V at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: The fuel pressure in the delivery pipe is 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) NG

Go to step 5


4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR) (a) (b) (c)

E13

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

VC


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VCC (F16–1)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): ECM Connector

A81699


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) or VCC (F16–1) – Body ground

No continuity

Wire Harness Side VOUT F16 VCC GND Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector A59674

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–



E13

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) PR (E13–23) – VOUT (F16–2)

PR

E2 ECM Connector

E2 (E13–28) – GND (F16–3) A81699



Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

PR (E13–23) or VOUT (F16–2) – Body ground

No continuity

VOUT F16 GND Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector A59674

OK REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0191

–


05CKF–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The high–pressure fuel system consists of the spill valve, pump plunger, check valve, fuel relief valve and fuel pressure sensor. The spill valve opens and closes the low–pressure fuel line (from the fuel tank), the pump plunger operated by the camshaft pressurizes fuel, the check valve mechanically opens and closes the high–pressure fuel line (to the fuel delivery pipe), the fuel relief valve prevents fuel pressure from becoming extremely high, and the fuel pressure sensor located on the fuel delivery pipe monitors fuel pressure. The high–pressure fuel pump is mounted on the cylinder head cover, and its plunger is operated by the cam located between #3 and #4 on the intake camshaft. Let the plunger moves up and down by the camshaft rotations, it produces vacuum to suck fuel and pressurizes the fuel. This fuel then pushes the check valve open and flows into the fuel delivery pipe. The ECM opens and closes the spill valve to regulate the fuel pressure to the target fuel pressure 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi). In order to obtain and maintain the target pressure, the ECM monitors the fuel pressure using the fuel pressure sensor and performs the feedback control. If the internal fuel pressure of the fuel delivery pipe exceeds beyond the standard pressure 14 MPa (142.8 kgf/cm2, 2,030 psi), the fuel relief valve installed on gateway of the fuel delivery pipe discharges the fuel pressure and then returns the fuel back to the fuel tank. Reference (Fuel system diagram) ECM

Fuel Pressure Sensor Fuel Delivery Pipe Fuel Injector Pulsation Damper

Fuel Relief Valve

Low–Pressure Fuel Line Spill Valve High–Pressure Fuel Line Check Valve Fuel Tank Pump Plunger Low–Pressure Fuel Pump

DTC No.

P0191

Fuel Pressure Regulator

High–Pressure Fuel Pump

Camshaft A81710

DTC Detection Condition After the fuel pressure is stable for 3 seconds or more, the following condition (a) or (b) continues for more than 10 seconds: (a) ECM did not command the high–pressure fuel pump to open the spill valve, but fuel pressure increases 3 MPa (30.6 kgf/cm2, 435 psi). (b) Despite ECM commanded the high–pressure fuel pump to open the spill valve, fuel pressure decreases 5 MPa (51.0 kgf/cm2, 725 psi).


Trouble Area Open or short in high–pressure fuel pump (spill valve) circuit High–pressure fuel pump Low–pressure fuel pump Fuel pipe Fuel relief valve Fuel pressure regulator ECM


–





1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO DTC P0191) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0191” is output

A

”P0191” and other DTCs are output

B



A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) NG

Go to step 10

OK

3


Go to step 12

OK

4 (a)

CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS(HIGH PRESSURE) Check if there is leakage in the fuel pipe located between the high–pressure fuel pump and the injectors.



NG

–


REPAIR OR REPLACE A PLACE FUEL LEAKS

OK

5

CHECK FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE) (a)

B12608

With the engine running or cranking, use a sound scope to check that there is the normal operating sounds of the fuel pump (high–pressure) when it is operated. Standard: There is the operating sounds of the fuel pump (high– pressure).

NG


OK

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP (SPILL VALVE)) (a) (b) E12

(c)

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Disconnect the S3 high–pressure fuel pump (spill valve) connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

FP–

FP+

Symbols (Terminal No.) FP+ (E12–6) – Fuel pump (S3–1)

ECM Connector

FP– (E12–3) – Fuel pump (S3–2)

A81695



Wire Harness Side

FP+ (E12–6) or Fuel pump (S3–1) – Body ground FP– (E12–3) or Fuel pump (S3–2) – Body ground


S3

High–Pressure Fuel Pump (Spill Valve) Connector

OK


A81702

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


CHECK IF DTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR(DTC P0191 IS OUTPUT AGAIN) Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). Warm up the engine. Let the engine idle for 30 seconds or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0191” is output again

A

No DTC output

B

B


A

8

REPLACE FUEL RELIEF VALVE ASSY

GO

9 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to


A

No DTC output

B

B

SYSTEM OK

A REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSY (HIGH PRESSURE)

10

CHECK OPERATION OF FUEL PUMP(LOW PRESSURE) (See page 11–33) OK

Go to step 3

NG

11

CHECK VOLTAGE FUEL PUMP(LOW PRESSURE) (See page 05–507) OK

Go to step 3

NG CHECK FOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (See page 05–507) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


12 (a)

–


CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS(LOW PRESSURE) Check if there is leakage in the fuel pipe located between the fuel tank and the high–pressure fuel pump. NG

OK REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSY




–


05CKG–01

DTC

P0200


DTC

P0201

INJECTOR CIRCUIT / OPEN – (CYLINDER 1)

DTC

P0202


DTC

P0203


DTC

P0204


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Electronic Driver Unit (EDU) has been adopted to operate the injector at high speed. The EDU enables the injector to drive in high–speed rate under high–pressure fuel condition using its internal DC/DC converter that provides high voltage and quick–charging system. The ECM constantly monitors the EDU. If the ECM detects abnormal condition, it will stop the engine. DTC No.

P0200

P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204


Trouble Area

No IJF signals to ECM despite crankshaft rotating 10 times (1 trip detection logic). No IJF signals to ECM despite crankshaft rotating 20 times during cranking (2 trip detection logic). No IJF signals of each cylinder to ECM 20 times successively (1 trip detection logic).


Open or short in EDU circuit EDU ((Injector j driver)) Fuel injector assy ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM B–R

ECM

B–R

2 3 D D J/C D D B–R B–R IE4 IP1 J14 J28 J14 J28 (LHD)(RHD) (LHD)(RHD) D D B–R J14 J28 (LHD)(RHD) 2 GR GR IE1

4 2

EFI No. 1

1


4 B–Y B–W

B–R

GR

4

4

3

4

4

INJ Relay

B–Y

B–Y

1 2 EFI 1 1 1A

3 4

4

2 4

W–B

Engine Room R/B No. 4 Electronic Driver Unit

B


4 INJ#1 E4

7 EA1

3 INJ#4 E4

(Shielded) B

B–G

(Shielded)

1 4A

8 5 VB E4 E4 COM1 1 INJ#2 E4

BR


5 IJF E5 4 IJT#1 E5 1 IJT#2 E5 2 IJT#3 E5 3 IJT#4 E5

1 4B B–G

W

FL MAIN

7 E4 GND 2 INJ#3 E4 6 COM2 E4

W–B

BR

2 E9 +B2 8 E9 MREL

B–Y

3 E9 BATT

V

35 E10 IREL

IE2 4

1

EFI Relay 2

V

4

5

1

5


B–Y

1 E9 +B

R–B G–W W–R R–W W–L

25 E13 1 E13 2 E13 3 E13 4 E13

IJF1 #1 #2 #3 #4

I5 Injector No. 1 Y

BR 1 2 I8 Injector No. 4 B–R BR 1 2 BR I6 Injector No. 2 P L 1 2 I7 Injector No. 3 B–W L 1 2 L

W–B

Battery EC

EE

EF A76865



–



1

CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER(POWER SOURCE OF EDU) (a) (b) (c)



Disconnect the E4 EDU connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the EDU connector. Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VB (E4–8) – GND (E4–7)

9 to 14 V

VB (+) A76902

NG

CHECK EDU POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – FUEL INJECTOR) (a) (b)


COM2

Disconnect the E4 EDU connector. Measure the resistance between the specified terminals of the EDU connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

INJ#1 (E4–4) – COM1 (E4–5) INJ#2 (E4–1) – COM2 (E4–6)

INJ#2 INJ#3 INJ#4 INJ#1 EDU Connector

INJ#3 (E4–2) – COM2 (E4–6)

COM1 A76902

INJ#4 (E4–3) – COM1 (E4–5)

NG OK


Go to step 6

2 55 to 2.85 2.55 2 85 at 20 _C (68 _F)


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EDU) (a) (b) (c)

E13 #4 #1 #2 #3 ECM Connector

IJF1

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the E5 EDU connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IJF1 (E13–25) – IJF (E5–5) #1 (E13–1) – IJT#1 (E5–4) #2 (E13–2) – IJT#2 (E5–1)

A81699

Continuity y

#3 (E13–3) – IJT#3 (E5–2) #4 (E13–4) – IJT#4 (E5–3)

Wire Harness Side


E5


Specified condition

IJF1 (E13–25) or IJF (E5–5) – Body ground #1 (E13–1) or IJT#1 (E5–4) – Body ground #2 (E13–2) or IJT#2 (E5–1) – Body ground

No continuityy


IJT#2 IJT#3 IJT#4 IJT#1 EDU Connector


IJF A66285

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

CHECK ECM(#1, #2, #3 AND #4 VOLTAGE) #3 #4

#2

(a)

Connect an oscilloscope to terminals #1 – #4 and E01 of the E13 ECM harness side connector.

(b)

With the engine cranking or idling, check the signal waveform. Standard: Signal waveform appears as shown in the illustration.

#1

E01 E13


Normal Signal Waveform #1 #3 #4

5V/ Division

#2 A81708


HINT: Check the waveform before the ECM detects the DTC(s) and enters the fail–safe mode, because the ECM will no more indicate the voltage output once it enters the fail–safe mode. NG



5

–


CHECK ECM(IJF1 VOLTAGE) (a)

Connect an oscilloscope to terminals IJF1 and E01 of the E13 ECM harness side connector.

(b)


E01

IJF1 E13


Normal Signal Waveform

2V/ Division

IJF1

A81709

HINT: Check the waveform before the ECM detects the DTC(s) and enters the fail–safe mode, because the EDU will no more indicate the voltage output once the ECM enters the fail–safe mode. NG


OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

6

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See page 11–36) NG





–


05CKH–01

DTC

P0300

RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED

DTC

P0301

CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

DTC

P0302


DTC

P0303


DTC

P0304


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Misfire: The ECM uses the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor to monitor changes in the crankshaft rotation for each cylinder. The ECM counts the number of times the engine speed change rate indicates that misfire has occurred. And when the misfire rate equals to or exceeds the count of indicating that the engine condition has deteriorated, the CHK ENG is illuminated. If the misfire rate is high enough and the driving conditions will cause the catalyst to overheat, the CHK ENG blinks when misfiring occurs. HINT: For any particular 200 revolutions of the engine, misfiring which would result in overheating of catalyst is detected. This cause CHK ENG to blink (1 trip detection logic). For any particular 1,000 revolutions of engine, misfiring which would result in a deterioration of emissions. This illuminates CHK ENG (2 trip detection logic). DTC No.


P0300

Misfiring of random cylinders is detected

P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304

Misfiring of each cylinder is detected

Trouble Area Open or short in engine wire Connector connection Vacuum hose connection Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing PCV hose connection PCV hose ECM

HINT: When codes for a misfiring cylinder are recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code is recorded, it indicates that the misfires have been detected and recorded at different times.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0200 on page 05–415 for the wiring diagram of the injector system. Refer to DTC P0351 on page 05–439 for the wiring diagram of the ignition system.

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Record the DTC and freeze frame data. Use the hand–held tester to set to the check (test) mode (See page 05–294). Read the value on the misfire counter for each cylinder when idling. If the value is displayed on the misfire counter, skip the following procedure of confirmation driving. (e) Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with ENGINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the DATA LIST. If you have no hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated once. Then repeat the simulation process again. HINT: In order to memorize the DTC of misfire, it is necessary to drive around MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD for the following period of time in the DATA LIST. Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. Turning the ignition switch OFF switches the diagnosis system from check (test) mode to normal mode. So all DTCs, etc., will be erased.

(f) (g)

Engine Speed

Time

Idling

3 minutes and 30 seconds or more

1,000 rpm

3 minutes or more

2,000 rpm


3,000 rpm

1 minute or more

Check whether there is misfire or not by monitoring the DTC and the freeze frame data, and then, record them. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least for 5 seconds.


If DTCs besides misfire are memorized simultaneously, first perform the troubleshooting for them. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If the misfire does not occur when the vehicle is brought to the workshop, misfire can be confirmed by reproducing the condition of the freeze frame data. Also, after finishing the repair, confirm that there is no misfire (See confirmation driving pattern). When either of SHORT FT #1, LONG FT #1, SHORT FT #2 or LONG FT #2 in the freeze frame data is over the range of 20 %, there is a possibility that the air–fuel ratio is inclining either to ”RICH” (–20 % or less) or ”LEAN” (+20 % or more). When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80C (176F), there is a possibility of misfire only during warming up the engine. If the misfire cannot be reproduced, the reason may be because of the driving the vehicle with lack of fuel, the use of improper fuel, a stain on the ignition plug, etc. Be sure to check the value on the misfire counter after the repair.



1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO MISFIRE DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result : Display

Proceed to

DTC ”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” are output.

A

DTC ”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304” and other codes are output.

B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B


A

2 (a) (b)

CHECK WIRE HARNESS, CONNECTOR AND VACUUM HOSE IN ENGINE ROOM Check the connection conditions of the wire harness and connector. Check the disconnection, piping and break of the vacuum hose. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE, THEN CONFIRM THAT THERE IS NO MISFIRE

OK

3



OK

4

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(NUMBER OF MISFIRE)

(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (c) Start the engine. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / CYL#1 – CYL#4”. (e) Read the number of misfire on the hand–held tester. HINT: When a misfire is not reproduced, be sure to branch below based on the stored DTC. Result: High Misfire Rate Cylinder

Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A

More than 3 cylinders

B

B A


Go to step 12


5

–


CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (a) (b) (c)

Remove the ignition coil with igniter assy. Remove the spark plug. Check the spark plug type. Recommended spark plug: DENSO made

SK20BR11

(d)

1.0 to 1.1 mm (0.039 to 0.043 in.) A78640

Check the spark plug electrode gap. Electrode gap: 1.0 to 1.1 mm (0.039 to 0.043 in.) Maximum electrode gap: 1.3 mm (0.051 in.) NOTICE: If adjusting the gap of a new spark plug, bend only the base the ground electrode. Do not touch the tip. Never attempt to adjust the gap on a used plug. (e) Check the electrode for carbon deposits. (f) Perform a spark test. CAUTION: Each injector connector must be disconnected. NOTICE: Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds. (1) Install the spark plug to the ignition coil with igniter, and connect the ignition coil with igniter connector. (2) Disconnect the injector connectors. (3) Ground the spark plug. (4) Check if spark occurs while the engine is being cranked. Standard: Spark jumps across electrode gap. NG

Go to step 19

OK

6

CHECK CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 14–181) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

7

CHECK VALVE CLEARANCE OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 14–186) NG

OK




8 (a) (b) (c)

–


REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER Read the DTC and check which of the cylinders causes the misfiring DTC (See page 05–294). Remove the injector of the misfiring cylinder and other normal injector (See page 11–42). Swap the injector of misfiring cylinder for the normal injector.

GO

9



10 (a)

READ OUTPUT DTC(MISFIRE DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

The same DTC is output again

A

The other DTC is output

B

B


A

11

SWITCH STEP BY NUMBER OF MISFIRE CYLINDER(REFER RESULT OF STEP 4) If the result of step 4 is ”1 or 2 cylinders”, proceed to A. If the result of step 4 is ”more than 3 cylinders”, proceed to B. B


A

12

CHECK VALVE TIMING(CHECK FOR LOOSE AND JUMPING TEETH) NG

ADJUST VALVE TIMING

OK

13


OK




14

–




OK

15 (a) (b) (c)

(d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE AND MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the intake air temperature. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Equivalent to ambient temperature Check the air flow rate. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Condition

Air flow rate (gm/s)

Ignition switch ON (do not start engine)

0

Idling

4 to 6

Running without load (2,500 rpm)

13 to 20

Idling – Running

Air flow rate fluctuates

NG OK




16

–


INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (a) (b)

Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 2.32 to 2.59 k at 20_C (68_F) 0.310 to 0.326 k at 80_C (176_F) NOTICE: In case of checking the engine coolant temperature sensor in the water, be careful not to allow water to go into the terminals. After checking, dry the sensor. HINT: Alternate procedure: Connect an ohmmeter to the installed engine coolant temperature sensor and read the resistance. Use an infrared thermometer to measure the engine temperature in the immediate vicinity of the sensor. Compare these values to the resistance/temperature graph. Change the engine temperature (warm up or allow to cool down) and repeat the test.

Ohmmeter

30 20 RESISTANCE K

10 5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 –20

S01196 S01699

0

20 40 60 80 100

(–4) (32) (68) (104) (140) (176) (212)

TEMPERATURE _C (_F)

NG

A81700


OK

17

INSPECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR (See page 05–342) NG

REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

OK

18 S S


A CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS


AGAIN GO TO STEP 5


19

–


INSPECT CHANGE NORMAL SPARK PLUG AND CHECK SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER

(a) Change to the normal spark plug. (b) Perform a spark test. CAUTION: Each injector connector must be disconnected. NOTICE: Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds. (1) Install the spark plug to the ignition coil, and connect the ignition coil connector. (2) Disconnect the injector connectors. (3) Ground the spark plug. (4) Check if spark occurs while the engine is being cranked. Standard: Spark jumps across electrode gap. NG

Go to step 20

OK REPLACE SPARK PLUG

20

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(IGNITION COIL ASSY – ECM) (a)

Wire Harness Side Ignition Coil Connector

I1

I2

I3

I4

Check the harness and connector between the ignition coil and ECM (IGF terminal) connectors (1) Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil connector. (2) Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

A54393

Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–2) – IGF1 (E13–24) Ignition coil (I2–2) – IGF1 (E13–24) Ignition coil (I3–2) – IGF1 (E13–24)

Continuity

Ignition coil (I4–2) – IGF1 (E13–24)


E13


Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground

IGF1

IGT1 IGT2 IGT3 IGT4 ECM Connector A81699


Ignition coil (I2–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground Ignition coil (I3–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground Ignition coil (I4–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground

No continuity


(b)

–


Check the harness and connector between the ignition coil and ECM (IGT terminal) connectors (1) Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil connector. (2) Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–3) – IGT1 (E13–8) Ignition coil (I2–3) – IGT2 (E13–9)

Continuity



Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–3) or IGT1 (E13–8) – Body ground Ignition coil (I2–3) or IGT2 (E13–9) – Body ground

No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY (THEN CONFIRM THAT THERE IS NO MISFIRE)


OR


–


05CKI–01

DTC

P0325

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0327

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0328

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A flat type knock sensor (non–resonant type) has a structure that can detect vibrations in a wide frequency range, from about 6 kHz to 15 kHz, and has the following features. Knock sensor is fitted on the cylinder block to detect the engine knocking. The knock sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed. This occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, the ignition timing is retarded to suppress it. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0325

Output voltage of the knock sensor decreases beyond a threshold. (Threshold varies according to an engine speed.)


P0327

Output voltage of the knock sensor is 0.5 V or less.


P0328

Output voltage of the knock sensor is 4.5 V or more.


HINT: If the ECM detects above diagnosis conditions, it operates the fail safe function in which the corrective retard angle value is set to the maximum value. Reference: The correct waveform is shown in the diagram on the left. KNK Signal Waveform

A83343


Item

Details

Terminal

KNK1 – EKNK

Equipment Settings

0.01 to 10 V/ Division, 0.01 to 10 msec./ Division

Condition

After warming up the engine, keep the engine speed at 4,000 rpm.


–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

(Shielded)

B

K1 Knock Sensor 2 1

B

1 KNK1 E12

W

2 EKNK E12

5V

BR BR E J12

D J12 J/C

EE D J13

E J13 BR A76872


1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). Warm up the engine. Run the engine at 3,000 rpm for 10 seconds or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Result : Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0325” is output again

A

”P0325, P0327 and/or P0328” are output again

B

”P0325, P0327 and/or P0328” are not output again

C

A


B

Go to step 3

C



2

–


CHECK KNOCK SENSOR (a)

Check the knock sensor installation. Torque: 20 Nm (204 kgfcm, 15 ftlbf)

NG

A79596

TIGHTEN SENSOR


3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – KNOCK SENSOR) (a) (b) E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals KNK1 (E12–1) and EKNK (E12–2) of the ECM connector. Resistance: 120 to 280 k at 20_C (68_F)

KNK1 EKNK ECM Connector A81695

NG

Go to step 5

OK

4

INSPECT ECM(KNK1 VOLTAGE)

EKNK (–)

(a) (b) (c)

KNK1 (+)

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals KNK1 (E12–1) and EKNK (E12–2) of the ECM terminals. Voltage: 4.5 to 5.5 V

E12 ECM Connector

A76969

NG


OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS NOTICE: Fault may be intermittent. Check harness and connectors carefully and result. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


5

–



Ohmmeter

A65174

Remove the knock sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 120 to 280 k at 20_C (68_F)

NG





–


05CKJ–01

DTC

P0335


DTC

P0339


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pick up coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signal, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signal. DTC No.

P0335

P0339


Trouble Area

No crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal to ECM during cranking for 3 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic). No crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more (2 trip detection logic). In condition (a), (b) and (c), when no crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal is input for 0.05 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic): (a) Engine revolution 1,000 rpm or more (b) STA signal is OFF (c) 3 sec. or more has been lapsed after STA signal is switched from ON to OFF.

G2+

ECM Connector

NE+

Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor Signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) ECM

Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope. (1) During cranking or idling, check the waveform between the terminals of the ECM connector.

E11

NE– A76903

A59781


Item

Details

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Setting

5 V/Division, 20 ms/Division

Condition

During Cranking or idling

HINT: The correct waveforms are as shown in the left.


–



Camshaft Timing Pulley LH

ECM

(Shielded)

1

W

2

R


E

27 G2+ E11

BR R

1

G

2

R

25 NE+ E11 BR

Crankshaft Position Sensor Plate No. 1

R

(Shielded)

24 NE– E11

EE

A76874


Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the engine mechanical system. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

S

1

INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(RESISTANCE) (a) (b)

Component Side

C6


Disconnect the C6 crankshaft position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the crankshaft position sensor. Resistance: 985 to 1,600 at cold 1,265 to 1,890 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG




2

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side NE+

C6

NE–


Specified condition



Continuity



Specified condition


E11

NE+ ECM Connector

No continuity

NE– A81698

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Check the crankshaft position sensor installation. NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a) (b)

INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE NO.1(TEETH OF SIGNAL PLATE) Remove the crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1 (See page 14–222). Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG



REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE NO.1


–


05CKK–01

DTC

P0340


DTC

P0341

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor (G2 signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G2 signal rotor has 3 teeth on the outside and is mounted on the intake camshaft. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil changes, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signal, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signal. DTC No.

DTC Detection Condition No camshaft position sensor (G2) signal to ECM during cranking for 4 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic).

P0340

P0341

No camshaft position sensor (G2) signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more for 5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic). While crankshaft rotates twice, camshaft position sensor (G2) signal will be input to ECM 12 times or more (1 trip detection logic).

Trouble Area

Open O or short h t in i camshaft h ft position iti sensor circuit i it Camshaft position sensor Camshaft timing gear Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM

HINT:

DTC P0340 indicate a malfunction related to the camshaft position sensor (+) circuit. (Wire harness (ECM – camshaft position sensor) and camshaft position sensor) DTC P0341 indicate a malfunction related to the camshaft position sensor (–) circuit. (Wire harness (ECM – camshaft position sensor) and camshaft position sensor)



G2+

ECM Connector



E11

NE+

–

NE– A76903

Item

Details

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Setting


Condition



A59781



1

INSPECT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(RESISTANCE) (a) (b)

Component Side

C1

Camshaft Position Sensor A64984

Disconnect the C1 camshaft position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the camshaft position sensor. Resistance: 835 to 1,400 at cold 1,060 to 1,645 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG

OK




2

–




C1

NE–

Disconnect the C1 camshaft position sensor connector. Disconnect the E11 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) – G2+ (E11–27)


Continuity

Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) – NE– (E11–24)


Specified condition

Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) or G2+ (E11–27) – Body ground Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) or NE– (E11–24) – Body ground

E11

G2+ ECM Connector

NE–

NG A81698

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Inspect the camshaft position sensor installation. NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a) (b)

INSPECT CAMSHAFT Remove the camshafts (See page 14–240). Check the camshaft lobes. NG



No continuity

REPLACE CAMSHAFT

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKL–01

DTC

P0351

IGNITION COIL ”A” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0352

IGNITION COIL ”B” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0353

IGNITION COIL ”C” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0354

IGNITION COIL ”D” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

HINT:

These DTCs indicate a malfunction related to primary circuit. If DTC P0351 is displayed, check No. 1 ignition coil with igniter If DTC P0352 is displayed, check No. 2 ignition coil with igniter If DTC P0353 is displayed, check No. 3 ignition coil with igniter If DTC P0354 is displayed, check No. 4 ignition coil with igniter

circuit. circuit. circuit. circuit.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A Direct Ignition System (DIS) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduces high–voltage loss, and enhances the overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor. The DIS is a 1–cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1–cylinder ignition system, the one spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary winding. High voltage generated in the secondary winding is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug passes from the center electrode to the ground electrode. The ECM determines the ignition timing and outputs the ignition signals (IGT) for each cylinder. Based on the IGT signals, the power transistors in the igniter cut off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil is supplied to the spark plug that is connected to the end of the secondary coil. At the same time, the igniter also sends an ignition confirmation signal (IGF) as a fail–safe measure to the ECM.



ECM

–


From Battery Igniter No.1 Ignition Coil with Igniter


No.1 Cylinder



IGT3

IGT4 Various Sensor

Spark Plug


No.2 Cylinder


No.3 Cylinder


No.4 Cylinder

TAC

To Tachometer

A73818

DTC No. P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354




Trouble Area Ignition system Open or short in IGF and IGT circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM (ignition coil circuit 1 through 4) Ignition coil with igniter (ignition coil 1 through 4) IG2 relay ECM


–



B–R 4

AM2 IG2

Driver Side J/B

2

6 B–R


1


W–B

IGN

16 DL B

1 1A

B–R R–B

1 4

B–G

B

1 4A


1 4B

4 IG2 Relay

5

1

R–B 3

2

4


4 R–B

1

2

R–W

W–B


8 E13 IGT1

W–R


IG2 2

1

3

R–B

2 DH

1 AM2

4

ECM

IGT2

IGT3 IGF1

IGT4

B–G 8 EA1 FL MAIN

R–B W–B

R–B W–B Battery EC

B–R 1 N2 Noise Filter (Ignition)

EF

A76873



–



1

PERFORM SIMULATION TEST(CHECK DTC)

(a) Read the DTC and check which of the cylinders causes the DTC (See page 05–294). (b) Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). (c) Swap the ignition coil with igniter of the cylinder that is referred by the DTC for the others. NOTICE: Do not swap the ignition coil with igniter connector for the others. (d) Start the engine. (e) Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B

B


A

2

INSPECT ECM(IGT1, IGT2, IGT3 OR IGT4 VOLTAGE) (a)

IGT4 IGT3

IGT2

IGT1

E1

During cranking or idling, check the waveform between terminals IGT1 to IGT4 and E1, and IGF1 and E1 of the ECM connector. Item

Details

Terminal

IGF1 E13 E11 ECM Connector

A76903

CH1: IGT1, IGT2, IGT3, IGT4 – E1 CH2: IGF1 – E1

Equipment Settings


Condition

While the engine is cranking or idling

HINT: Correct waveform appears as shown, with rectangle waves.

Normal Signal Waveforms

CH1

GND

CH2 GND A35500

NG


OK



3

–


CHECK IGNITION COIL ASSY(POWER SOURSE) (a)

Wire Harness Side Ignition Coil with Igniter Connector I1

I2

I3

I4

(b)

(c) (d) +B

GND A54393

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil with igniter connector. Check for open between terminal GND of the ignition coil with igniter connector and body ground. Resistance: 1 or less Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals +B and GND of the ignition coil with igniter connector. Voltage: 9 to 14 V

NG

Go to step 5

OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – IGNITION COIL) (a)


I1

I2

I3

I4


Specified condition


A54393

Ignition coil (I2–2) – IGF1 (E13–24) Ignition coil (I3–2) – IGF1 (E13–24)

Continuity



E13


Specified condition


IGF1


Ignition coil (I2–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground Ignition coil (I3–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground

No continuity


(b)


Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–3) – IGT1 (E13–8) Ignition coil (I2–3) – IGT2 (E13–9) Ignition coil (I3–3) – IGT3 (E13–10) Ignition coil (I4–3) – IGT4 (E13–11)


Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY

OK

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – IGNITION COIL) (a)


I2

I3

I4

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil with igniter connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–1) – IG2 relay (3)

+B A54393

Ignition coil (I2–1) – IG2 relay (3) Ignition coil (I3–1) – IG2 relay (3)

Continuity




Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground Ignition coil (I2–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground Ignition coil (I3–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground Ignition coil (I4–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground

IG2 Relay


A79064

No continuity


NG

–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK FOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (See page 05–507)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKM–01

DTC

P0420

CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1)

DTC

P0430


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM compares the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor located before the catalyst with the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor located after the catalyst to determine whether or not the catalyst performance has deteriorated. The air–fuel ratio feedback compensation keeps the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor before the catalyst repeatedly changing back and forth from rich to lean. If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor after the catalyst switches back and forth between rich and lean much more slowly than the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor before the catalyst. But when both waveforms change at a similar rate, it indicates that the catalyst performance has deteriorated. Waveform of Heated Oxygen Sensor before Catalyst

Normal Catalyst

Waveform of Heated Oxygen Sensor after Catalyst

A54278

DTC No. P0420 P0430

DTC Detection Condition After engine and catalyst are warmed up, and while vehicle is driven within set value and engine speed range, waveforms of heated oxygen sensors have the same amplitude (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter (inside exhaust manifold)

HINT:




–


CONFIRMATION ENGINE RACING PATTERN Engine Speed (c)

2,500 to 3,000 rpm

Idling IG SW OFF

(d)

(b) (a) Warming up

3 min. or so

Check

Time A54279

(a)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3, or connect the probe of the oscilloscope between terminals OX1A, OX2A, OX1B or OX2B and E2 of the ECM connectors. (b) Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched OFF until the engine coolant temperature is stable. (c) Run the engine at 2,500 to 3,000 rpm for about 3 minutes. (d) After confirming that the waveforms of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1 (OX1A, OX2A)) which oscillates around 0.5 V during feedback to the ECM, check the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2 (OX1B, OX2B)). HINT: OX Signal Waveform (Oscilloscope) If there is a malfunction in the system, the waveform of the 1.0 V heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2 (OX1B, OX2B)) is almost the same as that of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1 (OX1A, OX2A)) on the left. There are some cases where, even though a malfunction ex0V ists, the CHK ENG may either light up or not light up. 0.2 sec./Division

A54280

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using reeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO P0420 AND/OR P0430) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B



A

2



EXHAUST

OK

3

CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR(BANK 1, 2 SENSOR 1) (See page 05–363) NG


OK

4



OK REPLACE THREE–WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (EXHAUST MANIFOLD)


GAS


DTC

P0443

–


05CK6–01

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION To reduce HC emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through the charcoal canister to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders. The ECM changes the duty signal to the VSV for the EVAP so that the intake quantity of HC emissions is appropriate for the driving conditions (engine load, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is warmed up. DTC No.


P0443

Trouble Area Open of short in VSV circuit for EVAP VSV for EVAP ECM

Proper response to ECM command does not occur


ECM

Engine Room R/B No. 4 1 2

EFI

1

EFI Relay


4

5

3

8 E9 MREL

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

1

2

GR

4 IE1 2

B–G EFI No. 2

1 4A


1 4B

2

B–W

V5 VSV (EVAP)

B–G 13 EA1

FL MAIN

GR

4

1

B–W

1

2

W–G

34 E13 EVP1

W–B Battery EC A76875



–



1

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSV FOR EVAP) VSV is ON

(a) (b) (c)

VSV is OFF

(d)

Air

Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VSV for EVAP. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / EVAP VSV” (press the right or left button). When the VSV for EVAP is operated by the hand–held tester, check whether the disconnected hose applies suction to your finger. Standard: Tester operation

A81705

Specified condition

VSV is ON

Disconnected hose applies suction to your finger

VSV is OFF

Disconnected hose applies no suction to your finger

OK


NG

2

INSPECT VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1(VSV FOR EVAP) (See page 12–13) NG

REPLACE VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1 (VSV FOR EVAP)

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(EVP1 VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E01 (–) E13

EVP1 (+)

ECM Connector

NG



Specified condition

EVP1 (E13–34) – E01 (E13–7)

9 to 14 V

OK A76903



4


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – VSV FOR EVAP) (a) (b) (c)

E13

EVP1

–

ECM Connector

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the V5 VSV for EVAP connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VSV for EVAP (V5–2) – EVP1 (E13–34)

Continuity



Specified condition

VSV for EVAP (V5–2) or EVP1 (E13–34) – Body ground

No continuity


VSV for EVAP Connector

OK


A52933

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – VSV FOR EVAP) (a)

(b) (c) (d)


Inspect the EFI No. 2 fuse. (1) Remove the EFI No. 2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. (2) Check for continuity in the EFI No. 2 fuse. Standard: Continuity Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Disconnect the V5 VSV for EVAP connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

EFI relay (3) – VSV for EVAP (V5–1)

Continuity


EFI Relay A66053


Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or VSV for EVAP (V5–1) – Body ground

No continuity



A52933

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0500

–


05CJ6–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The speed sensor for skid control ECU detects the wheel speed and sends the appropriate signals to the skid control ECU. The skid control ECU converts these signals into a 4–pulse signal and outputs it to the combination meter. After this signal is converted into a more precise rectangular waveform by the waveform shaping circuit inside the combination meter,it is then transmitted to the ECM. The ECM determines the vehicle speed based on the frequency of these pulse signals. 4–Pulse Skid Control ECU

From Speed Sensor

4–Pulse


A81703

DTC No.

P0500


Trouble Area

No vehicle speed sensor signal to ECM under the following condition (1 trip (A/T) or 2 trip (M/T) detection logic): (a) Vehicle is being driven


WIRING DIAGRAM


18 C11

V–W

H H J10 J20

J/C

H H J10 J20

V–W

17 E10 SPD


A76866



–



1




OK

2

INSPECT ECM(SPD VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c) (d)

E01 (–) E13

E10

Shift the lever to the neutral position. Jack up the vehicle. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E13 ECM connectors as the wheel is turned slowly. Standard:

SPD (+) ECM Connector

A59661


Specified condition

SPD (E10–17) – E01 (E13–7)


HINT: The output voltage should fluctuate ups and downs similarly to the diagram on the left as the wheel is turned slowly. 4.5 to 5.5V

0V Turn Wheel

NG

A81704



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0504

–


05CJ5–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In this system, the signal of the stop light switch is used to judge whether the acceleration system is abnormal or not. The stop light switch has a duplex system (signals STP and ST1–) to memorize the abnormality when the signals of depressing and releasing the brake pedal are detected simultaneously. HINT: Normal condition is as shown in the table.

DTC No.

P0504

Signal


In transition

STP

OFF

ON

ON

ST1–

ON

ON

OFF

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a), (b) and (c) continue for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) Ignition switch ON (b) Brake pedal released (c) STP signal is OFF when the ST1– signal is OFF



Trouble Area Short in stop light switch signal circuit Stop light switch ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM AM2 IG2

B–R 4

G–W

To Stop Light

6 B–R

I13 Ignition SW 1 IE4 (LHD) 1 IP1 (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

G–W (RHD)

B–R 1 IR1

6 IE3 1 2 AM2 1 1 1A


B–G

DH 2

G–W (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

IGN

10 G–W 19 E10 STP DC

G–W (RHD) 4 IR1 G–W (RHD)

1

G–W (LHD)

3

2 R–W (LHD)

14 IE2


B–W

1 4A

G–W (LHD)

4

DA 18


ECM

12 E10 ST1–

1

Driver Side J/B

Driver Side J/B

1 DM 2 DA

B–W (RHD)

R–W (RHD)

11 IE3

2 IR1

3 IR1

B–W (LHD) 20 IE1

ALT R–W (LHD)

2 1 4B

R–W (RHD)

1 4D

B–G

B–W (RHD)

DA 22

B–G

C J9 (LHD) E J27 (RHD)

FL MAIN STOP

Driver Side J/B

Battery B–G

B–W (LHD)


DN 1 B–W

A76867




1 (a)

–




OK

2

INSPECT STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSY (a)

Free

Pushed in 2

1


4

Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2

Continuity

3–4

No continuity

1–2

No continuity

3–4

Continuity

3

NG

A81707

REPLACE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSY

OK

3



(a) (b)


(c) E1 (–)

E11

ST1– (+)


Specified condition

Depressed

STP Signal ON

Released

STP Signal OFF



Brake pedal

Specified condition

ST1– (E10 ST1 (E10–12) 12) – E1 (E11–1)

Depressed

Below 1.5 V

Released

7.5 to 14 V

E10




NG

Go to step 4


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – STOP LIGHT SWITCH) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side

S13

Disconnect the S13 stop light switch connector. Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Stop light switch (S13–1) – STP (E10–19)

Stop Light Switch Connector

Continuity

Stop light switch (S13–4) – ST1– (E10–12) A56986


Specified condition

Stop light switch (S13–1) or STP (E10–19) – Body ground Stop light switch (S13–4) or ST1– (E10–12) – Body ground

No continuity

E10

ST1–

STP

NG




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKN–01

DTC

P0555

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC

P0557

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0558

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The brake booster pressure sensor detects internal pressure of the brake booster as voltage. A structure of the sensor and its connection to the ECM are the same as ones for the intake air pressure sensor. (Refer to DTC P0105 on page 05–342). In order to purify emission gas when starting a cold engine, drastically retard the ignition timing to quickly activate tha catalyst. Upon this, the throttle valve is opened larger than the throttle opening angle with a warm engine, therefore the intake manifold pressure will be closer to atmospheric pressure. If the negative pressure (vacuum) applied inside the brake booster drops, the ECM cancels the drastic retarding timing and introduces the negative pressure (vacuum) into the intake manifold, and the ECM then resumes the drastic retarding timing after the brake booster negative pressure (vacuum) is ensured at required level. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0555

Open or short in brake booster pressure sensor circuit for 5 sec. or more

P0557

Open in brake booster pressure sensor circuit for 5 sec. or more

P0558

Short in brake booster pressure sensor circuit for 5 sec. or more

O Open en or short in brake booster pressure ressure sensor circuit Brake booster pressure sensor Vacuum hose ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM B2 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor VC 3

ECM

R–W

9 EA1

R–W

18 VC E13

PIM

2

Y

11 EA1

Y

26 PB E13

E2

1

BR

10 EA1

BR

28 E2 E13

5V

E1

A76868



–




1 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK VACUUM HOSE(BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR – BRAKE BOOSTER, INTAKE MANIFOLD – BRAKE BOOSTER) Check that the vacuum hoses are connected correctly. Check that the vacuum hoses are not loose or disconnected. Check the vacuum hoses and tubes for clogs, cracks, holes, damage, or blockage. NG


OK

2


VC (+) E13

E2 (–)


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V

NG

ECM Connector

A76903


OK

3

INSPECT ECM(PB VOLTAGE) (a) E13

Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) PB (E13–26) – E2 (E13–28) (E13 28)

PB (+)


NG A76903



Condition

Specified condition


0.5 to 4.5 V

Go to step 4

Idling


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR) (a) (b) E13

(c)

VC E2 ECM Connector

PB

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the B2 brake booster pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VC (B2–3) PB (E13–26) – PIM (B2–2)

A81699

Continuity y

E2 (E13–28) – E2 (B2–1)


Wire Harness Side


PIM

B2

VC (E13–18) or VC (B2–3) – Body ground PB (E13–26) or PIM (B2–2) – Body ground

E2

1

2 3

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Connector

No continuity

VC

NG A72877

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR


Specified condition

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0556

–


05CKO–01

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0555 on page 05–459.

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor

ECM

Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

Check Valve Throttle Valve To Cylinder

Intake Manifold

Air Cleaner Case Brake Booster A81711

DTC No.


P0556

When either one of the following conditions (a), (b), (c) or (d) is satisfied (1 trip detection logic): (a) If pressure inside the intake manifold is low, the brake booster internal pressure is 38 kPa (285 mmHg, 11.2 in.Hg) or more higher than the intake manifold internal pressure and this condition remains for more than 10 sec. (Pressure leaks caused by hose disconnection, etc). (b) Pressure inside the brake booster stays low or at fixed level, despite the vehicle has driven and stopped 10 times (Vacuum stuck caused by hose clogged, etc). (c) While the brake pedal is released, the pressure inside the brake booster is 32 kPa (240 mmHg, 9.4 in.Hg) or more higher than the intake manifold internal pressure and this condition remains for more than 1 sec. (Pressure leaks). (d) After running the engine for more than 100 sec. with the brake pedal released and the negative pressure (vacuum) has accumulated in the brake booster, the following two conditions are satisfied despite depressing the brake pedal for more than 1 sec. (Vacuum stuck): Internal pressure of the brake booster does not increase Internal pressure of the brake booster is 32 kPa (240 mmHg, 9.4 in.Hg) or more lower than the internal pressure of the intake manifold

WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0555 on page 05–459. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area



–



1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO P0556) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result : Display

Proceed to


A


B



A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Warm up the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester with the shift lever is the ”N” position. Standard : Condition

Intake Manifold Absolute Pressure


70 to 110 kPa (525 to 825 mmHg, 20.7 to 32.5 in.Hg)



NG

Go to step 7

OK

3 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STOP LIGHT SWITCH) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result : Brake Pedal

STP Signal

Depressed

ON

Released

OFF



NG

–


CHECK AND REPAIR STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT

OK

4 (a) (b) (c)



OK

5


PB (+)

(b) (c)


A76903

Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster pressure sensor. Turn the ignition switch ON. Using the MITYVAC (Hand–Held Vacuum Pump), apply a vacuum to the brake booster pressure sensor, measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


PB (E13–26) – E2 ((E13–28))

NG

Vacuum pump operation

Specified condition

0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 in.Hg)

3.3 to 3.9 V

40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 in.Hg)

2.1 to 2.7 V

80 kPa (600 mmHg, 23.6 in.Hg)

0.9 to 1.5 V

Go to step 6

OK CHECK FUNCTION OF BRAKE BOOSTER (See page 32–17, 32–21)



6

–



(c)

VC E2 ECM Connector

PB


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VC (B2–3) PB (E13–26) – PIM (B2–2)

A81699

Continuity y

E2 (E13–28) – E2 (B2–1)


Wire Harness Side


PIM

B2


E2

1

2 3



VC

NG A72877

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK VACUUM HOSE(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR – INTAKE MANIFOLD) Check that the vacuum hose is connected correctly. Check that the vacuum hose is not loose or disconnected. Check the vacuum hose for clogs, cracks, holes, damage, or blockage. NG

OK




8

–



(c)

VC E2 ECM Connector

PIM


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VCC (V1–3) PIM (E13–33) – VOUT (V1–2)

A81699

Continuity y

E2 (E13–28) – GND (V1–1)


Wire Harness Side


VOUT

V1

VC (E13–18) or VCC (V1–3) – Body ground PIM (E13–33) or VOUT (V1–2) – Body ground

GND

1

2 3


No continuity

VCC

NG A72877

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



Specified condition

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0560

–


05CK3–01

SYSTEM VOLTAGE



P0560

Trouble Area Open in back–up power source circuit ECM

Open in back–up power source circuit

HINT: If DTC P0560 is present, the ECM is unable to store other DTCs.

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room J/B No. 1 and Engine Room R/B No. 1 1 1A

B–G

4A

ECM

EFI 1

2

1

B–Y


3 E9

BATT


4B

B–Y

BR

1 E11 E1

1

B–G FL MAIN

BR Battery EE

A76869




1

–



Engine Room R/B No. 1 EFI Fuse


NG

CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED EFI FUSE

A66054

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(BATT VOLTAGE) (a) E1 (–)

BATT (+)

E11 ECM Connector


Specified condition

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

E9 A67446



Go to step 3


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EFI FUSE, EFI FUSE – BATTERY) (a)


EFI Fuse 2 1

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and ECM. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A79078


Specified condition


Continuity


E9

(b)

BATT ECM Connector

A67445


Specified condition


No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and battery. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity


Specified condition


No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJA–01

DTC

P0604

INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR

DTC

P0606

ECM/PCM PROCESSOR

DTC

P0607


DTC

P0657

ACTUATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT/OPEN

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0604 P0606 P0607 P0657


ECM inside error

Trouble Area

ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPAIR OR REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)



DTC

P0617

–


05CJ9–01

STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the engine is being cranked, the battery positive voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. DTC No.


Trouble Area

When all conditions (a), (b) and (c) are satisfied with battery (+B) voltage 10.5 V or more for 20 sec. (a) Vehicle speed greater than 20 km/h (b) Engine revolution greater than 1,000 rpm (c) STA signal ON

P0617


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition SW 1 1 B–R IE4 IP1 (LHD)(RHD)

B–R

4

B–R B–R

AM2 ST2

ECM 5

B–Y

17 E13 STA

B–Y B–Y

1 5 Engine Room R/B No. 1

2 AM2 1

6

1

5

3

B–G Engine Room R/B No. 4

1 ST 2

2 5

1 4B

Driver Side R/B

ST Relay

1 1A

1 4A

Fuse Block

5

6

5 B

B–Y B–W Driver J/C Side J/B B J13 C J13

W–B

7 IK1

2 DJ

B–G B FL MAIN B–R

1 1 S4 S5

9 DA

B J12

Battery IJ

B–W (A/T) 9

A J12 B–Y

B–Y (M/T)

Starter W–B

A J12

B–Y (A/T) 6

N1 Park/Neutral Position Switch


A76870


–



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STARTER SIGNAL) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STARTER SIG” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Ignition Switch Position

ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY Inspect the park/neutral position switch (A/T) (See page 05–938). NG

REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (See page 40–8) (GO TO NEXT STEP 3 AFTER THE REPLACEMENT)

OK

3 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

4

INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY (See page 80–2) NG


REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY (GO TO NEXT STEP 5 AFTER THE REPLACEMENT)


5 (a) (b) (c)

–



ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

SYSTEM OK




DTC

P0705

–


05CJ8–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch goes on when the shift lever is in the N or P shift position. If the shift lever is moved from the N position to the D position, this signal is used for air–fuel ratio correction and for idle speed control (estimated control), etc. DTC No. P0705

DTC Detection Condition 2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for N, P, D and R positions (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Short in park/neutral position switch circuit Park/neutral position switch ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC P0705, use the hand–held tester to confirm the park/neutral position switch signal from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE Refer to DTC P0705 on page 05–938.



DTC

P0724

–


05CJ7–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This STP signal is used to detect that the brakes have been applied. The STP signal voltage is the same as the one supplied to the stop lights. The STP signal is used mainly to control the fuel cut–off engine speed (The fuel cut–off engine speed is reduced slightly when the vehicle is braking). DTC No. P0724


Trouble Area

The stop light switch does not turn off even the vehicle is driven. (2 trip detection logic)




1 (a)

CHECK OPERATION OF STOP LIGHT Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake pedal is operated and released. NG


OK

2 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STOP LIGHT SWITCH) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Brake Pedal

STP Signal

Depressed

ON

Released

OFF

OK NG




3

–



Wire Harness Side

S13



Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition

Stop light switch (S13–1) or STP (E10–19) – Body ground

No continuity

E10

STP

NG




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P1235

–


05CK4–01

HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel pump (high pressure) is an electronically controlled plunger type fuel pump (high pressure) which is driven by the cam provided on the intake cam shaft rear end on the cylinder head. The fuel pump (high pressure) increases the pressure of the fuel fed from the fuel pump (low pressure) in the fuel tank at 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) according to the operating condition, and it feeds the fuel to the fuel delivery pipe. DTC No. P1235

DTC Detection condition Open or short O h t in i ffuell pump (hi (high h pressure)) circuit i it ffor 1 1sec. or more

Trouble Area O Open en or short in fuel pump um (high pressure) ressure) Fuel pump um (high pressure) ressure) ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM

BR G D J13

S3 Fuel Pump (High Pressure) (Spill Valve) 1 2

ECM

(Shielded) R

6 E12 FP+

G

3 E12 FP–

E J13 J/C

E J12 BR EE

D J12 BR (Shielded)

A76876

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1

–


CHECK OPERATION OF FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE) (a)

B12608


NG

REPLACE FUEL PUMP (HIGH PRESSURE)

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(FP+ AND FP– VOLTAGE) (a) FP+

E12

E11

E1

Turn the ignition switch ON, and check the waveforms between terminals FP+ and E1, and FP– and E1 of the E11 and E12 ECM connectors.

HINT: The correct waveform is as shown in the illustration.

FP– ECM Connector

A76903

Normal Signal Waveforms 10 V/ Division FP– GND FP+

5 msec./Division

A14558

NG


OK

3

CHECK FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE) (See page 11–33) NG

OK


REPLACE FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE)


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FUEL PUMP (HIGH PRESSURE) – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Disconnect the S3 fuel pump (high pressure) connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

FP–

FP+

FP+ (E12–6) – Fuel pump (S3–1) FP– (E12–3) – Fuel pump (S3–2)

ECM Connector

A81695

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) FP+ (E12–6) or Fuel pump (S3–1) – Body ground

Wire Harness Side

Specified condition

FP– (E12–3) or Fuel pump (S3–2) – Body ground


S3

Fuel Pump Connector (High Pressure)

A81702



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2008

–


05CK5–01

INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Intake Air Control valve (IACV) is opened and shut by the actuator with intake manifold vacuum. It stabilizes the engine combustion. The IACV operation generates swirl air flow in the cylinder. DTC No.


Trouble Area Open of short in VSV for IACV circuit VSV for IACV ECM

Open or short in VSV for IACV circuit 0.5 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic)

P2008


ECM


EFI

1

EFI Relay


4

5

3

8 E9 MREL

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

1

2

GR

4 IE1 2

B–G EFI No. 2

1 4A


1 4B

2

B–W

V6 VSV (Intake Air Control Valve)

B–G 13 EA1

FL MAIN

GR

4

1

B–W

1

2

L–B

5 E13 SCV




–



1

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSV FOR IACV) (a) (b) (c) Air

Air E

E F

(d)

F VSV is ON

VSV is OFF A81701

Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VSV for IACV. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / SCV VSV” (press the right or left button). Check the VSV for IACV operation when it is operated by the hand–held tester. Standard: Tester operation

Specified condition

VSV is ON

Air from port E flows out through port F.

VSV is OFF

Air does not flow from port E to port F.

NG

Go to step 2


2

INSPECT VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1(VSV FOR IACV) (See page 13–2) NG

REPLACE VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1 (VSV FOR IACV)

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(SCV VOLTAGE)

SCV (+) E13

(a) (b)

E1 (–) E11

ECM Connector

A76903


Specified condition

SCV (E13–5) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

NG



Go to step 4


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – VSV FOR IACV) (a) (b) (c)

E13

SCV

ECM Connector

Disconnect the V6 VSV for IACV connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–2) – SCV (E13–5)

Continuity



Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–2) or SCV (E13–5) – Body ground

No continuity

Wire Harness Side

V6

NG

VSV for IACV Connector A56870

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – VSV FOR IACV) (a)


(b) (c) (d)

EFI Relay A66053

Inspect the EFI No. 2 fuse. (1) Remove the EFI No. 2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. (2) Check the continuity of the EFI No. 2 fuse. Standard: Continuity Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Disconnect the V6 VSV for IACV connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open):

Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–1) – EFI relay (3)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): V6



Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–1) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–502) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKP–01

DTC

P2102

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

DTC

P2103

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The throttle motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body. It provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle motor in order to regulate the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to the driving condition. If this malfunction is detected, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: This electrical throttle system does not use the throttle cable. DTC No.

P2102

P2103


Trouble Area

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 2.0 seconds: (a) Throttle control motor output duty greater than 80 % (b) Throttle control motor current less than 0.5 A


Throttle control motor current greater than 10 A


Condition (a) continues for 0.6 seconds: (a) Throttle control motor current greater than 7 A

WIRING DIAGRAM T1 Throttle Control Motor (Built in Throttle Body)

ECM (Shielded)

2

B

1

W

3 E11 M+

2 E11 M–

17 E11 GE01

A54292



–



1

INSPECT THROTTLE BODY ASSY(RESISTANCE OF THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR) (a) (b)

Component Side Throttle Body

Disconnect the T1 throttle body connector. Measure the motor resistance between terminals M+ and M–. Motor resistance: 0.3 to 100 at 20_C (68_F)

T1

M+

NG

M– A59778

REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY (See page 10–44)

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side T1


Disconnect the T1 throttle body connector. Disconnect the E11 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) M+ (T1–2) – M+ (E11–3)

M–

M– (T1–1) – M– (E11–2)

M+ B53781


Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) M+ (T1–2) or M+ (E11–3) – Body ground M– (T1–1) or M– (E11–2) – Body ground


E11

M+ M– ECM Connector

A54408

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKQ–01

DTC

P2111

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – STUCK OPEN

DTC

P2112

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – STUCK CLOSED

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The throttle motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve using gears. The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body. And, it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle motor in order to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to the driving condition. If this malfunction is detected, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: This electrical throttle system is no used throttle cable. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P2111

The throttle motor locked during control by the ECM (Stuck open)

P2112

The throttle motor locked during control by the ECM (Stuck closed)




1 (a)

INSPECT THROTTLE BODY ASSY(VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE VALVE) Check it a foreign object has been caught between the throttle valve and the housing. NG

OK


REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT AND CLEAN THROTTLE BODY


2

–





T1

M+

M–

NG

A59778


OK

3


Wire Harness Side Throttle Body Connector T1


M–

M– (T1–1) – M– (E11–2)

M+ B53781




E11


A54408



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2118

–


05CKR–01

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CURRENT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If this DTC is detected, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: This electrical throttle control system (ETCS) does not use the throttle cable. DTC No.


P2118

Trouble Area Open in ETCS power source circuit ECM

Open in ETCS power source circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room J/B No. 1 and Engine Room R/B No. 1

Engine Room J/B No. 4 B–G

1 4B

1 4A

B–G

1 THROTTLE 1A 1 2 1

G–R

ECM 5 IE2

G–Y

6 +BM E10

FL MAIN

Battery

A76877



–



1

CHECK FUSE(THROTTLE FUSE) (a)


(b)

THROTTLE Fuse

Remove the THROTTLE fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. Check for continuity in the THROTTLE fuse. Standard: Continuity

NG A82233


OK

2

INSPECT ECM(+BM VOLTAGE) (a) E1 (–)

E11

+BM (+)

Check the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E11 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+BM (E10–6) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

E10

ECM Connector

NG


A67446

OK



3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – THROTTLE FUSE, THROTTLE FUSE – BATTERY) (a)


THROTTLE Fuse

Check the harness and the connector between the THROTTLE fuse and the ECM. (1) Remove the THROTTLE fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A82234


Specified condition

THROTTLE fuse (2) – +BM (E10–6)

Continuity


(b)

+BM ECM Connector

A67404


Specified condition

THROTTLE fuse (2) or +BM (E10–6) – Body ground

No continuity

Check the harness and the connector between the THROTTLE fuse and the battery. (1) Remove the THROTTLE fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Battery positive terminal – THROTTLE fuse (1)

Continuity


Specified condition

Battery positive terminal or THROTTLE fuse (1) – Body ground

No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2119

–


05CKS–01

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL THROTTLE BODY RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Electric Throttle Control System (ETCS) is composed of the throttle motor that operates the throttle valve, the throttle position sensor that detects the opening angle of the throttle valve, the accelerator pedal position sensor that detects the accelerator pedal position, the ECM that controls the ETCS, and the one valve type throttle body. The ECM controls the throttle motor to provide the proper throttle valve opening angle in response to the driving condition. The throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body detects the opening angle of the throttle valve, and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle motor. If the ETCS has a malfunction, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. DTC No. P2119


Trouble Area

Throttle opening angle continues to vary greatly from target throttle opening angle




1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO DTC P2119) Read the DTC using hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B


A




2

–


INSPECT THROTTLE BODY ASSY (a) (b)



T1

M+

M– A59778

NG


OK

3 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

REPLACE ECM AND CLEAR DTC(CHECK IF DTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR) Replace the ECM. Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). Start and warm up the engine. Run the engine at idle for 15 sec. or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Standard: No DTC output. OK

NG REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY


NORMAL


–


05CKT–01

DTC

P2120


DTC

P2122


DTC

P2123


DTC

P2125


DTC

P2127


DTC

P2128


DTC

P2138





–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: This electrical throttle system is no used throttle cable. The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket and it have the 2 sensors to detect the accelerator position and a malfunction of the accelerator position sensor. In the accelerator pedal position sensor, the voltage applied to VPA1 and VPA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the accelerator pedal. The VPA1 is a signal to indicate the actual accelerator pedal opening angle which is used for the engine control, and the VPA2 is a signal to indicate the information about VPA1 which is used for detecting a malfunction in VPA1. The ECM monitors the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals input from VPA1 and VPA2, and controls the throttle motor based on these signals. Movable Range



Usable Range

*1


*2

*1

5

VPA2

*2 0.8

VPA1

0

EP2

VPA1

VPA2 VCP2

VCP1

*1


*2




–



DTC No.

Trouble Area

P2120


P2122


P2123


P2125

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) VPA2 less than 0.5 V and VPA greater than 0.97 deg, or VPA2 greater than 4.8 V and VPA greater than 0.2 V but less than 3.45 V

P2127


P2128


P2138






ACCEL POS #2

ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

VCP circuit open

0V

0V

0V

0V


0V

1.5 to 2.9 V

0V

3.5 to 5.5 V


0.5 to 1.1 V

0V

2.5 to 4.6 V

0V

EP circuit open

5V

5V

5V

5V



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

A20 Accel Position Sensor 6 (LHD) VCP1 4 (RHD)


3 (LHD) EP1 1 (RHD)



1 (LHD) EP2 3 (RHD)

ECM


5 IG2

6 IG2

1 IG2

7 IG2

2 IG2

3 IG2

B (LHD)

G (LHD)

Y (LHD)

B (LHD)

W (LHD)

Y (LHD)

26 VCPA E9

22 VPA E9

28 E9

EPA

27 VCP2 E9

23 VPA2 E9

29 E9

EPA2

Y (RHD) A76878




1

–



Depressed


ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

Released FI7052

OK


NG

2


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)


Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20_C (68_F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 6 2 1 5 4

VCP1 EP1

NG A82236

OK




3

–


INSPECT ECM(VCPA AND VCP2 VOLTAGE) VCP2 (+) VCPA (+) E9

(a) (b)


Specified condition

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28) 4 5 to 5.5 4.5 55V VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)


NG


OK

4


VPA (+) E9


NG


(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

OK



5

–




A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)



Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)

A54384

EP1 (A20–3) – EPA (E9–28)



EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9


VPA2 VPA


Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)



VCPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) A54404

Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2121

–


05CKU–01




Trouble Area


P2121




1


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)


Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 2 1 6 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

OK


NG



2

–



VPA (+) E9

(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V


OK


NG

3



A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)



A54384

Specified condition




EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9


VPA2 VPA


Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)



VCPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) A54404



Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDU–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI2547

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD (European spec.) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect an OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or a hand–held tester to the vehicle, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system / components or in the power train control components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO 15031–4 are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–309). If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips, the CHK ENG goes off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

Hand–Held Tester

DLC3 A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–309). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3).


–


* 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporally stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine condition when a misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304) or fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175) or other malfunction (first malfunction only) is detected. Because freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. If no instructions are given, troubleshoot according to the following priorities. (1) DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175) and misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304). (2) Fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175). (3) Misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304). (b)

FI2547


Description for M–OBD (Except European spec.) When troubleshoot Multiplex OBD (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand– held tester to the vehicle, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM.



The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in drive system components. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–309). If the malfunction does not recur, the CHK ENG lamp will be disappeared by turning off the ignition switch but the recorded DTC will be remaining in the ECM memory.

To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (for operating instructions, see the instruction book.) The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporally stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, water temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Hand–Held Tester

DLC3 A76859


–


(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

–


Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro–OBD)/ ISO 14230(M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 A04550

Symbol

Terminal No.

Connection/Voltage or Resistance

Condition

SIL

7

Bus + Line/Pulse generation

During transmission

CG

4

Chassis Ground – Body Ground/1 or less

Always

SG

5

Signal Ground – Body Ground/1 or less

Always

BAT

16

Battery Positive – Body Ground/9 to 14 V

Always

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual. (d) Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11 V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (e) Check the CHK ENG. (1) The CHK ENG lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. HINT: If the CHK ENG is not illuminated, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. 2. DTC CHECK (Normal Mode) NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down.



(a) Hand–Held Tester

DLC3 A76859

–


Checking the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and note them down (for operating instructions, see the hand–held tester’s instruction book). (4) See page 05–309 to confirm the details of the DTCs.

HINT: In the event that 2 or more DTCs are detected, the CHK ENG lamp will indicate the smaller number DTC first. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (c) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester. (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and THROTTLE fuses from the engine room R/B No. 1 for more than 60 seconds. 3. DTC CHECK (Check Mode) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check (test) mode. (a) Procedure for check mode using the hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions Battery positive voltage 11 V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”P” or ”N” position. Air conditioning switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (4) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON.



–

(5) 0.13 sec. ON

OFF 0.13 sec. A76900



Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check (test) mode. The CHK ENG blinks in 0.13 sec. intervals as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG goes off after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the normal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (c) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester. (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and THROTTLE fuses from the engine room R/B No. 1 for more than 60 seconds.


–


4. FAIL–SAFE CHART If any of the following codes is recorded, the ECM enters into the fail–safe mode. DTC No.



P0031 P0032 P0037 P0038 P0051 P0052 P0057 P0058

Faulty heater circuit is turned off.

Ignition switch is OFF.

P0100 P0102 P0103

Ignition timing is calculated based on an engine speed and a throttle opening angle.

”Pass” detection has occurred. Upon this occurrence, the ECM will return to normal mode.

P0105 P0107 P0108

Intake air pressure is controlled with a calculated value in proportion to the throttle opening angle and the engine speed. Limit the engine speed to 3,000 rpm or less.


P0110 P0112 P0113

Intake air temperature is fixed at 20 C (68 F)


P0115 P0117 P0118

Engine coolant temperature is fixed at 80


P0120 P0121 P0122 P0123 P0220 P0222 P0223 P2135

Turn off the power for the throttle motor, return the throttle valve in position using the return spring, and fuel cut intermittent.

Repeat the following conditions at least 2 seconds or more with the throttle position switch closed: VTA is more than 0.1 V but less than 0.95 V Engine speed is 0 km/h

P0190 P0191

Stop the high–pressure pump operation. Limit the engine speed to 2,000 rpm or less.

After it is returned to normal condition, turn the ignition switch ON.

P0200

Turn off the INJ relay and cut the power for the EDU.

P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204

Stop fuel injection for an abnormal cylinder and related other cylinders. Limit the engine speed to 3,000 rpm or less.


P0325 P0327 P0328

Maximum timing retardation


P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354

Stop fuel injection for all the cylinders.


P0604 P0606 P0607 P0657



P1235



P2008

Force IACV to close.




–




P2102 P2103 P2111 P2112 P2118 P2119



P2120 P2121 P2122 P2123 P2125 P2127 P2128 P2138

If both VPA1 and VPA2 are malfunctioning: Fixed at idle If either of VPA1 or VPA2 is malfunctioning: Fuel cut intermittently


5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s ECM in the check mode, the 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of the 2 trip detection logic, and the sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTCs (See step 2). (b) Set the check mode (See step 3). (c) Perform a simulation test (See page 01–22). (d) Check the connector and terminal (See page 01–32). (e) Wiggle the harness and the connector (See page 01–32). 6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if its value differs from those listed here. So, do not solely depend on the ”Normal Condition” here when deciding whether a part is faulty or not. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Hand–held Tester Display


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

INJECTOR

Injection period of the No. 1 cylinder/ Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 32.64 ms


IGN ADVANCE

Ignition timing advance for No. 1 cylinder/ Min.: –64 deg., Max.: 63.5 deg.

Idling: BTDC 5 to 23

Calculated load by ECM/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %

Idling: 21.6 to 31.4 % Running without load (2,500 rpm): 19.6 to 29.4 %

CALC LOAD





–


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note


If the value is Approximately 0.0 gm/s: S Mass air flow meter power source circuit open S VG circuit open or short If the value is 160.0 gm/s or more: S E2G circuit open


S Idling: 22 to 32 kPa S Running without load (2,500 rpm): 20 to 30 kPa

If the value is Approximately 0.0 kPa: S PIM circuit short If the value is 142.0 kPa or more: S VC circuit open or short S PIM circuit open S E2 circuit open

Engine speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383 rpm

Idling: 625 to rpm

COOLANT TEMP

Coolant temperature/ Min.: –40_C, Max.: 140_C


INTAKE AIR

Intake air temperature/ Min.: –40_C, Max.: 140_C



S Throttle fully closed: 10 to 24 % S Throttle fully open: 64 to 96 %


S Throttle fully closed: ON S Throttle open: OFF

VEHICLE SPD




ACCEL POS #1

Accelerator pedal position sensor No.1 output voltage/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

S Accelerator pedal released: 0.5 to 1.1 V S Accelerator pedal depressed: 2.5 to 4.6 V


ACCEL POS #2




THROTTLE POS #2

Throttle position sensor No.2 output voltage/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

S Throttle fully closed: 2.1 to 3.1 V S Throttle fully open: 4.5 to 5.5 V


THROTTLE TARGT



MAF

MAP

ENGINE SPD

THROTTLE POS CTP SW


If the value is –40_C (–40_F): S Sensor circuit is o open. en. If the value is 140_C (284_F): S Sensor circuit is shorted. Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine).

Throttle fully closed: 0 %

S When accelerator pedal is depressed, duty ratio is increased. S Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

Throttle motor closed duty ratio/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %


S When accelerator pedal is released quickly, duty ratio is increased. S Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

THROTTLE MOT

Whether or not throttle motor control is permitted/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

+BM

Whether or not electric throttle control system power is inputted/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

THROTTLE OPN DUTY

THROTTLE CLS DUTY

Throttle motor opening duty ratio/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %





–


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

Whether or not accelerator pedal position sensor is detecting idle/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

Whether or not throttle position sensor is detecting idle/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

FAIL #1

Whether or not fail safe function is executed/ ON or OFF

ETCS has failed: ON

FAIL #2


ETCS has failed: ON

THROTTLE INITIAL

Throttle fully closed learned value Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

0.5 to 0.9 V

ACCEL LEARN VAL

Accelerator fully closed learned value Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

0.4 to 1.4 V

Throttle motor current Min.: 0 A, Max.: 20 A

Idling: 0 to 3.0 A

ACCEL IDL POS

THROTTLE IDL POS

THROTTLE MOT

O2S B1 S1

Heated oxygen sensor output voltage for bank 1 sensor 1/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 1.0 V

O2S B1 S2


O2S B2 S1


O2S B2 S2


SHORT FT #1


Driving (50 km/h, 31 mph): m h): 0.1 to 0.9 V

Performing the INJ VOL or A/F CONTROL function of the ACTIVE TEST enables the user to check the voltage output of each sensor.

0 20 %

This item is the short–term fuel compensation used to maintain the air–fuel ratio at stoichiometric air– fuel ratio This item is the overall fuel compensation carried out in long–term to compensate for a continual deviation of the short–term fuel trim from the central value.

LONG FT #1


0 20 %

TOTAL FT #1

Total fuel trim bank 1: Average value for fuel trim system of bank 1/ Min.: 0.5, Max.: 1.496

Idling: 0.5 to 1.4

SHORT FT #2

Short term fuel trim of bank 2/ Min.: –100 %, Max.: 100 %

0 20 %


LONG FT #2


0 20 %

TOTAL FT #2


Idling: 0.5 to 1.4





–


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

O2FT B1 S1

Short term fuel trim associated with the bank 1 sensor 1/ Min.: –100 %, Max.: 100 %

0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #1

O2FT B1 S2


0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #1

O2FT B2 S1


0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #2

O2FT B2 S2


0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #2


OL: Open Loop–has not yet satisfied conditions to go closed loop. CL: Closed Loop–using heated oxygen sensor(s) as feed back for fuel control. OL DRIVE: Open loop due to driving conditions. conditions (fuel enrichenrich ment) OL FAULT: Open loop due to detected system fault. CL FAULT: Closed loop but one of heated oxygen sensors, which is used for fuel control, is functioning improperly.

Fuel cut idle/ ON or OFF


FC IDL= ”ON” when throttle valve fully closed and engine speed is over 1,500 rpm.

MIL status/ ON or OFF

MIL ON: ON

Idling after warming up: u : 0 to 1,000 msec.


Cranking: ON

A/C signal/ ON or OFF

A/C ON: ON

Park/neutral position switch signal/ ON or OFF

P or N position: ON

FUEL SYS #1

FUEL SYS #2

FC IDL MIL

Fuel system status (Bank1) / OL or CL or OL DRIVE or OL FAULT or CL FAULT


O2 LR B1 S1

Oxygen sensor lean rich bank 1 sensor 1: Response time for oxygen sensor output to switch from lean to rich/ Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 16,711 ms

O2 LR B2 S1


O2 RL B1 S1

Oxygen sensor rich lean bank 1 sensor 1: Response time for oxygen sensor output to switch from rich to lean/ Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 16,711 ms

O2 RL B2 S1


STARTER SIG A/C SIG PNP SW [NSW] *2




–



Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

ELECT LOAD SIG

Electrical load signal/ ON or OFF

Tail light switch ON: ON Defogger switch ON: ON

STOP LIGHT SW



PS OIL PRESS SW


While turning the steering wheel: ON While not turning the steering wheel: OFF

The idle–up control is performed when PS is ON.

PS SIGNAL


When the steering wheel is turned: ON

This signal is usually ON status until the IG switch is turned OFF.

VSV status for intake air control valve/ ON or OFF

VSV operation: ON

Fuel pump/speed status/ ON/H or OFF/M,L

Idling: ON

EVAP VSV

VSV status for EVAP control/ ON or OFF

VSV operating: ON

VVT CTRL B1

VVT control status (bank 1)/ ON or OFF


IGNITION


0 to 400

CYL #1, #2, #3, #4

Misfire ratio of the cylinder 1 to 4/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 50 %

0%

MISFIRE RPM

Engine RPM for first misfire range/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 6,375 rpm

Misfire 0: 0 rpm

FC TAU

Fuel Cut TAU: Fuel cut during very light load/ ON or OFF

Fuel cut operating: ON

The fuel cut is being performed under very light load to prevent the engine combustion from becoming incomplete.


Check mode ON: ON

See step 3

SCV VSV FUEL PUMP / SPD

CHECK MODE

O2 RL B1 S2

Oxygen sensor rich lean bank 1 sensor 2: Response time for oxygen sensor output to switch from rich to lean/ Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 16,702.5 ms

O2 RL B2 S2


MIL ON RUN DIST

FUEL PRESS

VSV for EVAP is controlled by the ECM (ground side duty control)

This item is displayed in only idling


Distance since activation of check engine warning light/ Min.: 0 km, Max.: 65,535 km

When there is no DTC: 0 km

Fuel high pressure inside fuel delivery pipe/ Min.: 0 MPa, Max.: 819 MPa

Idling: 8 to 13 MPa Running without load (3,000 rpm): 9.5 to 10.5 MPa

*1: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is at the N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. *2: For A/T only



–


7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten diagnostic time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST” (g) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOL

A/F CONTROL

SCV VSV

EVAP VSV (ALONE)

FUEL PUMP / SPD

VVT CTRL B1

TC/TE1

FC IDL PROHBT

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

[Test Details] Control the injection volume Min.: –12.5 %, Max.: 25 % [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3,000 rpm or less

All injectors are tested at once. Injection volume is gradually changed between –12.5 and 25 %.

[Test Details] Control the injection volume –12.5 or 25 % (Change the injection volume –12.5 % or 25 %.) [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3,000 rpm or less

The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the user to check its output (show its graph indication) of sensor 1 and sensor 2: For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1 S1 and O2S B1 S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button.

[Test Details] Activate the VSV for intake air control valve. ON or OFF

[Test Details] Activate the VSV for EVAP control ON or OFF

[Test Details] Control the fuel pump ON or OFF

[Test Details] Active the VVT system (Bank 1). ON or OFF






–


BASIC INSPECTION When the malfunction code is not confirmed in the DTC check, troubleshooting should be carried out in all the possible circuits considered as causes of the problems. In many cases, by carrying out the basic engine check shown in the following flow chart, the location causing the problem can be found quickly and efficiently. Therefore, using this check is essential in the engine troubleshooting.

1



NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V


OK

2



NG

GO TO STEP 7

OK

3


OK

4



Inside

CLEAN OR REPLACE

A59673

OK

5





6

–


CHECK IGNITION TIMING (See page 14–181) NG

PROCEED TO PAGE AND CONTINUE TO TROUBLESHOOT

OK PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE 05–320

7



OK

8






–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDX–01

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When the malfunction is not confirmed in the DTC check and the problem still can not be confirmed in the basic inspection either, proceed to this problem symptoms table and troubleshoot according to the number given below. Symptom

Suspected Area

See page


2. Starter 3. Starter relay 4. Park/neutral position switch

19–10 19–10 40–8


1. 2. 3. 4.

05–502 05–439 05–507 05–415


1. Ignition coil assy 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. Injector circuit

05–439 05–507 05–415


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Starter signal circuit Ignition coil assy Spark plug Compression Injector circuit Fuel pump control circuit

05–513 05–439 18–14 14–181 05–415 05–507


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Starter signal circuit Injector circuit Ignition coil assy Spark plug Fuel pump control circuit

05–513 05–415 05–439 18–14 05–507


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


05–513 05–415 05–439 18–14 05–507


1. ECM power source circuit 2. Park/neutral position switch 3. Back up power source circuit

05–502 40–8 05–467


1. 2. 3. 4.

Park/neutral position switch Injector circuit Back up power source circuit Fuel pump control circuit

40–8 05–415 05–467 05–507


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Mass air flow meter circuit Vacuum sensor circuit Injector circuit Fuel pump control circuit Ignition coil assy Compression Back up power source circuit

05–336 05–342 05–415 05–507 05–439 14–181 05–467


1. Mass air flow meter circuit 2. Vacuum sensor circuit 3. ECM power source circuit

05–336 05–342 05–502


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

05–336 05–342 05–415 05–439 05–507

Muffler explosion after fire (Poor driveability)

1. Ignition coil assy 2. Spark plug 3. Injector circuit


ECM power source circuit Ignition coil assy Fuel pump control circuit Injector circuit

Mass air flow meter circuit Vacuum sensor circuit Injector circuit Ignition coil assy Fuel pump control circuit

05–439 18–14 05–415


–


Symptom

Suspected Area

See page


1. Spark plug 2. Injector circuit

18–14 05–415

Engine stall (Soon after starting)

1. Mass air flow meter circuit 2. Vacuum sensor circuit

05–336 05–342

Engine stall (After accelerator pedal depressed)


05–336 05–342

Engine stall (After accelerator pedal released)

1. Mass air flow meter circuit 2. Vacuum sensor circuit 3. ECM

05–336 05–342 01–32

Engine stall (During A/C operation)


05–1100 01–32

Engine stall (When shifting N to D)

1. Park/neutral position switch


40–8


–


05CJC–01

STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the engine is cranked, the intake air flow is slow, so fuel vaporization is poor. A rich mixture is therefore necessary in order to achieve good startability. While the engine is being cranked, the battery voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. The starter signal is mainly used to increase the fuel injection volume for the starting injection control and after–start injection control.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: This diagnostic troubleshooting procedure is on the premise that the engine is being cranked under normal conditions. If the engine does not crank, proceed to the problem symptoms table on page 05–320.

1 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

NG




2

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – STARTER RELAY) (a) (b) (c)

E13


Specified condition

STA (E13–17) – ST relay (1)

Continuity


STA

ECM Connector

A81699


Specified condition

STA (E13–17) or ST relay (1) – Body ground

No continuity

Driver Side R/B LHD:

ST Relay A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD:

ST Relay A79098

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDW–01


E12

E11

E10

E9

A53766


Wiring Color

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E11–1)

B–Y – BR

Always

Condition

STD Voltage (V) 9 to 14

+BM (E10–6) – E1 (E11–1)

G–Y – BR

Always

9 to 14

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E11–1)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

+B2 (E9–2) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E11–1)

GR – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IREL (E10–35) – E1 (E11–1)

V – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

R–W – BR

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VTA1 (E13–21) (E13 21) – E2 (E13 (E13–28) 28)

L W – BR L–W

IG switch ON, Accelerator pedal fully released

0.4 to 1.0

IG switch ON, Accelerator pedal fully depressed

3.2 to 4.8


2.1 to 3.1


4.5 to 5.5


0.5 to 1.1


2.5 to 4.6


1.5 to 2.9


3.5 to 5.5

VTA2 (E13–31) (E13 31) – E2 (E13 (E13–28) 28)

B R – BR B–R

VPA (E9–22) (E9 22) – EPA (E9–28) (E9 28)

G–Y

VPA2 (E9–23) (E9 23) – EPA2 (E9 (E9–29) 29)

W–Y

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VG (E13–30) – EVG (E13–29)

L–Y – G

Idling, P or N position, A/C switch OFF

0.5 to 3.0

THA (E13–20) – E2 (E13–28)

GR – BR

Idling, Intake air temperature 20 C (68 F)

0.5 to 3.4

THW (E13–19) – E2 (E13–28)

B–W – BR

Idling, Coolant temperature 80

0.2 to 1.0

#1 (E13–1) – E01 (E13–7) #2 (E13–2) (E13 2) – E01 (E13–7) (E13 7) #3 (E13–3) – E01 (E13–7) #4 (E13–4) – E01 (E13–7)

G–W – W–B W R–W W–R W–B B R–W – W–B W–L – W–B

IG switch ON Idling


IJF1 (E13–25) – E01 (E13–7)

R–B – W–B

Idling


IGT1 (E13–8) – E1 (E11–1) IGT2 (E13–9) – E1 (E11–1) IGT3 (E13–10) – E1 (E11–1) IGT4 (E13–11) – E1 (E11–1)

R–W – BR P – BR LG–B – BR L–Y – BR

Idling


IGF1 (E13–24) – E1 (E11–1)

W–R – BR

G2+ (E11–27) – NE– (E11–24)

IG switch ON

9 to 14

4.5 to 5.5

Idling


W–R

Idling


NE+ (E11–25) – NE– (E11–24)

G–R

Idling


FC (E9–10) – E1 (E11–1)

G–Y – BR

IG switch ON

M+ (E11–3) – E01 (E13–7) M– (E11–2) – E01 (E13–7)

B – W–B W – W–B

Idling


9 to 14 Pulse generation

05–319 DIAGNOSTICS Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

OX1A (E12–22) – E2 (E13–28)

B – BR

OX1B (E12–21) – O1B– (E11–26)

B–W

OX2A (E12–23) – E2 (E13–28)

R – BR

OX2B (E12–29) – O2B– (E11–31)

R–G

HT1A (E12–5) – E03 (E11–7) HT1B ((E12–25)) – E03 ((E11–7)) HT2A (E12–4) – E03 (E11–7) HT2B (E12–33) – E03 (E11–7)

Y – W–B P – W–B L – W–B L–B – W–B

KNK1 (E12–1) – EKNK (E12–2)

B–W

OC1+ (E11–16) – OC1– (E11–15)

–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) Condition

STD Voltage (V)

Maintain engine speed s eed at 2,500 rpm r m for 2 minutes after warming up


Idling IG switch ON

Below 3.0 9 to 14

Maintain engine speed at 4,000 rpm after warming up


W–G – Y–B

IG switch ON


EVP1 (E13–34) – E01 (E13–7)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

SCV (E13–5) – E1 (E11–1)

L–B – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON

3.3 to 3.9

Apply vacuum 26.7 kPa (200 mmHg, 7.9 in.Hg)

2.6 to 3.0

IG switch ON

3.3 to 3.9


2.6 to 3.0

PIM (E13–33) (E13 33) – E2 (E13–28) (E13 28)

G W – BR G–W

PB (E13–26) (E13 26) – E2 (E13–28) (E13 28)

Y – BR

PR (E13–23) – E2 (E13–28)

Y–G – BR

FP+ (E12 (E12–6) 6) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1) FP– (E12–3) – E1 (E11–1)

R – BR G – BR

STA (E13–17) – E1 (E11–1)

B–Y – BR

STP (E10–19) (E10 19) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

G W – BR G–W

Idling

2.1 to 3.2

Idling


Shift position in neutral, IG switch START Brake pedal is depressed

Below 1.5

IG switch ON, Brake pedal is depressed

Below 1.5

IG switch ON, Brake pedal is released

7.5 to 14

G W – BR G–W

W (E9–11) (E9 11) – E01 (E13 (E13–7) 7)

W – W–B W B

ELS (E9–12) (E9 12) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

G – BR

TACH (E9–5) – E1 (E11–1)

GR–R – BR

Idling

SPD (E10–17) – E01 (E13–7)

V–W – W–B

IG switch ON

TC (E9–20) – E1 (E11–1)

W–L – BR

IG switch ON

SIL (E9–18) – E1 (E11–1)

W–G – BR

During charge of gears

G – BR

F/PS (E9–14) – E1 (E11–1)

LG–B – BR


9 to 14


ST1 (E10–12) ST1– (E10 12) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

PSW (E11–10) – E1 (E11–1)

6.0 or more

Idling

9 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 3.0

Taillight switch ON, Defogger switch ON

7.5 to 14

Taillight switch OFF, Defogger switch OFF

0 to 1.5 Pulse generation 4.5 to 5.5 9 to 14 Pulse generation

While turning the steering wheel

Below 1.5

IG switch ON

Below 1.5


–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE)

05C6J–01


WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R


ECM


IG2 AM2

1


DH 2

B–G 4A 1

4B 1


9

6 B–R

IGN

11 E9

W


Driver Side J/B

DA 18 22

B–G FL MAIN

B–W

B–W C J8

Battery

A J26

J/C

(LHD) (RHD)

C J8

A J26

(LHD) (RHD)

A81015







1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–




NG

2


E9


OK ECM Connector

A65748



3 (a)


SYSTEM OK

NG

4 (a)





05–4 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505N–04



Driver’s Name

Production Date


Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name



Difficult to Start


Poor Idling


Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall


km miles


Back fire Other


High (

rpm)

Low (


Surging

Others



Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation




day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/


After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.


F) Downhill


Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal


)


)

)



Normal

)

rpm)

05–16 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505J–04

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT: Parameters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your reading due to the type of instrument or other factors. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check in the check mode, check the circuit for the codes listed in the table below. For details of each code, refer to the ’’See page ’’ under the respective ’’DTC No.’’ in the DTC chart. DTC No. (See page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

*1 CHK ENG

Memory

P0100 (05–24)

Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunction


P0110 (05–30)

Intake Air Temperature Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit Intake air temp. sensor (built into mass air flow meter) ECM

P0115 (05–34)

Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Malfunction


P0116 (05–38)


Engine coolant temperature sensor Thermostat

P0120 (05–39)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit Throttle position sensor ECM

P0121 (05–44)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit Range/Performance Problem

Throttle position sensor

Insufficient Coolant Temp. for Closed Loop Fuel Control

Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector Gas leakage on exhaust system ECM


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector

P0133*3 (05–60)


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector ECM

P0135 (05–65)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Open or short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater ECM

P0136 (05–54)


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor

P0141 (05–65)



P0125 (05–45)

P0130*3 (05–54)


05–17 DIAGNOSTICS

–


System too Lean (Fuel Trim) (Bank1)

Air induction system Injector blockage PCV hose Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Fuel pressure Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor ECM

P0172*3 (05–67)

System too Rich (Fuel Trim) (Bank1)

Injector leak, blockage Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Ignition system Fuel pressure Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor ECM

P0300*3 (05–73)


Open or short in engine wire Connector connection

P0171*3 (05–67)

P0301*3 (05–73)


P0302*3 (05–73)


P0303*3 (05–73)


Vacuum Vac m hose connection PCV hose Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing ECM

P0304*3 (05–73)


P0325 (05–81)

Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1)

Open or short in knock sensor circuit Knock sensor (under–torqued or loose) ECM

P0335 (05–84)

Crankshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor Crank angle sensor plate ECM

P0340 (05–88)

Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft position sensor Intake camshaft Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM

P0420*3 (05–91)


Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter ECM

P0443 (05–94)

Evaporative Emission Control System Purge Control Vent Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in VSV for EVAP circuit VSV for EVAP ECM



P0500 (05–98)


05–18 DIAGNOSTICS

–


Idle Control System Malfunction

Open or short in ISC valve circuit ISC valve is stuck or closed PCV hose A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM

Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No. 1)

Ignition system Open or short in IGF or IGT1 circuit from No. 1 ignition coil with igniter to ECM No. 1 ignition coil with igniter ECM





P1315 (05–103)



P1335 (05–84)

Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction (During engine running)


P1346 (05–111)

VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem (Bank 1)

Mechanical system (Timing chain has janped a tooth, chain stretched) ECM

P1349 (05–112)

VVT System Malfunction (Bank 1)


P1520*2 (05–115)

Stop Light Switch Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in stop light switch signal circuit Stop light switch ECM

P1600 (05–119)

ECM BATT Malfunction

Open in back up power source circuit ECM

P1656 (05–122)

OCV Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1)


P0505*3 (05–100)

P1300 (05–103)

P1305 (05–103)

P1310 (05–103)

*1: ... CHK ENG is illuminated. ... CHK ENG is not illuminated. *2: Only for A/T models. *3: For European spec. only



–


05C6G–01




–


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch 2 6 B–R DH

4

Driver Side J/B IGN

16

B–R

ECM Junction Connector A E B–W B–W J26 J27 (*1) (*1) J8 Junction Connector C B–W B–W C (*2) (*2)

18 DA

DL

B 1 IP1 (*1) 1 IE4 (*2)

4

4 5

1


IG2 Relay B–R

3

2 4

4 1

2 IE1 GR

1

4

4

5 2

2

1

2 R–B IG2

AM2 1

1

W–B

EFI Relay

EFI 1

3

2 4

4

8 EA1

1 1A B–G 1 4A

8 E9 MREL

GR

B–Y 1

9 E9 IGSW


W–B B–W


4

R–B 1


EFI No.1


2

1 4B B–G FL MAIN

To Injector (See page 05–73) To Ignition Coil and Igniter (See page 05–103)

4 W–B

B–R

7 E12 E1

12 EA1 B–R

BR

8 IK1

1 E9 +B

B–R Battery EC

*1: RHD *2: LHD

EH A79085



–




E9

E12

E1 (–)

+B (+)

ECM Connecter


OK

A18294


Specified condition

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V


NG

2


E13

(a) (b) (c)

E12


Specified condition


E2

Continuity


E1 ECM Connecter

A65746

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

IGSW (+)

ECM Connecter

A18294

OK NG


Go to step 8


4

–



Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG


A79096

OK

5

CHECK FUSE(IG2 FUSE) (a) (b)


Remove the IG2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. Check for continuity in the IG2 fuse. Standard: Continuity

NG

IG2 Fuse


A66055

OK

6



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


7

–



I13


NG

Ignition Switch

B50489

Switch

Terminal No.

Resisitance

LOCK

All Terminals

1M or more

ACC

1–3

1 or less

ON

1–2, 1–3, 2–3, 5–6

1 or less

START

4–5, 4–6, 5–6, 1–2

1 or less



8


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

MREL (+)

ECM Connecter

A18294

NG


OK

9



NG

EFI Fuse A66054

OK





10

–


CHECK FUSE(EFI No.1 FUSE) (a)


EFI No.1 Fuse

Ç

(b)


NG


A79065

OK

11



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


12

–




EFI Relay A66053



Specified condition


Ç


Continuity y

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (E9–1)


Specified condition



A79066

(b)

E9

+B ECM Connector


MREL A65748

No continuityy

OK


Specified condition


Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




–


05C6H–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In the diagram below, when the engine is cranked, current flows from terminal ST of the ignition switch to the starter relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal). When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to the coil of the circuit opening relay, the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates. While the NE signal is generated (engine running), the ECM keeps Tr ON (circuit opening relay ON) and the fuel pump also keeps operating.

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM B–W From 10 Terminal 3 of B–W IB1 EFI Relay (See Page 05–124)

1

2

5

3

6 IC3

G–Y

G–Y

10 E9

FC

L–B

B–W C8 Circuit Opening Relay

4 5

F25 Fuel Pump W–B

BR

A79082


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY) Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL PUMP / SPD”. Perform the active test with the engine stopped. Result: The circuit opening relay operates. OK


NG

2

CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT(See page 05–124) NG

OK


REPAIR OR CIRCUIT

REPLACE

POWER

SOURCE


3

–



C8



3–5

B16200

NG



OK

4

INSPECT ECM

E12


NG


(a) (b)

E9


Specified condition

FC (E9–10) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

FC (+) A18294

OK

Go to step 6


5

–





EFI Relay

Specified condition


A66053

Continuity y



Wire Harness Side


C8

Specified condition


1

3


5


No continuityy

2


A79099

E9

FC MREL

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6


OK



OR


7

–





2



A79099

Wire Harness Side



Specified condition


No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG A66276



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–1 DIAGNOSTICS

–


SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505G–04



2


3



4



5


6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7


8



B A


A


B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10

05–2 DIAGNOSTICS

9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14


15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 18

05–3 DIAGNOSTICS

16

–



GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END


05–19 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 05B3M–03

LOCATION Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ECM Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch

Mass Air Flow Meter Assy

Ignition Coil and Igniter Injector

VSV for EVAP

Camshaft Timig OIL Control Valve Assy



Engine Room R/B No.4 DLC3

Knock Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor

Circuit Opening Relay

Idle Speed Control Valve Assy Throttle Position Sensor

Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Vacuum Switching Valve (for ISC)

Fuel Pump

A79104



–


05C6I–01




–


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch 4

5

B–Y 6

B–R

*1: LHD *2: RHD *3: A/T *4: M/T

1 ST

Fuse Block

2 B–R

1 1

6 B–W

IE4 (*1) IP1 (*2)

B J13

B J12

B–R

B–W (*3) 9

B–R 1

Engine Room 2 R/B No.1 AM2 and Engine 1 Room 1 1A J/B No.1

B–Y

5

ECM Driver ST Relay Side R/B

3

2

A J12

B–Y

9 E12 STA

Junction Connector

5

5

W–B

B

2 DJ 7

Driver Side J/B

IK1

B–G FL MAIN B–R

6 B–Y (*3)

1


1 4B

A J12

B–Y (*4)

5

5

B–G 1 4A

C J13

N1 Neutral Start Switch

B

1 1 S5

9 DA

S4

Battery

Stater

W–B IJ

A79100



–


NSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: This diagnostic chart is on the premise that the engine is cranked normally. If the engine is not cranked, proceed to the problem symptoms table on page 05–22.

1 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK


NG

2


E12

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD



Disconnect the ECM E12 connector. Remove the starter relay from the driver side R/B. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):


Specified condition


No continuity


NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–24 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0100

–


05C68–01

MASS AIR FLOW CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow meter uses a platinum hot wire. The hot wire air flow meter consists of a platinum hot wire, temprature sensor and a control circuit installed in a plastic housing. The hot wire air flow meter works on the principle that the hot wire and temprature sensor located in the intake air bypass of the housing detect any changes in the intake air temperature. The hot wire is maintained at the set temperature by controlling the current flow through the hot wire. This current flow is then measured as the output voltage of the mass air flow meter. The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and temprature sensor provide a bridge circuit, with the power transistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temperature. B+ Temprature Sensor Power Transistor Platinum Hot Wire B

A

Output Voltage Temprature Sensor Platinum Hot Wire

A75348

DTC No P0100


Trouble Area

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed less than 4,000 rpm for more than 3 sec.


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the air flow ratio in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Air Flow Value (gm/sec) Approx. 0.0 271.0 or more



05–25 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM

From Terminal 2 of EFI No.1 Fuse (See Page 05–124) B–R

A6 Mass Air Flow Meter 12 EA1

B–R

1

ECM

2

L–Y

32 E12 EVG

3

G

24 E12 VG

A79052

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MASS AIR FLOW RATE)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Read air flow rate on the hand–held tester. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Air flow rate (gm/sec)

Proceed to

0.0

A

271.0 or more

B

1 less than Mass Air Flow Rate less than 270.0 or more (*1)

C

*1: The value must be changed when the throttle valve is opend or closed.

A


B

Go to step 6

C

CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See Page 05–5)

05–26 DIAGNOSTICS

2

–


INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER(POWER SORUCE VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


9 to 14 V

+B Mass Air Flow Meter Connector A54396

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3

INSPECT ECM (a) (b)

E12

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 ECM connector.

HINT: The shift position should be P or N and the A/C switch should be turned OFF. Standard: VG (+)

EVG (–) ECM Connector

A18294


Condition

Specified condition

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

OK

NG



05–27 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–






E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–28 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – MASS AIR FLOW METER) (a) (b)


(c) (d) EFI Relay


Specified condition


A66053

Continuity

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (A6–1)




Ç

Specified condition


No continuity




NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A54396

OK CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–124)

6

INSPECT ECM (a) E12

EVG ECM Connector


A18294


Specified condition


Continuity

NG


05–29 DIAGNOSTICS

7

–






E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–30 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0110

–


05B3P–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The intake air temperature sensor is built into the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature, the greater the thermistor resistance value, and the higher the intake air temperature, the lower the thermistor resistance value (See fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from the terminal THA via resistor R. That is, the resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve driveability during cold engine operation.

(fig. 1) 30 20 10

Resistance k

5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) FI4741

DTC No. P0110

DTC Detecting Condition Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit

Trouble Area Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit Intake air temp. sensor (built into mass air flow meter) ECM

If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0110”, it enters the fail–safe mode in which the intake air temperature is assumed to be 20 C (68 F). HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0110”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 C (284 F) or more

Short circuit


05–31 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM A6 Intake Air Temp. Sensor (built in Mass Air Flow Meter)

ECM 5V

THA 4

E2 5

G–R

20 THA E13

BR

28 E2 E13

R

A72925

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: The same as actual intake air temperature Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40 C (–40 F)

A

140 C (284 F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C


05–32 DIAGNOSTICS

2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN HARNESS) (a) (b)

ECM

Mass Air flow meter

(c) (d)


A75743


THA

E2


A54396

OK


NG

3


Mass Air flow meter

(a) (b)

ECM

A75742



E13

THA

E2 ECM Connector

NG A18294


OK REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–33 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN HARNESS) (a) (b) (c)

ECM

Mass Air flow meter

A75766

Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –405C (–405F)

OK


NG

5


Mass Air flow meter

ECM


A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–34 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0115

–


05B3Q–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A thermistor is built into the engine coolant temperature sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature. The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as the ones of the intake air temperature sensor. DTC No. P0115


Trouble Area Open or short in Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM

Open or short in water temp. sensor circuit

If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0115”, it enters the fail–safe mode in which the engine coolant temperature is assumed to be 80 C (176 F). HINT: After confirming DTC P0115, use the hand–held tester to confirm the engine coolant temperature in ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 C (284 F) or more

Short circuit


5V

2

B–W

1

BR

19 THW E13

R

28 E2 E13

A72925




05–35 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a) (b) (c)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(WATER TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same as actual engine coolant temperature Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40 C (–40 F)

A

140 C (284 F) or more

B


C

HINT:

If there is an open circuit, the hand–held tester indicates –40C (–40F). If there is a short circuit, the hand–held tester indicates 140C (284F) or more. B

Go to step 4

C


A

2

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN HARNESS) (a)


ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140 C (284 F) or more



NG


OK A76786


05–36 DIAGNOSTICS

3

–




ECM

(b)

A75742

E13

THW

E2


HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140 C (284 F) or more

OK

ECM Connector

A18294

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)

4

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN HARNESS) (a)


ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

OK A75766

NG



05–37 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–




(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40 C (–40 F)

A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–38 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0116

–


05B3R–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Rfer to DTC P0115 on page 05–34 DTC No.

P0116


Trouble Area

When the temperature of engine coolant is –7 C (20 F) with a cold engine, coolant temperature sensor g , and if the engine g value is 20 C (68 F) or less even if it has been 20 min or more since the engine was warmed up. (2 trip detection logic)

Engine g coolant temperature sensor Thermostat

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If different DTCs that are related to a different systems are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open.

1 (a)

READ OUTPUT DTC(BESIDES P0116) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B


GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART

A

2

INSPECT THERMOSTAT (See Page 16–3) NG

REPLACE THERMOSTAT



05–39 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0120

–


05B3S–02

THROTTLE PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION


ECM 5V

VC VTA E2

A58684

DTC No. P0120

The throttle position sensor is mounted in the throttle body and detects the throttle valve opening angle. When the throttle valve is fully closed, a voltage of approximately 0.7 V is applied to terminal VTA of the ECM. The voltage applied to terminal VTA of the ECM increases in proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve and becomes approximately 3.5 to 5.0 V when the throttle valve is fully opened. The ECM judges the vehicle driving conditions from these signals input from terminal VTA, uses them as one of the conditions for deciding the air–fuel ratio correction, power increase correction and fuel–cut control etc.


Trouble Area Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit Throttle position sensor ECM

Condition (a) or (b) continues for more than 5 sec. (a) VTA is less than 0.1 V (b) VTA is greater than 4.9 V

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0120”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the throttle valve opening percentage. Throttle valve opening position expressed as percentage

Trouble Area



0%

0%


Approx. 100 %

Approx. 100 %

E2 circuit open


05–40 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM

T2 Throttle Position Sensor

ECM 5V

VC 1

R–W

18 VC E13

VTA 3

L–W

21 VTA E13

BR

28 E2 E13

E2 2

E1

A79108




05–41 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–



(a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / THROTTLE POS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result:

Released

Accelerator pedal operatuin


Proceed to

0%

A

ReleasedDepressed


B

Approx. 100 %

C

FI7052

B


C

Go to step 4

A

2


T2



Throttle Valve

Resistance

VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2)

2.5 to 5.9 k

VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)


OK


A53154

NG

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k


05–42 DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR) (a) (b)

E13

VC VTA

E2

ECM Connector

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


Throttle valve

Resistance

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

2.5 to 5.9 k

VTA(E13–21) VTA(E13 21) – E2 (E13–28)

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

A65159

(c)


Specified condition


No Continuity

VTA (E13–28) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4


T2



Throttle Valve

Resistance

VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2)

2.5 to 5.9 k

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)


OK


A53154

NG


05–43 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–



E13


VC VTA

E2

Specified condition

VC (T2–1) – VC (E13–18) VTA (T2–3) – VTA (E13–21)

ECM Connector

Continuity y

E2 (T2–2) – E2 (E13–28)

A65159


Wire Harness Side


T2

VTA (T2–3) or VTA (E13–21) – Body ground

1

2


3

VC


A79044

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–44 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0121

–


05B3T–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0120 on page 05–39 HINT: This is the troubleshooting procedure of the throttle position sensor. DTC No.


P0121

After the vehicle speed has exceeded 30 km/h (19 mph) once, and an output value of the throttle position sensor is out of the applicable range, althought the vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 mph). (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open.

1 (a)

ARE THERE ANY DTC BEING OUTPUT(BESIDES P0121) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0121” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B A REPLACE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR



05–45 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0125

–


05C69–01

INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMP. FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The heated oxygen sensor is the planar type. Compared to the conventional type, the sensor element and the heater portions have a narrower overall. The heater can directly conduct its heat to the zirconia element via the alumina, it helps to accerate the sensor activation. To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three – way catalytic converter is used. For the most efficient use of the three – way catalytic converter, the air – fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air – fuel ratio. The heated oxygen sensor has the characteristic whereby its output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This is used to detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and provide the ECM with feedback control the air–fuel ratio. When the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas increases. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the LEAN condition (low voltage, i. e. less than 0.45 V ). When the air–fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas is reduced. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the RICH condition (high voltage, i. e. more than 0.45V). The ECM judges by the voltage output from the heated oxygen sensor whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. If the malfunction of the heated oxygen sensor causes an output of abnomal voltage, the ECM becomes unable to perform accurate air–fuel ratio control. The heated oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), current flows to the heater in order to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection.


Element Exhaust Gas

A

Output Voltage


Cover Air

A


A–A Section

DTC No


P0125

After engine is warmed up, heated oxygen sensor output* does not change when conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continue for at least 1.5 min: *: Output value changes at inside of the ECM only (a) Engine speed: 1,400 rpm or more (b) Vehicle speed: 40 to 100 km/h (25 to 62 mph) (c) Throttle valve is not fully closed (d) 180 sec. or more after starting engine


A66651

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector Gas leakage in exhaust system ECM

05–46 DIAGNOSTICS

–


HINT:

!" ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”.

WIRING DIAGRAM From Terminal 3 of EFI Relay (See Page 05–124) B–W 4 1 EFI No.2


ECM

4 B–W 13 EA1 B–W B–W

28 E13 E2

BR

2 BR 4 E2 1 HT

Y

4 E12 HT1A

B

23 E12 OX1A

2 +B OX 3 BR H7 B–W (*1) 18 IK2 Heated Oxygen 10 IK1 BR Sensor (Bank 1 B–W 3 IH2 Sensor 1) 2 BR P 1 IH2 E2 HT 1 IH2 4 4 B–W B 2 +B OX 3 IH2 H17 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

4 E10 HT1B

P 7 IK2

B

B (*1)

(*1)

(*1)

BR

(*1)

21 E12 OX1B

E J13

D J12 D J12

D J13 D J13

E BR J12

Junction Connector

(*1)

EH *1: Shielded A79067


05–47 DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST by the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor)output. Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %




Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction

OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG

Extremely rich or lean of the actual air–fuel ratio (Injector, fuel pressure, gas leakage in exhaust system, etc.)

05–48 DIAGNOSTICS

–


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: S If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. S Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. S A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. S A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0125” are output, perform the troubleshoot on that DTC before. B


A

2


(a) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature above 75_C (169_F). (b) Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor when the engine rpm is suddenly increased. HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times using the accelerator pedal. Standard: Heated oxygen sensor outputs a RICH signal (0.45 V or more) at least once. OK NG


Go to step 13

05–49 DIAGNOSTICS

–


3


H7

(a) (b) +B

HT

E2


Condition

HT (H7–1) – +B (H7–2)

20_C (68_F)

6 to 9

HT (H7–1) – E2 (H7–4)

No Continuity

OX

Heated Oxygen Sensor

Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor. Standard: (Bank1 Sensor1) Specified condition

Standard: (Bank1 Sensor2) A79112


Condition

Specified condition

HT (H17–1) – +B (H17–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H17–1) – E2 (H17–4)

No Continuity

H17 +B

HT

E2

OX

Heated Oxygen Sensor A73938

NG


OK

4

INSPECT EFI RELAY (See page 10–3) NG

REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

5



EFI No.2 Fuse

Ç Ç

(b)

Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity in the EFI fuse. Standard: Continuity

A79069

NG

OK



05–50 DIAGNOSTICS

6

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM)

E13

E12

(a) (b) (c)

E10

Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. Disconnect the E10, E12 and E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): (Bank1 Sensor1) Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–4)

E2 HT1A OX1A OX1B HT1B ECM Connector A79068

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–23)

Continuity y

E2 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Standard (Check for short): (Bank1 Sensor1) Wire Harness Side

Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (H7–1) or HT1A (E12–4) – Body ground

H7 HT


+B


Standard (Check for open): (Bank1 Sensor2) Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HT (H17–1) – HT1B (E10–4)

OX

OX (H17–3) – OX1B (E12–21)

E2


E2 (H17–4) – E2 (E13–28) A79114

Standard (Check for short): (Bank1 Sensor2) Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (H17–1) or HT1B (E10–4) – Body ground

Wire Harness Side


H17 HT

Continuity y


+B

OX E2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector A73939

OK


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–51 DIAGNOSTICS

7

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) (a) (b)


(c) (d) EFI Relay

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/BNo.4. Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A66053


Specified condition


Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Engine Room R/B No.4 1 2 EFI No.2 Fuse

Ç


Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or EFI No.2 fuse (1) – Body ground

No continuity


Specified condition

EFI No.2 fuse (2) – +B (H7–2)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): (Bank1 Sensor1)

A79070

HT

No continuity


Specified condition

EFI No.2 fuse (2) – +B (H17–2)

Continuity


+B

OX

Specified condition

Standard (Check for open): (Bank1 Sensor2)


Symbols (Terminal No.) EFI No.2 fuse (2) or +B (H7–2) – Body ground


Specified condition

EFI No.2 fuse (2) or +B (H17–2) – Body ground

No continuity

E2


A79114

Wire Harness Side H17 HT

+B

OX E2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector

OK


A73939

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–52 DIAGNOSTICS

8

–




OK

9 (a)

CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM Check for vacuum leaks in air induction system. NG


OK

10 (a)

CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See page 11–5) Check the fuel pressure (high or low pressure). NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM

OK

11

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY(INJECTION AND VOLUME) (See page 11–8) NG


OK

12




13


GO


EXHAUST

GAS

05–53 DIAGNOSTICS

14 (a)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P0125 IS OUTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0125” is not output again

A


B

B


A

15


YES DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL



05–54 DIAGNOSTICS

–


05B3V–02

DTC

P0130


DTC

P0136




Trouble Area

P0130

Voltage output of heated oxygen sensor remains between 0.40 V and 0.55 V during idling after the engine is warmed up


P0136

Voltage output of heated oxygen sensor remains 0.4 V or more or 0.5 V or less when vehicle is driven at 30 km/h (19 mph) or more after the engine is warmed up (2 trip detection loginc)

Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated Oxygen sensor

HINT:



05–55 DIAGNOSTICS

–



Vihicle speed

Once 40sec. or more

Twice 40sec. or more

(L3)

(L3)

40 km/h (25mph)

12 times 40sec. or more (L3)

Idling(L2)

(L4)

(L4)

60 sec. or more

10 sec.

10 sec.

(L5)

IG SW OFF

(L1)

10 sec.

A58686

1. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (L1) 2. Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check mode (See page 05–5). (L1) 3. Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more. (L2) 4. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more. (L3) 5. Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more. (L4) 6. Perform steps 4 to 5 12 times. (L5) HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHECK ENG will be illuminated on the multi–information display during step 6. NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of the malfunction will not be possible. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from 3 to 6, then perform steps from 3 to 6 again.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” whith the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V


05–56 DIAGNOSTICS

–


NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor) output. Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle has low fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and heated oxygen sensor DTCs will be recorded, and the CHK ENG lamp then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–57 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A

”P0130 and/or P0136” and other DTCs are output

B



A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor during idling. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).

P18349

OK

Go to step 11

NG

3

INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR(HEATER RESISTANCE) (See page 05–45) NG


OK

4


OK


REPLACE EFI RELAY

05–58 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–


CHECK FUSE(EFI No.2) (See page 05–45) NG


OK

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM) (See page 05–45) NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) (See page 05–45) NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

8 (a)



OK

9 (a)



OK

10




11



05–59 DIAGNOSTICS

12 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B




05–60 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0133

–


05B3W–02



P0133

DTC Detecting Condition Response time for heated oxygen sensor voltage output to change from rich to lean, or from lean to rich, is 1.0 sec. or more during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector ECM

HINT:


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately. 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor) output.


05–61 DIAGNOSTICS



–12.5 %



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %


–12.5 %


Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


+25 %

–12.5 %

Less than 0.4V


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph volatge output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle is lack of fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and DTC P0133 will be set, and the CHK ENG then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.


05–62 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B



A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DURING IDLING) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor during idling. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V, and duration ”t” must exist more than 0.9 sec. (See the following table).

A73686

OK

Go to step 11

NG

3



OK

4


OK


REPLACE EFI RELAY

05–63 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–




OK

6


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

7


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

8 (a)



OK

9 (a)



OK

10




11



05–64 DIAGNOSTICS

12 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

B




05–65 DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0135

OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC

P0141


05C6A–01



Trouble Area

P0135

When the heater operates, heater current exceeds 3.5 A (1 trip detection logic) Heater current is 0.2 A or less when the heater operates (1 trip detection logic)


P0141

When the heater operates, heater current exceeds 2 A (1 trip detection logic) Heater current is 0.2 A or less when the heater operates (1 trip detection logic)





1



OK

2


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

3


OK



05–66 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


INSPECT ECM(HTL OR HTL2 VOLTAGE)

E12

(a) (b)

E10


Specified condition

HT1A (E12–4) – E03 (E12–5)

9 to 14 V

HT1B (E10–4) – E03 (E12–5)

E03 (–)

HT1A (+) HT1B(+) ECM Connector

OK A18294


NG

5




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–67 DIAGNOSTICS

–


05B3Y–02

DTC

P0171

SYSTEM TOO LEAN (FUEL TRIM) (BANK 1)

DTC

P0172

SYSTEM TOO RICH (FUEL TRIM) (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Fuel trim refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection time. Fuel trim includes short–term fuel trim and long–term fuel trim. Short–term fuel trim is the short–term fuel compensation used to maintain the air–fuel ratio at stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, This variance triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the air–fuel ratio is rich, and an increase in the fuel volume if it is lean. Long–term fuel trim is overall fuel compensation carried out long–term to compensate for a continual deviation of the short–term fuel trim from the central value, due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the operating environment. If both the short–term fuel trim and long–term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it is detected as a malfunction and the CHK ENG is illuminated. DTC No.

P0171

P0172


Trouble Area

When air fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on LEAN side (2 trip detection logic)


When air fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on RICH side (2 trip detection logic)


HINT: If the total of the short–term fuel trim value and long–term fuel trim value is within 25 %, the system is functioning normally.



05–68 DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % " rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % " lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor) output. Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %




Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction

OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


05–69 DIAGNOSTICS

–


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.

1 (a)



OK

2



OK

3



OK

4

INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR(RESISTANCE) (See page 10–3) NG


OK

5



REPAIR OR REPLACE

05–70 DIAGNOSTICS

6 (a)

–



CHECK AND REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM

OK

7



EXHAUST

GAS

OK

8

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) (See page 05–54) OK

Go to step 18

NG

9



OK

10


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

11



OK

12


OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–71 DIAGNOSTICS

13

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

14


GO

15


GO

16 (a)


Proceed to

DTC ”P0171 and/or P0172” are not output again

A

DTC ”P0171 and/or P0172” are output again

B

B


A

17



YES DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL (DTCS P0171 AND/OR P0172)

18


GO


05–72 DIAGNOSTICS

19 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

B

Go to step 22

A

20


GO

21 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B


A

22





05–73 DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0300


DTC

P0301


DTC

P0302


DTC

P0303


DTC

P0304


05C6B–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Misfire: The ECM uses the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor to monitor changes in the crankshaft rotation of each cylinder. The ECM counts the number of times from the engine speed change rate, indicating that misfire has occurred. When the misfire rate equals to or exceeds the count, indicating that the engine condition has deteriorated, the CHK ENG is illuminated. If the misfire rate is high enough and the driving conditions causes the catalyst to overheat, the CHK ENG blinks when the misfire occurs. HINT: For any particular 200 revolutions of engine, misfiring which could result in overheating of catalyst is detected. This cause CHK ENG to blink (1 trip detection logic). For any particular 1,000 revolutions of engine, misfiring which could result in a deterioration of emissions is detected. This cause CHK ENG to illuminate (2 trip detection logic). DTC No.

P0300

P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304




Trouble Area Open or short in engine wire Connector connection Vacuum hose connection PCV hose Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature tem erature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing ECM

HINT: When 2 or more codes for a misfiring cylinder are recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code is recorded, it is indicated that the misfires were detected and recorded at different times.


05–74 DIAGNOSTICS

–


Reference: Inspection using an oscilloscope for injector signal waveform. (1) With the engine idling, check the waveforms between terminals #1 – #4 and E1 of the ECM connector. HINT: The correct waveforms are shown below. Injector Signal Waveform

20 V/ Division

20 V/ Division

(Magnification)

GND

GND 50 m sec. / Division (Idling)

1 m sec. / Division (Idling) Infection duration A12490

WIRING DIAGRAM

From Terminal 3 of IG2 Relay (See Page 05–124)

R–B 8 EA1

R–B

ECM I5 Injector No. 1 1 R–B 2

B–R

1 E13 #10

I6 Injector No. 2 1 R–B 2

Y

2 E13 #20

I7 Injector No. 3 R–B 2 1

W

3 E13 #30


B

4 E13 #40

A79071


05–75 DIAGNOSTICS

–


CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Record the DTC and freeze frame data. Use the hand–held tester to set to the check mode (See page 05–5). Read the value on the misfire counter for each cylinder when idling. If the value is displayed on the misfire counter, skip the following procedure of confirmation driving. Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with ENGINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the data list. If you do not have the hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated once. Then repeat the simulation process again.

HINT: In order to memorize the DTC of the misfire, it is necessary to drive around MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the following data list. Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the nomal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and the freeze frame data being erased.

(f) (g)

Engine Speed

Time

Idling


1,000 rpm

4 minutes or more

2,000 rpm


3,000 rpm

1 minute and 30 seconds or more

Check if there is misfire by monitoring the DTC and the freeze frame data, and then record them. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 5 seconds.


If the other DTCs besides misfire are memorized simultaneously, perform the troubleshooting for them first. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If the misfire is not occured when the vehicle is brought to the workshop, it can be confirmed by reproducing the condition of the freeze frame data. After finishing the repair, confirm that there is no misfire (See the confirmation driving pattern). When either of SHORT FT #1 or LONG FT #1 the freeze frame data is over the range of 20%, there is a possibility that the air–fuel ratio is inclining either to ”RICH” (–20% or less) or ”LEAN” (+20% or more). When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80 C (176 F), there is a possibility of misfire only during warming up. In case that the misfire cannot be reproduced, this may be because of the driving with the shortage of fuel, the use of improper fuel, a stain of ignition plug and etc.


05–76 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES MISFIRE DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” are output

A

”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” and other DTCs are output

B



A

2 (a) (b)

CHECK WIRE HARNESS, CONNECTOR AND VACUUM HOSE IN ENGINE ROOM Check the connection of the wire harness and the connector. Check the vacuum hose for disconnection, blockage and break. NG


OK

3


(a) Connect the hand–held teste to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (c) Start the engine. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL/CYL#1 – CYL#4”. (e) Read the number of misfire on the hand–held tester. HINT: When a misfire is not reproduced, be sure to branch below based on the stored DTC. Result: High Misfire Rate Cylinder

Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A


B

B

Go to step 15

A

4

CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 18–1) OK

NG


Go to step 7

05–77 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–


CHANGE NORMAL SPARK PLUG AND CHECK SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 18–1) OK

REPLACE SPARK PLUG

NG

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(IGNITION COIL – ECM) (See page 05–103) OK

REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY (THEN CONFIRM THAT THERE IS NO MISFIRE)


7

INSPECT ECM TERMINAL OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(#1, #2, #3 OR #4 VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13


Specified condition

#10 (E13–1) – E01 (E13–7) #20 (E13–2) – E01 (E13–7)

E01 #40 #30 #20 #10 ECM Connector

#30 (E13–3) – E01 (E13–7) A18294

8 to 14 V

#40 (E13–4) – E01 (E13–7)

OK

Go to step 10

NG

8

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR RESISTANCE OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 11–8) NG

OK



05–78 DIAGNOSTICS

9

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(IG2 RELAY – INJECTOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d)

E13

Disconnect the ECM E13 connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the injector connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

#40 #30 #20 #10 ECM Connector

Specified condition

IG2 Relay (3) – Injector No.1 (I5–2) IG2 Relay (3) – Injector No.2 (I6–2)

A65743

Continuity




Specified condition

IG2 Relay (3) or Injector No.1 (I5–2) – Body ground IG2 Relay (3) or Injector No.2 (I6–2) – Body ground

No continuity


Standard (Check for open):

IG2 Relay


A79064

Specified condition

Injector No.1 (I5–1) – #10 (E13–1) Injector No.2 (I6–1) – #20 (E13–2)


I6

I7

Continuity

Injector No.3 (I7–1) – #30 (E13–3)

I8

Injector No.4 (I8–1) – #40 (E13–4)

Standard (Check for short): 1 2


Specified condition

Injector No.1 (I5–1) or #10 (E13–1) – Body ground Injector No.2 (I6–1) or #20 (E13–2) – Body ground

Injector Connector

No continuity

Injector No.3 (I7–1) or #30 (E13–3) – Body ground A61031

Injector No.4 (I8–1) or #40 (E13–4) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

10

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR INJECTION AND VOLUME OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 11–8) NG


OK

11



REPAIR OR REPLACE

05–79 DIAGNOSTICS

12

–



ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE

OK

13

SWITCH STEP BY NUMBER OF MISFIRE CYLINDER(REFER RESULT OF STEP 4) High Misfire Rate Cylinder

Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A


B

B


A

14

CHECK VALVE TIMING(CHECK FOR LOOSE AND JUMPING TEETH OF TIMING BELT) (See page 14–49) NG

ADJUST VALVE TIMING

OK

15



OK

16 (a) (b) (c)

(d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE AND MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the intake air temperature. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Equivalent to ambient temperature Check the air flow rate. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBS/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Condition


Ignition switch On (do not start engine)

0

Idling

4 to 6


13 to 20

Idling – Running



05–80 DIAGNOSTICS

NG

–



OK

17



OK

18


Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A


B

B

AGAIN GO TO STEP5



05–81 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0325

–


05C6C–01

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Knock sensor is fitted on the cylinder block to detect the engine knocking. This sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, the ignition timing is delayed to suppress it. DTC No. P0325


Trouble Area

No knock sensor signal to the ECM with engine speed 3,000 rpm or more


HINT: If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0325”, it enters the fail–safe mode in which the corrective retarded angle value is set to the maximum value. Reference: Inspection using the oscillascope. (1) Run the engine at 4,000 rpm, check the waveform between terminal KNKL of the ECM connector and body ground. 2.2V HINT: The correct waveform is as shown on the left. (2) Spread the time on the horizontal axis, and confirm that period of the wave is 80 seconds (Normal A05134 mode vibration frequency of knock sensor: 11.7 kHz). HINT: If the vibration frequency in the normal mode is not 11.7 kHz, the sensor is out of order.

WIRING DIAGRAM (Shielded)

K1 Knock Sensor 2 1

ECM

B

2 EB1

B

1 E12 FKN+

W

1 EB1

W

2 E12 FKN–

BR

E J13

D J12

D J13

E J12

Junction Connector

BR EH

A79088


05–82 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (a) (b) E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for short):

FKN+ FKN– ECM Connector

OK


Specified condition

FKN+ (E12–1) – FKN– (E12–2)

No continuity

Go to step 3

A65745

NG

2

INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR (See page 10–3) NG


OK

3


E12


FKN+


FKN–

FKN+ (E12–1) – Knock sensor (K1–2) FKN– (E12–2) – Knock sensor (K1–1)

ECM Connector

A65745

FKN+ (E12–1) or Knock sensor (K1–2) – Body ground FKN– (E12–2) or Knock sensor (K1–1) – Body ground

NG


Continuity


OK

Specified condition

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE


HARNESS

OR

05–83 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


CONFIRM THE MALFUNCTION DISAPPEAR WHEN A GOOD KNOCK SENSOR IS INSTALLED (a)

Change the knock sensor to a new one. (1) Remove the knock sensor. (2) Install a new knock sensor. Torque: 20 Nm (204 kgfcm, 15 ftlbf) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5). Perform the driving test. Read the DTC using the hand–held tester (See page 05–5).

(b) (c) (d) A64029

Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0325” is output

A

”P0325” is not output

B

B A CHECK AND REPLACE ECM(See page 01–32)



05–84 DIAGNOSTICS

–


05B41–03

DTC

P0335

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

DTC

P1335

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (DURING ENGINE RUNNING)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pick up coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) has 34 teeth and is installed to the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signals, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signals. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0335

No crankshaft position sensor signal to the ECM during cranking Open in NE– circuit


P1335

If conditions from (a) through (c) are met: (a) NE greater than 1,000 rpm (b) NE signal is not detected for over 0.05 sec. (c) Not during cranking


CH1 (G2) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND

A63955



Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2 – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


05–85 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM (Shielded) C1 Camshaft Position Sensor 1

26 E13 G2

W

2

R

C6 (Shielded) Crankshaft Position Sensor 2

R

1

R

34 E13 NE– 27 E13 NE+

G

E E

E


BR

EH

A79089


Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Perform troubleshooting on ”DTC P0335” first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the following mechanical system.


05–86 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–


INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(CHECK RESISTANCE) (a)

C6


Measure the resistance between the terminals of the crankshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 985 to 1,600 (Cold) 1,265 to 1,890 (Hot) NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG


OK

2




NE+

NE–

NE+ (C6–1) – NE+ (E13–27) NE– (C6–2) – NE– (E13–34)

Crankshaft Position Sensor Connector



A66132

Symbols (Terminal No.) NE+ (C6–1) or NE+ (E13–27) – Body ground NE– (C6–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground


E13 NE+

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION Check the crankshaft position sensor installation . NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

HARNESS

AND

05–87 DIAGNOSTICS

4 (a) (b)

–


INSPECT CRANKSHAFT(TEETH OF SIGNAL PLATE) Remove the oil pump assembly. (See page 17–3) Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG



REPAIR OR REPLACE CRANKSHAFT

05–88 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0340

–


05B42–03

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor (G2 signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G2 signal plate has 3 teeth on its outer circumference and is installed on the camshaft timing pulley. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil changes, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) has 34 teeth and is installed to the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signals, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signals. DTC No.

P0340


Trouble Area

No camshaft position sensor signal to the ECM during cranking Open in NE– circuit

CH1 (G2) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND



Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2 – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


A63955

WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0335 on page05–84.



05–89 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–


INSPECT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(CHECK RESISTANCE) (a)

C1


Measure the resistance between the terminals of the camshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 1,630 to 2,740 (Cold) 2,065 to 3,225 (Hot) NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG


OK

2




G– G+ Camshaft Position Sensor Connector

G– (C1–2) – NE– (E13–34)



A66132

Symbols (Terminal No.) G+ (C1–1) or G2+ (E13–26) – Body ground G– (C1–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground


E13 G2

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION Check the camshaft position sensor installation. NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

HARNESS

AND

05–90 DIAGNOSTICS

4 (a)

–





REPAIR OR REPLACE CAMSHAFT

05–91 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0420

–


05B43–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM compares the 2 waveforms of the heated oxygen sensors located before and after the catalyst to determine whether or not the catalyst performance has deteriorated. Air–fuel ratio feedback compensation keeps the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor in front of the catalyst alternates between back and forth, from rich to lean. If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor behind the catalyst switches back and forth between rich and lean much more slowly than the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor in front of the catalyst. When both waveforms change at a similar rate, it indicates that the catalyst performance has deteriorated. Waveform of heated oxygen Sensor in front of Catalyst

Normal Catalyst

Waveform of Heated Oxygen Sensor behind Catalyst

A58692

DTC No.

P0420

DTC Detecting Condition After engine and catalyst are warmed up, and while vehicle is driven within set vehicle and engine speed range, waveforms of heated oxygen sensors have same amplitude (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter ECM

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN Engine Speed (c)

2,500 – 3,000 rpm

(b)

Idling IG SW OFF

(d)

(a)

Warmed up

3 min.

Check

Time A58693


05–92 DIAGNOSTICS

(a)

–


Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3, or connect the probe of the oscilloscope between terminals HT1A, HT1B, OX1A, OX1B and E1 of the ECM connector. Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched OFF until the engine coolant temperature is stable. Run the engine at 2,500 to 3,000 rpm for about 3 min. After confirming that the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1 (OX)) which oscillates around 0.5 V during feedback to the ECM, check the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2 (OX)).

(b)

(c) (d)

HINT: OX Signal Waveform (Oscilloscope)

If there is a malfunction in the system, the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2 (OX)) is similar to the wave from of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1 (OX)) snown in the diagram on the left. There are some cases that, even though a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG may not be illuminated.

1.0 V 0V 200 msec. /Division

A58694


1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B


A



05–93 DIAGNOSTICS

2

–



REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

3

INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR(BANK 1 SENSOR 1) (See Page 12–3) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HEATED SENSOR

OXYGEN

OK

4



OK REPLACE THREE–WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER


OXYGEN

05–94 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0443

–


05C6D–01

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION To reduce HC emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through the charcoal canister to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders. The ECM changes the duty signal to the VSV for EVAP so that the intake quantity of HC emissions becomse properly for the driving conditions (engine load, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is warmed up. DTC No. P0443


Trouble Area Open or short in VSV for EVAP circuit VSV for EVAP ECM

Proper response to ECM command does not occur (1 trip detection logic)

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

From Terminal 3 of B–W EFI Relay (See Page 05–124)

Engine Room R/B No.4 EFI No.2 4

4 1

2

B–W

13 EA1

V5 VSV for EVAP 12 B–W 1 2 W–G E13 EVP1

A79073



05–95 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSV FOR EVAP) (a) (b) (c) (d) E

E

F

F

VSV is ON

VSV is OFF

Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the hand–held tester. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VSV for EVAP. Start the engine. When the VSV for EVAP is operated by the hand–held tester, apply the disconnected hose to your finger to check the suction. Result: VSV is ON: Disconnected port sucks. VSV is OFF: Disconnected port does not suck.

A79090

OK


NG

2

INSPECT ECM(CHECK VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

E01 (–)


Specified condition

EVP1 (E13–12) – E01 (E13–7)

8 to 14 V

EVP1 (+) ECM Connector

A18294

OK


NG

3

INSPECT VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1 NG

REPLACE VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1

OK

4


OK



05–96 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–



E13

EVP1

ECM Connector

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the VSV connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VSV (V5–2) – EVP1 (E13–12)

Continuity



Specified condition

VSV (V5–2) or EVP1 (E13–12) – Body ground

No continuity


Vacuum Switching Valve Connector

OK


A52933

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–97 DIAGNOSTICS

6

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – VSV FOR EVAP) (a) (b)


(c) (d) EFI Relay

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the VSV connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) EFI relay (3) – EFI No.2 fuse (1)

A66053

EFI No.2 fuse (2) – VSV (V5–1)

2 EFI No.2 Fuse


Ç

Continuity



Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or EFI No.2 fuse (1) – Body ground EFI No.2 fuse (2) or VSV (V5–1) – Body ground





NG

A52933

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–98 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0500

–


05B45–02

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION


4–Pulse

From Speed Sensor

Skid Control ECU

4–Pulse

ECM

Combination Meter

A79413

DTC No.

P0500


Trouble Area

During the vehicle is being driven, no vehicle speed sensor signal to the ECM (1 trip detection logic: A/T) (2 trip detection logic: M/T)


WIRING DIAGRAM C11 Combination Meter 18

ECM Junction Connector V–W

H H J10 J20 *1 *2

H H J10 J20 *1 *2

17 E10 SPD

V–W

*1: LHD *2: RHD A79092


05–99 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1

CHECK OPERATION OF SPEEDOMETER(SPEEDOMETER OPERATION)


CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(CHECK VOLTAGE) E1 (–) E12

(a) (b) (c) (d)

SPD (+) E10

ECM Connector


Specified condition

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)


A18294


4.5–5.5V

0V


Turn Wheel

NG

A62954



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

P0505

–


05B46–02

IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Throttle Valve

The rotary solenoid type of the idle speed control (ISC) valve is located under the throttle body and intake air bypassing the throttle valve is directed to the ISC valve through the passage. In this way the intake air volume bypassing the throttle valve is regulated, controls the engine speed. The ECM operates the ISC valve only to perform idle–up and provide feedback for the target idling speed.

Intake Air Chamber


ECM Valve


DTC No.

P0505


Trouble Area Open or short in ISC valve circuit ISC valve is stuck or closed PCV hose A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM




12 B–R 2 VISC EA1

DUTY

GND

ECM 1

3

5 E13 RSD

G–R

W–B

W–B

7 E13 E01

EG

A79101

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

–




NG

2



1

2

3

VISC (+)



Specified condition

VISC (I10–2) – GND (I10–3)

9 to 14 V

NG

GND (–)

OK


A66264

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–



E13


RSD

DUTY (I10–1) – RSD (E13–5)

E01

GND (I10–3) – E01 (E13–7)

ECM Connector

A65743

DUTY

2

Continuity



1

Specified condition


Specified condition


No continuity

3

GND A66264

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4






–


DTC

P1300

IGNITER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (NO.1)

DTC

P1305


DTC

P1310


DTC

P1315


05C6E–01


If DTC P1300 is displayed, check No.1 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P1305 is displayed, check No.2 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P1310 is displayed, check No.3 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P1315 is displayed, check No.4 ignition coil with igniter circuit. A Direct Ignition System (DIS) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduces the high–voltage loss, and enhances overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor. The DIS is a 1–cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1–cylinder ignition system, the spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary coil. High voltage generated in the secondary coil is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug passes through from the center electrode to the ground electrode. The ECM determines ignition timing and outputs the ignition (IGT) signals of each cylinder. Based on IGT signals, the power transistors cut off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil. At the same time, the igniter also sends an ignition confirmation (IGF) signal as a fail–safe measurement to the ECM.



ECM

–


From Battery Igniter

Ignition Coil Assy No. 1


No. 1 Spark Plug

IGF Ignition Coil


IGT2


No. 2 Spark Plug

IGT3


No. 3 Spark Plug

IGT4


No. 4 Spark Plug

Various Sensor

TAC

To Tachometer

A73818

DTC No. P1300 P1305 P1310 P1315


No IGF signal to the ECM while engine is running


Trouble Area Ignition system Open or short in IGF or IGT1 circuit from No. 1 ignition coil with igniter to ECM No.1 – No.4 ignition coil with igniter ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM From Terminal 3 of IG2 Relay (See Page 05–124)

R–B ECM 8 EA1 R–B

I1 Ignition Coil and 1 Igniter No.1

R–B

3

8 E13 IGT1

R–W

R–B W–B 4

2 W–R

1

3

W–B 4

I2 Ignition Coil and Igniter No.2 2

B–R

P

9 E13 IGT2

W–R

R–B

W–R 1

3

W–B 4


B–R W–B

LG–B

10 E13 IGT3

W–R

R–B W–R

R–B W–B

N2 Noise 1 Filter

1

3

W–B 4


L–Y

W–R

W–R

11 E13 IGT4 23 E13 IGF

W–B EH


A79093


–



1

PERFORM SIMULATION TEST

(a) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5) (b) Shuffle arrangement of the ighition coil and igniters. NOTICE: Do not shuffle the connectors. (c) Perform the simulation test. (d) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5) Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B

B

REPLACE IGNITION COIL

A

2

INSPECT ECM(IGT1, IGT2, IGT3, IGT4 AND IGF SIGNAL) (a) (b)

E1

IGF E13

E12

Inspection using the oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform between terminals IGT1 to IGT4 and E1, and IGF1 and E1 of the ECM connector. Standard: Item

IGT4 IGT3 IGT2 IGT1 ECM Connector

Contents

Terminal A18294

CH1: IGT1, IGT2, IGT3, IGT4 – E1 CH2: IGF – E1

Equipment Set

2V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


HINT: Correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. CH1 (IGT1 – 4)

GND

CH2 (IGF1)

GND

NG A63956

OK




3

–


INSPECT IGNITION COIL(POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)


I2

I3

I4

Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

GND (I1–4) – Body ground GND (I2–4) – Body ground


Continuity


A54393

(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the ignition coil and igniter connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (I1–1) – GND (4) +B (I2–1) – GND (4) +B (I3–1) – GND (4)

9 to 14 V

+B (I4–1) – GND (4)

NG

Go to step 5

OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – IGNITION COIL)

IGT2

HINT: The procedure below is for No.1 cylinder. If a malfunction is found on other cylinders, check the circuit for the cylinder with referring to this procedure. (a) Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. (b) Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. (c) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

IGT1

E13


Specified condition

IGT (I1–3) – IGT1 (E13–8)

IGF


IGT (I2–3) – IGT2 (E13–9) A65743

IGT (I3–3) – IGT3 (E13–10) IGT (I4–3) – IGT4 (E13–11) IGF (I1–2) – IGF (E13–23)


I2

I3

IGF (I2–2) – IGF (E13–23)

I4


IGF IGT Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

A54393

Continuity


–



Specified condition

IGT (I1–3) or IGT1 (E13–8) – Body ground IGT (I2–3) or IGT2 (E13–9) – Body ground IGT (I3–3) or IGT3 (E13–10) – Body ground IGT (I4–3) or IGT4 (E13–11) – Body ground IGF (I1–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground

No continuity

IGF (I2–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground IGF (I3–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground IGF (I4–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground

NG

REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE IGNITION COIL

5



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


6


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – IGNITION COIL) (a) (b) (c)


–

I2

I3

I4

Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (I1–1) – IG2 relay (3)



A54393

Continuity

+B (I4–1) – IG2 relay (3)




Specified condition


No continuity


IG2 Relay A66053

A79064

NG


OK

7

CHECK FUSE(IGN FUSE) (See page 05–124) NG

OK




8

–




IG2



IG2 (I13–6) – IGN fuse (1)

A66267




Driver Side J/B 1


2



IGN Fuse

A79103


IG2 Relay A66053

A79064

NG





DTC

P1346

–


0506C–04

VVT SENSOR/CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0335 on page 05–84 DTC No. P1346

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and camshaft position sensor signal (2 trip detection logic)


WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0335 on page 05–84

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1






DTC

P1349

–


05C6F–01

VVT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION VVT system controls the intake valve timing to proper timing in response to driving condition. The ECM controls the oil control valve (OCV) to make the intake valve timing properly, oil pressure regulated by the OCV is supplied to the valiable valve timing (VVT) controller, and then the VVT controller changes relative position between the camshaft and the crankshaft. DTC No.

P1349


Trouble Area

Condition (a) or (b) continues with engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm after the engine is warmed up (a) Valve timing does not change from the current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


W–G

2

Y–B

15 E13 OCV+ 14 E13 OCV–

A63991


1


OK




2 (a) (b) (c)

–


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATE OF OCV) Start the engine and warm it up. Connect the hand–held tester and select VVT from the ACTIVE TEST menu. Check the engine speed while operating the OCV by the hand–held tester. OCV is OFF: Normal engine speed OCV is ON: Rough idle or engine stall

HINT: DTC P1349 is also output when a foreign object is detected in some parts of the system in engine oil, and then the system returns to normal in a short time. There is also no problem on the VVT as the oil filter should catch the foreign object in engine oil. OK

VVT SYSTEM OK

NG

3


E13

Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the waveform between terminals OCV+ and OCV– of the E13 ECM connector.

OCV+ OCV– ECM Connector

A18294

HINT:


(A)

(A)

The correct waveform is as shown on the left. The waveform frequency (A) becomes longer as the engine speed becomes higher.

GND

1 m sec./Division

NG A58701


OK

4

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See page14–64) NG

OK


REPLACE VVT CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY, AND THEN GO TO NEXT STEP


5

–



REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY, AND THEN GO TO NEXT STEP

OK

6

CHECK OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER(CHECK BLOCKAGE) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER

OK

7 (a) (b) (c)

PERFORM SIMULATION TEST(DTC CHECK) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5). Perform the simulation test. Check whether or not DTC P1349 is stored (See page 05–5). Result: DTC

Proceed to

”P1349” is output.

A

”P1349” is not output.

B

HINT: DTC P1349 is also output when a foreign object is detected in some parts of the system in engine oil, and then the system returns to normal in a short time. There is also no problem on the VVT as the oil filter should catch the foreign object in the engine oil. B A CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


VVT SYSTEM OK


DTC

P1520

–


05B48–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This signal is used to detect that the brakes have been applied. The STP signal voltage is the same as the one supplied to the stop lights. The STP signal is used mainly to control the fuel cut–off engine speed (The fuel cut–off engine speed is reduced slightly when the vehicle is braking.). DTC No.

P1520

DTC Detecting Condition Condition (a), (b) and (c) continue for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) Ignition switch ON (b) Brake pedal released (c) STP signal is OFF when the STP signal is OFF


Trouble Area Open or short in stop light switch signal circuit Stop light switch ECM


–



G–W (*1)

1 IR1

G–W (*2)

G–W (*2)

1

2 DA

ECM

10 DC

19 E10 STP

G–W

1 DM

G–W


G–W (*4, *5) C J30

G–W (*4, *5)

C J30

C J30

2

G–W (*4, *5)

1 R–W (*1)

11 IE3

R–W (*2) G–W (*3)

2 IR1 2

R–W (*1)

R–W (*2)

DA 22




N8 Noise Filter


1 BD1 (*4) 3 BF1 (*5)

G–W


L (*4)


B–G W–B (*3)

1 4D 2

1 1 4B


W–B (*4, *5)

W–B

3 BG1

B–G FL MAIN

W–B (*5)

W–B (*3)

W–B (*5)

L (*5)

4 BG1 W–B (*4) W–B (*5)

2 BD1 (*4) 4 BF1 (*5)

W–B

G–W (*5)

W–B (*4) A J33 2 BE1 W–B (*4)


W–B Battery



BS

BT

BX

A79094


–



1 (a)



OK

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed the hand–held tester. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Read the STP signal on the hand–held tester. Result: Brake Pedal

STP Signal

Depressed

ON

Released

OFF

OK NG




3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(ECM – STOP LIGHT SWITCH) (a) (b) (c)

E10

Disconnect the stop light switch connector. Disconnect the the E10 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

STP ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


Stop Light Switch Connector A56986

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P1600

–


05B49–02

ECM BATT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is applied to terminal BATT of the ECM even the ignition switch is OFF for the DTC memory and air–fuel ratio adaptive control value memory, etc. DTC No.


P1600

Trouble Area Open in back up power source circuit ECM

Open in back up power source circuit

HINT: If DTC P1600 is displayed, the ECM does not store other DTCs.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 1 1A

B–G

ECM

EFI 1

2

1

B–Y

7 7 IE3 IO1 *1 *2

B–Y

3 E9 BATT

1 4A Engine Room J/B No.4 BR

1 4B

7 E12 E1

B–G FL MAIN

Battery EH

*1: LHD *2: RHD A79095



1

–




EFI Fuse


NG A66054


OK

2


E9

E12


(a) (b)


Specified condition

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

BATT (+) A18294

OK

NG




3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(EFI FUSE – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E9

BATT ECM Connector

Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. Disconnect the ECM E9 connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


EFI Fuse 2 1

A79078

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (BATTERY – EFI FUSE)


HARNESS

OR


DTC

P1656

–


05B4A–02

OCV CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1)




Open or short in oil control valve (OCV) circuit



1 (a) (b) (c)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OCV OPERATION) Start the engine and warm it up. Connect the hand–held tester and select the VVT on the ACTIVE TEST menu. Check the engine speed while operating the OCV by using the hand–held tester. Result: VVT system is OFF (OCV is OFF): Normal engine speed VVT system is ON (OCV is ON): Rough idle or engine stalled OK


NG

2



OK

3

INSPECT ECM(CHECK VOLTAGE) (See page 05–20) NG

OK




4

–



E13


Specified condition

Oil control valve (C2–1) – OCV+ (E13–14)


Continuity

Oil control valve (C2–2) – OCV– (E13–15)

A65743


Wire Harness Side

Specified condition

Oil control valve (C2–1) or OCV+ (E13–14) – Body ground

C2

Oil control valve (C2–2) or OCV– (E13–15) – Body ground


A53155

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

No continuity

HARNESS

OR

05–5 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 05C66–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI0534


Hand–Held Tester

A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–16). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pend-

05–6 DIAGNOSTICS

–


ing fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine condition when a misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304) or fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171) or other malfunction (first malfunction only), is detected. Because freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. If no instructions are given, troubleshoot according to the following priorities. (1) DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171) and misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304). (2) Fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171). (3) Misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304).

(b)

FI0534


Description for M–OBD (Except European spec.) When troubleshoot Multiplex OBD (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand– held tester to the vehicle, and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM.

05–7 DIAGNOSTICS

Hand–Held Tester


The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in drive system components. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–16). When the malfunction does not reoccur, the CHK ENG is indicated until the ignition switch is turned off, and then the CHK ENG is not indicated when the ignition switch is turned on but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle or read the DTC which is indicated on the multi information display when TC and CG terminals on the DLC3 are connected. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (for operating instructions, see the instruction book.) The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip).

A76859


–

05–8 DIAGNOSTICS

–

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516


Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, water temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro–OBD)/ ISO 14230(M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 A04550

Terminal No.


Condition

7


During transmission

4


Always

16


Always

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still not possible is when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Deparment listed in the tool’s instruction manual. (d) Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (e)

FI0534



HINT: If the CHK ENG lamp is not illuminated, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.

05–9 DIAGNOSTICS

–


2. DTC CHECK (Nomal Mode) : NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.

(a)

Hand–Held Tester

A76859

(b)

(c)

Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down. The hand–held tester’s instruction book. (4) See page 05–16 to confirm the details of the DTCs. Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds. DTC CHECK (Check Mode):

3. HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check (test) mode. (a) Proceduce for check mode using hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions Battery positive voltage 11V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”P” or ”N” position. Air conditioning switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF.


05–10 DIAGNOSTICS

Hand–Held Tester

–


(3) (4)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch and the hand–held tester main switch ON.

(5)


A76859



NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG lamp goes out after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the nomal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTCs, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (c) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds.

05–11 DIAGNOSTICS

–





P0100

Ignition timing is fixed at


P0110



P0115

Water temperature is fixed at 80


P0120

VTA is fixed at 0

The following condition must be repeated at least 2 times consecutively when closed throttle position switch is OFF: VTA greater than 0.1 V and less than 0.95 V

P0135 P0141

The heater circuit in which an abnormality is detected is turned off

Ignition switch OFF

P0325


Ignition switch OFF

P1300 P1305 P1310 P1315

Fuel cut


P1656

It cut electrically the circuit in which an abnormality is detected


5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s engine ECM in check (test) mode, 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of 2 trip detection logic, and sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTC. (See step 3.) (b) Set the check (test) mode. (See step 3.) (c) Perform a simulation test. (See page 01–32) (d) Check the connector and terminal. (See page 01–32) (e) Wiggle the harness and the connector. (See page 01–32) 6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if the measured values are a little different from those listed here. Do not decide whether a part is faulty or not solely according to the ”Normal Condition” here. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”.


05–12 DIAGNOSTICS

Hand–held tester display


–


Normal Condition*1

Diagnostic Note

FUEL SYS #1

Fuel System Bank 1 OPEN: Air–fuel ratio feedback stopped CLOSED: Air–fuel ratio feedback operating

Idling after warming up: CLOSED

'

CALC LOAD

Calculator Load: Current intake air volume as a proportion of max. intake air volume

Idling: 3.3 to 26.7 % Runnig without load (2,500rpm): 12.0 to 14.7 %

'

COOLANT TEMP



INTAKE AIR



If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”, _C” sensor circuit is open or shorted.

SHORT FT #1

Short–term Fuel Trim Bank 1

0 20%

'

LONG FT #1

Long–term Fuel Trim Bank 1

0 20%

'

Air flow rate from mass air flow Meter

Idling: M/T 0.54 to 4.33 gm/sec. A/T 0.58 to 4.67 gm/sec. Running without load (2,500 rpm): 3.33 to 9.17 gm/sec.

'

ENGINE SPD

Engine Speed

Idling: 600 to 700 rpm

'

VEHICLE SPD

Vehicle Speed


IGN ADVANCE

Ignition Advance: Ignition Timing of Cylinder No. 1


THROTTLE POS

Voltage Output of Throttle Position Sensor Calculated as a percentage: 0 V " 0%, 5 V " 100%

Throttle Fully Closed: 6 to 16 % Throttle Fully Open: 64 to 98 %

O2S B1, S1

Voltage Output of Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 1, Sensor 1


O2FT B1, S1

Heated Oxygen Sensor Fuel Trim Bank 1, Sensor 1 (Same as SHORT FT #1)

MAF/AFM

0 20 %

Speed indicated on speedmeter. '

Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

' '

Fuel injection time for cylinder No.1


'

Intake Air Control Valve duty ratio Opening ratio rotary solenoid type ISC valve

Idling: 20 to 40 %

'

Starter Signal

Cranking: ON

'

CTP SW

Closed Throttle Position Switch Signal

Cranking: ON

'

A/C SIG

A/C Switch Signal

A/C ON: ON

'

Stop Light Switch Signal

Stop light switch ON: ON

'

Fuel Cut Idle: Fuel cut when throttle valve fully closed, during deceleration


'

Neutral start switch signal

P or N position: ON

'

Fuel Cut TAU: Fuel cut during very light load


'

INJECTOR

ISC DUTY RATIO STARTER SIG

STOP LIGHT SW *2 FC IDL PNP SW/NSW *2 FC TAU CYL#1, CYL#2, CYL#3, CYL#4

Abnormal revolution variation for each cylinder

0%

'

FUEL PUMP

Fuel Pump Signal

Idling: ON

'

EVAP (PURGE) VSV

EVAP VSV Signal

VSV operation: Above 30 %

'


05–13 DIAGNOSTICS

–


*1:

If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is in the N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. *2: A/T only 7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST”. (g) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOL

A/F CONTROL

Test Details

Diagnostic Note




The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph voltage outputs of the heated oxygen sensor. To display the graph indication, select O2S B1 S1 and press button ”F4” after selecting ”ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA”.

ISC DUTY RATIO

[Test Details] Control the ISC duty ratio 0 to 90 % [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3,000 rpm or less Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph) Battery voltage: 8.5 V or more

'

EVAP VSV (ALONE)


'


'


'


'

FUEL PUMP / SPD

TC/TE1

FC IDL PROHBT


05–14 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1



NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V


OK

2



NG

GO TO STEP 6

OK

3


OK

4

CHECK AIR FILTER


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

5


OK



05–15 DIAGNOSTICS

6

–




OK

7





05–22 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505L–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When the malfunction code is not confirmed in the diagnostic trouble code check and the problem still can not be confirmed in the basic inspection, proceed to this problem symptoms tables and troubleshoot according to the numbered order given below. Symptom

Suspect Area


1. Starter and starter relay 2. Neutral start switch circuit*

See page 19–1


1. 2. 3. 4.

ECM power source circuit Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit Fuel pump control circuit Fuel system

05–124 05–103 05–131 11–1


1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit 3. Fuel system

05–131 05–103 11–1


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Starter signal circuit ISC valve circuit Fuel pump control circuit Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) Spark plug Compression Fuel system

05–135 05–100 05–131 05–103 18–3


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Starter signal circuit ISC valve circuit Fuel pump control circuit Fuel system Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) Spark plug

05–135 05–100 05–131 11–1 05–103 18–3


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.


05–135 05–100 05–131 11–1 05–103 18–3


1. ISC valve circuit

05–100


1. ISC valve circuit 2. ECM power source circuit 3. Neutral start switch circuit*

05–100 05–124


1. 2. 3. 4.

05–100 05–131 11–1


1. ISC valve circuit 2. ECM power source circuit 3. Fuel pump control circuit

05–100 05–124 05–131



05–100 05–124 05–131

Hesitation/Poor acceleration (Poor drivability)

1. Fuel system 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit

11–1 05–131 05–103

Muffler explosion, after fire (Poor drivability)

1. Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit 2. Spark plug 3. Fuel system

05–103 18–3 11–1

Surging (Poor drivability)

1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. Spark plug 3. Fuel system

05–131 18–3 11–1


ISC valve circuit Neutral start switch circuit* Fuel pump control circuit Fuel system

14–1 11–1

05–23 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. ISC valve circuit

05–131 05–100


1. Injector circuit 2. ISC valve circuit 3. ECM

11–8 05–100 05–20

Engine stall (When shifting from N to D)

1. Neutral start switch circuit 2. ISC valve circuit

05–100

*: A/T only.



–


05C6I–01




–



5

B–Y 6

B–R

*1: LHD *2: RHD *3: A/T *4: M/T

1 ST

Fuse Block

2 B–R

1 1

6 B–W

IE4 (*1) IP1 (*2)

B J13

B J12

B–R

B–W (*3) 9

B–R 1


B–Y

5


3

2

A J12

B–Y

9 E12 STA

Junction Connector

5

5

W–B

B

2 DJ 7

Driver Side J/B

IK1

B–G FL MAIN B–R

6 B–Y (*3)

1


1 4B

A J12

B–Y (*4)

5

5

B–G 1 4A

C J13


B

1 1 S5

9 DA

S4

Battery

Stater

W–B IJ

A79100



–



1 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK


NG

2


E12

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD





Specified condition


No continuity


NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6K–01



13

W–L (LHD)

4

17 DB

W–L

B

B

(LHD)

D W–L J21 (RHD) CG

Driver Side J/B

J8 J/C

B W–L J20 (RHD)

3 DC

ECM 20 E9 TC

W–L

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (RHD)

6 CA

W–B (RHD)

J16 J/C W–B A (LHD)

A

W–B (LHD)

IP

IO

A81014



1


(a) (b)

TC (+)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


Specified condition

9 10111213141516

TC (13) – CG (4)

9 to 14 V

DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Go to step 3


2

–



TC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


9 10111213141516 DLC3


Specified condition

TC (13) – TC (E9–20)

Continuity


DLC3 A04550


Specified condition


No continuity

E9

TC ECM Connector

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DLC3 – BODY GROUND)

3


09843–18040 CG

(a) (b)

TC

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516


DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NO PROBLEM


NG


05–20 DIAGNOSTICS

–


TERMINALS OF ECM

E13

E12

E10

E9

A66714


Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

BATT (E9 – 3) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–Y – BR

Always

8 to 14

FC (E9 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–Y – BR

IG switch ON

8 to 14

FC (E9 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–Y – BR

Idling

W (E9 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W – BR

Idling

W (E9 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W – BR

IG switch ON

Below 3.5

+B (E9 – 1) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–R – BR

IG switch ON

8 to 14

STP (E10 – 19) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–W – BR

IG switch ON, brake pedal depressed

8 to 14

STP (E10 – 19) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–W – BR

IG switch ON, brake pedal released

F/PS (E9 – 14) – E1 (E12 – 7)

LG–B – BR

IG switch ON

STA (E12 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–Y – BR

Cranking

HT1B (E10 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

P – W–B

Idling

HT1B (E10 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

P – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

EMPS (E12 – 29) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR – BR

IG switch ON

8 to 14

SPD (E10 – 17) – E1 (E12 – 7)

V–W – BR

OX1B (E12 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B – BR

Below 1.5 8 to 14

Below 1.5 Pulse generation 5.5 or more Below 3.0



Maintain engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 2 min. after warning up

Pulse generation (See page 05–91) Pulse generation

TACH (E9 – 5) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR–R – BR

Idling

VC (E13 – 18) – E2 (E13 – 28)

R–W – BR

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

HT1A (E12 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

Y – W–B

Idling

Below 3.0

HT1A (E12 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

Y – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

EVP1 (E13 – 12) – E01 (E13 – 7)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

VG (E12 – 24) – EVG (E12 – 32)

G – L–Y


OX1A (E12 – 23) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B – BR


THW (E13 – 19) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B–W – BR

G2 (E13 – 26) – NE– (E13 – 34) NE+ (E13 – 27) – NE– (E13 – 34)


1.1 to 1.5 Pulse generation (See page 05–91) 0.2 to 1.0

W–R

Idling


G–R

Idling


THA (E13 – 20) – E2 (E13 – 28) G–R – BR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


0.5 to 3.4

05–21 DIAGNOSTICS VTA (E13 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28) VTA (E13 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28) #10 (E13 – 1) – E01 (E13 – 7)

–


L–W – BR


0.3 to 1.0

L–W – BR


3.2 to 4.9

B–R – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

#20 (E13 – 2) – E01 (E13 – 7)

Y – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

#30 (E13 – 3) – E01 (E13 – 7)

W – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

#40 (E13 – 4) – E01 (E13 – 7)

B – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

IGT1 (E13 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7)

R–W – BR

Idling


IGT2 (E13 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

P – BR

Idling


IGT3 (E13 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

LG–B – BR

Idling


IGT4 (E13 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

L–Y – BR

Idling


IGF (E13 – 23) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–R – BR

IG switch ON

IGF (E13 – 23) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–R – BR

RSO (E13 – 5) – E01 (E13 – 7)

G–R – W–B

Idling

4.5 to 5.5 Pulse generation (See page 05–103)

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON


B–W

Idling


ELS2 (E9 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

Defoger switch ON

ELS2 (E9 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

IG switch ON

Below 3.0

MREL (E9 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IGSW (E9 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

TC (E9 – 20) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–L – BR

IG switch ON

SIL (E9 – 18) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–G – BR


OCV+ (E13 – 15) – OCV– (E13 – 14)

W–G – Y–B

FKN+ (E12 – 1) – FKN– (E12 – 2)


9 to 14



DTC

–

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

056LX–04

B0100/13 SHORT IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0100/13 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0100/13


Trouble Area

Short circuit between D+ wire harness and D– wire harness of D squib D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Horn button assy (D squib) Spiral cable sub–assy Airbag sensor assy center Instrument panel wire

WIRING DIAGRAM

Airbag Sensor Assy Center

A30 D Squib Y–B 1

Y 2

14 A27

D+

13 A27 D–

Spiral Cable Sub–assy

H01451



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Check that the spiral cable sub–assy connectors (on the horn button assy side) are not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG

REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE SUB–ASSY

OK

2

CHECK D SQUIB CIRCUIT(AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER – HORN BUTTON ASSY) (a)

D Squib F E


DC

B

Airbag Sensor A Assy Center

(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

Color: Orange

OK


NG H41439

Go to step 5


3

–


CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER

D Squib


F E

DC

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B0100/13

DLC3

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H01002 H10600 H40103

H40030

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0100/13 is not output.

HINT: Codes other than code B0100/13 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

REPLACE AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER

OK

4

CHECK HORN BUTTON ASSY(D SQUIB)

D Squib FE


D C

(a) (b)


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B0100/13

DLC3

(g) (h)

CG H01003 H10600

(f)

TC H40103

H40031

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connectors to the horn button assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0100/13 is not output.

HINT: Codes other than code B0100/13 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG OK USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE HORN BUTTON ASSY


5

–


CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

Instrument Panel Wire Airbag D Squib C Spiral Sensor Cable A Assy F E Sub–assy D B Center

(a) (b)

(c)

Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector of the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H01004 H41424

H41440

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

OK

6

CHECK SPIRAL CABLE SUB–ASSY (a)

D Squib F E

D–


D C

B


(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”D” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

D+ Color: Orange

H01000 C91344

H41441

OK USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK


NG



DTC

–


056LY–04

B0101/14 OPEN IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0101/14 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0101/14


Trouble Area

Open circuit in D+ wire harness or D– wire harness of D squib D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction




CHECK D SQUIB CIRCUIT(AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER – HORN BUTTON ASSY) (a) (b)

D Squib F E


DC

B


(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

Color: Orange

H41439

NG OK


Go to step 4


2

–


CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER (a) (b)

D Squib F E


D–

DC


D+ Service Wire Color: Orange

DTC B0101/14

DLC3

CG

H01002 C91348 H10600 W02044

TC H42104

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0101/14 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0101/14 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–


CHECK HORN BUTTON ASSY(D SQUIB) (a) (b)

D Squib FE


DC


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B0101/14

DLC3

(f) (g) (h)

CG TC

H40036

(i)





4


Instrument Panel Wire Airbag D Squib Spiral Sensor Cable A Assy Sub–assy D C F E B Center

(a) (b)

Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG

OK


H41440



5

–



D Squib F E

D–


D C

B


Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

D+ Color: Orange

H41441



NG



DTC

–


054LL–10

B0102/11 SHORT IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0102/11 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0102/11


Trouble Area

Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to ground) D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





D Squib F E


DC

B


(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Measure the resistance between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

Color: Orange

H41439

NG OK


Go to step 5


2

–



D Squib F E


DC


D+

D–

Service Wire Color: Orange

DLC3

CG

DTC B0102/11

TC

H01002 C91348 H10600 W02042

H42105


OK




3

–



D Squib F E


D C


(c) (d) (e) (f)

DTC B0102/11

DLC3

(g) (h)

CG

TC H40037

(i)




OK

4

USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK NG

Go to step 1

OK REPLACE ALL SRS COMPONENTS INCLUDING WIRE HARNESS



5

–



Instrument Panel Wire Airbag D Squib Spiral Sensor Cable A Assy F E Sub–assy D C B Center

(a) (b)

Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Measure the resistance between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H01004 H41424

H41440

NG


OK

6


D Squib F E

D–


DC

B


Measure the resistance between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

D+ Color: Orange

H01000 C91344

H41441

NG


OK

7


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LM–10

B0103/12 SHORT IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0103/12 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0103/12


Trouble Area

Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to B+) D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





D Squib F E


DC

B


(c) (d) (e)

Color: Orange

OK


H41439

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

Go to step 5


2

–



D Squib F E


D–

DC



DTC B0103/12

DLC3

CG

TC

H01002 C91348 H10600 W02043

H42106

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0103/12 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0103/12 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



D Squib FE


DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0103/12

(f) (g) (h)

CG

TC

H40038

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




5

–




(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

H01004 H41424

H41440


OK

6

D Squib F E

D–

CHECK SPIRAL CABLE SUB–ASSY


D C

B


(a) (b) (c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

D+ Color: Orange

H01000 C91344

H41441

NG


OK

7


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056LZ–03

B0105/53 SHORT IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0105/53 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.

B0105/53


Trouble Area

Short circuit between P+ wire harness and P– wire harness of P squib P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Instrument panel passenger airbag assy (P squib) Airbag sensor assy center Instrument panel wire

WIRING DIAGRAM


A29 P Squib Y–R

10 A27

P+

Y–G

11 A27

P–

1

2

H01454



–



CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE(P SQUIB CIRCUIT) (a) (b)

Instrument Panel Wire P Squib

D C

B


(c)

(d) (e) P– P+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors between the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between P+ and P– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG H40576


OK

2

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER (a) (b) P Squib

D C

DLC3


(c) (d) (e) (f)

DTC B0105/53

(g) CG

TC

H42107



OK




3

–


CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIR BAG ASSY(P SQUIB) (a) (b) P Squib

DC

DLC3


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B0105/53

(f) CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40041

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0105/53 is not output.




REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIR BAG ASSY


DTC

–


056M0–03

B0106/54 OPEN IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0106/54 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B0106/54

Open circuit in P+ wire harness or P– wire harness of P squib P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction






D C

B

Airbag A Sensor Assy Center

P–

(c) (d)

P+

NG H40576

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Measure the resistance between P+ and P– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1



2

–


CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER Instrument Panel Wire

(a) (b)


(c)

P Squib D C

(d)

P– P+

(e) (f) (g)

SST DTC B0106/54

DLC3

HINT: Codes other than code B0106/54 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check.

CG

(h)

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using SST, connect P+ and P– of the connector ”C”. SST 09843–18040 Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0106/54 is not output.

TC H40577

NG OK




3

–


CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIR BAG ASSY(P SQUIB) (a) (b) P Squib DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0106/54

(f) (g) (h)

CG TC

H40043

(i)







DTC

–


054LP–09

B0107/51 SHORT IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0107/51 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to ground) P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0107/51





Instrument Panel Wire P Squib D C

B


(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Measure the resistance between the body ground and P+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

P+

NG

OK


H40578



2

P–

–



Instrument Panel Wire Airbag P Squib Sensor Assy D C Center

(c) (d)

P+

(e) (f) (g)

SST DTC B0107/51

DLC3


CG

TC

OK


(h)


H40579

NG



3

–


CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIR BAG ASSY(P SQUIB) (a) (b) P Squib DC DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0107/51

(e) (f)

CG H01024 H10600

(g) (h)

TC H01075

H40045

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LQ–09

B0108/52 SHORT IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0108/52 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to B+) P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0108/52






B


(c) (d) (e)

P+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and P+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

OK


H40578



2

P–

–




(c) (d) (e)

P+

DLC3

(f) SST

(g)

DTC B0108/52

(h) (i) (j)

CG

TC

H40581

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using SST, connect P+ and P– of the connector ”C”. SST 09843–18040 Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0108/52 is not output.


OK




3

–




(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0108/52

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40047

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056M1–03

B0110/43 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0110/43 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B0110/43


Trouble Area

Short circuit between SFR+ wire harness and SFR– wire harness of side squib RH Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Separate type front seat back assy (Side squib RH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2

WIRING DIAGRAM


S19 Side Squib RH 1

Y–R

5 A28 SFR+

2

Y–G

6 A28 SFR–

H01454



–



CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(SIDE SQUIB RH CIRCUIT) (a) (b)

Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Sensor Assy A Center

Side Squib RH C

(c)

(d)

B

D

(e) SFR–

SFR+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between SFR+ and SFR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE FLOOR WIRE NO.2

H42849

OK

2


Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

D C DLC3

(e) (f)

DTC B0110/43

(g) CG

TC

H42111



OK




3


CHECK SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT BACK ASSY(SIDE SQUIB RH) (a) (b)

Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC

(e)

DLC3

DTC B0110/43

(f)

CG

–

(g) (h)

TC

H40979

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0110/43 is not output.




REPLACE SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT BACK ASSY


DTC

–


056M2–03

B0111/44 OPEN IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0111/44 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Open circuit in SFR+ wire harness or SFR– wire harness of side squib RH Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0111/44






Side Squib RH C D

SFR+

(c)

(d)

B

SFR–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Measure the resistance between SFR+ and SFR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

H42849

NG OK




2

–



Floor Wire No.2

Side Squib RH

C


D SFR+

SFR–

Service Wire DLC3

CG H01020 H42496 H10600 H01070

DTC B0111/44

TC H42850

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect SFR+ and SFR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0111/44 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0111/44 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

(e) DTC B0111/44

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40981

(i)







DTC

–


054LT–06

B0112/41 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0112/41 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib RH wire harness (to ground) Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0112/41






Side Squib RH C D

SFR+

(c)

(d)

B

SFR–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Measure the resistance between the body ground and SFR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H42849

NG OK




2



Floor Wire No.2

Side Squib RH


C

D SFR+

SFR–

Service Wire DLC3

CG H01020 H42496 H10600

–

DTC B0112/41

TC

H01067

H42851


OK




3

–



Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B0112/41

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40983

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LU–06

B0113/42 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0113/42 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib RH wire harness (to B+) Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0113/42






Side Squib RH C D

(c)

(d)

B

(e) SFR+

SFR–

OK


H42849

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and SFR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG



2



Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Sensor Assy Center

Side Squib RH C D SFR–

SFR+

Service Wire DLC3

CG H01020 H42496 H10600

–

DTC B0113/42

TC

H01068

H42852

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect SFR+ and SFR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0113/42 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0113/42 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

(e) DTC B0113/42

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40985

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056M3–03

B0115/47 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0115/47 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B0115/47


Trouble Area

Short circuit between SFL+ wire harness and SFL– wire harness of side squib LH Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Separate type front seat back assy (Side squib LH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire

WIRING DIAGRAM


S18 Side Squib LH 1

Y–R

12 A26 SFL+

2

Y–G

11 A26 SFL–

H01454



–



CHECK FLOOR WIRE(SIDE SQUIB LH CIRCUIT)

Side Squib LH

A C

D

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

(e)

SFL–

H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE FLOOR WIRE

OK

2


Side Squib LH D C

(c)


(d) (e) (f)

DLC3 DTC B0115/47

(g) CG

TC

H42153



OK




3

–


CHECK SEPARATE TYPE FRONT SEAT BACK ASSY(SIDE SQUIB LH) (a) (b)

Side Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3 DTC B0115/47

CG

(g) (h)

TC

(f)

H40988

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0115/47 is not output.






DTC

–


056M4–03

B0116/48 OPEN IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0116/48 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B0116/48


Trouble Area

Open circuit in SFL+ wire harness or SFL– wire harness of side squib LH Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Side Squib LH

A D

C

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

SFL–

OK


H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Measure the resistance between SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2

–



D

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

Side Squib LH

C

Airbag Sensor Assy Center SFL+

SFL–

Service Wire DLC3

CG

DTC B0116/48

TC

H42854

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0116/48 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0116/48 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0116/48

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40990

(i)







DTC

–


054LX–06

B0117/45 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0117/45 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0117/45


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib LH wire harness (to ground) Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Side Squib LH

A D

C

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

SFL–

OK


H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Measure the resistance between the body ground and SFL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



2

–



Side Squib LH

D

SFL+

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

C

Airbag Sensor Assy Center SFL–

Service Wire DLC3

CG

DTC B0117/45

TC

H42855

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0117/45 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0117/45 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib LH DC

DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0117/45

(e) (f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40992

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LY–06

B0118/46 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0118/46 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0118/46


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib LH wire harness (to B+) Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Side Squib LH

A D

C

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

SFL–

OK


(e)

H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and SFL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG



2

–



Side Squib LH

D C

SFL+

(a) (b)

Floor Wire Airbag Sensor Assy Center SFL–

Service Wire DLC3

CG

DTC B0118/46

TC

H42856

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0118/46 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0118/46 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib LH

DC

(c)


(d) (e)

DLC3

CG

DTC B0118/46

(g) (h)

TC

(f)

H40994

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




–


DTC

B0121/26 SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (RH) MALFUNCTION

DTC


056M5–03

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The seat belt buckle switch RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy RH (seat belt buckle switch RH). DTC B0121/26 or B0122/26 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat belt buckle switch RH circuit. DTC No.

B0121/B0122/ 26


Trouble Area

Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch RH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch RH wire harness (to B+) Seat belt buckle switch RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center

Front seat inner belt assy RH (Seat belt buckle switch RH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2

HINT: DTC B0121/26 or B0122/26 is indicated only for the RHD vehicle.

WIRING DIAGRAM B9 Buckle SW (Driver’s Seat)


Buckle SW

G–Y

14 A28 RBE+

W–B

3 A28 RBE–

3

1

H42513



–



CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO B+) Floor Wire No.2

D C

(a) (b)

Airbag Sensor Assy A Center

(c) (d)

B

Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH

(e)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and RBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

RBE+

H42229

NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO GROUND) Floor Wire No.2

D C

(a) (b)


(c)

B


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and RBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

RBE+

OK


H42229

NG



3

–


CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY RH (a)

Floor Wire No.2 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH A


(b) (c)

B

Connect the connector to the front seat inner belt assy RH. Unlock the seat belt at the front seat RH. Measure the resistance between RBE+ and RBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1.0 k to 1.6 k

RBE–

RBE+

H42509

NG

REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY RH

OK

4

CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY RH Floor Wire No.2

Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH A

(a) (b)


Lock the seat belt at the front seat RH. Measure the resistance between the RBE+ and RBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 100 to 500

B

RBE–

RBE+

OK


H42509

NG



5

–




DLC3

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B0121/B0122/26

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H42333

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0121/26 or B0122/26 is not output.

HINT: Codes other than code B0121/26 or B0122/26 may be output at this time, but they are not relevant to this check. NG





–


DTC

B0126/27 SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (LH) MALFUNCTION

DTC


056M6–03

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The seat belt buckle switch LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy LH (seat belt buckle switch LH). DTC B0126/27 or B0127/27 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat belt buckle switch LH circuit. DTC No.

B0126/B0127/ 27


Trouble Area

Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch LH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch LH wire harness (to B+) Front seat inner belt assy LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Front seat inner belt assy LH (Seat belt buckle switch LH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire

HINT: DTC B0126/27 or B0127/27 is indicated only for the LHD vehicle.



Buckle SW

G–Y 3

W–B 1

19 A26 LBE+

2 A26 LBE–

H42513



–



CHECK FLOOR WIRE(TO B+) (a) (b)

Floor Wire D C

B

Front Seat Inner Belt Assy LH

A Airbag Sensor Assy Center

(c) (d) (e)

LBE+

H41707

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy LH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and LBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE(TO GROUND) (a) (b)

Floor Wire D C Front Seat Inner Belt Assy LH

B


LBE+

OK


(c)

H41707

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and LBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



3

–


CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY LH (a)

Floor Wire B Front Seat Inner Belt Assy LH


(b) (c)

Connect the connector to the front seat inner belt assy LH. Unlock the seat belt at the front seat LH. Measure the resistance between LBE+ and LBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1.0 k to 1.6 k

LBE–

LBE+

H41708

NG

REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY LH

OK

4

CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY LH (a) (b)



Lock the seat belt at the front seat LH. Measure the resistance between LBE+ and LBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 100 to 500

LBE–

LBE+

H41708

NG OK




5

–




DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0126/B0127/27

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H41027







DTC

–


056M7–03

B0130/63 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0130/63 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B0130/63


Trouble Area

Short circuit between PR+ wire harness and PR– wire harness of P/T squib RH P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Front seat outer belt assy RH (P/T squib RH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2

WIRING DIAGRAM


P17 P/T Squib RH Y–B

9 A28 PR+

Y

10 A28 PR–

1

2

H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Check that the floor wire No.2 connector (on the front seat outer belt assy RH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(P/T SQUIB RH CIRCUIT) (a)


P/T Squib RH D C

PR+

(b)

B

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between PR+ and PR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

PR–

H40048

NG OK




3

–


CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER (a) (b) Airbag Sensor Assy Center

P/T Squib RH

(c) (d)

D C DLC3

DTC B0130/63

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC H42114




OK

4

CHECK FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSY RH(P/T SQUIB RH) (a) (b)

P/T Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

CG

(e) DTC B0130/63

(g) (h)

TC

(f)

H40050

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the front seat outer belt assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0130/63 is not output.


REPLACE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSY RH


DTC

–


056M8–03

B0131/64 OPEN IN P/T (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0131/64 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B0131/64

Open circuit in PR+ wire harness or PR– wire harness of P/T squib RH P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction




CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(P/T SQUIB RH CIRCUIT) (a) (b)


P/T Squib RH D C

PR+

(c) (d)

B

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Measure the resistance between PR+ and PR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

PR–

H40048

NG OK




2

–




P/T Squib RH D

PR+

C

PR– Service Wire

DLC3

CG

DTC B0131/64

TC

H01020 C85243 H10600 H01083

H40951

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0131/64 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0131/64 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



P/T Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

(e) DTC B0131/64

(f) (g) (h)

CG TC H01021 H10600

H01083

H40051

(i)


HINT: Codes other than code B0131/64 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG OK USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK




DTC

–


054M1–07

B0132/61 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0132/61 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No. B0132/61


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib RH wire harness (to ground) P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction






P/T Squib RH D C

PR+

(c) (d)

B

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Measure the resistance between the body ground and PR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

PR–

OK


H40048

NG



2

–



Floor Wire No.2 P/T Squib RH D C


PR–

PR+

Service Wire DTC B0132/61

DLC3

CG H01020 C85243 H10600 H01079

TC H40952


OK




3

–



P/T Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC

(e) DTC B0132/61

DLC3

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H01021 H10600 H01079

H40053

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054M2–07

B0133/62 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0133/62 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No. B0133/62


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib RH wire harness (to B+) P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Sensor P/T Squib RH Assy A Center B D C

(c) (d) (e)

PR+

PR–

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and PR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG H40048



2

–



Floor Wire No.2

P/T Squib RH

PR+

D C


PR– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01020 C85243 H10600 H01081

DTC B0133/62

TC H40953

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0133/62 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0133/62 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



P/T Squib RH DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0133/62

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40055

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056M9–03

B0135/73 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0135/73 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B0135/73

Short circuit between PL+ wire harness and PL– wire harness of P/T squib LH P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Front seat outer belt assy LH (P/T squib LH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire

WIRING DIAGRAM


P16 P/T Squib LH Y–B

8 A26 PL+

Y

7 A26 PL–

1

2

H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connector from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Check that the floor wire connector (on the front seat outer belt assy LH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE(P/T SQUIB LH CIRCUIT)

P/T Squib LH

(a)

Floor Wire A

D C

PL+

B


(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between PL+ and PL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

PL–

OK


H40056

NG



3

–



P/T Squib LH

D C

DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0135/73

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H40057




OK

4

CHECK FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSY LH(P/T SQUIB LH) (a) (b)

P/T Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0135/73

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40058

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the front seat outer belt assy LH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0135/73 is not output.


REPLACE FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSY LH


DTC

–


056MA–03

B0136/74 OPEN IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0136/74 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B0136/74


Trouble Area

Open circuit in PL+ wire harness or PL– wire harness of P/T squib LH P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





P/T Squib LH

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A

D C

PL+

B


PL–

OK


H40056

(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Measure the resistance between PL+ and PL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2

–



Floor Wire P/T Squib LH Airbag Sensor Assy Center

D C

PL+

PL– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01017 C85243 H10600

DTC B0136/74

TC H01087

H40950

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0136/74 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0136/74 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



P/T Squib LH DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0136/74

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40060

(i)






DTC

–


054M5–07

B0137/71 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0137/71 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0137/71


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib LH wire harness (to ground) P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





P/T Squib LH

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A

D C

PL+

B


PL–

OK


H40056

(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Measure the resistance between the body ground and PL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



2

–



P/T Squib LH Floor Wire Airbag Sensor Assy Center

D C

PL+

PL– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01017 C85243 H10600

DTC B0137/71

TC H01084

H40954


OK




3

–



P/T Squib LH DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0137/71

(f) CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40062

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054M6–07

B0138/72 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0138/72 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0138/72


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib LH wire harness (to B+) P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





P/T Squib LH

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A

D C

B


(c) (d) (e)

PL+

PL–

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and PL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG H40056



2

–




D C

PL+

PL– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01017 C85243 H10600

DTC B0138/72

TC

H01085

H40957

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0138/72 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0138/72 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



P/T Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0138/72

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40064

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


05C5X–01

B1100/31 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor assy center consists of the airbag sensor, the safing sensor, the drive circuit, the diagnosis circuit and the ignition control, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the airbag sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1100/31 is recorded when a malfunction in the airbag sensor assy center is detected. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Airbag sensor assy center malfunction Half connection detection malfunction

B1100/31

Airbag sensor assy center Airbag sensor assy center connector

HINT: When a malfunction code other than code B1100/31 is displayed at the same time, first repair the malfunction indicated by the malfunction code other than code B1100/31.


CHECK DTC (a) (b) DLC3

DTC B1100/31

(c) (d) CG

TC

(e)

H41086

(f) (g) (h)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1100/31 is not output.



Go to step 2


2

–


CHECK CONNECTOR

(a) (b) (c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check the connection of the airbag sensor assy center connectors. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

CONNECT CONNECTORS, THEN GO TO STEP 1

OK

3

PERFORM A VISUAL CHECK OF THE DISCONNECTION DETECTION PIN (a)

Disconnection Detection Pin

Check that the disconnection detection pin is not deformed. OK: The connectors are not deformed.

NG

H40441

REPAIR OR REPLACE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER CONNECTOR

OK

4

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER (a) DLC3

DTC B1100/31

(b) (c)

CG

(d) (e)

TC

H41086

(f)

Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1100/31 is not output.




DTC

–


05C5Y–01

B1140/32 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY (RH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side airbag sensor assy RH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1140/32 is recorded when a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assy RH is detected. DTC No.

B1140/32


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy RH wire harness (to B+) Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy RH wire harness (to ground) Open circuit in BBR+ wire harness or BBR– wire harness of side airbag sensor assy RH Side airbag sensor assy RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Side airbag sensor assy RH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2

WIRING DIAGRAM Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH 4 2 BBR+ (*1) S15 S15 BCR+ (*2) (*1) (*2)

BBR– (*1) 3 1 BCR– (*2) S15 S15 (*1) (*2)

Airbag Sensor Assy Center GR

17 A28 BBR+

P

15 A28 BBR–

*1: w/ Curtain Shield Airbag *2: w/o Curtain Shield Airbag H42521



–



CHECK DTC

Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH DLC3

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1140/32

(e) (f) (g)

CG

(h)

TC

H40442



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy RH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(OPEN) (a)

Floor Wire No.2 Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH


D C w/o Curtain Shield Airbag:

B

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

BBR– BCR+

BBR+

BCR– H01015 H42522 H42823 C82599

BBR+ BBR– H42838

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy RH. (b) w/o Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) w/ Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (d) Measure the resistance between BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG


OK

4


Side Airbag D Sensor Assy RH

A C

BBR+

(a) (b)


(c)

B

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BBR–

H01015 C83438

OK


H42229

NG



5

–




A C

BBR+

(a) (b)


(c)

B

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BBR–

H01015 C83438

NG

H42229


OK

6

CHECK SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY RH

Side Airbag Sensor Assy LH

(a) (b)


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1140/32 DLC3

(f) DTC B1141/33

CG

(g)

TC

H01012 H10600 H01065 H01066

H42115

(h) (i) (j)



Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Interchange the side airbag sensor assy RH with LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1140/32 is not output. B: DTC B1141/33 is not output.

NG:A

REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY RH

NG:B



DTC

–


05C5Z–01

B1141/33 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY (LH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side airbag sensor assy LH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1141/33 is recorded when a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assy LH is detected. DTC No.

B1141/33


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy LH wire harness (to B+) Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy LH wire harness (to ground) Open circuit in BBL+ wire harness or BBL– wire harness of side airbag sensor assy LH Side airbag sensor assy LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Side airbag sensor assy LH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire

WIRING DIAGRAM Side Airbag Sensor Assy LH 4 2 BBL+ (*1) S14 S14 BCL+ (*2) (*1) (*2)

3 1 BBL– (*1) S14 S14 BCL– (*2) (*1) (*2)

Airbag Sensor Assy Center GR–L

16 A26 BBL+

LG–B

18 A26 BBL–




–



CHECK DTC


(a) (b) Airbag Sensor Assy Center

(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B1141/33

(f) (g) CG

(h)

TC H40445



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy LH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE(OPEN) Side Airbag D Sensor Assy LH

(a)

Floor Wire C

B


w/ Curtain w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: Shield Airbag: BBL– BCL– BCL+

BBL+

H01010 H42522 H42823 C82600

BBL–

BBL+ H42837

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy RH. (b) w/ Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) w/o Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (d) Measure the resistance between BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG


OK

4

CHECK FLOOR WIRE(TO B+)

Side Airbag Sensor D Assy LH

BBL–

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A C

B


(c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BBL+

H01010 C83441

H42231

NG OK




5

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE(TO GROUND)


BBL–

(a) (b)

Floor Wire Airbag Sensor Assy Center

(c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BBL+

H01010 C83441

NG

H42231


OK

6

CHECK SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY LH Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH

DLC3


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1140/32

(f) DTC B1141/33 CG H01007 H10600

(g)

TC H01065 H01066

H42116

(h) (i) (j)




NG:A


NG:B

REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY LH


DTC

–


05C60–01

B1148/36 FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (RH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag front RH sensor circuit consists of the diagnosis circuit and the frontal deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the frontal deceleration sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1148/36 is recorded when a malfunction in the airbag front RH sensor is detected. DTC No.

B1148/36


Trouble Area

Open circuit in SR+ wire harness or SR– wire harness of front airbag sensor RH Short circuit in airbag front RH sensor wire harness (to B+) Short circuit in airbag front RH sensor wire harness (to ground) Airbag front RH sensor malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Airbag front RH sensor Airbag sensor assy center Instrument panel wire Engine room main wire

WIRING DIAGRAM

A10 Airbag Front RH Sensor

SR+

SR–


G 2

R 1

1

1

IO3 IE7 (*2) (*1)

2 IO3 (*2)

2 IE7 (*1)

G

9 A27 SR+

R

20 A27 SR–

*1: LHD *2: RHD

H17182



–



CHECK DTC

Airbag Front RH Sensor

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DLC3

(e) DTC B1148/36

(f) (g) CG

TC

(h) H42117



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the airbag front RH sensor. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–


CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (RH) CIRCUIT (OPEN) (a)

Airbag Front F RH Sensor

E

DC

B


SR+ SR–

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the airbag front RH sensor. (b) Using a service wire, connect SR+ and SR– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between SR+ and SR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

Service Wire

H42523

NG

Go to step 7

OK

4

CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (RH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)


E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”E”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of SR+ and SR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

SR+ SR–

H42510

NG OK


Go to step 8


5

–


CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (RH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)


E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of SR+ and SR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 MW or Higher

SR+ SR–

NG

H42510

Go to step 9

OK

6

CHECK AIR BAG FRONT RH SENSOR

Airbag Sensor Front LH

D C

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1148/36

(e) DLC3 DTC B1149/37 CG

TC

(f) (g) (h)

H42118



Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Interchange the airbag front RH sensor with the airbag sensor front LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1148/36 is not output. B: DTC B1149/37 is not output.

NG:A

REPLACE AIR BAG FRONT RH SENSOR

NG:B



7

–


CHECK ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE(OPEN)

Engine Room Main Wire Airbag Front RH Sensor

Instrument Panel Wire

F

A E

SR+

D C

B


SR– SR+

SR–

(a)

Disconnect the engine room main wire connector from the instrument panel wire. (b) Using a service wire, connect SR+ and SR– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between SR+ and SR– of the connector ”D”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

Service Wire

H42524

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE

OK REPAIR OR REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE

8

CHECK ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE(TO B+)



A

F E

D C

B


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

SR–

SR+

H42512

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the engine room main wire connector from the instrument panel wire. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of SR+ and SR– of the connector ”D”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG





9


CHECK ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE(TO GROUND) (a)


–


A

F E

SR–

D C

B


(b)

Disconnect the engine room main wire connector from the instrument panel wire. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of SR+ and SR– of the connector ”D”. OK: Resistance: 1 MW or Higher

SR+

H42512

NG





DTC

–


05C60–01



B1148/36


Trouble Area



WIRING DIAGRAM


SR+

SR–


G 2

R 1

1

1

IO3 IE7 (*2) (*1)

2 IO3 (*2)

2 IE7 (*1)

G

9 A27 SR+

R

20 A27 SR–

*1: LHD *2: RHD

H17182



–



CHECK DTC


(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DLC3

(e) DTC B1148/36

(f) (g) CG

TC

(h) H42117



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)


OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–




E

DC

B


SR+ SR–


Service Wire

H42523

NG

Go to step 7

OK

4



E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SR+ SR–

H42510

NG OK


Go to step 8


5

–




E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SR+ SR–

NG

H42510

Go to step 9

OK

6



D C

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1148/36


TC

(f) (g) (h)

H42118




NG:A


NG:B



7

–





F

A E

SR+

D C

B


SR– SR+

SR–

(a)


Service Wire

H42524

NG



8




A

F E

D C

B


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

SR–

SR+

H42512


NG





9




–


A

F E

SR–

D C

B


(b)


SR+

H42512

NG





DTC

–


05C61–01

B1149/37 FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor front LH circuit consists of the diagnosis circuit and the frontal deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the frontal deceleration sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1149/37 is recorded when malfunction is detected in the airbag sensor front LH circuit. DTC No.

B1149/37


Trouble Area

Open circuit in SL+ wire harness or SL– wire harness of airbag sensor front LH Short circuit in airbag sensor front LH wire harness (to B+) Short circuit in airbag sensor front LH wire harness (to ground) Airbag sensor front LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Airbag sensor front LH Airbag sensor assy center Instrument panel wire Engine room main wire

WIRING DIAGRAM

A9 Airbag Sensor Front LH

SL+


W–R 2

Y–R (*1) BR (*2) SL–

1

3

3

IO3 (*4)

IE7 (*3)

4 IO3 (*4)

4 IE7 (*3)

W–R

15 A27 SL+

BR

26 A27 SL–

*1: LHD 1CD–FTV *2: Except LHD 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD H17182



–



CHECK DTC


(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DLC3

DTC B1149/37

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

(h)

H42119



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the airbag sensor front LH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–


CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) CIRCUIT (OPEN) (a) F E

DC

B



SL+

Service Wire

SL– H42523

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the airbag sensor front LH. (b) Using a service wire, connect SL+ and SL– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between SL+ and SL– of the connecter ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG

Go to step 7

OK

4

CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

F E

DC


B


SL+

(a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”E”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

SL– H42510

NG OK


Go to step 8


5

–


CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

F

A E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SL+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 MW or Higher

SL–

H03355 C81408

NG

H42510

Go to step 9

OK

6

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR FRONT LH


DC

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1148/36

(e)

DLC3

DTC B1149/37 CG

TC

H02757 H10600 H16834 H16835

(f) (g) (h)

H42120



Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Interchange the airbag front sensor RH with the airbag sensor front LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1148/36 is not output. B: DTC B1149/37 is not output.

NG:A


NG:B

REPLACE AIR BAG SENSOR FRONT LH


7

–


CHECK ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE(OPEN) Engine Room Main Wire


F E

D C

B



SL–

SL+

SL–

SL+

Service Wire

(a)

Disconnect the engine room main wire connect from the instrument panel wire. (b) Using a service wire, connect SL+ and SL– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between SL+ and SL– of the connector ”D”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG

H42524



8


Engine Room Main Wire F E

Instrument Panel Wire Airbag Sensor A Assy D C B Center


SL–

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

SL+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the engine room main wire connector from the instrument panel wire. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”D”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

H42512





9

–


CHECK ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE(TO GROUND) (a) Engine Room Main Wire F E


(b)

Disconnect the engine room main wire connector from the instrument panel wire. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”D”. OK: Resistance: 1 MW or Higher


SL–

SL+

H42512

NG





DTC

–


05C62–01

B1153/25 SEAT POSITION AIRBAG SENSOR MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The seat position airbag sensor circuits consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. DTC B1153/25 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat position airbag sensor circuit. DTC No.

B1153/25


Trouble Area

Open circuit in LSP+ (RSP+) wire harness or LSP– (RSP–) wire harness of seat position airbag sensor Short circuit in seat position airbag sensor wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in seat position airbag sensor wire harness (to B+) Seat position airbag sensor malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Seat position airbag sensor Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire (LHD) Floor wire No.2 (RHD)


Airbag Sensor Assy Center 4 1 A26 A28 LSP+ (*1) (*1) (*2) RSP+ (*2)

L–B 2 Seat Position Airbag Sensor

3 2 A26 A28 LSP– (*1) (*1) (*2) RSP– (*2)

GR–B 4 *1: LHD *2: RHD

H42514



–



CHECK DTC (a) (b)

LHD: Seat Position Airbag Sensor

RHD: Seat Position Airbag Sensor

DLC3

CG


(c) (d) (e)


(f) (g)

DTC B1153/25


TC

(h)


H42526

NG

Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

CONNECT CONNECTORS

OK

3 (a)

CHECK VEHICLE CONDITION Check the vehicle steering position. RHD

LHD


Go to step 10


4


CHECK FLOOR WIRE(OPEN) (a)

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. (b) Using a service wire, connect between LSP+ and LSP– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between LSP+ and LSP– of the floor wire connector on the airbag sensor assy center side. OK: Resistance: Below 1

Floor Wire D C

B

Seat Position Airbag Sensor

A Airbag Sensor Assy Center LSP–

LSP+

LSP+

LSP–

H42839 H42861

–

NG

Service Wire


H43084

OK

5


Floor Wire D C Seat Position Airbag Sensor

B


LSP–

(c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of LSP+ and LSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

LSP+

H01010 C83441

H42231

NG OK




6

–




B


(c)

LSP–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of LSP+ and LSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

LSP+

H01010 C83441

NG

H42231


OK

7

CHECK SEAT POSITION AIR BAG SENSOR


DLC3

(a) (b) (c)


(d) (e)

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H01007 H10600 C91522

H42468

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connectors to the seat position airbag sensor and the airbag sensor assy center. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1153/25 is not output.



Go to step 8


8 (a) (b) (c)

–


REPLACE SEAT POSITION AIRBAG SENSOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Replace the seat position airbag sensor (See page 60–70).

9

RECHECK DTC (a) Seat Position Airbag Sensor

DLC3

(b) Airbag Sensor Assy Center

(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

TC

H42468







10

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(OPEN)

Floor Wire No. 2 Seat Position Airbag Sensor D C

(a) Airbag Sensor Assy A Center

B RSP– RSP+

RSP+

NG

RSP–

H01015 H42839

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. (b) Using a service wire, connect between RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 REPAIR OR REPLACE FLOOR WIRE NO.2

H43089

OK

11

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO B+)

Floor Wire No. 2

D C Seat Position Airbag Sensor

(a) (b) Airbag Sensor Assy A Center

(c)

B RSP–

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

RSP+

H41028

OK


NG



12

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO GROUND)

Floor Wire No. 2



(c)

B RSP–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

RSP+

H41028

NG


OK

13

CHECK SEAT POSITION AIR BAG SENSOR (a) (b) Seat Position Airbag Sensor


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC H42477

(i)




Go to step 14


14 (a) (b) (c)

–


REPLACE SEAT POSITION AIR BAG SENSOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Replace the seat position airbag sensor (See page 60–70).

15

RECHECK DTC (a)


DLC3


(b) (c) (d) (e)

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

TC H42477







DTC

–


05A6E–03

B1154/38 AIRBAG SENSOR REAR (RH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor rear RH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives the signal from the lateral deceleration sensor signal in the airbag sensor rear RH, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1154/38 is recorded when a malfunction in the airbag sensor rear RH is detected. DTC No.

B1154/38


Trouble Area

Short circuit in airbag sensor rear RH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in airbag sensor rear RH wire harness (to B+) Open circuit in BCR+ wire harness or BCR– wire harness of airbag sensor rear RH Airbag sensor rear RH malfunction Side airbag sensor assy RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Airbag sensor rear RH Side airbag sensor assy RH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2

HINT: DTC B1154/38 is indicated only for the vehicle equipped with the curtain shield airbag.

WIRING DIAGRAM C16 Airbag Sensor Rear RH

Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH

LG 1

L 2

2 S15 BCR–

1 S15 BCR+

3 S15 BBR–

Airbag Sensor Assy Center P

15 A28

GR

17 A28 BBR+

4 BBR+ S15

BBR–

H42515



–



CHECK DTC (a) (b)

Airbag Sensor Rear RH

DLC3


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1154/38

(f) (g) CG

TC

(h) H42841



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the side airbag sensor assy RH and the airbag sensor rear RH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–



Floor Wire No.2

A

D B

C


Airbag Sensor Rear RH BCR–

BCR+ 1

2

Service Wire

H42511

Disconnect the connectors from the side airbag sensor assy RH and the airbag sensor rear RH. (b) Using a service wire, connect 1 and 2 of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG


OK

4

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO B+) (a) (b)

Floor Wire No.2

A

D C

B


(c)

Airbag Sensor Rear RH BCR+

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BCR–

OK


H42525

NG



5

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO GROUND) (a) (b)

Floor Wire No.2

A

D C

B


(c)


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BCR–

H42816 C91384

NG

H42525


OK

6

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR REAR RH (a) (b)

Airbag Sensor Rear LH


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1154/38

(f)

CG

TC

DTC B1155/39

H42817 H10600 C92968 C92969

H42842

(g) (h) (i) (j)



Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assy RH. Interchange the airbag sensor rear RH with LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1154/38 is not output. B: DTC B1155/39 is not output.

NG:A

Go to step 7

NG:B

REPLACE AIR BAG SENSOR REAR RH


7




(a) (b)


(c)

(d) DTC B1154/38

(e)

CG

–

TC

DTC B1155/39

(f) (g)

H42126

(h) (i) (j)



Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Return the interchanged airbag sensor rear RH and LH to the original condition and connect the connectors to them. Interchange the side airbag sensor assy RH with LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Tune the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1154/38 is not output. B: DTC B1155/39 is not output.

NG:A


NG:B



DTC

–


056MK–04

B1155/39 AIRBAG SENSOR REAR (LH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor rear LH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives the signal from the lateral deceleration sensor signal in the airbag sensor rear LH, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1155/39 is recorded when a malfunction in the airbag sensor rear LH is detected. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B1155/39

Short circuit in airbag sensor rear LH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in airbag sensor rear LH wire harness (to B+) Open circuit in BCL+ wire harness or BCL– wire harness of airbag sensor rear LH Airbag sensor rear LH malfunction Side airbag sensor assy LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Airbag sensor rear LH Side airbag sensor assy LH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire


WIRING DIAGRAM C15 Airbag Sensor Rear LH L–B 1

GR–R 2


Side Airbag Sensor Assy LH 2 S14 BCL–

3 BBL– S14

LG–B

18 A26 BBL–

1 S14 BCL+

4 BBL+ S14

GR–L

16 A26 BBL+

H42515



–



CHECK DTC (a) (b)

Airbag Sensor Assy Rear LH


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3 DTC B1155/39

(f) (g) CG TC

(h) H42843



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–)terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the side airbag sensor assy LH and the airbag sensor rear LH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–



Floor Wire D B

C Airbag Sensor Rear LH

Side Airbag A Sensor Assy LH BCL+

1

BCL–

2

Service Wire

Disconnect the connectors from the side airbag sensor assy LH and the airbag sensor rear LH. (b) Using a service wire, connect 1 and 2 of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG


H42511

OK

4


Floor Wire

D C Airbag Sensor Rear LH

BCL+

B

Side Airbag A Sensor Assy LH

(c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BCL–

OK


H42525

NG



5

–



Floor Wire


BCL+

B


(c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BCL–

H42816 C91384

NG

H42525


OK

6

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR REAR LH (a) (b)



(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B1154/38

(f)

CG

TC

DTC B1155/39

H42817 H10600 C92968 C92969

H42842

(g) (h) (i) (j)



Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assy LH. Interchange the airbag sensor rear RH with LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1154/38 is not output. B: DTC B1155/39 is not output.

NG:A

Go to step 7

NG:B

REPLACE AIR BAG SENSOR REAR LH


7

–




(c)

(d) DLC3

DTC B1154/38

(e)

CG

TC

DTC B1155/39

(f) (g)

H42128

(h) (i) (j)




NG:A


NG:B



DTC

–


056ML–03

B1160/83 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1160/83 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B1160/83


Trouble Area

Short circuit between ICR+ wire harness and ICR– wire harness of curtain shield squib RH Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Curtain shield airbag assy RH (Curtain shield squib RH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2


WIRING DIAGRAM


C18 Curtain Shield Squib RH 1

Y–V (*1)

2

Y–R (*1)

8 A28 ICR+

7 A28 ICR–

*1: w/ Curtain Shield Airbag

H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Check that the floor wire No.2 connector (on the curtain shield airbag assy RH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB RH CIRCUIT) (a)

Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Sensor Curtain Shield Assy Squib RH A Center D C B

(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between ICR+ and ICR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H41465

NG OK




3

–



Curtain Shield Squib RH


(c) (d)

D C DLC3

DTC B1160/83

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H40956




OK

4

CHECK CURTAIN SHIELD AIR BAG ASSY RH(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB RH) (a) (b)



(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1160/83

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40931

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1160/83 is not output.


REPLACE CURTAIN SHIELD AIR BAG ASSY RH


DTC

–


056MM–03

B1161/84 OPEN IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1161/84 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B1161/84


Trouble Area

Open circuit in ICR+ wire harness or ICR– wire harness of curtain shield squib RH Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB RH CIRCUIT) (a) (b)

Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Curtain Shield Sensor Squib RH Assy A Center B D C

OK


(c) (d)

H41465

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Measure the resistance between ICR+ and ICR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2


(a) (b)


D C ICR–

ICR+ Service Wire

DLC3

H01020 C89252 H11645



Floor Wire No.2

CG

–

DTC B1161/84

TC H10600

H42129

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect ICR+ and ICR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1161/84 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B1161/84 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–





(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1161/84

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40933

(i)






DTC

–


054MF–05

B1162/81 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1162/81 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B1162/81


Trouble Area

Short circuit in curtain shield squib RH wire harness (to ground) Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy malfunction







Curtain Shield Squib RH D C

(c) (d)

B

OK


H41465

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Measure the resistance between the body ground and ICR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



2

–



Floor Wire No.2 Curtain Shield Squib RH

(a) (b)


D C ICR–

ICR+ Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01020 C89252 H10600

DTC B1162/81

TC H11642

H42130


OK




3

–





(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1162/81

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40938

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054MG–05

B1163/82 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1163/82 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.


B1163/82

Trouble Area

Short circuit in curtain shield squib RH wire harness (to B+) Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction








(c) (d)

B

(e)

OK


H41465

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and ICR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG



2

–





D C ICR+

ICR–

Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01020 C89252 H10600

DTC B1163/82

TC H11643

H42131

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect ICR+ and ICR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1163/82 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B1163/82 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3



(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1163/82

(f)



CG

–

(g) (h)

TC

H40939

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056MN–03

B1165/87 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1165/87 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B1165/87


Trouble Area

Short circuit between ICL+ wire harness and ICL– wire harness of curtain shield squib LH Curtain shield squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Curtain shield airbag assy LH (Curtain shield squib LH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire


WIRING DIAGRAM


C17 Curtain Shield Squib LH 1

Y–V (*1)

2

Y–R (*1)

9 A26 ICL+

10 A26 ICL–


H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. DIsconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. Check that the floor wire connector (on the curtain shield airbag assy LH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB LH CIRCUIT) (a)

Curtain Shield Squib LH D C

Floor Wire

(b) B


Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between ICL+ and ICL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H41469

NG OK




3

–




DLC3

(c)


(d)

DTC B1165/87

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H42132




OK

4

CHECK CURTAIN SHIELD AIR BAG ASSY LH(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB LH) (a) (b)

Curtain Shield Squib LH DC

(c)


(d) (e)

DLC3

CG

DTC B1165/87

(f) (g) (h)

TC

H42133

(i)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the curtain shield airbag assy LH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1165/87 is not output.


REPLACE CURTAIN SHIELD AIR BAG ASSY LH


DTC

–


056MO–03

B1166/88 OPEN IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1166/88 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B1166/88


Trouble Area

Open circuit in ICL+ wire harness or ICL– wire harness of curtain shield squib LH Curtain shield squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





CHECK FLOOR WIRE(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB LH CIRCUIT) (a) (b)

Floor Wire Curtain Shield Squib LH D C

B


(c) (d)

OK


H41469

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. Measure the resistance between ICL+ and ICL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2

–



Curtain Shield Squib LH

(a) (b)


D C ICL+ ICL–

Service Wire

DLC3

CG

DTC B1166/88

TC

H01017 C89252 H10600 H11649

H42134

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect ICL+ and ICL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1166/88 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B1166/88 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–




(c)


(d)

DLC3

(e) (f)

DTC B1166/88 CG

TC

(g) (h) H40945

(i)






DTC

–


054MJ–05

B1167/85 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1167/85 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the curtain shield squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B1167/85


Trouble Area

Short circuit in curtain shield squib LH wire harness (to ground) Curtain shield squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy malfunction

Curtain shield airbag assy LH (Curtain Shield Squib LH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire






B


(c) (d)

OK


H41469

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. Measure the resistance between the body ground and ICL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



2

–



Floor Wire Curtain Shield Squib LH Airbag Sensor D C Assy Center ICL+ ICL– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01017 C89252 H10600

DTC B1167/85

TC

H11646

H42135


OK




3

–




(c)


(d) (e)

DLC3

CG

DTC B1167/85

(f) (g) (h)

TC

H40947

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




–


0543F–04

ABS WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECU detects trouble, it will prohibit ABS control, turn on the ABS warning light, and store the DTC. Connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 to make the ABS warning light blink and output the DTC.



–




22 C11

9 C10 17 C10

W–B (*4) J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A

Driver Side J/B J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4) A



36 S1 WA

R–Y J17 J/C

ABS

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

17 IE1

R–Y

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM1

IG1

6


1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)


3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK




–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the ABS warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK


NG

2 (a)



OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTORL ECU – CMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–




Always ON

DTC Detecting Condition Either of the following 1 or 2 is detected: 1. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the ECU. 2. There is a malfunction in the ECU internal circuit. 3. Malfunction in the circuit of meter or ABS warning light circuit.

Trouble Area Battery IC regulator ABS warning light circuit Power source circuit Skid control ECU

HINT: There is a case that hand–held tester cannot be used when ECU is abnormal.


0543D–04


–




18

R–W

D8 IG1 Relay 3

5

1 DN

G

C

J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C

G

C

22 R–W

J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

R–W

IE1

14 S1 IG1

B–L (*2) B–G (*1) B–G (*1)


B–G (*1)

4B


ALT

1 4A

1

2

3

B (*2)

ALT 3

1

1

W (*2)

3

2

1 4D

ED1

Combination Meter 9 R–Y C10 22 C11

17 IE1

R–Y

36 S1

WA

J17 J/C

17 C10

W–B (*4)

W–B (*4) A

A W–B (*3)

ABS


C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

J/C

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

B–W

18 DA

IG1

AM2 1 1

B–R

2

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4) J16 J/C

W–B (*3, *1) IL Battery



B–R 4 AM2

IG2 6

W–B (*3)

W–B (*3, *2) FL MAIN

B–R

I13 Ignition SW


2 DH

A

IO

*3: LHD *4: RHD

A J15 J/C

A

W–B (*4) W–B

IK

W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

EA

F45140


–



CHECK DTC FOR ABS Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–756). YES


NO

2



YES

3



OK


NG


C94397

NG

4


OK



5 (a)

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6 (a)



OK

7 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


AlwaysON MALFUNCTION IN ECU(VSC WARNING LIGHT)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ECU stores DTC, the VSC warning light illuminates on the combination meter. DTC No.

Always ON




Trouble Area Battery IC regulator Power source circuit Skid control ECU

0543E–04


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)


22 C11

J/C

16 C11


G C R–W J10 J20 (*3) (*4)


W–R


C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN


1 DN

B–G (*1)

5 DH

I13 Ignition SW

2 DH

ECU–IG

5

3

1

2

9 DA AM1

1 DH

G–Y

3 AM1

IG1


IG2 6

4 AM2

B–R B–L (*2) 1 ED1

W (*2)

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

AM2 B–R

1

1 1

2

1A

B–G (*1) B (*2)



1 ALT

4A B–G (*1)

1 4D

3

1 4B

ALT

3

2

B (*2)

1

1

2

FL MAIN

W–B

B–G (*1) W–B

Battery


IJ

W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

EA

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45147



–



CHECK DTC FOR VSC Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–756). YES


NO

2



YES

3



OK


NG


C94397

NG

4


OK



5 (a)

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6 (a)

CHECK VSC WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

7 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0543H–04




–




22 C11

4 C11 17 C10

18 IE1

P

J17 J/C W–B (*4)

Brake

J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A


J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4) A



20 S1 EBDW

P

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM2

IG2

6


1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)


3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK




–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(BRAKE WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the Brake warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK

Go to step 4

YES


NG

2 (a)

CHECK DTC FOR ABS Check the DTC on page 05–756.

NO

3 (a)

INSPECT BRAKE WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

4

INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSY(See page 71–3) NG

REPLACE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSY

OK

5

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH(See page 71–3) NG

OK


REPLACE BRAKE MASTER RESERVOIR SUB–ASSY

CYLINDER


6 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – PARKING BRAKE SWITCH) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal PKB of the skid control ECU and parking brake switch (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

7 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal EBDW of the skid control ECU and brake fluid level warning switch (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

8 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION MERTER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


0542U–04

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Rotor

The speed sensor detects wheel speed and transmits the appropriate signals to the ECU. These signals are used for control of the ABS and VSC control systems. Each of the front and rear rotors has 48 serrations. When the rotors rotate, the magnetic field generated by the permanent magnet in the speed sensor induces an AC voltage. Since the frequency of this AC voltage changes in direct proportion to the speed of the rotor, the frequency is used by the ECU to detect the speed of each wheel.


To ECU


BR3583 BR3582

–V

F00010

DTC No.


C0200/31 C0205/32


Trouble Area


C1330/35 C1331/36






–



A4 ABS Speed Sensor Front LH

41 S1 FL+

R–L

24 S1 FL–

W

21 S1 FR+

B

22 S1 FR–

2

1


L–Y

2

1

F40884


1 (a) (b)




Go to step 5


2

–


INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR

2

(a) (b) (c)

1

(d) C93876


NG


NG



3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FRONT SPEED SENSOR–SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between each front speed sensor and the skid control ECU connector (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4


GND


W04200

(REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals FR+ – FR– and FL+ – FL– of the skid control ECU. (b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check the signal waveform. HINT: S As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases, a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater. S When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope, error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches, looseness or foreign matter deposited on it. OK




5

–




NG

OK

BR3795

NG


NG



6 (a) (b)




7



HINT: If a foreign object is attached, remove it and after reassembling, check the output waveform. BR3719

NG


NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756). OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)



–


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


0577Z–02


C0210/33 C0215/34

C1332/38 C1333/39


Trouble Area








2 IB1

R

23 S1 RL+

G

1 IB1

G

40 S1 RL–

1

2


R

P

1 IM1

P

10 IE2

P

38 S1 RR+

V

10 IM1

V

11 IE2

V

39 S1 RR–

1

2

F45131



–



1 (a)


(b)


Go to step 5

NG

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR (a) (b)

(c)

F41836

Connector 2

2

1


Disconnect the skid control sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector. OK: Resistance: 2.2 k or less Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1 M or higher

Skid control Sensor Sub–Wire Harness: (a) Disconnect the sub–wire harness connector from the floor wire harness (b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector lock part and connecting part of the connector. (c) Measure resistance between terminal 1 of the connector 1 and terminal 2 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (d) Measure resistance between terminal 2 of the connector 1 and terminal 1 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (e) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector 1 and body ground. OK: 10 M or higher NG


NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756). OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(REAR SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each skid control sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4


GND


W04200



NG

5

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR INSTALLATION (a)

OK

Check the sensor installation. OK: There is no clearance between the sensor and rear axle carrier.

NG F10178

NG





6 (a) (b)

–


INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR TIP Remove the skid control sensor (See page 32–61). Check the sensor tip. OK: No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip. NG



7


Check the sensor rotor serrations. OK: No scratches, missing teeth or foreign objects.

NG


NG


W04846

NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756). OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) NOTICE: Do not reuse the skid control sensor.



–


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


05780–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure action on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force. DTC No. C0226/21 C0236/22 C0246/23 C0256/24




Trouble Area

Each solenoid valve


–




B–G (*1)

ALT 1

VSC


21


3 1

R (*1)

W (*2)

VSC

1 1B

5 S1 +BS

R (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 W–B

W–B

FL MAIN


W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132







DTC

–


05781–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ABS motor relay supplies power to the ABS pump motor. While the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC are activated, the ECU switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0273/13

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. After actuation of the motor relay, pump motor voltage is not supplied within 0.08 second. 2. Pump motor voltage is at high level for 2.5 seconds or more although motor relay does not actuate . 3. Pump motor voltage keeps low level for longer than 0.04 second and the pump repeats activating for 0.7 seconds 3 times maximum. At the last time of activation, the pump motor goes dead because of short circuit.




B–G (*1)

ALT

VSC

1

21


3 1

L (*1)

4

W (*2)

9 S1 +BM

2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 VSC

1 1B

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132



–



1 (a)



NG

2


GND


+BM C94397

OK

NG




3

–



Gasoline Engine: VSC (50 A) Engine Room R/B No.4

(b)



VSC (50 A)

F45087

NG


OK

4


GND


NG C94397


OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BM TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–


05782–02



C0278/11


Trouble Area

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. 3 or more solenoid valves are shown faulty in response and simultaneously valve supply voltage is detected faulty. 2. Solenoid valve relay is not turned OFF.



Engine Room R/B and J/B B

1

ALT

ABS No.2

1A 1

21

2

W–B

W–B FL MAIN

1

L

5 S1

+BS

6 S1

GND1

10 S1

GND2

W–B Battery

EA

C95006



–




GND

+BS


OK C94397


NG

2



(b)


VSC (25 A) Diesel Engine: Engine Room R/B No.1

VSC (25 A)

NG F45087

OK




3

–



GND


NG C94397


OK CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BS TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–


05C5L–01

C0365/43 MALFUNCTION IN DECELERATION SENSOR

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The lateral acceleration sensor is combined with the yaw rate sensor. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0365/43

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 2: 1. Lateral acceleration difference between sensor signal and reference value is large. 2. Offset value of sensor signal is higher than the standard value. 3. Sensor signal is out of range



B J7

J/C


D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B

Y1 J18 YAW Rate Sensor J/C W–G GND 1 CANL 2 C UBAT W–L 3 CANH 4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA


12V

W–L 6 B


F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2


(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor




W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22


F

B W–L J22


A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



1

READ VALUE OF YAWRATE SENSOR(INCLUDE LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) C95216

Remove the 2 bolts and lateral acceleration sensor with connector still connected. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 Turn the ignition switch and hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check the lateral acceleration value 0 0.23 G. Check that the acceleration value displayed on the hand– held tester is changing: Place the yaw rate sensor vertically to the ground and turn the sensor pivoted on its center. OK: Lateral acceleration value is changing.

OK


NG

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C5N–01

C0371/55 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT IN YAW RATE SENSOR CIRCUIT



Trouble Area

C0371/55

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4: 1. The voltage of sensor signal is out of range. 2. The offset value of sensor signal is outside the plausible range. 3. Sensor signal changes rapidly under normal driving. 4. Yaw rate sensor value is considerably different from the reference value of yaw rate during cornering.



B J7

J/C


D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B

Y1 J18 YAW Rate Sensor J/C W–G GND 1 CANL 2 C UBAT W–L CANH 3 4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA


12V

W–L 6 B


F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2


(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor




W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22


F

B W–L J22


A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



1

READ VALUE OF YAWRATE SENSOR (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) C95217

Remove the 2 bolts and yaw rate sensor with connector still connected. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch and hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check the yaw rate value 0 5 deg/s. Check that the yaw rate value of the yaw rate sensor displayed on the hand–held tester is changing: Place the yaw rate sensor vertically to the ground and turn the sensor pivoted on its center. OK: Yaw rate value is changing.

OK


NG

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C5O–01

C1201/45 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION



Trouble Area

A trouble signal in the engine control system is input.

Engine control system

HINT: If trouble occurs in the engine control system, the ECU prohibits TRC and VSC control.


CHECK DTC FOR ENGINE A

Normal Code

B

Malfunction Code

B

A REPLACE ECM


REPAIR ENGINE CONTROL ACCORDING TO CODE OUTPUT

SYSTEM


DTC

–


0542Z–04

C1203/59 ECM COMMUNICATOIN CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit is used to transmit TRC & VSC control information from the skid control ECU to the ECM (TRC+, TRC–), and engine control information from the ECM to the skid control ECU (ENG+, ENG–). DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1203/59

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected : 1. IG1 voltage is 8.5 V or more, and the condition that data can not be sent to ECM continues for 1.2 seconds or more. 2. IG1 voltage is 8.5 V or more, engine speed is 500 r.p.m or more, vehicle speed is 60 km/h (38 mph) or more, and the condition that data can not be received from ECM continues for 1.2 seconds or more. 3. The condition that data can not be transmitted between the skid control ECU and ECM occurs at least once within 5 seconds continues 10 consecutive times within 60 sec.



ECM 25 TRC+ E9

G

31 TRC– E9

L W (*3) Y (*4)

24 ENG+ E9 30 ENG– E9

B

*1: LHD *2: RHD

6 13 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2) 13 3 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2) 7 15 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2) 14 14 IE8 IE2 (*1) (*2)

G

18 S1 TRC+

L

19 S1 TRC–

Y

8 S1 ENG+

B

7 S1 ENG–

*3: RHD 1AZ–FSE *4: Except RHD 1AZ–FSE F45139



–



CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each of terminals ENG+, ENG–, TRC+, TRC– of the skid control ECU and the same one of the ECM (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

2 (a)

CHECK OPERATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR Check the MIL. (1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. NG


OK CHECK AND REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)


OR


DTC

–


C1208/54 MALFUNCTION IN STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT



C1231/31

Detection of any of conditions 1 through 7: 1. When the condition that ECU terminal IG1 voltage is 9.8 V or more, and does not receive data from steering angle sensor continues. 2. Sensor internal failure. 3. The offset value is out of range. 4. Sensor signal changes too rapidly. 5. Steering angle value difference between measured and reference is out of range. 6. Steering sensor is not centered. 7. Steering sensor signal is out of range. 8. Steering sensor is not calibrated.


Trouble Area


05C5R–01


–



B J7

J/C


D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B


(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA


12V

W–L 6 B


F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2


(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor




W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22


F

B W–L J22


A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



1 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF STEERING SENSOR Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check that the steering wheel turning angle value of the steering angle position sensor displayed on the hand–held tester is changing when turning the steering wheel. OK: Steering wheel turning angle value is changing. OK

Go to step 4

NG

2

CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NG

REPLACE STEERING SENSOR(See page 32–65)

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING SENSOR CIRCUIT – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal SS1, SS2, YIGA and YGND of the skid control ECU and steering angle sensor (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4

CALIBRATE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR(See page 05–756) NG

REPLACE STEERING SENSOR



OR


DTC

–


05432–04

C1204/44 NE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The skid control ECU receives engine revolution speed signals (NE signals) from the ECM. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1202/44

At vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, when data received from the ECM is in normal condition, engine revolution signal > 0 rpm continues for 5 seconds or more.



ECM

17 NEO E9

5 13 IE8 IE1 (*1) (*2)

Y–B

Y–B

32 S1

NEO

*1: LHD *2: RHD F45138


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – ECM) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal NEO of the skid control ECU and ECM (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


2

–


INSPECT ECM TERMINAL VOLTAGE(NEO TERMINAL) (a) (b) (c)

Gasoline engine:

Remove the ECM with connector still connected. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminal NEO of the ECM and body ground under the engine conditions below. OK: Engine condition

Voltage

OFF (IG ON)

3 to 6 V or below 1 V

ON (Idling)

3 to 6 V below 1 V (Pulse)

NEO (Reference) Diesel engine:

3–6V

Below 1 V

F03007

NEO F45092

NG

REPLACE ECM

OK IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER THE DTC IS DELETED, CHECK THE CONTACT CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION



–


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


05785–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure action on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1225/25



C1226/26



C1227/27



C1228/28





–




B–G (*1)

VSC

ALT 1


21


3 1

L (*1)

W (*2)

VSC

1 1B

9 S1 +BM

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132







DTC

–


05786–02

C1237/37 TIRES OF DIFFERENT SIZE


C1237/37


Trouble Area

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4: 1. When the ignition switch is ON, the speed difference between max. and min. wheel speed is 5 % or more for 20 sec. at vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph)or more. 2. When the ignition switch is ON, the slip difference be wheels at either side of vehicle 6 % or more (vehicle speed: 100 km/h (62 mph) or more). 3. Continuous ABS control for 60 seconds or more. 4. Interference on 1 or more wheels for 20 seconds with the brake pedal depressed, or for 5 seconds when the brake pedal is not depressed.





OK

2 (a)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR Check the speed sensor rotors (See page 05–774 or 05–778). NG


OK

3 (a)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR Check the speed sensors (See page 05–774 or 05–778). NG


OK

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal of the speed sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–




C1241/41

DTC Detecting Condition Low battery voltage is less than 9.8 V at the time of non– operation of ABS control or less than 9.4 V at the time of operation of ABS control, or battery voltage is more than 17.4 V.


Trouble Area Battery IC regulator Power source circuit

05436–04


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

22 IE1

R–W

R–W


Driver Side J/B

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

IG Relay

1 DN

5

5 DH

G–Y

ECU–IG 3

1

2

18 DB

R–W

9 DA


AM1

1 G–R DH 3

G–Y AM1

1

IG1


1 ED1

W (*2)

W–B

ALT 3

3 2

B (*2)

1

W–B


B–G (*1)

ALT

FL MAIN

W–B

1 4B


W–B B–G (*1) B (*2)

Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

IJ

EA

F45133



–






NG


NG


F45090

OK

2


OK

3


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: GND (a) Disconnect the skid control connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK

IG1 C94397

NG




4

–



GND


NG C94397





DTC

–


05787–02

C1246/53 MALFUNCTION IN MASTER CYLINDER PRESSURE SENSOR


C1246/53


Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected: 1. The voltage of sensor signal is out of range (less than 0.3 V, more than 4.7 V). 2. The sensor supply voltage is out of range (above 5.6 V, below 4.4 V). 3. The sensor signal offset value is out of range. 4. Gradient of sensor signal is not within allowed range.


WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator 12 S1 E2 11

O1 Oil Pressure Sensor Y–R 1 GR

S1 PMC 27 S1 VCM

2 Y–G 3 Driver Side J/B

S13 Stop Light SW

1 G–W (*4) IR1

G–W (*4) 2

1

R–W (*3) 11 IE3 R–W (*4)

G–W (*3)

6 IE3

2 DA

2 DL

G–W

1 DM

G–W (*3)

To Stop Light

R–W (*3)

2 IR1

STOP

22 DA

R–W (*4)

37 S1 STP

1 DN

B–G (*1)

Engine Room R/B No.3 FL MAIN B (*2)

ALT 3

3 1

1 ED1

W (*2)

B–L (*2)

2 Engine Room J/B No.4

Battery B–G (*1) *1: 1AZ–FSE *3: LHD *2: 1CD–FTV *4: RHD


1 4B

ALT 1

1 4D

B–G (*1)

2 F45141


–



1 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF MASTER CYLINDER PRESSURE SENSOR Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester. Check that the brake fluid pressure value of the No.1 master cylinder pressure sensor and No.2 master cylinder pressure sensor displayed on the hand–held tester changes when depressing the brake pedal. OK: Brake fluid pressure value is changing. OK

Go to step 4

NG

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASTER CYLINDER PRESSUR SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal of the master cylinder pressure sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–



STP C94397


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–





C1249/58

After the ignition switch is turned ON, the condition that the STP terminal voltage of ECU is 40 % to 67 % of supplied voltage, continues for 1 second or more.


Trouble Area

Stop light switch circuit

05439–04


–



G–W (*4) 2

1 G–W (*3)

2 IR1

R–W (*4)

G–W (*4)

11 IE3

R–W (*3) FL MAIN

2 DA

6 G–W (*3) IE3 22 DA

R–W (*4)

C J/C B J31 J30

W–B

G–W

1 DM

G–W

37 S1 STP

1 DN


ALT 1


W–B (*5)

STOP

2 DL

R–W (*3)

B–G (*1)

B (*2)


Driver Side J/B

1 4D 2

B–G (*1)

ALT

3




W–B BS


BT

A J/C A J33 J34

W–B (*6, *7)

W–B (*7) 2 4 BD1 BF1 (*6) (*7) *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

W–B (*6)

*5: S/D *6: L/B *7: W/G

3 BG1

W–B (*7)

G–W (*8, *9)

2 W–B (*6) BE1 BX



–




Go to step 4

OK

2


STP C94397


OK


NG

3 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a)






DTC

–


05788–02

C1288/88 ECU VERSION MISS MATCHI



Trouble Area

When either of the following 1 or 2 is detected: 1. ECM does not match. 2. Steering angle sensor is not calibrated.

ECM Steering angle sensor calibration.


PERFORM STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ZERO POINT CALIBRATION Perform the steering angle sensor zero point calibration (See page 05–756).

2 (a)

RECONFIRM DTC Check if the same DTC is stored in the memory. NO

END

YES

3 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05789–02



C1300/62


Trouble Area

1. Skid control ECU continuously detects the continuous operation of ABS at all 4 wheels for max. 1.28 sec. 2. Continuos VSC operation for 10 sec. or more. 3. Internal malfunction in ECU.

ECU


RECONFIRM DTC A

DTC C1300/62

B

Except DTC C1300/62

B


A

2


WITH USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. WITHOUT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: GND (a) Disconnect the skid control connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK

IG1 C94397

NG




3

–



GND

C94397


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C5U–01

C1301/42 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit is used to send TRC & VSC control information from the yaw rate sensor and steering angle sensor information to the skid control ECU DTC No.

C1301/42

DTC Detecting Condition IG1 voltage is 9.5 V or more, and the condition that data from steering angle sensor or yaw rate sensor can not be received continues for 0.1 seconds or more.


Trouble Area Yaw rate sensor Steering angle sensor Yaw rate sensor circuit Steering angle sensor circuit


–



B J7

J/C


D J6

(Shielded)

1 IE8

B J6

B

2 IE8

B

29 S1 SS2

A J6

W

9 IE8

W

13 S1 SS1

D

B J7

J6

D J7

B J6

B

E J7

A J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded) W B


(Shielded)

W–G

C W–L B

16 10 W–G IE8 S1 YGND 30 3 W–L IE8 S1

YIGA


12V

W–L 6 B


F45142



RHD:

–



J19 J/C

13 IO2

(Shielded) F

12

B

IO2

C

11 IO2


(Shielded) B

29 S1 SS2

W

13 S1 SS1

Y1 YAW Rate Sensor




W–G

CAN GND 5 1 LOW

J/C

B J22


F

B W–L J22


A J15 J/C IK

F45143



–



CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(YAW RATE SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the yaw rate sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


0578A–02




Trouble Area

C1350/51

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected. 1. No motor voltage supply within 0.08 sec. after actuation starts the motor relay. 2. A high level of motor voltage when actuation does not starts the motor relay for more than 2.5 sec. 3. The pump motor voltage is high level for a certain time after the motor relay has elapsed.

Brake actuator pump motor ABS motor relay circuit



B–G (*1)

VSC

ALT 1

21


3 1

W (*2)

L (*1)

4 2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 VSC

1 1B

9 S1 +BM

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

W–B Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132



–








–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542O–04

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ABS & EBD & BA Check Sheet


Customer’s Name

/

/


/


km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (

times a day)

ABS does not operate. ABS does not operate efficiently. BA does not operate. EBD does not operate.

Symptoms

ABS Warning Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

Brake Warning Light (PKB released)

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

STOP LIGHT SW

ON

OFF

NO SYS ABS SYSTEM Freeze Frame Data

BA FAIL SF

#IG ON VEHICLE SPD


km/h MPH


–


TRC & VSC Check Sheet

Inspector’s : Name VIN /

Production Date

Customer’s Name

/


/

/

km miles

Odometer Reading

/


Continuous

/ Intermittent (

times a day)

TRAC does not operate. (Wheels spin when starting rapidly.) VSC does not operate. (Wheels sideslip at the time of sharp turning.) TRC OFF Indicator Light Symptoms

Check Item

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

VSC Warning Indicator

Displays

Does not Display

SLIP Indicator Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

Skid Control Buzzer

Sounds

Does not Sound

ABS Warning Light

Normal


)

Malfunction Indicator Light

Normal


)

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

VSC/TRC OFF SW SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION

Freeze Frame Data

OFF

ON VSC/TRC P,N

2

R

3

D

4

L

FAIL

STEERING ANG

deg

YAW RAT

deg/s

MAS CYL PRESS THROTTLE MAS PRESS GRADE

V deg MPa/s

G (RIGHT&LEFT)

G

G (BACK&FORTH)

G



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542Q–04


Using SST 09843–18040, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. If malfunction is not found when inspecting parts, inspect the ECU and ground points for poor contact. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code. For details of each code, refer to the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No.” in the DTC chart. When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified. DTC chart of ABS system: DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

C0200 / 31 (05–774)


Right front speed sensor Right front speed sensor circuit Right front speed sensor rotor

C0205 / 32 (05–774)


Left front speed sensor Left front speed sensor circuit Left front speed sensor rotor

C0210 / 33 (05–778)


Right rear speed sensor Right rear speed sensor circuit Right rear speed sensor rotor

C0215 / 34 (05–778)


Left rear speed sensor Left rear speed sensor circuit Left rear speed sensor rotor

C0226 / 21 (05–782)


Brake actuator SFRR or SFRH circuit

C0236 / 22 (05–782)


Brake actuator SFLR or SFLH circuit

C0246 / 23 (05–782)


Brake actuator SRRR or SRRH circuit

C0256 / 24 (05–782)


Brake actuator SRLR or SRLH circuit

C0273 / 13 (05–784)



C0278 / 11 (05–787)



C1237 / 37 (05–807)

Wrong tire size

Tire size Speed sensor rotor

C1241 / 41 (05–808)

Low battery positive voltage or abnormally high battery positive voltage


C1249 / 58 (05–815)


Stop lamp switch Stop lamp switch circuit

C1300 / 62 (05–819)



C1330 / 35 (05–774)

Open circuit in right front speed sensor circuit


C1331 / 36 (05–774)

Open circuit in left front speed sensor circuit


C1332 / 38 (05–778)

Open circuit in right rear speed sensor circuit




–


C1333 / 39 (05–778)

Open circuit in left rear speed sensor circuit



Malfunction in skid control ECU Open circuit in ABS warning light circuit


DTC chart of VSC system: DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

C0365 / 43 (05–790)

Malfunction in lateral acceleration sensor (combined in yaw rate sensor)


C0371 / 55 (05–793)

Malfunction in yaw rate sensor circuit


C1224 / 44 (05–797)

Open or short circuit in NE signal circuit


C1201/45 (05–796)

VSC shut down due to ECM failure

ECM

C1203 / 59 (05–799)

ECM communication circuit malfunction


C1208 / 54 (05–801)

Malfunction in steering angle sensor


C1225 / 25 (05–805)



C1226 / 26 (05–805)



C1227 / 27 (05–805)



C1228 / 28 (05–805)



C1246 / 53 (05–812)

Malfunction in master cylinder pressure sensor


C1288 / 88 (05–818)

Malfunction in ECM version

Steering angle sensor zero point calibration

C1301 / 42 (05–821)

Malfunction in CAN communication circuit (steering angle sensor circuit, yaw rate sensor circuit)

Steering angle sensor circuit Yaw rate sensor circuit

C1350 / 51 (05–825)




Malfunction in skid control ECU Open circuit in VSC warning light circuit



Trouble Area


–


DTC of sensor check function : Code No.

Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1271/71



C1272/72



C1273/73



C1274/74



C1275/75

Change in output voltage of right front speed sensor

Right front sensor rotor

C1276/76

Change in output voltage of left front speed sensor


C1277/77

Change in output voltage of right rear speed sensor

Right rear sensor rotor

C1278/78

Change in output voltage of left rear speed sensor




–


ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542N–04



2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9





10


11

Repair

12

Confirmation Test

–


End HINT: Step 3, 6, 9, 12: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand–held tester. Fail safe function: When a failure occurs in the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC systems, the ABS warning light, the VSC warning light and the TRC OFF indicator light come on and the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC operations are prohibited. In addition to this, when the failure that disables the EBD operation occurs, the brake warning light comes on as well and the EBD operation is prohibited.



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 056T1–03

LOCATION


Skid Control Sensor Combination Meter (ABS Warning Light) (Brake Warning Light) (VSC Warning Light) (TRC OFF Indicator Light) (SLIP Indicator Light)

Left Front Speed Sensor Speed Sensor Rotor Steering Angle Sensor

ECM

Skid Control Buzzer


TRC OFF Switch

DLC3

Stop Lamp Switch

Yaw Rate Sensor (Include Lateral Acceleration Sensor) F45086



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0577Y–02

ABS Warning Light

BRAKE Warning Light

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

VSC Warning Light SLIP Indicator Light

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Check the warning lights. (1) Release the parking brake lever. (2) When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the ABS warning light, Brake warning light, VSC warning light, TRC OFF indicator light and SLIP indicator light come on for approx. 3 seconds.

HINT: TRC OFF Indicator Light

When the parking brake is applied or brake fluid level is low, the Brake warning light comes on. If the ECU stores DTC, the ABS warning light , VSC warning light and TRC OFF indicator light come on. If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to troubleshooting for the light circuit. Trouble Area

F45094

DLC3


05–827

Brake warning light circuit

05–840


05–831

TRC OFF indicator light circuit

05–844

SLIP indicator light circuit

05–848

(b)

Tc

CG C52361

Without using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Using SST, connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read the DTC from the ABS warning light or VSC warning light on the combination meter.

HINT:

If no code appears, inspect the diagnostic circuit, ABS warning light circuit or VSC warning light circuit. Trouble Area


See page

See page

Tc terminal circuit

05–852


05–827


05–831


As an example, the blinking patterns for the normal code and codes 11 and 21 are shown on the left. (4) Codes are explained in the code table on page 05–766. (5) After completing the check, disconnect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3, and turn off the display. If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time, the lowest numbered DTC is displayed first. (c) With using the hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Hook up the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.

0.25 sec. 0.25 sec.

ON

OFF Code 11 and 21 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec. 1.5 sec. 4 sec.


Normal Code 2 sec.

–

2.5 sec.

ON OFF Code 11

Code 21

R01346

(d)

BR3890

Without using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Using SST, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Clear the DTCs stored in the ECU by depressing the brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 seconds. (4) Check that the ABS warning light and VSC warning light indicates the normal code blinking pattern. (5) Remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040

HINT: Disconnecting the battery cable during repairs will not erase the DTCs in the ECU. (e) With using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.



–


2. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed on the Hand–held tester, you can read the value and status of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on the tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item ABS MOT RELAY SOL RELAY VSC / TRC OFF SW

Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS motor relay / ON or OFF Solenoid relay / ON or OFF VSC / TRC OFF switch / ON or OFF

STOP LIGHT SW


PKB SW


WHEEL SPD FR

WHEEL SPD FL

WHEEL SPD RR

WHEEL SPD RL

DECELERAT SENS1 IG VOLTAGE SFRR SFRH SFLR SFLH SRRR (SRR) SRRH (SRH)

Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Lateral acceleration sensor 1 reading / min.: –1.869 G, max.: 1.869 G ECU power supply voltage / NORMAL or TOO LOW ABS solenoid SFRR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFRH / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFLR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFLH / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRRR (SRR) / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRRH (SRH) / ON or OFF


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ON : Motor relay ON

–


–

ON : Switch ON OFF : Switch OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released ON : Parking brake applied OFF : Parking brake released

–

–

–

Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed


Approximately 0 0.1G at Reading changes when vestill condition hicle is bounced NORMAL : 9.8 V or over TOO LOW : Below 9.8 V

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–


Item SRLR SRLH SRCF(SA1) SRCR(SA2) SRMF(SMCF,SA3)

SRMR(SMCR,STR)

ENGINE SPD

VEHICLE SPD

Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS solenoid SRLR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRLH / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRCF(SA1) / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRCR(SA2) / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRMF(SMCF,SA3)1 / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRMR(SMCR,STR) / ON or OFF Engine Speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 6000 rpm Maximum wheel speed sensor reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH), max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH)

–


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

ON : Operate

–

Actual engine speed

–



YAW RATE

Yaw rate sensor/ Min.: –128 deg/s, Max.: 128 deg/s

–

YAW ZERO VALUE

Memorized zero value/ Min.: –128 deg/s, Max.: 128 deg/s

–

STEERING ANG

MAS CYL PRS1 TEST MODE #CODES

Steering sensor/ Min.: –1152 deg, Max.: 1150.875 deg Master cylinder pressure sensor 1 reading / min.: 0 V, max.: 5 V Test mode / NORMAL or TEST Number of DTC recorded / min.: 0, max.: 255


–

When brake pedal is released : 0.3 – 0.9 V NORMAL : Normal mode TEST : During test mode Min.: 0, max.: 26

Reading increases when brake pedal is depressed


–


3. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the Hand–held tester allows the relay, solenoid, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on tester, select the ”ACTIVE TEST”. HINT: IG must be turned ON to proceed Active Test using a hand–held tester. *1: For VSC equipped vehicles only Item


SFRR

Turns ABS solenoid SFRR ON / OFF

SFRH

Turns ABS solenoid SFRH ON / OFF

SFLR

Turns ABS solenoid SFLR ON / OFF

SFLH

Turns ABS solenoid SFLH ON / OFF

SRRR(SRR)

Turns ABS solenoid SRRR(SRR) ON / OFF

SRRH(SRH)

Turns ABS solenoid SRRH(SRH) ON / OFF

SRLR

Turns ABS solenoid SRLR ON / OFF

SRLH

Turns ABS solenoid SRLH ON / OFF

SRCF(SA1)

Turns TRAC solenoid SRCF (SA1) ON / OFF

SRCR(SA2)

Turns TRAC solenoid SRCR (SA2) ON / OFF

SRMF(SMCF,SA3)

Turns TRC solenoid SRMF (SMCF,SA3) ON / OFF

SRMR(SMCR,STR)

Turns TRC solenoid SRMR(SMCR,STR) ON / OFF

SFRR & SFRH


SFLR & SFLH



Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard


Item

–



SRH & SRR

Turns ABS solenoid SRH & SRR ON / OFF

SRLR & SRLH


SFRH & SFLH


SRCF & SRCR

Turns ABS solenoid SRCF & SRCR ON / OFF

SRMF & SRMR

Turns ABS solenoid SRMF & SRMR ON / OFF

SOL RELAY

Turns ABS solenoid relay ON / OFF

ABS MOT RELAY


ABS WARN LIGHT


VSC WARN LIGHT

Turns VSC warning light ON / OFF

VSC / TRC OFF IND

Turns VSC / TRC OFF indicator ON / OFF

SLIP INDI LIGHT

Turns SLIP indicator light ON / OFF

BRAKE WRN LIGHT


VSC WARN BUZ

Turns VSC warning buzzer ON / OFF


Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of motor can be heard Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Buzzer can be heard


4. (a) (b)

–


FREEZE FRAME DATA The vehicle (sensor) status memorized during ABS and/or VSC operation or at the time of error code detection can be displayed using the hand–held tester. Only one record of the freeze frame data is stored and the freeze frame data generated during ABS and/or VSC operation are constantly updated. Also, the number of the operations of the ignition switch ”ON” after the freeze frame data is stored can be memorized up to 31 and it can be displayed.

HINT: If the ignition switch ”ON” operation exceeds 31 times, ”31” appears on the display. (c) If the diagnosis code malfunction occurs, the freeze frame data at the occurrence of the malfunction is stored but the ABS actuation data is deleted. Hand–held tester display VEHICLE SPD

Measurement Item

Reference Value*

Vehicle speed





0 to 31

MAS CYL PRESS

Master cylinder pressure sensor output voltage

Release brake pedal: 0.3 to 0.9 V Depress brake pedal: 1.5 to 4.5 V

MASS PRESS GRADE

Master cylinder pressure sensor changing gradient

–30 to 200 MPa/s

Operate system

ABS operate: ABS BA operate: BA VSC (TRC) operate: VSC (TRC)

Yaw rate angle sensor output value

–70 to 70

Steering sensor output value

Left turn: Increase Right turn: Drop

Throttle position sensor output value

Release accelerator pedal: edal: Approx. A rox. 0 deg Depress accelerator pedal: Approx. 90 deg

Right and left G

–1.869 to 1.869 G

TRC OFF switch signal

TRC OFF SW ON: ON OFF: OFF

Shift lever position

P: P R: R N: N D: D 2: 2 L: L

STOP LIGHT SW # IG ON

SYSTEM YAW RATE STEERING ANG THROTTLE G (RIGHT & LEFT) VSC (TRC) OFF SW

SHIFT POSITION

*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”Idling”, it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF.



−


5.

Without using hand−held tester: ABS SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) NOTICE: After replacing the steering angle sensor and/or ECU, perform zero point calibration of the steering angle sensor or system decision (When replacing the ECU) (See step 7.). HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during test mode, the DTCs will be erased.

DLC3

(a)

Ts

CG C52361

Procedures for test mode: (1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (2) Using SST, connect terminal Ts and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843−18040 (3) Check that the steering wheel is in the straight− ahead position and shift the shift lever to P range. (4) Turn the ignition switch ON. (5) Check that the ABS warning light blinks.

HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink, inspect the ABS warning light circuit or Ts terminal circuit. Trouble area

See Page

Ts terminal circuit

05−854


05−827

(b)

Check the speed sensor signal. (1) Drive the vehicle straight forward at the speed of 45 km/h (28 mph) or over for several seconds and check that the ABS warning light goes off.

HINT: The sensor check may not be completed if the wheels spin or the steering wheels are steered during this check. (c) Stop the vehicle.

DLC3

(d)

Tc

(e) HINT: S S CG C52361

Using SST, connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843−18040 Read the number of blinks of the ABS warning light. See the list of DTCs on page 05−766. If every sensor is normal, the normal code is output (A cycle of 0.25 second ON and 0.25 second OFF is repeated).


–


If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time, the lowest numbered code is displayed first.

Malfunction Code (Example Code 72 76) 7

2

7

6

ON OFF

1.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec.

0.5 sec.

2.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

4 sec. Repeat BR3893

(f)

6.

After the check, disconnect the SST from terminal Ts and CG, Tc and CG of DLC3 and turn the ignition switch to OFF. SST 09843–19040

With using hand–held tester: ABS SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) NOTICE: After replacing the steering angle sensor and/or ECU, perform zero point calibration of the steering angle sensor or system decision (When replacing the ECU) (See step 7.). HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during test mode, the DTCs will be erased. (a) Hook up the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Perform step 5. (c) to (d) on the previous page. (c) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. 7. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ZERO POINT CALIBRATION NOTICE: When replacing the steering angle sensor with column assembly or ECU, Engine and ECT ECU (A/T), Engine ECU (M/T) or when adjusting the front wheel alignment or steering wheel center point in accordance with the removing or installing or replacing the suspension, axle or steering parts, make sure to perform steering angle sensor zero point calibration. (a) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and keep the shift lever at P range. (c) Make sure the steering off center angle is less than ±3° when assembling the steering wheels (Smaller value is desirable). (d) Press the TRC OFF switch and hold it. (e) Check that the following conditions are satisfied. HINT: Engine warning light comes on. ABS warning light is blinking. (f) Depress the brake pedal 3 times or more within 2 seconds. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


(g) Check that the skid control buzzer sounds for 3 seconds. HINT: Press and hold the TRC OFF switch until the skid control buzzer sounds. When it starts sounding, turn off the switch. When the skid control buzzer starts sounding, turn off the TRC OFF switch. If the skid control buzzer sounds, the sensor calibration is in normal completion. If the skid control buzzer does not sound, perform the sensor calibration again. If the skid control buzzer still will not sound, there is malfunction in the steering angle sensor, so check the DTC.



–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542T–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. NOTICE: When replacing the ABS & TRACTION actuator, sensor or etc., turn the ignition switch to OFF. Symptom

ABS does not operate BA does not operate EBD does not operate

Suspect Area If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Speed sensor circuit 4. Check the brake master cylinder with a ABS actuator checker or hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage.

ABS does not operate properly BA does not operate properly EBD does not operate properly

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. Speed sensor circuit 3. Stop light switch circuit 4. Check the brake master cylinder with a ABS actuator checker or hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage.


1. ABS warning light circuit 2. ABS & TRACTION actuator

DTC of ABS check cannot be performed

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. Tc terminal circuit

Sensor signal check cannot be performed

TRC does not operate


1. Ts terminal circuit 2. ABS & TRACTION actuator If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 4. Speed sensor circuit

See page

05–756 05–808 05–774 05–778 32–56

05–756 05–774 05–778 05–815 32–56

05–827 –

05–756 05–852 05–854 –

05–756 05–808 – 05–774 05–778

05–773 DIAGNOSTICS Symptom

–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM Suspect Area

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 4. Speed sensor circuit

See page

05–756

6. Steering angle sensor circuit

05–808 – 05–774 05–778 05–790 05–793 05–801

SLIP indicator light malfunction

1. SLIP indicator light circuit 2. ABS & TRACTION actuator

05–848 –

TRC OFF indicator malfunction

If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. TRC OFF switch circuit

VSC does not operate

5. Yaw rate sensor and deceleration sensor circuit

DTC of VSC check cannot be performed

VSC warning light malfunction


If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. Tc terminal circuit If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal, replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. 2. VSC warning circuit

05–756 05–844

05–756 05–852

05–756 05–831


–


0543K–04

SKID CONTROL BUZZER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The skid control buzzer sounds during VSC operation.

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C G C J11 J21 (*3) (*4)


V7 VSC Warning Buzzer B–Y R–W Buzzer 1 2

3 IE1

B–Y

15 S1 BZ

Driver Side J/B 18 DB

ECU–IG

IG1 Relay

1 DN

1 ED1

B–L (*2)

W (*2)

B–G (*1) Engine Room J/B No.4 FL MAIN

B–G (*1)

1 4B

ALT 1

2

1 4D

B–G (*1)

Engine Room R/B No.3 Battery


B (*2)

ALT 3

1

2

3

W (*2)

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45145



–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(SKID CONTROL BUZZER) Check that skid control buzzer sounds ”ON” and ”OFF” with the hand–held tester. OK


NG

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL BUZZER ASSY 2 1 (+)

(–)

(a) (b)

Disconnect the skid control buzzer connector. Apply battery positive voltage to the terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control buzzer connector, check that the buzzer sounds.

F02192

NG

REPLACE SKID CONTROL BUZZER ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL BUZZER – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal BZ of the skid control ECU and skid control buzzer (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0543J–04

SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The SLIP indicator blinks during TRC & VSC operation.

WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU With Actuator

Combination Meter

B–W

15 C11

22 C11

8 IE1

LG

4 S1 IND

LG

Slip I13 Ignition SW


J/C

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

B–W

IGN

18 DA

2 DH

B–R 6

IG2

AM2

4


AM2 1

2

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R

1

B–R

Engine Room J/B No.4 1 4A

B–G (*1)

1 4B

B–G (*1)

Engine Room R/B No.3 B (*2) *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV

3

3

FL MAIN

Battery B (*2)

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45144



–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the SLIP indicator light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal IND of the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


056T7–03




Driver Side J/B W–L (*2)

TC

D J/C B 17 W–L (*2) J21 J20 DB

15 DL

W–L

6 CA

W–B (*2)

17 S1 TC

13 J8 J/C W–L (*1) B

W–L (*1) B CG

W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1)

4

A

Center J/B 3 CB

A IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD



INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Tc TERMINAL) (a) (b)

Tc

CG


C52361

OK NG


Go to step 3


2 (a)

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the skid control ECU and DLC3 (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542S–04

TERMINALS OF ECU

C94401

Symbols (Terminals No.) WT (2) – GND (6 (6, 10)

IND (4) – GND (6, (6 10)

Wiring Color

Condition IG Switch ON, TRAC OFF Light ON

Below 2.0

IG Switch ON, TRAC OFF Light OFF

10 to 14

IG Switch ON, SLIP indicator light ON

Below 2.0

IG Switch ON, SLIP indicator light OFF

10 to 14

Always

10 to 14

LG B – W LG–B W–B B

LG – W W–B B

+BS (5) – GND (6, 10)

R – W–B

ENG+ (8) – ENG– (7)

Y–B

+BM (9) – GND (6, 10)

L – W–B

PMC (11) – E2 (12)

GR – Y–R

SS1 (13) – SS2 (29)

W–B

IG1 (14) – GND (6, 10)

R–W – W–B

BZ (15) – GND (6, (6 10)

B Y–W B–Y W–B B

IG switch ON

TRC+ (18) – TRC– (19) EBDW (20) – GND (6, (6 10)

Pulse generation

Always

10 to 14

IG switch ON, stop light switch OFF

0.3 to 0.9

Engine idling, slowly tun steering wheel IG switch ON IG switch ON, VSC buzzer is sounded

Tc (17) – GND (6, 10)

STD Voltage (V)

Pulse generation 10 to 14 Below 1.0 10 to 14

IG switch ON, VSC buzzer is not sounded

10 to 14

W–L – W–B

IG Switch ON

10 to 14

G–L

IG switch ON

Pulse generation

IG Switch ON, Brake warning light ON

5 to 9

IG Switch ON, Brake warning light OFF

Below 2.0

P – W–B W B

FR+ (21) – FR– (22)

W–B

IG switch ON, slowly turn right front wheel

AC generation

RL+ (23) – RL– (40)

R–G

IG switch ON, slowly turn left rear wheel

AC generation

D/G (26) – GND (6, 10)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 12

VCM (27) – GND (6, 10)

Y–G – W–B

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

W – W–B

IG switch ON

10 to 14

YIGA (30) – YGND (16)

W–L – W–G

IG Switch ON

10 to 14

PKB (31) – GND (6 (6, 10)

B W–W B–W W–B B

Ts (28) – GND (6, 10)

NEO (32) – GND (6, 10)

Y–B – W–B

VSCW (34) – GND (6, (6 10)

W R–W W–R W–B B

SP1 (35) – GND (6, 10)

L–W – W–B

WA (36) – GND (6, (6 10)



Below 1.5


10 to 14

Engine idling IG Switch ON, VSC warning light ON IG Switch ON, VSC warning light OFF

STP (37) – GND (6, (6 10) RR+ (38) – RR– (39) FL+ (41) – FL– (24)

Vehicle drives at about 20 km/h (12 mph)

Pulse generation 5 to 9 Below 2.0 Pulse generation

IG Switch ON, ABS warning light ON

Below 2.0

IG Switch ON, ABS warning light OFF

10 to 14


Below 1.5


8 to 14

G W–W G–W W–B B P–V

IG switch ON, slowly turn right rear wheel

AC generation

L–Y – R–L

IG switch ON, slowly turn left front wheel

AC generation



CSW (42) – GND (6 (6, 10)

–


IG switch ON, TRC OFF switch pressed

Below 1.5

IG switch ON, TRC OFF switch released

8 to 14

G Y–W G–Y W–B B



–


0543I–04

TRC OFF INDICATOR, TRC CUT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the TRC control main switch. When the TRC OFF switch is pressed, TRC control goes off and the TRC OFF indicator illuminates. Also, turn the TRC OFF indicator light to ”ON” when the VSC system is at the fail safe control. If the ignition switch is turned off, TRC control surely comes on the next time the ignition switch is turned ON.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

7 CA


Combination Meter

Center J/B 6 CD

21 C11

R–W

2 7 LG–B IE1 S1 WT

17 LG–B C11 TRC OFF

Driver Side J/B R–W

7 DB IG1 Relay

1 DN

3

5

5 DH

GAUGE1

1

9 DA

2 AM1


1 DH

G–R 3

AM1

1

IG1

G–Y Engine Room J/B No.4 1 B–G 4D (*1)

ALT 2

1 4B

1


1 ED1

B–L (*2)

B–G (*1)

W (*2)

ALT 3

2

3

1

B (*2)

FL MAIN

J16 J/C W–B (*4) A

T9 TRC Off SW W–B (*4) A 6

14 IE1

G–Y 9

G–Y

42 S1 CSW

Center J/B

Battery

W–B (*3) IJ

10 C1

6 W–B (*3) CA

IL

IP


*3: LHD *4: RHD F45146



–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(TRC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the TRC OFF indicator light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–held tester. OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT TRC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

3

INSPECT TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH (a) (b) (c) 4 3 2 10 9 8 7 6 5

+

E

Remove the TRC OFF switch. Disconnect the TRC OFF switch connector. Measure resistance between terminals + and E of the TRC OFF switch when the TRC OFF switch is ON and OFF. OK:

C94394

NG

TRC OFF switch

Resistance

Pushed in

Continuity

Released

1M or higher

REPLACE TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH

OK

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – TRC OFF SWITCH) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CSW of the skid control ECU and TRC OFF switch (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5 (a)

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05−854 −

DIAGNOSTICS


056T8−03


WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3 TS

W (*1) 12

D

W (*2) CG


J8 J/C

J/C

B W (*2) J21

W−B (*2)

W−B (*1) A

J16 J/C

*1: LHD *2: RHD

W−B (*1) A

28 S1 TS

W

IE2

D

C J20

4

12

W (*1)

Center J/B 3

6

CB

CA

IO

W−B (*2)

IP

IO: 1AZ−FSE IL: 1CD−FTV

C87489


INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL) (a) (b)

Ts

CG


C52361

OK NG

Go to step 3


2 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of the DLC3 and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0543G–04

VSC WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ECU stores DTC, the VSC warning light illuminates on the combination meter.

WIRING DIAGRAM

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)


22 C11

J/C

16 C11


G C R–W J10 J20 (*3) (*4)


W–R


C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN


1 DN

B–G (*1)

5 DH

I13 Ignition SW

2 DH

ECU–IG

5

3

1

2

9 DA AM1

1 DH

G–Y

3 AM1

IG1


IG2 6

4 AM2

B–R B–L (*2) 1 ED1

W (*2)

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

AM2 B–R

1

2

1 1

1A

B–G (*1) B (*2)



1 ALT

4A B–G (*1)

1 4D

3

1 4B

ALT

3

2

B (*2)

1

1

2

FL MAIN

W–B

B–G (*1) W–B

Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

IJ

W–B

10 S1 GND2

W–B

6 S1 GND1

EA

*3: LHD *4: RHD F45147


–



1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSC WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the VSC warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester. OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT VSC WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINATION METER – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056SW–09

ABS WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECU detects trouble, it will prohibit ABS control, turn on ABS warning light, and store the DTC. Connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 to make the ABS warning light blink and output the DTC.



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



22 C11

9 C10 17 C10

W–B (*4) J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A

Driver Side J/B J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4) A



22 S2 WA

R–Y J17 J/C

ABS

C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

17 IE1

R–Y

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM2

IG2

6


1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)


3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


1 (a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the ABS warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–held tester. OK


NG

2 (a) (b) (c)

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY(ABS WARNING LIGHT) (See page 71–1) Disconnect the connector from the skid control ECU. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the ABS warning light. OK: ABS warning light comes on NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(WA CIRCUIT) Check for a short circuit in harness and connector between terminal WA of the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056SV–09



Always ON

DTC Detecting Condition Either of the following 1 or 2 is detected: 1. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the ECU. 2. There is a malfunction in the ECU internal circuit.

Trouble Area Battery Charging system Power source circuit ABS warning light circuit Skid control ECU

HINT: There is a case that hand–held tester cannot be used when there is a malfunction in the ECU.



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

J/C

22 C A B–W J8 J26 C11 (*3) (*4)

9 R–Y C10 17 C10

17 IE1

W–B (*3) W–B (*4)

ABS

R–W


IGN

18 DA IG1 Relay

1 DN 5 DH

5

3

1

2

18 S2 IG1

22 IE1

2 DH

B–R

18 G C J/C G C R–W DB J10 J20 J10 J20 (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) 9 W–B DA

ECU–IG

Skid Control ECU with Actuator 22 R–Y S2 WA

R–W

I13 Ignition SW AM1

1 DH

G–R 3 AM1

IG1 1

4 AM2

IG2 6

B–R G–Y

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 B–R 1 ED1

B–L (*2)

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

1 B–G (*1) 1A

AM2

B–R

1

W (*2)

2

B (*2)

1



3 ALT

1 4A B–G (*1)

1 4D

ALT 2

3

1 1

2

4B

B (*2)

J15 J/C

FL MAIN B–G (*1) B (*2)

J17 J/C

W–B (*4)

A A

A W–B (*3 *1) W–B (*3 *2)

Battery

IJ *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD


3

1

IK

IO

IL

J16 J/C A

A

W–B

W–B

10 S2 GND2

W–B

6 S2 GND1

EA

F45148


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–699). YES


NO

2



YES

3


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. Voltage: 10 to 14 V

GND

GND

IG1

NG


F45088

OK

Go to step 5


4

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground. Resistance: 1 or less

NG GND

–

GND

F45088



5

INSPECT COMBINATION METER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) (a) (b) (c)

GND

GND

WA

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. Using service wire, connect terminals WA and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: ABS warning light goes off.

F45088

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577X–04




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


Combination Meter

B–W

22 C11

4 C11 17 C10

18 IE1

P

J17 J/C W–B (*4)

Brake

J16 W–B J/C (*3)

A

A

A


J/C

18 DA

C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4)

IGN

2 DH

AM2 1 1

B–R

2

W–B (*4) A



12 S2 EBDW

P

1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4)

B–R 4

AM2

IG2

6


1 4A

1 4B

B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2)


3

3

B (*2) A J15 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTC (See page 05–699). OK: Normal code NG


OK

2 (a)

INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT Check for an open or short circuit in the parking brake switch circuit (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE SWITCH CIRCUIT

PARKING

BRAKE

OK

3 (a) (b)

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the brake fluid level in reservoir. Check for an open or shot circuit in brake fluid level warning switch circuit (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT

OK

4 (a)

INSPECT VACUUM WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the vacuum warning switch and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5 (a)

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY(BRAKE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT) Check for an open or short circuit in the combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

OK




6 (a)

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BRAKE ACTUATOR – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the brake actuator and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

050XJ–11

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Rotor

The speed sensor detects wheel speed and transmits the appropriate signals to the ECU. These signals are used for control of the ABS control system. Each of the front and rear rotors has 48 serrations. When the rotors rotate, the magnetic field generated by the permanent magnet in the speed sensor induces an AC voltage. Since the frequency of this AC voltage changes in direct proportion to the speed of the rotor, the frequency is used by the ECU to detect the speed of each wheel.


To ECU


BR3583 BR3582

–V

F00010

DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0200/31 C0205/32

When any of the following 1. to 3. is detected : 1. Non–plausible high frequent signal, high wheel acceleration or high gradient for 20 sec. with the brake pedal applied or for 5 sec. when the brake pedal is not applied. 2. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph), the wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. 3. Deviation of 2 wheel speed.


C1330/35 C1331/36






–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator L–Y A4 ABS Speed Sensor Front LH

2

1


6

R–L

S2 FL–

W

10 S2 FR+

B

9 S2 FR–

2

1

5 S2 FL+

F40884


1 (a) (b)




Go to step 5


2

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR (a) (b) (c) 2

1

(d) C93876


NG


NG



3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FRONT SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each front speed sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4


GND


W04200

(REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminal FR+ – FR– and FL+ – FL– of the skid control ECU. (b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check the signal waveform. HINT: S As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases, a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater. S When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope, error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches, looseness or foreign matter deposited on it. OK




5

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



NG

OK

BR3795

NG


NG



6 (a) (b)




7



HINT: If a foreign object is attached, remove it and after reassembling, check the output waveform. R00948

NG


NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54)



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577U–04

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC



C0210/33 C0215/34

C1332/38 C1333/39


Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 to 3 is detected : 1. Non–plausible high frequent signal, high wheel acceleration or high gradient for 20 sec. with the brake pedal applied or for 5 sec. when the brake pedal is not applied. 2. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph), the wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. 3. Deviation of 2 wheel speed.








R

2 IB1

R

7 S2 RL+

G

1 IB1

G

17 S2 RL–

1

2

P

1 IM1

P

10 IE2

P

19 S2 RR+

1

2

V

10 IM1

V

11 IE2

V

8 S2 RR–

F45131



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


1 (a)


(b)


Go to step 5

NG

2

INSPECT REAR SPEED SENSOR (a) (b)

(c)

Disconnect the skid control sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector. OK: Resistance: 2.2 k or less Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1 M or higher

F41836

Connector 2

2

1


Skid control Sensor Sub–Wire Harness: (a) Disconnect the sub–wire harness connector from floor wire harness. (b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector lock part and connecting part of the connector. (c) Measure resistance between terminal 1 of the connector 1 and terminal 2 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (d) Measure resistance between terminal 2 of the connector 1 and terminal 1 of the connector 2. OK: 1 or lower (e) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector 1 and body ground. OK: 10 M or higher NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). NG



SENSOR

OR


3 (a)

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for on open or short circuit in harness and connector between each skid control sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR SERRATIONS Normal Signal Waveform

GND


W04200



NG

5

INSPECT SENSOR INSTALLATION (a)

Check the sensor installation. OK: There is no clearance between the sensor and rear axle carrier. NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). OK

NG F10178

NG

OK



SENSOR

OR


6 (a) (b)

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TIP Remove the skid control sensor (See page 32–61). Check the sensor tip. OK: No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip. NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). NG


OK

7


Check the sensor rotor serrations. OK: No scratches, missing teeth or foreign objects. NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699).

W04846

NG


NG





–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


050XQ–12

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure acting on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force. DTC No. C0226/21 C0236/22 C0246/23 C0256/24


Trouble Area

Each solenoid circuit




B–G (*1)

ALT 1

ABS 21


3 1

W (*2)

R (*1)


1 1B

3 S2 +BS

R (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2 W–B

1 S2 GND2

W–B

4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM







DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056ST–06


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ABS motor relay supplies power to the ABS pump motor. While the ABS is activated, the ECU switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C0273/13

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. Pump motor voltage is 2.0 V or more for 1 sec. or more at motor relay OFF. 2. Pump motor voltage is (IG – 4.0 V) or less for 0.1 sec. or more at motor relay ON. 3. After the end of the actuation of the motor relay slow down condition of motor does not meet the specification.




B–G (*1)

ALT

ABS

1

21


3 1

L (*1)

4

W (*2)

2 S2 +BM

2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 ABS

1 1B

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 1 W–B

FL MAIN

W–B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


1 (a)



NG

2


+BM

GND

GND


F45088

OK

NG




3

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


Gasoline Engine: ABS (40 A) Engine Room R/B No.4

(b)



ABS (40 A)

F45087

NG


OK

4


GND

GND


F45088

NG


OK CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BM TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

056SS–06



C0278/11


Trouble Area

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1. Internal circuit malfunction in ECU. 2. Valve relay voltage is 0.8 x IG or less for 0.5 sec. 3. Valve relay voltage is high level at valve relay OFF.




B–G (*1)

ALT 1

ABS 21


3 1

W (*2)

R (*1)


1 1B

3 S2 +BS

R (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 1 W–B

FL MAIN

W–B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



+BS

GND


OK

GND

F45088


NG

2



(b)


ABS (25 A) Diesel Engine: Engine Room R/B No.1

ABS (25 A)

NG F45087

OK




3

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


GND

–

GND


F45088

NG

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND) (See page 01–32)

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BS TERMINAL) (See page 01–32)



DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577V–04

C1237/37 SPEED SENSOR ROTOR FAULTY


C1237/37


Trouble Area

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4: 1. Wheel speed deviation of unspecified wheel. 2. Wheel sensor signal failure suspicion. 3. Continuous ABS control for 60 sec. or more.





OK

2

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR NG


NG


OK

3

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR

OK

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal of speed sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

050XX–09


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the power source of the ECU, hence the actuators. DTC No.


C1241/41

With vehicle speed to about 6 km/h (4 mph), battery voltage is less than 9.4 V at the time of non–operation of ABS control or less than 9.2 V at the time of operation of ABS control, or battery voltage is more than 16.9 V.


Trouble Area Battery Charging system Power source circuit


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

J/C

G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4)

22 IE1

R–W

R–W


Driver Side J/B

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

IG Relay

1 DN

5

5 DH

G–Y

ECU–IG 3

1

2

18 DB

R–W

9 DA


AM1

1 G–R DH 3

G–Y 1


1 ED1

W (*2)

W–B

ALT 3

3 2

B (*2) 1

1

W–B


B–G (*1)

ALT

FL MAIN

W–B

1 4B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B B–G (*1) B (*2)

Battery

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

IJ

EA

F45133



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM





NG


NG


F45090

OK

2


OK

3


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V GND

GND

IG1

NG


OK F45088



4

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground.

(b) OK: Resistance: 1 or less

GND

GND

F45088

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND) (See page 01–32)




DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

050XZ–13



C1249/58

DTC Detecting Condition Stop light switch circuit is open, and stop light switch voltage is in the level between 40 % and 70 % of the battery voltage.


Trouble Area Stop light switch Stop light switch circuit


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


G–W (*4) 2

1 G–W (*3)

2 IR1

R–W (*4)

G–W (*4)

11 IE3

R–W (*3) FL MAIN

2 DA

6 G–W (*3) IE3 22 DA

R–W (*4)

C J/C B J31 J30

W–B

G–W

1 DM

G–W

20 S2 STP

1 DN


ALT 1


W–B (*5)

STOP

2 DL

R–W (*3)

B–G (*1)

B (*2)


Driver Side J/B

1 4D 2

B–G (*1)

ALT

3




W–B BS


BT

A J/C A J33 J34

W–B (*6, *7)

W–B (*7) 2 4 BD1 BF1 (*6) (*7) *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD

W–B (*6)

*5: S/D *6: L/B *7: W/G

3 BG1

W–B (*7)

G–W (*6, *7)

2 W–B (*6) BE1 BX



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



Go to step 4

OK

2


Disconnect skid control ECU connector. Measure the voltage between terminal STP and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector when the brake pedal is depressed. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK GND

GND

STP


F45088

NG

3 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a)






DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

0577W–04




Trouble Area

Internal control unit of skid control ECU failure.

ECU


RECONFIRM DTC A

DTC C1300/62

B

Except DTC C1300/62

B


A

2


IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V GND

GND

IG1

NG


OK F45088



3

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



NG GND

–

GND

F45088





DTC

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

05C5B–01




Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected. 1. No motor voltage supply after skid control ECU starts the motor relay. 2. A high level of motor voltage when skid control ECU does not start the motor relay. 3. The pump motor voltage is high level for a certain time after the motor relay has elapsed.

C1350/51




B–G (*1)

ALT 1

ABS 21


3 1

W (*2)

L (*1)


1 1B

2 S2 +BM

L (*2) 1

2

1

B (*2) B–G (*1)

2 1 W–B

FL MAIN

W–B

S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1

W–B Battery

EA




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM







–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050X4–14

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ABS Check Sheet


Customer’s Name

/

/


/

Date Problem First Occurred Frequency the Problem Occurs

km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/ Continuously

/ Intermittently (

times a day)

ABS does not operate. ABS does not operate efficiently. Symptoms ABS Warning Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

Brake Warning Light

Remains ON

Does not Light Up

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

STOP LIGHT SW

ON

OFF

NO SYS SYSTEM Freeze Frame Data

ABS FAIL SF

#IG ON VEHICLE SPD


km/h MPH


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XB–14


Using SST 09843–18040, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. If malfunction is not found when inspecting parts, inspect the ECU and ground points for poor contact. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code. For details of each code, refer to the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No.” in the DTC chart. When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified.

C0200/31 (05–709)


Right front speed sensor Right front speed sensor rotor

C0205/32 (05–709)


Left front speed sensor Left front speed sensor rotor

C0210/33 (05–713)


Right rear speed sensor Right rear speed sensor rotor

C0215/34 (05–713)


Left rear speed sensor Left rear speed sensor rotor

C0226/21 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SFR) circuit

SFRR or SFRH circuit

C0236/22 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SFL) circuit

SFLR or SFLH circuit

C0246/23 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SRR) circuit

SRRR or SRRH circuit

C0256/24 (05–717)

Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SRL) circuit

SRLR or SRLH circuit

C0273/13 (05–719)



C0278/11 (05–722)



C1237/37 (05–725)

Speed sensor rotor is wrong number of teeth on one of the 4 wheels

Speed sensor Sensor rotor Speed sensor circuit

C1241/41 (05–726)

Low battery voltage or abnormally high battery voltage


C1249/58 (05–730)


Stop light switch Stop light switch circuit

C1300/62 (05–733)



C1330/35 (05–709)

Open circuit in right front speed sensor


C1331/36 (05–709)

Open circuit in left front speed sensor


C1332/38 (05–713)

Open circuit in right rear speed sensor


C1333/39 (05–713)

Open circuit in left rear speed sensor


C1350 / 51 (05–735)



Malfunction in ECU

Battery Charging system ABS warning light circuit Power source circuit Skid control ECU




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

DTC of speed sensor check function: Code No.

Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1271/71



C1272/72



C1273/73



C1274/74



C1275/75

Abnormal change in output voltage of right front speed sensor

Right front speed sensor rotor

C1276/76

Abnormal change in output voltage of left front speed sensor


C1277/77

Abnormal change in output voltage of right rear speed sensor

Right rear speed sensor rotor

C1278/78

Abnormal change in output voltage of left rear speed sensor




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050YD–14



2


3


4


5


6


7


8


9





10


11

Repair

12

Confirmation Test

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

End HINT: Step 3, 6, 9, 12: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand–held tester. Fail safe function: When a failure occurs in the ABS system, the ABS warning light comes on and the ABS operation is prohibited. In addition to this, when the failure which disables the EBD operation occurs, the brake warning light comes on as well and the EBD operation is prohibited.



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XD–10

LOCATION


Skid Control Sensor Left Front Speed Sensor

Combination Meter (ABS Warning Light) (Brake Warning Light)

Speed Sensor Rotor


DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch

F45085



–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 0577T–04

PRE–CHECK ABS Warning Light

BRAKE Warning Light

1. (a) (b)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Release the parking brake lever. Check the warning lights. When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the ABS warning light and brake warning light come on for 3 sec.

HINT: F45095

(c)

Tc

CG

C52361

Normal Code 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec. ON OFF Code 11 and 21 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec. 1.5 sec. 4 sec.

2.5 sec.

ON OFF Code 11

Code 21 R01346


Without using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Using SST, connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read the DTC from the ABS warning light on the combination meter.

HINT:

2 sec.

When the parking brake is applied or the level of the brake fluid is low, the brake warning light comes on. If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to troubleshooting for the ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737 or 05–741) or brake warning light circuit (See page 05–744).

If no code appears, inspect the diagnostic circuit or ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737 or 05–744). As an example, the blinking patterns for normal code and codes 11 and 21 are shown on the left. (4) Codes are explained in the code table on page 05–704. If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time, the lowest numbered DTC is displayed 1st. (5) After completing the check, remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (d) With using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. (1) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (e) Without using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Using SST, connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON.


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

(3)

Clear the DTCs stored in ECU by depressing the brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 sec. (4) Check that the ABS warning light indicates the normal code blinking pattern. (5) Remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040

BR3890

HINT: Disconnecting the battery cable during repairs will not erase the DTCs in the ECU. (f) With using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.

2. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed on the Hand–held tester, you can read the value and status of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on the tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item ABS MOT RELAY SOL RELAY

Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS motor relay / ON or OFF Solenoid relay / ON or OFF

STOP LIGHT SW


PKB SW


ABS OPERT FR

ABS operation (FR) / BEFORE or OPERATE

ABS OPERT FL

ABS operation (FL) / BEFORE or OPERATE

ABS OPERT RR

ABS operation (RR) / BEFORE or OPERATE

ABS OPERT RL

ABS operation (RL) / BEFORE or OPERATE


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ON : Motor relay ON

–


–

ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released ON : Parking brake applied OFF : Parking brake released BEFORE : No ABS operation (FR) OPERATE : During ABS operation (FR) BEFORE : No ABS operation (FL) OPERATE : During ABS operation (FL) BEFORE : No ABS operation (RR) OPERATE : During ABS operation (RR) BEFORE : No ABS operation (RL) OPERATE : During ABS operation (RL)

–

–

–

–




Item

WHEEL SPD FR

WHEEL SPD FL

WHEEL SPD RR

WHEEL SPD RL

IG VOLTAGE SFRR SFRH SFLR SFLH SRRR (SRR) SRRH (SRH) SRLR SRLH AIR BLD SUPPORT TEST MODE #CODES

Measurement Item / Range (Display) Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH, max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) ECU power supply voltage / NORMAL or TOO LOW ABS solenoid (SFRR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFRH) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFLR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFLH) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRRR (SRR)) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRRH (SRH)) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRLR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRLH) ON / OFF Air bleed support / SUPPORT or NOT SUP Test mode / NORMAL or TEST Number of DTC recorded / min.: 0, max.: 255

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed


Actual wheel speed

–

Actual wheel speed

–

NORMAL : 9.8 V or over TOO LOW : Below 9.8 V

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Operate: ON

–

Not supported

–

NORMAL : Normal mode TEST : During test mode

–

Min.: 0, max.: 19

–

3. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the Hand–held tester allows the relay, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) From the display on the tester, select the ”ACTIVE TEST”.



Item

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


SFRR

Turns ABS solenoid (SFRR) ON / OFF

SFRH

Turns ABS solenoid (SFRH) ON / OFF

SFLR

Turns ABS solenoid (SFLR) ON / OFF

SFLH

Turns ABS solenoid (SFLH) ON / OFF

SRRR

Turns ABS solenoid (SRRR) ON / OFF

SRRH

Turns ABS solenoid (SRRH) ON / OFF

SRLR

Turns ABS solenoid (SRLR) ON / OFF

SRLH

Turns ABS solenoid (SRLH) ON / OFF

SFRR & SFRH


SFLR & SFLH


SRRR & SRRH

Turns ABS solenoid SRRR & SRRH ON / OFF

SRLR & SRLH


SFRH & SFLH


ABS MOT RELAY


ABS WARN LIGHT


BRAKE WRN LIGHT


4. (a) (b)

Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of motor can be heard Observe combination meter Observe combination meter

FREEZE FRAME DATA The vehicle (sensor) status memorized during ABS operation or at the time of error code detection can be displayed using the hand–held tester. Only one record of the freeze frame data is stored and the freeze frame data generated during ABS operation are constantly updated. Also, the number of the operations of the ignition switch ”ON” after the freeze frame data is stored can be memorized up to 31 and it can be displayed.

HINT: If the ignition switch ”ON” operation exceeds 31 times, ”31” appears on the display. (c) If the diagnosis code malfunction occurs, the freeze frame data at the occurrence of the malfunction is stored but the ABS actuation data is not stored. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–703 DIAGNOSTICS Hand–held tester display VEHICLE SPD

–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

Measurement Item

Reference Value*

Vehicle speed




# IG ON


0 to 31

SYSTEM

Operate system

ABS operate: ABS

STOP LIGHT SW

*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”Idling”, it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 5. SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during the test mode, the DTCs of the sensor check function will be erased. (a) Check the sensor signal. (1) Start the engine. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (3) Select the TEST MODE.

0.13 sec.

0.13 sec.

ON

OFF BR3904


(4) Check that the ABS warning light blinks. HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink, inspect the ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737). (5) Drive the vehicle straight forward. HINT: Drive the vehicle faster than 45 km/h (28 mph) for several sec. There is a case that the sensor check is not completed if the vehicle has its wheels spun or its steering wheel steered during this check. (6) Stop the vehicle. (7) Using SST, connect the terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. (b) Read the DTC from the hand–held tester screen. HINT: See the list of DTCs shown on the 05–704. Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XH–14

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. NOTICE: When replacing Skid Control ECU, sensor or etc., turn the ignition switch to OFF. Symptom

Suspect Area 1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Speed sensor circuit

ABS does not operate

4. Check the brake actuator with a hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 5. When the above areas (1. to 4.) are all normal but the problem still occurs, replace the skid control ECU. 1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. Speed sensor circuit

ABS does not operate properly

3. Stop light switch circuit 4. Check the brake actuator with a hand–held tester. If there is malfunction, check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 5. When the above areas (1. to 4.) are all normal but the problem still occurs, replace the skid control ECU.

See page 05–699

05–709 05–713 32–53

05–699 05–709 05–713 32–53


1. ABS warning light circuit 2. Skid control ECU

05–737 –

DTC check cannot be performed

1. ABS warning light circuit 2. Tc terminal circuit 3. When the above areas (1. and 2.) are all normal but the problem still occurs, replace the skid control ECU.

05–737 05–748

Speed sensor signal check cannot be performed

1. D/G terminal circuit 2. Skid control ECU


– –


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

05C5C–01


WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3

Driver Side J/B

13

W–L (*2) J8 J/C W–L (*1) W–L (*1)

4

B B W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1)

TC

CG


A

17 DB

15 DL

W–L

6 CA

W–B (*2)

25 S2 TC

Center J/B 3 CB

A IO

IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD F45136

Except 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TC


Driver Side J/B W–L (*2) 13

D J/C B 17 W–L (*2) J21 J20 DB

15 DL

W–L

6 CA

W–B (*2)

25 S2 TC

J8 J/C W–L (*1) B CG

4

W–L (*1) B

W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1) A

Center J/B 3 CB

A IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM



DLC3

(a) (b)

Tc

CG


C52361

OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the skid control ECU and the DLC3 (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XF–14

TERMINALS OF ECU

F45089


Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

+BM (2) – GND (1, 4)

L – W–B

Always

10 to 14

+BS (3) – GND (1, 4)

R – W–B

Always

10 to 14

L–Y – R–L

IG switch ON Slowly turn left front wheel

AC generation

RL+ (7) – RL– (17)

R–G

IG switch ON Slowly turn left rear wheel

AC generation

FR+ (10) – FR– (9)

W–B

IG switch ON Slowly turn right front wheel

AC generation

FL+ (5) – FL– (6)

D/G (11) – GND (1, 4) EBDW (12) – GND (1 (1, 4)

PKB (14) – GND (1, (1 4) IG1 (18) – GND (1, 4) RR+ (19) – RR– (8)

STP (20) – GND (1 (1, 4)

WA (22) – GND (1, (1 4)

W–G – W–B


8 to 12

IG switch ON, BRAKE warning light ON

5 to 9

IG switch ON, BRAKE warning light OFF

Below 2.0


Below 2.0


10 to 14

IG switch ON

10 to 14

P – W–B W B

B W–W B–W W–B B R–W – W–B P–V

IG switch ON Slowly turn right rear wheel

AC generation


8 to 14


Below 4.0

G W–W G–W W–B B IG switch ON, ABS warning light ON

5 to 9


Below 2.0


SP1 (23) – GND (1, 4)

L–W – W–B

Vehicle drive at about 20 km/h (12mph)

Tc (25) – GND (1, 4)

W–L – W–B

IG switch ON




–

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM

05C5D–01


WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TS


J8 J/C W (*1)

12 IE2

W (*1)

12

D

D

13 S2

W

TS

W (*2) Center J/B CG

W–B (*2) 4

3

6

CB

CA

W–B (*2)

J16 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B (*1)

A

A IO

*1: LHD *2: RHD

IP

F45137

Except 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TS

W (*1) 12

12 IE2

W (*1) D

W (*2) CG


J8 J/C

D J20

D J/C

B W (*2) J21

W–B (*2) 4

13 S2 TS

W

Center J/B 3 CB

6 W–B (*2) CA

J16 J/C W–B (*1) A

W–B (*1) A IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD




−

ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM


INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL)

DLC3

(a) (b)

Ts

CG

C52361


OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 − BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of the DLC3 and the skid control ECU (See page 01−32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU − DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01−32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32−54)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

11

–


05A7M–02

ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature inside the cabin and sends the appreciate signals to the A/C amplifier. DTC No.

11

Detection item

Trouble Area

Open or short in room temperature sensor circuit

Cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assembly GR A17 A/C Room Temp. Sensor G 1

2

22 A16 TR

6 A16 SG–5

I35373



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TR – SG–5) (a) A16

SG–5

A15

(b) (c)

TR I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal TR and SG–5 of A/C amplifier connector at each temperature. Standard: 1.8 to 2.2 V at 25_C (77_F) 1.2 to 1.6 V at 40_C (104_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, the voltage decreases. OK

NG




2

–


INSPECT COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR (a) (b)

Remove cooler the thermistor (room temp. sensor). Measure the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) connector at each temperature. Standard: 1,615 to 1,785 at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases. I30111

Resistance (k)


NG

OK


REPLACE COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal TR and SG–5 of A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4 (a) (b)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 8.5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. Standard: Normal codes are output. MG

OK SYSTEM OK



OR


DTC

12

–


05C7L–01

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature outside the cabin and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. DTC No.

12

Detection item

Trouble Area

Open or short in ambient temperature sensor circuit

Thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) Harness or connector between thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) and combination meter Combination meter Harness or connector between combination meter and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM

Combination Meter 14 C10

13 C10 12 C10 11 C10

I14 Integration Relay P–B

1 IC1

P–B P MPX2MPX1 11 22

A/C Control Assembly 10 IC1

P

20 A15 MPX–

Engine and ECT ECU (A/T)Engine ECU (M/T) 10 23 20 18 21 29 29 P P–B A15 MPX+ E9 E9 E10 MPX1MPX2 E9 E10 E9 (*3) (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) (*3) A1 A/C Ambient Temp. Sensor 4 W W IE1 2 1 15 W–R W–R IE1 *1: 1CD–FTV *2: 1AZ–FSE *3: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE I35374



–



INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY C10–12

C10–11

(a) (b)

I37583

Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Measure resistance between the terminal C10–11 and C10–12 of the ambient temp. sensor connector at each temperature. Standard: 9.0 to 9.8 k at 0_C (0_F) 2.7 to 2.9 k at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, resistance decreases.

Resistance (k)


OK NG




2 (a) (b)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINATION METER – OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR) Disconnect the connector from ambient temp. sensor. Check continuity between the terminal C10–11 (12) of combination meter assy and the terminal A1–1 (2) of ambient temp. sensor connector. Standard: Continuity NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3 (a) (b)


REPLACE OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR




DTC

13

–


050TN–10

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature inside the cooling unit and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. DTC No.

13

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open or short in evaporator temperature sensor circuit.

Cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator ( temp. sensor)) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assembly W–G A19 A/C Thermistor B 1

2

16 A15 SG–4

10 A16 TE

I35373



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TE – SG–4) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

TE

SG–4 I36144

NG


Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal TE and SG–4 of A/C amplifier connector at each temperature. Standard: 2.0 to 2.4 V at 0_C (32_F) 1.4 to 1.8 V at 15_C (59_F)

OK



2

–


INSPECT COOLER THERMISTOR NO.1 (a) (b)

Remove the cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor). Check the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor) at each temperature, as shown in the chart. Standard: 1,500 at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases. E50650

Resistance (k)


NG

REPLACE COOLER THERMISTOR NO.1

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER THERMISTOR NO.1 – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal TE and SG–4 of A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a) (b)

–



OK SYSTEM OK




DTC

21

–


05C7M–01

SOLAR SENSOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE)




21

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open or short in solar sensor circuit circuit. ( the checking g is being g performed in a dark place,, DTC 21 (If could be displayed.)




1 IF1

L

21 A16 TSP

LG

2 IF1

LG

9 A16 TSD

O

3 IF1

O

15 A16 S5–4

2 3

1

I35375



–



INSPECT COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR

2

(a) (b)

1

I33908




(SOLAR

SENSOR)

OK

2


TSD

A16

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between solar sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 131415161718192021222324

TSP

S5–4

I37731

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3 (a) (b)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 8.5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. Standard: Normal codes are output NG





DTC

23

–


0564B–07

PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The pressure sensor sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier assy when the A/C refrigerant pressure drops too low or rises too high. When the A/C amplifier receives these signals, it outputs signals though the A/C amplifier to switch OFF the compressor relay and turns the magnetic clutch OFF. DTC No.

23

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open in pressure sensor circuit. Abnormal refrigerant pressure. below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) over 3,140 kPa (32.0 kgf/cm2, 455 psi)

A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) Harness or connector between A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

WIRING DIAGRAM A3 A/C Pressure Sensor

VC GND VOUT

A/C Control Assembly B–W

3 G–W 1 L–W 2

7 IE2 8 IE2 17 IE2

B–W G–W L–W

16 A16 S5 18 A16 SG 7 A16 PRE

I35376



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(PRE) A16

(a) (b)

A15

(c) (d) SG

PRE

(e) I36144

Install the manifold gauge set. Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Check the voltage between terminal PRE and SG of A/C amplifier connector when refrigerant pressure is changed. The voltage changes following refrigerant pressure change, as shown in the diagram below. Standard: Low Pressure Cut Side ON (0V)

225 kPa

196 kPa OFF (4.5 – 5.5 V)

OK

Reference : High Pressure Cut Side ON (0V) 2,550 kPa 3,140 kPa OFF (4.5 – 5.5 V)


NG

2

INSPECT AIR CONDITIOER PRESSURE SENSOR (a) (b) (c) 2

(d) 1

3

(+) (V) 4.9 4.8

Disconnect the pressure sensor connector. Install the manifold gauge set (See page 55–38). Connect the positive (+) lead from the three 1.5 V dry cell batteries to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1. Check the voltage between terminals 2 and 1 of pressure sensor. Standard: The voltage varies with on the refrigerant pressure as shown in the chart.

(–)

Dry Cell Battery

1.0 0.5 0.1 0 0.39

3.19 MPa

NG I35425

OK


REPLACE SENSOR

AIR

CONDITIOER

PRESSURE


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE SENSOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between pressure sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4 (a) (b)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. After turning the ignition switch ON, read DTC. Standard: Normal codes are output. NG

OK SYSTEM OK



OR


DTC

24

–


05C7N–01

SOLAR SENSOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE)




24

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Open or short in solar sensor circuit circuit. (If ( the checking g is being g performed in a dark place,, DTC 24 could be displayed.)




1 IF1

L

21 A16 TSP

LG

2 IF1

LG

9 A16 TSD

O

3 IF1

O

15 A16 S5–4

2 3

1

I35375



–



INSPECT COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR (a) (b)

1

3

I33908




(SOLAR

SENSOR)

OK

2


TSD

A16

Check for open or short circuit in harness and connector between solor sansor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 131415161718192021222324

TSP

S5–4

I37731

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3 (a) (b)

–







DTC

31

–


05A7T–02

AIR MIX DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE)


TPP terminal voltage (V) 4


31

Detection Item

Trouble Area




MAX 4 (*1) HOT 5 (*2)

MAX 5 (*1) COOL 4 (*2)

W (*2)

Y (*2)

PT 3 V (*2) VZ 2 (*1) 1 (*2)

GND 1 (*1) 2 (*2)

R (*2)

P (*2)


5 IQ1

4 IQ1

3 IQ1

1 IQ1

2 IQ1

2 A15 AMPH

W (*1) W (*2) Y (*1) Y (*2) V (*1) V (*2) R (*1) R (*2) P (*1)

1 A15 AMPC

20 A16 TPP

1 A16 S5–1

13 A15 SG–1

P (*2) *1: LHD *2: RHD I35377



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPP – SG–1) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

TPP

SG–1 I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Change the set temperature to activate the air mix damper and measure the voltage between terminal TPP and SG–1 of A/C amplifier assy. Standard: MAX. COOL: 3.5 to 4.5 V MAX. HOT: 0.5 to 1.8 V


NG




2

–



LHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL

5 4 3 2 1

PT VZ

GND I35383

Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy connector. Resistance: 4.2 to 7.8 k While operating air mix damper servo sub–assy as shown in the procedure on page 05–1133, measure the resistance between terminal PT and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy. Standard: MAX. HOT: 3.4 to 6.2 V MAX. COOL: 0.8 to 1.6 V


RHD Models: MAX. HOT

MAX. COOL

PT VZ

GND

NG I36141


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX NO.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a) (b)

–







DTC

33

–


05A7X–02

AIR OUTLET DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the position of the mode damper and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. The position sensor is built in the mode damper servo sub–assy.

TPM terminal voltage (V) 4

1 0 100% Damper opening angle DTC No.

33

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Short to ground or power source circuit in mode damper position sensor circuit.



M



4 A15 3 A15 19 A16 14 A16 15 A15


I35378



–



INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPM – SG–3) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

SG–3

TPM

I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with being connectors connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Change the set to activate the mode damper sub–assy and measure voltage between terminal TPM and SG–3 of A/C amplifier assy. Standard: FACE: 3.5 to 4.5 V DEF: 0.5 to 1.5 V

HINT: As the is moved from FACE side to DEF side, the voltage decreases gradually with out interruption. OK


NG

2


FACE

(c)

DEF

5 4 3 2 1

VZ

PT

GND

I35385

Remove the mode damper servo sub–assy. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of mode damper servo sub–assy connector. Standard: 4.2 – 7.8 k While operating mode damper servo sub–assy as in the procedure on page 05–1136, measure the resistance between terminal PT and GND of mode damper servo sub– assy. Standard: DEF: 3.4 to 6.2 k FACE: 0.8 to 1.6 k

HINT: As the mode damper servo sub–assy moved from DEF side to FACE side, the resistance decreases gradually with out interruption. NG

OK




3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between mode damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4 (a) (b)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 1.0 minutes after turnig the ignition switch ON. Standard: Normal codes are output. NG




OR


DTC

36

–


05A80–02

AIR MIX DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE)


TPI terminal voltage (V) 4


36

Detection Item

Trouble Area




M



B GR


12 A15 11 A15 8 A16 2 A16 14 A15


I35378



1

–


INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPD – SG–2) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

TPD

SG–2 I36144

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Change the set temperature to activate the air mix damper and measure the voltage between terminal TPD and SG–2 of A/C amplifier. Standard: MAX. COOL: 3.5 to 4.5 V MAX HOT: 0.5 to 1.8 V


NG




2

–



RHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL

5 4 3 2 1

PT

VZ GND I35383

Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy connector. Resistance: 4.2 to 7.8 k While operating air mix damper servo sub–assy as shown in the procedure on page 05–1139, measure resistance between terminal PT and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy. Resistance: MAX. HOT: 3.4 to 6.2 k MAX. COOL: 0.8 to 1.6 k



MAX. COOL

PT

VZ GND

I36141

NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a) (b)

–







DTC

41

–


05A83–02

AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This air mix damper servo sub–assy is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air mix damper to the desired position. DTC No.

41

Detection Item

Trouble Area




MAX 4 (*1) HOT 5 (*2)

MAX 5 (*1) COOL 4 (*2)

W (*2)

Y (*2)

PT 3 V (*2) VZ 2 (*1) 1 (*2)

GND 1 (*1) 2 (*2)

R (*2)

P (*2)


5 IQ1

4 IQ1

3 IQ1

1 IQ1

2 IQ1

2 A15 AMPH

W (*1) W (*2) Y (*1) Y (*2) V (*1) V (*2) R (*1) R (*2) P (*1)

1 A15 AMPC

20 A16 TPP

1 A16 S5–1

13 A15 SG–1

P (*2) *1: LHD *2: RHD I35377



–



PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch (passenger side) and change to step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand. Display Code


0

COOL side (0% open)

1

COOL side (0% open)

2

COOL side (0% open)

3

COOL side (0% open)

4

COOL/HOT (50% open)

5

COOL/HOT (50% open)

6


7


8


9


OK

NG




2

–



LHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL


5 4 3 2 1

MAX COOL

MAX HOT I35383


MAX. COOL

MAX HOT

MAX COOL

I36141

NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER NO.2 SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper control servomotor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

43

–


05A87–02

AIR OUTLET DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit turns the servomotor and changes each mode damper position by the signals from the A/C amplifier assy. When the AUTO switch is on, the A/C amplifier changes the mode automatically between ”FACE”, ”BI–LEVEL”, ”FOOT” and ”FOOT/DEF” according to the temperature setting. DTC No.

Detection Item

Trouble Area

43

Air mode damper position sensor value does not change even if A/C amplifier operated mode damper control servomotor.



M



4 A15 3 A15 19 A16 14 A16 15 A15


I35378



–



PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Warm up engine. Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change it to the step operation. Check the air flow by hand. Display code

Air flow condition

0

FACE

1

FACE

2

FACE

3

FACE

4

FACE1

5

B/L

6

FOOT1

7

FOOT

8

FOOT/DEF

9

DEF

OK

NG




2

–



FACE

(c)

Remove the mode damper servo sub–assy. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal DEF and negative (–) lead to terminal FACE then check that the lever turns to ”DEF” position. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal FACE and negative (–) lead to terminal DEF then check that the lever turn to ”FACE” position.

DEF

5 4 3 2 1

FACE

DEF

I35385

NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between mode damper servo sub–assy and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

46

–


05A8A–02

AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The air mix damper servo sub–assy is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air mix damper to the desired position. DTC No.

46

Detection Item

Trouble Area




M



B GR


12 A15 11 A15 8 A16 2 A16 14 A15


I35378



1 (a) (b) (c)

–


PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch (driver side) and change to the step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand. Display Code


0


1


2


3


4

COOL/HOT (50% open)

5

COOL/HOT (50% open)

6


7


8


9


NG

OK




2

–



RHD Models:

(a) (b)

MAX. HOT

(c) MAX. COOL


5 4 3 2 1

MAX COOL

MAX HOT I35383


MAX. COOL

MAX HOT

MAX COOL I36141

NG


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix control servomotor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C7P–01

AIR CONDITIONER MAGNETIC VALVE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The air conditioner magnetic valve is controlled by A/C amplifier.

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W (*2)

H J26

J/C

F J27 R–W (*2)

2 IK2

R–W

A/C Control Assembly R

2

1

3 IK2

R

8 A15 SOL+

R–W (*1)

Center J/B 1 R–W CB (*1)

C3 Compressor Assembly

9 CJ

Driver Side J/B From 6 HTR DC Fuse *1: LHD *2: RHD I35381



–



PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change to the step operation. Check the air flow level by hand. Display Code

Blower level

0

ON

1

ON

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF

5

OFF

6

OFF

7

OFF

8

OFF

9

OFF

OK


NG

2

INSPECT AIR CONDITIONER MAGNETIC VALVE (a)

Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Standard: 10 to 11 at 25 C (77 F) If the resistance is not as specified, replace the compressor assy.

NG

REPLACE W/PULLEY COMPRESSOR ASSY

I36135

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal SOL+ of A/C amplifier and battery + terminal (See page 01–32). NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


050TW–10

BACK–UP POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the back–up power source for the A/C amplifier. Power is supplied even when the ignition switch is off and is used for diagnostic trouble code memory etc.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fuse Block ECU–B2 6

B–W

1

6

2


Center J/B W–R

10 CC

7 CF

W–R

24 A16 +B

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 B–G (*1) DCC 1 4 5 B–W B (*2) IE4 IP1 1 1A 2 1 (*3) (*4) Engine Room R/B No.3 B (*2)

3

3

B (*2)


B–G (*1)

1 4A

B–G (*1)

Center J/B W–B (*3)

6 CA

3 CG

W–B (*3)

13 A16 GND

J17 J/C FL MAIN

W–B (*4) A

A

W–B (*4) A

J15 J/C Battery IP


IK

*3: LHD *4: RHD

I35395



–



CHECK FUSE(ECU–B2, DCC FUSE) Remove the ECU–B2 fuse and DCC fuse from the fuse block and engine room J/B. Check for the continuity of ECU–B2 fuse and DCC fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) A16

(a) (b)

A15

Remove the A/C amplifier with being connected. Measure the voltage between terminal +B and GND of A/C amplifier. Standard: 10 to 14 V

+B

GND

NG I36144

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–


05C7O–01

BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The blower motor is operated by signals from the A/C amplifier. Blower motor speed signals are transmitted by changes in the Duty Ratio. Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and then B is the period of non–continuity. Blower Level (Reference) HI M8 M7

Si duty (%)

M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 LO

Duty Ratio =

A A+B

x 100 (%)

A OFF 5 V B

ON 0 V

1 cycle 26.3 37.8 51.6 65.3 83.7 30.9 44.7 58.4 74.5

100.0

I36148

WIRING DIAGRAM B5 Blower Motor Controller

SI

+B

VM

GND

A/C Control Assembly L–B 2 B 3

2 IJ2

B–W

1 IJ2

W–B

4 IJ2

4

1

3 IJ2

5

R

L–B B4 Blower Motor B L M 2 1

L–B

A16 BLW Driver Side J/B From 2 HTR DF RELAY

L–B

W–B

A

J15 J/C IK


I36133


–



PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set to actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change to step operation. Check the air flow level by hand. Display Code

Blower level

0

0

1

1

2

16

3

16

4

16

5

16

6

16

7

16

8

16

9

31

OK


NG

2

INSPECT BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY (a) 1

Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and negative (–) to terminal 2. Standard: Blower motor operates smoothly. If operation is not as specified, replace the blower motor.

2

NG

LHD RHD

REPLACE BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY

I30151

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY – BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between blower w/fan motor sub–assy and blower motor control (See page 01–32). NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL – BODY GROUND) (a) B5

1

2

3

Check for an open circuit in harness and connector between terminal GND of blower motor control and body ground (See page 01–32).

4

GND

NG

I37588

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5

INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(BLW) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c) (d)

BLW

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch ON. Blower switch is ON. Measure the waveform between terminal BLW of A/C amplifier and body ground. OK: Pulse generation

HINT: I36144

The correct waveform is as shown. Waveform varies with blower level.

2V/ Division

GND 500 s sec. / Division

I31456

NG


OK

6 (a)

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between A/C amplifier and blower motor control (See page 01–32). NG

OK REPLACE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–



Inspector’s name:




/

/


/


Continuous

Weather

Fine

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Symptoms

km Miles

Odometer Reading

Intermittent

Cloudy Warm

/ (

Snowy

Cool


Cold (Approx.

F C

)







Vent Control Faulty


1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

I30150



–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TJ–13

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check (sensor check), check the circuit listed for the code in the table below (Proceed to the page given for that circuit). DTC No. (See Page) 00 11 *1 (05–1102)

Detection Item Normal

21 *3 (05–1113)

– (8.5 min. or more)

Ambient temperature sensor circuit (open/short)

Thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) Harness or connector between thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) and combination meter Combination Combinationmeter meter Harness or connector between combination meter and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

(8.5 min. or more)

Evaporator temperature sensor circuit (open/short)

Cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

(8.5 min. or more)

Solar sensor circuit (open) (Passenger side)

Automatic light control sensor (solar sensor) Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar ( l sensor)) and d A/C amplifier lifi assy A/C amplifier assy

Solar sensor circuit (short) (Passenger side) Pressure sensor circuit

Solar sensor circuit (open) (Driver side) Solar sensor circuit (short) (Driver side) Air mix damper position sensor circuit (Passenger side)

31 (05–1122)

Air outlet damper position sensor circuit 33 (05–1126)

Air mix damper position sensor circuit (Driver side) 36 (05–1129)

41 (05–1133)

– Cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) Harness or connector between cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy

23 (05–1116)

24 *3 (05–1119)

Memory

Room temperature sensor circuit (open/short)

12 *2 (05–1106)

13 (05–1109)

Trouble Area

Air mix damper control servomotor (Passenger side)


A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) Harness or connector between A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) and A/C amplifier assy A/C amplifier assy Automatic light control sensor (solar sensor) Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar ( l sensor)) and d A/C amplifier lifi assy A/C amplifier assy


–



(1 min. or more)


(1 min. or more)


(1 min. or more)


(15 sec.)

05–1095 DIAGNOSTICS Air outlet damper control servomotor 43 (05–1136)

46 (05–1139)

Air mix damper control servomotor (Driver side)

–



(15 sec.)


(15 sec.)

HINT:

*1: If the room temp. is approx. –18.6C (–3.7F) or lower, DTC 11

may be output even though the sys-

tem is normal. If the ambient temp. is approx. –52.9C (–61.4F) or lower, DTC may be output even though the system is normal. *3: If the check is being performed in a dark place, DTC 21 and 24 (solar sensor circuit abnormal) could be displayed. *2:



–


050U2–12

HEATER RELAY CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The heater relay is switched on by signals from the A/C amplifier. It supplies power to the blower motor.

WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B HTR HTR Relay 1

2 DP

L

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

1 DN

G–Y

5 DH

5

2

4

3

34 DA 2 DF

A/C Control Assembly 17

GR–R L–B

A16 HR

To Blower Motor W–B

4 DF

IG1 Relay 5

3 9 DA

1


2

AM1

1 DH

G–R

G–Y

3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y


1 ED1

W (*2)

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1 HTR 1 L W (*2) 1 1B 2 1

3 140A ALT 3

2

1

3

B (*2)

Engine Room R/B No.4 B–G (*1)

1 4C 1 4D

120A ALT (*3) 100A ALT (*4) 1 4B

B–G (*1) B (*2) W–B

FL MAIN

W–B IJ

Battery

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

*3: 1AZ–FSE, 1AZ–FE *4: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE I35394


–



CHECK FUSE(HTR FUSE) Remove the HTR fuse from the driver side J/B and engine room J/B. Check for the continuity of HTR fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

INSPECT HEATER RELAY (a)

Check for the continuity between each pair of terminals of cooler relay assy, as shown in the chart. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

3–5

Less than 1 (When battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2)

No continuity

Less than 1 3–4

No continuity (When battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2)

1–2

Approx. 1.3 k

E32993

NG

REPLACE HEATER RELAY

OK

3


A15

(b)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Measure the voltage between terminal HR of A/C amplifier and body ground when ignition switch is ON and OFF. Standard:

Ignition switch position

Blower switch position

Voltage (V)

OFF

OFF

0

ON

ON

Below 1.0

ON

OFF

10 to 14

HR I36144

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–


05C7R–01

HOT GAS HEATER MAGNETIC VALVE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION For the hot gas heater, it is necessary to fulfill the following 6 conditions. Hot gas heater switch is ON. Recirculation damper position is FRS. Blower motor switch is in the position other than OFF. Ambient temperature varies according to the following condition; A/C switch ON

Below –1.5C (32F)

A/C switch OFF

Below 8C (46F)


WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W (*2)

H J/C H R–W J26 J26 (*2)

11 IE1

C4 Condenser Assembly R–W

A/C Control Assembly R–B

1

2

18 IE2

R–Y

7 A15 MGV

Driver Side J/B 6 DC

5 DB

R–W (*1)

From HTR Fuse *1: LHD *2: RHD I35380



1

–


INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER (a) A16

A15

(b)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Measure the voltage between terminals MGV of the A/C amplifier and body ground. Standard:

MGV I36144

OK


Voltage (V)

Operate

Below 1.0

Not Operate

No Continuity

PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

NG

2

INSPECT W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY (a)

I36136

Apply voltage between terminals and check that the refrigerant passages switch.

NG

REPLACE W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY

OK

3 (a)

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY – AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between w/ receiver condenser assy and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG





–


05C7S–01

HOT GAS HEATER SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Hot gas heater performs only when its switch turns to ON and fulfill the following 6 conditions. Hot gas heater switch is ON. Recirculation damper position is FRS. Blower motor switch is in the position other than OFF. Ambient temperature varies according to the following condition; A/C switch ON

Below –1.5C (32F)

A/C switch OFF

Below 8C (46F)



Center J/B 1 R–W (*2) CB

12 CK

R–W (*2, *1) 3 IG

A/C Control Assembly 11 A16 HOTGASIN

G–Y (*1) IN 6 W–B (*1)

H J26

J/C

E 2

F R–W (*3, *1) J27

A R–W (*3)

J16 J/C

Driver Side J/B

A R–W (*2)

6 DC

From HTR Fuse

W–B (*1)

IL *1: 1CD–FTV *2: LHD *3: RHD I35396



1

–


INSPECT HETER SWITCH ASSY (a)

Check that the continuity when connecting the positive tester lead (+) and the negative tester lead (–) to the following terminals. Standard:


Connecting terminals

ILL+ E IN

ILL– IG I32396

NG

Standard value

ON

IG – IN

Continuity

OFF

IG – IN

No continuity

ON

IG – E

Continuity

OFF

IG – E

No continuity

ON

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

OFF

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

REPAIR OR REPLACE HETER SWITCH ASSY

OK

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(A/C CONTROL ASSEMBLY – BATTERY) (a) A16

A15

(b) (c)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal HOTGASIN and GND of the A/C amplifier. Standard:

HOTGASIN I36144

NG


Standard value

ON

10 to 14 V

OFF

0V


OK

3

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH – BODY GROUND) (a) E

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between heater switch and body ground (See page 01–32).

I32395

NG


OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TG–11



2


3


4



5


6


7

DTC CHART (See page 05–1094) GO TO STEP 10

8


9

ACTUATOR CHECK (See page 05–1091)



–


10


11


12

PARTS INSPECTION

13

REPAIR

14

CONFIRMATION TEST

15

END



–


050TV–11

IG POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the power source for the A/C amplifier and servomotor, etc.

WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B AM1

1 DH

IG1 Relay HTR

1 DN 5 DH

5

3

1

2

H J/C H J26 J26

R–W (*4)

A/C Control Assembly R–W (*4)

Center J/B

6 DC 9 DA

R–W (*3)

1 CB

2 R–W CE (*3)

12 A16 IG

W–B


G–R 1 IG1

AM1 3

Engine Room R/B No.4 120A ALT (*5) 1 100A ALT (*6) 1 4D 4B 2 1

B–G (*1)

Center J/B 6 CA


1 ED1

W (*2)

W–B (*3)

140A ALT 3 2

1 B (*2)

FL MAIN

3 13 W–B CG A16 GND (*3)

A

3

W–B (*4) J17 J/C

A

B–G (*1)

W–B (*4) A

Battery

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD *5: 1AZ–FSE, 1AZ–FE *6: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE

J15 J/C IJ

IP

IK

I36744



–



CHECK FUSE(HTR FUSE) Remove the HTR fuse from the driver side J/B. Check for the continuity of HTR fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2


A15

(b) (c)

IG

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal IG and GND of the A/C amplifier. Standard: 10 to 14 V

GND

NG I36144

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7J–01

LOCATION w/ Hot Gas Heater Models: Magnetic Valve Assy

w/ Pulley Compressor Assy Air Conditioner Magnetic Valve

Pressure Sensor

Pressure Sensor

Cooler (Solar Sensor) Thermistor

Outer Ambient Temperature Sensor


w/ Receiver Condenser Assy

Engine and ECT ECU (A/T) Engine ECU (M/T) Air Conditioner Control Assy (Air Conditioning Amplifier)

Driver Side J/B

DLC3 Heater Switch Cooler (Room Temp. Sensor) Thermistor I35352



–


Recirculation Damper Servo Sub–assy

Mode Damper Servo Sub–assy

Evaporator

Evaporator Temp. Sensor

Blower w/ Fan Motor Sub–assy Blower Motor Control

Airmix No.2 Damper Servo Sub–assy Airmix Damper Servo Sub–assy

I35353



–



Inspector’s name:




/

/


/


Continuous

Weather

Fine

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Symptoms

km Miles

Odometer Reading

Intermittent

Cloudy Warm

/ (

Snowy

Cool


Cold (Approx.

F C

)







Vent Control Faulty


1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

I30150



–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TM–13


Whole functions of the A/C system does not operate.

Suspect Area 1. IG power source circuit 2. A/C amplifier assy 3. Engine ECU

See page


Air Flow Control : No blower operation

1. 2. 3. 4.

Air Flow Control : No blower control

1. Blower motor circuit

05–1148

Air Flow Control : Insufficient air out

1. Blower w/fan motor sub–assy 2. Blower motor circuit 3. A/C amplifier assy

05–1148 05–1148 05–1098

Temperature Control : Cool air does not come out

1. Volume of refrigerant 2. Drive belt tension 3. Refrigerant pressure 4. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 5. Pressure sensor circuit 6. Air mix control servomotor circuit 7. Air mix damper position sensor circuit 8. Room temp. sensor circuit 9. Ambient temp. sensor circuit 10.A/C amplifier assy

55–24 55–46 55–24 05–1151 05–1116 05–1133 05–1122 05–1102 05–1106 05–1098

Temperature Control : Warm air does not come out

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Air mix control servomotor circuit Air mix damper position sensor circuit Ambient temp. sensor circuit Room temp. sensor circuit A/C amplifier assy Heater radiator

05–1133 05–1122 05–1106 05–1102 05–1098 –

Temperature Control : Output air is warmer or cooler than the set temperature or response is slow.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.


05–1102 05–1106 05–1113 05–1122 05–1133 05–1109 05–1098

Temperature Control : No temperature control (only Max. cool or Max. warm)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.


05–1102 05–1106 05–1113 05–1122 05–1133 05–1109 05–1098

No air inlet control

1. Recirculation damper servomotor circuit 2. A/C amplifier assy

05–1153 05–1098

No air outlet control

1. Air outlet damper position sensor circuit 2. Air outlet control servomotor circuit 3. A/C amplifier assy

05–1126 05–1136 05–1098


Blower motor circuit Heater relay circuit Blower w/fan motor sub–assy A/C amplifier assy

05–1144 05–1098 05–294 05–149 05–5 05–528 05–1148 05–1146 05–1148 05–1098


Engine idle up does not occur, or is continuous

–


1. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 2. A/C amplifier assy 3. Engine ECU


05–1151 05–1098 05–294 05–149 05–5 05–528

Set temperature value displayed does not much up with operation of temperature control switch.

1. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 2. A/C amplifier assy

05–1151 05–1098

Brightness does not change when light control switch it turned.

1. Illumination light system 2. A/C amplifier assy

– 05–1098

Unable to access the diagnosis mode.

1. A/C amplifier assy

05–1098

DTC is not recorded. Set mode is cleared when IG switch is turned off.

1. Back–up power source circuit 2. A/C amplifier assy

05–1142 05–1098

Hot gas heater: Symptom Warm wind does not blow out even if the gas heater switch is turned on before the water temperature rises under the condition where the ordinal A/C correctly operates.


Suspect Area 1. Hot gas heater magnetic valve circuit 2. Hot gas heater switch circuit 3. A/C amplifier assy

See page 05–1157 05–1159 05–1098


–


05C7Q–01

RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The recirculation damper servomotor is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air inlet damper to the desired position.

WIRING DIAGRAM A21 Air Inlet Control Servo Motor

Center J/B R–W (*1)

R–W (*2)

1 CB

6 CE

H J26

R–W (*2)

H J26

3

+

R–Y

5 A15 REC

P–B

6 A15 FRS

1

R–W (*2) 2

Driver Side J/B 6

R–W (*2)

J/C

R–W (*1)


DC

From HTR Fuse

*1: LHD *2: RHD I35397



1 (a) (b) (c)

–


PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set to actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch and change to step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand. Display code

Recirculation damper position

0

FRESH

1

FRESH

2

FRESH

3

FRESH

4

RECIRCULATION

5

RECIRCULATION

6

RECIRCULATION

7

RECIRCULATION

8

RECIRCULATION

9

RECIRCULATION

NG

OK




2

–


INSPECT RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY

LHD Models:

(a) (b)

REC

FRS I36092

Remove the recirculation damper servo sub–assy. Connect the positive (+) lead to from the battery to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 2, then check that the arm turns to ”FRS” side smoothly. (c) Connect the positive (+) lead to from the battery to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1, then check that the arm turns to ”REC” side smoothly. If operattions are not as specified, replace the mode damper servomotor.

I36094

RHD Models:

REC

FRS

I36093

I36094

NG

OK


REPLACE RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY


3 (a)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(RECIRCULATON DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – BATTERY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between recirculation damper and battery + terminal (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(REC, FRS) A16

(a) (b)

A15

FRS

Remove A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Measure the voltage between terminal FRS of A/C amplifier and body ground when recirculation switch is operated, as shown in the table. Standard:

REC I36144

(c)


Voltage (V)

FRESH

Below 1.0

RECIRCULATION

10 to 14

Measure voltage between terminal REC of A/C amplifier and body ground when recirculation switch is operated, as shown in the table. Standard:

NG


Voltage (V)

FRESH

10 to 14

RECIRCULATION

Below 1.0





–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7K–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

AIR CONDITIONER AMPLIFIER ASSY A16

A15

121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 242322212019181716151413

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20191817161514131211

I36145


Wiring Color

Condition IG SW: ON Front blower: Operate

Specification

A16–5 (BLW) – A16–13 (GND)

R – W–B

A16–7 (PRE) – A16–18 (SG)

L–W – G–W

A15–20 (MPX–) – A16–13 (GND)

P – W–B


–

A15–10 (MPX+) – A16–13 (GND)

P–B – W–B


–

A15–6 (FRS) – A16–13 (GND)

P–B – W–B

IG SW: ON R/F SW: RECIRCULATION FRESH


A15–5 (REC) – A16–13 (GND)

R–Y – W–B

IG SW: ON R/F SW: FRESH RECIRCULATION


A16–17 (HR) – A16–13 (GND)

GR–R – W–B

IG SW: ON Front blower: OFF Operate


A15–4 (AOF) – A16–13(GND)

L–B – W–B

IG SW: ON Mode switch: DEF. FACE


A15–3 (AOD) – A16–13 (GND)

LG–B – W–B

IG SW: ON Mode switch: FACE DEF.


A16–12 (IG) – A16–13 (GND)

R–W – W–B

IG SW: LOCK ON

A15–2 (AMPH) – A16–13 (GND)

W – W–B

IG SW: ON Set passenger side temp.: MAX. COOL MAX. HOT


A15–1 (AMPC) – A16–13 (GND)

Y – W–B

IG SW: Set passenger side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL


A15–12 (AMDH) – A16–13 (GND)

P–L – W–B

IG SW: Set driver side temp.: MAX. COOL MAX. HOT


A15–11 (AMDC) – A16–13 (GND)

B – W–B

IG SW: Set driver side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL


A16–13 (GND) – Body ground


Always

Continuity

A16–24 (+B) – A16–13 (GND)

W–R – W–B

Always

10 to 14 V

A16–8 (TPD) – A15–14 (SG–2)

GR – Y–R

A16–20 TPP – A15–13 (SG–1)

V–P

A16–9 (TSD) – A16–13 (GND) A16–21 (TSP) – A16–13 (GND)

Start engine Refrigerant pressure: 0 kPa (0 kgf/cm2, 0 psi) 3,138 MPa (32.0 kgf/cm2, 455 psi)

Pulse generation

0.5 4.8 V

Below 10 to 14 V

IG SW: ON Set driver side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL

1.0 4.0 V

IG SW: ON Set passenger side temp.: MAX HOT MAX. COOL

1.0 4.0 V

LG – W–B


0.8 to 3.3 V

L – W–B


0.8 to 3.3 V


05–1099 DIAGNOSTICS Terminal No. (Symbols)

Wiring Color

A16–22 (TR) – A16–6 (SG–5)

GR – G

A16–10 (TE) – A15–16 (SG–4)

–

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Condition

Specification

IG SW: ON Cabin temp.: 25C (77F) 40C (104F)

1.8 to 2.2 1.2 to 1.6 V

B – W–G

Evaporator temp.: 0C (32F) 15C (59F)

2.0 to 2.4 1.4 to 1.8 V

A16–23 (ILL+) – A16–13 (GND)

G – W–B

Light control switch TAIL or HEAD

10 to 14 V

A16–19 (TPM) – A15–15 (SG–3)

GR–R – G–W

IG SW: ON Set air flow setting: DEF. FACE

1.0 4.0 V

A15–8 (SOL+) – A16–13 (GND)

R – W–B

A15–7 (MGV) – A16–13 (GND) (*1)

R–Y – W–B

Start engine Hot gas heater: Operate

A16–11 (HOTGASIN) – A16–13 (GND) (*1)

G–Y – W–B

IG SW: ON Hot Gas SW: ON

10 to 14 V

A16–16 (S5) – A16–18 (SG)

B–W – G–W

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–1 (S5–1) – A15–13 (SG–1)

R–P

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–2 (S5–2) – A15–14 (SG–2)

Y–B – Y–R

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–14 (S5–3) – A15–15 (SG–3)

BR–W – G–W

IG SW: LOCK ON

0 5.0 V

A16–15 (S5–4) – A16–9 (TSD)

O – LG

IG SW: LOCK ON

1.7 4.2 V

A16–15 (S5–4) – A16–21 (TSP)

O–L

IG SW: LOCK ON

1.7 4.2 V

A15–17 (CFAN) – A16–13 (GND)

W–R – W–B

Start engine Condenser fan: operate


A16–19 (PBKIG) – A17–13 (GND)

B–W – W–B

IG SW: ON PARKING BRAKE SW: OFF ON


A17–3 (PBLT) – A17–13 (GND) (*3)

L–R – W–B

IG SW: ON SEAT BELT SIGNAL: OFF ON


A17–4 (RDEFIN) – A17–13 (GND) (*2)

G–W – W–B

IG SW: ON RDEF RELAY : OFF ON


(*1) (*2) (*3) 2.

Start engine Compressor: Operate

Pulse generation 10 to 14 Below 1.0 V

Diesel (standard) only Petrol only Except 1AZ–FE COMBINATION METER A9

A10

I35419


Wiring Color

C10–17 (Z1H) – Body ground


C10–11 (HAY) – C10–12 (HAZ)

W–R – W


Condition Always IG SW: ON Ambient temp.: 25C (77F) 40C (104F)

Specification Continuity 1.35 to 1.75 0.85 to 1.25 V


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C55–01

A AUDIO SYSTEM CANNOT BE OPERATED WITH STEERING PAD SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM Radio Receiver Assy

Steering Pad SW LH 12 AU1 S15

LG

7 R11 SW1

11 AU2 S15

P

8 R11 SW2

10 EAU S15

W–R

6 R11 GND

I35619



–

AUDIO SYSTEM


INSPECT STEERING WHEEL ASSY(AU1, AU2, EAU) (a) (b)

AU1 EAU

AU2

OK


Remove the steering pad switch LH. Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

AU1 – EAU


Approx. 100 k

AU1 – EAU

SEEK+ switch: push

0

AU1 – EAU

SEEK– switch: push

Approx. 0.3 k

AU1 – EAU

VOL+ switch: push

Approx. 1 k

AU1 – EAU

VOL– switch: push

Approx. 3.2 k

AU1 – EAU


Approx. 100 k

AU1 – EAU

MODE switch: push

0

NG I35662



2

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING WHEEL ASSY – RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) (a)

Radio Receiver Assy: SW1

Disconnect the connectors from the steering wheel assy and radio receiver assy. (1) Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Specified condition

SW1– – AU1

Continuity

SW2 – AU2

Continuity

GND – EAU

Continuity

(2) SW2

GND

Steering Wheel Assy:

Check for a short between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

AU1

EAU

AU2


SW2 – Body ground

No continuity

GND – Body ground

No continuity

I37571

NG

OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY


Tester connection SW1 – Body ground


OR


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C54–01

CASSETTE TAPE CANNOT BE EJECTED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

PRESS ”EJECT” AND CHECK OPERATION Press ”EJECT” and check the operation. (1) Press the cassette tape EJECT switch of the radio receiver assembly for 2 seconds or more and check that the cassette tape is ejected. Standard: The cassette tape is ejected. NG


OK

2 (a)

CHECK CASSETTE TAPE Check the cassette tape. (1) Check that the ejected cassette tape does not have the label peeled, cassette body deformation or others. Standard: No fault on the cassette tape. NG


OK

3 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK





–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C53–01

CASSETTE TAPE CANNOT BE INSERTED OR PLAYED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)



OK

2 (a)

CHECK CASSETTE TAPE Check the cassette tape. (1) Check that the cassette tape is a normal tape to which music or voice is recorded. Standard: Proper cassette tape to which music or voice is recorded. NG


OK

3 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another one and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: The function is recovered to be normal. OK





–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C52–01

CD CANNOT BE EJECTED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1

PRESS ”EJECT” AND CHECK OPERATION

(a)

Press ”EJECT”and check the operation. (1) Press the CD EJECT switch of the radio receiver assembly for 2 seconds or more to see if the CD is ejected. Standard: CD is ejected. Reference: If the CD is not ejected, send the vehicle for repair. Do not try to remove it by force. NG


OK

2 (a)

CHECK IF A PROPER CD IS INSERTED Check that a proper CD is inserted. (1) Check that in what conditions the sound skipping occurs. Standard: Driving on the bad road. NG


OK

3 (a)

REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. Standard: Installed properly. OK



CD FAULTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C51–01

CD CANNOT BE INSERTED OR IS EJECTED RIGHT AFTER INSERTION INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1

CHECK IF A PROPER CD IS INSERTED

(a)

Check if a proper CD is inserted. (1) Make sure that the CD is normal audio CD, and that there is no deformation, flaw, stain, burr and other defects on the CD. Standard: Normal audio CD. Reference: Translucent or different–shaped CD cannot be played. CD–ROM for the computers (with music recorded in) and recorded CD –R may not be played. NG

CD FAULTY

OK

2 (a)

CHECK IF A CD IS INSERTED PROPERLY Check that a CD is inserted properly. (1) Check whether or not the CD is inserted upside down. Standard: Not upside down. NG

SET DISC CORRECTLY

OK

3

DISC CLEANING (a)


OK NG


DISC DIRTY


4 (a)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM




CD FAULTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

054A0–09

CD SOUND SKIPS INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1

DISC CLEANING (a)


OK

DISC DIRTY

NG

2 (a)


CD FAULTY

NG

3 (a)

CHECK WHEN THIS HAPPENS Check when this happens. (1) Check that in what condition (place) noise occurs. Standard: Driving on the bumpy road. OK

Go to step 5

NG

4 (a)

COMPARE IT WITH ANOTHER CAR OF SAME MODEL Compare it with another vehicle of the same model. (1) Compare with the vehicle of the same type which does not have a trouble to see if there is any difference in the condition of trouble occurrence. Standard: No difference found. OK

NG


SETTING


5 (a)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

CHECK OF RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Check of radio receiver assembly installation. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. Standard: Installed properly. NG

INSTALL THE RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY PROPERLY

OK

6

DID THE TEMPERATURE IN THE CABIN CHANGE RAPIDLY?

(a)

Did the temperature in the cabin change rapidly? (1) Check whether or not the rapid temperature change occurred in the cabin. Standard: The rapid temperature change occurred. Reference: The rapid temperature change creates condensation inside the CD player, which may prevent the CD from being played. OK



CONDENSATION DUE TO TEMPERATURE CHANGE (LEAVE IT AS IT IS FOR A WHILE BEFORE USING)


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4W–01

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AUDIO SYSTEM Check Sheet


Customer’s Name

Licence No. Brought–in Date

/

/

/

Date of First Occurrence Frequency of Problem Occurrence

km Mile

Odometer Reading

Constant

/

Intermittent (

Times a day)

Problem Symptom

Radio

DTC Check

Switch

Parts name

CD Noise

DTC (1st time).

DTC (2nd time).

Radio receiver assy

I30195



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549F–10

DESCRIPTION 1. RADIO WAVE BAND The radio wave bands used in radio broadcasting are as follows: Frequency

30 kHz

Designation

300 kHz

3 MHz

LF

MF AM

Radio wave Modulation

Amplitude modulation

30 MHz HF

300 MHz VHF FM

Frequency modulation

LF: Low Frequency MF: Medium Frequency HF: High Frequency VHF: Very High Frequency

2. SERVICE AREA There are great differences in the size of the service area for AM and FM broadcasting. Sometimes FM stereo broadcast cannot be received even through AM can be received very clearly. FM stereo has the smaller service area, but it also picks up static and other types of interference (”noise”) easily.

FM (Stereo) FM (Monaural) AM BE2818

3. RECEPTION PROBLEMS HINT: Besides the problem of static, there are some move problems called ”fading”, ”multipath” and ”fade out”. These problems are caused not by electrical noise but by the nature of the radio waves themselves. Fading

(a)

Ionosphere

BE2819


Fading Besides electrical interference, AM broadcasts are also susceptible to other types of interference, especially at night. This is because AM radio waves bounce off the ionosphere at night. These radio waves then interfere with the signals that reach the vehicle’s antenna directly from the same transmitter. This type of interference is called ”fading”.


Multipath

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

(b)

Multipath Interference caused by reflection of radio waves against obstructions is called ”Multipath”. Multipath occurs when radio signals emitted from the broadcast transmitter antenna are reflected against tall buildings or mountains and interferes with other signals which are to be received directly.

(c)

Fade Out Because FM frequency is higher than that of AM, FM radio wave tends to be reflected against obstructions such as tall buildings or mountains. For this reason, FM signals often seems to gradually disappear or fade away as the vehicle goes behind those obstructions. This phenomenon is called ”fade out”.

BE2820

Fade Out

BE2821

4. (a)

NOISE PROBLEMS It is very important for noise troubleshooting to understand a customer’s claim clearly. Use the following table to diagnose the phenomenon. Radio wave


Strong possibility of foreign noise.

Noise occurs when listening to faint broadcasting.

The same program may be broadcasted from some local stations. If the program is the same, one of those may be tuned in.

Noise occurs only at night.

Strong possibility of beat from a distant broadcasting.

Noise occurs at a specific place while driving.

Strong possibility of multipath noise and fading noise caused by changes of FM frequency.

AM

FM

Probable cause

Noise occurs at a specific place.

HINT: If the condition where the noise occurs does not meet any of the above, find out the cause based on ”Reception Problems”. Refer to the description about Multipath and Fading mentioned previously. 5. COMPACT DISC PLAYER (a) Compact Disc (hereafter called ”CD”) Players use a laser beam pick–up to read the digital signals recorded on the CD and reproduce analog signals of the music, etc. 4.7 in. (12 cm) and 3.2 in. (8 cm) discs are available for the CD player. HINT: Never attempt to disassemble or apply oil to any part of the player unit. Do not insert any object into the magazine except for a disc. NOTICE: CD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure. Be sure to operate the player correctly as instructed.



6.

Example : Head

Capstan

(a) (b)

Pinch Roller

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE Tape Player / Head Cleaning: Raise the slot cover with your finger. Using a pencil or similar object, push in the guide. Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner, clean the head surface, pinch rollers and capstans.

N17398

7.

MAINTENANCE CD Player / Disc Cleaning: If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping the surface from the center to outside in the radial directions with a soft cloth. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static preservative. BE4331

8. (a) (b) (c) 9. (a) (b) (c)

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Components in the audio system communicate each other though AVC–LAN. (Radio receiver function) The master component of AVC–LAN is the radio receiver assy with a resistance (60 – 80 ), which is necessary for communication. When short circuit or open circuit occurs in the AVC–LAN circuit, the audio system does not operate normally due to the communication cutoff. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION The audio system has diagnosis function (The diagnosis result is displayed on the LCD of the radio receiver assy). (Radio receiver function) The component code (physical address), or three–digit number (in hexadecimal) is set for each component comprising AVC–LAN. The logical address, or two–digit number (in hexadecimal) is set for each function and component unit in each component.



–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549J–12



Physical address

Logical address


1. RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (Physical address: 190) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, trouble code may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting the engine. *2: It is stored when 180 seconds have passed after the power supply connector is pulled out after the engine starts. *3: It may be stored when the engine key is turned 1 minuite after the engine starts. *4: It may be stored when the engine key is turned again after the engine starts. *5: When 210 seconds have passed after pulling out the power supply connector of the master component with the ignition switch in ACC or ON, this code is stored. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Description

Action to be taken

22

RAM Error

D6 *1

Absence of Master

D7 *5

Connection check Error

D8 *2

No Response to Connection Check

Component shown by sub code is or was disconnected from system after engine start.


D9 *1

Last Mode Error

Audio or visual component operated before engine stop is or was disconnected with ignition switch in ACC or ON.


DA


No response is identified when changing mode (audio and visual mode change). Sound and picture does not change by button operation.

Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code. If error occurs again, replace component shown by sub code.

DB *1

Mode Status Error



Transmission Error

Transmission to component shown by auxiliary code failed. (Detecting this DTC does not necessarily mean actual failure.)

If same sub code is recorded in other component, check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code. (If not, delete DTC and recheck.)

DC *3




Component in which this code is recorded was disconnected from system or master component with ignition in ACC or ON.

Check harness for power supply system of radio receiver assy. Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy.

Component in which this code is recorded was disconnected from system or master component ignition with in ACC or ON.



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

DD *4


After the engine was started, master component was disconnected from system.

Check harness for power supply system of multi–display. Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy. If this error occurs frequently, replace radio receiver assy.

DE *4


After the engine was started, component shown by sub code had been disconnected from system.


E0 *1




E2


Error occures in ON/OFF controlling command from master component.

Replace radio receiver assy


Registration Request command is output from component shown by sub code. Receiving Connection Check Instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.


E3 *1

(b)

Logical address: 61 (Cassette switch)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Description

Action to be taken

40

Mechanical Error of Media

Malfunction due to mechanical failure is identified. Or cassette tape is cut or entangled.

Inspect cassette tape. Replace radio receiver assy.

41

EJECT Error

Malfunction due to mechanical failure.


42

Tape caught in the radio receiver assy

Hub lock etc.

Inspect cassette tape.

(c)


DTC

Diagnosis item

Description

Action to be taken

No Disc Readout



44

CD player Error



45

EJECT Error





Inspect CD.

47

CD High Temp.

High temperature is detected in CD player.


48

CD Excess Current

Excess current is applied CD player.


42

46



–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549G–09



2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (SEE PAGE 05–1398)

3

CHECK AND CLEAR THE DTCS (SEE PAGE 05–1399)

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM OCCURS (GO TO STEP 6)


5

SYMPTOM SIMULATION (SEE PAGE 05–1398)

6

DTC CHECK (SEE PAGE 05–1399) MALFUNCTION CODE (GO TO STEP 7) NORMAL CODE (GO TO STEP 8)

7

DTC CHART (SEE PAGE 05–1405) GO TO STEP 9

8

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (SEE PAGE 05–1412)

9

CIRCUIT INSPECTION (SEE PAGE 05–1413 – 05–1432)

10

CONFIRMATION TEST



END


–

AUDIO SYSTEM


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4X–01

LOCATION Sedan:


Radio Receiver Assy

Steering Pad Switch LH

Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Room J/B No.1 DCC Fuse

Front No.2 Speaker Assy Front No.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.2 Speaker Assy

Rear No.1 Speaker Assy



I35612



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Lift Back:


Radio Receiver Assy





I35613



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Wagon:


Radio Receiver Assy





I35614



–

AUDIO SYSTEM

054A1–09

NOISE OCCURS INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK OF SPEAKER INSTALLATION Check the speaker installation condition. (1) Check that each speaker is securely installed. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

HINT: The radio is equipped with the noise prevention system that works against only the excessively large noise, thereby excessively large noise do not occur in the radio. If large noise occurs, check whether or not the earth on the antenna installation part and the proper noise–prevention equipment are all installed, and whether or not the improper wiring is held. Condition in which noise occurs

Noise type


Alternator noise


Blower motor noise

Rapid acceleration during the drive on the unpaved road or after the IG switch is turned ON makes noise.

Fuel pump noise

Pressing and then releasing the horn switch, and keeping pressing the horn switch makes noise.

Horn noise

Stopping the engine erases the small noise that has been heard.

Ignition noise

Noise occurs in turn with the blink of the turn signal flash.

Flasher noise


Washer noise

Noise occurs during the engine running, and it continues to occur after the engine is stopped.

Water temperature sensor noise


Wiper noise


Stop light switch noise

Others.

Static electricity on the vehicle

HINT:

Identify the condition under which the noise occurs, and check the noise filter on the related part. Make sure first that there is no noise from outside. Failing to do so makes the noise occurrence source detection impossible and leads to misunderstanding. The noise should be removed in descending order of loudness. NG OK IDENTIFICATION OF NOISE SOURCE


INSTALL IT PROPERLY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C4Z–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) WIRING DIAGRAM

J24 J/C L–Y (*5)

Radio Receiver Assy

L–Y (*5)

E

E

4 R9 +B

L–Y (*4) Center J/B 4 CE

8 CB

L–Y (*3) Driver Side J/B

GR

3 DH

RAD No.1

4 DB

1 DH

AM1

1 DN

G I12 Ignition Switch 2 ACC

F F F J/C F GR J8 J20 J8 J20 (*3) (*6)

G–R AM1 3

(*3) (*6)

B–G (*1) B–L (*2)

Fuse Block L–Y (*3)

7

RAD No.2

L–Y (*4) L–Y (*5)

6

2

3 R9 ACC

6

1

R9

B–W

GND

BR (*3) W–B (*6)


3 1

ALT 3 B (*2)

1

W (*2)

3

2

ED1

Engine Room R/B No.1, Engine Room J/B No.1 1 1A

FL MAIN

DCC

5 4 IP1 IE4 1 2 (*6) (*3) Engine Room R/B No.4, Engine Room J/B No.4

B–G (*1) Battery B–G (*1)

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD

1

ALT

1 4A 1

B–W

1

2

1 4D

B–G (*1) IN

4B

*4: RHD, 1CD–FTV, w/o Multi–display *5: RHD, Except *4 *6: RHD I35615



–

AUDIO SYSTEM


INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER ASSY(BU, ACC, GND) ACC

+B

(a) (b)

GND

Remove the radio receiver assy. Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND – Body ground

Always

Continuity

(c)

Check the voltage between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

I35616

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

+B – GND

Always

10 to 14 V

ACC – GND

Ignition SW ACC

10 to 14 V

NG


OR

OK

2 (a)

CHECK FOR PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Check problem symptoms table (See page 05–1412). Suspected areas are cleared

A


B

B

A REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY




–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549I–12

1

PRE–CHECK

6

1. (a)

SEEK DOWN SEEK UP

DISC

I35610

(b)

DIAGNOSIS CHECK Starting Diagnosis Mode (All elements are lighting in the SW check mode). (1) Turn off the audio system and turn the IG switch to ACC. While pressing the preset switches ”1” and ”6” at the same time, press ”DISC” 3 times. (2) Reference: When the system enters the Diagnosis Mode, a ”beep” tone is emitted 3 times and all the elements are lighting in the SW check mode. It takes about 40 seconds to complete the check. Turn all the elements in the LCD on. When pressing the switch, comfirm a beep tone is emitted. Press ”SEEK TRACK UP” button switches to enter the ”Service Check Screen”. Service Check Screen. (1) Reference In the service check mode, the system check and the diagnosis memory check are performed, and the check results are displayed in ascending order of the device codes (physical address.) Terms

Meaning

Component code (Physical address)

Three–digit code (In hexadecimal) given to each device comprising AVC–LAN. Corresponding to its function, individual symbol is provided.

Logical address

Two–digit code (In hexadecimal) given to each function and device unit in each device comprising AVC–LAN.

Code No. (physical address) List Code No. (physical address) 190

(c)


Equipment name Radio receiver assy (Audio head unit)

Finishing Diagnosis Mode. (1) Press ”DISC” for 2 seconds or more, or turn the IG switch OFF.


(d)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Service Check Mode Result Display (for checking the current and the past system conditions). (1) Press the ”SEEK TRACK” switch to see the check result of each device.


good–––”The component is normal”.


CHEC–––”Check needed”.


The illustration shows the case that the system has 2 devices with codes 190 and 360, and the device (code 360) requires a check. The check result is displayed in ascending order of device code. The device code is displayed first, and then the check result.

I34696

(2) Display good

NCON

ECHN

CHEC

Check Result Display.

Original Language

Meaning

Action to be taken

Good (normal)

No DTCs are detected in both ”System Check Mode” and ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.

–

No connection

The system recognized the component when it was registered, but the component gives no response to the ”Diagnosis Mode ON Request”.

Check the power source circuit and the communication circuit of the device indicated by the device code (physical address).

Exchange

One or more DTC for ”Exchange” is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.


Check

When no DTCs are detected for ”Exchange”, one or more DTC for ”Check is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.




–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Display

Original Language

Meaning

Action to be taken

OLD

Old version

Old DTC application is identified and DTC is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.

–

No response

The device gives no response to any one of ”System Check Mode ON Request”, ”System Check Result Request” and ”Diagnosis Memory Request”.

Check the power source circuit and the communication circuit of the device indicated by the device code (physical code).

NRES

(3) (e)


To perform the Service Check again, press the preset switch ”1”. Detailed information Mode (when displaying the troubled device’s DTC) (1) With ”CHEC” or ”ECHN” being displayed, press the preset switch ”2” to go to the detailed information mode. (2) Press the ”SEEK TRACK” switch to display ”System Check Result (SYS)” and ”Diagnosis Memory Response (CODE)”.


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Service Check Mode

PRESET SWITCH ”3” Detail Information Mode

PRESET SWITCH ”2” P–––indicates physical address 190–––physical address

*1

SYS–––system check result

1–––the first code 62–––logical address

Detail information of the first code is displayed

47–––DTC

Continue to display detailed information when more than one DTC is detected. CODE–––diagnosis memory response result 2–––the second code 01–––logical address

DC–––DTC

P–––indicates physical address 360–––sub code

Detail information of the second code is displayed

(*2) 6F–––connection check number 05–––the number of times of occurrence (in decimal) Continue to display detailed information when more than one DTC is detected.


From *1

To *1

The illustration shows the case that the component with code 190 has DTC ”47” and ”dC” as a result of the system check and the diagnosis memory response. The detailed information mode shows the system check result first, then the diagnosis memory response result. (*2): As for the DTCs that do not have any sub code, sub code is not displayed. I34695



–

(3)

AUDIO SYSTEM

Displayed Items in Detailed Information Mode

Division Code for DTC display

Meaning

The order of detailed information displayed when the ”SEEK TRACK UP” switch is pressed. (The order is reversed when the ”SEEK TRACK DOWN” switch is pressed.)

SYS

System check result is displayed.

Logical address DTC

Diagnosis memory check result is displayed.

Logical address DTC Sub code Connection confirmation number The number of times of occurrence

CODE

(4) (5) (f)

Check the trouble area referring to the DTC list. To return to the service check mode, press the preset switch ”3”. Clearing Individual DTC Memory (when clearing the memory of the DTC detected in the past individually) (1) Press the preset switch ”5” for 2 seconds or more while the ”ECHN” is displayed in the service check mode or during the detail information mode.

HINT:

(g)

Beep sound is emitted once when the DTC memory is completely cleared. When the DTC memory is cleared, only the component code (physical address) is displayed for the target component. To check the DTC, press the preset switch ”1” and perform the service check again. Clearance of all the DTC memory (when clearing all the memory of the DTC detected in the past) (1) Start the diagnosis mode after repairing the trouble area. (2) Press the preset switch ”5” for 2 seconds or more. (”CLR” is displayed at this time.)

HINT:


Beep sound is given once when the DTC memory is completely cleared. When the DTCs memory for all the device is cleared, only the component codes (physical address) are displayed. (3) Press the preset switch ”1” to perform the service check again, and check that no DTCs are displayed for all the component codes (physical address).


2. (a)

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

IDENTIFICATION OF NOISE SOURCE Identify the condition under which the noise occurs, and check the noise filter on the related part.


Noise Source


Generator


Blower motor

Rapid acceleration while driving on the unpaved road or after the IG switch is turned ON makes noise.

Fuel pump

Pressing and then releasing the horn switch, and keeping pressing the horn switch makes unusual noise.

Horn

Stopping the engine erases small noise that has been heard.

Ignition

Noise occurs synchronously with the turn signal flash.

Flasher


Washer

Noise occurs during the engine running, and it continues after the engine stops.

Engine coolant temperature sensor


Wiper


Stop light switch

Others.

Static electricity stored on the vehicle

(b)


Reference: Make sure first that there is no noise from outside. Failing to do so makes the noise source detection difficult and leads to misunderstanding. The noise should be removed in descending order of loudness. Setting the radio untuned makes noise noticeable, making the recognition of the phenomenon easier.


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 0549M–11

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Pressing power switch does not start system.

5. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy)

05–1413

Sound quality is bad in all modes. (volume is too low)

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Sound quality is bad in all modes (volume is too low)

05–1413 05–1415

Noise occurs.

–

05–1419

Radio broadcast cannot be received. (bad reception)

–

05–1420

CD cannot be inserted or is ejected right after insertion.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. CD cannot be inserted or is ejected right after insertion

05–1413 05–1422

CD cannot be ejected.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. CD cannot be ejected

05–1413 05–1424

Sound quality is bad only when CD is played.(volume is too low)

–

05–1425

CD sound skips.

–

05–1426

Cassette tape cannot be inserted or played.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Cassette tape cannot be inserted or played

05–1413 05–1428

Cassette tape cannot be ejected.

1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Cassette tape cannot be ejected

05–1413 05–1429

Sound quality is bad only when playing tape.

–

05–1430

Tape is tangled due to incorrect tape speed or auto–reverse malfunction.

–

05–1431

STEERING PAD SWITCH Symptom A audio system cannot be operated with steering pad switch


Suspect Area –

See page 05–1432


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549R–06

RADIO BROADCAST CANNOT BE RECEIVED (BAD RECEPTION) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK IF RADIO AUTO–SEARCH FUNCTIONS PROPERLY Check if the radio auto–search functions properly. (1) Perform the auto–search of the radio and check that it functions normally. Standard: The radio auto–search functions properly. OK


NG

2 (a)

CHECK OPTIONAL COMPONENT Check optional component (Sun shade film, telephone antenna etc.). (1) Check whether or not any optional component is installed, such as the sunshade film and the telephone antenna. Standard: Optional component is installed. OK


NG

3 (a)

CHECK ANTENNA FOR NOISE PRODUCTION Noise Check with Antenna. (1) With the ignition switch in ACC, turn on the radio and choose the AM mode. (2) Place a tip of a screwdriver or the antenna of the antenna assembly w/ holder and check that the noise heard from the speaker. Standard: Noise occurs. OK

NG




4

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER ASSY(ANTENNA) (a)

(b)

E50367

Preparation for Check (1) Remove the antenna plug of the radio receiver assy. Noise Check (1) With the radio receiver assy connector connected, turn the ignition switch to ACC. (2) Turn on the radio and choose the AM mode. (3) Place a flat–head screwdriver or a metal such as a thin wire on the antenna jack of the radio receiver assy and check that the noise heard from the speaker. Standard: Noise occurs.

OK

NG REPLACE ANTENNA CORD SUB–ASSY




–

AUDIO SYSTEM

05C50–01

SOUND QUALITY IS BAD IN ALL MODES (VOLUME IS TOO LOW) WIRING DIAGRAM

Radio Receiver Assy

T15 Front No.2 Speaker Assy RH (+) OUT

P F20 Front No.1 Speaker Assy RH

1

3

2 V

1

4

LG

1 IL1

LG (*1)

1 R9 FR+

L

6 IL1

L (*1)

5 R9 FR–

1 IA1

P (*2)

2 R9 FL+

6 IA1

V (*2)

6 R9 FL–

(+) IN (–) IN 2 (–) OUT

T14 Front No.2 Speaker Assy LH (+) OUT

LG F19 Front No.1 Speaker Assy LH

1

3

2

1

L

P

4

(+) IN V

(–) IN 2 (–) OUT

T17 Rear No.2 Speaker Assy RH (+) OUT

B R25 Rear No.1 Speaker Assy RH

4

R

1

3

(+) IN

2

1

(–) IN 2 W (–) OUT

Y

17 BC1

R

9 IM2

R

W

18 IM2

W

7 BA1

B

1 IC2

B

17 BA1

Y

10 IC2

Y

7 BC1

1 R10 RR+ 3 R10 RR–

T16 Rear No.2 Speaker Assy LH (+) OUT

R R24 Rear No.1 Speaker Assy LH

4 B

1

3

(+) IN

2

1

(–) IN 2 Y (–) OUT

W

2 R10 RL+ 6 R10 RL–

*1: LHD, RHD w/o Multi–display *2: RHD, LHD w/o Multi–display I35617



–

AUDIO SYSTEM


ADJUST SOUND QUALITY Adjust the sound quality. (1) Operate the radio receiver assy to adjust the sound quality. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK

BAD SOUND QUALITY

NG

2 (a)

COMPARE IT WITH ANOTHER CAR OF SAME MODEL Compare it with another vehicle of the same models. (1) Compare with the vehicle of the same type which does not have a trouble to see if there is any difference in the condition of trouble occurrence. Standard: No difference found. OK

NG


SETTING


3

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(RADIO RECEIVER ASSY – SPEAKER ASSY) (a)

FL+ FR+ RL+

Disconnect the connectors from the radio receiver assy and speakers. (1) Check continuity between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart.

RR+

FL– FR–

RR– RL+


(2)


I35618

NG

OK


Tester connection

Specified condition


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity


Continuity

Check for a short between terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Tester connection

Specified condition

FL+ – Body ground

No Continuity

FL– – Body ground

No Continuity

FR+ – Body ground

No Continuity

FR– – Body ground

No Continuity

RL+ – Body ground

No Continuity

RL– – Body ground

No Continuity

RR+ – Body ground

No Continuity

RR– – Body ground

No Continuity

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR(See page 01–32)

OR


4

–

AUDIO SYSTEM


(a)



OK

5 (a)

INSPECT FRONT NO.2 SPEAKER ASSY Check that malfunction disappears when a known good speaker is installed. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

HINT: Connect the all connectors of speakers. NG


OK

6

INSPECT REAR NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY

(a)



OK

7 (a)

INSPECT REAR NO.2 SPEAKER ASSY Check that malfunction disappears when a known good speaker is installed. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

HINT: Connect the all connectors of speakers. NG OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY




–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549Z–09

SOUND QUALITY IS BAD ONLY WHEN CD IS PLAYED (VOLUME IS TOO LOW) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK



CD FAULTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549U–10

SOUND QUALITY IS BAD ONLY WHEN PLAYING TAPE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappear. OK


NG

2 (a)

CHECK FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECT Check for foreign objects. (1) Check that no foreign material and troubles are detected in the radio receiver assembly cassette tape player. Standard: No foreign objects or defects detected. NG


OK

3


Pinch Roller

Capstan

Head cleaning (1) Raise the cassette door with your finger. Next, using a pencil or similar object, push in the guide. (2) Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner, clean the head surface, pinch rollers and capstans. (3) Check that the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears.

N17398

OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY


HEAD DIRTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM

0549V–10

TAPE IS TANGLED DUE TO INCORRECT TAPE SPEED OR AUTO–REVERSE MALFUNCTION INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)



OK

2 (a)

REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK(BELOW 90 MIN.) Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one (90min or less) to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK


NG

3


Pinch Roller

Capstan

OK N17398



Head cleaning (1) Raise the cassette door with your finger. Next, using a pencil or similar object, push in the guide. (2) Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner, clean the head surface, pinch rollers and capstans. (3) Check that the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. HEAD DIRTY


–

AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4Y–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

RADIO RECEIVER ASSY R9

R10

R12

R11

I35611


Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

R9–1(FR+) – R9–7(GND)




R9–2(FL+) – R9–7(GND)

P – BR*1 P – W–B*2



R9–3(ACC) – R9–7(GND)

GR – BR*1 GR – W–B*2

Ignition switch to ACC

10 to 14

R9–4(+B) – R9–7(GND)

L–Y – BR*1 L–Y – W–B*2

Always

10 to 14

R9–5(FR–) – R9–7(GND)

L – BR*1 L – W–B*2



R9–6(FL–) – R9–7(GND)

V – BR*1 V – W–B*2



R9–7(GND) – Body ground

BR*1 – Body ground W–B*2 – Body ground

R9–8(ANT) – R9–7(GND)

B – BR*1 B – W–B*2

Radio switch ON and AM or FM

10 to 14

R9–10(ILL+) – R9–7(GND)

G – BR*1 G – W–B*2

Light control switch TAIL

10 to 14

R10–1(RR+) – R9–7(GND)

B – BR*1 R – W–B*2



R10–2(RL+) – R9–7(GND)

B – BR*1 B – W–B*2



R10–3(RR–) – R9–7(GND)

W – BR*1 W – W–B*1



R10–6(RL–) – R9–7(GND)

Y – BR*1 Y – W–B*2



R11–6(GND) – R9–7(GND)

W–R – BR*1 W–R – W–B*2

R11–7(SW1) – R9–7(GND)



Always

Always Steering pad switch not operating. SEEK+ switch push SEEK– switch push VOL+ switch push VOL– switch push

Continuity

Below 1.0 4 or more Approx. 0.5 Approx. 0.9 Approx. 2.0 Approx. 3.4


R11–8(SW2) – R9–7(GND)

P – BR*1 P – W–B*2

–

AUDIO SYSTEM

Steering pad switch is not operating MODE switch push

4 or more Below 2.5

R12–9 (TX+)

P


–

R12–10 (TX–)

LG


–

*1: LHD *2: RHD



–

COMBINATION METER 05C4F–01

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK COMBINATION METER SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s name: VIN

Customer’s Name


Date of Vehicle Brought In

/

/

Odometer Reading

/

Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs Weather Conditions When Problem Occurred

Weather Outside temperature

Hot Warm Cold (Approx.

Cool F ( C))

Gauge

Malfunction in tachometer Malfunction in water temperature receiver gauge Malfunction in fuel receiver gauge Entire combination meter does not operate Buzzer does not sound

Others

Problem Symptom

/

Constantly Sometimes ( Times per day, month) Once only Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Various/Others


Seat belt warning lamp for driver’s seat does not come on Seat belt warning lamp for front passenger’s seat does not come on The ambient temperature is not displayed


km Mile


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4L–01

ENTIRE COMBINATION METER DOES NOT OPERATE WIRING DIAGRAM Diesel Engine Type (1CD–FTV): J/C Fuse Block 5 4 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1)

DOME 1

6

B–W

2

F 6

F

J10 J26 (*1) (*2)

W–R



IGN

2 DH IG1 Relay

B–L 1 ED1

5

3

2

1

GAUGE1

AM1

1 DN

J/C A C A C J8 J26 J8 J26 B–W B–W (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) Center J/B 6 7 7 CA CD DB R–W R–W 5 6 6 CA CK DH W–B 9 DA W–B 18 DA

1 DH 3 G–R 4

Engine Room J/B No.1 and R/B No.1 DCC 1 1 1A B

2

1 1

AM2 2

1


Ignition Switch 1 AM1

IG1

AM2

IG2

B–R 1 1 IP1 IE4 B–R (*2) (*1) FL MAIN

6

W–B (*1) A J15 J/C

B 3

W

2

W–B (*2)

Battery

ALT 3

21 C11 5 C11

W–B G–Y

B–R

22 C11

1

IK

*1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models


IJ

IP

IL

3

I35761


–

COMBINATION METER

Gasoline Engine Type: J/C


Fuse Block 5 4 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1)

DOME 1

6

B–W

F 2

6

W–R

F

J10 J26 (*1) (*2)


2 DH

IG1 Relay GAUGE1 5 3 2

1

AM1

1 DN

J/C A C J8 J26 B–W (*1) (*2) Center J/B 7 7 DB CA R–W 5 6 DH CA 9 DA

18 DA

IGN

1 DH

A C J8 J26 (*1) (*2) 6 CD 6 CK

B–W

R–W W–B

22 C11 21 C11 5 C11

W–B

W–B G–Y

Ignition Switch

3

1

G–R

AM1 IG1 4

B–R

6 AM2 IG2

Engine Room J/B No.1 and R/B No.1 DCC 1 1 1A B–G

B–G

1 4A 1 4D

2

1

B–R 1

AM2 2

1

B–R


1 1 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1) FL MAIN

W–B (*1) A J15 J/C

B–G ALT 2

1

1 4B

W–B (*2)

Battery IK

IJ

IP

IL




–

COMBINATION METER


INSPECT FUSE(GAUGE2, ECU–B) Check continuity in the GAUGE, DOME fuse. NG

REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY(POWER SOURCE AND GROUND CIRCUIT) (a) (b)

C11–20

(c) C11–22 C11–5

C11–21 I34628

Remove the combination meter assy. Check continuity. (1) Check continuity between the terminal C11–5 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. Standard: Continuity. Check the voltage. (1) Measure the voltage between the terminal C11–20 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. Standard voltage: 10 – 14 V (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Measure the voltage between the terminal C11–21, 22 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. Standard voltage: 10 – 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

COMBINATION METER




2


3

Check multiplex communication system (See page 05–1654)

(a)

Check the DTC output. DTC outputs (Proceed to ”BODY MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM) DTC does not output (Go to step 4)

4

Problem Symptom Confirmation (See page 05–1509)

5


6

Repair or Replace

7

Confirmation Test

8

End



–

COMBINATION METER 056QA–03

LOCATION

Rear Door Courtesy Switch Back Door Courtesy Switch Front Door Courtesy Switch Front Door Courtesy Switch Engine Room No.4 J/B, R/B

Fuel Sender Gauge Assy

Engine Room No.1 J/B, R/B

Park/Neutral Start Switch

I34623



–

COMBINATION METER

Combination Meter Assy Accessary Meter Passenger’s Seat belt Warning Lamp

Driver Side R/B

Center J/B

Fuse Block Occupant Detection Sensor

Driver Side J/B

Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH Front Seat Inner Belt Assy LH

I34624



C11

–

COMBINATION METER

C10

I34625



–

COMBINATION METER

TAIL IND

C11–14 (ILL+)

BEAM–

C10–6 (BEAM–)

C11–12 (BEAM+) TURN–L

C10–17 (POWER EARTH)

C10–3 (AVC LAN+) C10–4 (AVC LAN–)

AVC–LAN I/F

TURN–R

C11–1 (TURN L) C11–13 (TURN R)

DOOR

LIGHTS C10–15 (BEAN (SECURITY))

C10–13 (BEAN (EFI))

BEAN I/F

C10–14 (BEAN (BODY)) C10–12 (OUTSIDE TEMP–) C10–11 (OUTSIDE TEMP+)

OUTSIDE TEMP ODO/TRIP

C10–10 (FUEL) C10–5 (FE)

S

C10–16 (E/G OIL LEVEL)*1 C10–1 (WATER LEVEL)*1

T

C11–5 (SIGNAL EARTH)

C11–19 (SI) C11–3 (TACHO)

CPU F

W

C11–18 (4P OUT) C10–2 (ACC) A/T SHIFT CLOCK

CPU POWER SUPPLY

C11–20 (+B)

I34626



–

COMBINATION METER

CPU C11–21 (IG1+) BUZZER WATER LVL C11–9 (CHECK ENGINE)

CHECK E/G

*1, 2: C11–16 (VSC)

VSC

*1, 2: C11–15 (SLIP)

*3: C11–10 (AUTO LEVELING)

SLIP AUTO LVL

C10–9 (ABS) ABS ACTIVE CIRCUIT

ABS

*3: C11–6 (EMPS)

C11–22 (IG2+) EMPS ACTIVE CIRCUIT

EMPS

C11–4 (EBD) BRAKE ACTIVE CIRCUIT

C11–2 (BRAKE LVL SW)

AIR BAG

BRAKE A/B ACTIVE CIRCUIT

C11–8 (AIR BAG)

E/G OIL LVL FUEL A/T OIL TEMP CHG ECT SNOW D–SEAT BELT Rr FOG *1, 2: C11–17 (TRC OFF)

C10–8 (Rr FOG) C10–7 (Fr FOG)

Fr FOG TRC OFF

C11–11 (OIL PRESS SW)

OIL/P

*1: GLOW CRUISE *1: 1CD–FTV, *2: 1AZ–FSE, 2AZ–FSE, *3: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

I34627


–

COMBINATION METER

Terminal No.

Wire harness side Fuse Filter Warning Switch (*1) 1 2 RAD No.1 Fuse 3 Multi Display 4 Multi Display 5 Fuel Sender Gauge 6 GND 7 Front Fog Light Relay 8 Rear Fog Light Relay

C10

9 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 10 Fuel Sensor Gauge 11 Ambient Temp. Sensor 12 Ambient Temp. Sensor 13 Engine ECU 14 Integration Relay 15 Security ECU 16 Engine Oil Level Sensor 17 18 1 2 3

GND – Turn Signal Flasher Relay Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch Engine ECU

4 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 5 GND 6 EMPS ECU 7 – 8 Airbag Sensor Assembly 9 Engine ECU 10 Headlight Beam Level Control ECU C11

11 Oil Pressure Switch 12 H–HI RH Fuse/H–LP RH Fuse 13 Turn Signal Flasher Relay 14 TAIL Fuse 15 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 16 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 17 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 18 4P OUT (Other Parts) 19 20 21 22

Skid Control ECU with Actuator DOME Fuse GAUGE1 Fuse IGN Fuse

*1: 1CD–FTV



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4K–01

MALFUNCTION IN FUEL RECEIVER GAUGE WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy F25 Fuel Sender Gauge 2

15

3

IC1

BR–W

BR–W

6 IC1

G–W

G–W

5 C10

10 C10

I34419


INSPECT FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY (a) (b)

Remove the fuel sender gauge assy. Check that the float position is between E and F and measure resistance between the terminal 2 and 3 of the connector. (c) Check that the resistance value changes continuously. Standard:

1

e–3–1–B

E51362

NG F 1/2

11.9 mm

E I33111


Float level

Float position mm (in.)

Resistance ()

F

88.6 (3.49) 3 (0.12)

4.0 1.5

1/2

6.4 (0.25) 3 (0.12)

50.5 2.6

E

102.9 (4.05) 3 (0.12)

110.0 3.0

REPLACE FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY


2

–

COMBINATION METER

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY AND COMBINATION METER) (a) (b)

C10–5

(c) C10–10 I34628

Remove the combination assy and fuel sender gauge. Check the continuity between the terminal 3 of the fuel sender gauge and the terminal C10–5 of the combination meter assy. Standard: Continuity. Check continuity between the terminal 2 of the fuel sender gauge and the terminal C10–10 of the combination meter assy. Standard: Continuity.

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4H–01

MALFUNCTION IN SPEEDOMETER WIRING DIAGRAM w/ VSC: Combination Meter Assy

Skid Control ECU

SP1

35 S1

16 IE1

L–W

19 C11

L–W

Center J/B

J15 J/C

A

6 CA

W–B (*1) W–B

6 CK

W–B

5 C11

W–B (*2) IK

IP

IL


w/o VSC: Combination Meter Assy

Skid Control ECU

SP1

23 S2

16 IE1

L–W

19 C11

L–W

Center J/B A

6 CA

W–B (*1) W–B

J15 J/C

6 CK

W–B

5 C11

W–B (*2) IK

IP

IL *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models


I35752


–

COMBINATION METER


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(SKID CONTROL ECU)



Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPEED



–

NG

GO TO BRAKE SYSTEM

OK

2

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Check the input signal waveform. (1) Remove the combination meter assy. (2) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminal C11–19 and C11–5 of the combination meter assy. (3) Start the engine. (4) Check the signal waveform.

C11–5

C11–19

Item I34628

Contents

Tool setting


Vehicle condition


HINT: As the vehicle speed becomes higher, the cycle of the signal waveform becomes shorter. OK


A05135

NG

3 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN SKID CONTROL ECU AND COMBINATION METER ASSY) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Disconnect the connector from the skid control ECU. Check continuity between the terminal S1–35 (SP1)/S2–23 (SP1) of the skid control ECU and the terminal C11–19 of the combination meter connector (See Page 05–770). Standard: Continuity. OK


CHECK AND REPLACE SKID CONTROL ECU


–

COMBINATION METER

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4I–01

MALFUNCTION IN TACHOMETER WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy

ECM

J/C 5 TACH E9

GR–R

B A J27 J9 (*2) (*1)

D E J26 J8 (*2) (*1)

GR–R

3 C11

Center J/B

J15 J/C

A

6 CA

W–B (*1) W–B

6 CK

W–B

5 C11

W–B (*2) IK

IP

IL



READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(ECM)

(a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATE LIST”. ALL(ECM): Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

ENGINE SPEED



–

NG OK




2

–

COMBINATION METER

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Check the input signal waveform. (1) Remove the combination meter assy. (2) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals C11–3 and C11–5 of the combination meter connector. (3) Start the engine.

C11–5

(4)

C11–3

Check the signal waveform. Item

Contents

Tool setting


Vehicle condition

Engine idle speed

I34628

A05138

OK


NG

3 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN ECM AND COMBINATION METER ASSY) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Disconnect the connector from the ECM. Check continuity between the terminal E9–5 (TACH) of ECM and the terminal C11–3 of the combination meter connector (See Page 05–1506). Standard: Continuity. OK





–

COMBINATION METER

05C4J–01

MALFUNCTION IN WATER TEMPERATURE RECEIVER GAUGE WIRING DIAGRAM ECM


18 23 20 MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*1) (*2) (*3)

13 C10

P

*1: 1AZ–FE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV

I35754

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: The ECM sends information on the water temperature sensor to the meter through the Bean. If there is on open or short circuit in the water temperature sensor circuit, the ECM outputs DTCs. Perform troubleshooting with the ”Engine system”.

1




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

COOLANT TEMP




NG


OK

2





–

COMBINATION METER




–


PRE–CHECK 1. DATA LIST According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (e) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. ALL(ECM):

2. (a)

Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPEED



–

ENGINE SPEED



–

COOLANT TEMP




SET BUZZER OFF MODE (SEAT BELT) Within 6 seconds after turning ignition switch to the ON position, depress the ODO/TRIP switch for 10 seconds or more, and fasten the driver’s seat belt to enter the buzzer ON/OFF mode.

HINT: This procedure can be performed when the display shows the ”ODO” mode. (b) When entering the buzzer ON/OFF mode, current buzzer condition is shown on the display. According to the display, select the buzzer OFF mode by operating the ODO/TRIP switch. HINT: After entering the buzzer ON/OFF mode, when the ODO/TRIP switch is not operated for 10 seconds or more, the display returns to the normal mode. When the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery, the buzzer setting returns to buzzer ON mode. 6s Ignition SW

ON OFF ON

ODO/TRIP SW

OFF

Driver’s Seat Belt Unfastened Fastened


10s

10s


–

COMBINATION METER 056QC–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Chart No.

Symptom

See page

1


05–1510

2

Malfunction in tachometer

05–1513

3

Malfunction in water temperature receiver gauge

05–1515

4

Malfunction in fuel receiver gauge

05–1517

5

Entire combination meter does not operate

05–1519

6

Seat belt warning lamp for driver’s seat does not operate

05–1522

7

Seat belt warning lamp for front passenger’s seat does not flash

05–1524

8

The ambient temperature does not display

05–1527

9

Warning buzzer does not sound

05–1530



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4M–01

SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP FOR DRIVER’S SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy I14 Body ECU MPX2

BKL

1 IC1

22 P–B

12 IC1

9 L–R

B9 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy 3 G–Y 1 W–B

L–R

P–B Driver Side J/B 14 2 DB DD

Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 GSW (*1) A27 14 19 DBEW (*2) A28 A26 LBE+ (*1) (*2) (*1) RBE+ (*2) 3 2 A28 A26 LBE– (*1) (*2) (*1) RBE– (*2)

14 C10

L–R




(a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. BGW(Body): Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

D SEAT BUCKL SW

Driver seat belt buckle switch ON / OFF

ON: Fasten the driver seat belt OFF: Unfasten the driver seat belt

–

OK

NG




2

–

COMBINATION METER



2 1 4 3

I35973

NG

Condition

Specified Condition


No continuity


Continuity


OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(BODY ECU–FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY) Check continuity between the terminal I14–9 of body ECU and the terminal A27–4 of airbag sensor assembly. Check continuity between the terminal A28–14 (A26–19) / A28–3 (A26–2)of airbag sensor assembly and the terminal B9–3 / B9–1 of front seat inner belt assy. ( ): LHD Models Standard: Continuity

(b)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4


CHECK AND REPLACE BODY ECU



OR


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4N–01

SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP FOR FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT DOES NOT FLASH WIRING DIAGRAM RHD Models: I14 Body ECU


A/C Control Assembly 20 MPX– A15 (*2) 9 MPX+ A13 (*1)

29 A13 (*1) 10 A15 (*2)

10 IC1

P

MPX2 11 P

P–B

1 IC1

P–B

14 C10

MPX1

P–B

ECM 29 29 E10 E9

24 3 A16 A13 PBLT (*1) (*2)

21 E9

MPX2

(*3) (*4) (*5)

F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light B–PBEW

22

18 23 20 MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*3) (*4) (*5)

P

13 C10

3 L–R (*6)

B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) J22 IG to GAUGE Fuse R–W(*6) J/C 8 C 3 2 1 C PBEW IC3 G–Y (*6) G–Y (*6) W–B(*6) 1 E J/C W–B (*6) B C A J31 J30 J16 W–B (*6) W–B (*6) J/C A 5

W–B (*6) IL

BS *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6:

Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV Except 1AZ–FE I35764



–

COMBINATION METER

LHD Models: I14 Body ECU A/C Control Assembly 20 MPX– A15 (*2) 9 MPX+ A13 (*1) 24 PBLT A13 (*1)

29 A13 (*1) 10 A15 (*2) 3 A16 (*2)

10 IC1

P

P–B

F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light B–PBEW 6 L–R (*6) IG

4

E

P

G–Y (*6)

14 IM1

22 P–B

1 IC1

P–B

14 C10

MPX1

ECM 29 29 21 E10 E9 E9 MPX2 18 23 20 (*3) (*4) (*5) MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*3) (*4) (*5)

to GAUGE Fuse

R–W(*6) PBEW 7

MPX2 11


P

13 C10

B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor)

3 G–Y (*6)

1 W–B(*6)

8 Center J/B

W–B(*6)

9 CH

6 CA W–B

*1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6:

Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV Except 1AZ–FE

IP

W–B BU

BV

I35765



–

COMBINATION METER




E66856

NG

Condition

Specified Condition


No continuity


Continuity


OK

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(A/C CONTROL ASSEMBLY–FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY) Check continuity between the terminal A13–24 / A16–3 of A/C control assembly and the terminal F19–3 (6) of front passenger’s seat belt warning light. ( ): LHD models Check continuity between the terminal F19–2 (F19–7)of front passenger’s seat belt warning light and the terminal B10–3 of front seat inner belt assy. ( ): LHD models Standard: Continuity

(b)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3


CHECK AND REPLACE AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ASSEMBLY




–

COMBINATION METER 05C4G–01

TERMINALS OF ECU COMBINATION METER ASSY

C11

C10

I35933

Terminal No.

Wiring color

Condition

C11–1 – Body ground (TURN L – Body ground)


Turn signal LH indicator light OFF ON

C11–2 – Body ground (BRAKE LVL SW – Body ground)


Brake fluid level warning switch ON

C11–3 – Body ground (TACHO – Body ground)


Ignition switch OFF ON, Engine idle speed

Specified condition Below 1 V 10 to 14 V Below 1 V

Puls generation (*2)

C11–5 – Body ground (SIGNAL EARTH – Body ground)


Constant

C11–6 – Body ground (EMPS – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON and EMPS Indicator OFF ON


C11–8 – Body ground (AIRBAG – Body ground)

B–Y – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and AIRBAG Indicator OFF ON


C11–9 – Body ground (CHECK ENGINE – Body ground)

W – Body ground

C11–10 – Body ground (AUTO LEVELING – Body ground)

LG – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and AUTO LEVERING Indicator OFF ON

C11–11 – Body ground (OIL PRESS SW – Body ground)

Y–B – Body ground

Engine running Stopped

C11–12 – Body ground (BEAM+ – Body ground)

R–W (w/HID), R (w/o HID) – Body ground

C11–13 – Body ground (TURN R – Body ground)


Engine running and CHECK ENGINE indicator OFF

Continuity

9 to 14 V

10 to 14 V Below 1 V No continuity Continuity

Headlight OFF ON


Turn signal RH indicator light OFF ON


Combination switch OFF ON


C11–14 – Body ground (ILL+ – Body ground)

G – Body ground

C11–15 – Body ground (SLIP – Body ground)

LG – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and SLIP Indicator OFF ON


C11–16 – Body ground (VSC – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON and VSC Indicator OFF ON




–

COMBINATION METER 10 to 14 V Below 1 V

C11–17 – Body ground (TRC OFF – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON and TRC OFF Indicator OFF ON

C1–19 – Body ground (SI – Body ground)

L–W – Body ground

Ignition switch ON and turn the wheel slowly

C11–20 – Body ground (+B – Body ground)


Any Contents









C10–1 – Body ground (WATER LEVEL – Body ground)

Y–R – Body ground

Fuel filter warning switch ON

Below 1 V

C10–2 – Body ground (ACC – Body ground)

GR – Body ground

Ignition switch OFF ACC


C10–3 – Body ground (AVC LAN+ – Body ground)



–

C10–4 – Body ground (AVC LAN– – Body ground)

G – Body ground


–

Puls generation (*1) 10 to 14 V

C10–5 – Body ground (FE – Body ground)


Constant

C10–6 – Body ground (BEAM– – Body ground)

W–B (DRL) R–W (w/ HID) R– (w/o HID) – Body ground

Headlight ON, Hi–beam indicator OFF ON

C10–7 – Body ground (Fr FOG – Body ground)

G – Body ground

Ignition switch ON, Fr fog light indicator ON OFF


C10–8 – Body ground (Rr FOG – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON, Rr fog light indicator ON OFF


C10–9 – Body ground (ABS – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON and ABS Indicator OFF ON


C10–10 – Body ground (FUEL – Body ground)


Fuel sender gauge is F position E position

C10–11 – Body ground (OUTSIDE TEMP+ – Body ground)


Ignition switch ON

C10–12 – Body ground (OUTSIDE TEMP– – Body ground)

W – Body ground

Constant

C10–13 – Body ground (BEAN (EFI) – Body ground)

P – Body ground


–

C10–14 – Body ground (BEAN (BODY) – Body ground)

P–B – Body ground


–

C10–15 – Body ground (BEAN (SECURITY) – Body ground)

P–L – Body ground


–

C10–16 – Body ground (E/G OIL LEVEL – Body ground)

Y–G – Body ground

OIL LEVEL switch ON

No continuity

C10–17 – Body ground (POWER EARTH – Body ground)


Constant


Continuity


4.0 110.0 3.31 V (–9C) 0.8 V (43C)

Continuity

Continuity


–

COMBINATION METER


Contents

Tool setting


Vehicle condition


A05135


Contents

Tool setting


Vehicle condition

Engine idle speed

A05138

ENGINE ECU 1AZ–FSE: E13

E12

E11

E10

TACH

E9

I34746

Except 1AZ–FSE: E13

E12

E10

TACH

E9

C95801



–

COMBINATION METER

05C4O–01

THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DOES NOT DISPLAY WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy A1 Ambient Temp. Sensor 2 1 W–R

W


15 IE1

4 IE1

W–R

W

11 C10

12 C10

I35755


–

COMBINATION METER


CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY C10–12

C10–11

(a) (b)

I37583

Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Measure resistance between the terminal C10–11 and C10–12 of the ambient temp. sensor connector at each temperature. Resistance: 9.0 to 9.8 k: at 0C (0F) 2.7 to 2.9 k: at 25C (77F)

HINT: As the temperature increases, resistance decreases. Resistance:

Resistance (k)

Temperature (C) I30156

OK NG




2 (a) (b)

–

COMBINATION METER

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR Disconnect the connector from ambient temp. sensor. Check continuity between the terminal C10–11 (12) of combination meter assy and the terminal A1–1 (2) of ambient temp. sensor connector. Standard: Continuity. NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

COMBINATION METER

05C4P–01

WARNING BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND WIRING DIAGRAM LHD Models:




P

11 MPX1 P 9

KSW

8 DA

DCTY

13 DB

1 IC1

P–B


BKL

24 3 PBLT A13 A16 (*1) (*2)

R

B J10

J/C

B J10


12 IC1

14 C10

R

L–R L–R Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 L–R A27 GSW D9 Door Courtesy SW 19 14 1 A26 LBE+ IC2 G–Y R 2 W–B W–B A26 LBE– W–B (*5) (*7)

B9 Buckle Switch 3

1

IL

IO

F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light 6 B–PBEW L–R (*6) B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) PBEW

7 G–Y (*6)

14 IM1

3 G–Y (*6)

1 W–B (*6)

W–B BU

BV

*1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: Except 1AZ–FE *7: Except (*5) I36641



–

COMBINATION METER

RHD Models:




P

11 MPX1 P 9

KSW

8 DA

DCTY

13 DB

1 IC1

B J10

R

J/C

B J10


12 IC1

R

L–R L–R Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 L–R DBEW A27 D9 Door Courtesy SW 14 14 1 A28 RBE+ IC2 G–Y R 3 W–B W–B A28 RBE– W–B (*5) (*7)

B9 Buckle Switch 3

1

IL F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light 3 B–PBEW L–R (*6)

PBEW

P–B


BKL

24 3 PBLT A13 A16 (*1) (*2)

14 C10

2 G–Y (*6)

B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) 8 IC3

3 G–Y (*6) C J31 W–B (*6)

BS


IO

1 J/C

B J30

W–B (*6) J22 J/C C C

W–B (*6) *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: Except 1AZ–FE *7: Except (*5)

I36642


–

COMBINATION METER


CHECK BUZZER Buzzer does not sound.

A

Only seat belt buzzer does not sound.

B

HINT: Perform the buzzer OFF mode check, when only the seat belt buzzer does not sound. If the seat belt buzzer still does not sound even after the check, proceed to step 2. B

SYSTEM CHECK MODE(SEE PAGE 05–1499)

A

2


(a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the display and select the ”DATA LIST”. Key reminder buzzer: Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY UNLOCK WRN SW



–

D DOOR CTY SW



–

IG SW


Ignition switch OFF

–

Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY UNLOCK WRN SW



–

D DOOR CTY SW



–

IG SW


Ignition switch OFF

–

Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

D SEAT BUCKL SW

Driver seat buckle switch is OFF / ON

Driver seat buckle switch is OFF position

–

P SEAT BUCKL SW

Passenger seat buckle switch is OFF / ON

Passenger seat buckle switch is OFF position

–

IG SW


Ignition switch OFF

–

VEHICLE SPD


Vehicle speed 15 km/h


Light reminder buzzer:

Seat belt buzzer:

HINT: When the vehicle speed is not displayed on the hand–held tester, refer to ”Malfunction in speedometer” (See Page 05–1510). Result: NG (Seat belt buzzer does not operate)

A

NG (Key reminder / Light reminder buzzer does not operate)

B

OK

C



–

COMBINATION METER

B

Go to step 5

C


A

3

INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY(D–SEAT)(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG


OK

4

INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY(P–SEAT)(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG



5

INSPECT IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG

CHECK AND REPLACE IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH

OK

6

INSPECT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG

CHECK AND REPLACE DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY




–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7U–01


Inspector’s name:




/

/

km Miles

Odometer Reading


/


Continuous

Weather

Fine

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Intermittent

Cloudy Warm

/

Snowy

Cool

(


Cold (Approx.

F C

)

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

I35990



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7W–01

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the table below and proceed to the appropriate page. DTC No.


Comment / Remedy

000

No malfunction

010

Overvoltage shutoff

011

Undervoltage shutoff

012

Overheating

Check temperature at temperature or overheating sensor > 125 C Check water circuit.

014

Possible overheating detected (Hardware threshold value)

Difference of measured values at temperature sensor > 15 C (min. 70 C water temperature and metering pump in operation); Check temperature sensor and overheating sensor, replace if necessary.

017

Overheating detected (Hardware threshold value)

Temperature at temperature or overheating sensor > 130 C, emergency OFF if DTC No. 012 or 014 not is applicable; Check water circuit, temperature sensor and overheating sensor, replace if necessary.

020

Glow plug break


021

Glow plug output overload


030

Combustion air blower motor EMF outside perm. range.

Blower impeller or burner motor fammed (frozen solid, dirty, etc.) Remedy jam, replace burner motor if necessary.

031

Combustion air blower motor break

Check the lead to combustion air motor (burner motor) for continuity, replace if necessary.

032

Combustion air blower motor short–circuit

Check combustion air blower motor (burner motor), replace if necessary. Check supply lead (chafed, etc.).

047

Metering pump short–circuit

Check the supply lead to metering pump for short–circuit, check metering pump, replace if necessary.

048

Metering pump break

Check the supply lead to metering pump for continuity, remedy break, replace metering pump if necessary.

051

Cold blow time exceeded

At start, if flame sensor above 70 C, > 240 sec.; Check exhaust gas combustion air supply, check flame sensor, replace if necessary.

052

Safety time exceeded

When all perm. start attempts used up; Check the fuel delivery and fuel supply. Check exhaust gas and combustion air ducts.

054

Flame cutout, High setting

056

Flame cutout, LOW setting

060

Temperature conrol sensor break

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 2 and 10 connector B > 2 M (if break)

061

Temperature control sensor short–circuit

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 2 and 10 at connector B < 2 M (If short– circuit)

064

Flame sensor break

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 7 and 14 at connector B > 3,040 (If break)

065

Flame sensor short–circuit

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 7 and 14 at connector B > 780 (If short–circuit)


– Voltage between 1 and 5 at connector A > 16 V Voltage between 1 and 5 at connector A < 10.2 V (Voltage values must be present > 20 seconds) Check battery, regulator and electrical leads.

Check the fuel delivery and fuel supply. Check exhaust gas combustion air ducts. If combustion OK Check the flame sensor, replace if necessary.



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM Comment / Remedy

071

Surface sensor break

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 4 and 11 at connector B > 2 MW (If break)

072

Surface sensor short–circuit

Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 4 and 11 at connector B > 50 W (If short–circuit)

090 092 093

Control unit detective (Internal fault / Reset) Control unit detective (ROM error) Control unit detective (RAM error)

Control unit malfunction due to interference voltage from vehicle electrical system; possible causes low batteries, chargers, other sources of interference; eliminate interference voltages. Internal faults detected in microprocessor / memory detected. Replace control unit.

097

Internal control unit faults

Other faults which cannot lead to DTC No. 90, 92 and 93, replace control unit.



–


05C80–01

ECU POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is power source for the power heater ECU and power heater fuel pump.

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No.1, Engine Room J/B No.1

Engine Room R/B No.3 B

3

3

B

1

Power Heater ECU

PWR HTR

1A

1 1

W

5 P1 +

W–B

1 P1 –

2 J2 J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

W–B A

A

EC

I35410



1 (a) (b)

–


CHECK FUSE(PWR HTR) Remove the PWR HTR from the engine room J/B or R/B No.1. Check that the continuity exists of PWR HTR fuse. NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE FUSE

OK

2

INSPECT POWER HEATER ECU(+) (a) P1

(b) (c)

Remove the power heater ECU with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal ”+” of the power heater ECU and body ground. Standard: 10 to 14 V

+ I36137

NG


OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER HEATER ECU – BODY GROUND) (a) P1 –

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the power heater ECU and body ground (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I37732

NG





–


COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7T–01



2


3


4



5


6


7


8


9


10




11

PARTS INSPECTION

12

REPAIR

13

CONFIRMATION TEST

14

END


–



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7X–01

LOCATION

Alternator Assy Heater Pump Assy

Heater Assy

Center J/B

Heater Switch Assy Driver Side J/B HTR Fuse


I36096


–


05C83–01

POWER HEATER ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Turning on the alternator allows current to flow from the alternator to the power heater. As a result, the power heater ECU control the expanded power of the combustion type power heater.

WIRING DIAGRAM A11 Alternator

4 L A11


Power Heater ECU

Y

3 EE1

Y

8 P1

ALT+L

I35971


1

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – ALTERNATOR) (a) P1

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal ALT+L of power heater ECU and terminal L of alternator (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ALT+L A11

1 2 3 4

L I37735

NG


OK

2

CHECK AND REPLACE GENERATOR W/CLUTCH PULLEY NG

OK REPAIR OR REPLACE POWER HEATER ECU


REPAIR OR REPLACE GENERATOR W/CLUTCH PULLEY


–


05C82–01

POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the power heater switch is turned on, the fuel pump receives the drive voltage from the power heater ECU, causing the combustion type power heater to operate.

WIRING DIAGRAM Power Heater ECU

F17 Fuel Pump 2

M

2 P1 F/P

L 1 W–B EC

I35412



1

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – BODY GROUND) (a) P1 F/P

Check for short circuit in harness and connector between terminal F/P of power heater ECU and body ground (See page 01–32).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I37732

NG


OK

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP) (a) F17

Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector betwen terminal 1 of power heater ECU and power heater fuel pump (See page 01–32).

1 2

I37734

NG


OK

3

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP – BODY GROUND) (a) F17

Check for an open circuit in harness and connector between terminal 2 of power heater fuel pump and body ground (See page 01–32).

1 2

I37734

NG OK




4

–


INSPECT POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP (a) F17

I36139

Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and negative (–) to terminal 2 with the power heater turned on and check the pressure of the hose by hand. Standard: The pressure is applied to the hose.

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP




–


05C81–01

POWER HEATER SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the power heter switch is turned on, the power heater ECU sends the drive signal to the fuel pump, causing the combustion type power heater to operate.


Center J/B 1 CB

12 CK

R–W 3 IG

Power Heater ECU G–Y

IN 6

12 IE6

G–Y

3 P1 SW

W–B

R–W E 2

Driver Side J/B 1 DN 5 DH

B–L

IG1 Relay 5

3

1

2

HTR

6 DC 9 DA 1 DH

AM1

W–B


G–R 1 IG1

B–L

1 ED1

W

AM1 3


2

1

3

B A

FL MAIN

Battery

J15 J/C IJ

IK

I36132



1

–


INSPECT HETER SWITCH ASSY (a) P5

ILL+

E

Check that the continuity when connecting the positive tester lead (+) and the negative tester lead (–) to the following terminals.


Connectiong terminals

ON

IG – IN

Continuity

OFF

IG – IN

No Continuity

IN ILL–

IG I32396

NG

Standard Value

ON

IG – E

Continuity

OFF

IG – E

No Continuity

ON

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

OFF

ILL+ – ILL–

Continuity

REPLACE HETER SWITCH ASSY

OK

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – POWER HEATER ECU) (a) P5

(b) (c)

Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal IN of the heater switch and SW of the power heater ECU. Heater switch condition

Standard value

ON

10 to 14 V

OFF

0V

IN P1 SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I37733

OK


NG



3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – BATTERY) (a) P5

Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between heater switch and battery (See page 01–32).

IG I32395

NG


OK

4

CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) P5 E

Check for an open circuit in henees and connector between heater swith and body ground (See page 01–32).

I32395

NG





–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7V–01

PRE–CHECK NOTICE: If the glow plug breaks, the ECU detects the breakage and stops the automatic operation, so the burner heater does not activate. (For other failures, similarly activated.) The cause of failures (such as voltage malfunction, overheating malfunction, short–circuit or breakage of functional components, etc.) and repair methods are shown by connecting the DTC tester and reading the DTC. 1. DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTION (a) Connect the DTC tester between the connector A (Vehicle harness) of DTC check harness and connector B (Power heater harness). (b) Start the engine. (c) Pressing the DTC calling button displays a 3–digit number DTC.

Connector A

Connector B

DTC Display

In Normal

DTC Check Harness In Malfunction

Past Record Control Panel Current Display ”Heating” Symbol

Memory Clear Button DTC Calling Button


DTC Calling Button I12508


2. (a)

3. (a) 4.

–


DESCRIPTION OF DISPLAY AND BUTTONS AF: Current Value Malfunction (Blinking at current failure) Diag: DTC (Example: 064 Flame sensor break) Memory Clear button: Deletion of faulty memory (Press both buttons together for longer than 2 sec.) > Button: Scroll up of faulty memory (The past 5 codes can be stored.) < Button: Scroll down of faulty memory (The past 5 codes can be stored.) FAULTY MEMORY The ECU is able to store upto 5 pieces of faulty memory. If it is full, the new data is written over F5. WIRING DIAGRAM

Connector A

Battery Buner Motor 13

R

14 Glow Plug

BR 9

B–R

12 Surface Sensor 5 6 Temp.Control Sensor

Power Heater ECU

G L–Y L Y

3 4

L–W

5 1 6 2 7 3

W–R (*1) Y–R (*2)

Terminal L of Alternator

W–B

Metering Pump

R–G Fuse (20 A)

R–B R–L (*1) R–Y (*2)

IG SW Vehicle Side

8 4

Flame Sensor 1 2

*1: TMC Made *2: TMUK Made

Connector B

I35431



–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7Z–01


The combustion type power heater does not operate


Suspect Area 1. 2. 3. 4.

ECU power source circuit Power heater switch circuit Power heater fuel pump circuit Power heater alternator circuit

See page 05–1171 05–1173 05–1176 05–1179


–

COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7Y–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

POWER HEATER ECU P1

I36138


Wiring Color

P1–1 (–) – Body ground


Always

Continuity

P1–2 (F/P) – Body ground

L – Body ground

Always

Continuity

P1–3 (SW) – Body ground


P1–5 (+) – Body ground

W – Body ground

Always

P1–8 (ALT +L ) – Body ground

Y – Body ground

Alternator: Operate


Condition

IG SW: ON Power heater SW: ON

Specification

10 to 14 Continuity Pulse generation


–


05C4T–01

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit carries the SET/COAST, RES/ACC and CANCEL signals (each voltage) to the ECM.

WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE C14 Combination SW

ECU


SET/COAST

RES/ACC

24 E11 CCS

CRUISE

3 ECC J/C E

BR

J13 BR

E

J13 D

J13

E J12

BR

EE

I35711



–


1CD–FTV C14 Combination SW

ECU


SET/COAST

RES/ACC

24 E11 CCS

CRUISE

3 ECC J/C E

BR

J13 BR

E

J13 D

J13

E J12

BR

E1

I35711



–



1 (a) (b) (c)



Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

CCS READY M



”1”

CCS READY S



”1”

NG

Go to step 2




2

–


INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) (c)

(d)

I35702

Remove the horn button assy. Disconnect the cruise control main switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Resistance()

Neutral

2–3

(No continuity) 210 to 270

RES/ACC

2–3

SET/COAST

2–3

560 to 700

CANCEL

2–3

1,380 to 1,700

Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Specification

OFF

2–3

10 k or higher

ON

2–3

1 or less

HINT: When malfunction is found with the cruise control main switch assy, replace the steering wheel assy.

NG


OK

3 (a) (b)

(c)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH, BODY GROUND – ECM) Disconnect the cruise control switch connector and ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

CCS (S14 – 2) – CCS (E11 – 24)

Always

1 or less


Condition

Specification

CCS (E11 – 24) – Body ground

Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1709) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


05C4U–01

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the cruise control main switch is turned off, the cruise control does not operate.

WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE (M/T) R–W (*1) R–W (*2)

9 IE2 5 IR1

R–W (*1)

C9 Clutch Start SW Assy LG–B (*1) 1 2 LG–B (*2)

R–W (*2)

15 IE2 6 IR1


LG–B (*1) C LG–B (*2)

J19 J/C

D

10 E11 D

LG–B (*1) C LG–B (*2) D

Center J/B 21 C11

CPU

ECM

J14 J/C

CRUISE

6 CD 6 W–B CK

R–W

8 CE 6 W–B CA

5 C11 *1: LHD *2: RHD

IP

I35709



1AZ–FSE (A/T) N1 Park/neutral Position SW 10 1 R–W LG–B IK1 IK2 3 RB DL 7

–

ECM D D J/C C C LG–B J14 J19 J14 J19 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) Driver Side J/B GAUGE2 GAUGE1 7 R–W D DB

LG–B

Center J/B R–W

8 CA

1 CD

R–W


27 DA


10 E11 D

Center J/B

CRUISE

21 C11

6 CD 6 CK

R–W W–B

7 CA 6 W–B CA

CPU 5 C11

IP

*1: LHD *2: RHD

I35708

C9 Clutch Start SW Assy

1CD–FTV R–W (*1) R–W (*2)

9 IE2 5 IR1

R–W (*1)

ECM

LG–B 2 (*1)

1

R–W (*2)

LG–B (*2)


6 IR1

10 E11 D

LG–B (*1) LG–B (*2)

Center J/B 21 C11

CPU

15 IE2

CRUISE

6 CD 6 W–B CK

R–W

8 CE 6 W–B CA

5 C11 *1: LHD *2: RHD

IP

I35710



–



1 (a) (b) (c)



Normal Condition

CCS READY M



CCS READY S



NG


OK

2

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (a)

Disconnect the C11connector from combination meter assy. Measure voltage according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard:

(b)

Tester Connection

Specified Condition


10 to 14 V

Result:

I36055

A


OK

A

NG (M/T)

B

NG (A/T)

C

B

Go to step 4

C

Go to step 7


3

–


INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (a) (b)

I36055

Disconnect the C11 connector from the combination meter. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition


10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY

4

INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY (a) (b)

2

Free 1

Push in


Switch condition

Tester connection

Specification

Switch pin free

1–2

10 k or higher


1–2

1 or less

NG E67361

OK

Disconnect the clutch start switch assy connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard:

INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY


5 (a) (b)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINAITION METER ASSY – CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter connector and clutch start switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Combination meter (C11–21) – Clutch start switch (C9–1)

Always

1 or less

(c)


Condition

Specification

Clutch start switch (C9–1) – Body ground

Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6 (a) (b)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY – ECM) Disconnect the clutch start switch connector and ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Clutch start switch (C9–2) – D (E11–10)

Always

1 or less

(c)


Condition

Specification


Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




7

–


INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Shift the shift lever to the D range. Check continuity between terminal 3 and terminal 7. Standard: There is continuity.

NG C53270


OK

8 (a) (b)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINAITION METER ASSY – PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter connector and park/neutral position switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Park/neutral start switch (N1–3) – Combination meter (C11–21)

Always

1 or less

(c)


Condition

Specification

Combination meter (C11–21) – Body ground

Always

10 k or higher

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


9 (a) (b)

(c)

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY – ECM) Disconnect the ECM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specification

Park/neutral start switch (N1–7) – D (E11–10)

Always

1 or less


Condition

Specification


Always

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



OR


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADJ–04

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet


Customer’s Name

Licence No. Date of Vehicle Brought in

/

/

Date of Problem Occurrence Condition of Frequency Problem Occurrence Problem Occurs?

/ Continuous

Vehicle Speed when Problem Occurred

Symptoms

km Mile

Odometer Reading

/

Intermittent (

Times a day)

km Mile

Auto cancel occurs

Driving condition City driving Freeway Up hill Down hill After cancel occurred, did the driver activate cruise control again? Yes No

Cancel does not occur

With brake ON Clutch pedal depressed (M/T) Except D range shift (A/T) When control SW turns to CANCEL position

Cruise control malfunction

Slip to acceleration side Slip to deceleration side Hunting occurs O/D cut off does not occur (A/T) O/D does not return (A/T)

Switch malfunction

SET ’ACCEL’ ’COAST’ RESUME CANCEL

CRUISE MAIN indicator light

Remains ON

Does not light up

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check


Blinks


–


05C4V–01

DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Making short circuit between terminal TC and CG of DLC3 will output DTC from the DLC3.

WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE D5 DLC3 W–L (*2)

TC 13

D J21

J/B

(*2)

W–L (*1)

B B J8 J20 (*1) (*2) B J8 (*1)

W–L

17 DB

3 DC

W–L

20 E12 TC

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (*2)

CG

ECM

Driver Side J/B

6 CA

W–B (*2)

4 W–B (*1) A J16 J/C *1: LHD *2: RHD

A W–B IO

IP

I35707



–


1CD–FTV D5 DLC3 W–L (*2)

TC

D J21

J/B

(*2)

13

W–L (*1)

B B J8 J20 (*1) (*2) B J8 (*1)

W–L

17 DB

3 DC

W–L

11 E12 TC

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (*2)

CG

ECM

Driver Side J/B

6 CA

W–B (*2)

4 W–B (*1) A J16 J/C *1: LHD *2: RHD

A W–B IL

IP

I35707

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 D5 DLC3

INSPECT DLC3(TC TERMINAL VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

TC

CG C52361

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – CG (D5 – 4)

10 to 14 V

NG

Go to step 3


2 D5 DLC3

–




TC

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 20)

1 or less

1CD–FTV C52361

(c)

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 11)

1 or less


Specified Condition


10 k or higher


10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

D5 DLC3

CG

Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

CG (D5 – 4) – Body ground

10 k or higher

C52361

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 D5 DLC3

–




TC

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 20)

1 or less

1CD–FTV C52361

(c)

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 11)

1 or less


Specified Condition


10 k or higher


10 k or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


PRE–CHECK 1. (a)


(b)


DLC3 C52361

Terminal No.


Condition

4


Always

7



16


Always




(c)

–






1.5 sec. ON OFF

BE4034

(e)

TC

DLC3

CG


C52361




0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.

2.5 sec.

ON


I03610


–




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPD



–

MEMORY SPD



–

THROTTLE



–

CRUISE CONTROL



–

MAIN SW (MAIN)



”3”

MAIN SW (SUB)



”3”

CCS READY M



”1”

CCS READY S



”1”

CCS INDICATOR M



”2”

CCS INDICATOR S



”2”

CANCEL SW



–

SET/COAST SW



–

RES/ACC SW



–

STP LIGHT SW2 M



–

STP LIGHT SW2 S



–



–


STP LIGHT SW1 S



–

SHIFT D POS



–


5. (a)


(b)


(1)

(3) I35838

(3) (1)

I35839




(d)


(e)


(3) I35838

(1)

(3) I35840

(1)

I35839



(c)

(1)

(3)

–


–


CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADI–04



2


3

CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS (See page 05–1700)

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR (GO TO STEP 5) SYMPTOM OCCURS (GO TO STEP 6)

5


6


7


GO TO STEP 9

8


9

CIRCUIT INSPECTION (See page 05–453)



–


10

TERMINAL OF ECM (See page 05–1707)

11

INDEMNIFICATION OF PROBLEM

12

REPAIR OR REPLACE

13

CONFIRMATION TEST

END HINT: Step 3, 6, 9, 13: Diagnostic steps permit the use of the hand–held tester.



–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADK–04

LOCATION Engine Room J/B No.4

Engine Room R/B

Park/neutral Position Switch (A/T) LHD:


Driver Side J/B

ECM DLC3 RHD:


Cruise Control Main Switch Assy

ECM DLC3 Driver Side J/B

Clutch Start Switch Assy (M/T) Stop Lamp Switch Assy AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

I35700


–


05C4Q–01

DTC


DTC

P0503/23 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ”A” INTERMITTENT/ERRATIC/HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION See page 05–453. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. (1CD–FTV) DTC No.


P0500/21

The malfunction code is output when the vehicle speed signal from the vehicle speed sensor is cut for 0.14 sec. or more while cruise control is in operation.

P0503/23

Momentary interruption and noise malfunction codes are output when a rapid change of vehicle speed occurs while cruise control is in operation.

Trouble Area Combination meter Vehicle sspeed eed sensor Vehicle speed sensor ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–453. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. (1CD–FTV)

INSPECTION PROCEDURE See page 05–453. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. (1CD–FTV)



DTC

–


05C4R–01

P0571/52 BRAKE SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lamp switch assy sends a signal to the ECM. When the ECM receives this signal, it cancels the cruise control. A fail–safe function is provided so that it functions normally, even if there is a malfunction in the stop lamp signal circuit. The cancel condition occurs when battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal STP. When the brake is on, battery positive voltage is normally applied through the STOP fuse and the stop lamp switch assy to terminal STP of the ECM, and the ECM turns the cruise control OFF. If the harness connected to terminal STP has an open circuit, terminal STP will have battery positive voltage and the cruise control will be turned OFF. DTC No.


P0571/52

The malfunction code is output when the voltage of the STP terminal and that of the ST1 terminal on the ECM are less than 1 V for 0.5 sec. or more. When the following conditions are realized, a malfunction is detected. The STP terminal voltage is less than 1 V. The ST1 terminal voltage is less than 1 V. For more than 0.5 sec. or more.


Trouble Area

Stop lamp switch assy Stop lamp switch assy circuit ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE

10 DC

A J26 (*2) B–W

B–G

G–W S13 6 11 R–W G–W G–W Stop Lamp R–W Driver Side J/B IE3 IE3 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) Switch Assy 2 1 2 R–W G–W G–W R–W IR1 DA IR1 (*2) (*2) 1 (*2) 2 (*2) 20 14 G–W G–W B–W B–W IE1 IE2 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) J/C C E C 3 4 G–W B–W B–W G–W J8 J27 J9 IR1 IR1 (*2) (*2) 3 (*2) 4 (*2) (*2) (*1) (*1) I13 Driver Side J/B Ignition SW IGN 1 1 18 2 B–R B–R DA DH IE4 IP1 6 IG2 AM2 4 (*1) (*2) Engine Room R/B Engine Room J/B No.4

1 4B

1 4A 1 4D

ALT 1

B–G

AM2

1 1A

1 1

2 B–G

1 DN

ECM 19 E11 STP

12 E11 ST1–

B–R

2 Driver Side J/B STOP

22 DA

FL MAIN Battery

*1: LHD *2: RHD

I35714



–


1CD–FTV G–W S13 6 11 R–W G–W G–W Stop Lamp R–W Driver Side J/B IE3 IE3 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) Switch Assy 10 2 1 2 G–W G–W R–W IR1 R–W DC DA IR1 (*2) (*2) 1 (*2) 2 (*2) 20 14 B–W B–W G–W G–W IE1 IE2 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) A C J/C E C 3 4 G–W B–W B–W G–W J26 J8 J27 J9 IR1 IR1 (*2) (*2) 3 (*2) 4 (*2) (*2) (*1) (*2) (*1) I13 Driver Side J/B Ignition SW IGN 1 1 18 2 B–R B–R B–W DA DH IE4 IP1 6 IG2 AM2 4 (*1) (*2) Engine Room J/B No.4 Engine Room R/B 1 AM2 B B–R 1 3 1A 1 2 ALT W B 3 Driver Side J/B 3 1 2 1 STOP 22 1 ED1 B–L DN DA

ECM 19 E11 STP

12 E11 ST1–

FL MAIN Battery

*1: LHD *2: RHD

I35713



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: In case of using the hand–held tester, start the inspection from step1, and in case of not using the hand–held tester, start from step 2.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and turn the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”STOP LIGHT SW” in the DATA LIST and read the displayed value. Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

STP LIGHT SW2 M



–

STP LIGHT SW2 S



–

Standard: Brake pedal depressed: OK Brake pedal released: OFF NG

Go to step 2


2 (a)

INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH OPERATION Check that the stop lamp lights up when brake pedal is depressed, and goes off when the brake pedal is released. NG

OK


INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT


3


INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) 2

4 Free

–

1

3

Pushed in E67360

Disconnect the stop lamp switch assy connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Switch pin free

1–2

1 or less

Switch pin free

3–4

10 k or higher


1–2

10 k or higher


3–4

1 or less

NG

Specification


OK

4


1AZ–FSE:

STP

1CD–FTV: STP

I35703


Remove the ECM with connectors. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between terminal STP of ECM connector and body ground when the brake pedal is depressed and released. Standard: Pedal condition

Tester connection

Specification

Depressed


10 to 14 V

Released


1 V or less


(d)

1AZ–FSE:

ST–

–


Measure the voltage between terminal ST1– of ECM connector and body ground when the brake pedal is depressed and released. Standard: Pedal condition

Tester connection

Specification

Depressed


1 V or less

Released


10 to 14 V

1CD–FTV: ST–

I35932

NG





DTC

–


05C4S–01

P0607/54 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC indicates the internal abnormalities of ECM. DTC No.

Detection Item

P0607/54

The ECM has a supervisory CPU and control ECU inside. When each input STP signal is different for 0.15 sec. or more, the malfunction code is output. The malfunction code is output after 0.4 sec. have passed from the time the cruise cancel input signal (STP input) is input into the ECM. HINT: When a malfunction code is detected, the fail safe must be kept on until the ignition switch is turned off.




Trouble Area

ECM


–


PRE–CHECK 1. (a)


(b)


DLC3 C52361

Terminal No.


Condition

4


Always

7



16


Always




(c)

–






1.5 sec. ON OFF

BE4034

(e)

TC

DLC3

CG


C52361




0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.

2.5 sec.

ON


I03610


–




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

VEHICLE SPD



–

MEMORY SPD



–

THROTTLE



–

CRUISE CONTROL



–

MAIN SW (MAIN)



”3”

MAIN SW (SUB)



”3”

CCS READY M



”1”

CCS READY S



”1”

CCS INDICATOR M



”2”

CCS INDICATOR S



”2”

CANCEL SW



–

SET/COAST SW



–

RES/ACC SW



–

STP LIGHT SW2 M



–

STP LIGHT SW2 S



–



–


STP LIGHT SW1 S



–

SHIFT D POS



–


5. (a)


(b)


(1)

(3) I35838

(3) (1)

I35839




(d)


(e)


(3) I35838

(1)

(3) I35840

(1)

I35839



(c)

(1)

(3)

–


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 056HK–05

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the related troubleshooting page. Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Main switch cannot be turned ON. (Cruise indicator light in combination meter is not lit.)


05–1718 05–1722 01–32

Setting of vehicle speed cannot be done. (Although indicator light in combination meter is lit when the main switch is turned ON, they go off when vehicle speed is set.)

1. Cruise control switch circuit 2. ECM

05–1718 01–32

Setting cannot be done. (Indicator light in combination meter is lit when the main switch is turned ON and they remain ON while setting.)

1. 2. 3. 4.

Cruise control switch circuit Stop lamp switch circuit Combination meter system ECM

05–1718 05–1711 71–1 01–32

While the vehicle is driving with cruise control, the set control is canceled. (Indicator light and CRUISE remain ON.)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Cruise control switch circuit Vehicle speed sensor circuit Stop lamp switch circuit CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit ECM

05–1718 05–1710 05–1711 05–1722 01–32

Hunting (Speed is not constant.)

1. Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2. ECM

05–1710 01–32

Setting cannot be cancelled. (When Coast, Acceleration, Resume, Set speed change and Control switch are operated.)


05–1718 05–1722 01–32

DTC is not output, or is output when should not be.

1. Diagnosis circuit 2. CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit 3. ECM

05–1729 05–1722 01–32

CRUISE MAIN indicator light does not light up.

1. 2. 3. 4.

05–1718 05–1722 01–32 71–1


Cruise control switch circuit CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit ECM Combination meter


–

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADL–02

TERMINALS OF ECM 1AZ–FSE: E8

E9

E10

E11

E12

I34746

Symbols (Terminals No.) TC – E1 (E12–20 – E10–1)

STP – E1 (E11–19 – E10–1)

IGSW – E1 ((E12–9 – E10–1))

ST1 – E1 ST1– (E11–12 – E10–1)

CCS – E1 (E11 24 – E10–1) (E11–24 E10 1)

Wiring Color

W–L – BR

Condition

STD Voltage

Ignition switch ON

10 to 14 V


Below 2 V


10 to 14 V


Below 1 V

G W – BR G–W

Ignition switch ON Cruise control main switch ON

0 to 3 V

Ignition switch ON Cruise control main switch OFF

9 to 14 V


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON

9 to 14 V

B W – BR B–W

G W – BR G–W

W – BR



6 to 10.1 V


4 to 7.1 V


2.1 to 4 V


Below 1 V


–


1CD–FTV: E9

E8

E11

E12

I34747


STP – E1 (E11–19 – E9–7)

ST1 – E1 ST1– (E11–12 – E9–7)

CCS – E1 (E11 24 – E9 (E11–24 E9–7) 7)

Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage


10 to 14 V


Below 1 V


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON

9 to 14 V

G W – BR G–W

G W – BR G–W

W – BR

M/T: D – E1 (E11–10 – E9–7)

LG B – BR LG–B

TC – E1 (E12–11 – E9–7)

W–L – BR



6 to 10.1 V


4 to 7.1 V


2.1 to 4 V


Below 1 V

Ignition switch ON Depress clutch pedal

Below 1 V

Ignition switch ON Release clutch pedal

10 to 14 V

Ignition switch ON

10 to 14 V


Below 2 V


–


05B62–03

CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECM detects a trouble, the CHK ENG is illuminated. At this time, the ECM records the DTC in its memory.

WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R


ECM

4

Engine AM2 Room R/B No. 1

2 1

IG2 AM2

1


DH 2

1A 1 B Engine Room R/B No. 3

3

3

9

6 B–R

IGN

12 E9

W


Driver Side J/B

DA 18 22

B FL MAIN

B–W

B–W C J8

Battery

A J26

J/C

(LHD) (RHD)

C J8

A J26

(LHD) (RHD)

A81015







1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–




NG

2


E9

ECM Connector

A65748


OK



3 (a)

CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CONDITION Check that the CHK ENG is illuminated when the ignition switch is turned ON. Standard: CHK ENG is illuminated OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

4 (a)

INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY(CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT) See the combination meter troubleshooting on page 05–1509. NG





–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JC–04



Driver’s Name

Production Date


Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name



Difficult to Start


Poor Idling


Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall


km miles


Back fire Other


High (

rpm)

Low (


Surging

Others



Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation




day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/


After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.


F) Downhill


Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal


)


)

)



Normal

)

rpm)


–


ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CP9–01

DESCRIPTION 1. COMMON RAIL SYSTEM The common rail system stores high–pressure fuel supplied from the supply pump in the common rail and injects it using the injector. Fuel injection timing and fuel injection volume are regulated by the ECM; it provides an electric current to the solenoid valve of the injector with the EDU to regulate them. By storing high–pressure fuel produced in the supply pump in the common rail, this system can always offer stable fuel injection pressure regardless of the engine speed and engine load, even if a driving speed is low. In addition, this system uses the injector that opens and closes its fuel passage with the Two–Way–Valve (TWV) therefore both the fuel injection time and volume are precisely regulated by the ECM. The ECM monitors internal fuel pressure of the common rail with the fuel pressure sensor and commands the supply pump to supply fuel to obtain a target internal pressure (approximately 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1,835 kgf/cm2, 4,351 to 26,106 psi)). The ECM opens and closed the pressure discharge valve to improve controllability for the common rail internal fuel pressure. This system has two divisional fuel injections. It performs ”pilot–injection” as subsidiary fuel injection prior to the main fuel injection to make combustion soft, and this helps to reduce engine vibration and noise. Common Rail System Diagram (1CD–FTV Fuel System) : High–pressure Area

Sensors

ECM

EDU Common Rail



Injector Fuel Filter Supply Pump Assy Fuel Tank Suction Control Valve A81021



–


COMMON RAIL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: Component

Description

Common rail

Store high–pressure fuel produced by the supply pump

Supply pump

Operated by the crankshaft, and supply high–pressure fuel to the common rail

Injector

Inject fuel to the combustion room based on signals from the ECM


Monitor internal fuel pressure of the common rail and send signals to the ECM

Pressure discharge valve

Based on signals from the ECM, open the valve when sudden deceleration is occurred, or when the ignition switch is OFF to prevent the fuel pressure from being too high


Based on signals from the ECM, adjust fuel volume supplied to the common rail and regulate the internal fuel pressure

2.

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Engine Control System Diagram

Fuel Tank


Supply Pump

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Generator Ignition Switch Signal Starter Signal Vehicle Speed Signal DLC3 Battery Voltage

Pressure Discharge Valve Common Rail ECM Fuel Pressure Sensor

Other Signal

EDU Relay (INJF) (INJT PRD)

EDU Inter Cooler

Mass Air Flow Meter Atmospheric Temp. Sensor Turbo Charger

VRV for Turbo Charger

Intake Shatter EGR Valve

EGR Cooler Camshaft Position Sensor


Intake Air Temp. Sensor

Injector

Manifold Absolute Sensor Glow Plug

Vacuum Pump


Glow Relay

A81477



–


3. INJECTION CONTROL SYSTEM The ECM controls the fuel injection system using the injector and the supply pump. The ECM determines the fuel injection volume and injection timing by controlling duration and timing of the energizing to the solenoid valve of the injector, and determines injection pressure by controlling the Suction Control Valve located on the supply pump. The feed pump is used to pump fuel from the fuel tank into the supply pump. Injection Control Diagram Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor EDU TWV Camshaft Position Sensor Common Rail Crankshaft Position Sensor (NE Signal)


ECM


Orifice

Orifice

Control Chamber

Check Valve

Piston

Plunger Other Sensor

Feed Pump

Eccentric Cam Nozzle Needle

Fuel Tank

Injector

A81479



–


4. SUPPLY PUMP OPERATION SYSTEM The rotation of the eccentric cam causes the ring cam pushes plunger A upward as illustrated below. The spring force pulls plunger B (which is located on opposite of plunger A) upward. As a result, plunger B draws fuel in, and plunger A pumps fuel at the same time. Supply Pump Operation Diagram Check Valve Plunger A


Eccentric Cam To Common Rail Ring Cam

Plunger B From Feed Pump

Plunger A: Pumping End Plunger B: Suction End

Plunger A: Pumping Start Plunger B: Suction Start

Plunger A: Suction Start Plunger B: Pumping Start

Plunger A: Suction End Plunger B: Pumping End A81480



–


5. SUCTION CONTROL VALVE OPERATION SYSTEM HINT: The ECM controls the suction control valve operation to regulate the fuel volume that is pumped by the supply pump to the common rail. Consequently, the fuel pressure in the common rail is controlled to the target injection pressure. (a) Suction control valve opening small: (1) When the opening of the suction control valve is small, the fuel suction area is kept small, therefore the transferble fuel volume is decreased. (2) The suction volume becomes small due to the small suction area, despite the plunger stroke is full. Therefore, the difference of the volume between the geometry volume and the suction volume is in vacuum condition. (3) Pumping will start at the time when the fuel pressure has become higher than the common rail pressure. Suction Control Valve Opening Small Operation Diagram

Plunger

Plunger

Pumping

Top–Dead Center

Bottom–Dead Center

Starting Point


Cam Stroke Suction Control Valve

(1) Check Valve

Small Suction Area

(1)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(2)

A81483

(b)

Suction control valve opening large: (1) When the opening of the suction control valve is large, the fuel suction area is kept large, therefore the transferble fuel volume is increased. (2) If the plunger strokes fully, the suction volume will increase because the suction area is large. (3) Pumping will start at the time when the fuel pressure has become higher than the common rail pressure.

Suction Control Valve Opening Large Operation Diagram

Pumping


Starting Point

Cam Stroke (1)

Suction Control Valve Large Suction Area

(2) (3)

(1)

(2)

(3) A81484



–


6. DIAGNOSTICS TROUBLE CODE MATRIX FOR FUEL SYSTEM HINT: This matrix indicates typical DTC codes combinations for each malfunction occurrence. ( DTC No.

A

B

C

E

D

() ()

P0088 (See page 05–563)

()

P0190 (See page 05–557)

P0191 (See page 05–603)

P0192 (See page 05–557)

()

P1272 (See page 05–663) Trouble area

Malfunction


A

Stuck open

B

Stuck close

C

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit or pressure sensor output fixed

D


E

Stuck open

F

Stuck close

G


H

Stuck open

I

Stuck close

J

EDU

Faulty EDU

K

Common rail system (Fuel system)


L

7.

DIAGNOSTICS TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DTC No.

Description

P0087

Fuel pressure sensor output status at fixed value

P0088

Internal fuel pressure too high (200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi) or more)

P0093


P0190

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (Low or high output)

P0191

Fuel pressure sensor out of range (Low output)

P0192

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (High output)

P0193

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (Sensor 1 and/or 2 relation)

P0200

Open or short in EDU or injector circuit

P0627


P1229

Fuel over fed

P1238

Injection malfunction, exclude open or short in injector circuit

P1271


P1272

Closed malfunction of the pressure discharge valve


()

() () () Refer to

Open or short in injector circuit

Pressure discharge g valve

L

P1271 (See page 05–663)


K

()

P1229 (See page 05–563)

Injector j

J

I

() () ()

P0627 (See page 05–655)

P1238 (See page 05–658)

H

): Potential DTC codes

P0193 (See page 05–557) P0200 (See page 05–604)

G

P0087 (See page 05–557)

P0093 (See page 05–570)

F


–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JD–04


P0045 (05–554)

Turbo/Super Charger Boost Control Solenoid Circuit / Open

P0087 (05–557)

*1 CHK ENG

VRV Open or short in VRV circuit ECM

Fuel Rail/System Pressure – Too Low


Fuel Rail/System Pressure – Too High

Supply pump Pressure discharge valve Short in Supply pump (suction control valve)circuit Open pressure discharge valve circuit ECM

P0093 (05–570)

Fuel System Leak Detected – Large Leak

Fuel line between supply pump and common rail Fuel line between common rail and injector Supply pump Common rail Injector (P1238 is set simultaneously) Pressure discharge valve Open or short in EDU circuit (P0200 is set simultaneously) Open or short in injector circuit (P0200 and P1238 are set simultaneously) EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously) ECM

P0095 (05–573)

Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit

P0097 (05–573)

Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Low

P0098 (05–573)

Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit High

P0100 (05–577)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit


P0101 (05–583)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/PerformanceProblem

Mass air flow meter

P0102 (05–577)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Meter Circuit Low Input

P0103 (05–577)

Mass or Volume Air Flow Meter Circuit High Input


P0088 (05–563)

Open O or short h t iin di diesell tturbo b iinlet l t air i ttemp. sensor circuit i it Diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor ECM

P0105 (05–584)



P0106 (05–588)

Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/PerformanceProblem




P0107 (05–584)


P0108 (05–584)


P0110 (05–589)


P0112 (05–589)


P0113 (05–589)


P0115 (05–593)


P0116 (05–597)


P0117 (05–593)

Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Low Input

P0118 (05–593)

Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit High Input

P0168 (05–598)

Fuel Temperature Too High

P0180 (05–599)

Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit

P0182 (05–599)

Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit Low Input

P0183 (05–599)

Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit High Input

P0190 (05–557)


P0191 (05–603)


P0192 (05–557)

Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input

P0193 (05–557)

Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input

P0200 (05–604)

Injector Circuit / Open

P0234 (05–612)

Turbo/Super Charger Overboost Condition

P0299 (05–612)

Turbo/Super Charger Underboost

P0335 (05–616)


P0339 (05–616)


P0340 (05–620)



–





Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit Engine coolant temp. temp sensor ECM




Open or short in fuel pressure sensor Fuel pressure sensor ECM

Open O or short h t in i intake i t k air i ttemperature t sensor circuit i it Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

Open or short in fuel temp. temp sensor circuit Fuel temperature sensor ECM

Open or short in EDU circuit Injector EDU ECM VRV Open or short in VRV circuit Turbocharger g EGR valve Vacuum hose ECM Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position osition sensor Signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) ECM Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft position sensor Camshaft timing pulley ECM


P0380 (05–622)

Glow Plug/Heater Circuit ”A”

P0400 (05–629)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow

P0403 (05–629)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation Control Circuit

P0488 (05–633)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation Throttle Position Control Range/ Performance

P0500 (05–640)

–


Open or short in glow plug circuit Glow fuse Glow relay Glow plug ECM

Open or short in intake shutter circuit Open or short in fully opened switch circuit Intake shutter ECM



P0504 (05–643)

Brake Switch ”A”/”B” Correlation


P0560 (05–647)

System Voltage


P0606 (05–650)

ECM/PCM Processor

P0607 (05–650)


P0622 (05–651)

Generator Field ”F” Terminal Circuit

Open in generator circuit Generator Drive belt ECM

P0627 (05–655)

Fuel Pump Control Circuit / Open

Open or shot in suction control valve circuit Suction control valve ECM

P1229 (05–563)

Fuel Pump System

Short in supply pump (suction control valve) circuit Suction control valve ECM

Injector Malfunction

Injector EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously) Open or short in engine wire (P0200 is set simultaneously) Connector connection (P0200 is set simultaneously) Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing ECM

P1251 (05–612)

Turbo/Super Charger Overboost Condition (Too High)

VRV Open or short in VRV circuit Turbocharger EGR valve Vacuum hose ECM

P1271 (05–663)

Fuel Regulator Circuit Malfunction (EDU Drive)

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit Open or short in pressure discharge valve it self EDU ECM

Fuel Pressure Regulator Malfunction


P1238 (05–658)

P1272 (05–663)

EGR valve assy EGR passage assage Open or short in EGR circuit ECM

ECM



–


P1601 (05–673)

Injector Correction Circuit Malfunction (EEPROM)


P1611 (05–650)

IC Circuit Malfunction

ECM

P2120 (05–674)



P2121 (05–681)



P2122 (05–674)


P2123 (05–674)


P2125 (05–674)


P2127 (05–674)


P2128 (05–674)


P2138 (05–674)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D”/”E” Voltage Correlation

P2226 (05–684)

Barometric Pressure Circuit

P2227 (05–685)

Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/Performance

P2228 (05–685)

Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input

P2229 (05–685)

Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input

B2799 (05–1625)


O Open en or short in accelerator pedal edal position osition sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor ECM

ECM

Immobiliser system

*1: Check engine warning light (CHK ENG) is illuminated



–


05B5V–03

ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ignition switch is turned ON, battery positive voltage is applied to terminal IGSW of the ECM and the EFI MAIN relay (Marked: EFI MAIN) control circuit in the ECM sends a signal to terminal MREL of the ECM switching on the EFI MAIN relay. This signal causes current to flow to the coil, closing the contacts of the EFI MAIN relay and supplying power to terminal +B of the ECM. If the ignition switch is turned off, the ECM continues to switch on the EFI MAIN relay for a maximum of 2 seconds for the initial setting of the throttle valve.

WIRING DIAGRAM

I13 Ignition Switch B–R 1 1

4

AM2

IG2

IE4 (LHD) IP1 (RHD)

A B–W J26 (RHD)

Driver Side J/B

2 B–R DH 6

18 DA

IGN

B–Y

B–W (LHD)

C

GR

1

2

1

2 AM2

EFI 1

1

1A

C

B–W (RHD) B–W (LHD)

GR

ECM 9 E9

IGSW

8 E9

MREL

1 E9

+B

1

5

1

3

2

B–W

EFI MAIN Relay

1

B

E J27

J8 J/C 2 IE1

B–R 1

J/C

1

BR

7 E12 E1

1 8


IK1

3 Engine Room R/B No. 3

B–W

B–W

W–B

3 B FL MAIN 10 EE1

BR

Battery EC

EI

A81013



–




E9

E12

E1 (–)

+B (+)

ECM Connecter

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard:

OK

A18294


Specified condition

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V


NG

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) E12

E1


NG ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A65745

OK

3


E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)

E9


Specified condition

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

IGSW (+)

ECM Connecter

NG


A18294

OK

Go to step 6


4

–



Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG A79096


OK

5


I13

Measure the for continuity between the connector terminals shown in the chart below.

NG

Ignition Switch

B50489

Switch

Terminal No.

Resisitance

LOCK

All Terminals

No continuity

ACC

1–3

Continuity

ON

1–2, 1–3, 2–3, 5–6

Continuity

START

4–5, 4–6, 5–6, 1–2

Continuity



6


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)

MREL (+)

ECM Connecter

OK


A18294


Specified condition

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

NG



7

–





NG

EFI Fuse A66054


OK

8

INSPECT EFI MAIN RELAY (a) (b)

Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No.1. Inspect the EFI MAIN relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Condition

1–2

Constant

Continuity

Usually

No Continuity

Apply B+ between Terminals 1 and 2

Continuity

3–5 B16200

Specified condition

Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG OK



REPLACE EFI MAIN RELAY


9

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI MAIN RELAY – ECM, EFI MAIN RELAY – BODY GROUND) (a)

Engine Room R/B No.1 EFI MAIN Relay

Check the harness and connector between the EFI MAIN relay and ECM connector. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A66056


Specified condition

EFI MAIN relay (1) – MREL (E9–8)

Continuity


(b)

MREL ECM Connector

A65748


Specified condition

EFI MAIN relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground

No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI MAIN relay and body ground. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open):

OK


Specified condition

EFI MAIN relay (2) – Body ground

Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JB–04



2


3



4



5


6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7


8



B A


A


B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10


9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14


15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 18


16

–



GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JE–04

LOCATION ECM Injector Common Rail Assy (Pressure Discharge Valve Assy)


Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temperature Sensor

Glow Plug Assy

EGR Valve Assy

Common Rail Assy (Fuel Pressure Sensor Assy)

Mass Air Flow Meter Engine Room R/B No.3

EDU Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

DLC3 Supply Pump Intake Shutter Assy

Accelerator Pedal Assy (Accel Position Sensor) Engine Room J/B

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor VRV Crankshaft Position Sensor


Fuel Temperature Sensor

A80993



DTC

P0045

–


05CPC–01

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT / OPEN



Trouble Area VRV Open or short in VRV circuit ECM

Open or short in VRV circuit for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic)

P0045



1

INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY (See page 12–16) NG


OK

2

INSPECT ECM(VN VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E12

VN(+)

Inspect using the oscilloscope. During idling, check the waveform between terminals E12 and E13 of the ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)


E1(–)

ECM Connector

A66060

VRV Signal Waveforms 5V/ Division

GND

1 msec./ Division

OK


A82974

NG



3

–




Disconnect the V4 VRV connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VN (E13–10) – (V4–2)

Continuity




Specified condition

VN (E13–10) or (V4–2) – Body ground

No continuity

E13

VN

ECM Connector

OK


A80456

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(VRV – EFI MAIN RELAY) (a)

Engine Room R/B No. 1 EFI MAIN Relay

Check the harness and connector between the EFI main relay and ECM connector. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A66056


Specified condition

EFI main relay (1) – MREL (E9–8)

Continuity



Specified condition

EFI main relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground

No continuity

MREL

ECM Connector

A81091



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


DTC

P0087

FUEL RAIL/SYSTEM PRESSURE – TOO LOW

DTC

P0190


DTC

P0192

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0193

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05CPD–01

HINT:

For more information on the fuel pressure sensor and the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P0087, P0190, P0192 and/or P0193 are present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.



–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM monitors internal fuel pressure of common rail using the fuel pressure sensor and controls the suction control valve to regulate the internal pressure to the target pressure(approx. 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1,835 kgf/cm2, 4.351 to 26,106 psi)). The pressure sensor is a semiconductor pressure sensor that varies electric resistance when applying pressure to its silicon. This sensor outputs voltage in proportion to the internal fuel pressure. The sensor has been designed as a duplicate circuit, and its main (PR) circuit is used under normal condition. Even if either sensor is failed, another normal sensor will be used to monitor the internal fuel pressure.

Detect P0193 Internal Structure of the Pressure Sensor (Duplicate System)

Property of Output Voltage

Output Voltage (V)

VC 4.90 4.44 3.89

Main

PR E2

PR (Main) Detect P0192 Sub

PR2 (Sub)

1.40 0.85 0.55

VCS PR2

E2S

0

190 Fuel Pressure (MPa)

A81476

DTC No.


P0087

Fuel pressure sensor output stays at fixed value.

P0190

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec.: (c) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is ”0.55 V or less” or ”4.9 V or more”.

P0192

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec.: (a) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is 0.55 V or less.

P0193

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec.: (a) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is 4.9 V or more.

Trouble Area

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit Fuel F l pressure sensor ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192 and P0193”, use the hand–held tester to confirm internal the fuel pressure of the common rail from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100



–


MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0087 (Fuel pressure sensor output stays at fixed value): Under normal condition, internal fuel pressure of the common rail usually fluctuates 1 to 2 MPa (10 to 20 kgf/cm2, 145 to 290 psi) even if the driving condition is constant. The internal fuel pressure is approximately 30 to 40 MPa (306 to 408 kgf/cm2, 4,351 to 5,801 psi) at idling, and it increases to approx. 50 to 100 MPa (510 to 1,020 kgf/cm2, 7,251 to 14,503 psi) when running the engine at 2,500 rpm. This DTC code is set if there is no fluctuation at the internal fuel pressure. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P0190, P0192 and P0193 (Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit): These DTCs are set if the fuel pressure sensor output voltage is out of the standard range. The DTCs stand for open or short malfunction of the sensor circuit. If these DTCs are present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P0087 Malfunction Detection

Normal

Fuel Pressure

Abnormal

Engine Speed A82882









–



Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 0.5 sec.

CHK ENG operation

1 driving cycle

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P0087: Specification

Item

Minimum

Maximum

Engine speed

500 rpm

–

Battery voltage

8V

–

5 mm3/st

–

Fuel quantify

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor circuit (P0190, P0192 and P0193) is malfunction

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P0087: Detection Criteria Changing value of fuel pressure

Threshold Virtually no fluctuation


Threshold Less than 0.55 V or more than 4.9 V


Threshold Less than 0.55 V



Threshold More than 4.9 V


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

F16 Fuel Pressure Sensor

PR

PR2

VCS

VC

E2S

E2

ECM

5

P

5 EB1

P

26 E13 PCR1

2

P–B

2 EB1

P–B

33 E13 PCR2

1

R–W

1 EB1

R–W

2 E12 VCS

6

R–W

6 EB1

R–W

18 E13 VC

3

BR

3 EB1

BR

1 E12 E2S

4

BR

4 EB1

BR

28 E13 E2

A80998


After completing repair, confirm P0087 is not set again. If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Check that internal fuel pressure of the common rail is within specification below. Reference: Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100


Go to step 3


2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. Clear the DTCs. Let the engine idle for 60 seconds and perform quick acceleration to 2,500 rpm for 30 seconds. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192 and/or P0193” are output.

A

DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192 and/or P0193” are not output.

B

B


A REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65)

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR – ECM)

E13 PCR1

(a) (b) (c)

E12

VC

VCS

Disconnect the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

E2S

Specified condition

PCR1 (E13–26) – PR (F16–5)

PCR2

E2

PCR2 (E13–33) – PR2 (F16–2)

ECM Connector

VCS (E12–2) – VCS (F16–1)

A80452

Continuity

VC (E13–18) – VC (F16–6) E2 (E13–28) – E2 (F16–4)

Wire Harness Side PR2 F16 VCS

E2S (E12–1) – E2S (F16–3)

Standard (Check for short): E2S


Specified condition

PCR1 (E13–26) or PR (F16–5) – Body ground PCR2 (E13–33) or PR2 (F16–2) – Body ground VCS (E12–2) or VCS (F16–1) – Body ground

E2

VC PR Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector

No continuity

VC (E13–18) or VC (F16–6) – Body ground E2 (E13–28) or E2 (F16–4) – Body ground

A80453

E2S (E12–1) or E2S (F16–3) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR) (See page 11–78)


OR


–


05CPE–01

DTC

P0088

FUEL RAIL/SYSTEM PRESSURE – TOO HIGH

DTC

P1229

FUEL PUMP SYSTEM

HINT:

For more information on the supply pump (suction control valve) and the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P0088 and/or P1229 are present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.



Trouble Area

P0088

Internal fuel pressure of the common rail is too high. The fuel pressure exceeds 200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi).

Supply pump (Suction control valve) Pressure discharge valve Short in supply pump (Suction control valve) circuit Open in pressure discharge valve circuit ECM

P1229

Fuel over fed. Internal fuel pressure is beyond the target fuel pressure despite the ECM closing the suction control valve.

Short in supply pump (Suction control valve) circuit Supply pump (Suction control valve) ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0088 and P1229”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel rail pressure from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0088 (Internal fuel pressure too high): The ECM will set this DTC if the fuel pressure inside the common rail is beyond 200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi). This DTC indicates that the suction control valve may be stuck open, or there may be short in its circuit, and the pressure discharge valve may be stuck close, or there may be open in its circuit. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P1229 (Fuel over fed): The ECM will set this DTC if the actual fuel pressure inside the common rail stays higher than the target fuel pressure, despite the ECM closing the suction control valve. This DTC code represents that the suction control valve may be stuck open, or there may be short in its circuit. Under this condition, the pressure discharge valve will operate quite often. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF.



–


MONITOR STRATEGY P0088: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration

Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 sec.

CHK ENG operation

1 driving cycle


Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 min.

CHK ENG operation

1 driving cycle

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P0088: Specification The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or suction control valve circuit, or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning

P1229: Item

Specification

Target fuel pressure variation is small

–

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or suction control valve circuit, or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P0088: Detection Criteria

Threshold 200 MPa (2,039 kgf/cm2, 29,007 psi) or more


P1229: Threshold Internal fuel pressure of the common rail stays higher than the target fuel pressure, despite the ECM closing the suction control valve, and also the pressure discharge valve is frequently operating



–


WIRING DIAGRAM S6 Suction Control Valve

EDU PRD

4 E5

1

LG–R

2

LG

ECM 2 E13 PCV+ 1 E13 PCV–

R–L

32 E13 PRD

R–L


(Shielded) PRV

8 E5

W

1 EA1

W

COM3

7 E4

B

2 EA1

B

(Shielded)

BR

D J12

BR

E J12

2

1

J/C

E J13

BR

D J13

EI

A82347




1

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0088 AND/OR P1229)


Proceed to

”Only DTC P0088” or ”DTC P0088 and P1229” are output

A


B

DTC ”P0190, P0191, P0192, P0193 and/or P1271” are output

C


D

B

Go to step 4

C


D

Go to step 3

A

2


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. Clear the DTCs. Start the engine and turn the ignition switch OFF. Wait for 10 seconds and then restart the engine and turn the ignition switch OFF again. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. (g) Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

DTC P1272 is output

A


B

B A


Go to step 4


3 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check that the internal fuel pressure of the common rail drops below approximately 5 MPa within approximately 1 second as the ignition switch is turned OFF at the engine in an idle. Result:

(e)

Pressure Displayed (MPa)

Proceed to

Approx. 5 or less

A

Approx. 5 or more

B

B

REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 14–286) PROCEED TO STEP 4 AFTER REPLACEMENT

A

4

CHECK INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY(SUCTION CONTROL VALVE) Suction Control Valve

(a)


NG A75346

OK




5

–



(a) Disconnect the suction control valve connector and then start the engine. Wait for 1 minute. HINT: If the engine does not start, the suction control valve is normal. Therefore proceed to step 6. (b) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. (e) Clear the DTCs. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. (g) Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A

DTC P1229 is output

B

B


A

6




PCV– Suction Control Valve Connector A81460

PCV– (S6–2) – PCV– (E13–1)




E13 PCV+ PCV–

NG


OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


7



E13

PCV+

–


Specified condition

PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1)



A66060



A82559

NG


OK CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0088 AND/OR P1229 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) for 5 minutes, and then confirm P0088 and/or P1229 is not set again.



DTC

P0093

–


05CPF–01

FUEL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED – LARGE LEAK

HINT:

For more information on the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P0093 is present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.



P0093

Trouble Area Fuel line between supply pump and common rail Fuel line between common rail and injector Supply pump Common rail Injector (P1238 is set simultaneously) Pressure discharge valve Open or short in EDU circuit (P0200 is set simultaneously Open or short in injector circuit (P0200 and P1238 are set simultaneously) EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously ECM

Fuel leaks in high–pressure area.

HINT: After confirming DTC P0093, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel rail pressure from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0093 (Fuel leaks in high–pressure area): This DTC stands for fuel leaks is existing in high–pressure area in the common rail system. The ECM constantly monitors the internal fuel pressure of the common rail after the engine is started, and the ECM then will set this DTC if the decreasing rate of the internal fuel pressure is large when injecting the fuel. In the common rail system, high–pressure fuel (approx. 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1,835 kgf/cm2, 4.351 to 26,106 psi)) is always applied to the high–pressure area including the supply pump, common rail, injector and piping. The ECM adjusts the suction control valve opening angle to obtain the target internal fuel pressure. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and permits driving the vehicle for extra 1 minute before stopping both the fuel injection and supply pump operation, then stops the engine. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF.



TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Item Engine speed


Maximum

600 rpm

–

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or suction control valve circuit, or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold Drop rate in the internal fuel pressure is large when injecting fuel


1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0093) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output besides DTC P0093)

Proceed to


A

DTC P1238 is output

B

DTC ”P0200 and/or P1271” are output

C


Go to step 3

C


A

2 (a)

CHECK FUEL LEAKAGE(INSPECT HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL PARTS AND AREA FOR FUEL LEAKS) Visually check the supply pump, injector and fuel line located between the supply pump and the common rail for fuel leaks or fuel pressure leaks. Also, perform the same on the fuel line between the common rail and the injector (See page 11–69, 11–60).

HINT: Fuel leaks inside the components (Supply pump, etc) may result. NG OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE


3 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4.9 to 4.9 mm3/st NG


OK

4 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL LEAK TEST) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL LEAK TEST”. Check for fuel leaks in high–pressure area.

GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0093 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT:

After clearing the DTC, let the engine idle for 1 minute and then run it at 2,500 rpm for 30 seconds. At the same time, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside the common rail from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Internal fuel pressure of the common rail must be stable under each driving condition. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100



–


DTC

P0095

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT

DTC

P0097

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW

DTC

P0098

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

05CPG–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Fig. 1) 30 20

Resistance k

10 5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 – 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

The inlet air temperature sensor is built into the intake air connector and senses the inlet air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the inlet air temperature. The lower the inlet air temperature, the greater the thermistor resistance value, and the higher the inlet air temperature, the lower the thermistor resistance value (See Fig. 1). The inlet air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM. The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the inlet air temperature sensor from terminal THIA via a resistor R. That is the resistor R and the inlet air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the inlet air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the inlet air temperature, the potential at the terminal THIA also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability with a cold engine.

Temp. C (F) A56991

DTC No.

Proceed to


Step 1

Open or short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0097

Step 4

Short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0098

Step 2

Open in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0095

Trouble Area

Open or short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. sensor circuit Diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0095, P0097 or P0098”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM I9 Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temperature Sensor

ECM 5V 2

GR

1

BR

20 E13

R THIA

28 E13

E2 E1

A76568



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INLET AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual diesel turbo inlet air temperature. Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–




ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THIA and E2 of the diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 1405C (2845F) or more


E2 THIA Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp. Sensor Connector A56868

OK

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE DIESEL TURBO INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG

3



ECM

(b)

A75742

Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THIA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 1405C (2845F) or more

E13

THIA

E2

OK ECM Connector

A80455

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


OR


4

–




ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –405C (–405F)

OK A76591

REPLACE DIESEL TURBO TENPERATURE SENSOR

INLET

AIR

NG

5



(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –405C (–405F)

A75744

E13 THIA E2

OK




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CPH–01

DTC

P0100


DTC

P0102


DTC

P0103



A

Output Voltage


A53295

DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0100

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic)

P0102

Open in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic)

P0103

Short in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic)


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100, P0102 or P0103”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the mass air flow ratio from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF”. Air Flow Value (gm/s) Approx. 0.0 174.0 or more AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

A6 Mass Air Flow Meter VG 5 B–W

3

ECM G

24 VG E12

L–Y

32 EVG E12

+B

From EFI MAIN Relay

E2G

4

A76970

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to

0.0

A

174.0 or more

B


C


A


B

Go to step 6

C



2

–




Turn the ignition switch ON. Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


9 to 14 V


NG

Go to step 5

A54396

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(VG VOLTAGE)

E12

(a) (b)

VG (+)

Start the engine. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E12 ECM connector.

HINT: The A/C switch should be turned OFF. Standard: EVG (–)


Condition

Specified condition

ECM Connector

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.4 V

A66060

OK NG




4

–





VG

VG (A6–5) – VG (E12–24)

E2G

E2G (A6–4) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12


A80454



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASS AIR FLOW METER – EFI MAIN RELAY) (a) (b)


(c)

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Remove the EFI main relay from the engine room R/B No. 1. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):



Specified condition

+B (A6–3) – EFI main relay (3)

Continuity


A54396

Engine Room R/B No. 1 EFI Main Relay

NG A66056


Specified condition

+B (A6–3) or EFI main relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6



Specified condition


Continuity

EVG ECM Connector A66060

NG

OK




7

–





VG

VG (A6–5) – VG (E12–24)

E2G

E2G (A6–4) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12


A80454



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0101

–


05CPI–01

MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM



Trouble Area

After engine is warmed up, condition (a) continues for more than 10 sec. at idling: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Mass air flow meter output greater than 2.2 V P0101

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for more than 6 sec. with engine speed 2000 rpm or more: (2 trip detection logic) (a) VTA greater than 0.1 V (b) Mass air flow meter output less than 0.25 V

Mass air flow meter


1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B






–


05CPJ–01

DTC

P0105


DTC

P0107


DTC

P0108


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION V 4.5

1 kPa

13.3

253.3

mmHg 1,900 100 (3.9) (74.8) (in.Hg) Air Pressure

By a built–in sensor unit, the manifold absolute pressure sensor detects the intake manifold pressure as a voltage. The ECM then determines the basic injection duration and basic ignition advance angle based on this voltage. Since the manifold absolute pressure sensor does not use the atmospheric pressure as a criterion, but senses the absolute pressure inside the intake manifold (the pressure in proportion to the preset absolute vacuum 0), it is not influenced by fluctuations in the atmospheric pressure due to high altitude and other factors. This permits it to control the air fuel ratio at the proper level under all conditions.

A06532

DTC No. P0105 P0107 P0108


Trouble Area

Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic)


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / PIM”. Intake Manifold Pressure (kPa) Approx. 0 250 or more




–


WIRING DIAGRAM

T5 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 VC

PIM

E2

ECM 5V R–W

18 VC E13

2

W–R

28 PIM E12

1

BR

28 E2 E13

A81002


If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / PIM” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: Same value as the actual atmospheric pressure. NG

OK




2

–


INSPECT ECM(VC VOLTAGE) E13

(a) (b)

VC (+)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V


NG

A66060


OK

3

INSPECT ECM(PIM VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E12

E2 (–)

PIM (+)


Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Voltage:


Condition

Specified condition

PIM (E12–28) – E2 (E13–28)

Applied negative pressure of 40kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 in.Hg)

0.2 to 0.8 V

PIM (E12 – 28) – E2 (E13–28)

Same as atmosphere

1.3 to 1.9 V

PIM (E12 – 28) – E2 (E13–28)

Applied positive pressure of 69kPa (0.7 kg/cm3,, 10.0 psi

3.2 to 3.8 V

NG OK




4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR – ECM) (a)

Wire Harness Side PIM

T5

(b) (c)

VC

E2

Disconnect the T5 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)


Specified condition

PIM (T5–2) – PIM (E12–28) VC (T5–3) – VC (E13–18)

A56992

Continuity y

E2 (T5–1) – E2 (E13–28)


E12

E13

Specified condition

PIM (T5–2) or PIM (E12–28) – Body ground VC (T5–3) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground

VC

No continuityy

E2 (T5–1) or E2 (E13–28) – Body ground

PIM E2

ECM Connector

NG

A81088

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

5

CHECK TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–7) NG


OK

6

CHECK EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 12–18) NG




OR


DTC

P0106

–


05CPK–01

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/ BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/ PERFORMANCE PROBLEM



Trouble Area

Voltage output of the manifold absolute pressure sensor is out of the standard range. (2 trip detection logic)



If DTCs ”P0105, P0107, and P0108” are output simultaneously, manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108” first. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B



A REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR



–


05CPL–01

DTC

P0110


DTC

P0112


DTC

P0113



Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F)

The intake air temperature sensor is built in the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature is, the greater the thermistor resistance value becomes, and the higher the intake air temperature is, the lower the thermistor resistance value becomes (See Fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from terminal THA (THAR) via resistor R. The resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA (THAR) also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability with a cold engine.

A67628

DTC No.

Proceed to


P0110

Step 1

Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0112

Step 4

Short in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0113

Step 2

Open in intake air temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0110, P0112 or P0113, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM


5V G–R

THA 2

E13 28

E2

BR

E13

1

R

31 THA

E2

A72925



1 (a) (b) (c)


Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–




(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the mass air flow meter wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

A75743


E2

OK

THA A54396


NG

3



(a) (b)

ECM

A75742


HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

E13

THA

E2 ECM Connector

OK A80455

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


OR


4

–



Mass Air Flow Meter

(a) (b) (c)

ECM

A75766

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

OK


NG

5


ECM

Mass Air Flow Meter

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

THA

OK




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CPM–01

DTC

P0115


DTC

P0117

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0118

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A thermistor is built in the engine coolant temperature sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature. The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as those of the intake air temperature sensor. HINT: If the ECM detects DTC ”P0115, P0117 or P0118” it enters the fail–safe mode in which the engine coolant temperature is assumed to be 80 C (176 F). DTC No.

Proceed to


Step 1

Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0117

Step 4

Short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0118

Step 2

Open in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0115

Trouble Area


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0115, P0117 or P0118”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the engine coolant temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E2 Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor

5V

2

W

2 EC1

B–W

19 THW E13

1

L

1 EC1

BR

28 E2 E13

R

A81000



1 (a) (b) (c)


Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–




ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

Wire Harness Side

E2

OK Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Connector

A76786


NG

3



ECM

(b)

A75742

THW

Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THW and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

E2 E13

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


OR


4

–




ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

OK A75766


NG

5



(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

THW

OK




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0116

–


05CPN–01



P0116


Trouble Area

When THW greater than –40 C (–40 F) and less than 60 C (140 F), and THA greater than –6.7 C (20 F), and when starting engine, conditions (a) and (b) continue (2 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THW change is lower than 3 C (5.4 F) after engine was started.


In case that reading value of engine coolant temp. sensor will not change more than 1 C (1.8 F) even after repeating 6 trips (detection logic) of adjusting speed pattern with THW more than 90 C (194 F) after engine was started.


If DTCs ”P0115, P0116, P0117 and P0118” are output simultaneously, engine coolant temperature sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0115, P0117 or P0118” first. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B



A

2






DTC

P0168

–


05CPO–01

FUEL TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH


P0168


Trouble Area

When THF greater than 35 C (95 F) and less than 60 C (140 F), and THF –6.7 C (20 F), and when starting engine, conditions (a) and (b) continue (1 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THF change is lower than 3 C (5.4 F) after the engine was started.


In case that reading value of fuel temp. sensor will not change more than 1 C (1.8 F) even after repeating 6 trips (detection logic) of adjusting speed pattern with THF more than 60 C (140 F) after the engine was started.


If DTCs ”P0180, P0182 and P0183” are output simultaneously, fuel temperature sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0180, P0182 or P0183” first. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B


A REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR




–


DTC

P0180

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0182

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0183

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05CPP–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel temperature sensor senses the fuel temperature. A thermistor built into the sensor changes the resistance value according to the fuel temperature. The lower the fuel temperature is, the greater the thermistor resistance becames, and the higher the fuel temperature is, the lower the thermistor resistance becomes (See Fig. 1). The fuel temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the fuel temperature sensor from terminal THF via a resistor R. The resistor R and the fuel temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the fuel temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the fuel temperature, the potential at terminal THF also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM performs the pressure control compensation of the supply pump and error detection compensation of the highly pressurized fuel system.

(Fig.1) 30 20

Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) A67628

DTC No.

Proceed to


P0180

Step 1

Open or short in fuel temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0182

Step 4

Short in fuel temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

P0183

Step 2

Open in fuel temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area

Open or short in fuel temp. sensor circuit Fuel temperature sensor ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0180, P0182 or P0183”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM F18 Fuel Temp. Sensor

5V 2

L

1

BR

29 THF E13 28 E13

R

E2 E1

A10940



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL TEMPARATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual fuel temperature. Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–



Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the fuel temperature sensor wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

A75743


Fuel Temp. Sensor Connector

OK A66104

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG

3


Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b)

ECM

A75742

Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals THF and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more

E13

THF

E2

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE


HARNESS

OR


4

–



Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A76591

OK

REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG

5


Fuel Temp. Sensor

(a) (b) (c)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

THF ECM Connector

OK A80456



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0191

–


05CPQ–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTCs P0087 on page 05–557.


If DTCs ”P0087, P0190, P0192, and P0193” are output simultaneously, manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0087, P0190, P0192, and P0193” first. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

DTC No. P0191

1 (a)


Trouble Area

Voltage output of the fuel pressure sensor for the common rail is out of the standard range. (1 trip detection logic)


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0191) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B



A REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR) (See page 11–78)



DTC

P0200

–


05CPR–01


HINT:

For more information on the EDU, see page 05–517. If P0200 are present, Use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The EDU has been adopted to drive the injector at high speeds. The EDU has realized high–speed driving under high fuel pressure conditions using the DC/DC converter that provides a high–voltage, quick–charging system. Soon after the EDU receives an injection command signal (IJT) from the ECM, the EDU responds to the command with injector injection confirmation signal (IJF) when the current is applied to the injector. EDU Wiring Diagram

Maximum 150 V COM3 COM2

BATTERY

DC/DC Converter

Maximum 150 V

Command Pulse

COM1 Injector

ECM

IJT#1

INJ#1

IJT#4

INJ#4

IJT#2

INJ#2

Control Circuit

IJT#3

INJ#3

PRD


PRV

IJF

Confirmation Pulse

GND

EDU Connector

E5

E4

Warning: Terminal J, I, H, K, L, M, N and S are high voltage A81481



–


DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0200

Open or short in EDU or injector circuit. After engine is started, there is no injection confirmation signal (IJF) from EDU to ECM, despite the ECM sending injection command signal (IJT) to the EDU.

Open or short in EDU circuit Injector EDU ECM

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0200 (Open or short in EDU or injector circuit): The ECM always monitors both the injection command signal (IJT) and injection confirmation signal (IJF). This DTC will be set if the ECM judged that the number of IJT signals and IJF signals are inconsistent. The EDU monitors a drive current supplied to the injector and interprets the IJF signal as low if the current exceeds the specified level, and then it indicates that there is the current in the injector. P0200 refers to malfunction of injector drive circuit or injector circuit. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. Malfunction Detection

Command Signal (IJT) ECM


EDU

ON Injection Command Signal

OFF

IJT

Abnormal Injection Confirmation Signal

IJF

Normal A81495


IJF signal from EDU Continuous 10 sec. 1 driving cycle



Maximum

Engine speed

500 rpm

–

Battery voltage

11 V

Ignition switch


– ON


–


TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold If injection missing counter* is accumulated a specified number of times successively, or if injection missing counter for either one of the cylinders is accumulated a specified number of times successively (Approximately 1 second or more). *: Injection missing counter increments when no IJF signal from the EDU despite the ECM sending the IJT signal.

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

(LHD) (RHD) 7 7 B–Y IE3 IO1 10 EE1

B–W GR B–W 1

B–W

1

3


1

1

3 EFI MAIN Relay

5

EDU Relay

2 1

5 1

2

(Shielded)

R–B

W–B

7 EE1

B–Y

1 E9 +B

GR

2 IE1

GR

8 E9

Y

4 IE2

Y

10 E9 IREL

5 IJT#4 E5 BATTERY

R–L R–B G–W W–R R–W W–L

(Shielded)

1 2 EFI 1

8 E4

G

B–W

6 IJT#1 E5 3 IJT#2 E5 2 IJT#3 E5

1

B–Y

8 IK1

4 PRD E5 7 IJF E5

1


W

1 EA1 1

Discharge

INJ#4

Valve

B

2

2 EA1

B

3

7 E4

B


BR

BR

B

W–B Battery

E J13

EC AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

22 E13 #3 21 E13 #4

W

B–R 1

J/C BR

3 E4

2

5 COM1 E4 COM3 2 INJ#2 E4

I8 Injector No. 4 B

1 INJ#3 E4 6 COM2 E4

D J13

1 GND E5

B–R

1 B–R

2

I6 Injector No. 2 Y

L 1

BR

D J12 D J12 E J12

FL MAIN

32 E13 PRD 25 E13 INJF 24 E13 #1 23 E13 #2

P3 Pressure

1 1A

MREL

I5 Injector No. 1 4 8 INJ#1 E4 E5 PRV

W

2 E10 BATT

B–W

EDU

1

1

B–Y

2

I7 Injector No. 3 V

L 1

2

L W–B

EI A81001


–


PULSE GENERATION INSPECTION HINT: Problem area can be identified by inspecting waveform at the following inspection points. Warning: Terminal COM1, COM2, and INJ#1 to 4 are high–voltage ECM

High–voltage Area

EDU

INJF D

COM2

C IJF

Injector

COM1

IJT#1

INJ#1

IJT#4

INJ#4

#2

IJT#2

INJ#2

#3

IJT#3

INJ#3

#1 #4

B

A

A81508

HINT: Inspect the following inspection points ”A and D” or ” B and C” at the same time. Malfunction point

Trouble area

A

ECM

B (if A is normal)

Open or short in ”#1 to #4 (ECM)” – ”IJT#1 to #4 (EDU)” harness or connector.

C (if A and B are normal)

Open or short in ”INJ#1 to #4 (EDU)” – ”COM1 and/or COM2” (EDU) circuit. Injector EDU

D (if A, B and C are normal)


(a)




A09438

Reference: Inspect using the oscilloscope. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. Inspection Points

Specified Condition

A and B



(b)

Signal Waveform



5 V/ Division

INJF

–

Inspection Points

Specified Condition

C and D




If P0200 and P1271 are present simultaneously, there is open in the INJF wire harness between the EDU and ECM, or there is open in the wire harness for both of the injector the pressure discharge valve. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to

DTC P0200 and P1238 are output

A


B

B

Go to step 3

A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

(e)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4.9 to 4.9 mm3/st The cylinder that has a misspecification compensation value is a faulty cylinder, use the following flowchart to inspect and repair the cylinder.

GO



3

–


INSPECT INJECTOR ASSY (a)

Check the injector for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 0.85 to 1.05 at 20_C (68_F)

2 1

Injector Assy

NG A81503


OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – INJECTOR ASSY) (a)

Wire Harness Side Injector Connector 1 2

I5

I6

I7

Check the harness and connector between the injector and EDU (INJ# terminal). (1) Disconnect the I5, I6, I7, or I8 injector connector. (2) Disconnect the E4 EDU connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

I8


Specified condition


A80992


Wire Harness Side INJ#2 INJ#4 INJ#1

Injector (I7–1) – INJ#3 (E4–1) Injector (I8–1) – INJ#4 (E4–3)

COM1

Injector (I5–2) – COM1 (E4–5)

E4

Continuity

Injector (I6–2) – COM2 (E4–6) Injector (I7–2) – COM2 (E4–6) Injector (I8–2) – COM1 (E4–5)


COM2

INJ#3 EDU Connector

Specified condition

Injector (I5–1) or INJ#1 (E4–4) – Body ground

A56874

Injector (I6–1) or INJ#2 (E4–2) – Body ground Injector (I7–1) or INJ#3 (E4–1) – Body ground Injector (I8–1) or INJ#4 (E4–3) – Body ground Injector (I5–2) or COM1 (E4–5) – Body ground

No continuity

Injector (I6–2) or COM2 (E4–6) – Body ground Injector (I7–2) or COM2 (E4–6) – Body ground Injector (I8–2) or COM1 (E4–5) – Body ground

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – ECM)

Wire Harness Side IJF E5

(a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the E5 EDU connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the terminals of the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

IJT#3

IJT#2

IJT#4

EDU Connector

Specified condition

IJT#1 (E5–6) – #1 (E13–24) IJT#2 (E5–3) – #2 (E13–23)

IJT#1

IJT#3 (E5–2) – #3 (E13–22)

A80994

Continuity y

IJT#4 (E5–5) – #4 (E13–21) IJF (E5–7) – INJF (E13–25)



Specified condition


#2


INJF


#4 #3

#1

No continuityy

#4 (E13–21) or IJT#4 (E5–5) – Body ground INJF (E13–25) or IJF (E5–7) – Body ground


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6



E4

EDU Connector

(a) (b) (c)


Specified condition


9 to 14 V

A56874




A80994

NG

CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (BATTERY – EDU)


7

–


INSPECT ECM(INJECTOR VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E12


Specified condition

#1 (E13–24) – E1 (E12–7) #2 (E13–23) – E1 (E12–7)

#1

#2

#3

#4

E1

ECM Connector

#3 (E13–22) – E1 (E12–7)


#4 (E13–21) – E1 (E12–7)

A66060



A09438

NG

REPLACE ECM(See page 10–65)

OK

8





–


05CPS–01

DTC

P0234

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER OVERBOOST CONDITION

DTC

P0299

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER UNDERBOOST

DTC

P1251

TURBO/SUPER CHARGER OVERBOOST CONDITION (TOO HIGH)


P0234 P0299 P1251


Trouble Area

When the condition that the turbocharger pressure exceeds the standard value for 0.5 sec. or more. (1 trip detection logic) Actual turbocharger pressure is deviated 20 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2, 2.9 psi) or more from the simulated target pressure based on the engine speed and fue injection volume for 60 seconds.

VRV Open or short in VRV circuit Turbocharger Vacuum hose EGR valve ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM V4 VRV B–W

1

ECM 2

2 IE1

GR

W

10 E13 VN

GR

8 E9 MREL


EE1 10

1 B–W

B

1 B

1 1A

EFI MAIN Relay 1 2

3

5

1

1 B–Y

EFI 1

2

1

W–B

FL MAIN 3 Battery 3

Engine Room R/B No. 3 EC A81003



–



1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0234, P0299 AND/OR P1251) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0234, P0299 and/or P1251” are output

A

”P0234, P0299 and/or P1251 and other DTCs are output

B

B


A

2

CHECK CONNECTION OF VACUUM HOSE NG


OK

3

CHECK VACUUM HOSE(CHECK VACUUM BETWEEN TURBOCHARGER – VRV FOR INTAKE PRESURE CHANGE AT 900 RPM)

(a) Using a 3–way connector, connect a vacuum gauge to the hose between the E–VRV and turbocharger. (b) Warm up the engine to above 80 C (176 F). (c) Check the vacuum at 900 rpm. Result: Proceed to

Vacuum

A

0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 in.Hg) to 50 kPa (375 mmHg, 14.8 in.Hg)

B

Above 50 kPa (375 mmHg, 14.8 in.Hg)

B A


Go to step 8


4

–


INSPECT ECM(VN VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E12

E13

VN


Specified condition

VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)


E1

ECM Connector

A66060

E–VRV Signal Waveforms 5V/ Division GND

1 msec./ Division

A05967

NG


OK

5

INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY(OPERATION) VRV: ON

(a) (b) (c)

VRV: OFF Air Filter

F

E

E

Air

Air A15518

Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the VRV. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check for operation of the E–VRV when it is operated by the hand–held tester. VRV ON: Air from port E flows out through port F. VRV OFF: Air from port E flows out through air filter.

NG


OK

6

INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY(RESISTANCE) (See page 12–16) NG

OK




7

–




Disconnect the V4 VRV connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check the continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) VN (E13–10) – (V4–2) E2 (E13–28) – (V4–1)



Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) VN (E13–10) or (V4–2) – Body ground E2 (E13–28) or (V4–1) – Body ground


E13

VN E2

NG ECM Connector

A80456

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

8

INSPECT TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–7) NG


OK

9

INSPECT EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 12–18) NG




AND


–


05B5I–03

DTC

P0335


DTC

P0339


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is installed the crankshaft timing pulley. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals of every engine revolution. The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G signal, and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signal. DTC No.

P0335

P0339


Trouble Area

No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking (2 trip detection logic) No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 650 rpm or more (2 trip detection logic) In conditions (a), (b) and (c), when no crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal is input for 0.05 sec. or more. (1 trip detection logic) (a) Engine revolution 1,000 rpm or more (b) STA signal is OFF (c) 3 sec. or more has lapsed after STA signal is switched from ON to OFF.




A81512

Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor Signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) ECM


Specified condition

NE+ (E13–27) – NE– (E13–34)



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM C1 Camshaft Position Sensor (Shielded) 1

P

23 G1 E12

2

L

31 G– E12

1

G

27 NE+ E13

2

R

34 NE– E13

C6 Crankshaft Position Sensor (Shielded)

E1 E J12 J/C

BR

E E

EI A81004


Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the engine mechanical systems. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1

–



Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Resistance: 1,630 to 2,740 at cold 2,065 to 3,225 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50 _C (122 _F) and ”Hot” is from 50 _C (122 _F) to 100 _C (212 _F).


A78431

NG

REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (See page 10–64)

OK

2




Specified condition



Continuity



Specified condition


E13

No continuity

NE+

NE–


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

3

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

OR


4 (a)

–


CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE(TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE(CRANKSHAFT TIMING PULLEY)) Check the teeth of the sensor plate. NG



REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE (CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY)


DTC

P0340

–


05B5J–03


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Camshaft position sensor (G signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G signal plate has one tooth on its outer circumference and is installed on the camshaft timing pulley. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil change, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is mounted on the crankshaft timing pulley. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G signal and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signal. DTC No.

P0340


Trouble Area

No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking ((2 trip detection logic) g ) No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 650 rpm or more (1 trip detection logic)


Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft position sensor Camshaft timing pulley ECM


Specified condition

G1 (E12–23) – G– (E12–31)



A81512



1


Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Resistance: 1,630 to 2,740 at cold 2,065 to 3,225 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10C (14F) to 50 C (122 F) and ”Hot” is from 50 C (122 F) to 100 C (212 F).


A64984


NG

REPLACE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (See page 10–63)


2

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the C1 camshaft position sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) – G1 (E12–23)


Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) – G– (E12–31)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) or G1 (E12–23) – Body ground Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) or G– (E12–31) – Body ground

E12

Specified condition

Specified condition

No continuity

G1 G–


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

3

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a)

CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY(TEETH OF PLATE) Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG



REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY

OR


DTC

P0380

–


05CPT–01

GLOW PLUG/HEATER CIRCUIT ”A”

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The glow plug is mounted inside the engine combustion room. To ensure efficient engine starting with a cold engine, the ECM calculates time the current needs to flow into the glow plug depending on the engine coolant temperature after the ignition switch is turned ON. The ECM then turns on the glow relay and permits the current to flow into the glow plug. The glow plug is then heated and enhances fuel combustion with the cold engine. This DTC will be set if there is open in glow plug itself or its circuit.

Battery

ECM

GLOW Relay


The ECM performs the after glow for a certain period of time depending on the engine coolant temperature after the engine has been started. After glow reduces a diesel engine knocking, a white smoke, and etc with a cold engine. After Glow System After Glow Time

(sec.) 120

1 0

40 20 (C) 104 68 (F) Engine Coolant Temperature ON

Ignition Switch

OFF ON

Glow Plug

OFF

OFF

Engine Speed

After Glow Time Starting Engine A81018



–



Trouble Area

When the glow plug is turned from ON to OFF, or vice–versa, conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied: (a) Battery voltage dos not change (b) Duty signal from terminal M of the generator does not change

P0380

S Open or short in glow plug circuit S Glow fuse S Glow relay S Glow plug S ECM

MONITOR DESCRIPTION When starting a cold engine, the ECM supplies the current to the glow plug for a certain period of time. As the supplying current to the glow plug is terminated, the large current is suddenly cut off, therefore the battery voltage then varies and also terminal M output (duty ratio) of the generator varies. If these variations are not occurred when the glow plug is turned from ON to OFF, or vice–versa, the ECM realizes that the current has not been supplied to the glow plug, and interprets this as open malfunction of the glow plug or glow plug circuit.


Glow plug circuit Twice per driving cycle 3 min. 2 driving cycles



Maximum

Battery voltage

11 V

–

Engine speed

700 rpm

2,000 rpm

–

40_C (104_F)

Engine coolant temperature Engine speed is stable Time after engine start

– 8 sec.

Any switches that vary electrical load have not been being operated

– –

The monitor will not run if the generator circuit is malfunctioning

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold When the battery voltage, or terminal M output (duty ratio) of the generator does not change, despite turning the glow plug from ON to OFF, or vice–versa



–



IG1

3

8 E13 ALT


G–R

9 E12 RL

G–Y

B–L B DH 1

Driver Side J/B

A12 1 B 5

A11 3 M

A11 4 L

1 Generator

IG1 Relay 3

B

W

B

Y

1 DN 5 DH

AM1 ED1 1

B–L

2

IG S A11 2 A11 1

ECU–IG

R–W

14 E9

B

GREL

R

IK2 1 EE1 5 3

3

IK1 10

18 DB 9 DA

3

R

R

2

2 ALT

2

4

GLOW

1

1

G2 GLOW Relay

R–W

B

W–B 3 3

3 Engine Room R/B No. 3 B 1

B

1 B

7 7


BR

G J10 (LHD) C J20 (RHD) R–W

IE3 (LHD) IO1 (RHD)

1

1

2 ALT–S EFI 1 1

1

IJ

BR

2

G1 Glow Plug

Battery

7 E12 E1

B–Y

J/C

FL MAIN

2 E10 BATT

B–Y

B

1A

Engine Room R/B No. 1 BR EI

A81005



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: S S

After completing repair, confirm P0380 is not set again. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Glow System Wiring Diagram From Battery

GREL

GLOW Relay

ECM

Glow Plug

A81506

1

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0380)


Proceed to


A

P0380 and P0622 are output

B

B

A




2

–


CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY ASSY (a)

Check the glow plug relay for continuity. (1) Check that there is continuity between and terminal. Specified condition: Between terminal


A33913

NG

1–2


3–4

Continuity

REPLACE GLOW PLUG RELAY ASSY

OK

3

CHECK FUSE(GLOW FUSE) (a)


(b)

GLOW Fuse

Remove the GLOW fuse from the engine room R/B No. 3. Check for continuity in the GLOW fuse. Result: Continuity

NG A80987


OK

4

INSPECT GLOW PLUG ASSY (a)

Ohmmeter

Continuity

B08263

Check the glow plug for resistance. (1) Check that there is resistance between the glow plug terminal and ground. Standard resistance: Approx. 1.1 at 20_C (68_F) NOTICE: S Be careful not to damage the glow plug pipes as it could cause an open circuit or shorten life of the glow plugs. S Avoid getting oil and fuel on the glow plug when cleaning. S During inspection, be sure to wipe off any oil of the terminal and bakelite washer with a dry cloth. S Do not apply more than 11 V to the glow plug as it could cause an open circuit. NG

OK


REPLACE GLOW PLUG ASSY (See page 19–33)


5

–


INSPECT GLOW PLUG ASSY(INSTALLATION) NG

TIGHTEN GLOW PLUG

OK

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GLOW PLUG RELAY – ECM, AND GLOW PLUG RELAY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) (c)

E9

Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Remove the glow plug relay. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

GREL

Specified condition

+S (Glow plug relay terminal 3) – GREL (E9–14)

Continuity

–S (Glow plug relay terminal 4) – Body ground

ECM Connector


A81091

NG –S


Specified condition

GREL (E9–14) – Body ground

No Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

+S

A80991

OK

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GLOW PLUG RELAY – GLOW PLUG, AND GLOW PLUG RELAY – BATTERY) (a) (b) (c)

L

Remove the glow plug relay. Disconnect the glow plug wire. Check for continuity between the wire harness. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

L (Glow plug relay terminal 2) – Glow plug wire

B

B (Glow plug relay terminal 1) – Positive terminal of the battery A80991

OK


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Continuity

HARNESS

OR


8

–


INSPECT ECM(GREL VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E9

Turn the ignition switch START. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E13 ECM connectors. Voltage:


Condition

Specified Condition

GREL (E9–14) – E2 (E13–28)

Engine coolant temp. is 40C (104F) or less

9 to 14 V

GREL

E2 ECM Connector

NG

A66060


OK

9


E12

(a)

BATT (+)


Specified Condition

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

E10

ECM Connector

A80463

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR (BATTERY – ECM)



OR


–


05CPU–01

DTC

P0400

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

DTC

P0403

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CONTROL CIRCUIT



Trouble Area

P0400

Mass air flow rate is not changed when turning on EGR valve

P0403

EGR valve assy motor malfunction

EGR valve assy O Open en or short in EGR circuit EGR passage ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM

B–W

From EFI MAIN Relay E3 EGR Valve Assy 6 5 B–W

2 B–W

ECM G

6 E12 EG+A

4

Y–G

5 E12 EG–A

3

R–L

4 E12 EG+B

1

G–B

3 E12 EG–B

A81006




1

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES P0400 AND/OR P0403)

(a) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed

P0400 and/or P0403 are output

A

P0400 and/or P0403 and other DTCs are output

B

HINT: If any other codes besides P0400 and/or P0403 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B


A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Warm up the engine, the engine coolant temperature should be above 75_C (167_F) and bellow 90_C (194_F). Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF”. Check that the MAF reading during idling. Result: MAF greater than 4 g/s but less than 16 g/s Force the EGR valve to operate with a hand–held tester, make the valve opening 0, and check that the AFM reading during idling. Result: MAF greater than 10 g/s but less than 16 g/s

(e) (f) (g)

NG


OK

3

INSPECT EGR VALVE ASSY EGR3

+B2

(a)

EGR4 EGR2

EGR1

Check the EGR valve for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the specified terminals. Resistance:

+B1

A82939

NG

OK


Terminal No.

Specified condition

+B1 – EGR1

19.6 1.4

+B1 – EGR2

19.6 1.4

+B2 – EGR3

19.6 1.4

+B2 – EGR4

19.6 1.4



4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EGR VALVE ASSY – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side E3 S4

S2

Disconnect the E2 EGR valve connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

S1

S3 EGR Valve Connector

Specified condition

EG+A (E12–6) – S3 (E3–6) EG–A (E12–5) – S1 (E3–4)

Continuity

EG+B (E12–4) – S4 (E3–3)

A56871

EG–B (E12–3) – S2 (E3–1)


E12

Specified condition

EG+A (E12–6) or S3 (E3–6) – Body ground EG–A (E12–5) or S1 (E3–4) – Body ground

No continuity

EG+B (E12–4) or S4 (E3–3) – Body ground EG–B (E12–3) or S2 (E3–1) – Body ground

EG–B

EG+A

NG

EG+B

EG–A

ECM Connector

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A81087

OK

5

INSPECT ECM(EGR VALVE ASSY VOLTAGE)

E1

E12

(a) (b)

EG–B

Inspect using the oscilloscope. During idling, check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

EG+A (E12–6) – E1 (E12–7) EG–A (E12–5) – E1 (E12–7)

EG+A

EG–A

EG+B

ECM Connector

EG+B (E12–4) – E1 (E12–7) A66060


EG–B (E12–3) – E1 (E12–7)


GND

0.5 msec./Division

OK


A09818

NG



6

–


CHECK DEPOSIT(EGR VALVE ASSY) NG

REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT AND CLEAN EGR VALVE

OK

7

CHECK DEPOSIT(EGR PASSAGE) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

8




REPAIR EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE POINT


DTC

P0488

–


05CPV–01

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION THROTTLE POSITION CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM opens and closes the intake shutter valve using the step motor. Upon opening and closing the valve, the exhaust gas recirculation volume is properly controlled. Also, the engine vibration and noise will be reduced by closing the valve when the engine is stopped. The ECM detects fully opened of the intake shutter valve with the intake shutter valve fully opened switch Intake Shutter Internal Structure Intake Shutter Control Motor Intake Shutter Valve Reduction Gear CLOSE

OPEN

Intake Shutter Valve Fully Opened Switch

OFF

ON

A81482

DTC No.

P0488

DTC Detection Condition Intake shutter valve fully opened switch is not turned on, despite forcing the intake shutter valve to fully open.


Trouble Area Open or short in intake shutter circuit Open or short in fully opened switch circuit Intake shutter ECM


–


MONITOR DESCRIPTION This DTC will be set if the actual opening angle of the intake shutter valve varies from the target opening angle. The ECM forces the valve to fully open within 2 to 3 seconds as the ignition switch is turned ON, and then checks if the intake shutter valve fully opened switch is turned on. In addition, the ECM also forces the valve to fully open when accelerating the engine (high engine load) and checks if the switch is turned ON. When starting and/or accelerating the engine, the ECM sets this DTC if the switch is not turned on. If the DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. Malfunction Detection

ECM Commanding Fully Open Abnormal CLOSE Actual Intake Shutter Valve Opening Angle

Normal

OPEN Normal ON Fully Opened Switch Status

OFF

Abnormal Intake Shutter Valve Control Motor Step Counter

CLOSE

OPEN Time

A81510


Intake shutter valve fully opened switch Continuous 3 sec. 1 driving cycle

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Specification Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle



–


TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold Intake shutter valve fully opened switch is not turned ON, despite the ECM commanding the intake shutter valve to open fully


From EFI MAIN Relay ECM

D1 Intake Shutter

B–W

B–W

5

2

6

B

15 E13 LU+A

4

G

14 E13 LU–A

3

Y

13 E13 LU+B

1

L

12 E13 LU–B

W–B

2

1

11 E13 THOP

P–L

T3 Intake Shutter Fully Opened Switch

EI

A81906


1 (a)

CHECK INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY Visually check that the intake shutter valve moves within approximately 2 to 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. Intake shutter

Proceed to

Does not move

A

Smoothly move to full–open position

B

B A


Go to step 6


2 (a)

–


CHECK INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY Check if the intake shutter valve moves as the lever is rotated by hand. Intake shutter

Proceed to

Smoothly moved

A

Difficult to move smoothly

B

B


A

3

INSPECT INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY (a)

Check the intake shutter for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. RHD Resistance: Terminals

Temperature

Resistance

at 20_C (68_F)

18 to 22

Temperature

Resistance

at 20_C (68_F)

18 to 22

1–2 1–3 4–5 4–6

Intake Shutter Assy A31135

LHD Resistance: Terminals 1–3 2–3 4–6 5–6

NG

OK




4

–


INSPECT ECM(LU VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

LU–B E13

E12


Specified condition

LU+A (E13–15) – E1 (E12–7) LU–A (E13–14) – E1 (E12–7)

LU–A LU+B E1 LU+A ECM Connector


LU+B (E13–13) – E1 (E12–7) LU–B (E13–12) – E1 (E12–7)

A66060


LU+A LU+B LU–A LU–B

10 msec./Division

A56892

NG


OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side D1

Disconnect the D1 intake shutter connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

LU+A (E13–15) – Intake shutter (D1–6) LU–A (E13–14) – Intake shutter (D1–4)

Intake shutter Connector

LU+B (E13–13) – Intake shutter (D1–3)

A56871

Continuity

LU–B (E13–12) – Intake shutter (D1–1)


E13

Specified condition

LU+A (E13–15) or Intake shutter (D1–6) – Body ground LU–A (E13–14) or Intake shutter (D1–4) – Body ground

LU+B

LU+B (E13–13) or Intake shutter (D1–3) – Body ground

LU+A

No continuity

LU–B (E13–12) or Intake shutter (D1–1) – Body ground

LU–A

LU–B


NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Fully open the intake shutter valve by hand. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / ACCEL OPEN SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Switch Condition Displayed

Proceed to

OFF

A

ON

B

B

CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0488 OUTPUT AGAIN)

HINT: After clearing the DTC, start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle, then confirm P0488 is not set again. A

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FULLY OPENED SWITCH – ECM) (a)

Wire Harness Side

(b) (c)

T3

Disconnect T3 the intake shutter fully opened switch connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

Intake Shutter Fully Opened Switch Connector A81491

THOP

ECM Connector

OK


A80456

Specified condition

THOP (E13–11) – Intake shutter (T3–1)

Continuity


Specified condition

THOP (E13–11) or Intake shutter (T3–1) – Body ground

No continuity

NG

E13


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0488 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC, start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle, then confirm P0488 is not set again.



DTC

P0500

–


05B5L–03



4–Pulse

From Speed Sensor

Skid Control ECU

4–Pulse

Combination Meter

ECM

A79413

DTC No.


P0500

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 7 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic): (a) THW less than 70C (158F) (b) Engine speed is greater than 2,000 rpm but less than 3,500 rpm




–


WIRING DIAGRAM

C11 Combination Meter Assy

ECM

18

V–W

H H J10 J20 (LHD) (RHD)

J/C

H H J10 J20

V–W

17 SP1 E10

(LHD) (RHD)

A81008


1



OK




2


INSPECT ECM(SP1 VOLTAGE)

E13

E2

(a) (b) (c) (d)

E10

SP1 ECM Connector

A80462

Shift the transmission to the neutral position. Jack up the vehicle. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E13 ECM connectors as the wheel is turned slowly. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

SP1 (E10–17) – E2 (E13–28)


HINT: The output voltage should fluctuate ups and downs similarly to the diagram on the left when the wheel is turned slowly.

4.5 to 5.5V

0V

–

Turn Wheel A62954



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0504

–


05CPW–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In this system, the signal of the stop lamp switch is used to judge whether the acceleration system is abnormal or not. The stop lamp switch has a duplex system (signals STP and ST1–) to memorize the abnormality when the signals of depressing and releasing the brake pedal are detected simultaneously. HINT: Normal condition is as shown in the table.

DTC No.

P0504

Signal


In transition


STP

OFF

ON

ON

ST1–

ON

ON

OFF

DTC Detection Condition Conditions (a), (b) and (c) continue for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic): (a) Ignition switch ON (b) Brake pedal released (c) STP signal is OFF when the ST1– signal is OFF


Trouble Area Short in stop lamp switch signal circuit Stop lamp switch ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B

I13 Ignition Switch 6 B–R

4 AM2

B–R

IG2 12 E10 ST1–

DH 2


G–W (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

Driver Side J/B

B–R

DA 18

1 AM2 1


G–W (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

IGN 6 IE3

2

ECM 10 19 G–W DC E10 STP

2 DA

1 IR1

G–W (LHD)

G–W (RHD)

G–W (RHD)

1

4

B–W

G–W (LHD)

S13 Stop Lamp Switch

1 1A B

14 IE2

4 IR1


R–W (LHD)

3

11

1

2

3

R–W (RHD)

B–W (RHD)

IE3

2 IR1

B–W (LHD) 20

3 IR1

IE1

ALT

2

R–W (RHD)

R–W (LHD)

B–W (RHD)

B–W (LHD)

3

3 B

DA 22

W FL MAIN

STOP

C J9 (LHD) E J27 (RHD) Driver Side J/B


DN 1 Battery

1 ED1

B–L B–W

A81009




1 (a)

–




OK

2

INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY (a)

Free

Pushed in 2

1


Terminals No.

Specified condition

1–2

Continuity

3–4

No continuity

1–2

No continuity

3–4

Continuity

Stop Lamp Switch 4

3 A72924

NG


OK

3



(a) (b)


(c) E12

E1 (–)

E10


Specified condition

Depressed

STP Signal ON

Released

STP Signal OFF



Brake pedal

Specified condition

ST1– (E10 ST1 (E10–12) 12) – E1 (E12–7)

Depressed

Below 1.5 V

Released

7.5 to 14 V

ST1– (+)


OK




4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LAMP SWITCH – ECM) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the S13 stop lamp switch connector. Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Stop lamp switch (S13–1) – STP (E10–19)

Stop Lamp Switch Connector

Continuity

Stop lamp switch (S13–4) – ST1– (E10–12) A56986


Specified condition

Stop lamp switch (S13–1) or STP (E10–19) – Body ground Stop lamp switch (S13–4) or ST1– (E10–12) – Body ground

No continuity

E10

ST1– STP ECM Connector

A81090

OK REPLACE ECM(See page 10–65)


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0560

–


05CPX–01

SYSTEM VOLTAGE



P0560

Trouble Area

Open in back–up power source circuit (1 trip detection logic).


HINT: If DTC P0560 appears, the ECM does not store other DTC.

WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM Engine Room R/B No. 1


B

1 1A

EFI 1

2

1

B–Y


B–Y

2 BATT E10

3 B FL MAIN

Battery

A81010




1

–





EFI fuse

NG A66058


OK

2


E12

(a)

BATT (+)


Specified condition

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

E10

ECM Connector

A80463

OK NG




3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI FUSE – ECM, EFI FUSE – BATTERY) (a)


EFI Fuse

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and ECM. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A80988


Specified condition


Continuity


(b)

BATT ECM Connector A80464


Specified condition


No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and battery. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity


Specified condition


No continuity

NG

OK REPLACE JUNCTION BLOCK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CPY–01

DTC

P0606

ECM/PCM PROCESSOR

DTC

P0607


DTC

P1611

IC CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0606 P0607 P1611

DTC Detection Condition ECM inside error (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using ,. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65)



DTC

P0622

–


05CQ7–01

GENERATOR FIELD ”F” TERMINAL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the generator is generating the current, the duty signal is sent from terminal M of the generator to the ECM terminal ALT. The duty signal is used for detecting the open malfunction of the generator circuit and DTC P0380.

Battery

ECM

GLOW Relay


DTC No.


Trouble Area

Generator terminal M duty signal is not output while engine is running.

P0622

Open in generator circuit Generator Driver belt ECM

MONITOR DESCRIPTION The ECM will detect a generator failure or an open malfunction of the circuit, if the duty signal is not output from terminal M of the generator despite the engine running.


Generator circuit Continuous 10 sec. 1 driving cycle



Maximum

Battery voltage

11 V

–

Engine speed

700 rpm

2,000 rpm

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold There is no signal output from terminal M of the generator



–



IG1

3

8 E13 ALT


G–R

9 E12 RL

G–Y

B–L B

DH 1 ED1 1 Driver Side J/B W

B

A12 1 B

1 DN 5 DH

AM1

5

A11 3 M

Y A11 4 L

Generator

1

IG A11 2

IG1 Relay 3

S A11 1

R–W

2

ECU–IG 3

B–L

IK2 1

B EE1 5

3 18 DB 9 DA

2


ALT 1

3

R–W

W–B BR


3 B

7 E12 E1

B

J/C

B

1


2 ALT–S

FL MAIN

R–W

1

1 W–B Battery

IJ

B

1A


BR EI

A81011 A81005



–



If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1

CHECK IF CHARGE LAMP IS ILLUMINATED

HINT: Run the engine at 2,000 rpm, and check if the charge lamp located in the combination meter is OFF. YES

Go to step 3

NO

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GENERATOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E13 ALT

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the A11 generator connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

ALT (E13–8) – M (A11–3)

Continuity




Specified condition

ALT (E13–8) or M (A11–3) – Body ground

No continuity


Generator Connector A81490

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

3

INSPECT DRIVE BELT (See page 14–266) NG

OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE DRIVE BELT (See page 14–269)

OR


4

–


INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM (See page 19–26)




DTC

P0627

–


05CPZ–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0627


Trouble Area

Open or short in suction control valve circuit for more than 0.5 sec. (1 trip detection logic).

Open or short in suction control valve circuit Suction control valve ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

S6 Suction Control Valve 1

LG–R

2 E13 PCV+

2

LG

1 E13 PCV–

A80997




1

–


CHECK INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY Suction Control Valve

(a)


NG A75346


OK

2




PCV– SCV Connector

PCV– (S6–2) – PCV– (E13–1) A81460




E13 PCV+ PCV– ECM Connector A81089

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


3



E13

PCV+

–


Specified condition

PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1)



A66060



A82559

NG





DTC

P1238

–


05CQ0–01

INJECTOR MALFUNCTION

HINT:

For more information on the injector and the common rail system, see page 05–517. If P1238 is present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM detects combustion deterioration for specific cylinder. HINT: The cylinder that has compensation learned value for INJ VOL varies from other cylinders may be malfunctioning. If DTC P0093 (Fuel leaks in high–pressure area) is present simultaneously, leakage malfunction of the cylinder probably be occurred. If DTC P0200 (Open or short in EDU or injector circuit) is present simultaneously, there probably be faulty circuit located between the ECM and the injector including the EDU. If only DTC P1238 (Injector malfunction) is present, probably the injector is mechanical malfunction or insufficient compression (valve clearance, etc) has occurred, not an open or short malfunction of the ECM, EDU and injector circuit. Solenoid valve of the injector is the same type of the pressure discharge valve. Injector Cross Section Diagram

Solenoid Valve

Piston

Nozzle Needle

A81504



P1238

–



Main Trouble Area S Injector S EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Open or short in engine wire (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Connector connection (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Compression pressure S Valve clearance

Engine speed variation is large when idling.

Related Trouble Area

S Valve timing S ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC P1238, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside the common rail in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100

MONITOR DESCRIPTION P1238 (Injection malfunction, exclude open or short in injector circuit): This DTC will be set if the engine speed variations between each cylinder is large. The ECM monitors changes in the crankshaft rotation speed using the crankshaft position sensor for detecting poor combustion. Also, it identifies faulty cylinder using the camshaft position sensor. The fluctuation counter increments when irregular crankshaft rotation speed variation exceeds the threshold at idling. Therefore, either one of the cylinders has very poor combustion (Rough idle), the ECM sets this DTC.


Crankshaft position sensor Continuous 10 min. 2 driving cycles

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Specification

Item

Minimum

Engine Engine speed Engine coolant temperature

Maximum At idling

500 rpm

–

20_C (68_F)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold The number of irregular changes in the crankshaft rotation speed

HINT: The number of irregular changes in the crankshaft rotation speed indicates the insufficient combustion cylinder.




–



If DTCs other than P1238 are present simultaneously, first perform the troubleshooting for them. Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to


A


B



A

2

CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR IN ENGINE ROOM

HINT: Check the wire harness and connector connections. NG OK


REPAIR OR REPLACE


3 (a) (b) (c)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS FOR MALFUNCTION CYLINDER) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4.9 to 4.9 mm3/st Cylinders that have a compensation value which is outside of the specification range are considered to be faulty cylinders. Use the following flowchart to inspect and repair the cylinder. Result:

(d)

Result

Proceed to

Faulty cylinder can not identified

A

Faulty cylinder can be identified

B

B

Go to step 5

A

4 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(INJECTION CUT FOR MALFUNCTION CYLINDER) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / INJECTOR CUT #1, #2, #3 and #4”. Check for the 4 cylinders in the sequence and then performs the power balance inspection to identify faulty cylinder (If there is no changes in the engine speed even though the fuel injection is cut off during idling, the cylinder is malfunctioning).

GO

5

CHECK CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE OF MALFUNCTION CYLINDER (See page 14–266) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

6

CHECK VALVE CLEARANCE OF MALFUNCTION CYLINDER (See page 14–266) NG

OK




7

–


READ OUTPUT DTC (DTC P1238 OUTPUT AGAIN)

HINT: After clearing the DTC, let the engine idle for 10 minutes after it was warmed up, and confirm P1238 is not set again. OK


NG

8


GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1238 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC, let the engine idle for 10 minutes after it was warmed up, and confirm P1238 is not set again.



–


05CQ1–01

DTC

P1271

FUEL REGULATOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (EDU DRIVE)

DTC

P1272

FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR MALFUNCTION

HINT:

For more information on the pressure discharge valve and the common rail system, see page 05–517. For more information on the EDU, see page 05–604. If P1271 and/or P1272 are present, use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system, see page 05–517.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM controls the internal fuel pressure of the common rail by opening and closing the pressure discharge valve. When sudden deceleration is occurred, the internal fuel pressure will temporarily become higher than usual and combustion noise may result, therefore the ECM will open the valve temporarily to discharge the pressure inside the common rail. Also, the pressure discharge valve opens when the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the internal pressure is then promptly discharged. Pressure Discharge Valve Operation Under Sudden Deceleration Accelerator Pedal Opening Angle

Open Close

Open Pressure Discharge Valve

Close

w/o Pressure Discharge Valve Fuel Pressure

w/ Pressure Discharge Valve Target Fuel Pressure

Long Time Time A81485



–


HINT: The solenoid valve of the pressure discharge valve is the same type of the injector solenoid valve. Pressure Discharge Valve Cross Section Diagram

To Fuel Tank (Low Pressure)

Valve Solenoid

From Common Rail (High Pressure)

A81505

DTC No.

DTC Detection condition

Trouble Area

P1271

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit. There is no valve opening confirmation signal (IJF) from EDU to ECM, despite the ECM sending valve opening command signal (PRD) after the engine has been started (1 trip detection).

Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit Open or short in pressure discharge valve itself EDU ECM

P1272

Pressure discharge valve closed malfunction. Actual pressure decreasing rate deviates from the simulated pressure drop rate by the ECM after the ignition switch is turned OFF (2 trip detection).


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P1271 and/or P1272”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside common rail in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed

Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Idling

Approx. 30 to 40


Approx. 50 to 100



–


MONITOR DESCRIPTION P1271 (Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit): This DTC will be set if there is no valve opening confirmation signal (IJF) from the EDU to the ECM, despite the ECM commanding the pressure discharge valve to open with the EDU. This DTC refers to open or short malfunction of the pressure discharge valve circuit, therefore the malfunction that the valve is stuck open or closed can be excluded. The EDU monitors the current supplied to the pressure discharge valve, and the EDU interprets the IJF signal is low if the current exceeds the specified level, and the EDU indicates that there is the current in the pressure discharge valve. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. P1271 Malfunction Detection

Command Signal (PRD) ECM


EDU

ON Pressure Discharge Valve PRD Command Signal

OFF Abnormal

Pressure Discharge Valve Confirmation Signal

IJF

Normal A81500

P1272 (Closed malfunction of the pressure discharge valve): The pressure discharge valve will open and discharge the internal fuel pressure of the common rail to the fuel tank when the ignition switch is turned OFF. In this event, the ECM compares the actual dropping rate of the internal fuel pressure and the simulated dropping rate. If the ECM judges the actual dropping rate is smaller than the simulation, the ECM then interprets this as the valve has stuck closed and set this DTC. This DTC detection will be activated if the internal fuel pressure does not drop below the specified level after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. If this DTC is present, the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF.



EDU Continuous 3 sec. 1 driving cycles


–


P1272: Required sensors


Frequency of operation

Once per driving cycle

Duration CHK ENG operation

1 sec. 2 driving cycles

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P1271: Specification Drive the vehicle at 50 km/h with the 3 rd transmission gear and then decelerate it by completly releasing the accelerator pedal

P1272: Item


Maximum

30 MPa (306 kgf/cm2, 4,351 psi)

–

Fuel temperature

0_C

–

Battery voltage

11 V

–

Fuel pressure

The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor, or pressure discharge valve circuit, or fuel temp. sensor is malfunctioning

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P1271: Threshold If the confirmation signals from the EDU is not present, despite the ECM sending the command signals regularly during decelerating

P1272: Threshold If the internal pressure stays beyond the specified level after the ignition switch was turned OFF



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

EDU 4 E5

PRD

R–L

ECM 32 E13 PRD

R–L


(Shielded) PRV

8 E5

W

1 EA1

W

COM3

7 E4

B

2 EA1

B

(Shielded)

BR

D J12

BR

E J12

2

1

J/C

E J13

BR

D J13

EI

A80999

PULSE GENERATION INSPECTION HINT: Problem area can be identified by inspecting waveform at the following inspection points. Warning: Terminals COM3 and PRD are high–voltage

EDU High–voltage Area

PRD A

B PRD

PRV Pressure Discharge Valve

ECM C IJF

INJF D

COM3 A81507

HINT: Inspect the following inspection points ”A and D” or ”B and C” at the same time. Malfunction point A

Trouble area ECM

B (If A is normal)

Open or short in ”PRD (ECM)” – ”PRD (EDU)” circuit.

C (If A and B are normal)

Open or short in ”PRV (EDU)” – ”COM3 (EDU)” circuit. Pressure discharge valve EDU

D (If A, B and C are normal)




(a)

Signal Waveform



5 V/ Division

PRD

–

Inspection point

Specified condition

A and B



(b)

Signal Waveform


5 V/ Division

INJF

Inspection point

Specified condition

C and D




After completing repair, confirm P1271 and/or P1272 is not set again. If P0200 and P1271 are present simultaneously, there is open in the INJF wire harness between the EDU and ECM, or there is open in the wire harness for both of the injector the pressure discharge valve. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P1271 AND/OR P1272) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”Only DTC P1271” or ”P1271 and P1272” are output

A


B

B A


Go to step 8


2

–


INSPECT COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (a)


Check the pressure discharge valve for resistance. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 0.85 to 1.05 at 20_C (68_F)

NG A82883

REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 14–286)

OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE – EDU) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the E4 and E5 EDU connectors. Disconnect the P3 pressure discharge valve connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) COM3 (E4–7) – COMG (P3–2)

COM3 EDU Connector

PRV (E5–8) – #G (P3–1) A81461

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) COM3 (E4–7) or COMG (P3–2) – Body ground

Wire Harness Side

PRV (E5–8) or #G (P3–1) – Body ground

E5

PRV EDU Connector

Specified condition


A81462

Wire Harness Side P3 #G

COMG

Pressure Discharge valve Connector

OK


NG A81694

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – ECM) (a) (b) (c)


PRD EDU Connector

Disconnect the E5 EDU connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

PRD (E5–4) – PRD–(E13–32)

Continuity



Specified condition

PRD (E5–4) or PRD (E13–32) – Body ground

No continuity

E13

PRD ECM Connector

A81089

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5



E4

EDU Connector

(a) (b) (c)


Specified condition


9 to 14 V

A56874




A80994

NG

CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (EDU – BATTERY)


6

–


INSPECT ECM(PRD VOLTAGE)

E13

PRD

(a) (b)

E12

E1 ECM Connector

A66060

Signal Waveform

Inspect using the oscilloscope. Drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal, and check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

PRD (E13–4) – E1 (E12–7)


HINT: It may be that the following method is the alternative inspection: Run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 10 seconds and then decrease to idle speed with accelerator pedal completely released.

5 V/ Division

PRD


NG


OK

7





8 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check if the internal fuel pressure of the common rail drops below approximately 5 MPa within approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned OFF at idling. Result:

(e)

Pressure Displayed

Proceed to

5 MPa or more

A

5 MPa or less

B

B

CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1271 AND/ OR P1272)

HINT: P1271: After clearing the DTC, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal, then confirm P1271 is not set again. P1272: After clearing the DTC, turn the ignition switch OFF after the engine was started, and restart the engine and then turn the ignition switch OFF, and then confirm P1272 is not set again. A

9

REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY(PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 11–78)




DTC

P1601

–


05CQ2–01

INJECTOR CORRECTION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (EEPROM)


P1601


Trouble Area

Injector compensation value is not registered (1 trip detection logic) Wrong injector compensation value is registered (1 trip detection logic)



1

CHECK INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE (See page 05–528) NG



SET INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE (See page 05–528)


–


05CQ3–01

DTC

P2120


DTC

P2122


DTC

P2123


DTC

P2125


DTC

P2127


DTC

P2128


DTC

P2138





–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: This electrical throttle system does not use a throttle cable. The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket and it has the 2 sensors to detect the accelerator position and a malfunction of the accelerator position sensor. In the accelerator pedal position sensor, the voltage applied to pedal terminals VPA1 and VPA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the accelerator pedal. The VPA1 is a signal to indicate the actual accelerator pedal opening angle which is used for the engine control, and the VPA2 is a signal to indicate the information about the opening angle which is used for detecting a malfunction. The ECM judges the current accelerator pedal opening angle with the signals from terminals VPA1 and VPA2, and the ECM controls the throttle motor based on these signals. Movable Range



Usable Range

*1


*2

*1

5

VPA2

*2 0.8

VPA1

0

EP2

VPA1

VPA2 VCP2

VCP1

*1


*2




–



DTC No.

Trouble Area

P2120


P2122


P2123


P2125

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) VPA2 less than 0.5 V and VPA greater than 0.97 deg, or VPA2 greater than 4.8 V and VPA greater than 0.2 V but les than 3.45 V

P2127


P2128


P2138






ACCEL POS #2

ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

VC circuit open

0V

0V

0V

0V


0V

1.5 to 2.9 V

0V

3.5 to 5.5 V


0.5 to 1.1 V

0V

2.5 to 4.6 V

0V

EP circuit open

5V

5V

5V

5V



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

A20 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor



3 (LHD) EP1 1 (RHD)



1 (LHD) EP2 3 (RHD)

ECM


5 IG2

6 IG2

1 IG2

7 IG2

2 IG2

3 IG2

B (LHD)

G (LHD)

Y (LHD)

B (LHD)

W (LHD)

Y (LHD)

26 VCPA E9

22 VPA E9

28 E9

EPA

27 VCP2 E9

23 VPA2 E9

29 E9

EPA2

Y (RHD) A76878




1

–



Depressed


ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

Released FI7052

OK


NG

2


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)

Disconnect the accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between each terminal. Standard (LHD): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20_C (68_F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 6 2 1 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

NG

OK




3

–


INSPECT ECM(VCPA AND VCP2 VOLTAGE) VCPA (+) EPA2 (–)

E9

(a) (b)


Specified condition

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28) 4 5 to 5.5 4.5 55V

EPA (–)

VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)

VCP2 (+) ECM Connector

A66060

NG


OK

4


VPA (+) E9

EPA2 (–)

(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

EPA (–)

ECM Connector

NG


A66060

OK



5




A20

–

(a) EP1

(b) (c)


Disconnect the A20 accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Disconnect E9 the ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (LHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)

A54384

EP1 (A20–3) – EPA (E9–28)



EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9 VPA


VCPA VPA2


ECM Connector

Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)

EPA2 EPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23)

VCP2 A81091

Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2121

–


05CQ4–01




Trouble Area

Conditions (a) and (B) continue for 0.5 sec.: (a) Difference between VPA and VPA2 exceeds the threshold (b) IDL is OFF

P2121




1


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)


Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 2 1 6 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

NG




2

–


INSPECT ECM(VPA AND VPA2 VOLTAGE) VPA (+)

VPA2 (+) E9


(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

OK


NG

3



A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)



A54384

Specified condition




EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9


VPA2 VPA


EPA2

VCPA

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22) EP1 (A20–1) – EPA (E9–28) VCP1 (A20–4) – VCPA (E9–26)

ECM Connector

EPA

VCP2 A81091

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) EP2 (A20–3) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (A20–6) – VCP2 (E9–27)


Specified condition

Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CQ5–01

DTC

P2226

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT

DTC

P2228

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P2229

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Detect the atmospheric pressure using the atmospheric pressure sensor. Followed by the atmospheric pressure, correct the injection timing, the injection volume and the amount of common rail internal fuel pressure and then they create optimum combustion. DTC No. P2226 P2228 P2229

DTC Detection Condition ECM malfunction (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65)



DTC

P2227

–


05CQ6–01

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Detect the atmospheric pressure using the atmospheric pressure sensor. Followed by the atmospheric pressure, correct the injection timing, the injection volume and the amount of common rail internal fuel pressure and then they create optimum combustion. DTC No. P2227


Trouble Area

Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction (2 trip detection logic)

ECM


1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B






–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPB–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI2547

Hand–held Tester

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect an OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or a hand–held tester to the vehicle, and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system / components or in the power train control components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO 15031–4 are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–544). If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips, the CHK ENG goes off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

DLC3 A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–544). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check mode using hand– held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand– held tester only) (See step 3).


–


(b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

* 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: The freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, engine coolant temperature, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2(Euro–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 9141–2 format.

DLC3 A04550

Terminal No.


Condition

7


During transmission

4


Always

16


Always

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Deparment listed in the tool’s instruction manual.



–


(c)

Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (d) Check the CHK ENG. (1) The CHK ENG lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. HINT: If the CHK ENG is not illuminate, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. 2. DTC CHECK (Normal Mode): NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.

Hand–held Tester

(a)

DLC3 A76859

(b)

(c)


Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down. If you need help with the hand–held tester, refer to the hand–held tester’s instruction book). (4) See page 05–544 to confirm the details of the DTCs. Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and ETCS fuses from the engine room R/B for more than 60 seconds.


–


3. DTC CHECK (Check Mode): HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check mode. (a) Procedure for Check Mode using the hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery positive voltage 11V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”N” position. A/C switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (4) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (5) 0.13 Sec ON

OFF 0.13 Sec A76900


Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check mode. The CHK ENG blinks in 0.13 sec intervals as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG goes off after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the normal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.)


(c)

–


Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and ETCS fuses from the engine room R/B for more than 60 seconds.

4. FAIL–SAFE CHART If any of the following codes are recorded, the ECM enters the fail–safe mode. DTC No.



P0087


Ignition switch OFF

P0088


Ignition switch OFF

P0093

After fail safe driving control is performed for 1 minute, engine stalls

Ignition switch OFF

P0095 P0097 P0098

Intake air temp. is fixed at 145_C (293_F)


P0105 P0107 P0108

Turbo pressure is set at fixed value


P0115 P0117 P0118

When fuel temp. sensor operates normal and intake air temp. is less than 15_C (59_F), value of fuel temp. sensor is substituted When fuel temp. sensor operates normal and intake air temp. is more than 20_C (68_F), value is fixed at 120_C (248_F) When the fuel temp. sensor is abnormal, value is fixed at 40_C (104_F)


P0168

Output limit


P0180 P0182 P0183

Fuel temp. is fixed at 40_C (104_F)


P0190 P0191 P0192 P0193


Ignition switch OFF

P0200


Ignition switch OFF

P0335

Output limit


P0488


Ignition switch OFF

P0500

Vehicle speed is fixed at 0 km/h (0 mph)

Vehicle speed less than 10 km/h (6 mph)

P1229


Ignition switch OFF

P1271


Ignition switch OFF

P1272


Ignition switch OFF

P2120 P2122 P2123 P2125 P2127 P2128 P2138

Output limit

Ignition switch OFF

5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s ECM in the check mode, the 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of the 2 trip detection logic, and the sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTCs (See step 2). (b) Set the check mode (See step 3). AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


(c) Perform a simulation test (See page 01–22). (d) Check the connector and terminal (See page 01–32). (e) Wiggle the harness and connector (See page 01–32). 6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if its value differs from those listed here. Do not solely depend on the ”Normal Condition” here when deciding whether a part is faulty or not. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOLUME INJ TIMING ENGINE SPD


Normal Condition *

Diagnostic Note

Injection volume/ Min.: 0 mm3, Max.: 1279.98 mm3

Idling: 3 to 10 mm3

Injection timing/ Min.: 0_CA, Max.: 51_CA

Idling: –1 to 5CA

Engine speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383.75 rpm

Idling: 750 to rpm

If the value is Approximately 0.0 gm/s: S Mass air flow meter power source circuit open S VG circuit open or short If the valve is 160 gm/s or more: S E2G circuit open

MAF

Air flow rate from MAF sensor status/ Min.: 0 gm/s, Max.: 655.35 gm/s


PIM


Idling: 85 to 110 kPa

COOLANT TEMP



INTAKE AIR



FUEL TEMP

Fuel temperature status/ Min.: –40 _C, Max.: 215 _C

Actual fuel temp.

Accel position status/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %

S Accelerator pedal released: 10 to 22 % S Accelerator pedal depressed: 52 to 90 %


VEHICLE SPD




THROTTLE POS

Throttle step position status/ Min.: 1 step, Max.: 255 step

S Throttle fully closed: 1 step S Throttle fully open: 255 step


COMN RAIL PRESS

Common rail pressure status/ Min.: 0 MPa, Max.: 255 MPa

Idling: 30 to 40 MPa

ACCEL POSITION


If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”, sensor circuit is open or shorted shorted.




–


Normal Condition *

Diagnostic Note If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”, sensor circuit is open or shorted.

Ambient temperature sensor status/ Min.: –40 _C, Max.: 215 _C

Actual atmosphere

INJ VOL FB #1



INJ VOL FB #2



INJ VOL FB #3



INJ VOL FB #4



PUMP VCM ANGLE

Pump vacuum angle status/ Min.: 0 _CA, Max.: 255 _CA

Idling: 70 to 90CA

M–INJ/PILOT ON

M–INJ/PILOT ON/ Min.: 0 us, Max.: 65,535 us

Idling: 600 to 1,200 us

M–INJ/PILOT OFF

M–INJ/PILOT OFF/ Min.: 0 us, Max.: 65,535 us

Idling: 0 us

PILOT–INJ

Pilot–Injection/ Min.: 0 us, Max.: 65,535 us

Idling: 400 to 700 us

Injection volume feedback learning value/ Min.: –10 mm3, Max.: 9,092 mm3



S Brake pedal depressed: ON S Brake pedal released: OFF

STARTER SIG


Cranking: ON

AMBI TEMP SENS

INJ FB VALUE

STOP LIGHT SW

A/C CUT SIG

A/C cut signal/ ON or OFF

A/C ON: OFF

EGR SYSTEM

EGR system status/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

ACCEL OPEN SW

Accel open switch/ ON or OFF

Accelerator pedal fully opened: ON

CHECK MODE


Check mode ON: ON

EGR STEP POS

EGR step position status/ Min: 0 step, Max: 125 step

Idling: 0 to 125 step

*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten diagnostic time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST” AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


(g)

–


According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

[Test Details] Change step of EGR motor Min: 0 step, Max: 125 step


FUEL LEAK TEST

[Test Details] Fuel leak test ON or OFF

INJECTOR CUT #1


INJECTOR CUT #2


INJECTOR CUT #3


INJECTOR CUT #4


EGR STEP POS

TC/TE1



–


8. READ INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE HINT: This operation is useful when confirming the compensation code of each injector or when DTC P1601 is present.

Reading flowchart:

Are you read the injector

A81230




(d)

–


(e)


(f)

Press the ”ENTER” button again.

(g)

Select ”READ COMP VALUE” and press the ”ENTER” button.

(h) (i)

Select a cylinder number which you want to read the compensation code. Press the ”ENTER” button.

(j)


A80985

A66061

A66063

A66064

A66065



(k)

–


Confirm the 30–digit–alphanumeric code which is displayed on the hand–held tester. This is the injection compensation code for the cylinder.

HINT: The code shown in the illustration is an example. (l) Press the ”ENTER” button to exit this screen.

A66066

(m) Press the ”NO” button to complete the confirmation. HINT: If you want to read other compensation codes for other cylinders, press the ”YES” button instead of ”NO.” By pressing the ”NO” button, the hand–held tester returns to the ”DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” screen.

A66067



–


9. SET INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE HINT: This operation must be done when replacing the ECM or the injectors.

Setting flowchart:

Register the injector compensation code

other cylinders?

(Set the injector compensation code)

A81231




(d)

–


(e)


(f)

Press the ”Enter” button again.

(g)

Select ”SET COMP VALUE” and press the ”ENTER” button.

(h)

Press the ”ENTER” button.

(i)

Select a cylinder number which you want to register the compensation code. Press the ”ENTER” button.

A80985

A66061

A66062

A66068

(j)

A66069



–


(k)

A66070

Input the 30–digit–alphanumeric code with the hand– held tester to register the compensation code to the ECM. NOTICE: Be careful not to register a wrong compensation code to the ECM. The compensation code which stored in the ECM must be consistent with the compensation code of the injector assembly. If a wrong code was set to the ECM, rough idling or engine rattling may result. In addition, it may be a cause of the engine failure or short–life. (l) After inputting, press the ”ENTER” button. (m) Press the ”ENTER” button again.

A66071

(n)

A66072

HINT: The code shown in the illustration is an example. NOTICE: Make sure the correct compensation code is entered on the hand–held tester before pressing YES button. If a wrong compensation code was entered on the hand–held tester, select the ”NO” button to correct the error (Back to step (g)). (o) Press the ”YES” button to set the code to the ECM.

(p)

A66073


Confirm the injection compensation code which is displayed on the hand–held tester.



–


(q) Press the ”NO” button to complete the registration. HINT: If you want to register other compensation code for other cylinders, press the ”YES” button instead of ”NO.” By pressing the ”NO” button, the hand–held tester returns to the ”DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” screen.

A66074


1



NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V


OK

2



OK

3



Inside A66289

OK


CLEAN OR REPLACE


4 (a) (b)

–


CHECK FUEL QUALITY Check that only diesel fuel is used Check that the fuel does not contain any impurity. NG

REPLACE FUEL

OK

5

CHECK ENGINE OIL (See page 17–20) NG

ADD OR REPLACE

OK

6

CHECK ENGINE COOLANT (See page 16–37) NG

REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT (See page 16–44)

OK

7

CHECK IDLE SPEED AND MAXIMUM SPEED (See page 14–266) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE INJECTION PUMP (See page 11–69)

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE VACUUM PUMP

OK

8

CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT

OK

9

CHECK VACUUM PUMP

OK PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE (See page 05–551)



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPA–01

PRECAUTION 1.

2. 3.

Since each injector has a characteristic fuel injecting behavior, the ECM compensates such behavior by adjusting an injection time for each injector to optimize the fuel injection volume. Compensating data for the optimum injection volume, which has converted into a 30–digit–alphanumeric value, has been imprinted on a head potion of the injector as the injection compensation code. The injection compensation code will be required to register to the ECM when replacing the injectors or the ECM. If an incorrect injection compensation value was registered to the ECM, the engine assembly may rattle or the engine idling may be rough. In addition, it may be a cause of the engine failure or short–life.



–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JF–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When the malfunction code is not confirmed the DTC check and the problem still can not be confirmed in the basic inspection, then proceed to this step and perform troubleshooting according to the numbered order given in the table below. Symptom

Suspect Area

See page

Does not crank (Difficult to start)

2. Starter 3. Starter relay 4. Engine coolant temperature sensor

19–22 19–22 10–56

Difficult to start with a cold engine

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

STA signal circuit Injector Fuel filter Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle Glow plug system

05–691 11–56 11–82 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Difficult to start with a warm engine

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

STA signal circuit Injector Fuel filter Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

05–691 11–56 11–82 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Fuel filter Injector EC power source circuit EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–82 11–56 05–686 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Engine stalls (Other than conditions listed abobe)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

EC power source circuit Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

05–686 11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Fuel filter Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

11–82 11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

A/C signal circuit Injector STA signal circuit EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

55–3 11–56 05–691 10–56 10–56 10–56



–


Lower engine idle speed (Poor idling)

1. A/C signal circuit 2. Injector 3. EGR system 4. Compression 5. Valve clearance 6. Fuel line (Air bleed) 7. EC 8. Supply pump 9. Fuel pressure sensor 10.Diesel throttle

55–3 11–56 12–16 14–266 14–270 – 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Injector Fuel line (Air bleed) EGR system Compression Valve clearance EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–56 – 12–16 14–266 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Hunting at hot engine (Poor idling)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.


11–56 05–686 14–266 – 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Hunting at cold engine (Poor idling)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.


11–56 05–686 14–266 – 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Hesitation/ Poor acceleration (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Injector Fuel filter EGR system Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–56 11–82 12–16 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Knocking (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Injector EGR system EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

11–56 12–16 10–56 10–56 10–56

Black smoke (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Injector EGR system EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

11–56 12–16 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56



–


White smoke (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

EGR system Injector Fuel filter EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle

12–16 11–56 11–82 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56

Surging/ Hunting (Poor driveability)

1. 2. 3. 4.

Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor

11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56



–


05B5Y–02

STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: While the engine is being cranked, current flows from terminal ST2 of the ignition switch to the ST relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal).

WIRING DIAGRAM

I13 Ignition Switch B–R


B–R

B–R

B–R

1 1


ST2

B–Y

5

5

STA

5

B–Y

5

AM2

7 E9

B–Y 4 AM2

1 2

ECM

6

1

Fuse Block

ST Relay

1 ST 2

1A

6 2

3

Driver Side R/B

B 5

5

B–Y

B–W

B–Y

3 B


B J13 7

3

W–B C

J13

IK1 B

B J12

FL MAIN B–R

1 S5

1 S4

9 DA

J13 J/C

2 DJ

B

C

Driver Side J/B

A J12 B–Y

Starter W–B

Battery IJ

A81016



–



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STA SIGNAL) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STARTER SIG” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Ignition Switch Position

ON

START

STARTER SIG

OFF

ON

OK

NG




2

–


INSPECT HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – ST RELAY) (a) (b) (c)

E9

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition

ST relay (1) – STA (E9–7)

Continuity



Specified condition

ST relay (1) or STA (E9–7) – Body ground

No continuity


A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD




NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054KK–04

TERMINALS OF ECM

E13

E12

E10

E9

A66714


Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

Always

9 to 14

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON

9 to 14

MREL (E9–8) (E9 8) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

GR – BR

VC (E13–18) – E1 (E12–7)

R–W – BR

VPA (E9–22) (E9 22) – EPA (E9–28) (E9 28)

G–Y

IG switch OFF

0 to 1.5

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5


0.5 to 1.1


3.0 to 4.6


0.9 to 2.3


3.4 to 5.0

VPA2 (E9–23) (E9 23) – EPA2 (E9 (E9–29) 29)

W–Y

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

G – L–Y

Idling

0.5 to 3.4

THA (E13–31) – E2 (E13–28)

G–R – BR


0.5 to 3.4

THW (E13–19) – E2 (E13–28)

B–W – BR

Idling, engine coolant temp. at 80C (176F)

0.2 to 1.0

STA (E9–7) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

Cranking

#1 (E13–24) – E1 (E12–7) #2 (E13 (E13–23) 23) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) #3 (E13–22) – E1 (E12–7) #4 (E13–21) – E1 (E12–7)

G–W – BR W–R W R – BR R–W – BR W–L – BR

Idling


G1 (E12–23) – G– (E12–31)

P–L

Idling


NE+ (E13–27) – NE– (E13–34)

G–R

Idling


STP (E10–19) (E10 19) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

G W – BR G–W

ST1 (E10–12) ST1– (E10 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

G W – BR G–W

TC (E9–11) (E9 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

W L – BR W–L

W (E9–12) (E9 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

W – BR

6.0 or more

IG switch on, brake pedal is depressed

7.5 to 14

IG switch on, brake pedal is released

0 to 1.5

Brake pedal is depressed

0 to 1.5


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON

9 to 14

Idling

9 to 14

IG switch ON

0 to 3

SP1 (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)

V–W – BR



SIL (E9–18) – E1 (E12–7)

W–G – BR

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3

Pulse generation



PIM (E12–28) ( ) – E2 (E13–28) ( )

W–R – BR

IREL (E9 (E9–10) 10) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

Y – BR

TACH (E9–5) – E1 (E12–7)

GR–R – BR

VCS (E12–2) – E1 (E12–7)

R–W – BR

GREL (E9–14) (E9 14) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R – BR

FAN (E9–3) (E9 3) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

W – BR

THIA (E13–20) – E2 (E13–28)

GR – BR

–


Applied negative pressure of 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 in. hg)

0.2 to 0.8

Same as atmosphere

1.3 to 1.9

Applied positive pressure of 69kPa (0.7 kg/cm3, 10.0 psi)

3.2 to 3.8

IG switch OFF

9 to 14

Idling

0 to 1.5

Idling

Pulse generation

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

Cranking

9 to 14

Idling

0 to 1.5

Fan OFF

9 to 14

Fan ON

0 to 1.5


0.5 to 3.4

THF (E13–29) – E2 (E13–28)

L – BR

IG switch ON

0.5 to 3.4

PCR1 (E13–26) – E2 (E13–28)

P – BR

Idling

1.8 to 2.1

PCR2 (E13–33) – E2 (E13–28)

P–B – BR

Idling

1.2 to 1.5

ALT (E13–8) – E1 (E12–7)

B–L – BR

Idling

Pulse generation

RL (E12–9) (E12 9) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

Y – BR

Idling

9 to 14

PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1)

LG–R – LG

IG switch ON Idling

0 to 3 Pulse generation (See page 05–563)

PRD (E13–32) – E1 (E12–7)

R–L – BR

IG switch OFF

INJF (E13–25) – E1 (E12–7)

R–B – BR

Idling


EG+A (E12–6) – E1 (E12–7) EG–A EG A (E12 (E12–5) 5) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) EG+B (E12–4) ( ) – E1 (E12–7) ( ) EG–B (E12–3) – E1 (E12–7)

G – BR Y G – BR Y–G R–L – BR G–B – BR

Idling


LU+A (E13–15) – E1 (E12–7) LU–A LU A (E13 (E13–14) 14) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) LU+B ((E13–13)) – E1 ((E12–7)) LU–B (E13–12) – E1 (E12–7)

B – BR G – BR Y – BR L – BR

Racing


THOP (E13–11) (E13 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

P L – BR P–L

VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)

W – BR


4 to 6.5

Idling

9 to 14

IG switch ON

0 to 3

IG switch ON


05–862

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567O–10



Inspector’s Name

:


Registration Year

/

/


/


/

km mile

Odometer Reading

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (


( 1st 2nd

No down–shift

( O/D 3rd

times a day)

Particular range)

2nd 3rd

3rd O/D )

3rd 2nd

2nd 1st )



Lock–up

Any drive range)


Check Item

MIL

Normal

Remains ON

1st Time

Normal code


)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check


05–876

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567Q–08


Detection Item

Trouble Area Combination meter Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit Vehicle speed sensor ECM

MIL *

Memory

P0500/42 (05–240)


P0710/38 (05–882)


P0712/38 (05–882)


P0713/38 (05–882)


P0717/37 (05–884)



P0748/62 (05–886)



P0778/63 (05–886)



P0793/67 (05–892)



P0982/65 (05–886)


P0983/65 (05–886)


P2716/77 (05–894)


–

P2769/64 (05–897)

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

–

P2770/64 (05–897)

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

–




Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit Shift solenoid l id valve l DSL ECM

05–856

DIAGNOSTICS

–


ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567N–11


When using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. 1


2


3


4


5

Visual Inspection

6


7


8



DIAGNOSTICS

9

–



10


Go to step 19

OK

11


Go to step 16

OK

12


Go to step 14

OK

13


Go to step 18

OK

14


Go to step 16

OK

15


NG

16


17



05–857

05–858

DIAGNOSTICS

–

18


19


20

Repair

21

Confirmation Test


End

When not using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. 1


2


3

Check and Clear DTCs (See page 05–863)

4


5



DIAGNOSTICS

6

–



7


Go to step 16

OK

8


Go to step 13

OK

9


Go to step 11

OK

10


Go to step 15

OK

11


Go to step 13

OK

12


NG

13


14



05–859

05–860

DIAGNOSTICS

–

15


16


17

Repair

18

Confirmation Test

End



05–908

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C92–01



6 CJ

W–B

1 IG1


1

W

2

ECM 2 IG1

W

27 E9

KD *1

W–B

IP *1: Europe spec

G25416


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–909





Voltage


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

KD H42584

OK


NG

2


D02350

Disconnect the kick–down switch connector. Measure the continuity between terminals of the kick– down switch connector when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. OK: Kick–down switch

Continuity

ON

Continuity

OFF

No continuity

NG


OK

3




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–877 0567R–11


ECM











05–882

DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0710/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0712/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0713/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05C8T–01



P0710/38


P0712/38


P0713/38


Trouble Area


WIRING DIAGRAM

E1 ECT Solenoid

ECM BR

O E2

6

O

V THO

28 E13 E2

1

30 E13 THO

D26545


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–883




(a) (b)

(c) E2 C54864


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG


OK

2


(d)

THO

E2 C95813


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–884

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8U–01

P0717/37 TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL



Trouble Area

P0717/37




B–O

27 E12 NT+

B

35 E12 NT–

2

D26540


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–885




C58536


NG


OK

2


NT+

(d)

NT– C95812


NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–886

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8V–01

DTC

P0748/62 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1)

DTC

P0778/63 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2)

DTC

P0982/65 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)

DTC

P0983/65 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)



Trouble Area

P0748/62



P0778/63



P0982/65

ECM detects short in solenoid valve S4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve S4 is operated (1–trip detection logic)


P0983/65

ECM detects open in solenoid valve S4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve S4 is not operated (1–trip detection logic)


HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0748/62 is output, check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTC P0778/63 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S4 when DTC P0982/65 and P0983/65 is output.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–887




Gear

Solenoid Valve

SL1

SL2

S4

ON

ON

OFF

1st

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

ON

OFF

2nd

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

X

OFF

OFF

OFF OFF

3rd

X

3rd

OFF

X

3rd

OFF

X

SL1 SL2

S4

Gear


OFF

OFF

ON

O/D

X

ON ON

ON



X

1st

3rd

OFF

ON

X

2nd

OFF

3rd

OFF OFF

X

3rd

ON

O/D

OFF OFF

X

3rd


X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

ON OFF X

X

ON

O/D

X ON


Gear

ON

X

OFF


OFF OFF ON OFF



X

X

3rd

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

05–888

DIAGNOSTICS

–



ECM Y

R

17 E12 SL2+

R–B

16 E12 SL2–

Y

19 E12 SL1+

Y–B

18 E12 SL1–

SL2+ 4

BR SL2– 9 W SL1+ 5

B SL1– 10

L

R S4 8

13 E12 S4

D26538


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–889



SL2+

(b)

(c) SL1–

SL2–

S4 D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT1+ and SL1– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SL1+ as well as SL1– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (d)

(e)

Measure the resistance between terminals SL2+ and SL2–. OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SL2+ as well as SL2– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (f)


Go to step 4

Measure the resistance between terminal S4 of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) NG

OK

Go to step 3

Go to step 5

05–890

2

DIAGNOSTICS

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1

SL1+ SL1–

S4 SL2+

SL2–

C95812

(d)

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the connector from the ECM. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: SL1+ – SL1–: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) SL2+ – SL2–: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) S4 – E1: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals SL1+, SL1–, SL2+ and SL2– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466




DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–891


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG



5


(a) (b)

(–)

(c)

D25467

Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.




05–892

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8W–01

P0793/67 INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR ”A”



Trouble Area

P0793/67



WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


LG

26 E12 NC+

LG–B

34 E12 NC–

2

D26541


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–893




Disconnect the speed sensor (NC) connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F)

C58536

NG


OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – ECM)

3

(a) (b) (c)

NC+ NC– C95812

(d)

Connect the speed sensor (NC) connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that NC+ as well as NC– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–894

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

–


05C8X–01

P2716/77 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”D” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID SLT) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION



ON

OFF

1 cycle


BE4056

DTC No.

P2716/77

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. or more: (1 trip detection logic) (a) SLT– terminal: 0V (b) SLT– terminal: 12V



DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–895

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid O

P–L

17 E13 SLT+

P

16 E13 SLT–

SLT+ 2

G SLT– 7

D26542



(b)

(c) SLT– D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SLT+ as well as SLT– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG OK


Go to step 3

05–896

2

DIAGNOSTICS

–



(d) SLT+

SLT–

C95813

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SLT+ as well as SLT– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG




DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–897 05C8Y–01

DTC

P2769/64 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL)

DTC

P2770/64 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL)



Trouble Area

P2769/64

ECM detects short in solenoid valve DSL circuit 4 times when solenoid valve DSL is operated (2 trip detection logic)

Short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit Shift solenoid valve DSL ECM

P2770/64

ECM detects open in solenoid valve DSL circuit 4 times when solenoid valve DSL is not operated (2 trip detection logic)

Open in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit Shift solenoid valve DSL ECM



L–B

G DSL 3

11 E12 DSL

D26539


05–898

1

DIAGNOSTICS

–



(b)

C54864

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1 DSL C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals DSL and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–899


(c) (–)

(+)

D03728

Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL of shift solenoid valve DSL and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG




05–902

DIAGNOSTICS

–


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM. The ECM receives signals (REVERSE and DRIVE) from the park/neutral position switch.


05C90–01

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–903



ECM

W–L

20 IK2

R–Y

5 IK1

PL 1

RL 2

J/C

D D D D W–L J18 J29 J18 J29 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) J/C A C R–Y (*2) R–Y (*2) J22 J23

W–L

21 E10 P 11 E10 R

J5 J/C

R–W 3

R–Y (*1)

R–Y(*1)

RB

C R NL 5

LG–B DL 7

9 IK2

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

R

C J/C

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

22 E10 N

R

J14 J/C

10 IK2

LG–B (*1)

10 E10 D

LG–B (*1) C C LG–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 IK1

8 CA

1 CD

R–W

R–W


1 DN

B–G G–Y

5

5 DH

GAUGE2

3

R–W

9 DA

2

1

27 DA

AM1

1 DH


IG1 1


ALT

1 4D 2

1

1 4B


IJ

*1: LHD *2: RHD D30747


05–904

DIAGNOSTICS

–





C91579


P

1–3

6–9

R

2–3

–

N

3–5

6–9

D

3–7

–



OK

2


E1

R N

D

Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that P, R, N as well as D of the ECM connector when the shift lever is shifted to the following position. OK:

P C96192

NG



Shift range

Terminal

Voltage (V)

P

P – E1

7.5 to 14

R

R – E1

7.5 to 14

N

N – E1

7.5 to 14

D

D – E1

7.5 to 14

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–863 05C8R–02

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD (1) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle to the OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or hand– held tester, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. (2) Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the Check Engine Warning Light (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)/CHK ENG (MIL) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system/components or in the driving system components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to CHK ENG (MIL) illuminating when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO15031–6 are recorded in the ECM memory. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip, the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. (3) To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand– held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.). (4) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–876). (5) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection, and ensure thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to check mode when troubleshooting, technicians can cause the CHK ENG (MIL) to light up for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 2).


05–864

DIAGNOSTICS

(6)

–


*2 trip detection logic: When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction code is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG (MIL) to illumenate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip.). (b) Description M–OBD (1) When troubleshooting Multiplex (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand–held tester to the vehicle, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. (2) The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the MIL on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in driving system components. In addition to the MIL illuminating when a malfunction is detected, the applicable DTCs are recorded in the ECM memory. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip, the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. (3) To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 on the vehicle or read the number of blinks of the MIL when TC and CG terminals on the DLC3 are connected. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and activate the several actuators and check freeze frame data and various forms of engine data (For instruction book). (4) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use, and also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and perform troubleshooting. Most DTCs use 2–trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection and ensure thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to check (test) mode using the hand–held tester when troubleshooting, the technician can cause the MIL to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily. *2–trip detection logic: When a logic malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected again during the 2nd test drive, this 2nd detection causes the MIL to illuminate.


DIAGNOSTICS

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

–

05–865


Inspect the DLC3. (1) The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro– OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 D25148

Terminal No.

Connection


Condition

7

Bus Line

Pulse generation


4

Chassis Ground


Always

16

Battery Positive

Body Ground / 9 – 14 V

Always


2. (a)

FI2547



HINT: If the MIL does not come on, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. (b) Check the DTC, using the hand–held tester. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down.

05–866

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(1)

(c)

CG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 DLC3

Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book. (2) See page 05–876 to confirm the details of the DTCs. Check the DTC (Not using the hand–held tester). (1) Turn the ignition switch ON, but do not start the engine. (2) Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of DLC3. SST 09843–18040

TC D25148

(3)

Normal Code 0.26 Seconds

Read the DTC indicated by the number of times of the MIL blinks.

HINT: If the system is operating normally, the light will blink 2 times per second.

ON OFF 0.26 Seconds AT0716

Malfunction Code ”42” For Next Code 0.52 Seconds 2.5 Seconds

The malfunction code is indicated, as shown in the chart on the left (DTC ”42” is shown as an example).

HINT: When 2 or more malfunction codes are stored in memory, the lower–numbered code is displayed first.

ON OFF

4.0 Seconds

(4)

1.5 Seconds 4.5 Seconds Repeat

AT0713


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–867

3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. (a) Check the DTC. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery voltage 11 V or more Throttle valve fully closed Shift lever in P range Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON.

(6) 0.13 sec.

(7)

0.13 sec.

ON

(8)

OFF BR3904


Switch the hand–held tester from Normal mode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes). Start the engine (MIL goes out after the engine starts). Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.

NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, which all DTCs etc. are erased. (10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clear the DTC. (1) When using hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate a hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 10 seconds or more.

05–868

DIAGNOSTICS

–


4. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item


STOP LIGHT SW


SHIFT


SPD (NC)


LOCK UP SOL


KICKDOWN SW


PNP SW [NSW]



REVERSE



DRIVE



SOLENOID (SLT)


IG SW ON: ON

u

AT FLUID TEMP





Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

S Brake Pedal is depressed: ON S Brake Pedal is released: OFF

u

Shift lever Range is; S D: 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th (O/D)

u


u

S Lock Up: ON S Except Lock Up: OFF

u

S Accelerator Pedal is depressed: ON S Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF

u


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–869


5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Item

LINE PRESS UP

Test Details [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid SLT and raise the line pressure. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Stopped. IDL: ON [Others] ON: Line pressure up. OFF: No action (normal operation)

Diagnostic Note

–

LOCK UP



SHIFT

[Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid valve and set the each shift range by yourself. [Vehicle Condition] Less than 50 km/h (31 mph) [Others] Press " button: Shift up Press u button: Shift down


6. (a)

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms of the trouble. If the problem is that the transaxle does not shift up, shift down, or the shift point is too high or too low, conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symptoms. 7. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. Check to see that 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place, and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). HINT: O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control (1. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or less. 2. If there is a 10 km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed.) O/D Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or lower)


05–870

(2) (3)

DIAGNOSTICS

–


Check for shift shock and slip. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. Check for abnormal noise and vibration. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration.

HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc. (4) Check kick–down operation. While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1, 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. Drive in D range O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph). Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock–up. (b) S range test Shift to the S range, depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when: Down–shifting causes engine overrun. Down–shifting is required continuously, down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed. (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. CAUTION: Before conducting this test, ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–871

8. (a)


Possible cause






Line pressure too low Direct clutch slipping 1st & reverse brake slipping U/D clutch slipping




05–872

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(b)


(2) (3)


Possible cause






DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–873


D range


R range


Idling

372 to 412 (3.8 to 4.2, 54 to 60)

672 to 742 (6.9 to 7.6, 98 to 108)

Stall

931 to 1,031 (9.5 to 10.5, 135 to 150)

1,768 to 1,968 (18.0 to 20.1, 256 to 285)

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause


Line pressure control solenoid (SLT) defective Regulator valve detective


Line pressure control solenoid (SLT) defective Regulator valve detective Oil pump defective




R range circuit fluid leak Direct clutch defective 1st & reverse brake defective


05–874

DIAGNOSTICS

D09299

–


10. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (a) Disconnect the solenoid wire. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. While driving, shift through the D range. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Shift range

Gear position

D

3rd

R

Reverse

P

Pawl Lock

HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish, do the above road test. If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in the transaxle itself. (c) Connect the solenoid wire. (d) Cancel out the DTC.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–875


G23367


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–861 05CBX–01



DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–879 0567W–11


Suspect Area

See page


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


4. 5. 6. 7.

05–905 05–161 05–161 01–32


ECM

01–32



05–910 01–32



05–161 05–882 01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

Poor acceleration

ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

No kick–down


05–908 01–32



05–880

DIAGNOSTICS

–



Suspect Area

See page



L L –



–



L –



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L



L –



L – L



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L



No kick–down

Valve body assy


40–47 – L

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–881


Suspect Area

See page


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


L L L L L


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Front and rear planetary gear unit U/D planetary gear Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) 1st & reverse brake (B2)

L L L L L



L L


Direct clutch (C2)

L


U/D clutch (C3)





L L L



L L



40–37


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

40–37 L L L L L



L L



L



L L


Direct clutch (C2)

L


U/D clutch (C3)

L


U/D brake (B3)

L









L 40–37

40–37 L L L 40–37

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–905 05C91–01

STOP LIGHT SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition, when brakes are suddenly applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends a signals to the ECM. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress.


05–906

DIAGNOSTICS

–



G–W (*1)

1 IR1

G–W (*2)

G–W (*2)

1

2 DA

ECM

10 DC

19 E10 STP

G–W

1 DM

G–W


G–W (*4, *5) C J30

G–W (*4, *5)

C J30

C J30

2

G–W (*4, *5)

1 R–W (*1)

11 IE3

R–W (*2) G–W (*3)

2 IR1 2

R–W (*1)

R–W (*2)

DA 22




N8 Noise Filter


1 BD1 (*4) 3 BF1 (*5)

G–W


L (*4)


B–G W–B (*3)

1 4D 2

1 1 4B


W–B (*4, *5)

W–B

3 BG1

B–G FL MAIN

W–B (*5)

W–B (*3)

W–B (*5)

L (*5)

4 BG1 W–B (*4) W–B (*5)

2 BD1 (*4) 4 BF1 (*5)

W–B

G–W (*5)

W–B (*4) A J33 2 BE1 W–B (*4)


W–B Battery



BS

BT

BX

A79094

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–907





OK

2




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–878

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8S–01


E12

E10

E9

C95801


Wiring Color

SLT+ (E13–17) – SLT– (E13–16)

P–L – P

IG switch ON

10 to 14

THO (E13–30) – E2 (E13–28)

V – BR

IG switch ON and ATF temperature 110C (230F)

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1


10 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

O/D gear

10 to 14

Except O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1

1st or 2nd gear

10 to 14

3rd or O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

10 to 14

1st gear

10 to 14

Except 1st gear

Below 1

DSL (E12–11) (E12 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

L B – BR L–B

S4 ((E12–13)) – E1 ((E12–7))

L – BR

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

SL2+ (E12–17) (E12 17) – SL2 (E12 SL2– (E12–16) 16)

R – R–B

SL1+ (E12–19) (E12 19) – SL1 (E12 SL1– (E12–18) 18)

Y – Y–B

NC+ (E12–26) – NC– (E12–34)

LG – LG–B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 to 5

NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35)

B–O – B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 to 5

D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

LG B – BR LG–B

R (E10 (E10–11) 11) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

R Y – BR R–Y

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)

V–W – BR

SPT1 (E10–20) (E10 20) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

L – BR

SFTD (E9–21) (E9 21) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

B – BR

SFTU (E9–22) (E9 22) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

R – BR

KD*1 (E9 (E9–27) 27) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

W – BR

*1: Europe


IG switch ON

Shift lever D range

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Shift lever other than D range

Below 1

IG switch ON

Shift lever R range

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Shift lever other than R range

Below 1

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and shift lever except for S position

Below 1


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and shift lever ”–” position (Down shift)

Below 1.5


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and shift lever ”+” position (Up shift)

Below 1.5


Below 1


10 to 14

05–910

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C93–01



DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–911




L

R–W 3

SCT

S

7 B

SFTD 1 R SFTU 2

J17 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B E

A

5

A

W–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 CG

7 CA

R–W

7 DB

R–W

Driver Side J/B

B–G G–Y

IG1 Relay GAUGE1

1 DN

5

5 DH

3

1

9 DA

2 AM1

1 DH


IG1

1


1 4D

ALT 2

FL MAIN

W–B 1 4B

1 B–G

A

J15 J/C

Battery IJ

IK

IP

*1: LHD *2 RHD

D30750


05–912

DIAGNOSTICS

–



CHECK ECM (a) (b)

E1

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT1 and E1 of the ECM. OK:

NG

SPT1

Shift position

Specified condition

Except S position

Below 1 V

S position

7.5 to 14 V

Go to step 6

H42584

OK

2

CHECK ECM (a) SFTU

E1

SFTD


Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTU – E1

7.5 to 14 V


SFTD – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTD – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42584

OK

NORMAL

NG

3


(a) (b) (c)

SFTD (+)

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminals E and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E

Continuity

S position

SFTU – E

No continuity


SFTD – E

Continuity

S position

SFTD – E

No continuity

E (–) H42585



DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–913


E6

Tester connection

Specified condition

SFTU (E6–22) – SFTU (A–2)

Continuity

SFTD (E6–28) – SFTD (A–1)

Continuity

SFTD

SFTU

SFTU


SFTD

A

NG H42586

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

05–914

6

DIAGNOSTICS

–



IG

S

H42585

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminal IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition

Except S position

IG – S

No continuity

S position

IG – S

Continuity

NG


OK

7


E5

E1 (–)

SPT1

Connect the transmission control switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal SPT1 and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Except S position

SPT1 – E1

Below 1 V

S position

SPT1 – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42587

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Specified condition

HARNESS

AND

05–900

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8Z–01

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO.2 CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM.




(a) (b)

E2 C54864

(c)


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2


NG OK




DIAGNOSTICS

2

–

05–901



E2 THO

(d) C95813


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–919


0567O–11



Inspector’s Name

:


Registration Year

/

/


/


/

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (

Vehicle does not move ( Any range

Symptoms

km mile

Odometer Reading

No up–shift

( 1st 2nd

No down–shift

( O/D 3rd

No up–shift

(S range)

No down–shift

(S range)

times a day)

Particular range)

2nd 3rd

3rd O/D )

3rd 2nd

2nd 1st )


Lock–up

Any drive range)


Check Item

MIL

Normal

Remains ON

1st Time

Normal code


)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–931


0567Q–09


Detection Item

Trouble Area

MIL *

Memory

P0500 (05–453 )


Combination meter Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit Vehicle speed sensor ECM

P0705 (05–938)



P0710 (05–941)


P0711 (05–943)


P0712 (05–941)


P0713 (05–941)


P0717 (05–945)



P0724 (05–947)


Short in stop light switch circuit Stop light switch ECM

P0741 (05–948)

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Perfomance (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Shift solenoid valve DSL ECM

P0743 (05–951)

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)


P0746 (05–954)



P0748 (05–956)



P0766 (05–962)


Shift solenoid valve S4 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Shift solenoid valve S4 ECM

P0776 (05–963)




Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit ATF temperature t t sensor ECM

05–932

DIAGNOSTICS

–


P0778 (05–956)



P0793 (05–965)



P0982 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)

P0983 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)

P2716 (05–967)




DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–915

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 0567N–12


1


2


3


4


5

Visual Inspection

6


7


8


9



05–916

10

DIAGNOSTICS

–



Go to step 19

OK

11


Go to step 16

OK

12


Go to step 14

OK

13


Go to step 18

OK

14


Go to step 16

OK

15


NG

16


17


18



DIAGNOSTICS

19


20

Repair

21

Confirmation Test

End


–


05–917

05–970

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C9J–01



6 CJ

W–B

4 IG2


1

W

2

ECM 8 IG2

W

30 E10 KD

W–B

IP

G25416


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–971





Voltage


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

KD D30684

OK


NG

2


Disconnect the kick–down switch connector. Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2 of the kick–down switch when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. OK: Kick–down switch

NG

Continuity

ON

Continuity

OFF

No continuity


D02350

OK

3




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–933 0567R–12


ECM











05–938

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

P0705

–



CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM. DTC No.


P0705



05C96–01

Trouble Area


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–939



ECM

W–L

20 IK2

R–Y

5 IK1

PL 1

RL 2

C

NL 5 LG–B DL 7

C

A J/C C J22 J23 R–Y (*2)

R–Y(*2) 9 IK2 10 IK2

7 E9

R LG–B

P

11 E10 R

R–Y(*1)

R–Y(*1)

R–W 3 RB R

6 E9

W–L J15 J/C

C D J14 J19 (*1) (*2)

J/C

N

C D 10 LG–B J14 J19 E10 D (*1) (*2)

Center J/B 1 IK1

R–W

8 CA

1 CD

R–W

R–W


1 B–G

DN

5

5 DH

G–Y

GAUGE2

3 2

1

AM1

27 DA

R–W

9 DA

W–B

1 DH

I12 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1

IG1 1


1 4D

ALT 2

1

FL MAIN

1 4B

B–G IJ

Battery *1: LHD *2: RHD D30749


05–940

DIAGNOSTICS

–





C91579


P

1–3

6–9

R

2–3

–

N

3–5

6–9

D

3–7

–



OK

2


E1

R

D

Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that P, R, N as well as D of the ECM connector when the shift lever is shifted to the following range. OK:

N P D30683

NG



Shift range

Terminal

Voltage (V)

P

P – E1

7.5 to 14

R

R – E1

7.5 to 14

N

N – E1

7.5 to 14

D

D – E1

7.5 to 14

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0710

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0712

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0713

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

05–941 05C97–01



P0710


P0712


P0713


Trouble Area


WIRING DIAGRAM

E1 ECT Solenoid

ECM 28 O

O

E2 6

BR

THO 1

V

E13 E2

32 E12 THO

D26545


05–942

DIAGNOSTICS

–




(a) (b)

(c) E2 C54864


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG


OK

2


E2

(d)

THO

C91565

Connect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Resistance: 79 to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols

Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0711

–

05–943


05C98–01

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” PERFORMANCE


P0711


Trouble Area






(a) (b)

E2 C54864

(c)

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK:


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2

Measure the resistance between body ground and that THO as well as E2 of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG OK

Temperature: C (F)


05–944

2

DIAGNOSTICS



E2

C82158

–

(d)

THO C91565

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK:



Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2

Measure the resistance between body ground and that THO as well as E2 of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

OK

Temperature: C (F)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0717

–


05–945 05C99–01

TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL



Trouble Area

P0717




B–O

27 E12 NT+

B

35 E12 NT–

2

D26540


05–946

DIAGNOSTICS

–




C58536


NG


OK

2


NT+ NT–

(d) C91565


NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0724

–

05–947


05C9A–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition, when brakes are suddenly applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends signals to the ECM. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0724

The stop light switch does not turn off even once the vehicle is driven (2–trip detection logic).






OK

2




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–948

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0741

–


05C9B–01

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor, Air–flow meter and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch. Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch with the lock–up schedule in the ECM memory to detect a mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve DSL, valve body and torque converter clutch. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0741

Lock–up does not occur when driving in lock–up range (normal driving at 80 km/h 50 mph), or lock–up remains ON in lock– up OFF range (2 trip detection logic)

Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed Valve body blocked or stuck Shift solenoid valve DSL Lock–up clutch



(b)

Disconnect the transmission wire connector connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between the terminal 3 and the body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20C (68F)

C54864

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSIONWIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E1

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals DSL and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20C (68F)

DSL

C91565

OK

Go to step 3


DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–949

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) (–)

(a) (b)

(+)

(c)

(–)

(d)

(+)

(e)

D03447 D03448

Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air, check that the solenoid valve does not leak the air. OK: Solenoid valve does not leak air. When battery voltage is supplied to the shift solenoid valve, check that the valve opens. OK: Solenoid valve opens. Measure the resistance between the terminal DSL of shift solenoid valve DSL and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes operation noise.

D30707

(–)

(+)

D03420 D03419

D03728

NG


NG


OK

4

CHECK TRANSMISSION WIRE

OK


05–950

5

DIAGNOSTICS

–




OK

6





DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0743

–


05–951 05C9C–01

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CIRCUIT ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL)


P0743

DTC Detection Condition Either (a) or (b) is detected at 1 time: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Solenoid resistance is 8 or less short circuit when solenoid is energized (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or more open circuit when solenoid is not energized

Trouble Area




L–B

G DSL 3

11 E12 DSL

D26539


05–952

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(DSL) (a) (b)

DSL

C54864

Disconnect the solenoid connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between the terminal 3 and the body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1

NG

DSL



Connect the transmission wire connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F)

C91565

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–953


(–)

(c)

(+)

D03420 D03419

D03728

Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. Measure the resistance between the terminals DSL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes operation noise.

NG




05–954

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0746

–


05C9D–01

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1)



Trouble Area

P0746





1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG


OK

2


OK



DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–955





05–956

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C9E–01

DTC

P0748

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1)

DTC

P0778

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2)

DTC

P0982

SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)

DTC

P0983

SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)



Trouble Area

P0748



P0778



P0982

ECM detects short in solenoid valve No. 4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve No. 4 is operated (1–trip detection logic)


P0983

ECM detects open in solenoid valve No. 4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve No. 4 is not operated (1–trip detection logic)


HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0748 is output, check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTC P0778 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S4 when DTC P0982 and P0983 is output.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–957




Gear

Solenoid Valve

SL1

SL2

S4

ON

ON

OFF

1st

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

ON

OFF

2nd

X

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF

X

OFF

OFF

OFF OFF

3rd

X

3rd

OFF

X

3rd

OFF

X

SL1 SL2

S4

Gear


OFF

OFF

ON

O/D

X

ON ON

ON



X

1st

3rd

OFF

ON

X

2nd

OFF

3rd

OFF OFF

X

3rd

ON

O/D

OFF OFF

X

3rd


X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

ON

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

X

X

OFF

3rd

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

X

2nd

OFF

X

ON OFF X

X

ON

O/D

X ON


Gear

ON

X

OFF


OFF OFF ON OFF



X

X

3rd

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

X

3rd

X

X

X

3rd

05–958

DIAGNOSTICS

–



ECM Y

R

17 E12 SL2+

R–B

16 E12 SL2–

Y

19 E12 SL1+

Y–B

18 E12 SL1–

SL2+ 4

BR SL2– 9 W SL1+ 5

B SL1– 10

L

R S4 8

10 E12 S4

D26538


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–959



SL2+

(b)

(c) SL1–

SL2–

S4 D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals 5 and 10. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals 5 and 10 of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (d)

(e)

Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 9. OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 9 of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG (f)


Go to step 4

Measure the resistance between terminal 8 and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) NG

OK

Go to step 3

Go to step 5

05–960

2

DIAGNOSTICS



E1

SL1+ S4

SL1–

–

SL2+

SL2– C91565

(d)

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the connector from the ECM. Measure the resistance between terminals of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: SL1+ – SL1–: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20_C (68_F) SL2+ – SL2–: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20_C (68_F) S4 – E1: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals SL1+, SL1–, SL2+ and SL2– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG




DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–961


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466

NG



5


(a) (b)

(–)

(c)

D25467

Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.




05–962

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0766

–


05C9F–01

SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4)



Trouble Area

P0766





(a) (b)

(–)

(c)

D25467

Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid makes an operating noise.

NG


OK

2



OK

3





DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0776

–


05–963 05C9G–01

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2)



Trouble Area

P0776





1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

Remove the shift solenoid valve SL2. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5.5 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector, then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

2

(–)

(+)

D25466

NG


OK

2


OK



05–964

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–






DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0793

–


05–965 05C9H–01

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR ”A”



Trouble Area

P0793



WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


LG

26 E12 NC+

LG–B

34 E12 NC–

2

D26541


05–966

DIAGNOSTICS

–




C58536

Disconnect the speed sensor (NC) connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of the speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F)

NG


OK

2


NC+ NC–

C91565

(d)

Connect the speed sensor (NC) connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC–. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620 at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P2716

–


05–967 05C9I–01

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”D” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID SLT) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION



ON

OFF

1 cycle


BE4056

DTC No.

P2716

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. or more: (1–trip detection logic) (a) SLT– terminal: 0V (b) SLT– terminal: 12V


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid O

P–L

13 E12 SLT+

P

12 E12 SLT–

SLT+ 2

G SLT– 7

D26542


05–968

DIAGNOSTICS

–




(b)

(c) SLT– D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT–. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


(d) SLT+

SLT–

C91565

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the ECM connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–969


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

2

(–)


(+)

D25466




DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–977


05C9L–01

PATTERN SELECT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ECT SNOW is the system that operates the throttle motor to control engine output to reduce skidding of the driving wheels, guarantee takeoff acceleration, driving straightness and turning stability.

WIRING DIAGRAM


E8 *3 ECT Pattern Select SW W–B

B 1

8 CH

*1

11 CF

*2

4

14 DA

11 8 SNOW MPX1 B8

ECM 29 E10 MPX2

Driver Side J/B 22 MPX2 B8

18 E10 MPX1

6 CA

W–B IP

*1: RHD *2: LHD

(*3) Pattern Select Switch (ECT SNOW Switch) When the ECT SNOW switch is pushed, the switch contact is made and the ECT SNOW mode is selected. To cancel the ECT SNOW mode, push the ECT SNOW switch once again. The ECT SNOW mode is automatically cancelledout when the ignition switch is turned ”OFF”. D30688


05–978

DIAGNOSTICS

–



DRIVING TEST Start the engine. Turn the ECT SNOW switch ”OFF”. Confirm vehicle response by driving from a parked position to fully depressing the accelerator pedal. Turn the ECT SNOW switch on and perform the same check as (c). Confirm that there is a difference between ECT SNOW switch ”ON” and ”OFF”.

HINT:

Driving test should be done on a paved road (a nonskid road). Make sure not to use the TRAC system when testing a vehicle equipped with one. Standard: There is a difference in acceleration between ”ON” and ”OFF”. NG

Go to step 2


2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a)

Wire Harness Side:

(b)

Disconnect the connector of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Measure the resistance between 4 of the wire harness connector and body ground. Standard:

NG B59192

Tester connection

Specified condition

4 – Body ground

Below 1

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY (a)

Switch Side:

D30685


Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 4 of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Specified condition


1–4

Continuity


1–4

No continuity

NG


DIAGNOSTICS

4

–

05–979


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY – INTEGRATION RELAY) (a)

Instrument Panel J/B Assy Vehicle Front Side:

(b) (c)

DA

Connect the connector of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Disconnect the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) connector. Measure the resistance between terminal SNOW of instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) and body ground. Standard: Switch condition

Tester connection

Specified condition



Below 1



10 k or higher

DA

SNOW

D30751

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



AND

05–920

DIAGNOSTICS

–


PRE–CHECK 1. (a)



DIAGNOSTICS

–

(6)

(b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

05–921




DLC3 D25148

Terminal No.

Connection


Condition

7

Bus Line

Pulse generation


4

Chassis Ground


Always

16

Battery Positive


Always


2. (a)

FI2547




05–922

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(b) Check the DTC, using the hand–held tester. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down. (1) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book. (2) See page 05–931 to confirm the details of the DTCs. (c) Clear the DTC. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. 3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. (a) Check the DTC. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery voltage 11 V or more Throttle valve fully closed Shift lever in P range Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON. (6) 0.13 sec.

0.13 sec.

ON

OFF BR3904



NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (7) Start the engine (MIL goes out after the engine starts).

DIAGNOSTICS

–

(8)

05–923



NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, which all DTCs etc. are erased. (10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clear the DTC. When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (c) Clear the DTC. When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 10 seconds or more. 4. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item


STOP LIGHT SW


SHIFT


SPD (NC)


LOCK UP SOL


KICKDOWN SW



Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note


u


u


u


u

Accelerator Pedal is depressed: ON Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF

u

05–924

DIAGNOSTICS

–


Item


PNP SW [NSW]



REVERSE



DRIVE



SOLENOID (SLT)


IG SW ON: ON

u

AT FLUID TEMP




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note


5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Item

LINE PRESS UP

6. (a)


Diagnostic Note

–

LOCK UP



SHIFT





DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–925

7. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. Check to see that 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place, and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). HINT: O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control (1. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or less. 2. If there is a 10 km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed.) O/D Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or lower) (2) Check for shift shock and slip. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. (3) Check for abnormal noise and vibration. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration. HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc. (4) Check kick–down operation. While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1, 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. Drive in D range O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph). Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock–up. (b) S range test Shift to the S range, depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when: The ATF temperature is low. Down–shifting causes engine overrun. Down–shifting is required continuously. (Down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed.) (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. CAUTION: Before conducting this test, ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.


05–926

DIAGNOSTICS

–


8. (a)


Possible cause






Line pressure too low Direct clutch slipping 1st and reverse brake slipping U/D clutch slipping




DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–927

(b)


(2) (3)


Possible cause






05–928

DIAGNOSTICS

–



D range


R range


Idling

372 to 412 (3.8 to 4.2, 54 to 60)

672 to 742 (6.9 to 7.6, 98 to 108)

Stall

931 to 1,031 (9.5 to 10.5, 135 to 150)

1,768 to 1,968 (18.0 to 20.1, 256 to 285)

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause








R range circuit fluid leak Direct clutch defective 1st and reverse brake defective


DIAGNOSTICS

D09299

–

05–929


10. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (a) Disconnect the transmission wire. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. While driving, shift through the D range. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Shift range

Gear position

D

3rd

R

Reverse

P

Pawl Lock

HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish, do the above road test. If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in the transaxle itself. (c) Connect the transmission wire. (d) Cancel out the DTC.


05–930

DIAGNOSTICS

–



G23367


05–918

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05CBY–01



DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–935 0567W–12


Suspect Area

See page


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


1. 2. 3. 4.

05–947 05–309 05–309 01–32


ECM

01–32



05–972 01–32


05–309 05–941 05–943 01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

Poor acceleration

ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

No kick–down


05–970 01–32




05–936

DIAGNOSTICS

–



Suspect Area

See page



L L –



–



L –



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


1. Lock–up relay valve 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L –



L – L



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L



No kick–down

Valve body assy


40–47 – L

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–937


Suspect Area

See page


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


L L L L L


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Front and rear planetary gear unit U/D planetary gear Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) 1st and reverse brake (B2)

L L L L L



L L


Direct clutch (C2)

L


U/D clutch (C3)





L L L



L L



40–37


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

40–37 L L L L L



L L



L



L L


Direct clutch (C2)

L


U/D clutch (C3)

L


U/D brake (B3)

L

No engine braking (1st: L range)

1st and reverse brake (B2)

L

No engine braking (2nd: 2 range)

2nd brake (B1)









L 40–37

L 40–37 L L L 40–37

05–934

DIAGNOSTICS

–



E12

E10

E11

E9

I34746


S4 ((E12–10)) – E1 ((E11–1))

DSL (E12–11) (E12 11) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

Wiring Color

L – BR

STD Voltage (V) Below 1

O/D gear

10 – 14

Except O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1


10 – 14

IG switch ON

10 – 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

1st or 2nd gear

10 – 14

3rd or O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

10 – 14

1st gear

10 – 14

Except 1st gear

Below 1

L B – BR L–B

SLT+ (E12–13) – SLT– (E12–12)

P–L – P

SL2+ (E12–17) – SL2 (E12 SL2– (E12–16) 16)

R – R–B

SL1+ (E12–19) – SL1 (E12 SL1– (E12–18) 18)


Y – Y–B

NC+ (E12–26) – NC– (E12–34)

LG – LG–B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 – 5

NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35)

B–O – B

Engine is running

Below 1 and 4 – 5

THO (E12–32) – E2 (E13–28)

V – BR

D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

LG B – BR LG–B

R (E10–11) (E10 11) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

V–W – BR

SPT1 (E10–20) (E10 20) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

L – BR

IG switch ON and Shift lever D range

10 – 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than D range

Below 1

IG switch ON and Shift lever R range

10 – 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than R range

Below 1

IG switch ON

4.5 – 5.5


7.5 – 14


Below 1


7.5 – 14

B – BR IG switch ON and Shift lever ”–” position (Down shift) IG switch ON and Shift lever S position

SFTU (E10–22) (E10 22) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1)

Below 1.5 7.5 – 14

R – BR IG switch ON and Shift lever ”+” position (Up shift)

KD*1 (E10 (E10–30) 30) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1)

Below 1.5

R Y – BR R–Y

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E11–1)

SFTD (E10–21) (E10 21) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1)

ATF temperature: 115 C (239 F) or more

W*1 BR

*1: LHD


Below 1.5


Below 1


10 – 14

05–972

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C9K–01

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When shifting the shift lever into S position using the transmission control switch, it is possible to shift in 1 to 4 positions. Shifting ”+” once changes up 1 shift range position, ”–” once changes down 1 shift range position respectively.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–973




L

R–W 3

SCT

S

7 B

SFTD 1 R SFTU 2

J17 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B E

A

5

A

W–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 CG

7 CA

R–W

7 DB

R–W

Driver Side J/B

B–G G–Y

IG1 Relay GAUGE1

1 DN

5

5 DH

3

1

9 DA

2 AM1

1 DH


IG1

1


1 4D

ALT 2

FL MAIN

W–B 1 4B

1 B–G

A

J15 J/C

Battery IJ

IK

IP

*1: LHD *2 RHD

D30750


05–974

DIAGNOSTICS

–



CHECK ECM (a) (b)

E1

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT1 and E1 of the ECM. OK: Shift range

Specified condition

Except S position

Below 1 V

S position

7.5 to 14 V

SPT1

NG

Go to step 6

D30684

OK

2

CHECK ECM E1

(a)

SFTU

Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the ECM. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTU – E1

7.5 to 14 V


SFTD – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTD – E1

7.5 to 14 V

SFTD D30684

OK

NORMAL

NG

3


(a) (b) (c)

SFTD (+)

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Measure the resistance between terminals E and SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E

Continuity

S position

SFTU – E

No continuity


SFTD – E

Continuity

S position

SFTD – E

No continuity

E (–) H42585



DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


05–975


E11

Tester connection

Specified condition

SFTU (E11–22) – SFTU (A–2)

Continuity

SFTD (E11–21) – SFTD (A–1)

Continuity

SFTD

SFTU

SFTU


SFTD

A

NG H42967

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

05–976

6

DIAGNOSTICS

–



IG

S

H42585

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminal IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Specified condition

Except S position

IG – S

No continuity

S position

IG – S

Continuity

NG


OK

7


E1 (–)

SPT1 (+)

Connect the transmission control switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal SPT1 and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Shift range

Tester connection

Except S position

SPT1 – E1

Below 1 V

S position

SPT1 – E1

7.5 to 14 V

C91567

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Specified condition

HARNESS

AND

05–984

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567O–09



Inspector’s Name

:


Registration Year

/

/


/


/

km mile

Odometer Reading

/ Continuous

/ Intermittent (


( 1st 2nd

No down–shift

( O/D 3rd

times a day)

Particular range)

2nd 3rd

3rd O/D )

3rd 2nd

2nd 1st )



Lock–up

Any drive range)


Check Item

MIL

Normal

Remains ON

1st Time

Normal code


)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check


05–996

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567Q–07

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the page given. *1 : ... MIL light up DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area Combination meter Open or short in speed sensor circuit Speed sensor ECM

MIL *1

Memory

P0500 (05–98)


P0710 (05–1003)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction (ATF Temperature Sensor)

P0711 (05–1005)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (ATF Temperature Sensor)

P0750 (05–1007)

Shift Solenoid ”A” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)


P0753 (05–1010)

Shift Solenoid ”A” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)


P0755 (05–1007)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)


P0758 (05–1010)

Shift Solenoid ”B” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)


P0770 (05–1013)

Shift Solenoid ”E” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)


P0773 (05–1015)

Shift Solenoid ”E” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)


P1520 (05–1018)

Stop Light Switch Circuit

Open or short in stop light switch circuit Stop lamp switch assy ECM

P1725 (05–1019)

NT Revolution Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Input Turbine Speed Sensor)


P1760 (05–1021)

Linear Solenoid for Line Pressure Control Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)

Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit Shift solenoid valve SLT ECM

P1780 (05–1024)

Park/Neutral Position Switch Malfunction

Short in park/neutral position switch circuit Park/Neutral position switch assy ECM

P1790 (05–1027)

ST Solenoid Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve ST)


P1798 (05–1030)

SB Solenoid Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SB)



O Open en or short in ATF tem temp.. sensor circuit Transmission wire (ATF temperature sensor) ECM

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–997

HINT: This DTC may be output when the clutch, brake and gear components, etc. inside the automatic transmission are damaged.


05–980

DIAGNOSTICS

–


ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567N–10


1


2


3


4


5

Visual Inspection

6


7


8


9



DIAGNOSTICS

10

–



Go to step 19

OK

11


Go to step 16

OK

12


Go to step 14

OK

13


Go to step 18

OK

14


Go to step 16

OK

15


NG

16


17


18



05–981

05–982

DIAGNOSTICS

19


20

Repair

21

Confirmation Test

End


–


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1033


05C8O–01



6 CJ

W–B

1 IG1

K2 Kick Down SW W W–B 1

ECM 12 2 W 1 E10 KD * IG1

2

W–B

IP *1: LHD

G25416


05–1034

DIAGNOSTICS

–




KD

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure voltage between terminal KD of ECM and body ground when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or not. OK: Accelerator pedal

Voltage


Below 1 V


10 to 14 V

H42584

OK


NG

2


Disconnect the kick–down switch connector. Check continuity between terminals of the kick–down switch connector when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. OK: Kick–down switch

D02350

NG

Continuity

ON

Continuity

OFF

No continuity


OK

3




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

05–998

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567R–10


ECM

DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch Assy LHD: Kick–down Switch

Shift Lock Control Unit (Transmission Control Switch) Speed Sensor (NT)

Transmission Wire (ATF Temperature Sensor)

Shift Solenoid Valve SL


Shift Solenoid Valve S2

Shift Solenoid Valve SB Shift Solenoid Valve S1

Shift Solenoid Valve ST

Shift Solenoid Valve SLT D30681


DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0710

–


05–1003 0567Z–06

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION


P0710


Trouble Area

Either (a) or (b) is detected for 0.5 sec. or more: (1 trip detection logic) (c) Temp. sensor resistance is less than 79 (d) After engine has been operating for 15 min. or more, resistance at temp. sensor is more than 156 k


WIRING DIAGRAM

E1 ECT Solenoid

ECM BR

O E2

6 V

O THO 1

28 E13 E2 30 E13 THO

D26545


05–1004

DIAGNOSTICS

–




(a) (b)

(c) E2 C54864


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG


OK

2


(d) E2 THO

C95813


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0711

–

05–1005


05C8G–01

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE


P0711


Trouble Area






(a) (b)

E2 C54864

(c)


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2


NG OK




05–1006

2

DIAGNOSTICS

–



E2 THO

(d) C95813


Resistance: k

10 (50)

6.4

110 (230)

0.2


Specified condition

THO – Body ground

No continuity

E2 – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0750

SHIFT SOLENOID ”A” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1)

DTC

P0755

SHIFT SOLENOID ”B” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2)

05–1007 05C8H–01

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor and speed sensor NT to detect the actual gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear). Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect the mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valves, the valve body or automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.). DTC No.


P0750 The gear required by the ECM does not match the actual gear when driving (2–trip detection logic) P0755


Trouble Area Shift solenoid valve S1 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.) Shift solenoid valve S2 is stuck open or closed Valve body is blocked up or stuck Automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.)

05–1008

DIAGNOSTICS

–




S1

(c)

Remove the shift solenoid valve S1/S2. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

S2

S1

S2

D30679

OK


NG


DIAGNOSTICS

2

–


05–1009





05–1010

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8I–01

DTC

P0753

SHIFT SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1)

DTC

P0758

SHIFT SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shifting from 1st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF operation of the shift solenoid valves S1 and S2 controlled by ECM. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the solenoid valves, the ECM controls the remaining normal solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe function). Fail safe function: If either of the solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short, the ECM turns the other solenoid valve ON and OFF to shift to the gear positions shown in the table below. The ECM also turns the shift solenoid valve ST OFF at the same time. If both solenoids malfunction, hydraulic control cannot be performed electronically and must be done manually. Manual shifting as shown in the above table must be done (In the case of a short circuit, the ECM stops sending current to the short circuited solenoid). NORMAL Range

D

2 (S range) 1 (S range)

Solenoid valve S1 S2 ON ON

Gear 1st

ON

OFF

2nd

OFF OFF

OFF

3rd

ON

ON

ON

ON OFF



Solenoid valve S1 S2 OFF X

Solenoid valve S1 S2 X ON

Gear 3rd

Gear

BOTH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES MALFUNCTIONING Gear when shift selector is manually operated

2nd

3rd

X

2nd

3rd

X

3rd

3rd

X

3rd

3rd

X

2nd

3rd

ON

X

2nd

3rd

OFF

X

3rd

3rd

ON

X

2nd

3rd

ON

X

2nd

3rd

X

OFF

3rd

ON

X

OFF

3rd

OFF

O/D

X

ON

O/D

OFF

1st

X

OFF

3rd

ON

OFF

2nd

X

OFF

3rd

OFF

3rd

X

OFF

3rd

ON

ON

1st

X

OFF

O/D

ON

OFF

2nd

X

OFF

3rd

X: Malfunctions

DTC No.

P0753 P0758

DTC Detection Condition ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valve S1 or S2 circuit when it changes ECM records DTC P0753 or P0758 if condition (a) or (b) is detected: (a) When solenoid is energized, solenoid resistance is 8 or less and it is counted (b) When solenoid is not energized, solenoid resistance is 100 k or more and it is counted

Trouble Area

Open or short in shift solenoid valve S1/S2 circuit Shift solenoid valve S1/S2 ECM

HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve S1 when DTC P0753 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S2 when DTC P0758 is output.


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1011


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid W S1

15 E12 S1

P

14 E12 S2

5

B S2

P–L

10

G22782


INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(S1/S2) (a) S1

(b)

S2

D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal S1/S2 of transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1 S1

NG

S2 C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: S1 – E1: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F) S2 – E1: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–1012

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–



S1

(c)

Remove the shift solenoid valve S1/S2. Measure the resistance between the solenoid valve connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

S2

S1

S2

D30679

NG




DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0770

–


05–1013 05C8J–01

SHIFT SOLENOID ”E” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor, air–flow meter and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch. Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch with the lock–up schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve SL, valve body and torque converter clutch or automatic transaxle (clutch, brake or gear etc.). DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0770

Lock–up does not occur when driving in the lock–up range (normal driving at 80 km/h 50 mph), or lock–up remains ON in the lock–up OFF range. (2–trip detection logic) When lock–up is ON, clutch or brake slips or gear is broken. (2–trip detection logic)




(c)

D30680

Remove the shift solenoid valve SL. Measure the resistance between terminal SL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG

REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL)

OK

2




05–1014

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–






DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0773

–


05–1015 05687–06

SHIFT SOLENOID ”E” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The shift solenoid valve SL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM to control the hydraulic pressure acting on the lock–up relay valve, which then controls operation of the lock–up clutch. Fail safe function: If the ECM detects a malfunction, it turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0773

Either (a) or (b) is detected for 1 time. (2–trip detection logic) (a) Solenoid resistance is 8 or less when solenoid is energized. (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or more when solenoid is not energized.



R

LG SL

4

13 E12 SL

D26539


05–1016

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SL) (a) SL

(b)

C54864

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal SL and the body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1

SL C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SL and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–1017


(c)

D30680

NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL)


Remove the shift solenoid valve SL. Measure the resistance between terminal SL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

OK


05–1018

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1520

–


05C8K–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition, when brakes are suddenly applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends signals to the ECM. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress. DTC No. P1520


Trouble Area

Stop light switch remains ON while vehicle running (1–trip detection logic)






OK

2




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1725

–


05–1019 057ZG–05

NT REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine. By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT) with the vehicle speed sensor signal, the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P1725

ECM detects conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. or more: (1 – trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd, 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and Park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NT < 300 rpm


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

T4 Turbine Speed Sensor B–O 1

2

B

27 E12 NT+

35 E12 NT–

D26540


05–1020

DIAGNOSTICS

–




C58536

Disconnect the sensor connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor (NT). OK: Resistance: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F)

NG


OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR–ECM) (a) (b) (c)

(d)

NT+ NT– C95812

Connect the speed sensor (NT) connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NT+ and NT–. OK: Resistance: 560 to 680 at 20_C (68_F) Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols

Specified condition

NT+ – Body ground

No continuity

NT– – Body ground

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1760

–


05–1021 05C8L–01

LINEAR SOLENOID FOR LINE PRESSURE CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION



ON

OFF

1 cycle

The throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulator valve (which modulates the line pressure) causes the solenoid valve SLT, under electronic control, to precisely and minutely modulate and generate the line pressure according the extent of the accelerator pedal depressed or the output of engine power. This reduces the function of the line pressure and provides smooth shifting. Upon receiving a signal of the throttle valve opening angle, the ECM controls the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) duty ratio to the solenoid valve, modulating the line pressure and generating throttle pressure. (*): Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and B is the period of non–continuity, then Duty Ratio=A/(A+B) x 100 (%)

BE4056

DTC No. P1760

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. or more: (a) SLT– terminal: 0 V (b) SLT– terminal: 12 V



05–1022

DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

E1 ECT Solenoid 17

P–L

G SLT+

E13 SLT+

3

GR

16 E13 SLT–

P SLT–

8

D26542



(b)

(c) SLT– D25234

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT–. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Check continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols SLT+ – Body ground SLT– – Body ground

NG OK


Go to step 3


DIAGNOSTICS

2

–

05–1023



(d) SLT+

SLT–

C95813

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols

Specified condition

SLT+ – Body ground

No continuity

SLT– – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3


1

(a) (b)

2

(c)

1

Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT. Measure the resistance between terminals. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5.6 at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector, then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

2

(–)

(+)

D25466

NG




05–1024

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

P1780

–


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends the signals to the ECM. DTC No.


P1780



Trouble Area


0568L–06

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1025



ECM

W–L

20 IK2

R–Y

5 IK1

PL 1

RL 2

J/C

D D D D W–L J18 J29 J18 J29 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) J/C A C R–Y (*2) R–Y(*2) J22 J23

W–L

21 E10 P 11 E10 R

J5 J/C

R–W 3

R–Y(*1)

RB

R–Y(*1) C

9 IK2

R NL 5

LG–B DL 7

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

R

10 IK2

C J/C

A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2)

22 E10 N

R

10 E10 D

LG–B

Center J/B R–W

1 IK1

8 CA

1 CD

R–W

R–W


1 DN

B–G G–Y

3

5

5 DH

GAUGE2

R–W

9 DA

2

1

27 DA

AM1

1 DH


IG1 1


1 4D

ALT 2

1

1 4B


IJ

*1: LHD *2: RHD D30748


05–1026

DIAGNOSTICS

–




Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Check the continuity between each terminals shown below when the shift lever is moved to each range.

Shift Range

C53270


P

1–3

6–9

R

2–3

–

N

3–5

6–9

D

3–7

–



OK

2


E1

R

D

N P

Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that R as well as D, P and N of the ECM when the shift lever is shifted to the following range. OK:

C96192

NG



Shift Range

Terminal

Voltage (V)

P

P – E1

10 to 14

R

R – E1

10 to 14

N

N – E1

10 to 14

D

D – E1

10 to 14

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P1790

–


05–1027 05C8M–01

ST SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shift solenoid valve ST is switched ON–OFF by a signal from ECM so that let in or out timing of O/D and 2nd brake is adjusted by operating orifice control valve. Therefore, shift solenoid valve ST operates when letting in or out reverse clutch. If it is broken, the shift shock becomes big. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P1790




Y ST

R–B 2

12 E12 ST

D26539


05–1028

DIAGNOSTICS

–



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ST) (a) ST

(b)

C54864

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal ST and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1

ST

Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals ST and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

NG C95812



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


05–1029

INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(ST) (a) (b)

(c)

D09034

Remove the shift solenoid valve ST. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG



REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(ST)

05–1030

DTC

DIAGNOSTICS

P1798

–


05C8N–01

SB SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SB)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shift solenoid valve SB controls the 2nd brake (B1) and 1st and reverse brake pressures and performs the 1st and 2nd engine brake control. Fail safe function: S shift control prohibition. On activating the fail–safe function during S shift, the driving mode turns to the ordinal D range. DTC No.


P1798


Trouble Area



V SB

L 7

19 E12 SB

D26539


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1031



INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SB) (a) (b)

Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure resistance between terminal 7 and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

SB C54864

NG

Go to step 3

OK

2


E1

SB

NG C95812



Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure resistance between terminals SB and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–1032

3

DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SB) (a) (b)

(c)

D09034

Remove the shift solenoid valve SB. Measure resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

NG



REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SB)

05–1040

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05C8Q–01

PATTERN SELECT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When SNOW mode is selected with the pattern select switch, the ECM controls the solenoid valves and the transmission starts from 2nd gear. In D range, the transmission automatically shifts up through 3rd to O/D as usual.

WIRING DIAGRAM


E8 ECT Pattern Select SW W–B 1 8 CH

*1

11 CF

*2

14 DA

B 4

11 8 SNOW I14 MPX1

ECM 29 E10 MPX2

Driver Side J/B 22 I14 MPX2

23 E10 MPX1

6 CA

W–B IP *1: RHD *2: LHD

D30688


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–1041


INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY (a) (b)

Disconnect the connector of pattern select switch. Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 4 of the pattern select switch. OK: Pattern select switch

Specified condition


Continuity


No continuity

NG


D30685

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH – INTEGRATION RELAY, PATTERN SELECT SWITCH – BODY GROUND) NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS



AND

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–985 05C8E–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)



05–986

DIAGNOSTICS

–

(6)

(b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516




DLC3 D25148

Terminal No.

Connection


Condition

7

Bus Line

Pulse generation


4

Chassis Ground


Always

16

Battery Positive


Always


2. (a)

FI2547




DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–987

(b) Check the DTC, Using the hand–held tester. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down. (1) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book. (2) See page 05–996 to confirm the details of the DTCs. (c) Clear the DTC. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. 3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. (a) Check the DTC. (1) Check the initial conditions. Battery voltage 11 V or more Throttle valve fully closed Shift lever in P or N range Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON. (6) 0.13 sec.

0.13 sec.

ON

OFF BR3904



NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (7) Start the engine (MIL goes off after the engine starts).

05–988

DIAGNOSTICS

(8)

–



NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode, which all DTCs etc. are erased. (10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clear the DTC. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. 4. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Item


STOP LIGHT SW


SHIFT


LOCK UP SOL


KICKDOWN SW


SNOW SW

Pattern SW (2nd) Status/ ON or OFF


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note


u


u


u

Accelerator Pedal is depressed all the way down: ON Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF

u

IG SW ON: OFF O Pattern SW (2nd) Push: ON O Pattern SW (2nd) Push: OFF

u

DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–989


Item


PNP SW [NSW]



REVERSE



DRIVE


Shift lever range is; D and S: ON Except D and S: OFF

SOLENOID (SLT)


IG SW ON: ON

u

AT FLUID TEMP




Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note


5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten the work time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Item

LINE PRESS UP

6. (a)


Diagnostic Note

–

LOCK UP

[Test Details] Control the shift solenoid SL to set the ATM to the lock–up condition. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Speed: 60 km/h (37 mph) or more

Possible to check the SL operation.

SHIFT





05–990

DIAGNOSTICS

–


7. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. Check that 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place, and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). HINT: O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control Coolant temp. is 60C (140F) or less and vehicle speed is 70 km/h (43 mph) or less. ATF temp. is 10C (50) or less. O/D and 3rd Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control Brake pedal is depressed. Accelerator pedal is released. ATF temp. is 10C (50) or less. Coolant temp. is 60C (140F) or less. When the 2nd start switch is on, there is no 1 " 2 up–shift and 2 " 1 down–shift. (2) Check for shift shock and slip. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2, 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. (3) Check for abnormal noises and vibration. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration. HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc. (4) Check kick–down operation. While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and O/D gears, check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1, 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. Drive in D range O/D gear, at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 70 km/h (43 mph). Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock–up. (b) S range test Shift to the S range, depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when: Down–shifting causes engine overrun. Down–shifting is required continuously. (Down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed.) (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. CAUTION: Before conducting this test, ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–991

8. (a)

MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS Measure the stall speed. The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuring the stall speeds in the D and R ranges. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds. To ensure safety, do this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction. The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.

(1) (2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

TAC

DLC3 D25148

Chock the 4 wheels. Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. SST 09843–18030 (3) Fully apply the parking brake. (4) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal. (5) Start the engine. (6) Shift into the D range. Press all the way down on the accelerator pedal with your right foot. (7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time. Stall speed: 2,400 " 150 rpm (8) Do the same test in the R range. Stall speed: 2,400 " 150 rpm

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause


Engine output may be insufficient Stator one–way clutch not operating properly HINT: If the value is larger or smaller than the specified value by 600 rpm or more, the torque converter could be faulty.


Line pressure too low Forward clutch slipping One–way clutch No.2 not operating properly


Line pressure too low Reverse clutch slipping 1st and reverse brake slipping


Line pressure too low Improper fluid level


05–992

DIAGNOSTICS

–


(b)

Measure the time lag. (1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag before the shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the reverse clutch, forward clutch, and 1st and reverse brake. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests. Take 3 measurements and take the average value.

(2) (3)


Possible cause


Line pressure too low Forward clutch worn One–way clutch No.2 not operating properly


Line pressure too low Reverse clutch worn 1st and reverse brake worn


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–993

9. HYDRAULIC TEST (a) Measure the line pressure. NOTICE: Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe. (1) Warm up the ATF. (2) Remove the test plug on the left side of the transaxle case and connect SST. SST 09992–00095 (09992– 00231, 09992–00271) SST (3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (5) Start the engine and check idling speed. SST (6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedG24063 al and shift into D range. (7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling. (8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when engine speed reaches stall speed. (9) In the same way, do the test in R range. Specified line pressure: Condition

D range


R range


Idling

370 to 410 (3.8 to 4.2, 54 to 60)

540 to 640 (5.5 to 6.5, 78 to 92)

Stall

1,110 to 1,230 (11.3 to 12.5, 161 to 178)

1,700 to 1,810 (17.3 to 18.5, 246 to 263)

Evaluation: Problem

Possible cause








R range circuit fluid leak Reverse clutch defective 1st and reverse brake defective


05–994

DIAGNOSTICS

G24064

–


10. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (a) Disconnect the transmission wire connector. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. While driving, shift through the D range. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Shift range

Gear position

D

3rd

R

Reverse

P

Pawl Lock

HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish, do the above road test. If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in the transaxle itself. (c) Connect the transmission wire connector. (d) Clear the DTC.


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–995


G23367


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–983 05CBZ–01



05–1000

DIAGNOSTICS

–

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567W–10


Suspect Area

See page


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


3. 4. 5. 6.


1. Engine coolant temp. sensor circuit 2. Throttle position sensor circuit 3. ECM

05–16 05–16 01–32



05–1035 01–32

1. Engine coolant temp. sensor circuit 2. ATF temp. sensor circuit

05–16 05–1003 05–1005 01–32



3. ECM

05–1018 05–16 05–16 01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32


ECM

01–32

Poor acceleration

1. Pattern select switch circuit (ECT SNOW switch) 2. Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) 3. ECM


ECM

No kick–down


05–1033 01–32

No 2nd start

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

05–1040 05–1035 05–1024 05–1040 01–32


Pattern select switch circuit (ECT SNOW switch) Transmission control switch circuit Park/neutral position switch circuit Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) ECM

05–1040 01–32 01–32

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–1001

Chapter 2: On–vehicle Repair (L: U340E, U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM824E) Symptom

Suspect Area

See page


1. 2. 3. 4.

Manual valve Primary regulator valve Secondary regulator valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L L –


1. Manual valve 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L –



L –



L –



L –


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


Valve body assy

L


1. 2. 3. 4.

Lock–up relay valve Solenoid relay valve Solenoid modulator valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L L –


1. C1 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L –


1. 2. 3. 4.

C3 accumulator Accumulator control valve Reverse control valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L L –


1. Lock–up relay valve 2. Accumulator control valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart

L L –


1. B2 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve

L L


1. C2 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve

L L


1. B1 accumulator 2. Accumulator control valve 3. 3–4 shift timing valve

L L L


Valve body assy

L

Harsh engagement (D, 2, L)

Coat relay valve

L



No kick–down

Valve body assy

L

Poor acceleration

SLT damper

L


40–42 –

05–1002

DIAGNOSTICS

–


Chapter 3: Off–vehicle Repair (L: U340E, U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. No. RM824E) Symptom

Suspect Area

See page


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Planetary gear unit Forward clutch One–way clutch No.2 Reverse Clutch 1st and reverse brake

L L L L L


1. Planetary gear unit 2. Reverse Clutch 3. 1st and reverse brake

L L L



L L


Direct clutch

L


O/D and 2nd brake



40–37


1. Forward clutch 2. One–way clutch No.2

L L



L L



40–37



L L


Direct clutch

L


O/D and 2nd brake

L

Slip or shudder (Forward range)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Slip or shudder (Reverse range)


L L


One–way clutch No.2

L



L L


Direct clutch

L


O/D and 2nd brake

L

No engine braking (1st)

1st and reverse brake

L

No engine braking (2nd)

O/D and 2nd brake

L



40–37



40–37


Torque converter clutch Forward clutch Direct clutch O/D and 2nd brake 2nd brake One–way clutch No.1 One–way clutch No.2

L

40–37 L L L L L L

DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–999 05C8F–01


E12

E10

E9

C95801

Symbols (Terminals No.) SLT+ (E13–17) –

Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

P–L – P

IG switch ON

10 to 14

THO (E13–30) – E2 (E13–28)

V – BR

IG switch ON and ATF temperature 110 C (230 F)

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1

ST (E12–12) (E12 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R B – BR R–B IG switch ON and R gear

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

Vehicle driving under lock–up position

10 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 1

1st or O/D gear

10 to 14

2nd or 3rd gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

10 to 14

1st or 2nd gear

10 to 14

3rd or O/D gear

Below 1

IG switch ON

Below 1

SLT– (E13–16)

SL (E12–13) (E12 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

S2 ((E12–14)) – E1 ((E12–7))

S1 ((E12–15)) – E1 ((E12–7))

R – BR

P – BR

P–L – BR

SB (E12–19) – E1 (E12–7)

L – BR

NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35)

B–O – B

SPT (E10–8) (E10 8) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

L – BR

D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R (E10 (E10–11) 11) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7)

KD*1 (E10–12) (E10 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

Pulse signal is output Below 1 4 to 5


7.5 to 14


Below 1

IG switch ON and Shift lever D position

10 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than D position

Below 1

IG switch ON and Shift lever R position

10 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever other than R position

Below 1

IG switch ON and Kick–down switch ON

Below 1

IG switch ON and Kick–down switch OFF

10 to 14

LG B – BR LG–B

R Y – BR R–Y

W*1 – BR

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)

V–W – BR

SFTU (E10–23) (E10 23) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

R – BR

SFTD (E10–30) (E10 30) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7)

Engine is running

IG switch ON and rotate driving wheel slowly

Pulse signal is output


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever ”+” position (Up shift)

Below 1.5


7.5 to 14

IG switch ON and Shift lever ”–” position (Down shift)

Below 1.5

B – BR

*1: LHD


DIAGNOSTICS

–


05–1035 05C8P–01



05–1036

DIAGNOSTICS

–




L

R–W 3

IG

S

7 B

SFTD 1 R SFTU 2

J17 J/C W–B (*1)

W–B E

A

5

A

W–B (*2)

Center J/B R–W

1 CG

7 CA

R–W

7 DB

R–W

Driver Side J/B

B–G G–Y

IG1 Relay GAUGE1

1 DN

5

5 DH

3

1

9 DA

2 AM1

1 DH


IG1

1


1 4D

ALT 2

FL MAIN

W–B 1 4B

1 B–G

A

J15 J/C

Battery IJ

IK

IP

*1: LHD *2 RHD

D30750


DIAGNOSTICS

–

05–1037



CHECK ECM (a) (b)

E1

SPT

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT and E1 of the ECM. OK:

NG

Shift position

Specified condition

Except S position

Below 1 V

S position

7.5 to 14 V

Go to step 6

H42584

OK

2

CHECK ECM (a) E1

SFTU

SFTD


Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTU – E1

7.5 to 14 V


SFTD – E1

Below 1.5 V

S position

SFTD – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42584

OK

NORMAL

NG

3


(a) (b) (c)

SFTD (+)

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Measure the resistance between terminals E and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition


SFTU – E

Continuity

S position

SFTU – E

No continuity


SFTD – E

Continuity

S position

SFTD – E

No continuity

E (–) H42585



05–1038

4

DIAGNOSTICS

–



E10

SFTU SFTU

Disconnect the ECM connector. Check the continuity between ECM and transmission control switch. OK: Tester connection

Specified condition

SFTU (E10–23) – SFTU (A–2)

Continuity

SFTD (E10–30) – SFTD (A–1)

Continuity

SFTD SFTD

A

NG G25441

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

DIAGNOSTICS

6

–

05–1039



IG

S

H42585

Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminals IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Specified condition

Except S position

IG – S

No continuity

S position

IG – S

Continuity

NG


OK

7


E10

E1 (–)

SPT (+)

C94728

Connect the transmission control switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT and E1 of the ECM connector. OK: Shift position

Tester connection

Except S position

SPT – E1

Below 1 V

S position

SPT – E1

7.5 to 14 V

H42587

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

Specified condition

HARNESS

AND


–


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC

C1514/14 Torque Sensor Power Source Circuit Malfunction

DTC

C1517/17 Torque Sensor Hold Malfunction

05C5H–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The torque sensor converts the power input in the steering wheel into electric signals, and sends them to the ECU. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1511/11 C1512/12

Torque q sensor circuit malfunction Steering column assy Power steering ECU assy

C1513/13 C1514/14


C1517/17


WIRING DIAGRAM Torque Sensor


6 5 7 8

TRQV TRQ1 TRQ2 TRQG

F44868



–



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

(e)

(f)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor with the steering wheel being in the center value position (no load). Standard: 2.3 to 2.7 V Check the difference of the values between ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” with the steering wheel being in the center value position (no load). Standard: Voltage: 0.3 V or less Check the values of the torque sensor on the data monitor when turning steering wheel. (1) Turn the steering wheel to the right end from the center value position, and check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor. Standard: 2.5 to 4.7 V (2) Turn the steering wheel to the left end from the center value position, and check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor. Standard: 0.3 to 2.5 V (3) Check the difference of the values between ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2”. Standard: Voltage: 0.3 V or less NG

Go to step 3




2

–


INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSY(TORQUE SENSOR) TRQG (–)

TRQ2 (+)

TRQ1 (+)

(a)

Measure the voltage between terminals TRQ1 and TRQG, TRQ2 and TRQG of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Steering position

Connector B

F44304

TRQ1

TRQ2

Center position

2.3 to 2.7 V

2.3 to 2.7 V

Right turned

2.5 to 4.7 V

2.5 to 4.7 V

Left turned

0.3 to 2.5 V

0.3 to 2.5 V

OK


NG

3

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY TRQG (–)

(a) TRQV (+)

Connector B

F44304

Measure the voltage between terminals TRQV and TRQG of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: 7.5 to 8.5 V

OK


NG REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20)



DTC

–


050YA–04

C1515/15 Torque Sensor Zero Point Calbration Not Performed

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC does not indicate trouble. Perform calibration of torque sensor zero point to delete DTC. DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1515/15

When torque sensor zero point calibration is not performed, this DTC is detected.

Sensor zero point calibration is not performed.


RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). Is DTC excepted for C1515/15 outputed? YES


NO

(a) (b)

2


3

RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTC (See page 05–1045). Is DTC C1516/16 outputed? NO

END

YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY DTC C1516/16(See page 05–1063)



DTC

–


0579K–02

C1516/16 Calibration of Sensor Zero Point Not Completed

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC does not indicate trouble. This is detected when the torque sensor zero point calibration is not completed normally. DTC No. C1516/16


Trouble Area

The torque sensor zero point calibration is not completed normally.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE

(a)

1

CLEAR DTC(See page 05–1045)

2


3

RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). (A): DTC C1516/16 output after attempted 3 time or more. (B): Normal code output.

HINT: If the DTC code is output in spite of conducting the steering zero point calibration, replace the steering column assy. (A) (B) END


REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSY


–


DTC


DTC


050WR–04



C1523/23

Short circuit of motor terminal or abnormal voltage or current in motor circuit.

C1524/24

Trouble Area Steering column assy Power steering ECU assy


1

M1

Power Steering Motor

2

M2

F40038



–



1

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY M1

(a) (b)

M2

Connector A

Turn the ignition switch ON. Turn the steering wheel to the left and right and measure the voltage between terminals M1 and M2 of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Voltage changes when steering wheel is turned.

F44304

NG


OK

2

INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSY(POWER STEERING MOTOR) (a) (b) M1

Disconnect the connector from the power steering motor. Measure the resistance between terminals M1 and M2 of power steering motor connector. Standard: Resistance: 0.07 to 1

M2

F44858

NG





–


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC

C1581/81 Assist Map Un–written

050WS–04



Trouble Area

C1531/31 C1532/32 Po er steering ECU assy Power ass malfunction malf nction C1533/33

Power steering g ECU assy y

C1534/34 C1581/81



RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). Is DTC except for C1531/31, C1532/32, C1533/33, C1534/34 and/or C1581/81 output? YES


NO REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20)



–


DTC


DTC


DTC

C1571/71 Speed Sensor Malfunction (Test mode)

0579L–02



Speed sensor Speed sensor circuit Skid control ECU assy Combination C bi ti meter t assy Power steering ECU assy

C1541/41 Speed sensor malfunction C1542/42 C1571/71

Trouble Area

Speed sensor malfunction (Test mode)

WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter

18 C11

Power Steering ECU

V–W

H H J/C H H J10 J20 J10 J20 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

V–W

5 E15 SPD

*1: LHD *2: RHD F44865



–



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. Select the item ”SPD” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speedometer displayed by the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed by the speedometer when driving the vehicle. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed speed values.



NG

2 (a)

CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CODE OUTPUT Check that DTC for brake system output the normal code. NG

OK




3

–


INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(METER SPEED SIGNAL) SPD

PGND

E14

E15

Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect an oscilloscope to terminals SPD and PGND of the power steering ECU assy connector.

(c)

Driving at about 20 km/h (12 mph), check the signal waveform. Standard: Signal waveform as shown in the illustration.

F44304

5 V/ Division

20 ms/Division

(a) (b)

A05135

HINT: As the vehicle speed becomes high, the waveform cycle narrows. OK


NG

4 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK GO TO COMBINATION METER SYSTEM(See page 05–1510)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


0579M–02

DTC


DTC


DTC

C1573/73 Engine Revolution Signal Malfunction (Test Mode)



C1544/44 Engine revolution signal malfunction C1545/45 C1573/73

Engine revolution signal malfunction (Test mode)

Trouble Area Engine revolution signal circuit ECM Power steering ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU

ECM

5 TACH E9

GR–R

A B J/C A B J9 J27 J9 J27 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

GR–R

12 E15 TACH

*1: LHD *2: RHD F44865



–



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. Select the item ”ENGINE REV” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check that there is no difference between the engine revolution value output from the tachometer displayed by the hand–held tester and the engine revolution value displayed by the tachometer when engine is idle. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed engine revolution values.

HINT: There is tolerance of 10 % in the tachometer indication. OK


NG

2 (a)

CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CODE OUTPUT Check that the DTC for engine output the normal code. NG

OK




3

–


INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL)

PGND

E14

TACH

E15

Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect an oscilloscope to terminals TACH and PGND of the power steering ECU assy connector.

(c)

With the engine idling, check the signal waveform. Standard: Signal waveform as shown in the illustration.

F44304

5 V/ Division

10 ms / Division

(a) (b)

HINT: As the engine revolution becomes high, the waveform cycle narrows.

A05138

OK


NG

4 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – ECM) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between power steering ECU assy and ECM (See page 01–32). NG

OK GO TO ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


0579N–02

C1551/51 IG Power Source Circuit Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The power steering ECU assy identifies ON or OFF status of the ignition switch by this circuit. DTC No.

C1551/51


Trouble Area

Unusual IG voltage value which exceeds the specification is inputed to power steering ECU assy.

ECU–IG fuse IG power source circuit Charging system Power steering ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU Assy G C J/C G C J10 J20 J11 J21 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

R–W

6 E15 IG

R–W

Driver Side J/B

I13 Ignition SW 3 AM1

G–R

3

5 DH

G–Y IG1 1

IG1 Relay

ECU–IG

18 DB

R–W

5

1

2

AM1

1 DH

9 DA

W–B

1 DN W–B

2 E14 PGND

Engine Room R/B No. 4 B–G

ALT

1 4B 1

1 4D

B–G

2

FL MAIN W–B Battery

IJ

IM

*1: LHD *2: RHD F44867



–



1

INSPECT FUSE(ECU–IG) (a) (b)

Driver Side J/B:

Remove the ECU–IG fuse from the driver side J/B. Check the continuity of the ECU–IG fuse. Standard: Continuity

ECU–IG Fuse

F44856

NG


OK

2


Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Measure the resistance between terminal PGND of E14 connector and body ground. Standard: Resistance: 1 or less

PGND (–) E14 F44851

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – DRIVER SIDE J/B) (a) (b) (c)

PGND E14

IG

Disconnect the E14 and E15 connectors from the power steering ECU assy. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals IG and PGND of the E14 and E15 connectors. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

E15 F44855

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


DTC

C1552/52 PIG Power Source Circuit

DTC

C1554/54 EMPS Relay Circuit

0579O–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When turning the ignition switch to ON, battery voltage is supplied to terminal PIG of the power steering ECU assy by EMPS relay operations. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the system prohibits the steering assist by interrupting the circuits of the EMPS relay and the motor relay (built in the power steering ECU assy). DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1552/52

Unusual motor power source voltage value which is not within the specification is input to power steering ECU assy.

C1554/54

Open or short circuit of EMPS relay circuit is detected.


WIRING DIAGRAM


Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 R EMPS Relay 1 R

R

1

3

5

1

2 EMPS

1

2

1

1

1

W–R

5 IE1

L

1 E14

W–R

3 E15 RLY

1 1A W–B

PIG

2 E14 PGND


1 4B

1 4A

B–G

FL MAIN

Battery

IM

F44862



–



1

INSPECT FUSE(EMPS) (a)

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1:

(b)

Remove the EMPS fuse from the engine room R/B No.1 and J/B No.1. Check the continuity of the EMPS fuse. Standard: Continuity

EMPS Fuse

EMPS Relay

F44852

NG

OK


INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN HARNESS AND ALL COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO EMPS FUSE


2

–


INSPECT EMPS RELAY (a) 1

3

(b) 2

1

5

3

5

Remove the EMPS relay from the engine room R/B No. 1 and J/B No. 1. Check operation of the EMPS relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

3–5

10 k or higher

3–5

Below 1 When battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

2 F45794

NG

REPLACE EMPS RELAY

OK

3


E14

Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Measure the resistance between the terminal PGND of the E14 connector and body ground. Standard: Resistance: 1 or less

PGND F44851

OK


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – ENGINE ROOM R/B AND J/B) (a) (b) (c)

E14

PIG (+) PGND (–)

Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals PIG and PGND of the E14 connector. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

F44851

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


0579Q–02

C1555/55 EMPS Motor Relay Circuit

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If a malfunction occurs in the system, the system prohibits the steering assist by interrupting the circuits of the EMPS relay and the motor relay (built in the power steering ECU assy). DTC No.


Trouble Area

C1555/55

Open or short circuit of EMPS motor relay in the ECU circuit is detected.


WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1


R EMPS Relay 1 R

R

1

3

5

1

2

2

1

W–R

5 IE1

1 E14 PIG

W–R

3 E15 RLY

1

EMPS 1

1

L

1

1A W–B

2 E14 PGND


1 4B

1 4A

B–G

FL MAIN

Battery

IM

F44862



–



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. Select the item ”PIG SUPPLY” in the FREEZE FRAME DATA and read its value displayed on the hand– held tester. Check that the power supply voltage value of the drive motor displayed by the hand–held tester. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

(d)

OK

Go to step 3

NG GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART

2

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(PIG TERMINAL VOLTGE)

PIG (+)

(a) (b)

PGND (–)

E14

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals PIG and PGND of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V

NG


YES


F44304

OK

3 (a) (b)

RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). Is DTC except for C1552/52 output?

NO REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20)



–


CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK Inspector’s : Name

EMPS Check Sheet

VIN Customer’s Name Production Date

/

/

Licence No.

Vehicle Model Date Vehicle Brought In

/


km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/

/

Continuous

( Engine

Cooled

Intermittent (

Warmed up )

times a day)

Steering operation is heavy. Steering force to the right and left differs, or steering force is uneven.

Symptoms

While running, the steering force does not alter corresponding the vehicle speed. The steering returns unwell. Vibration or strange sound comes from the steering column assy. When a trouble happens ( During turning

During vehicle stop

Always )

Others

PS Warning Light Abnormal

Remains ON

Does not come on

1st Time

Normal Code


)

2nd Time

Normal Code


)

DTC Check

Freeze Frame Data A malfunction code is outputed at the first time, record the freeze frame data as well (as the DTCs).



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WM–04


Using SST 09843–18040, connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for the code. For details of each code, proceed the page referred to under the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No.” in the DTC chart. DTC No. (See page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

C1511/11 (05–1059) C1512/12 (05–1059)

Torque sensor circuit malfunction

C1513/13 (05–1059)


C1514/14 (05–1059)


C1515/15 (05–1062)

Calibration of torque sensor zero point is not performed

Sensor zero point calibration is not preformed.

C1516/16 (05–1063)

Calibration of torque sensor zero point is not completed


C1517/17 (05–1059)



Motor circuit malfunction


Power steering ECU assy malfunction


Speed sensor malfunction

Speed sensor Speed sensor circuit Skid control ECU Combination meter assy Power steering ECU assy

Engine revolution signal malfunction


C1551/51 (05–1073)

IG power source circuit malfunction

ECU–IG fuse Power steering relay IG power source circuit Charging system Power steering ECU assy

C1552/52 (05–1076)

PIG power source circuit malfunction

C1554/54 (05–1076)

EMPS relay circuit malfunction

C1523/23 (05–1064) C1524/24 (05–1064) C1531/31 (05–1066) C1532/32 (05–1066) C1533/33 (05–1066) C1534/34 (05–1066) C1541/41 (05–1067) C1542/42 (05–1067) C1544/44 (05–1070) C1545/45 (05–1070)




–


C1555/55 (05–1080)

EMPS motor relay circuit malfunction


C1581/81 (05–1066)





–


05C5I–01

EMPS Warning Light Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the power steering ECU assy detects a trouble, the PS warning lights up. At this time, the power steering ECU assy records a DTC in memory.


Combination Meter

B–W

22 C11 P/S

6 C11

B–W

17 C10

W–B (*1)

9 E15 WL

W–B (*2) Driver Side J/B A J/C C A B–W C J8 J26 J8 J26 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

B–W

IGN

18 DA

2 DH

B–R

I13 Ignition SW 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*1) (*2)

B–R

B–R 4 AM2

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 AM2 B–R

1 1A

1 2

IG2

B–R 6


1

1 4A

A J17 J/C A

1 B–G 4B W–B (*2)

B–G

A

FL MAIN

J15 J/C

Battery *1: LHD

IK

A J16 J/C W–B A (*1) IO

*2: RHD

F44861



–



1 (a)


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2


Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Check the continuity between the terminal PGND of the E14 connector and body ground. Standard: Continuity

PGND

E14

F44851

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3

INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (a) (b) (c)

E15 WL

Turn the ignition switch ON. Disconnect the E15 connector from the power steering ECU assy, and check the P/S warning light comes on. Using a service wire, ground the terminal WL of the E15 connector, and check the P/S warning light goes off. Standard: P/S warning light comes on and then goes off

NG F44869

OK CHECK GO TO COMBINATION METER SYSTEM




–



HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. HINT: See the indicated pages for detailed explanation. The hand–held tester can be used at step 3, 6, 9, 12.

1


2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS(See page 05–1044)

3

CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

(a)

After the completion of the DTC and freeze frame data check, clear the DTCs (See page 05–1045).

4

PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR(Go to step 5) SYMPTOM OCCURS(Go to step 6)

5

SYMPTOM SIMULATION(See page 01–22)

6

DTC CHECK(See page 05–1045) NORMAL CODE(Go to step 7) MALFUNCTION CODE(Go to step 8)

7

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(See page 05–1058)

8

DTC CHART(See page 05–1054)



9

–


CIRCUIT INSPECTION(See page 05–1059 to 05–1086)

10

IDENTIFYING PROBLEMS

11

REPAIR

12

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WN–04

LOCATION Steering Column Assy

EMPS Fuse

EMPS Relay Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1

Power Steering ECU assy

Combination Meter Assy (P/S Warning Light)

ECU–IG Fuse

DLC3

Driver Side J/B

F45950



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 05C5F–01

PRE–CHECK

1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Check the PS warning light. (1) When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the PS warning light goes on for 2 seconds.

HINT: If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to troubleshooting for the PS warning light circuit (See page 05–1082). F15799

DLC3:

2. (a)

Tc

DTC CHECK (USING SST CHECK WIRE) Checking DTCs using a SST check wire. SST 09843–18040 (1) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.

CG C52361

(3)

Normal Code 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec.

Read and record any DTCs from the P/S warning light on the combination meter. Refer to the chart on the left for examples of a normal code and codes 21 and 22.

HINT:

ON

OFF

If the P/S warning light does not blink any DTC codes or the normal code, inspect the circuit shown in the charts below. Trouble Area

Codes 21 and 22 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.

2.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

ON

Code 21

Code 22 F40045


05–1084

P/S Warning Light Circuit

05–1082

4 sec.

OFF

Tc Terminal Circuit

If 2 or more malfunctions are detected at the same time, DTC will be displayed in the ascending order. (4) Refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart (See page 05–1054) for DTC information.


DLC3:

(b)

Ts

CG C52361

3. (a)

–


Clearing the DTCs using the SST check wire. SST 09843–18040 (1) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Disconnect and connect the SST check wire from the CG terminal 4 times or more in 8 seconds ending with it connected. (4) Check that the P/S warning light blinks a normal code. (5) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (6) Remove the SST from the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 DTC CHECK (USING HAND–HELD TESTER) Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Read the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen.

HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Clear the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. DATA LIST AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

4. HINT: Ignition switch must be turned ON, and the vehicle should be placed on a leveled ground to observe data by using a hand–held tester. Data List (*: with freeze frame data): Item

TRQ1 (*)

TRQ2 (*)


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note



–



–



Item


–


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

TRQ3 (*)



SPD (*)

Show the vehicle speed on the speedometer / Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)


ENGINE REV (*)

Show the engine revolution / Min.: 0 rpm Max.: 8,192 rpm

Actual engine speed

–

MOTOR ACTUAL (*)

Show the current flowing motor / Min.: –128 A, Max.: 128 A

0 to 65 A

–

COMMAND VALUE (*)

Show the specified current value / Min.: –128 A, Max.: 128 A

0 to 65 A

–

THERMISTOR TEMP (*)

Show the temperature of the thermistor / Min.: –50 _C, Max.: 205 _C

PIG SUPPLY (*)

Show the power supply voltage for driving motor / Min.: 0 V, Max.: 25 V

10 to 16 V

IG SUPPLY (*)

Show the power supply condition / Min.: 0 V, Max.: 25 V

10 to 16 V

–

TRQ1 ZERO VAL (*)



–

TRQ2 ZERO VAL (*)



–

TRQ3 ZERO VAL (*)



–

MTR OVERHEAT

Record of continuous overheat preventive control / record or un–record

Un–record

–

MTR LOW POWER

Record of low motor power supply voltage / record or un–record

Un–record

–

MTR HIGH POWER

Record of high motor power supply voltage / record or un–record

Un–record

#CODES

Number of DTC recorded / Min.: 0, Max.: 255

Min.: 0, Max.: XX

ASSIST MAP

Show the selected condition of the assist map / 01, 02, 03, 11 or 12

–

–

ECU ID

Show the identified information of ECU / 01, 02, 03, 04 or 05

–

–

TEST MODE STAT

Test mode status / NORMAL or TEST


–

–

Vehicle speed indicated on speedometer

–

While power steering operated

NORMAL: Normal mode TEST: During test mode

–

–


DLC3:

5.

Tc Ts

(a)

CG C52361

–


INPUT SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) (USING SST CHECK WIRE) Check the input signal using a SST check wire. (1) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Check that the PS warning light shows the normal code. (4) Check that the PS warning light goes off while driving the vehicle more than 10 km/h (6 mph) and the engine speed more than 300 rpm.

HINT: If the PS warning light goes off during driving, the sensor is judged to be normal. (5) Stop the vehicle. (6) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (7) Read the number of blinks of the PS warning light. HINT: See the list of DTC shown in the table below. Even if a sensor is normal, it output codes 71 and 73 during test mode.

Malfunction Code (Example Code 73)

Normal Code

3

7 ON

ON

OFF

OFF 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec.

0.5 sec.

A Cycle

4 sec. 1.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.

0.5 sec.

Repeat F42646


Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1571/71 (05–1067)



C1573/73 (05–1070)



(8)

After checking, disconnect the SST from the terminal Ts and CG, Tc and CG of DLC3, and turn the ignition switch to OFF. SST 09843–18040 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


6. (a)

–


INPUT SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) (USING HAND–HELD TESTER) Check the input signal using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Check that the warning light goes off with driving the vehicle more than 10 km/h (6 mph) and engine speed more than 300 rpm. (3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen.

HINT:

Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. See the list of DTC shown in the table below. Even if a sensor is normal, it outputs codes C1571/71 and C1573/73 during test mode.


Diagnosis

Trouble Area

C1571/71 (05–1067)



C1573/73 (05–1070)



7.

CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT (USING SST CHECK WIRE)

HINT: Perform this operation in the following cases. When removing and installing ”steering wheel assembly”, ”tilt steering column assembly” and ”steering gear assembly”. When replacing power steering ECU assy. (a) Place front wheels and steering wheel facing straight ahead.

DLC3:

Tc Ts

CG C52361


(b) Perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. HINT: If the power steering ECU assy is replaced, initialization is not necessary. (1) Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch OFF. (2) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (3) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (4) Turn the ignition switch ON.


–


(5)

(c) HINT:

DLC3:

Do not touch the steering wheel. Check that the DTC for except C1515/15 is not output. (1) Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch to OFF.

(2)

Ts

8. CG C52361


Disconnect and connect the terminal Tc of DLC3 20 times within 20 seconds. (6) Check the DTC C1515/15 output. Perform the torque sensor zero point calibration.

Using SST, connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3 and turn the ignition switch to ON. SST 09843–18040 (3) Disconnect the SST. SST 09843–18040 (4) Check the DTC is not output. CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT (USING HAND–HELD TESTER)

HINT: Perform this operation in the following cases. When removing and installing ”steering wheel assembly”, ”tilt steering column assembly” and ”steering gear assembly”. When replacing power steering ECU assy. (a) Place front wheels and steering wheel facing straight ahead. (b) Perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. HINT: If the power steering ECU assy is replaced, initialization is not necessary. (1) Stop the vehicle. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (3) Select the ”TRQ SENS ADJUST” mode on the hand–held tester. (4) Select the ”ZERO POINT INITIALIZE”. (5) Following the screen instructions, perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. (c) Perform the torque sensor zero point calibration. HINT: Do not touch the steering wheel. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Select the ”TRQ SENS ADJUST” mode on the hand–held tester. (4) Select the ”ZERO POINT ADJUST”. (5) Following the screen instructions, perform the torque sensor zero point calibration.


–


9. REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY NOTICE: Thoroughly check the procedures for removing and installing the power steering ECU assy when replacing it. Do the same operation or procedure for the removing and installing the steering column assy. (a) Remove the power steering ECU assy (See page 50–20). (1) Mark the clamp position on the torque sensor wire harness in order to reinstall the wire harness as shown in the illustration. (2) Disconnect the torque sensor wire harness from the clamp. NOTICE: In case the clamp will be reused, pay attention so as not to damage it. (3) Disconnect the connectors. (4) LHD: Remove the 2 bolts, screw and power steering ECU assy. (5) RHD: Remove the 2 bolts, 2 screws and power steering ECU assy.



–


RHD:

LHD: Torque Sensor Wire Harness Clamp

Torque Sensor Wire Harness Clamp

Marks

Marks

Power Steering ECU Assy Bolt A

Power Steering ECU Assy Front

Front

Bolt B Bolt B Bolt A Screw

Screw

Motor Wire Harness Torque Sensor Wire Harness Motor Wire Harness

Torque Sensor Wire Harness F44857

(b)


Install the power steering ECU assy (See page 50–20). (1) LHD: Install the power steering ECU assy with the 2 bolts and screw. Torque: Bolt A: 8.0 Nm (82 kgfcm, 71 in.lbf) Bolt B: 15.5 Nm (158 kgfcm, 11 ftlbf) (2) RHD: Install the power steering ECU assy with the 2 bolts and 2 screws. Torque: Bolt A: 8.0 Nm (82 kgfcm, 71 in.lbf) Bolt B: 15.5 Nm (158 kgfcm, 11 ftlbf) (3) Connect the connectors.


–

(4)


Align the marks on the torque sensor wire harness with the clamp, as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE: When reusing the clamp, check that there is no damage on it. When reinstalling the wire harness, make sure there is no twist in the harness or with other wire harness. 10. FAIL SAFE FUNCTION (a) If the power steering ECU assy detects a trouble, the ECU assy halt, fix or lower the steering power assist in order to protect the system. HINT: Repeating the steering operation when stopping or driving at low speed, or leaving the steering wheel turn fully for long hours will lower the amount of power assist in order to prevent power steering ECU assy from heating up. In this case, not operating the steering for about 10 minutes with engine idle will lead the fail safe function to return the normal state.



–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WP–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs, check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. Symptom

Suspected Area

See page 05–1045

At the time of idling, steering control force is great.

1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. IG Power source circuit 3. Front tire (Worn or improperly inflated) 4. Front wheel alignment (Incorrect) 5. Steering column assy 6. Power steering ECU assy

05–1045

Even if the vehicle speed is increased, appropriate steering resistance cannot be felt.

1. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 2. Combination meter assy 3. Steering column assy 4. Power steering ECU assy

P/S warning light faulty.

1. P/S warning light circuit 2. Power steering ECU assy

05–1082 01–32

DTC check cannot be done.

1. P/S warning light circuit 2. Tc terminal circuit 3. Power steering ECU assy

05–1082 05–1084 01–32

Input signal check cannot be done.

1. Ts terminal circuit 2. Power steering ECU assy 3. Combination meter assy

05–1086 01–32 71–21

Unusual noise.

1. Steering column assy 2. Power steering ECU assy 3. Steering gear assy

50–9 01–32 51–28


05–1073 28–1 26–6 50–9 01–32

71–21 50–9 01–32


–


050X7–04

TC TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the terminals Tc and CG of DLC3 are connected, the power steering ECU assy displays the DTC.


TC


13

W–L

B D J/C D B J8 J21 J9 J20 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)

W–L

4 E15 TC

Center J/B

CG

4

3 CB

W–B (*2)

6 CA

W–B (*2)

W–B (*1) A J16 J/C W–B (*1) A *1: LHD *2: RHD

IO

IP

F44864



–




DLC3:

(a) (b)

Tc

CG

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. OK: Voltage: 5 to 16 V

C52361

OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminals CG of DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – POWER STEERING ECU ASSY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminals Tc of DLC3 and power steering ECU assy (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WO–04

TERMINALS OF ECU POWER STEERING ECU ASSY

E14

Connector A

E15

Connector B F44303

NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU, ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

PIG (E14–1) – PGND (E14–2)

L – W–B

PGND (E14–2) – Body Ground

W–B – Body Ground

M1 (A–1) (A 1) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2)

M2 (A–2) (A 2) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2)



Always

Below 1.0 V

IG switch ON, turn the steering wheel to left

Below 1.0 V


10 to 16 V

––W W–B B IG switch ON, turn the steering wheel to left

10 to 16 V


Below 1.0 V

––W W–B B

SIL (E15–2) – PGND (E14–2)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

RLY (E15–3) PGND (E14–2)

W–R – W–B

IG switch ON, after 1 sec. or more

Tc (E15–4) (E15 4) – PGND (E14–2) (E14 2)

W L–W W–L W–B B

IG switch ON IG switch ON, short circuit Tc and CG terminals of DLC3

10 to 16 V Below 2.0 V 5 to 16 V Below 1.0 V

SPD (E15–5) – PGND (E14–2)

V–W – W–B

IG switch ON

Pulse generation

IG (E15–6) – PGND (E14–2)

R–W – W–B

IG switch ON

10 to 16 V

GR – W–B

IG switch ON

5 to 16 V

IG switch ON, P/S warning light goes off

10 to 16 V

IDUP (E15–8) – PGND (E14–2) WL (E15–9) (E15 9) – PGND (E14–2) (E14 2)

B W–W B–W W–B B IG switch ON, P/S warning light comes on IG switch ON

Ts (E15–11) (E15 11) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2)

5 to 16 V

W–W W–B B IG switch ON, short circuit Ts and CG terminals of DLC3

TACH (E15–12) – PGND (E14–2)

Below 1.0 V

GR–R – W–B

IG switch ON

Below 1.0 V Pulse generation

TRQ1 (B–5) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B


0.3 to 4.7 V

TRQV (B–6) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B

IG switch ON

7.5 to 8.5 V

TRQ2 (B–7) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B


0.3 to 4.7 V

TRQG (B–8) – PGND (E14–2)

– – W–B

IG switch ON

Below 1.0 V



–


050XA–04

TS TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION After making short circuit between terminal Ts and CG of DLC3 with turning the ignition switch OFF, the mode will change from the normal mode to test mode when the ignition switch is turned ON. After the ignition switch is turned ON, there will be DTC output from Tc terminal of DLC3.


TS

(*1) (*2) J/C B D D J8 J20 J9 (*1) D

W 12

J20 (*2)

Power Steering ECU Assy W (*1)

11 E15 TS

W (*2)

Center J/B CG

W–B (*2) 4

3 CB

6 CA

W–B (*2)

W–B (*1) A J16 J/C W–B (*1) A *1: LHD *2 RHD

IO

IP

F44863



–



INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL) (Ts – CG)

DLC3:

(a) (b)

Ts

CG

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. OK: Voltage: 5 to 16 V

C52361

OK

Go to step 3

NG

2 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of DLC3 and power steering ECU assy (See page 01–32). NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

B2780

–


05B0C–03

PUSH SWITCH/KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC will be output if the transponder key ECU does not detect that the unlock warning switch is ON even when the ignition switch is ON (Under normal conditions, the unlock warning switch is ON when the ignition switch is ON). DTC No.


Trouble Area

Unlock warning switch ON is not detected when ignition switch is ON

B2780

Unlock warning switch assy Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy

WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy U1 Un–lock Warning Switch Assy W–B*2

W–B 1

Y

Y*2

2

D J22

J/C

F J23

Y*2

Y 10

KSW

Driver Side J/B*1 Passenger Side R/B Assy*2 13 CF

W–B*1

Y*1

8 DA

6 Y*1 DA

Center J/B

6

CA A J16 J/C

W–B W–B IP

A IO: Gasoline IL: 1CD–FTV *1: LHD *2: RHD B66226



–



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. Select the item KEY SW on the hand–held tester. OK: OFF Key is in ignition key cylinder ON No key is in ignition key cylinder OK

REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY

NG

2


Free

Remove the unlock warning switch. Inspect the unlock warning switch resistance. Standard: Tester Connection

Pushed

1–2

B51903

OK


NG

Switch Position

Specified Condition

Switch pushed (Key set)

Below 1

Switch free (Key removed)

10 k or higher



3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY) (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side


Disconnect the T8 ECU and U1 switch connectors. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T8–10 (KSW) – U1–2

Below 1


Below 1


B65751

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B2784

–


05B0D–03

ANTENNA COIL OPEN/SHORT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The transponder key coil is built into the transponder key amplifier and receives a key code signal from the transponder chip in the key. This signal is amplified by the amplifier and then output to the transponder key ECU. DTC No. B2784


Trouble Area Wire harness Transponder key amplifier Transponder key ECU assy

Antenna coil is open/short

WIRING DIAGRAM



1

Y–B

8

CODE 4

Y–G

11

TXCT 5

L–R

12

GND

GR–R

13

VC5

VC5 CODE

Coil

7

ANT2

TXCT AGND

B62676


1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. Select the item ANTENNA COIL on the hand–held tester. OK: NORMAL NG: FAIL OK




2

–



Wire Harness Side



Specified Condition


Below 1




10 k or higher


̱̲̳ ̴̵ ̶ ̷

NG

B64974

OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B2793

–


05B0E–03

TRANSPONDER CHIP MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a malfunction is found in a key during the key code registration or the key code is not registered normally. Replace the key when the key code registration is not performed normally and this DTC is detected. DTC No. B2793


Trouble Area Key

Transponder chip malfunction


CHECK DTC Delete the DTC (See page 05–1602). Insert the key into the ignition key cylinder. Check that no code is output. OK

NO PROBLEM

NG

2 (a) (b)

RE–REGISTER KEY Delete the DTC (See page 05–1602). Re–register the key and check that the engine starts with the key. OK

NG REPLACE KEY


NORMAL


DTC

B2794

–


05B0F–03

UNMATCHED ENCRYPTION CODE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a key with an incomplete key code is inserted into the ignition key cylinder. DTC No. B2794

DTC Detection Condition Key with incomplete key code is inserted


REPLACE KEY


Trouble Area Key


DTC

B2795

–


05B0G–03

UNMATCHED KEY CODE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a key with a key code that has not been registered in the ECU is inserted into the ignition key cylinder. DTC No. B2795


Trouble Area Key

Key with unregistered key code is inserted


DELETE DTC AND INSERT ALL PRESENTLY AVAILABLE KEYS TO CHECK WHETHER ENGINE STARTS OR NOT OK

NG REPLACE KEY THAT WILL NOT START ENGINE


NO PROBLEM (BECAUSE OF KEY RE–REGISTRATION)


–


05B0H–03

DTC

B2796

NO COMMUNICATION IN IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

DTC

B2798


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This code is stored in the memory when a key that does not have a transponder chip is inserted or if communication between the key and transponder key ECU is impossible. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B2796

No communication

Key Wire harness Transponder key amplifier (Transponder key coil) Transponder key ECU assy

B2798

Communication error

Key

WIRING DIAGRAM



1

Y–B

8

CODE 4

Y–G

11

TXCT 5

L–R

12

GND

GR–R

13

VC5

VC5 CODE

Coil

ANT2

7

TXCT AGND

B62676



–



1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. Select IMMOBILISER on the hand–held tester. OK: SET Ignition switch ON UNSET Without key OK

NORMAL

NG

2 (a)

CHECK WHETHER ENGINE STARTS WITH OTHER KEYS Check whether the engine starts with the other keys for the vehicle. OK

RE–REGISTER OR REPLACE KEY THAT WILL NOT START ENGINE

NG HINT: Start the inspection from step 3 when using the hand–held tester and start from step 4 when not using the hand–held tester.

3 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will does not start the engine. Select the item ANTENNA COIL on the hand–held tester. OK: NORMAL NG: FAIL NG

OK




4

–



Wire Harness Side



Specified Condition


Below 1




10 k or higher


̱̲̳ ̴̵ ̶ ̷

NG

B64974

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

5 (a)






DTC

B2797

–


05B0I–03


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when an error occurs in normal communication. HINT: Some noise is found in the communication line. DTC No.

B2797


Trouble Area

Keys are positioned too close to each other or noise occurred in communication line


WIRING DIAGRAM I12 Transponder Key Amplifier

CODE


Y–G 4

11

CODE

B52550


CHECK OPERATION OF TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER After replacing the transponder key amplifier, check that the engine starts. OK

NG REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY




DTC

B2799

–


05B0J–03

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when the ECM detects errors in communication between the transponder key ECU assy and the ECM or in the communication lines. This DTC is also output when an engine start is attempted while the ECU communication ID between the transponder key ECU and the ECM are different. Before troubleshooting for this DTC, make sure that there is no DTC detected in the transponder key ECU. If there is a key code–related DTC detected in the transponder key ECU, repair it first. DTC No.

B2799


Trouble Area

Error in communication between ECM and transponder key ECU, and in communication line Communication ID is different during communication with transponder key ECU

Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy Transponder key amplifier ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy

E10 ECM

IMI

IMO

30*1 27*2

GR

29*1 26*2

W

6

7

EFIO

EFII

*1: 1CD–FTV *2: Gasoline B66227



–



CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – ECM) (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY OR ECM – BODY GROUND) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy

Disconnect the T8 ECU and E10 ECM connectors. Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: 1CD–FTV Terminal No.

Specified Condition

T8–6 (EFIO) – E10–30 (IMI)

Below 1

T8–7 (EFII) – E10–29 (IMO) T8–6 (EFIO) or E10–30 (IMI) – Body ground T8–7 (EFII) or E10–29 (IMO) – Body ground

Gasoline

E10 ECM

Terminal No.

Specified Condition

T8–6 (EFIO) – E10–27 (IMI)

Below 1

T8–7 (EFII) – E10–26 (IMO) EFIO (T8–6) or IMI (E10–27) – Body ground EFII (T8–7) or IMO (E10–26) – Body ground

B66229

10 k or higher

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

10 k or higher

HARNESS

AND

OK

2 (a)






–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CG–07

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s : Name

VIN Production Date

Customer’s Name

/

/


/

/




Symptoms

Weather

km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/

Constant

Intermittent (

times a day)

Only once Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Snowy


Hot Cold (Approx.

Warm C (

Cool F)

Immobiliser is not set (Engine starts with key codes other than registered key code) Engine does not start

1st Time

Normal code


)

2nd Time

Normal code


)

DTC Check



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CI–07

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART 1.

TRANSPONDER KEY ECU DTC CHART DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

*B2780 (05–1613)

Push Switch/Key Unlock Warning Switch Malfunction

Unlock warning switch Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy

B2784 (05–1616)

Antenna Coil Open/Short

Wire harness Transponder key amplifier Transponder key ECU assy

B2793 (05–1618)

Transponder Chip Malfunction

Key

B2794 (05–1619)

Unmatched Encryption Code

Key

B2795 (05–1620)

Unmatched Key Code

Key

No Communication in Immobiliser System

Key Transponder key amplifier Wire harness Transponder key ECU assy

B2797 (05–1624)



B2798 (05–1621)


Key

B2796 (05–1621)

HINT: *: Except for 1AZ–FE engine 2. ECM DTC CHART NOTICE: The DTC for the immobiliser system is specified. If the other codes are output, check the DTC chart of the engine control system. DTC No. (See Page)

B2799 (05–1625)

Detection Item



Trouble Area Wire harness Key Transponder key ECU assy Transponder key amplifier ECM


–


ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CF–07


Use this procedure to troubleshoot the engine immobiliser system. The hand–held tester should be used in step 4, 5 and 7.

1


2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AND SYMPTOM CHECK (See page 05–1601)

3

CRANK ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 10 SECONDS

4

CHECK FOR DTC

(a) (b) (c)

Check for DTCs and note any codes that are output. Delete the DTC. Recheck for DTCs. Try to prompt the DTC (SFI system and engine immobiliser system) by simulating the original activity that the DTC suggested. (1) If the DTC does not reoccur, proceed to A. (2) If the DTC (SFI system) reoccurs, proceed to B. (3) If the DTC (engine immobiliser system) reoccurs, proceed to C. B

Go to SFI or ECD SYSTEM (See page 05–290 or 05–517)

C

Go to step 8

A

5 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item KEY SW in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Transponder key ECU: Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY SW

Un–lock warning switch signal /ON or OFF


–


Go to DTC B2780 (See page 05–1613)


–


OK

6 (a) (b)

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1612) When problem is not listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to A. When problem is listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to B. B

Go to step 8

A

7 (a)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1602) (1) Inspect with the hand–held tester (ECU data monitor). (2) Inspect with the hand–held tester (ACTIVE TEST). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1607)

(b)

8


9

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CM–07

LOCATION LHD Models


Transponder Key ECU Assy Security Indicator

Driver Side R/B Assy

ECM


Transponder Key ECU Assy Passenger Side R/B Assy

RHD Models


ECM

Center J/B Unlock Warning Switch Assy

B65753



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0A–03

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description (1) The ECM controls the function of the immobiliser system on the vehicle. Data of the immobiliser system and the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) can be read in the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. When trouble occurs in the immobiliser system, even though the security indicator lamp does not come on, DTCs can be checked. Therefore, the immobiliser system seems to be malfunctioning, use the hand–held tester to check for a malfunction and repair it. (b)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Inspect the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro– OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with the ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 B50154

Standard: Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition



Pulse generation


Always

Below 1


Always

Below 1


Always

10 to 14 V

HINT: If the screen displays UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE after you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and used the hand–held tester, the problem may be on the vehicle side or the tester side. If communication is normal when the tester is connected to other vehicle, inspect the DLC3 of the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tester is connected to another vehicle, the problem may be in the tester itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the tester’s instruction manual. 2. Using hand–held tester: CHECK DTC (a) Checking DTCs. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (b) Clear the DTCs from memory. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Erase DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


3. CHECK DIAGNOSIS (a) Using the hand–held tester, check for DTCs. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from normal mode to check mode, all the DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode are erased. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and make a note of them. (1) Prepare the hand–held tester. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 under the instrument panel lower pad. (3) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester switch ON. (4) Use the hand–held tester to check for DTCs and freeze frame data, and make a note of them (For operating instructions, see the hand–held tester instruction book). (5) Confirm the details of the DTCs. (b) Either of the following procedures will erase the DTCs and freeze frame data. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes (See the hand–held tester instruction book for operating instructions). (2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or ECU–B fuse. 4. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed on the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Read the DATA LIST, according to the display on the tester. Transponder key ECU: Item


Normal Condition

KEY SW

Un–lock warning switch signal/ ON or OFF

OFF: Key is in Ignition key cylinder ON: No key is in Ignition key cylinder

IG SW

Ignition switch signal/ ON or OFF

OFF: Ignition switch is ON or START position ON: Ignition switch is OFF or ON position

IMMOBILISER

Immobiliser system status/ SET or UNSET

UNSET: Without key SET: Ignition switch ON

RESPONSE



FRAME



SERIAL NUMBER



ENCRYPT CODE



STATUS



BCC

Transponder chip signal/ NG or OK

NG: Incorrect data sending OK: Correct data sending

SUB KEY

Sub key code signal/ NOMATCH or MATCH

NOMATCH: Nomatch sub–key code is sent MATCH: Sub key code is sent

MASTER KEY

Master key code signal/ NOMATCH or MATCH

NOMATCH: Nomatch Master key code is sent MATCH: Master key code is sent

REGIST SUB CODE

Number of registered sub–key/ min. 0, max. 15

Number of registered sub–key

REGIST MAS CODE

Number of registered master key/ min. 0, max. 15

Number of registered master key



–


Item


Normal Condition

REG CODE SPACE

Memory space for key codes registration/ NOT FUL or FULL

NOT FUL: Possible to resister more key code FULL: Impossible to register key code any more

ANTENNA COIL

Antenna coil condition/ NORMAL or FAIL

Normal: Antenna coil is normal FAIL: Antenna coil is abnormal

5. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows you to operate the relay, VSV, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Perform the ACTIVE TEST, according to the display on the tester. Transponder key ECU: Item

Test Details

SECURITY INDIC

Turn security indicator ON/OFF



–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CK–07


Suspected Area 1. Key

2. Transponder key amplifier Engine does not start

3. Transponder key ECU assy


See Page 05–1618 05–1619 05–1620 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625 05–1616 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625 05–1613 05–1616 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625


–

ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0B–02

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER (COIL) I12

B65593

(a)

Disconnect the I12 amplifier connector and check the resistance between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition



Specified Condition Below 1

Constant

If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. (b) Reconnect the I12 amplifier connector and check the resistance or voltage of each terminal of the connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

VC5 (I12–1) – GND (I12–7)

Y–B – GR–R


0 V 10 to 14 V

CODE(I12–4) – GND (I12–7)

Y–G – GR–R


Waveform 1

TXCT (I12–5) – GND (I12–7)

L–R – GR–R


Waveform 2



Below 1

Constant

If the result is not as specified, the amplifier may have a malfunction.

(c)

GND

B55023



CODE – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON


–



TXCT – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

GND

B55024

2.

CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY T8

B50659

(a)

Disconnect the T8 ECU connector and check the voltage and resistance between each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

AGND (T8–13) – Body ground


Constant

Below 1

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

IG (T8–2) – AGND (T8–13)

B–W – GR–R


KSW (T8–10) – AGND (T8–13)

Y – GR–R

+B (T8–1) – GND (T8–14)

Condition


Specified Condition

0 V 10 to 14 V 10 k or higher Below 1

If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. (b) Reconnect the T8 ECU connector and check the voltage between each terminal of the connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

KSW (T8–10) – AGND (T8–13)

Y – GR–R

VC5 (T8–8) – AGND (T8–13)

Condition

Specified Condition


10 to 14 V 0 V

Y–B – GR–R


0 V 4.6 to 5.4 V

TXCT (T8–12) – AGND (T8–13)

L–R – GR–R


Waveform 1

CODE (T8–11) – AGND (T8–13)

Y–G – GR–R


Waveform 2

EFIO (T8–6) – AGND (T8–13)

GR – GR–R


Waveform 3

EFII (T8–7) – AGND (T8–13)

W – GR–R


Waveform 4

If the result is not as specified, the ECU may have a malfunction.



(c)

GND

–



TXCT – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

B69239


CODE – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

GND

B69240


EFIO – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

GND

B69241


GND

B69242


Terminal

EFII – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Constant


–


3. CHECK ECM 3ZZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE , 1AZ–FE engine: E12

E13

E9

E10

B66228

(a)

Disconnect the E10 and E12 ECM connectors and check the voltage or resistance between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

IMI (E10–27) – E1 (E12–7)

GR–R – BR


Waveform 1

IMO (E10–26) – E1 (E12–7)

W – BR


Waveform 2


BR – Body ground

Below 1

Constant

1CD–FTV, 1AZ–FSE engine: E13

E12

E10

E11

E9

B50745

(b)

Disconnect the E10 and E11 or E12 ECM connectors and check the voltage or continuity between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:


Wiring Color

*1 IMI (E10–30) – E1 (E12–7)

GR – BR


Waveform 1

*2 IMI (E10–27) – E1 (E11–1)

GR – BR


Waveform 1

*1 IMO (E10–29) – E1 (E12–7)

W – BR


Waveform 2

*2 IMO (E10–26) – E1 (E11–1)

W– BR


Waveform 2

*1 E1 (E12–7) – Body ground

BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

*2 E1 (E11–1)) – Body ground

BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1


Condition

Specified Condition


–


HINT: *1: 1CD–FTV engine *2: 1AZ–FSE engine If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.

(c)

GND


IMI – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Ignition switch ON

B69241


GND

B69242


Terminal

IMO – GND

Tool Setting


Condition

Constant


–

KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM 05AEZ–02

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s : name VIN /

Production Date

Customer’s Name

/

Licence No. Date Vehicle Brought in

/

/




Problem Symptoms

Weather

km miles

Odometer Reading

/

/

Constant

Intermittent (

Only once Fine

Cloudy

Rainy


Hot Cold (Approx.



times a day)

Warm C (

Cool F))

Snowy


–


KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM 05AEY–02

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: Use this procedure to troubleshoot the key reminder warning system. The hand–held tester should be used in step 3 and 4.

1


2


3

DTC CHECK (MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM) (See page 05–1656)

(a) (b) (c)


GO TO MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (See page 05–1656)

A

4 (a) (b)

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1593) If the fault is not listed on the symptoms table, proceed to A. If the fault is listed on the symptoms table, proceed to B. B

Go to step 5

A

5 (a)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1655). (1) Inspection with the hand–held tester (ECU DATA MONITOR). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1659). On–vehicle inspection (See page 73–26).

(b) (c)

6




7

CONFIRMATION TEST

END


–



–


05C5J–01

KEY REMINDER BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ignition switch is OFF, the key is in the ignition key cylinder and the driver side door is open the integration relay activates the combination meter to cause the buzzer to sound.

WIRING DIAGRAM Center J/B D9*4 1 5 R*5 R*5 D10*5 CA CE Door Courtesy Lamp Switch (Driver Side) J/C 9 14 B B R J10 J10 IM1 IC2 R 4 R R 5 4 R* * * 1 Center J/B U1 13 6 Unlock Warning CA CF Switch Assy W–B*5 Y W–B 1 2 5 4 W–B* W–B* A

W–B*1, 2

Integration Relay 13 DB

17

8 DA

19

DCTY

KSW

J16 A W–B*3 IL

IO

IP

Instrument Panel J/B

Combination Meter Assy 14 C10

P–B

1 IC1

P–B

22 I14 MPX2

P

11 I14 MPX1

Buzzer

Meter ECU C10 13

IC1 10 P

P

20 23 18 E9 E9 E10 *3 *2 *1


ECM

A13 29*6 A15 20*7 A/C Control MPX– Assembly MPX+ A13 9*6 7 A15 10* 21 29 29 E9 E9 E10 P–B *3 *2 *1

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV *4: LHD *5: RHD *6: Except Automatic A/C *7: Automatic A/C

B68159


–



INSPECT FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY (DRIVER SIDE) When using hand–held tester, proceed to A. When not using hand–held tester, proceed to B. B

Go to step 3

A

2 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (COURTESY LAMP SWITCH) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item D DOR CTY SW in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: ON: Driver side door is open OFF: Driver side door is closed

3 (a)

OK

Go to step 6

NG

Go to step 4

CHECK FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY Put the dome lamp No. 2 switch in the door position and open the driver side door. Then check that the courtesy lamp comes on. OK

Go to step 7

NG

4


Free Pushed

Remove the courtesy lamp switch. Check the switch resistance. Standard: Twster Connection

1 – Swicth Body

Swicth

Specified Condition

Switch Free

10 k or higher

Switch Pushed

Below 1

Switch Body B58556

NG

OK


REPLACE FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY


5

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) – FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side DB Instrument Panel J/B Assy

Disconnect the DB J/B connector. Disconnect the D9 or D10 switch connector. Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard Tester Connection *1 DB–13 (DCTY) – D9–1 *2 DB–13 (DCTY) – D10–1 DB–13 (DCTY) – Body ground

D9*1 D10*2 Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy

Specified Condition Below 1 10 k or higher

HINT: *1: RHD *2: LHD

OK B68145


NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

6 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item KEY UNLK WRN SW in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: ON: The key is in the ignition key cylinder OFF: No key is in the ignition key cylinder OK

NG


Go to step 9


7

–



Free

Remove the unlock warning switch. Check the switch resistance. Standard: Tester Connection

Pushed

Switch Position

Specified Condition

Free

10 k or higher

Pushed

Below 1

1–2

B68147

NG


OK

8

CHECK WIRE HARNESS (INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) – UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY) (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side


Disconnect the DA J/B connector. Disconnect the U1 switch connector. Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

DA–8 (KSW) – U1–2

Below 1

U1–1 – Body ground DA–8 (KSW) – Body ground

10 k or higher


NG B68146

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


9 (a)

–


CHECK BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) Check if the seat belt warning buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or more (See page 05–1509).

HINT: When the seat belt warning buzzer sounds, the instrument panel J/B is abnormal. NG





–


LOCATION LHD Models

Combination Meter Assy Warning Buzzer



Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy

RHD Models

Combination Meter Assy Warning Buzzer Center J/B

Instrument panel J/B Assy Integration Relay


Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy B67412



–


PRE–CHECK 1. USING HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: The hand–held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which records the monitored data. Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. 2. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator etc. without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Read the DATA LIST according to the display on tester. Standard (Integuration relay): Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

KEY UNLK WRN SW

Unlock warning switch signal/ ON or OFF


–

D DOOR CTY SW

Driver side door courtesy switch signal/ ON or OFF


–



–





Suspected Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Unlock warning switch assy Front door courtesy lamp switch (Driver side) Instrument panel junction block assy (Integration relay) Combination meter Wire harness

See Page 05–1594 05–1594 05–1591 – –


–


TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)

Vehicle Rear Side

Vehicle Front Side

DB DA DN


DB

DN

B68141



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the DA, DB and DN J/B connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) B (DB–16) – Body ground

Wiring Color

Body ground E (DA–9) – Body ground KSW (DA–8) – Body ground

Specified Condition

W–R – Body ground *1 B–G – Body ground

B (DN–1) (DN 1) –

Condition

10 to 14 V

Constant


10 to 14 V


Constant

Y – Body ground

No key is inserted in ignition key cylinder Key inserted

Below 1 10 k or higher Below 1

HINT: *1: Except 1CD–FTV *2: 1CD–FTV If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. (c) Reconnect the DA, DB and DN J/B connectors. (d) Check the voltage of each terminal of the connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

DCTY (DB–13) – Body ground

R – Body ground

Drive side door CLOSED OPEN


If the result is not as specified, the J/B may have a malfunction.



–


DTC

B1214

DOOR SYSTEM COMMUNICATION BUS MALFUNCTION (+B SHORT)

DTC

B1215

DOOR SYSTEM COMMUNICATION BUS MALFUNCTION (GND SHORT)

05C5P–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTCs B1214 and B1215 are output when +B and the body ground is short–circuited on the communication bus. Detecting this condition disables all the BEAN communication and outputs some DTCs. DTC No.

B1214

B1215


Trouble Area

Communication circuit and +B battery system short

ECM A/C control assy (A/C ECU) Combination meter assy Theft warning ECU assy Wire harness Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay)

Communication circuit and body ground short

ECM A/C control assy (A/C ECU) Combination meter Theft warning ECU assy Wire harness Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay)



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay) A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) P–B

20 29 A15 A13

10

9 A15 A13 *2 *1

*2

P

10 IC1

P

11 I14

MPX1

*1

29*3 E10 29*4 E9 21*5 E9

ECM

18*3 E10 23*4 E9 20*5 E9

P

Combination Meter Assy (Combination Meter ECU) 13 C10

14 C10

1 P–B

IC1

22 P–B

I14

MPX2

C10 15 *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6:

Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV w/ Theft Deterrent System

P–L*6

T6

31

MPX


B67596



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: Disconnect connectors in operational sequence and start the next operation after the connector is connected.

1 (a)

CHECK DTC (THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY) Check whether the outputs of the DTC stops when the theft warning ECU connector is disconnected. Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)



ECM


B67598

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the theft warning ECU is malfunctioning. YES NO


REPLACE THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY


2 (a)

–


CHECK DTC (COMBINATION METER ECU AND WIRE HARNESS) Check whether the outputs of the DTC stops when the combination meter ECU connector is disconnected.




ECM

B67599

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the combination meter ECU itself or the wire harness between the combination meter ECU and the theft warning ECU is malfunctioning. NO YES


Go to step 4


3 (a) (b)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COMBINATION METER ECU – THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter ECU and theft warning ECU connectors. Check the wire harness (MPX line) between the combination ECU and theft warning ECU.


C10 connector


ECM

T6 connector


B69061

(1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Check the voltage between the wire harness (MPX line) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition


0V

If the output voltage is not 0 V, the wire harness (MPX line) may be short–circuited with +B. (3) Check the resistance between the wire harness (MPX line) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition


10 k or higher

When the resistance is 10 k or higher, the wire harness (MPX line) and body ground may be short–circuited with the body ground. NO

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

YES REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU)


HARNESS

AND


4 (a)

–


CHECK DTC (ECM) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the ECM connector is disconnected.




ECM

B67600

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the ECM is malfunctioning. YES NO


REPLACE ECM


5 (a)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COMBINATION METER ECU – ECM) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the E10* 1 or E9*2 connector of the ECM and the C10 connector of the combination meter ECU are disconnected.


C10

E9*1 or E10* 2



ECM

B67601

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the wire harness between the E10*1 or E9*2 connector of the ECM and the C10 connector of the combination meter ECU is malfunctioning. *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: Except 1AZ–FSE YES

NO


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


6 (a)

–


CHECK DTC (A/C ECU) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the A/C ECU connector is disconnected. Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)



ECM


B67972

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the A/C ECU is malfunctioning. YES

NO


REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY (A/C ECU)


7 (a)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (A/C ECU – ECM) Check whether the output of the DTC stops when the A13* 1 or A15* 2 connector of the A/C ECU and the E10* 3 or E9*4 connector of the ECM are disconnected. Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay)

A13* 1 or A15* 2

Air Conditioning Control Assy (A/C ECU)

E9*3 or E10* 4


ECM

B67973

HINT: When the output of the DTC stops, the wire harness between the A13* 1 or A15* 2 connector of the A/C ECU and the E10* 3 or E9*4 connector of the ECM is malfunctioning. *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: Except 1AZ–FSE YES

NO


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


8

(a) (b)

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (INTEGRATION RELAY – A/C ECU) (INTEGRATION RELAY – COMBINATION METER ECU) Disconnect the A/C ECU, combination meter ECU and integration relay connectors. Check the wire harness (MPX lines) between the integration relay and A/C ECU as well as in between the integration relay and combination ECU.




ECM

B67602

(1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Check the voltage between the wire harness (MPX lines) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition


0V


If the output voltage is not 0 V, the wire harness (MPX line) may be short–circuited with +B. (3) Check the resistance between the wire harness (MPX lines) and the body ground. Standard: Tester Condition

Specified Condition


10 k or higher


When the resistance is 10 k or higher, the wire harness (MPX line) and body ground may be short–circuited with the body ground. NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)


AND


DTC

B1261

–


05C5Q–01

ECM (ENGINE ECU) COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1261 is output when communication between the ECM and integration relay stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1261

DTC Detection Condition No communication from ECM for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area ECM Wire harness


–



Except for 1CD–FTV

ECM

13 BEAN C10 (EFI)

23 E9

P

*1, 3

18 E10 MPX1 *2

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) 9 10 MPX+ A13 A15 *5 *4 12 B–R B–R

8 IK1

B–R

EA1 3 2 IP1 IE4 *7 *6

D

B–R

4

2

1

4

D

D

B–W

J/C

4

*7

2 EFI Relay 3

J28 *7 D J28 *7

D J14 *6 D J14 *6

E9

+B

2

B–R*2

B–Y

E9

+B2

3 E9

BATT

*6

B–Y

BR*1, 2, 3

1 7 E12 E11 *1, 3

1

*2

1

B–R*2

7 7 IO1 IE3


*1, 3

29 E10 MPX2

B–R*1, 3

J28 J14 *7 *6 Engine Room R/B No. 4 EFI NO.1

29 E9

P–B

E1

*2


4

4 GR

4A 1

GR*8 B–Y 1

To A/F Relay

4B 1 B–G

2 To terminal MREL of ECM

W–B

EFI

1

Main

1A 1 Battery

EC

B–G Engine Room R/B

EF*1 EE*2 EH*3 *1: 1AZ–FE *2: 1AZ–FSE *3: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *4: Except Automatic A/C *5: Automatic A/C *6: LHD *7: RHD *8: Unleaded Gasoline B67805



–



1CD–FTV

BEAN (EFI)

13 C10

ECM P

20 E9

MPX1

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) 9 10 MPX+ A13 A15 *3

W–B Engine Room R/B EC

2

B–Y

1

1 EFI MAIN Relay

8 IK1

B–W

EE1

7 7 IE3 IO1 *1

E9

MPX2

*4

10 B–W

21 P–B

1 B–W

B–Y

E9

+B

2 E10 BATT

*2

3

BR 5

1

7 E12 E1

1

1

B–Y To terminal MREL of ECM

Engine Room R/B


1 2 1

EFI

1A

1 B

EI

3

3 B FL Main

*1: LHD *2: RHD *3: Except Automatic A/C *4: Automatic A/C

Battery

B67806



1

–



Wire Harness Side

(b) E10*2 ECM

Disconnect the E9 or E10 ECM, C10 and A13 or A15 ECU connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: 1AZ–FSE Tester Connection

Specified Condition

E10–18 (MPX1) – C10–13 (BEAN) Below 1


1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE E9*1, 3, 4 ECM

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

E9–23 (MPX1) – C10–13 (BEAN) Below 1



Specified Condition

E9–20 (MPX1) – C10–13 (BEAN) Below 1

*5 E9–21 (MPX2) – A13–9 (MPX+)


*6 E9–21 (MPX2) – A15–10 (MPX+)

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FE *2: 1AZ–FSE *3: 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *4: 1CD–FTV *5: Except Automatic A/C *6: Automatic A/C



B68027

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


2

–


CHECK ECM (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side E10 ECM

Disconnect the E10 or E9 ECM connector. Check the voltage between the wire harness side connectors and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

+B (E9–1) – Body ground *1 +B2 (E9–2) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

*1 BATT (E9–3) – Body ground *2 BATT (E10–2) – Body ground

HINT: *1: Except 1CD–FTV *2: 1CD–FTV

E9 ECM

B68150

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

CHECK ECM (GROUND) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side E12*1 ECM

Disconnect the E12 or E11 ECM connector. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition


Below 1


HINT: *1: Except 1AZ–FSE *2:1AZ–FSE E11*2 ECM

NG B68151

OK REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B1262

–


05C5S–01

A/C ECU COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1262 will be output when the communication between the A/C ECU and the integration relay stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1262

DTC Detection Condition No communication from A/C ECU for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area A/C control assy (A/C ECU) Wire harness


–


WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU)

Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integration Relay) 11 MPX1 I14

10

P

20 29 A15 A13 MPX– *1 *2

P

IC1

ECM 21 29 29 MPX2 E9 E9 E10 *5

*3

*4

Fuse Block Assy 4 5 IP1 IE4 *7 *6

Center J/B

ECU–B 2

B–W

6

1

2

10 9 MPX+ A13 A15 2 *1 *

P–B

6

10 CC

W–R

7 CF

W–R

24 2 A16 A13 +B *1 *2

B–W 1 13 40 A16 A13 GND

W–B*7


*2

*1

1 W–B*6

1A 1 *3, 4 B–G


B*5 Engine Room R/B No. 3*5

4A

3

Center J/B CG 3

1 A J17 J/C

4B 1

3 B*5

A B–G*3, 4

CA

6

W–B*7

Main A

W–B*6

J15 J/C Battery IK

IP

*1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: LHD *7: RHD

B67808



1

–



Wire Harness Side

(b) A13*1 Air Conditioning Control Assy

Disconnect the A13 or A15, E10 or E9 and I14 connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: 1AZ–FSE Tester Connection

Specified Condition

*1 A13–29 (MPX–) – I14–11 (MPX1) *2 A15–20 (MPX–) – I14–11 (MPX1)

Below 1

*1 A13–9 (MPX+) – E10–29 (MPX2)

A15*2 Air Conditioning Control Assy

*2 A15–10 (MPX+) – E10–29 (MPX2)

1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE Tester Connection

Specified Condition


Below 1




Specified Condition


Below 1


HINT: *1: Except automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV

E10*3 ECM

E9*4, 5 ECM

B68152


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


2

–


CHECK AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY (A/C ECU) (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)



Specified Condition


10 to 14 V




NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

B68404

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

CHECK AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY (A/C ECU) (GROUND) (a) (b)



Specified Condition


10 to 14 V




NG B68404

OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSY


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B1269

–


05AEV–02

THEFT DETERRENT ECU COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1269 is output when communication between the theft warning ECU and the combination meter stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1269

DTC Detection Condition No communication from theft deterrent ECU for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area Theft warning ECU assy Wire harness


–




15 BEAN (SECURITY) C10

31 T6

P–L

MPX

Fuse Block Assy 5 B–W

IP1

F

DOME 6

1

W–R

6

J26

J/C

H J27

W–R

2 T6 +B1

2

B–W 1 W–B


29 T6

E

1 1A

1

*2 B

*1 B–G

Center J/B

Engine Room R/B No.

Engine Room J/B No. 4*1

3*2

3

4A 1

3

4B 1

CG 9

CA

6

B*2 B–G*1 Main

W–B *1: Except 1CD–FTV *2: 1CD–FTV

Battery IP

B67807



1

–



Wire Harness Side


Disconnect the T6 and C10 ECU connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T6–31 (MPX) – C10–15 (BEAN) (Security)

Below 1


B68155

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

2

CHECK THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)


Disconnect the T6 ECU connector. Check the voltage between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T6–2 (+B1) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

NG B65849

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


3

–


CHECK THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY (GROUND) (a) (b)


Disconnect the T6 ECU connector. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard:

NG B65849

OK REPLACE THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY


Tester Connection

Specified Condition

T6–29 (E) – Body ground

Below 1

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

B1271

–


05C5T–01

COMBINATION METER ECU COMMUNICATION STOP

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC B1271 is output when communication between the combination meter and integration relay stops for more than 10 seconds. DTC No. B1271

DTC Detection Condition No communication from Combination meter ECU for more than 10 seconds


Trouble Area Combination meter assy (Combination meter ECU) Wire harness


–



ECM MPX1

18 23 20 E10 E9 E9 *2 *3 *1

22 MPX2 I14


13 BEAN C10 (EFI)

P

1 IC1

P–B

P–B

14 BEAN C10 (BODY)


31 T6

MPX

15 BEAN C10 (SECURITY)

P–L*4

IE4 4*5 IP1 5*6 Fuse Block Assy

B–W B–W

1

F

DOME

W–R

6

6 1

J10

2

F J26

J/C

H W–R*5 20 C11 J11

+B

F


1

1A

J26 W–R*6

1

B*3

B–G*1, 2

W–B*5

Engine Room R/B No. 3*3

3

3


4A

1

4B

1

W–B*6

A

A

B*3

17 POWER C10 EARTH

B–G*1, 2

J16 J/C

Main

A

J17 J/C A A

J15 J/C

W–B Battery IL*3, 5 IO*1, 2, 5

W–B*6

IK

*1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV *4: w/ Theft Deterrent System *5: LHD *6: RHD B67809



1

–




Disconnect the C10, E10 or E9, T6 and I14 connectors. Check the resistance between wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

*1 C10–13 (BEAN) (EFI) – E10–18 (MPX1) *2 C10–13 (BEAN) (EFI) – E9–23 (MPX1) *3 C10–13 (BEAN) (EFI) – E9–20 (MPX1)

Below 1

C10–14 (BEAN) (BODY) – I14–22 (MPX2)

E10*1 ECM

C10–15 (BEAN) (SECURITY) – T6–31 (MPX)

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV E9*2, 3 ECM



B68156


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


2

–


CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) (POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)


Disconnect the C11 ECU connector. Check the voltage between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

C11–20 (+B) – Body ground

10 to 14 V

NG B67965

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND

OK

3

CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) (GROUND) (a) (b)


B68158

Disconnect the C10 ECU connector. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Tester Connection

Specified Condition

C10–17 (POWER EARTH) – Body ground

Below 1

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) (See page 05–1509)


AND


–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05AEQ–02

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the chart below (Proceed to the page given for that circuit). DTC No. (See Page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Door System Communication Bus Malfunction (+B Short)


B1215 (05–1670)

Door System Communication Bus Malfunction (GND Short)


B1261 (05–1680)

ECM Communication Stop

Wire harness ECM

B1262 (05–1685)

A/C ECU Communication Stop

Wire harness A/C assy (A/C ECU)

B1269 (05–1689)

Theft Deterrent ECU Communication Stop

Wire harness Theft warning ECU assy

B1271 (05–1693)

Combination Meter ECU Communication Stop

Wire harness Combination meter assy (Combination meter ECU)

B1214 (05–1670)



–


MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05AEO–02


Use this procedure to troubleshoot the key reminder warning system. The hand–held tester should be used at step 3 and 4.

1


2

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AND SYMPTOM

3


(a) (b) (c)


Go to step 5

A

4 (a) (b)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1655). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1659).

5


END



–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05C5K–01

LOCATION

Gasoline

Engine Room R/B No. 4 EFI Relay EFI No. 1 Fuse Engine Room J/B No. 4

Engine Room R/B DCC Fuse EFI Fuse

1CD–FTV


Engine Room R/B EFI MAIN Relay EFI Fuse DCC Fuse

B70602



–


Combination Meter Assy Combination Meter ECU LHD Models Center J/B

ECM A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU)

Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse Dome Fuse Instrument Panel J/B Assy Integration Relay RHD Models

Combination Meter Assy Combination Meter ECU

Theft Warning ECU Assy Center J/B

ECM


A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse Dome Fuse B67413



–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05AEP–02

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

2. (a) (b)

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (BEAN) The BEAN communication line is used to control the ECM, the A/C control assy (A/C ECU), the combination meter assy (combination meter ECU) and the theft warning ECU, which are connected to the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay). If there is a short–circuit (bus–down) in the line, the communication to the system that has a short–circuit (bus–down)will be disabled and the DTC concerning the system will be output from the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay). CHECK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION Check the battery voltage. Standard: 10 to 14 V Inspect the DTC output. (1) Check a DTC for the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) by connecting the hand–held tester to the DLC3 and turning the ignition switch ON.

HINT:

When DTC check is impossible, check the following items. The display shows communication error (refer to new diagnostic system and the operations when an error occurrs.) (2) When the display shows DTCs of the ECU unconnected and the communication bus defective, perform the inspection depending on the type of troubleshooting.

HINT: If another DTC is output, refer to the DTC chart and check the applicable section.



–

MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 05C5M–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) Instrument Panel J/B Assy (Integuration Relay) Vehicle Front Side

Vehicle Rear Side

DB DA DN

I14

DB

DA

DN

I14

A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) Except Automatic A/C

A13

Automatic A/C

A15


B67982



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the DA, DB, DN, I14 J/B, A13 or A15 and C10 ECU connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) B (DN–1) (DN 1) – Body ground B (DB–16) – Body ground E (DA–9) – Body ground *3 MPX1 (I14–11) – MPX– (A13–29) *4 MPX1 (I14–11) – MPX– (A15–20) MPX2 (I14–22) – BEAN (BODY) (C10–14)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


Constant

10 to 14 V


Constant

10 to 14 V


Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1


P–P

P–B – P–B

HINT: *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: Except automatic A/C *4: Automatic A/C If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



2.

–


CHECK ECM FOR 1AZ–FSE ECM E11

E9



A15

A13


B67959

(a) (b)

Disconnect the A13 or A15, C10 ECU, E9, E10 and E11 ECM connectors. Check the voltage and resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

+B2 (E9–2) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E11–1)

B–Y – BR

MPX1 (E10–18) – BEAN (C10–13) *1 MPX2 (E10–29) – MPX+ (A13–9) *2 MPX2 (E10–29) – MPX+ (A15–10)

P–P P B–P P–B P–B B




3.

–


CHECK ECM FOR 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE ECM E9

E12


Automatic A/C


A15

A13


B67962

(a) (b)

Disconnect the A13 or A15, C10 ECU, E9 and E12 ECM connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

B–R – BR

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

MPX1 (E9–23) – BEAN (C10–13)

P–P






4.

–


CHECK ECM FOR 1CD–FTV ECM E12

E10

E9



A15

A13


B67960

(a) (b)

Disconnect the A13 or A15, C10 ECU, E9, E10 and E12 ECM connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


BR – Body ground

Constant

Below 1

Constant

10 to 14 V

Constant

Below 1

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

B–W – BR

BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7)

B–Y – BR

MPX1 (E9–20) – BEAN (C10–13)

P–P



HINT: *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


5.

–


CHECK A/C CONTROL ASSY EXCEPT AUTO (A/C ECU) A/C Control Assy (A/C ECU) A13


ECM (1AZ–FSE)

E10


ECM (1CD–FTV) E9

B67983



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the A13 ECU, E9 or E10 ECM and I14 J/B connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


W–B – body ground

Constant

Below 1

+B (A13–2) – GND (A13–40)

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

MPX– (A13–29) – MPX1 (I14–11)

P–P

*1 MPX+ (A13–9) – MPX2 (E10–29)

P–B – P–B

*2 MPX+ (A13–9) – MPX2 (E9–29)

Constant

Below 1

P–B – P–B

*3 MPX+ (A13–9) – MPX2 (E9–21)

P–B – P–B

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



6.

–


CHECK A/C CONTROL ASSY FOR AUTO (A/C ECU) A15


A16


ECM (1AZ–FSE) E10


ECM (1CD–FTV) E9

B67984



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the A15, A16 ECU, E9 or E10 ECM and I14 J/B connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition



Constant

Below 1

+B (A16–24) – GND (A16–13)

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

MPX– (A15–20) – MPX1 (I14–11)

P–P

*1 MPX+ (A15–10) – MPX2 (E10–29)

P–B – P–B

*2 MPX+ (A15–10) – MPX2 (E9–29)

Constant

Below 1

P–B – P–B

*3 MPX+ (A15–10) – MPX2 (E9–21)

P–B – P–B

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. 7. CHECK THEFT WARNING ECU ASSY Theft Warning ECU Assy T6


B69311

(a) (b)

Disconnect the T6 and C10 ECU connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) E (T6–29) – Body ground +B1 (T6–2) – E (T6–29) MPX (T6–31) – BEAN (Security)(C10–15)

Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition


Constant

Below 1

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 – 14 V

P–L – P–L

Constant

Below 1

If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


8.

–


CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY (COMBINATION METER ECU) Combination Meter Assy (Conbination Meter ECU) C10

C11

ECM (1AZ–FSE) E10


ECM (1CD–FTV) E9

Theft Warning ECU Assy T6


B67985



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the C10, C11, T6, ECU, E10 or E9 ECM and I14 connectors. Check the voltage or resistance of each terminal of the wire harness side connector. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

Specified Condition

POWER EARTH (C10–17) – Body ground


Constant

Below 1

+B (C11–20) – POWER EARTH (C10–17)

W–R – W–B

Constant

10 to 14 V

*1 BEAN (EFI) (C10–13) – MPX1 (E10–18)

P–P

*2 BEAN (EFI) (C10–13) – MPX1 (E9–23)

P–P

*3 BEAN (EFI) (C10–13) – MPX1 (E9–20)

P–P

Constant

Below 1

BEAN (BODY) (C10–14) – MPX2 (I14–22)

P–B – P–B

*4 BEAN (SECURITY) (C10–15) – MPX (T6–31)

P–L – P–L

HINT: *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1AZ–FE, 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV *4: w/ Theft deterrent system If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3T–01

A NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY DOES NOT OPERATE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS Check obstruction. (1) Check that there are no obstructions between the navigation controller assy and the infrared ray light emission portion of the multi–display (CRT display) display. Standard: Normally returns OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

CHECK BATTERY(NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY) Check battery. (1) Check that the dry–cell battery used for the navigation controller assy is not dead. Standard: It is not dead NG

BATTERY IS DEAD

OK

3


Clean the infrared ray emitted portion. (1) Clean the infrared ray emitted portion on the multi– display (CRT display) display and navigation controller assy. (2) Check whether the same malfunction occurs. Standard: The function returns to normal.

OK I35660

DIRT AT PORTION

THE

INFRARED

NG

4

REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY Standard: Normally returns OK

SYSTEM OK



RAY

EMITTED


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3K–01

AVC–LAN CIRCUIT WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display 10 CTX– M2 5 CTX+ M2

TX3+ TX3–


LG V

12 M1 24 M1

Body ECU (Combination Meter Assy) 3 C10 4 C10

G–Y G

Radio Receiver Assy GTX+ GTX–

5 M1 18 M1

9 R6 TX+ 10 R6 TX–

P LG

I34725


INSPECT APPARATUS Choose the apparatus to be inspected. Apparatus

Go to step

Radio receiver assy

A

Navigation ECU

B

Body ECU (Combination Meter Assy)

C

A


B

Go to step 4

C

Go to step 6


2 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SERVICE CHECK MODE(RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) Perform the service check. (1) Start the diagnosis system and read the check result for the radio receiver assy. Standard: A

”NCON” is displayed or nothing is displayed (AUDIO H/U)

B

”GOOD” is displayed

B


A

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY – RADIO RECEIVER ASSY)

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display: M2 GTX+

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display) display and radio receiver assy. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Specified condition

GTX+ – TX+

Continuity

GTX– – TX–

Continuity

(2)


GTX– Radio Receiver Assy:

R12

NG TX– TX+

I35665

Tester connection

Specified condition

GTX+ – Body ground

No continuity

GTX– – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (See page 67–5)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SERVICE CHECK MODE(NAVIGATION ECU) Perform the service check. (1) Start the diagnosis system and read the check result for the navigation ECU. Standard: A

”NCON” is displayed or nothing display (NAVI)

B


B


A

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY – NAVIGATION ECU)


M3

CTX+

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display) display and navigation ECU. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Specified condition

CTX+ – TX+

Continuity

CTX– – TX–

Continuity

(2)


CTX– Navigation ECU:

N7

Tester connection

Specified condition

CTX+ – Body ground

No continuity

CTX– – Body ground

No continuity

TX+

NG

TX– I35666



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SERVICE CHECK MODE(BODY ECU) Perform the service check. (1) Start the diagnosis system and read check result for body ECU. Standard: A

”NCON” is displayed or nothing display (BODY)

B


B


A

7

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY – BODY ECU) (a)


M1

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display) display and body ECU (Combination meter assy). (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

TX3+ TX3– Body ECU (Combination Meter Assy): GTX+ GTX– C10

I35875

Tester connection

Specified condition

TX3+ – GTX+

Continuity

TX3– – GTX–

Continuity

(2)

Check short between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

NG

Tester connection

Specified condition

TX3+ – Body ground

No continuity

TX3– – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY (See page 71–21)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3M–01

COLOR ON NAVIGATION SCREEN IS UNUSUAL (RGB SIGNAL ERROR) WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display VG

6 M2


6 N4 VG

8 SYNC M2

W

8 N4 SYNC

B

3 M2

B

3 N4 B

G

7 M2

G

7 N4 G

R

2 M2

R

2 N4 R

VR

M2

Y

1 N4 VR

1

I34723



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM



Multi–display (CRT Display) Display: M2 B

R

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display)display and navigation ECU. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

VR VG G

Navigation ECU:

Tester connection

Specified condition

VG – VG

Continuity

VR – VR

Continuity

R–R

Continuity

G–G

Continuity

B–B

Continuity

(2)


N4 B

G

R VR VG I35666

NG

Tester connection

Specified condition

VG – Body ground

Continuity

VR – Body ground

Continuity

R – Body ground

No continuity

G – Body ground

No continuity

B – Body ground

No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

2


OK SYSTEM OK



OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3N–01





2 1

1 LG 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

V

6 IA1

P

1 IA1

P (*1)

L

6 IL1

L (*2)

LG

1 IL1

2

4


2 1

1 P 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

2

4

V (*1)


LG (*2)

*1: LHD *2: RHD I34726



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM



Go to step 4

NG

2


Navigation ECU:



NG FR–

OK


I35667


FL–*1, FR–*2

Continuity

– AUI–


FR+

FL–


Tester connection

Specified condition


No continuity


No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


FL+

(a) (b)

FR+ R4

FL–

FR–


I35668


Condition

Specified condition

– GND



FL–*1, FL–*2 – GND



FL+*1, FR+*2

NG


OK

4


(a)


OK




5

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


Navigation ECU:


N3

Tester connection

Specified condition

AUO+ – 1

Continuity

AUO– – 2

Continuity




Tester connection

Specified condition


No continuity


No continuity

NG I33631



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3E–01



Physical address

Logical address


1. RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (Physical address: 190) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, this code may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting an engine. *2: This code is stored in 180 sec. after the power supply connector is pulled out after engine start. *3: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after engine start. *4: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again in 1 min. after engine start. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition


D5 *1


Component shown by sub–code is or was disconnected from system with ignition switch ACC or ON. Communication with component shown by sub–code is not ensured when engine is started.


D6 *1

Absence of Master


Check harness for power supply system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display.

D8 *2


Component shown by sub–code is or was disconnected from system after engine is started.


D9 *1

Last Mode Error



DA


No response is identified when changing mode (audio and visual mode change). Detected when sound and picture does not change by button operation

Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub–code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub–code. If error occurs again, replace component shown by auxiliary code

DB *1

Mode Status Error



DC *4

Transmission Error



DD *4


After engine is started, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected from system.

Check harness for power supply system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. If this error occurs frequently, replace multi–display (CRT display) display.



Diagnosis item

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Condition


DE *3


After engine start, slave component has been disconnected.


DF *5

Master Error



E0 *1




E1 *1




E2


E3 *1


Registration Request command is output from slave component. Receiving Connection Check Instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.


E4 *1




(b)

Error occurs in ON/OFF controlling command from multi–display (CRT display) display.



DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition


10

Panel Switch Error


Inspect all switches on panel switch test screen in display check mode. If any of them does not function, replace radio receiver assy. If all switches function without problem, observe them for a while.

11

Touch Switch Error


Inspect all touch switches on touch switch test screen in display check mode. If any of lines do not react, replace radio receiver assy. If all of vertical and horizontal lines react normally, observe them for a while.

(c)

Logical address: 61 (Cassette tape player’s switch)

DTC 40

(d)

Diagnosis item Mechanical Error of Media

Condition Malfunction due to mechanical failure is identified. Or cassette tape is cut or entangled.

Countermeasure and inspected parts Inspect cassette tape. Replace radio receiver assy.


DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


No Disc Readout



44

CD player Error



45

EJECT Error





Inspect CD.

42

46



Diagnosis item

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Diagnosis content

47

CD Player Temp. Too High

Readout cannot be done because temperature around player’s pick–up (reading part) is too high.

48

CD Player Excess Current

Excess current is applied radio receiver assy.

Countermeasure and inspected parts With IG switch OFF, leave vehicle in cool shaded place for a while and recheck. After deleting the DTC memory, if same code is detected, replace radio receiver assy. Replace radio receiver assy.

2. NAVIGATION ECU (Physical address: 178) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, this code may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting the engine. *2: This code is stored in 210 seconds after the master component is turned off with the ignition switch ACC or ON. *3: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned in 1 min. again after engine start. *4: This code may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after engine start. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) Condition


D6 *1

DTC

Absence of Master

Diagnosis item



D7 *2

Connection Check Error



DC *3

Transmission Error



DD *4


Component that is to be master has been disconnected after engine start.

Check harness for power supply system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. If error occurs frequently, replace multi– display (CRT display) display.

E0 *1




E2


E3 *1



Error is detected in ON/OFF control command from multi–display (CRT display) display . Registration Request command is output from slave component. Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.




Diagnosis item

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Condition


DF *4

Master Error



E4 *1




(b)

Logical address: 58 (Navigation ECU)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition


10

Gyro Error

Error in gyro sensor is detected. (Abnormal value in voltage output from sensor is detected for more than specified time.)

Replace navigation ECU.

42

Map Disc Error

Data cannot be read for a certain time due to scratches or dirt on disc surface or insertion of wrong disc.

Inspect disc and replace as necessary. (Visually check disc surface and wipe it with a soft cloth.)

43

Vehicle Signal Error

Input error of vehicle signal is detected. (When no vehicle signal has been input for a certain time.)

Inspect wire harness. If wire harness is normal, replace navigation ECU.

(c)

Logical address: 58 (GPS receiver)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Condition


11

GPS Receiver Error

Operation error of GPS receiver is detected.

At an outdoor site with a clear view, operate the system to display GPS data. If GPS mark is not properly displayed after 15 min. or more, replace navigation ECU.

40

GPS Antenna Error

Open condition of GPS antenna is detected. (Open circuit, connection failure of connectors, etc.)

Inspect antenna and replace as necessary.

41

Power Supply Error of GPS Antenna

Abnormal voltage of GPS antenna cable or short circuit is detected.

Inspect GPS antenna and replace as necessary. (When no continuity is identified between connector’s core and sealed part, GPS antenna is normal.) If GPS antenna is normal, replace navigation ECU.

3. MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY (Physical address: 110) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, it may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting an engine. *2: It is stored in 180 sec. after the power supply connector is pulled out after engine start. *3: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after engine start. *4: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned in 1 min. again after engine start. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


21

ROM Error

Abnormal condition of ROM is detected.


22

RAM Error



D5 *1


Component shown by auxiliary code is or was disconnected from system with ignition switch ACC or ON. Communication with component shown by auxiliary code is not ensured when engine is started.

Check harness for power supply of component shown by auxiliary code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by auxiliary code.

D8 *2


Component shown by auxiliary code is or was disconnected from system after engine start.

Check harness for power supply of component shown by sub– code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by auxiliary code.



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


D9 *1

Last Mode Error



DB *1

Mode Status Error


Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub–auxiliary code. Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub–code.

DC *4

Transmission Error

Transmission to component shown by auxiliary code has been failed. (This code does not necessarily mean actual failure.)

If same auxiliary code is recorded in order component(s), check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code.

DE *3


After engine start, slave component has been disconnected. DB


E2


Error is detected in ON/OFF control command from radio receiver assy.


E3 *1


Registration Request command is output from slave component. By reception of connection check instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.


(b)


DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


10

Panel Switch Error


Inspect all switches on panel switch test screen in display check mode. If any of them do not function, replace multi–display (CRT display) display. If all switches function without problem, observe them for a while.

11

Touch Switch Error


Inspect all touch switches on touch switch test screen in display check mode. If any of lines does not react, replace multi–display (CRT display) display. If all of vertical and horizontal lines react normally, observe them for a while.

(c)

Logical address: 34 (Front passenger monitor)

DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


10

Error in Picture Circuit

Error in power supply system for picture circuit (abnormal voltage) is detected.


11

Back–light Error (No current)

Decline in power output from inverter circuit for back–light.


12

Back–light Error (Excess current)

Excess power output from inverter circuit for back–light.




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4. BODY ECU (COMBINATION METER) (Physical address: 1EC) HINT: *1: Even if no failure is detected, it may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting an engine. *2: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned in 1 min. again after the engine starts. *3: It may be stored when the ignition switch is turned again after the engine starts. *4: This code is stored in 210 sec. after the master components is turned off with the ignition switch ACC or ON. Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


D6 *1

Absence of Master

Component in which this code is recorded has been disconnected from system with ignition ACC or ON. Or, when this code was recorded, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected.


D7

Communication Check Error

DC *2

Transmission Error

DD *3


DF *4

Component in which this code is recorded is or was disconnected from system after engine start. Or, when recording this code, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected.


Transmission to component shown by auxiliary code has been failed. (Detecting this DTC does not necessarily mean actual failure.)

If same auxiliary code is recorded in other components, check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code.

After engine was started, multi–display (CRT display) display was disconnected from system

Check harness for power supply of multi– display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. If this error occurs frequently, replace multi–display (CRT display) display.

Master Error


Check harness for power supply of radio receiver assy. Check harness for communication system of multi–display (CRT display) display. Check harness for communication system between radio receiver assy and multi–display (CRT display) display.

E0 *1




E1 *1






–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

DTC

Diagnosis item

Diagnosis content


E2


Error occurs in ON/OFF controlling command from stereo component amplifier assy.


E3 *1


Registration Request command is output from slave component. Registration Connection Check Instruction, Registration Request command is output from sub–master component.




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3U–01

DRIVING DIRECTIONS ARE OPPOSITE TO MOVING DIRECTION OF VEHICLE POSITION MARK WIRING DIAGRAM Neutral Start SW (*4) Back–up Light SW (*5) 1 2 N1 B1 (*4) (*5)

R–Y

Navigation ECU

J5 J/C

5 IK1

R–Y (*3)

R–Y (*1) C

C

14 N3 REV

J22 J/C R–Y (*2)

R–Y (*2) A

A

*4: A/T *1: LHD *5: M/T *2: RHD *3: LHD Except 1ZZ–FE, 3ZZ–FE I34724


NAVIGATION CHECK MODE(VEHICLE SENSORS) Check the vehicle input signals. (1) Start up the diagnosis system and read the REV signal in vehicle sensors mode. Standard: Input signal is normal (REV) OK


NG

2

INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(REV) (a) (b)

N3

Remove the navigation ECU. Check the voltage. (1) Measure the voltage between the terminal REV of navigation ECU and body ground. Voltage: Terminal REV – Body ground

REV

I32703

OK



Condition Turn ignition switch ON and put gear shift in R range

Voltage (V) 10 to 14


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3N–01





2 1

1 LG 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

V

6 IA1

P

1 IA1

P (*1)

L

6 IL1

L (*2)

LG

1 IL1

2

4


2 1

1 P 3

(–) IN (–) OUT

(+) IN (+) OUT

2

4

V (*1)


LG (*2)

*1: LHD *2: RHD I34726



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM



Go to step 4

NG

2


Navigation ECU:



NG FR–

OK


I35667


FL–*1, FR–*2

Continuity

– AUI–


FR+

FL–


Tester connection

Specified condition


No continuity


No continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


FL+

(a) (b)

FR+ R4

FL–

FR–


I35668


Condition

Specified condition

– GND



FL–*1, FL–*2 – GND



FL+*1, FR+*2

NG


OK

4


(a)


OK




5

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


Navigation ECU:


N3

Tester connection

Specified condition

AUO+ – 1

Continuity

AUO– – 2

Continuity




Tester connection

Specified condition


No continuity


No continuity

NG I33631



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3R–01

GPS MARK DOES NOT APPEAR INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK MARK DISPLAY Check that the malfunction disappears when placing the vehicle outdoors with a good view. Standard: GPS mark is displayed.

HINT: At the place surrounded by the architecture, the vehicle cannot receive the GPS radio wave. OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

CHECK OPTIONAL COMPONENT Check for optional component. (1) Check if there are any optional components on the vehicle. Standard: There are no optional components on the vehicle. (2) Check if there is anything such as film stuck to the window or any metal objects on the instrument panel. Standard: There is nothing such as film stuck to the window or any metal objects on the instrument panel. NG


OK

3

REPLACE NAVIGATION ANTENNA ASSY (See page 67–28) Standard: Normally returns. NG

OK SYSTEM OK




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3B–01



2


3

Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur (Go to step 4) Symptom occurs (Go to step 5)

4


5

DTC Check (See page 05–1438) Normal code (Go to step 7) Malfunction code (Go to step 6)

6

DTC Chart (See page 05–1453) Go to step 8

7

Problem Symptoms Table (See page 05–1464)

8

Circuit Inspection and Part Inspection

9

Indemnification of Problem



10

Repair or Replace

11

Confirmation Test

End


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3F–01

LOCATION Engine Room R/B No.1 and Radio Receiver Assy Engine Room J/B No.1 DCC Fuse Telephone Microphone Assy Body ECU AM2 Fuse (Combination Meter Assy) Multi–display Sub R/B (LHD) (CRT display) Sub R/B (RHD) Display Front No.2 Speaker Assy

Combination Meter Assy (Body ECU)

Navigation Antenna Assy

Front No.1 Speaker Assy Steering Pad Switch LH

Driver Side J/B RAD No.1 Fuse AM1 Fuse GAUGE1 Fuse IG1 Relay

Navigation ECU Steering Pad Switch RH Navigation Controller Holder Navigation Controller Assy

I34714



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

MAP IS DISPLAYED IN WHITE OR BLUE SCREEN (SWITCHED AND VEHICLE POSITION MARK ARE DISPLAYED) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK SETTING Check the settings. (1) Check that the map display is normal when the map scale is set to the widest area. Standard: Map display is normal OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

CHECK AND OPERATE AGAIN Clean the map disc. (1) After wiping the map disc in the circumference direction with a soft cloth, insert it again. OK

SYSTEM OK

OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

3

REPLACE DISC PLAYER DISC Standard: Normally returns



05C3P–01


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3L–01

NAVIGATION SCREEN IS NOT STABILIZED (SYNCRONOUS ERROR) WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display VG

6 M2


6 N4 VG

8 SYNC M2

W

8 N4 SYNC

B

3 M2

B

3 N4 B

G

7 M2

G

7 N4 G

R

2 M2

R

2 N4 R

VR

M2

Y

1 N4 VR

1

I34723



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM




M2

VR VG SYNC

Navigation ECU:

(a)

Disconnect the connectors from the multi–display (CRT display)display and navigation ECU. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Specified condition

VG – VG

Continuity

VR – VR

Continuity

SYNC – SYNC

Continuity

(2)


N4

SYNC

Tester connection

Tester connection

Specified condition

VG – Body ground

Continuity

VR – Body ground

Continuity

SYNC – Body ground

No continuity

VR VG I35666

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

2


OK SYSTEM OK



OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3H–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY) WIRING DIAGRAM Multi–display (CRT Display) Display Driver Side J/B 1 DH

G–R

H H J/B F J9 J21 J8 (*3) (*4) (*3) F GR J8 GR (*3) W–B

AM1 I13 Ignition SW ACC 2 G G–R 3

3

RAD No.1

4 DB

IG1 Relay

9 DA

DH

G–Y

IG1 1 4 AM2 ST2 5 B–L (*2) B–G (*1) AM1

5 DH 1 DN

1

2

5

3

GAUGE1

7

R–W

DB

6

B–W

1 2 RAD No.2

6

B–G (*1) B–R B–G (*1)

B–W 6 6

1

2

Engine Room J/B 1 ALT 4D 1 2 1 4B

1 4A

FL MAIN

1 W ED1 (*2) B (*2)

3

3 2

1

L–Y (*4)

E J/C E L–Y J24 J25 (*4)

B–G (*1)

W–B 25 M1 GND1

Center J/B 5 CG

B (*2)

6 CA W–B

3

B–W Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 DCC 4 5 B–W B 1 IE4 IP1 2 1 (*2) (*4) B–R (*3) 1 AM2 1 1 B–R B–G 1A IE4 IP1 1 (*1) 2 1 Battery *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV

1 M1 +B1

9 L–Y CB (*3)

L–Y (*3)

W–B

ALT

3 M1 IG 15 M1 ST1

Center J/B 4 CE


F GR (*4) J20 (*4) F J20 (*4)

Center J/B 3 7 R–W CA CF

Fuse Block ST

B–Y

14 M1 ACC

GR (*3)

IJ

IP

*3: LHD *4: RHD I34729



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


INSPECT MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY(ACC, IG, ST1, +B1, GND1) IG +B1

M1

(a) (b)

Remove the multi–display (CRT display) display. Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND1 – Body ground

Always

Continuity

(c) GND1


ACC

ST1

I34716

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

+B1 – GND1

Always

10 to 14 V

IG – GND1

Ignition SW ON

10 to 14 V

ACC – GND1

Ignition SW ACC

10 to 14 V

ST1 – GND1

Ignition SW ON

10 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)



B


B


A REPLACE MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY (See page 67–6)



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3J–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER) WIRING DIAGRAM N4 Navigation Controller Holder 5

GR (*3)

I13 Ignition SW

Driver Side J/B RAD No.1 4 3 DB DH

G 3

AM1

ACC

F J8 (*3) F GR J8 (*3)

2

1 DH

G–R

1

AM1

F J20 (*4) F J20 (*4)

B–L (*2)

DN

J/C

ACC

H H GR J9 J21 (*4) (*3) (*4)

1 ED1

W (*2)

B–G (*1) Engine Room R/B J/B B–G (*1)

1 4B

ALT 1

B (*2)

1 4D

B–G (*1)

2

Engine Room R/B No.3 ALT 3 3 1 2

W (*2) W–B

FL MAIN

1

A A

Battery

GND

J17 J/C W–B IP (*3) IK (*4)

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD I34728



1

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INSPECT NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER(ACC, GND) (a) (b)

N4

GND

ACC

Remove the navigation controller holder. Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND – Body ground

Constant

Continuity

(c)


I35658

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

ACC – GND

Ignition SW ACC

10 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)



B


B

A REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3I–01

POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (NAVIGATION ECU) WIRING DIAGRAM Navigation ECU 9 N6 +B

L–Y (*3) E J/C E L–Y J24 J25 (*4)

L–Y (*4) Center J/B

Fuse Block RAD No.2

4 L–Y CE (*3)

10 CB

6

B–W

6 2

1

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 B (*2) B–G (*1)

1 1A

DCC 1 1

I13 Ignition SW G 3

AM1 ACC

2

Driver Side J/B RAD No.1 4 3 DH DB

GR

2 1 DH

G–R

AM1

B–W

1 DN

4 5 IF4 IF1 (*3) (*4)

B–W

F F J/C F F GR J8 J20 J8 J20 (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) 1 B–L (*2) W (*2) ED1

18 N6 ACC

Engine Room R/B J/B

B–G (*1)

1 4A 1 4B

ALT

1 B–G (*1) 4D

W (*2)

1 2 Engine Room R/B No.3 B (*2)

Center J/B

3

B (*2)

ALT 3

3 1

W (*2)

2

W–B

FL MAIN

Battery


6 CA

13 7 W–B (*3) CF N5 SNSE 7 W–B CK (*4) 17 10 W–B CH N6 GND

IP

*3: LHD *4: RHD I34727



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(+B, ACC, SNSE, GND) (a) (b)

+B

N5

N6

Remove the navigation ECU. Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard: Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

GND – Body ground

Always

Continuity

SNSE – Body ground

Always

Continuity

(c) SNSE

ACC

GND


I32703

Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

+B – GND

Always

10 to 14 V

ACC – GND

Ignition SW ACC, ON

10 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2 (a)



B


B

A REPLACE NAVIGATION ECU (See page 67–27)




–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3G–01


Suspect Area

See page

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (multi–display (CRT display)display) 3. AVC–LAN circuit

01–5 05–1465

Navigation screen display nothing

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU) 3. AVC–LAN circuit

01–5 05–1467 05–1471

Navigation screen is not stabilized (Synchronous error)

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU) 3. Navigation screen is not stabilized (Synchronous error)

01–5 05–1467 05–1475

Color on navigation screen is unusual (RGB signal error)

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU) 3. Color on navigation screen is unusual (RGB signal error)

01–5 05–1467 05–1477

Black screen

Front speaker (driver side) only is not heard Map disc cannot be inserted

– 1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation ECU)

05–1471

05–1479 01–5 05–1467

Current position cannot be displayed on screen (disc caution screen does not change)

–

05–1483

Map is displayed in white or blue screen (switched and vehicle position mark are displayed)

–

05–1484

Vehicle position is deviated from correct point badly

1. Vehicle position is deviated from correct point badly. 2. GPS mark does not appear.

05–1485 05–1487

GPS mark does not appear

–

05–1487

Vehicle position mark rotates without control (map rotates without control)

–

05–1488

Driving directions are opposite to moving direction of vehicle position mark

–

05–1490

A navigation controller assy does not operate

1. A navigation controller assy does not operate 2. The system cannot be operated by the voice sound

05–1491 05–1494

When mount the navigation controller to the navigation controller system, it cannot be operated

1. RAD No.2 fuse 2. Power source circuit (navigation controller holder) 3. When mount the navigation controller holder to the navigation controller system, it cannot be operated 4. The system cannot be operated by the voice sound

01–5 05–1469 05–1492

The system cannot be operated by the voice sound

1. The system cannot be operated by the voice sound 2. AVC–LAN circuit

05–1494 05–1471


05–1494


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM 05C3X–01

TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

NAVIGATION ECU N5

N4

N3

I35876


Wiring Color

Condition

Specification

N5–3 (MIC+) – N5–6 (SGND)

B – BR


N5–4 (MACC) – N5–6 (SGND)

R – BR

Ignition switch ACC

N5–5 (MIC–) – N5–6 (SGND)

BR – BR

Always

Continuity

N5–6 (SGND) – Body ground

BR – Body ground

Always

Continuity

N5–7 (SNSE) – Body ground


Always

Continuity

N3–1 (AUI+) – N3–17 (GND)

R*1, W*2 – W–B

Audio system is sounding

N3–2 (AUO+) – N3–17 (GND)

P*1, LG*2 – W–B

Sound quality test

–

N3–5 (SPD) – N3–17 (GND)

V–W – W–B


–

N3–9 (+B) – N3–17 (GND)

L–Y – W–B

Always

N3–10 (AUI–) – N3–17 (GND)

LG*1, R*2 – W–B

N3–11 (AUO–) – N3–17 (GND)

V*1, L*2 – W–B

N3–14 (REV) – N3–17 (GND)

R–Y – W–B

N3–17 (GND) – Body ground


N3–18 (ACC) – N3–17 (GND)


A waveform synchronized with sounds is output 4 to 6 V


Below 1 V A waveform synchronized with sounds is output

Sound quality test

–


–

Always

Continuity

GR – W–B

Ignition switch ACC

10 to 14 V

N4–1 (VR) – N4–6 (VG)

Y – Shielded

Ignition switch OFF

Below 1 V

N4–2 (R) – N4–6 (VG)

R – Shielded


Pulse generation *2

N4–3 (B) – N4–6 (VG)

B – Shielded


Pulse generation *2

N4–5 (TX+)

V

N4–6 (VG) – Body ground


N4–7 (G) – N4–6 (VG)

G – Shielded





Wiring Color

N4–8 (SYNC) – N4–6 (VG)

W – Shielded

N4–10 (TX–)

LG

–


Specification


Pulse generation *1


–

*1: LHD *2: RHD 2. MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY M1

M2

M3

I34717


Wiring Color

Condition

M1–1 (+B1) – M2–1 (GND2)

L–Y – W–B

Always

10 to 14 V

M1–3 (IG) – M2–1 (GND2)

R–W – W–B

Ignition switch ON

10 to 14 V

M1–4 (SPD) – M2–1 (GND2)

V–W – W–B

See ”Vehicle Signal Check”

–

M1–5 (GTX+)

P


–

M1–10 (RE1) – M1–22 (SGD1)

R – Shielded

Ignition switch ACC See ”Service Check Mode”

Specification

Approx. 3.3 V

M1–12 (TX3+)

G–Y

M1–14 (ACC) – M2–1 (GND2)

GR – W–B

Ignition switch ACC

10 to 14 V

M1–15 (ST1) – M2–1 (GND2)

B–W – W–B

Ignition switch START

10 to 14 V

M1–16 (TC) – M2–1 (GND2)

W–L – W–B

Ignition switch OFF and connect terminals TC and GND1 of check connector

Continuity

M1–17 (PKB) – M2–1 (GND2)

B–W – W–B


–

M1–18 (GTX–)

LG


–

M1–22 (SGD1) – Body ground


M1–24 (TX3–)

G



M2–1 (GND1) – M1–6 (VG)

Always See ”Service Check Mode”

–

Continuity –

Always

Continuity

Y – Shielded

Ignition switch OFF

Below 1 V

M2–2 (R) – M1–6 (VG)

R – Shielded


Pulse generation *2

M–2 (B) – M1–6 (B – VG)

B – Shielded


Pulse generation *2

M2–5 (CTX+)

V

M2–6 (VG) – Body ground


M2–7 (G) – M1–6 (VG)

G – Shielded





Wiring Color

M2–8 (SYNC) – M1–6 (VG)

W – Shielded

M2–10 (CTX–)

LG



3.

–


Specification


Pulse generation *1


–

Always

Continuity

BODY ECU (COMBINATION METER ASSY) C10

I35656


Wiring Color

Condition

Specification

C10–3 (GTX+)

G–Y


–

C10–4 (GTX–)

G


–

(a)

*1: Oscilloscope wave Terminal to be measured: SYNC – GND Setting for measurement: 500 mV/DIV10– s/DIV Condition: Navigation display is displayed.

(b)

*2: Oscilloscope wave Terminal to be measured: R, G, B – GND Setting for measurement: 200 mV/DIV10– s/DIV Condition: Navigation map is switched.

I30915

I30916



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3W–01

THE SYSTEM CANNOT BE OPERATED BY THE VOICE SOUND WIRING DIAGRAM S15 Steering Pad Switch LH AU1 AU2 EAU

LG (*1)

CTX+

R7 8 R7 6 R7

12 P (*1) 11 W–R (*1) 10

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display 5 GTX+ M1 18 GTX– M1

CTX–

Radio Receiver Assy 7

SW2 GND

9

P

R6 10 R6

LG

10 M2 5 M2

SW1

TX+ TX–


LG V

T11 Telephone Microphone Assy MACC

MIC+

MIC–

R

17 ID1

R

4 N5 MACC

B

18 ID1

B

3 N5 MIC+

W

16 ID1

W

BR

5 N5 MIC–

(Shielded)

14 ID1

(Shielded)

BR

6 N5 SGND

5

4

2

*1: w/ Steering SW I35657



–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM


INSPECT STEERING WHEEL ASSY(BEEP SOUND) Check the switch (Beep sound). (1) Press steering pad switch LH to check that the beep sound is produced. OK

Go to step 3

NG

2

INSPECT STEERING WHEEL ASSY(AU2, EAU) (a) (b) ”VOICE” switch

Remove the horn button assy(See page 50–9). Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Tester connection

Condition

Specified condition

AU2 – EAU


Approx. 100 k

AU2 – EAU

VOICE switch: push

Approx. 3.1 k

S15

EAU AU2

I35662

NG

REPLACE STEERING WHEEL ASSY (See page 50–9)

OK

3 (a)

CHECK TALK BACK Check whether the system performs talk back or not. Standard: The system performs talk back. OK

NG


SYSTEM OK


4

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(NAVIGATION ECU – TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSY) (a)

Navigation ECU:

MIC+

Disconnect the connectors from the navigation ECU and telephone microphone assy. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

N5 MACC MIC–

Tester connection

Specified condition

MACC – MACC

Continuity

MIC+ – MIC+

Continuity

MIC– – MIC–

Continuity

(2)


Telephone Microphone Assy:

T11

Tester connection

Specified condition

MACC – Body ground

No continuity

MIC+ – Body ground

No continuity

MIC– – Body ground

No continuity

MACC MIC+

NG

MIC– I35670

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

5

REPLACE TELEPHONE MICROPHONE ASSY Standard: Normally returns NG

OK SYSTEM OK



HARNESS

OR


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3Q–01

VEHICLE POSITION IS DEVIATED FROM CORRECT POINT BADLY INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a)

CHECK DISPLAY(GPS MARK DISPLAY) Preparation for the pre–check. (1) Place the vehicle outdoors with a good view of the GPS mark. Check the screen display. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Turn the power switch of the radio receiver assy ON to display the map. Standard: ’’GPS’’ mark appears

(b)

NG


OK

2 (a)

CHECK WHEN THIS HAPPENS Check the abnormal condition. (1) Check the point in which the trouble occurs. Standard: A

The trouble occurs outside the specific area

B

The trouble occurs in the specific area

HINT: At the place difficult to specify the vehicle position (a by–pass road, a overhand road, a loop road, or several– storied car park, etc.), the vehicle position may be out of the point due to the wrong matching. B

SYSTEM OK

A

3 (a)

CHECK DISPLAY(AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION) Check the screen display. (1) Check the color of ’’Automatic calibration’’ switch at the distance correction screen. Standard: Green (’’Automatic calibration’’ switch) OK

NG


SYSTEM OK


4 (a)

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

NAVIGATION CHECK MODE(VEHICLE SENSORS) Check the vehicle input signals. (1) Start up the diagnosis system and read the SPEED signal in vehicle signal check mode. Standard: Input signal is normal (SPEED) NG

Go to step 6

OK

SYSTEM OK

OK

5

CHECK AND OPERATE AGAIN Standard: Normally returns


6

INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(SPD, GND1) (a) (b) SPD

N3

GND1

I32703

Remove the navigation ECU. Check the voltage. (1) Shift the shift lever to neutral. (2) Jack up either one of the front wheels. (3) Turn ignition switch ON. (4) Measure the voltage between the terminal SPD and GND1 of navigation ECU when the front wheels are turned slowly. Standard: Voltage is pulsed. 9 to14 V

0

OK




Turn the wheel


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3S–01

VEHICLE POSITION MARK ROTATES ARBITRARILY (MAP ROTATES ARBITRARILY) WIRING DIAGRAM Navigation ECU

Combination Meter

18 C11

J10 (*1) J20 (*2) J/C V–W

V–W H

5 N3 SPD

H

*1: LHD *2: RHD I34722


CHECK AND OPERATE AGAIN Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, check that the malfunction disappears. Standard: Malfunction disappears

HINT: Even if the system works correctly, the following conditions may be seen: vehicle position mark turns, or the map turns unwillingly. (It is because by turning the IG switch to ACC or ON during turning, navigation system stores based on the angular speed). In that case, turn the IG switch from OFF to ACC or ON to return the correct function. OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

2 (a)

NAVIGATION CHECK MODE(VEHICLE SENSORS) Check the vehicle input signals. (1) Start up the diagnosis system and read the ”SPD” signal in vehicle sensors mode. Standard: Input signal is normal OK

NG




3

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INSPECT NAVIGATION ECU(SPD) (a) (b) SPD N3

I32703

Remove the navigation ECU. Check the voltage. (1) Shift the shift lever to neutral. (2) Jack up either one of the front wheels. (3) Turn ignition switch ON. (4) Measure the voltage between the terminal SPD of navigation ECU and body ground when the front wheel are turned slowly. Standard: Voltage is pulsed. 9 to14 V

0

OK




Turn the wheel


–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

05C3V–01

WHEN MOUNT THE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY TO THE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER, IT CANNOT BE OPERATED WIRING DIAGRAM R11 Navigation Controller Holder

Multi–display (CRT Display) Display (Shielded)

TX

10 M1 RE1

R 3

22 SGND

2

M1 SGD1

(Shielded)

I34721



Clean the infrared ray emitted portion. (1) Clean the infrared ray emitted portion on the navigation controller holder and navigation controller assy. (2) Check whether the same malfunction occurs. Standard: The function returns to normal.

I35661

OK

NG


DIRT AT PORTION

THE

INFRARED

RAY

EMITTED


2

–

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER – MULTI–DISPLAY (CRT DISPLAY) DISPLAY) (a)

Navigation Controller Holder:

R11 TX

Disconnect the connectors from the navigation controller assy and multi–display (CRT display) display. (1) Check continuity between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart. Standard:

SGND

Tester connecter

Specified condition

TX – RE1

Continuity

SGND – SGD1

Continuity

(2)

Check for a short between the terminals at each condition, as shown in the chart Standard:


M1

Tester connecter

Specified condition

TX – Body ground

No continuity

SGND – Body ground

Continuity

RE1

SGD1

NG I35698

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3

REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER HOLDER Standard: Normally returns. OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

4

REPLACE NAVIGATION CONTROLLER ASSY Standard: Normally returns. OK

SYSTEM OK



HARNESS

OR


–



Suspected Area

See Page


3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.


05–1546


1. 2. 3. 4.


05–1555


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.


05–1560



–


CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet

Inspector’s name:




/

/


km miles

Odometer Reading

/ Constant Once only

Sometimes (

/ Times per day, month)

Problem Symptoms

Fine Cloudy Rainy Weather Conditions Weather Various/Others When Problem Hot Warm Cool Occurred Outdoor temperature Cold (Approx. C ( F))

Snowy

Malfunction in Door Lock/Unlock Operation Using Door Lock Control Switch

Driver side door lock control switch


Malfunction in Door Lock/Unlock Operation Using Key

Driver side door key lock and unlock control switch


Malfunction in Key Lock–in Prevention Function

w/ Double Lock: Malfunction in Double Locking Function System Others



–


CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS HINT: The following items can be customized. NOTICE: After confirming whether the items requested by the customer are applicable or not for customization, perform the customize operation. Be sure to record the current settings before customizing. When troubleshooting, make sure that the item in question is not set to ”OFF” as a result of customization. Standard (Integration relay): DISPLAY (ITEM)

DEFAULT

AUTO LOCK DELAY ALL UNLK/OPN–CL (All unlock w/ D door open–close)


CONTENTS

SETTING

30s

Function that selects AUTO LOCK time 30 sec. or 60 sec.

30s/60s

OFF

Function that unlocks all other doors when opening driver side door within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch to OFF from ON

ON/OFF


–


05C8D–01

DOUBLE LOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION RHD Models w/ Double Lock Only: All the doors except the back door have the double locking system. This system is set and unset by the integration relay. When the integration relay receives a request signal from the wireless transmitter (See page 73–1) to set or unset the double locking system, it drives the double lock motor built into each door lock according to the condition of all the double lock position switches, thus causing the double locking system to be set and unset.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM RHD Models w/ Double Lock Only

Instrument Panel J/B Assy Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH W–B

10

9

D14

D14

17

B

B

IL2

B 9

IL1

B

Integration Relay

J/C

G

G

J20

G

G

J20

J21

3

B

J21

IC1

D14

IP

4 D14

8

W

4

L

G

5

5

D21

D21

1 BC1

10

W–B

D21

2 D21

BU

B

W

L

4 BC1

16 BC1

6 BC1

B

W

L

17

1 IA1

9

W–B

D16

2 D16

9

14

ACTS

CK

IM2

5

L

CB

IM2

L 17

DJ

ACTR

3

W

W Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH 5 6 B W–B D16 D16

L

15

CI

IM1

2

10 CA

DJ

1

L

11

6 CF

6

W

CE

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH

6

CJ

1

W

W–B

Center J/B 12

CH

L

IL1

DLPD

J20

W

IL1

I14

B

W–B

3

B

6

2 CA

2 CD

IA2

8

W

W

IA1

4

L

L

IA1

IJ

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH 10 9 4 W–B B D19 D19 BA1

3 BA1

10

W–B BQ

D19

4 D19

W

L


16 BA1

6 BA1

B

W

L

12 IC1

10 IC3

4 IC3

W L

B66822


–



INSPECT WIRELESS DOOR LOCK OPERATION Check that the doors can be normally locked and unlocked by the wireless operation. NG

GO TO WIRELESS DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM (See page 05–1568)

OK

2 (a)

INSPECT FUSE (ECU–B 2, DOOR) Inspect the ECU–B 2 and DOOR fuses (See page 68–1). NG

OK


REPLACE FUSE


3

–


INSPECT FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH (a)

Unlock

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition





(3)


Lock

B64708


NG

OK



Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH


4

–


INSPECT FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH (a)

Unlock

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition





(3)


Lock

B64707


NG

OK



Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE FRONT DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH


5

–


INSPECT REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH (a)

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition





(3) Unlock


Lock

B64706


NG

OK



Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY RH


6

–


INSPECT REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH (a)

Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH: Inspect operation of the double lock motor. (1) Apply battery voltage and set the door lock motor to set. (2) Apply battery voltage to the double lock motor and inspect operation. Standard: MeasurementCondition

Specified Condition





(3) Lock


Unlock

B64705


NG

OK



Specified Condition

SET

Below 1

UNSET

10 k or higher

REPLACE REAR DOOR W/MOTOR LOCK ASSY LH


7

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (DOOR LOCK – INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)) (a)

Wire Harness Side D14*1, D21*2, D16*3, D19*4 Door Lock

(b)

Disconnect the D14, D21, D16 or D19 door lock and the I14 and DJ J/B connectors. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D14–9 – I14–6 (DLPD) D21–5 – I14–6 (DLPD) D16–6 – I14–6 (DLPD) D19–9 – I14–6 (DLPD)


D14–4 – DJ–8 (ACTS) D21–2 – DJ–8 (ACTS) D16–2 – DJ–8 (ACTS)

Below 1

D19–4 – DJ–8 (ACTS) D14–3 – DJ–9 (ACTR) D21–1 – DJ–9 (ACTR) D16–1 – DJ–9 (ACTR) D19–3 – DJ–9 (ACTR)

(c)

DJ Instrument Panel J/B Assy

Check the resistance between the D14, D21, D16 or D19 door lock connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open): Tester Connection

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

3


9

D21–6 – Body ground D16–5 – Body ground

Specified Condition

Below 1


*1 Driver side *2 Passenger side *3 Rear right side *4 Rear left side

NG B70501

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


–



HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: Troubleshoot in accordance with the procedures on the following pages.

1


2


3


(a) (b)

When problem is not listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to A. When problem is listed on problem symptoms table, proceed to B. B

Go to step 6

A

4 (a)

PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1536). (1) Inspection with the hand–held tester (ECU DATA LIST). (2) Inspection with the hand–held tester (ACTIVE TEST). On–vehicle inspection (See page 73–1). Inspection (See page 73–3). Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1542).

(b) (c) (d)

5


END



–


05C8C–01

KEY LOCK–IN PREVENTION FUNCTION DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY (MANUAL OPERATION AND OPERATION INTERLOCKED WITH KEY ARE ACTIVE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The unlock warning switch turns ON when the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder. The courtesy lamp switch turns ON when the driver side door is opened. These 2 switches are monitored by the integration relay. In order to prevent the key from being locked in, the integration relay controls door locking operation according to the conditions of these switches so that the doors are not locked with the key locked in.

WIRING DIAGRAM LHD models


D9 Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy (Driver Side) 14 1 R IC2

R

J16 J/C W–B

A

Integration Relay

J10 J/C

A

B

B

R

U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy W–B Y 1 2

13 DB

17

8 DA

19

DCTY

KSW

IO*1 IL*2

*1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV B66819



–


RHD models


D10 Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy (Driver Side) 9 1 R R IM1

W–B

Integration Relay

Center J/B 1 CA

5 CE

6 CA

13 W–B CF

R

13 DB

17

D Y*2

8 DA

19

DCTY

IP J22 J/C 1 U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy

2

Y*2 D

KSW

Y*1

*1: 1AZ–FE *2: Except 1AZ–FE B66820



–



READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Using the hand–held tester, check that the unlock warning switch signal is output when the switch is operated. Standard (Integration relay): Item

KEY UNLK WRN SW

Measurement Item/Display (Range)

Normal Condition


Diagnostic Note


OK

–

Go to step 4

NG

2

INSPECT UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY

Free

(a) (b)

Pin

Remove the unlock warning switch. Inspect the resistance of the switch. Standard: Tester Connection

Pushed 1–2

Switch Position

Specified Condition

Free (Key removed)

10 k or higher

Pushed (Key set)

Below 1

B51903

NG OK




3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY – INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY)) (a) (b)

Wire Harness Side U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy

(c)

Disconnect the U1 switch and DA J/B connectors. Check the continuity between the wire harness connectors. Standard (Check for open): Tester Connection

Specified Condition

U1–2 – DA–8 (KSW)

Below 1

Check the resistance between the U1 switch connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open):


Tester Connection

Specified Condition


Below 1

17 16 15 14 13

34 33 32 31 30 12 29 11 28 10 27 9 26 8 25 7 24 6 5 4 3 2 1

23 22 21 20 19 18

NG B70499

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


4 (a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Using the hand–held tester, check that the driver side door courtesy lamp switch signal is output when the switch is operated. Standard (Integration relay): Item

D DOR CTY SW

Measurement Item/Display (Range) Driver side door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

OK

NG


Normal Condition ON: Driver side door is open OFF: Driver side door is closed

Diagnostic Note –



5

–



Free Pushed

Remove the courtesy lamp switch. Inspect the resistance of the switch. Standard: Tester Connection

̱

Switch Position

1 – Body ground

Specified Condition

Free

Below 1

Pushed

10 k or higher

Body Ground B58556

NG

REPLACE FRONT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY (DRIVER SIDE)

OK

6

CHECK WIRE HARNESS (COURTESY LAMP SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) – INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY), BODY GROUND) (a)

Wire Harness Side D9*1, D10*2 Courtesy Lamp Switch (Driver Side)

*1LHD models

(b)

Disconnect the D9, D10 switch and the DB J/B connectors. Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

1

Tester Connection

Specified Condition

D9, D10–1 – DB–13 (DCTY)

Below 1

*2RHD models

DB Instrument Panel J/B Assy

B70500

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


–


LOCATION LHD Models Instrument Panel J/B Assy Integration Relay Door Fuse

Center J/B

Unlock Warning Switch Assy Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse RHD Models Center J/B

Instrument Panel J/B Assy Integration Relay Door Fuse


Fuse Block Assy ECU–B 2 Fuse

B70813



–


Sedan Models Power Window Regulator Master Switch Assy Door Control Switch

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy RH Rear Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy

Front Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH Front Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy Rear Door w/ Motor Lock Assy LH Rear Door Courtesy Lamp Switch Assy Liftback Models

Back Door Lock Assy Back Door Opener Switch Assy (Outside Handle Switch)

Wagon Models


Back Door Lock Assy


Back Door Lock Assy

B70496



–


PRE–CHECK

1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (a) Inspect the DLC3. HINT: The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 14230 format.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DLC3 B50154

Tester Connection

Condition

Specified Condition



Pulse generation


Constant

Below 1


Constant

Below 1


Constant

9 to 14 V

HINT: If the display shows UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE when you have connected the cable of the hand– held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and used the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tester side. If communication is normal when the tester is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 of the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tester is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tester itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the tester’s manual. (b) Check the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding.

Hand–held Tester

A82518


2. (a) (b)

USING HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tester screen.

HINT: The hand–held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which records the monitored data. Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.


–


3. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switch, sensor, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Read the DATA LIST according to the display on the tester. Standard (Integration relay): Item


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note



–

D DOR CTY SW



–

P DOR CYT SW

Passenger side door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Passenger side door is open OFF: Passenger side door is closed

–

Rr DOR CTY SW

Rear door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Either right or left rear door is open OFF: Both right and left rear doors are closed

–

P LOCK POS SW

Passenger side door lock position switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Passenger side door lock is in unlock position OFF: Passenger side door lock is in lock position

–

Rr LOCK POS SW

Rear door lock position switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Rear door lock is in unlock position OFF: Rear door lock is in lock position

–

IG switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Key is in ON or START position OFF: Key is in OFF or ACC position

–

Driver side door lock position switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Driver side door lock is in unlock position OFF: Driver side door lock is in lock position

–

Manual door lock switch LOCK signal /ON or OFF

ON: Manual door lock switch is in lock position OFF: Manual door lock switch is in original position (Common to driver side and passenger side model)

–

D/L SW–UNLOCK

Manual door lock switch UNLOCK signal /ON or OFF

ON: Manual door lock switch is in unlock position OFF: Manual door lock switch is in original position (Common to driver side and passenger side model)

–

DOR KEY SW–LOCK

Key operation door lock switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Key operation door lock switch is in lock position OFF: Key operation door lock switch is in original position (Common to driver side and passenger side model)

–

P DOR KEY SW–UL

Key operation passenger door unlock switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Passenger key operation door lock switch is in unlock position OFF: Passenger key operation door lock switch is in neutral position

–

D DOR KEY SW–UL

Key operation driver door unlock switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Driver key operation door lock switch is in unlock position OFF: Driver key operation door lock switch is in original position

–

ALL UNLK/OPN–CL


ON: All doors unlock when driver side door is opened OFF: Other doors do not unlock when driver side door is opened

–

OPEN DOOR WARN

Door courtesy switch signal /ON or OFF

ON: Either door is open OFF: All doors are closed

–

AUTO LOCK DELAY

Door courtesy switch signal /60s or 30s

60s: Door auto locking time is 60 sec. 30s: Door auto locking time is 30 sec.

–

KEY UNLK WRN SW

IG SW

D LOCK POS SW

D/L SW–LOCK



–



Item

Diagnostic Note

Normal Condition

DOOR HANDLE SW

Back door opener switch signal (Outside handle switch) /ON or OFF

ON: Back door opener switch is pushed OFF: Back door opener switch is not pushed

–

LOCK STATUS

Back door position switch signal /UNLOCK or LOCK

UNLOCK: Back door is unlock LOCK: Back door is lock

–

4. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows you to operate the relay, VSV, actuator, etc. without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) According to the display on the tester, perform the ACTIVE TEST. Standard (Integration relay): Item

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

DOOR LOCK

Operate door lock motor for all doors LOCK/OFF

–

DOOR LOCK

Operate door lock motor for all doors UNLOCK/OFF

–



–



Suspected Area

See Page


3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.


05–1546


1. 2. 3. 4.


05–1555


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.


05–1560



–


TERMINALS OF ECU 1.

CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL J/B ASSY (INTEGRATION RELAY) Vehicle Rear Side

DB

Vehicle Front Side

DC

DM DA

DN

DH DJ

I14


DB

DH

DC

DM

DJ

DN

I14

B70502



(a) (b)

–


Disconnect the DA, DB, DC, DM, DN and I14 J/B connectors. Check the voltage or continuity between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors and the body ground. Standard:


Wiring Color

KSW (DA–8) – Body ground

Y – Body ground

E (DA–9) – Body ground B (DB–16) – Body ground

No key in ignition key cylinder Key inserted


Constant


Constant


B (DN–1) (DN 1) –

Condition

L1 (DA–29) – Body Ground


Door control switch (Master switch) OFF LOCK

UL1 (DA–13) – Body Ground


Door control switch (Master switch) OFF UNLOCK

L2 (I14 (I14–4) 4) –

*3 L–Y – Body ground

UL2 (I14–5) – Body Ground

L – Body ground

Continuity

Constant


*4 L–R – Body ground


10 to 14 V

Body ground

Body Ground

Specified Condition

Driver door key cylinder OFF LOCK

No continuityy Continuityy

Driver door key cylinder OFF UNLOCK *3 Luggage component door opener switch FREE PUSHED *4 Back door opener switch FREE PUSHED

*3 BDSU (I14–10) – Body Ground


DCTY (DB–13) – Body Ground

R – Body ground

Driver door CLOSED OPEN

PCTY (DC–9) – Body Ground

R – Body ground

Passenger door CLOSED OPEN



Rear left door CLOSED OPEN



Rear right door CLOSED OPEN

*3 LGCY (I14–1) – Body Ground


Luggage door CLOSED OPEN

*4 BDCY (I14–12) – Body Ground


Back door CLOSED OPEN

10 k or higher Below 1

HINT: *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV engine *3: Sedan *4: Liftback and Wagon If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side.



(c) (d)

–


Reconnect the J/B connectors. Check the voltage between each terminal of the connectors and the body ground. Standard:


Wiring Color

Condition

ACC (DH–3) – Body ground

G – Body ground

ACT+ (DJ–1) – Body Ground


ACT+ (DM–7) – Body Ground


ACT+ (DB–20) – Body Ground


ACT– (DJ–4) – Body Ground


ACT– (DM–6) – Body Ground


ACT– (DB–10) – Body Ground


LACT (DM–3) – Body Ground

L – Body ground

LSWD (I14–3) – Body Ground

LG – Body ground

* LSWP (DB–8) – Body Ground


Passenger door UNLOCK " LOCK

* LSWP (DA–20) – Body Ground


Rear right door UNLOCK " LOCK

* LSWP (DM–10) – Body Ground


Rear left door UNLOCK " LOCK

DLPD (I14–6) – Body Ground

B – Body ground


* ACTS (DJ–8) – Body Ground

L – Body ground


* ACTR (DJ–9) – Body Ground

W – Body ground

Double lock SET " UNSET

Specified Condition

Ignition switch ACC

10 to 14 V

Door control switch (master switch) or door key cylinder OFF " LOCK

Below B l 1V" 10 to 14 V " Below 1 V Door control switch (master switch) or door key cylinder OFF " UNLOCK

Back door opener switch (outside handle switch) OFF " ON Driver door UNLOCK " LOCK


More than 5 V " Less than 1 V


HINT: *: Double Lock If the result is not as specified, the J/B assy (integration relay) may have a malfunction.



–


05C7C–01


WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R


ECM


IG2 AM2

1


DH 2

B–G 4A 1

4B 1


9

6 B–R

IGN

11 E9

W


Driver Side J/B

DA 18 22

B–G FL MAIN

B–W

B–W C J8

Battery

A J26

J/C

(LHD) (RHD)

C J8

A J26

(LHD) (RHD)

A81015



CHK ENG is not illuminate




1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–




NG

2


E9


OK ECM Connector

A65748



3 (a)


CHECK AND CONNECTOR

REPAIR

HARNESS

AND

NG

4 (a)


REPAIR OR REPLACE BULB OR COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLYSYSTEM OK




–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6L–01



Driver’s Name

Production Date


Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name



Difficult to Start


Poor Idling


Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall


km miles


Back fire Other


High (

rpm)

Low (


Surging

Others



Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation




day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/


After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.


F) Downhill


Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal


)


)

)



Normal

)

rpm)


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6N–01


Open or short in oil control valve (OCV) circuit Oil control valve ECM

*1 CHK ENG

P0010/39 *4 (05–169)


P0011/59 *4 (05–174)

Camshaft Position ”A” –Timing Over–Advanced or System Performance (Bank 1)

P0012/59 *4 (05–174)


P0016/18 *4 (05–181)


P0031/21 *2, *4 (05–182)


P0032/21 *2, *4 (05–182)


P0051/28 *2, *4 (05–182)


P0052/28 *2, *4 (05–182)


P0100/31 (05–186)

Mass Air Flow Circuit

P0102/31 (05–186)


P0103/31 (05–186)


P0110/24 (05–194)


P0112/24 (05–194)


P0113/24 (05–194)


P0115/22 (05–199)


P0117/22 (05–199)


P0118/22 (05–199)


P0120/41 (05–204)



P0122/41 (05–204)




Valve timing Oil control valve (OCV) Camshaft timing gear assy ECM Mechanical system (Timing chain has jumped a tooth, chain stretched) ECM

Open or short in heater circuit of A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F relay ECM


Open O or short h t iin iintake t k air i temp. t sensor circuit i it Intake air temp. sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM



–


P0123/41 (05–204)


Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) Open in VTA1 circuit open in E2 circuit VC and VTA1 circuit are short–circuited ECM

P0136/27 *4 (05–211)



P0141/27 *4 (05–218)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)


P0156/29 *4 (05–211)



P0161/29 *4 (05–218)

Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 2 Sensor 2)


P0325/52 (05–222)



P0327/52 (05–222)



P0328/52 (05–222)



P0335/12, 13 (05–226)


P0339/13 (05–226)


P0340/12 (05–229)


P0341/12 (05–229)


P0351/14 *3 (05–232)


P0352/15 *3 (05–232)


P0353/14 *3 (05–232)


P0354/15 *3 (05–232)




P0511/33 (05–243)

Idle Air Control Circuit

Open or short in idle speed control (ISC) valve circuit Idle speed control (ISC) valve is stuck or closed A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM

P0606/89 (05–247)

ECM/PCM Processor

ECM

P0500/42 (05–240)


Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position osition sensor Signal plate (crankshaft) ECM Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit osition sensor Camshaft position Camshaft timing pulley Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM

Ignition system Open or short in IGF or IGT1 to 4 circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM No. 1 to No. 4 ignition coil with igniter IG2 relay ECM


–


P0710/38 (05–882)


P0712/38 (05–882)


P0713/38 (05–882)


P0717/37 (05–884)


P0748/62 (05–886)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”A” Electrocal (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)

P0778/63 (05–886)

Pressure Control Solenoid ”B” Electrocal (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)

P0793/67 (05–892)


P0982/65 (05–886)


P0983/65 (05–886)


P2237/21 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2238/21 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2239/21 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2240/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2241/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2242/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2251/21 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2252/21 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2253/21 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2254/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2255/28 *2, *4 (05–248)


P2256/28 *2, *4 (05–248)




Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM

05–164 DIAGNOSTICS P2716/77 (05–894)


P2769/64 (05–897)

DSL Solenoid Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

P2770/64 (05–897)

DSL Solenoid Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)

B2799/99 (05–1625)

Engine Immobilizer System Malfunction

–



Immobilizer system

*1: ... CHK ENG is illuminated. ... CHK ENG is not illuminated. *2: This DTC is related to A/F sensor, although the caption is heated oxygen sensor. *3: This DTC indicate a malfunction related to primary circuit. *4: For European spec. only



–


05C78–01

ECM BACK–UP POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the ignition switch is OFF, the battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal BATT of the ECM for the DTCs memory and air–fuel ratio adaptive control value memory, etc.

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Room J/B No.1 B–G

1 1A

ECM

EFI 1

2

B–Y

1


B–Y

3 E9 BATT

4A 1 Engine Room J/B No.4

7 E12 E1

4B 1 B–G BR FL MAIN

Battery EF

A76869




NG

EFI Fuse A66054

OK





2

–


INSPECT ECM(BATT VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E9

E12



Specified condition

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

BATT (+) A18294

OK


NG

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EFI FUSE, EFI FUSE – BATTERY) (a) E9

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and ECM. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

BATT ECM Connector

A65748


Specified condition


Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Engine Room R/B No.1

(b)

EFI Fuse 2 1

A79078


Specified condition


No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and battery. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity


Specified condition


No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C77–01


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition SW B–R 4

A B–W J26 (RHD)

Driver Side J/B

B–R 6

2 DH

18 DA

IGN

B–Y

B–W C (LHD)

GR

1

4

2 AM2

1

ECM

J/C

B–R

2

B–W (RHD)

C

9 E9 IGSW

B–W (LHD)

J8 J/C


1

E J27

2 IE1

8 E9 MREL

GR

4

5

1 E9 +B

B–R

1

EFI EFI Relay

1


7 E12 E1

2

1 1A B–G 1 4A


4

4 8 IK1

B–W 4


1 4B B–G

1

EFI No.1

B–R

W–B

12 EA1

2

FL MAIN

BR


B–R

Battery EC

EF A79123



–




E9

E12

E1 (–)

+B (+)

ECM Connecter


OK

A18294


Specified condition

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V


NG

2


E13

(a) (b) (c)

E12


Specified condition


E2

Continuity


E1 ECM Connecter

A65746

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

IGSW (+)

ECM Connecter

NG


OK A18294

Go to step 6


4

–



Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG A79096


OK

5


I13


NG

Ignition Switch

B50489

Switch

Terminal No.

Resisitance

LOCK

All Terminals

1M or more

ACC

1–3

1 or less

ON

1–2, 1–3, 2–3, 5–6

1 or less

START

4–5, 4–6, 5–6, 1–2

1 or less



6


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

MREL (+)

ECM Connecter

OK


A18294

NG



7

–





NG

EFI Fuse


A66054

OK

8



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

9

CHECK FUSE(EFI No,1 FUSE) (a)


EFI No.1 Fuse

Ç Ç

(b)


NG

OK


A79065



10

–




EFI Relay A66053



Specified condition


Ç


Continuity y

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (E9–1)


Specified condition



A79066

(b)

E9

+B ECM Connector


MREL A65748

No continuityy

OK


Specified condition


Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




–


05C7A–01

FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel injectors are located on the intake manifold. They inject fuel into the cylinders based on the signals from the ECM. Reference: Inspection using oscilloscope With the engine idling, check the waveform between terminals #1 to #4 and E01 of the ECM connectors. HINT: The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram below. Injector Signal Waveform 20V /Division

(Magnification) 20V /Division

GND

GND 100 msec./Division (Idling)

Injection duration

1 msec./Division (Idling) A78423



–


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition SW 6

4 B–R

I5 Injector No.1 2 B–R R–B 1

B–R

Driver Side J/B

B–R

I6 Injector No.2 2 R–B 1

IGN

DL 16 1

AM2 1

1 #1 E13

DH 2


2

ECM

Engine R–B 1 Room IG2 R/B No.1 B–R Engine 2 Room 8 EA1 J/B No.1

1 1A

1

Y

I7 Injector No.3 R–B 1 2 W

I8 Injector No.4 R–B 1 2

B

2 #2 E13

3 #3 E13

4 #4 E13

R–B B

B–G

4

4

W–B 1

1

4A

3


1 4B B–G

FL MAIN

IG2 Relay 2

5

4

W–B

6 E02 E13

4 W–B

Battery

7 E01 E13

EC

Engine B Room R/B No.4 EE

A76891



–



INSPECT ECM(#1, #2, #3 OR #4 VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13


Specified condition

#1 (E13–1) – E01 (E13–7)

E01

#4

#3 #2

#2 (E13–2) – E01 (E13–7)

#1

9 to 14 V

#3 (E13–3) – E01 (E13–7)

ECM Connector

#4 (E13–4) – E01 (E13–7)

A18294

OK

Go to step 7

NG

2

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY(CHECK RESISTANCE) (See page 11–22) NG


OK

3



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY

OK

4


Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG A79096




–


OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(INJECTOR – ECM, INJECTOR – IG2 RELAY) (a) E13

#4

#3

#2 #1 ECM Connector

Check the harness and connector between the injector connector and ECM connector. (1) Disconnect the I5, I6, I7 or I8 injector connector. (2) Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Injector (I5–1) – #1 (E13–1)

A65743

Injector (I6–1) – #2 (E13–2) Injector (I7–1) – #3 (E13–3)


Continuity

Injector (I8–1) – #4 (E13–4)


Specified condition

Injector (I5–1) or #1 (E13–1) – Body ground Injector (I6–1) or #2 (E13–2) – Body ground Injector (I7–1) or #3 (E13–3) – Body ground Injector (I8–1) or #4 (E13–4) – Body ground

IG2 Relay

A79064


I6

I7

No continuity

I8

1 2

(b)

Check the harness and connector between the injector connector and ignition switch connector. (1) Disconnect the I5, I6, I7 or I8 injector connector. (2) Remove theIG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Injector Connector

Specified condition

Injector (I5–2) – IG2 Relay (3) Injector (I6–2) – IG2 Relay (3)

A61031


Continuity



Specified condition

Injector (I5–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground Injector (I6–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground Injector (I7–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity

Injector (I8–2) or IG2 Relay (3) – Body ground

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6

–




IG2



IG2 (I13–6) – IGN fuse (1)

A66267




Driver Side J/B 1


2



IGN Fuse

A79103


IG2 Relay

A79064

NG

OK CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7

–


INSPECT ECM (a) (b) E13

Disconnect the ECM E13 connector. Check for continuity between the ECM connector and body ground. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity


E01

E02

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

8

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY(CHECK INJECTOR VOLUME) (See page 11–22) NG




OR


–


05C79–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In the diagram below, when the engine is cranked, current flows from terminal ST2 of the ignition switch to the starter relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal). When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to the coil of the E.F.I. circuit opening relay, the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates. While the NE signal is generated (engine running), the ECM keeps Tr ON (circuit opening relay ON) and the fuel pump also keeps operating. Circuit Opening Relay

EFI Relay

Fuel Pump

Ignition SW AM2

ST2 ECM FC

ST

Tr

MREL (M/T) (A/T)

(A/T)

STA

Start Position SW

EFI

AM2

ST Relay FL MAIN

Battery

(NE Signal)

Starter

A76888



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM GR

B–Y

2 IE1

8 E9 MREL

GR

1

10 E9 FC

2 EFI 1

Engine Room R/B No. 1 Engine Room J/B No. 1

G–Y 6 IC3

GR

B–Y

1 1A

B–G Engine Room R/B No. 4 1 4A


4 5

1

3

2

1 EFI Relay

3

FL MAIN

5

4

1 4B

B–G

B–W

B–W

2 B–W

4

4

L–B

10 IB1 4

Battery

G–Y

F25 Fuel Pump

5 B–W


W–B W–B

EC

BR

A76889



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY) Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL PUMP / SPD”. Perform the active test with the engine stopped. Result: The circuit opening relay operates. OK


NG

2


REPAIR OR CIRCUIT

REPLACE

POWER

SOURCE

OK

3


C8



3–5

B16200

NG



OK

4


E12



(a) (b)

E9

FC (+) A18294


OK


Specified condition

FC (E9–10) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

Go to step 6


5

–





EFI Relay

Specified condition


A66053

Continuity y



Wire Harness Side


C8

Specified condition


1

3


5


No continuityy

2


A79099

E9

FC MREL

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6


OK



OR


7

–





2



A79099

Wire Harness Side



Specified condition


No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG A66276

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR



CHECK OPERATION OF FUEL PUMP (See page 11–19) OK


NG

2


OK


CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT


3

–



C8



3–5

B16200

NG



OK

4


E12


(a) (b)

E9




FC (+) A18294

OK NG

Symbols (Terminal No.) FC (E9–10) – E1 (E12–7)

Go to step 6


5

–





EFI Relay

Specified condition


A66053

Continuity y



Wire Harness Side


C8

Specified condition


1

3


5


No continuityy

2


A79099

E9

FC MREL

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6


OK



OR


7

–





2



A79099

Wire Harness Side



Specified condition


No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG A66276



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C7H–01

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING When using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure shown below. 1


2


3



4



5


6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7


8



B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

A


B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10


9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14


15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 18


16

–



GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–


When not using hand–held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure shown below. 1


2


3


4


B

A

Malfunction occurs

B



A

5


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 7

A

6


GO TO STEP 9

7


B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 12


8

–



B

A


B


GO TO STEP 12

A

9

10


CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B

A


B


GO TO STEP 13

A

11


GO TO STEP 13

12

PARTS INSPECTION

13


14

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

15

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6O–01

LOCATION

Combination Meter Variable Resister (*1) ECM VSV (EVAP) Mass Air Flow Meter

Fuel Pump DLC3 Circuit Opening Relay Engine Room J/B No.4 Engine Room R/B No.4 Engine Room J/B No.1 Engine Room R/B No.1 Camshaft Oil Control Valve Ignition Coli and Igniter

Injector Idle Speed Control Valve Throttle Body

Crank Position Sensor A/F Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Canshaft Position Sensor Engine Coolamt Temperature Sensor Knock Sensor Neutral Start Switch

A/F Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 1) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2) *1: Leaded Only A76850



DTC

–


05C6R–01

P0010/39 CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The VVT system controls the intake camshaft to provide the optimal valve timing for every driving condition. This control is performed based on the signals, such conditions as intake air volume, throttle position and engine coolant temperature. The ECM controls the oil control valve (OCV), based on the signals output from the sensors. The VVT controller regulates the intake camshaft angle using oil pressure through the oil control valve (OCV). As result, the relative position between the camshaft and the crankshaft becomes optimal, and the engine torque improves, fuel economy improves, exhaust emissions decrease under overall driving conditions. Also, the ECM detects the actual valve timing using the signals from the camshaft position sensor and the crankshaft position sensor, and performs feedback control. This is how target valve timing is achieved by the ECM. ECM Crankshaft Position Sensor MassAir Flow Meter

Target Valve Timing

Throttle Position Sensor


Feedback Duty Control Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor Correction Vehicle Speed Signal Camshaft Position Sensor


DTC No. P0010/39

DTC Detection Condition Open or short in oil control valve (OCV) circuit


Trouble Area Open or short in oil control valve circuit Oil control valve ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


W–G

15 E13 OC1+

2

Y–B

14 E13 OC1–

A59779


When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OCV OPERATION) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and warm it up. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD/ ACTIVE TEST / VVT CTRL B1 or VVT CTRL B2”. Check the engine speed when operating the OCV by the hand–held tester. Standard: Tester operation

Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON


OK


NG

2


OK




3

–



E13

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)




(A)

(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A79111


OK

4



(b) (c)



Specified condition


Continuity


A54386


Specified condition


E13


NG

OC1+


A65743


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

No continuity

HARNESS

OR


–



CHECK OPERATION OF OCV (a)

C2

(b) (c) (–)

(+)

Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve connector. Apply battery positive voltage between the terminals of the camshaft timing oil control valve. Check the engine speed. Standard: Engine speed is rough idle or engine is stalled.

NG



OK

2


E13

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)




(A)

(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A79111

OK


CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page )


3

–




(b) (c)



Specified condition


Continuity


A54386


Specified condition


E13

OC1+



A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

No continuity

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6S–01

DTC

P0011/59 CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)

DTC

P0012/59 CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– RETARDED (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0010/39 on page 05–169. DTC No.


P0011/59

Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the advanced oil control valve.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed

P0012/59

Trouble Area

Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the retarded oil control valve.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed

Valve timing Oil control valve Camshaft timing gear assy ECM




P0011/59


P0012/59

If DTC ”P0011/59 or P0012/59” is displayed, check VVT system circuit. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



OK




2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF OCV) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and warm it up. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / VVT CTRL B1”. Check the engine speed when operating the OCV by the hand–held tester. Standard: Tester operation

Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON


OK

Go to step 4

NG

3


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG


VVT SYSTEM OK*


4

–



E13

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)




(A)

(A)

(A)

GND


NG


OK

5



OK

6


Go to step 8

NG

7


GO

8


NG


Go to step 10


9

–



GO

10


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

11


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK

VVT SYSTEM OK*




OK




2

–


CHECK OPERATION OF OCV (a) (b)

C2

(–)

Start the engine. Check the engine speed with conditions (1) and then (2). (1) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve connector. (2) Apply battery positive voltage between the terminals of the camshaft timing oil control valve. Result:

(+)


Proceed to

Check (1)

Check (2)

A

Normal engine speed


B

B

Conditions other than A

Go to step 4

A

3


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Disconnecting the battery terminal or removing the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG


VVT SYSTEM OK*


4

–



E13

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E13–15) – OC1– (E13–14)




(A)

(A)

(A)

GND


NG


OK

5



OK

6


Go to step 8

NG

7


GO

8


NG


Go to step 10


9

–



GO

10


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

11


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Disconnecting the battery terminal or removing the EFI and ECTS fuses for more than 60 sec. (b) Start and warm up the engine. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011/59 or P0012/59 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


VVT SYSTEM OK*


DTC

–


05C7F–01

P0016/18 CRANKSHAFT POSITION –CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1 SENSOR A)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0335/12, 13 and P0339/13 on page 05–226. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0016/18

Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and VVT sensor 1 signal (2 trip detection logic)



INSPECTION PROCEDURE Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1






–


05C6T–01

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P2237/21 on page 05–248. HINT: These DTCs are related to the air fuel raito (A/F) sensor, although the caption is the heated oxygen sensor. The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The heated oxygen sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the B+ side of the circuit. Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 1 System Drawing) A/F Relay From Battery

ECM

A/F Sensor Heater

HA1A

Sensor

A1A+

A/F Fuse

A1A–

Duty Control

MREL

B62793

DTC No.


P0031/21 P0051/28

Heated current is 0.8 A or less when heater operates (1 trip detection logic)

P0032/21 P0052/28

When the heater operates, heated current exceeds 19.7 A (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heater circuit of A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F relay ECM

HINT:




–





S

1 A7


Bank 1, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A8

Disconnect the A/F sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals HT and +B of the A/F sensor. Resistance: 1.8 to 3.4 (20 _C)

A75325

Bank 2, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A79112

NG


OK

2


Remove the A/F relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Inspect the A/F relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200


NG


REPLACE A/F RELAY


3

–


INSPECT ECM(VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E12

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the applicable terminals of the E12 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HA1A (E12–6) – E04 (E12–4) HA2A (E12–5) – E05 (E12–3)

HA1A (+) HA2A (+) E04 (–) E05 (–) ECM Connector

HINT: A18294

The HA1A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1. The HA2A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 1. OK

NG


9 to 14 V



4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/F SENSOR – ECM, A/F SENSOR – A/F RELAY) (a)


HT

+B

Check the harness and connector between the ECM and A/F sensor connectors. (1) Disconnect the A7 or A8 A/F sensor connector. (2) Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)


HT (A7–1) – HA1A (E12–6)

A76787

HT (A8–1) – HA2A (E12–5)

Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (A7–1) or HA1A (E12–6) – Body ground HT (A8–1) or HA2A (E12–5) – Body ground

+B


Continuity



HT

Specified condition

(b)

A79114


Check the harness and connector between the A/F sensor connector and A/F relay. (1) Disconnect the A7 or A8 A/F sensor connector. (2) Remove the A/F relay from the engine room R/B No.4. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

E12

Symbols (Terminal No.) +B (A7–2) – A/F relay (3) +B (A8–2) – A/F relay (3)


Standard (Check for short): HA1A


HA2A ECM Connector

+B (A7–2) or A/F relay (3) – Body ground A65745

+B (A8–2) or A/F relay (3) – Body ground



A/F Relay

NG

A79113



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6U–01

DTC

P0100/31 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT

DTC

P0102/31 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0103/31 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT


A

Output Voltage


A53295

DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0100/31

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 sec.

P0102/31

Open in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 sec.

P0103/31

Short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 sec. (+B circuit)


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100/31, P0102/31 or P0103/31”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the mass air flow ratio in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Air Flow Value (gm/s) Approx. 0.0 271.0 or more


Malfunction Mass air flow meter power source circuit open VG circuit open or short E2G circuit open


–



ECM


EFI Relay

2 EFI 1


4

3

5

8 MREL E9

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

GR

2

1

4 2

IE1

B–G EFI No. 1 4


2

1

GR


B–R

1 4B

4

B–G 12 EA1

FL MAIN

W–B

B–R 1

3

G

24 VG E12

2

L–Y

32 EVG E12

Battery EC

A76863




–


When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to

0.0

A

271.0 or more

B


C

*1: The value must be changed when the throttle valve is opened or closed. B

Go to step 6

C


A

2




OK



NG


Specified condition


9 to 14 V

Go to step 5


3

–



E12




Condition

Specified condition

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

OK


NG

4





E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

NG VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–




(c) (d) EFI Relay


Specified condition


A66053

Continuity

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (A6–1)




Ç

Specified condition


No continuity




NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A54396


6



Specified condition


Continuity

NG EVG ECM Connector

OK


A18294



7

–






E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32)



A54396


Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




E12




Condition

Specified condition

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

OK

NG




2

–






NG


Specified condition


9 to 14 V

Go to step 4

A54396

OK

3





E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4

–




(c) (d) EFI Relay

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Remove the EFI No.1 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) EFI relay (3) – EFI No.1 fuse (1)

A66053

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (A6–1)

2 EFI No.1 Fuse


Ç

Continuity



Specified condition






A54396

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C7G–01

DTC

P0110/24 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

DTC

P0112/24 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0113/24 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT


Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) A67628

The intake air temperature sensor is built in the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature is the greater the thermistor resistance value becomes and the higher the intake air temperature is the lower the thermistor resistance value becomes (See Fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from terminal THA (THAR) via resistor R. That is, the resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA (THAR) also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability during cold engine operation.

DTC No.

Proceed to


P0110/24

Step 1


P0112/24

Step 4


P0113/24

Step 2


Trouble Area

O Open en or short in intake air tem temperature erature sensor circuit Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

After confirming DTC ”P0110/24, P0112/24 or P0113/24”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40C (–40

Open circuit

140C (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM


5V G–R

THA 4

E2 5

20 E13

THA

R

28 E2 E13

BR

A72925





Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:



B

Go to step 4

C



2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) (b)

ECM

Mass Air flow meter

(c) (d)


A75743


THA

E2


A54396

OK


NG

3


Mass Air flow meter

(a) (b)

ECM

A75742



E13

THA

E2 ECM Connector


A18294

OK

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)

4



(a) (b) (c)

ECM

A75766

Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

OK


NG

5


ECM

Mass Air flow meter


A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–



INSPECT ECM(THA VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

THA

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals THA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector. Voltage: Intake air temp.

Voltage

20 C (68 F)

0.5 to 3.4 V

60 C (140 F)

0.2 to 1.0 V

E2 ECM Connector

OK


A18294

NG

2



OK

3


E13

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) THA (E13–20) – THA (A6–4)

THA

E2 ECM Connector

E2 (E13–28) – E2 (A6–5) A65743



Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

THA (E13–20) or THA (A6–4) – Body ground

Continuity

A6

THA

E2


NG A54396



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6V–01

DTC

P0115/22 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT

DTC

P0117/22 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0118/22 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A thermistor is built in the engine coolant temperature sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature. The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as those of the intake air temperature sensor. HINT: If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0115/22, P0117/22 or P0118/22” it enters the fail–safe mode in which the engine coolant temperature is assumed to be 80 C (176 F). DTC No.

Proceed to


Step 1

Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0117/22

Step 4

Short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0118/22

Step 2

Open in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.

P0115/22

Trouble Area


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0115/22, P0117/22 or P0118/22”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the engine coolant temperature in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 (284

Short circuit


5V

2

B–W

1

BR

19 THW E13

R

28 E13

E2

A72925



–






Proceed to

–40°C (–40°F)

A

140°C (284°F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–




ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more



OK A76786

CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE WATER TEMP. SENSOR

NG

3



ECM

(b)

A75742

E13

THW

E2 ECM Connector


HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more

OK A18294

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR



4

–




ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

OK A75766


NG

5



(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–



INSPECT ECM(THW VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

THW

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals THW and E2 of the ECM connector. Voltage: Intake air temp.

Voltage

20 C (68 F)

0.5 to 3.4 V

60 C (140 F)

0.2 to 1.0 V

E2 ECM Connector

OK A18294


NG

2

INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (See page 10–20) NG


OK

3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EFI WATER TEMP. SENSOR) (a) (b) E13

(c)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

THW

E2 ECM Connector

Specified condition

THW (E13–19) – Engine coolant temperature sensor (E2–2) A65743

E2 (E13–28) – Engine coolant temperature sensor (E2–1)

Continuity


Specified condition

THW (E13–19) or Engine coolant temperature sensor (E2–2) – Body ground

Continuity



MG A76786



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6W–01

DTC

P0120/41 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0122/41 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0123/41 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT


ECM 5V

VC VTA1 E2

A58684

DTC No.

The throttle position sensor is mounted in the throttle body and detects the throttle valve opening angle. When the throttle valve is fully closed, a voltage of approximately 0.7 V is applied to terminal VTA1 of the ECM. The voltage applied to terminal VTA1 of the ECM increases in proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve and becomes approximately 3.5 to 5.0 V when the throttle valve is fully opened. The ECM judges the vehicle driving conditions from these signals input from terminal VTA1, uses them as one of the conditions for deciding the air–fuel ratio correction, power increase correction and fuel–cut control etc.


Condition (a) of DTC P0120/41, P0122/41 or P0123/41 continues for 2 sec. (Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit)

P0120/41

P0122/41

P0123/41

Trouble Area

Detection conditions for DTCs P0122 and P0123 are not satisfied but condition (a) is satisfied (a) VTA1 less than 0.1 V, or VTA1 greater than 4.9 V


(a) VTA1 less than 0.1 V


(a) VTA1 greater than 4.9 V

Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body) Open in VTA1 circuit Open in E2 circuit VC and VTA1 circuit are short–circuited ECM

NOTICE: When a malfunction is detected, the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: After confirming DTCs, use the hand–held tester to confirm the throttle valve opening percentage and closed throttle position switch condition.



–



Trouble Area



0%

0%


Approx. 100 %

Approx. 100 %

E2 circuit open

WIRING DIAGRAM T2 Throttle Position Sensor

ECM 5V 1

R–W

VTA 3

L–W

E2 2

BR

VC

18 VC E13

21 VTA1 E13

28 E2 E13 E1 A12544





–




(a) (b)

Released

Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / THROTTLE POS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Accelerator pedal operation


Proceed to

0%

A


B

Approx. 100 %

C

FI7052

ReleasedDepressed

B


C

Go to step 4

A

2


T2



Throttle Valve

Resistance

VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2)

2.5 to 5.9 k

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)


OK


A53154

NG



3

–



E13

VC VTA1

E2

ECM Connector

A65159

Reconnect the throttle position sensor connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


Throttle valve

Resistance

VC (E13–18) – EC (E13–28)

2.5 to 5.9 k

VTA1 (E13 (E13–21) 21) – E2 (E13–28)

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

(d)


Specified condition


No Continuity

VTA1 (E13–21) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4


T2


Symbols (Terminal No.) VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2) VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)


OK


A53154

NG

Throttle Valve

Resistance

2.5 to 5.9 k

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k



5

–



E13


VC VTA1

E2

Specified condition

VC (T2–1) – VC (E13–18) VTA (T2–3) – VTA1 (E13–21)

ECM Connector

Continuity y

E2 (T2–2) – E2 (E13–28)

A65159


Wire Harness Side


T2


1

2


3

VC


A79044

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–




E13


VTA1

E2

Specified condition

VC (T2–1) – VC (E13–18)

VC

VTA (T2–3) – VTA1 (E13–21)

ECM Connector

Continuity y

E2 (T2–2) – E2 (E13–28)

A65159


Wire Harness Side

Specified condition


T2

No continuity


1

2

3

NG

VC


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A79044

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(VC VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c)

E13

VC (+)


Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V

NG A18294

OK

3


GO




4 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Clear the DTC (See page 05–149). Start the engine. Run the engine at idle for more than 15 seconds. Read the DTC (See page 05–149). Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0120/41, P0122/41 or P0123/41” is output again

A

”P0120/41, P0122/41 or P0123/41” is not output again

B



SYSTEM OK


–


05C6X–01

DTC


DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The heated oxygen sensor is the lamination type. Compared to the conventional type, the sensor and heater portions of the lamination type are narrower overall. Because the heat of the heater acts directly on the alumina and zirconia (of the sensor portion) it accelerates the activation of the sensor. To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three–way catalytic converter is used. But for the most efficient use of the three–way catalytic converter, the air–fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The heated oxygen sensor has the characteristic whereby its output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This is used to detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and provide the ECM with feedback control the air–fuel ratio. When the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas increases. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the LEAN condition (low voltage, i.e. less than 0.45 V). When the air–fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas is reduced. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the RICH condition (high voltage, i.e. more than 0.45 V). The ECM judges by the voltage output from the heated oxygen sensor whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. However, if the malfunction of the heated oxygen sensor causes an output of abnormal voltage, the ECM becomes unable to perform accurate air–fuel ratio control. The heated oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), current flows to the heater in order to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection.


Element Exhaust Gas

DTC No

P0136/27 P0156/29

A

Output Voltage


Cover Air

A


A–A Section DTC Detection Condition

The following g condition continues for 480 sec. or more: During driving with the engine warmed up, voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor remains at 0.45 V or more, or 0.60 V or less.


A66651

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) Heated oxygen o gen sensor heater (bank 1, 1 2 sensor 2) EFI relay


–


HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No.1. Bank 2 refers to the bank that does not include cylinder No.1. Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.


ECM 2 IE1

GR

8 E9 MREL

GR

Engine Room R/B No.4 EFI No.2

4

4 3

4

1

2

4

13 EA1

B–W

1 EFI Engine Room Relay R/B No.4

5

2 4

4 B–Y

1 2 EFI 1 1 1A

W–B

B–W H8 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) B–W L 1 2 4


4 IK1

L

4 E10 HT1B

B

21 E12 OX1B

W

32 E13 O1B–

3

BR

D J12 J/C

B–G

E J13

1 4A

BR


H10 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2) L–R B–W 1 2 4

(*1) 10 IK1

L–R

3 E10 HT2B

R

29 E12 OX2B

G

31 E13 O2B–

3

D J13 (*1)

J/C E J12

FL MAIN

BR

*1: Shielded

Battery EC

EF

A76884



–



Vehicle speed



(L3)

(L3)

40 km/h (25 mph)

12 times 40 sec. or more (L3)

Idling(L2)

(L4)

(L4)

60 sec. or more

10 sec.

10 sec.

(L5)

IG SW OFF

(L1)

10 sec.

A58686

1. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (L1) 2. Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check mode (See page 05–149). (L1) 3. Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more. (L2) 4. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more. (L3) 5. Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more. (L4) 6. Perform steps 4 to 5 12 times. (L5) HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG will be illuminated on the multi–information display during step 6. NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of the malfunction will be impossible. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from 3 to 6, then perform steps from 3 to 6 again.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately. 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: Less than 3.0 V –12.5 % lean output: More than 3.35 V Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–


NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the A/F sensor output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the heated oxygen sensor output. Output voltage of A/F sensor (sensor 1)


Injection volume

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %

Case 1 Output voltage More than 3.35 V Less than 3.0 V

OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


NG


NG


Output voltage

More than 3.35 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 3.0V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Output voltage NG

No reaction

The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST/ A/F CONTROL/USER DATA”, then select ”AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”AFS B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1 (a)

–


READ OUTPUT DTC(BESIDES DTC P0136/27) Read the DTC. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0136/27” is output

A

”P0136/27” and other DTCs are output

B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0136/27” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B


A

2


(a) After warming up the engine, run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 3 minutes. (b) Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor when the engine rpm is suddenly increased. HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times by using the accelerator pedal. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates from 0.4 V or less to 0.5 V or more. OK

Go to step 6

NG

3


H8

(a) (b)


HT

+B 2 4 E1

1 3 OX

Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector A79117

OK




Condition

Specified condition

HT (H8–1) – +B (H8–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H8–1) – E1 (H8–4)

'

No Continuity

HT (H10–1) – +B (H10–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H10–1) – E1 (H10–4)

'

No Continuity

NG



4

–




Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

5



(b) (c)

H10 Bank 2 Sensor 2

Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. Disconnect the E10 and E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

OX


Specified condition

OX (H8–3) – OX1B (E12–21)


HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E10–4)

A79118

Continuity

OX (H10–3) – OX2B (E12–29) HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E10–3)


E10


Specified condition


No continuity


OX1B OX2B HT1B HT2B ECM Connector

A65747



EFI Fuse


EFI No.2 Fuse

Sensor

ECM HT1B OX1B O1B–

Duty Control

MREL


A79115


NG

–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6


HINT: Clear all DTCs prior to perform the confirmation driving pattern. GO

7 (a)

READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P0136/27 IS OUTTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0136/27” is not output again

A

”P0136/27” is output again

B

B




OR


–


05C6Y–01

DTC

P0141/27 OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC

P0161/29 OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK 2 SENSOR 2)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0136/27 on page 05–211. HINT: The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The heated oxygen sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the B+ side of the circuit. Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 2 System Drawing) EFI Relay From Battery

EFI Fuse


EFI No.2 Fuse

Sensor

ECM HT1B OX1B O1B– MREL

A79115

DTC No. P0141/27 P0161/29

DTC Detection Condition Heated current is 0.2 A or less when heater operates (1 trip detection logic) When heater operates, heated current exceeds 2 A (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor yg sensor heater Heated oxygen EFI relay ECM

HINT:







–


1


H8

(a) (b)


HT

+B 2 4 E1


Condition

HT (H8–1) – +B (H8–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H8–1) – E1 (H8–4)

No Continuity

HT (H10–1) – +B (H10–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H10–1) – E1 (H10–4)

No Continuity

1 3 OX



A79117

NG

Specified condition


OK

2


Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B. Inspect the EFI relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(HT1B OR HT2B VOLTAGE)

E13

(a) (b)

E10

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the applicable terminals of the E10 and E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HT1B (E10–4) – E01 (E13–7) HT2B (E10–3) – E01 (E13–7)

E01 (–)

HT1B (+) HT2B (+) ECM Connector

A18294

HINT: S S

The HT1B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2. The HT2B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 2. OK

NG


9 to 14 V



4

–




EFI No.2 Fuse

Ç

(b)


NG

OK


A79069



5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – EFI RELAY) (a)


+B

H10 Bank 2 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector

Check the harness and connector between the ECM and heated oxygen sensor connectors. (1) Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (2) Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

A79118

HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E10–4) HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E10–3)



Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (H8–1) or HT1B (E10–4) – Body ground HT (H10–1) or HT2B (E10–3) – Body ground

(b) HT1B HT2B ECM Connector

A65744


Ç Ç


Check the harness and connector between the heated oxygen sensor connector and EFI relay. (1) Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (2) Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. (3) Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. (4) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (H8–2) – EFI No.2 fuse (2)

+B (H10–2) – EFI No.2 fuse (2)

A79070

Continuity y

EFI No.2 fuse (1) – EFI relay (3)




Specified condition

+B (H8–2) or EFI No.2 fuse (2) – Body ground +B (H10–2) or EFI No.2 fuse (2) – Body ground

No continuityy

EFI No.2 fuse (1) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground

EFI Relay

NG A66053



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6Z–01

DTC

P0325/52 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0327/52 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0328/52 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A flat type knock sensor (non–resonant type) has the structure that can detect the vibration in a wider band of frequency from about 6 kHz to 15 kHz and has the following features. Knock sensors are fitted on the cylinder block to detect the engine knocking. Sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, the ignition timing is retarded to suppress it. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0325/52

Output voltage of the knock sensor 1 decreases beyond a threshold. (Threshold varies according to an engine speed.)


P0327/52

Output voltage the knock sensor 1 is 0.5 V or less.


P0328/52

Output voltage the knock sensor 1 is 4.5 V or more.


Reference: The correct waveform is as shown.

KNK Signal Waveform

Item

A05134


Contents

Terminal

KNK1 – EKNK

Equipment Set

0.01 to 10 V/ DIV, 0.01 to 10 msec./ DIV

Condition

After warming up the engine, keep the engine speed 4,000 rpm.


–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

(Shielded)

B

K1 Knock Sensor 2 1

B

1 KNK1 E12

W

2 EKNK E12

BR BR E J12

D J12 J/C

EF D J13

E J13 BR A76872


1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTC (See page 05–149). Warm up the engine. Accelerate the engine to 3,000 rpm for 10 seconds or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–149). Result : Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0325/52” is output again

A

”P0325/52, P0327/52 and/or P0328/52” are output again

B

B A


Go to step 3


2 (a)

–


CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Check the knock sensor installation. Torque: 20 Nm (204 kgfcm, 15 ftlbf) NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR


3


E12


KNK1


EKNK

KNK1 (E12–1) – Knock sensor (K1–2)


EKNK (E12–2) – Knock sensor (K1–1)

ECM Connector


A65745


Specified condition

KNK1 (E12–1) or Knock sensor (K1–2) – Body ground EKNK (E12–2) or Knock sensor (K1–1) – Body ground

NG

No continuity

Go to step 5

OK

4

INSPECT ECM(KNK1 VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c)

E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 ECM side terminals. Standard:

KNK1


Specified condition

EKNK

KNK1 (E12–1) – EKNK (E12–2)

4.5 to 5.5 V

ECM Connector

A79072



REPLACE ECM


5

–



A65174

Remove knock sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard:


Condition

Specified condition

FKN+ (1) – FKN– (2)

20 _C (68 _F)

120 to 280

NG





–


05C70–01

DTC


DTC


DTC

P0339/13 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate) has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signal, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G and NE signal. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0335/12

No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking (2 trip detection logic)

P0335/13

No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more (1 trip detection logic)

P0339/13

In condition (a), (b) and (c), when no crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal is input for 0.05 sec. or more. (a) Engine revolution 1,000 rpm or more (b) STA signal is OFF (c) 3 sec. or more has lapsed after STA signal is switched from ON to OFF.

CH1 (G2+) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND

A63955


Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor Signal plate (crankshaft) ECM


Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition



–



Camshaft Timing Roter

ECM

(Shielded)

1

W

2

R


E

26 G2+ E13

BR R

1

G

2

R

27 NE+ E13 BR

Crankshaft Position Sensor Plate

R

(Shielded)

34 E13

NE–

EF

A79124


Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335/12, 13 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the engine mechanical systems. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

S

1


C6


Measure the resistance between the terminals of the crankshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 985 to 1,600 at cold 1,265 to 1,890 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50 _C (122 _F) and ”Hot” is from 50 _C (122 _F) to 100 _C (212 _F). NG




2

–





NE+

NE–

Specified condition

NE+ (C6–1) – NE+ (E13–27)


Continuity

NE– (C6–2) – NE– (E13–34)


Specified condition

NE+ (C6–1) or NE+ (E13–27) – Body ground

No continuity

NE– (C6–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground

E13 NE+

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Check the crankshaft position sensor installation . NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a)

CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE(TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE(CRANKSHAFT)) Check the teeth of the sensor plate. NG



REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE (CRANKSHAFT)


–


05C71–01

DTC

P0340/12 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0341/12 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor (G signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G signal rotor has 3 teeth on its outer circumference and is installed on the intake camshaft. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil changes, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate) has 34 teeth and is installed to the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signals, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G and NE signals. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0340/12

No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking (1 tri trip detection logic) No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more (1 trip detection logic)

P0341/12

While crankshaft rotates twice, camshaft position sensor signal is input to ECM 12 times or more (1 trip detection logic)

CH1 (G2+) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND

Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft C h ft position iti sensor Camshaft timing pulley Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM


Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


A63955





1

–



C1


Measure the resistance between the terminals of camshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 835 to 1,400 (Cold) 1,060 to 1,645 (Hot) NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG


OK

2




G– G+ Camshaft Position Sensor Connector A66132

G– (C1–2) – NE– (E13–34)


Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) G+ (C1–1) or G2+ (E13–26) – Body ground G– (C1–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground


E13 G2

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Check the camshaft position sensor installation. NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

HARNESS

OR


4 (a)

–





REPLACE CAMSHAFT


–


05C72–01

DTC

P0351/14 IGNITION COIL ”A” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0352/15 IGNITION COIL ”B” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0353/14 IGNITION COIL ”C” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0354/15 IGNITION COIL ”D” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT


These DTCs indicate a malfunction related to primary circuit. If DTC P0351/14 is displayed, check No.1 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P0352/15 is displayed, check No.2 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P0353/14 is displayed, check No.3 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P0354/15 is displayed, check No.4 ignition coil with igniter circuit. A Direct Ignition System (DIS) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduces high–voltage loss, and enhances the overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor. The DIS is a 1–cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1–cylinder ignition system, the one spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary winding. High voltage generated in the secondary winding is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug passes from the center electrode to the ground electrode. The ECM determines the ignition timing and outputs the ignition (IGT) signals for each cylinder. Based on the IGT signals, the power transistors in the igniter cut off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil is supplied to the spark plug that is connected to the end of the secondary coil. At the same time, the igniter also sends an ignition confirmation (IGF) signal as a fail–safe measure to the ECM.



–


From Battery

ECM

Igniter No.1 Ignition Coil with Igniter


No.1 Cylinder



IGT3

IGT4 Various Sensor

Spark Plug


No.2 Cylinder


No.3 Cylinder


No.4 Cylinder

TAC

To Tachometer

A73818

DTC No. P0351/14 P0352/15 P0353/14 P0354/15



Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform between terminals IGT1 to IGT4 and E1, and IGF and E1 of the E4 and ECM connectors.

CH1 (IGT1 to 4)

GND

CH2 (IGF)

GND

A63956


Trouble Area Ignition system Open or short in IGF and IGT1 to 4 circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM No. 1 to 4 ignition coil with igniter IG2 relay ECM


–



B–R 4

AM2 IG2

Driver Side J/B

2

6 B–R


1


W–B

IGN

16 DL B

1 1A

B–R R–B

1 4

B–G

B

1 4A


1 4B

4 IG2 Relay

5

1

R–B 3

2

4


4 R–B

1

2

R–W

W–B


8 E13 IGT1

W–R


IG2 2

1

3

R–B

2 DH

1 AM2

4

ECM

IGT2

IGT3 IGF

IGT4

B–G 8 EA1 FL MAIN

R–B W–B

R–B B–R 1 Battery EC

N2 Noise Filter (Ignition)

EF

A76873



–



1

CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER NG

Go to step 4

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – IGNITION COIL) (a) E13

(b) (c)


IGF ECM Connector

Specified condition


A65743

Continuity



I2

I3


I4


Specified condition


No continuity


IGF Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector

NG A54393

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3

INSPECT ECM

E13

IGF(+)

(a) (b) (c)

E12

E1(–) ECM Connector


A18294

Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IGF (E13–13) – E1 (E12–7)

4.5 to 5.5 V


NG

–




4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM (IGT TERMINAL) – IGNITION COIL) (a) E13

(b) (c)


IGT4

IGT3


Specified condition


A65743

Continuity



I2

I3


I4


Specified condition


No continuity


IGT Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector

A54393

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5


E1(–) E13

E12

Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors when the engine is cranked. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IGT1 (E13–8) – E1 (E12–7) IGT2 (E13–9) – E1 (E12–7) IGT3 (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)

IGT4(+) IGT3(+) IGT2(+) IGT1(+) ECM Connector

OK


Between 0.1 0 1 V and 4.5 45V

IGT4 (E13–11) – E1 (E12–7) A18294

NG



6

–



E1(–) E13

E12

(b)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil and igniter connector. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors when the engine is cranked. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IGT1 (E13–8) – E1 (E12–7)

IGT4(+) IGT3(+) IGT2(+) IGT1(+)

IGT2 (E13–9) – E1 (E12–7)

ECM Connector

4 5 V or more 4.5

IGT3 (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7)

A18294

IGT4 (E13–11) – E1 (E12–7)

NG


OK

7

INSPECT IGNITION COIL ASSY(POWER SOUSE CIRCUIT) (a)


I2

I3

I4

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil and igniter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON position. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)


Specified condition

+B (I1–1) – GND (I1–4) +B (I2–1) – GND (I2–4)

A54393

9 to 14 V

+B (I3–1) – GND (I3–4) +B (I4–1) – GND (I4–4)

OK


NG

8



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


9

–


CHECK FUSE(IGN) (a) (b)

Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG A79096


OK

10

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – IGNITION COIL AND IGNITER) (a)


I1

I3

I4

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil and igniter connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)


Specified condition


A54393

+B (I3–1) – IG2 relay (3)

Continuity

+B (I4–1) – IG2 relay (3)



Specified condition


No continuity


IG2 Relay

A79064

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


11

–




IG2



IG2 (I13–6) – IGN fuse (1)

A66267




Driver Side J/B 1


2



IGN Fuse

A79103


IG2 Relay

A79064

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C73–01



4–Pulse

From Speed Sensor

Skid Control ECU

4–Pulse

Combination Meter

ECM

A79413

DTC No.

P0500/42

DTC Detection Condition During the vehicle is being driven, no vehicle speed sensor signal to the ECM (2 trip detection logic)




–


WIRING DIAGRAM


18 C11

V–W

H H J10 J20

J/C

H H J10 J20

V–W

17 E10 SPD


A76866


1



OK




2

–


INSPECT ECM E1 (–) E12

(a) (b) (c) (d)

SPD (+) E10

ECM Connector


Specified condition

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)


A18294


4.5–5.5V

0V


Turn Wheel

NG

A62954



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

–


05C74–01

P0511/33 IDLE AIR CONTROL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Throttle Valve

The rotary solenoid type idle speed control (ISC) valve is located under the throttle body and intake air bypassing the throttle valve is directed to the idle speed control (ISC) valve through the passage. In this way the intake air volume bypassing the throttle valve is regulated, controls the engine speed. The ECM operates the idle speed control (ISC) valve only to perform idle–up and provide feedback for the target idling speed.

Intake Air Chamber


ECM Valve


DTC No.

P0511/33


Trouble Area Open or short in idle speed control (ISC) valve circuit Idle speed control (ISC) valve is stuck or closed A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM




12 B–R 2 +B EA1

DUTY

GND

ECM 1

3

10 E12 RSD

G–R

W–B

BR

7 E12 E1

EF

A79101




–


When using hand–held tester: 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)



NG

2



1

2

3

+B (+)

NG

GND (–)

OK



A66264


Specified condition

+B (I10–2) – GND (I10–3)

9 to 14 V

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–



E12


Specified condition

DUTY (I10–1) – RSD (E12–10)

E1

RSD ECM Connector


A65745


1

2

Continuity

GND (I10–3) – E1 (E12–7)


Specified condition


No continuity

3

GND

DUTY

NG

A66264

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4






E12

E1 (–)

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E4 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

RSD (E12–10) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

RSD (+) ECM Connector


OK A65745

Go to step 3


2

–





3



OK

4

CHECK BLOCKAGE OF ISC VALVE AND PASSAGE TO BYPASS THROTTLE VALVE NG





DTC

–


05C75–01

P0606/89 ECM/PCM PROCESSOR

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0606/89

DTC Detection Condition ECM inside error

Trouble Area ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)



–


05C76–01

DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC


DTC




–


DTC


DTC


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: This DTC is recorded when A/F sensor has a malfunction, although the caption is healed oxygen sensor. The air–fuel ratio sensor are the lamination type. Compared to the conventional type, the sensor and heater portions of the lamination type are narrower overall. Because the heat of the heater acts directly on the alumina and zirconia (of the sensor portion) it accelerates the activation of the sensor. To obtain a high purification rate of the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three–way catalytic converter is used. For the most efficient use of the three–way catalytic converter, the air–fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The A/F sensor has the characteristic that it provides output voltage* being approximately proportional to the existing air–fuel ratio. The A/F sensor output voltage* is used to provide feedback for the ECM to control the air–fuel ratio. By the A/F sensor output, the ECM can determine the deviation amount from the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio and control the proper injection time immediately. If the A/F sensor is out of order, ECM is unable to perform the accurate air–fuel ratio control. The A/F sensor is equipped with a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), the current flows to the heater to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection. *: The voltage value changes at the inside of the ECM only.

Heater

Platinum Electrode

Element Exhaust Gas

A

ECM Monitored A/F Sensor Voltage

Solid Electrolyte (Zirconia Element)

Cover Air

A A–A Section


Air–Fuel Ratio A73819


DTC Detecting Condition A/F sensor circuit (bank 1 sensor 1)

P2237/21 P2240/28

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF+ less than 0.5 V (b) AF+ greater than 4.5 V Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) (AF+) – (AF–) less than 0.1 V (b) (AF+) – (AF–) greater than 0.8 V A/F sensor circuit low (bank 1 sensor 1)

P2238/21 P2241/28

Condition (a) continues for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF+ less than 0.5 V Condition (a) continues for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) (AF+) – (AF–) less than 0.1 V A/F sensor circuit high (bank 1 sensor 1)

P2239/21 P2242/28

Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF+ greater than 4.5 V Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) (AF+) – (AF–) greater than 0.8 V

P2251/21 P2254/28

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF– less than 0.5 V (b) AF– greater than 4.5 V

P2252/21 P2255/28

Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (a) AF– less than 0.5 V

P2253/21 P2256/28

Condition (a) continue for 5.0 sec. or more : (b) AF– greater than 4.5 V

–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) Trouble Area HINT : Main trouble area Open or short in A/F sensor circuit Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM HINT : Main trouble area Open in A/F sensor circuit Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM HINT : Main trouble area Short in A/F sensor circuit Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM Open or short in A/F sensor circuit A/F sensor A/F sensor heater A/F sensor heater relay A/F sensor heater and relay circuit ECM

HINT:

means malfunction related to bank 1 A/F sensor circuit. means malfunction related to bank 2 A/F sensor circuit. Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No. 1. Bank 2 refers to the bank that includes cylinder No. 2.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM W ECM

W 2 IE1

GR

GR

8 E9 MREL

4

4 3

1 A/F Relay

5

1 EA1

2 EA1 W

W


L

6 E12 HA1A

W

23 E12 A1A+

B

31 E12 A1A–

2 4

4


B–R 1 2 A/F 1 1 1A

3


W–B

(*1)

BR

D J12


Y

5 E12 HA2A

G

22 E12 A2A+

L

30 E12 A2A–

J/C

B–G

E J13

1 4A

BR


4

3

D J13 (*1)

J/C E J12

FL MAIN

BR

*1: Shielded

Battery EC

EF

A76886



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: Less than 3.0 V –12.5 % lean output: More than 3.35 V Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the A/F sensor output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the heated oxygen sensor output.



Output voltage of A/F sensor (sensor 1)

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


NG


NG


Output voltage

More than 3.35 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 3.0V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 3.0 V



Injection volume

More than 3.35 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph voltage output of both the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST/ A/F CONTROL/USER DATA”, then select ”AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”AFS B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If DTC is displayed, check bank 1 sensor 1 circuit. If DTC is displayed, check bank 2 sensor 1 circuit. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1 A7



Bank 1, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A8

–

Disconnect the A/F sensor connector. Measure resistance between terminals HT and +B of the A/F sensor. Resistance: 1.8 to 3.4 (20_C)

A75325

Bank 2, Sensor 1 +B

HT

AF–

AF+ A/F Sensor

A79112

NG


OK

2


Remove the A/F sensor heater relay from the engine room R/B. Inspect the A/F senor heater relay. Standard: Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2


3–5 B16200

NG OK



REPLACE A/F RELAY


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – A/F SENSOR) (a) (b) (c)

Wire Harness Side A7 Bank 1 Sensor 1 HT

+B

Disconnect the A7 or A8 A/F sensor connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

AF+

Specified condition

AF+ (A7–3) – A1A+ (E12–23)

AF–

AF– (A7–4) – A1A– (E12–31)

A/F Connector

A76787

HT (A7–1) – HA1A (E12–6)

Continuity

AF+ (A8–3) – A2A+ (E12–22) AF– (A8–4) – A2A– (E12–30)


HT (A8–1) – HA2A (E12–5)

Standard (Check for short): +B

HT


Specified condition


AF+


AF–

No continuity


A/F Connector

A79114


E12 A1A+ A2A+ A2A– HA1A

HA2A

A1A– A65745


A/F Relay From Battery

ECM

A/F Sensor Heater

HA1A

Sensor

A1A+

A/F Fuse

A1A–

Duty Control

MREL

B62793



NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6M–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI0534


Hand–Held Tester

A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–161). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3).


(b)

FI0534


–


* 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine condition when a misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304) or fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171) or other malfunction (first malfunction only), is detected. Because freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. Description for M–OBD (Except European spec.) When troubleshoot Multiplex OBD (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand– held tester to the vehicle, and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in drive system components. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–161). When the malfunction does not reoccur, the CHK ENG is indicated until the ignition switch is turned off, and then the CHK ENG is not indicated when the ignition switch is turned on but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.


Hand–Held Tester

A76859

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 DLC3 A04550


–


To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle or read the DTC which is indicated on the multi information display when TC and CG terminals on the DLC3 are connected. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (for operating instructions, see the instruction book.) The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, water temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 14230(M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 14230 format.


–



Condition

7


During transmission

4


Always

16


Always

Terminal No.

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Deparment listed in the tool’s instruction manual. (d) Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (e)

FI0534

A76859


HINT: If the CHK ENG lamp is not illuminated, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. 2. DTC CHECK (Nomal Mode) : NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.

(a)

Hand–Held Tester


Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down. The hand–held tester’s instruction book. (4) See page 05–161 to confirm the details of the DTCs.


(b) CG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

–


If you have no hand–held tester, perform the following steps (1) to (6). (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (2) Using SST, connect between terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040

DLC3 TC A04550

(3)

Read DTC by observing the CHK ENG lamp. If any DTC is not detected, the CHK ENG lamp blinks as shown in the illustration.

(4)

Example If DTC 12 and DTC 31 are detected, the CHK ENG flashes 1 time (for 0.5 sec) and flashes 2 times after the 1.5 sec interval, then flashes 3 times after a 2.5 sec interval from the previous DTC and flashes 1 time. If the interval between the previous DTC and the next DTC is 4.5 sec, it means the previous DTC is the last one of the multiple string DTCs. The CHK ENG lamp repeats the indication of DTCs from the initial cycle. (Refer to the illustration on the left) Check the details of the malfunction using the DTC chart on page 05–16. After completing the check, disconnect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) and turn off the display.

0.25sec. ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF 0.25sec. FI0294

0.5 sec.

1.5 sec. 4.5 sec.

4.5 sec. ON OFF

2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. Repeat

Start

One Cycle BR3589

(5) (6)

HINT: In the event that 2 or more DTCs are detected, the CHK ENG lamp will indicate the smaller number DTC first. (c) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (d) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds.



–


3. DTC CHECK (Check Mode): HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check (test) mode. (a) Proceduce for check mode using hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions Battery positive voltage 11V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”P” or ”N” position. Air conditioning switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (4) Turn the ignition switch and the hand–held tester main switch ON.

Hand–Held Tester

A76859

(5)




NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG lamp goes out after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the nomal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTCs, inspect the applicable circuit.


(b)

(c)

–


Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnecting the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds.




P0031/21 P0032/21 P0051/28 P0052/28

The heater circuit in which the abnormality is detected is turned off

Ignition switch OFF

P0100/31 P0102/31 P0103/31

Ignition timing is calculated from engine speed and a throttle angle


P0110/24 P0112/24 P0113/24

Intake air temp. is fixed at 20 C (68 F)


P0115/22 P0117/22 P0118/22

Engine coolant temp. is fixed at 80


P0120/41 P0122/41 P0123/41

Fuel cut intermittently while idling

Returned to normal condition and ignition switch OFF

P0325/52 P0327/52 P0328/52


Ignition switch OFF

P0351/14 P0352/15 P0353/14 P0354/15

Fuel cut


5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s engine ECM in check (test) mode, 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of 2 trip detection logic, and sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTC. (See step 3.) (b) Set the check (test) mode. (See step 3.) (c) Perform a simulation test. (See page 01–22) (d) Check the connector and terminal. (See page 01–32) (e) Wiggle the harness and the connector. (See page 01–32)



–


6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if the measured values are a little different from those listed here. Do not decide whether a part is faulty or not solely according to the ”Normal Condition” here. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Hand–held Tester Display


Normal Condition

Diagnostic Note

INJECTOR

Injection period/ Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 32.64 ms


'

IGN ADVANCE

Ignition timing advance/ Min.: –64 deg., Max.: 63.5 deg.

Idling: BTDC 5 to 15 deg.

'

CALC LOAD

Calculated load by engine ECM/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %

S Idling: 3.3 to 26.7 % S Running without load (2,500 rpm): 12.0 to 14.7 %

'

MAF


S Idling: M/T 0.54 to 4.33 gm/sec. A/T 0.58 to 4.67 gm/sec. S Runnning without load (2,500 rpm): 3.33 to 9.17 gm/sec.

'

ENGINE SPD

Engine Speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16,383 rpm

Idling: M/T 650 to rpm A/T 550 to rpm

'

COOLANT TEMP


INTAKE AIR


THROTTLE POS


CTP SW


VEHICLE SPD


Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (0 mph)

'

O2S B1 S2

Oxygen sensor output voltage of the bank 1 sensor 2/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 1.275 V


'

AFS B1 S1

A/F sensor output voltage of the bank 1 sensor 1/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 7.999 V


'


After warming up: 80 to 95C (176 to 203 Equivalent to ambient temp. S Throttle fully closed: 6 to 16 % S Throttle fully open: 64 to 98 % S Throttle fully closed: ON S Throttle open: OFF

If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C” sensor circuit _C”, i it is i open or shorted. Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine) '


–


SHORT FT #1


0 20 %

'

LONG FT #1


0 20 %

'

TOTAL FT #1


Idling: 0.5 to 1.4

'

TOTAL FT #2


Idling: 0.5 to 1.4

'

AF FT B1 S1

Short term fuel trim associated with the bank 1, sensor 1/ Min.: 0, Max.: 1.999

Lean: 0 < 1 Stoichiometric Air–Fuel Ratio = 1 Rich: 1 < 1.999

'


OL: Open Loop–has not yet satisfied conditions to go closed loop. CL: Closed Loop–using oxygen sensor(s) as feed back for fuel control. OL DRIVE: Open loop due to driving conditions. (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) OL FAULT: Open loop due to detected system fault. CL FAULT: Closed loop, but fault with at least one oxygen sensor may be using single oxygen sensor for fuel control.

FUEL SYS #1

Fuel system status (Bank1) / OL or CL or OLDRIVE or OLFAULT or CLFAULT

FC IDL

Idle fuel cut / ON or OFF


'

CHK ENG

CHK ENG status / ON or OFF

CHK ENG ON: ON

'

STARTER SIG

Starter signal / ON or OFF

Cranking: ON

'

A/C SIG

A/C signal / ON or OFF

A/C ON: ON

'

PNP SW [NSW]

Neutral position switch signal / ON or OFF

P or N position: ON

'

ELECT LOAD SIG

Electrical load signal / ON or OFF

Defogger switch ON: ON

'

STOP LIGHT SW



'

PS OIL PRESS SW

Power steering signal / ON or OFF

Steering position is; center: OFF Except center:ON

'

PS SIGNAL


After engine start: OFF After steer the steering: ON

'

FUEL PUMP / SPD

Fuel pump / speed status / ON/H or OFF/M,L

Idling: ON

'

EVAP VSV

VSV status for EVAP control / ON or OFF

VSV operating: ON

'

VVT CTRL B1

VVT control status / ON or OFF


'

IGNITION


0 to 400

'

CYL #1, #2, #3, #4

Misfire ratio of the cylinder 1/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 50 %

0%

'



THROTTLE POS

Throttle position sensor output voltage/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

THROTTLE TARGT


–


Throttle fully closed: 0.3 to 0.8 V Throttle fully open: 3.2 to 4.9 V


Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine) Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten diagnostic time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST”. (g) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOL

A/F CONTROL

EVAP VSV (ALONE)

FUEL PUMP / SPD

Test Details

Diagnostic Note

[Test Details] Control the injection volume Min.: –12.5 %, Max.: 25 % [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3000 rpm or less.


[Test Details] Control the injection volume –12.5 % @ 25 % (Change the injection volume –12.5 % or 25 %.) [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3000 rpm or less.

The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor. To display the graph indication, select O2S B1 S1 or A/F B1S1 and press button ”4” after selecting ”ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/ USER DATA”.

[Test Details] Activate the VSV for EVAP control. ON or OFF

'

[Test Details] Control the fuel pump. ON or OFF

'

VVT CTRL B1

[Test Details] Activate the VVT system. ON or OFF

TC/TE1


'


'

FC IDL PROHBT




–



1



NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V


OK

2



NG

GO TO STEP 6

OK

3


OK

4

CHECK AIR FILTER


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

5


OK




6

–




OK

7



OK PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6Q–01


Suspected Area

See page


1. Starter 2. Starter relay


1. ECM power source circuit 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. ECM

05–257 05–264 01–32



05–264


1. Starter signal circuit 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. Compression

05–278 05–264 14–101



05–278 05–264



05–278 05–264


1. A/C signal circuit (Compressor circuit) 2. ECM power source circuit

05–257


1. A/C signal circuit (Compressor circuit) 2. Fuel pump control circuit

05–264


1. Compression 2. Fuel pump control circuit

14–101 05–264


1. ECM power source circuit 2. Fuel pump control circuit

05–257 05–264


1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. A/T faulty

05–264 05–879



05–264



05–264

Engine stalls during A/C operation


01–32

Unable to refuel/Difficult to refuel

1. ORVR system


19–8 19–8


–


05C7B–01


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch B–R


B–R

4

5

ECM B–Y

9 E12 STA

B–R B–Y 1 2 AM2 1

Engine Room R/B No. 1 Engine Room J/B No.1

5

5 5

B–Y 6

1 ST Relay

1 1A B–G

5

1 4A

1 4B

B–R

1 1 S4 S5

B J13

C J13

J/C

B J12

A J12

A J12

2 DJ

B Driver Side J/B

FL MAIN

B–Y

B–Y

B–W

W–B

7 IK1

B–G

ST

6

5 B


1 2

2

3

Driver Side R/B

Fuse Block

9 DA

B–Y (M/T)

Starter W–B

Battery

B–Y (A/T)

B–W (A/T)

IJ 9

6

N1 Neutral Start SW A76870



–




READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STA SIGNAL) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STARTER SIG” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Ignition Switch Position

ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

NG




2

–



E12

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD

Starter Relay

NG

A79098

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR



INSPECT ECM(STA VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E12

E1 (–)

STA (+) ECM Connector


A18294


Specified condition

STA (E12–9) – E1 (E12–7)

0V


(c)

–


Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 ECM connector when the engine is cranked. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

STA (E12–9) – E1 (E12–7)

6 V or more

OK


NG

2


E12

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD

Starter Relay

NG A79098



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C7D–01



J8 J/C 13

W–L (LHD)

Driver Side J/B B

B

17 DB

W–L (LHD)

W–L (RHD) CG

4

A

20 E9 TC

W–L

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (RHD) W–B (LHD)

3 DC

ECM

6 CA W–B (RHD)

A W–B (LHD) J16 J/C

IO

IP

A76890



1


(a) (b)

TC (+)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


Specified condition

9 10111213141516

TC (13) – CG (4)

9 to 14 V

DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NG


Go to step 3


2

–



TC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


9 10111213141516 DLC3


Specified condition

TC (13) – TC (E9–20)

Continuity


DLC3 A04550


Specified condition


No continuity

E9

TC ECM Connector

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3


09843–18040 CG

(a) (b)

TC

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516


DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NO PROBLEM


NG



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FE) 05C6P–01

TERMINALS OF ECM

E13

E12

E10

E9

A66714

Symbols (Terminals No.) BATT (E9 – 3) – E1 (E12 – 7) FC (E9 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

Wiring Color B–Y – BR G Y – BR G–Y

W (E9 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W – BR

+B (E9 – 1) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–R – BR

STP (E10 – 19) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G W – BR G–W

F/PS (E9 – 14) – E1 (E12 – 7)

LG–B – BR

STA (E12 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–Y – BR

HA1A (E12 – 6) – E04 (E12 – 4) *1

L – W–B W B

A1A+ (E12 – 23) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

Always

8 to 14

IG switch ON

8 to 14

Idling Idling

Below 1.5 8 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 3.5

IG switch ON

8 to 14

IG switch ON, brake pedal depressed IG switch ON, brake pedal released IG switch ON Cranking Idling

8 to 14 Below 1.5 Pulse generation 5.5 or more Below 3.0

IG switch ON

9 to 14

W – BR

IG switch ON

3.0 to 3.6

A1A– (E12 – 31) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

B – BR

IG switch ON

2.7 to 3.3

HA2A (E12 – 5) – E05 (E12 – 3) *1

Y – W–B W B

Idling

Below 3.0

A2A+ (E12 – 22) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

IG switch ON

9 to 14

G – BR

IG switch ON

3.0 to 3.6

A2A– (E12 – 30) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

L – BR

IG switch ON

2.7 to 3.3

HT1B (E10 – 4) – E01 (E13 – 7) *1

L – W–B W B

Idling

Below 3.0

OX1B (E12 – 21) – 01B (E13 – 32) *1

IG switch ON

9 to 14

B – BR

IG switch ON

0 to 1.0

O1B– (E13 – 32) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

W – BR

IG switch ON

0.4 to 1.1

HT2B (E10 – 3) – E01 (E13 – 7) *1

L R–W L–R W–B B

Idling

Below 3.0

OX2B (E12 – 29) – 01B (E13 – 32) *1 O2B– (E13 – 31) – E1 (E12 – 7) *1

IG switch ON

9 to 14

R – BR

IG switch ON

0 to 1.0

G – BR

IG switch ON

0.4 to 1.1



–


V–W – BR

TACH (E9 – 5) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR–R – BR

Idling

VC (E13 – 18) – E2 (E13 – 28)

R–W – BR

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

PRG (E13 – 12) – E01 (E13 – 7)



SPD (E10 – 17) – E1 (E12 – 7)

Pulse generation

VG (E12 – 24) – EVG (E12 – 32)

G – L–Y

THW (E13 – 19) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B–W – BR

G2+ (E13 – 26) – NE– (E13 – 34)

W–R

Idling


NE+ (E13 – 27) – NE– (E13 – 34)

G–R

Idling


THA (E13 – 20) – E2 (E13 – 28) VTA1 (E13 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28)

G–R – BR L W – BR L–W

#1 (E13 – 1) – E01 (E13 – 7)

B–R B R–W W–B B

#2 ((E13 – 2)) – E01 ((E13 – 7)) #3 ((E13 – 3)) – E01 ((E13 – 7)) #4 (E13 – 4) – E01 (E13 – 7)

Y – W–B W – W–B B – W–B

IGT1 (E13 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7) IGT2 ((E13 – 9)) – E1 ((E12 – 7)) IGT3 ((E13 – 10)) – E1 ((E12 – 7)) IGT4 (E13 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

R–W R W – BR P – BR LG–B – BR L–Y – BR


1.1 to 1.5


0.2 to 1.0


0.5 to 3.4


0.3 to 1.0


3.2 to 4.9

IG switch ON

Idling

IG switch ON IGF (E13 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7) RSD (E12 – 10)

W–R – BR

Idling

8 to 14

Pulse generation ((See page g 05–232)) 4.5 to 5.5 Pulse generation (See page 05–232)

G–R – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

OC1+ (E13 – 15) – OC1– (E13 – 14) *1

W–G – Y–B

IG switch ON


KNK1 (E12 – 1) – EKNK (E12 – 2)

B–W

Idling


ELS2 (E9 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

MREL (E9 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7)

– E1 (E12 – 7)

Defoger switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 3.0

GR – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IGSW (E9 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

TC (E9 – 20) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–L – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

SIL (E9 – 18) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–G – BR


ELS (E9 – 12) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

VAF (E13 – 32) – E2 (E13 – 28) *2

P – BR

*1: For European spec. only *2: Leaded only


Taillight ON


IG switch ON

Below 3.0

IG switch ON

2.0 to 3.5


–


05C7E–01

VARIABLE RESISTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The variable resister has been adopted to leaded–type vehicle only. This resistor is used change the air–fuel ratio of the air–fuel mixture. The idle mixture is adjusted using this resistor. Turning the idle mixture adjusting screw clockwise moves the contacts inside the resistor, raising the terminal VAF voltage. Conversely, turning the screw counterclockwise lowers the terminal VAF voltage. When the terminal VAF voltage rises, the ECM increases the injection volume slightly, marking the air–fuel mixture a little richer.

WIRING DIAGRAM

V3 Variable Resister

ECM 5V

VCC 2

VAF 3

9 EA1

R–W

18 VC E13

P

3 EA1

P

32 VAF E13

BR

10 EA1

BR

28 E2 E13

R–W

E1 E2 1

A76892

INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: Always use a CO meter when adjusting the idle mixture. If a CO meter is not available, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ADJUST IDLE MIXTURE.



1

–


CHECK CO/HC (See page 14–101) OK

CHECK FOR PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–168)

NG

2

ADJUST CO CONCENTRATION SST

09243–00020 (a) (b)

Same condition as step 1 this chart. Using SST, adjusting the idle mixture by turning the idle mixture adjusting screw in the variable resistor. Result:

SST

Result

Idle Mixture Adjusting Screw

Proceed

Connection: 1.5 0.5 %

B

Change in CO connection

C

No change in CO connection

A

HINT:

Always check idle speed after turning the idle mixture adjusting screw. If it is incorrect, readjust idle speed. Adjustable range of the idle mixture adjust to turn this screw is 180 degrees. Do not turn this screw more than it.

B

ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE

C

CHECK CO/HC (See page 14–101)

180 A73579

A



3

–


INSPECT VARIABLE RESISTOR SST

09243–00020 (a)

V3

Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance:

2 1 3

(b)


Specified condition

1–2

3.5 – 6.5

Measure the resistance between terminals 2 and 3 when turning the idle mixture adjusting screw fully clockwise and counterclockwise using SST Resistance: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

2–3

Change from about 5 k to 0 k accordingly

SST A74545

NG

REPLACE VARIABLE RESISTOR

OK

4

CHECK ECM SST

09243–00020 (a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector while slowly turning the idle mixture adjusting screw first fully counterclockwise and then fully clockwise, using SST. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.)

SST VAF (E13–32) – E2 (E13–28)

Specified condition Voltage changes smoothly from 0 V to about 5 V, i.e. does not suddenly jump up to 5 V down to 0 V

E13

VAF

E2 ECM Connector


A79116

OK



5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – VARIABLE RESISTOR) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the V3 variable resistor connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (V3–2) – VC (E13–18)

E2 VAF VC Variable Resistor Connector

VAF (V3–3) – VAF (E13–32)

Continuity y

E2 (V3–1) – E2 (E13–28)

A73587

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) VC (V3–2) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground

E13

VAF (V3–3) or VAF (E13–32) – Body ground

NG VAF

E2

VC ECM Connector

A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE


HARNESS

OR


–


05CJB–01

CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECM detects a trouble, it illuminates CHK ENG. At this time, the ECM sets a DTC in the memory.

WIRING DIAGRAM

1


2 AM2 1 1A

1

B–R


ECM 4

W IG2 AM2

B–R

4A

9

1

4B 1 B–G

DH 2

IGN

C11 Combination Meter Check Engine Warning Light

B–R Engine Room J/B No.4

W

I13 Ignition Switch

6

B–G

11 E9

Driver Side J/B

FL MAIN DA

18 22

B–W Battery

C A J8 J26 (LHD) (RHD)

J/C

B–W C A J8 J26 (LHD) (RHD) A76882





1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)





2

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) (b) (c) E9


W ECM Connector

A67445

NG

CHECK AND CONNECTOR

REPAIR

HARNESS

AND


3 (a)


SYSTEM OK

NG

4 (a)






–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDT–01



Driver’s Name

Production Date


Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name



Difficult to Start


Poor Idling


Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall


km miles


Back fire Other


High (

rpm)

Low (


Surging

Others



Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation




day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/


After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.


F) Downhill


Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal


)


)

)



Normal

)

rpm)


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CID–01



*1 CHK ENG

P0010 (05–322)


P0011 (05–325)

Camshaft Position ”A” –Timing Over– Advanced or System Performance (Bank 1)

P0012 (05–325)


P0016 (05–329)



P0031 (05–330)


Open in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay EFI fuse EFI No. 2 fuse ECM

P0032 (05–330)


Short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater ECM

P0037 (05–330)



P0038 (05–330)



P0051 (05–330)



P0052 (05–330)



P0057 (05–330)



P0058 (05–330)



P0100 (05–336)

Mass or volume Air Flow Circuit

P0102 (05–336)


P0103 (05–336)


P0105 (05–342)


P0107 (05–342)


P0108 (05–342)







–


*1 CHK ENG

P0110 (05–347)



P0112 (05–347)



P0113 (05–347)



P0115 (05–351)



P0116 (05–355)



P0117 (05–351)


Short in engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM

P0118 (05–351)


Open in engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM

P0120 (05–356)



P0121 (05–362)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit Range/Performance Problem

Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body)

P0122 (05–356)









P0123 (05–356)

P0130 *3 (05–363)

P0133 *3 (05–374)



–


*1 CHK ENG

P0134 (05–381)


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector Gas leakage in exhaust system PCV valve and hose PCV hose connection ECM

P0136 *3 (05–388)



P0150 *3 (05–363)



P0153 *3 (05–374)



P0154 (05–381)



P0156 *3 (05–388)



System too Lean (Bank 1)


System too Rich (Bank 1)


P0171 *3 (05–394)

P0172 *3 (05–394)



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) *1 CHK ENG

System too Lean (Bank2)


P0175 *3 (05–394)

System too Rich (Bank2)


P0190 (05–406)



P0191 (05–410)


Open or short in high–pressure fuel pump (spill valve) circuit High–pressure fuel pump Low–pressure fuel pump Fuel pipe Fuel relief valve Fuel pressure regulator ECM

P0200 (05–415)

Injector Circuit/Open

P0201 (05–415)


P0202 (05–415)


P0203 (05–415)


P0204 (05–415)


P0220 (05–356)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”B” Circuit


P0222 (05–356)

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”B” Circuit Low Input


Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”B” Circuit High Input


P0174 *3 (05–394)

P0223 (05–356)


O Open en or short in EDU circuit EDU (Injector driver) Fuel injector j assyy ECM


P0300 *3 (05–420)


P0301 *3 (05–420)


P0302 *3 (05–420)


P0303 *3 (05–420)


P0304 *3 (05–420)


P0325 (05–429)


P0327 (05–429)

–


Open or short in engine wire Connector connection Vacuum hose connection Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing PCV hose h connection ti PCV hose ECM

*1 CHK ENG

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2




P0328 (05–429)



P0335 (05–433)


P0339 (05–433)


P0340 (05–436)


P0341 (05–436)


P0351 (05–439)


P0352 (05–439)


P0353 (05–439)


P0354 (05–439)


P0420 *3 (05–446)


P0430 *3 (05–446)


P0443 (05–449)

Evaporative Emission Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit

Open of short in VSV circuit for EVAP VSV for EVAP ECM

P0500 (05–453)



P0504 (05–455)

Brake Switch Correlation



Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit osition sensor Crankshaft position Signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) ECM Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit Camshaft position osition sensor Camshaft timing gear Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM

Ignition system Open or short in IGF and IGT circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM (ignition coil circuit 1 through 4) Ignition coil with igniter (ignition coil 1 through 4) IG2 relay ECM

Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter (inside exhaust manifold)


–


*1 CHK ENG

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit

Open or short in brake booster pressure sensor circuit Brake booster pressure sensor Vacuum hose ECM

P0556 (05–462)

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit Range/Performance


P0557 (05–459)

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input


P0558 (05–459)

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input


P0560 (05–467)

System Voltage


P0571 (05–1711)

Brake Switch ”A” Circuit

Cruise control system

P0604 (05–470)

Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error

P0606 (05–470)

ECM/PCM Processor

P0607 (05–470)


P0555 (05–459)

ECM

P0617 (05–471)

Starter Relay Circuit High


P0657 (05–470)

Actuator Supply Voltage Circuit / Open

ECM

P0705 *4 (05–474)



P0710 *4 (05–941)

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” circuit


P0711 *3,4 (05–943)



P0712 *4 (05–941)



P0713 *4 (05–941)



P0717 *4 (05–945)



P0724 *4 (05–947)



P0741 *3,4 (05–948)

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Performance or Stuck Off


P0743 *4 (05–951)

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Electrical




–


*1 CHK ENG

P0746 *3,4 (05–954)



P0748 *4 (05–956)



P0766 *3,4 (05–962)



P0776 *3,4 (05–963)



P0778 *4 (05–956)



P0793 *4 (05–965)

Intermediate Shaft Speed Sensor ”A” Circuit No Signal


P0982 *4 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”D” Control Low


P0983 *4 (05–956)

Shift Solenoid ”D” Control High


P1235 (05–477)

High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit

Open or short in fuel pump (high pressure) Fuel pump (high pressure) ECM

P2008 (05–480)

Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit/Open (Bank 1)

Open of short in VSV for IACV circuit VSV for IACV ECM

P2102 (05–483)

Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low


P2103 (05–483)

Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High


P2111 (05–485)

Throttle Actuator Control System – Stuck Open

P2112 (05–485)

Throttle Actuator Control System – Stuck Closed


P2118 (05–487)

Actuator Control Motor Current Range/Performance

Open in ETCS power source circuit ECM

P2119 (05–490)

Throttle Actuator Control Throttle Body Range/Performance


P2120 (05–492)



P2121 (05–499)





–


*1 CHK ENG

P2122 (05–492)


P2123 (05–492)


P2125 (05–492)


P2127 (05–492)


P2128 (05–492)


P2135 (05–356)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A”/”B” Voltage Correlation


P2138 (05–492)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D”/”E” Voltage Correlation


P2195 *3 (05–363)


P2196 *3 (05–363)


P2197 *3 (05–363)


P2198 *3 (05–363)


P2716 *4 (05–967)



B2799 (05–1625)


Immobiliser system


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure ressure Injector ECM

*1: CHK ENG (Check engine warning light) is illuminated *2: CHK ENG (Check engine warning light) is illuminated or blinks *3: For Euro–OBD vehicles only. *4: For A/T only.



DTC

P2121

–


05CKU–01




Trouble Area


P2121




1


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)


Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 2 1 6 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

OK


NG



2

–



VPA (+) E9

(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V


OK


NG

3



A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)



A54384

Specified condition




EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9


VPA2 VPA


Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)



VCPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) A54404



Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CK1–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In the diagram below, when the engine is cranked, current flows from terminal ST2 of the ignition switch to the starter relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of ECM (STA signal). When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to the coil of the circuit opening relay, the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates. While the NE signal is generated (engine running), the ECM keeps Tr ON (circuit opening relay ON) and the fuel pump also keeps operating. Circuit Opening Relay

IG2 Relay

Fuel Pump

Ignition SW AM2

IG2

IGN

ST2

ECM FC

ST

Tr

IGSW (M/T) (A/T)

(A/T)

STA

Park/Neutral Position SW IG2

AM2

ST Relay FL MAIN

Battery

(NE Signal)

Starter

A76880



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R


B–R

AM2 IG2

4

ECM 6

B–R

10 E9 FC

G–Y

I13 Ignition SW

1 6 IC3

B–R 1

2 AM2

IG2 2

1

1 1A

DH 2

1

DL 16

B–G

B


Driver Side J/B

IGN


1 4A

G–Y

B–R

4


5

1

3

2

4

5

1

1 4B

IG2 Relay 3

2

4

B–W

4 B–W

Battery

L–B

10 IB1

B–G

FL MAIN

B–W

B–W

4

EC

G–Y

F25 Fuel Pump

5 W–B


W–B

BR

A76881



–



PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY) Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL PUMP/SPD”. Perform the ACTIVE TEST with the engine stopped. Result: The circuit opening relay operates. NG

Go to step 2


2




3–5

B16200

NG



OK

3

INSPECT ECM(FC VOLTAGE) E1 (–)

(a) (b)

FC (+)


Specified condition

FC (E9–10) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

E9

E11

ECM Connector

A67446

NG

Go to step 6

OK

4



REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSY


5

–



Wire Harness Side 3 5

C8 1

Remove the circuit opening relay. Disconnect the F25 fuel pump connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

2

Specified condition

Circuit opening relay (C8–3) – Fuel pump (F25–4)

Continuity

Fuel pump (F25–5) – Body ground



A79099

Wire Harness Side


Specified condition


No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

A67586

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


6



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


7

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IGNITION SWITCH – IG2 RELAY, IG2 FUSE – IG2 RELAY) (a)

Driver Side J/B

IGN Fuse

A79096

Wire Harness Side

Check harness and connector between the IG2 relay and ignition switch. (1) Inspect the IGN fuse. Remove the IGN fuse from the driver side J/B. Check for continuity in the IGN fuse. Standard: Continuity Reinstall the IGN fuse. (2) Disconnect the I13 ignition switch connector. (3) Remove the IG2 relay. (4) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IG2 (I13–6) – IG2 relay (1)

Continuity


I13 IG2

(b)

Ignition Coil Connector A66267


IG2 Relay A79064


Specified condition

IG2 (I13–6) or IG2 relay (1) – Body ground

No continuity

Check harness and connector between the IG2 relay and the IG2 fuse. (1) Inspect the IG2 fuse. Remove the IG2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. Check for continuity in the IG2 fuse. Standard: Continuity (2) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):



Specified condition

IG2 fuse (2) – IG2 relay (5)

Continuity


IG2 Fuse


Specified condition

IG2 fuse (2) or IG2 relay (5) – Body ground

No continuity

2 1

OK


NG A81706

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


8

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY, CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d)


Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Remove the circuit opening relay. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IG2 relay (3) – Circuit opening relay (C8–1)

IG2 Relay

Circuit opening relay (C8–2) – FC (E9–10)

A79064

Continuity y

IG2 relay (2) – Body ground


Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

IG2 relay (3) or Circuit opening relay (C8–1) – Body ground

3


No continuity

5

C8 1

2


A79099

E9

FC ECM Connector

NG A54404



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDS–01



2


3


HINT: If the display indicates a communication fault in the tool, inspect the DLC3.

4



5


6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7


8



B A


A


B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10


9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14


15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 18


16

–



GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END



–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDV–01

LOCATION Engine Room R/B No. 4

Combination Meter

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor ECM VSV for EVAP Mass Air Flow Meter

Fuel Pump (For Low Pressure) DLC3 Circuit Opening Relay Accelerator Pedal Assy Engine Room R/B No. 1 Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve (OCV)

Ignition Coil Assy Injector

Injector Driver (EDU) VSV for Intake Air Control Valve Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor Fuel Pump (For High Pressure)

Throttle Body Assy Camshaft Position Sensor

Crankshaft Position Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 1)



Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Knock Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Park/Neutral Position Switch (Only for A/T Models)

A76858



DTC

P0010

–


05CDY–01

CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1)

HINT: This is the procedure of oil control valve (OCV).

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The VVT system controls the intake camshaft to provide the optimal valve timing for every driving condition. This control is performed based on the signals, such conditions as intake air volume, throttle position and engine coolant temperature. The ECM controls the oil control valve (OCV), based on the signals output from the sensors. The VVT controller regulates the intake camshaft angle using oil pressure through the OCV. As result, the relative position between the camshaft and the crankshaft becomes optimal, and the engine torque improves, fuel economy improves, exhaust emissions decrease under overall driving conditions. Also, the ECM detects the actual valve timing using the signals from the camshaft position sensor and the crankshaft position sensor, and performs feedback control. This is how target valve timing is achieved by the ECM. ECM Crankshaft Position Sensor Air Flow Meter


Target Valve Timing

Throttle Position Sensor Feedback

Duty Control Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor Correction Vehicle Speed Signal Camshaft Position Sensor


DTC No. P0010

DTC Detection Condition Open or short in OCV circuit




–


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


W–G

16 E11 OC1+

2

Y–B

15 E11 OC1–

A59779


1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON


OK


NG

2

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY(OCV) (See page 10–39) NG

OK




3

–



E11

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E11–16) – OC1– (E11–15)



OC1–


(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A67528


OK

4


Wire Harness Side

C2

Disconnect the C2 OCV connector. Disconnect the E11 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) OCV (C2–1) – OC1+ (E11–16)

OCV Connector

OCV (C2–2) – OC1– (E11–15) A54386


Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) OCV (C2–1) or OC1+ (E11–16) – Body ground OCV (C2–2) or OC1– (E11–15) – Body ground


E11

OC1+ OC1–

NG ECM Connector

A81698


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CDZ–01

DTC

P0011

CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)

DTC

P0012

CAMSHAFT POSITION ”A” –TIMING OVER– RETARDED (BANK 1)


P0011

P0012


Trouble Area

Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the advanced OCV.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed Condition (a) or (b) continues after engine is warmed up and engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm (Problem of the retarded OCV.): (a) Valve timing does not change from current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed

Valve timing OCV Camshaft timing gear assy ECM




P0011


P0012

If DTC ”P0011 or P0012” is displayed, check VVT system circuit. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1


OK




2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–



Specified condition

OCV is OFF

Normal engine speed

OCV is ON


NG

Go to step 4

OK

3


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ETCS fuses for 60 seconds or more. (b) Start the engine and warm it up. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011 or P0012 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG


VVT SYSTEM OK *


4

–



E11

OC1 +


Specified condition

OC1+ (E11–16) – OC1– (E11–15)



OC1–


(A)

(A)

GND

1 msec./Division

NG A67528


OK

5

INSPECT OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER NG


OK

6

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY(OCV) (See page 10–39) OK

Go to step 8

NG

7


GO

8

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See page 14–240) OK

NG


Go to step 10


9

–


REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See page 14–240)

GO

10

CHECK BLOCKAGE(OCV, OIL CHECK VALVE AND OIL HOLE) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

11


(a)

Clear the DTC. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, or disconnecting the battery terminal or the EFI and ETCS fuses for 60 seconds or more. (b) Start the engine and warm it up. (c) Drive the vehicle around for 10 minutes or more. (d) Read output DTC using the hand–held tester. Standard: No DTC output. HINT: *: DTCs P0011 or P0012 is output when a foreign object in engine oil is caught in some part of the system. These codes will stay registered even if the system returns to normal after a short time. These foreign objects are then captured by the oil filter, thus eliminating the source of the problem. OK NG CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


VVT SYSTEM OK


DTC

P0016

–


05CE0–01

CRANKSHAFT POSITION –CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1 SENSOR A)



Trouble Area

Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and camshaft position sensor (bank 1) signal (2 trip detection logic)




1 (a)

CHECK VALVE TIMING (See page 14–186) Check for loose and jumping teeth of timing chain. NG



ADJUST VALVE TIMING (See page 14–186) (REPAIR OR REPLACE TIMING CHAIN)


–


05CJD–01

DTC

P0031


DTC

P0032


DTC

P0037


DTC

P0038


DTC

P0051


DTC

P0052


DTC

P0057


DTC

P0058




–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0130 on page 05–363. HINT: The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The heated oxygen sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the B+ side of the circuit. Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 1 System Drawing) Heated Oxygen Sensor


+B EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

DTC No. P0031 P0037 P0051 P0057 P0032 P0038 P0052 P0058

DTC Detection Condition Heated current is 0.2 A or less when heater operates with +B > 10.5 V and < 11.5 V (1 trip detection logic) Heated current is 0.25 A or less when heater operates with +B 11.5 V (1 trip detection logic)

Heated current exceeds 2 A when heater operates. (1 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater EFI relay EFI fuse EFI No. 2 fuse ECM Short in heater circuit of heated oxygen sensor Heated oxygen sensor heater ECM

HINT:







1



Component Side +B

HT

(b)

H9

–

B2S1

E1 Heated Oxygen Sensor

Component Side +B H7

B1S1

H8

B1S2

H10 B2S2

A61830

(c)

Disconnect the H7, H8, H9 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the heated oxygen sensor connector. Standard (Bank 2 sensor 1): Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

Measure the resistance between the terminals of the heated oxygen sensor connector. Standard (Except Bank 2 sensor 1): Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

HT

E1 Heated Oxygen Sensor A62378

NG


OK

2



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


3

–


INSPECT ECM(HT1A, HT1B, HT2A OR HT2B VOLTAGE)

HT1A (+)

E1 (–) E12

E11

(a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the applicable terminals of the E11 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HT1A (E12–5) – E1 (E11–1) HT1B (E12–25) – E1 (E11–1)

HT1B (+) HT2B (+)

HT2A (+) ECM Connector

HT2A (E12–4) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

HT2B (E12–33) – E1 (E11–1)

A76903

HINT:

The HT1A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1. The HT1B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2. The HT2A means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 1. The HT2B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 2. OK

NG




4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – EFI RELAY)

Wire Harness Side

(a)

H7 B1S1 H8 B1S2 H10 B2S2

H9 B2S1 HT

+B

+B HT


Check the harness and connector between the ECM and heated oxygen sensor connectors. (1) Disconnect the H7, H8, H9 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (2) Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

A66290

Specified condition

HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5) HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E12–25) HT (H9–1) – HT2A (E12–4)

Continuity

HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E12–33)

E12


HT1A HT1B HT2B

Specified condition


HT2A

HT (H8–1) or HT1B (E12–25) – Body ground HT (H9–1) or HT2A (E12–4) – Body ground

ECM Connector


A81695

(b) Engine Room R/B No. 4

EFI Relay A66053

No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the heated oxygen sensor connector and EFI relay. (1) Inspect the EFI No.2 fuse. Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. Check for continuity in the EFI No.2 fuse. Standard: Continuity (2) Disconnect the H7, H8, H9 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. (3) Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. (4) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (H7–2) – EFI relay (3) +B (H8–2) – EFI relay (3) +B (H9–2) – EFI relay (3)

Continuity

+B (H10–2) – EFI relay (3)


Specified condition

+B (H7–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground +B (H8–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground +B (H9–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground +B (H10–2) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground


No continuity


NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJE–01

DTC

P0100


DTC

P0102


DTC

P0103



A

Output Voltage


A53295


Trouble Area

P0100

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 seconds.

P0102

Open in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 seconds.

P0103

Short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed 4,000 rpm or less for more than 3 seconds.


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100, P0102 or P0103”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the air flow rate from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Air flow rate (gm/s)

Malfunction

Approximately 0.0

Mass air flow meter power source circuit open VG circuit open or short

271.0 or more


EVG circuit open


–



ECM


EFI Relay Engine Room R/B No. 1 and Engine Room J/B No. 1

2 EFI 1

4

3

5

8 MREL E9

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

GR

2

1

4 2

IE1

B–G EFI No. 2 4


2

1

GR


B–W

1 4B

4

B–G 13 EA1

FL MAIN

W–B

B–W 1

3 L–Y

30 VG E13

2

29 EVG E13

G

Battery EC

A76863


1 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to

0.0

A

271.0 or more

B

1 Mass Air Flow Rate 270.0 (*1)

C




–


B

Go to step 5

C


A

2


Wire Harness Side +B (+)

A6

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


9 to 14 V


NG

Go to step 7

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(VG VOLTAGE) VG (+)

E13

(a) (b)

EVG (–)

ECM Connector

A76903

Start the engine. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


Condition

Specified condition

VG (E13–30) – EVG (E13–29)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

HINT: The shift position should be P or N and the A/C switch should be turned OFF. OK

NG




4

–




A6


E2G

VG (A6–3) – VG (E13–30)

VG

E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E13–29)



A54396


Specified condition


No continuity

E13

EVG

VG

ECM Connector

NG A81699

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

INSPECT ECM(SENSOR GROUND) (a) EVG

E13

NG


OK



Specified condition


Continuity



6

–




A6


E2G

VG (A6–3) – VG (E13–30)

VG

E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E13–29) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E13

VG

EVG ECM Connector

NG A81699



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – MASS AIR FLOW METER) (a)

(b) (c) (d)

Wire Harness Side +B

A6


Inspect the EFI No. 2 fuse. (1) Remove the EFI No. 2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. (2) Check for continuity in the EFI No. 2 fuse. Standard: Continuity Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (A6–1) – EFI relay (3)

Continuity



Specified condition

+B (A6–1) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity


EFI Relay A66053

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJF–01

DTC

P0105


DTC

P0107


DTC

P0108


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (V)

Output Voltage

(3.96) 3.6 2.4 1.2 150

450

20

60

mmHg 750(840) kPa 100(112)

Manifold Absolute Pressure A01512

DTC No.

By a built–in sensor unit, the manifold absolute pressure sensor detects the intake manifold pressure as a voltage. The ECM then determines the basic injection duration and basic ignition advance angle based on this voltage. Since the manifold absolute pressure sensor does not use the atmospheric pressure as a criterion, but senses the absolute pressure inside the intake manifold (the pressure in proportion to the preset absolute vacuum 0), it is not influenced by fluctuations in the atmospheric pressure due to high altitude and other factors. This permits it to control the air fuel ratio at the proper level under all conditions. If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108”, it operates the fail–safe function, keeping the ignition timing and fuel injection volume constant and making it possible to drive the vehicle.


Trouble Area

P0105

Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more

P0107

Open in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more

P0108

Short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.5 sec. or more


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0105, P0107 or P0108”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the manifold absolute pressure from ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Manifold Absolute Pressure (kPa) Approximately 0 142 or more




–


WIRING DIAGRAM V1 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

ECM

VCC 3

R–W

18 VC E13

VOUT 2

G–W

33 PIM E13

BR

28 E2 E13

GND

1

5V

E1

A00309



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: Same as the atmospheric pressure Result: Manifold Absolute Pressure (kPa)

Proceed to

142 or more

A

0.0

B

OK (Same as present pressure) (*1)

C

*1: The value must be changed when the engine is run or stopped.

A


B

Go to step 3

C



2

–


INSPECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR(VCC VOLTAGE) (a)

Wire Harness Side

(b) (c)

V1 GND (–)

1

2 3

VCC (+)


A72877

Disconnect the V1 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the V1 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VCC (V1–3) – GND (V1–1)

4.5 to 5.5 V

NG

Go to step 4

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(PIM VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

PIM (+)


Specified condition

PIM (E13–33) – E2 (E13–28)

3.4 to 3.8 V


A76903

NG



Go to step 5


4

–



(c)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the V1 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

VC ECM Connector

1

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VCC (V1–3)

Continuity


A81699

Wire Harness Side

V1



Specified condition

VC (E13–18) or VCC (V1–3) – Body ground

No continuity

VCC

2 3


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

A72877

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5


(c)


E2 ECM Connector

PIM

PIM (E13–33) – VOUT (V1–2) A81699

E2 (E13–28) – GND (V1–1)


Standard (Check for short): Wire Harness Side VOUT

V1 GND

1

2 3



A72877


Specified condition

PIM (E13–33) or VOUT (V1–2) – Body ground

No continuity


NG

–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJG–01

DTC

P0110


DTC

P0112


DTC

P0113



Resistance K

10

Acceptable

5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) A67628

DTC No.

Proceed to

The intake air temperature sensor is built in the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature is the greater the thermistor resistance value becomes and the higher the intake air temperature is the lower the thermistor resistance value becomes (See Fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from terminal THA via resistor R. That is, the resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability during cold engine operation. If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0110, P0112 or P0113”, it operates the fail–safe functions in which the intake air temperature is assumed to be 20C (68F).


Trouble Area Open or short in intake air temperature sensor circuit Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter) ECM

P0110

Step 1


P0112

Step 4



P0113

Step 2



HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0110, P0112 or P0113”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 (284

Short circuit



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM


5V 20

GR

THA

E13

4

28

E2

BR

E13

5

R

THA

E2

E1

A72925



1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual intake air temperature Result: Display

Proceed to

–40C (–40)

A

140C (284) or more

B


C

HINT:

If there is an open circuit, the hand–held tester indicates –40C (–40F). If there is a short circuit, the hand–held tester indicates 140C (284F) or more.

A


B

Go to step 4

C



2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN HARNESS)


(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d) (e) (f) A75743

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Connect the terminals THA and E2 of the mass air flow meter wire harness side connector. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more


A6

THA

OK

E2 A54396


NG

3



(a) (b)

ECM

A75742

THA

E13

E2

ECM Connector


HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: 140C (284F) or more

OK A76903

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR



4

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN HARNESS)


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

ECM

A75766

Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

OK


NG

5



(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

ECM

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature value: –40C (–40F)

A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A81699



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0116

–


05CK2–01

ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM



P0116

When THW is greater than –40C (–40F) but less than 60C (140F), and THA is greater than –6.7C (20F), and when starting engine, conditions (a) and (b) continue (2 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THW change is lower than 3C (5.4F) from THW since when starting engine

Trouble Area




1

READ OUTPUT DTC(IN ADDITION TO P0116)

(a) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display

Proceed to


A


B



A

2






–


05CK7–01

DTC

P0120

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0122

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0123

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC

P0220

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT

DTC

P0222

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0223

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC

P2135

THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A”/”B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION

HINT: This is repair procedure of ”throttle position sensor”.



–



Throttle Position Sensor Magnet IC No.1 VC VTA1

ECM

Throttle Position Sensor Output Voltage (V)

This electrical throttle system is no used throttle cable. This throttle position sensor is non–contact type. The throttle position sensor is mounted on the throttle body to detect the opening angle of the throttle valve. Since this sensor is electronically controlled with hall elements, accurate control and reliability can be obtained. It has 2 sensors to detect the throttle opening angle and a malfunction of the throttle position sensor. The voltage is applied to the terminals VTA1 and VTA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve. The VTA1 is a signal to indicate the actual throttle valve opening angle which is used for the engine control, and the VTA2 is a signal to indicate the information about the opening angle which is used for detecting a malfunction. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals input from terminals VTA1 and VTA2, and the ECM controls the throttle motor to make the throttle valve angle properly in response to the driving condition.

Fail Safe Angle *1 5

VTA2 2.58 2.25

VTA1

0.95 0.69 6.5 0

Usable Range

84

Throttle Valve Opening Angle (deg)

VTA2 E2 IC No.2 Magnet

Throttle Valve Fully Closed (Throttle Position Opening Position Expressed as Percentage (VTA1) 10 to 24 %) Throttle Valve Fully Opened (Throttle Position Opening Position Expressed as Percentage (VTA1) 64 to 96 %) *1: Fail Safe Angle 6.5 (Throttle Position Opening Position Expressed as Percentage (VTA1) about 16 %)


A19802


–



DTC No.

Condition (a) of DTC P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0222 or P0223 continues for 2 sec. (Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit)

Trouble Area

Detection conditions for DTCs P0122 and P0123 are not satisfied but condition (a) is satisfied (a) VTA1 0.2 V or VTA1 4.8 V


(a) VTA1 0.2 V


P0123

(a) VTA1 4.8 V


P0220

Detection conditions for DTCs P0222 and P0223 are not satisfied but condition (a) is satisfied (a) VTA2 0.5 V or VTA2 4.97 V and 0.2 V VTA1 1.8 V


(a) VTA2 0.5 V


P0223

(a) VTA2 4.97 V and 0.2 V VTA1 1.8 V


P2135

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec. or more, or condition (b) continues for 0.4 sec. or more: (a) |VTA1 – VTA2| 0.02 V (b) VTA1 0.2 V and VTA2 0.5 V


P0120

P0122

P0222

NOTICE: When a malfunction is detected, the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: After confirming DTCs, use the hand–held tester to confirm the throttle valve opening percentage and closed throttle position switch condition. The THROTTLE POS means VTA1 signal as well as the THROTTLE POS #2 for the VTA2 signal. Reference (Normal condition): Tester display

Accelerator pedal fully released

Accelerator pedal fully depressed

THROTTLE POS

10 to 24 %

64 to 96 %

THROTTLE POS #2

2.1 to 3.1 V

4.5 to 5.5 V



–


WIRING DIAGRAM T1 Throttle Position Sensor (Built in Throttle Body)

VC

VTA1

VTA2

E2

ECM

5

R–W

18 VC E13

6

L–W

21 E13

4

B–R

3

BR

VTA1

31 VTA2 E13 28 E13 E2

A76871



1 (a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(THROTTLE POS AND THROTTLE POS #2) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ETCS / THROTTLE POS and THROTTLE POS #2” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Throttle position expressed as percentage and voltage Accelerator pedal released


Trouble area

THROTTLE POS (VTA1)


THROTTLE POS (VTA1)


0%

0 to 0.2 V

0%

0 to 0.2 V

100 %

4.5 to 5.5 V

100 %

4.5 to 5.5 V

E2 circuit open

0 % or 100 %


0 % or 100 %




0 to 0.2 or 4.5 to 5.5 V


0 to 0.2 or 4.5 to 5.5 V


10 to 24 %

2.1 to 3.1 V

64 to 96 % (Does not fail safe)

4.5 to 5.5 V (Does not fail safe)

Throttle position sensor circuit is normal


Proceed to

VC circuit open

A

B


B

–


Go to step 5

A

2


Wire Harness Side Throttle Body Connector

T1

Disconnect the T1 throttle body connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (T1–5) – VC (E13–18)

E2

VTA2

VC

VTA1

VTA1 (T1–6) – VTA1 (E13–21)

Continuity

VTA2 (T1–4) – VTA2 (E13–31)

B53781

E2 (T1–3) – E2 (E13–28)


E13

Specified condition

VC (T1–5) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground VTA1 (T1–6) or VTA1 (E13–21) – Body ground

No continuityy

VTA2 (T1–4) or VTA2 (E13–31) – Body ground

VC E2 ECM Connector

VTA2

VTA1

NG

A81699

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3



T1

E2

VTA2

VC

VTA1 B53781

VC (+)

E13



A76903

Disconnect the T1 throttle body connector. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V


–

NG



OK

4


GO

5 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC(THROTTLE POSTION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). Start the engine. Run the engine at idle for 15 sec. or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0222, P0223 and/or P2135” are output again

A

No DTC output

B



SYSTEM OK


DTC

P0121

–


05CK8–01


HINT: This is the procedure of the ”throttle position sensor”.


DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) continues for 2.0 seconds: (a) Difference between VTA1 and VTA2 is out of threshold

Trouble Area Throttle position sensor (built in throttle body)

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY



–


DTC

P0130


DTC

P0150


DTC

P2195


DTC

P2196


DTC

P2197


DTC

P2198



05CK9–01


–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three–way catalytic converter is used. For the most efficient use of the three–way catalytic converter, the air–fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The heated oxygen sensor has the characteristic whereby its output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This is used to detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and provide the ECM with feedback control the air–fuel ratio. When the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas increases. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the LEAN condition (low voltage, i.e. less than 0.45 V). When the air–fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, the oxygen will be vanished from the exhaust gas. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the RICH condition (high voltage, i.e. more than 0.45 V). The ECM judges by the voltage output from the heated oxygen sensor whether the air– fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. If the malfunction of the heated oxygen sensor causes an output of abnormal voltage, the ECM becomes unable to perform accurate air–fuel ratio control. The heated oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), current flows to the heater in order to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection. Atmosphere Ideal Air–Fuel Mixture

Platinum Electrode Solid Electrolyte (Zirconia Element)

Platinum Electrode Heater Coating (Ceramic)

Output Voltage

Housing


Cover Exhaust Gas DTC No.


P0130 P0150

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) remains at 0.4 V or more, or 0.55 V or less, during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

P2195 P2197

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) remains at 0.55 V or less, during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

P2196 P2198

Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) remains at 0.4 V or more, during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

A00798

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system y Fuel pressure Injector ECM

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly. The output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor and the short–term fuel trim value can be read using the hand–held tester.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

B–W 4

2 IE1

GR

2

EFI No. 2

1


B–W

GR

4

4

3

8 E9 MREL

H8 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) 25 1 P B–W 2 E12 HT1B (*1) 21 3 4 B E12 OX1B 13 B–W EA1 26 W E11 O1B– B–W

4 B–W

GR

H10 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2) B–W 2 1 L–B

1 EFI Relay

33 E12 HT2B

(*1) 2

5 4 Engine Room B–Y R/B No. 4

4 4

(*1) W–B


2 EFI 1 1 1A

R

29 E12 OX2B

G

31 E11 O2B–

B–W

(*1) 1

3

H7 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) B–W 2 1 Y

BR

5 E12 HT1A

BR 4 D J12 D J12

B–G

3

BR

E J13 Engine Room J/B No. 4

BR

BR 4

3

R

23 E12 OX2A

B–W 2

1

L

4 E12 HT2A

D J13

1 4B B–G

J/C

FL MAIN E J12 W–B

BR

28 E13 E2

(*1)

J/C

BR

22 E12 OX1A

(*1)

B–W

1 4A

B

H9 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 1)

Battery EC

EE

*1: Shielded A76864



–



Vehicle speed 40 km/h (25 mph)

20 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

(d)

(d)

(d)

Idling(c)

(e)

(e)

(f)

100 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

20 sec. or more

30 sec.

IG SW OFF (a) (b)

A76369

(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Switch the hand–held tester from the ”normal mode” to the ”check mode” (See page 05–294). (c) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 100 seconds or more. (d) Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 20 seconds or more. (e) Let the engine idle for 20 seconds or more. Perform steps from (d) to (e) 3 times. (f) Let the engine idle for 30 seconds. HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG will be illuminated on the multi information display during step (f). NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of a malfunction will not occur. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from (c) to (f), then perform steps from (c) to (f) again.



–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing the ”A/F CONTROL” ACTIVE TEST (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few seconds delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output. And there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor). Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %




Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction

OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG



–


The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”O2S B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle is short of fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and heated oxygen sensor DTCs will be recorded, and the CHK ENG then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.

1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and/or P2198” are output

A

”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 or P2198” and other DTCs are output

B

HINT:

If any other codes besides ”P0130, P0150, P2195, P2196, P2197 and/or P2198” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. If a misfiring DTC(s) is present, record the DTC(s) that indicates misfiring cylinder(s), then proceed to A.

B

A




2 (a)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor during idling. Heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) output voltage: Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).

(b)

P18349

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3



4 (a)


Proceed to


A


B





5

–



Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

̲

̱

̴

̳

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

6



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


7

–




H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1


(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity


E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition


OX1A E2


No continuity




HINT:




EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG

OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


8 (a)

–




OK

9



OK

10



OK

11 (a)



YES

12



13





14 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B





–


05CKA–01

DTC

P0133


DTC

P0153



P0133 P0153


Response time for output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) to change from rich to lean, or from lean to rich, is 1.0 sec. or more during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector ECM

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.







–12.5 %



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %


–12.5 %


Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


+25 %

–12.5 %

Less than 0.4V


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”O2S B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle is short of fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and DTCs P0133 and/or P0153 will be recorded, and the CHK ENG then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.



1 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

HINT:


B


A

2 (a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DURING IDLING) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) during idling. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V, and period of ”t” must exist less than 1.0 sec. (See the following table).

(b)

A73686

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3





4 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

B



5


Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

6



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200




NG

–


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

7



H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1


(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity


E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition


OX1A E2


No continuity




HINT:




EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


8 (a)

–




OK

9



OK

10



OK

11 (a)



YES

12



13





14 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B





–


05CKB–01

DTC

P0134


DTC

P0154



P0134 P0154


After engine is warmed up, heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) output does not indicate RICH ( 0.45 V) even once when conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continue for at least 65 sec.: (a) Engine speed: 1,400 rpm or more (b) Vehicle speed: 130 km/h (81 mph) (c) Throttle valve is not fully closed (d) 180 sec. or more after starting engine

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay Air induction system Fuel pressure PCV hose connection PCV valve and hose Injector Gas leakage in exhaust system ECM

HINT:

&$ "!$ ! % ! '% & ! &%&$ &" "!$ & "'&#'& ("& " & & ")*! %!%"$ ! %!%"$ $" & ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL” & "'&#'& ("& " & & ")*! %!%"$ % %% &! & & ")*! %!%"$ $'& * "#! "$ %"$& Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing the ”A/F CONTROL” ACTIVE TEST (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


–



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG





1 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

HINT: S


S

B


A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature above 75_C (169_F). Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) when the engine rpm is suddenly increased.

HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times using the accelerator pedal. Standard: Heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) outputs a RICH signal (0.45 V or more) at least once. NG

Go to step 6

OK

3



4 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B




5

–




YES DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL (DTC P0134 AND/OR P0154)

6



OK

7


Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

8



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200




NG

–


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

9



H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1


(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity


E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition


OX1A E2


No continuity




HINT:




EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


10

–




OK

11 (a)



OK

12



OK

13



OK

14


OK



EXHAUST

GAS


15 (a)

–




YES

16



17



18 (a)


Proceed to


A


B





–


05CKC–01

DTC

P0136


DTC

P0156



P0136 P0156

DTC Detection Condition If the following two conditions are satisfied at a time (2 trip detection logic): (a) The ECM records cycles which the vehicle driving and stops 8 times or more. (b) There was no change in the rich and lean outputs from heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2) for the 360 seconds under air fuel ratio feedback control. (Throttle was not closed)

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) EFI relay

HINT:

Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders. Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.




–



Vehicle speed



(f) 12 times 40 sec. or more

(d)

(d)

(d)

40 km/h (25 mph) Idling (c)

(e)

(e)

(e)

IG SW OFF

(a), (b)

60 sec. or more

10 sec.

10 sec.

10 sec.

A58686

(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check (test) mode (See page 05–294). (c) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more. (d) Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more. (e) Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more. (f) Perform steps (d) and (e) 12 times. HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG will be illuminated on the multi information display during step (f). NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of a malfunction will not occur. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from (c) to (f), then perform steps from (c) to (f) again.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing the ”A/F CONTROL” ACTIVE TEST (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V



–



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables the technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” or ”O2S B2S1 and O2S B2S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B



A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) After warming up the engine, run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 3 minutes. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2) when the engine rpm is suddenly increased.

HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times by using the accelerator pedal. The output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 2): Alternates from 0.4 V or less to 0.5 V or more. OK

Go to step 6

NG

3


Component Side +B

HT

H8 B1S2

H10 B2S2

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

NG OK




4

–




Specified condition

1–2


3–5

NG

B16200


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

5


Wire Harness Side H8 B1S2

(b) (c)

H10 B2S2 HT OX

E1

Disconnect the H8 or H10 heated oxygen sensor connector. Disconnect the E11 and E12 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

OX (H8–3) – OX1B (E12–21)


HT (H8–1) – HT1B (E12–25)

A72895

E1 (H8–4) – O1B– (E11–26) OX (H10–3) – OX2B (E12–29)

Continuity

HT (H10–1) – HT2B (E12–33) E1 (H10–4) – O2B– (E11–31)

E12

E11


OX1B


O1B– HT1B HT2B OX2B

Specified condition


O2B–

HT (H8–1) or HT1B (E12–25) – Body ground OX (H10–3) or OX2B (E12–29) – Body ground

No continuity



HINT:


The OX1B and HT1B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2. The OX2B and HT2B means the heated oxygen sensor bank 2 sensor 2.


–


Reference (Bank 1 Sensor 2 System Drawing) Heated Oxygen Sensor


+B EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1B


OX1B

Duty Control

O1B– MREL

A72920

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6



7 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B A CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS



OR


–


05CKD–01

DTC

P0171


DTC

P0172


DTC

P0174


DTC

P0175


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel trim is related to the feedback compensation value, not to the basic injection time. The fuel trim includes the short–term fuel trim and the long–term fuel trim. The short–term fuel trim is the short–term fuel compensation used to maintain the air–fuel ratio at stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This variance triggers a reduction in the fuel volume if the air–fuel ratio is RICH, and an increase in the fuel volume if it is LEAN. The long–term fuel trim is the overall fuel compensation carried out in long–term to compensate for a continual deviation of the short–term fuel trim from the central value, due to individual engine differences, wear overtime and changes in the operating environment. If both the short–term fuel trim and the long–term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it is detected as a malfunction and the CHK ENG is illuminated. DTC No.

P0171 P0174

P0172 P0175


Trouble Area

When air–fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on LEAN side (2 trip detection logic)

Air induction system Injector blockage Mass air flow meter Manifold absolute pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Fuel pressure Gas leakage in exhaust system Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) Heated oxygen sensor heater (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) EFI relay PCV valve and hose PCV hose connection ECM

When air–fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on RICH side (2 trip detection logic)

Injector leakage blockage Mass air flow meter Manifold absolute pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Ignition system Fuel pressure Gas leakage in exhaust system Open or short in heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit Heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) ECM

HINT:

When DTC ”P0171 or P0174” is recorded, the actual air–fuel ratio is on the LEAN side. When DTC ”P0172 or P0175” is recorded, the actual air–fuel ratio is on the RICH side. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air–fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC ”P0171 or P0174” is recorded. The CHK ENG then comes on.



S S S

–


If the total of the short–term fuel trim value and long–term fuel trim value is within 25 % (Engine coolant temperature is greater than 75_C), the system is functioning normally. Bank 1 refers to the No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders. Bank 2 refers to the No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders.







–12.5 %



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %


–12.5 %


Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


+25 %

–12.5 %

Less than 0.4V


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG





1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 AND/OR P0175) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175” are output

A

”P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175” and other DTCs are output

B

HINT:

If any other codes besides ”P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. If a misfiring DTC(s) is present, record the DTC(s) that indicates misfiring cylinder(s), then proceed to A.

B


A

2 (a)

CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM Check for vacuum leaks in air the induction system. NG


OK

3


OK




4

–


INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER (a) (b)

Air E2 THA

5

VG +B E2G

4 3 2 1

(c)

30 20

RESISTANCE k

10 5

Remove the mass air flow meter. Output voltage inspection. (1) Apply battery voltage across terminals +B and E2G. (2) Connect the positive (+) tester prove to terminal VG, and negative (–) tester prove to terminal E2G. (3) Blow air into the mass air flow meter, and check that the voltage fluctuates. Resistance inspection. (1) Measure the resistance between terminals THA and E2. Resistance: 13.6 to 18.4 k at –20_C (–4_F) 2.21 to 2.69 k at 20_C (68_F) 0.49 to 0.67 k at 60_C (140_F)

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2

Acceptable

0.1 –20 0 20 40 60 80 100 (–4) (32) (80) (104) (140)(176) (212) TEMPERATURE_C(_F)

A60548

OK


NG



5

(a) (b)

Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 2.32 to 2.59 kW at 20_C (68_F) 0.310 to 0.326 kW at 80_C (176_F) NOTICE: In case of checking the engine coolant temperature sensor in the water, be careful not to allow water to go into the terminals. After checking, dry the sensor. HINT: Alternate procedure: Connect an ohmmeter to the installed engine coolant temperature sensor and read the resistance. Use an infrared thermometer to measure the engine temperature in the immediate vicinity of the sensor. Compare these values to the resistance/temperature graph. Change the engine temperature (warm up or allow to cool down) and repeat the test.

30 20 RESISTANCE KW


INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR(RESISTANCE) Ohmmeter

10 5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 –20

–

0

20 40 60 80 100

(–4) (32) (68) (104) (140) (176) (212)

TEMPERATURE _C (_F)

NG

A81700


OK

6


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

7



OK

8


OK




9

–



REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST LEAKAGE POINT (See page 15–6)

GAS

OK

10 (a)


Go to step 14

YES

11



12



13 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B A




14 (a)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (BANK 1, 2 SENSOR 1)) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) during idling. The output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1): Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).

(b)

P18349

NG

Go to step 21

OK

15



16 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B A

17


GO


Go to step 20


18

–




19 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B


A

20






21

–



Component Side +B

H7 B1S1

HT

̲

̱

̴

̳

(b)


E1

Terminal No.

Resistance

1 (HT) – 2 (+B)

11 to 16 at 20_C (68_F)

1 (HT) – 4 (E1)

No Continuity

A62378

Component Side +B

H9

HT

B2S1

E1

A61830

NG


OK

22



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


23

–




H9

B1S1

HT

B2S1


(b) (c)

HT

OX E1

OX

E1


Specified condition

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–22)


HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–5)

A76821

E1 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Continuity


E12

E13 HT1A


HT2A


Specified condition


OX1A E2


No continuity




HINT:




EFI Fuse

Heater

ECM

HT

HT1A


OX1A E2

Duty Control

MREL

A72920

NG

OK

24



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


25

–




26 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B


A

27






DTC

P0190

–


05CKE–01


Output Voltage

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel pressure sensor is installed on a fuel delivery pipe and detects the fuel pressure. It controls of feedback the pump discharge in order to keep the fuel at target pressure 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) by the ECM.

(V) 4.5

0.5 19.6 (200)

0 (0) Fuel Pressure DTC No. P0190

MPa

(kgf/cm2) A14687


Trouble Area Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit Fuel pressure sensor ECM

Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0190”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the delivery pipe pressure from ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Malfunction PR circuit short

Approximately 0

VC circuit open or short PR circuit open E2 circuit open

19.6 or more

WIRING DIAGRAM F16 Fuel Pressure Sensor

ECM

VCC 1

R–W

18 VC E13

VOUT 2

Y–G

23 PR E13

3

BR

28 E2 E13

GND

5V

E1

A00309



–




1

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) Result: Fuel Pressure (MPa)

Proceed to

19.6 or more

A

0.0

B

OK (8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi)) (*1)

C

*1: The value must be changed when the engine is run or stopped. B

Go to step 3

C


A

2

INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR(VCC VOLTAGE) (a) (b)


VOUT

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Standard:

VCC (+) GND (–)


Specified condition

VCC (F16–1) – GND (F16–3)

4.5 to 5.5 V

Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector A59674

NG OK


Go to step 4


3

–


INSPECT ECM(PR VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13

PR (+)


A76903

Start the engine. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

PR (E13–23) – E2 (E13–28)

2.1 to 3.2 V at 25_C (77_F)

HINT: The fuel pressure in the delivery pipe is 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) NG

Go to step 5


4


E13

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

VC


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VCC (F16–1)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): ECM Connector

A81699


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) or VCC (F16–1) – Body ground

No continuity

Wire Harness Side VOUT F16 VCC GND Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector A59674

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–



E13

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) PR (E13–23) – VOUT (F16–2)

PR

E2 ECM Connector

E2 (E13–28) – GND (F16–3) A81699



Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

PR (E13–23) or VOUT (F16–2) – Body ground

No continuity

VOUT F16 GND Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector A59674

OK REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0191

–


05CKF–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The high–pressure fuel system consists of the spill valve, pump plunger, check valve, fuel relief valve and fuel pressure sensor. The spill valve opens and closes the low–pressure fuel line (from the fuel tank), the pump plunger operated by the camshaft pressurizes fuel, the check valve mechanically opens and closes the high–pressure fuel line (to the fuel delivery pipe), the fuel relief valve prevents fuel pressure from becoming extremely high, and the fuel pressure sensor located on the fuel delivery pipe monitors fuel pressure. The high–pressure fuel pump is mounted on the cylinder head cover, and its plunger is operated by the cam located between #3 and #4 on the intake camshaft. Let the plunger moves up and down by the camshaft rotations, it produces vacuum to suck fuel and pressurizes the fuel. This fuel then pushes the check valve open and flows into the fuel delivery pipe. The ECM opens and closes the spill valve to regulate the fuel pressure to the target fuel pressure 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi). In order to obtain and maintain the target pressure, the ECM monitors the fuel pressure using the fuel pressure sensor and performs the feedback control. If the internal fuel pressure of the fuel delivery pipe exceeds beyond the standard pressure 14 MPa (142.8 kgf/cm2, 2,030 psi), the fuel relief valve installed on gateway of the fuel delivery pipe discharges the fuel pressure and then returns the fuel back to the fuel tank. Reference (Fuel system diagram) ECM

Fuel Pressure Sensor Fuel Delivery Pipe Fuel Injector Pulsation Damper

Fuel Relief Valve

Low–Pressure Fuel Line Spill Valve High–Pressure Fuel Line Check Valve Fuel Tank Pump Plunger Low–Pressure Fuel Pump

DTC No.

P0191

Fuel Pressure Regulator

High–Pressure Fuel Pump

Camshaft A81710

DTC Detection Condition After the fuel pressure is stable for 3 seconds or more, the following condition (a) or (b) continues for more than 10 seconds: (a) ECM did not command the high–pressure fuel pump to open the spill valve, but fuel pressure increases 3 MPa (30.6 kgf/cm2, 435 psi). (b) Despite ECM commanded the high–pressure fuel pump to open the spill valve, fuel pressure decreases 5 MPa (51.0 kgf/cm2, 725 psi).


Trouble Area Open or short in high–pressure fuel pump (spill valve) circuit High–pressure fuel pump Low–pressure fuel pump Fuel pipe Fuel relief valve Fuel pressure regulator ECM


–





1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO DTC P0191) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B



A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Pressure: 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) NG

Go to step 10

OK

3


Go to step 12

OK

4 (a)

CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS(HIGH PRESSURE) Check if there is leakage in the fuel pipe located between the high–pressure fuel pump and the injectors.



NG

–



OK

5

CHECK FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE) (a)

B12608


NG


OK

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP (SPILL VALVE)) (a) (b) E12

(c)

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Disconnect the S3 high–pressure fuel pump (spill valve) connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

FP–

FP+

Symbols (Terminal No.) FP+ (E12–6) – Fuel pump (S3–1)

ECM Connector

FP– (E12–3) – Fuel pump (S3–2)

A81695



Wire Harness Side

FP+ (E12–6) or Fuel pump (S3–1) – Body ground FP– (E12–3) or Fuel pump (S3–2) – Body ground


S3

High–Pressure Fuel Pump (Spill Valve) Connector

OK


A81702

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7 (a) (b) (c) (d)

–



Proceed to


A

No DTC output

B

B


A

8

REPLACE FUEL RELIEF VALVE ASSY

GO

9 (a) (b) (c) (d)


Proceed to


A

No DTC output

B

B

SYSTEM OK

A REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSY (HIGH PRESSURE)

10

CHECK OPERATION OF FUEL PUMP(LOW PRESSURE) (See page 11–33) OK

Go to step 3

NG

11

CHECK VOLTAGE FUEL PUMP(LOW PRESSURE) (See page 05–507) OK

Go to step 3

NG CHECK FOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (See page 05–507) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


12 (a)

–


CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS(LOW PRESSURE) Check if there is leakage in the fuel pipe located between the fuel tank and the high–pressure fuel pump. NG

OK REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSY




–


05CKG–01

DTC

P0200


DTC

P0201


DTC

P0202


DTC

P0203


DTC

P0204


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Electronic Driver Unit (EDU) has been adopted to operate the injector at high speed. The EDU enables the injector to drive in high–speed rate under high–pressure fuel condition using its internal DC/DC converter that provides high voltage and quick–charging system. The ECM constantly monitors the EDU. If the ECM detects abnormal condition, it will stop the engine. DTC No.

P0200

P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204


Trouble Area

No IJF signals to ECM despite crankshaft rotating 10 times (1 trip detection logic). No IJF signals to ECM despite crankshaft rotating 20 times during cranking (2 trip detection logic). No IJF signals of each cylinder to ECM 20 times successively (1 trip detection logic).


Open or short in EDU circuit EDU ((Injector j driver)) Fuel injector assy ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM B–R

ECM

B–R

2 3 D D J/C D D B–R B–R IE4 IP1 J14 J28 J14 J28 (LHD)(RHD) (LHD)(RHD) D D B–R J14 J28 (LHD)(RHD) 2 GR GR IE1

4 2

EFI No. 1

1


4 B–Y B–W

B–R

GR

4

4

3

4

4

INJ Relay

B–Y

B–Y

1 2 EFI 1 1 1A

3 4

4

2 4

W–B

Engine Room R/B No. 4 Electronic Driver Unit

B


4 INJ#1 E4

7 EA1

3 INJ#4 E4

(Shielded) B

B–G

(Shielded)

1 4A

8 5 VB E4 E4 COM1 1 INJ#2 E4

BR


5 IJF E5 4 IJT#1 E5 1 IJT#2 E5 2 IJT#3 E5 3 IJT#4 E5

1 4B B–G

W

FL MAIN

7 E4 GND 2 INJ#3 E4 6 COM2 E4

W–B

BR

2 E9 +B2 8 E9 MREL

B–Y

3 E9 BATT

V

35 E10 IREL

IE2 4

1

EFI Relay 2

V

4

5

1

5


B–Y

1 E9 +B

R–B G–W W–R R–W W–L

25 E13 1 E13 2 E13 3 E13 4 E13

IJF1 #1 #2 #3 #4

I5 Injector No. 1 Y

BR 1 2 I8 Injector No. 4 B–R BR 1 2 BR I6 Injector No. 2 P L 1 2 I7 Injector No. 3 B–W L 1 2 L

W–B

Battery EC

EE

EF A76865



–



1

CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER(POWER SOURCE OF EDU) (a) (b) (c)



Disconnect the E4 EDU connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the EDU connector. Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VB (E4–8) – GND (E4–7)

9 to 14 V

VB (+) A76902

NG

CHECK EDU POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

OK

2

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – FUEL INJECTOR) (a) (b)


COM2

Disconnect the E4 EDU connector. Measure the resistance between the specified terminals of the EDU connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

INJ#1 (E4–4) – COM1 (E4–5) INJ#2 (E4–1) – COM2 (E4–6)

INJ#2 INJ#3 INJ#4 INJ#1 EDU Connector

INJ#3 (E4–2) – COM2 (E4–6)

COM1 A76902

INJ#4 (E4–3) – COM1 (E4–5)

NG OK


Go to step 6

2 55 to 2.85 2.55 2 85 at 20 _C (68 _F)


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EDU) (a) (b) (c)

E13 #4 #1 #2 #3 ECM Connector

IJF1

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the E5 EDU connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

IJF1 (E13–25) – IJF (E5–5) #1 (E13–1) – IJT#1 (E5–4) #2 (E13–2) – IJT#2 (E5–1)

A81699

Continuity y

#3 (E13–3) – IJT#3 (E5–2) #4 (E13–4) – IJT#4 (E5–3)

Wire Harness Side


E5


Specified condition

IJF1 (E13–25) or IJF (E5–5) – Body ground #1 (E13–1) or IJT#1 (E5–4) – Body ground #2 (E13–2) or IJT#2 (E5–1) – Body ground

No continuityy


IJT#2 IJT#3 IJT#4 IJT#1 EDU Connector


IJF A66285

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

CHECK ECM(#1, #2, #3 AND #4 VOLTAGE) #3 #4

#2

(a)

Connect an oscilloscope to terminals #1 – #4 and E01 of the E13 ECM harness side connector.

(b)


#1

E01 E13


Normal Signal Waveform #1 #3 #4

5V/ Division

#2 A81708


HINT: Check the waveform before the ECM detects the DTC(s) and enters the fail–safe mode, because the ECM will no more indicate the voltage output once it enters the fail–safe mode. NG



5

–


CHECK ECM(IJF1 VOLTAGE) (a)

Connect an oscilloscope to terminals IJF1 and E01 of the E13 ECM harness side connector.

(b)


E01

IJF1 E13


Normal Signal Waveform

2V/ Division

IJF1

A81709

HINT: Check the waveform before the ECM detects the DTC(s) and enters the fail–safe mode, because the EDU will no more indicate the voltage output once the ECM enters the fail–safe mode. NG



6

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See page 11–36) NG





–


05CKH–01

DTC

P0300


DTC

P0301


DTC

P0302


DTC

P0303


DTC

P0304


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Misfire: The ECM uses the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor to monitor changes in the crankshaft rotation for each cylinder. The ECM counts the number of times the engine speed change rate indicates that misfire has occurred. And when the misfire rate equals to or exceeds the count of indicating that the engine condition has deteriorated, the CHK ENG is illuminated. If the misfire rate is high enough and the driving conditions will cause the catalyst to overheat, the CHK ENG blinks when misfiring occurs. HINT: For any particular 200 revolutions of the engine, misfiring which would result in overheating of catalyst is detected. This cause CHK ENG to blink (1 trip detection logic). For any particular 1,000 revolutions of engine, misfiring which would result in a deterioration of emissions. This illuminates CHK ENG (2 trip detection logic). DTC No.


P0300


P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304


Trouble Area Open or short in engine wire Connector connection Vacuum hose connection Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing PCV hose connection PCV hose ECM

HINT: When codes for a misfiring cylinder are recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code is recorded, it indicates that the misfires have been detected and recorded at different times.



–


WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0200 on page 05–415 for the wiring diagram of the injector system. Refer to DTC P0351 on page 05–439 for the wiring diagram of the ignition system.

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Record the DTC and freeze frame data. Use the hand–held tester to set to the check (test) mode (See page 05–294). Read the value on the misfire counter for each cylinder when idling. If the value is displayed on the misfire counter, skip the following procedure of confirmation driving. (e) Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with ENGINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the DATA LIST. If you have no hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated once. Then repeat the simulation process again. HINT: In order to memorize the DTC of misfire, it is necessary to drive around MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD for the following period of time in the DATA LIST. Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. Turning the ignition switch OFF switches the diagnosis system from check (test) mode to normal mode. So all DTCs, etc., will be erased.

(f) (g)

Engine Speed

Time

Idling


1,000 rpm

3 minutes or more

2,000 rpm


3,000 rpm

1 minute or more

Check whether there is misfire or not by monitoring the DTC and the freeze frame data, and then, record them. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least for 5 seconds.


If DTCs besides misfire are memorized simultaneously, first perform the troubleshooting for them. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If the misfire does not occur when the vehicle is brought to the workshop, misfire can be confirmed by reproducing the condition of the freeze frame data. Also, after finishing the repair, confirm that there is no misfire (See confirmation driving pattern). When either of SHORT FT #1, LONG FT #1, SHORT FT #2 or LONG FT #2 in the freeze frame data is over the range of 20 %, there is a possibility that the air–fuel ratio is inclining either to ”RICH” (–20 % or less) or ”LEAN” (+20 % or more). When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80C (176F), there is a possibility of misfire only during warming up the engine. If the misfire cannot be reproduced, the reason may be because of the driving the vehicle with lack of fuel, the use of improper fuel, a stain on the ignition plug, etc. Be sure to check the value on the misfire counter after the repair.



1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO MISFIRE DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result : Display

Proceed to

DTC ”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” are output.

A

DTC ”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304” and other codes are output.

B



A

2 (a) (b)

CHECK WIRE HARNESS, CONNECTOR AND VACUUM HOSE IN ENGINE ROOM Check the connection conditions of the wire harness and connector. Check the disconnection, piping and break of the vacuum hose. NG


OK

3



OK

4


(a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (c) Start the engine. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / CYL#1 – CYL#4”. (e) Read the number of misfire on the hand–held tester. HINT: When a misfire is not reproduced, be sure to branch below based on the stored DTC. Result: High Misfire Rate Cylinder

Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A


B

B A


Go to step 12


5

–


CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (a) (b) (c)

Remove the ignition coil with igniter assy. Remove the spark plug. Check the spark plug type. Recommended spark plug: DENSO made

SK20BR11

(d)

1.0 to 1.1 mm (0.039 to 0.043 in.) A78640

Check the spark plug electrode gap. Electrode gap: 1.0 to 1.1 mm (0.039 to 0.043 in.) Maximum electrode gap: 1.3 mm (0.051 in.) NOTICE: If adjusting the gap of a new spark plug, bend only the base the ground electrode. Do not touch the tip. Never attempt to adjust the gap on a used plug. (e) Check the electrode for carbon deposits. (f) Perform a spark test. CAUTION: Each injector connector must be disconnected. NOTICE: Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds. (1) Install the spark plug to the ignition coil with igniter, and connect the ignition coil with igniter connector. (2) Disconnect the injector connectors. (3) Ground the spark plug. (4) Check if spark occurs while the engine is being cranked. Standard: Spark jumps across electrode gap. NG

Go to step 19

OK

6


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

7


OK




8 (a) (b) (c)

–


REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER Read the DTC and check which of the cylinders causes the misfiring DTC (See page 05–294). Remove the injector of the misfiring cylinder and other normal injector (See page 11–42). Swap the injector of misfiring cylinder for the normal injector.

GO

9



10 (a)

READ OUTPUT DTC(MISFIRE DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B

B


A

11



A

12

CHECK VALVE TIMING(CHECK FOR LOOSE AND JUMPING TEETH) NG

ADJUST VALVE TIMING

OK

13


OK




14

–




OK

15 (a) (b) (c)

(d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE AND MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the intake air temperature. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Equivalent to ambient temperature Check the air flow rate. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Condition



0

Idling

4 to 6


13 to 20

Idling – Running


NG OK




16

–


INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (a) (b)

Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 2.32 to 2.59 k at 20_C (68_F) 0.310 to 0.326 k at 80_C (176_F) NOTICE: In case of checking the engine coolant temperature sensor in the water, be careful not to allow water to go into the terminals. After checking, dry the sensor. HINT: Alternate procedure: Connect an ohmmeter to the installed engine coolant temperature sensor and read the resistance. Use an infrared thermometer to measure the engine temperature in the immediate vicinity of the sensor. Compare these values to the resistance/temperature graph. Change the engine temperature (warm up or allow to cool down) and repeat the test.

Ohmmeter

30 20 RESISTANCE K

10 5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 –20

S01196 S01699

0

20 40 60 80 100

(–4) (32) (68) (104) (140) (176) (212)

TEMPERATURE _C (_F)

NG

A81700


OK

17

INSPECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR (See page 05–342) NG

REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

OK

18 S S


A CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS


AGAIN GO TO STEP 5


19

–


INSPECT CHANGE NORMAL SPARK PLUG AND CHECK SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER

(a) Change to the normal spark plug. (b) Perform a spark test. CAUTION: Each injector connector must be disconnected. NOTICE: Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds. (1) Install the spark plug to the ignition coil, and connect the ignition coil connector. (2) Disconnect the injector connectors. (3) Ground the spark plug. (4) Check if spark occurs while the engine is being cranked. Standard: Spark jumps across electrode gap. NG

Go to step 20

OK REPLACE SPARK PLUG

20

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(IGNITION COIL ASSY – ECM) (a)


I1

I2

I3

I4


A54393

Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–2) – IGF1 (E13–24) Ignition coil (I2–2) – IGF1 (E13–24) Ignition coil (I3–2) – IGF1 (E13–24)

Continuity



E13


Specified condition


IGF1



Ignition coil (I2–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground Ignition coil (I3–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground Ignition coil (I4–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground

No continuity


(b)

–



Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY (THEN CONFIRM THAT THERE IS NO MISFIRE)


OR


–


05CKI–01

DTC

P0325

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0327

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

DTC

P0328

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A flat type knock sensor (non–resonant type) has a structure that can detect vibrations in a wide frequency range, from about 6 kHz to 15 kHz, and has the following features. Knock sensor is fitted on the cylinder block to detect the engine knocking. The knock sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed. This occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, the ignition timing is retarded to suppress it. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0325

Output voltage of the knock sensor decreases beyond a threshold. (Threshold varies according to an engine speed.)


P0327

Output voltage of the knock sensor is 0.5 V or less.


P0328

Output voltage of the knock sensor is 4.5 V or more.


HINT: If the ECM detects above diagnosis conditions, it operates the fail safe function in which the corrective retard angle value is set to the maximum value. Reference: The correct waveform is shown in the diagram on the left. KNK Signal Waveform

A83343


Item

Details

Terminal

KNK1 – EKNK

Equipment Settings

0.01 to 10 V/ Division, 0.01 to 10 msec./ Division

Condition

After warming up the engine, keep the engine speed at 4,000 rpm.


–


WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

(Shielded)

B

K1 Knock Sensor 2 1

B

1 KNK1 E12

W

2 EKNK E12

5V

BR BR E J12

D J12 J/C

EE D J13

E J13 BR A76872


1 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). Warm up the engine. Run the engine at 3,000 rpm for 10 seconds or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Result : Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0325” is output again

A

”P0325, P0327 and/or P0328” are output again

B

”P0325, P0327 and/or P0328” are not output again

C

A


B

Go to step 3

C



2

–


CHECK KNOCK SENSOR (a)

Check the knock sensor installation. Torque: 20 Nm (204 kgfcm, 15 ftlbf)

NG

A79596

TIGHTEN SENSOR


3

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – KNOCK SENSOR) (a) (b) E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals KNK1 (E12–1) and EKNK (E12–2) of the ECM connector. Resistance: 120 to 280 k at 20_C (68_F)

KNK1 EKNK ECM Connector A81695

NG

Go to step 5

OK

4

INSPECT ECM(KNK1 VOLTAGE)

EKNK (–)

(a) (b) (c)

KNK1 (+)

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals KNK1 (E12–1) and EKNK (E12–2) of the ECM terminals. Voltage: 4.5 to 5.5 V

E12 ECM Connector

A76969

NG


OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS NOTICE: Fault may be intermittent. Check harness and connectors carefully and result. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


5

–



Ohmmeter

A65174

Remove the knock sensor. Measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 120 to 280 k at 20_C (68_F)

NG





–


05CKJ–01

DTC

P0335


DTC

P0339


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pick up coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signal, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signal. DTC No.

P0335

P0339


Trouble Area

No crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal to ECM during cranking for 3 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic). No crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more (2 trip detection logic). In condition (a), (b) and (c), when no crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal is input for 0.05 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic): (a) Engine revolution 1,000 rpm or more (b) STA signal is OFF (c) 3 sec. or more has been lapsed after STA signal is switched from ON to OFF.

G2+

ECM Connector

NE+

Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor Signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) ECM


E11

NE– A76903

A59781


Item

Details

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Setting


Condition




–



Camshaft Timing Pulley LH

ECM

(Shielded)

1

W

2

R


E

27 G2+ E11

BR R

1

G

2

R

25 NE+ E11 BR

Crankshaft Position Sensor Plate No. 1

R

(Shielded)

24 NE– E11

EE

A76874


Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the engine mechanical system. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

S

1

INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(RESISTANCE) (a) (b)

Component Side

C6


Disconnect the C6 crankshaft position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the crankshaft position sensor. Resistance: 985 to 1,600 at cold 1,265 to 1,890 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG




2

–




C6

NE–


Specified condition



Continuity



Specified condition


E11

NE+ ECM Connector

No continuity

NE– A81698

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Check the crankshaft position sensor installation. NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a) (b)

INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE NO.1(TEETH OF SIGNAL PLATE) Remove the crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1 (See page 14–222). Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG



REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE NO.1


–


05CKK–01

DTC

P0340


DTC

P0341

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor (G2 signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G2 signal rotor has 3 teeth on the outside and is mounted on the intake camshaft. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil changes, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1) has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signal, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signal. DTC No.

DTC Detection Condition No camshaft position sensor (G2) signal to ECM during cranking for 4 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic).

P0340

P0341

No camshaft position sensor (G2) signal to ECM with engine speed 600 rpm or more for 5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic). While crankshaft rotates twice, camshaft position sensor (G2) signal will be input to ECM 12 times or more (1 trip detection logic).

Trouble Area

Open O or short h t in i camshaft h ft position iti sensor circuit i it Camshaft position sensor Camshaft timing gear Timing chain has jumped a tooth ECM

HINT:

DTC P0340 indicate a malfunction related to the camshaft position sensor (+) circuit. (Wire harness (ECM – camshaft position sensor) and camshaft position sensor) DTC P0341 indicate a malfunction related to the camshaft position sensor (–) circuit. (Wire harness (ECM – camshaft position sensor) and camshaft position sensor)



G2+

ECM Connector



E11

NE+

–

NE– A76903

Item

Details

Terminal

CH1: G2+ – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Setting


Condition



A59781



1

INSPECT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(RESISTANCE) (a) (b)

Component Side

C1

Camshaft Position Sensor A64984

Disconnect the C1 camshaft position sensor connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the camshaft position sensor. Resistance: 835 to 1,400 at cold 1,060 to 1,645 at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG

OK




2

–




C1

NE–

Disconnect the C1 camshaft position sensor connector. Disconnect the E11 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) – G2+ (E11–27)


Continuity

Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) – NE– (E11–24)


Specified condition

Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) or G2+ (E11–27) – Body ground Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) or NE– (E11–24) – Body ground

E11

G2+ ECM Connector

NE–

NG A81698

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) Inspect the camshaft position sensor installation. NG

TIGHTEN SENSOR

OK

4 (a) (b)

INSPECT CAMSHAFT Remove the camshafts (See page 14–240). Check the camshaft lobes. NG



No continuity

REPLACE CAMSHAFT

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKL–01

DTC

P0351

IGNITION COIL ”A” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0352

IGNITION COIL ”B” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0353

IGNITION COIL ”C” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

DTC

P0354

IGNITION COIL ”D” PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

HINT:

These DTCs indicate a malfunction related to primary circuit. If DTC P0351 is displayed, check No. 1 ignition coil with igniter If DTC P0352 is displayed, check No. 2 ignition coil with igniter If DTC P0353 is displayed, check No. 3 ignition coil with igniter If DTC P0354 is displayed, check No. 4 ignition coil with igniter

circuit. circuit. circuit. circuit.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A Direct Ignition System (DIS) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduces high–voltage loss, and enhances the overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor. The DIS is a 1–cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1–cylinder ignition system, the one spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary winding. High voltage generated in the secondary winding is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug passes from the center electrode to the ground electrode. The ECM determines the ignition timing and outputs the ignition signals (IGT) for each cylinder. Based on the IGT signals, the power transistors in the igniter cut off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil is supplied to the spark plug that is connected to the end of the secondary coil. At the same time, the igniter also sends an ignition confirmation signal (IGF) as a fail–safe measure to the ECM.



ECM

–


From Battery Igniter No.1 Ignition Coil with Igniter


No.1 Cylinder



IGT3

IGT4 Various Sensor

Spark Plug


No.2 Cylinder


No.3 Cylinder


No.4 Cylinder

TAC

To Tachometer

A73818

DTC No. P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354




Trouble Area Ignition system Open or short in IGF and IGT circuit from ignition coil with igniter to ECM (ignition coil circuit 1 through 4) Ignition coil with igniter (ignition coil 1 through 4) IG2 relay ECM


–



B–R 4

AM2 IG2

Driver Side J/B

2

6 B–R


1


W–B

IGN

16 DL B

1 1A

B–R R–B

1 4

B–G

B

1 4A


1 4B

4 IG2 Relay

5

1

R–B 3

2

4


4 R–B

1

2

R–W

W–B


8 E13 IGT1

W–R


IG2 2

1

3

R–B

2 DH

1 AM2

4

ECM

IGT2

IGT3 IGF1

IGT4

B–G 8 EA1 FL MAIN

R–B W–B

R–B W–B Battery EC

B–R 1 N2 Noise Filter (Ignition)

EF

A76873



–



1

PERFORM SIMULATION TEST(CHECK DTC)

(a) Read the DTC and check which of the cylinders causes the DTC (See page 05–294). (b) Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). (c) Swap the ignition coil with igniter of the cylinder that is referred by the DTC for the others. NOTICE: Do not swap the ignition coil with igniter connector for the others. (d) Start the engine. (e) Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B

B


A

2

INSPECT ECM(IGT1, IGT2, IGT3 OR IGT4 VOLTAGE) (a)

IGT4 IGT3

IGT2

IGT1

E1

During cranking or idling, check the waveform between terminals IGT1 to IGT4 and E1, and IGF1 and E1 of the ECM connector. Item

Details

Terminal

IGF1 E13 E11 ECM Connector

A76903

CH1: IGT1, IGT2, IGT3, IGT4 – E1 CH2: IGF1 – E1

Equipment Settings


Condition


HINT: Correct waveform appears as shown, with rectangle waves.

Normal Signal Waveforms

CH1

GND

CH2 GND A35500

NG


OK



3

–


CHECK IGNITION COIL ASSY(POWER SOURSE) (a)


I2

I3

I4

(b)

(c) (d) +B

GND A54393

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil with igniter connector. Check for open between terminal GND of the ignition coil with igniter connector and body ground. Resistance: 1 or less Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals +B and GND of the ignition coil with igniter connector. Voltage: 9 to 14 V

NG

Go to step 5

OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – IGNITION COIL) (a)


I1

I2

I3

I4


Specified condition


A54393

Ignition coil (I2–2) – IGF1 (E13–24) Ignition coil (I3–2) – IGF1 (E13–24)

Continuity



E13


Specified condition


IGF1


Ignition coil (I2–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground Ignition coil (I3–2) or IGF1 (E13–24) – Body ground

No continuity


(b)


Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–3) – IGT1 (E13–8) Ignition coil (I2–3) – IGT2 (E13–9) Ignition coil (I3–3) – IGT3 (E13–10) Ignition coil (I4–3) – IGT4 (E13–11)


Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY

OK

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – IGNITION COIL) (a)


I2

I3

I4

(b) (c)

Disconnect the I1, I2, I3 or I4 ignition coil with igniter connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


+B A54393

Ignition coil (I2–1) – IG2 relay (3) Ignition coil (I3–1) – IG2 relay (3)

Continuity




Specified condition

Ignition coil (I1–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground Ignition coil (I2–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground Ignition coil (I3–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground Ignition coil (I4–1) or IG2 relay (3) – Body ground

IG2 Relay


A79064

No continuity


NG

–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK FOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (See page 05–507)


REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKM–01

DTC

P0420


DTC

P0430


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM compares the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor located before the catalyst with the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor located after the catalyst to determine whether or not the catalyst performance has deteriorated. The air–fuel ratio feedback compensation keeps the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor before the catalyst repeatedly changing back and forth from rich to lean. If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor after the catalyst switches back and forth between rich and lean much more slowly than the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor before the catalyst. But when both waveforms change at a similar rate, it indicates that the catalyst performance has deteriorated. Waveform of Heated Oxygen Sensor before Catalyst

Normal Catalyst

Waveform of Heated Oxygen Sensor after Catalyst

A54278

DTC No. P0420 P0430

DTC Detection Condition After engine and catalyst are warmed up, and while vehicle is driven within set value and engine speed range, waveforms of heated oxygen sensors have the same amplitude (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter (inside exhaust manifold)

HINT:




–


CONFIRMATION ENGINE RACING PATTERN Engine Speed (c)

2,500 to 3,000 rpm

Idling IG SW OFF

(d)

(b) (a) Warming up

3 min. or so

Check

Time A54279

(a)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3, or connect the probe of the oscilloscope between terminals OX1A, OX2A, OX1B or OX2B and E2 of the ECM connectors. (b) Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched OFF until the engine coolant temperature is stable. (c) Run the engine at 2,500 to 3,000 rpm for about 3 minutes. (d) After confirming that the waveforms of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1 (OX1A, OX2A)) which oscillates around 0.5 V during feedback to the ECM, check the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2 (OX1B, OX2B)). HINT: OX Signal Waveform (Oscilloscope) If there is a malfunction in the system, the waveform of the 1.0 V heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2 (OX1B, OX2B)) is almost the same as that of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1 (OX1A, OX2A)) on the left. There are some cases where, even though a malfunction ex0V ists, the CHK ENG may either light up or not light up. 0.2 sec./Division

A54280




1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO P0420 AND/OR P0430) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B



A

2



EXHAUST

OK

3



OK

4



OK REPLACE THREE–WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (EXHAUST MANIFOLD)


GAS


DTC

P0443

–


05CK6–01

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION To reduce HC emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through the charcoal canister to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders. The ECM changes the duty signal to the VSV for the EVAP so that the intake quantity of HC emissions is appropriate for the driving conditions (engine load, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is warmed up. DTC No.


P0443

Trouble Area Open of short in VSV circuit for EVAP VSV for EVAP ECM

Proper response to ECM command does not occur


ECM


EFI

1

EFI Relay


4

5

3

8 E9 MREL

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

1

2

GR

4 IE1 2

B–G EFI No. 2

1 4A


1 4B

2

B–W

V5 VSV (EVAP)

B–G 13 EA1

FL MAIN

GR

4

1

B–W

1

2

W–G

34 E13 EVP1




–



1

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSV FOR EVAP) VSV is ON

(a) (b) (c)

VSV is OFF

(d)

Air

Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VSV for EVAP. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / EVAP VSV” (press the right or left button). When the VSV for EVAP is operated by the hand–held tester, check whether the disconnected hose applies suction to your finger. Standard: Tester operation

A81705

Specified condition

VSV is ON

Disconnected hose applies suction to your finger

VSV is OFF

Disconnected hose applies no suction to your finger

OK


NG

2

INSPECT VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1(VSV FOR EVAP) (See page 12–13) NG

REPLACE VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1 (VSV FOR EVAP)

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(EVP1 VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E01 (–) E13

EVP1 (+)

ECM Connector

NG



Specified condition

EVP1 (E13–34) – E01 (E13–7)

9 to 14 V

OK A76903



4



E13

EVP1

–

ECM Connector

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the V5 VSV for EVAP connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VSV for EVAP (V5–2) – EVP1 (E13–34)

Continuity



Specified condition

VSV for EVAP (V5–2) or EVP1 (E13–34) – Body ground

No continuity



OK


A52933

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – VSV FOR EVAP) (a)

(b) (c) (d)


Inspect the EFI No. 2 fuse. (1) Remove the EFI No. 2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. (2) Check for continuity in the EFI No. 2 fuse. Standard: Continuity Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Disconnect the V5 VSV for EVAP connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

EFI relay (3) – VSV for EVAP (V5–1)

Continuity


EFI Relay A66053


Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or VSV for EVAP (V5–1) – Body ground

No continuity



A52933

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0500

–


05CJ6–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The speed sensor for skid control ECU detects the wheel speed and sends the appropriate signals to the skid control ECU. The skid control ECU converts these signals into a 4–pulse signal and outputs it to the combination meter. After this signal is converted into a more precise rectangular waveform by the waveform shaping circuit inside the combination meter,it is then transmitted to the ECM. The ECM determines the vehicle speed based on the frequency of these pulse signals. 4–Pulse Skid Control ECU

From Speed Sensor

4–Pulse


A81703

DTC No.

P0500


Trouble Area

No vehicle speed sensor signal to ECM under the following condition (1 trip (A/T) or 2 trip (M/T) detection logic): (a) Vehicle is being driven


WIRING DIAGRAM


18 C11

V–W

H H J10 J20

J/C

H H J10 J20

V–W

17 E10 SPD


A76866



–



1




OK

2

INSPECT ECM(SPD VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c) (d)

E01 (–) E13

E10

Shift the lever to the neutral position. Jack up the vehicle. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E13 ECM connectors as the wheel is turned slowly. Standard:

SPD (+) ECM Connector

A59661


Specified condition

SPD (E10–17) – E01 (E13–7)


HINT: The output voltage should fluctuate ups and downs similarly to the diagram on the left as the wheel is turned slowly. 4.5 to 5.5V

0V Turn Wheel

NG

A81704



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0504

–


05CJ5–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In this system, the signal of the stop light switch is used to judge whether the acceleration system is abnormal or not. The stop light switch has a duplex system (signals STP and ST1–) to memorize the abnormality when the signals of depressing and releasing the brake pedal are detected simultaneously. HINT: Normal condition is as shown in the table.

DTC No.

P0504

Signal


In transition

STP

OFF

ON

ON

ST1–

ON

ON

OFF

DTC Detection Condition Condition (a), (b) and (c) continue for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) Ignition switch ON (b) Brake pedal released (c) STP signal is OFF when the ST1– signal is OFF



Trouble Area Short in stop light switch signal circuit Stop light switch ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM AM2 IG2

B–R 4

G–W

To Stop Light

6 B–R

I13 Ignition SW 1 IE4 (LHD) 1 IP1 (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

G–W (RHD)

B–R 1 IR1

6 IE3 1 2 AM2 1 1 1A


B–G

DH 2

G–W (RHD)

G–W (LHD)

IGN

10 G–W 19 E10 STP DC

G–W (RHD) 4 IR1 G–W (RHD)

1

G–W (LHD)

3

2 R–W (LHD)

14 IE2


B–W

1 4A

G–W (LHD)

4

DA 18


ECM

12 E10 ST1–

1

Driver Side J/B

Driver Side J/B

1 DM 2 DA

B–W (RHD)

R–W (RHD)

11 IE3

2 IR1

3 IR1

B–W (LHD) 20 IE1

ALT R–W (LHD)

2 1 4B

R–W (RHD)

1 4D

B–G

B–W (RHD)

DA 22

B–G

C J9 (LHD) E J27 (RHD)

FL MAIN STOP

Driver Side J/B

Battery B–G

B–W (LHD)


DN 1 B–W

A76867




1 (a)

–




OK

2

INSPECT STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSY (a)

Free

Pushed in 2

1


4

Terminal No.

Specified condition

1–2

Continuity

3–4

No continuity

1–2

No continuity

3–4

Continuity

3

NG

A81707

REPLACE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSY

OK

3



(a) (b)


(c) E1 (–)

E11

ST1– (+)


Specified condition

Depressed

STP Signal ON

Released

STP Signal OFF



Brake pedal

Specified condition

ST1– (E10 ST1 (E10–12) 12) – E1 (E11–1)

Depressed

Below 1.5 V

Released

7.5 to 14 V

E10




NG

Go to step 4


4

–



Wire Harness Side

S13


Specified condition



Continuity

Stop light switch (S13–4) – ST1– (E10–12) A56986


Specified condition

Stop light switch (S13–1) or STP (E10–19) – Body ground Stop light switch (S13–4) or ST1– (E10–12) – Body ground

No continuity

E10

ST1–

STP

NG




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKN–01

DTC

P0555

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC

P0557

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC

P0558

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The brake booster pressure sensor detects internal pressure of the brake booster as voltage. A structure of the sensor and its connection to the ECM are the same as ones for the intake air pressure sensor. (Refer to DTC P0105 on page 05–342). In order to purify emission gas when starting a cold engine, drastically retard the ignition timing to quickly activate tha catalyst. Upon this, the throttle valve is opened larger than the throttle opening angle with a warm engine, therefore the intake manifold pressure will be closer to atmospheric pressure. If the negative pressure (vacuum) applied inside the brake booster drops, the ECM cancels the drastic retarding timing and introduces the negative pressure (vacuum) into the intake manifold, and the ECM then resumes the drastic retarding timing after the brake booster negative pressure (vacuum) is ensured at required level. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0555

Open or short in brake booster pressure sensor circuit for 5 sec. or more

P0557

Open in brake booster pressure sensor circuit for 5 sec. or more

P0558

Short in brake booster pressure sensor circuit for 5 sec. or more

O Open en or short in brake booster pressure ressure sensor circuit Brake booster pressure sensor Vacuum hose ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM B2 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor VC 3

ECM

R–W

9 EA1

R–W

18 VC E13

PIM

2

Y

11 EA1

Y

26 PB E13

E2

1

BR

10 EA1

BR

28 E2 E13

5V

E1

A76868



–




1 (a) (b) (c)



OK

2


VC (+) E13

E2 (–)


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

4.5 to 5.5 V

NG

ECM Connector

A76903


OK

3


Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:

Symbols (Terminal No.) PB (E13–26) – E2 (E13–28) (E13 28)

PB (+)


NG A76903



Condition

Specified condition


0.5 to 4.5 V

Go to step 4

Idling


4

–



(c)

VC E2 ECM Connector

PB


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VC (B2–3) PB (E13–26) – PIM (B2–2)

A81699

Continuity y

E2 (E13–28) – E2 (B2–1)


Wire Harness Side


PIM

B2


E2

1

2 3


No continuity

VC

NG A72877

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



Specified condition

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0556

–


05CKO–01

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0555 on page 05–459.

Brake Booster Pressure Sensor

ECM

Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

Check Valve Throttle Valve To Cylinder

Intake Manifold

Air Cleaner Case Brake Booster A81711

DTC No.


P0556

When either one of the following conditions (a), (b), (c) or (d) is satisfied (1 trip detection logic): (a) If pressure inside the intake manifold is low, the brake booster internal pressure is 38 kPa (285 mmHg, 11.2 in.Hg) or more higher than the intake manifold internal pressure and this condition remains for more than 10 sec. (Pressure leaks caused by hose disconnection, etc). (b) Pressure inside the brake booster stays low or at fixed level, despite the vehicle has driven and stopped 10 times (Vacuum stuck caused by hose clogged, etc). (c) While the brake pedal is released, the pressure inside the brake booster is 32 kPa (240 mmHg, 9.4 in.Hg) or more higher than the intake manifold internal pressure and this condition remains for more than 1 sec. (Pressure leaks). (d) After running the engine for more than 100 sec. with the brake pedal released and the negative pressure (vacuum) has accumulated in the brake booster, the following two conditions are satisfied despite depressing the brake pedal for more than 1 sec. (Vacuum stuck): Internal pressure of the brake booster does not increase Internal pressure of the brake booster is 32 kPa (240 mmHg, 9.4 in.Hg) or more lower than the internal pressure of the intake manifold

WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0555 on page 05–459. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area



–



1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO P0556) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result : Display

Proceed to


A


B



A

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Warm up the engine. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester with the shift lever is the ”N” position. Standard : Condition

Intake Manifold Absolute Pressure





NG

Go to step 7

OK

3 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STOP LIGHT SWITCH) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result : Brake Pedal

STP Signal

Depressed

ON

Released

OFF



NG

–


CHECK AND REPAIR STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT

OK

4 (a) (b) (c)



OK

5


PB (+)

(b) (c)


A76903

Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster pressure sensor. Turn the ignition switch ON. Using the MITYVAC (Hand–Held Vacuum Pump), apply a vacuum to the brake booster pressure sensor, measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


PB (E13–26) – E2 ((E13–28))

NG

Vacuum pump operation

Specified condition

0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 in.Hg)

3.3 to 3.9 V

40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 in.Hg)

2.1 to 2.7 V

80 kPa (600 mmHg, 23.6 in.Hg)

0.9 to 1.5 V

Go to step 6

OK CHECK FUNCTION OF BRAKE BOOSTER (See page 32–17, 32–21)



6

–



(c)

VC E2 ECM Connector

PB


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VC (B2–3) PB (E13–26) – PIM (B2–2)

A81699

Continuity y

E2 (E13–28) – E2 (B2–1)


Wire Harness Side


PIM

B2


E2

1

2 3



VC

NG A72877

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


7 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK VACUUM HOSE(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR – INTAKE MANIFOLD) Check that the vacuum hose is connected correctly. Check that the vacuum hose is not loose or disconnected. Check the vacuum hose for clogs, cracks, holes, damage, or blockage. NG

OK




8

–



(c)

VC E2 ECM Connector

PIM


Specified condition

VC (E13–18) – VCC (V1–3) PIM (E13–33) – VOUT (V1–2)

A81699

Continuity y

E2 (E13–28) – GND (V1–1)


Wire Harness Side


VOUT

V1

VC (E13–18) or VCC (V1–3) – Body ground PIM (E13–33) or VOUT (V1–2) – Body ground

GND

1

2 3


No continuity

VCC

NG A72877

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



Specified condition

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P0560

–


05CK3–01

SYSTEM VOLTAGE



P0560

Trouble Area Open in back–up power source circuit ECM

Open in back–up power source circuit

HINT: If DTC P0560 is present, the ECM is unable to store other DTCs.

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room J/B No. 1 and Engine Room R/B No. 1 1 1A

B–G

4A

ECM

EFI 1

2

1

B–Y


3 E9

BATT


4B

B–Y

BR

1 E11 E1

1

B–G FL MAIN

BR Battery EE

A76869




1

–



Engine Room R/B No. 1 EFI Fuse


NG

CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED EFI FUSE

A66054

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(BATT VOLTAGE) (a) E1 (–)

BATT (+)

E11 ECM Connector


Specified condition

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

E9 A67446



Go to step 3


3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – EFI FUSE, EFI FUSE – BATTERY) (a)


EFI Fuse 2 1

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and ECM. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A79078


Specified condition


Continuity


E9

(b)

BATT ECM Connector

A67445


Specified condition


No continuity

Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and battery. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity


Specified condition


No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CJA–01

DTC

P0604

INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR

DTC

P0606

ECM/PCM PROCESSOR

DTC

P0607


DTC

P0657

ACTUATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT/OPEN

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. P0604 P0606 P0607 P0657


ECM inside error

Trouble Area

ECM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. REPAIR OR REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)



DTC

P0617

–


05CJ9–01

STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the engine is being cranked, the battery positive voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. DTC No.


Trouble Area

When all conditions (a), (b) and (c) are satisfied with battery (+B) voltage 10.5 V or more for 20 sec. (a) Vehicle speed greater than 20 km/h (b) Engine revolution greater than 1,000 rpm (c) STA signal ON

P0617


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition SW 1 1 B–R IE4 IP1 (LHD)(RHD)

B–R

4

B–R B–R

AM2 ST2

ECM 5

B–Y

17 E13 STA

B–Y B–Y

1 5 Engine Room R/B No. 1

2 AM2 1

6

1

5

3

B–G Engine Room R/B No. 4

1 ST 2

2 5

1 4B

Driver Side R/B

ST Relay

1 1A

1 4A

Fuse Block

5

6

5 B

B–Y B–W Driver J/C Side J/B B J13 C J13

W–B

7 IK1

2 DJ

B–G B FL MAIN B–R

1 1 S4 S5

9 DA

B J12

Battery IJ

B–W (A/T) 9

A J12 B–Y

B–Y (M/T)

Starter W–B

A J12

B–Y (A/T) 6

N1 Park/Neutral Position Switch


A76870


–



1 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK


NG

2 (a)

INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY Inspect the park/neutral position switch (A/T) (See page 05–938). NG

REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (See page 40–8) (GO TO NEXT STEP 3 AFTER THE REPLACEMENT)

OK

3 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

SYSTEM OK

NG

4

INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY (See page 80–2) NG


REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY (GO TO NEXT STEP 5 AFTER THE REPLACEMENT)


5 (a) (b) (c)

–



ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

SYSTEM OK




DTC

P0705

–


05CJ8–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch goes on when the shift lever is in the N or P shift position. If the shift lever is moved from the N position to the D position, this signal is used for air–fuel ratio correction and for idle speed control (estimated control), etc. DTC No. P0705

DTC Detection Condition 2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for N, P, D and R positions (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Short in park/neutral position switch circuit Park/neutral position switch ECM

HINT: After confirming DTC P0705, use the hand–held tester to confirm the park/neutral position switch signal from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE Refer to DTC P0705 on page 05–938.



DTC

P0724

–


05CJ7–01


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This STP signal is used to detect that the brakes have been applied. The STP signal voltage is the same as the one supplied to the stop lights. The STP signal is used mainly to control the fuel cut–off engine speed (The fuel cut–off engine speed is reduced slightly when the vehicle is braking). DTC No. P0724


Trouble Area

The stop light switch does not turn off even the vehicle is driven. (2 trip detection logic)




1 (a)

CHECK OPERATION OF STOP LIGHT Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake pedal is operated and released. NG


OK

2 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STOP LIGHT SWITCH) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Brake Pedal

STP Signal

Depressed

ON

Released

OFF

OK NG




3

–



Wire Harness Side

S13



Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity

E10

STP

NG




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P1235

–


05CK4–01

HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel pump (high pressure) is an electronically controlled plunger type fuel pump (high pressure) which is driven by the cam provided on the intake cam shaft rear end on the cylinder head. The fuel pump (high pressure) increases the pressure of the fuel fed from the fuel pump (low pressure) in the fuel tank at 8 to 13 MPa (81.6 to 132.6 kgf/cm2, 1,160 to 1,885 psi) according to the operating condition, and it feeds the fuel to the fuel delivery pipe. DTC No. P1235

DTC Detection condition Open or short O h t in i ffuell pump (hi (high h pressure)) circuit i it ffor 1 1sec. or more

Trouble Area O Open en or short in fuel pump um (high pressure) ressure) Fuel pump um (high pressure) ressure) ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM

BR G D J13

S3 Fuel Pump (High Pressure) (Spill Valve) 1 2

ECM

(Shielded) R

6 E12 FP+

G

3 E12 FP–

E J13 J/C

E J12 BR EE

D J12 BR (Shielded)

A76876

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.



1

–


CHECK OPERATION OF FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE) (a)

B12608


NG

REPLACE FUEL PUMP (HIGH PRESSURE)

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(FP+ AND FP– VOLTAGE) (a) FP+

E12

E11

E1

Turn the ignition switch ON, and check the waveforms between terminals FP+ and E1, and FP– and E1 of the E11 and E12 ECM connectors.

HINT: The correct waveform is as shown in the illustration.

FP– ECM Connector

A76903

Normal Signal Waveforms 10 V/ Division FP– GND FP+

5 msec./Division

A14558

NG


OK

3

CHECK FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE) (See page 11–33) NG

OK


REPLACE FUEL PUMP(HIGH PRESSURE)


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FUEL PUMP (HIGH PRESSURE) – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Disconnect the S3 fuel pump (high pressure) connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

FP–

FP+

FP+ (E12–6) – Fuel pump (S3–1) FP– (E12–3) – Fuel pump (S3–2)

ECM Connector

A81695

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) FP+ (E12–6) or Fuel pump (S3–1) – Body ground

Wire Harness Side

Specified condition

FP– (E12–3) or Fuel pump (S3–2) – Body ground


S3

Fuel Pump Connector (High Pressure)

A81702



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2008

–


05CK5–01

INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Intake Air Control valve (IACV) is opened and shut by the actuator with intake manifold vacuum. It stabilizes the engine combustion. The IACV operation generates swirl air flow in the cylinder. DTC No.


Trouble Area Open of short in VSV for IACV circuit VSV for IACV ECM

Open or short in VSV for IACV circuit 0.5 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic)

P2008


ECM


EFI

1

EFI Relay


4

5

3

8 E9 MREL

4 B–W

W–B

1 1A

4

1

2

GR

4 IE1 2

B–G EFI No. 2

1 4A


1 4B

2

B–W

V6 VSV (Intake Air Control Valve)

B–G 13 EA1

FL MAIN

GR

4

1

B–W

1

2

L–B

5 E13 SCV




–



1

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSV FOR IACV) (a) (b) (c) Air

Air E

E F

(d)

F VSV is ON

VSV is OFF A81701

Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VSV for IACV. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / SCV VSV” (press the right or left button). Check the VSV for IACV operation when it is operated by the hand–held tester. Standard: Tester operation

Specified condition

VSV is ON

Air from port E flows out through port F.

VSV is OFF

Air does not flow from port E to port F.

NG

Go to step 2


2

INSPECT VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1(VSV FOR IACV) (See page 13–2) NG

REPLACE VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1 (VSV FOR IACV)

OK

3

INSPECT ECM(SCV VOLTAGE)

SCV (+) E13

(a) (b)

E1 (–) E11

ECM Connector

A76903


Specified condition

SCV (E13–5) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

NG



Go to step 4


4

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – VSV FOR IACV) (a) (b) (c)

E13

SCV

ECM Connector

Disconnect the V6 VSV for IACV connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–2) – SCV (E13–5)

Continuity



Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–2) or SCV (E13–5) – Body ground

No continuity

Wire Harness Side

V6

NG


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

5

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – VSV FOR IACV) (a)


(b) (c) (d)

EFI Relay A66053

Inspect the EFI No. 2 fuse. (1) Remove the EFI No. 2 fuse from the engine room R/B No. 4. (2) Check the continuity of the EFI No. 2 fuse. Standard: Continuity Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No. 4. Disconnect the V6 VSV for IACV connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open):

Wire Harness Side


Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–1) – EFI relay (3)

Continuity

Standard (Check for short): V6



Specified condition

VSV for IACV (V6–1) or EFI relay (3) – Body ground

No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

OK CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–502) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKP–01

DTC

P2102

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

DTC

P2103

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The throttle motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body. It provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle motor in order to regulate the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to the driving condition. If this malfunction is detected, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: This electrical throttle system does not use the throttle cable. DTC No.

P2102

P2103


Trouble Area

Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 2.0 seconds: (a) Throttle control motor output duty greater than 80 % (b) Throttle control motor current less than 0.5 A


Throttle control motor current greater than 10 A


Condition (a) continues for 0.6 seconds: (a) Throttle control motor current greater than 7 A

WIRING DIAGRAM T1 Throttle Control Motor (Built in Throttle Body)

ECM (Shielded)

2

B

1

W

3 E11 M+

2 E11 M–

17 E11 GE01

A54292



–



1




T1

M+

NG

M– A59778

REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY (See page 10–44)

OK

2


Wire Harness Side T1



M–

M– (T1–1) – M– (E11–2)

M+ B53781




E11


A54408

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05CKQ–01

DTC

P2111

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – STUCK OPEN

DTC

P2112

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – STUCK CLOSED

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The throttle motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve using gears. The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body. And, it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle motor in order to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to the driving condition. If this malfunction is detected, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: This electrical throttle system is no used throttle cable. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P2111

The throttle motor locked during control by the ECM (Stuck open)

P2112

The throttle motor locked during control by the ECM (Stuck closed)




1 (a)

INSPECT THROTTLE BODY ASSY(VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE VALVE) Check it a foreign object has been caught between the throttle valve and the housing. NG

OK


REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT AND CLEAN THROTTLE BODY


2

–





T1

M+

M–

NG

A59778


OK

3


Wire Harness Side Throttle Body Connector T1


M–

M– (T1–1) – M– (E11–2)

M+ B53781




E11


A54408



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2118

–


05CKR–01

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CURRENT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If this DTC is detected, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. HINT: This electrical throttle control system (ETCS) does not use the throttle cable. DTC No.


P2118

Trouble Area Open in ETCS power source circuit ECM

Open in ETCS power source circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room J/B No. 1 and Engine Room R/B No. 1

Engine Room J/B No. 4 B–G

1 4B

1 4A

B–G

1 THROTTLE 1A 1 2 1

G–R

ECM 5 IE2

G–Y

6 +BM E10

FL MAIN

Battery

A76877



–



1

CHECK FUSE(THROTTLE FUSE) (a)


(b)

THROTTLE Fuse

Remove the THROTTLE fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. Check for continuity in the THROTTLE fuse. Standard: Continuity

NG A82233


OK

2

INSPECT ECM(+BM VOLTAGE) (a) E1 (–)

E11

+BM (+)

Check the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E11 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+BM (E10–6) – E1 (E11–1)

9 to 14 V

E10

ECM Connector

NG


A67446

OK



3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – THROTTLE FUSE, THROTTLE FUSE – BATTERY) (a)


THROTTLE Fuse

Check the harness and the connector between the THROTTLE fuse and the ECM. (1) Remove the THROTTLE fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A82234


Specified condition

THROTTLE fuse (2) – +BM (E10–6)

Continuity


(b)

+BM ECM Connector

A67404


Specified condition

THROTTLE fuse (2) or +BM (E10–6) – Body ground

No continuity

Check the harness and the connector between the THROTTLE fuse and the battery. (1) Remove the THROTTLE fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

Battery positive terminal – THROTTLE fuse (1)

Continuity


Specified condition

Battery positive terminal or THROTTLE fuse (1) – Body ground

No continuity

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2119

–


05CKS–01

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL THROTTLE BODY RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Electric Throttle Control System (ETCS) is composed of the throttle motor that operates the throttle valve, the throttle position sensor that detects the opening angle of the throttle valve, the accelerator pedal position sensor that detects the accelerator pedal position, the ECM that controls the ETCS, and the one valve type throttle body. The ECM controls the throttle motor to provide the proper throttle valve opening angle in response to the driving condition. The throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body detects the opening angle of the throttle valve, and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle motor. If the ETCS has a malfunction, the ECM shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is closed by the return spring. And the throttle valve is locked at a certain opening angle. Also, the whole electronically controlled throttle operation is cancelled until the system returns to normal and the ignition switch is turned OFF. DTC No. P2119


Trouble Area

Throttle opening angle continues to vary greatly from target throttle opening angle




1 (a)

CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(IN ADDITION TO DTC P2119) Read the DTC using hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B


A




2

–


INSPECT THROTTLE BODY ASSY (a) (b)



T1

M+

M– A59778

NG


OK

3 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

REPLACE ECM AND CLEAR DTC(CHECK IF DTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR) Replace the ECM. Clear the DTC (See page 05–294). Start and warm up the engine. Run the engine at idle for 15 sec. or more. Read the DTC (See page 05–294). Standard: No DTC output. OK

NG REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY


NORMAL


–


05CKT–01

DTC

P2120


DTC

P2122


DTC

P2123


DTC

P2125


DTC

P2127


DTC

P2128


DTC

P2138





–


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: This electrical throttle system is no used throttle cable. The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket and it have the 2 sensors to detect the accelerator position and a malfunction of the accelerator position sensor. In the accelerator pedal position sensor, the voltage applied to VPA1 and VPA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the accelerator pedal. The VPA1 is a signal to indicate the actual accelerator pedal opening angle which is used for the engine control, and the VPA2 is a signal to indicate the information about VPA1 which is used for detecting a malfunction in VPA1. The ECM monitors the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals input from VPA1 and VPA2, and controls the throttle motor based on these signals. Movable Range



Usable Range

*1


*2

*1

5

VPA2

*2 0.8

VPA1

0

EP2

VPA1

VPA2 VCP2

VCP1

*1


*2




–



DTC No.

Trouble Area

P2120


P2122


P2123


P2125

Condition (a) continues for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) VPA2 less than 0.5 V and VPA greater than 0.97 deg, or VPA2 greater than 4.8 V and VPA greater than 0.2 V but less than 3.45 V

P2127


P2128


P2138






ACCEL POS #2

ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

VCP circuit open

0V

0V

0V

0V


0V

1.5 to 2.9 V

0V

3.5 to 5.5 V


0.5 to 1.1 V

0V

2.5 to 4.6 V

0V

EP circuit open

5V

5V

5V

5V



–


WIRING DIAGRAM

A20 Accel Position Sensor 6 (LHD) VCP1 4 (RHD)


3 (LHD) EP1 1 (RHD)



1 (LHD) EP2 3 (RHD)

ECM


5 IG2

6 IG2

1 IG2

7 IG2

2 IG2

3 IG2

B (LHD)

G (LHD)

Y (LHD)

B (LHD)

W (LHD)

Y (LHD)

26 VCPA E9

22 VPA E9

28 E9

EPA

27 VCP2 E9

23 VPA2 E9

29 E9

EPA2

Y (RHD) A76878




1

–



Depressed


ACCEL POS #1

ACCEL POS #2

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

Released FI7052

OK


NG

2


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)


Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20_C (68_F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 6 2 1 5 4

VCP1 EP1

NG A82236

OK




3

–


INSPECT ECM(VCPA AND VCP2 VOLTAGE) VCP2 (+) VCPA (+) E9

(a) (b)


Specified condition

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28) 4 5 to 5.5 4.5 55V VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)


NG


OK

4


VPA (+) E9


NG


(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V

OK



5

–




A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)



Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)

A54384

EP1 (A20–3) – EPA (E9–28)



EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9


VPA2 VPA


Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)



VCPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) A54404

Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P2121

–


05CKU–01




Trouble Area


P2121




1


LHD EP2 VCP2


(a)

3 2 1 6 5 4

(b)


Resistance


Standard (RHD):

EP1 VCP1


RHD

Resistance

EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4)


2 25 to 4.75 2.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6)

VCP2 EP2 3 2 1 6 5 4

VCP1 EP1 A82236

OK


NG



2

–



VPA (+) E9

(a) (b)




VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28)

VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29)

Released

0.5 to 1.1 V

1.5 to 2.9 V

Depressed

2.5 to 4.6 V

3.5 to 5.5 V


OK


NG

3



A20

(a) EP1

(b) (c)



A54384

Specified condition




EP2

Continuity



A20


Specified condition



No continuity


E9


VPA2 VPA


Specified condition

VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22)



VCPA

VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) A54404



Continuity


–



Specified condition


No continuity


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDU–01

PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI2547

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD (European spec.) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect an OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or a hand–held tester to the vehicle, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system / components or in the power train control components which affect vehicle emissions, or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO 15031–4 are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–309). If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips, the CHK ENG goes off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

Hand–Held Tester

DLC3 A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–309). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3).


–


* 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporally stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine condition when a misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304) or fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175) or other malfunction (first malfunction only) is detected. Because freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. If no instructions are given, troubleshoot according to the following priorities. (1) DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175) and misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304). (2) Fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175). (3) Misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304). (b)

FI2547


Description for M–OBD (Except European spec.) When troubleshoot Multiplex OBD (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand– held tester to the vehicle, and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM.



The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in drive system components. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–309). If the malfunction does not recur, the CHK ENG lamp will be disappeared by turning off the ignition switch but the recorded DTC will be remaining in the ECM memory.

To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (for operating instructions, see the instruction book.) The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporally stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, water temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Hand–Held Tester

DLC3 A76859


–


(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516

–


Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro–OBD)/ ISO 14230(M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 A04550

Symbol

Terminal No.

Connection/Voltage or Resistance

Condition

SIL

7

Bus + Line/Pulse generation

During transmission

CG

4

Chassis Ground – Body Ground/1 or less

Always

SG

5

Signal Ground – Body Ground/1 or less

Always

BAT

16

Battery Positive – Body Ground/9 to 14 V

Always

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual. (d) Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11 V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (e) Check the CHK ENG. (1) The CHK ENG lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. HINT: If the CHK ENG is not illuminated, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. 2. DTC CHECK (Normal Mode) NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note them down.



(a) Hand–Held Tester

DLC3 A76859

–


Checking the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and note them down (for operating instructions, see the hand–held tester’s instruction book). (4) See page 05–309 to confirm the details of the DTCs.

HINT: In the event that 2 or more DTCs are detected, the CHK ENG lamp will indicate the smaller number DTC first. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (c) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester. (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and THROTTLE fuses from the engine room R/B No. 1 for more than 60 seconds. 3. DTC CHECK (Check Mode) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check (test) mode. (a) Procedure for check mode using the hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions Battery positive voltage 11 V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”P” or ”N” position. Air conditioning switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (3) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (4) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON.



–

(5) 0.13 sec. ON

OFF 0.13 sec. A76900



Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check (test) mode. The CHK ENG blinks in 0.13 sec. intervals as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG goes off after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the normal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (c) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester. (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and THROTTLE fuses from the engine room R/B No. 1 for more than 60 seconds.


–


4. FAIL–SAFE CHART If any of the following codes is recorded, the ECM enters into the fail–safe mode. DTC No.



P0031 P0032 P0037 P0038 P0051 P0052 P0057 P0058

Faulty heater circuit is turned off.


P0100 P0102 P0103

Ignition timing is calculated based on an engine speed and a throttle opening angle.


P0105 P0107 P0108

Intake air pressure is controlled with a calculated value in proportion to the throttle opening angle and the engine speed. Limit the engine speed to 3,000 rpm or less.


P0110 P0112 P0113



P0115 P0117 P0118

Engine coolant temperature is fixed at 80


P0120 P0121 P0122 P0123 P0220 P0222 P0223 P2135


Repeat the following conditions at least 2 seconds or more with the throttle position switch closed: VTA is more than 0.1 V but less than 0.95 V Engine speed is 0 km/h

P0190 P0191



P0200

Turn off the INJ relay and cut the power for the EDU.

P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204

Stop fuel injection for an abnormal cylinder and related other cylinders. Limit the engine speed to 3,000 rpm or less.


P0325 P0327 P0328

Maximum timing retardation


P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354

Stop fuel injection for all the cylinders.


P0604 P0606 P0607 P0657



P1235



P2008

Force IACV to close.




–




P2102 P2103 P2111 P2112 P2118 P2119



P2120 P2121 P2122 P2123 P2125 P2127 P2128 P2138

If both VPA1 and VPA2 are malfunctioning: Fixed at idle If either of VPA1 or VPA2 is malfunctioning: Fuel cut intermittently


5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s ECM in the check mode, the 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of the 2 trip detection logic, and the sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTCs (See step 2). (b) Set the check mode (See step 3). (c) Perform a simulation test (See page 01–22). (d) Check the connector and terminal (See page 01–32). (e) Wiggle the harness and the connector (See page 01–32). 6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if its value differs from those listed here. So, do not solely depend on the ”Normal Condition” here when deciding whether a part is faulty or not. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”. Hand–held Tester Display


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

INJECTOR

Injection period of the No. 1 cylinder/ Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 32.64 ms


IGN ADVANCE

Ignition timing advance for No. 1 cylinder/ Min.: –64 deg., Max.: 63.5 deg.


Calculated load by ECM/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %

Idling: 21.6 to 31.4 % Running without load (2,500 rpm): 19.6 to 29.4 %

CALC LOAD





–


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note


If the value is Approximately 0.0 gm/s: S Mass air flow meter power source circuit open S VG circuit open or short If the value is 160.0 gm/s or more: S E2G circuit open


S Idling: 22 to 32 kPa S Running without load (2,500 rpm): 20 to 30 kPa

If the value is Approximately 0.0 kPa: S PIM circuit short If the value is 142.0 kPa or more: S VC circuit open or short S PIM circuit open S E2 circuit open

Engine speed/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383 rpm

Idling: 625 to rpm

COOLANT TEMP

Coolant temperature/ Min.: –40_C, Max.: 140_C


INTAKE AIR

Intake air temperature/ Min.: –40_C, Max.: 140_C



S Throttle fully closed: 10 to 24 % S Throttle fully open: 64 to 96 %


S Throttle fully closed: ON S Throttle open: OFF

VEHICLE SPD




ACCEL POS #1




ACCEL POS #2




THROTTLE POS #2

Throttle position sensor No.2 output voltage/ Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

S Throttle fully closed: 2.1 to 3.1 V S Throttle fully open: 4.5 to 5.5 V


THROTTLE TARGT



MAF

MAP

ENGINE SPD

THROTTLE POS CTP SW


If the value is –40_C (–40_F): S Sensor circuit is o open. en. If the value is 140_C (284_F): S Sensor circuit is shorted. Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine).


S When accelerator pedal is depressed, duty ratio is increased. S Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

Throttle motor closed duty ratio/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %


S When accelerator pedal is released quickly, duty ratio is increased. S Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

THROTTLE MOT

Whether or not throttle motor control is permitted/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

+BM

Whether or not electric throttle control system power is inputted/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

THROTTLE OPN DUTY

THROTTLE CLS DUTY

Throttle motor opening duty ratio/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 100 %





–


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

Whether or not accelerator pedal position sensor is detecting idle/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

Whether or not throttle position sensor is detecting idle/ ON or OFF

Idling: ON

FAIL #1


ETCS has failed: ON

FAIL #2


ETCS has failed: ON

THROTTLE INITIAL

Throttle fully closed learned value Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

0.5 to 0.9 V

ACCEL LEARN VAL

Accelerator fully closed learned value Min.: 0 V, Max.: 5 V

0.4 to 1.4 V

Throttle motor current Min.: 0 A, Max.: 20 A

Idling: 0 to 3.0 A

ACCEL IDL POS

THROTTLE IDL POS

THROTTLE MOT

O2S B1 S1


O2S B1 S2


O2S B2 S1


O2S B2 S2


SHORT FT #1


Driving (50 km/h, 31 mph): m h): 0.1 to 0.9 V

Performing the INJ VOL or A/F CONTROL function of the ACTIVE TEST enables the user to check the voltage output of each sensor.

0 20 %


LONG FT #1


0 20 %

TOTAL FT #1


Idling: 0.5 to 1.4

SHORT FT #2

Short term fuel trim of bank 2/ Min.: –100 %, Max.: 100 %

0 20 %


LONG FT #2


0 20 %

TOTAL FT #2


Idling: 0.5 to 1.4





–


Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

O2FT B1 S1


0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #1

O2FT B1 S2


0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #1

O2FT B2 S1


0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #2

O2FT B2 S2


0 20 %

Same as SHORT FT #2


OL: Open Loop–has not yet satisfied conditions to go closed loop. CL: Closed Loop–using heated oxygen sensor(s) as feed back for fuel control. OL DRIVE: Open loop due to driving conditions. conditions (fuel enrichenrich ment) OL FAULT: Open loop due to detected system fault. CL FAULT: Closed loop but one of heated oxygen sensors, which is used for fuel control, is functioning improperly.

Fuel cut idle/ ON or OFF


FC IDL= ”ON” when throttle valve fully closed and engine speed is over 1,500 rpm.

MIL status/ ON or OFF

MIL ON: ON



Cranking: ON

A/C signal/ ON or OFF

A/C ON: ON

Park/neutral position switch signal/ ON or OFF

P or N position: ON

FUEL SYS #1

FUEL SYS #2

FC IDL MIL



O2 LR B1 S1


O2 LR B2 S1


O2 RL B1 S1


O2 RL B2 S1


STARTER SIG A/C SIG PNP SW [NSW] *2




–



Normal Condition *1

Diagnostic Note

ELECT LOAD SIG

Electrical load signal/ ON or OFF

Tail light switch ON: ON Defogger switch ON: ON

STOP LIGHT SW



PS OIL PRESS SW


While turning the steering wheel: ON While not turning the steering wheel: OFF

The idle–up control is performed when PS is ON.

PS SIGNAL


When the steering wheel is turned: ON

This signal is usually ON status until the IG switch is turned OFF.

VSV status for intake air control valve/ ON or OFF

VSV operation: ON

Fuel pump/speed status/ ON/H or OFF/M,L

Idling: ON

EVAP VSV

VSV status for EVAP control/ ON or OFF

VSV operating: ON

VVT CTRL B1

VVT control status (bank 1)/ ON or OFF


IGNITION


0 to 400

CYL #1, #2, #3, #4

Misfire ratio of the cylinder 1 to 4/ Min.: 0 %, Max.: 50 %

0%

MISFIRE RPM

Engine RPM for first misfire range/ Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 6,375 rpm

Misfire 0: 0 rpm

FC TAU

Fuel Cut TAU: Fuel cut during very light load/ ON or OFF


The fuel cut is being performed under very light load to prevent the engine combustion from becoming incomplete.


Check mode ON: ON

See step 3

SCV VSV FUEL PUMP / SPD

CHECK MODE

O2 RL B1 S2


O2 RL B2 S2


MIL ON RUN DIST

FUEL PRESS

VSV for EVAP is controlled by the ECM (ground side duty control)

This item is displayed in only idling


Distance since activation of check engine warning light/ Min.: 0 km, Max.: 65,535 km

When there is no DTC: 0 km

Fuel high pressure inside fuel delivery pipe/ Min.: 0 MPa, Max.: 819 MPa

Idling: 8 to 13 MPa Running without load (3,000 rpm): 9.5 to 10.5 MPa

*1: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is at the N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. *2: For A/T only



–


7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten diagnostic time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST” (g) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOL

A/F CONTROL

SCV VSV

EVAP VSV (ALONE)

FUEL PUMP / SPD

VVT CTRL B1

TC/TE1

FC IDL PROHBT

Test Details

Diagnostic Note


All injectors are tested at once. Injection volume is gradually changed between –12.5 and 25 %.


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the user to check its output (show its graph indication) of sensor 1 and sensor 2: For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA”, then select ”O2S B1 S1 and O2S B1 S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button.

[Test Details] Activate the VSV for intake air control valve. ON or OFF



[Test Details] Active the VVT system (Bank 1). ON or OFF






–


BASIC INSPECTION When the malfunction code is not confirmed in the DTC check, troubleshooting should be carried out in all the possible circuits considered as causes of the problems. In many cases, by carrying out the basic engine check shown in the following flow chart, the location causing the problem can be found quickly and efficiently. Therefore, using this check is essential in the engine troubleshooting.

1



NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V


OK

2



NG

GO TO STEP 7

OK

3


OK

4



Inside

CLEAN OR REPLACE

A59673

OK

5





6

–


CHECK IGNITION TIMING (See page 14–181) NG

PROCEED TO PAGE AND CONTINUE TO TROUBLESHOOT


7



OK

8






–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDX–01

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When the malfunction is not confirmed in the DTC check and the problem still can not be confirmed in the basic inspection either, proceed to this problem symptoms table and troubleshoot according to the number given below. Symptom

Suspected Area

See page


2. Starter 3. Starter relay 4. Park/neutral position switch

19–10 19–10 40–8


1. 2. 3. 4.

05–502 05–439 05–507 05–415


1. Ignition coil assy 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. Injector circuit

05–439 05–507 05–415


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Starter signal circuit Ignition coil assy Spark plug Compression Injector circuit Fuel pump control circuit

05–513 05–439 18–14 14–181 05–415 05–507


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


05–513 05–415 05–439 18–14 05–507


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


05–513 05–415 05–439 18–14 05–507


1. ECM power source circuit 2. Park/neutral position switch 3. Back up power source circuit

05–502 40–8 05–467


1. 2. 3. 4.

Park/neutral position switch Injector circuit Back up power source circuit Fuel pump control circuit

40–8 05–415 05–467 05–507


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Mass air flow meter circuit Vacuum sensor circuit Injector circuit Fuel pump control circuit Ignition coil assy Compression Back up power source circuit

05–336 05–342 05–415 05–507 05–439 14–181 05–467


1. Mass air flow meter circuit 2. Vacuum sensor circuit 3. ECM power source circuit

05–336 05–342 05–502


1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

05–336 05–342 05–415 05–439 05–507

Muffler explosion after fire (Poor driveability)

1. Ignition coil assy 2. Spark plug 3. Injector circuit


ECM power source circuit Ignition coil assy Fuel pump control circuit Injector circuit

Mass air flow meter circuit Vacuum sensor circuit Injector circuit Ignition coil assy Fuel pump control circuit

05–439 18–14 05–415


–


Symptom

Suspected Area

See page


1. Spark plug 2. Injector circuit

18–14 05–415



05–336 05–342

Engine stall (After accelerator pedal depressed)


05–336 05–342


1. Mass air flow meter circuit 2. Vacuum sensor circuit 3. ECM

05–336 05–342 01–32

Engine stall (During A/C operation)


05–1100 01–32

Engine stall (When shifting N to D)

1. Park/neutral position switch


40–8


–


05CJC–01

STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the engine is cranked, the intake air flow is slow, so fuel vaporization is poor. A rich mixture is therefore necessary in order to achieve good startability. While the engine is being cranked, the battery voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. The starter signal is mainly used to increase the fuel injection volume for the starting injection control and after–start injection control.


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: This diagnostic troubleshooting procedure is on the premise that the engine is being cranked under normal conditions. If the engine does not crank, proceed to the problem symptoms table on page 05–320.

1 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK

NG




2

–



E13


Specified condition

STA (E13–17) – ST relay (1)

Continuity


STA

ECM Connector

A81699


Specified condition

STA (E13–17) or ST relay (1) – Body ground

No continuity

Driver Side R/B LHD:

ST Relay A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD:

ST Relay A79098

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) 05CDW–01


E12

E11

E10

E9

A53766


Wiring Color

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E11–1)

B–Y – BR

Always

Condition

STD Voltage (V) 9 to 14

+BM (E10–6) – E1 (E11–1)

G–Y – BR

Always

9 to 14

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E11–1)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

+B2 (E9–2) – E1 (E11–1)

B–R – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E11–1)

GR – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IREL (E10–35) – E1 (E11–1)

V – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

R–W – BR

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VTA1 (E13–21) (E13 21) – E2 (E13 (E13–28) 28)

L W – BR L–W


0.4 to 1.0


3.2 to 4.8


2.1 to 3.1


4.5 to 5.5


0.5 to 1.1


2.5 to 4.6


1.5 to 2.9


3.5 to 5.5

VTA2 (E13–31) (E13 31) – E2 (E13 (E13–28) 28)

B R – BR B–R

VPA (E9–22) (E9 22) – EPA (E9–28) (E9 28)

G–Y

VPA2 (E9–23) (E9 23) – EPA2 (E9 (E9–29) 29)

W–Y

VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29)

B–Y

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

VG (E13–30) – EVG (E13–29)

L–Y – G

Idling, P or N position, A/C switch OFF

0.5 to 3.0

THA (E13–20) – E2 (E13–28)

GR – BR

Idling, Intake air temperature 20 C (68 F)

0.5 to 3.4

THW (E13–19) – E2 (E13–28)

B–W – BR

Idling, Coolant temperature 80

0.2 to 1.0

#1 (E13–1) – E01 (E13–7) #2 (E13–2) (E13 2) – E01 (E13–7) (E13 7) #3 (E13–3) – E01 (E13–7) #4 (E13–4) – E01 (E13–7)

G–W – W–B W R–W W–R W–B B R–W – W–B W–L – W–B

IG switch ON Idling


IJF1 (E13–25) – E01 (E13–7)

R–B – W–B

Idling


IGT1 (E13–8) – E1 (E11–1) IGT2 (E13–9) – E1 (E11–1) IGT3 (E13–10) – E1 (E11–1) IGT4 (E13–11) – E1 (E11–1)

R–W – BR P – BR LG–B – BR L–Y – BR

Idling


IGF1 (E13–24) – E1 (E11–1)

W–R – BR

G2+ (E11–27) – NE– (E11–24)

IG switch ON

9 to 14

4.5 to 5.5

Idling


W–R

Idling


NE+ (E11–25) – NE– (E11–24)

G–R

Idling


FC (E9–10) – E1 (E11–1)

G–Y – BR

IG switch ON

M+ (E11–3) – E01 (E13–7) M– (E11–2) – E01 (E13–7)

B – W–B W – W–B

Idling



05–319 DIAGNOSTICS Symbols (Terminal No.)

Wiring Color

OX1A (E12–22) – E2 (E13–28)

B – BR

OX1B (E12–21) – O1B– (E11–26)

B–W

OX2A (E12–23) – E2 (E13–28)

R – BR

OX2B (E12–29) – O2B– (E11–31)

R–G

HT1A (E12–5) – E03 (E11–7) HT1B ((E12–25)) – E03 ((E11–7)) HT2A (E12–4) – E03 (E11–7) HT2B (E12–33) – E03 (E11–7)

Y – W–B P – W–B L – W–B L–B – W–B

KNK1 (E12–1) – EKNK (E12–2)

B–W

OC1+ (E11–16) – OC1– (E11–15)

–

SFI SYSTEM (1AZ–FSE) Condition

STD Voltage (V)

Maintain engine speed s eed at 2,500 rpm r m for 2 minutes after warming up


Idling IG switch ON

Below 3.0 9 to 14

Maintain engine speed at 4,000 rpm after warming up


W–G – Y–B

IG switch ON


EVP1 (E13–34) – E01 (E13–7)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

SCV (E13–5) – E1 (E11–1)

L–B – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON

3.3 to 3.9


2.6 to 3.0

IG switch ON

3.3 to 3.9


2.6 to 3.0

PIM (E13–33) (E13 33) – E2 (E13–28) (E13 28)

G W – BR G–W

PB (E13–26) (E13 26) – E2 (E13–28) (E13 28)

Y – BR

PR (E13–23) – E2 (E13–28)

Y–G – BR

FP+ (E12 (E12–6) 6) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1) FP– (E12–3) – E1 (E11–1)

R – BR G – BR

STA (E13–17) – E1 (E11–1)

B–Y – BR

STP (E10–19) (E10 19) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

G W – BR G–W

Idling

2.1 to 3.2

Idling


Shift position in neutral, IG switch START Brake pedal is depressed

Below 1.5

IG switch ON, Brake pedal is depressed

Below 1.5

IG switch ON, Brake pedal is released

7.5 to 14

G W – BR G–W

W (E9–11) (E9 11) – E01 (E13 (E13–7) 7)

W – W–B W B

ELS (E9–12) (E9 12) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

G – BR

TACH (E9–5) – E1 (E11–1)

GR–R – BR

Idling

SPD (E10–17) – E01 (E13–7)

V–W – W–B

IG switch ON

TC (E9–20) – E1 (E11–1)

W–L – BR

IG switch ON

SIL (E9–18) – E1 (E11–1)

W–G – BR

During charge of gears

G – BR

F/PS (E9–14) – E1 (E11–1)

LG–B – BR


9 to 14


ST1 (E10–12) ST1– (E10 12) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1)

PSW (E11–10) – E1 (E11–1)

6.0 or more

Idling

9 to 14

IG switch ON

Below 3.0

Taillight switch ON, Defogger switch ON

7.5 to 14

Taillight switch OFF, Defogger switch OFF

0 to 1.5 Pulse generation 4.5 to 5.5 9 to 14 Pulse generation

While turning the steering wheel

Below 1.5

IG switch ON

Below 1.5


–


05C6J–01


WIRING DIAGRAM

B–R


ECM


IG2 AM2

1


DH 2

B–G 4A 1

4B 1


9

6 B–R

IGN

11 E9

W


Driver Side J/B

DA 18 22

B–G FL MAIN

B–W

B–W C J8

Battery

A J26

J/C

(LHD) (RHD)

C J8

A J26

(LHD) (RHD)

A81015







1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

–




NG

2


E9


OK ECM Connector

A65748



3 (a)


SYSTEM OK

NG

4 (a)





05–4 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505N–04



Driver’s Name

Production Date


Licence No.

License No.

Odometer Reading

Problem Symptoms

Customer’s Name



Difficult to Start


Poor Idling


Poor Driveability

Hesitation Knocking

Engine Stall


km miles


Back fire Other


High (

rpm)

Low (


Surging

Others



Problem Frequency

Constant Other

Sometimes (

times per

Weather

Fine

Cloudy

Rainy

Outdoor Temperature

Hot

Warm

Cool

Place

Highway Rough road

Engine Temp.

Cold

Engine Operation




day/month)

Snowy

Various/Other C/


After Warming up

Once only

Uphill

Any temp.


F) Downhill


Remains on

Sometimes lights up

Does not light up

Normal


)


)

)



Normal

)

rpm)

05–16 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505J–04

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT: Parameters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your reading due to the type of instrument or other factors. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check in the check mode, check the circuit for the codes listed in the table below. For details of each code, refer to the ’’See page ’’ under the respective ’’DTC No.’’ in the DTC chart. DTC No. (See page)

Detection Item

Trouble Area

*1 CHK ENG

Memory

P0100 (05–24)

Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunction


P0110 (05–30)

Intake Air Temperature Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit Intake air temp. sensor (built into mass air flow meter) ECM

P0115 (05–34)

Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Malfunction


P0116 (05–38)


Engine coolant temperature sensor Thermostat

P0120 (05–39)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit Throttle position sensor ECM

P0121 (05–44)

Throttle Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”A” Circuit Range/Performance Problem


Insufficient Coolant Temp. for Closed Loop Fuel Control

Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector Gas leakage on exhaust system ECM


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector

P0133*3 (05–60)



P0135 (05–65)



P0136 (05–54)


Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor

P0141 (05–65)



P0125 (05–45)

P0130*3 (05–54)


05–17 DIAGNOSTICS

–


System too Lean (Fuel Trim) (Bank1)


P0172*3 (05–67)

System too Rich (Fuel Trim) (Bank1)


P0300*3 (05–73)


Open or short in engine wire Connector connection

P0171*3 (05–67)

P0301*3 (05–73)


P0302*3 (05–73)


P0303*3 (05–73)


Vacuum Vac m hose connection PCV hose Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing ECM

P0304*3 (05–73)


P0325 (05–81)

Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1)


P0335 (05–84)

Crankshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit Malfunction


P0340 (05–88)

Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction


P0420*3 (05–91)


Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter ECM

P0443 (05–94)

Evaporative Emission Control System Purge Control Vent Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in VSV for EVAP circuit VSV for EVAP ECM



P0500 (05–98)


05–18 DIAGNOSTICS

–


Idle Control System Malfunction

Open or short in ISC valve circuit ISC valve is stuck or closed PCV hose A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM







P1315 (05–103)



P1335 (05–84)

Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction (During engine running)


P1346 (05–111)

VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem (Bank 1)

Mechanical system (Timing chain has janped a tooth, chain stretched) ECM

P1349 (05–112)

VVT System Malfunction (Bank 1)


P1520*2 (05–115)

Stop Light Switch Circuit Malfunction

Open or short in stop light switch signal circuit Stop light switch ECM

P1600 (05–119)

ECM BATT Malfunction

Open in back up power source circuit ECM

P1656 (05–122)

OCV Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1)


P0505*3 (05–100)

P1300 (05–103)

P1305 (05–103)

P1310 (05–103)

*1: ... CHK ENG is illuminated. ... CHK ENG is not illuminated. *2: Only for A/T models. *3: For European spec. only



–


05C6G–01




–


WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch 2 6 B–R DH

4

Driver Side J/B IGN

16

B–R

ECM Junction Connector A E B–W B–W J26 J27 (*1) (*1) J8 Junction Connector C B–W B–W C (*2) (*2)

18 DA

DL

B 1 IP1 (*1) 1 IE4 (*2)

4

4 5

1


IG2 Relay B–R

3

2 4

4 1

2 IE1 GR

1

4

4

5 2

2

1

2 R–B IG2

AM2 1

1

W–B

EFI Relay

EFI 1

3

2 4

4

8 EA1

1 1A B–G 1 4A

8 E9 MREL

GR

B–Y 1

9 E9 IGSW


W–B B–W


4

R–B 1


EFI No.1


2

1 4B B–G FL MAIN

To Injector (See page 05–73) To Ignition Coil and Igniter (See page 05–103)

4 W–B

B–R

7 E12 E1

12 EA1 B–R

BR

8 IK1

1 E9 +B

B–R Battery EC

*1: RHD *2: LHD

EH A79085



–




E9

E12

E1 (–)

+B (+)

ECM Connecter


OK

A18294


Specified condition

+B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V


NG

2


E13

(a) (b) (c)

E12


Specified condition


E2

Continuity


E1 ECM Connecter

A65746

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

IGSW (+)

ECM Connecter

A18294

OK NG


Go to step 8


4

–



Driver Side J/B


IGN Fuse

NG


A79096

OK

5

CHECK FUSE(IG2 FUSE) (a) (b)


Remove the IG2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. Check for continuity in the IG2 fuse. Standard: Continuity

NG

IG2 Fuse


A66055

OK

6



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


7

–



I13


NG

Ignition Switch

B50489

Switch

Terminal No.

Resisitance

LOCK

All Terminals

1M or more

ACC

1–3

1 or less

ON

1–2, 1–3, 2–3, 5–6

1 or less

START

4–5, 4–6, 5–6, 1–2

1 or less



8


E9

E12

E1 (–)

(a) (b)


Specified condition

MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E12–7)

9 to 14 V

MREL (+)

ECM Connecter

A18294

NG


OK

9



NG

EFI Fuse A66054

OK





10

–


CHECK FUSE(EFI No.1 FUSE) (a)


EFI No.1 Fuse

Ç

(b)


NG


A79065

OK

11



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE EFI RELAY


12

–




EFI Relay A66053



Specified condition


Ç


Continuity y

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (E9–1)


Specified condition



A79066

(b)

E9

+B ECM Connector


MREL A65748

No continuityy

OK


Specified condition


Continuity

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR




–


05C6H–01

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In the diagram below, when the engine is cranked, current flows from terminal ST of the ignition switch to the starter relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal). When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to the coil of the circuit opening relay, the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates. While the NE signal is generated (engine running), the ECM keeps Tr ON (circuit opening relay ON) and the fuel pump also keeps operating.

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM B–W From 10 Terminal 3 of B–W IB1 EFI Relay (See Page 05–124)

1

2

5

3

6 IC3

G–Y

G–Y

10 E9

FC

L–B

B–W C8 Circuit Opening Relay

4 5

F25 Fuel Pump W–B

BR

A79082


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATION OF CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY) Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL PUMP / SPD”. Perform the active test with the engine stopped. Result: The circuit opening relay operates. OK


NG

2

CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT(See page 05–124) NG

OK


REPAIR OR CIRCUIT

REPLACE

POWER

SOURCE


3

–



C8



3–5

B16200

NG



OK

4

INSPECT ECM

E12


NG


(a) (b)

E9


Specified condition

FC (E9–10) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

FC (+) A18294

OK

Go to step 6


5

–





EFI Relay

Specified condition


A66053

Continuity y



Wire Harness Side


C8

Specified condition


1

3


5


No continuityy

2


A79099

E9

FC MREL

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS


6


OK



OR


7

–





2



A79099

Wire Harness Side



Specified condition


No continuity

F25

Fuel Pump Connector

NG A66276



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–1 DIAGNOSTICS

–


SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505G–04



2


3



4



5


6

VISUAL INSPECTION

7


8



B A


A


B

Malfunction occurs

GO TO STEP 10

05–2 DIAGNOSTICS

9

10

–


SYMPTOM SIMULATION


B

A

Malfunction code

B

No code

GO TO STEP 12

A

11


GO TO STEP 14

12


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

13


B

A


B


GO TO STEP 17

A

14


15

CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B A


A


B


GO TO STEP 18

05–3 DIAGNOSTICS

16

–



GO TO STEP 18

17

PARTS INSPECTION

18


19

ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR

20

CONFIRMATION TEST

END


05–19 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 05B3M–03

LOCATION Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ECM Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch

Mass Air Flow Meter Assy

Ignition Coil and Igniter Injector

VSV for EVAP

Camshaft Timig OIL Control Valve Assy



Engine Room R/B No.4 DLC3

Knock Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor

Circuit Opening Relay

Idle Speed Control Valve Assy Throttle Position Sensor

Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Vacuum Switching Valve (for ISC)

Fuel Pump

A79104



–


05C6I–01




–



5

B–Y 6

B–R

*1: LHD *2: RHD *3: A/T *4: M/T

1 ST

Fuse Block

2 B–R

1 1

6 B–W

IE4 (*1) IP1 (*2)

B J13

B J12

B–R

B–W (*3) 9

B–R 1


B–Y

5


3

2

A J12

B–Y

9 E12 STA

Junction Connector

5

5

W–B

B

2 DJ 7

Driver Side J/B

IK1

B–G FL MAIN B–R

6 B–Y (*3)

1


1 4B

A J12

B–Y (*4)

5

5

B–G 1 4A

C J13


B

1 1 S5

9 DA

S4

Battery

Stater

W–B IJ

A79100



–



1 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK


NG

2


E12

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD





Specified condition


No continuity


NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–24 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0100

–


05C68–01

MASS AIR FLOW CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow meter uses a platinum hot wire. The hot wire air flow meter consists of a platinum hot wire, temprature sensor and a control circuit installed in a plastic housing. The hot wire air flow meter works on the principle that the hot wire and temprature sensor located in the intake air bypass of the housing detect any changes in the intake air temperature. The hot wire is maintained at the set temperature by controlling the current flow through the hot wire. This current flow is then measured as the output voltage of the mass air flow meter. The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and temprature sensor provide a bridge circuit, with the power transistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temperature. B+ Temprature Sensor Power Transistor Platinum Hot Wire B

A

Output Voltage Temprature Sensor Platinum Hot Wire

A75348

DTC No P0100


Trouble Area

Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit with engine speed less than 4,000 rpm for more than 3 sec.


HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the air flow ratio in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Air Flow Value (gm/sec) Approx. 0.0 271.0 or more



05–25 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM

From Terminal 2 of EFI No.1 Fuse (See Page 05–124) B–R

A6 Mass Air Flow Meter 12 EA1

B–R

1

ECM

2

L–Y

32 E12 EVG

3

G

24 E12 VG

A79052


1

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MASS AIR FLOW RATE)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine. Read air flow rate on the hand–held tester. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Air flow rate (gm/sec)

Proceed to

0.0

A

271.0 or more

B

1 less than Mass Air Flow Rate less than 270.0 or more (*1)

C

*1: The value must be changed when the throttle valve is opend or closed.

A


B

Go to step 6

C


05–26 DIAGNOSTICS

2

–


INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER(POWER SORUCE VOLTAGE) (a) (b) (c)


Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and the body ground. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


9 to 14 V

+B Mass Air Flow Meter Connector A54396

NG

Go to step 5

OK

3

INSPECT ECM (a) (b)

E12

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 ECM connector.

HINT: The shift position should be P or N and the A/C switch should be turned OFF. Standard: VG (+)

EVG (–) ECM Connector

A18294


Condition

Specified condition

VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32)

Engine is idling

0.5 to 3.0 V

OK

NG



05–27 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–






E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745



NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–28 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – MASS AIR FLOW METER) (a) (b)


(c) (d) EFI Relay


Specified condition


A66053

Continuity

EFI No.1 fuse (2) – +B (A6–1)




Ç

Specified condition


No continuity




NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

A54396

OK CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–124)

6

INSPECT ECM (a) E12

EVG ECM Connector


A18294


Specified condition


Continuity

NG


05–29 DIAGNOSTICS

7

–






E2G (A6–2) – EVG (E12–32) A54396



Specified condition


No continuity

E12

VG

EVG ECM Connector

A65745

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–30 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0110

–


05B3P–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The intake air temperature sensor is built into the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature. The lower the intake air temperature, the greater the thermistor resistance value, and the higher the intake air temperature, the lower the thermistor resistance value (See fig. 1). The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from the terminal THA via resistor R. That is, the resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve driveability during cold engine operation.

(fig. 1) 30 20 10

Resistance k

5

Acceptable

3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

– 20 (– 4)

0 32

20 68

40 104

60 140

80 176

100 212

Temp. C (F) FI4741

DTC No. P0110

DTC Detecting Condition Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit

Trouble Area Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit Intake air temp. sensor (built into mass air flow meter) ECM

If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0110”, it enters the fail–safe mode in which the intake air temperature is assumed to be 20 C (68 F). HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0110”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 C (284 F) or more

Short circuit


05–31 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM A6 Intake Air Temp. Sensor (built in Mass Air Flow Meter)

ECM 5V

THA 4

E2 5

G–R

20 THA E13

BR

28 E2 E13

R

A72925

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open.

1 (a) (b) (c)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: The same as actual intake air temperature Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40 C (–40 F)

A

140 C (284 F) or more

B


C

HINT:


A


B

Go to step 4

C


05–32 DIAGNOSTICS

2

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN HARNESS) (a) (b)

ECM

Mass Air flow meter

(c) (d)


A75743


THA

E2


A54396

OK


NG

3


Mass Air flow meter

(a) (b)

ECM

A75742



E13

THA

E2 ECM Connector

NG A18294


OK REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–33 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN HARNESS) (a) (b) (c)

ECM

Mass Air flow meter

A75766

Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –405C (–405F)

OK


NG

5


Mass Air flow meter

ECM


A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–34 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0115

–


05B3Q–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A thermistor is built into the engine coolant temperature sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature. The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as the ones of the intake air temperature sensor. DTC No. P0115


Trouble Area Open or short in Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor ECM

Open or short in water temp. sensor circuit

If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0115”, it enters the fail–safe mode in which the engine coolant temperature is assumed to be 80 C (176 F). HINT: After confirming DTC P0115, use the hand–held tester to confirm the engine coolant temperature in ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed

Malfunction

–40 C (–40 F)

Open circuit

140 C (284 F) or more

Short circuit


5V

2

B–W

1

BR

19 THW E13

R

28 E2 E13

A72925




05–35 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a) (b) (c)

–


READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(WATER TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Same as actual engine coolant temperature Result: Temperature Displayed

Proceed to

–40 C (–40 F)

A

140 C (284 F) or more

B


C

HINT:

If there is an open circuit, the hand–held tester indicates –40C (–40F). If there is a short circuit, the hand–held tester indicates 140C (284F) or more. B

Go to step 4

C


A

2

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN HARNESS) (a)


ECM

(b) (c) (d)

A75743

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140 C (284 F) or more



NG


OK A76786


05–36 DIAGNOSTICS

3

–




ECM

(b)

A75742

E13

THW

E2


HINT: Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: 140 C (284 F) or more

OK

ECM Connector

A18294

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)

4

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN HARNESS) (a)


ECM

(b) (c)

Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40C (–40F)

OK A75766

NG



05–37 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–




(a) (b)

ECM

(c) (d)

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: –40 C (–40 F)

A75744

E13

ECM Connector

OK A65743



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–38 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0116

–


05B3R–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Rfer to DTC P0115 on page 05–34 DTC No.

P0116


Trouble Area

When the temperature of engine coolant is –7 C (20 F) with a cold engine, coolant temperature sensor g , and if the engine g value is 20 C (68 F) or less even if it has been 20 min or more since the engine was warmed up. (2 trip detection logic)

Engine g coolant temperature sensor Thermostat

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If different DTCs that are related to a different systems are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B



A

2

INSPECT THERMOSTAT (See Page 16–3) NG

REPLACE THERMOSTAT



05–39 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0120

–


05B3S–02

THROTTLE PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION


ECM 5V

VC VTA E2

A58684

DTC No. P0120

The throttle position sensor is mounted in the throttle body and detects the throttle valve opening angle. When the throttle valve is fully closed, a voltage of approximately 0.7 V is applied to terminal VTA of the ECM. The voltage applied to terminal VTA of the ECM increases in proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve and becomes approximately 3.5 to 5.0 V when the throttle valve is fully opened. The ECM judges the vehicle driving conditions from these signals input from terminal VTA, uses them as one of the conditions for deciding the air–fuel ratio correction, power increase correction and fuel–cut control etc.


Trouble Area Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit Throttle position sensor ECM

Condition (a) or (b) continues for more than 5 sec. (a) VTA is less than 0.1 V (b) VTA is greater than 4.9 V

HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0120”, use the hand–held tester to confirm the throttle valve opening percentage. Throttle valve opening position expressed as percentage

Trouble Area



0%

0%


Approx. 100 %

Approx. 100 %

E2 circuit open


05–40 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM

T2 Throttle Position Sensor

ECM 5V

VC 1

R–W

18 VC E13

VTA 3

L–W

21 VTA E13

BR

28 E2 E13

E2 2

E1

A79108




05–41 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–



(a) (b)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / THROTTLE POS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result:

Released

Accelerator pedal operatuin


Proceed to

0%

A

ReleasedDepressed


B

Approx. 100 %

C

FI7052

B


C

Go to step 4

A

2


T2



Throttle Valve

Resistance

VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2)

2.5 to 5.9 k

VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)


OK


A53154

NG

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k


05–42 DIAGNOSTICS

3

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR) (a) (b)

E13

VC VTA

E2

ECM Connector

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the E13 ECM connector. Standard:


Throttle valve

Resistance

VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28)

2.5 to 5.9 k

VTA(E13–21) VTA(E13 21) – E2 (E13–28)

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

A65159

(c)


Specified condition


No Continuity

VTA (E13–28) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


4


T2



Throttle Valve

Resistance

VC (T2–1) – E2 (T2–2)

2.5 to 5.9 k

Fully closed

0.2 to 5.7 k

Fully open

2.0 to 10.2 k

VTA (T2–3) (T2 3) – E2 (T2–2) (T2 2)


OK


A53154

NG


05–43 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–



E13


VC VTA

E2

Specified condition

VC (T2–1) – VC (E13–18) VTA (T2–3) – VTA (E13–21)

ECM Connector

Continuity y

E2 (T2–2) – E2 (E13–28)

A65159


Wire Harness Side


T2

VTA (T2–3) or VTA (E13–21) – Body ground

1

2


3

VC


A79044

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–44 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0121

–


05B3T–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0120 on page 05–39 HINT: This is the troubleshooting procedure of the throttle position sensor. DTC No.


P0121

After the vehicle speed has exceeded 30 km/h (19 mph) once, and an output value of the throttle position sensor is out of the applicable range, althought the vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 mph). (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open.

1 (a)

ARE THERE ANY DTC BEING OUTPUT(BESIDES P0121) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0121” are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B A REPLACE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR



05–45 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0125

–


05C69–01

INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMP. FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The heated oxygen sensor is the planar type. Compared to the conventional type, the sensor element and the heater portions have a narrower overall. The heater can directly conduct its heat to the zirconia element via the alumina, it helps to accerate the sensor activation. To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three – way catalytic converter is used. For the most efficient use of the three – way catalytic converter, the air – fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air – fuel ratio. The heated oxygen sensor has the characteristic whereby its output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. This is used to detect the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas and provide the ECM with feedback control the air–fuel ratio. When the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas increases. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the LEAN condition (low voltage, i. e. less than 0.45 V ). When the air–fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas is reduced. And the heated oxygen sensor informs the ECM of the RICH condition (high voltage, i. e. more than 0.45V). The ECM judges by the voltage output from the heated oxygen sensor whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. If the malfunction of the heated oxygen sensor causes an output of abnomal voltage, the ECM becomes unable to perform accurate air–fuel ratio control. The heated oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), current flows to the heater in order to heat the sensor for the accurate oxygen concentration detection.


Element Exhaust Gas

A

Output Voltage


Cover Air

A


A–A Section

DTC No


P0125

After engine is warmed up, heated oxygen sensor output* does not change when conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continue for at least 1.5 min: *: Output value changes at inside of the ECM only (a) Engine speed: 1,400 rpm or more (b) Vehicle speed: 40 to 100 km/h (25 to 62 mph) (c) Throttle valve is not fully closed (d) 180 sec. or more after starting engine


A66651

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector Gas leakage in exhaust system ECM

05–46 DIAGNOSTICS

–


HINT:

!" ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”.

WIRING DIAGRAM From Terminal 3 of EFI Relay (See Page 05–124) B–W 4 1 EFI No.2


ECM

4 B–W 13 EA1 B–W B–W

28 E13 E2

BR

2 BR 4 E2 1 HT

Y

4 E12 HT1A

B

23 E12 OX1A

2 +B OX 3 BR H7 B–W (*1) 18 IK2 Heated Oxygen 10 IK1 BR Sensor (Bank 1 B–W 3 IH2 Sensor 1) 2 BR P 1 IH2 E2 HT 1 IH2 4 4 B–W B 2 +B OX 3 IH2 H17 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

4 E10 HT1B

P 7 IK2

B

B (*1)

(*1)

(*1)

BR

(*1)

21 E12 OX1B

E J13

D J12 D J12

D J13 D J13

E BR J12

Junction Connector

(*1)

EH *1: Shielded A79067


05–47 DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST by the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor)output. Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %




Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction

OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


05–48 DIAGNOSTICS

–


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: S If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. S Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. S A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. S A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.

1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0125” are output, perform the troubleshoot on that DTC before. B


A

2


(a) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature above 75_C (169_F). (b) Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor when the engine rpm is suddenly increased. HINT: Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times using the accelerator pedal. Standard: Heated oxygen sensor outputs a RICH signal (0.45 V or more) at least once. OK NG


Go to step 13

05–49 DIAGNOSTICS

–


3


H7

(a) (b) +B

HT

E2


Condition

HT (H7–1) – +B (H7–2)

20_C (68_F)

6 to 9

HT (H7–1) – E2 (H7–4)

No Continuity

OX

Heated Oxygen Sensor

Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor. Standard: (Bank1 Sensor1) Specified condition

Standard: (Bank1 Sensor2) A79112


Condition

Specified condition

HT (H17–1) – +B (H17–2)

20_C (68_F)

11 to 16

HT (H17–1) – E2 (H17–4)

No Continuity

H17 +B

HT

E2

OX

Heated Oxygen Sensor A73938

NG


OK

4


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

5



EFI No.2 Fuse

Ç Ç

(b)

Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity in the EFI fuse. Standard: Continuity

A79069

NG

OK



05–50 DIAGNOSTICS

6

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR – ECM)

E13

E12

(a) (b) (c)

E10

Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. Disconnect the E10, E12 and E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): (Bank1 Sensor1) Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

HT (H7–1) – HT1A (E12–4)

E2 HT1A OX1A OX1B HT1B ECM Connector A79068

OX (H7–3) – OX1A (E12–23)

Continuity y

E2 (H7–4) – E2 (E13–28)

Standard (Check for short): (Bank1 Sensor1) Wire Harness Side

Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (H7–1) or HT1A (E12–4) – Body ground

H7 HT


+B



Specified condition

HT (H17–1) – HT1B (E10–4)

OX

OX (H17–3) – OX1B (E12–21)

E2


E2 (H17–4) – E2 (E13–28) A79114

Standard (Check for short): (Bank1 Sensor2) Symbols (Terminal No.) HT (H17–1) or HT1B (E10–4) – Body ground

Wire Harness Side


H17 HT

Continuity y


+B

OX E2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector A73939

OK


NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–51 DIAGNOSTICS

7

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) (a) (b)


(c) (d) EFI Relay

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/BNo.4. Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

A66053


Specified condition


Continuity

Standard (Check for short): Engine Room R/B No.4 1 2 EFI No.2 Fuse

Ç


Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or EFI No.2 fuse (1) – Body ground

No continuity


Specified condition

EFI No.2 fuse (2) – +B (H7–2)

Continuity


A79070

HT

No continuity


Specified condition

EFI No.2 fuse (2) – +B (H17–2)

Continuity


+B

OX

Specified condition

Standard (Check for open): (Bank1 Sensor2)


Symbols (Terminal No.) EFI No.2 fuse (2) or +B (H7–2) – Body ground


Specified condition

EFI No.2 fuse (2) or +B (H17–2) – Body ground

No continuity

E2


A79114

Wire Harness Side H17 HT

+B

OX E2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector

OK


A73939

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–52 DIAGNOSTICS

8

–




OK

9 (a)



OK

10 (a)



OK

11



OK

12




13


GO


EXHAUST

GAS

05–53 DIAGNOSTICS

14 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

B


A

15





05–54 DIAGNOSTICS

–


05B3V–02

DTC

P0130


DTC

P0136




Trouble Area

P0130

Voltage output of heated oxygen sensor remains between 0.40 V and 0.55 V during idling after the engine is warmed up


P0136

Voltage output of heated oxygen sensor remains 0.4 V or more or 0.5 V or less when vehicle is driven at 30 km/h (19 mph) or more after the engine is warmed up (2 trip detection loginc)

Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated Oxygen sensor

HINT:



05–55 DIAGNOSTICS

–



Vihicle speed

Once 40sec. or more

Twice 40sec. or more

(L3)

(L3)

40 km/h (25mph)

12 times 40sec. or more (L3)

Idling(L2)

(L4)

(L4)

60 sec. or more

10 sec.

10 sec.

(L5)

IG SW OFF

(L1)

10 sec.

A58686

1. Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (L1) 2. Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check mode (See page 05–5). (L1) 3. Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more. (L2) 4. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more. (L3) 5. Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more. (L4) 6. Perform steps 4 to 5 12 times. (L5) HINT: If a malfunction exists, the CHECK ENG will be illuminated on the multi–information display during step 6. NOTICE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of the malfunction will not be possible. If you do not have a hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from 3 to 6, then perform steps from 3 to 6 again.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” whith the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V


05–56 DIAGNOSTICS

–


NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor) output. Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle has low fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and heated oxygen sensor DTCs will be recorded, and the CHK ENG lamp then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–57 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A

”P0130 and/or P0136” and other DTCs are output

B



A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor during idling. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).

P18349

OK

Go to step 11

NG

3



OK

4


OK


REPLACE EFI RELAY

05–58 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–




OK

6


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

7


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

8 (a)



OK

9 (a)



OK

10




11



05–59 DIAGNOSTICS

12 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B




05–60 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0133

–


05B3W–02



P0133

DTC Detecting Condition Response time for heated oxygen sensor voltage output to change from rich to lean, or from lean to rich, is 1.0 sec. or more during idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit Heated oxygen sensor Air induction system Fuel pressure Injector ECM

HINT:


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately. 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor) output.


05–61 DIAGNOSTICS



–12.5 %



+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage NG

Injection volume


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %


–12.5 %


Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


+25 %

–12.5 %

Less than 0.4V


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V

–

Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph volatge output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. NOTICE: If the vehicle is lack of fuel, the air–fuel ratio becomes LEAN and DTC P0133 will be set, and the CHK ENG then comes on. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.


05–62 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B



A

2 (a) (b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR DURING IDLING) Warm up the heated oxygen sensor with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor during idling. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V, and duration ”t” must exist more than 0.9 sec. (See the following table).

A73686

OK

Go to step 11

NG

3



OK

4


OK


REPLACE EFI RELAY

05–63 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–




OK

6


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

7


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

8 (a)



OK

9 (a)



OK

10




11



05–64 DIAGNOSTICS

12 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

B




05–65 DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0135


DTC

P0141


05C6A–01



Trouble Area

P0135

When the heater operates, heater current exceeds 3.5 A (1 trip detection logic) Heater current is 0.2 A or less when the heater operates (1 trip detection logic)


P0141

When the heater operates, heater current exceeds 2 A (1 trip detection logic) Heater current is 0.2 A or less when the heater operates (1 trip detection logic)





1



OK

2


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

3


OK



05–66 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


INSPECT ECM(HTL OR HTL2 VOLTAGE)

E12

(a) (b)

E10


Specified condition

HT1A (E12–4) – E03 (E12–5)

9 to 14 V

HT1B (E10–4) – E03 (E12–5)

E03 (–)

HT1A (+) HT1B(+) ECM Connector

OK A18294


NG

5




REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–67 DIAGNOSTICS

–


05B3Y–02

DTC

P0171

SYSTEM TOO LEAN (FUEL TRIM) (BANK 1)

DTC

P0172

SYSTEM TOO RICH (FUEL TRIM) (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Fuel trim refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection time. Fuel trim includes short–term fuel trim and long–term fuel trim. Short–term fuel trim is the short–term fuel compensation used to maintain the air–fuel ratio at stoichiometric air–fuel ratio. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the air–fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the stoichiometric air–fuel ratio, This variance triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the air–fuel ratio is rich, and an increase in the fuel volume if it is lean. Long–term fuel trim is overall fuel compensation carried out long–term to compensate for a continual deviation of the short–term fuel trim from the central value, due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the operating environment. If both the short–term fuel trim and long–term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it is detected as a malfunction and the CHK ENG is illuminated. DTC No.

P0171

P0172


Trouble Area

When air fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on LEAN side (2 trip detection logic)


When air fuel ratio feedback is stable after warming up engine, fuel trim is considerably in error on RICH side (2 trip detection logic)


HINT: If the total of the short–term fuel trim value and long–term fuel trim value is within 25 %, the system is functioning normally.



05–68 DIAGNOSTICS

–


INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Hand–held tester only: Narrowing down the trouble area is possible by performing ACTIVE TEST of the following ”A/F CONTROL” (heated oxygen sensor or other trouble areas can be distinguished). (a) Perform ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester (A/F CONTROL). HINT: ”A/F CONTROL” is an ACTIVE TEST which changes the injection volume –12.5 % or +25 %. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Warm up the engine with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 sec. (4) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL”. (5) Perform ”A/F CONTROL” with the engine in an idle condition (press the right or left button). Result: Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume: +25 % " rich output: More than 0.55 V –12.5 % " lean output: Less than 0.4 V NOTICE: There is a few second delay in the sensor 1 (front sensor) output, and there is about 20 seconds delay in the sensor 2 (rear sensor) output. Output voltage of heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1: front sensor) Injection volume

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %


OK


+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



OK

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %



Output voltage

More than 0.55 V

OK

Injection volume

No reaction

NG

Injection volume

+25 %

+25 %

–12.5 %

–12.5 %




Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction

OK

Injection volume

+25 %

Less than 0.4V

'

Output voltage

Injection volume

No reaction


Injection volume

+25 %

More than 0.55 V


Output voltage NG

No reaction

NG


05–69 DIAGNOSTICS

–


The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enable the technician to check and graph voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor. For displaying the graph indication, enter ”ACTIVE TEST / A/F CONTROL / USER DATA,” then select ”O2S B1S1 and O2S B1S2” by pressing ”YES” button and push ”ENTER” button before pressing ”F4” button. HINT: If different DTCs that are related to a different system are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may be open. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. A high heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.55 V or more) could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run rich. A low heated oxygen sensor (sensor 1) voltage (0.4 V or less) could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run lean.

1 (a)



OK

2



OK

3



OK

4



OK

5



REPAIR OR REPLACE

05–70 DIAGNOSTICS

6 (a)

–



CHECK AND REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM

OK

7



EXHAUST

GAS

OK

8

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR) (See page 05–54) OK

Go to step 18

NG

9



OK

10


REPLACE EFI RELAY

OK

11



OK

12


OK


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–71 DIAGNOSTICS

13

–



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

14


GO

15


GO

16 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B


A

17



YES DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL (DTCS P0171 AND/OR P0172)

18


GO


05–72 DIAGNOSTICS

19 (a)

–



Proceed to


A


B

B

Go to step 22

A

20


GO

21 (a)


Proceed to


A


B

B


A

22





05–73 DIAGNOSTICS

–


DTC

P0300


DTC

P0301


DTC

P0302


DTC

P0303


DTC

P0304


05C6B–01

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Misfire: The ECM uses the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor to monitor changes in the crankshaft rotation of each cylinder. The ECM counts the number of times from the engine speed change rate, indicating that misfire has occurred. When the misfire rate equals to or exceeds the count, indicating that the engine condition has deteriorated, the CHK ENG is illuminated. If the misfire rate is high enough and the driving conditions causes the catalyst to overheat, the CHK ENG blinks when the misfire occurs. HINT: For any particular 200 revolutions of engine, misfiring which could result in overheating of catalyst is detected. This cause CHK ENG to blink (1 trip detection logic). For any particular 1,000 revolutions of engine, misfiring which could result in a deterioration of emissions is detected. This cause CHK ENG to illuminate (2 trip detection logic). DTC No.

P0300

P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304




Trouble Area Open or short in engine wire Connector connection Vacuum hose connection PCV hose Ignition system Injector Fuel pressure Mass air flow meter Engine coolant temperature tem erature sensor Compression pressure Valve clearance Valve timing ECM

HINT: When 2 or more codes for a misfiring cylinder are recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code is recorded, it is indicated that the misfires were detected and recorded at different times.


05–74 DIAGNOSTICS

–


Reference: Inspection using an oscilloscope for injector signal waveform. (1) With the engine idling, check the waveforms between terminals #1 – #4 and E1 of the ECM connector. HINT: The correct waveforms are shown below. Injector Signal Waveform

20 V/ Division

20 V/ Division

(Magnification)

GND

GND 50 m sec. / Division (Idling)

1 m sec. / Division (Idling) Infection duration A12490

WIRING DIAGRAM

From Terminal 3 of IG2 Relay (See Page 05–124)

R–B 8 EA1

R–B

ECM I5 Injector No. 1 1 R–B 2

B–R

1 E13 #10

I6 Injector No. 2 1 R–B 2

Y

2 E13 #20


W

3 E13 #30


B

4 E13 #40

A79071


05–75 DIAGNOSTICS

–


CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Record the DTC and freeze frame data. Use the hand–held tester to set to the check mode (See page 05–5). Read the value on the misfire counter for each cylinder when idling. If the value is displayed on the misfire counter, skip the following procedure of confirmation driving. Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with ENGINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the data list. If you do not have the hand–held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated once. Then repeat the simulation process again.

HINT: In order to memorize the DTC of the misfire, it is necessary to drive around MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the following data list. Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the nomal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and the freeze frame data being erased.

(f) (g)

Engine Speed

Time

Idling


1,000 rpm

4 minutes or more

2,000 rpm


3,000 rpm

1 minute and 30 seconds or more

Check if there is misfire by monitoring the DTC and the freeze frame data, and then record them. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 5 seconds.


If the other DTCs besides misfire are memorized simultaneously, perform the troubleshooting for them first. Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. If the misfire is not occured when the vehicle is brought to the workshop, it can be confirmed by reproducing the condition of the freeze frame data. After finishing the repair, confirm that there is no misfire (See the confirmation driving pattern). When either of SHORT FT #1 or LONG FT #1 the freeze frame data is over the range of 20%, there is a possibility that the air–fuel ratio is inclining either to ”RICH” (–20% or less) or ”LEAN” (+20% or more). When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80 C (176 F), there is a possibility of misfire only during warming up. In case that the misfire cannot be reproduced, this may be because of the driving with the shortage of fuel, the use of improper fuel, a stain of ignition plug and etc.


05–76 DIAGNOSTICS

1 (a)

–


CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES MISFIRE DTCS) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

Only ”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” are output

A

”P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304” and other DTCs are output

B



A

2 (a) (b)

CHECK WIRE HARNESS, CONNECTOR AND VACUUM HOSE IN ENGINE ROOM Check the connection of the wire harness and the connector. Check the vacuum hose for disconnection, blockage and break. NG


OK

3


(a) Connect the hand–held teste to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (c) Start the engine. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL/CYL#1 – CYL#4”. (e) Read the number of misfire on the hand–held tester. HINT: When a misfire is not reproduced, be sure to branch below based on the stored DTC. Result: High Misfire Rate Cylinder

Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A


B

B

Go to step 15

A

4

CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 18–1) OK

NG


Go to step 7

05–77 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–


CHANGE NORMAL SPARK PLUG AND CHECK SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 18–1) OK

REPLACE SPARK PLUG

NG

6

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(IGNITION COIL – ECM) (See page 05–103) OK

REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY (THEN CONFIRM THAT THERE IS NO MISFIRE)


7

INSPECT ECM TERMINAL OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(#1, #2, #3 OR #4 VOLTAGE) (a) (b)

E13


Specified condition

#10 (E13–1) – E01 (E13–7) #20 (E13–2) – E01 (E13–7)

E01 #40 #30 #20 #10 ECM Connector

#30 (E13–3) – E01 (E13–7) A18294

8 to 14 V

#40 (E13–4) – E01 (E13–7)

OK

Go to step 10

NG

8

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR RESISTANCE OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 11–8) NG

OK



05–78 DIAGNOSTICS

9

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR OF MISFIRING CYLINDER(IG2 RELAY – INJECTOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d)

E13

Disconnect the ECM E13 connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the injector connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

#40 #30 #20 #10 ECM Connector

Specified condition


A65743

Continuity




Specified condition


No continuity


Standard (Check for open):

IG2 Relay


A79064

Specified condition

Injector No.1 (I5–1) – #10 (E13–1) Injector No.2 (I6–1) – #20 (E13–2)


I6

I7

Continuity

Injector No.3 (I7–1) – #30 (E13–3)

I8

Injector No.4 (I8–1) – #40 (E13–4)

Standard (Check for short): 1 2


Specified condition

Injector No.1 (I5–1) or #10 (E13–1) – Body ground Injector No.2 (I6–1) or #20 (E13–2) – Body ground

Injector Connector

No continuity

Injector No.3 (I7–1) or #30 (E13–3) – Body ground A61031

Injector No.4 (I8–1) or #40 (E13–4) – Body ground

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

10

INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR INJECTION AND VOLUME OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See page 11–8) NG


OK

11



REPAIR OR REPLACE

05–79 DIAGNOSTICS

12

–



ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE

OK

13


Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A


B

B


A

14

CHECK VALVE TIMING(CHECK FOR LOOSE AND JUMPING TEETH OF TIMING BELT) (See page 14–49) NG

ADJUST VALVE TIMING

OK

15



OK

16 (a) (b) (c)

(d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE AND MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the intake air temperature. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Temperature: Equivalent to ambient temperature Check the air flow rate. (1) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBS/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Condition


Ignition switch On (do not start engine)

0

Idling

4 to 6


13 to 20

Idling – Running



05–80 DIAGNOSTICS

NG

–



OK

17



OK

18


Proceed to

1 or 2 cylinders

A


B

B

AGAIN GO TO STEP5



05–81 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0325

–


05C6C–01

KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Knock sensor is fitted on the cylinder block to detect the engine knocking. This sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, the ignition timing is delayed to suppress it. DTC No. P0325


Trouble Area

No knock sensor signal to the ECM with engine speed 3,000 rpm or more


HINT: If the ECM detects the DTC ”P0325”, it enters the fail–safe mode in which the corrective retarded angle value is set to the maximum value. Reference: Inspection using the oscillascope. (1) Run the engine at 4,000 rpm, check the waveform between terminal KNKL of the ECM connector and body ground. 2.2V HINT: The correct waveform is as shown on the left. (2) Spread the time on the horizontal axis, and confirm that period of the wave is 80 seconds (Normal A05134 mode vibration frequency of knock sensor: 11.7 kHz). HINT: If the vibration frequency in the normal mode is not 11.7 kHz, the sensor is out of order.

WIRING DIAGRAM (Shielded)

K1 Knock Sensor 2 1

ECM

B

2 EB1

B

1 E12 FKN+

W

1 EB1

W

2 E12 FKN–

BR

E J13

D J12

D J13

E J12

Junction Connector

BR EH

A79088


05–82 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (a) (b) E12

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for short):

FKN+ FKN– ECM Connector

OK


Specified condition

FKN+ (E12–1) – FKN– (E12–2)

No continuity

Go to step 3

A65745

NG

2

INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR (See page 10–3) NG


OK

3


E12


FKN+


FKN–

FKN+ (E12–1) – Knock sensor (K1–2) FKN– (E12–2) – Knock sensor (K1–1)

ECM Connector

A65745

FKN+ (E12–1) or Knock sensor (K1–2) – Body ground FKN– (E12–2) or Knock sensor (K1–1) – Body ground

NG


Continuity


OK

Specified condition

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE


HARNESS

OR

05–83 DIAGNOSTICS

4

–


CONFIRM THE MALFUNCTION DISAPPEAR WHEN A GOOD KNOCK SENSOR IS INSTALLED (a)

Change the knock sensor to a new one. (1) Remove the knock sensor. (2) Install a new knock sensor. Torque: 20 Nm (204 kgfcm, 15 ftlbf) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5). Perform the driving test. Read the DTC using the hand–held tester (See page 05–5).

(b) (c) (d) A64029

Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to

”P0325” is output

A

”P0325” is not output

B

B A CHECK AND REPLACE ECM(See page 01–32)



05–84 DIAGNOSTICS

–


05B41–03

DTC

P0335

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

DTC

P1335

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (DURING ENGINE RUNNING)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pick up coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) has 34 teeth and is installed to the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signals, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signals. DTC No.


Trouble Area

P0335

No crankshaft position sensor signal to the ECM during cranking Open in NE– circuit


P1335

If conditions from (a) through (c) are met: (a) NE greater than 1,000 rpm (b) NE signal is not detected for over 0.05 sec. (c) Not during cranking


CH1 (G2) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND

A63955



Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2 – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


05–85 DIAGNOSTICS

–


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM (Shielded) C1 Camshaft Position Sensor 1

26 E13 G2

W

2

R

C6 (Shielded) Crankshaft Position Sensor 2

R

1

R

34 E13 NE– 27 E13 NE+

G

E E

E


BR

EH

A79089


Read freeze frame data using Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Perform troubleshooting on ”DTC P0335” first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the following mechanical system.


05–86 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–


INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(CHECK RESISTANCE) (a)

C6


Measure the resistance between the terminals of the crankshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 985 to 1,600 (Cold) 1,265 to 1,890 (Hot) NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG


OK

2




NE+

NE–

NE+ (C6–1) – NE+ (E13–27) NE– (C6–2) – NE– (E13–34)

Crankshaft Position Sensor Connector



A66132

Symbols (Terminal No.) NE+ (C6–1) or NE+ (E13–27) – Body ground NE– (C6–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground


E13 NE+

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION Check the crankshaft position sensor installation . NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

HARNESS

AND

05–87 DIAGNOSTICS

4 (a) (b)

–


INSPECT CRANKSHAFT(TEETH OF SIGNAL PLATE) Remove the oil pump assembly. (See page 17–3) Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG



REPAIR OR REPLACE CRANKSHAFT

05–88 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0340

–


05B42–03

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The camshaft position sensor (G2 signal) consists of a magnet, iron core and pickup coil. The G2 signal plate has 3 teeth on its outer circumference and is installed on the camshaft timing pulley. When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil changes, causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil. The NE signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley) has 34 teeth and is installed to the crankshaft. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. The ECM detects the crankshaft angle and the engine revolution based on the NE signals, and the cylinder and the angle of the VVT based on the combination of the G2 and NE signals. DTC No.

P0340


Trouble Area

No camshaft position sensor signal to the ECM during cranking Open in NE– circuit

CH1 (G2) CH2 (NE+)

GND

GND



Contents

Terminal

CH1: G2 – NE– CH2: NE+ – NE–

Equipment Set

5V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


A63955

WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0335 on page05–84.



05–89 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–


INSPECT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(CHECK RESISTANCE) (a)

C1


Measure the resistance between the terminals of the camshaft posision sensor connector. Resistance: 1,630 to 2,740 (Cold) 2,065 to 3,225 (Hot) NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” mean the temperature of the coils themselves. ”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50_C (122_F) and ”Hot” is from 50_C (122_F) to 100_C (212_F). NG


OK

2




G– G+ Camshaft Position Sensor Connector

G– (C1–2) – NE– (E13–34)



A66132

Symbols (Terminal No.) G+ (C1–1) or G2+ (E13–26) – Body ground G– (C1–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground


E13 G2

NE–

ECM Connector

A65743

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK

3 (a)

CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION Check the camshaft position sensor installation. NG

OK


TIGHTEN SENSOR

HARNESS

AND

05–90 DIAGNOSTICS

4 (a)

–





REPAIR OR REPLACE CAMSHAFT

05–91 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0420

–


05B43–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM compares the 2 waveforms of the heated oxygen sensors located before and after the catalyst to determine whether or not the catalyst performance has deteriorated. Air–fuel ratio feedback compensation keeps the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor in front of the catalyst alternates between back and forth, from rich to lean. If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor behind the catalyst switches back and forth between rich and lean much more slowly than the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor in front of the catalyst. When both waveforms change at a similar rate, it indicates that the catalyst performance has deteriorated. Waveform of heated oxygen Sensor in front of Catalyst

Normal Catalyst

Waveform of Heated Oxygen Sensor behind Catalyst

A58692

DTC No.

P0420

DTC Detecting Condition After engine and catalyst are warmed up, and while vehicle is driven within set vehicle and engine speed range, waveforms of heated oxygen sensors have same amplitude (2 trip detection logic)

Trouble Area Gas leakage in exhaust system Heated oxygen sensor Three–way catalytic converter ECM

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN Engine Speed (c)

2,500 – 3,000 rpm

(b)

Idling IG SW OFF

(d)

(a)

Warmed up

3 min.

Check

Time A58693


05–92 DIAGNOSTICS

(a)

–


Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3, or connect the probe of the oscilloscope between terminals HT1A, HT1B, OX1A, OX1B and E1 of the ECM connector. Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched OFF until the engine coolant temperature is stable. Run the engine at 2,500 to 3,000 rpm for about 3 min. After confirming that the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1 (OX)) which oscillates around 0.5 V during feedback to the ECM, check the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2 (OX)).

(b)

(c) (d)

HINT: OX Signal Waveform (Oscilloscope)

If there is a malfunction in the system, the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2 (OX)) is similar to the wave from of the heated oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1 (OX)) snown in the diagram on the left. There are some cases that, even though a malfunction exists, the CHK ENG may not be illuminated.

1.0 V 0V 200 msec. /Division

A58694


1 (a)


Proceed to


A


B


A



05–93 DIAGNOSTICS

2

–



REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

3



OXYGEN

OK

4



OK REPLACE THREE–WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER


OXYGEN

05–94 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0443

–


05C6D–01

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION To reduce HC emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through the charcoal canister to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders. The ECM changes the duty signal to the VSV for EVAP so that the intake quantity of HC emissions becomse properly for the driving conditions (engine load, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is warmed up. DTC No. P0443


Trouble Area Open or short in VSV for EVAP circuit VSV for EVAP ECM

Proper response to ECM command does not occur (1 trip detection logic)

WIRING DIAGRAM ECM

From Terminal 3 of B–W EFI Relay (See Page 05–124)

Engine Room R/B No.4 EFI No.2 4

4 1

2

B–W

13 EA1

V5 VSV for EVAP 12 B–W 1 2 W–G E13 EVP1

A79073



05–95 DIAGNOSTICS

1

–


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSV FOR EVAP) (a) (b) (c) (d) E

E

F

F

VSV is ON

VSV is OFF

Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the hand–held tester. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VSV for EVAP. Start the engine. When the VSV for EVAP is operated by the hand–held tester, apply the disconnected hose to your finger to check the suction. Result: VSV is ON: Disconnected port sucks. VSV is OFF: Disconnected port does not suck.

A79090

OK


NG

2


E13

E01 (–)


Specified condition

EVP1 (E13–12) – E01 (E13–7)

8 to 14 V

EVP1 (+) ECM Connector

A18294

OK


NG

3

INSPECT VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1 NG

REPLACE VACUUM SWITCHING VALVE ASSY NO.1

OK

4


OK



05–96 DIAGNOSTICS

5

–



E13

EVP1

ECM Connector

Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Disconnect the VSV connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

VSV (V5–2) – EVP1 (E13–12)

Continuity



Specified condition

VSV (V5–2) or EVP1 (E13–12) – Body ground

No continuity



OK


A52933

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–97 DIAGNOSTICS

6

–


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI RELAY – VSV FOR EVAP) (a) (b)


(c) (d) EFI Relay

Remove the EFI relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Remove the EFI No.2 fuse from the engine room R/B No.4. Disconnect the VSV connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) EFI relay (3) – EFI No.2 fuse (1)

A66053

EFI No.2 fuse (2) – VSV (V5–1)

2 EFI No.2 Fuse


Ç

Continuity



Specified condition

EFI relay (3) or EFI No.2 fuse (1) – Body ground EFI No.2 fuse (2) or VSV (V5–1) – Body ground





NG

A52933

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–98 DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

P0500

–


05B45–02

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION


4–Pulse

From Speed Sensor

Skid Control ECU

4–Pulse

ECM

Combination Meter

A79413

DTC No.

P0500


Trouble Area

During the vehicle is being driven, no vehicle speed sensor signal to the ECM (1 trip detection logic: A/T) (2 trip detection logic: M/T)


WIRING DIAGRAM C11 Combination Meter 18

ECM Junction Connector V–W

H H J10 J20 *1 *2

H H J10 J20 *1 *2

17 E10 SPD

V–W

*1: LHD *2: RHD A79092


05–99 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1

CHECK OPERATION OF SPEEDOMETER(SPEEDOMETER OPERATION)


CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT

OK

2

INSPECT ECM(CHECK VOLTAGE) E1 (–) E12

(a) (b) (c) (d)

SPD (+) E10

ECM Connector


Specified condition

SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7)


A18294


4.5–5.5V

0V


Turn Wheel

NG

A62954



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

AND


DTC

P0505

–


05B46–02

IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Throttle Valve

The rotary solenoid type of the idle speed control (ISC) valve is located under the throttle body and intake air bypassing the throttle valve is directed to the ISC valve through the passage. In this way the intake air volume bypassing the throttle valve is regulated, controls the engine speed. The ECM operates the ISC valve only to perform idle–up and provide feedback for the target idling speed.

Intake Air Chamber


ECM Valve


DTC No.

P0505


Trouble Area Open or short in ISC valve circuit ISC valve is stuck or closed PCV hose A/C switch circuit Air induction system ECM




12 B–R 2 VISC EA1

DUTY

GND

ECM 1

3

5 E13 RSD

G–R

W–B

W–B

7 E13 E01

EG

A79101



1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

–




NG

2



1

2

3

VISC (+)



Specified condition

VISC (I10–2) – GND (I10–3)

9 to 14 V

NG

GND (–)

OK


A66264

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


3

–



E13


RSD

DUTY (I10–1) – RSD (E13–5)

E01

GND (I10–3) – E01 (E13–7)

ECM Connector

A65743

DUTY

2

Continuity



1

Specified condition


Specified condition


No continuity

3

GND A66264

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4






–


DTC

P1300


DTC

P1305


DTC

P1310


DTC

P1315


05C6E–01


If DTC P1300 is displayed, check No.1 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P1305 is displayed, check No.2 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P1310 is displayed, check No.3 ignition coil with igniter circuit. If DTC P1315 is displayed, check No.4 ignition coil with igniter circuit. A Direct Ignition System (DIS) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduces the high–voltage loss, and enhances overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor. The DIS is a 1–cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1–cylinder ignition system, the spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary coil. High voltage generated in the secondary coil is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug passes through from the center electrode to the ground electrode. The ECM determines ignition timing and outputs the ignition (IGT) signals of each cylinder. Based on IGT signals, the power transistors cut off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil. At the same time, the igniter also sends an ignition confirmation (IGF) signal as a fail–safe measurement to the ECM.



ECM

–


From Battery Igniter



No. 1 Spark Plug

IGF Ignition Coil


IGT2


No. 2 Spark Plug

IGT3


No. 3 Spark Plug

IGT4


No. 4 Spark Plug

Various Sensor

TAC

To Tachometer

A73818

DTC No. P1300 P1305 P1310 P1315


No IGF signal to the ECM while engine is running


Trouble Area Ignition system Open or short in IGF or IGT1 circuit from No. 1 ignition coil with igniter to ECM No.1 – No.4 ignition coil with igniter ECM


–


WIRING DIAGRAM From Terminal 3 of IG2 Relay (See Page 05–124)

R–B ECM 8 EA1 R–B

I1 Ignition Coil and 1 Igniter No.1

R–B

3

8 E13 IGT1

R–W

R–B W–B 4

2 W–R

1

3

W–B 4


B–R

P

9 E13 IGT2

W–R

R–B

W–R 1

3

W–B 4


B–R W–B

LG–B

10 E13 IGT3

W–R

R–B W–R

R–B W–B

N2 Noise 1 Filter

1

3

W–B 4


L–Y

W–R

W–R

11 E13 IGT4 23 E13 IGF

W–B EH


A79093


–



1

PERFORM SIMULATION TEST

(a) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5) (b) Shuffle arrangement of the ighition coil and igniters. NOTICE: Do not shuffle the connectors. (c) Perform the simulation test. (d) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5) Result: Display (DTC output)

Proceed to


A


B

B

REPLACE IGNITION COIL

A

2

INSPECT ECM(IGT1, IGT2, IGT3, IGT4 AND IGF SIGNAL) (a) (b)

E1

IGF E13

E12

Inspection using the oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform between terminals IGT1 to IGT4 and E1, and IGF1 and E1 of the ECM connector. Standard: Item

IGT4 IGT3 IGT2 IGT1 ECM Connector

Contents

Terminal A18294

CH1: IGT1, IGT2, IGT3, IGT4 – E1 CH2: IGF – E1

Equipment Set

2V/DIV, 20ms/DIV

Condition


HINT: Correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. CH1 (IGT1 – 4)

GND

CH2 (IGF1)

GND

NG A63956

OK




3

–


INSPECT IGNITION COIL(POWER SOURCE) (a) (b)


I2

I3

I4

Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition



Continuity


A54393

(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the ignition coil and igniter connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (I1–1) – GND (4) +B (I2–1) – GND (4) +B (I3–1) – GND (4)

9 to 14 V

+B (I4–1) – GND (4)

NG

Go to step 5

OK

4

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – IGNITION COIL)

IGT2

HINT: The procedure below is for No.1 cylinder. If a malfunction is found on other cylinders, check the circuit for the cylinder with referring to this procedure. (a) Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. (b) Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. (c) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

IGT1

E13


Specified condition

IGT (I1–3) – IGT1 (E13–8)

IGF


IGT (I2–3) – IGT2 (E13–9) A65743

IGT (I3–3) – IGT3 (E13–10) IGT (I4–3) – IGT4 (E13–11) IGF (I1–2) – IGF (E13–23)


I2

I3

IGF (I2–2) – IGF (E13–23)

I4


IGF IGT Ignition Coil and Igniter Connector AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

A54393

Continuity


–



Specified condition

IGT (I1–3) or IGT1 (E13–8) – Body ground IGT (I2–3) or IGT2 (E13–9) – Body ground IGT (I3–3) or IGT3 (E13–10) – Body ground IGT (I4–3) or IGT4 (E13–11) – Body ground IGF (I1–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground

No continuity

IGF (I2–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground IGF (I3–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground IGF (I4–2) or IGF (E13–23) – Body ground

NG


OK REPLACE IGNITION COIL

5



Specified condition

1–2


3–5

B16200

OK


NG


REPLACE IG2 RELAY


6


CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(IG2 RELAY – IGNITION COIL) (a) (b) (c)


–

I2

I3

I4

Disconnect the ignition coil and igniter connector. Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room R/B No.4. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition

+B (I1–1) – IG2 relay (3)



A54393

Continuity

+B (I4–1) – IG2 relay (3)




Specified condition


No continuity


IG2 Relay A66053

A79064

NG


OK

7

CHECK FUSE(IGN FUSE) (See page 05–124) NG

OK




8

–




IG2



IG2 (I13–6) – IGN fuse (1)

A66267




Driver Side J/B 1


2



IGN Fuse

A79103


IG2 Relay A66053

A79064

NG





DTC

P1346

–


0506C–04

VVT SENSOR/CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0335 on page 05–84 DTC No. P1346

Detection Item

Trouble Area

Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and camshaft position sensor signal (2 trip detection logic)


WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0335 on page 05–84

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

1






DTC

P1349

–


05C6F–01

VVT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION VVT system controls the intake valve timing to proper timing in response to driving condition. The ECM controls the oil control valve (OCV) to make the intake valve timing properly, oil pressure regulated by the OCV is supplied to the valiable valve timing (VVT) controller, and then the VVT controller changes relative position between the camshaft and the crankshaft. DTC No.

P1349


Trouble Area

Condition (a) or (b) continues with engine speed at 400 to 4,000 rpm after the engine is warmed up (a) Valve timing does not change from the current valve timing (b) Current valve timing is fixed


WIRING DIAGRAM

ECM


W–G

2

Y–B

15 E13 OCV+ 14 E13 OCV–

A63991


1


OK




2 (a) (b) (c)

–


PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OPERATE OF OCV) Start the engine and warm it up. Connect the hand–held tester and select VVT from the ACTIVE TEST menu. Check the engine speed while operating the OCV by the hand–held tester. OCV is OFF: Normal engine speed OCV is ON: Rough idle or engine stall

HINT: DTC P1349 is also output when a foreign object is detected in some parts of the system in engine oil, and then the system returns to normal in a short time. There is also no problem on the VVT as the oil filter should catch the foreign object in engine oil. OK

VVT SYSTEM OK

NG

3


E13

Turn the ignition switch ON. Check the waveform between terminals OCV+ and OCV– of the E13 ECM connector.


A18294

HINT:


(A)

(A)

The correct waveform is as shown on the left. The waveform frequency (A) becomes longer as the engine speed becomes higher.

GND

1 m sec./Division

NG A58701


OK

4

INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See page14–64) NG

OK


REPLACE VVT CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY, AND THEN GO TO NEXT STEP


5

–



REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY, AND THEN GO TO NEXT STEP

OK

6

CHECK OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER(CHECK BLOCKAGE) NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER

OK

7 (a) (b) (c)

PERFORM SIMULATION TEST(DTC CHECK) Clear the DTC (See page 05–5). Perform the simulation test. Check whether or not DTC P1349 is stored (See page 05–5). Result: DTC

Proceed to

”P1349” is output.

A

”P1349” is not output.

B

HINT: DTC P1349 is also output when a foreign object is detected in some parts of the system in engine oil, and then the system returns to normal in a short time. There is also no problem on the VVT as the oil filter should catch the foreign object in the engine oil. B A CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32)


VVT SYSTEM OK


DTC

P1520

–


05B48–02


CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This signal is used to detect that the brakes have been applied. The STP signal voltage is the same as the one supplied to the stop lights. The STP signal is used mainly to control the fuel cut–off engine speed (The fuel cut–off engine speed is reduced slightly when the vehicle is braking.). DTC No.

P1520

DTC Detecting Condition Condition (a), (b) and (c) continue for 0.5 sec. or more: (a) Ignition switch ON (b) Brake pedal released (c) STP signal is OFF when the STP signal is OFF


Trouble Area Open or short in stop light switch signal circuit Stop light switch ECM


–



G–W (*1)

1 IR1

G–W (*2)

G–W (*2)

1

2 DA

ECM

10 DC

19 E10 STP

G–W

1 DM

G–W


G–W (*4, *5) C J30

G–W (*4, *5)

C J30

C J30

2

G–W (*4, *5)

1 R–W (*1)

11 IE3

R–W (*2) G–W (*3)

2 IR1 2

R–W (*1)

R–W (*2)

DA 22




N8 Noise Filter


1 BD1 (*4) 3 BF1 (*5)

G–W


L (*4)


B–G W–B (*3)

1 4D 2

1 1 4B


W–B (*4, *5)

W–B

3 BG1

B–G FL MAIN

W–B (*5)

W–B (*3)

W–B (*5)

L (*5)

4 BG1 W–B (*4) W–B (*5)

2 BD1 (*4) 4 BF1 (*5)

W–B

G–W (*5)

W–B (*4) A J33 2 BE1 W–B (*4)


W–B Battery



BS

BT

BX

A79094


–



1 (a)



OK

2 (a) (b) (c) (d)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed the hand–held tester. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Read the STP signal on the hand–held tester. Result: Brake Pedal

STP Signal

Depressed

ON

Released

OFF

OK NG




3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(ECM – STOP LIGHT SWITCH) (a) (b) (c)

E10

Disconnect the stop light switch connector. Disconnect the the E10 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open):

STP ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


Stop Light Switch Connector A56986

NG



REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


DTC

P1600

–


05B49–02

ECM BATT MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is applied to terminal BATT of the ECM even the ignition switch is OFF for the DTC memory and air–fuel ratio adaptive control value memory, etc. DTC No.


P1600

Trouble Area Open in back up power source circuit ECM

Open in back up power source circuit

HINT: If DTC P1600 is displayed, the ECM does not store other DTCs.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 1 1A

B–G

ECM

EFI 1

2

1

B–Y

7 7 IE3 IO1 *1 *2

B–Y

3 E9 BATT

1 4A Engine Room J/B No.4 BR

1 4B

7 E12 E1

B–G FL MAIN

Battery EH

*1: LHD *2: RHD A79095



1

–




EFI Fuse


NG A66054


OK

2


E9

E12


(a) (b)


Specified condition

BATT (E9–3) – E1 (E12–7)

8 to 14 V

BATT (+) A18294

OK

NG




3

–


CHECK WIRE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(EFI FUSE – ECM) (a) (b) (c)

E9

BATT ECM Connector

Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.1. Disconnect the ECM E9 connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.)

Specified condition


Continuity



Specified condition


No continuity


EFI Fuse 2 1

A79078

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

OK CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (BATTERY – EFI FUSE)


HARNESS

OR


DTC

P1656

–


05B4A–02

OCV CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1)




Open or short in oil control valve (OCV) circuit



1 (a) (b) (c)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(OCV OPERATION) Start the engine and warm it up. Connect the hand–held tester and select the VVT on the ACTIVE TEST menu. Check the engine speed while operating the OCV by using the hand–held tester. Result: VVT system is OFF (OCV is OFF): Normal engine speed VVT system is ON (OCV is ON): Rough idle or engine stalled OK


NG

2



OK

3

INSPECT ECM(CHECK VOLTAGE) (See page 05–20) NG

OK




4

–



E13


Specified condition

Oil control valve (C2–1) – OCV+ (E13–14)


Continuity

Oil control valve (C2–2) – OCV– (E13–15)

A65743


Wire Harness Side

Specified condition

Oil control valve (C2–1) or OCV+ (E13–14) – Body ground

C2

Oil control valve (C2–2) or OCV– (E13–15) – Body ground


A53155

NG

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR



REPLACE

No continuity

HARNESS

OR

05–5 DIAGNOSTICS

–


PRE–CHECK 1. (a)

FI0534


Hand–Held Tester

A76859


To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–16). The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pend-

05–6 DIAGNOSTICS

–


ing fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip). Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine condition when a misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304) or fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171) or other malfunction (first malfunction only), is detected. Because freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction. Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart, these should be followed. If no instructions are given, troubleshoot according to the following priorities. (1) DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171) and misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304). (2) Fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171). (3) Misfire (DTCs P0300 – P0304).

(b)

FI0534


Description for M–OBD (Except European spec.) When troubleshoot Multiplex OBD (M–OBD) vehicles, the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand– held tester to the vehicle, and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM.

05–7 DIAGNOSTICS

Hand–Held Tester


The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in drive system components. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–16). When the malfunction does not reoccur, the CHK ENG is indicated until the ignition switch is turned off, and then the CHK ENG is not indicated when the ignition switch is turned on but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

To check the DTCs, connect the hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle or read the DTC which is indicated on the multi information display when TC and CG terminals on the DLC3 are connected. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. (for operating instructions, see the instruction book.) The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to the check (test) mode using hand–held tester when troubleshooting, a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 3). * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected, the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip).

A76859


–

05–8 DIAGNOSTICS

–

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516


Freeze frame data: Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculator load, water temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.

Check the DLC3. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro–OBD)/ ISO 14230(M–OBD) communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ ISO 14230 format.

DLC3 A04550

Terminal No.


Condition

7


During transmission

4


Always

16


Always

HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. If communication is still not possible is when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the Service Deparment listed in the tool’s instruction manual. (d) Inspect the battery voltage. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V, recharge the battery before proceeding. (e)

FI0534



HINT: If the CHK ENG lamp is not illuminated, troubleshoot the combination meter. (2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should go off. If the lamp remains on, it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.

05–9 DIAGNOSTICS

–


2. DTC CHECK (Nomal Mode) : NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode. So before switching modes, always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.

(a)

Hand–Held Tester

A76859

(b)

(c)

Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down. The hand–held tester’s instruction book. (4) See page 05–16 to confirm the details of the DTCs. Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds. DTC CHECK (Check Mode):

3. HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check (test) mode. (a) Proceduce for check mode using hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions Battery positive voltage 11V or more. Throttle valve fully closed. Transmission in the ”P” or ”N” position. Air conditioning switched OFF. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF.


05–10 DIAGNOSTICS

Hand–Held Tester

–


(3) (4)

Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch and the hand–held tester main switch ON.

(5)


A76859



NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa, or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode, the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. (6) Start the engine. (The CHK ENG lamp goes out after the engine start.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC, etc. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data, etc. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF, because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the nomal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased. (9) After checking the DTCs, inspect the applicable circuit. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) When operating hand–held tester to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.) (c) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI fuse for more than 60 seconds.

05–11 DIAGNOSTICS

–





P0100

Ignition timing is fixed at


P0110



P0115

Water temperature is fixed at 80


P0120

VTA is fixed at 0

The following condition must be repeated at least 2 times consecutively when closed throttle position switch is OFF: VTA greater than 0.1 V and less than 0.95 V

P0135 P0141

The heater circuit in which an abnormality is detected is turned off

Ignition switch OFF

P0325


Ignition switch OFF

P1300 P1305 P1310 P1315

Fuel cut


P1656

It cut electrically the circuit in which an abnormality is detected


5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s engine ECM in check (test) mode, 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of 2 trip detection logic, and sensitivity to detect faults is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. (a) Clear the DTC. (See step 3.) (b) Set the check (test) mode. (See step 3.) (c) Perform a simulation test. (See page 01–32) (d) Check the connector and terminal. (See page 01–32) (e) Wiggle the harness and the connector. (See page 01–32) 6. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester, you can read the value of the switches, sensors, actuators and so on without parts removal. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten diagnostic time. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. A vehicle may still be normal even if the measured values are a little different from those listed here. Do not decide whether a part is faulty or not solely according to the ”Normal Condition” here. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. (g) According to the display on tester, read the ”DATA LIST”.


05–12 DIAGNOSTICS

Hand–held tester display


–


Normal Condition*1

Diagnostic Note

FUEL SYS #1

Fuel System Bank 1 OPEN: Air–fuel ratio feedback stopped CLOSED: Air–fuel ratio feedback operating

Idling after warming up: CLOSED

'

CALC LOAD

Calculator Load: Current intake air volume as a proportion of max. intake air volume

Idling: 3.3 to 26.7 % Runnig without load (2,500rpm): 12.0 to 14.7 %

'

COOLANT TEMP



INTAKE AIR



If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”, _C” sensor circuit is open or shorted.

SHORT FT #1

Short–term Fuel Trim Bank 1

0 20%

'

LONG FT #1

Long–term Fuel Trim Bank 1

0 20%

'

Air flow rate from mass air flow Meter

Idling: M/T 0.54 to 4.33 gm/sec. A/T 0.58 to 4.67 gm/sec. Running without load (2,500 rpm): 3.33 to 9.17 gm/sec.

'

ENGINE SPD

Engine Speed

Idling: 600 to 700 rpm

'

VEHICLE SPD

Vehicle Speed


IGN ADVANCE

Ignition Advance: Ignition Timing of Cylinder No. 1


THROTTLE POS

Voltage Output of Throttle Position Sensor Calculated as a percentage: 0 V " 0%, 5 V " 100%

Throttle Fully Closed: 6 to 16 % Throttle Fully Open: 64 to 98 %

O2S B1, S1

Voltage Output of Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 1, Sensor 1


O2FT B1, S1

Heated Oxygen Sensor Fuel Trim Bank 1, Sensor 1 (Same as SHORT FT #1)

MAF/AFM

0 20 %

Speed indicated on speedmeter. '

Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine)

' '

Fuel injection time for cylinder No.1


'

Intake Air Control Valve duty ratio Opening ratio rotary solenoid type ISC valve

Idling: 20 to 40 %

'

Starter Signal

Cranking: ON

'

CTP SW

Closed Throttle Position Switch Signal

Cranking: ON

'

A/C SIG

A/C Switch Signal

A/C ON: ON

'

Stop Light Switch Signal

Stop light switch ON: ON

'

Fuel Cut Idle: Fuel cut when throttle valve fully closed, during deceleration


'

Neutral start switch signal

P or N position: ON

'

Fuel Cut TAU: Fuel cut during very light load


'

INJECTOR

ISC DUTY RATIO STARTER SIG

STOP LIGHT SW *2 FC IDL PNP SW/NSW *2 FC TAU CYL#1, CYL#2, CYL#3, CYL#4

Abnormal revolution variation for each cylinder

0%

'

FUEL PUMP

Fuel Pump Signal

Idling: ON

'

EVAP (PURGE) VSV

EVAP VSV Signal

VSV operation: Above 30 %

'


05–13 DIAGNOSTICS

–


*1:

If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is in the N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. *2: A/T only 7. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay, VSV, actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten labor time. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST”. (g) According to the display on tester, perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. Hand–held Tester Display

INJ VOL

A/F CONTROL

Test Details

Diagnostic Note




The following procedure of A/F CONTROL enables the technician to check and graph voltage outputs of the heated oxygen sensor. To display the graph indication, select O2S B1 S1 and press button ”F4” after selecting ”ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA”.

ISC DUTY RATIO

[Test Details] Control the ISC duty ratio 0 to 90 % [Vehicle Condition] Engine speed: 3,000 rpm or less Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph) Battery voltage: 8.5 V or more

'

EVAP VSV (ALONE)


'


'


'


'

FUEL PUMP / SPD

TC/TE1

FC IDL PROHBT


05–14 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1



NG

OK

NG

11 V or more

Less than 11 V


OK

2



NG

GO TO STEP 6

OK

3


OK

4

CHECK AIR FILTER


REPAIR OR REPLACE

OK

5


OK



05–15 DIAGNOSTICS

6

–




OK

7





05–22 DIAGNOSTICS

–

SFI SYSTEM (1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE) 0505L–04

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When the malfunction code is not confirmed in the diagnostic trouble code check and the problem still can not be confirmed in the basic inspection, proceed to this problem symptoms tables and troubleshoot according to the numbered order given below. Symptom

Suspect Area


1. Starter and starter relay 2. Neutral start switch circuit*

See page 19–1


1. 2. 3. 4.

ECM power source circuit Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit Fuel pump control circuit Fuel system

05–124 05–103 05–131 11–1


1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit 3. Fuel system

05–131 05–103 11–1


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Starter signal circuit ISC valve circuit Fuel pump control circuit Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) Spark plug Compression Fuel system

05–135 05–100 05–131 05–103 18–3


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.


05–135 05–100 05–131 11–1 05–103 18–3


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.


05–135 05–100 05–131 11–1 05–103 18–3


1. ISC valve circuit

05–100


1. ISC valve circuit 2. ECM power source circuit 3. Neutral start switch circuit*

05–100 05–124


1. 2. 3. 4.

05–100 05–131 11–1



05–100 05–124 05–131



05–100 05–124 05–131

Hesitation/Poor acceleration (Poor drivability)

1. Fuel system 2. Fuel pump control circuit 3. Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit

11–1 05–131 05–103

Muffler explosion, after fire (Poor drivability)

1. Ignition coil (w/ Igniter) circuit 2. Spark plug 3. Fuel system

05–103 18–3 11–1

Surging (Poor drivability)

1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. Spark plug 3. Fuel system

05–131 18–3 11–1


ISC valve circuit Neutral start switch circuit* Fuel pump control circuit Fuel system

14–1 11–1

05–23 DIAGNOSTICS

–



1. Fuel pump control circuit 2. ISC valve circuit

05–131 05–100


1. Injector circuit 2. ISC valve circuit 3. ECM

11–8 05–100 05–20

Engine stall (When shifting from N to D)

1. Neutral start switch circuit 2. ISC valve circuit

05–100

*: A/T only.



–


05C6I–01




–



5

B–Y 6

B–R

*1: LHD *2: RHD *3: A/T *4: M/T

1 ST

Fuse Block

2 B–R

1 1

6 B–W

IE4 (*1) IP1 (*2)

B J13

B J12

B–R

B–W (*3) 9

B–R 1


B–Y

5


3

2

A J12

B–Y

9 E12 STA

Junction Connector

5

5

W–B

B

2 DJ 7

Driver Side J/B

IK1

B–G FL MAIN B–R

6 B–Y (*3)

1


1 4B

A J12

B–Y (*4)

5

5

B–G 1 4A

C J13


B

1 1 S5

9 DA

S4

Battery

Stater

W–B IJ

A79100



–



1 (a) (b) (c)


ON

START

STA Signal

OFF

ON

OK


NG

2


E12

STA ECM Connector


Specified condition


Continuity



A79097

Driver Side R/B RHD





Specified condition


No continuity


NG



–


REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR


–


05C6K–01



13

W–L (LHD)

4

17 DB

W–L

B

B

(LHD)

D W–L J21 (RHD) CG

Driver Side J/B

J8 J/C

B W–L J20 (RHD)

3 DC

ECM 20 E9 TC

W–L

Center J/B 3 CB

W–B (RHD)

6 CA

W–B (RHD)

J16 J/C W–B A (LHD)

A

W–B (LHD)

IP

IO

A81014



1


(a) (b)

TC (+)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


Specified condition

9 10111213141516

TC (13) – CG (4)

9 to 14 V

DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Go to step 3


2

–



TC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


9 10111213141516 DLC3


Specified condition

TC (13) – TC (E9–20)

Continuity


DLC3 A04550


Specified condition


No continuity

E9

TC ECM Connector

NG

A65748

REPAIR OR CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DLC3 – BODY GROUND)

3


09843–18040 CG

(a) (b)

TC

(c)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516


DLC3 DLC3 A04550

OK NO PROBLEM


NG


05–20 DIAGNOSTICS

–


TERMINALS OF ECM

E13

E12

E10

E9

A66714


Wiring Color

Condition

STD Voltage (V)

BATT (E9 – 3) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–Y – BR

Always

8 to 14

FC (E9 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–Y – BR

IG switch ON

8 to 14

FC (E9 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–Y – BR

Idling

W (E9 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W – BR

Idling

W (E9 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W – BR

IG switch ON

Below 3.5

+B (E9 – 1) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–R – BR

IG switch ON

8 to 14

STP (E10 – 19) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–W – BR

IG switch ON, brake pedal depressed

8 to 14

STP (E10 – 19) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G–W – BR

IG switch ON, brake pedal released

F/PS (E9 – 14) – E1 (E12 – 7)

LG–B – BR

IG switch ON

STA (E12 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–Y – BR

Cranking

HT1B (E10 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

P – W–B

Idling

HT1B (E10 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

P – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

EMPS (E12 – 29) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR – BR

IG switch ON

8 to 14

SPD (E10 – 17) – E1 (E12 – 7)

V–W – BR

OX1B (E12 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B – BR

Below 1.5 8 to 14

Below 1.5 Pulse generation 5.5 or more Below 3.0




Pulse generation (See page 05–91) Pulse generation

TACH (E9 – 5) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR–R – BR

Idling

VC (E13 – 18) – E2 (E13 – 28)

R–W – BR

IG switch ON

4.5 to 5.5

HT1A (E12 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

Y – W–B

Idling

Below 3.0

HT1A (E12 – 4) – E03 (E12 – 5)

Y – W–B

IG switch ON

9 to 14

EVP1 (E13 – 12) – E01 (E13 – 7)

W–G – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

VG (E12 – 24) – EVG (E12 – 32)

G – L–Y


OX1A (E12 – 23) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B – BR


THW (E13 – 19) – E2 (E13 – 28)

B–W – BR

G2 (E13 – 26) – NE– (E13 – 34) NE+ (E13 – 27) – NE– (E13 – 34)


1.1 to 1.5 Pulse generation (See page 05–91) 0.2 to 1.0

W–R

Idling


G–R

Idling


THA (E13 – 20) – E2 (E13 – 28) G–R – BR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)


0.5 to 3.4

05–21 DIAGNOSTICS VTA (E13 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28) VTA (E13 – 21) – E2 (E13 – 28) #10 (E13 – 1) – E01 (E13 – 7)

–


L–W – BR


0.3 to 1.0

L–W – BR


3.2 to 4.9

B–R – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

#20 (E13 – 2) – E01 (E13 – 7)

Y – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

#30 (E13 – 3) – E01 (E13 – 7)

W – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

#40 (E13 – 4) – E01 (E13 – 7)

B – W–B

IG switch ON

8 to 14

IGT1 (E13 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7)

R–W – BR

Idling


IGT2 (E13 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

P – BR

Idling


IGT3 (E13 – 10) – E1 (E12 – 7)

LG–B – BR

Idling


IGT4 (E13 – 11) – E1 (E12 – 7)

L–Y – BR

Idling


IGF (E13 – 23) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–R – BR

IG switch ON

IGF (E13 – 23) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–R – BR

RSO (E13 – 5) – E01 (E13 – 7)

G–R – W–B

Idling

4.5 to 5.5 Pulse generation (See page 05–103)

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IG switch ON


B–W

Idling


ELS2 (E9 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

Defoger switch ON

ELS2 (E9 – 13) – E1 (E12 – 7)

G – BR

IG switch ON

Below 3.0

MREL (E9 – 8) – E1 (E12 – 7)

GR – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

IGSW (E9 – 9) – E1 (E12 – 7)

B–W – BR

IG switch ON

9 to 14

TC (E9 – 20) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–L – BR

IG switch ON

SIL (E9 – 18) – E1 (E12 – 7)

W–G – BR


OCV+ (E13 – 15) – OCV– (E13 – 14)

W–G – Y–B

FKN+ (E12 – 1) – FKN– (E12 – 2)


9 to 14



DTC

–


056LX–04

B0100/13 SHORT IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0100/13 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0100/13


Trouble Area

Short circuit between D+ wire harness and D– wire harness of D squib D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction


WIRING DIAGRAM


A30 D Squib Y–B 1

Y 2

14 A27

D+

13 A27 D–


H01451



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Check that the spiral cable sub–assy connectors (on the horn button assy side) are not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK D SQUIB CIRCUIT(AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER – HORN BUTTON ASSY) (a)

D Squib F E


DC

B


(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

Color: Orange

OK


NG H41439

Go to step 5


3

–



D Squib


F E

DC

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B0100/13

DLC3

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H01002 H10600 H40103

H40030




OK

4

CHECK HORN BUTTON ASSY(D SQUIB)

D Squib FE


D C

(a) (b)


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B0100/13

DLC3

(g) (h)

CG H01003 H10600

(f)

TC H40103

H40031

(i)





5

–



Instrument Panel Wire Airbag D Squib C Spiral Sensor Cable A Assy F E Sub–assy D B Center

(a) (b)

(c)

Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector of the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H01004 H41424

H41440

NG


OK

6


D Squib F E

D–


D C

B


(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”D” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

D+ Color: Orange

H01000 C91344

H41441



NG



DTC

–


056LY–04

B0101/14 OPEN IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0101/14 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0101/14


Trouble Area

Open circuit in D+ wire harness or D– wire harness of D squib D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





D Squib F E


DC

B


(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

Color: Orange

H41439

NG OK


Go to step 4


2

–



D Squib F E


D–

DC



DTC B0101/14

DLC3

CG

H01002 C91348 H10600 W02044

TC H42104


OK




3

–



D Squib FE


DC


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B0101/14

DLC3

(f) (g) (h)

CG TC

H40036

(i)





4


Instrument Panel Wire Airbag D Squib Spiral Sensor Cable A Assy Sub–assy D C F E B Center

(a) (b)

Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG

OK


H41440



5

–



D Squib F E

D–


D C

B


Measure the resistance between D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

D+ Color: Orange

H41441



NG



DTC

–


054LL–10

B0102/11 SHORT IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0102/11 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0102/11


Trouble Area

Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to ground) D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





D Squib F E


DC

B


(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Measure the resistance between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

Color: Orange

H41439

NG OK


Go to step 5


2

–



D Squib F E


DC


D+

D–

Service Wire Color: Orange

DLC3

CG

DTC B0102/11

TC

H01002 C91348 H10600 W02042

H42105


OK




3

–



D Squib F E


D C


(c) (d) (e) (f)

DTC B0102/11

DLC3

(g) (h)

CG

TC H40037

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




5

–




(a) (b)

Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Measure the resistance between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H01004 H41424

H41440

NG


OK

6


D Squib F E

D–


DC

B


Measure the resistance between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

D+ Color: Orange

H01000 C91344

H41441

NG


OK

7


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LM–10

B0103/12 SHORT IN D SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center, the spiral cable sub–assy and the horn button assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0103/12 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the D squib circuit. DTC No.

B0103/12


Trouble Area

Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to B+) D squib malfunction Spiral cable sub–assy malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





D Squib F E


DC

B


(c) (d) (e)

Color: Orange

OK


H41439

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the horn button assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

Go to step 5


2

–



D Squib F E


D–

DC



DTC B0103/12

DLC3

CG

TC

H01002 C91348 H10600 W02043

H42106

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0103/12 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0103/12 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



D Squib FE


DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0103/12

(f) (g) (h)

CG

TC

H40038

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




5

–




(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the instrument panel wire connector from the spiral cable sub–assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

H01004 H41424

H41440


OK

6

D Squib F E

D–

CHECK SPIRAL CABLE SUB–ASSY


D C

B


(a) (b) (c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and D+ of the connector ”E”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

D+ Color: Orange

H01000 C91344

H41441

NG


OK

7


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056LZ–03

B0105/53 SHORT IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0105/53 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.

B0105/53


Trouble Area

Short circuit between P+ wire harness and P– wire harness of P squib P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction


WIRING DIAGRAM


A29 P Squib Y–R

10 A27

P+

Y–G

11 A27

P–

1

2

H01454



–





D C

B


(c)

(d) (e) P– P+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors between the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between P+ and P– of the connector ”E”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG H40576


OK

2

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER (a) (b) P Squib

D C

DLC3


(c) (d) (e) (f)

DTC B0105/53

(g) CG

TC

H42107



OK




3

–


CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIR BAG ASSY(P SQUIB) (a) (b) P Squib

DC

DLC3


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B0105/53

(f) CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40041

(i)







DTC

–


056M0–03

B0106/54 OPEN IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0106/54 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B0106/54

Open circuit in P+ wire harness or P– wire harness of P squib P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction






D C

B

Airbag A Sensor Assy Center

P–

(c) (d)

P+

NG H40576

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Measure the resistance between P+ and P– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1



2

–


CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER Instrument Panel Wire

(a) (b)


(c)

P Squib D C

(d)

P– P+

(e) (f) (g)

SST DTC B0106/54

DLC3


CG

(h)


TC H40577

NG OK




3

–




(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0106/54

(f) (g) (h)

CG TC

H40043

(i)







DTC

–


054LP–09

B0107/51 SHORT IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0107/51 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to ground) P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0107/51






B


(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Measure the resistance between the body ground and P+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

P+

NG

OK


H40578



2

P–

–




(c) (d)

P+

(e) (f) (g)

SST DTC B0107/51

DLC3


CG

TC

OK


(h)


H40579

NG



3

–


CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL PASSENGER AIR BAG ASSY(P SQUIB) (a) (b) P Squib DC DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0107/51

(e) (f)

CG H01024 H10600

(g) (h)

TC H01075

H40045

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LQ–09

B0108/52 SHORT IN P SQUIB CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0108/52 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the P squib circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to B+) P squib malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0108/52






B


(c) (d) (e)

P+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the instrument panel passenger airbag assy. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and P+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

OK


H40578



2

P–

–




(c) (d) (e)

P+

DLC3

(f) SST

(g)

DTC B0108/52

(h) (i) (j)

CG

TC

H40581

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using SST, connect P+ and P– of the connector ”C”. SST 09843–18040 Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0108/52 is not output.


OK




3

–




(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0108/52

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40047

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056M1–03

B0110/43 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0110/43 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B0110/43


Trouble Area

Short circuit between SFR+ wire harness and SFR– wire harness of side squib RH Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction


WIRING DIAGRAM


S19 Side Squib RH 1

Y–R

5 A28 SFR+

2

Y–G

6 A28 SFR–

H01454



–





Side Squib RH C

(c)

(d)

B

D

(e) SFR–

SFR+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between SFR+ and SFR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG


H42849

OK

2


Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

D C DLC3

(e) (f)

DTC B0110/43

(g) CG

TC

H42111



OK




3



Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC

(e)

DLC3

DTC B0110/43

(f)

CG

–

(g) (h)

TC

H40979

(i)







DTC

–


056M2–03

B0111/44 OPEN IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0111/44 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Open circuit in SFR+ wire harness or SFR– wire harness of side squib RH Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0111/44






Side Squib RH C D

SFR+

(c)

(d)

B

SFR–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Measure the resistance between SFR+ and SFR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

H42849

NG OK




2

–



Floor Wire No.2

Side Squib RH

C


D SFR+

SFR–

Service Wire DLC3

CG H01020 H42496 H10600 H01070

DTC B0111/44

TC H42850


OK




3

–



Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

(e) DTC B0111/44

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40981

(i)







DTC

–


054LT–06

B0112/41 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0112/41 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib RH wire harness (to ground) Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0112/41






Side Squib RH C D

SFR+

(c)

(d)

B

SFR–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Measure the resistance between the body ground and SFR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H42849

NG OK




2



Floor Wire No.2

Side Squib RH


C

D SFR+

SFR–

Service Wire DLC3

CG H01020 H42496 H10600

–

DTC B0112/41

TC

H01067

H42851


OK




3

–



Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B0112/41

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40983

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LU–06

B0113/42 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0113/42 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the side squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib RH wire harness (to B+) Side squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

B0113/42






Side Squib RH C D

(c)

(d)

B

(e) SFR+

SFR–

OK


H42849

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib RH). Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and SFR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG



2




Side Squib RH C D SFR–

SFR+

Service Wire DLC3

CG H01020 H42496 H10600

–

DTC B0113/42

TC

H01068

H42852

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect SFR+ and SFR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0113/42 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0113/42 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

(e) DTC B0113/42

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40985

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056M3–03

B0115/47 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0115/47 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B0115/47


Trouble Area

Short circuit between SFL+ wire harness and SFL– wire harness of side squib LH Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction


WIRING DIAGRAM


S18 Side Squib LH 1

Y–R

12 A26 SFL+

2

Y–G

11 A26 SFL–

H01454



–




Side Squib LH

A C

D

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

(e)

SFL–

H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG


OK

2


Side Squib LH D C

(c)


(d) (e) (f)

DLC3 DTC B0115/47

(g) CG

TC

H42153



OK




3

–



Side Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3 DTC B0115/47

CG

(g) (h)

TC

(f)

H40988

(i)







DTC

–


056M4–03

B0116/48 OPEN IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0116/48 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B0116/48


Trouble Area

Open circuit in SFL+ wire harness or SFL– wire harness of side squib LH Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Side Squib LH

A D

C

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

SFL–

OK


H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Measure the resistance between SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2

–



D

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

Side Squib LH

C

Airbag Sensor Assy Center SFL+

SFL–

Service Wire DLC3

CG

DTC B0116/48

TC

H42854

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0116/48 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0116/48 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0116/48

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40990

(i)







DTC

–


054LX–06

B0117/45 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0117/45 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0117/45


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib LH wire harness (to ground) Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Side Squib LH

A D

C

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

SFL–

OK


H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Measure the resistance between the body ground and SFL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



2

–



Side Squib LH

D

SFL+

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

C

Airbag Sensor Assy Center SFL–

Service Wire DLC3

CG

DTC B0117/45

TC

H42855

Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Using a service wire, connect SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (d) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (e) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (f) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (g) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (h) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0117/45 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0117/45 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib LH DC

DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0117/45

(e) (f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40992

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054LY–06

B0118/46 SHORT IN SIDE SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0118/46 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the side squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0118/46


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side squib LH wire harness (to B+) Side squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Side Squib LH

A D

C

(a) (b)

Floor Wire

B


(c)

(d) SFL+

SFL–

OK


(e)

H42853

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the separate type front seat back assy (side squib LH). Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and SFL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG



2

–



Side Squib LH

D C

SFL+

(a) (b)

Floor Wire Airbag Sensor Assy Center SFL–

Service Wire DLC3

CG

DTC B0118/46

TC

H42856

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect SFL+ and SFL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0118/46 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0118/46 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



Side Squib LH

DC

(c)


(d) (e)

DLC3

CG

DTC B0118/46

(g) (h)

TC

(f)

H40994

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




–


DTC


DTC


056M5–03

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The seat belt buckle switch RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy RH (seat belt buckle switch RH). DTC B0121/26 or B0122/26 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat belt buckle switch RH circuit. DTC No.

B0121/B0122/ 26


Trouble Area

Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch RH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch RH wire harness (to B+) Seat belt buckle switch RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center

Front seat inner belt assy RH (Seat belt buckle switch RH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2

HINT: DTC B0121/26 or B0122/26 is indicated only for the RHD vehicle.



Buckle SW

G–Y

14 A28 RBE+

W–B

3 A28 RBE–

3

1

H42513



–




D C

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

B


(e)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and RBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

RBE+

H42229

NG


OK

2


D C

(a) (b)


(c)

B


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and RBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

RBE+

OK


H42229

NG



3

–


CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY RH (a)

Floor Wire No.2 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH A


(b) (c)

B

Connect the connector to the front seat inner belt assy RH. Unlock the seat belt at the front seat RH. Measure the resistance between RBE+ and RBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1.0 k to 1.6 k

RBE–

RBE+

H42509

NG


OK

4

CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY RH Floor Wire No.2

Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH A

(a) (b)


Lock the seat belt at the front seat RH. Measure the resistance between the RBE+ and RBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 100 to 500

B

RBE–

RBE+

OK


H42509

NG



5

–




DLC3

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B0121/B0122/26

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H42333







–


DTC


DTC


056M6–03

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The seat belt buckle switch LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy LH (seat belt buckle switch LH). DTC B0126/27 or B0127/27 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat belt buckle switch LH circuit. DTC No.

B0126/B0127/ 27


Trouble Area

Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch LH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in seat belt buckle switch LH wire harness (to B+) Front seat inner belt assy LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Front seat inner belt assy LH (Seat belt buckle switch LH) Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire

HINT: DTC B0126/27 or B0127/27 is indicated only for the LHD vehicle.



Buckle SW

G–Y 3

W–B 1

19 A26 LBE+

2 A26 LBE–

H42513



–




Floor Wire D C

B



(c) (d) (e)

LBE+

H41707

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat inner belt assy LH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and LBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG


OK

2


Floor Wire D C Front Seat Inner Belt Assy LH

B


LBE+

OK


(c)

H41707

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and LBE+ of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



3

–


CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY LH (a)



(b) (c)

Connect the connector to the front seat inner belt assy LH. Unlock the seat belt at the front seat LH. Measure the resistance between LBE+ and LBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1.0 k to 1.6 k

LBE–

LBE+

H41708

NG


OK

4

CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY LH (a) (b)



Lock the seat belt at the front seat LH. Measure the resistance between LBE+ and LBE– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 100 to 500

LBE–

LBE+

H41708

NG OK




5

–




DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0126/B0127/27

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H41027







DTC

–


056M7–03

B0130/63 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0130/63 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B0130/63


Trouble Area

Short circuit between PR+ wire harness and PR– wire harness of P/T squib RH P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction


WIRING DIAGRAM


P17 P/T Squib RH Y–B

9 A28 PR+

Y

10 A28 PR–

1

2

H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Check that the floor wire No.2 connector (on the front seat outer belt assy RH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(P/T SQUIB RH CIRCUIT) (a)


P/T Squib RH D C

PR+

(b)

B

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between PR+ and PR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

PR–

H40048

NG OK




3

–


CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER (a) (b) Airbag Sensor Assy Center

P/T Squib RH

(c) (d)

D C DLC3

DTC B0130/63

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC H42114




OK

4


P/T Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

CG

(e) DTC B0130/63

(g) (h)

TC

(f)

H40050

(i)





DTC

–


056M8–03

B0131/64 OPEN IN P/T (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0131/64 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B0131/64

Open circuit in PR+ wire harness or PR– wire harness of P/T squib RH P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction






P/T Squib RH D C

PR+

(c) (d)

B

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Measure the resistance between PR+ and PR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

PR–

H40048

NG OK




2

–




P/T Squib RH D

PR+

C

PR– Service Wire

DLC3

CG

DTC B0131/64

TC

H01020 C85243 H10600 H01083

H40951


OK




3

–



P/T Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC DLC3

(e) DTC B0131/64

(f) (g) (h)

CG TC H01021 H10600

H01083

H40051

(i)






DTC

–


054M1–07

B0132/61 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0132/61 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No. B0132/61


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib RH wire harness (to ground) P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction






P/T Squib RH D C

PR+

(c) (d)

B

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Measure the resistance between the body ground and PR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

PR–

OK


H40048

NG



2

–



Floor Wire No.2 P/T Squib RH D C


PR–

PR+

Service Wire DTC B0132/61

DLC3

CG H01020 C85243 H10600 H01079

TC H40952


OK




3

–



P/T Squib RH


(c) (d)

DC

(e) DTC B0132/61

DLC3

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H01021 H10600 H01079

H40053

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054M2–07

B0133/62 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH (seat belt pretensioner RH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0133/62 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the P/T squib RH circuit. DTC No. B0133/62


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib RH wire harness (to B+) P/T squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Sensor P/T Squib RH Assy A Center B D C

(c) (d) (e)

PR+

PR–

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and PR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG H40048



2

–



Floor Wire No.2

P/T Squib RH

PR+

D C


PR– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01020 C85243 H10600 H01081

DTC B0133/62

TC H40953

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0133/62 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0133/62 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



P/T Squib RH DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0133/62

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40055

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056M9–03

B0135/73 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0135/73 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B0135/73

Short circuit between PL+ wire harness and PL– wire harness of P/T squib LH P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction


WIRING DIAGRAM


P16 P/T Squib LH Y–B

8 A26 PL+

Y

7 A26 PL–

1

2

H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connector from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Check that the floor wire connector (on the front seat outer belt assy LH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2


P/T Squib LH

(a)

Floor Wire A

D C

PL+

B


(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between PL+ and PL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

PL–

OK


H40056

NG



3

–



P/T Squib LH

D C

DLC3


(c) (d)

DTC B0135/73

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H40057




OK

4


P/T Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0135/73

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40058

(i)





DTC

–


056MA–03

B0136/74 OPEN IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0136/74 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B0136/74


Trouble Area

Open circuit in PL+ wire harness or PL– wire harness of P/T squib LH P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





P/T Squib LH

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A

D C

PL+

B


PL–

OK


H40056

(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Measure the resistance between PL+ and PL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2

–



Floor Wire P/T Squib LH Airbag Sensor Assy Center

D C

PL+

PL– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01017 C85243 H10600

DTC B0136/74

TC H01087

H40950


OK




3

–



P/T Squib LH DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0136/74

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40060

(i)






DTC

–


054M5–07

B0137/71 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0137/71 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0137/71


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib LH wire harness (to ground) P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





P/T Squib LH

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A

D C

PL+

B


PL–

OK


H40056

(c) (d)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Measure the resistance between the body ground and PL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



2

–




D C

PL+

PL– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01017 C85243 H10600

DTC B0137/71

TC H01084

H40954


OK




3

–



P/T Squib LH DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0137/71

(f) CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40062

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054M6–07

B0138/72 SHORT IN P/T SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The P/T squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH (seat belt pretensioner LH). This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B0138/72 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the P/T squib LH circuit. DTC No. B0138/72


Trouble Area

Short circuit in P/T squib LH wire harness (to B+) P/T squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction





P/T Squib LH

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A

D C

B


(c) (d) (e)

PL+

PL–

OK


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the front seat outer belt assy LH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and PL+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG H40056



2

–




D C

PL+

PL– Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01017 C85243 H10600

DTC B0138/72

TC

H01085

H40957

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B0138/72 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B0138/72 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3

–



P/T Squib LH

DC


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B0138/72

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40064

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


05C5X–01

B1100/31 AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor assy center consists of the airbag sensor, the safing sensor, the drive circuit, the diagnosis circuit and the ignition control, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the airbag sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1100/31 is recorded when a malfunction in the airbag sensor assy center is detected. DTC No.


Trouble Area

Airbag sensor assy center malfunction Half connection detection malfunction

B1100/31

Airbag sensor assy center Airbag sensor assy center connector

HINT: When a malfunction code other than code B1100/31 is displayed at the same time, first repair the malfunction indicated by the malfunction code other than code B1100/31.


CHECK DTC (a) (b) DLC3

DTC B1100/31

(c) (d) CG

TC

(e)

H41086

(f) (g) (h)




Go to step 2


2

–


CHECK CONNECTOR

(a) (b) (c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check the connection of the airbag sensor assy center connectors. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

CONNECT CONNECTORS, THEN GO TO STEP 1

OK

3

PERFORM A VISUAL CHECK OF THE DISCONNECTION DETECTION PIN (a)

Disconnection Detection Pin

Check that the disconnection detection pin is not deformed. OK: The connectors are not deformed.

NG

H40441

REPAIR OR REPLACE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER CONNECTOR

OK

4

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR ASSY CENTER (a) DLC3

DTC B1100/31

(b) (c)

CG

(d) (e)

TC

H41086

(f)





DTC

–


05C5Y–01

B1140/32 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY (RH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side airbag sensor assy RH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1140/32 is recorded when a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assy RH is detected. DTC No.

B1140/32


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy RH wire harness (to B+) Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy RH wire harness (to ground) Open circuit in BBR+ wire harness or BBR– wire harness of side airbag sensor assy RH Side airbag sensor assy RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Side airbag sensor assy RH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2

WIRING DIAGRAM Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH 4 2 BBR+ (*1) S15 S15 BCR+ (*2) (*1) (*2)

BBR– (*1) 3 1 BCR– (*2) S15 S15 (*1) (*2)

Airbag Sensor Assy Center GR

17 A28 BBR+

P

15 A28 BBR–




–



CHECK DTC

Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH DLC3

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1140/32

(e) (f) (g)

CG

(h)

TC

H40442



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy RH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–



Floor Wire No.2 Side Airbag Sensor Assy RH


D C w/o Curtain Shield Airbag:

B

w/ Curtain Shield Airbag:

BBR– BCR+

BBR+

BCR– H01015 H42522 H42823 C82599

BBR+ BBR– H42838

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy RH. (b) w/o Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) w/ Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (d) Measure the resistance between BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG


OK

4



A C

BBR+

(a) (b)


(c)

B

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BBR–

H01015 C83438

OK


H42229

NG



5

–




A C

BBR+

(a) (b)


(c)

B

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BBR+ and BBR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BBR–

H01015 C83438

NG

H42229


OK

6



(a) (b)


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1140/32 DLC3

(f) DTC B1141/33

CG

(g)

TC

H01012 H10600 H01065 H01066

H42115

(h) (i) (j)




NG:A


NG:B



DTC

–


05C5Z–01

B1141/33 SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSY (LH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The side airbag sensor assy LH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1141/33 is recorded when a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assy LH is detected. DTC No.

B1141/33


Trouble Area

Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy LH wire harness (to B+) Short circuit in side airbag sensor assy LH wire harness (to ground) Open circuit in BBL+ wire harness or BBL– wire harness of side airbag sensor assy LH Side airbag sensor assy LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Side airbag sensor assy LH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire

WIRING DIAGRAM Side Airbag Sensor Assy LH 4 2 BBL+ (*1) S14 S14 BCL+ (*2) (*1) (*2)

3 1 BBL– (*1) S14 S14 BCL– (*2) (*1) (*2)

Airbag Sensor Assy Center GR–L

16 A26 BBL+

LG–B

18 A26 BBL–




–



CHECK DTC



(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B1141/33

(f) (g) CG

(h)

TC H40445



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy LH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE(OPEN) Side Airbag D Sensor Assy LH

(a)

Floor Wire C

B


w/ Curtain w/o Curtain Shield Airbag: Shield Airbag: BBL– BCL– BCL+

BBL+

H01010 H42522 H42823 C82600

BBL–

BBL+ H42837

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the side airbag sensor assy RH. (b) w/ Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) w/o Curtain shield airbag: Using a service wire, connect BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (d) Measure the resistance between BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG


OK

4

CHECK FLOOR WIRE(TO B+)

Side Airbag Sensor D Assy LH

BBL–

(a) (b)

Floor Wire A C

B


(c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BBL+

H01010 C83441

H42231

NG OK




5

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE(TO GROUND)


BBL–

(a) (b)


(c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BBL+ and BBL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BBL+

H01010 C83441

NG

H42231


OK

6


DLC3


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1140/32

(f) DTC B1141/33 CG H01007 H10600

(g)

TC H01065 H01066

H42116

(h) (i) (j)




NG:A


NG:B



DTC

–


05C60–01



B1148/36


Trouble Area



WIRING DIAGRAM


SR+

SR–


G 2

R 1

1

1

IO3 IE7 (*2) (*1)

2 IO3 (*2)

2 IE7 (*1)

G

9 A27 SR+

R

20 A27 SR–

*1: LHD *2: RHD

H17182



–



CHECK DTC


(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DLC3

(e) DTC B1148/36

(f) (g) CG

TC

(h) H42117



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)


OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–




E

DC

B


SR+ SR–


Service Wire

H42523

NG

Go to step 7

OK

4



E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SR+ SR–

H42510

NG OK


Go to step 8


5

–




E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SR+ SR–

NG

H42510

Go to step 9

OK

6



D C

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1148/36


TC

(f) (g) (h)

H42118




NG:A


NG:B



7

–





F

A E

SR+

D C

B


SR– SR+

SR–

(a)


Service Wire

H42524

NG



8




A

F E

D C

B


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

SR–

SR+

H42512


NG





9




–


A

F E

SR–

D C

B


(b)


SR+

H42512

NG





DTC

–


05C60–01



B1148/36


Trouble Area



WIRING DIAGRAM


SR+

SR–


G 2

R 1

1

1

IO3 IE7 (*2) (*1)

2 IO3 (*2)

2 IE7 (*1)

G

9 A27 SR+

R

20 A27 SR–

*1: LHD *2: RHD

H17182



–



CHECK DTC


(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DLC3

(e) DTC B1148/36

(f) (g) CG

TC

(h) H42117



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)


OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–




E

DC

B


SR+ SR–


Service Wire

H42523

NG

Go to step 7

OK

4



E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SR+ SR–

H42510

NG OK


Go to step 8


5

–




E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SR+ SR–

NG

H42510

Go to step 9

OK

6



D C

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1148/36


TC

(f) (g) (h)

H42118




NG:A


NG:B



7

–





F

A E

SR+

D C

B


SR– SR+

SR–

(a)


Service Wire

H42524

NG



8




A

F E

D C

B


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

SR–

SR+

H42512


NG





9




–


A

F E

SR–

D C

B


(b)


SR+

H42512

NG





DTC

–


05C61–01

B1149/37 FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor front LH circuit consists of the diagnosis circuit and the frontal deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives signals from the frontal deceleration sensor, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1149/37 is recorded when malfunction is detected in the airbag sensor front LH circuit. DTC No.

B1149/37


Trouble Area

Open circuit in SL+ wire harness or SL– wire harness of airbag sensor front LH Short circuit in airbag sensor front LH wire harness (to B+) Short circuit in airbag sensor front LH wire harness (to ground) Airbag sensor front LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Airbag sensor front LH Airbag sensor assy center Instrument panel wire Engine room main wire

WIRING DIAGRAM

A9 Airbag Sensor Front LH

SL+


W–R 2

Y–R (*1) BR (*2) SL–

1

3

3

IO3 (*4)

IE7 (*3)

4 IO3 (*4)

4 IE7 (*3)

W–R

15 A27 SL+

BR

26 A27 SL–

*1: LHD 1CD–FTV *2: Except LHD 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD H17182



–



CHECK DTC


(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DLC3

DTC B1149/37

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

(h)

H42119



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the airbag sensor front LH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–


CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) CIRCUIT (OPEN) (a) F E

DC

B



SL+

Service Wire

SL– H42523

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the airbag sensor front LH. (b) Using a service wire, connect SL+ and SL– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between SL+ and SL– of the connecter ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG

Go to step 7

OK

4

CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

F E

DC


B


SL+

(a) (b) (c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”E”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

SL– H42510

NG OK


Go to step 8


5

–


CHECK FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR (LH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

F

A E

DC

B


(a) (b) (c)


SL+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 MW or Higher

SL–

H03355 C81408

NG

H42510

Go to step 9

OK

6

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR FRONT LH


DC

(a) (b)


(c) (d)

DTC B1148/36

(e)

DLC3

DTC B1149/37 CG

TC

H02757 H10600 H16834 H16835

(f) (g) (h)

H42120



Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. Interchange the airbag front sensor RH with the airbag sensor front LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1148/36 is not output. B: DTC B1149/37 is not output.

NG:A


NG:B

REPLACE AIR BAG SENSOR FRONT LH


7

–


CHECK ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE(OPEN) Engine Room Main Wire


F E

D C

B



SL–

SL+

SL–

SL+

Service Wire

(a)

Disconnect the engine room main wire connect from the instrument panel wire. (b) Using a service wire, connect SL+ and SL– of the connector ”E”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between SL+ and SL– of the connector ”D”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG

H42524



8


Engine Room Main Wire F E



SL–

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

SL+

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the engine room main wire connector from the instrument panel wire. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”D”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG

H42512





9

–


CHECK ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE(TO GROUND) (a) Engine Room Main Wire F E


(b)

Disconnect the engine room main wire connector from the instrument panel wire. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of SL+ and SL– of the connector ”D”. OK: Resistance: 1 MW or Higher


SL–

SL+

H42512

NG





DTC

–


05C62–01

B1153/25 SEAT POSITION AIRBAG SENSOR MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The seat position airbag sensor circuits consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. DTC B1153/25 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat position airbag sensor circuit. DTC No.

B1153/25


Trouble Area

Open circuit in LSP+ (RSP+) wire harness or LSP– (RSP–) wire harness of seat position airbag sensor Short circuit in seat position airbag sensor wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in seat position airbag sensor wire harness (to B+) Seat position airbag sensor malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Seat position airbag sensor Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire (LHD) Floor wire No.2 (RHD)


Airbag Sensor Assy Center 4 1 A26 A28 LSP+ (*1) (*1) (*2) RSP+ (*2)

L–B 2 Seat Position Airbag Sensor

3 2 A26 A28 LSP– (*1) (*1) (*2) RSP– (*2)

GR–B 4 *1: LHD *2: RHD

H42514



–



CHECK DTC (a) (b)

LHD: Seat Position Airbag Sensor

RHD: Seat Position Airbag Sensor

DLC3

CG


(c) (d) (e)


(f) (g)

DTC B1153/25


TC

(h)


H42526

NG

Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

CONNECT CONNECTORS

OK

3 (a)

CHECK VEHICLE CONDITION Check the vehicle steering position. RHD

LHD


Go to step 10


4



Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. (b) Using a service wire, connect between LSP+ and LSP– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between LSP+ and LSP– of the floor wire connector on the airbag sensor assy center side. OK: Resistance: Below 1

Floor Wire D C

B


A Airbag Sensor Assy Center LSP–

LSP+

LSP+

LSP–

H42839 H42861

–

NG

Service Wire


H43084

OK

5



B


LSP–

(c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of LSP+ and LSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

LSP+

H01010 C83441

H42231

NG OK




6

–




B


(c)

LSP–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of LSP+ and LSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

LSP+

H01010 C83441

NG

H42231


OK

7

CHECK SEAT POSITION AIR BAG SENSOR


DLC3

(a) (b) (c)


(d) (e)

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H01007 H10600 C91522

H42468

(i)




Go to step 8


8 (a) (b) (c)

–


REPLACE SEAT POSITION AIRBAG SENSOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Replace the seat position airbag sensor (See page 60–70).

9

RECHECK DTC (a) Seat Position Airbag Sensor

DLC3

(b) Airbag Sensor Assy Center

(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

TC

H42468







10

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(OPEN)

Floor Wire No. 2 Seat Position Airbag Sensor D C

(a) Airbag Sensor Assy A Center

B RSP– RSP+

RSP+

NG

RSP–

H01015 H42839

Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the seat position airbag sensor. (b) Using a service wire, connect between RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 REPAIR OR REPLACE FLOOR WIRE NO.2

H43089

OK

11

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO B+)

Floor Wire No. 2



(c)

B RSP–

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

RSP+

H41028

OK


NG



12

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO GROUND)

Floor Wire No. 2



(c)

B RSP–

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of RSP+ and RSP– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

RSP+

H41028

NG


OK

13

CHECK SEAT POSITION AIR BAG SENSOR (a) (b) Seat Position Airbag Sensor


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC H42477

(i)




Go to step 14


14 (a) (b) (c)

–


REPLACE SEAT POSITION AIR BAG SENSOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Replace the seat position airbag sensor (See page 60–70).

15

RECHECK DTC (a)


DLC3


(b) (c) (d) (e)

DTC B1153/25

(f)

CG

TC H42477







DTC

–


05A6E–03

B1154/38 AIRBAG SENSOR REAR (RH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor rear RH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives the signal from the lateral deceleration sensor signal in the airbag sensor rear RH, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1154/38 is recorded when a malfunction in the airbag sensor rear RH is detected. DTC No.

B1154/38


Trouble Area

Short circuit in airbag sensor rear RH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in airbag sensor rear RH wire harness (to B+) Open circuit in BCR+ wire harness or BCR– wire harness of airbag sensor rear RH Airbag sensor rear RH malfunction Side airbag sensor assy RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Airbag sensor rear RH Side airbag sensor assy RH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire No.2


WIRING DIAGRAM C16 Airbag Sensor Rear RH


LG 1

L 2

2 S15 BCR–

1 S15 BCR+

3 S15 BBR–

Airbag Sensor Assy Center P

15 A28

GR

17 A28 BBR+

4 BBR+ S15

BBR–

H42515



–



CHECK DTC (a) (b)


DLC3


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1154/38

(f) (g) CG

TC

(h) H42841



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the side airbag sensor assy RH and the airbag sensor rear RH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–



Floor Wire No.2

A

D B

C


Airbag Sensor Rear RH BCR–

BCR+ 1

2

Service Wire

H42511

Disconnect the connectors from the side airbag sensor assy RH and the airbag sensor rear RH. (b) Using a service wire, connect 1 and 2 of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG


OK

4

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO B+) (a) (b)

Floor Wire No.2

A

D C

B


(c)


Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BCR–

OK


H42525

NG



5

–


CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(TO GROUND) (a) (b)

Floor Wire No.2

A

D C

B


(c)


Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BCR+ and BCR– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BCR–

H42816 C91384

NG

H42525


OK

6

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR REAR RH (a) (b)

Airbag Sensor Rear LH


(c) (d) (e)

DTC B1154/38

(f)

CG

TC

DTC B1155/39

H42817 H10600 C92968 C92969

H42842

(g) (h) (i) (j)



Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assy RH. Interchange the airbag sensor rear RH with LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1154/38 is not output. B: DTC B1155/39 is not output.

NG:A

Go to step 7

NG:B

REPLACE AIR BAG SENSOR REAR RH


7




(a) (b)


(c)

(d) DTC B1154/38

(e)

CG

–

TC

DTC B1155/39

(f) (g)

H42126

(h) (i) (j)




NG:A


NG:B



DTC

–


056MK–04

B1155/39 AIRBAG SENSOR REAR (LH) MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The airbag sensor rear LH consists of the diagnosis circuit and the lateral deceleration sensor, etc. If the airbag sensor assy center receives the signal from the lateral deceleration sensor signal in the airbag sensor rear LH, it judges whether or not the SRS should be activated. DTC B1155/39 is recorded when a malfunction in the airbag sensor rear LH is detected. DTC No.


Trouble Area

B1155/39

Short circuit in airbag sensor rear LH wire harness (to ground) Short circuit in airbag sensor rear LH wire harness (to B+) Open circuit in BCL+ wire harness or BCL– wire harness of airbag sensor rear LH Airbag sensor rear LH malfunction Side airbag sensor assy LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction

Airbag sensor rear LH Side airbag sensor assy LH Airbag sensor assy center Floor wire


WIRING DIAGRAM C15 Airbag Sensor Rear LH L–B 1

GR–R 2


Side Airbag Sensor Assy LH 2 S14 BCL–

3 BBL– S14

LG–B

18 A26 BBL–

1 S14 BCL+

4 BBL+ S14

GR–L

16 A26 BBL+

H42515



–



CHECK DTC (a) (b)

Airbag Sensor Assy Rear LH


(c) (d) (e)

DLC3 DTC B1155/39

(f) (g) CG TC

(h) H42843



Go to step 2


2 (a) (b) (c)

CHECK CONNECTION OF CONNECTORS Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–)terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Check that the connectors are properly connected to the side airbag sensor assy LH and the airbag sensor rear LH. OK: The connectors are connected. NG

OK


CONNECT CONNECTORS


3

–



Floor Wire D B

C Airbag Sensor Rear LH

Side Airbag A Sensor Assy LH BCL+

1

BCL–

2

Service Wire

Disconnect the connectors from the side airbag sensor assy LH and the airbag sensor rear LH. (b) Using a service wire, connect 1 and 2 of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (c) Measure the resistance between BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: Below 1 NG


H42511

OK

4


Floor Wire


BCL+

B


(c)

Disconnect the service wire from the connector ”C”. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and each of BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

BCL–

OK


H42525

NG



5

–



Floor Wire


BCL+

B


(c)

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Measure the resistance between the body ground and each of BCL+ and BCL– of the connector ”B”. OK: Resistance: 10 k or Higher

BCL–

H42816 C91384

NG

H42525


OK

6

CHECK AIR BAG SENSOR REAR LH (a) (b)



(c) (d) (e)

DLC3

DTC B1154/38

(f)

CG

TC

DTC B1155/39

H42817 H10600 C92968 C92969

H42842

(g) (h) (i) (j)



Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assy LH. Interchange the airbag sensor rear RH with LH and connect the connectors to them. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: A: DTC B1154/38 is not output. B: DTC B1155/39 is not output.

NG:A

Go to step 7

NG:B

REPLACE AIR BAG SENSOR REAR LH


7

–




(c)

(d) DLC3

DTC B1154/38

(e)

CG

TC

DTC B1155/39

(f) (g)

H42128

(h) (i) (j)




NG:A


NG:B



DTC

–


056ML–03

B1160/83 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1160/83 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B1160/83


Trouble Area

Short circuit between ICR+ wire harness and ICR– wire harness of curtain shield squib RH Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction



WIRING DIAGRAM


C18 Curtain Shield Squib RH 1

Y–V (*1)

2

Y–R (*1)

8 A28 ICR+

7 A28 ICR–


H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Check that the floor wire No.2 connector (on the curtain shield airbag assy RH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE NO.2(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB RH CIRCUIT) (a)

Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Sensor Curtain Shield Assy Squib RH A Center D C B

(b)

Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between ICR+ and ICR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H41465

NG OK




3

–





(c) (d)

D C DLC3

DTC B1160/83

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H40956




OK

4




(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1160/83

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40931

(i)





DTC

–


056MM–03

B1161/84 OPEN IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1161/84 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B1161/84


Trouble Area

Open circuit in ICR+ wire harness or ICR– wire harness of curtain shield squib RH Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction






Floor Wire No.2 Airbag Curtain Shield Sensor Squib RH Assy A Center B D C

OK


(c) (d)

H41465

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Measure the resistance between ICR+ and ICR– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2


(a) (b)


D C ICR–

ICR+ Service Wire

DLC3

H01020 C89252 H11645



Floor Wire No.2

CG

–

DTC B1161/84

TC H10600

H42129


OK




3

–





(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1161/84

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40933

(i)






DTC

–


054MF–05

B1162/81 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO GROUND)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1162/81 is recorded when a short to ground is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.

B1162/81


Trouble Area

Short circuit in curtain shield squib RH wire harness (to ground) Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy malfunction








(c) (d)

B

OK


H41465

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Measure the resistance between the body ground and ICR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

NG



2

–




(a) (b)


D C ICR–

ICR+ Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01020 C89252 H10600

DTC B1162/81

TC H11642

H42130


OK




3

–





(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1162/81

(f)

CG

(g) (h)

TC

H40938

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


054MG–05

B1163/82 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (RH) CIRCUIT (TO B+)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib RH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1163/82 is recorded when a short to B+ is detected in the curtain shield squib RH circuit. DTC No.


B1163/82

Trouble Area

Short circuit in curtain shield squib RH wire harness (to B+) Curtain shield squib RH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction








(c) (d)

B

(e)

OK


H41465

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy RH. Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Measure the voltage between the body ground and ICR+ of the connector ”C”. OK: Voltage: Below 1 V

NG



2

–





D C ICR+

ICR–

Service Wire

DLC3

CG H01020 C89252 H10600

DTC B1163/82

TC H11643

H42131

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. (c) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assy center. (d) Using a service wire, connect ICR+ and ICR– of the connector ”C”. NOTICE: Do not forcibly insert a service wire into the terminal of the connector when connecting. (e) Connect the negative (–) terminal cable to the battery, and wait for at least 2 seconds. (f) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (g) Clear the stored DTCs in the memory (See page 05–1184). (h) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. (i) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and wait for at least 10 seconds. (j) Check the DTCs (See page 05–1184). OK: DTC B1163/82 is not output. HINT: Codes other than code B1163/82 may be output at this time, but they are not related to this check. NG

OK




3



(c) (d)

DC

(e) DLC3

DTC B1163/82

(f)



CG

–

(g) (h)

TC

H40939

(i)




OK

4


Go to step 1




DTC

–


056MN–03

B1165/87 SHORT IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1165/87 is recorded when a short circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B1165/87


Trouble Area

Short circuit between ICL+ wire harness and ICL– wire harness of curtain shield squib LH Curtain shield squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction



WIRING DIAGRAM


C17 Curtain Shield Squib LH 1

Y–V (*1)

2

Y–R (*1)

9 A26 ICL+

10 A26 ICL–


H01454



–



CHECK CONNECTOR Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. DIsconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. Check that the floor wire connector (on the curtain shield airbag assy LH side) is not damaged. OK: The lock button is not disengaged, or the claw of the lock is not deformed or damaged. NG


OK

2

CHECK FLOOR WIRE(CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB LH CIRCUIT) (a)


Floor Wire

(b) B


Release the activation prevention mechanism built in the connector ”B” (See page 05–1184). Measure the resistance between ICL+ and ICL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: 1 M or Higher

H41469

NG OK




3

–




DLC3

(c)


(d)

DTC B1165/87

(e) (f) (g)

CG

TC

H42132




OK

4



(c)


(d) (e)

DLC3

CG

DTC B1165/87

(f) (g) (h)

TC

H42133

(i)





DTC

–


056MO–03

B1166/88 OPEN IN CURTAIN SHIELD SQUIB (LH) CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The curtain shield squib LH circuit consists of the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. This circuit actuates the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are fulfilled. DTC B1166/88 is recorded when an open circuit is detected in the curtain shield squib LH circuit. DTC No.

B1166/88


Trouble Area

Open circuit in ICL+ wire harness or ICL– wire harness of curtain shield squib LH Curtain shield squib LH malfunction Airbag sensor assy center malfunction







B


(c) (d)

OK


H41469

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery, and wait for at least 90 seconds. Disconnect the connectors from the airbag sensor assy center and the curtain shield airbag assy LH. Measure the resistance between ICL+ and ICL– of the connector ”C”. OK: Resistance: Below 1

NG



2

–



Curtain Shield Squib LH

(a) (b)


D C ICL+ ICL–

Service Wire

DLC3

CG

DTC B1166/88

TC

H01017 C89252 H10600 H11649

H42134


OK




3

–




(c)


(d)

DLC3

(e) (f)

DTC B1166/88 CG

TC

(g) (h) H40945

(i)





Toyota Avensis 2003-2007 Diagnostics

Recommend Documents